Honda Odyssey. 2007-10 Factory Service Manual. Volume 2

INTRODUCTION
—How to Use This Manual —------------------ :— >

------- j General Information
This manual is divided into multiple sections. The first page of
each section is marked with a black tab that lines up with its
corresponding thumb index tab on this page and the back cover.
You can quickly find the first page of each section without
looking through a full table of contents. The symbols printed at
the top corner of each page can also be used as a quick reference
system.
Each section includes: ..........
1. A table of contents, or an exploded view index showing:
• Parts disassembly sequence.
• Bolt torques and thread sizes.
• Page references to descriptions in text.
2. Disassembly/assembly procedures and tools.
3. Inspection.
4. Testing/troubleshooting.
Engine WeehanicaI
5. Repair.
6. Adjustments.
| Engine Cooling
Safety Messages
Your safety, and the safety of others, is very important. To help
you make informed decisions, we have provided safety
Fuel and EroSssions
messages, and other safety information throughout this manual.
Of course, it is not practical or possible to warn you about all the
hazards associated with servicing this vehicle. You must use
your own good judgment
You will find important safety information in a variety of forms
including:
• Safety Labels — on the vehicle. *Steering
• Safety Messages — preceded by a safety alert symbol f a and
one of three signal words, DANGER, WARNING, or CAUTION.
These signal words mean: Suspension
You WILL be KILLED or SERIOUSLY HURT if
(Including TPMS)
you don't follow instructions.
AWARNING You CAN be KILLED or SERIOUSLY HURT if *Brakes (Including VSA)
you don't follow instructions.
A CAUTION You CAN be HURT if you don't follow
instructions.
• Instructions — how to service this vehicle correctly and safely.
*Body
All information contained in this manual is based on the latest
product information available at the time of printing. We reserve
the right to make changes at anytime without notice. No part of
*Heating, Ventilation,
this publication may be reproduced, or stored in a retrieval and Air Condi tioning
system, or transmitted, in any form by any means, electronic,
mechanical, photocopying, recording, or otherwise, without the
prior written permission of the publisher. This includes text,
figures, and tables. *Body Electrical
As you read this manual, you will find information that is
preceded by a [NOTICl] symbol. The purpose of this message is to * Audio, Entertainment,
help prevent damage to your vehicle, other property, or the
environment. Navigation, and Telematics
First Edition 07/2009 Honda Motor Co., Ltd.
All Rights Reserved Service Publication Office * Restraints
Specifications apply to USA and Canada
As sections with * include SRS components;

special precautions are required when servicing.
2007-10 Honda Odyssey
marked sections are not included in this
manual, see Volume 1. , ■ Volume 2 of 2
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) (if steering maintenance Is required)
The Odyssey SRS includes a driver's airbag in the steering wheel hub, a passenger's airbag in the dashboard
above the glove box, seat belt tensioners in the front seat belt retractors, side curtain airbags in the sides of the
roof, and side airbags in the front seat-backs. Information necessary to safely service the SRS is included in this
Service Manual. Items marked with an asterisk!*) on the contents page include or are located near SRS
components. Servicing, disassembling, or replacing these items requires special precautions and tools, and
should be done by an authorized Honda dealer.
• To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could lead to personal injury or death in the event of a severe
frontal or side collision, all SRS service work should be done by an authorized Honda dealer.
• Improper service procedures, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, could lead to personal
injury caused by unintentional deployment of the airbags, side airbags, and/or side curtain airbags.
• Do not bump or impact the SRS unit, front impact sensors, side impact sensors, or rear safing sensor,
especially when the ignition switch is in ON (II), or for at least 3 minutes after the ignition switch is turned to
LOCK (0); otherwise, the system may fail in a collision, or the airbags may deploy.
• SRS electrical connectors are identified by yellow color coding. Related components are located in the
steering column, dashboard center lower cover, dashboard, dashboard lower cover, in the dashboard above
the glove box, in the front seats, in the roof side, and around the floor. Do not use electrical test equipment on
these circuits.
S te e rin g
Special Tools....................................................................... 17-2
Component Location Index.......... ...................................17-3
Steering Wheel Rotational Play Check...................... .. 17-4
Power Assist Check.......................................................... 17-4
Steering Linkage and Gearbox Inspection....................17-5
* Steering Wheel Removal.............................. .................. 17-6
Steering Wheel Disassembly/Reassembly.................. 17-7
* Steering Wheel Installation............................... ....17-8
* Steering Column Removal and Installation.................. 17-9
Steering Column Inspection............................................ 17-12
Steering Lock Replacement............................................ 17-13
Rack Guide Adjustm ent.................................................... 17-14
Tie-rod End Ball Joint Boot Replacement..................... 17-15
Gearbox Mount Cushion Replacement........................ 17-16
H y d ra u lic P o w e r S te e rin g C o m p o n e n ts
Component Location Index............................ .................17-17
Symptom Troubleshooting Index...........................— 17-18
Symptom Troubleshooting..............................................17-21
Pump Pressure Test with T/N 07406-0010001 ............. 17-22
Pump Pressure Test with T/N 07406-001000A or T/N
07406-001A10 1 .........................................................,...1 7 -2 3
Fluid Leakage Inspection............................................ . 17-25
Fluid Replacement............................................................. 17-26
Power Steering Hose, Line, and Pressure Switch
Replacement.................................................... ............. 17-27
Pump Replacement..........................................................17-28
Pump Overhaul.................................................................. 17-29
* Steering Gearbox Rem oval............................................. 17-34
Steering Gearbox Overhaul....... .................................... 17-42
* Steering Gearbox Installation......................................... 17-53
Special Tools
Ref.No. Tool Number Description Qty

® 07406-0010001 P/S Pressure Gauge 1
© 07406-001000A or 07406-001A101 P/S Pressure Gauge 1
(D 07746-0010300 Bearing Driver Attachment, 42 x 47 mm 1
© 07749-0010000 Driver Handle, 1 5 x 1 35L 1
© 07965-SA50500 Bearing Driver Attachment, 36 mm 1
© 07AAF-SDAA100 Ball Joint Thread Protector, 12 mm 1
© 07LAG-SM40100 Piston Seal Ring Guide 1
© 07LAG-SM40200 Piston Seal Ring Sizing Tool 1
© 07MAA-SL00200 or 07MAA-SL0020A Locknut Wrench, 43 mm 1
© 07MAC-SL0A102 Ball Joint Remover, 32 mm 1
© 07RAK-S040122 Hose Joint Adapter 1
© 07TAF-SZ50100 Cylinder End Seal Remover Attachment 1
© 07VAK-P8A011A P/S Joint Adapter (Pump) 1
© 07VAK-P8A012 B P/S Joint Adapter Plate (Pump) 1
© 07ZAB-S5A0100 Pulley Holder 1
Component Location Index
STEERING WHEEL
Removal, page 17-6
Disassembly/Reassembly, page 17-7
Installation, page 17-8
Rack Guide Adjustment, page 17-14

Tie-rod End Ball Joint Boot Replacement, page 17-15
Gearbox Mount Cushion Replacement, page 17-16
Steering Wheel Rotational Play Power Assist Check
Check
1. Set the front wheels in the straight ahead position. NOTE: This test should be done with original equipment
tires and wheels at the correct tire pressure.
2. Measure how far you can turn the steering wheel left
and right without moving the front wheels. 1. Check the power steering fluid level (see page 17-26).
• If the play is within the limit, the steering gearbox
2. Start the engine, let it idle, and turn the steering wheel
and steering linkages are OK. from lock to lock several times to warm up the fluid.
• If the play exceeds the limit, adjust the rack guide
(see page 17-14). If the play is still excessive after 3. Attach a commercially available spring (A) scale to the
rack guide adjustment, inspect the steering linkage steering wheel. With the engine idling and the vehicle
and steering gearbox (see page 17-5). on a clean, dry floor, pull the scale as shown, and read
it as soon as the tires begin to turn.
Rotational play; 0 —10 mm {0—0.39 in)
• If the scale reads no more than the specification, the
steering gearbox and pump are OK.
• If the scale reads more than the specification,
troubleshoot the steering system (see page 17-21).
Initial turning load: 31 N (3.2 kgf, 7.1 Ibf)
Steering Linkage and Gearbox Inspection
BOOT TIE-ROD END BALL JOINT

Inspect for damage and deterioration. Inspect for faulty movement and damage.
Steering Wheel Removal
SRS components are located in this area. Review the 5. Install a commercially available steering wheel puller
SRS component locations (see page 24-23) and the (A) on the steering wheel (B). Free the steering wheel
precautions and procedures (see page 24-26) before from the steering column shaft by turning the
doing repairs or service. pressure bolt (C) of the puller.
1. Do the battery terminal disconnection procedure (see Note these items when removing the steering wheel:
page 22-112). • Do not tap on the steering wheel or the steering
2. Set the front wheels in the straight ahead position, column shaft when removing the steering wheel.
then remove the driver's airbag from the steering • If you thread the puller bolts (D) into the wheel hub
wheel (see page 24-215). more than five threads, the bolts will hit the cable
reel and damage it. To prevent this, install a pair of
3. Disconnect the cable reel subharness connector (A). jam nuts five threads up on each puller bolt.
6. Remove the steering wheel puller, then remove the

steering wheel nut and steering wheel from the
steering column.
Steering Wheel Installation
SRS components are located in this area. Review the 3. Install the steering wheel nut (A), and tighten it to the
SRS component locations (see page 24-23) and the specified torque.
precautions and procedures (see page 24-26) before
A
doing repairs or service.
1. Before installing the steering wheel, make sure the
front wheels are pointing straight ahead, then center
the cable reel (A). Do this by first rotating the cable
reel clockwise until it stops. Then rotate it
counterclockwise about three full turns. The arrow
mark (B) on the cable reel label should straight up.
B. A
4. Connect the cable reel subharness connector (B).

Make sure the wire harness is routed and fastened
properly.
5. Install the driver's airbag (see page 24-215).
6. Do the battery terminal reconnection procedure (see
page 22-112), and check these items:
• Turn the ignition switch to ON (II), and check that
The SRS indicator comes on for about 6 seconds,
2. Position the two tabs (A) of the turn signal canceling
and then goes off.
sleeve (B) as shown, install the steering wheel on to
the steering column shaft, making sure the steering • Make sure the horn and turn signal switches work
wheel hub (C) engages the pins (D) of the cable reel properly.
and tabs of the turn signal canceling sleeve. Do not • Make sure the steering wheel switches work
tap on the steering wheel or steering column shaft properly.
when installing the steering wheel.
7. After installation, check the steering wheel spoke
angle. If the steering spoke angles to the right and left
are not equal (steering wheel is not centered), correct
the engagement of the wheel/column shaft splines.
SRS components are located in this area. Review the 8. Hold the lower slide shaft (A) on the column with a
SRS component locations (see page 24-23) and the piece of wire (B) between the joint yoke (C) of the
precautions and procedures (see page 24-26) before lower slide shaft and joint yoke (D) of the upper shaft
doing repairs or service. to prevent the lower slider shaft from pulling out.
Removal
1. Do the battery terminal disconnection procedure (see
page 22-112).
2. Remove the driver's airbag (see page 24-215) and the
steering wheel (see page 17-6).
3. Remove the column covers.
4. Remove the driver's heater lower cover (see page
20-138).
5. Remove the steering joint cover (A).
9. Release the lock lever, and adjust the steering column

to the full telescopic out position, then tighten the lock
lever.
NOTE: Do not release the lock lever when removing
the steering column from the frame.
10. Remove the steering joint bolt (A), and disconnect the
steering joint (B) by sliding the steering joint into the
column.
NOTE:
• If the center guide is in place and has not moved,
leave it in place.
6. Release the lock lever, and adjust the steering column • If the center guide has come off, discard it.
to the full tilt up position, and to the full telescopic in
position.
7. Tighten the lock lever.
Steering Column Removal and Installation (cont'd)
11. Disconnect the wire harness connectors from the combination switch assembly/cable reel (A).
(B).
13. Disconnect the connectors from the ignition switch, and release the wire harness clips from the steering column.
14. Remove the steering column (C) by removing the attaching nuts and bolts. If the lower slide shaft (D) is removed, slip
it into the upper shaft (E) by aligning the paint marks (F).
3. Cut the wire (A) and slip the lower end of the steering
joint onto the pinion shaft (B).
1. Install the steering column in the reverse order of
removal, and note these items: NOTE:
• Make sure the wires are not caught or pinched by • Pinion shaft with center guide: Install the steering
any parts. joint by aligning the center guide.
• Take care not to let the sliding capsules fall out of • Pinion shaft without center guide: Position the
position during column installation. steering column by aligning the gap (C) within the
angle.
• Tighten the three screws (A) in the sequence
shown.
2. Center the steering rack within its stroke in the

steering joint connection.
4. Align the bolt hole (A) on the steering joint with the
groove (B) around the pinion shaft, then loosely
install the steering joint bolt (C). Be sure that the joint
bolt is securely in the groove in the pinion shaft.
5. Pull on the steering joint to make sure that the

steering joint is fully seated. Tighten the steering joint
bolt to the specified torque.
Steering Column Removal and Steering Column Inspection
Installation (cont'd)
6 . install the steering joint cover (A). 1. Remove the steering column (see page 17-9).
2. Check these items:
• Check the steering column ball bearing (A) and the
steering joint bearings (B) for play and proper
movement. If any bearing is noisy or has excessive
play, replace the steering column as an assembly.
• Check the lower slide shaft (C) for smooth
movement in and out. If the lower slide shaft is
removed, slip it into the upper shaft by aligning the
paint marks (D). If it sticks or binds, replace the
steering column as an assembly.
• Check the sliding capsules (E) for distortion or
breakage. If there is distortion or breakage, replace
the steering column as an assembly.
• Check the tilt mechanism and telescopic
mechanism for movement and damage.
7. Install the driver's heater lower cover (see page
20-138).
E
8. Install the column covers.
9. Install the steering wheel (see page 17-8) and the
driver's airbag (see page 24-215).
the SRS indicator comes on for about 6 seconds,
and then goes off.
• Make sure the horn and turn signal switches work
properly.
• Make sure the steering wheel switches work
properly.
11 . After installation, check these items:
• Check the steering wheel spoke angle. If the
steering spoke angles to the right and left are not
equal (steering wheel and rack are not centered),
correct the engagement of the joint/pinion shaft
splines.
• Set the steering column to the center tilt position,
and to the center telescopic position, then do the
front toe inspection (see page 18-5).
Steering Lock Replacement
1. Remove the steering column (see page 17-9). 8. Tighten the shear bolts (A) until the hex heads (B)
twist off.
2. Center-punch both of the two shear bolts, and drill
their heads off with a 5 mm (3/16 in) drill bit. Be careful
not to damage the steering lock when removing the
shear bolts.
9. Install the steering column (see page 17-9).

10. Rewrite all new keys to the immobilizer-keyless
control unit (see page 22-458) and make sure the
immobilizer system works properly.
3. Remove the shear bolts from the steering lock, then

remove the steering lock.
4. Remove the immobilizer-keyless control unit from the
steering lock, then install it on the new steering lock.
(see page 22-459)
5. Install the steering lock without the key inserted.
6. Loosely tighten the new shear bolts.
7. Insert the ignition key, and check for proper operation
of the steering wheel lock and that the ignition key
turns freely.
Rack Guide Adjustment
Special Tools Required 3. Remove the old sealant from the rack guide screw (A),
Locknut Wrench, 43 mm 07MAA-SL00200 or and apply new sealant (Loctite 565) to the middle of
07 M AA-S L0020A the threads (B). Loosely install the rack guide screw
on the steering gearbox.
1. Set the front wheels in the straight ahead position.
NOTE: If more than 5 minutes have passed after
2. Loosen the rack guide screw locknut (A) with the applying the sealant, remove the old sealant and
locknut wrench, then remove the rack guide screw residue, and reapply new sealant.
(B).
15+5 °
4. Tighten the rack guide screw to 25 N-m (2.5 kgf-m,

18 lbf*ft), then loosen it.
A
69 N-m (7.0 kgf-m, 51 ibf-ft) 5. Retighten the rack guide screw to 3.9 N-m (0.4 kgf-m,
2.9 Ibf-ft), then back it off to the specified angle.
Specified return angle: 15±5 °
6. Hold the rack guide screw stationary with a wrench,
and install the locknut by hand until it's fully seated.
7. Install the locknut wrench on the locknut, and hold the
rack guide screw stationary with a wrench. Tighten
the locknut to the specified torque.
8. Check for unusual steering effort throughout the
complete turning range.
9. Check the steering wheel rotational play (see page
17-4), and the power assist (see page 17-4).
Tie-rod End Ball Joint Boot Replacement
Special Tools Required 6. Install the ball joint boot (A) using the bearing driver
Bearing Driver Attachment, 36 mm 07965-SA50500 attachment. The boot must not have a gap at the boot
installation sections (B). After installing the boot,
1. Disconnect the tie-rod end ball joint from the knuckle, check the ball pin tapered section for grease
(see step 21 on page 17-36) contamination, and wipe it if necessary.
2. Remove the tie-rod end from the rack end.
3. Remove the ball joint boot from the tie-rod end, and
wipe the old grease off the ball pin.
4. Pack the lower area of the ball pin (A) with fresh
multipurpose grease.
7. Install the tie-rod end to the rack end.

8. Connect the tie-rod end ball joint to the knuckle, (see
step 26 on page 17-58)
9. Check the wheel alignment, and adjust it if necessary
(see page 18-5).
5. Pack the interior of the new ball joint boot (B) and lip
(C) with fresh multipurpose grease.
Note these items when installing new grease:
• Keep grease off the boot mounting area (D) and the
tapered section (E) of the ball pin.
• Do not allow dust, dirt, or other foreign materials to
enter the boot.
Gearbox Mount Cushion Replacement
1. Remove the steering gearbox (see page 17-34). 4. Apply a mild soap and water solution to the new
gearbox mount cushion surface (A), then place it on
2. Position a 34 mm socket (A) on the flange part of the
the gearbox mounting cushion hole.
gearbox housing with a washer (B), a 10x 105 mm
flange bolt (C), and a 10 mm nut (D) as shown.
5. Position a 34 mm socket on the flange part of the

gearbox housing with a washer, a flange bolt, and a
3. Hold the flange bolt with a wrench, and tighten the nut
nut as shown.
with a wrench. Remove the gearbox mount cushion
(E). 6. Install the gearbox mount cushion by tightening the
nut until the mount cushion edges (B) contact the
steering gearbox flange surface.
7. Install the steering gearbox (see page 17-53).
, POWER STEERING FLUID RESERVOIR

Fluid Leakage Inspection, page 17-25
Fluid Replacement, page 17-26
Power Steering Hose, Line, and
Pressure Switch Replacement, page 17-27
. POWER STEERING PUMP

Drive Belt Inspection (J35A6 engine), page 4-41
Drive Belt Inspection (J35A7 engine), page 4-42
Drive Belt Replacement(J35A6 engine), page 4-42
Drive Belt Replacement (J35A7 engine), page 4-43
Pump Pressure Test
with T/N 07406-0010001, page 17-22
Pump Pressure Test
with T/N 07406-001000A or
07406-001A101, page 17-23
Pump Replacement, page 17-28
Pump Overhaul, page 17-29
POWER STEERING GEARBOX

Removal, page 17-34
Overhaul, page 17-42
Installation, page 17-53
Symptom Troubleshooting Index
Find the symptom in the chart below, and do the related procedures in the order listed until you find the cause.
Symptom Procedure(s) Also check for

Hard steering Troubleshoot the system (see page 17-21). • Modified suspension
• Damaged suspension
• Incorrect tire sizes, tire
varieties, and air
pressure
Assist Check the rack guide adjustment (see page 17-14). Front wheel alignment
(excessively light (see page 18-5)
steering at high
speed)
Shock or 1. Check the rack guide adjustment (see page 17-14).
vibration when 2. Check the drive belt for slippage: J35A6 engine (see page 4-41),
the steering J35A7 engine (see page 4-42).
wheel is turned to 3. Check the power steering pump fluid pressure with T/N
full lock 07406-00100001 (see page 17-22), T/N 07406-001000A or T/N
07406-001A101 (see page 17-23).
4. Overhaul the steering gearbox (see page 17-42).
Steering wheel 1. Check cylinder lines for deformation (see page 17-27). Damaged suspension
will not return 2. Check the ball joints for binding.
smoothly 3. Check wheel alignment (see page 18-5).
Uneven or rough 1. Check the rack guide adjustment (see page 17-14).
steering 2. Check the drive belt: J35A6 engine (see page 4-41), J35A7
engine (see page 4-42).
3. Check for low or erratic engine idle speed (see page 11-382).
4. Check for air in the power steering system due to air entering the
inlet side of the pump.
5. Check for low fluid level in the power steering reservoir due to
possible leaks in the system (see page 17-26).
Steering wheel 1. Check for low fluid level in the power steering reservoir due to
kicks back during possible leaks in the system (see page 17-26).
wide turns 2. Check the drive belt: J35A6 engine (see page 4-41), J35A7
engine (see page 4-42).
3. Check the power steering pump fluid pressure with T/N
07406-0010001 (see page 17-22), T/N 07406-001000A or
T/N 07406-001A101 (see page 17-23).
< g )

Humming noise 1. Check when the noise occurs: • Pump pressure
from the power • If the noise is heard during the first 2—3 minutes after starting • Fluid contamination
steering system the engine in cold weather, this is normal. - Restriction in the
• If the noise is heard when the wheel is turned with the vehicle high-pressure line
stopped, this is normal due to the fluid pulsation. - Restriction in the
2. Check for the high-pressure hose touching the subframe or low-pressure line
body.
3. Check for automatic transmission torque converter noise.
4. Check for air bubbles in the power steering fluid, leak on the inlet
side of the pump.
5. Check for particle contamination of fluid and a restricted filter in
the reservoir.
Power steering 1. Check for loose steering components (tie-rod and ball joints).
rack rattle or Tighten or replace as necessary.
chattering 2. Check the steering column shaft for wobbling. If the steering
column wobbles, replace the steering column assembly (see
page 17-9).
3. Check the rack guide adjustment (see page 17-14).
4. Check the power steering pump pulley:
• If the pulley is loose, tighten it (see step 32 on page 17-33).
• If the pump shaft is loose, replace the pump (see page 17-28).
Hissing from the • Check the fluid level. If low, fill the reservoir to the proper level, • P/S pump pressure
power steering and check for leaks (see page 17-25). • Air in the P/S fluid
system/foaming • Check the reservoir for leaks.
fluid • Check for crushed inlet hose or loose hose clamp allowing air
into the suction side of the system (see page 17-27).
• Check the power steering pump shaft oil seal for leaks.
Noise from the • Compare the pump noise at normal operating temperature to • P/S pump pressure
power steering another like vehicle (pump noise during the first 2—3 minutes • Air in the P/S fluid
pump after starting the engine in cold weather is normal).
• Remove and inspect the pump for wear and damage (see page
17-28).
Squeaking from Check the drive belt: J35A6 engine (see page 4-41), J35A7 engine
the power (see page 4-42).
steering pump
Fluid leaks from • Fluid leaks from the top of the valve body unit: Replace the valve Fluid contamination
the steering body unit (see step 13 on page 17-44).
gearbox • Fluid leaks from the driver's side boot. Replace the valve oil seal
on the pinion shaft. Replace the cylinder end seal on the gearbox
side (see page 17-42).
• Fluid leaks from the passenger's side boot. Replace the cylinder
end seal on the cylinder side (see page 17-42).
• Fluid leaks from pinion shaft near the lower steering joint bolt.
Replace the valve body unit.
(cont'd)
Symptom Troubleshooting Index (cont'd)

Fluid leaks from • Fluid leaks from the cylinder line connections (flare nuts). Tighten Fluid contamination
the power the connection (see page 17-27), and retest.
steering line • Fluid leaks from a damaged cylinder line(s). Replace the cylinder
line(s) (see page 17-27).
• Fluid leaks from the pump outlet hose or return line fitting on the
valve body unit (flare nuts). Tighten the fitting, and retest. If it still
leaks, replace the hose, and the line (see page 17-27), or valve
body unit as necessary (see step 13 on page 17-44).
Fluid leaks from • Fluid leaks from the pump seal. Replace the pump seal (see page Fluid contamination
the power 17-29).
steering pump • Fluid leaks from the power steering pump housing.
Replace the leaking O-rings or seals, and if necessary replace the
power steering pump (see page 17-28).
Fluid leaks from • Fluid leaks from around the reservoir cap because fluid level is Fluid contamination
the power too high. Drain the reservoir to the proper level (see page 17-26).
steering reservoir If the fluid is foaming, check for an air leak on the inlet side of the
pump.
• Fluid leaks from the reservoir. Check the reservoir for cracks, and
replace as necessary.
Fluid leaks from • Check the fitting for loose bolts. If the bolts are tight, replace the Fluid contamination
the power fitting O-ring (see page 17-29).
steering pump • Fluid leaks at the swagged joint. Replace the pump outlet hose
outlet hose (see page 17-29).
(high-pressure)
Fluid leaks from Check the hose for damage, deterioration, or improper assembly. Fluid contamination
the power Replace or repair as necessary (see page 17-28).
steering pump
inlet hose
(low-pressure)
Symptom Troubleshooting
Hard Steering 5. Using a spring scale, measure the power assist in

both directions, to the left and to the right.
NOTE:
• Compare to a known-good vehicle that is the same A r e th e tw o m e a s u r e m e n t s w ith in 5 .0 N (0 .5 1 k g f,
trim level. 1 .1 2 Ib f) o f e a c h o th e r?
• Check for suspension damage. YES-Go to step 6.
• Check the steering alignment.
NO-Go to step 9.
• Check the tire condition and pressure.
6. Measure the fluid pressure with both pressure gauge
1. Check the power assist (see page 17-4). valves open (if so equipped), while turning the
Is th e in itia l tu r n in g lo a d m o r e t h a n 3 1 N ( 3 .2 k g f j . 1 1 b f)? steering wheel fully to the left and fully to the right.
YES-Go to step 2. I s t h e p r e s s u r e 8 , 5 5 0 — 9 , 0 5 0 k P a ( 8 7 . 2 — 9 2 . 3 k g f / c m 2,
1 ,2 4 0 — 1 ,3 1 3 p s i) o r le s s ?
NO-Power assist is OK at this time. Compare to a
known-good vehicle.! YES-Go to step 7.
2. Connect the P/S joint adapter (pump), hose joint NO-Faulty steering gearbox. Overhaul the steering
adapter, and P/S pressure gauge T/N 07406-0010001 gearbox (see page 17-42).H
(see page 17-22), T/N 07406-001000A, or T/N 7. Adjust the rack guide (see page 17-14), and retest.
07406-001A101 (see page 17-23) to the pump.
Is th e s te e r in g O K ?
3. Measure steady-state fluid pressure from the pump at
idle. YES-Repair is completed.■
i s t h e p r e s s u r e 1 , 4 7 0 k P a ( 1 5 k g f / c m 2, 2 1 3 p s i ) o r l e s s ? NO-Fa ulty steering gearbox. Overhaul the steering

gearbox (see page 17-42).B
YES-Go to step 4.
8. Check the outlet and return hoses and the lines
NO-Go to step 8. between the pump and the steering gearbox for
4. Measure the pump relief pressure at idle. clogging and deformation.
i s t h e p r e s s u r e 8 , 5 5 0 — 9 , 0 5 0 k P a ( 8 7 . 2 — 9 2 . 3 k g f / c m 2, A r e th e lin e s c lo g g e d o r d e f o r m e d ?
1 ,2 4 0 — 1 ,3 1 3 p s i) o r m o re ? YES-Repair or replace the lines.!
YES-Go to step 5. NO-Fa ulty valve body unit. Replace the valve body
NO-Replace the pump assembly (see page 17-28).H unit (see page 17-42).B
(cont'd)
Symptom Troubleshooting (cont'd) Pump Pressure Test w ith T/N
07406-0010001
9. Check the cylinder lines for deformation (see page Special T ools Required
17-27). • Hose Joint Adapter 07RAK-S040122
• P/S Joint Adapter (Pump) 07VAK-P8A011A
A r e a n y o f th e lin e (s ) d e f o r m e d ? • P/S Joint Adapter Plate (Pump) 07VAK-P8A012B
YES-Replace the deformed Iine.il • P/S Pressure Gauge 07406-0010001
NO-Go to step 10. Check the fluid pressure as follows to determine

whether the trouble is in the pump or steering gearbox.
10. Check for a bent rack shaft or misadjusted rack guide
(too tight). 1. Check the power steering fluid level (see page 17-26),
and the drive belt: J35A6 engine (see page 4-41),
I s t h e rack s h a f t b e n t o r t h e r a c k g u i d e a d j u s t e d t o o t i g h t ?
J35A7 engine (see page 4-42).
YES-Replace the rack shaft, or readjust the rack guide
2. Remove the engine cover (see step 7 on page 5-2).
preload.■
3. Disconnect the pump outlet hose (A) from the pump
NO-Faulty valve body unit Replace the valve body
outlet with care so as not to spill the power steering
unit (see page 17-42).H
fluid on the frame and other parts, then install the P/S
joint adapter (pump) on the pump outlet (B) with the
P/S joint outlet plate.
4. Connect the hose joint adapter to the P/S pressure

gauge, then connect the pump outlet hose to the hose
joint adapter.
5. Install the P/S pressure gauge to the P/S joint adapter
(pump).
Pump Pressure Test with T/N
07406-001000A or T/N 07406-001A101
6. Fully open the shut-off valve (A). Special Tools Required
• Hose Joint Adapter 07RAK-S040122
. P/S Joint Adapter (Pump) 07VAK-P8A011A
• P/S Joint Adapter Plate (Pump) 07VAK-P8A012B
• P/S Pressure Gauge 07406-001000A or 07406-001A101
Check the fluid pressure as follows to determine

whether the trouble is in the pump or steering gearbox.
1. Check the power steering fluid level (see page 17-26),
and the drive belt: J35A6 engine (see page 4-41),
3. Disconnect the pump outlet hose (A) from the pump
outlet with care so as not to spill the power steering
fluid on the frame and other parts, then install the P/S
7. Fully open the pressure control valve (B). joint adapter (pump) on the pump outlet (B) with the
P/S joint outlet plate.
8. Start the engine, and let it idle.
9. Turn the steering wheel from lock to lock several
times to warm the fluid to operating temperature at
158 °F (70 °C).
10. Measure steady-state fluid pressure while the engine
is idling. If the pump is in good condition, the gauge
should read no more than 1,470 kPa (15 kgf/cm2,
213 psi).
If the reading is high, check for:

• Clogged or deformed inlet or return line between
the pump and the steering gearbox.
• Clogged valve body unit.
11. Close the shut-off valve, then close the pressure
control valve gradually until the pressure gauge
needle is stable. Read the pressure.
NOTICE l
Do not keep the shut-off valve closed more than
5 seconds or the pump could be damaged by
over-heating.
4. Connect the hose joint adapter to the P/S pressure
12. Immediately open the shut-off valve fully.
gauge, then connect the pump outlet hose to the hose
If the pump is in good condition, the gauge should
joint adapter.
read at least 8,550—9,050 kPa (87.2—92.3 kgf/cm2,
1,240—1,313 psi). A low reading means the pump 5. Install the P/S pressure gauge to the P/S joint adapter
output is too low for full assist. Repair or replace the (pump).
pump.
Pump Pressure Test w ith T /N 07406-001000A or T /N 07406-001A101 (cont'd)
6. Open the shut-off valve (A) fully.
7. Start the engine, and let it idle.

8. Turn the steering wheel from lock to lock several
times to warm the fluid to operating temperature at
158 °F (70 °C).
9. Measure steady-state fluid pressure while the engine
is idling. If the pump is in good condition, the gauge
should read no more than 1,470 kPa (15 kgf/cm2,
213 psi).
If the reading is high, check for;

• Clogged or deformed inlet or return line between
the pump and the steering gearbox.
• Clogged valve body unit.
10. Let the engine idle, and gradually close the shut-off
valve and immediately read the pressure.
I NOTICE
Do not keep the shut-off valve closed more than
5 seconds or the pump could be damaged by
over-heating.
11. Immediately open the shut-off valve fully.

If the pump is in good conditi on, the gauge should
read at least 8,550—9,050 kPa (87.2—92.3 kgf/cm2,
1,240—1,313 psi). A low reading means the pump
output is too low for full assist. Repair or replace the
pump.
*: '07 model
Fluid Replacement
Check the reservoir (A) at regular intervals, and add the 1. Remove the reservoir from its holder. Raise the
recommended fluid as necessary. Always use Honda reservoir, then disconnect the return hose (A) to drain
Power Steering Fluid. Using any other type of power the reservoir. Take care not to spill the fluid on the
steering fluid or automatic transmission fluid can cause vehicle. Wipe off any spilled fluid at once.
increased wear, fluid leaks, and poor steering in cold
NOTE: Inspect the reservoir screen for any debris. If
weather.
the reservoir screen is clogged, replace the reservoir,
NOTE: If the fluid is contaminated, the screen in the and check for the source of the contamination.
reservoir may be partially blocked. Inspect the reservoir
screen for any debris. If the reservoir screen is clogged,
replace the reservoir, and check for the source of the
contamination.
System capacity: 1.13 L (1.19 US qt)

Reservoir capacity: 0.34 L (0.36 US qt)
2. Connect a hose (B) of suitable diameter to the

disconnected return hose, and put the hose end in a
suitable container.
3. Start the engine, let it run at idle, and turn the steering
wheel from lock to lock several times. When fluid
stops running out of the hose, shut off the engine.
Discard the fluid.
NOTE: Stop the engine immediately once the fluid
stops running out of the hose to prevent pump
damage.
4. Reinstall the return hose on the reservoir.
5. Fill the reservoir to the upper level line (C).
6. Start the engine, and run it at idle. Turn the steering
wheel from lock to lock several times to bleed from
the system.
7. Recheck the fluid level, and add some if necessary. Do
not fill the reservoir beyond the upper level line.
8. If the fluid is contaminated, dark, or discolored, repeat
the procedure as necessary until the system is clean.
Power Steering Hose, Line, and Pressure Switch Replacement
Note these items during installation:

• Connect each hose to the corresponding line securely until it contacts the stop on the line. Install the clamp or
adjustable clamp at the specified distance from the hose end as shown.
• Check all clamps for deterioration or deformation; replace the clamps with new ones if necessary.
• Add the recommended power steering fluid to the specified level on the reservoir, and check for leaks.
ADJUSTABLE HOSE CLAMP (A) HOSE CLAMP (B)
2.5—5.5 mm 2.0—4.0 mm
(0.10-0.22 In) {0.08-0.16 in)
11 N-m
(1.1 kgf-m, 8.0 Ibf-ft)
PUMP OUTLET HOSE CYLINDER LINES

15 N-m (1.5 kgf-m, 11 Ibf-ft)
INLET LINE
14x1.5 mm
37 N-m
(3.8 kgf-m, 27 Ibf-ft)
RETURN LINE
16 x 1.5 mm
28 N-m
CYLINDER LINES
15 N-m (1.5 kgf-m, 11 Ibf-ft)
RETURN LINE
*: '07 model
Pump Replacement
1. Place a suitable container under the vehicle to catch 9. Loosely install the pump in the pump bracket with the
any spilled fluid. mounting bolts, then tighten the pump fittings
securely.
2. Drain the power steering fluid from the reservoir (see
page 17-26). 10. Tighten the pump mounting bolts to the specified
torque.
3. J35A7 engine model: Disconnect the IMT actuator
connector (A). 11. Install the drive belt (A): J35A6 engine (see page 4-41),
6x 1.0 mm Note these items during drive belt installation:
11 N-m
( 1.1
kgf-m* 8.0 • Inspect the belt for wear and cracks. Replace the
belt if necessary.
• Make sure that the drive belt is properly positioned
on the pulleys (B).
• Do not get power steering fluid or grease on the
auto-tensioner, the alternator, the A/C compressor,
and the drive belt or pulley faces. Clean off any fluid
or grease before installation.
F
22 N-m
4. Remove the drive belt (B) from the pump pulley:

J35A6 engine (see page 4-41), J35A7 engine (see 12. J35A7 engine model: Connect the IMT actuator
page 4-42). connector.
5. Cover the auto-tensioner, the alternator, and the A/C 13. Fill the reservoir to the upper level line (see page
compressor with several shop towels to protect them 17-26).
from spilled power steering fluid. Disconnect the 14. Start the engine, and check for leaks.
pump inlet hose (C) and the pump outlet hose (D)
from the pump (E), and plug them. Take care not to
spill the fluid on the vehicle. Wipe off any spilled fluid
at once. Do not turn the steering wheel with the pump
removed.
6. Remove the pump mounting bolts (F), then remove
the pump.
7. Cover the opening of the pump with a piece of tape to
prevent foreign material from entering the pump.
8. Connect the pump inlet hose and the pump outlet
hose onto the new pump with the new O-ring (G).
Pump Overhaul
Exploded View
Replace the pump as an assembly if any of the parts indicated with an asterisk (*) are worn or damaged.
,8x1.25 mm
20 N-m
*4.5 mm ROLL PIN (2.0 kgf-m, 14 Ibf-ft)
*OUTER SIDE PLATE
*CAIVI RING
51.0x2.4 mm
O-RING
Replace.
13.0 x 1.9 mm
O-RING
Replace.
INLET JOINT
6x 1.0 mm
11 N-m
(1.1 kgf*m,
8.0 Ibf-ft)
PULLEY NUT *FLOW CONTROL VALVE
64 N-m
(6.5 kgf-m,
47 Ibf-ft)
16.7 x 1.8 mm
O-RING
Replace.
* FLOW CONTROL VALVE CAP

49 N-m (5.0 kgf-m, 36 Ibf-ft)
Pump Overhaul (cont'd)
Special Tools Required Inspection

Pulley Holder 07ZAB-S5A0100 11. Check the flow control valve for wear, burrs, and other
damage to the edges of the grooves in the valve.
Disassembly
NOTE: Refer to the Exploded View as needed during the
following procedure.
1. Remove the power steering pump (see page 17-28).
2. Drain the remaining fluid from the power steering
pump (see page 17-26). o a
3. Hold the power steering pump (A) in a vise with soft
jaws (B), then hold the pulley (C) with the pulley
a
holder (D), and remove the pulley nut (E) and pulley.
Be careful not to damage the pump housing with the
jaws of a vise.
12. Inspect the bore of the flow control valve on the pump
housing for scratches and wear.
13. Slip the flow control valve back in the pump housing,
and check that it moves in and out smoothly. If OK, go
to step 14; if not, replace the pump as an assembly
(see page 17-28). The flow control valve (A) is not
available separately.
5. Loosen the flow control valve cap with a hex wrench,

and remove the cap, the O-ring, the spring, and the
flow control valve.
6. Remove the pump cover and the pump cover seal.
7. Remove the outer side plate, the cam ring, the rotor,
the vanes, the side plate, and the O-rings.
8. Remove the snap ring, then remove the subvalve
from the pump housing.
9. Remove the 40 mm internal snap ring, then remove
the driveshaft by tapping the shaft end with a soft face
hammer.
10. Remove the pump seal from the pump housing.
14. Attach a hose (A) to the end of the flow control valve Reassembly
(B) as shown. Then submerge the flow control valve
17. Align the pin (A) of the subvalve (B) with the oil
in a container of power steering fluid (C), and apply
passage (C) in the pump housing, and push the
compressed air in the hose.
subvalve into place, then install the snap ring ( D ) .
• If air bubbles leak through the valve at less than
98 kPa (1.0 kgf/cm2, 14.2 psi), replace the pump as
an assembly. The flow control valve is not available
separately.
• If the flow control valve is OK, set it aside for
reassembly later.
18. Install the new pump seal (A) (with its grooved side
facing in) into the pump housing by hand first, then
position the driveshaft (B) in the pump housing. Press
the driveshaft and pump seal with the appropriate
size socket (C) as shown.
15. Inspect the ball bearing by rotating the outer race

slowly. If you feel any play (axial or radial) or
roughness remove the faulty ball bearing (A), and
install a new one (B).
B
biiim
m
,
i ] Lzr r~ i
19. Install the 40 mm snap ring (D) with its radiused edge
facing out.
16. Inspect each part shown with an asterisk in the

Exploded View. If any of them are worn or damaged,
replace the pump as an assembly.
Pump Overhaul (cont'd)
20. Coat the new pump cover seal (A) with power steering 23. Install the rotor (A) to the pump cover (B).
fluid, and install it into the groove in the pump cover
A
(B).
24. Set the 10 vanes (C) into the grooves in the rotor.
Make sure that the round ends (D) of the vanes are in
21. Install the outer side plate (C) over the two roll pins (D) contact with the sliding surface of the cam ring.
with its arrow marks stamped (E) facing down.
25. Coat the new 15.2 mm O-ring (A) with power steering
22. Set the cam ring (A) over the two roll pins with its fluid, and install it into the groove in the side plate (B).
mark (B) facing down.
26. Install the side plate on the cam ring (C) by aligning
the roll pin set holes (D) in the side plate with the roll
pins (E).
27. Coat the new 51.0 mm O-ring (A) with power steering 31. Coat the new 13.0 mm O-ring (A) with power steering
fluid, and position it in the bottom of the pump fluid, and install it on the inlet joint (B). Install the inlet
housing. joint on the pump housing.
28. Install the pump cover assembly (B) in the pump 32. Install the pulley (A), then loosely install the pulley nut
housing. Tighten the bolts to the specified torque (B). Hold the steering pump in a vise with soft jaws. Be
alternating in two or more steps. careful not to damage the pump housing with the
jaws of the vise.
29. Coat the flow control valve (A) with power steering
fluid, then install it and the spring (B) in the pump
housing.
33. Hold the pulley with the pulley holder, and tighten the
pulley nut to the specified torque.
30. Coat the new 16.7 mm O-ring (C) with power steering 34. Check that the pump turns smoothly by turning the
fluid, and install it on the flow control valve cap (D), pulley by hand. If it turns hard, loosen the four flange
then install the cap on the pump housing. Tighten it to bolts on the pump cover, then retighten them in the
the specified torque. same manner as in step 28. Retest. If the power
steering pump is still hard to turn, replace the power
steering pump.
35. Install the power steering pump (see page 17-28).
Steering Gearbox Removal
Special T ools Required 5. Remove the steering joint cover (A).

• Bail Joint Thread Protector, 12 mm 07AAF-SDAA100
• Ball Joint Remover, 32 mm 07MAC-SL0A102
• Engine Support Hanger, A and Reds AAR-T1256*
• Engine Hanger Adapter VSB02C000022*
• Engine Hanger Balance Bar VSB02C000019*
• Subframe Adapter VSBQ2C000016*
. 2008 V6 Attachment Arm SIL02C000033*
*These special tools are available through the Honda
Tool and Equipment Program 888-424-6857
SRS components are located in this area. Review the

SRS component locations (see page 24-23) and the
to the full tilt up position, and to the full telescopic in
Note these items during removal: position.
• Using clean solvent and a brush, wash any oil and dirt 7. Tighten the lock lever.
off the valve body unit, it's lines, and the end of the
steering gearbox. Blow dry with compressed air.
• Be sure to remove the steering wheel before
disconnecting the steering joint, or damage to the
cable reel can occur.
• Lower the front subframe from the body, and remove
the steering gearbox through the gap produced by
lowering the front subframe.
1. Drain the power steering fluid (see page 17-26).
page 22-112).
3. Remove the driver's airbag (see page 24-215), and the
steering wheel (see page 17-6).
4. Remove the driver's heater lower cover (see page
20-138).
<8>
8. Hold the lower slide shaft (A) on the column with a 11. Remove the center guide (A) (if equipped) from the
piece of wire (B) between the joint yoke (C) of the top of the pinion shaft (B), and discard it. The center
lower slide shaft and joint yoke (D) of the upper shaft guide is for factory assembly use only.
to prevent the lower slider shaft from pulling out.

13. '08-10 models J35A7 engine: Remove the harness
to the full telescopic out position, then tighten the lock
lever. holder and the connectors from the front cylinder
head (see step 3 on page 6-144).
NOTE: Do not release the lock lever when removing
14. Remove the connector bracket from the front cylinder
the steering column from the frame.
head:
10. Remove the steering joint bolt (A), and disconnect the • J35A6 engine (see step 14 on page 6-31)
steering joint (B) by sliding the steering joint into the • '07 model J35A7 engine (see step 14 on page 6-89)
column.
• '08-10 models J35A7 engine (see step 14 on page
6-152)
15. Remove the harness bracket from the rear cylinder
head.
• J35A6 engine (see step 15 on page 6-31)
• '07 model J35A7 engine (see step 15 on page 6-89)
6-152)
Steering Gearbox Removal (cont'd)
16. Install the engine hanger adapters (VSB02C000022) 19. Raise the vehicle (see page 1-14).
on the end of the engine support beams, then install
20. Remove the front wheels.
the engine support hanger (AAR-T1256) with the
adapters to the vehicle. 21. Remove the cotter pin (A) from the tie-rod end ball
J35A6, '07 model J35A7 engines joint, then remove the nut (B) on both sides.
17. J35A6, '07 model J35A7 engines: Lift and support the 22. Disconnect the tie-rod end ball joint from the knuckle
engine with the engine support hanger and the using the ball joint thread protector and the ball joint
engine hanger balancer bar (VSB02C000019). Attach remover on both sides (see page 18-11).
the front arm (A) to the front cylinder head with NOTE: Be careful not to damage the ball joint boot
several spacers (B) and the 10x 1.25 mm bolt (C).
when installing the remover.
Attach the rear arm (D) to the rear cylinder head with
the 8 x 1.25 mm bolt (E). 23. Remove exhaust pipe A (see page 9-11).
18. '08-10 models J35A7 engine: Lift and support the 24. Disconnect the power steering pressure (PSP) switch
engine with the engine support hanger and the connector (A).
engine hanger balance bar. Attach the front arm to the
front cylinder head with several spacers and the
10x 1.25 mm bolt. Attach the 2008 V6 attachment arm
(SIL02C000033) (F) to the rear cylinder head with a
8 x 1.25 mm bolt, then attach the rear arm to the 2008
V6 attachment arm.
25. Remove the front splash shield (A). 27. Attach the front subframe adapter (VSB02C000016) to
® ’07 model: (see page 20-281) the subframe (A) by hanging the belt (B) over the front
• '08-10 models: (see page 20-281) of the subframe, then secure the belt with its retaining
pin (C).
B A
26. Make reference marks (A) on the body across the

marks (B) on the edge of the front subframe (C).
28. Raise the jack (D) and line up the slots in the arms with
the bolt holes on the corner of the jack base, then
attach them with bolts securely.
29. Remove the 12 mm flange bolts (A), then loosen the
front subframe front bracket mounting bolts (B) on
the right and left of the vehicle so they are about
30 mm (1 3/16 in) from the mounting surface.
30. Support the front subframe securely by raising the 34. Loosen the 14 mm flare nut (A), and disconnect the
front subframe adapter, then remove the two 12 mm inlet line (B).
flange bolts (A).
35. Loosen the adjustable hose clamp (A) and disconnect

the return hose (B).
31. Remove the two 14 mm special bolts (B) and front

subframe rear brackets (C) from the front subframe.
32. Lower the jack supporting the front subframe with the
front subframe adapter slowly until the front
subframe has dropped about 50 mm (1 15/16 in).
33. Remove the P/S line mounting brackets (A) from the
front subframe.
A
38. Remove the two 12 mm flange bolts and nuts from
the driver's side of the steering gearbox.
6x 1.0 m m
37. Remove the two 10 mm flange bolts from the

passenger's side of the steering gearbox, then 39. Loosen the steering gearbox bracket mounting bolt
remove the mounting bracket (A) and cushion (B). (A).
A
10 x 1.25 mm 10x1.25 mm
40. With active control engine mount (ACM) system: 43. Without active control engine mount (ACM) system:
Remove the rear engine mount stop (A), then remove Remove the rear engine mount (A) from the front
the rear engine mount bolt (B). subframe.
41. With active control engine mount (ACM) system:

Disconnect the rear engine mount actuator connector
(A), then remove the rear engine mount (B) from the
engine mount base bracket (C). 44. Disconnect the return hose clip (A).

Remove the engine mount base bracket from the front
subframe.
45. Move the steering gearbox to the driver's side, and 49. Replace the pinion shaft grommet A if necessary.
rotate it so the pinion shaft points toward the front of
the vehicle.
46. Carefully move the steering gearbox as an assembly
toward the driver's side of the vehicle until the pinion
shaft clears the wheelwell opening. Be careful not to
damage the brake lines with the pinion shaft.
50. After removing the steering gearbox, make sure that

no power steering fluid gets on the gearbox mount
cushions, gearbox housing, surface of the front
subframe and stiffener. Wipe off any spilled fluid at
once.
47. Remove the steering gearbox (A) through the

fenderwell opening on the driver's side.
48. Remove the pinion shaft grommet B on the valve

housing.
Steering Gearbox Overhaul
Exploded View
FLARE NUTS
15 N-m
Replace.
Special Tools Required 5. Hold the flat surface sections (A) of the steering rack
• Cylinder End Seal Remover Attachment (B) with one wrench, and unscrew both rack ends (C)
07TAF-SZ50100 with another wrench. Be careful not to damage the
• Piston Seal Ring Guide 07LAG-SM40100 rack surface with the wrench.
• Piston Seal Ring Sizing Tool 07LAG-SM40200
. Driver Handle, 15 x 135L 07749-0010000
• Bearing Driver Attachment, 42 x 47 mm 07746-0010300
• Pincers Oetiker 1098, commercially available
NOTE: Refer to the Exploded View as needed during the

following procedure.
Disassembly
1. Remove the steering gearbox (see page 17-34).
2. Remove the tie-rod end from the rack end.
3. Remove the boot bands (A) and tie-rod clips (B). Pull
the boots away from the ends of the steering gearbox.
Replace.
6. Remove the lock washer (D) and stop washer (E)

('07 model).
7, Loosen the locknut (A), then remove the rack guide
screw (B).
4. Unbend the lock washer (A).
8. Remove the spring (C) and the rack guide (D) from the
gearbox housing.
Steering Gearbox Overhaul (cont'd)
9. Remove the cylinder lines (A) from the gearbox 12. Remove the end plug (A) from the gearbox housing,
housing (B). then remove the nut (B) from the pinion shaft end.
NOTE: Use a second wrench when loosening the
cylinder lines to avoid damage to the fittings on the
steering gearbox.
13. Remove the two flange bolts, then remove the valve
body unit (A), and gasket (B) from the gearbox
housing. Check that the valve turns smoothly by
turning the pinion shaft. If any play or roughness is
felt, replace the valve body unit with a new part. Do
not try to disassemble the valve body unit.
10. Remove the connector A, the connector B, and the

O-rings (C) from the steering gearbox.
14. Slide the steering rack all the way towards the valve
body end of the gearbox housing.
11. Drain the fluid from the cylinder fittings by slowly

moving the steering rack back and forth.
15. Turn the rack stop (A) counterclockwise until the end
(B) of the circlip (C) sticks out from the hole (D) in the
cylinder housing. Then turn it clockwise to remove the
circlip.
B
Replace.
18. Carefully pry the piston seal ring (A) and the O-ring (B)
off the rack piston. Be careful not to damage the inside
of seal ring groove and the piston edges when
removing the seal ring.
16. Remove the rack stop (A), rack bushing (B), and
steering rack (C) from the gearbox housing.
19. Install a washer (O.D. 27.5 mm, P/N 94103-10400)(A) 23. Turn the cylinder end seal remover attachment so it
so it fits through the rack guide hole of the gearbox fits through the rack guide hole of the gearbox
housing, then position the washer on the cylinder end housing, then position the attachment on the cylinder
seal (B). Make sure that the washer is securely end seal (A). Make sure that the seal remover is
positioned on the cylinder end seal edges. securely positioned on the seal edges.
20. Install a socket with a 27.5 mm O.D. (A) onto the 24" 24. Insert a 24" long 3/8" drive extension (A), on the
long 3/8" drive extension (B), and carefully place it on cylinder end seal remover attachment. Place the
the washer (C). gearbox housing in a press, then remove the cylinder
end seal (B) from the gearbox housing by pressing on
the 24" long 3/8" drive extension.
Note these items when pressing the cylinder end seal:
• Keep the tool straight to avoid damaging the
cylinder wall. Check the tool angle, and correct it if
necessary when removing the cylinder end seal.
• Use a press to remove the cylinder end seal. Do not
try to remove the cylinder end seal by striking the
tool; striking the tool would break the cylinder end
seal, and the seal would remain in the gearbox
housing.
21. Install a commercially available bearing separator (D)

on the gearbox housing. Set the steering gearbox in a
press so its valve body unit seat side points upward,
then push out the cylinder end seal (E) 5—6 mm
(0.20—0.24 in) by pressing on the 24" long 3/8" drive
extension end.
22. Remove the steering gearbox from the press, and
remove the washer from the gearbox housing.
Reassembly 30. Wrap vinyl tape around the rack teeth and rack end
edges, then coat the surface of the tape with power
25. Coat the piston seal ring guide with power steering
steering fluid. Make sure that the vinyl tape is
fluid, then slide it onto the rack, big end first.
wrapped carefully so that there is no stepped portion.
26. Position the new O-ring (A) and new piston seal ring
(B) on the piston seal ring guide, then slide them
down toward the big end of the tool.
Note these items during reassembly:
• Do not over expand the resin seal rings, install the
resin seal rings with care so as not to damage them,
After installation, make sure you contract the seal
ring using the sizing tool.
• Replace the piston's O-ring and seal ring as a set.
31. Coat the inside surface of the new cylinder end seal
(A) with power steering fluid, then install it onto the
steering rack with its grooved side toward the piston.
When installing the cylinder end seal, be careful not to
damage the lip of the seal with the edges or teeth of
the steering rack.
Replace.
27. Pull the O-ring off into the piston groove, then pull the
piston seal ring off into the piston groove on top of the
O-ring.
28. Coat the piston seal ring (A) and the inside of the
piston seal ring sizing tool with power steering fluid,
then carefully slide the tool onto the rack and over the
piston seal ring.
32. Remove the vinyl tape from the steering rack, then
remove any adhesive residue.
O7LAG-SM4O2O0
29. Move the piston seal ring sizing tool back and forth
several times to make the piston seal ring fit snugly in
the piston.
(cont'd)
33. Apply multipurpose grease to the steering rack teeth, 37. Wrap vinyl tape around the rack end edges, and coat
then insert the steering rack into the gearbox housing. the surface of the tape with power steering fluid.
Be careful not to damage the inner surface of the Make sure that the vinyl tape is wrapped carefully so
cylinder wall with the rack edges. there is no stepped portion.
34. Insert an appropriate size deep socket (A) onto the 38. Coat the inside surface of the new cylinder end seal
steering rack as shown. (A) with power steering fluid, then press it into the
rack bushing (B) using the attachment and the driver
Press handle.
*
Replace.
39. Coat the new O-ring (C) with power steering fluid, and
35. Install the cylinder end seal (B) into the bottom of the
carefully fit it in the groove of the rack bushing.
cylinder by pressing on the tool with a press. Do not
push on the tool with excessive force as it may
damage the cylinder end seal.
36. Remove the tool, and center the steering rack.
40. Install the rack bushing onto the steering rack with the 43. Insert the end of the circlip (A) into the hole (B) of the
cylinder end seal grooved side toward the piston. rack stop (C). Turn the rack stop counterclockwise
Push in the rack bushing with your finger. until the circlip is fully seated in the rack stop.
44. Apply multipurpose grease to the bearings (A) in the

gearbox housing, then install the valve body unit (B)
and new gasket (C) by engaging the gears. Note the
41. Remove the vinyl tape from the steering rack, then
valve body unit installation position (direction of line
remove any adhesive residue.
connections). Then loosely install the two flange
42. Install the rack stop (A) onto the steering rack so the bolts.
hole (B) is aligned with the slot (C) on the cylinder
housing.
45. Install the nut (A) onto the pinion shaft end, and 49. Coat the new O-rings (C) with power steering fluid,
tighten to the specified torque. then install the O-rings to connector A and
connector B.
46. Tighten the flange bolts to the specified torque.

47. Remove the old sealant from the threads on the
gearbox housing (B), and apply new sealant (Loctite 50. Install connector A and connector B to the steering
565) all the way around the threads on the end plug gearbox, and tighten them to the specified torque.
(C), install the end plug onto the gearbox housing, and 51. Before installing the cylinder lines, coat the new
tighten it to the specified torque. O-rings with power steering fluid, then install the
NOTE: If more than 5 minutes have passed after lines.
applying the sealant, remove the old sealant and Note these items during reassembly:
residue, and reapply new sealant.
• Thoroughly clean the joints of the cylinder lines.
48. After tightening, use a drift to stake (A) the end plug The joints must be free of foreign material.
shoulder against the gearbox housing. • Install the cylinder lines by tightening the flare nuts
by hand first, then tighten the flare nuts to the
specified torque.
NOTE: Use a second wrench when tightening the
cylinder lines to avoid damaging the fittings on the
steering gearbox.
15 N-m
52. Apply multipurpose grease to the sliding surface of 55. Install a new stop washer (A) ('07 model) and a new
the rack guide (A), and install it onto the gearbox lock washer (B). Align the lock washer tabs (C) with
housing. the slots (D). Install the rack end (E) while holding the
lock washer in place. Repeat this step for the other
side of the rack.
53. Remove the old sealant from the rack guide screw (B)
threaded section, and apply new sealant (Loctite 565)
to the middle of the threads of the rack guide screw,
then install the spring (C), the rack guide screw, and
the locknut (D).
56. Hold the flat surface sections of the steering rack with
NOTE: If more than 5 minutes have passed after one wrench, and tighten both rack ends with another
applying the sealant, remove the old sealant and wrench. Be careful not to damage the rack surface
residue, and reapply new sealant. with the wrench.
54. Adjust the rack guide screw (see page 17-14). After 57. Bend the lock washer (A) back against the flat spots
adjusting, check that the rack moves smoothly by on the rack end joint housing.
sliding it right and left.
(cont'd)
58. Apply multipurpose grease to the circumference of 63. Install the new boot bands (A) by aligning the tabs (B)
the rack end joint housing (A). with the holes (C) on the band.
(P/N 08798-9013)
59. Apply a light coat of silicone grease to the boot

grooves (B) on the rack end. 64. Close the ear portion (A) of the boot band (B) with
NOTE: Make sure not to get any silicone grease on the commercially available pincers, Oetiker 1098 or
terminal part of the connectors and switches, equivalent (C).
especially if you have silicone grease on your hands
or gloves.
60. Center the steering rack within its stroke.
61. Clean off any grease or contamination from the boot
installation surfaces (A) on the gearbox housing.
Install the boots (B) on the rack ends with the tie-rod
clips (C), and fit the boot end on the steering housing
properly.
65. Slide the rack right and left to be certain that the boots
are not deformed or twisted.
66. Install the tie-rod end to the rack end.
67. Install the steering gearbox (see page 17-53).
62. After installing the boots, wipe the grease off the
threaded section (D) of the rack end.
Special Tools Required 3. Rotate the steering gearbox so the pinion shaft (A)
• Engine Support Hanger, A and Reds AAR-T1256* points upward.
• Engine Hanger Balance Bar VSB02C000019*
. Subframe Adapter VSB02C000016*
. 2008 V6 Attachment Arm SIL02C000033*
*These special tools are available through the Honda
Tool and Equipment Program 888-424-6857

1. Install the pinion shaft grommet B on the valve
housing. 4. Continue moving the steering gearbox toward the
passenger's side until the steering gearbox is in
position. Make sure the power steering return line and
inlet line are routed above the steering gearbox.
5. Connect the return hose clip (A).
2. Slide the steering gearbox (A) between the front

subframe and body from the driver's side. Place the
steering gearbox in position on the front suspension
subframe.
Steering Gearbox Installation (cont'd)
6. With active control engine mount (ACM) system: 8. With active control engine mount (ACM) system:
Install the rear engine mount base bracket (A) onto Install the new rear engine mount bolt (A), then install
the front subframe. the rear engine mount stop (B).
NOTE: Use the new mounting bolts (B) NOTE: Use the new mounting nuts (C)
('08-10 models). ('08-10 models).
D D c
10 x 1.25 mm 10 x 1.25 mm *07 model:
54 N-m (5.5 kgf-m#40 Ibf-ft) 54 N-m (5.5 kgf-m, 40 Ibf-ft) 12 x 1.25 mm
Replace. Replace. 74 N-m (7.5 kgf-m, 54 ibf-ft)
'08-10 models:
12 x 1.25 mm
74 N-m (7.5 kgf-m, 54 Ibf-ft)
Replace.
A
10 x 1.25 mm
54 N-m
Replace.
B
'07 model:
10 x 1.25 mm 9. Without active control engine mount (ACM) system:
42 N-m Install the rear engine mount (A) onto the front
'08-10 models: subframe using new bolt (B).
10 x 1.25 mm
49 N-m NOTE: Use the new mounting bolts (C)
Replace. ('08-10 models).

Install the rear engine mount (C) onto the engine
mount base bracket using new bolts (D), then connect
the rear engine mount actuator connector (E).
10 x 1.25 mm
42 N-m (4.3 kgf-m, 31 Ibf-ft)
'08-10 models:
10 x 1.25 mm
49 N-m (5.0 kgf-m, 36 Ibf-ft)
Replace.
10. Loosely install the new steering gearbox bracket 12. Install the steering gearbox mounting cushion (A) and
mounting bolt (A). bracket (B), then loosely install the 10 mm flange bolts
on the passenger's side on the steering gearbox.
10 x 1.25 mm
39 N-m
11. Loosely install the two 12 mm flange bolts and nuts

on the driver's side of the steering gearbox.
13. Tighten the mounting bolts on both sides of the

steering gearbox to the specified torque alternately in
two or more steps.
14. Install the P/S heat shield (A).
6 x 1.0 mm
9.8 N-m (1.0 kgf-m, 7.2 Ibf-ft)
12 x 1.25 mm
87 N-m
15. Connect the return hose (A) to the steering gearbox, 17. Install the P/S line mounting brackets (A) on the front
and tighten the adjustable hose clamp (B). subframe.
B
3 N-m
C0.3 kgf-m, 2 Ibf-ft)
18. Raise the jack supporting the front subframe with the
front subframe adapter.
19. Align all reference marks (A) on the body and
subframe.
16. Install the inlet line, and tighten the flare nut (A) to the
specified torque.
20. Install the front subframe rear bracket (A) with 12 mm 23. Install the front splash shield (A).
flange bolts (B) and new 14 mm special bolts (C), and • '07 model: (see page 20-281)
tighten to specified torque. @ '08-10 models: (see page 20-281)
24. Connect the power steering pressure (PSP) switch

12 x 1.25 mm Replace.
117 N-m connector (A).
(11.9 kgf-m, 86.1 Ibf-ft)
21. Install the front subframe front bracket (A) with 12 mm

flange bolts (B) and new 14 mm special bolts (C), and
tighten to specified torque.
22. Remove the transmission jack supporting the

subframe.
26. On both sides, wipe off any grease contamination 33. With the rack in the straight ahead driving position,
from the tie-rod end ball joint tapered section and cut the wire (A) and slip the lower end of the steering
threads. Connect the tie-rod end ball joints (A) to the joint (B) onto the pinion shaft (C) taking care to align
knuckles. Install the nut (B), and tighten it to the the gap (D) within the angle.
specified torque.
34. Align the bolt hole (A) on the steering joint with the
groove (B) around the pinion shaft, then loosely
Replace. install the joint bolt (C). Be sure that the joint bolt is
securely in the groove in the pinion shaft. Pull on the
27. Install the new cotter pin (C), and bend it as shown.
steering joint to make sure that the steering joint is
28. Install the front wheel, then set the wheels in the fully seated. Tighten the steering joint bolt to the
straight ahead position. specified torque.
NOTE; Before installing the wheel, clean the mating
surfaces between the brake disc and inside of the
wheel.
29. Lower the vehicle.
30. Remove the engine support hanger, the engine
hanger balance bar, and the hanger adapters.
31. Install the engine cover.
32. Center the steering rack within its stroke in the
steering joint connection.
28 N-m
35. Install the steering joint cover (A). 40. After installation, check these items:
• Start the engine, allow it to idle, and turn the
steering wheel from lock to lock several times to
warm up the fluid. Check the gearbox for leaks (see
page 17-25).
• Check the steering wheel spoke angle.
• If steering spoke angles to the right and left are not
equal (steering wheel and rack are not centered),
correct the engagement of the joint/pinion shaft
splines.
• Set the steering column to the center tilt position,
and to the center telescopic position, then do the
front toe inspection (see page 18-5).
36. Install the driver's heater lower cover (see page

20-138).
37. Install the steering wheel (see page 17-8), and the
driver's airbag (see page 24-215).
the SRS indicator comes on for about 6 seconds,
and then goes off.
• Make sure the horn and turn signal switches work
properly.
• Make sure the steering wheel switches work
properly.
39. Fill the system with power steering fluid, and bleed
from the system (see page 17-26).
Suspension............................................................ 18-1
TPMS
Touring and Touring With PAX Tires Models . 18-47
Except Touring and Touring With PAX Tires
Models........................................................... 18-99
Front and Rear Suspension
Special Tools..................................................................... 18-2
Component Location Index..............................................18-3
Wheel Alignm ent...............................................................18-5
Wheel Bearing End Play Inspection.............................. 18-9
Wheel Runout Inspection................................................. 18-10
Wheel Bolt R eplacem ent........................... ....................18-11
Ball Joint Removal............................................................18-12
Ball Joint Boot Inspection/Replacement......................18-13
Front Suspension
Knuckle/Hub/Wheel Bearing Replacement..................18-14
Stabilizer Link Removal/Installation.............................. 18-20
Stabilizer Bar Replacement..............................................18-20
Lower Arm Removal/Installation...................................18-23
Damper/Spring Removal and Installation................... 18-25
Damper/Spring Disassembly, Inspection, and
Reassembly..................................................................... 18-27
Rear Suspension
Knuckle/Hub Bearing Unit Replacement.......................18-33
Upper Arm Removal/Installation...................................18-37
Lower Arm A Removal/Installation................................18-38
Lower Arm B Removal and Installation........................ 18-39
Trailing Arm Removal/Installation................................. 18-41
Damper Removal and Installation................................. 18-42
Spring/Bump Stop Removal/Installation...................... 18-44
Special Tools

© 071AF-S3VA000 Bali Joint Thread Protector, 14 mm 1
© 07746-0010600 Attachment, 72 x 75 mm 1
© 07749-0010000 Driver Handle, 15x135L 1
© 07965-SD90100 Support Base 1
© 07974-SA50700 Clip Guide, 41 mm 1
© 07AAF-SDAA100 Ball Joint Thread Protector, 12 mm 1
© 07GAF-SD4A100 Hub Dis/Assy Tool 1
© 07GAG-SD40700 Clip Guide, 44 mm 1
© 07ZAD-PNA0100 Oil Seal Driver Attachment, 96 mm 1
*
© ©
© ©
Front Suspension
Component Location Index (cont'd)
Rear Suspension
HUB BEARING UNIT

Hub Bearing Unit Replacement, page 18-34
Knuckle Replacement, page 18-35
Wheel Alignment
The suspension can be adjusted for front camber, front Tire Pressure (at cold):
toe, and rear toe. However, each of these adjustments *07 Canada models:
are related to each other. For example, when you adjust Except LX and EX models:
camber, the toe will change. Therefore, you must adjust Front/Rear: 240 kPa (2.4 kgf/cm2, 35 psi)
the front wheel alignment whenever you adjust camber LX and EX models:
or toe. Front: 230 kPa (2.3 kgf/cm2, 33 psi)
Rear: 240 kPa (2.4 kgf/cm2, 35 psi)
Pre-Alignment Checks USA models and *08-10 Canada models:
Except EX-L model:
For proper inspection and adjustment of the wheel
Front: 230 kPa (2.3 kgf/cm2, 33 psi)
alignment, do these checks:
Rear: 240 kPa (2.4 kgf/cm2, 35 psi)
1. Release the parking brake to avoid an incorrect EX-L model:
measurement. Front/Rear: 240 kPa (2.4 kgf/cm2, 35 psi)
2. Make sure the suspension is not modified. 5. Check the runout of the wheels and tires (see page
18-10).
3. Make sure the fuel tank is full, and that the spare tire,
the jack, and the tools are in place on the vehicle. 6. Check the suspension ball joints (Raise the vehicle
(see page 1-14), hold a tire with your hands, and move
4. Check the tire size and tire pressure.
it up and down and right and left to check for
Tire size: movement).
*07 USA models:
Except Touring model:
Front/Rear: 235/65R1S103T
Touring model:
Front/Rear: 235-710R460A 104T
*07 Canada models:
Front/Rear: 235/65R16103T
'08-09 USA models:
Except Touring and Touring with PAX tires models:
Front/Rear: 235/i5R 1i 103T
Touring model:
Front/Rear; 235/80R17102T
Touring with PAX tires model:
Front/Rear: 235-710R460A104T
*10 USA models and *08-10 Canada models:
Except Touring model:
Front/Rear: 235/65R16103T
Touring model: 7. Before doing alignment inspections, be sure to
Front/Rear: 235/60R17102T remove all extra weight from the vehicle, and no one
should be inside the vehicle (driver or passengers).
8. Lower the vehicle to the ground. Bounce the vehicle
up and down several times to stabilize the
suspension.
9. Check that the steering column is set at the center tilt
and telescopic position.
Wheel Alignment (cont'd)
Caster Inspection Front Camber Adjustment

Use commercially available computerized four wheel The front camber can be adjusted by exchanging one or
alignment equipment to measure wheel alignment both of the damper pinch bolts with a smaller diameter
(caster, camber, toe, and turning angle). Follow the adjusting bolt. The difference between the adjusting bolt
equipment manufacturer's instructions. diameter and the pinch bolt hole diameter allows for a
small range of adjustment
1. Check the caster angle.
NOTE: Refer to the Parts Catalog if you need to use an
Caster angle: 2 °3 2 ' ±1 °
adjusting bolt.
• If the measurement is within specifications,
measure the camber angle.
Damper pinch bolt Adjusting bolt
• If the measurement is not within specifications,
check for bent or damaged suspension
components.
Camber Inspection
Use commercially available computerized four wheel
alignment equipment to measure wheel alignment
(caster, camber, toe, and turning angle). Follow the
equipment manufacturer's instructions. 1. Raise the vehicle (see page 1-14).
1. Check the camber angle.
Camber angle:
3. Loosen the damper pinch bolts (A), and adjust the
Front: 0 ° 00' ± 3 0 '
camber angle by moving the bottom of the damper
(Maximum difference between the front left and
right side: 0 * 30' ) within the range of the damper pinch bolt free play.
Rear: - - 0 o3 0 f + 4 5 #
• If the measurement is within specification, measure

the toe-in.
• If the measurement for the front camber is outside
the specification, go to the front camber
adjustment.
• If the measurement for the rear camber is outside
the specification, check for bent or damaged
suspension components.
4. Tighten the damper pinch bolts holding the flange nut

to the specified torque.
5. Clean the mating surfaces of the brake disc and the
inside of the wheel, then install the front wheels.
6. Lower the vehicle to the ground, and bounce the front
of the vehicle up and down several times to stabilize
the suspension.
7. Measure the camber angle. Front Toe In sp ec tio n /A d ju s tm en t
• If the measurement is within specification, measure
Use commercially available computerized four wheel
the toe-in.
alignment equipment to measure wheel alignment
• If the measurement is not within specification, go to
(caster, camber, toe, and turning angle). Follow the
step 8.
equipment manufacturer's instructions.
8. Raise the vehicle (see page 1-14).
1. Check the tire pressure.
2. Set the steering column to the middle tilt and
10. Replace the damper pinch bolts with the adjusting telescopic positions. Center the steering wheel
bolts (A), and adjust the camber angle. spokes, and install a steering wheel holder tool.
NOTE: 3. Check the toe with the wheels pointed straight ahead.
• The camber angle can be adjusted up to ± 2 0 ' Front toe-in: 0 ± 2 mm (0±0.08 in)
(center of tolerance) by replacing one damper pinch
bolt with the adjusting bolt. • If adjustment is required, go to step 4.
• The camber angle can be adjusted up to ± 4 0 ' • If no adjustment is required, go to rear toe
by replacing both damper pinch bolts with the inspection/adjustment.
adjusting bolts. 4. Loosen the tie-rod locknuts (A) while holding the flat
surface sections (B) of the tie-rod end with a wrench.
Turn both tie-rods (C) until the front toe is within
specifications.
A
14 x 1.5 mm
44 N-m (4.5 kgf-m, 33 ibf-ft)
11. Tighten the adjusting bolts holding the flange nut to

the specified torque.
inside of the wheel, then install the front wheels.
13. Lower the vehicle to the ground, and bounce the front
of the vehicle up and down several times to stabilize
the suspension.
5. After adjusting, tighten the tie-rod locknuts to the
14. Measure the camber angle. If the camber angle is not
specified torque. Reposition the rack-end boot if it is
within specification, repeat step 8 through 13 to
twisted or displaced.
readjust the camber angle. If the camber
measurement is correct, measure the toe-in, and 6. Go to rear toe inspection/adjustment.
adjust it if necessary.
(cont'd)
Wheel Alignment (cont'd)
Rear Toe Inspection/Adjustm ent Turning Angle Inspection

Use commercially available computerized four wheel Use commercially available computerized four wheel
alignment equipment to measure wheel alignment alignment equipment to measure wheel alignment
(caster, camber, toe, and turning angle). Follow the (caster, camber, toe, and turning angle). Follow the
equipment manufacturer's instructions. equipment manufacturer's instructions.
1. Release the parking brake to avoid an incorrect 1. Turn the wheel right and left while applying the brake,
measurement. and measure the turning angle of both wheels.
2. Check the toe. Turning angle:
Inward wheel: 41 0 56 * + 2 °
Rear toe-in: 2 + 2 mm (0.08+0.08 in) Outward wheel (reference): 34 ° 3 2 '
• If adjustment is required, go to step 3.
• If no adjustment is required, go to turning angle
inspection.
3. Hold the adjusting bolt (A) on lower arm B, and loosen
the self-locking nut (C).
2. If the measurement is not within the specifications,

even up both sides of the tie-rod threaded section
length while adjusting the front toe. If it is correct, but
the turning angle is not within the specifications,
check for bent or damaged suspension components.
4. Replace the self-locking nut with a new one, and

lightly tighten it.
NOTE:
• Always use a new self-locking nut whenever it has
been tightened to the specified torque.
• Reassemble the adjusting bolt and the adjusting
cam plate with the eccentric facing up.
5. Adjust the rear toe by turning the adjusting bolt until
the toe is correct.
6. Tighten the self-locking nut to the specified torque
while holding the adjusting bolt.
Wheel Bearing End Play Inspection
1. Raise the vehicle (see page 1-14). 4. Attach the dial gauge. Place the dial gauge against the
hub flange.
2. Remove the wheels.
5. Measure the bearing end play while moving the brake
3. Install suitable flat washers (A) and the wheel nuts.
disc or the brake disc/drum inward and outward.
Tighten the nuts to the specified torque to hold the
brake disc or the brake disc/drum securely against the Wheel bearing end play:
hub. Front/Rear: 0—0.05 mm (0.0—0.002 in)
Front 6. If the bearing end play measurement is more than the

standard, replace the wheel bearing or the hub
bearing unit.
127 N-m (13.0 kgf-m, 94.0 ibf-ft)

Rear
127 N-m (13.0 kgf-m, 94.0 Ibf-ft)

Wheel Runout Inspection
1. Raise the vehicle (see page 1-14). 5. If the wheel runout is not within the specification,
check the wheel bearing end play (see page 18-9), and
2. Check for bent or deformed wheels.
make sure the mating surfaces on the brake disc or
3. Set up the dial gauge as shown, and measure the the brake disc/drum and the inside of the wheel are
axial runout by turning the wheel. clean.
Front and rear wheel axial runout: 6. If the bearing end play is within the specification but
Standard: the wheel runout is more than the service limit,
Steel wheel: 0—1.0 mm (0.0—0.04 in) replace the wheel.
Aluminum wheel: 0—0.7 mm (0.0—0.03 in)
Service limit: 2.0 mm (0.08 in)
4. Reset the dial gauge to the position shown, and

measure the radial runout.
Front and rear wheel radial runout:
Standard:
Steel wheel: 0 —1.0 mm (0.0—0.04 in)
Aluminum wheel: 0 —0.7 mm (0.0—0.03 in)
Service limit: 1.5 mm (O.Oi in)
Wheel Bolt Replacement
Special Tools Required 4. Insert the new wheel bolt (A) into the hub (B) while
Ball Joint Remover, 28 mm 07MAC-SL0A202 aligning the splined surfaces (C) on the hub hole with
the wheel bolt. Adjust the measurement (D) with the
INOTICE I washers (P/N 94101-14800 or equivalent) (E), then
• Do not use a hammer or impact tools (pneumatic or install a nut (P/N 90304-SHJ-A91 or equivalent) (F)
electric) to remove and install the wheel bolts. hand-tight.
• Be careful not to damage the threads of the wheel NOTE;
bolts. • Degrease the area around the wheel bolt and the
threaded section of the nut.
• Make sure the wheel bolt is installed vertically in
2. Remove the brake disc or the brake disc/drum: front relation to the hub disc surface.
(see page 19-19), rear (see page 19-32). • Do not install the nut and the washers that have
been used as tools on a vehicle.
3. Separate the wheel bolt (A) from the hub (B) using the
ball joint remover (C), and keep the jaw (D) of ball joint D
remover vertical against the wheel bolt (see page 13—18 mm
18-12). (0.51-0.63 in) F Q
NOTE;
• If the angle of the remover against the wheel bolt is
not square, readjust the ball joint remover by
turning the head (E) of the adjusting bolt (F).
• Before installing the new wheel bolt, clean the
mating surfaces on the bolt and the hub.
5. Tighten the nut until the wheel bolt is drawn fully into
the hub. Do not exceed the maximum torque limit.
Make sure there is no gap (G) between the bolt and
the hub.
Limited torque:
127 N-m (13.0 kgf-m, 94.0 Ibf-ft) max.
6. Install the brake disc or the brake disc/drum: front (see

page 19-19), rear (see page 19-32).
NOTE;
• If you cannot tighten the wheel nut to the specified
torque when installing the wheel, replace the front
hub or the rear hub bearing unit as an assembly.
• Before installing the wheel, clean the mating
surfaces of the brake disc and the inside of the
wheel.
Ball Joint Removal
Special Tools Required 3. Loosen the pressure bolt (A), and install the ball joint
• Ball Joint Thread Protector, 12 mm 07AAF-SDAA100 remover as shown. Insert the jaws carefully, making
• Ball Joint Thread Protector, 14 mm 071AF-S3VA000 sure not to damage the ball joint boot. Adjust the jaw
• Ball Joint Remover, 32 mm 07MAC-SL0A102 spacing by turning the adjusting bolt (B).
• Ball Joint Remover, 28 mm 07MAC-SLGA202
NOTE: Fasten the safety chain (C) securely to a
suspension arm or the subframe (D). Do not fasten it
I NOTICE l to a brake line or wire harness.
Always use a ball joint remover to disconnect a ball joint
Do not strike the housing or any other part of the ball
joint connection to disconnect it.
1. Install a hex nut (A) or the ball joint thread protector

onto the threads of the ball joint (B).
NOTE: Using a hex nut, make sure the nut is flush with
the ball joint pin end to prevent damage to the
threaded end of the ball joint pin.
O7AAF-SDAA10O or
071AF-S3VA000
4. After adjusting the adjusting bolt, make sure the head

of the adjusting bolt is in the position shown to allow
the jaw (E) to pivot.
5. With a wrench, tighten the pressure bolt until the ball
joint pin pops loose from the ball joint connecting
hole. If necessary, apply penetrating type lubricant to
loosen the ball joint pin.
2. Apply grease to the ball joint remover on the areas NOTE; Do not use pneumatic or electric tools on the
shown (A). This will ease the installation of the tool, pressure bolt
and prevent damage to the pressure bolt (B) threads.
6. Remove the ball joint remover, then remove the nut
or the ball joint thread protector from the end of the
ball joint pin, and pull the ball joint out of the ball joint
connecting hole. Inspect the ball joint boot, and
replace it if damaged.
07MAC-SL0A2O2
Ball Joint Boot Inspection/Replacement
Special Tools Required 7. Adjust the clip guide with the adjusting bolt (A) until
• Clip Guide, 44 mm 07GAG-SD40700 its base is just above the groove around (B) the
. Clip Guide, 41 mm 07974-SA50700 bottom of the boot. Then slide the clip (C) over the clip
guide and into position on the boot.
1. Check the ball joint boot for weakness, damage,
cracks, and grease leaks.
NOTE:
• If the ball joint boot is damaged with grease leaks,
replace the appropriate part as an assembly.
• If the ball joint boot is soft and cracked without
grease leaks, go to step 2. Replace the appropriate
ball joint boot.
2. Disconnect the appropriate ball joint connection, and
remove the component including the ball joint:
• The front lower arm (see page 18-23)
• The rear upper arm (see page 18-37)
3. Remove the boot clip and the boot.
4. Pack the interior and lip (A) of a new boot with grease.
Keep the grease off of the boot-to-housing mating 8. After installing a boot, wipe any grease off the
surfaces (B). exposed portion of the ball joint pin.
9. Install all of the removed parts.
5. Pack fresh grease into the base (C). Do not let dirt or
other foreign materials get into the boot.
6. Install the boot on the ball joint, then squeeze it gently
to force out any air, then wipe the grease off the
tapered portion of the ball joint pin (D).
Knuckle/Hub/Wheel Bearing Replacement
Exploded V ie w
Check for wear, damage, 26 x 1.5 mm

and rust. 329 N-m
{33.5 kgf-m, 242 Ibf-ft)
Replace.
"1
Apply a small amount of engine oil
to the seating surface of the nut.
Special Tools Required 5. Remove the wheel speed sensor (A) from the knuckle
• Ball Joint Thread Protector, 12 mm 07AAF-SDAA100 (B). Do not disconnect the wheel speed sensor
• Ball Joint Remover, 32 mm 07MAC-SL0A102 connector.
• Ball Joint Thread Protector, 14 mm 071AF-S3VA000
• Hub Dis/Assy Tool 07GAF-SD4A100 6x 1.0 m m
• Attachment, 72x75 mm 07746-0010600
• Driver Handle, 15 x 135L 07749-0010000
• Support Base 07965-SD90100
• Oil Seal Driver Attachment, 96 mm 07ZAD-PNA0100

2. Remove the wheel nuts (A) and the front wheel.
(13.0 kgfm,
94.0 Ibf-ft)
3. Remove the brake hose mounting bolt (A) from the
damper.
4. Remove the brake caliper bracket mounting bolts (B),

then remove the caliper assembly (C) from the
knuckle. To prevent damage to the caliper assembly
or the brake hose, use a short piece of wire to hang
the caliper assembly from the undercarriage. Do not
twist the brake hose excessively.
Knuckle/Hub/Wheel Bearing Replacement (cont'd)
7. Remove the front brake disc (see page 19-19). 11. Remove the lock pin (A) from the lower arm ball joint,
then remove the castle nut (B).
8. Check the front hub for damage and cracks.
NOTE: During installation, install the lock pin as
9. Remove the cotter pin (A) from the tie-rod end ball
shown after tightening the new castle nut.
joint, then loosen the nut (B).
NOTE: During installation, install the new cotter pin B
1 4x2.0 mm
after tightening the nut, and bend its end as shown.
07.1AF-S3VA000
12. Disconnect the lower ball joint from the knuckle using
the ball joint thread protector and the ball joint
remover (see page 18-12).
NOTE:
10. Disconnect the tie-rod end ball joint from the knuckle • Be careful not to damage the ball joint boot when
using the ball joint thread protector and the ball joint installing the remover.
remover (see page 18-12). • Do not force or hammer on the lower arm, or pry
between the lower arm and the knuckle. You could
damage the ball joint.
w
13. Remove the damper pinch bolts (A) and the flange 15. Separate the hub (A) from the knuckle (B) using the
nuts (B) from the damper. hub dis/assembly tool and a hydraulic press. Hold the
knuckle with the attachment (C) of the hydraulic press
NOTE: During installation, install new damper pinch
or equivalent tool. Be careful not to damage or
bolts and new flange nuts.
deform the splash guard (D). Hold onto the hub to
keep it from falling when pressed clear.
14. Remove the driveshaft outboard joint (C) from the

knuckle (D) by tapping the driveshaft end (E) with a 16. Remove the snap ring (A) and the splash guard (B)
soft face hammer while drawing the hub outward, from the knuckle (C).
then remove the knuckle.
NOTE:
• Do not pull the driveshaft end outward. The
driveshaft inboard joint may come apart.
• During installation, apply grease to the mating
surfaces of the wheel bearing and the driveshaft
outboard joint (see step 1 on page 16-18).
Knuckle/Hub/Wheel Bearing Replacement (cont'd)
17. Press the wheel bearing (A) out of the knuckle (B) 20. Press a new wheel bearing (A) into the knuckle (B)
using the attachment, the driver handle, and a press. using the old bearing (C), a steel plate (D), the oil seal
driver attachment, the support base, and a press.
Press
NOTE:
• Install the wheel bearing with the wheel speed
sensor magnetic encoder (black color), toward the
inside on the knuckle.
• Remove any oil, grease, dust, metal debris, and
other foreign material from the magnetic encoder
surface.
• Keep any magnetic tools away from the magnetic
encoder surface.
• Be careful not to damage the magnetic encoder
surface when you insert the wheel bearing.
METAL COLOR
Replace.
18. Press the wheel bearing inner race (A) from the hub
(B) using the hub dis/assembly tool, a commercially
available bearing separator (C), and a press.
Press
19. Wash the knuckle and the hub thoroughly in high

flash point solvent before reassembly.
I
21. install the new snap ring (A) securely in the knuckle 24. Install the knuckle in the reverse order of removal, and
(B). note these items:
• First install all of the components, and lightly
tighten the bolts and the nuts, then raise the
suspension to load it with the vehicle's weight
before fully tightening to the specified torque.
• Be careful not to damage the ball joint boot when
connecting the knuckle.
• Before connecting the lower arm ball joint to the
knuckle, degrease the threaded section and the
tapered portion of the ball joint pin, the ball joint
connecting hole, the threaded section and the
mating surfaces of the castle nut.
• Torque the castle nut to the lower torque
specification, then tighten it only far enough to
align the slot with the ball joint pin hole. Do not
align the castle nut by loosening it.
• Before installing the brake disc, clean the mating
22. Install the splash guard (C), and tighten the screws (D) surfaces of the front hub and the inside of the brake
to the specified torque. disc.
9 Use a new spindle nut on reassembly.
23. Install the hub (A) onto the knuckle (B) using the
attachment, the driver handle, the support base, and a • Before installing the spindle nut, apply a small
hydraulic press. Be careful not to damage the splash amount of engine oil to the seating surface of the
guard (C). nut. After tightening, use a drift to stake the spindle
nut shoulder against the driveshaft.
Press • Before installing the wheel, clean the mating
wheel.
(see page 18-5).
Stabilizer Link Removal/Installation Stabilizer Bar Replacement
1. Raise the vehicle (see page 1-14). Special Tools Required

2. Remove the front wheel.
• Engine Support Hanger, A and Reds AAR-T1256*
3. Remove the flange nuts (A) while holding the • Engine Hanger Balance Bar VSB02C000019*
respective joint pin (B) with a hex wrench (C). Remove . 2008 V6 Attachment Arm SIL02C000033*
the stabilizer link (D). • Subframe Adapter VSB02C000016*
• Available through the Honda Tool and Equipment
Program 888-424-6857
1. Release the tilt/telescopic lock lever.

4. Disconnect the stabilizer links from the stabilizer bar
on the right and left sides (see page 18-20).
5. Remove the intake manifold cover.
6. '08-10 models J35A7 engine: Remove the harness
holder and the connectors from the front cylinder
head (see step 3 on page 6-144).
78 N-m 7. Remove the connector bracket from the front cylinder
(8.0 kgf-m,
58 Ibf-ft) head:
4. Install the stabilizer link (A) on the stabilizer bar (B) • J35A6 engine (see step 14 on page 6-31)
and the damper (C) with the joint pins (D) set at the • '07 model J35A7 engine (see step 14 on page 6-89)
center of their range of movement • '08-10 models J35A7 engine (see step 14 on page
6-152)
8. Remove the harness bracket from the rear cylinder
head:
• J35A6 engine (see step 15 on page 6-31)
• '07 model J35A7 engine (see step 15 on page 6-89)
6-152)
5. Tighten the flange nuts to the specified torque while

holding the respective joint pin with a hex wrench.
inside of the wheel then install the front wheel.
9. Install the engine hanger adapters (VSB02C000022) 12. Remove the front splash shield (A).
on the end of the engine support beams, then install • '07 model (see page 20-281)
the engine support hanger (AAR-T1256) with the • '08-10 models (see page 20-281)
adapters to the vehicle.
J35A6, '07 model J35A7 engines
13. Make reference marks (A) on the body across the

marks (B) on the edge of the front subframe (C).
10. J35A6, '07 model J35A7 engines: Lift and support the
engine with the engine support hanger and the
engine hanger balancer bar (VSB02C000019). Attach
the front arm (A) to the front cylinder head with
several spacers (B) and the 10x 1.25 mm bolt (C).
Attach the rear arm (D) to the rear cylinder head with
the 8 x 1.25 mm bolt (E).
11. '08-10 models J35A7 engine: Lift and support the
engine with the engine support hanger and the
engine hanger balance bar. Attach the front arm to the
front cylinder head with several spacers and the
10x 1.25 mm bolt. Attach the 2008 V6 attachment arm
(SIL02C000033) (F) to the rear cylinder head with a
8 x 1.25 mm bolt (G), then attach the rear arm to the
2008 V6 attachment arm.
(cont'd)
Stabilizer Bar Replacement (cont'd)
14. Attach the subframe adapter to the front subframe (A) 17. Support the front subframe securely by raising the
by hanging the belt (B) over the front of the subframe, subframe adapter, then remove the two 12 mm flange
then secure the belt with its stop (C). bolts (A).
15. Raise the jack and line up the slots in the subframe
adapter arms with the bolt holes on the corner of the 117 N-m Replace.
jack base, then attach them with four bolts. (11.9 kgf-m, 86.1 Ibf-ft)
16. Remove the 12 mm flange bolts (A), then loosen the 18. Loosen the two 14 mm special bolts (B) so they are
front subframe front bracket mounting bolts (B) on about 14 mm (9/16 in) from the mounting surface.
the right and left of the vehicle so they are about 14
mm (9/16 in) from the mounting surface. 19. Lower the jack supporting the front subframe with the
subframe adapter slowly until the front subframe has
dropped about 14 mm (9/16 in).
NOTE: Do not try to lower the front subframe beyond
the loosened 14 mm bolts clearance.
20. Remove the flange bolts (A) and the bushing holders
(B), then remove the bushings (C).
21. Move the stabilizer bar toward the driver's side, and Special Tools Required
remove the stabilizer bar. • Ball Joint Remover, 32 mm 07MAC-SL0A102
• Ball Joint Thread Protector, 14 mm 071AF-S3VA000
22. Install the stabilizer bar in the reverse order of
removal, and note these items: 1. Raise the vehicle (see page 1-14).
• Note the right and left direction of the stabilizer bar.
• Do not set the bushings (A) on the bent or curved
part of the stabilizer bar. 3. Remove the flange nut (A) while holding the
• Note the direction of installation for the bushings. respective joint pin (B) with a hex wrench (C), then
• Raise the front subframe up with the jack with front disconnect the stabilizer links from the damper (D).
subframe adapter until it contacts the body frame,
and align all reference marks on body and
subframe, then tighten the mounting bolts to the
specified torque.
• Refer to stabilizer link removal/installation to
connect the stabilizer bar to the links (see page
18-20).
wheel.
4. Turn the stabilizer bar backward to gain easier access

to the front side of the lower arm mounting bolt.

(see page 18-5).
Lower Arm Removal/Installation (cont'd)
5. Remove the lock pin (A) from the lower arm ball joint, 7. Remove the lower arm mounting bolts (A), then
then remove the castle nut (B). remove the lower arm (B).
NOTE: During installation, install the lock pin as NOTE: Use new lower arm mounting bolts during
shown after tightening the new castle nut. reassembly.
B B
14x2.0 mm
5 9 -6 9 N-m (6.0-7 .0 kgf-m, 4 3 -5 1 Ibf-ft) A
A I
14 x 1.5 mm eg
88 N-m
(9.0 kgf-m, 65 ibf-ft)
Replace.
6. Disconnect the lower arm ball joint from the knuckle
using the ball joint thread protector, and the ball joint 8. Install the lower arm in the reverse order of removal,
remover (see page 18-12). and note these items:
NOTE: tighten the bolts and the nuts, then raise the
• Be careful not to damage the ball joint boot when suspension to load it with the vehicle's weight
installing the remover. before fully tightening to the specified torque.
• Do not force or hammer on the lower arm, or pry • Be careful not to damage the ball joint boot when
between the lower arm and the knuckle. You could connecting the lower arm to the knuckle.
damage the ball joint. • Before connecting the lower arm ball joint to the
• Refer to stabilizer link removal/installation to
connect the damper to the links (see page 18-20).
surfaces on the brake disc and the inside of the
wheel.
(see page 18-5).
Damper/Spring Removal and Installation
NOTE; The '07 model, is shown, other models are 6. Remove the service caps (A), and remove the damper
similar. by removing the three flange nuts (B).
Removal
B
10 x 1.25 mm
3. Disconnect the stabilizer link (A) from the damper (B)
(see page 18-20).
4. Remove the wheel speed sensor harness (C) and the

brake hose bracket (D) from the damper. Do not
disconnect the wheel speed sensor connector.
NOTE:
5. Remove the flange nuts (A) and the damper pinch © The left and right damper springs are different.
bolts (B) from the damper. Mark the springs L and R before you continue.
NOTE: Do not allow the knuckle to rotate too far out • Be careful not to damage the body.
ward. This may allow the driveshaft inboard joint to
come apart.
Damper/Spring Removal and Installation (cont'd)
installation 3. Install the wheel speed sensor harness (A) and the
brake hose bracket (B) to the damper (C).
1. Install the damper/spring (A) onto the frame. Note the
direction of the damper rubber as shown, then loosely 12x1.25 mm
install the new three flange nuts (B).
NOTE: Be careful not to damage the body.
4. Loosely install the stabilizer link (D) to the damper.

5. Tighten the stabilizer link nuts to the specified torque,
while holding the joint pin with the hex wrench (see
page 18-20).
6. Raise the front suspension with a floor jack to load the
suspension with the vehicle's weight.
7. Tighten the flange nuts on top of the damper to the
specified torque.
8. Tighten the damper pinch bolts holding the flange nut
to the specified torque.
2. Loosely install the new damper pinch bolts (A) and
the new flange nuts (B) to the damper (C). 9. Install the service caps.
C 10. Clean the mating surfaces of the brake disc and the
inside of the wheel, then install the front wheel.
(see page 18-5).
Damper/Spring Disassembly, Inspection, and Reassembly
Exploded V ie w - '07 M odel
Refer to the parts catalog to Check for oil leaks, gas leaks,
make sure the damper spring and smooth operation,
and damper unit match whenever
replacing either component
(cont'd)
Damper/Spring Disassembly, Inspection, and Reassembly (cont'd)
NOTE: When compressing the damper spring, use a Inspection - '07 M odel
commercially available strut spring compressor (Branick
MST-580A or Model 7200 or equivalent). According to 1. Reassemble the damper mounting rubber and the
the manufacturer's instructions. self-locking nut.
2. Compress the damper assembly by hand, and check
Disassembly - *07 Model
for smooth operation through a full stroke, both
1. Compress the damper spring, then remove the compression and extension. The damper should
self-locking nut (A) while holding the damper rod with extend smoothly and constantly when compression is
a hex wrench (B). Do not compress the spring more released. If it does not, the gas is leaking and the
than necessary to remove the nut. damper should be replaced.
3. Check for oil leaks, abnormal noises, or binding

during these tests.
2. Release the pressure from the strut spring
compressor, then disassemble the damper as shown
in the Exploded View.
Reassembly - ’§7 Model 3. Align an angle of the damper bracket (A) and the
stamp (B) on the upper spring seat with the spring
1. Align the stamp of the upper spring seat (A) and the mounting rubber as shown.
spring mounting rubber (B) as shown below, and then
set it on the damper spring. Left Right
FRONT FRONT
t t
4. Position the angle of the stamp (C) on the damper

2, Install all the parts except the self-locking nut onto the mounting rubber as shown.
damper unit by referring to the Exploded View. Align 5. Compress the damper spring.
the bottom of the damper spring (A) and the stepped
part (B) of the lower spring seat on the damper unit. 6. Install the new self-locking nut (A).
A
12x1.25 mm
7. Hold the damper rod using a hex wrench (B), and

tighten the self-locking nut to the specified torque.
Exploded V ie w - '08-10 M o d els

M
NOTE: When compressing the damper spring, use a Inspection - '08-10 M odels
commercially available strut spring compressor (Branick
MST-580A or Model 7200, or equivalent) according to 1. Reassemble the damper mounting rubber and the
the manufacturer's instructions. self-locking nut.
Disassembly - *08-10 Models 2. Compress the damper assembly by hand, and check
1. Compress the damper spring, then remove the compression and extension. The damper should
self-locking nut (A) while holding the damper rod with extend smoothly and constantly when compression is
a hex wrench (B). Do not compress the spring more released. If it does not, the gas is leaking and the
than necessary to remove the nut. damper should be replaced.
A i

2. Release the pressure from the strut spring during these tests.
compressor, then disassemble the damper as shown
in the Exploded View.
Reassembly - ’08-10 Models 4. Align the raised portion (A) of the lower spring
mounting rubber and the stepped part (B) of the lower
1. Install the damper spring (A) on the dust cover (B), spring seat on the damper unit.
then align the upper end (C) of the damper spring with
the cushion stop (D) of the dust cover.
5. Align the damper bracket (A) and the damper

mounting rubber (B) so the stamp (C) points toward
the outside.
Left Right
2. Compress the damper spring.
FRONT FRONT
3. Install all parts, except the self-locking nut, onto the
damper (A) by referring to the Exploded View.
6. Align the angle of the stud bolt (D) on the damper

mounting rubber with the damper bracket as shown.
7. Install the new self-locking nut (A).
A
12x1.25 mm
8. Hold the damper rod using a hex wrench (B), tighten

the self-locking nut to the specified torque.
Rear Suspension
Knuckle/Hub Bearing Unit Replacement
Exploded V ie w
12 k 1.25 mm
98.1 N-m
(10.0 kgf-m, 72.3 Ibf-ft)
12x1.25 mm
98.1 N-m
(10.0 kgf-m, 72.3 Ibf-ft)
KNUCKLE
Check for deformation and damage.
WASHERS
Check for deformation and damage.
PARKING BRAKE SHOE

ASSEMBLY
6 x 1.0 mm
9.8 N-m
(1.0 kgf-m,
7.2 Ibf-ft)
BACKING PLATE
Check for corrosion,
deformation, and damage.
Replace if rusted.
HUB BEARING UNIT
(MAGNETIC ENCODER)
Check for faulty
movement and wear.
REAR BRAKE DISC/DRUM

Check for wear, damage, and rust.
Knuckle/Hub Bearing Unit Replacement (cont'd)
Special Tools Required 4. Remove the two washers (A).

• Ball Joint Thread Protector, 12 mm 07AAF-SDAA100
NOTE: During installation, make sure the washers are
installed between the brake caliper bracket and the
Hub Bearing Unit Replacement knuckle.

2. Remove the wheel nuts (A) and the rear wheel.
5. Release the parking brake lever fully, and remove the

rear brake disc/drum (see page 19-32).
127 N-m 6. Remove the hub bearing unit (A) and the O-ring (B).
(13.0 kgfm,
94.0 ibf-ft)
3. Remove the brake caliper bracket mounting bolts (A),

then remove the caliper assembly (B) from the
knuckle. To prevent damage to the caliper assembly
or the brake hose, use a short piece of wire to hang
the caliper from the undercarriage. Do not twist the
brake hose excessively.
7. Check the hub bearing unit for damage and cracks.

8. Install the hub bearing unit in the reverse order of
removal, and note these items:
• Use a new O-ring on reassembly.
• Before installing the brake disc/drum, clean the
mating surfaces of the hub bearing unit and the
brake disc/drum.
surfaces of the brake disc/drum and the inside of
the wheel.
(see page 18-5).
1
Knuckle Replacement 5. Remove the lock pin (A) from the upper arm ball joint,
then remove the castle nut (B).
1. Remove the hub bearing unit
2. Remove the brake hose bracket mounting bolts (A) shown after tightening the new castle nut.
from the knuckle.
3. Remove the flange nuts (B), then remove the backing

plate (C) with the parking brake shoe assembly.
6. Disconnect the upper arm ball joint from the knuckle
4. Remove the wheel speed sensor (A) and the sensor using the ball joint thread protector and the ball joint
harness (B) from the knuckle (C). Do not disconnect remover (see page 18-12).
the wheel speed sensor connector.
7. Remove the wheel speed sensor harness mounting
6x1.0 mm bolt (B) from lower arm A.
9.8 N-m
9.8 N-m B
{1.0 kgf-m, 7.2 ibf-ft)
Knuckle/Hub Bearing Unit Replacement (cont'd)
8. Remove the lower arm A mounting bolt (A). 11. Place a floor jack under lower arm B,and remove the
self-locking nut (A), the washer (C), and the flange bolt
NOTE: Use the new mounting bolt during
(D).
reassembly.
NOTE: Use the new flange bolt and a new self-locking
nut during reassembly.
9. Remove and discard the washer (B) and the lower arm
mounting self-locking nut (C).
NOTE: Use a new self-locking nut and a new washer 12. Install the knuckle in the reverse order of removal, and
during reassembly. note these items:
10. Remove the self-locking nuts (A), and separate the • First install all of the components, and lightly
knuckle from the trailing arm (B). tighten the bolts and the nuts, then raise the
NOTE: Use new self-locking nuts during reassembly. before fully tightening to the specified torque.
A
12 x 1.25 mm connecting the knuckle.
118 N-m (12.0 kgf-m, 86.8 Ibf-ft) • Use a new washer, when reinstalling lower arm A.
• Before connecting the upper arm ball joint to the
® Before installing the wheel, clean the mating
surfaces on the brake disc/drum and the inside of
the wheel.
(see page 18-5).
Upper Arm Removal/Installation
Special Tools Requi red 4. Remove the lock pin (A) from the upper arm ball joint,
• Bali Joint Thread Protector, 12 mm 07AAF-SDAA100 then remove the castle nut (B).
1. Raise the vehicle (see page 1-14). shown after tightening the new castle nut.
2. Remove the rear wheel. 07AAF-SDAA1O0

3. Position a floor jack at the connecting point of lower
arm B and the knuckle (A). Raise the floor jack until the
suspension begins to compress.
5. Disconnect the upper arm ball joint from the knuckle

using the ball joint thread protector and the ball joint
remover (see page 18-12).
6. Remove the upper arm bolt (A). Remove the upper
arm (B) from the vehicle.
Upper Arm Removal/Installation Lower Arm A Removal/Installation
(cont'd)
8. Lightly tighten the new upper arm bolt and the new 1. Raise the vehicle (see page 1-14).
castle nut. 2. Remove the rear wheel.
9. Position a floor jack at the connecting point of lower 3. Remove the wheel speed sensor harness mounting
arm B and the knuckle (A). bolt (B) from lower arm A.
4. Remove the lower arm A mounting bolt (B).

10. Raise the rear suspension with the floor jack until the
vehicle just lifts off the safety stands.
11. Tighten the upper arm bolt and nut to the specified
torque, and note these items:
connecting the upper arm to the knuckle.
• Before connecting the upper arm ball joint to the
align the castle nut by loosening it
the wheel. 5. Remove and discard the washer (C) and the lower arm
mounting self-locking nut (D).
(see page 18-5). 6. Remove lower arm A from the vehicle.
7. Install lower arm A and the new washer. Removal
8. Lightly tighten the new lower arm A mounting bolt 1. Raise the vehicle (see page 1-14).
and the new self-locking nut.
2. Remove the rear wheel.
arm B and the knuckle (A). 3. Position a floor jack at the connecting point of lower
arm B and the knuckle. Raise the floor jack until the
suspension begins to compress.
10. Raise the rear suspension with the floor jack until the
11. Tighten the lower arm A mounting bolt and the 4. Remove the flange bolt (A) that connects lower arm B
self-locking nut to the specified torque. and the knuckle.
12. Before installing the wheel, clean the mating surfaces 5. Lower the floor jack gradually.
on the brake disc/drum and the inside of the wheel.
6. Remove the spring (A), the upper spring seat (B) and
13. Check the wheel alignment, and adjust it if necessary the lower spring seat (C).
(see page 18-5).
D F
Replace. E 14 x 1.5 mm
7. Mark the cam positions of the adjusting bolt (D) and

the adjusting cam plate (E), then remove the
self-locking nut (F), the adjusting cam plate, and the
adjusting bolt.
Lower Arm B Removal and Installation (cont'd)
Installation 3. Position a floor jack at the connecting point of lower

arm B and the knuckle.
1. Position lower arm B, install the adjusting bolt (A) and
the adjusting cam plate (C), and loosely install the
new self-locking nut (D).
D
A 14 x 1.5 mm
Replace. 98.1 N-m
14 x 1.5 mm
93 N-m (9.5 kgf-m, 69 Ibf-ft)
Replace.
4. Slowly raise the jack until you can align the bolt holes
with lower arm B and the knuckle, then loosely install
the new flange bolt (A).
5. Raise the rear suspension with a floor jack until the
6. Tighten the flange bolt and the self-locking nut while
holding the adjusting bolt to the specified torque.
NOTE: Align the cam positions of the adjusting bolt
and the adjusting cam plate with the marked positions
when tightening.
7. Clean the mating surfaces of the brake disc/drum
inside of the wheel, then install the rear wheel.
2. Install the spring (E) and the upper spring seat (F).
(see page 18-5).
Align the bottom of the spring and the lower spring
seat (G) with the lower arm B as shown.
1. Raise the vehicle (see page 1-14). 7. Remove the self-locking nuts (A) and the trailing arm
mounting bolts (B) from the trailing arm, then remove
the trailing arm.
3. Remove the parking brake shoes (see page 19-38),
and the parking brake cable (see page 19-48) from the NOTE: Use new self-locking nuts and new trailing arm
backing plate. mounting bolts during reassembly.
4. Remove the parking brake cable (A) from the trailing

arm (B).
Replace.
8. Install the trailing arm in the reverse order of removal,
and note these items:
tighten the bolts and the nuts, then raise the
5. Remove the brake hose bracket (C) from the trailing
arm.
before fully tightening to the specified torque.
6. Position a floor jack at the connecting point of the • Do the parking brake adjustment (see page 19-10).
lower arm and the knuckle. • Check the brake hose for interference and twisting.
the wheel.
(see page 18-5).
Damper Removal and Installation
Removal Inspection
1. Raise the vehicle (see page 1-14). 1. Compress the damper assembly by hand, and check
compression and extension. The damper should
3. Position a floor jack at the connecting point of the move smoothly and constantly when compression is
lower arm and the knuckle (A). Raise the floor jack released. If it does not, the gas is leaking and the
until the suspension begins to compress. damper should be replaced.
B .

during these tests.
4. Remove the flange bolt (B) and the flange nut (C) from
the body.
5. Remove the self-locking nut (D) from the knuckle.
6. Compress the damper (E) by hand, and remove it
from the vehicle.
1. Lower the rear suspension. Compress the damper (A)
by hand, and move it into position. Loosely install the
flange nut (B), the flange bolt (C), and the new
self-locking nut (D).
C
10 x 1.25 mm
44 N-m

3. Tighten the flange bolt, the flange nut, and the
self-locking nut on the bottom of the damper to the
specified torque.
4. Clean the mating surfaces of the brake disc/drum and
the inside of the wheel, then install the rear wheel.
(see page 18-5).
Spring/Bump Stop Removal/Installation
Exploded V ie w
BUMPSTOP
Check for weakness, oil contamination,
and damage.
10 x 1.25 mm
44 N-m
UPPER SPRING SEAT

Check for deterioration
and damage.
LOWER SPRING SEAT

Check for deterioration
and damage.
Removal Installation
1. Raise the vehicle (see page 1-14). 1. Install the bump stop (A), and tighten the flange bolt
(C) to the specified torque.
4. Remove the flange bolt (A) that connects lower arm B

and the knuckle.
5. Lower the floor jack gradually.
6. Remove the spring (A), the upper spring seat (B), and
the lower spring seat (C).
2. Install the upper spring seat (D) and the spring (E).
Align the bottom of the spring and the lower spring
seat (F) with the lower arm B as shown.
7. Remove the flange bolt (D) that connects to the body,

and remove the bump stop (E).
Spring/Bump Stop Removal/Installation (cont'd)

14 x 1.5 mm
93 N-m (9.5 kgf-m, 69 Ibf-ft)
Replace.
4. Slowly raise the jack until you can align the bolt holes
with lower arm B and the knuckle and install the new
flange bolt (A).
6. Tighten the flange bolt to the specified torque.
7. Clean the mating surfaces of the brake disc/drum and
the inside of the wheel, then install the rear wheel.
(see page 18-5).
TPMS - Touring and Touring With PAX Tires Models
TPMS
Component Location Index..................... ........................ 18-48
General Troubleshooting Inform ation..........................18-49
Memorizing the Tire Pressure Sensor ID .......................18-53
DTCTroubleshooting In d e x ................. ...................... 18-55
Symptom Troubleshooting Index . ............................... 18-56
System D escription...................— ................................18-57
Circuit D iagram .......... ........................ .............................. 18-64
DTC Troubleshooting...................................... , ............. 18-67
Symptom Troubleshooting.................................... .........18-83
TPMS Control Unit Replacement.............................— 18-89
Initiator Replacement............................................. . 18-90
Tire Pressure Sensor R eplacem ent............ ..................18-91
Resetting the PAX System W arning....... .......................18-97
TPMS CONTROL UNIT

Replacement, page 18-89
DATA LINK
CONNECTOR (DLC) RIGHT-REAR INITIATOR
PASSENGER'S UNDER-DASH
FUSE/RELAY BOX
UNDER-HOOD
SUBFUSE BOX
UNDER-HOOD
FUSE/RELAY BOX
LEFT-REAR INITIATOR
TIRE PRESSURE SENSOR

Replacement (’07 model), page 18-91
Replacement ('08-10 models), page 18-94
RIGHT-FRONT INITIATOR DRIVER'S UNDER-DASH

Replacement, page 18-90 FUSE/RELAY BOX

Replacement ('07 model), page 18-91
Replacement ('07 model), page 18-91
General Troubleshooting Information
B
System Indicator The Low Tire Pressure Indicator ('08-10
The system has seven indicators
Models)
• The low tire pressure indicator (A) • If the system detects low tire pressure in any of the
• The message indicator (B) four tires, the low tire pressure indicator and the
• The TPMS indicator (C) appropriate tire indicator(s) come on, as well as the
• The right-front (RF) tire indicator (D) message indicator.
• If the TPMS control unit detects a problem in the
• The left-front (LF) tire indicator (E)
system during an indication of low tire pressure, it will
• The right-rear (RR) tire indicator (F)
turn off the tire indicator(s), store the DTC(s), and turn
• The left-rear (LR) tire indicator (G) on the TPMS indicator and the low tire pressure
indicator after blinking.
The TPMS Indicator ('07 M odel}

• If a problem in the system is detected, the TPMS
indicator comes on, as well as the message indicator.
• If low tire pressure and a problem in the system are
detected, the TPMS indicator comes on, as well as the
message indicator.
If the system is OK, the low tire pressure indicator
should come on when you turn the ignition switch to ON
(II), and then goes off 2 seconds later. If it doesn't, there
is a problem with the system.
The TPMS Indicator {*08-10 Models)

• If a problem in the system is detected, the TPMS
indicator comes on, as well as the message indicator
and the low tire pressure indicator comes on after
blinking for about 75 seconds.
detected, the TPMS indicator comes on, as well as the
message indicator, and the low tire pressure indicator
comes on after blinking for about 75 seconds.
The Low Tire Pressure Indicator ('07 Model) If the system is OK, the low tire pressure indicator
should come on when you turn the ignition switch to ON
• If the system detects low tire pressure in any of the (II), and then goes off 2 seconds later. If it doesn't, there
four tires, the low tire pressure indicator and the is a problem with the system.
appropriate tire indicator(s) come on, as well as the
message indicator.
• If the TPMS control unit detects a problem in the
system during an indication of low tire pressure, it will
turn off the low tire pressure indicator and tire
indicator(s), store the DTC(s), and turn on the TPMS
indicator.
(cont'd)
General Troubleshooting Information (cont'd)
DTC 11,13,15,17 Problems That Are Not System Faults

If the system detects low tire pressure in any of the four • Tire Sealant
tires, the low tire pressure indicator and the appropriate Fluid sealant used to repair a punctured tire can
tire indicator(s) with the message indicator come on, damage the tire pressure sensor mounted on each
and the TPMS control unit sets one or more of these wheel. It can prevent the system from detecting the
codes: DTC 11,13,15,17. When the tire pressure returns correct tire pressure, which sets a DTC 11,13,15, or 17
to normal, and TPMS control unit receives the normal even though the system is normal.
pressure signal from the tire pressure sensor, the TPMS • Cold Weather
control unit turns off the indicators.
When the weather is extremely cold, about —40 °F
Tire Pressure Changing by Temperature (—40 °C) or colder, the output of the lithium battery in
each tire pressure sensor may drop far enough that
Tire pressures increase slightly as the temperature in the the TPMS control unit sets a DTC for low battery
tires rises during driving. Pressures can also increase or voltage (31,33,35, or 37) even though the system is
decrease slightly with changes in outside air normal.
temperature. A temperature change of about 18 °F • Non-TPMS type Wheels (Including Spare Tire)
(10 °C) changes tire pressure by about 10 kPa Vehicles equipped with TPMS (including PAX system)
(0.1 kgf/cm2, 1.5 psi). If the temperature drops, tire must use wheels made for the system. Every TPMS
pressure could decrease just enough to turn on the low type wheel is marked with the letters PAX System; do
tire pressure indicator and tire indicator(s), but later, the not use any other type of wheel (see page 18-61).
tire temperature could increase enough to turn the
indicator off. To resolve a complaint of such intermittent When a flat tire is replaced with the spare tire, the TPMS
indications, confirm and clear the stored DTC(s) and indicator comes on (DTC 32,34,36 or 38) because the
check the tire pressures. Then explain to the customer system is no longer receiving the signal from the flat
how temperature changes can affect the system. tire's transmitter. This is not a problem with the spare
tire.
-2 0 0 20 40 60 °C
-4 32 68 104 140 *F
[ill
How a Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) is Set How to Troubleshoot TPMS DTCs ('07 Model)
('07 Model) DTC troubleshooting procedures assume the cause of
• When the system detects a problem, the TPMS control the problem is still present and the TPMS indicator is still
unit sets a code, but shifts to fail-safe mode, and does on. Do not use a troubleshooting procedure unless the
not alert the driver to low tire pressures. system has set the DTC listed for it.
• If the TPMS control unit loses power, or fails, the NOTE: For DTCs 11,13,15, and 17 (tire low pressure), the
TPMS indicator comes on, but no DTCs are set. TPMS indicator comes on only if the DTCs are caused by
• The memory can hold all the DTCs that could possibly a system problem rather than low tire pressure.
be set. However, when the same DTC is detected more
1. Ask the customer to describe the conditions when the
than once, the most recent one overwrites the
previous one, so only the latest DTC of each type is indicator came on, and try to reproduce the same
conditions for troubleshooting. Find out if the
stored.
customer checked and/or adjusted tire pressures
• DTCs are indicated in ascending order, not in the order
since the indicator came on.
they occurred.
• Set DTCs are stored in the EEPROM (nonvolatile 2. If an indicator does not come on during the test-drive,
memory), and cannot be cleared by disconnecting the check for loose terminals, poor contact due to
battery. To clear a DTC, connect the HDS (Honda damaged terminals, etc. before you start
Diagnostic System) to the data link connector (DLC), troubleshooting.
and follow the screen prompts.
3. After troubleshooting, repair and clear the DTCs, and
test-drive the vehicle. Make sure no indicators come
How a Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) is Set
on.
('08-10 Models)
4. Check for DTCs from other control units that are
• When the system detects a problem, the TPMS control connected via the F-CAN. If there are DTCs that are
unit sets a code, but shifts to fail-safe mode, and does related to the F-CAN, the most likely cause was that
not alert the driver to low tire pressures. the ignition switch was turned to ON (II) with the
• If the TPMS control unit loses power, or fails, the TPMS control unit connector disconnected. Clear the
TPMS indicator and the low tire pressure indicator DTCs. Check for PGM-FI and TPMS codes, and
(starts blinking) comes on, but no DTCs are set. troubleshoot those first.
• The memory can hold all the DTCs that could possibly
previous one, so only the latest DTC of each type is
stored.
they occurred.
• Set DTCs are stored in the EEPROM (nonvolatile
memory), and cannot be cleared by disconnecting the
battery. To clear a DTC, connect the HDS (Honda
Diagnostic System) to the data link connector (DLC),
(cont'd)
How to Troubleshoot TPMS DTCs ('08-10 How to Retrieve DTCs

Models) 1. With the ignition switch in LOCK (0), connect the HDS
DTC troubleshooting procedures assume the cause of (Honda Diagnostic System) to the data link connector
the problem is still present and the TPMS indicator and (DLC) (A) located under the driver's side of the
the low tire pressure indicator (stars blinking) are still on. dashboard.
Do not use a troubleshooting procedure unless the
system has set the DTC listed for it.
NOTE: For DTCs 11,13,15, and 17 (tire low pressure), the
TPMS indicator and the low tire pressure indicator
(starts blinking) come on only if the DTCs are caused by
a system problem rather than low tire pressure.
1. Ask the customer to describe the conditions when the
indicators came on or blinked, and try to reproduce
the same conditions for troubleshooting. Find out if
the customer checked and/or adjusted tire pressures
since the indicator came on.
2. If an indicator does not come on during the test-drive,
check for loose terminals, poor contact due to
2. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
damaged terminals, etc. before you start
troubleshooting. 3. Make sure the HDS communicates with the vehicle
and the TPMS control unit. If it doesn't, troubleshoot
the DLC circuit (see page 11 -269).
test-drive the vehicle. Make sure no indicators come
on. 4. Follow the prompts on the HDS to display the DTC(s)
on the screen. After determining the DTC, refer to the
4. Check for DTCs from other control units that are
DTC troubleshooting.
connected via the F-CAN. If there are DTCs that are
related to the F-CAN, the most likely cause was that NOTE: See the HDS Help menu for specific
the ignition switch was turned to ON (II) with the instructions.
TPMS control unit connector disconnected. Clear the
DTCs. Check for PGM-FI and TPMS codes, and 5. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
troubleshoot those first.
Memorizing the Tire Pressure
Sensor ID
How to Clear DTCs Memorizing a Tire Pressure Sensor ID
1. With the ignition switch in LOCK (0), connect the HDS All four tire pressure sensor IDs must be memorized to
to the data link connector (DLC) (A) located under the the TPMS control unit whenever you do any of these
driver's side of the dashboard. actions:
• Replace the TPMS control unit.
• Replace the tire pressure sensor.
• Substitute a known-good wheel with tire pressure
sensor.
NOTE: To ensure the TPMS control unit memorizes the
correct ID, the vehicle with the new sensor must be at
least 10 ft (3 m) away from other vehicles that have tire
pressure sensors.
Memorizing a Sensor ID Automatically

After rotating the tires or replacing a tire pressure
sensor, drive the vehicle for at least 40 seconds at a
speed of 15 mph (24 km/h) or more, and all the sensor
2. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). IDs are memorized automatically.
3. Make sure the HDS communicates with the vehicle NOTE:
and the TPMS control unit If it doesn't, troubleshoot • When replacing the TPMS control unit, use the HDS to
the DLC circuit (see page 11-269). memorize IDs.
4. Clear the DTC(s) by following the screen prompts on • After the IDs are memorized, reduce the pressure in all
the HDS. four tires to less than the appropriate specification,
and check to see that the four tire indicators come on.
NOTE: See the HDS Help menu for specific
instructions.
5. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
Memorizing the Tire Pressure Sensor ID (cont'd)
Memorize the ID with the HDS

The HDS can memorize the ID of a new tire pressure
sensor or a previously memorized ID.
1. With the ignition switch in LOCK (0), connect the HDS
to the data link connector (DLC) (A) located under the
driver's side of the dashboard.

3. Make sure the HDS communicates with the vehicle
the DLC circuit (see page 11-269).
4. Memorize the ID of the tire pressure sensor by
following the screen prompts on the HDS.
NOTE:
• See the HDS Help menu for specific instructions.
• When replacing the TPMS control unit, use the HDS
to memorize IDs.
• After the IDs are memorized, reduce the pressure in
all four tires to less than the appropriate
specification, and check to see that the four tire
indicators come on.
B/ TPMS
DTC Troubleshooting Index
DTC Detection item Troubleshooting

11 Right-front Tire Low Air Pressure DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 18-67)
13 Left-front Tire Low Air Pressure DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 18-67)
15 Right-rear Tire Low Air Pressure DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 18-67)
17 Left-rear Tire Low Air Pressure DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 18-67)
21 Right-front Tire Pressure Sensor Abnormally High Temperature DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 18-68)
22 Left-front Tire Pressure Sensor Abnormally High Temperature DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 18-68)
23 Right-rear Tire Pressure Sensor Abnormally High Temperature DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 18-68)
24 Left-rear Tire Pressure Sensor Abnormally High Temperature DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 18-68)
31 Right-front Tire Pressure Sensor Low Battery Voltage DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 18-69)
32 Right-front Tire Pressure Sensor Signal Failure DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 18-69)
33 Left-front Tire Pressure Sensor Low Battery Voltage DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 18-69)
34 Left-front Tire Pressure Sensor Signal Failure DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 18-69)
35 Right-rear Tire Pressure Sensor Low Battery Voltage DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 18-69)
36 Right-rear Tire Pressure Sensor Signal Failure DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 18-69)
37 Left-rear Tire Pressure Sensor Low Battery Voltage DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 18-69)
38 Left-rear Tire Pressure Sensor Signal Failure DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 18-69)
41 Abnormal Signal Reception Error DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 18-73)
45 Initiator Circuit Short Detection DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 18-74)
51 Right-front Tire Pressure Sensor Registration Error DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 18-77)
53 Left-front Tire Pressure Sensor Registration Error DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 18-77)
55 Right-rear Tire Pressure Sensor Registration Error DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 18-77)
57 Left-rear Tire Pressure Sensor Registration Error DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 18-77)
81 TPMS Control Unit Failure DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 18-81)
83 NoVSP Signal DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 18-81)
85 F-CAN Communication Failure DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 18-82)
91 Right-front Tire Pressure Sensor Internal Error DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 18-83)
93 Left-front Tire Pressure Sensor Internal Error DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 18-83)
95 Right-rear Tire Pressure Sensor Internal Error DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 18-83)
97 Left-rear Tire Pressure Sensor Internal Error DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 18-83)
Symptom Diagnostic procedure Also check

for
HDS does not communicate with the TPMS Troubleshoot the DLC circuit (see page 11-269) Faulty data
control unit or the vehicle link cable
Low tire pressure indicator does not come Symptom Troubleshooting (see page 18-83)
on, and no DTCs are stored ('07 model)
on, and no DTCs are stored ('08-10 models)
Low tire pressure indicator does not go off, Symptom Troubleshooting (see page 18-85)
and no DTCs are stored ('07 model)
and no DTCs are stored ('08-10 models)
TPMS indicator does not come on, and no Symptom Troubleshooting (see page 18-86)
DTCs are stored
TPMS indicator does not go off, and no DTCs Symptom Troubleshooting (see page 18-87)
are stored
System Description
T P M S Control U n it Inputs and O utputs fo r C onnector A (14P)
Wire side of female terminals
Terminal W ire co lo r T e rm in a l sign D escrip tio n S ig n al

number
1 WHT/RED + B (Battery Power source for the Battery voltage (about 12 V) at all times
positive) TPMS control unit
3 BLK GND (Ground) Ground for the Less than 0.1 V at all times
TPMS control unit
5 YEL IG1 (Ignition Power source for With Ignition switch ON (II): battery voltage
switch 1) activating the (about 12 V)
system With Ignition switch in LOCK (0): less than
0.1 V
8 WHT/BLK LF LF PWR. Power source for the For 5 seconds with ignition switch ON (II):
(LF low frequency left-front initiator about 7 V
power) After 5 seconds with ignition switch ON (II):
less than 0.1 V
9 RED/BLK RF LF PWR. Power source for the For 5 seconds with ignition switch ON (II):
(RF low right-front initiator about 7 V
frequency power) After 5 seconds with ignition switch ON (II):
less than 0.1 V
10 GRN/BLK LR LF PWR. Power source for the For 5 seconds with ignition switch ON (II):
(LR low left-rear initiator about 7 V
less than 0.1 V
11 BLU/BLK RR LF PWR. Power source for the For 5 seconds with ignition switch ON (II):
(RR low right-rear initiator about 7 V
less than 0.1 V
System Description (cont'd)
T P M S C ontrol U n it Inputs and O u tpu ts fo r C onnector B (20P)
___ ri ri ri rT
1 2 3 4 / / / 9 10
13 14 15 16 19
Terminal Wire color Terminal sign Description Signal

number
1 RED/WHT ■ RF LF SIG. Detects the signal For the first 5 seconds after turning the
(RF low frequency from the right-front ignition switch to ON (II): pulses 0—2 V
signal) initiator With ignition switch ON (II) for more than
5 seconds: less than 0.1 V
2 BLU/WHT RR LF SIG. Detects the signal For the first 5 seconds after turning the
(RR low frequency from the right-rear ignition switch to ON (II): pulses 0 —2 V
3 WHT/BLU LF LFSIG. Detects the signal For the first 5 seconds after turning the
(LF low frequency from the left-front ignition switch to ON (II): pulses 0—2 V
4 GRN/WHT LR LF SIG. Detects the signal For the first 5 seconds after turning the
(LR low frequency from the left-rear ignition switch to ON (II): pulses 0—2 V
9 BLU K-LINE Communications with
(Data link connector) the HDS
10 RED CAN L F-CAN With Ignition switch ON (II): pluses
(F-CAN communication
communication circuit
signal low)
B
T P M S Control U n it Inputs and O u tp u ts for Connector B (20P) (cont'd)
Terminal W ire co lo r Terminal sign D e scrip tio n S ig n al

num ber
13 WHT/GRN LF LFGND Ground for the With Ignition switch ON (II): less than
(LF low frequency left-front initiator 0.1 V
ground)
14 RED RF LFGND Ground for the With Ignition switch ON (II): less than
(RF low frequency right-front initiator 0.1 V
ground)
15 GRN/RED LR LFGND Ground for the With Ignition switch ON (II): less than
(LR low frequency left-rear initiator 0.1 V
ground)
16 BLU/YEL RR LFGND Ground for the With Ignition switch ON (II): less than
(RR low frequency right-rear initiator 0.1 V
ground)
19 WHT CANH F-CAN With Ignition switch ON (II): pulses
signal high)
S f stem S tru cture

Whenever the ignition switch is turned to ON (II), the TPMS control unit continuously monitors all four tire pressure
sensors and the system function. If it detects low pressure in a tire, it alerts the driver by turning on the low tire pressure
indicator and the appropriate tire indicator. If it detects a problem in the system, it turns on the TPMS indicator and the
low tire pressure indicator (starts blinking).
In itia to rs
Mounted on the top of each wheelwell, each initiator sends a start/stop signal to the tire pressure sensor in the tire below
it.
T P M S c o n tro l u n it
Mounted in the middle of the roof above the headliner, the TPMS control unit sends signals to the initiators and receives
signals from the tire pressure sensor to verify pressure sensor IDs every time the ignition switch is turned to ON (II). It
also receives signals from the transmitters for tire pressure and the sensor condition, and it continuously monitors and
controls the system.
In d ic a to rs
All indicators are in the gauge control module: The low tire pressure indicator (LED indicator), the four tire indicators (on
the multi-information display) to show which tire is affected, and the TPMS indicator (on the multi-information display)
that comes on only if there's a problem with the system. The message indicator (LED indicator) comes on when there is
one or more indicator(s) on in the multi-information display. When two or more tire pressures are low, the low tire
pressure indicator comes on about 5 seconds before the appropriate tire indicator. Once low pressure is detected, the
system scans all four tire pressure sensors to ensure that it turns on the correct tire indicator.
Initiator Initiator
(TPMS type) (TPMS type)

Tire pressure sensor
Each sensor is an integrated unit made up of the tire valve stem, a tire pressure sensor, and a transmitter. The unit is
attached to the inside of the wheel, around the valve stem. The sensor transmits internal tire information one time per 60
seconds to the TPMS control unit. When the TPMS control unit receives a tire pressure reading of less than 190 kPa
(1.9 kgf/cm2, 28 psi), the TPMS control unit then turns on the low tire pressure indicator and the appropriate tire(s)
indicator. When that tire's pressure is increased to more than 210 kPa (2.1 kgf/cm2, 30 psi), the transmitter sends the tire
pressure reading to the TPMS control unit, and the TPMS control unit turns the indicators off.
Wheels
The TPMS (included with PAX system) will not work unless TPMS type wheels are installed on the vehicle. There are
four different types of wheels used. The original equipment wheels have a "TAX System" or "TPMS" mark (A) on them,
and are counterweighted (B) by adding material on the opposite of the tire pressure sensor (C), to counterbalance the
weight of the sensor.
System Communication
• When the ignition switch is turned to ON (II), an RF (radio frequency) band wave signal is transmitted from the tire
pressure sensor to the TPMS control unit.
• When the ignition switch is turned to ON (II), the initiators send an LF (low frequency) band wave signal to the tire
pressure sensors, switching them from sleep mode to normal function mode. When the ignition switch is turned to
LOCK (0), the sensors switch from normal function mode back to sleep mode to extend their battery life.
• Each tire pressure sensor has its own ID to prevent jamming by similar systems on other vehicles. After memorizing
all the sensor IDs, the TPMS control unit recognizes only those specific signals.
• An ID can be memorized manually or automatically. Each initiator is hardwired to the TPMS control unit. Every time
the ignition is turned to ON (II), the TPMS control unit asks each initiator to wake up the appropriate tire pressure
sensor. The transmitters in the tire pressure sensors then transmit the sensor IDs, and the TPMS control unit receives,
and memorizes them. The TPMS control unit then knows which ID belongs to each tire location. This recurring ID
confirmation prevents any confusion in the system as a result of normal tire rotation.
NOTE: Be careful not to bend the brackets on the TPMS control unit and front initiators: Misalignment of the TPMS
control unit and initiators could interfere with sending and receiving signals.
TPMS Control Unit

(With Radio Frequency Antenna)
Tire Pressure Sensor

(Sensor-transmitter)
'07 model
Initiator
(Low Frequency Initiator)
*08-10 models
B
Circuit Diagram
BATTERY
GAUGE CONTROL MODULE
PCM
_Q _
A1
-WHT/RED -
A5
YEL
VOLTAGE
REGULATOR
B19
-W HT -
CANH
CAN
CONTROLLER
B10
■ RED ■
CAN L
INITIATOR
LEFT-FRONT
A8
- WHT/BLK -
LF LF PWR.
LF SIGNAL B3
DRIVER -WHT/BLU -
CIRCUIT LF LF SIG.
B13
-WHT/GRN-
LF LFGND
INITIATOR
RIGHT-FRONT
- RED/BLK -
RF LF PWR.
LF SIGNAL B1
DRIVER -RED/WHT-
CIRCUIT RF LF SIG.
B14
RED- RF LF GND
INITIATOR
LEFT-REAR
- GRN/BLK -
LR LF PWR.
LF SIGNAL B4
DRIVER -GRN/WHT -
CIRCUIT LR LF SIG.
B15
-GRN/RED -
LR LFGND
INITIATOR
RIGHT-REAR
A11
-BLU/BLK -
RR LF PWR.
LF SIGNAL B2
DRIVER -BLU/WHT -
CIRCUIT RR LF SIG.
B16
- BLU/YEL -
RR LFGND
BLU •
B9 r
K-LINE [_
r
G202
BLK -
GND I
:12V
_ 0 :§ V
(cont'd)
Circuit Diagram (cont'd)
DRIVER S UNDER-DASH
FUSE/RELAY BOX CONNECTOR X (39P)
r a
GAUGE CONTROL MODULE CONNECTOR A (30P)
11 12 13 1 p n
I 5 | / | 7 1 /1 1 1 1
| 9 10 11
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 x 8 9 10 11 / / /
fa l
15 16 / 18 19 20 21 / X |2 3 25 / 27 / / 30
| 12 | 13 | |2 l|/2 3 | Wire side of female terminals
E iH Ij H PCM CONNECTOR A (49P)

|1 6 |/|1 8 |/|/ I717I
r ri
1 2 / 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
a 11 7 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
1
/
0
CM
1 27 I 1
/
|/l/|3l|32|33|34|35|
1 22 23 24 X 25 26 27
1
M 29 30 31 /
co
CM
36 33 34 35 38 39
00
00
40 41 ■ / 44 46 47 48 49
Wire side of female terminals Terminal side of female terminals
DATA LINK CONNECTOR (DLC) INITIATOR 3P CONNECTOR
f 1/ / 4 5 6 7 / ) ]A e
/ / 12 / 14 /
16/ 02©
Terminal side of female terminals Wire side of female terminals
TPMS CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR A (14P) TPMS CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR B (20P)
-1
17 3 / 5 z7 1 2 3 4 9 10
10 11 / 13 14 15 16 19
Wire side of female terminals Wire side of female terminals

H
DTC Troubleshooting
DTC 1 1 , 13,15,17: Tire Low A ir Pressure 4. Check the RF, LF, RR, or LR TIRE PRESSURE in the
TPMS DATA LIST with the HDS, and compare it with
NOTE; If low tire pressure is detected, the TPMS control the measured actual tire pressure.
unit sets one or more of these DTCs, and turns on the
low tire pressure indicator and the appropriate tire NOTE: If UNDEFINED is shown on the sensor
indicator(s). If the low tire pressure and tire indicators transmitter status, turn the ignition switch to LOCK
come on because of a low tire pressure, and the (0), rotate the tire 1/4 turn, then turn the ignition
customer corrects it before bringing the vehicle in, the switch to ON (II), and try again. If UNDEFINED is still
DTCs will be stored, but all the indicators turns off. displayed, repeat this procedure until NORMAL is
shown.
Is the indicated tire pressure on the HDS within 40 kPa
2. Make sure the tires are inflated to the specified tire (0.4 kgf/cm2, 6 psi) of the actual tire pressure?
pressure listed on the doorjamb sticker.
YES-Check for loose terminals and poor connections
3. Test-drive the vehicle. at the TPMS control unit. If necessary, substitute a
Does the low tire pressure indicator go off? known-good TPMS control unit (see page 18-89), and
recheck.l
YES-The system is OK at this time. Check for and
repair the cause of air loss.H NO-Check that the tire pressure sensor is properly
mounted. If the mounted OK, replace the appropriate
NO-Go to step 4. tire pressure sensor: '07 model (see page 18-91),
'08-10 models (see page 18-94).H
DTC Troubleshooting (cont'd)
DTC 21,22,23,24: Tire Pressure Sensor 6. Check the LF, RF, RR, or LR TIRE PRESSURE SENSOR
Abnormally High Temperature TEMPERATURE in the TPMS DATA LIST with the
HDS.
NOTE: If UNDEFINED is shown on the sensor
2. Check the tire indicated by the DTCs you retrieved. transmitter status, turn the ignition switch to LOCK
(0), rotate the tire 1/4 turn, then turn the ignition
NOTE: An abnormal rise in the internal temperature of
switch to ON (II), and try again. If UNDEFINED is still
the tires can be caused by:
displayed, repeat this procedure until NORMAL is
• Excessive braking shown.
• Failure to release the parking brake (rear tires only)
Is 176 °F (80 °C) or more indicated?
• Leaving the vehicle running while parked (front
tires only) YES-Replace the appropriate tire pressure sensor: '07
• Improper assembly of a wheel and tire model (see page 18-91), '08-10 models (see page
18-94).H
DTC Tire Location
21 Right-front NO-Check for loose terminals and poor connections
22 Left-front at the TPMS control unit. If necessary, substitute a
23 Right-rear known-good TPMS control unit (see page 18-89) and
24 Left-rear recheck.1
4. Make sure the tires have cooled down.
Does the TPMS indicator go off within 1 minute?
YES-The system is OK at this time. Clear the DTC with
the HDS.B
NO-Go to step 6.
H
DTC 31,33,35,37: Tire Pressure Sensor Low DTC 32,34,36,38: Tire Pressure Sensor Signal
Battery Voltage Failure
NOTE: This problem occurs when the temperature NOTE:
around the sensor is —40 °F (—40 °C) or lower. Note that • The vehicle must be driven for 3 minutes at 15 mph
the diagnosis must be made in a place where ambient (24 km/h) or more for DTC 32,34,36, or 38 to set.
temperature is —4 °F (—20 °C) or higher. • Inspect for an aftermarket electrical device(s) (such as
1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). an inverter, battery charger, CB radio, etc) interfering
with the RF signal from the sensors when the ignition
Does the TPMS indicator go off within 1 minute? switch is ON (II).
YES-The system is OK at this time. Clearthe DTC with 1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
the HDS.B
2. Check the DTC indicated to the tire location to make
NO-Go to step 2. sure the wheel is a TPMS type with the tire pressure
2. Check the LF, RF, RR, or LR TIRE PRESSURE SENSOR sensor.
BATTERY STATUS in the TPMS DATA LIST with the DTC Tire Location
HDS. 32 Right-front
NOTE: If UNDEFINED is shown on the sensor 34 Left-front
transmitter status, turn the ignition switch to LOCK 36 Right-rear
(0), rotate the tire 1/4 turn, then turn the ignition 38 Left-rear
switch to ON (II), and try again. If UNDEFINED is still Is a TPMS type wheel with a tire pressure sensor
displayed, repeat this procedure until NORMAL is mounted on the vehicle?
shown.
YES-Go to step 3.
DTC Tire Location
NO-lnstall a TPMS type wheel, and memorize the
31 Right-front
sensor ID. Drive the vehicle above 15 mph (24 km/h)
33 Left-front
continuously for 40 seconds, or memorize the ID with
35 Right-rear
the HDS (see page 18-53).
37 Left-rear
Is LOW indicated? 3. Test-drive the vehicle, and check the VEHICLE SPEED
in the TPMS DATA LIST with the HDS.
YES-Replace the appropriate tire pressure sensor: '07
model (see page 18-91), '08-10 models (see page Is the vehicle's speed indicated?
18-94). I YES-Go to step 7.
NO-Check for loose terminals and poor connections NO-Go to step 4.
at the TPMS control unit. If necessary, substitute a
known-good TPMS control unit (see page 18-89) and 4. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
recheck.ll
6. Check for DTCs with the HDS. 11. Substitute a wheel with a known-good tire pressure
sensor on the vehicle.
Is DTC 85 indicated?
12. To memorize the sensor ID, drive the vehicle above 15
YES-Go to the DTC 85 troubleshooting (see page mph (24 km/h) for 40 continuous seconds, or
18-82).11
memorize the ID with the HDS (see page 18-53).
NO-Check for loose terminals and poor connections
at the TPMS control unit If necessary, substitute a
known-good TPMS control unit (see page 18-89), and 14. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
recheck.B
15. Check TPMS DATA LIST for LF, RF, LR, or RR TIRE
7. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). PRESSURE SENSOR STATUS changes to NORMAL
with the HDS.
9. Check TPMS DATA LIST for LF, RF, LR, or RR TIRE transmitter status, turn the ignition switch to LOCK
PRESSURE SENSOR STATUS changes to NORMAL (0), rotate the tire 1/4 turn, then turn the ignition
with the HDS. switch to ON (II), and try again. If UNDEFINED is still
NOTE: If UNDEFINED is shown on the sensor displayed, repeat this procedure until NORMAL is
transmitter status, turn the ignition switch to LOCK shown.
DTC Tire Location
32 Right-front
34 Left-front
shown.
36 Right-rear
DTC Tire Location 38 Left-rear
32 Right-front Is NORMAL indicated within one full turn of the tire?
34 Left-front
36 Right-rear YES-Replace the tire pressure sensor on the original
38 Left-rear wheel: '07 model (see page 18-91), *08-10 models (see
page 18-94).B
Is NORMAL indicated within one full turn of the tire?
NO-Go to step 16.
YES-The system is OK at this time. Clearthe DTC with
the HDS.B 16. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
NO-Go to step 10.
17. Substitute an initiator from a known-good location on 20. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
the current vehicle, or from another known-good
21. Disconnect TPMS control unit connectors A (14P) and
vehicle (see page 18-90).
B (20P) and the appropriate initiator 3P connector.
DTC Tire Location
19. Check TPMS DATA LIST for RF, LF, RR, and LR TIRE 32 Right-front
PRESSURE SENSOR STATUS changes to NORMAL 34 Left-front
with the HDS. 36 Right-rear
38 Left-rear
transmitter status, turn the ignition switch to LOCK 22. Check for continuity between appropriate the TPMS
(0), rotate the tire 1/4 turn, then turn the ignition control unit connector A (14P) terminal and
switch to ON (II), and try again. If UNDEFINED is still appropriate initiator 3P connector terminal No. 1.
shown. DTC TPMS Control Initiator Location
Unit Connector A
DTC Tire Location (14P) Terminal
32 Right-front 32 No. 9 Right-front
34 Left-front 34 No. 8 Left-front
36 Right-rear 36 No. 11 Right-rear
38 Left-rear 38 No. 10 Left-rear
Is NORMAL indicated within one full turn of the tire? TPMS CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR A (14P)
YES-Replace the appropriate initiator (see page
18-90).H
NO-Go to step 20.
Wire side of
female terminals
Wire side of
female terminals
LEFT-FRONT
INITIATOR 3P CONNECTOR
Is there continuity?
YES-Go to step 23.
NO-Repair an open in the appropriate wire between
the TPMS control unit and the initiator.®
23. Check for continuity between appropriate the TPMS 24. Check for continuity between appropriate the TPMS
control unit connector B (20P) terminal and control unit connector B (20P) terminal and
appropriate initiator 3P connector terminal No. 3. appropriate initiator 3P connector terminal No. 2.
DTC TPMS Control Initiator Location DTC TPMS Control Initiator Location
Unit Connector B Unit Connector B
(20P) Terminal (20P) Terminal
32 No. 14 Right-front 32 No. 1 Right-front
34 No. 13 Left-front 34 No. 3 Left-front
36 No. 16 Right-rear 36 No. 2 Right-rear
38 No. 15 Left-rear 38 No. 4 Left-rear
TPMS CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR B (20P) INITIATOR 3P CONNECTOR
RIGHT-REAR LEFT-FRONT
p iA p p A [
t—
Wire side of 4 1 I2 I3 > 4 1 I2 I3 p
female terminals
TtONT I
RIGHT-FRONT I LEF
LEFT-REAR
p n Z X n zZ ) /W \ Wire side of f r \\
4 1 2 3 p 'k i' female terminals 'k i' i 1 2 3 ?
j) RR LF SIG. LF LF SIG. )
f (BLU/WHT) (WHT/BLU)
RF LFSIG. LR LF SIG. (GRN/WHT)
(RED/WHT) _o _ n <_ n r 1
LEFT-FROINT 2 3 / / / /I 9 10
I — |L/Nd 1
2 3] X 13 14 15 16 / / 19
TPMS CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR B (20P)
Wire side of YES-Go to step 25.
female terminals
RiGHT-REAR NO-Repair an open in the appropriate wire between
the TPMS control unit and the initiator.!
YES-Go to step 24.
25. Check for continuity between body ground and the DTC 41: Abnorm al Signal Reception Error
appropriate TPMS control unit connector B (20P)
terminal. NOTE:
• Inspect for an aftermarket electrical device(s) (such as
DTC TPMS Control Unit an inverter, battery charger, CB radio, etc) that may
Connector B (20P) produce RF signal from the sensors when the ignition
Terminal switch is ON (II).
32 No. 1 • If DTC 32,34,36, or 38 is also set, troubleshoot those
34 No. 3 DTCs first.
36 No. 2
38 No. 4 1. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
2. Check all four wheels to make sure they are the TPMS
type with the tire pressure sensor.
RR LF SIG. Is each wheel a TPMS type with a tire pressure sensor
(BLU/WHT) LF LF SIG. (WHT/BLU)
mounted on the vehicle?
YES-Go to step 3.
sensor ID. Drive the vehicle above 15 mph (24 km/h)
continuously for 40 seconds, or memorize the ID with
the HDS (see page 18-53).■

3. Test-drive the vehicle, and check the VEHICLE SPEED
in the TPMS DATA LIST with the HDS.
Is there continuity? Is the vehicle speed indicated?
YES-Repair a short to body ground in the appropriate YES-Go to step 7.

wire between the TPMS control unit and the
NO-Go to step 4.
initiator.!
known-good TPMS control unit (see page 18-89) and
recheck.il
5. Turn the ignition switch to ON (11). DTC 45: Initiator Circuit Short Detection
6. Check for DTCs with the HDS. 1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (ll).
Is DTC 85 indicated? 2. Clear the DTC with the HDS.
YES-Go to the DTC 85 troubleshooting (see page 3. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), then turn the
18-82).11 ignition switch to ON (II) again.
NO-Check for loose terminals and poor connections 4. Check for DTCs with the HDS.
known-good TPMS control unit (see page 18-89) and Is DTC 45 indicated?
recheck.B YES-Go to step 5.
7. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). NO-The system is OK at this tim e .il
8. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 5. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
9. Check TPMS DATA LIST for LF, RF, LR, and RR TIRE 6. Disconnect TPMS control unit connectors A (14P) and
PRESSURE SENSOR STATUS changes to NORMAL B (20P).
with the HDS.
7. Check for continuity between body ground and the
NOTE: If UNDEFINED is shown on the sensor appropriate TPMS control unit connector A (14P)
transmitter status, turn the ignition switch to LOCK terminal.
switch to ON (II), and try again. If UNDEFINED is still T e rm in a l N a m e T P M S C o n tro l U n it
displayed/repeat this procedure until NORMAL is Connector A (14P)
shown. T e rm in a l
RF LF PWR. No. 9
LF LF PWR. No. 8
YES-The system is OK at this time. Clear the DTC with RR LF PWR. No. 11
the HDS.B LR LF PWR. No. 10
NO-Check for loose terminals and poor connections TPMS CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR A (14P)
recheck.1
YES-Go to step 8.
NO-Go to step 10.

8. Disconnect the appropriate initiator 3P connector. 10. Check for continuity between the appropriate
terminal in TPMS control unit connector A (14P) and
connector B (20P) terminals.
appropriate TPMS control unit connector A (14P)
terminal. Tire Location TPMS Control Unit
Terminal Name/No.
Terminal Name TPMS Control Unit
Connector A (14P) Connector A Connector B
Terminal (14P) (20P)
RF LF PWR. No. 9 Right-front RF LF PWR./9 RF LF GND/14
LF LF PWR. No. 8 Left-front LF LF PWR./8 LF LFGND/13
Right-rear RR LF PWR./11 RR LFGND/16
RR LF PWR. No. 11
LR LF PWR. No. 10 Left-rear LR LF PWR./10 LR LFGND/15
TPMS CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR A (14P)

TPMS CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR A f14P)
LF LF PWR. 8 10 11
(WHT/BLK) LF LF PWR. (WHT/BLK) RR LF PWR. (BLU/BLK)
RF LF PWR. (RED/BLK) LR LF PWR. (GRN/BLK)
RF LF GND (RED) JJtL F GND (GRN/RED)

Wire side of female terminals ™0__ Q— ^ r* n
10
13 14 15 16 19
YES-Repair a short to body ground in the appropriate
initiator.! LF LF GND (WHT/GRN) RR LF GND (BLU/YEL)

NO-Replace the appropriate initiator (see page
18-90).! Wire side of female terminals
YES-Go to step 11.
NO-Go to step 13.
11. Disconnect the appropriate initiator 3P connector. 13. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
12. Check for continuity between appropriate terminal in 14. Measure the voltage between body ground and the
TPMS control unit connector A (14P) and connector B appropriate TPMS control unit connector B (20P)
(20P) terminals. terminal individually.
Tire Location TPMS Control Unit TPMS CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR B (20P)
Terminal Name/No.
Connector A Connector B
(14P) (20P)
Right-front RF LF PWR./9 RF LF GND/14
Left-front LF LF PWR./8 LF LFGND/13
Right-rear RR LF PWR./11 RR LFGND/16
Left-rear LR LF PWR./10 LR LFGND/15

8 10 11
LF LF PWR. (WHT/BLK) RR LF PWR. (BLU/BLK)
RF LF PWR. (RED/BLK) LR LF PWR. (GRN/BLK)

Is there battery voltage?
RF LF GND (RED) LR LFGND (GRN/RED)
YES-Repair a short to power in the appropriate wire
10 between the TPMS control unit and the initiator.!
13 14 15 16 19 NO-Check for loose terminals and poor connections
13— cr
LF LF GND (WHT/GRN) RR LF GND (BLU/YEL)
recheck.l
YES-Repair a short in the appropriate wire between
the TPMS control unit and the initiator.!
NO-Replace the appropriate initiator (see page
1 8-90).!
D
DTC 51,53,55,57: Tire Pressure Sensor 6. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
Registration Error 7. Substitute a wheel with a known-good tire pressure
NOTE: The following DTCs will only set during sensor on the vehicle.
initialization with the HDS. 8. To memorize the sensor ID, drive the vehicle above 15
1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). mph (24 km/h) for 40 continuous seconds, or
memorize the ID with the HDS (see page 18-53).
2. Check the DTC indicated to the tire location to make
sure the wheel is a TPMS type with the tire pressure 9. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
sensor. 10. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
DTC Tire Location 11. Check TPMS DATA LIST for LF, RF, LR, and RR TIRE
51 Riqht-front PRESSURE SENSOR STATUS changes to NORMAL
53 Left-front with the HDS.
55 Right-rear
57 Left-rear NOTE: If UNDEFINED is shown on the sensor
transmitter status, turn the ignition switch to LOCK
Is a TPMS type wheel with a tire pressure sensor (0), rotate the tire 1/4 turn, then turn the ignition
mounted on the vehicle? switch to ON (II), and try again. If UNDEFINED is still
YES-Go to step 3. displayed, repeat this procedure until NORMAL is
shown.
sensor ID. Drive the vehicle above 15 mph (24 km/h) DTC Tire Location
continuously for 40 seconds, or memorize the ID with 51 Right-front
the HDS (see page 18-53).B 53 Left-front
55 Right-rear
3. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 57 Left-rear
4. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). Is NORMAL indicated within one full turn of the tire?
5. Check TPMS DATA LIST for LF, RF, LR, and RR TIRE YES-Replace the tire pressure sensor on the original
PRESSURE SENSOR STATUS changes to NORMAL wheel: '07 model (see page 18-91), '08-10 models (see
with the HDS. page 18-94).B
NOTE: If UNDEFINED is shown on the sensor NO-Go to step 12.
transmitter status, turn the ignition switch to LOCK
(0), rotate the tire 1/4 turn, then turn the ignition 12. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
shown.
DTC Tire Location

51 Right-front
53 Left-front
55 Right-rear
57 Left-rear
the HDS.B
13. Substitute an initiator from a known-good location on 18. Check for continuity between the appropriate TPMS
the current vehicle, or from another known-good control unit connector A (14P) terminal and
vehicle (see page 18-90). appropriate initiator 3P connector terminal No. 1.
14. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). DTC TPMS Control Initiator Location
15. Check TPMS DATA LIST for RF, LF, RR, and LR TIRE Unit Connector A
(14P) Terminal
PRESSURE SENSOR STATUS changes to NORMAL
51 No. 9 Right-front
with the HDS.
53 No. 8 Left-front
NOTE: If UNDEFINED is shown on the sensor 55 No. 11 Right-rear
transmitter status, turn the ignition switch to LOCK 57 No. 10 Left-rear
switch to ON (II), and try again. If UNDEFINED is still TPMS CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR A (14P)
shown.
DTC Tire Location 9 10 11

51 Right-front RRLF PWR. (BLU/BLK)
53 Left-front LR LF PWR. (GRN/BLK) ^
55 Right-rear
RF LF PWR. (RED/BLK) 1 ^
57 Left-rear I d iA Q
LF LF PWR.
Is NORMAL indicated within one full turn of the tire? (WHT/BLK) U {±AJLP
RIGHT-REAR
Wire side of
YES-Replace the appropriate initiator (see page female terminals A m
18-90).B
LEFT-REAR
NO-Go to step 16. 'Y pzLZ X cq
4 1 I2 I3>
RIGHT-FRONT
17. Disconnect TPMS control unit connectors A (14P) and Wire side of
B (20P) and the appropriate initiator 3P connector. female terminals
LEFT-FRONT
DTC Tire Location
51 Right-front INITIATOR 3P CONNECTOR
53 Left-front Is there continuity?
55 Right-rear
57 Left-rear YES-Go to step 19.
the TPMS control unit and the initiator.il
19. Check for continuity between appropriate the TPMS 20. Check for continuity between appropriate the TPMS
control unit connector B (20P) terminal and control unit connector B (20P) terminal and
appropriate initiator 3P connector terminal No. 3. appropriate initiator 3P connector terminal No. 2.
DTC TPMS Control Initiator Location DTC TPMS Control Initiator Location
Unit Connector B Unit Connector B
(20P) Terminal (20P) Terminal
51 No. 14 Right-front 51 No. 1 Right-front
53 No. 13 Left-front 53 No. 3 Left-front
55 No. 16 Right-rear 55 No. 2 Right-rear
57 No. 15 Left-rear 57 No. 4 Left-rear
TPMS CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR B (20P) INITIATOR 3P CONNECTOR
RIGHT-REAR LEFT-FRONT
] A n O A O
Wire side of
female terminals
LEFT-REAR
Wire side of
female terminals
o f©
J) RR LF SIG. LF LF SIG.
f (BLU/WHT) (WHT/BLU) <s)
RF LF SIG. LR LF SIG. (GRN/WtIT)
(RED/WHT) n n Cl r>........ n.....r1
LEFT-FROlNT 1 2 3 4 / / /I / 9 10
t— |X V r— 1
13 14 15 16 19
/ 4 --- L
2 3 4 —
Wire side of YES-Go to step 21.
female terminals
RIGHT-REAR NO-Repair an open in the appropriate wire between
YES-Go to step 20.
the TPMS control unit and the initiator.il
21. Check for continuity between body ground and the 22. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
terminal. 23. Measure the voltage between body ground and the
DTC TPMS Control Unit terminal.
Connector B (20P)
DTC TPMS Control Unit
Terminal
Connector B (20P)
51 No. 1
53 Terminal
No. 3
51 No. 1
55 No. 2
57 53 No. 3
No. 4
55 No. 2
TPMS CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR B (20P) 57 No. 4
RR LF SIG. TPMS CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR B (20P)

(BLU/WHT) LF LF SIG. (WHT/BLU)
RF LF SIG. RR LF SIG.
(RED/WHT) LR LF SIG. (GRN/WHT) (BLU/WHT) LF LF SIG. (WHT/BLU)
@ 13 14 15 16 19
10
©
X ca U X
YES-Repair a short body ground in the appropriate Is there battery voltage?
initiator.! YES-Repair a short to power in the appropriate wire
between the TPMS control unit and the initiator.!
NO-Go to step 22.
at the TPMS control unit If necessary, substitute a
recheck.B
I
DTC 81: TPMS Control Unit Failure DTC 83: No VSP Signal
NOTE: Low battery voltage can cause this DTC. Make NOTE: Check for fuel and emissions systems DTCs with
sure the battery is fully charged and in good condition the HDS, and troubleshoot the PCM and F-CAN
(see page 22-111). communication errors first (see page 11-3).
1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
2. Clear the DTC with the HDS. 2. Clear the DTC with the HDS.
3. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), then turn the 3. Test-drive the vehicle. Drive the vehicle 7 mph
ignition switch to ON (II) again. (10 km/h) or more.
4. Check for DTCs with the HDS. 4. Check the VEHICLE SPEED in the TPMS DATA LIST
with the HDS.
Is the vehicle's speed indicated?
YES-Replace the TPMS control unit (see page
18-89).B YES-The system is OK at this time.B
NO-The system is OK at this time. Check for loose NO-Go to step 5.
terminals and poor connections at the TPMS control
5. Check for DTCs with the HDS.
unit and G202. ■
YES-Go to DTC 85 troubleshooting (see page
18-82).B
NO-Go to step 6.
6. Check the speedometer.
Does the speedometer register speed?
recheck.B
NO-Update the PCM if it does not have the latest
software (see page 11-292), or substitute a
known-good PCM (see page 11-7), then go to step 1
and recheck. If the PCM was updated and DTCs are
not indicated, troubleshooting is complete. If the PCM
was substituted and DTCs are not indicated, replace
the original PCM (see page 11-294).B
DTC 85: F-CAN Com m unication Failure 10. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
NOTE: Check for fuel and emissions systems DTCs with 11. Short the SCS line with the HDS.
the HDS, and troubleshoot the PCM and F-CAN
12. Disconnect PCM connector A (49P).
communication errors first (see page 11 -3).
13. Disconnect TPMS control unit connector B (20P).
14. Check for continuity between the TPMS control unit
2. Clearthe DTC with the HDS.
connector B (20P) terminals and the PCM connector A
3. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), then turn the (49P) terminals according to the table.
ignition switch to ON (II) again.
Terminal TPMS Control PCM
4. Wait about 5 seconds. Name Unit Connector Connector A
B (20P) (4SP) Terminal
Terminal
Is DTC 85 indicated? CAN L No. 10 No. 49
CANH No. 19 No. 48
YES-Go to step 6.
TPMS CONTROL UNIT CONNECTORS (20P)
NO-The system is OK at this time.B Wire side of female terminals
6. Test-drive the vehicle. CAN L (RED)
n ....... S P
n n n r
Does the speedometer work? 1 2 3 4 / / / / 9 10
YES-Go to step 10. 13 14 15 16 / / 19
u u u
NO-Go to step 7. CAN H (WHT)

J 1I 2 > | 4 | 5 | 6 | 7^8 9 |10|
■
8. Disconnect TPMS control unit connector B (20P). 11 / 13 14I1516 17 18 19 20 /
i
i
22 23 24 25 26 27 /
i
9. Test-drive the vehicle. 29 30 31 3 233 34 351/ / 38 39
|40|41 Z l Z | 4 4 l / l 4 6 ! 4 7 4 8 14 9 1
Does the speedometer work? CAN L
CAN H (WHT) (RED)
at the TPMS control unit. If necessary, substitute a PCM CONNECTOR A (4SP)
known-good TPMS control unit (see page 18-89), and Terminal side of female terminals
recheck.B Is there continuity?
NO-Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), then YES-Check for loose terminals and poor connections
reconnect all connectors, then check and at the TPMS control unit and G202. If necessary,
troubleshoot the fuel and emissions system (see page substitute a known-good TPMS control unit (see page
11-3).B 18-89), and recheck.B
the TPMS control unit and the PCM.B
DTC 9 1 ,9 3 ,9 5 , 97: Tire Pressure Sensor Low tire pressure indicator does not come on,
Internal Error and no DTCs are stored ('07 model)
1.Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). NOTE: Check for gauge DTCs with the HDS (see page
22-6). If gauge DTCs are stored, troubleshoot those DTCs
2. Clear the DTC with the HDS.
first.
3. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), then turn the
1.Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
2. Check the low tire pressure indicator for several
4. Wait about 1 minute.
seconds when the ignition switch is turned ON (II).
Did the indicator come on, and then go off?
NOTE: The tire pressure sensor of the appropriate
YES-Go to step 3.
wheel is shown.
NO-Do the troubleshooting for the gauge control
DTC Tire Location module (see page 22-345). If necessary, substitute a
91 Right-front known-good gauge control module (see page 22-371),
93 Left-front and recheck.B
95 Right-rear
97 Left-rear 3. Lower the pressure in each tire until the low tire
pressure indicator comes on.
Is DTC 91, 93, 95, or 97 indicated?
NOTE:
model (see page 18-91), '08-10 models (see page • If 5 minutes has passed since the ignition switch
18-94).B has been turned ON (II), turn the ignition switch to
LOCK (0), and wait 2 minutes, then turn it back ON
NO-The system is OK at this time.B (II) again.
• Reinflate the tire before continuing to the next tire.
• After noting whether the low tire pressure indicator
came on, make sure it goes off when you reinflate
the tire before proceeding to the next tire.
Does the indicator come on when the pressure drops
below 190 kPa (1.9 kgf/cm2, 28 psi) or less?
YES-The system is OK at this time.B
NO-Go to step 4.
Symptom Troubleshooting (cont'd)
4. Check the TIRE PRESSURE in the TPMS DATA LIST Low tire pressure indicator does not come on,
with the HDS, and compare it with the actual and no DTCs are stored ('08-10 models
measured tire pressure.
transmitter status, turn the ignition switch to LOCK 2. Check the low tire pressure indicator for several
(0), rotate the tire 1/4 turn, then turn the ignition seconds when the ignition switch is turned ON (II).
shown. YES-Go to step 3.
Is the tire pressure shown on the HDS within 40 kPa (0.4 NO-Do the troubleshooting for the gauge control
kgf/cm2, 6 psi) of the actual tire pressure? module (see page 22-345). If necessary, substitute a
known-good gauge control module (see page 22-371),
YES-Go to step 5.
and recheck.B
NO-Replace the appropriate tire pressure sensor
3. Lower the pressure in each tire until the low tire
'07 model (see page 18-91), '08-10 models (see page
pressure indicator comes on.
18-94).B
NOTE:
• If 5 minutes has passed since the ignition switch
6. Disconnect TPMS control unit connector A (14P). has been turned to ON (II), turn the ignition switch
to LOCK (0), and wait 2 minutes, then turn it back
7. Measure the voltage between TPMS control unit
ON (II) again.
connector A (14P) terminals No. 3 and No. 5.
TPMS CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR A (14P) came on, make sure it goes off when you reinflate
GND (BLK) IG1 (YEL) Does the indicator come on when the pressure drops
n c ? m.
1 / 5 / YES-The system is OK at this time.B
/
CD
00
10 11 / / NO-Go to step 4.
TJ
----------- 1'W'\...

YES-Repair a short to power in the wire between the
TPMS control unit and the No. 21 (7.5 A) fuse in the
driver's under-dash fuse/relay box.B
known-good TPMS control unit (see page 18-89), and
recheck.B
DEi
4. Check the TIRE PRESSURE in the TPMS DATA LIST Low tire pressure indicator does not go off,
with the HDS, and compare it with the actual and no DTCs are stored f§7 model)
measured tire pressure.
1.Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
transmitter status, turn the ignition switch to LOCK 2. Disconnect TPMS control unit connector B (20P).
displayed, repeat this procedure until NORMAL is 4. Check the low tire pressure indicator for several
shown. seconds when the ignition switch is turned ON (II).
Is the indicated tire pressure on the HDS within 40 kPa Did the indicator come on, and then go off?
(0.4 kgf/cm2, 6 psi) of the actual tire pressure?
YES-Check for loose terminals and poor connections at the TPMS control unit. If necessary, substitute a
at the TPMS control unit. If necessary, substitute a known-good TPMS control unit (see page 18-89), and
known-good TPMS control unit (see page 18-89), and recheck.B ..
recheck.B
NO-Replace the appropriate tire pressure sensor module (see page 22-345). If necessary, substitute a
'07 model (see page 18-91), '08-10 models (see page known-good gauge control module (see page 22-371),
18-94),B and recheck.B
Low tire pressure indicator does not go off, TPMS indicator does not come on, and no
and no DTCs are stored ('08-10 models) DTCs are stored
NOTE: If the low tire pressure indicator is turned on at 1. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
the same time as the TPMS indicator, go to the following
TPMS symptom troubleshooting first: TPMS indicator
does not go to off, and no DTCs are stored (see page 3. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
18-87).
4. Check the TPMS indicator when the ignition switch is
1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). turned ON (II).
2. Check the low tire pressure indicator for several Did the indicator come on?
seconds when the ignition switch is turned to ON (II).
Did the indicator come on, and then blink for about 75 at the TPMS control unit. If necessary, substitute a
seconds? known-good TPMS control unit (see page 18-89), and
recheck.B
YES-Check for gauge DTCs with the HDS (see page
22-6) and go to the indicated gauge DTCs NO-Do the troubleshooting for the gauge control
troubleshooting.■ module (see page 22-345). If necessary, substitute a
NO-Go to step 3.
and recheck.ll
seconds when the ignition switch is turned ON (II).
Did the indicator come on, and then blink for about 75
seconds?
18-89).B
module (see page 22-345). If necessary, substitute a
and recheck.ll
1
TPMS indicator does not go off, and no DTCs 5. Check the No. 21 (7.5 A) fuse in the driver's
are stored under-dash fuse/relay box.
Is the fuse blown?
NOTE:
9 Check for gauges DTCs with the HDS (see page 22-6). YES-Go to step 6.
If multiple DTCs are present, including B1178,
NO-Reinstall the checked fuse, then go to step 10.
troubleshoot those DTCs first. If only DTC B1178 is
present, continue with the following troubleshooting. 6. Disconnect TPMS control unit connector A (14P).
• If the TPMS control unit was replaced, the TPMS
7. With the No. 21 (7.5 A) fuse removed, check for
indicator will be on until all four sensor ID codes are
continuity between body ground and TPMS control
learned.
unit connector A (14P) terminal No. 5.
2. Check the No. 1 (7.5 A) fuse in the driver's under-dash TPMS CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR A (14P)
fuse/relay box.
IG1 (YEL)
Is the fuse blown?
n c p
YES-Go to step 3.
/ / /
CO
1 5
NO-Reinstall the checked fuse, then go to step 5. —
8 d 9 10 11
3--- / 4 r/
3. Disconnect TPMS control unit connector A (14P).
4. With the No. 1 (7.5 A) fuse removed, check for
continuity between body ground and TPMS control
unit connector A (14P) terminal No. 1.

YES-Repair a short to body ground in the wire
+B (WHT/RED) between the No. 21 (7.5 A) fuse in the driver's
c l> under-dash fuse/relay box and the TPMS control unit.
n
1 /3 / 5 / / NO-lnstall a new No. 21 (7.5 A) fuse in the driver's
under-dash fuse/relay box, then go to step 8.
8 9 10 11
]— /
between the No. 1 (7.5 A) fuse in the driver's
under-dash fuse/relay box and the TPMS control unit.
NO-lnstall a new No. 1 (7.5 A) fuse in the driver's
9. Check the TPMS indicator when the ignition switch is 13. Measure the voltage between body ground and TPMS
turned ON (II). control unit connector A (14P) terminal No. 5.
Did the indicator come on?
101 (YEL)
known-good TPMS control unit (see page 18-89), and
recheck.ll
NO-Troubleshooting is com plete.!
11. Measure the voltage between body ground and TPMS
control unit connector A (14P) terminal No. 1.
+ B (WHT/RED)
YES-Go to step 14.
Ln____5 3
/i/ NO-Repair an open in the wire between the TPMS
cn
1 / 3 /
control unit and the No. 21 (7.5 A) fuse in the driver's
/44
CD
8
- 10 11
under-dash fuse/relay b o x .!
Y)

YES-Go to step 12.
NO-Repair an open in the wire between the TPMS
under-dash fuse/relay b o x .!
1
TPMS Control Unit Replacement
14. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). NOTE: Make sure the TPMS control unit mounting
bracket is not bent or twisted as this may affect its
15. Reconnect TPMS control unit connector A (14P). communication with the initiators and the tire pressure
16. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). sensors.
17. Measure the voltage between body ground and TPMS 1. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
control unit connector A (14P) terminal No. 3. 2. Remove the headliner (see page 20-116).
3. Disconnect the TPMS control unit connectors (A).
GND (BLK)
n I n
1 / 3 / 5 / /
8 9 10 11 /
i i ..... 44
X
Is there 0.1 V or more?

YES-Repair an open or high resistance in the wire
between the TPMS control unit and body ground
(G202).B
module (see page 22-345). If the gauge control
module is OK, check for loose terminals and poor
connections at the TPMS control unit. If necessary,
substitute a known-good TPMS control unit (see page 4. Remove the TPMS control unit (B) from the bracket
18-89), and recheck.B (C).
5. install the TPMS control unit in the reverse order of
removal.
6. Connect the HDS, and memorize the tire pressure
sensor IDs (see page 18-53). Do not memorize the IDs
automatically.
Initiator Replacement
NOTE: Make sure the initiator mounting bracket is not Rear

bent or twisted as this may affect its communication
with the TPMS control unit and the tire pressure sensor. 1. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
Front 2. Raise the vehicle (see page 1-14).

4. Remove the cover or the fuel pipe protector (see page
20-283).
5. Disconnect the initiator connector (A).
4. Remove the front inner fender: '07 model (see page
20-279), '08-10 models (see page 20-280).
5. Disconnect the initiator connector (A).
6x 1.0 mm
9.8 N-m (1.0 kgf-m, 7.2 Ibf-ft)
6. Remove the initiator (B) from the inner side of the
6x 1.0 mm
wheelwell.
9.8 N-m (1.0 kgf-m, 7.2 Ibf-ft)
7. Install the initiator in the reverse order of removal.
6. Remove the initiator (B) from the bracket.
7. Install the initiator in the reverse order of removal.
Tire Pressure Sensor Replacement
Removal - '07 model 5. Position the wheel so that the tire machine (A) and the
tire iron (B) are next to the valve stem (C), and will
NOTICE move away from it when the machine starts. Then
Each tire pressure sensor contains a lithium anode remove the tire from the wheel.
battery that is not removable. The complete tire pressure
sensor should be disposed of according to local battery
disposal guidelines or requirements. An improperly
disposed of battery can be harmful to the environment.

2. Remove the wheel with the faulty sensor.
3. Remove the tire valve stem cap and the valve stem
core to deflate the tire.
4. Remove any balance weights, and then remove the
tire from the wheel with a commercially available tire
changer (A).
INOTICE I
Note these items to avoid damaging the tire pressure
sensor:
• Do the outside of the wheel first.
• Position the wheel as shown so the valve stem (B) is 6. Remove and discard the valve stem nut (A), then
remove the c sensor and the valve stem (B) from the
90 degrees from the bead breaker (C) as shown.
wheel.
• Do not position the bead breaker of the tire changer
too close to the rim. NOTE: Use the new nut and the new valve stem on
reassembly.
A
Replace.
Tire Pressure Sensor Replacement (cont'd)
7. Remove and discard the valve stem (A), and the screw Installation - *07 model
(B) from the tire pressure sensor (C).
NOTE:
NOTE: The valve stem grommet (D) might stay in the
• Use only wheels that have a 'TA X System" or
wheel; make sure you remove it.
"TPMS" mark (A) on them.
• The vehicle may be equipped with one of the two
types of wheels.
Type 1
Type 2
1. Assemble the new valve stem (A), the new screw (B),
and the sensor-transmitter (C).
NOTE: Always use the new valve stem and the new
screw.
n
2. Before installing the tire pressure sensor, clean the 5. Lube the tire bead sparingly with a paste-type tire
mating surfaces on the sensor and the wheel. mounting lubricant, and position the wheel so that the
tire machine (A) are next to the valve stem (B) and will
3. Install the tire pressure sensor (A) to the wheel (B), move away from it when the machine starts. Then
and tighten the valve nut (C) finger tight. Make sure
install the tire onto the wheel.
the pressure sensor is resting on the wheel.
6. With a dry air source, inflate the tire to 300 kPa

(3.1 kgf/cm2, 44 psi) to seat the tire bead to the rim,
then adjust the tire pressure (see page 18-5), and
4. Tighten the valve nut to the specified torque while install the valve stem cap.
holding the tire pressure sensor toward (D) the wheel.
You may hear a snap or pop as you tighten the nut NOTE: Make sure the tire bead is seated on both sides
This is normal. of the rim evenly.
NOTE: 7. Check and adjust the wheel balance, then install the
• Do not reuse the nuts that had been tightened, even wheels to the vehicle.
one time, to the specified torque, as they are 8. Lower the vehicle. Torque the wheel nuts to
deformed inside (E). specifications (see step 2 on page 18-15).
• Do not use air or electric impact tools to tighten the
valve stem nut. 9. Connect the HDS, and memorize the tire pressure
sensor ID(s) (see page 18-53).
• Tightening the nut beyond the specified torque can
damage the nut.
• Make sure that there is no space between the
sensor and the wheel.
Removal - '08-10 models 5. Position the wheel so that the tire machine (A) and the
INOTICE move away from it when the machine starts. Then

4. Remove any balance weights, and then break the
bead loose from the wheel with a commercially
available tire changer (A).
INOTICE
6. Remove the valve stem nut (A) and the washer (B),
Note these items to avoid damaging the tire pressure then remove the tire pressure sensor with the valve
sensor: stem (C) from the wheel.
• Position the wheel as shown so the valve stem (B) is NOTE: Check the nut and the washer if they have
90 degrees from the bead breaker (C) as shown. deterioration or damage, replace them with new ones
during reassembly.
too close to the rim.
1
7. Remove and discard the valve stem grommet (A) Installation - *08-10 models
from the tire pressure sensor (B).
NOTE:
NOTE;
• Use only wheels that have a "PAX System" or
• The valve stem grommet might stay in the wheel; "TPMS" mark (A) on them.
make sure you remove it.
9 The vehicle may be equipped with one of the three
• Always use a new valve stem grommet whenever types of wheels.
the tire pressure sensor has been removed from the
wheel, or when replacing the tire. Type 1
Type 2
Type 3
1. Before installing the tire pressure sensor, clean the 3. Touring model: Install the tire pressure sensor (A) and
mating surfaces on the sensor and the wheel. the washer (B) to the wheel (C), and tighten the valve
stem nut (D) finger tight. Make sure the pressure
2. Touring with PAX tires model: Install the tire pressure sensor is resting on the wheel.
sensor (A) and the washer (B) to the wheel (C), and
tighten the valve stem nut (D) finger tight. Make sure NOTE: Install the tire pressure sensor so that the
the pressure sensor is resting on the wheel. sensor housing surface (E) should not exceed the
protrusion (F) of the wheel to prevent the sensor
housing from being caught on the bead of the tire
when assembling the tire. Be sure to always mount
the tire pressure sensor with the feet (G) in the
downward position toward the wheel.
4 N-m
(0.4 kgf-m,
3 Ibf-ft)
4 N-m
(0.4 kgf-m,
3 Ibf-ft)
E F E
4. Tighten the valve stem nut to the specified torque

while holding the tire pressure sensor.
NOTE:
• Do not use air or electric impact tools to tighten a
valve stem nut.
• Do not twist the tire pressure sensor to adjust its
position with the wheel, as this will damage or
deform the valve stem grommet.
I
Resetting the PAX System Warning
5. Lube the tire bead sparingly with a paste-type tire When a tire goes flat or is very low on pressure, the
mounting lubricant, and position the wheel so that the multi-information display will show "PAX SYSTEM
tire machine (A) are next to the valve stem (B) and will WARNING, RUN FLAT DRIVING." After the tire is
move away from it when the machine starts. Then repaired or replaced, you must reset the warning
install the tire onto the wheel. indicator (and the mileage counter that supports it), no
matter how far the vehicle was driven in the run flat
mode.
1. To put the gauge control module into the
self-diagnostic mode:
• Turn the headlight switch to ON.
• Press and hold the SELECT/RESET (Instrument
panel brightness) knob.
• Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
• Within 5 seconds, turn the headlights to AUTO, then
to ON, and then to AUTO again.
• Within 5 seconds, release the SELECT/RESET knob,
then push and release the knob three times.
2. Once the gauge control module is in the
self-diagnostic mode, press and hold the INFO button
on the steering wheel for 5 seconds to get to the
CUSTOMIZE MENU.
6. With a dry air source, inflate the tire to 300 kPa 3. Use the INFO button to scroll through to the PAX
(3.1 kgf/cm2, 44 psi) to seat the tire bead to the rim, RESET screen, then press the SEL/RESET button on
then adjust the tire pressure (see page 18-5), then the steering wheel.
install the valve stem cap. 4. Use the INFO button to scroll to the appropriate
NOTE: Make sure the tire bead is seated on both sides wheel, and then press the SEL/RESET button on the
of the rim evenly. steering wheel to reset the PAX warning system
display. The screen should read PAX RESET
7. Check and adjust the wheel balance, then install the COMPLETED. Repeat this step for each wheel that
wheels on the vehicle. needs to be reset.
8. Lower the vehicle. Torque the wheel nuts to 5. Use the INFO button to scroll through to EXIT, then
specifications (see step 2 on page 18-15). press the SEL/RESET button.
9. Connect the HDS, and memorize the tire pressure 6. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0) to exit the
sensor ID(s) (see page 18-53). self-diagnostic mode.
TPMS - Except Touring and Touring With PAX Tires
Models
TPMS
Component Location Index..............................................18-100
Memorizing the Tire Pressure Sensor ID ............. .........18-104
Tire Pressure Sensor Location..................... .................. 18-105
DTC Troubleshooting In d e x ........................................... 18-106
Symptom Troubleshooting Index................................. 18-107
System Description.......................................................... 18-108
Circuit Diagram .................................................................. 18-112
DTC Troubleshooting....................................................... 18-114
Symptom Troubleshooting..............................................18-122
TPMS Control Unit Replacement...................................18-127
Tire Pressure Sensor Replacement................................18-128
Replacement (’07 model), page 18-128

System Indicator DTC 1 1 ,1 3 ,1 5 ,1 7

The TPMS (tire pressure monitoring system) has the low If the system detects low pressure in any of the four tires,
tire pressure indicator and the TPMS indicator. the low tire pressure indicator comes on, and the TPMS
control unit sets one or more of these codes: DTC 11,13,
Low Tire Pressure 15,17. When the tire pressure returns to normal, and the
Indicator TPMS Indicator
TPMS control unit receives the normal pressure signal
from the tire pressure sensor, the TPMS control unit
turns off the indicator. However TPMS control unit still
retains the DTC(s).
NOTE: It is necessary to test-drive the vehicle at 28 mph
(45 km/m) or more for at least 1 minute so that the tire
pressure sensor transmits the signal.
Tire Pressure Changing by Tem perature

Tire pressures increase slightly as the temperature in the
tires rises during driving. Pressures can also increase or
decrease slightly with changes in outside air
temperature. A temperature change of about 18 °F
The Low Tire Pressure Indicator (10 °C) changes tire pressure by about 10 kPa
(0.1 kgf/cm2, 1.5 psi). If the temperature drops, tire
• If the system detects low pressure in any of the four pressure could decrease enough to turn on the low tire
tires, the low tire pressure indicator comes on. pressure indicator, but later, the tire temperature could
• When the indicator comes on, inflate the tires and increase enough to turn the indicator off. To resolve a
test-drive the vehicle at 28 mph (45 km/h) or more for complaint of such intermittent indications, confirm and
at least 1 minute, and the low tire pressure indicator clear the stored DTC(s) and check the tire pressures.
will go off. Then explain to the customer how temperature changes
• If the TPMS control unit detects a problem in the can affect the system.
system during an indication of low tire pressure, it
turns off the low tire pressure indicator, stores the
DTC(s), and turns on the TPMS indicator.
The TPMS Indicator

• If a problem is detected in the system, the TPMS
indicator comes on.
detected, only the TPMS indicator comes on.
If the system is OK, the TPMS indicator and the low tire
pressure indicator should come on when you turn the
ignition switch to ON (II), and then go off 2 seconds later.
If they don't, there is a problem with the system.
-2 0 0 20 40 60 ”C
-4 32 68 104 140 ”F
Problems That Are Not System Faults How to Troubleshoot DTCs

• Tire Sealant DTC troubleshooting procedures assume the cause of
Fluid sealant used to repair a punctured tire can the problem is still present and the TPMS indicator is still
damage the tire pressure sensor mounted on each on. Do not use a troubleshooting procedure unless the
wheel. It can prevent the system from detecting the system has set the DTC listed for it.
correct tire pressure, which sets a DTC 11,13,15, or 17 NOTE: For DTCs 11,13,15, and 17 (tire low pressure), the
even though the system is normal.
TPMS indicator comes on only if the DTCs are caused by
• Cold Weather a system problem rather than low tire pressure.
When the weather is extremely cold, about —40 °F
(—40 °C) or colder, the output of the lithium battery in 1. Ask the customer to describe the conditions when the
each tire pressure sensor may drop far enough that indicator came on, and try to reproduce the same
the TPMS control unit sets a DTC for low battery conditions for troubleshooting. Find out if the
voltage (31,33,35, or 37) even though the system is customer checked and/or adjusted tire pressures
normal. since the indicator came on.
• Non-TPMS type Wheels (Including Spare Tire) 2. If an indicator does not come on during the test-drive,
Vehicles equipped with TPMS must use wheels made check for loose terminals, poor contact due to
for the system. Every TPMS type wheel has an damaged terminals, etc. before you start
exclusive mark; do not use any other type of wheel troubleshooting.
(see page 18-110).
When a flat tire is replaced with the spare tire, the test-drive the vehicle. Make sure no indicators come
TPMS indicator comes on (DTC 32,34,36 or 38) on.
because the system is no longer receiving the signal
from the flat tire's transmitter. This is not a problem 4. Check for DTCs from other control units that are
with the spare tire. connected via the F-CAN. If there are DTCs that are
related to the F-CAN, the most likely cause was that
How a Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) is Set the ignition switch was turned to ON (II) with the
TPMS control unit connector disconnected. Clearthe
• When the system detects a problem, the TPMS control DTCs. Check for PGM-FI and TPMS codes, and
unit sets a code, but shifts to fail-safe mode, and does troubleshoot those first.
not alert the driver to low tire pressures.
• If the TPMS control unit loses power, or fails, the
TPMS indicator comes on, but no DTCs are set.
• The memory can hold all the DTCs that could possibly
previous one, so only the latest DTC of each type is
stored.
they occurred.
• Set DTCs are stored in the EEPROM (nonvolatile
memory), and cannot be cleared by disconnecting the
battery. To clear a DTC, connect the HDS (Honda
Diagnostic System) to the data link connector (DLC),
I
How to Retrieve DTCs How to Clear DTCs

1. With the ignition switch in LOCK (0), connect the HDS 1. With the ignition switch in LOCK (0), connect the HDS
(Honda Diagnostic System) to the data link connector to the data link connector (DLC) (A) located under the
(DLC) (A) located under the driver's side of the driver's side of the dashboard.
dashboard.

3. Make sure the HDS communicates with the vehicle and the TPMS control unit. If it doesn't, troubleshoot
and the TPMS control unit. If it doesn't, troubleshoot the DLC circuit (see page 11 -269).
the DLC circuit (see page 11 -269).
4. Clear the DTC(s) by following the screen prompts on
4. Follow the prompts on the HDS to display the DTC(s) the HDS.
DTC troubleshooting.
instructions.
instructions.
Memorizing the Tire Pressure Sensor ID
Special Tools Required 6. Hold the TPMS tool near the valve stem of one wheel,
TPMS Trigger Tool ATEQ VT55* memorize the tire pressure sensor ID by following the
• Available through the Honda Tool and Equipment screen prompts on the HDS.
Program 888-424-6857 NOTE;
• If you turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0) before
All four tire pressure sensor IDs must be memorized to memorizing all four sensor IDs, the memorizing ID
the TPMS control unit whenever you do any of these is canceled.
actions: • If more than one sensor ID is displayed on the HDS,
• Replace the TPMS control unit. verify that the vehicle has not been driven for 5
• Replace the tire pressure sensor. minutes, and there are no other vehicles or sensors
• Substitute a known-good wheel with tire pressure within 10 ft (3 m).
sensor. • See the HDS Help menu for specific instructions.
NOTE;
• The TPMS tool is necessary to do this procedure.
• Let the vehicle sit for at least 5 minutes to allow the
sensors to switch to sleep mode.
• To ensure the TPMS control unit memorizes the
correct ID, the vehicle with the new tire pressure
sensor must be at least 10 ft (3 m) away from other
vehicle that have tire pressure sensors.
• When doing a tire rotation, memorizing the sensors in
not needed.
7. Repeat step 6 for each wheel until all four sensor IDs
are memorized. When all four IDs are memorized, the
low tire pressure indicator blinks.
9. Disconnect the HDS from the DLC.
10. Test-drive the vehicle at 28 mph (45 km/h) or more for
at least 1 minute.
11. Make sure the low tire pressure indicator does not
blink.
12. Make sure the tires are inflated to the specified tire

4. Select Sensor ID Learning from the Mode Menu on
the HDS.
5. Follow HDS screen prompts to turn on the TPMS tool.
a
Tire Pressure Sensor Location
Special Tools Required 6. Hold the TPMS tool near the valve stem of one wheel,
TPMS Trigger Tool ATEQ VT55* activate the tire pressure sensor by following the
Âvailable through the Honda Tool and Equipment prompts on the HDS.
Program 888-424-6857 NOTE:
• See the HDS Help menu for specific instructions.
NOTE; • If a tire pressure sensor does not respond to the
• The TPMS tool is necessary to do this procedure. TPMS tool, rotate the tire 1/4 turn and retry.
• Let the vehicle sit for at least 5 minutes to allow the • If the tire pressure sensor still does not respond
sensors to switch to sleep mode. after one full rotation of the tire, then check for DTC
• This procedure locates where the tire pressure 32,34,36, and 38 with the HDS.
sensors 1 ,2 ,3 ,4 are mounted, when activated by the • If more than one sensor ID is displayed on the HDS,
TPMS tool. verify that the vehicle has not been driven for 5
• Position the vehicle at least 10 ft (3 m) away from other minutes, and there are no other vehicles or sensors
vehicles that have tire pressure sensors. within 10 ft (3 m).
7. The TPMS tool will display the sensor data including

the sensor ID number.
8. Locate the tire pressure sensor ID numbers on the
2. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). TPMS data list, and match it to the sensor number.
3. Make sure the HDS communicates with the vehicle Note the sensor location.
and the TPMS control unit. If it doesn't, troubleshoot 9. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
4. Using the HDS, bring up the TPMS data list, scroll
down to the bottom, and locate the four tire pressure
sensors ID numbers. These are the ID numbers
assigned to each tire location.
5. Follow HDS screen prompts to turn on the TPMS tool.
DTC Detection Item Troubleshooting

11 Tire 1 Low Air Pressure DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 18-114)
(see page 18-114)
(see page 18-114)
(see page 18-114)
21 Tire 1 Pressure Sensor Abnormally High Temperature DTC Troubleshooting
(seepage 18-115)
(see page 18-115)
(see page 18-115)
(see page 18-115)
31 Tire 1 Pressure Sensor Low Battery Voltage DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 18-116)
32 Tire 1 Pressure Sensor Signal Failure DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 18-117)
(see page 18-116)
(seepage 18-117)
35 Ti re 3 Pressu re Sensor Low Battery Voltage DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 18-116)
(see page 18-117)
(see page 18-116)
38 Tire 4 Pressure Sensor Signal Failure DTCTroubleshooting
(see page 18-117)
41 Abnormal Signal Reception Error DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 18-118)
51 Tire 1 Pressure Sensor Registration Error DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 18-118)
53 Tire 2 Pressure Sensor Registration Error DTC T roubleshooting
(see page 18-118)
(see page 18-118)
(see page 18-118)
81 TPMS Control Unit Failure DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 18-119)
83 No VSP Signal DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 18-120)
85 F-CAN Communication Failure DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 18-120)
91 Tire 1 Pressure Sensor Internal Error DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 18-121)
(see page 18-121)
(see page 18-121)
(see page 18-121)
I
S y m p to m Diagnosti c procedure Also check f o r

HDS does not communicate with the TPMS Troubleshoot the DLC circuit (see page 11-269) Faulty data
control unit or the vehicle link cable
on, and no DTCs are stored
and no DTCs are stored
TPMS indicator does not come on, and no Symptom Troubleshooting (see page 18-124)
DTCs are stored
TPMS indicator does not go off, and no DTCs Symptom Troubleshooting (see page 18-124)
are stored
System Description
TPMS Control Unit Inputs and Outputs for Connector A (14P)
V- n
.;..... n............. ..
1 / 5 /
CO
x

number
1 WHT/RED + B (Battery positive) Power source for the Battery voltage (about 12 V) at all times
TPMS control unit
3 BLK GND (Ground) Ground for the TPMS Less than 0.1 V at all times
control unit
5 YEL IG1 Power source for With Ignition switch ON (II): battery
(Ignition switch 1) activating the system voltage (about 12 V)
With Ignition switch in LOCK (0): less
than 0.1 V

number
9 BLU K-LINE Communications with
(Data link connector) the HDS
10 RED CAN L F-CAN With Ignition switch ON (II): pulses
signal low)
19 WHT CANH F-CAN With Ignition switch ON (II): pulses
signal high)
System Structure
Once the vehicle speed exceeds 28 mph (45 km/h), the TPMS control unit monitors all four tire pressure sensors and the
system function. If it detects low pressure in a tire, it alerts the driver by turning on the low tire pressure indicator. If it
detects a problem in the system, it turns on the TPMS indicator.
TPMS control unit
Mounted in the middle of the roof above the headliner, the TPMS control unit receives wireless pressure sensor ID
signals every time the vehicle speeds exceeds 28 mph (45 km/h). It also receives wireless signals from the transmitters
for tire pressure and the sensor condition, and it continuously monitors and controls the system. The TPMS control unit
cannot directly determine the position (location) of a tire pressure sensor(s) on the vehicle since it is a wireless system.
Tire pressure sensor locations will change during scheduled vehicle maintenance (tire rotation).
NOTE: To determine the actual location of each tire pressure sensor on the vehicle, do the tire pressure sensor location
procedure (see page 18-105). Once the tire pressure sensor locations are identified, write the sensor ID on the side wall
of the tire with a tire crayon to eliminate confusion.
Indicators
Two indicators are in the gauge control module: The low tire pressure indicator comes on when any tire pressure is low,
and the TPMS indicator that comes on only if there's a problem with the system.
The low tire pressure indicator alerts the driver that a tire(s) pressure is low, but does not specify the tire(s) location.
Vehicle
Tire pressure sensor

Each sensor is an integrated unit made up of the tire valve stem, a tire pressure sensor, and a transmitter. The unit is
attached to the inside of the wheel, around the valve stem. The sensor transmits the internal tire information to the
TPMS control unit once every 60 seconds when the vehicle speed exceeds 28 mph (45 km/h). When the TPMS control
unit receives a tire pressure signal that is less than 190 kPa (1.9 kgf/cm2, 28 psi), the TPMS control unit then turns on the
low tire pressure indicator. When that tire's pressure is increased to more than 210 kPa (2.1 kgf/cm2, 30 psi), and the
vehicle is driven above 28 mph (45 km/h) the transmitter sends the tire pressure signal to the TPMS control unit, and
then the TPMS control unit turns the indicators off.
NOTE: Do not mix the tire pressure sensors or TPMS type wheels with other TPMS types. Be sure to use the correct type
sensors and wheels for this system.
Sensor are active:
• When the wheel rotates over 28 mph (45 km/h), the sensor detects the momentum, switches the sensor to the normal
function mode.
• The LF (low frequency) signal of the TPMS tool makes the sensor active even though the vehicle is stopped. The tire
pressure sensor goes into sleep mode when the acceleration sensor detects the wheel is stationary for 5 minutes or
more continuously.
Wheels
The TPMS will not work unless TPMS type wheels are installed on the vehicle. There are four different types of wheels
used:
• Aluminum wheel: The original equipment wheels have a "TPMS" mark (A) on them and are counterweighted (B) by
adding material on the opposite of the tire pressure sensor (C), to counterbalance the weight of the sensor.
• Steel wheel: The original equipment wheels have a "TPMS" mark (A) on them, and a counterweight (B) balances the
weight of the tire pressure sensor (C) by a size difference in the cooling hole.
Aluminum wheel
B B
System Communication
• When the vehicle is traveling more than 28 mph (45 km/h), an RF (radio frequency) band wave signal is transmitted
from each tire pressure sensor to the TPMS control unit.
• When the wheels rotate, and the tire pressure sensors momentum is detected, switching them from sleep mode to
normal function (awake) mode. After the vehicle is stationary for 5 minutes, the sensors switch from normal function
mode back to sleep mode to extend their battery life.
• Each tire pressure sensor has its own ID to prevent jamming by similar systems on other vehicles. After memorizing
all the sensor IDs, the TPMS control unit recognizes only those specific signals.
• An ID cannot be memorized automatically. The TPMS control unit knows which ID belongs to each tire pressure
sensor. This recurring ID confirmation prevents any confusion in the system as a result of normal tire rotation.
NOTE: Be careful not to bend the brackets on the TPMS control unit: Misalignment of the TPMS control unit could
interfere with sending and receiving signals.
TPMS Control Unit Tire Pressure Sensor

(With Radio Frequency Antenna) (Sensor-transmitter with acceleration sensor)
*07 model
'08-10 models
Circuit Diagram
BATTERY
G502 G202
DRIVER'S UNDER-DASH
FUSE/RELAY BOX CONNECTOR X (39P)

| 1 | 2 | 3 I j~4~|
I5 |/| 7 |/| | 9 |10|11|

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 > < 8 9 10 11 / / /
18 19 20 21
15 16 / /IXM 24 25 / 27 / / 30

| 12 | 13 | I21I/ T 23I
rrri 15
PCM CONNECTOR A (4SP)
|1 6 |/|1 8 |/|/| i/M
ri ri
" 1 2 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
1
■O
11 12 13 14 15 i e i 17’ 18 19
CM
/
L27J | / l / i 31132133134135l
I c3
1
22 23 24 X 2£i X 26 / 1
36 ra s L T l
29 30 31 32 33 34■35 / 38 39
47 48 49
CO
40 41 / 44,
LA .
DATA LINK CONNECTOR (DLC)
1/ / 4 5 6 7 / )
I* / / 12 7 14 / 16j
Terminal side of female terminals
TPMS CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR A (14P) TPMS CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR B (20P)
..n C? i__ri _
1 / 3 / 5 / / 9 10
44 / / / 4 19

DTC Troubleshooting
DTC 11, 13,15, 17: Tire Low Air Pressure 5. Note the tire pressure sensor(s) number by the
indicated DTC.
NOTE: If low tire pressure is detected, the TPMS control
unit sets one or more of these DTCs, and turns on the DTC Tare Pressure Sensor Number
low tire pressure indicator. If the low tire pressure 11 No. 1
indicator comes on because of a low tire pressure, and 13 No. 2
the customer corrects it before bringing the vehicle in, 15 No. 3
the DTCs will be stored, but the indicator turns off. 17 No. 4
1. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 6. Do the tire pressure sensor location procedure to
determine the affected tire location and relate it to the
2. Make sure the tires are inflated to the specified tire tire pressure sensor number (see page 18-105).
7. Check the TIRE 1, TIRE 2, TIRE 3, or TIRE 4 AIR
3. Test-drive the vehicle at 28 mph (45 km/h) or more for PRESSURE in the TPMS DATA LIST with the HDS, and
at least 1 minute. compare it with the actual measured tire pressure.
Does the low tire pressure indicator go off? Is the indicated tire pressure on the HDS within 40 kPa
YES-The system is OK at this time. Check for and (0.4 kgf/cm2, 6 psi) of the actual tire pressure?
repair the cause of air lo s s .l YES-Go to step 8.
NO-Go to step 4. NO-Replace the appropriate tire pressure sensor:
4. Check for DTCs with the HDS. '07 model (see page 18-128), '08-10 models (see page
18-131J.B
at least 1 minute.
Is DTC 11, 13,15, or 17 indicated?

18-127).11
NO-lf any other DTCs are indicated, troubleshoot the
appropriate DTC. If no DTCs are indicated, the system
is OK at this time.B
1
DTC 21,22,23,24: Tire Pressure Sensor 6. Do the tire pressure sensor location procedure to
Abnormally High Temperature determine the affected tire location and relate it to the
tire pressure sensor number (see page 18-105).
2. Make sure the tires have cooled down. TEMPERATURE in the TPMS DATA LIST with the
HDS.
NOTE: An abnormal rise in the internal temperature of
the tires can be caused by Is 176 °F (80 °C) or more indicated?
• Excessive braking
• Failure to release the parking brake (rear tires only) model (see page 18-128), '08-10 models (see page
• Leaving the vehicle running while parked (front 18-131).B
tires only)
NO-Go to step 8.
• Improper assembly of a wheel and tire
at least 1 minute. 9. Test-drive the vehicle at 28 mph (45 km/h) or more for
at least 1 minute.
Does the TPMS indicator go off?
the HDS.B Is DTC 21, 22, 23, or 24 indicated?
NO-Go to step 4. YES-Check for loose terminals and poor connections
known-good TPMS control unit (see page 18-127),
5. Note the tire pressure sensor(s) number by the and recheck.B
indicated DTC.
NO-lf any other DTCs are indicated, troubleshoot the
DTC T i re Pressure Sensor Number appropriate DTC. If no DTCs are indicated, the system
21 No. 1 is OK at this time.B
22 No. 2
23 No. 3
24 No. 4
DTC 31, 33,35,37: Tire Pressure Sensor Low 4. Do the tire pressure sensor location procedure to
Battery Voltage determine the affected tire location and relate it to the
NOTE: This problem occurs when the temperature
around the sensor is —40 °F (—40 °C) or less. Note that Did each tire pressure sensor respond to the TPMS tool?
the diagnosis must be made in a place where ambient YES-Go to step 5.
temperature is —40 °F (—40 °C) or more.
NO-Check that the tire pressure sensor is properly
1. Test-drive the vehicle at 28 mph (45 km/h) or more for mounted. If necessary, replace the appropriate tire
at least 1 minute. pressure sensor: '07 model (see page 18-128), '08-10
Does the TPMS indicator go off? models (see page 18-131 ).B
YES-The system is OK at this time. Clear the DTC with 5. Check the TIRE 1, TIRE 2, TIRE 3, or TIRE 4 PRESSURE
the HDS.B SENSOR BATTERY STATUS in the TPMS DATA LIST
with the HDS.
NO-Go to step 2.
Is LOW indicated?
3. Note the tire pressure sensor(s) number by the model (see page 18-128), '08-10 models (see page
indicated DTC. 18-131 ),B
DTC Tire Pressure Sensor Number NO-Check for loose terminals and poor connections
31 No. 1 at the TPMS control unit. If necessary, substitute a
33 No. 2 known-good TPMS control unit (see page 18-127),
35 No. 3 and recheck.B
37 No. 4
I
DTC 32,34,36,38: Tire Pressure Sensor Signal 6. Do the tire pressure sensor location procedure to
Failure determine the affected tire location and relate it to the
NOTE: Inspect for an aftermarket electrical device(s)
(such as an inverter, battery charger, CB radio, etc) D id each tire pressure sensor respond to the TPMS tool?
interfering with the RF signal from the sensors when YES-Go to step 7.
driving the vehicle.
NO-Check for an aftermarket electrical device
1. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). interfering with the RF signals from the sensors. If
2. Make sure all four wheels are TPMS wheels with the there are no electrical devices causing interference,
mounted tire pressure sensors. replace the appropriate tire pressure sensor: '07
model (see page 18-128), '08-10 models (see page
Are TPMS type wheels with a tire pressure sensor 18-13D.B
mounted on the vehicle?
7. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), and wait 5
YES-Go to step 3. minutes or more.
NO-lnstall a TPMS type wheel, and memorize the 8. Test-drive the vehicle at 28 mph (45 km/h) or more for
pressure sensor ID with the HDS (see page 18-104).B at least 1 minute.
3. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 9. Check if the value of the AIR PRESSURE and AIR
TEMPERATURE of the affected sensor changes from
DEFAULT to the correct tire pressure on the TPMS
5. Note the tire pressure sensor(s) number by the DATA LIST with the HDS.
indicated DTC.
Does the value of the AIR PRESSURE and AIR
DTC T ire Pressure Sensor Number TEMPERATURE change from DEFAULT to the correct
32 No. 1 tire pressure?
34 No. 2 YES-The system is OK at this time. Clear the DTC with
36 No. 3 the HDS.B
38 No. 4
NO-Replace the appropriate tire pressure sensor:
’07 model (see page 18-128), ’08-10 models (see page
18-131 ).B
DTC 41: Abnormal Signal Reception Error DTC 51,53r 55#57: Tire Pressure Sensor
NOTE:
Registration Error
• Inspect for an aftermarket electrical device(s) (such as NOTE:
an inverter, battery charger, CB radio, etc) interfering • The following DTCs will only set during initialization
with the RF signal from the sensors when driving the with the HDS.
vehicle. • Inspect for an aftermarket electrical device(s) (such as
• If DTC 32,34,36, or 38 is also set, troubleshoot those an inverter, battery charger, CB radio, etc) interfering
DTCs first. with the RF signal from the sensors when driving the
1.Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). vehicle.
2. Make sure all four wheels are TPMS type wheels with 1. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
mounted tire pressure sensors. 2. Make sure all four wheels are TPMS type wheels with
Are TPMS type wheels with tire pressure sensors mounted tire pressure sensors.
mounted on the vehicle? Are TPMS type wheels with a tire pressure sensor
YES-Go to step 3. mounted on the vehicle?
NO-lnstall a TPMS type wheel, and memorize the YES-Go to step 3.

pressure sensor ID with the HDS (see page 18-104).B NO-lnstall a TPMS type wheel, and memorize the
3. Memorize the tire pressure sensor ID with the HDS pressure sensor ID with the HDS (see page 18-104).B
(see page 18-104). 3. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
D id each tire pressure sensor respond to the TPMS tool? 4. Check for DTCs with the HDS.
YES-The system is OK at this time, clear the DTC with 5. Note the tire pressure sensor(s) number by the
the HDS.B indicated DTC.
NO-Replace the TPMS control unit (see page DTC Tire Pressure Sensor Number
18-127).B 51 No. 1
53 No. 2
55 No. 3
57 No. 4
1
6. Do the tire pressure sensor location procedure to DTC 81: TPMS Control Unit Failure
determine the affected tire location and relate it to the
tire pressure sensor number (see page 18-105). NOTE: Low battery voltage can cause this DTC. Make
sure the battery is fully charged and in good condition
Did each tire pressure sensor respond to the TPMS tool? (see page 22-111).
YES-Go to step 7. 1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
NO-Check for an aftermarket electrical device 2. Clear the DTC with the HDS.
interfering with the RF signals from the sensors. If
there are no electrical devices causing interference, 3. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), then turn the
replace the appropriate tire pressure sensor: '07 ignition switch to ON (II) again.
model (see page 18-128), '08-10 models (see page 4. Check for DTCs with the HDS.
18-131 ) . ■
7. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), and wait 5
minutes or more. YES-Replace the TPMS control unit (see page
18-127).B
at least 1 minute. NO-The system is OK at this time. Check for loose
terminals and poor connections at the TPMS control
9. Check for DTCs with the HDS. unit and G202. B

and recheck.B
NO-The system is OK at this time. Clear the DTC with
the HDS.B
DTC 83: NoVSP Signal DTC 85: F-CAN Communication Failure

NOTE: If DTC 85 stored at the same time as DTC 83, NOTE: Check for fuel and emissions systems DTCs with
troubleshoot DTC 85 first, then recheck for DTC 83. the HDS, and troubleshoot the PCM and F-CAN
communication errors first (see page 11-3).
3. Test-drive the vehicle at 7 mph (10 km/h) or more.
3. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), then turn the
4. Check the speedometer.
Does the speedometer register speed?
4. Wait about 5 seconds.
YES-Go to step 5.
NO-Update the PCM if it does not have the latest
software (see page 11-292), or substitute a
known-good PCM (see page 11-7), then go to step 1 YES-Go to step 6.
and recheck. If the PCM was updated and DTCs are
NO-The system is OK at this time.B
not indicated, troubleshooting is complete. If the PCM
was substituted and DTCs are not indicated, replace 6. Test-drive the vehicle.
the original PCM (see page 11 -294).ll
Does the speedometer work?
5. Check the VEHICLE SPEED in the TPMS DATA LIST
with the HDS. YES-Go to step 10.
Is the vehicle speed indicated? NO-Go to step 7.
YES-The system is OK at this tim e.B 7. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
NO-Substitute a known-good TPMS control unit (see 8. Disconnect TPMS control unit connector B (20P).
page 18-127), and recheck.B 9. Test-drive the vehicle.
Does the speedometer work?

and recheck.B
NO-Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), and
reconnect all connectors, then check and
troubleshoot the fuel and emissions system (see page
11-3).B
i / TPMS
10. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). DTC 91,93, 95,97: Tire Pressure Sensor
11. Short the SCS line with the HDS. Internal Error
12. Disconnect PCM connector A (49P). 1.Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
13. Disconnect TPMS control unit connector B (20P). 2. Check for DTCs with HDS.
14. Check for continuity between the TPMS control unit 3. Note the tire pressure sensor(s) number by the
connector B (20P) terminals and the PCM connector A indicated DTC.
(49P) terminals according to the table.
DTC Tire Pressure Sensor Number
Terminal TPMS Control PCM 91 No. 1
Name Unit Connector Connector A 93 No. 2
B (20P) (49P) Terminal 95 No. 3
Terminal 97 No. 4
CAN L No. 10 No. 49 4. Do the tire pressure sensor location procedure to
CAN H No. 19 No. 48 determine the affected tire location and relate it to the
Did each tire pressure sensor respond to the TPMS tool?
CAN L (RED)
n n *-i P
YES-Go to step 5.
n n 1
/ / / / / / 9 10 NO-Check that the tire pressure sensor is properly
u u
/ / 7/ / 19
u
7 mounted. If necessary, replace the appropriate tire
CAN H (WHT)
pressure sensor: '07 model (see page 18-128), '08-10
models (see page 18-131 ).B
r 3__ __ __________.—
J 1I2 / | 4 I5 I6 I7 8 9 110|i
r% 111213i4151617181920/ i 6. Test-drive the vehicle at 28 mph (45 km/h) or more for
■ 2222324X 25>< 2627/
93031 3435]/ / 3839 ■ at least 1 minute.
CO
CM
CO
CO
|40|41 / I / I 441 /| 464748|49| 7. Check for DTCs with the HDS.

CAN L
CAN H (WHT) (RED)
PCM CONNECTOR A (49P)
Terminal side of female terminals YES-Replace the appropriate tire pressure sensor: '07
model (see page 18-128), '08-10 models (see page
Is there continuity? 18-131), and recheck. If DTCs are still present,
substitute a known-good TPMS control unit (see page
18-127), and recheck.B
at the TPMS control unit and G202. If necessary,
substitute a known-good TPMS control unit (see page NO-lf any other DTCs are indicated, troubleshoot the
18-127), and recheck.B appropriate DTC. If no DTCs are indicated, the system
is OK at this time.B
the TPMS control unit and the PCM.B
Low tire pressure Indicator does not come on, 5. Do the tire pressure sensor location procedure to
and no DTCs are stored determine the affected tire location and relate it to the
NOTE: Check for gauge DTCs with the HDS (see page
22-6). If gauge DTCs are stored, troubleshoot those DTCs Did each tire pressure sensor respond to the TPMS tool?
first. YES-Go to step 6.
1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). NO-Check that the tire pressure sensor is properly
2. Check the low tire pressure indicator for several mounted. If necessary, replace the appropriate tire
seconds when the ignition switch is turned ON (II). pressure sensor: '07 model (see page 18-128), '08-10
models (see page 18-131).B
YES-Go to step 3. PRESSURE in the TPMS DATA LIST with the HDS, and
compare with the actual measured tire pressure.
module (see page 22-345). If necessary, substitute a Is the indicated tire pressure on the HDS within 40 kPa
known-good gauge control module (see page 22-371), (0.4 kgf/cm2, 6 psi) of the actual tire pressure?
and recheck.B
YES-Go to step 7.
at least 1 minute. NO-Replace the appropriate tire pressure sensor:
4. Stop the vehicle, and lower the pressure in each tire 18-13D.B
until the low tire pressure indicator comes on.
NOTE:
came on, make sure it goes off when you reinflate
• If 5 minutes has passed since finishing the last
test-drive, reactivate the appropriate tire pressure
sensor using the TPMS tool (see page 18-105).
Does the indicator come on when the pressure drops
YES-The system is OK at this tim e.B

NO-Go to step 5.
8. Disconnect TPMS control unit connector A (14P). Low tire pressure indicator does not go off,
9. Measure the voltage between TPMS control unit and no DTCs are stored
connector A (14P) terminals No. 3 and No. 5. 1. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
GND (BLK) IG1 (YEL)
_ I pi 1 *
1 / 3 7 5 / / seconds when the ignition switch is turned ON (II).
4 / / / Did the indicator come on, and then go off?
i— ® — ' YES-Check for loose terminals and poor connections

Wire side of female terminals known-good TPMS control unit (see page 18-127),
and recheck.B
YES-Repair a short to power in the wire between the module (see page 22-345). If necessary, substitute a
TPMS control unit and the No. 21 (7.5 A) fuse in the known-good gauge control module (see page 22-371),
driver's under-dash fuse/relay box.B and recheck.B

and recheck.B
TPMS indicator does not come on, and no TPMS indicator does not go off, and no DTCs
DTCs are stored are stored
1. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). NOTE;
2. Disconnect TPMS control unit connector B (20P). • Check for gauge DTCs with the HDS (see page 22-6). If
multiple DTCs are present, including B1178,
3. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). troubleshoot those DTCs first. If only DTC B1178 is
present, continue with the following troubleshooting.
4. Check the TPMS indicator for several seconds when
the ignition switch is turned ON (II). • If the TPMS control unit was replaced, the TPMS
indicator will be on until all four sensor ID codes are
D id the indicator come on? learned.
YES-Check for loose terminals and poor connections 1.Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
known-good TPMS control unit (see page 18-127), 2. Check the TPMS indicator for several seconds when
and recheck.B the ignition switch is turned ON (II).
Did the indicator come on, and then go o f f?
module (see page 22-345). If necessary, substitute a YES-The system is OK at this time.B
and recheck.B NO-Go to step 3.
4. Check the No. 1 (7.5 A) fuse in the driver's under-dash
fuse/relay box.
Is the fuse blown?
YES-Go to step 5.
E
6. With the No. 1 (7.5 A) fuse removed, check for 9. With the No. 21 (7.5 A) fuse removed, check for
continuity between body ground and TPMS control continuity between body ground and TPMS control
unit connector A (14P) terminal No. 1. unit connector A (14P) terminal No. 5.
TPMS CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR A (14P) TPMS CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR A (14P)
+ B (WHT/RED) 1G1 (YEL)
W ire side o f female term inals W ire side o f female term inals
Is there continuity? Is there continuity?
YES-Repair a short to body ground in the wire YES-Repair a short to body ground in the wire
between the No. 1 (7.5 A) fuse in the driver's between the No. 21 (7.5 A) fuse in the driver's
under-dash fuse/relay box and the TPMS control unit. under-dash fuse/relay box and the TPMS control unit.
NO-lnstall a new No. 1 (7.5 A) fuse in the driver's NO-lnstall a new No. 21 (7.5 A) fuse in the driver's
under-dash fuse/relay box, then go to step 10. under-dash fuse/relay box, then go to step 10.
7. Check the No. 21 (7.5 A) fuse in the driver's
under-dash fuse/relay box.
Is the fuse blown?
YES-Go to step 8.
11. Check the TPMS indicator for several seconds when 15. Measure the voltage between body ground and TPMS
the ignition switch is turned ON (II). control unit connector A (14P) terminal No. 5.
D id the indicator come on, and then go off?

YES-Troubleshooting is com plete.!
IG1 (YEL)
and recheck.B
control unit connector A (14P) terminal No. 1. Wire side of female terminals
TPMS CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR A (14P) Is there battery voltage?

+ B (WHT/RED) YES-Go to step 16.
.1 ri .. NO-Repair an open in the wire between the TPMS
1 z 73 / 5 / / control unit and the No. 21 (7.5 A) fuse in the driver's
/ / / / under-dash fuse/relay box.B
y )
YES-Go to step 14.

NO-Repair an open in the wire between the TPMS
under-dash fuse/relay box.B
TPMS Control Unit Replacement
s
16. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). NOTE: Make sure the TPMS control unit mounting
bracket is not bent or twisted as this may affect its
17. Reconnect TPMS control unit connector A (14P).
communication with the tire pressure sensors.
2. Remove the headliner (see page 20-116).
control unit connector A (14P) terminal No. 3.
3. Disconnect the TPMS control unit connectors (A).
GND (BLK)
Is there 0.1 V orm ore?
YES-Repair an open or high resistance in the wire

between the TPMS control unit and body ground
(G2G2).B
module (see page 22-345). If the gauge control
module is OK, check for loose terminals and poor
connections at the TPMS control unit. If necessary,
substitute a known-good TPMS control unit (see page 4. Remove the TPMS control unit (B) from the bracket
18-127), and recheck.B (C).
5. Install the TPMS control unit in the reverse order of
removal.
6. Connect the HDS, and memorize the tire pressure
sensor IDs using the TPMS tool (see page 18-104).
Tire Pressure Sensor Replacement
Removal - '07 Model 5. Position the wheel so that the tire machine (A) and the
(NOTICE I move away from it when the machine starts. Then

4. Remove any balance weights, and then remove the
tire from the wheel with a commercially available tire
changer (A).
INOTICE
sensor:
6. Remove and discard the valve stem nut (A), then
• Position the wheel as shown so the valve stem (B) is
90 degrees from the bead breaker (C) as shown. remove the tire pressure sensor and the valve stem
(B) from the wheel.
too close to the rim. NOTE: Use the new nut and the new valve stem on
reassembly.
Installation - *07 Model
NOTE:
NOTE: The valve stem grommet (D) might stay in the • Use only wheels that have a "TPMS" mark (A) on
wheel; make sure you remove it. them.
• The vehicle may be equipped with one of the three
types of wheels.
Type 1 (aluminum wheel)
Type 3 (steel wheel)

1. Assemble the new valve stem (A), the new screw (B), 3. Install the tire pressure sensor (A) to the wheel (B),
and the sensor-transmitter (C). and tighten the valve stem nut (C) finger tight. Make
sure the pressure sensor is resting on the wheel.
NOTE; Always use the new valve stem and the new
screw.
Replace.
2. Before installing the tire pressure sensor, clean the

mating surfaces on the sensor and the wheel.
Replace.

while holding the tire pressure sensor toward (D) the
wheel. You may hear a snap or pop as you tighten the
nut. This is normal.
NOTE:
• Do not reuse the nuts that had been tightened, even
one time, to the specified torque, as they are
deformed inside (E).
• Do not use air or electric impact tools to tighten the
valve stem nut.
• Tightening the nut beyond the specified torque can
damage the nut.
• Make sure that there is no space between the
sensor and the wheel.
5. Lube the tire bead sparingly with a paste-type tire Removal - *08-10 models
mounting lubricant, and position the wheel so that the
tire machine (A) are next to the valve stem (B) and will INOTICE
move away from it when the machine starts. Then Each tire pressure sensor contains a lithium anode
install the tire onto the wheel. battery that is not removable. The complete tire pressure

4. Remove any balance weights, and then break the
bead loose from the wheel with a commercially
available tire changer (A).
INOTICE
sensor:
• Position the wheel as shown so the valve stem (B) is
90 degrees from the bead breaker (C) as shown.
then adjust the tire pressure (see page 18-5), and • Do not position the bead breaker of the tire changer
install the valve stem cap. too close to the rim.
NOTE: Make sure the tire bead is seated on both sides

of the rim evenly.
7. Check and adjust the wheel balance, then install the
wheels to the vehicle.
8. Lower the vehicle. Torque the wheel nuts to
specifications (see step 2 on page 18-15).
9. Connect the HDS and memorize the tire pressure
sensor IDs using the TPMS tool (see page 18-104).
5. Position the wheel so that the tire machine (A) and the 7. Remove and discard the valve stem grommet (A)
tire iron (B) are next to the valve stem (C), and will from the tire pressure sensor (B).
move away from it when the machine starts. Then
NOTE:
remove the tire from the wheel.
• The valve stem grommet might stay in the wheel;
make sure you remove it.
• Always use a new valve stem grommet whenever
the tire pressure sensor has been removed from the
wheel, or when replacing the tire.
6. Remove the valve stem nut (A) and the washer (B),
then remove the tire pressure sensor with the valve
stem (C) from the wheel.
NOTE: Check the nut and the washer, if they have
deterioration or damage, replace them with new ones
during reassembly.
Installation - *08-10 models 1. Before installing the tire pressure sensor, clean the
mating surfaces on the sensor and the wheel.
NOTE:
2. Install the tire pressure sensor (A) and the washer (B)
• Use only wheels that have a "TPMS" stamp (A) on the
to the wheel (C), and tighten the valve stem nut (D)
inside of the aluminum wheels, and the out side of the
finger tight. Make sure the pressure sensor is resting
steel wheels.
on the wheel.
• The vehicle may be equipped with one of the three
types of wheels. NOTE: Install the tire pressure sensor so that the
sensor housing surface (E) should not exceed the
Type 1 (aluminum wheel) protrusion (F) of the wheel to prevent the sensor
housing from being caught on the bead of the tire
when assembling the tire. Be sure to always mount
the tire pressure sensor with the feet (G) in the
downward position toward the wheel.
4 N-m
(0.4 kgf-m,
E F E
Type 3 (steel wheel)

while holding the tire pressure sensor.
NOTE:
• Do not use air or electric impact tools to tighten a
valve stem nut.
• Do not twist the tire pressure sensor to adjust its
position with the wheel, as this will damage or
deform the valve stem grommet.
4. Lube the tire bead sparingly with a paste-type tire

mounting lubricant, and position the wheel so that the
tire machine (A) are next to the valve stem (B) and will
move away from it when the machine starts. Then
install the tire onto the wheel.

then adjust the tire pressure (see page 18-5), then
install the valve stem cap.
NOTE: Make sure the tire bead is seated on both sides
of the rim evenly.
6. Check and adjust the wheel balance, then install the
wheels on the vehicle.
7. Lower the vehicle. Torque the wheel nuts to
specifications (see step 2 on page 18-15).
8. Connect the HDS, and memorize the pressure sensor
IDs using the TPMS tool (see page 18-104).
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) (if brakes maintenance Is required)
Service Manual. Items marked with an asterisk (*) on the contents page include or are located near SRS
these circuits.
Brakes
Conventional Brake Components........................19-1

VSA System Components.................................... 19-51
Brakes
C o n ven tio n al B rake C o m p o n e n ts

Special T o o ls .................................................... . ........... 19-2
Component Location Index........... ................................ 19-3
Brake System Inspection and Test............................... 19-4
Symptom Troubleshooting............................................19-5
Brake Pedal and Brake Pedal Position Switch
Adjustment..................................................................19-6
Parking Brake Inspection and Adjustment.................. 19-10
Brake System Bleeding................................................. 19-12
Brake System Indicator Circuit Diagram..................... 19-13
Parking Brake Switch Test............................................. 19-14
Brake Fluid Level Switch Test....................................... 19-14
Front Brake Pad Inspection and Replacement.............19-15
Front Brake Disc Inspection.......................................... 19-18
Front Brake Disc Replacement......................................19-19
Front Brake Caliper Overhaul....................................... 19-20
Master Cylinder Replacement....................................... 19-22
Master Cylinder Inspection............................................19-23
Brake Booster Test.........................................................19-23
Brake Booster Pushrod Clearance Adjustment........... 19-25
Brake Booster Replacement........................ ................. 19-26
Rear Brake Pad Inspection and Replacement.............19-28
Rear Brake Disc Inspection........................................... 19-31
Rear Brake Disc Replacement...................................... 19-32
Rear Brake Caliper Overhaul................. ................. . 19-34
Parking Brake Inspection.............................................. 19-36
Parking Brake Shoe Replacement................................19-38
Parking Brake Shoe Lining Break-in.............................19-41
Power Adjustable Pedals System Circuit Diagram. ...19-42
Power Adjustable Pedals Replacement...................... 19-43
Power Adjustable Pedals Switch Test and
Replacement...............................................................19-44
Brake Pedal Replacement............................................. 19-44
Brake Hose and Line Inspection...................................19-45
Brake Hose Replacement.............................................. 19-46
Parking Brake Cable Replacement................................19-48
Special Tools
Ref.No. Tool Number Descripti on Qty

® 070AB-SJA0100 Booster Piston Holder 1
© 07AAE-SEPA101 Brake Caliper Piston Compressor 1
I
BRAKE SYSTEM INDICATOR
Circuit Diagram, page 19-13
Parking Brake Switch Test, page 19-14
Brake Fluid Level Switch Test, page 19-14
POWER ADJUSTABLE
PEDALS SWITCH
Test and Replacement, page 19-44
BRAKE HOSE and LINE

Inspection, page 19-45
Brake Hose Replacement, page 19-46
PARKING DRUM BRAKE

Shoe Replacement, page 19-38
Shoe Lining
Break-in, page 19-41
REAR DISC BRAKE

Pad Inspection and
Disc Inspection, page 19-31
Disc Replacement, page 19-32
MASTER CYLINDER Caliper Overhaul, page 19-34
Brake System Bleeding, page 19-12
Inspection, page 19-23 PARKING BRAKE
Inspection and Adjustment, page 19-10
Cable Replacement, page 19-48
BRAKE BOOSTER FRONT BRAKE

Test, page 19-23 Pad Inspection and Replacement, page 19-15
Pushrod Clearance Disc Inspection, page 19-18
Adjustment, page 19-25 Disc Replacement, page 19-19
Replacement, page 19-26 Caliper Overhaul, page 19-20
BRAKE PEDAL
Without Power Adjustable Pedals
Adjustment, page 19-6
With Power Adjustable Pedals
Power Adjustable Pedals System
Power Adjustable Pedals
Brake System Inspection and Test
Inspect the brake system components listed. Repair or replace any parts that are leaking or damaged.
C o m p o n e n t Inspections:
Component Procedure Also check for
Master Cylinder Look for damage or signs of fluid leakage at: Bulging seal at reservoir cap. This is a
• Reservoir or reservoir grommets. sign of fluid contamination.
• Line joints.
• Between master cylinder and booster.
Brake Hoses Look for damage or signs of fluid leakage at: Bulging, twisted, or bent lines.
• Line joints and banjo bolt connections.
• Hoses and lines, also inspect for twisting or
damage.
Caliper Look for damage or signs of fluid leakage at: Seized or sticking caliper pins.
• Piston seal.
• Banjo bolt connections.
• Bleed screw.
VSA Modulator- Look for damage or signs of fluid leakage at:
control Unit • Line joints.
• Modulator-control unit.
Brake System Test
Brake pedal sinks/fades when braking
1. Set the parking brake, and start the engine, then turn off the A/C. Allow the engine to warm up to normal operating
temperature (radiator fan comes on twice).
2. Attach a 50 mm (2 in) piece of masking tape along the bottom of the steering wheel, and draw a horizontal reference
mark across it.
3. With the transmission in P or N, press and hold the brake pedal lightly (about the same pressure needed to keep an
A/T-equipped vehicle from creeping), then release the parking brake.
4. While still holding the brake pedal, hook the end of the tape measure behind the brake pedal, then pull the tape up to
the steering wheel. Note the measurement between the brake pedal and the reference mark on the steering wheel.
5. Apply steady pressure to the brake pedal for 3 minutes.
6. Watch the tape measure.
• If the measurement increases 10 mm (3/8 in) or less, the master cylinder is OK.
• If the measurement increases more than 10 mm (3/8 in), replace the master cylinder.
©
Rapid brake pad wear, vehicle vibration (after 5. Loosen the hydraulic lines at the master cylinder, then
spin the wheels to check for brake drag.
a long drive), or high, hard brake pedal
Is there brake drag at any o f the wheels?
NOTE: Make sure that the caliper pins are installed
correctly. Upper caliper pin B and lower caliper pin A are YES-Go to step 6.
different. If these caliper pins are installed in the wrong
location, it will cause vibration, uneven or rapid brake NO-Check the master cylinder reservoir for
pad wear, and possibly uneven tire wear. For proper contamination in the brake fluid. If you find
caliper pin location (see page 19-20). contamination, flush the entire brake system of all
contaminated fluid, then replace all rubber parts in
1. Drive the vehicle until the brakes drag or until the the brake system that were exposed to contaminated
pedal is high and hard. This can take 20 or more brake fluid. If the brake fluid is OK, replace the master
pedal applications during an extended test-drive. cylinder and adjust the pushrod clearance (see page
19-25).B
2. With the engine running, raise the vehicle, and spin all
four wheels by hand. 6. Loosen the bleed screws at each caliper, then spin the
wheels to check for brake drag.
Is there brake drag at any of the wheels?
Is there brake drag at any o f the wheels?
YES-Go to step 3.
YES-Check the master cylinder reservoir for
NO-Look for other causes of pad wear, high pedal, or
contamination in the brake fluid. If you find
vehicle vibration.!
contamination, flush the entire brake system of all
3. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), press the brake contaminated fluid, then replace all rubber parts in
pedal several times to deplete the vacuum in the the brake system that were exposed to contaminated
brake booster, and then spin the wheels again to fluid. If the brake fluid is OK, disassemble and repair
check for brake drag. the caliper on the wheel(s) with brake drag.B
Is there brake drag at any of the wheels? NO-Look for and replace any damaged brake lines. If
all brake lines are OK, replace the VSA
YES-Go to step 4. modulator-control unit (see page 19-103).B
NO-Replace the brake booster (see page 19-26).B
4. Without removing the brake lines, unbolt and
separate the master cylinder from the brake booster,
then spin the wheels to check for brake drag.
Is there brake drag at any of the wheels?
YES-Go to step 5.
NO-Check the brake pedal position switch
adjustment, and pedal free play: Without power
adjustable pedals (see page 19-6), with power
adjustable pedals (see page 19-7).B
Brake Pedal and Brake Pedal Position Switch Adjustment
Pedal Height on Models without Power 3. Loosen the pushrod locknut (A), and screw the
push rod (B ) in or out with pliers until the standard
Adjustable Pedals
pedal height from the floor is reached. After
1. Turn the brake pedal position switch (A) 45° adjustment, tighten the locknut firmly. Do not adjust
counterclockwise, and pull it back until it is no longer the pedal height with the pushrod pressed.
touching the brake pedal.
Lower the pedal
Raise the pedal
10 x 1.25 mm
26 N-m
B ra k e P e d a l P o s itio n S w itc h A d ju s tm e n t
4. Lift up on the brake pedal by hand. Push in the brake
pedal position switch until its plunger is fully pressed
(threaded end (A) touching the pad (B) on the pedal
arm). Turn the switch 45 ° clockwise to lock it. The gap
between the brake pedal position switch and the pad
is automatically adjusted to 0.7 mm (0.028 in) by
locking the switch. Make sure the brake lights go off
when the pedal is released.
2. Pull back the carpet, and find the cutout in the

insulation. Measure the pedal height (B) at the middle
of the left side center on the brake pedal pad (C) to the
floor without the insulation.
S t a n d a r d pedal h e i g h t ( w i t h carpet removed):
155 mm (6.1 in)
5. Check the brake pedal free play.

Pedal Height on Model w ith Power 3. Turn the brake pedal position switch (A) 45°
counterclockwise, and pull it back until it is no longer
Adjustable Pedals
touching the brake pedal.
1. Measure the movement range of the adjustable brake
pedal by pushing the power adjustable pedals switch
to fully retract the pedal, then pushing the switch to
fully extend the pedal.
• If the range of movement is not 76 mm (3 in), check

the connector that supplies power to the adjusting
motor, the tightness of the nuts and bolts that
secure the power adjustable pedals to the vehicle's
body, the power adjustable pedals switch, and all
the moving parts that relate to movement.
• If the problem cannot be fixed, replace the power
adjustable pedals assembly (see page 19-43).
• Check the range of movement again. If the range is
76 mm (3 in), go to the step 2.
2. Before checking the brake pedal height, move the

brake pedal and accelerator pedal fully forward until
they stop by pushing the switch. 4. Pull back the carpet, and find the cutout in the
insulation. Measure the pedal height (B) at the middle
of the left side center on the brake pedal pad (C) to the
floor without the insulation.
Standard pedal height (with carpet removed):
155 mm (6.1 i n)
Brake Pedal and Brake Pedal Position Switch Adjustment (cont'd)
5. Loosen the pushrod locknut (A), and screw the Brake Pedal Position Switch Adjustment
pushrod (B) in or out with pliers until the standard
6. Lift up on the brake pedal by hand. Push in the brake
pedal height from the floor is reached. After
pedal position switch until its plunger is fully pressed
adjustment, tighten the locknut firmly. Do not adjust
(threaded end (A) touching the pad (B) on the pedal
the pedal height with the pushrod pressed.
arm). Turn the switch 45 ° clockwise to lock it. The gap
between the brake pedal position switch and the pad
is automatically adjusted to 0.7 mm (0.028 in) by
locking the switch. Make sure the brake lights go off
when the pedal is released.
8. Check the distance between the brake pedal and the Pedal Free Play
accelerator pedal. The brake pedal and the accelerator
pedal move simultaneously with a fixed distance of 1. With the ignition switch in LOCK (0), inspect the free
4 5± 5 mm (1.8±0.2 in). play (A) at the pedal pad (B) by pushing the brake
pedal by hand. If the pedal free play is out of
specification, adjust the brake pedal position switch
(C). If the brake pedal free play is insufficient, it may
result in brake drag.
Free play: 1 —5 mm (0.04—0.20 in)
Without power adjustable pedals
45±5 m m
(1.8±0.2 i n)
9. Loosen the flange bolts (A) to adjust the distance

between the brake pedal and the accelerator pedal.
After adjustment, tighten the flange bolts firmly.
NOTE: Readjust the accelerator pedal distance from
the brake pedal whenever the brake pedal is adjusted.
A
8 x 1.0 mm W i th power adjustable pedals
22-N-m
Parking Brake Inspection and Adjustment
inspection Minor Adjustment

1. Press the parking brake pedal (A) with 294 N {30 kgf, 1. Raise the vehicle (see page 1-14).
66 Ibf) of force to fully apply the parki ng brake. The
2. Release the parking brake pedal fully.
parking brake pedal should be locked within the
specified number of clicks. 3. Press the parking brake pedal 1 click.
Pedal locked clicks: 4 to 5 clicks 4. Tighten the parking brake adjusting nut (A) until the
parking brakes drag slightly when the rear wheels are
turned.
2. If the number of pedal clicks is not as specified, adjust

the parking brake.
NOTE: Minor parking brake pedal adjustments 5. Release the parking brake pedal fully, and check that
(1 to 2 clicks) can be made with the adjusting nut (see the parking brakes do not drag when the rear wheels
parking brake minor adjustment). If a larger are turned. Readjust if necessary.
adjustment is required, follow the major adjustment 6. Make sure the parking brake pedal is within the
procedure using the adjuster at the parking brake specified number of clicks (4 to 5 clicks).
drum (see parking brake major adjustment).
After installing new parking brake shoes and/or a new
brake disc/drum, make sure you drive the vehicle for
"break-in" (see page 19-41).
Major Adjustment (to be done when 5. Remove the access plug (A).
replacing brake shoes and after brake lining
surface break-in)
3. Loosen the parking brake adjusting nut (A).
6. Turn the ratchet teeth on the adjuster (B) with a flat-tip

screwdriver (C) until the shoes lock against the
parking brake drum. Then back off the adjuster
10 clicks, and install the access plug.
7. Clean the mating surfaces between the brake
disc/drum and the inside of the wheel, then install the
rear wheels.
8. Do the minor adjustment procedure.
Brake System Bleeding
NOTE: 4. Attach a length of clear drain tube (A) to the bleed

• Do not reuse the drained fluid. Use only new Honda screw (B), then loosen the bleed screw to allow air to
DOT 3 Brake Fluid from an unopened container. Using escape from the system. Then tighten the bleed screw
a non-Honda brake fluid can cause corrosion and securely.
shorten the life of the system.
Front
• Make sure no dirt or other foreign matter gets in the
brake fluid. B
9 N-m
• Do not spill brake fluid on the vehicle; it may damage
the paint. If brake fluid does contact the paint, wash it
off immediately with water.
• The reservoir connected to the master cylinder must
be at the MAX (upper) level mark at the start of the
bleeding procedure, and checked after bleeding each
wheel location. Add fluid as required.
1. Make sure the brake fluid level in the reservoir (A) is at
the MAX (upper) level line (B).
B
9 N-m
2. Have someone slowly pump the brake pedal several

times, then apply steady pressure.
3. Start the bleeding at the driver's side of the front
brake system.
NOTE: Bleed the calipers in the sequence shown.
5. Refill the master cylinder reservoir to the MAX (upper)
BLEEDING SEQUENCE: level line.
6. Repeat the procedure for each brake circuit until there
© Front Right © Rear Right
are no air bubbles in the fluid.
® Front Left © Rear Left

Brake System Indicator Circuit Diagram
INDICATOR DRIVER CIRCUIT A24

WHT VSA MODULATOR-
A23 CONTROL UNIT
BRAKE SYSTEM INDICATOR (EBD INDICATOR)
RED
—
A8
GRN/ORN
1
BRAKE FLUID PARKING BRAKE
O \ LEVEL SWITCH SWITCH
CLOSED; Float down CLOSED; Appli ed
OPEN: Float up OPEN: Released
BLK
G401
Parking Brake Switch Test Brake Fluid Level Switch Test
NOTE: If both the ABSA/SA indicator and the brake 1. Disconnect the brake fluid level switch connector.
system indicator come on at the same time, check the
2. Check for continuity between the terminals (1) and (2)
VSA system for DTCs first (see page 19-53).
with the float in the down position and in the up
1. Disconnect the parking brake switch connector (A) position.
from the parking brake switch (B).
NOTE:
• If both the ABSA/SA indicator and the brake system
indicator come on at the same time, check the VSA
system for DTCs first (see page 19-53).
• Remove the brake fluid completely from the
reservoir. With the float down, there should be
continuity.
• Fill the reservoir with brake fluid to the MAX (upper)
level (A). With the float up, there should be no
continuity.
• If the parking brake switch and fluid level switch are
OK, but the brake system indicator does not
function, do the gauge control module
self-diagnostic function (see page 22-345).
2. Check for continuity between the switch terminal (C)
and body ground.
• With the parking brake pedal pressed, there should

be continuity.
• With the parking brake pedal released, there should
be no continuity.
NOTE: If the parking brake switch and the brake fluid
level switch are OK, but the brake system indicator
does not function, do the gauge control module
3. Reconnect the parking brake switch connector.
Special Tools Required Replacement
Brake Caliper Piston Compressor 07AAE-SEPA101
1. Remove some brake fluid from the master cylinder.
ik CAUTION 2. Raise the vehicle (see page 1-14).
Frequent inhalation of brake pad dust, regardless of 3. Remove the front wheels.
material composition, could be hazardous to your
health. 4. Remove the flange bolt (A) while holding the caliper
• Avoid breathing dust particles. pin (B) with a wrench. Be careful not to damage the
• Never use an air hose or brush to clean brake pin boot, and pivot the caliper (C) up out of the way.
assemblies. Use an OSHA-approved vacuum Check the hose and the pin boots for damage and
cleaner. deterioration.
Inspection
3. Check the thickness (A) of the inner pad (B) and the
outer pad (C). Do not include the thickness of the
backing plate.
Brake pad thickness;
Standard; 11.0-12.0 mm (0.43-0.47 in)
Service li mit: 1.6 mm (0.06 in)
5. Remove the brake pads (A) and the pad shims (B).
4. If any part of the brake pad thickness is less than the

service limit, replace the brake pads as a set.
5. Clean the mating surfaces between the brake disc and
the inside of the wheel, then install the front wheels.
Front Brake Pad Inspection and Replacement (cont'd)
6. Remove the pad retainers (A). 11. Install the brake caliper piston compressor tool (A) on
the caliper (B).
7. Clean the caliper bracket (B) thoroughly; remove any

rust, and check for grooves and cracks. Verify that the
caliper pins (C) move in and out smoothly. Clean and 12. Press in the piston with the brake caliper piston
lube if needed. compressor tool so the caliper will fit over the brake
pads. Make sure the piston boot is in position to
8. Inspect the brake disc for runout, thickness, prevent damaging it when pivoting the caliper down.
parallelism (see page 19-18), and check for damage
and cracks. NOTE: Be careful when pressing in the piston; brake
fluid might overflow from the master cylinder's
9. Apply a thin coat of M-77 assembly paste (P/N reservoir. If brake fluid gets on any painted surface,
08798-9010) to the retainer mating surfaces of the wash it off immediately with water.
caliper bracket (indicated by the arrows).
13. Remove the brake caliper piston compressor tool.
10. Install the pad retainers. Wipe excess assembly paste
off the retainers. Keep the assembly paste off the
brake disc and the brake pads.
14. Apply a thin coat of M-77 assembly paste (P/N 16. Pivot the caliper down into position. Install the flange
08798-9010) to the pad side of the shims (A), the back bolt (A), and tighten it to the specified torque while
of the brake pads (B) and the other areas indicated by holding the caliper pin (B) with a wrench being careful
the arrows. Wipe excess assembly paste off the pad not to damage the pin boot.
shims and the brake pads friction material. Keep
grease and assembly paste off the brake disc and the
brake pads. Contaminated brake disc or brake pads
reduce stopping ability.
18. Press the brake pedal several times to make sure the
15. Install the brake pads and the pad shims correctly. brakes work.
Install the brake pad with the wear indicator (C) on the
upper inside. If you are reusing the brake pads, NOTE: Engagement may require a greater pedal
always reinstall the brake pads in their original stroke immediately after the brake pads have been
positions to prevent a temporary loss of braking replaced as a set. Several applications of the brake
efficiency. pedal will restore the normal pedal stroke.
19. Add brake fluid as needed.
20. After installation, check for leaks at hose and line
joints or connections, and retighten if necessary.
Test-drive the vehicle, then recheck for leaks (see
page 19-45).
Front Brake Disc inspection
Runout Thickness and Parallelism

1 . R a i s e t h e v e h ic l e ( s e e p a g e 1 - 1 4 ) . 1. Raise the vehicle (see page 1-14).
2. R e m o v e th e fro n t w h e e ls . 2. Remove the front wheels.
3. R e m o v e th e b ra k e p a d s (s e e p a g e 19 -1 5 ). 3. Remove the brake pads (see page 19-15).
4. Inspect the brake disc to wheel surface for damage 4. Using a micrometer, measure the brake disc
and cracks. Clean the brake disc thoroughly, and thickness at eight points, about 45 ° apart and 10 mm
remove all rust. (3/8 in) in from the outer edge of the brake disc.
Replace the brake disc if the smallest measurement is
5. Install suitable flat washers (A) and the wheel nuts (B), less than the max. refinishing limit.
and tighten the wheel nuts to the specified torque to
hold the brake disc securely against the hub. Brake disc thickness:
Standard; 27.9—28.1 mm (1.10—1.11 in)
Max. refinishing limit: 26.0 mm (1.02 in)
Brake disc parallelism: 0.015 mm (0.0006 in) max.
NOTE: This is the maximum allowable difference
between the thickness measurements.
(13.0 kgf-m, 94.0 Ibf-ft)
6. Set up the dial gauge against the brake disc as shown,

and measure the runout at 10 mm (3/8 in) from the
outer edge of the brake disc.
Brake disc runout: 5. If the brake disc is beyond the service limit for
Service limit: 0.04 mm (0.002 in) parallelism, refinish the brake disc with a
Honda-approved commercially available on-car brake
7. If the brake disc is beyond the service limit, refinish
lathe.
the brake disc with a Honda-approved commercially
available on-car brake lathe. NOTE: If the brake disc is beyond the service limit for
Max. refinishing limit: 26.0 mm (1.02 in) refinishing, replace it (see page 19-19).
NOTE: 6. Install the brake pads (see page 19-15).

• If the brake disc is beyond the service limit for 7. Clean the mating surfaces between the brake disc and
refinishing, replace it (see page 19-19). the inside of the wheel, then install the front wheels.
• If the brake disc is replaced with a new one, check
the new disc for runout. If the new disc is out of
specification, refinish the disc.
8. Install the brake pads (see page 19-15).
9 . Clean the mating surfaces between the brake disc and
Front Brake Disc Replacement
NOTE; Keep any grease off the brake disc and the brake 5. Remove the brake disc flathead screws (A),
pads.
3. Remove the brake hose mounting bolt (A) from the
damper.
8 x 1.25 mm
6. Remove the brake disc (B) from the front hub.

NOTE: If the brake disc is stuck to the front hub, thread
two 8 x 1.25 mm bolts (C) into the brake disc to push it
4. Remove the brake caliper bracket mounting bolts (B), away from the front hub. Turn each bolt 90 degrees at
then remove the caliper assembly (C) from the a time to prevent the brake disc from binding.
knuckle. To prevent damage to the caliper assembly 7. Install the brake disc in the reverse order of removal.
or brake hose, use a short piece of wire to hang the
caliper assembly from the undercarriage. Do not twist NOTE: Before installing the brake disc, clean the
the brake hose excessively. mating surfaces between the front hub and the inside
of the brake disc.
8. Inspect the brake disc runout (see page 19-18).
the inside of the wheel, then install the front wheel.
Front Brake Caliper Overhaul
i4 CAUTION
Frequent inhalation of brake pad dust, regardless of material composition, could be hazardous to your health.
• Avoid breathing dust particles.
• Never use an air hose or brush to clean brake assemblies. Use an OSHA-approved vacuum cleaner._____________
Remove, disassemble, inspect, reassemble, and install the caliper, and note these items:
NOTE: Make sure that the caliper pins are installed correctly. Upper caliper pin B and lower caliper pin A are different. If
these caliper pins are installed in the wrong location, it will cause vibration, uneven or rapid brake pad wear, and
possibly uneven tire wear
• Do not spill brake fluid on the vehicle; it may damage the paint. If brake fluid gets on the paint, wash it off immediately
with water.
• To prevent dripping brake fluid, cover disconnected hose joints with clean rags or shop towels.
• Clean all parts in brake fluid and air dry; blow out all passages with compressed air.
• Before reassembling, check that all parts are free of dirt and other foreign particles.
• Replace parts with new ones as specified in the illustration.
• Make sure no dirt or other foreign matter gets in the brake fluid.
• Make sure no grease or oil gets on the brake discs or the pads.
• When reusing brake pads, always reinstall them in their original positions to prevent loss of braking efficiency.
• Do not reuse drained brake fluid. Use only new Honda DOT 3 Brake Fluid from an unopened container. Using a
non-Honda brake fluid can cause corrosion and shorten the life of the system.
• Coat the pistons, piston seal grooves, and the caliper bores with clean brake fluid.
• Use recommended greases in the front caliper set.
• After installing the caliper, check the brake hose and line for leaks, interference, and twisting.
CALIPER
Master Cylinder Replacement
INOTICE I 8. Install the master cylinder in the reverse order of

the paint. If brake fluid gets on the paint, wash it off
immediately with water. • Coat the inner bore lip and the new O-ring with the
Shin-Etsu silicone grease (P/N 08798-9013).
• Be careful not to damage or bend the brake lines
during removal and installation. • Make sure not to get any silicone grease on the
terminal part of the connectors and switches,
• After removal, plug the ends of the hoses and the
especially if you have silicone grease on your hands
joints to prevent spilling brake fluid.
or gloves.
1. Remove the air cleaner housing and the intake air • If the master cylinder is replaced with a new one,
duct (see page 11-427). check the brake booster pushrod clearance before
installing it (see page 19-25).
2. Remove the reservoir cap and the brake fluid from the
• Check the brake pedal height and free play after
master cylinder reservoir with a syringe.
installing the master cylinder, and adjust it if
3. Disconnect the brake fluid level switch connector (A). necessary: Without power adjustable pedals (see
page 19-6), With power adjustable pedals (see page
F 19-7).
9. Bleed the brake system (see page 19-12).
10. Spin the wheels to check for brake drag.
4. Disconnect the brake lines (B) from the master

cylinder (C). To prevent spills, cover the hose joints
with clean rags or shop towels.
5. Remove the master cylinder mounting nuts (D).
6. Remove the master cylinder from the brake booster
(E). Be careful not to bend or damage the brake lines
when removing the master cylinder.
7. Remove the O-ring (F) from the master cylinder.
NOTE: Replace the O-ring whenever the master
cylinder is removed.
Master Cylinder Inspection Brake Booster Test
1. Remove the master cylinder (see page 19-22). Functional Test

2. Inspect and note these items: 1. With the ignition switch in LOCK (0), press the brake
pedal several times to deplete the vacuum reservoir,
Before reassembling, check that all parts are free of then press the brake pedal hard and hold it for
dirt and other foreign particles. 15 seconds. If the brake pedal sinks, either the master
Do not try to disassemble the master cylinder cylinder is bypassing internally or the brake system is
assembly. Replace the master cylinder assembly leaking. Inspect the brake hoses and lines (see page
with a new part if necessary. 19-45).
Do not allow dirt or foreign matter to contaminate
2. Start the engine with the brake pedal pressed. If the
the brake fluid.
brake pedal sinks slightly, the vacuum booster is
RESERVOIR CAP operating normally. If the brake pedal height does not
Check the vent holes vary, do the brake system test (see page 19-4).
for blockage.
Check for leaks, rust, and

damage.
3. Install the master cylinder (see page 19-22).

Brake Booster Test (cont'd)
Leak Test 3. Disconnect the brake booster vacuum hose (A) at the
booster. The check valve (B) is built into the hose.
1. Press the brake pedal with the engine running, then
turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). The brake pedal B
height should not vary while pressed for 30 seconds.
• If the pedal height rises, go to step 6.

• If it does not rise, go to step 2.
2. Start the engine and let it idle for 30 seconds. Turn the
ignition switch to LOCK (0), and wait 30 seconds.
Press the brake pedal several times using normal
pressure. When the pedal is first pressed, it should be
low. On consecutive applications, the pedal height
should gradually rise.
• If it rises, the booster is OK.

4. Start the engine, and let it idle. There should be
• If it does not rise, go to step 3.
vacuum available.
• If no vacuum is available, the check valve is not

working properly. Replace the brake booster
vacuum hose and the check valve, and retest.
• If vacuum is found, go to step 5.
5. With the ignition switch in LOCK (0), reconnect the
vacuum hose to the brake booster.
6. Start the engine, and then pinch the brake booster
vacuum hose between the check valve and the
booster.
7. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), and wait
30 seconds. Press the brake pedal several times using
normal pressure. When the pedal is first pressed, it
should be low. On consecutive applications, the pedal
height should gradually rise.
• If the pedal position does not vary inspect the seal

between the master cylinder and the booster. If the
seal is OK, replace the brake booster.
• If the pedal position varies, replace the brake
booster vacuum hose/check valve as an assembly.
Brake Booster Pushrod Clearance Adjustment
Special Tools Required 1. Remove the master cylinder (see page 19-22).
Booster Piston Holder 070AB-SJA0100 2. Measure the clearance between the tool (A) supplied
NOTE: with the master cylinder and brake booster pushrod
(B). Make sure that the tool is lying flat against the
• Brake booster pushrod to piston clearance must be
surface (C) of the brake booster, and that the tip of the
checked and readjusted before installing a new master
tool contacts the pushrod. Ifthe tool will not lie flat (D)
cylinder.
or there is a gap (E) between the tool and the pushrod,
• The master cylinder assembly comes with a tool that go to step 3 to adjust the pushrod in or out. Ifthe
must be used to adjust the clearance between the clearance is correct, go to step 4.
brake booster pushrod and the master cylinder piston.
• Use only the tool that comes with the new master
cylinder to check the pushrod clearance. Do not use
any other tool.
• Make sure to discard the tool supplied with the master
cylinder after its use.
• The brake booster must be installed on the vehicle
before doing the pushrod clearance adjustment.
• If the booster is removed, check the pushrod length
(A) as shown. If the length is incorrect, loosen the
pushrod locknut (B), and turn the yoke (C) in or out to
adjust.
A
116 mm (4.6 in)
Brake Booster Pushrod Clearance Brake Booster Replacement
Adjustment (cont'd)
3. If the clearance is incorrect, use the booster piston 1. Remove the master cylinder (see page 19-22).
holder to hold the pushrod (A) and turn the adjusting
2. Disconnect the brake booster vacuum hose (A) from
screw (B) clockwise to inward or counterclockwise to
the brake booster (B).
outward.
070AB-SJA0100
3. Disconnect the two brake lines (A) from the VSA

modulator-control unit (B).
4. Install the master cylinder (see page 19-22).

4. Remove the lock pin (A) and the clevis pin (B), then 6. Pull the brake booster (A) forward, and remove it from
disconnect the yoke from the brake pedal. the engine compartment
Without power adjustable pedals 1NOTICE I
• Be careful not to damage the brake booster
mounting surfaces and the threads on the booster
studs.
• Be careful not to bend or damage the brake lines.
NOTE: Use the new brake booster gasket (B) during

reassembly.
13 N-m
(1.3 kgf-m, 9.4 Ibf-ft)
With power adjustable pedals
7. Install the brake booster in the reverse order of

• Install the master cylinder after installing the brake

booster (see page 19-22).
• Replace the master cylinder O-ring.
• Check the brake pedal height and free play after
installing the master cylinder, and adjust it if
necessary: without power adjustable pedals, (see
page 19-6) with power adjustable pedals (see page
19-7).
• Bleed the brake system (see page 19-12).
Rear Brake Pad Inspection and Replacement
Special Tools Requi red Replacement

Brake Caliper Piston Compressor 07AAE-SEPA101
1. Remove some brake fluid from the master cylinder.
Frequent inhalation of brake pad dust, regardless of 3. Remove the rear wheels.
health. 4. Remove the flange bolt (A) while holding the caliper
• Avoid breathing dust particles. pin (B) with a wrench. Be careful not to damage the
• Never use an air hose or brush to clean brake pin boot, and pivot the caliper (C) up out of the way.
Check the hose and the pin boots for damage and
assemblies. Use an OSHA-approved vacuum
cleaner. deterioration.
Inspection
2. Remove the rear wheels.
3. Check the thickness (A) of the inner pad (B) and the
outer pad (C). Do not include the thickness of the
backing plate.
Brake pad thickness:
Standard: 9.5—10.5 mm {§.37—0.41 in)
5. Remove the brake pads (A) and the pad shims (B).
4. If any part of the brake pad thickness is less than the

service limit, replace the brake pads as a set.
disc/drum and the inside of the wheel, then i nstall the
rear wheels.
11. Install the brake caliper piston compressor tool (A) on
the caliper (B).
NOTE: The upper and lower pad retainers are
different. During installation, make sure the pad B
retainers are in their proper positions.
07AAE-SEPA101
12. Press in the piston with the brake caliper piston
compressor tool so the caliper will fit over the brake
pads. Make sure the piston boot is in position to
7. Clean the caliper bracket (B) thoroughly; remove any
prevent damaging it when pivoting the caliper down.
rust, and check for grooves and cracks. Verify that the
caliper pins (C) move in and out smoothly. Clean and NOTE: Be careful when pressing in the piston; brake
lube if needed. fluid might overflow from the master cylinder's
reservoir. If brake fluid gets on any painted surface,
8. Inspect the brake disc/drum for runout, thickness,
wash it off immediately with water.
parallelism (see page 19-31), and check for damage
and cracks. 13. Remove the brake caliper piston compressor tool.
9. Apply a thin coat of M-77 assembly paste
(P/N 08798-9010) to the retainer mating surfaces of
the caliper bracket (indicated by the arrow).
10. Install the upper and lower pad retainers. Wipe excess
assembly paste off the retainers. Keep the assembly
paste off the brake disc/drum and the brake pads.
Rear Brake Pad Inspection and Replacement (cont'd)
14. Apply a thin coat of M-77 assembly paste 16. Pivot the caliper down into position. Install the flange
(P/N 08798-9010) to the pad side of the shims (A), the bolt (A), and tighten it to the specified torque while
back of the brake pads (B), and the other areas holding the caliper pin (B) with a wrench being careful
indicated by the arrows. Wipe excess assembly paste not to damage the pin boot.
off the pad shims and the brake pads friction material.
Keep grease and assembly paste off the brake
disc/drum and the brake pads. Contaminated brake
disc/drum or pads reduce stopping ability.

rear wheels.
18. Press the brake pedal several times to make sure the
brakes work.
15. Install the brake pads and the pad shims correctly. NOTE: Engagement may require a greater pedal
Install the brake pad with the wear indicator (C) on the stroke immediately after the brake pads have been
bottom inside. If you are reusing the brake pads, replaced as a set. Several applications of the brake
always reinstall the brake pads in their original pedal will restore the normal pedal stroke.
positions to prevent a temporary loss of braking
19. Add brake fluid as needed.
efficiency.
20. After installation, check for leaks at hose and line
joints or connections, and retighten if necessary.
Test-drive the vehicle, then recheck for leaks (see
page 19-45).
Rear Brake Disc Inspection
Runout 7. Ifthe brake disc/drum is beyond the service limit,

refinish the brake disc/drum with a Honda-approved
1.,Raise the vehicle (see page 1-14). commercially available on-car brake lathe.
2. Remove the rear wheels. Max. refinishing limit; 9.0 mm (0.35 in)
3. Remove the brake pads (see page 19-28). NOTE:
• Ifthe brake disc/drum is beyond the service limit for
4. Inspect the brake disc/drum to wheel surface for refinishing, replace it (see page 19-32).
damage and cracks. Clean the brake disc/drum
• If the brake disc/drum is replaced with a new one,
thoroughly, and remove all rust.
check the new disc/drum for runout. Ifthe new
5. Install suitable flat washers (A) and the wheel nuts (B), disc/drum is out of specification, refinish the
and tighten the wheel nuts to the specified torque to disc/drum.
hold the brake disc/drum securely against the hub.
rear wheels.
(13.0 kgf-m, 94.0 Ibf-ft)

6. Set up the dial gauge against the brake disc/drum as
shown, and measure the runout at 10 mm (3/8 in)
from the outer edge of the brake disc/drum.
Brake disc/drum runout:
Rear Brake Disc Inspection (cont'd) Rear Brake Disc Replacement
Thickness and Parallelism NOTE: Keep any grease off the brake disc/drum and the
brake pads.
3. Remove the brake pads (see page 19-28).
4. Using a micrometer, measure the brake disc/drum
thickness at eight points, about 45 ° apart and 4. Remove the brake caliper bracket mounting bolts (A),
10 mm (3/8 in) in from the outer edge of the brake then remove the caliper assembly (B) from the
disc/drum. Replace the brake disc/drum ifthe smallest knuckle. To prevent damage to the caliper assembly
measurement is less than the max. refinishing limit. or brake hose, use a short piece of wire to hang the
caliper assembly from the undercarriage. Do not twist
Brake disc/drum thickness: the brake hose excessively.
Standard: 10.9—11.1 mm (0.43—0.44 in)
Max. refinishi ng limit; 9.0 mm (0.35 in) NOTE: Make sure the washers (C) are in position on
Brake disc/drum parallelism: reassembly, if they are removed (see step 4 on page
0.015 mm (0.0006 in) max. 18-34).
NOTE: This is the maximum allowable difference

between the thickness measurements.
5. If the brake disc/drum is beyond the service limit for

parallelism, refinish the brake disc/drum with a
Honda-approved commercially available on-car brake
lathe.
NOTE: If the brake disc/drum is beyond the service
limit for refinishing, replace it (see page 19-32).
rear wheels.
6. Remove the brake disc/drum (B) from the hub bearing
unit
NOTE:
• Remove the access plug (C), then if necessary, turn
the adjuster (D) with a flat-tip screwdriver until the
shoes become loose.
• If the brake disc/drum has stuck to the hub bearing
unit/thread two 8 x 1.25 mm bolts (E) into the brake
disc/drum to push it away from the hub bearing
unit. Turn each bolt 90 degrees at a time to prevent
the brake disc/drum from binding.
7. Install the brake disc/drum in the reverse order of
• Before installing the brake disc/drum, clean the

mating surfaces between the hub bearing unit and
the inside of the brake disc/drum.
• Adjust the major parking brake (see page 19-11).
8. Inspect the brake disc runout (see page 19-31).
rear wheel.
Rear Brake Caliper Overhaul
A CAUTION
• Never use an air hose or brush to clean brake assemblies. Use an OSHA-approved vacuum cleaner.
Remove, disassemble, inspect, reassemble, and install the caliper, and note these items:
NOTE: Make sure that the caliper pins are installed correctly. Upper caliper pin A and lower caliper pin B are different.
If these caliper pins are installed in the wrong location, it will cause vibration, uneven or rapid brake pad wear, and
possibly uneven tire wear.
• Do not spill brake fluid on the vehicle; it may damage the paint. If brake fluid gets on the paint, wash it off immediately
with water.
• To prevent dripping brake fluid, cover disconnected hose joints with clean rags or shop towels.
• Clean all parts in brake fluid and air dry; blow out all passages with compressed air.
• Before reassembling, check that all parts are free of dirt and other foreign particles.
• Replace parts with new ones as specified in the illustration.
• Make sure no dirt or other foreign matter gets in the brake fluid.
• Make sure no grease or oil gets on the brake discs or the pads.
• When reusing brake pads, always reinstall them in their original positions to prevent loss of braking efficiency.
• Do not reuse drained brake fluid. Use only new Honda DOT 3 Brake Fluid from an unopened container. Using a
non-Honda brake fluid can cause corrosion and shorten the life of the system.
• Coat the piston, piston seal groove, and the caliper bore with clean brake fluid.
• Use recommended greases in the rear brake caliper set.
• After installing the caliper, check the brake hose and line for leaks, interference, and twisting.
m m 'Honda silicone grease (P/N 08C30-B0234M)
BANJO BOLT
34 N-m BRAKE HOSE
(3.5 kgf-m, BLEED SCREW
25 Ibf-ft).
9 N-m
CALIPER PIN
PISTON
LOWER PAD RETAINER

PIN BOOT
12x1.25 mm CALIPER BRACKET
88 N-m
Parking Brake Inspection
ikCAUTION
• Never use an air hose or brush to clean brake assemblies. Use an OSHA-approved vacuum cleaner.

3. Release the parking brake, and remove the brake disc/drum (see page 19-32).
12 x 1.25 mm
98.1 N-m (10.0 kgf-m, 72.3 Ibf-ft)
4. Check the parking brake linings (A) for cracking, 8. Measure the inside diameter of the parking brake
glazing, wear, and contamination. drum with inside vernier calipers.
Parking brake drum inside diameter:
Standard: 210.0-210.1 mm (8.268-8.272 in)
5. Measure the parking brake lining thickness (B).

Measurement does not include brake shoe thickness.
Parki ng brake lining thickness:
Standard: 3.4 mm (0.13 in) 9. Ifthe inside diameter of the parking brake drum is
Service limit: 1.0 mm (0.04 in) more than the service limit, replace the brake
disc/drum.
6. If any part of the parking brake lining thickness is less
than the service limit, replace all of the parking brake 10. Check the parking brake drum for scoring, grooves,
shoes as a set (see page 19-38). and cracks.
7. Check the hub bearing unit (C) for smooth operation. 11. Install the brake disc/drum and the rear brake caliper
If it requires servicing, replace the hub bearing unit (see page 19-32).
(see page 18-34).
12. Adjust the major parking brake (see page 19-11).
rear wheels.
Parking Brake Shoe Replacement
A CAUTION 6. Disconnect the rod spring (A) from the connecting

rod (B), and remove the rod spring and the connecting
Frequent inhalation of brake pad dust, regardless of
rod.
health.
• Never use an air hose or brush to clean brake
assemblies. Use an OSHA-approved vacuum
cleaner.
Disassembly
3. Release the parking brake, and remove the brake
disc/drum (see page 19-32).
4. Disconnect and remove the upper return springs (A).
A
7. Lower the parking brake shoe assembly.
8. Remove the forward brake shoe (A) and the adjuster
assembly (B) by removing the lower return spring (C).
5. Remove the tension pins (A) by pushing the

respective retainer spring (B), and turning the pin.
9. Remove the rearward brake shoe (A) by Reassembly
disconnecting the parking brake cable (B) from the
parking brake lever (C). 1. Apply Molykote 44MA grease to the sliding surface of
the pivot pin (A) and insert the pin into the rearward
brake shoe (B) from the outside.
10. Remove the U-clip (A), the wave washer (B), the
parking brake lever (C), and the pivot pin (D) from the
brake shoe (E).
2. Install the parking brake lever (C) and the wave

washer (D) on the pivot pin, and secure the pin with
a new U-clip (E).
• Install the wave washer with its convex side facing

out.
• Pinch the U-clip securely to prevent the parking
brake lever from coming off the brake shoe.
3. Connect the parking brake cable (A) to the parking

brake lever (B). Apply Molykote 44MA grease to the
cable contact surface (C) on the backing plate.
Parking Brake Shoe Replacement (cont'd)
4. Apply a thin coat of Molykote 44MA grease to the 8. Install the rod spring (A) to the connecting rod (B) first
shoe ends and connecting rod ends (A), sliding with the spring end (C) pointing downward. Then
surfaces (B), and opposite edges of the parking brake install the connecting rod on the parking brake shoes.
shoe (C) as shown. Wipe off any excess. Keep grease
off the brake linings.
A —► • Brake shoe ends and connecting rod ends 9. Install the tension pins (A), and retainer springs (B).
B c:f>o Sliding surface Make sure the tension pin does not contact the
C <=£>• Opposite edge of the shoe parking brake lever.
5. Install clevis pin A and B on the adjuster (C).

NOTE:
• Clean the threaded portions of clevis pin A and the
sliding surface of clevis pin B, then coat them with
Molykote 44MA grease.
• Shorten clevis pin A by fully turning in the adjuster
nut.
6. Position the brake shoe adjuster assembly (D) on the

parking brake shoes.
7. Hook the lower return spring (E) on the parking brake
shoes.
Parking Brake Shoe Lining Break-in
10. Install the upper return springs (A) as shown. 44WARNING

I Do this operation in a safe area.___________________ |
NOTE:
• Do the brake linings surface break-in when replacing
shoes with new brake linings and/or the rear brake
disc/drum.
• Check the number of parking brake pedal clicks.
Adjust the parking brake before lining surface break-in
(see page 19-11).
1. Park the vehicle on a firm, level surface.
2. Release the parking brake.
3. Press the parking brake pedal 5 clicks.
(see page 19-32).

NOTE: Before installing the brake disc/drum, clean the
mating surfaces between the hub bearing unit and the
inside of the brake disc/drum.
12. Adjust the major parking brake (see page 19-11).
rear wheel.
14. Do the parking brake shoe lining break-in, (see page
19-41).
4. Drive the vehicle for 1/4 mile (400 m) at about
31 mph (50 km/h).
5. Stop the vehicle, and release the parking brake for
5—10 minutes to allow the brake disc/drum to cool.
6. Repeat steps 3 through 5 two more times.
7. Check the parking brake pedal adjustment (see page
19-10).
Power Adjustable Pedals System Circuit Diagram
DRIVER'S
UNDER-HOOD UNDER-DASH
FUSE/RELAY BO X FUSE/RELAY BOX
ACCELERATOR/BRAKE
PEDAL ADJUSTER M O TO R
TR A N SM ISS IO N
RANGE SWITCH
_£L
G501
r
G101
G102
Power Adjustable Pedals Replacement
1. Remove the lock pin (A) and the clevis pin (B).
I
8x1.25 mm
13 N-m
(1.3 kgf-m, 9.4 Ibf-ft)
2. Disconnect accelerator/brake pedal adjuster motor connector (C).

3. Disconnect the brake pedal position switch connector (D), and remove the clip (E).
4. Disconnect the accelerator pedal position (APP) sensor 6P connector (F), and remove the clip (G).
5. Remove the power adjustable pedals bracket mounting bolt (H) and nuts (I).
6. Remove the adjustable pedals assembly.
7. Remove the brake pedal position switch (J) by turning it 45° counterclockwise.
8. Install the adjustable pedals assembly in the reverse order of removal.
9. Adjust the brake pedal and the brake pedal position switch (see page 19-7).
Power Adjustable Pedals Switch Brake Pedal Replacement
Test and Replacement
1. Carefully push out the power adjustable pedals 1. Remove the lock pin (A) and the clevis pin (B).
switch (A) and disconnect the 7P connector from the
switch.
2. Check for continuity between the terminals in each 2. Disconnect the brake pedal position switch
pedal position according to the table. If there is no connector (C).
continuity, replace the power adjustable pedals
switch or the bulb (B). 3. Remove the brake pedal bracket mounting bolt (D)
and nuts (E).
\ Terminal
1 2 3 5 6 4. Remove the brake pedal with bracket (F).
Pedal Position \
5. Remove the brake pedal position switch (G) by
FORWARD o o turning it 45° counterclockwise.
BACKWARD Q o
6. Install in the reverse order of removal.
ILLUMINATION Q o
7. Adjust the brake pedal and the brake pedal position
switch (see page 19-6).
Brake Hose and Line Inspection
1. Inspect the brake hoses for damage, deterioration, leaks, interference, and twisting.
2. Check the brake lines for damage, rusting, and leaks. Also check for bent brake lines.
3. Check for leaks at hose and line joints and connections, and retighten if necessary.
4. Check the master cylinder and the VSA modulator-control unit for damage and leaks.
Connection Point Component Connected to Specified Torque Value Note

A Front brake caliper Brake hose 34 N-m (3.5 kgf-m, 25 Ibf-ft) Banjo bolt
Bleed screw 9 N-m (0.9 kgf-m, 7 Ibf-ft)
B Rear brake caliper Brake hose 34 N-m (3.5 kgf-m, 25 Ibf-ft) Banjo bolt
Bleed screw 9 N-m (0.9 kgf-m, 7 Ibf-ft)
C Brake hose Brake line 15 N-m (1.5 kgf-m, 11 Ibf-ft) Flare nut
D Master cylinder Brake line 22 N-m (2.2 kgf-m, 16 Ibf-ft) Flare nut
E VSA modulator- Brake line (12 mm nut) 22 N-m (2.2 kgf-m, 16 Ibf-ft) Flare nut
control unit Brake line (10 mm nut) 15 N-m (1.5 kgf-m, 11 Ibf-ft) Flare nut
Brake Hose Replacement
NOTE: 5. Install the brake hose (A) with the mounting bolt (B).
• Before reassembling, check that all parts are free of
dirt and other foreign particles.
• Replace parts with new ones whenever specified to do
so.
the paint. If brake fluid gets on the paint, wash it off
immediately with water.
• After removal, plug the ends of the hoses and the
joints to prevent spilling brake fluid.
Front
2. Disconnect the brake line (A) from the brake hose (B),
then remove the brake hose clip (C).
Replace.
6. Connect the brake hose to the caliper with the banjo

bolt (C) and new sealing washers (D).
7. Install the new brake hose clip (A) to the brake hose
(B) on the bracket, then connect the brake line (C).
Do not twist the brake hose.
3. Remove the banjo bolt (A), and disconnect the brake

hose (B) from the caliper.
8. After installing the brake hose, bleed the brake system

(see page 19-12).
9. Do the following checks:
• Check the brake hose and line joint for leaks, and
tighten if necessary.
• Check the brake hoses for interference and twisting.
the inside of the wheel, then install the front wheel.
4. Remove the brake hose mounting bolt (C), then
remove the brake hose.
Rear 6. Connect the rear side brake hose to the caliper with
the banjo bolt (A) and new sealing washers (B).
2. Disconnect the brake lines (A) from the brake hoses
(B), then remove the brake hose clips (C).
A C
10 x1.0 mm Replace.
7. Install the new brake hose clips (A) to the brake hoses
(B) on the brackets, then connect the brake lines (C).
Do not twist the brake hoses.
4. Remove the banjo bolt (A), and disconnect the brake

hose from the caliper.
8. After installing the brake hoses, bleed the brake

system (see page 19-12).
9. Do the following checks:
• Check the brake hose and line joint for leaks, and
tighten if necessary.
• Check the brake hoses for interference and twisting.
rear wheel.
5. Remove the rear side brake hose (B).
Parking Brake Cable Replacement
Exploded V ie w
8 x 1.25 mm
Check for faulty movement.

NOTE: 6. Reinstall the parking brake cable in the reverse order
• The parking brake cables must not be bent or of removal, and note these items:
distorted. This will lead to stiff operation and
premature cable failure. • Be careful not to bend or distort the cable.
• Refer to the Exploded View as needed during this • Install the rear hub bearing unit (see page 18-34).
procedure. • Connect the parking brake cable to the brake lever,
and install the brake shoes and brake disc/drum
1. Loosen the parking brake cable adjusting nut (see
page 19-10). (see page 19-38).
• Adjust the parking brake (see page 19-10). Apply
2. Remove the rear hub bearing unit (see page 18-34). the parking brake firmly 10 times then adjust it
3. Remove the parking brake shoes, and disconnect the again.
parking brake cable from the parking brake lever (see
page 19-38).
4. Remove the flange nuts (A), then disconnect the
backing plate (B) with the parking brake cable (C) from
the knuckle (D).
5. Remove the parking brake cable mounting bolts (E)

from the backing plate, and remove the parking brake
cable.
Brakes
VSA System Components

Component Location Index.......... ............... ........ ....... ..19-52
DTC Troubleshooting Index....... .................................... 19-56
Symptom Troubleshooting In d e x ................................ 19-58
System Description.......... .................................. ........... 19-59
Circuit Diagram ................ .......... ......................................19-70
DTC Troubleshooting....................................................... 19-73
Symptom Troubleshooting.............................................. 19-96
* Steering Angle Sensor R eplacem ent............................19-100
Sensor Cluster Replacem ent.......................................... 19-101
VSA Sensor Neutral Position Memorization................ 19-101
VSA Off Switch Test.......................................... . — ...... 19-102
VSA Modulator-Control Unit Removal and
Installation.......................... .............................................19-103
Wheel Speed Sensor Replacement................................19-105
STEERING ANGLE SENSOR

DATA LINK CONNECTOR (DLC) VSA OFF SWITCH

Test, page 19-102
HUB BEARING UNIT

(MAGNETIC ENCODER)
UNDER-HOOD FUSE/RELAY BOX
HUB BEARING UNIT

(MAGNETIC ENCODER)
LEFT-REAR
WHEEL SPEED SENSOR
Replacement page 19-106
RIGHT-REAR
WHEEL SPEED SENSOR
SENSOR CLUSTER
WHEEL BEARING
(MAGNETIC ENCODER) DRIVER'S UNDER-DASH FUSE/RELAY BOX
LEFT-FRONT WHEEL SPEED SENSOR
WHEEL BEARING
(MAGNETIC ENCODER)
VSA MODULATOR-CONTROL UNIT

Removal and Installation, page 19-103
System Indicator
This system has four indicators: The VSA activation indicator blinks when the VSA
function is activating. The VSA activation indicator
• ABS indicator (A)
comes on and stays on when the VSA is turned OFF by
• Brake system indicator (B) using the VSA OFF switch, or when the VSA function is
• VSA indicator (C) lost.
• VSA activation indicator (D)
ABS/VSA Indicator
D C
• If the system is OK, the ABS and VSA indicators go off
2 seconds after turning the ignition switch to ON (II).
• The ABS and VSA indicators come on when the
control unit detects a problem in the system.
However, even though the system is operating
properly, the indicator may come on under these
conditions:
- Only the drive wheels rotate.
- One drive wheel is stuck.
- The vehicle goes into a spin.
- The ABS or VSA continues to operate for a long
time.
- The vehicle is subjected to an electrical signal
disturbance.
To determine the actual cause of the problem, question
the customer, taking these conditions into
consideration.
When the system detects a problem, it will turn the
• When a problem is detected, there are cases when the
appropriate indicators on. Depending on the failure, the
indicator stays on until the ignition switch is turned to
VSA modulator-control unit determines which
LOCK (0), and cases when the indicator goes off
indicators are turned on.
automatically when the system returns to normal.
When the system is OK, each indicator comes on for - DTC 61 or 62:
about 2 seconds after turning the ignition switch to The ABS and VSA indicators go off automatically
ON (II), then goes off. when the system returns to normal.
ABS Indicator - DTC 31,32,33,34,35,36,37,38,54, 81,121,122,
123, or 124:
The ABS indicator comes on when the ABS function is
The ABS and VSA indicators stay on until the
lost. The brakes still work like a conventional system.
ignition switch is turned to LOCK (0) whether or not
Brake System Indicator the system returns to normal.
- DTC 11,12,13,14,15,16,17,18, 21,22,23,24,51, or
The brake system indicator comes on when the EBD
52:
function is lost, the parking brake is applied, and/or the
brake fluid level is low. The ABS and VSA indicators stay on until the
system returns to normal after the engine is
NOTE: If two or more wheel speed sensors fail, the brake restarted, and the vehicle is driven.
system indicator comes on. - DTC 25,26, 27, 64,65,66, 68,83,86, 91,104, or 105:
VSA Indicator The VSA indicator stays on until the ignition switch
is turned to LOCK (0) whether or not the system
The VSA indicator comes on when the VSA function is returns to normal.
lost.
- DTC 84:
The VSA activation indicator goes off automatically
when the system returns to normal.
Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) How to Troubleshoot DTCs

• The memory hold any number of DTCs. However, The troubleshooting procedures assume that the cause
when the same DTC is detected more than once, the of the problem is still present and the ABS and/or VSA
more recent DTC is written over the earlier one. indicator is still on. Following a troubleshooting
Therefore, when the same problem is detected procedure for a code that has been cleared but does not
repeatedly, it is memorized as a single DTC. reset can result in incorrect diagnosis.
• The DTCs are indicated in ascending number order, NOTE: Always troubleshoot powertrain DTCs first.
not in the order they occur.
• The DTCs are memorized in an EEPROM in the VSA 1. Question the customer about the conditions when the
modulator-control unit. Therefore, the memorized problem occurred, and try to reproduce the same
DTCs cannot be erased by disconnecting the battery. conditions for troubleshooting. Find out when the
Do the specified procedures to clear the DTCs. ABS and/or VSA indicator came on, such as during
activation, after activation, when the vehicle was
Self-diagnosis traveling at a certain speed, etc. If necessary, have the
customer demonstrate the concern.
• Self-diagnosis can be classified into two categories:
2. When the ABS or VSA indicator does not come on
- Initial diagnosis: Done right after the ignition switch
during the test-drive, check for loose connectors, poor
is turned to ON (II) and until the ABS and VSA
contact of the terminals, etc. in the circuit indicated by
indicators go off.
the DTC before you start troubleshooting.
- Regular diagnosis: Done right after the initial
diagnosis until the ignition switch is turned to 3. After troubleshooting, or the repairs are done, clear
LOCK (0). the DTCs, and test-drive the vehicle under the same
• When the system detects a problem, the VSA conditions that originally set the DTCs. Make sure the
modulator-control unit shifts to fail-safe mode. ABS and VSA indicators do not come on.
4. Check for DTCs from other systems which are
Kickback
connected via F-CAN. If there are DTCs that are
The pump motor operates when the VSA modulator- related to F-CAN, one possible cause was that the
control unit is functioning, and the fluid in the reservoir ignition switch was turned to ON (II) with the VSA
is forced out to the master cylinder, causing kickback at modulator-control unit connector disconnected. Clear
the brake pedal. the DTCs. Check for powertrain DTCs first.
Pump M otor Interm ittent Failures

• The pump motor operates when the VSA modulator- The term "intermittent failure" means a system may
control unit is functioning. have had a failure, but it checks OK now. If you cannot
• The VSA modulator-control unit checks the pump reproduce the condition, check for loose connections
motor operation one time after completing initial and terminals. Also check for ground and power
diagnosis during regular diagnosis when the vehicle is connections related to the circuit that you are
driven over 12 mph (20 km/h). troubleshooting.
Brake Fluid Replacement/Air Bleeding

Brake fluid replacement and air bleeding procedures are
identical to the procedures used on vehicles without the
VSA system (see page 19-12).
V -X v S A
How to Use the HDS (Honda Diagnostic How to Retrieve DTCs

System) 1. With the ignition switch in LOCK (0), connect the HDS
NOTE: Make sure the battery is in good condition and to the data link connector (DLC) under the driver's
fully charged. side of the dashboard.
1. If the system indicators stay on, connect the HDS to 2. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
the data link connector (DLC) (A) located under the 3. Make sure the HDS communicates with the vehicle
driver's side of the dashboard. and the VSA modulator-control unit. If it doesn't,
troubleshoot the DLC circuit (see page 11-269).
4. Follow the prompts on the HDS to display the DTC(s)
DTC troubleshooting. Do the all systems DTC check,
and troubleshoot any powertrain DTCs first.
How to Clear DTCs

to the data link connector (DLC) under the driver's
side of the dashboard.
and the VSA modulator-control unit. If it doesn't,
4. Check the diagnostic trouble code (DTC) for all
4. Clear the DTC(s) by following the screen prompts on
systems, troubleshoot the powertrain DTCs first and
the HDS.
note it. Then refer to the indicated DTCs
troubleshooting, and do the appropriate 5. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
troubleshooting procedure.
NOTE:
• The HDS reads the DTC, the current data, and other
system data.
• For specific operations, refer to the Help menu that
came with the HDS.
DTC Detection Item ABS Brake VSA VSA Note

Indicator System Indicator Activation
Indicator Indicator
11 Right-front Wheel Speed Sensor (Short to Power/ ON ON or OFF* ON ON DTC Troubleshooting
Short to Body Ground/Open) (see page 19-73)
12 Right-front Wheel Speed Sensor (Electrical ON ON or OFF* ON ON DTC Troubleshooting
Noise/I nterm ittent Interruption) (see page 19-77)
13 Left-front Wheel Speed Sensor (Short to ON ON or OFF* ON ON DTC Troubleshooting
Power/Short to Body Ground/Open) (see page 19-73)
14 Left-front Wheel Speed Sensor (Electrical ON ON or OFF* ON ON DTC Troubleshooting
Noise/Intermittent Interruption) (see page 19-77)
15 Right-rear Wheel Speed Sensor (Short to ON ON or OFF* ON ON DTC Troubleshooting
16 Right-rear Wheel Speed Sensor (Electrical ON ON or OFF* ON ON DTC Troubleshooting
17 Left-rear Wheel Speed Sensor (Short to ON ON or OFF* ON ON DTC Troubleshooting
18 Left-rear Wheel Speed Sensor (Electrical ON ON or OFF* ON ON DTC Troubleshooting
21 Right-front Magnetic Encoder (Wheel Bearing) ON ON or OFF* ON ON DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 19-79)
22 Left-front Magnetic Encoder (Wheel Bearing) ON ON or OFF* ON ON DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 19-79)
23 Right-rear Magnetic Encoder (Wheel Bearing) ON ON or OFF* ON ON DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 19-79)
24 Left-rear Magnetic Encoder (Wheel Bearing) ON ON or OFF* ON ON DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 19-79)
25 Yaw Rate Sensor OFF OFF ON ON DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 19-80)
26 Lateral Acceleration Sensor OFF OFF ON ON DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 19-80)
27 Steering Angle Sensor OFF OFF ON ON DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 19-82)
31 ABS Solenoid ON ON ON ON DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 19-85)
(see page 19-85)
(see page 19-85)
(see page 19-85)
(see page 19-85)
(see page 19-85)
(see page 19-85)
(see page 19-85)
*: Brake system indicator turns ON when two or more wheels fail.
VSA
DTC Detection Item ABS Brake VSA VSA Note

Indicator System Indicator Activation
Indicator Indicator
51 Motor Lock ON OFF ON ON DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 19-86)
52 Motor Stuck ON/OFF ON OFF ON ON DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 19-86)
54 Fail-safe Relay ON ON ON ON DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 19-88)
61 Low +B-FSR Voltage ON or OFF ON or OFF ON ON DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 19-88)
62 High +B-FSR Voltage ON ON ON ON DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 19-88)
64 Sensor Power Voltage OFF OFF ON ON DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 19-89)
65 Brake Fluid Level OFF OFF ON ON DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 19-89)
66 VSA Pressure Sensor (Inside of VSA OFF OFF ON ON DTC Troubleshooting
Modulator-control Unit) (see page 19-90)
68 Brake Pedal Position Switch OFF OFF ON ON DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 19-91)
81 Central Processing Unit (CPU) ON ON or OFF ON ON DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 19-92)
83 PCM Communication OFF OFF ON ON DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 19-93)
84 VSA Sensor Neutral Position OFF OFF OFF ON DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 19-93)
86 F-CAN Communication OFF OFF ON ON DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 19-94)
91 VSA Operation OFF OFF ON ON DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 19-94)
104 Sensor Cluster ON or OFF OFF ON ON DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 19-80)
105 Hydraulic Unit Temperature Sensor OFF OFF ON ON DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 19-95)
121 VSA Solenoid ON ON ON ON DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 19-95)
(see page 19-95)
(see page 19-95)
(see page 19-95)
When the vehicle has one of these symptoms, checkfor VSA diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) with the HDS. If there are
no DTCs, do the diagnostic procedure for the symptom, in the sequence listed, until you find the cause.
Symptom Diagnostic procedure

HDS does not communicate with the VSA modulator- Troubleshoot the DLC circuit (see page 11-269).
control unit or the vehicle
VSA activation indicator does not come on at start-up 1. Do the gauge control module troubleshooting (see
(bulb check) page 22-345).
2. Substitute a known-good VSA modulator-control unit,
then recheck. If it is OK, replace the original VSA
modulator-control unit (see page 19-103).
VSA activation indicator does not go off, and no DTCs 1. Symptom troubleshooting (see page 19-96).
are stored 2. Substitute a known-good VSA modulator-control unit,
ABS indicator, brake system indicator, and VSA 1. Do the gauge control module troubleshooting (see
indicator do not come on page 22-345).
2. Substitute a known-good VSA modulator-control unit,
ABS indicator, brake system indicator, and VSA 1. Checkfor F-CAN DTCs (see page 11-261), and
indicator do not go off troubleshoot and repair those first.
2. Do the gauge control module troubleshooting (see
page 22-345).
3. Symptom troubleshooting (see page 19-97).
VSA
System Description
VSA Modulator-control Unit Inputs and Outputs for 47P Connector (Connector Disconnected)
331341 / | 3 6 1 3 7 1 /1 /1 / I / 1 4 2 14 3 1 / ] 45 [46
W ire side of female term inals
Terminal Wire Terminal Description Signal

number color sign
1 WHT/RED + B-P Power source for the pump Battery voltage (about 12V) at all times
motor
2 BLU K-LINE Communication with HDS
3 YEL/GRN STR-Z Detects steering angle sensor
signal
4 BLK/RED IG1 Power source for activating the With ignition switch ON (II): battery voltage
system (about 12V)
5 BLU/BLK STR-G Ground for the steering angle
sensor
6 WHT/RED CLST-IG Power source for the sensor With ignition switch ON (II): battery voltage
cluster (about 12V)
7 YEL/BLK STR-VCG Power source for the steering With ignition switch ON (II): about 5.0 V
angle sensor
11 WHT CAN1-H F-CAN
15 RED CAN1-L F-CAN
Termi nal W i re Terminal Description Signal

number color sign
16 BLK GND-V Ground for the VSA Continuity to ground
modulator-control unit
25 RED CAN2-L CAN2 communication circuit
28 RED/BLU STR-A Detects steering angle sensor
signal
29 WHT CAN2-H CAN2 communication circuit
30 GRN/WHT STR-B Detects steering angle sensor
signal
31 WHT/BLU CLST-GND Ground for the sensor cluster
32 WHT + B-V Power source for the fail-safe Battery voltage (about 12V) at all times
relay
33 YEL FR-GND Detects right-front wheel speed
34 GRN FR +B sensor signal
36 YEL/RED R L +B Detects left-rear wheel speed
37 RED/WHT RL-GND sensor signal
42 BLU/YEL RR-GND Detects right-rear wheel speed
43 GRN/YEL RR +B sensor signal
45 BLU/WHT F L +B Detects left-front wheel speed
46 PNK FL-GND sensor signal
47 BLK GND-P Ground for the pump motor Continuity to ground
®
ABS (Anti-lock Brake System) Features
Without ABS, when the brake pedal is pressed while driving, the wheels sometimes lock before the vehicle comes to a
stop. In such an event, the maneuverability of the vehicle is reduced ifthe front wheels are locked, and the stability of the
vehicle is reduced if the rear wheels are locked, creating an extremely unstable condition. With ABS, the system
precisely controls the slip rate of the wheels to ensure maximum grip force from the tires, and it thereby ensures
maneuverability and stability of the vehicle. The ABS calculates the slip rate of the wheels based on the four wheel
speeds, and then it controls the brake fluid pressure to reach the target slip rate.
Grip force of t i re and road surface
TCS (Traction Control System) Features

When a drive wheel loses traction on a slippery road surface and starts to spin, the VSA modulator-control unit applies
brake pressure to the spinning wheel and sends an engine torque control request to the PCM to slow the spinning wheel
and keep traction.
ANTi-POWER of BRAKE FORCE
(cont'd)
VSA (Vehicle Stability Assist) System Features

Oversteer Control
Applies the brakes to the front and rear outside wheels
The brake makes the yaw rate opposite

to the turning direction
• Applies the brakes to the front and rear inside wheels

• Controls the engine torque when accelerating
The brake increases the yaw rate toward

the turning direction
The throttle control effect:

■ Reduces vehicle speed
■ Increases cornering force
EBD (Electronic Brake Distribution) Features
The EBD has been added to the VSA system. EBD eliminates the need for an external, mechanical proportioning valve
and improves overall braking performance.
When the vehicle is heavily loaded, most of the increase in weight is born by the rear wheels, increasing braking
capability. Proportioning valves maintain a fixed distribution of brake pressure between the front and the rear wheels,
making it very difficult to fully utilize increased rear wheel braking capability. EBD varies brake pressure distribution
according to load, using input from the wheel speed sensors, which improves overall braking performance.
^ Best distribution under heavy load Under heavy load
Rear wheel
brake pressure
Front wheel brake pressure
Normal Braking
Under normal braking conditions, brake pressure is evenly distributed between the front and rear brakes, and EBD is not
used.
Firm Braking
Under hard braking conditions, the VSA modulator-control unit monitors wheel speed in order to allow a maximum
amount of brake distribution individually to the rear wheels. Once the VSA modulator-control unit detects that one or
both rear wheels are nearing their maximum braking potential, the inlet valve closes for one or both rear wheels,
maintaining the current pressure. If the traction is improved, and the wheel(s) is no longer nearing its limits, the VSA
modulator-control unit will open the inlet solenoid allowing additional pressure to be distributed to the rear wheel. The
rear wheels are controlled independently of each other during EBD function.
If during EBD function the VSA modulator-control unit determines that the wheels are beginning to slip more than a
predetermined amount, the control unit abandons EBD control and shifts to select low 3-channel ABS control.
Brake Assist Features

Brake assist has been added to the VSA system. Brake assist helps ensure that any driver can achieve the full braking
potential of the vehicle by increasing brake system pressure in a panic situation, bringing the vehicle into a full ABS
stop.
Each time the ignition switch is turned ON (II), the VSA modulator-control unit learns the current driver's normal braking
characteristics by monitoring the brake pressure sensor and the brake pedal position switch at each stop. Using these
inputs and their values, the VSA modulator-control unit is able to learn the driver's normal braking habits, and then
determine the difference between a normal stop and a panic stop for the individual driver of the vehicle. If during a panic
stop the VSA modulator-control unit determines that the brake system pressure increases above a learned threshold in
less than a certain amount of time, the VSA modulator-control unit engages brake assist.
Because the brake system pressure crossed the pressure threshold before the time threshold had expired, the VSA
modulator-control unit goes into brake assist mode.
Normal Braking
During normal braking conditions, brake assist does not affect brake system pressure.
Panic Stop
During a panic stop, the control unit turns the VSA pump ON, and opens the inlet valve. This brings the brake system
pressure up high enough to cause a full ABS stop. As soon as the brake pedal is released, brake assist is stopped and the
brake system returns to normal operation.
M odulator U nit
The modulator unit consists of the inlet solenoid valve, outlet solenoid valve, VSA normally open (NO) solenoid valve,
VSA normally closed (NC) solenoid valve, reservoir, pump, pump motor, and the damping chamber.
The modulator controls the caliper fluid pressure directly. It is a circulating-type modulator because the brake fluid
circulates through the caliper, the reservoir, and the master cylinder.
The hydraulic control has three modes: Pressure intensifying, pressure retaining, and pressure reducing.
The hydraulic circuit is an independent four channel type, one channel for each wheel.
ABS Control
Pressure Intensifying Mode
VSA NO valve open, VSA NC valve closed, inlet valve open, outlet valve closed.
Master cylinder fluid is pumped out to the caliper.
Pump Motor
When starting the pressure reducing mode, the pump motor is ON. When stopping ABS operation, the pump motor is
OFF.
The reservoir fluid is pumped out by the pump, through the damping chamber, to the master cylinder.
MASTER CYLINDER
RL FR FL RR
Pressure Retai ning Mode

VSA NO valve open, VSA NC valve closed, inlet valve closed, outlet valve closed.
Caliper fluid is retained by the inlet valve and outlet valve.
MASTER CYLINDER
Pressure Reducing Mode

VSA NO valve open, VSA NC valve closed, inlet valve closed, outlet valve open.
Caliper fluid flows through the outlet valve to the reservoir.
MASTER CYLINDER
VSA
TCS C ontrol
VSA NO valve closed, VSA NC valve open, inlet valve open, outlet valve closed, pump motor ON.
The reservoir and master cylinder fluid is pumped out by the pump, through the damping chamber, to the front caliper.
MASTER CYLINDER
Pressure Retaining Mode

VSA NO valve closed, VSA NC valve open, inlet valve closed, outlet valve closed, pump motor ON.
Front caliper fluid is retained by the inlet valve and outlet valve.
MASTER CYLINDER
RL FR FL RR

VSA NO valve open, VSA NC valve closed, inlet valve closed, front outlet valve open, pump motor ON.
MASTER CYLINDER
MODULATOR UNIT
V S A C ontrol
VSA NO valve closed, VSA NC valve open, inlet valve open, outlet valve closed, pump motor ON.
The reservoir and master cylinder fluid is pumped out by the pump, through the damping chamber, to the front and rear
calipers.
MASTER CYLINDER
Pressure Retai ni ng Mode
VSA NO valve closed, VSA NC valve open, inlet valve closed, outlet valve closed, pump motor ON.
Front and rear caliper fluid is retained by the inlet valve and outlet valve.
MASTER CYLINDER
IWDJ^TORWIT__________ JiPRESSURE/SN
SENSOR ML/"
| VSfl&
NV

VSA NO valve open, VSA NC valve closed, inlet valve closed, outlet valve open, pump motor ON.
MASTER CYLINDER
; PRESSURE
MODULATORjUNIT___________________| SENSOR
^ ^ ^ H V S A NC
m m
I gflO ' l Tzgl P ' J

I . - ..L ............................................. ..........3 DAMPING 1 1 ■ DAMPING U ....... ....... -I
■ I «soR i p 1 cham ber r OUT , ..... . J_ OUT
m UMPy yPUMJ jC Ip 3 d p a
Circuit Diagram
BATTERY
© UNDER-HO O D FUSE/RELAY BO X
IG NITION SW ITCH
IG1 HOT In O N (II)
DRIVER'S
UNDER-DASH
FUSE/RELAY BOX
and START (III)
No. 22 (120 A) No. 23 (50 A )
—.-..cr v o —
G1 3 /lG^6 A6 No. 18 (15 A) “ 1C6
-W H T ■ ■ BLK/RED ■
J
No. 18 (30 A)
— crv-o---- ■W H T ■
No. 17 (30 A)
—<rxj>—■ C1
■ W HT/RED •
BRAKE PEDAL POSITION SWITCH

Closed: Brake pedal pressed PCM
No. 13 (20 A) 1 v 2 A8
— C T X jD ---------- ■ RED — .................... (o Dj-------------------------- - W H T/B LK -
A48
-W H T -
A49
-R E D -
VS A OFF SWITCH
PASSENGER'S
UNDER-DASH RED/BLK •
FUSE/RELAY BOX -0 -i
GAUGE CONTROL R E D --------
MODULE
< l-
GAUGE CONTROL RED/WHT
MODULE
INDICATOR
DRIVER CIRCUIT
BRAKE SYSTEM
INDICATOR
©
A27
- RED/W HT ■
r
G501
B L K ---------
ABS A24
INDICATOR - W H T -------- -W H T -
© A 23
- R E D --------- -R E D -
VSA
INDICATOR
A8
• GRN/ORN ■
V S A ACTIVATIO N A7
INDICATOR * RED/YEL -
D ATA LINK
CONNECTOR
(DLC)
6
-W H T -
- RED-
- RED- +B
BRAKE FLUID
2 PARKING <
LEVEL SWITCH
Closed: Low fluid d
1
BRAKE SW ITCH
Closed: Parking
brake applied
- BLU-
- BLK -
BLK
- BLK-
-O r ■5“
G401 G502
VSA MODULATOR-CONTROL UNIT
CONTROL UNIT MODULATOR
UNIT
DTC
EEPROM
VCC
5V
- BLK/RED ■
IG1 REGULATOR VCC
32
- W H T ------
+B-V
1 FAIL-SAFE RELAY
PRESSURE
• W HT/RED ■ SENSOR
+B-P
77 ?
SENSOR CLUSTER 5V
2 REGULATOR
■W H T -
CAN2-H P UM P MOTOR
25 RELAY
■ RED ■
CAN2-L
CAN
CONTROLLER
- W HT/BLU -
CLST-GND
Dr
STEERING
ANGLE SENSOR
- WHT/RED -
6
CLST-IG
J
1 5
- BLU/BLK - VSA1
STR-G vcc
/7/ _<> vcc
■ YEL/BLK -
7 — kMir
STR-VCC
3 NO
■ YEL/GRN - VSA2
STR-Z
30
■ G RN/W H T - NC
STR-B
28 — kM s NO
■ RED/BLU -
STR-A
SOLENOIDS
■ W H T ---------
11
LEFT-FRONT
CAN1-H CAN
15 CONTROLLER --- KMjTt
■ RED ---------
CAN1-L
45
£
WHEEL SPEED ■ BLU/W HT ■
FL+B RIGHT-FRONT
SENSOR
46
PNK --------
FL-GND
Qcjj ELECTRIC
34 CURRENT
G R N --------
FR +B LIMITATIO N
33
YEL -------- +B -
FR-GND O-
36
WHEEL SPEED ■ YEL/RED - uUT
RL+B G ND RIGHT-REAR
SENSOR
37
■ RED/WHT ■
RL-GND
¥ t ■ GRN/YEL -
43
RR+B
°1 O UT
42
■ BLU/YEL -
RR-GND PUMP MOTOR
2
BLU ---------
K-LINE
16
BLK ---------
GND-V
47
BLK ---------
GND-P 7?F
-m - : 12 V
"O" : 5 V
(cont'd)
UNDER-HOOD FUSE/RELAY BOX BRAKE FLUID LEVEL SWITCH PARKING BRAKE SWITCH
CONNECTOR C (2P) 2P CONNECTOR 1P CONNECTOR
DRIVER'S UNDER-DASH FUSE/RELAY GAUGE CONTROL MODULE CONNECTOR A (30P)

BOX CONNECTOR C(12P)
1 r.... n
1 2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 6 > < T 8 9 10 11 1 / / /
/ 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 -J
12 15 16 / 18 19 20 21 / X 23 24 25 / 27 / 30
VSA OFF SWITCH 6P CONNECTOR STEERING ANGLE SENSOR SENSOR CLUSTER 6P CONNECTOR
5P CONNECTOR
J
( 1 2 3 \
00
col
4 5
/ 2 / 5 1 2 3
/ 5 /
VSA MODULATOR-CONTROL UNIT 47P CONNECTOR BRAKE PEDAL POSITION

SWITCH 4P CONNECTOR
2 3 4 5 6 7 7 7 , / 11 / . / , / 15
1 1U
2' 5 /V 213 25J 3() 31
m ±
32 47
33 34 7 3 6 37 7 Z Z , / ■ 42 -43 / ■ 4 5 .46
W ire si de o f female term inals
DATA LINK CONNECTOR (DLC) WHEEL SPEED SENSOR 2P CONNECTOR
\ //
FRONT REAR
\9
1
/ / 12 /
4 5 6
14 /
7 y\
16/
Terminal side of female term inals Terminal side of W ire side of

male term inals female term inals
_Q
1 2 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
■ 1112 1 3 1 4 1 5 1 6 1 7 1 8 1 9 2 0
22 23 2 4 > < 2 5 ^ K 26 27
2930 31 3 2333435 3839
40|41
---- / \ S \ 4 4 -K
L—tf—If \ / \ 4^ 6 4--------
7 |4 8 |4 9
----
Terminal side of female term inals

DTC Troubleshooting
DTC 11,13,15,17: Wheel Speed Sensor (Short 8. Measure the voltage between body ground and the
appropriate wheel speed sensor +B and GND
to Power/Short to Body Ground/Open) terminals of the VSA modulator-control unit 47P
1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). connector individually (see table).
2. Clear the DTC with the HDS. DTC Appropriate Terminal

3. Test-drive the vehicle at 19mph (30km/h) or more. +B GND
11 (Right-front) FR +B: FR-GND:
NOTE: Drive the vehicle on the road, not on a lift. No. 34 No. 33
13 (Left-front) FL + B: FL-GND:
4. Check for DTCs with the HDS. No. 45 No. 46
Is DTC11, 13, 15, and/or 17 indicated? 15 (Right-rear) RR +B: RR-GND:
No. 43 No. 42
YES-Go to step 5. 17 (Left-rear) RL+B: RL-GND:
No. 36 No. 37
NO-lntermittent failure, the system is OK at this time.
Check for loose terminals between the wheel speed VSA MODULATOR-CONTROL UNIT 47P CONNECTOR
sensor 2P connector and the VSA modulator-control
1 ■ l i f f 14 ! 5 16 I t V
16
unit 47P connector. Refer to intermittent failures /l/V I/M /l/V |2 5 |/1 /|2 8 |2 9 |3 0 |3 1
troubleshooting (see page 19-54).B 32
|3 3 ] 3 4 |/|3 6 |3 7 |/1 /L /] /l4 2 |4 3 |/|4 5 |4 6 |
47

6. Disconnect the VSA modulator-control unit 47P
connector (see step 2 on page 19-103).
7. Start the engine.
W ire side of female terminals

VSA modulator-control unit and the appropriate
wheel speed sensor.B
NO-Go to step 9.
10. Check for continuity between body ground and the 11. Disconnect the appropriate wheel speed sensor 2P
appropriate wheel speed sensor + B and GND connector (see page 19-105).
terminals of the VSA modulator-control unit 47P
connector individually (see table).
appropriate wheel speed sensor +B and GND
DTC Appropriate Terminal terminals of the VSA modulator-control unit47P
+B GND connector individually (see table).
11 (Right-front) FR + B: FR-GND: DTC Appropriate Terminal
No. 34 No. 33
13 (Left-front) FL +B: FL-GND: ‘ +B GND
No. 45 No. 46 11 (Right-front) FR +B: FR-GND:
15 (Right-rear) RR + B: RR-GND: No. 34 No. 33
No. 43 No. 42 13 (Left-front) FL+B: FL-GND:
17 (Left-rear) RL+B: RL-GND: No. 45 No. 46
No. 36 No. 37 15 (Right-rear) RR +B: RR-GND:
No. 43 No. 42
VSA MODULATOR-CONTROL UNIT 47P CONNECTOR 17 (Left-rear) RL+B: RL-GND:
No. 36 No. 37
•j I2 I3|4 |5|6 |7 |/|/H 1 5 |
16
A A A / \ A A / \ / \ 2 5 \ A / M 2 $ M z\
32 47
VSA MODULATOR-CONTROL UNIT 47P CONNECTOR
\z^ M A ^ W \ 7 \ A A A a2\az\ A 4 S M
•j I f .m j l .5"!. 16
FR-GND RR-GND / \ A A / \ A / \ A A 2 5 \ / \ A 2 S \ 29\30\31
(YEL) (BLU/YEL)
32 |33|34|/l36|37|/l7ITI7l42|43|7l45|46| 47
FR+B
(GRN) FR-GND RR-GND FL-GND
RL+B (YEL) (BLU/YEL) (PNK)
(YEL/RED) FR+B FL+B
(GRN) (BLU/WHT)
RL-GND
(RED/WHT) R L+ B RR+B
(YEL/RED) (GRN/YEL)
RL-GND
(RED/WHT)
YES-Go to step 11.
NO-Go to step 13.
between the VSA modulator-control unit and the
wheel speed sensor.H
NO-Replace the wheel speed sensor (see page
19-105J.B
13. Disconnect the appropriate wheel speed sensor 2P 15. Connect the wheel speed sensor 2P connector
connector (see page 19-105). terminals No. 1 and No. 2 to body ground with a
jumper wire.
14. Check for continuity between the appropriate wheel
speed sensor + B and GND terminals of the VSA DTC Appropriate Wheel Speed Sensor
modulator-control unit 47P connector (see table). 11 Right-front
13 Left-front
DTC Appropriate Terminal
15 Right-rear
+S GND 17 Left-rear
11 (Right-front) FR + B: FR-GND;
No. 34 No. 33
WHEEL SPEED SENSOR 2P CONNECTOR
13 (Left-front) FL+B: FL-GND:
No. 45 No. 46 Front Rear
15 (Right-rear) RR +B: RR-GND:
No. 43 No. 42
17 (Left-rear) RL+B: RL-GND:
No. 36 No. 37
1 [ 2 [ 3 [ 4 6 |7
16
A /\A /\/\/\y \A 2 5 \/\A 2 8 \2 9 \3 0 \3 1 Terminal side of Terminal side of
32
\3 3 \3 4 \/\36 \3 7 \A \A \/\A \4 2 \4 3\A 4 5\4 q\ 47
male term inals female term inals
FR-GND RR-GND FL-GND

(YEL) (BLU/YEL) (PNK)
FR+B
(GRN)
RL+ B
(YEL/RED)
RR + B FL +B
(GRN/YEL) (BLU/WHT)
RL-GND
(RED/WHT)
Wire side of female term inals
YES-Repair a short in the wires between the VSA
modulator-control unit and the wheel speed sensor.l
NO-Go to step 15.
16. Check for continuity between body ground and the 17. Substitute the appropriate wheel speed sensor with
appropriate wheel speed sensor + B and GND the opposite side wheel speed sensor, or with a
terminals of the VSA modulator-control unit 47P known-good wheel speed sensor (see page 19-105).
connector individually (see table).
18. Reconnect all connectors.
DTC Appropriate Terminal
+B GND
11 (Right-front) FR +B: FR-GND; 20. Clear the DTC with the HDS.
No. 34 No. 33
13 (Left-front) FL+B: FL-GND: 21. Test-drive the vehicle at 19 mph (30 km/h) or more.
No. 45 No. 46 NOTE: Drive the vehicle on the road, not on a lift.
15 (Right-rear) RR +B: RR-GND:
No. 43 No. 42 22. Check for DTCs with the HDS.
17 (Left-rear) R L+B : RL-GND:
No. 36 No. 37 Is the same DTC indicated that is indicated in step 4?
YES-Check for loose terminals in the VSA
modulator-control unit 47P connector. If necessary,
| 2 | 3 |4 | 5| 6 |7 l/ V I / lll| / l/ V ll5 | substitute a known-good VSA modulator-control unit
16
A / I A A A A A A i ^ A / M i ^M z^
(see page 19-103), and retest.H
32 |33|34 |/l3 6 l3 7 l/|y1 /1 /l4 2 |4 3 |/!4 5 |4 6 | 47
FR-GND RR-GND FL-GND NO-Replace the original wheel speed sensor (see
(YEL) (BLU/YEL) (PNK) page 19-105).H
FR+B FL+B
(GRN) (BLU/WHT)
RL+B RR+B
(YEL/RED) (GRN/YEL)
RL-GND
(RED/WHT)
@<a>
YES-Go to step 17.
NO-Repair an open in the wire between the VSA
modulator-control unit and the wheel speed sensor.l
DTC 12, 14,16,18: Wheel Speed Sensor 3. Inspect the appropriate magnetic encoder for
(Electrical Noise/Interm ittent Interruption) damage, debris, and correct installation.
NOTE; if the ABS and the VSA indicators came on DTC Appropriate Note
because of electrical noise, the indicator will go off when Magnetic
you test-drive the vehicle at 10 mph (15 km/h) after the Encoder
system returns to normal. 12 Right-front Remove the
14 Left-front driveshaft
1.Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). outboard joint
from the
2. Check that the appropriate wheel speed sensor is appropriate
properly mounted (see page 19-105). wheel hub (see
page 18-14).
DTC Appropriate Wheel Speed Sensor 16 Right-rear Remove the hub
12 Right-front 18 Left-rear bearing unit (see
14 Left-front page 18-33).
16 Right-rear
Is the magnetic encoder OK?
18 Left-rear
Is the wheel speed sensor Installation OK? YES-Go to step 4.
YES-Go to step 3. NO-Remove the debris from the magnetic encoder,

or replace the wheel bearing (front) orthe hub bearing
NO-Reinstall the wheel speed sensor, and check the unit (rear):
mounting position (see page 19-105). Then go to • Front: Replace the front wheel bearing (see page
step 3. 18-14).B
• Rear: Replace the rear hub bearing unit (see page
18-33).B
4. Disconnect the VSA modulator-control unit 47P VSA MODULATOR-CONTROL UNIT 47P CONNECTOR
DTC12;
5. Check for continuity between the appropriate wheel i1 |2 |3 |4 |5 |6 |7 !/V i/il1 1 /|/V |1 5 |
16
/l/l/l/l/l/l/l/|2 5 |/l/|2 B |2 9 |3 0 |3 1
speed sensor GND terminal and other wheel speed
32 47
|3 3 |3 4 |/|3 6 |3 7 l/l/l/l7 l4 2 |4 3 |/|4 5 |4 6 |
sensor GND terminals of the VSA modulator-control
unit 47P connector (see table). FR-GND / « \ J RL-GND RR-GND FL-GND
(YEL) H X i ) - 1(RED/ (BLU/ (PNK)
w WHT) YEL)
DTC Appropriate O ther Term inals
( f t)
Terminal
12 FR-GND: No. 46 No. 42 No. 37 ....... J n h----
No. 33 DTC14:
14 FL-GND: No. 33 No. 42 No. 37 1
|2 |3 |4 |5 |6 |7 1 /I/M l1 | / j / j / | 15| 16
/|y 1 /lX I/i/i/1 /|2 5 |X I/|2 8 |2 9 |3 0 |3 1
No. 46
32 |3 3 |3 4 |/|3 6 i3 7 |/|/|/|/|4 2 |4 3 |/|4 5 |4 6 | 47
16 RR-GND: No. 33 No. 46 No. 37
No. 42 FR-GND RL-GND RR-GND FL-GND
(YEL) (RED/ (BLU/ (PNK)
18 RL-GND: No. 33 No. 46 No. 42 WHT) YEL)
No. 37
DTC16:
11 |2 |3 |4 |5 |6 |7 |/M /|1 1 |/|/|/|1 5 | 16
/1 Z 1 /1 /1 /1 /1 /M 2 5 I/IX I2 8 I2 9 I3 0 I3 1
32 47
|3 3 |3 4 |/|3 6 |3 7 |/|/|/|/l4 2 |4 3 |/|4 5 |4 6 |
FR-GND RL-GND
(YEL) (RED/
WHT) RR-GND
(BLU/YEL)
DTC18:
-| 12 | 3 I 4 I 5 I 6 |7 IT ’l / l / l 1,1I / I / M i ,5| 16
/l/l/l/l/l/l/l/|2 5 |/|/|2 8 |2 9 |3 0 |3 1
32 47
|3 3 |3 4 |/l3 6 |3 7 l/l/l/l/l4 2 |4 3 M 4 5 |4 6 |
FR-GND RR-GND FL-GND

(YEL) 1 <n> J (BLU/
YEL)
(PNK)
RL-GND
(RED/WHT)
YES-Repair a short in the wires between the
appropriate wheel speed sensor and the other wheel
speed sensor.B
NO-Go to step 6.
^w ^VSA
6. Substitute a known-good wheel speed sensor (see DTC 21,22,23,24: Magnetic Encoder (Wheel
page 19-105). Bearing)
7. Reconnect all connectors. 1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
9. Clear the DTC with the HDS. 3. Test-drive the vehicle at 19 mph (30 km/h) or more.
10. Test-drive the vehicle at 19 mph (30 km/h) or more. NOTE: Drive the vehicle on the road, not on a lift.
NOTE: Drive the vehicle on the road, not on a lift. 4. Check for DTCs with the HDS.
Is DTC 21,22, 23, or 24 indicated?
Is DTC 12, 14, 16, and/or 18 indicated? YES-Go to step 5.
YES-Check for loose terminals in the VSA NO-The system is OK at this time.B
modulator-control unit 47P connector, if necessary,
substitute a known-good VSA modulator-control unit 5. Inspect the appropriate magnetic encoder for
(see page 19-103), and retest.H damage, debris, and correct installation (see table):
NO-Replace the original wheel speed sensor (see DTC Appropriate Note
page 19-105).■ Magnetic
Encoder
21 Right-front Remove the
22 Left-front driveshaft
outboard joint
from the
appropriate
wheel hub (see
page 18-14).
23 Right-rear Remove the hub
24 Left-rear bearing unit (see
page 18-33).
Is the magnetic encoder OK?
substitute a known-good VSA modulator-control unit
(see page 19-103), and retest.H
NO-Remove the debris from the magnetic encoder,
or replace the wheel bearing (front) or the hub bearing
unit (rear):
• Front: Replace the front wheel bearing (see page
18-14).B
• Rear: Replace the rear hub bearing unit (see page
18-33).B
DTC 25: Yaw Rate Sensor 6. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
7. Disconnect the sensor cluster 6P connector (see page
DTC 26: Lateral Acceleration Sensor 19-101).
DTC 104: Sensor Cluster 8. Disconnect the VSA modulator-control unit 47P
10. Measure the voltage between body ground and VSA
3. Test-drive the vehicle around a number of corners. modulator-control unit 47P connector terminals No. 6,
NOTE: Drive the vehicle on the road, not on a lift. No. 25, No. 29, and No. 31 individually.
4. Check for DTCs with the HDS. VSA MODULATOR-CONTROL UNIT 47P CONNECTOR
Is DTC 25, 26, or 104 indicated? ICLST-IG (WHT/RED)

I2 I 3 I 4 | 5 I 6 t7 ! / | / i 7 i l l l / i / i / l l 5 |
1 - 16
YES-Go to step 5. >5|/1/|2S |2S )|30|31
32 47
|3 3 | 3 4 | / l 3 6 | 3 7 | / | / | / 1 /f 4 2 |4 3 |/| I5|46|
NO-lntermittent failure, the system is OK at this time. CAN2-L CAN2-H CLST-GND
Check for loose terminals between the sensor cluster (RED) (WHT) (WHT/BLU)
6P connector and the VSA modulator-control unit 47P
connector. Refer to intermittent failures
troubleshooting (see page 19-54).!
5. Check the size, air pressure, and the amount of wear
of all four tires, and check the wheel alignment (see
page 18-5). Is there 0.1 Vormore?
Is the tire condition and wheel alignment OK? YES-Repair a short to power in the wire between the
VSA modulator-control unit and the sensor cluster.!
YES-Go to step 6.
NO-Go to step 11.
NO-Make sure the suspension is not modified, and
adjust the wheel alignment, and recheck by
test-driving.■
VSA
11. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 13. Check for continuity between VSA modulator-control
unit 47P connector terminals No. 6, No. 25, No. 29,
12. Check for continuity between body ground and VSA
No. 31, and sensor cluster 6P connector terminals
modulator-control unit 47P connector terminals No. 6,
No. 1, No. 3, No. 2, No. 5, individually.
No. 25, No. 29, and No. 31 individually.
VSA MODULATOR-CONTROL UNIT 47P CONNECTOR W ire side of female term inals
| CLST-IG (WHT/RED) CLST-IG (WHT/RED)
-7 /l/lxl^/lXl7l25l>l/|28l29|30l31. 1 |2 | 3 |4 | 5 |e | 7 | > 1 / l/ lll| / | / l/ | l5 | ■ 16
25|/L/i28|2S
o0
0
00
32 47
|33|34M36|37l/d/lz F M i F F 5M
CLST-GND
(WHT/BLU) CAN2-L CAN2-H CLST-GND
(RED) [-.(WHT) (WHT/BLU)
CAN2-L (RED)
Wire side of female term inals CLST-IG (WHT/RED)
Is there continuity? 1 2
YES-Repair a short to body ground in the wire ZE
sensor cluster.® CAN2-H (WHT)
NO-Go to step 13. CLST-GND (WHT/BLU)
SENSOR CLUSTER 6P CONNECTOR

YES-Go to step 14.
modulator-control unit and the sensor cluster.!
14. Substitute a known-good sensor cluster (see page DTC 27: Steering Angle Sensor
19-101).
1. Check the size, air pressure, and the amount of wear
NOTE: Check that the sensor cluster mounting base is of all four tires, and check the wheel alignment (see
not bent or twisted, and make sure the sensor cluster page 18-5).
is mounted properly and fixed.
Is the tire condition and wheel alignment OK?
YES-Go to step 2.
NO-Make sure the suspension is not modified, and
17. Clearthe DTC with the HDS. adjust the wheel alignment, and recheck by
test-dri ving.H
18. Do the VSA sensor neutral position memorization
(see page 19-101). 2. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
19. Test-drive the vehicle around a number of corners. 3. Clear the DTC with the HDS.
NOTE: Drive the vehicle on the road, not on a lift. 4. Test-drive the vehicle around a number of corners.
20. Check for DTCs with the HDS. NOTE: Drive the vehicle on the road, not on a lift.
Is DTC 25, 26, or 104 indicated? 5. Check for DTCs with the HDS.
YES-Check for loose terminals in the VSA Is DTC 64 indicated?
substitute a known-good VSA modulator-control unit YES-Do the troubleshooting for DTC 64 (see page
(see page 19-103), and "retest.■ 19-89).H
NO-lf any DTCs are indicated, go to the indicated NO-Go to step 6.

DTCs troubleshooting. If DTC is not indicated, replace 6. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
the original sensor cluster (see page 19-101).■
7. Disconnect the steering angle sensor 5P connector
(see page 19-100).
10. Measure the voltage between body ground and VSA 12. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
modulator-control unit 47P connector terminals No. 5
and No. 7 individually.
modulator-control unit 47P connector terminals No. 5
VSA MODULATOR-CONTROL UNIT 47P CONNECTOR and No. 7 individually.

STR-G (BLU/BLK) STR-VCC (YEL/BLK)
■J 12 | 3 | 4 | 5 J 6 | 7 | 7 1 ^ 1 i M /|/|1 5 |
16 STR-G (BLU/BLK) STR-VCC (YEL/BLK)
T IT I7 l7 l7 l7 l7 l7 l2 5 M 7 l2 8 |2 9 l3 o |3 i
32 I33|34(/l36|37l7171/l/|42|43|/l45l46| 47 ■\
I2 I3 |4 j5 j g |
16
^ y H /1 y H /|/n /l^ 2 5 l/i/l2 8 |2 9 |3 0 l3 1
32 47
|3 3 l3 4 l/l3 6 |3 7 l/i7 1 7 i/l4 2 |4 3 |/l4 5 |4 6 l

YES-Repair a short to power in the wire between the Is there continuity?
VSA modulator-control unit and the steering angle
sensor.B
NO-Go to step 11. steering angle sensor.B
11. Measure the voltage between body ground and VSA NO-Go to step 14.
No. 28, and No. 30 individually.
VSA MODULATOR-CONTROL UNIT 47P CONNECTOR No. 28, and No. 30 individually.
--------- 1 STR-Z (YEL/GRN) VSA MODULATOR-CONTROL UNIT 47P CONNECTOR
■j L3L415L6L7k V M 1
[33l34l/l36l37l7171/l/l42i4: 171451 i | 1 .I i .r r n m T l 7 [ 7 l 7 l n P I 7 l 7 I W 16
28|29|3C)|31
STR-A (RED/BLU) 32 47
flm/WMT) |3 3 |3 4 l/|3 6 |3 7 |/|/l/j/l4 2 k l / H L6|
r STR-B
(2 (GRN/WHT)
Is there 0.1 V or more? W ire side of female term inals
YES-Repair a short to power in the wire between the Is there continuity?

VSA modulator-control unit and the steering angle
sensor.®
NO-Go to step 12. steering angle sensor.B
NO-Go to step 15.
15. Check for continuity between VSA modulator-control 16. Check for continuity between VSA modulator-control
unit 47P connector terminals No. 5, No. 7, and unit 47P connector terminals No. 3, No. 28, No. 30,
steering angle sensor 5P connector terminals No. 1, and steering angle sensor 5P connector terminals
No. 5 individually. No. 3r No. 2, and No. 4 individually.
VSA MODULATOR-CONTROL UNIT-47P CONNECTOR VSA MODULATOR-CONTROL UNIT 47P CONNECTOR

W ire side o f female term inals Wire side of female terminals
STR-G (BLU/BLK) STR-VCC (YEL/BLK) I STR-Z (YEL/GRN)
|2|3|4|5|6|7 L/V1/|11 l/|/1 7 |i5 |
1 T 2 l3 r 4 |5 |6 |7 M /1 7 n T |7 C 7 1 7 fi5 r
16
A A A A A A A A Q A f i * 5|29|3()|31
/l/l/l/|/l/l/|/l2 5 |/|/|2 8 |2 9 |3 0 |3 1 |3 3 |3 4 |/|3 6 |3 7 |/|/1 /|/l4 2 |4 3 L / | 4 5 |
32 47 STR-A (RED/BLU) STR-B
|3 3 |3 4 |/|3 6 |3 7 |/|/|/|/l4 2 |4 3 |/l4 5 !4 6 |
(GRN/WHT)
STR-G (BLU/BLK) STR-VCC (YEL/BLK)
1 2 3 4 5 STR-B (GRN/WHT)
STEERING ANGLE SENSOR 5P CONNECTOR

Wire side of female term inals STR-Z (YEL/GRN)
STEERING ANGLE SENSOR 5P CONNECTOR

Is there continuity? Wire side of female terminals
YES-Go to step 16.
modulator-control unit and the steering angle YES-Go to step 17.
sensor.B
modulator-control unit and the steering angle
sensor.B
17. Substitute a known-good steering angle sensor (see DTC 3 1 , 32,33,34,35,36,37,38: ABS Solenoid
page 19-100).
3. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), then turn it to
20. Clear the DTC with the HDS. ON (II) again.
21. Test-drive the vehicle around a number of corners. 4. Check for DTCs with the HDS.
NOTE: Drive the vehicle on the road, not on a lift. Is DTC 31, 32, 33, 34, 35, 36, 37, or 38 indicated?
22. Check for DTCs with the HDS. YES-Check for loose terminals in the VSA
YES-Check for loose terminals in the VSA (see page 19-103), and retest.B
(see page 19-103), and retest.B
NO-Check for loose terminals in the steering angle
sensor 5P connector, if the connections are OK,
replace the original steering angle sensor (see page
19-100).B
DTC 51: Motor Lock 8. Check for continuity between VSA modulator-control
unit 47P connector terminal No. 1 and body ground.
DTC 52: Motor Stuck ON/OFF
2. Clear the DTC with the HDS. +B-P (WHT/RED)
•J |2 |3 |4 |5 |6 |7 | / | / |/1 llb 1 /|/ll5 |
16
3. Test-drive the vehicle at 19 mph (30 km/h) or more. AAAAAAA/\25\A/\2%\2%\3^
32 47
| 3 3 l 3 4 | / | 3 6 |3 7 |/ |/ l / |/l 4 2 |4 3 [ / |4 5 |4 6 |
NOTE: Drive the vehicle on the road, not on a lift.
(g )
Is DTC 51 or 52 indicated?
YES-Go to step 5. W ire side of female term inals
NO-intermittent failure, the system is OK at this time. Is there continuity?

Check for loose terminals in the VSA modulator-
control unit 47P connector. Refer to intermittent YES-Repair a short to body ground in the wire
failures troubleshooting (see page 19-54).! between the No. 17 (30 A) fuse in the under-hood
fuse/relay box and the VSA modulator-control unit.B
NO-lnstall a new No. 17 (30 A) fuse in the under-hood
6. Check the No. 17 (30 A) fuse in the under-hood fuse/ fuse/relay box, then go to step 9.
relay box.
9. Reconnect the VSA modulator-control unit 47P
Is the fuse blown? connector.
NO-Reinstall the checked fuse, then go to step 14. 11. Clear the DTC with the HDS.
VSA
12. Test-drive the vehicle at 19 mph (30 km/h) or more. 16. Check for continuity between VSA modulator-control
Is DTC 51 or 52 indicated?
YES-Replace the VSA modulator-control unit (see |2 |3 |4 |5 |6 |7 ^ U V |l ll /m i 5 |
16
page 19-103).B /l/l/M /l/1 /l/l2 5 |/|/|2 8 |2 9 |3 0 |3 1
32 47
NO-Troubleshooting is complete.®
GND-P (BLK)
@
15. Measure the voltage between VSA modulator-control W ire side of female term inals
VSA MODULATOR-CONTROL UNIT 47P CONNECTOR YES-Go to step 17.
+B-P (WHT/RED) NO-Repair an open in the wire between the VSA

”1
modulator-control unit and body ground (G302).B
16
/ t ^ l /l A V l/ l/ |2 5 |/ |/ l2 8 |2 9 |3 0 |3 1
32 ! 3 3 |3 4 |/ |3 6 |3 7 |/ l/ |7 l /|4 2 |4 3 l/ l4 5 |4 6 | 47 17. Reconnect the VSA modulator-control unit 47P
connector.
X 19. Clear the DTC with the HDS.
Is there battery voltage? NOTE: Drive the vehicle on the road, not on a lift.
YES-Go to step 16. 21. Check for DTCs with the HDS.
NO-Repair an open in the wire between the No. 17 Is DTC 51 or 52 indicated?
(30 A) fuse in the under-hood fuse/relay box and the
VSA modulator-control u n itB
(see page 19-103), and retest.■
DTC 54: Fail-safe Relay DTC 61: Low + B-FSR Voltage

1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). DTC 62: High + B-FSR Voltage
2. Clear the DTC with the HDS. NOTE: If the vehicle has high electric load or a weak
3. Test-drive the vehicle at 19 mph (30 km/h) or more. battery, DTC 61 may be stored when starting the engine.
NOTE: Drive the vehicle on the road, not on a lift. 1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
4. Check for DTCs with the HDS. 2. Clear the DTC with the HDS.
Is DTC 54 indicated? 3. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), then turn it to
ON (II) again.
modulator-control unit 47P connector. If necessary, Does the ABS indicator stay on?
substitute a known-good VSA modulator-control unit YES-Go to step 4.
(see page 19-103), and retestJH
NO-lntermittent failure, the system is OK at this
time.B 4. Check for DTCs with the HDS.
is DTC 61 or 62 indicated?
YES-Check the battery (see page 22-111) and the
charging system (see page 4-37 ).B
NO-Do the appropriate troubleshooting for the DTC
indicated.B
V - X VSA
DTC 64: Sensor Power Voltage DTC 65: Brake Fluid Level
1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 1. Check the brake fluid level in the master cylinder
reservoir.
Is brake fluid level OK?
YES-Go to step 2.
NO-lnspectthe brake pads: Front (see page 19-15),
4. Check for DTCs with the HDS. rear (see page 19-28), and replace worn out brake
Is DTC 64 indicated? pads, then recheck.B
NO-The system is OK at this time.B 3. Clear the DTC with the HDS.
5. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 4. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
6. Disconnect the steering angle sensor 5P connector 5. Disconnect the brake fluid level switch 2P connector
(see page 19-100). (see page 19-22).
7. Disconnect the VSA modulator-control unit 47P 6. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
connector (see step 2 on page 19-103). 7. Check for DTCs with the HDS.
8. Check for continuity between VSA modulator-control
YES-Go to step 8.
NO-Replace the reservoir (brake fluid level switch is
STR-VCC (YEL/BLK) included) on the master cylinder (see page 19-22).B
| 2 | 3 14 | 5 I 6 | 7
■J 16
A A A A A A /\A 2 ^ \A A 2 % \2 ^ m ^
32 47 9. Disconnect gauge control module connector A (30P)
|3 3 |3 4 |/l3 6 |3 7 ! /1 /1 /1 /|4 2 |4 3 |/|4 5 |4 6 |
(see page 22-371).
(g )
Wire side o f female terminals
steering angle sensor.B
NO-Check for loose terminals in the VSA
(cont'd)
10. Check for continuity between brake fluid level switch DTC 66: VSA Pressure Sensor (Inside of VSA
2P connector terminal No. 2 and body ground.
M odulator-control Unit)
BRAKE FLUID LEVEL SWITCH 2P CONNECTOR
2. Clearthe DTC with the HDS.
ON (II) again.
YES-Do the troubleshooting for DTC 64 (see page
Wire side of female term inals 19-89).
NO-Go to step 5.
5. Check the BRAKE PRESS in the VSA DATA LIST with
the HDS without pressing the brake pedal.
between the gauge control module and the brake fluid
level sw itch.! Is there 0.8 MPa or more?
NO-Check for loose terminals in the VSA YES-Go to step 6.
(see page 19-103), and retest.■ modulator-control unit 47P connector. If necessary,
(see page 19-103), and retest.■
6. Press the brake pedal until BRAKE SWITCH in the VSA
DATA LIST is turned ON with the HDS.
7. Check the BRAKE PRESS in the VSA DATA LIST with
the HDS.
Is there 0 MPa?
YES-Go to step 8.
NO-Check the brake pedal position switch function
and adjustment. If necessary, adjust or replace the
brake pedal position switch: Without power
adjustable pedals (see page 19-7).H
VSA
8. Do the VSA sensor neutral position memorization DTC 68: Brake Pedal Position Switch
(see page 19-101).
9. Start the engine and press the brake pedal until
BRAKE PRESS in the VSA DATA LIST is 15 MPa with 2. Check for other DTCs.
the HDS. Is another DTC indicated?
10. Check for DTCs with the HDS. YES-Do the appropriate troubleshooting for the
Is DTC 66 indicated? DTC.B
YES-Check for loose terminals in the VSA NO-Go to step 3.

modulator-control unit 47P connector. If necessary, 3. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
(see page 19-103), and retest.B 4. Check the brake pedal position switch (see page
22-274), and adjustment: Without power adjustable
NO-The system is OK at this time.B pedals (see page 19-6), with power adjustable pedals
(see page 19-7).
Is the brake pedal position switch and adjustment OK?
YES-Go to step 5.
NO-Adjust the brake pedal position switch. If
necessary, replace the switch: Without power
adjustable pedals (see page 19-7).B
8. Check for DTCs with the HDS. DTC 81: Central Processing Unit (CPU)
Is DTC 68 indicated? 1.Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
YES-Go to step 9. 2. Check for other DTCs.
NO-The system is OK at this tim e.ll Is another DTC indicated?
9. Troubleshoot the brake pedal position switch signal YES-Do the appropriate troubleshooting for the
circuit (see page 11 -381). DTC.B
Is the brake pedal position switch circuit OK? NO-Go to step 3.
YES-Go to step 10. 3. Clearthe DTC with the HDS.
NO-Repair the brake pedal position switch circuit.! 4. Test-drive the vehicle at 19 mph (30 km/h) or more.
10. Update the PCM if it does not have the latest software NOTE: Drive the vehicle on the road, not on a lift.
(see page 11-292), or substitute a known-good PCM
(see page 11-7). 5. Check for DTCs with the HDS.
11. Clear the DTC with the HDS. Is DTC 81 indicated?
12. Test-drive the vehicle at 19 mph (30 km/h) or more. YES-Check for loose terminals in the VSA
NOTE: Drive the vehicle on the road, not on a lift. substitute a known-good VSA modulator-control unit
13. Check for DTCs with the HDS. (see page 19-103), and retest.B
Is DTC 68 indicated? NO-lntermittent failure, the system is OK at this

time.B
YES-Check for loose terminals in the PCM connector
A (49P). Ifthe PCM was updafed, substitute a
known-good PCM (see page 11-7), then retest. If the
PCM was substituted, replace the VSA
modulator-control unit (see page 19-103).H
NO-lf the PCM was updated, troubleshooting is
complete. If the PCM was substituted, replace the
original PCM (see page 11-294).B
®V^VSA
DTC 83: PCM Communication DTC 84: VSA Sensor Neutral Position
1.Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 1. Do the VSA sensor neutral position memorization
(see page 19-101).
YES-Do the troubleshooting for DTC 86 (see page
ON (II) again.
19-94). HI
NO-Go to step 3.
4. Test-drive the vehicle at 19 mph (30 km/h) or more. modulator-control unit 47P connector. If necessary,
NOTE: Drive the vehicle on the road, not on a lift. substitute a known-good VSA modulator-control unit
YES-Go to step 6.
NO-The system is OK at this tim e.ll
6. Check for fuel and emissions systems DTCs with the
HDS (see page 11-3).
Are any PCM DTCs indicated?
YES-Do the applicable troubleshooting for the
PCM.B
DTC 86: F-CAN Communication DTC 91: VSA Operation

2. Clear the DTC with the HDS. 2. Clear the DTC with the HDS.
3. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), then turn it to 3. Test-drive the vehicle at 19 mph (30 km/h) or more.
ON (II) again.
YES-Go to step 5.
NO-The system is OK at this time.B modulator-control unit 47P connector. If necessary,
6. Check for fuel and emissions systems DTCs with the
HDS (see page 11-3).
Are any PCM DTCs indicated?
YES-Do the appropriate troubleshooting for the
PCM.B
DTC 105: Hydraulic Unit Temperature Sensor ,
DTC 121 122,123,124: VSA Solenoid
2. Clear the DTC with the HDS. 2. Clearthe DTC with the HDS.
3. Test-drive the vehicle at 19 mph (30 km/h) or more. 3. Test-drive the vehicle at 19 mph (30 km/h) or more.
NOTE: Drive the vehicle on the road, not on a lift. NOTE: Drive the vehicle on the road, not on a lift.
4. Check for DTCs with the HDS. 4. Check for DTCs with the HDS.
Is DTC 105 indicated? Is DTC 121, 122, 123, or 124 indicated?
YES-Replace the VSA modulator-control unit (see YES-Check for loose terminals in the VSA
page 19-103).B modulator-control unit 47P connector. If necessary,
time.B
VSA activation indicator does not go off, and 7. Check for continuity between VSA OFF switch 6P
connector terminal No. 3 and body ground.
no DTCs are stored
1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). VSA OFF SWITCH 6P CONNECTOR
2. Check the VSA activation indicator for several
seconds when the ignition switch is turned to ON (II).
Does the indicator come on then go off?
YES-The system is OK at this tim e .B
NO-Go to step 3.
4. Disconnect the VSA OFF switch 6P connector (see
page 19-102).
5. Check the VSA OFF switch (see page 19-102).
YES-Repair a short to body ground between the
Is the VSA OFF switch OK? gauge control module and the VSA OFF switch.B
YES-Go to step 6. NO-Substitute a known-good gauge control module,
then go to step 1 and recheck. If it is OK, replace the
NO-Replace the VSA OFF switch (see page 19-102).B original gauge control module (see page 22-371 ).B
6. Disconnect gauge control module connector A (30P)
(see page 22-371).
ABS indicator, brake system indicator, and 5. Reconnect the VSA modulator-control unit 47P
VSA indicator do not go off connector.
1. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 6. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
2. Check the No. 18 (15 A) fuse in the driver's under-dash 7. Check the ABS indicator, brake system indicator, and
VSA indicator for several seconds when the ignition
fuse/relay box.
switch is turned to ON (II).
Is the fuse blown?
Do the indicators come on then go off?
YES-Go to step 3.
YES-Troubleshooting is complete.®
NO-Replace the VSA modulator-control unit (see
3. Disconnect the VSA modulator-control unit 47P page 19-103).B
4. Checkfor continuity between VSA modulator-control
IG1 (BLK/RED)
-J | 2 | 3 j 4 j 5 | 6 |7
16
/\A A A A A A A ^ \A A i8 \2 ^ \m \z \
32 47
\z z \z 4 \A m \z 7 \A A A A 4 2 \4 z \A 4 5 \m \
(g)
between the No. 18 (15 A) fuse in the driver's
under-dash fuse/relay box and the VSA
modulator-control unit.B
NO-lnstall a new No. 18 (15 A) fuse in the driver's
8. Disconnect the VSA modulator-control unit 47P 12. Check for continuity between VSA modulator-control
connector (see step 2 on page 19-103). unit 47P connector terminal No. 16 and body ground.
10. Measure the voltage between VSA modulator-control
G ND-V (BLK)
-j 12 1 5 ! 4'-51 16
/l/l/l/l/l/l/l/|2 5 |/|/]2 8 |2 9 |3 0 |3 1
VSA MODULATOR-CONTROL U N IT 47P CONNECTOR
32 47
|3 3 |3 4 |/ l 3 6 |3 7 l / l / l/ L / |4 2 |4 3 |/] 4 5 |4 6 |
IG1 (BLK/RED)
|2j3|4|5|6i 7 1/1/1/1111/1/1/1151 16 Y
A A A A A A z I425\A/\28\29\ZQ\Z1
32 I33|34|/|36|37|7l7l/l7l42|43l/|45|46l 47 Wire side of female terminals
T
~~ Wire side of female terminals YES-Go to step 13.
Is there battery voltage? modulator-control unit and body ground (G302).B
YES-Go to step 11. 13. Disconnect gauge control module connector A (30P)
(see page 22-371).
NO-Repair an open in the wire between the No. 18
(15 A) fuse in the driver's under-dash fuse/relay box
and the VSA modulator-control unit.B
14. Check for continuity between VSA modulator-control
unit 47P connector terminal and gauge control
module connector A (30P) terminal (see table).
Sign VSA Modulator- Gauge Control

control Unit 47P Module
Connector Connector A (30P)
Terminal Terminal
CAN1-L No. 15 No. 23
CAN1-H No. 11 No. 24
CAN1-H (WHT)
CAN1-L (RED)
| 2 | 3 14 | 5 | 6 | 7 [ ? ^ | l l i 7 t 7 l T I T r 16
1
AAAAA/\/\A2s\AA2sMm\zi
32 |3 3 |3 4 |/i3 6 |3 7 i/1 /'Iy 1 /l4 2 i4 3 |/|4 5 |4 6 i 47
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 X 8 9 10 11 / / /
15 16 / 18 19 20 21 A M 2 Z 24 25 / 27 / / 30
CAN1-L (RED) CAN1-H (WHT)

NO-Repair an open in the wire between the gauge
control module and the VSA modulator-control
unit.fl
Steering Angle Sensor Replacement
SRS components are located in this area. Review the SRS component locations (see page 24-23) and the precautions
and procedures (see page 24-26).
NOTE: Do not damage or drop the combination switch as the steering angle sensor is sensitive to shock and vibration.
1. With the wheels in the straight ahead position and the steering wheel centered, remove the steering wheel (see page
17-6).
2. Remove the steering column covers and the cable reel (see page 24-231).
3. Remove the combination switch assembly (see page 17-9).
4. Remove the combination light switch (A) and the wiper/washer switch (B) from the combination switch body
assembly (C).
NOTE:
• Do not remove the steering angle sensor from the combination switch body.
• When installing the cable reel, set the turn signal canceling sleeve position so that the arrow points straight up (see
page 24-232).
• Note that the tightening order is specified for the combination switch mounting screws (see page 17-11).
@v — ✓ v S A
Sensor Cluster Replacement VSA Sensor Neutral Position

Memorization
NOTE: NOTE: Do not press the brake pedal during this
• Do not damage or drop the sensor as it is sensitive. procedure.
• Do not use power tools. 1. Park the vehicle on a flat and level surface, with the
1.Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). steering wheel in the straight ahead position.
2. Remove the driver's seat (see page 20-153). 2. With the ignition switch in LOCK (0), connect the HDS
to the data link connector (DLC) (A) under the driver's
3. Disconnect the sensor cluster 6P connector (A). side of the dashboard.

5. Select VSA ADJUSTMENT with the HDS, and follow
the screen prompts.
5. Install the sensor cluster in the reverse order of NOTE: See the HDS Help menu for specific
removal. instructions.
6. Do the VSA sensor neutral position memorization 6. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
(see page 19-101).
VSA Off Switch Test
1. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 6. Check for continuity between VSA OFF switch 6P
connector terminals No. 5 and No. 6. There should be
2. Remove the driver's dashboard outer panel (A) (see
continuity at all times.
page 20-134).
A VSA OFF SWITCH 6P CONNECTOR
7. Install the VSA OFF switch in the reverse order of

removal.
the dashboard.
4. Disconnect the VSA OFF switch 6P connector (C), and
remove the switch.
5. On the switch side, check for continuity between VSA
OFF switch 6P connector terminals No. 2 and No. 3.
There should be continuity when the button is
pressed, and no continuity when the button is
released.
VSA OFF SWITCH 6P CONNECTOR
1 r-
7 ' 2 3 /
u
5 6LI
MOP
Terminal side of male terminals
NOTE:
• Do not spill brake fluid on the vehicle; it may damage the paint If brake fluid gets on the paint, wash it off immediately
with water.
• Be careful not to damage or deform the brake lines during removal and installation.
• After removal, plug the ends of the hoses and the joints to prevent spilling brake fluid.
Removal
2. Disconnect the VSA modulator-control unit 47P connector (A) by pushing down the lever (B); the connector
disconnects itself.
D
22 N-m
3. Disconnect the six brake lines from the VSA modulator-control unit (C).
NOTE: Brake lines are connected to the master cylinder (D) and to the right-front (E), the left-rear (F), the right-rear (G),
and the left-front (H) brake systems.
4. Remove the VSA modulator-control unit with the bracket (I) from the body.
5. Remove the three TORX bolts, then remove the VSA modulator-control unit from the bracket.
VSA Modulator-Control Unit Removal and Installation (cont'd)
Installation
1. Install the VSA modulator-control unit onto the bracket, then tighten the three TORX bolts.
2. Install the bracket with the VSA modulator-control unit to the body.
3. Reconnect the six brake lines, then tighten the flare nuts to the specified torque.
4. Align the connecting surface of the VSA modulator-control unit 47P connector to the VSA modulator-control unit.
5. Pull up the lock of the VSA modulator-control unit 47P connector until you hear it click into place, then confirm the
connector is fully seated.
6. Bleed the brake system (see page 19-12).
7. Do the VSA sensor neutral position memorization (see page 19-101).
8. Start the engine, and test-drive the vehicle. Make sure the ABS and VSA indicators turn off during the test-drive and
do not comeback on.
NOTE: If the brake pedal is spongy, there may be air trapped in the modulator which could then be induced into the
normal brake system during brake pedal modulation. Bleed the brake system again (see page 19-12).
Front
2. Disconnect the wheel speed sensor connector (A).
3. Remove the clips, the bolt, and the wheel speed sensor (B).
4. Install the wheel speed sensor in the reverse order of removal, and note these items:
• Do not twist the sensor wires.
• If the wheel speed sensor comes in contact with the wheel bearing, it is faulty.
• Make sure there is no debris in the sensor mounting hole.
do not comeback on.
Wheel Speed Sensor Replacement (cont'd)
Rear
2. Disconnect the wheel speed sensor connector (A).
3. Remove the bracket (B), the clips, the bolts, and the wheel speed sensor (C).
4. Install the wheel speed sensor in the reverse order of removal, and note these items:
• Lubricate the O-ring on the wheel speed sensor.
• Do not twist the sensor wires.
• If the wheel speed sensor comes in contact with the hub bearing unit, it is faulty.
• Make sure there is no debris in the sensor mounting hole.
do not comeback on.
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) (if body maintenance is required)
these circuits.
Body
Body
Special Tools............................................ 20-2
Mirrors
Doors Component Location Index...................20-60
Component Location Index Power Mirror Replacement................... 20-62
Front D oor............................................ 20-3 Mirror Holder Replacement................. . 20-64
Sliding D oor.......................................... 20-5 Rearview Mirror Replacement.............. 20-66
Front Door Panel Removal/Installation. 20-8
Front Door Outer Handle Replacement. 20-10 Glass
Front Door Latch Replacement............. 20-12 Component Location Index...... ............. 20-70
Front Door Glass and Regulator Windshield Replacement....................... 20-72
Replacement........................................ 20-14 Rear Window Replacement.................. 20-77
Front Door Glass Outer Weatherstrip Quarter Glass Replacement................... 20-81
Replacement........................................ 20-15
Front Door Sash Outer Trim Moonroof
Replacement........................................ 20-16 Component Location Index................... 20-86
Front Door Outer Molding Symptom Troubleshooting Index........20-87
Replacement........................................ 20-17 Glass Position Adjustment.................... 20-88
Front Door Weatherstrip Replacement. 20-17 Glass Replacement...................................20-88
Front Door Side Sill Seal Replacement. 20-18 Wind Deflector Replacement................20-89
Front Door Glass Adjustment............... 20-18 Drain Channel Replacement................. 20-90
* Front Door Position Adjustment............20-19 Sunshade Replacement.........................20-91
Door Striker Adjustment......................... 20-20 Motor Replacement.................................20-92
Sliding Door Panel * Frame and Drain Tube Replacement. . . 20-93
Removal/Installation........................... 20-21 Drain Channel Slider and Cable
Sliding Door Outer Handle Assembly Replacement..................... 20-96
Replacement........................................ 20-22 Limit Switch Adjustment....................... 20-98
Sliding Door Latch Remote Control Closing Force and Opening Drag
Assembly Replacement..................... 20-23 Check................. ....................................20-99
Sliding Door Front Latch Replacement. 20-25
Sliding Door Outer Handle Crank Interior Trim
Replacement........................................ 20-25 Component Location In d e x .. ..............20-100
Sliding Door Rear Latch Replacement. 20-26 Trim Removal/Installation
Sliding Door Glass and Regulator Door Areas............................................ 20-101
Replacement........................................ 20-27 * Pillar Areas........................................... 20-103
Sliding Door Glass Adjustment..............20-29 Rear Side A re a ................. — .......... .. 20-110
Sliding Door Quarter Glass Tailgate A rea ........................................ 20-113
Replacement........................................ 20-30 Sunvisor Removal/Installation..............20-114
Sliding Door Lower Roller Assembly Grab Handle Removal/Installation........20-116
Removal/Installation...........................20-35 * Headliner Removal/Installation............. 20-116
Sliding Door Cable Adjustment............ 20-35 * Carpet Replacement................. ...............20-121
Sliding Door Sash Inner Trim Floor Well Cover Carpet
Replacement........................................ 20-42 Removal/Installation...........................20-124
Sliding Door Sash Outer Trim Floor Well Cover Replacement............. 20-124
Replacement...................................... 20-42 Floor Well Cover B Replacement..........20-125
Sliding Door Glass Outer Weatherstrip Floor Well Cover
Replacement........................................ 20-43 Disassembly/Reassembly.................. 20-126
Sliding Door Outer Sash Trim Floor Well Cover Lock Cylinder
Replacement........................................ 20-44 Replacement........................................ 20-127
Sliding Door Outer Molding In-floor Storage Bin
Replacement................... ....................20-44 Disassembly/Reassembly................... 20-129
Power Sliding Door Motor Unit
Replacem ent.......................................20-45
Sliding Door Center Rail Replacement. 20-49
Sliding Door Rear Pulley Mount
Replacement........................................ 20-51
Sliding Door Guide Pin Replacement.. 20-52
Sliding Door Subseal Replacement— 20-53
Sliding Door Removal/Installation........20-53
Consoles * Front Seat Cushion Cover
Detachable Console Replacement....................... ................ 20-185
Disassembly/Reassembly....................20-130 Second Row Seat
Disassembly/Reassembly................... 20-191
Dashboard Second Row Seat Riser
Driver's Dashboard Outer Panel Disassembly/Reassembly................... 20-195
Removal/Installation........................... 20-134 Second Row Seat Striker Replacement. 20-196
Driver's Lower Dashboard Switch Second Row Seat Armrest
Panel Removal/Installation..................20-135 Replacement........................................ 20-196
Driver's Dashboard Lower Cover
Second Row Seat-back Cover
Removal/Installation........................... 20-135 Replacement........................................ 20-197
Dashboard Center Panel
Second Row Seat Cushion Cover
Instrument Panel Removal/Installation. 20-137 Second Row Seat Lock Release Cable
Center Pocket Removal/Installation----- 20-137 Replacement........................................ 20-202
* Dashboard Center Lower Cover Third Row Seat Access Cable
Beverage Holder Removal/Installation. 20-139 Second Row Center Seat
Upper Glove Box Lid
Removal/Installation........................... 20-140 Second Row Center Seat-back Cover
Upper Glove Box Lid Damper Replacement........................................ 20-211
Removal/Installation........................... 20-140 Second Row Center Seat Side Frame
Upper Glove Box Pocket
Cover Replacement............................. 20-213
Removal/Installation......................... . 20-141 Second Row Center Seat Lever
Passenger's Dashboard Undercover
Removal/Installation........................... 20-213
Removal/Installation........................... 20-141 Second Row Center Seat Latch
* Lower Glove Box Removal/Installation. 20-142 Replacement........................................ 20-214
Lower Glove Box Lock Cylinder Second Row Center Seat Latch Cable
Replacement.........................................20-142 Replacement........................................ 20-216
Lower Glove Box Striker
Second Row Center Seat Lock Cable
Removal/Installation........................... 20-143 Replacement.........................................20-217
Lower Glove Box Damper
Second Row Center Seat Interlock
Removal/Installation........................... 20-144 Cable Replacement....................... . 20-218
Dashboard Side Vent Third Row Seat Removal/Installation .. 20-219
Removal/Installation........................... 20-144
Third Row Seat
* Dashboard/Steering Hanger Beam
Removal/Installation........................... 20-145 Third Row Seat Striker Replacement. . . 20-232
Dashboard/Steering Hanger Beam Third Row Seat Pivot
Disassembly/Reassembly....................20-148 Removal/Installation........................... 20-233
Dashboard Panel
Third Row Seat Pivot
Disassembly/Reassembly....................20-150 Disassembly/Reassembly................... 20-234
Third Row Seat Latch Replacement-----20-236
Seats
Third Row Seat Cover Replacement. . . 20-237
Component Location Index....................20-151
Third Row Seat Latch Cable
Front Seat Active Head Restraint
R e p la c e m e n t...................................... 20-240
Inspection.............................................. 20-152
Third Row Seat-back Recline Cable
* Front Seat Removal/Installation............20-153
Replacement........................................ 20-242
* Front Seat Disassembly/Reassembly.. 20-157
Front Seat Linkage
Bumpers
Disassembly/Reassembly Front Bumper Removal/Installation . . . . 20-245
Driver's Manual Height Adjustable.. 20-166 Front Bumper Lower Mesh
Driver's 8-Way Pow er......................... 20-168 R eplacem ent.........................................20-247
Passenger's M anual............................. 20-169 Front Bumper Lid Replacement.............20-247
Passenger's 4-Way Pow er..................20-172 Rear Bumper Removal/Installation----- -20-248
Front Seat Armrest Replacement..........20-173 Rear Bumper Step Replacement............20-249
* Front Seat Recline Motor Replacement. 20-175
* Front Seat Lumbar Support
R eplacem ent..................................... 20-176
* Front Seat-back Cover Replacem ent... 20-177
Hood
Hood Adjustment..................................... 20-250
Hood Insulator Replacement................. 20-251
Hood Seal and Hood Molding
Replacement........................................ 20-252
Tailgate
Tailgate Adjustment................................ 20-253
Tailgate Support Strut Replacement. . . 20-254
Tailgate Weatherstrip Replacement. . . 20-255
Fuel Fill Door

Fuel Fill Door Adjustment....................... 20-256
Exterior Trim
Front Grille Cover Replacement............ 20-257
Front Grille Replacement....................... 20-258
Cowl Cover Replacement....................... 20-260
A-Pillar Corner Trim Replacement........ 20-261
Windshield Side Trim Replacem ent... 20-262
Roof Rail Replacement........................... 20-265
Roof Molding Replacement.................. 20-266
Door Molding Replacement................... 20-268
Side Sill Panel Replacement................. 20-269
Tailgate Spoiler Trim Replacement— 20-270
Rear License Trim Replacement............20-272
Emblem Replacement............................. 20-274
Fenderwell
Front Inner Fender Replacement.......... 20-279
Front Splash Shield Replacement........ 20-281
Front Bulkhead Lower Trim
Replacement........................................ 20-282
Front Fender Fairing Replacement........20-282
Fuel Pipe Protector Replacement.......... 20-283
Rear Air Outlet Replacement................. 20-284
Openers
Component Location Index................... 20-285
Hood Opener Cable Replacement........ 20-286
* Fuel Fill Door Opener Cable
Replacement........................................ 20-287
Hood Latch Replacement....................... 20-289
Hood Release Handle Replacement-----20-290
Fuel Fill Door Opener Replacement----- 20-290
Tailgate Handle Replacement................ 20-291
Tailgate Latch Replacement................... 20-292
Frame
Subframe Replacement......................... 20-294
Frame Repair Chart................................. 20-298
Special Tools

© 82217-SHJ-A01 Stopper Plate 1
©
Component Location Index - Front Door
(For some models) Removal/Installation, page 20-8

Component Location Index - Front Door (cont'd)
Component Location Index - Sliding Door
I DOOR SASH INNER TRIM

Replacement, page 20-42 DOOR OUTER
MOLDING
DOOR SASH OUTER

UPPER RAIL TRIM TAPE (’07 m odel)
COVER DOOR OUTER SASH
TRIM ('08-10 m odels)
DOOR GLASS OUTER

DOOR GLASS INNER WEATHERSTRIP
WEATHERSTRIP Replacement, page 20-43
POWER SLIDING
DOOR PINCH SENSOR
SUNSHADE
GUIDE PIN
LOWER ROLLER
POWER
WINDOW
SWITCH
PANEL
POWER WINDOW
SWITCH
LOWER ROLLER
OPEN STOP LATCH
CESS ARTICULATED
HARNESS
Component Location Index - Sliding Door (cont'd)
CENTER CHANNEL GLASS RUN CHANNEL

FRONT SEAL
QUARTER GLASS
REGULATOR
OUTER HANDLE
PROTECTOR .
OUTER HANDLE
FAILSAFE LEVER CABLE Replacement, page 20-22
REAR LATCH CABLE SPACER
:over
OUTER HANDLE
CABLE A
REAR LATCH
Replacement, page 20-26 REMOTE CONTROL
FRONT LATCH CABLE

LOWER ROLLER
STOP CABLE
REAR STRIKER Adjustment, page 20-35 FRONT LATCH
LOWER ROLLER
LATCH CABLE
INNER HANDLE
LOWER ROLLER LOWER ROLLER LATCH
LATCH RELEASE CABLE FRONT STRIKER
OUTER HANDLE CRANK
POWER SLIDING DOOR
MOTOR UNIT
Front Door Panel Removal/Installation
Special Tools Required 3. Remove the power window switch panel (A).
«KTC Trim Tool Set SOJATP2014*
• Trim Pad Remover, Snap-on A 177A or equivalent, -1. Insert the appropriate trim tool in the slot at the
commercially available power window switch panel, and pry up to detach
the rear clip (B).
Âvailable through the Honda Tool and Equipment
-2. Pull out along the edge of the panel to release the
Program; call 888-424-6857
hooks (C) and front clip (D).
-3. Disconnect the power mirror switch connector (E)
NOTE: (driver's) and the power window switch connector
• Take care not to scratch the door or the related parts. (F).
• Take care not to bend the cable. Driver's door
• Use the appropriate tool from the KTC trim tool set to
avoid damage when removing components. Fastener Locations
1. Raise the glass fully.

2. Pry out the rear area of the cover (A) to release the
hooks (B, C) with the appropriate trim tool, then
remove the cover and the screws securing the inner
handle (D).
Fastener Locations
4. Remove the door panel (A) with as little bending as 5. Disconnect the inner handle cable (A) from the inner
possible to avoid creasing or breaking it. handle (B).
-1. Remove the screws.

-2. Detach the door panel clips with a commercially
available trim pad remover (B).
-3. Starting at the rear, pull the door panel upward,
then release the lock knob (C).
NOTE: To avoid damaging components inside the
door, do not use excessive force when raising the
panel.
95 mm (3.74 in)
6. If equipped, disconnect the courtesy light bulb

connector (A) and the driving position memory switch
connector (B).
Fastener Locations
► : Screw, 2 [> : Clip, 9
7. Remove the door panel (C).

Front Door Panel Front Door Outer Handle
Removal/Installation (cont'd) Replacement
8. If necessary, remove the screws securing the inner NOTE:
handle (A)r then remove the handle from the door • Put on gloves to protect your hands.
panel (B). • Take care not to scratch the door.
Fastener Locations 1. Remove these items:
► : Screw, 6 • Door panel (see page 20-8)
• Plastic cover, as necessary (see page 20-3)
3. Disconnect the outer handle rod (A) from the fastener
(B).
9. Install the door panel in the reverse order of removal,

• Ifthe clips are damaged or stress-whitened, replace
them with new ones.
• Make sure each connector is plugged in properly.
• Push the clips and the hooks into place securely.
• Make sure the power window and power door lock 4. Driver's door: Disconnect the cylinder rod (A), and
operate properly. remove the maintenance cap (B) from the rear of the
door, then loosen the screw securing the cylinder
protector (C) and the outer handle.
NOTE: Because of the thread lock (D) on the middle of
threads, the screw will stay on the protector after it is
loosened.
Fastener Location
► : Screw, 1
5. Remove the bolt, slide the cylinder protector (A) 7. Driver's door: Remove the screws (A, B), then
rearward, then remove the cylinder switch (driver's separate the lock cylinder (C), the cylinder switch (D),
door for some models), the lock cylinder (driver's and the cylinder protector (E).
door), and the cylinder protector as an assembly.
Fastener Locati ons
Fastener Location A► : Screw, 1 B ► ; Screw, 1
► ; Bolt, 1
6. With cylinder switch: Disconnect the cylinder switch

connector (A), and detach the harness clip (B), then
remove the cylinder switch (C).
8. Remove the bolt, then remove the spacer (A).
Fastener Location
► : Bolt, 1
Front Door Outer Handle Front Door Latch Replacement
Replacement (cont'd)
9. Pull out the outer handle (A) of the door panel in the NOTE: Put on gloves to protect your hands.
sequence shown.
2. Remove these items:
• Door panel (see page 20-8)
• Plastic cover, as necessary (see page 20-3)
3. Disconnect the cylinder rod from the lock cylinder,
and disconnect the outer handle rod from the outer
handle (see page 20-10).
4. Remove the bolt, then remove the center lower
channel (A) by pulling it downward.
Fastener Location
► : Bolt, 1
10. Install the outer handle in the reverse order of

• Make sure the cylinder switch harness is routed
properly.
• Make sure the cylinder switch connector is plugged
in properly, and each rod is connected securely.
• Make sure the door key cylinder/door locks operate
properly.
• Make sure the door handle works properly before
closing the door.
• Make sure the plastic cover on the door is installed
properly and sealed around its outside perimeter to
seal out water.
Fastener Location
► : Screw, 1
6. Disconnect the power door lock actuator connectors 8. Remove the screws/then remove the upper cover (A)
(A), and detach the inner handle cable clip (B). and the base cover (B) from the latch (C) by releasing
Remove the screws securing the latch (C) and the lock the hook (D).
cable protector.
NOTE;
Fastener Locations • Reinstall the latch in the reverse order of removal.
^ ; Screw, 3 Apply multipurpose grease to the pivot (E) on the
latch lever.
• Make sure the anti-friction tape seal (F) of the latch
cable is installed in the covers securely.
Fastener Locations
► : Screw, 3
7. Remove the latch (A) with the protector through the

hole in the door. Take care not to bend the outer
handle rod (B), the cylinder rod (C), the lock cable (D),
or the inner handle cable (E).
9. If necessary, disconnect the inner handle cable (A)

from the latch (B). Reinstall the cable, wrap
anti-friction tape seal (C) around the cable.
(cont'd)
Front Door Latch Replacement Front Door Glass and Regulator
(cont'd) Replacement
10. install the latch in the reverse order of removal, and NOTE: Put on gloves to protect your hands.
note these items;
1. Remove the door panel (see page 20-8).
• Ifthe clip is damaged or stress-whitened replace it
with a new one. 2. Remove the plastic cover (see page 20-3).
• Push the clip and the hook into place securely. 3. Lower the glass (A) until you can see the bolts, then
• Make sure the actuator connectors are plugged in remove them. Carefully pull out the glass through the
properly and each rod is connected securely. window slot. Take care not to drop the glass inside the
• Make sure the door locks and opens properly. door.
• Peel off the old anti-friction tape seals on the covers
Fastener Locations
if necessary. Clean the surface and the edges of the
covers, and screw heads with isopropyl alcohol
where new adhesive is to be applied. Attach the
new anti-friction tape seals (A, B, C) to the surface
and edges of the covers, and screw heads as
shown.
seal out water.
2 mm (0.08 in)
6x 1.0 mm
9.8 N-m (1.0 kgf-m, 7.2 ibf-ft)
4. Disconnect the connector (A) from the regulator (B).
Fastener Locations
5. Remove the bolts (C), and loosen the bolts (D), then
remove the regulator through the hole in the door.
Front Door Glass Outer
Weatherstrip Replacement
6. Apply multipurpose grease to the sliding surfaces of Special Tools Required
the regulator (A) where shown. KTC Trim Tool Set SOJATP2014*
*AvaiIable through the Honda Tool and Equipment
NOTE:
• Once you remove the door glass outer weatherstrip,
replace it with a new one because it will bend during
removal.
• Put on gloves to protect your hands.
• Take care not to scratch the door.
avoid damage when removing components.
7. Install the glass and the regulator in the reverse order
• Power mirror:
of removal, and note these items:
- Without driving position memory system (see
• Make sure the connector is plugged in properly.
page 20-62)
• Make sure that there is no clearance between the
- With driving position memory system (see page
glass and glass run channel when the glass is
closed. 20-63)
• Roll the glass up and down to see if it moves freely 2. Remove the screws from the edges of the door.
without binding.
Fastener Locations
• Adjust the position of the glass as necessary (see
page 20-18). ► : Screw, 2
• Do the power window control unit reset procedure

(see page 22-301).
• Make sure the power door locks, power windows,
and power mirror operate properly.
seal out water.
• Check for water leaks (see step 8 on page 20-19).
• Test-drive, and checkfor wind noise and rattles.
Front Door Glass Outer Front Door Sash Outer Trim
Weatherstrip Replacement (cont'd) Replacement
3. Starting at the rear, pull up the door glass outer Speci al Tools Required
weatherstrip (A) at each area where the inner molding KTC Trim Tool Set SQJATP2014*
(B) catches the inside edge of the window slot, then *Available through the Honda Tool and Equipment
remove the weatherstrip. Program; call 888-424-6857
*08-10 Models
NOTE;
1. Remove the screw, then remove the door sash outer
trim (A).
Fastener Location
► : Screw, 1
0Xffi>
-------- 1 A
4. Install the weatherstrip in the reverse order of

removal, and push it into place securely.
2. Install the door sash outer trim in the reverse order of

removal, and make sure you do not roll up the lip (B)
of the door glass outer weatherstrip. If necessary, set
a plastic plate between the lip and weatherstrip.
Install the top edge of the weatherstrip while sliding
the plastic plate sideways. Be careful not to cut the lip.
Front Door Outer Molding Front Door Weatherstrip
Replacement Replacement
Special Tools Required NOTE:
KTC Trim Tool Set SQJATP2014* • Take care not to scratch the door.
• Available through the Honda Tool and Equipment • Use a clip remover to remove the clips.
1. Remove the power mirror:
• Without driving position memory system (see page
NOTE;
20-62)
• Once you remove the door outer molding, replace it
• With driving position memory system (see page
with a new one because it will bend during removal.
20-63)
• Take care not to scratch the door. 2. Remove the door checker mounting bolt (A).
• Use the appropriate tool from the KTC trim tool set to Fastener Locations
A► : Bolt, 1 B [> : Clip, 34 C |> : Clip, 1
1. Remove the power mirror:
• Without driving position memory system (see page
20-62)
• With driving position memory system (see page
20-63)
2. Pry out the clips with the appropriate trim tool, and
then remove the door outer molding (A).
Fastener Locations
3. Detach the clips (B, C), and release the door

weatherstrip (D) from the holder (E) on the door sash,
then remove the weatherstrip.
3. Install a door outer molding in the reverse order of
4. Install the door weatherstrip in the reverse order of
• Push the clips into place securely.
• Make sure the upper and lower sides of the molding
them with new ones.
are catching the edges of the sash properly.
• Make sure the weatherstrip is installed in the holder
securely.
• Apply medium strength liquid thread lock to the
door checker mounting bolt before installation.
Front Door Side Sill Seal Front Door Glass Adjustment
Replacement
NOTE: NOTE:
• Take care not to scratch the door. • Check the door weatherstrips and the glass run
• Use a clip remover to remove the clips. channel for damage or deterioration, and replace
them if necessary.
1. Detach the clips, then remove the door side sill seal
• Wipe the run channel clean with a shop towel.
(A).
1. Place the vehicle on a firm, level surface when
Fastener Locations adjusting the door glass.
> : Clip, 7
• Plastic cover (see page 20-3)
3. Carefully lower the glass (A) until you can see the
glass mounting bolts (B), then loosen them.
2. Install the side sill seal in the reverse order of removal,

them with new ones.
4. Push the glass against the glass run channel (C), then
tighten the glass mounting bolts to the specified
torque.
Front Door Position Adjustment
5. Check that the glass moves smoothly. SRS components are located in the B-pillar bottom area.
Review the SRS component locations (see page 24-23)
6. Raise the glass fully, and check for gaps. Also check
and the precautions and procedures (see page 24-26)
that the glass (A) contacts the glass run channel (B)
before doing repairs or service.
evenly.
NOTE: Check for a flush fit with the body, then check for
equal gaps between the front, rear, and bottom door
edges and the body. Check that the door and body edges
are parallel.
adjusting the doors.
2. Adjust at the hinges (A):
• Pad a floor jack (B) with shop towels (C), then use
the jack to support the door while adjusting it.
• Remove the front inner fender, '07 model (see page
20-279), '08-10 models (see page 20-280), and the
front fender fairing (see page 20-282). Loosen the
hinge mounting bolts (D) slightly, and move the
7. Attach the plastic cover making sure it is sealed door backward or forward, up or down as
around its outside perimeter to seal out water. necessary to equalize the gaps.
8. Check for water leaks. Run water over the roof and on
the sealing area as shown, and note these items:
• Use a 12 mm (1/2 in) diameter hose (A).
• Adjust the rate of water flow as shown (B).
• Do not use a nozzle.
• Hold the hose about 300 mm (12 in) away from the
door (C).
12 mm (1/2 in)
0.5 m (19 in)
300 mm (12 in)

Front Door Position Adjustment Door Striker Adjustment
(cont'd)
3. Check that the door and the body edges are parallel. If Make sure the door latches securely without slamming
necessary, adjust the door cushions (A) to make the it. If necessary, adjust the striker (A). The striker can be
rear of the doors flush with the body. adjusted slightly up or down, and in or out.
1. Loosen the screws (B).
A
4. Tighten the mounting bolts to the specified torque. 18 N-m (1.8 kgf-m, 13 Ibf-ft)
5. Apply touch-up paint to the hinge mounting bolts, and 2. Wrap the striker with a shop towel, then adjust the
around the hinges. striker by tapping it with a plastic hammer (C). Do not
tap the striker too hard.
6. Check for water leaks (see step 8 on page 20-19).
3. Lightly tighten the screws.
4. Hold the outer handle out, and push the door against
the body to be sure the striker allows a flush fit. If the
door latches properly, tighten the screws to the
specified torque, and recheck.
Sliding Door Panel Removal/Installation
Speci al Tools Required 4. Pull the retainer (A) off of the inner handle shaft (B)
• KTC Trim Tool Set SOJATP2014* with a hook-shaped tool, and remove the inner handle
• Trim Pad Remover, Snap-on A 177A or equivalent, (C).
commercially available
NOTE:
• Put on gloves to protect your hand.
1. Open the sliding door as necessary.
2. Lower the glass fully.
3. Remove the power window switch panel (A).
-1. Pry on the rear edge of the switch panel with a trim
5. Release the sliding door sash inner trim as necessary
tool to release the rear clip.
(see page 20-42).
-2. Pull out along the edge of the panel to release the
hooks (B). 6. Detach the door panel clips with a commercially
-3. Disconnect the power window switch connector available trim pad remover (A).
(C).
95 mm (3.74 in)
Fastener Location
0 : Clip, 1
Fastener Locations
7. Pull the door panel (B) away from the inner handle
shaft (C) and remove it.
Sliding Door Panel Sliding Door Outer Handle
8. If necessary, remove the screws, then remove the NOTE:
sliding door sunshade (A). • Put on gloves to protect your hands.
Fastener Locations • Take care not to scratch the door.
► : Screw, 6 1. Remove the remote control assembly (see page
20-23).
2. Release the cable end (B) from the latch (C) and the
fastener (D). Loosen the nuts (E), and then separate
the outer handle cable A from the outer handle
protector (F).
NOTE: If the joint bushing is damaged or
stress-whitened, replace it with a new one.
9. Install the sliding door panel in the reverse order of

• Make sure the power window switch connector is
plugged in properly.
• If the clips are damaged or stress-whitened, replace
them with new ones.
3. Remove the bolt, and release the hook (A), then
remove the outer handle protector (B).
Fastener Location
► : Bolt, 1
Sliding Door Latch Remote Control
Assembly Replacement
4. Remove the bolt, then remove the spacer (A). NOTE: Put on gloves to protect your hands.
Fastener Location 1. Remove the sliding door panel (see page 20-21).
► : Bolt 1 2. Disconnect the connectors (A), and detach the
harness clips (B).
5. Pull out the outer handle (A) of the door panel in the
sequence shown.
6. Install the outer handle in the reverse order of

removal, and note these items;
• Push the hook into place securely.
• Make sure outer handle cable A is connected
securely.
• Do the outer handle cable A adjustment (see page
20-35).
• Make sure the door handle works properly.
seal out water.
Sliding Door Latch Remote Control Assembly Replacement (cont'd)
4. Remove the remote control assembly (A). 5. If necessary, remove outer handle cable B from the
remote control (A).
-1. Disconnect the power door lock actuator
connectors (C), and the remote control switch -1. Remove the screws from the cover (C).
connector (D). -2. Disconnect the outer handle cable B.
-2. Release the cable holders (E), and disconnect the
failsafe lever cable (F), the rear latch cable (G), the Fastener Locations
front latch cable (H), outer handle cable B and the
inner handle lower roller latch release cable (I).
-3. Remove the bolts (J), and loosen the bolt (K).
Fastener Locations
6. Do the sliding door cable adjustment on outer handle

cable B (see page 20-35).
7. Install the remote control assembly in the reverse
order of removal, and note these items:
• Make sure the actuator connectors and switch
connector are plugged in properly, and each cable
is routed properly and connected securely.
• Take care not to bend any of the cables.
• Make sure the door locks and opens properly.
Sliding Door Front Latch Sliding Door Outer Handle Crank
NOTE: Put on gloves to protect your hands. NOTE:
1. Remove the outer handle crank (see page 20-25).
© Take care not to scratch the door.
2. Release the cable holder (A). Disconnect the front
latch cable (B), and detach the cable clips (C). 1. Remove the sliding door panel (see page 20-21).
2. Disconnect the connectors, and detach the harness
Fastener Locations
clips (see step 2 on page 20-23).
3. Remove the plastic cover (see page 20-5).
4. Release the cable holders (C), and disconnect outer
handle cable A, the inner handle lower roller latch
release cable (D) and outer handle cable B.
Disconnect the power release actuator connector (E),
and detach the harness clip (F).
Fastener Locations
G, H ► ; Bolt, 3
3. Remove the screws, then remove the front latch (D).

4. Do the sliding door cable adjustment on the front
latch cable (see page 20-35).
5. Install the front latch in the reverse order of removal,
• If the clips are damaged or stress-whitened replace
them with new ones.
• Make sure the cables are connected securely.
5. Remove the bolt (G) and loosen the bolts (H), then
• Take care not to bend any of the cables. remove the outer handle crank (I).
Sliding Door Outer Handle Crank Sliding Door Rear Latch
Replacement (cont'd) Replacement
6. Release the holder (A), and disconnect the lower roller NOTE:
latch cable (B) from the outer handle crank (C). • Put on gloves to protect your hands.
1. Remove the door glass (see page 20-27).
2. Release the cable holder (A), and disconnect the
failsafe lever cable (B) and the rear latch cable (C).
B
7. Install the outer handle crank in the reverse order of

• If the clips are damaged or stress-whitened replace
them with new ones.
• Make sure the release actuator connector is
plugged in properly, and the cables are routed
properly and connected securely.
seal out water.
Sliding Door Glass and Regulator
Replacement
4. Disconnect the rear latch assembly connectors (A), NOTE:
and release the hook (B). • Put on gloves to protect your hands.
• Take care not to drop the glass inside the door.
Fastener Locations
C > ;B o it,3 Dr E ► : Bolt, 2 1. Remove these items:
• Door sash inner trim (see page 20-42)
• Door sash outer trim (see page 20-42)
F
3. Remove the plastic cover (see page 20-5).
bolts, then remove them. Carefully lower the glass.
Fastener Locations
► : Bolt, 2
{0.8 kgf-m, 6 Ibf-ft)

5. Remove the bolts (C, D), and loosen the bolt (E), then
remove rear latch (F).
6. Do the sliding door cable adjustment on the following
cables:
• Failsafe lever cable (see page 20-35)
• Rear latch cable (see page 20-35)
7. Install the rear latch in the reverse order of removal,
them with new ones.
• Make sure the connectors are plugged in properly,
6 x 1.0 mm
and the cables are routed properly and connected 8 N-m (0.8 kgf-m, 6 Ibf-ft)
securely.
seal out water.
(cont'd)
Sliding Door Glass and Regulator Replacement (cont'd)
5. Pull away the glass run channel (A) as needed, then 8. Carefully remove the glass (A) out through the
remove the nut. Remove the bolts securing the center window opening.
channel (B).
Fastener Locations
9. Remove the regulator (A).

-1. Disconnect the front latch cable (B), and detach the
harness clips (C).
-2. Disconnect the lower roller stop cable (D), the
motor connector (E), and the switch connector (F),
then detach the connector clip.
6. Pull up the center channel (A), and remove the center -3. Slide the regulator link cable and the front latch
channel bracket (B). cables in through the hole in the door skin.
-4. Loosen the bolts (G, H), and remove the bolts (I).
Fastener Locations
G► ; Bolt, 3 H► : Bolt, 3 I ► : B o lt , 2
(Black)
7. Pull the top of the center channel forward, separate it

from the glass run channel (C), and pull it up from the
door glass (D) and out through the window opening.
Take care not to damage the outer weather strip (E).
Sliding Door Glass Adjustment
10. Apply grease to all the sliding surfaces of the NOTE:

regulator (A) and the switch lever (B) where shown. • Check the door weatherstrips and the glass run
channel for damage or deterioration, and replace
them if necessary.
• Wipe the run channel clean with a shop towel.
adjusting the door glass.
2. Remove the sliding door panel (see page 20-21).
4. Pull back the plastic cover (see page 20-5).
glass mounting bolts (B), then loosen them.
11. Install the glass and the regulator in the reverse order
them with new ones.
• Before installing the regulator, make sure the
switch lever is in the position shown.
• Make sure the connectors and the cables are
installed properly.
• Roll the glass up and down to make sure it moves
freely without binding.
9.8 N-m
• Make sure that there is no clearance between the (1.0 kgf-m, 7.2 Ibf-ft)
glass and the glass run channel when the glass is
closed. 6. Push the glass against the center channel (C), then
• Adjust the position of the glass as necessary (see tighten the glass mounting bolts to the specified
page 20-29). torque.
• Make sure the plastic cover on the door is installed 7. Check that the glass moves smoothly.
seal out water.
• Test-drive, and check for wind noise and rattles.
Sliding Door Glass Adjustment Sliding Door Quarter Glass
8. Raise the glass fully, and check for gaps. Also check NOTE:
that the glass (A) contacts the glass run channel (B) • Put on gloves to protect your hands.
evenly. • Wear eye protection while cutting the glass adhesive
with piano wire.
• Use seat covers to avoid damaging any surfaces.
• Glass adhesive can be efficiently cut with a
commercially available auto glass tool. See the tool
manufacturer's instructions for details.
• Door glass (see page 20-27)
• Outer weatherstrip (see page 20-43)
• Outer molding (see page 20-44)
2. Ifthe old quarter glass is to be reinstalled, make
alignment marks across the glass and the body with a
grease pencil.
3. Remove the front seal (A) from the front edge of the
quarter glass (B). If necessary, cut the rubber dam
9. Attach the plastic cover making sure it is sealed with a utility knife.
around its outside perimeter to seal out water.
10. Check for water leaks. Run water over the roof and on
the sealing area as shown, and note these items:
• Use a 12 mm (1/2 in) diameter hose (A).
• Adjust the rate of water flow as shown (B).
• Do not use a nozzle.
• Hold the hose about 300 mm (12 in) away from the
door (C).
12 m m (1 /2 in)
0.5 m (19 in)
4. Apply protective tape along the inside and outside

edges of the body. Make a hole with an awl through
300 mm (12 in) the adhesive from inside the vehicle. Push a piece of
piano wire through the hole, and wrap each end
around a piece of wood.
11. Test-drive, and check for wind noise and rattles.

5. With a helper on the outside, pull back the piano wire 7. Scrape smooth the old adhesive, with a putty knife or
(A) and forth in a sawing motion. Hold the piano wire similar tool, until there is a thickness of about 2 mm
as close to the quarter glass (B) as possible to prevent (0.08 in) on the bonding surface around the entire
damage to the body, and carefully cut through the quarter glass opening flange:
adhesive (C) around the entire quarter glass. • Do not scrape down to the painted surface of the
body; damaged paint will interfere with proper
bonding.
• Remove the fasteners from the body.
8. Before installing the clips (A, B, C), apply glass primer
to the inside face of the quarter glass (D) where the
clips will be installed, and apply the clips with
adhesive tape. Be careful not to touch the quarter
glass where adhesive will be applied.
Cutting positions
6. Carefully remove the quarter glass.

Sliding Door Quarter Glass Replacement (cont'd)
9. Attach the new front seal (A) to the quarter glass (B) 10. Clean the body bonding surface with a shop towel
with adhesive tape (C). Before installing the front seal, dampened in isopropyl alcohol. After cleaning, keep
apply glass primer to the molding and the glass, then oil, grease, and water from getting on the surface.
attach the new front seal. Be sure the top of front seal
contacts the lower edge of the molding. 11. Ifthe old quarter glass is to be reinstalled, with a putty
knife to scrape off all of old adhesive and the
/' ///////, : Apply primer here. remaining rubber dam from the glass. Clean the
inside face and the edge of the glass with isopropyl
alcohol. Make sure the bonding surface is kept free of
water, oil, and grease.
12. Attach the rubber dam (A) with adhesive tape to the
inside surface of the glass (B) as shown. Be careful not
to touch the glass where adhesive will be applied.
22.3 mm
(0.88 in)
13. Apply a light coat of glass primer with an applicator to 14. Carefully apply a light coat of body primer to any
the inside face of the quarter glass (A) along the front exposed paint on the quater glass mounting flange.
seal (B), and to the molding as shown, then lightly Let the body primer dry for at least 10 minutes:
wipe it off with gauze or cheesecloth: • Do not apply body primer to any remaining old
• With the printed dots (C) on the quarter glass as a adhesive on the flange.
guide, apply the glass primer to the upper and • Be careful not to mix up the body and the glass
lower corner areas of the quarter glass. primer applicators.
• Do not apply body primer to the quarter glass, and • Never touch the primed surfaces with your hands.
do not mix up the body and glass primer
applicators. /' ///////, : Apply body primer to any exposed paint as shown.
• Never touch the primed surfaces with your hands. If
you do, the adhesive may not bond to the quarter
glass properly, causing a leak after the quarter glass
is installed.
• Keep water, dust, and abrasive materials away from
the primed surface.
/' //// /// : Apply glass primer here.
6 mm
15. Cut a “M" in the end of the nozzle (A) on the adhesive
cartridge as shown.
Sliding Door Quarter Glass Replacement (cont'd)
16. Put the cartridge in a caulking gun, and run a 18. Scrape or wipe off the excess adhesive with a putty
continuous bead of adhesive (A) around the edge of knife or towel. To remove adhesive from a painted
the glass (B) as shown. Apply the adhesive within 30 surface or the quarter glass with a soft shop towel
minutes after applying the glass primer. Make a dampened in isopropyl alcohol.
slightly thicker bead at each corner.
19. After the adhesive has dried, spray water over the
2 mm (0.08 in) quarter glass and check for leaks. Mark the leaking
area, let the quarter glass dry, then seal with sealant.
Let the vehicle stand for at least 4 hours after quarter
glass installation. If the vehicle has to be used within
the first 4 hours, it must be driven slowly.
20. Reinstall all remaining removed parts.
NOTE: Advise the customer not to do the following
things for 2 to 3 days:
• Slam the doors with all the windows rolled up.
• Twist the body excessively (such as when going in
and out of driveways at an angle or driving over
rough, uneven roads).
17. Hold the quarter glass (A) with suction cups (B) over
the opening, align it with the clips (C, D, E) set it down
on the adhesive. Lightly push on the quarter glass
until its edges are fully seated on the adhesive all the
way around.
NOTE: Do not open or close any of the doors for about
an hour until the adhesive is dry.
Sliding Door Lower Roller Sliding Door Cable Adjustment
Assembly Removal/Installation
1. Remove the lower roller plate (see step 4 on page Outer Handle Cable A
20-54).
NOTE:
2. Remove bolts, then remove the lower roller assembly
• This cable is routed between the outer slide door
(A).
handle and the outer handle crank assembly. It is
pulled by the outside handle and rotates the linkage of
the outer handle crank assembly.
• The remote control assembly needs to be off the door
in order to adjust the outer handle cable A.
1. Connect the outer handle cable A to the outer slide
door handle assembly (B) while keeping the locknut
(C) and the adjusting nut (D) loose.
2. Set the adjusting nut so the measurement (E) is

52 mm (2.05 in), and then tighten the locknut.
3. Loosen the locknut (B) and the adjusting nut (C) and
release the cable fasteners (D), then remove the
cables (E).
4. Install the cables on the new lower roller assembly.
5. Do the sliding door cable adjustment on the following
cables:
• Lower roller latch cable (see page 20-35)
• Lower roller stop cable (see page 20-35)
6. Install the lower roller assembly in the reverse order
of removal.
Sliding Door Cable Adjustment (cont'd)
3. Route the outer handle cable A inside of the sliding Outer Handle Cable B
door and connect it to the outer handle crank.
NOTE;
• This cable is routed between the outer handle crank
assembly and the remote control assembly. It is pulled
by the outer handle crank assembly and rotates the
linkage on the remote control assembly.
• Both the outer handle crank assembly and the remote
control assembly need to be off the door in order to
adjust the outer handle cable B.
1. Connect the outer handle cable B to the outer handle
B crank assembly (A).
53 mm
12.09 in)
4. Confirm that the measurement (B) is 53 mm (2.09 in)

at the outer handle crank assembly.
2. Loosen the mounting bolt (A), and position the other Front Latch Cable
end of the outer handle cable B in the remote control
assembly (C). NOTE;
• This cable is routed between the remote control
assembly and the front latch assembly. It is pulled by
the remote control assembly and releases the front
latch to open the door.
• The outer handle crank assembly needs to be off the
door in order to reach the front latch assembly.
• The cable bracket on the front latch assembly needs to
be adjusted before the front latch assembly is
mounted on the door.
1. Connect the front latch cable to the front latch
assembly lever and bracket.
2. Adjust the cable bracket (A) so that the measurement
(B) is 49 mm (1.93 in) at the other end of the cable
including the latch free play, then tighten the bolt (C).
49 mm
(1.93 in)
3. Adjust the cable bracket (D) so that the measurement
(E) is length 59 mm (2.32 in) at the other end of the
cable, then tighten the bolt.
4. After the outer handle crank assembly and the remote
control assembly are installed in the door, check the
measurement again, and confirm it is still
59 mm (2.32 in).
(cont'd)
3. After the front latch assembly is installed on the door Failsafe Lever Cable
and the front latch cable is connected to the remote
control assembly, confirm that the measurement is NOTE:
still 32 mm (1.26 in). • This cable is routed between the remote control
assembly and the rear latch assembly. It is pulled by
the remote control assembly and it activates the
failsafe lever.
• The rear latch assembly needs to be removed from the
. door in order to be able to adjust the failsafe lever
cable.
1. Connect the failsafe lever cable to the rear latch
assembly lever, but keep the clip (A) open.
B
35 mm
(1.38 in)
2. Adjust the length of the cable at the clip so that the

measurement (B) is 35 mm (1.38 in) at the other end of
the cable including the latch free play, and then lock
the clip.
3. After the rear latch assembly is installed on the door, Rear Latch Cable
and the failsafe lever cable is connected to the remote
control assembly, then check the measurement again; NOTE:
it should be 37 mm (1.46 in). • This cable is routed between the remote control
assembly and the rear latch assembly. It is pulled by
37 mm the remote control assembly and it releases the rear
latch to open the door.
• The rear latch assembly needs to be off the door in
order to adjust the failsafe lever cable.
1. Connect the rear latch cable to the rear latch assembly
lever and bracket.
2. Adjust the cable bracket (A) so that the measurement
(B) is 36 mm (1.42 in) at the other end of the cable
including the latch free play, then tighten the bolt (C).
The rear latch needs to be in the fully closed position.
36 mm (1.42 in)
L
3. After the rear latch assembly is installed on the door, Lower Roller Latch Cable
and the rear latch cable is connected to the remote
control assembly, then check the measurement again; NOTE;
it should be 35 mm (1.38 in). • This cable is routed between the outer handle crank
assembly and the lower roller latch assembly. It is
pulled by the outer handle crank assembly and it
releases the lower roller latch.
• Both the outer handle crank assembly and the lower
roller latch assembly need to be off the door in order
to adjust the lower roller latch cable.
1. Have the lower roller latch cable (A) connected to the
outer handle crank assembly (B).
2. Set the other end of the lower roller latch cable (A) in Lower Roller Stop Cable
the lower roller latch assembly (B) keeping the locknut
(C) and the adjusting nut (D) loose. NOTE:
• This cable is routed between the power window
regulator assembly and the lower roller lever
assembly. The cable is pulled by the power window
regulator when the window is about 100 mm (3.94 in)
from the top; it pulls the lower roller stopper.
• The lower roller stop cable can be easily adjusted
while both, the power window regulator assembly
and the lower roller lever assembly are mounted on
the sliding door.
1. Position the end of the lower roller stop cable (A) in
the lower roller latch assembly (B) keeping the locknut
(C) and the adjusting nut (D) loose. Make sure the
window is fully closed.
3. While the lower roller latch assembly is in the closed

position, set the adjusting nut so that the
measurement (E) is 35 mm (1.38 in) at the other end of
the cable including the latch free play, and then
tighten the locknut.
2. Set the adjusting nut so that the measurement (E) is

50 mm (1.97 in) at the other end of the cable, and then
tighten the locknut.
Sliding Door Sash Inner Trim Sliding Door Sash Outer Trim
NOTE: Take care not to scratch the door. NOTE: Take care not to scratch the door.
1. Lower the glass fully. 1. Lower the glass.
2. Pull down the hook locking tabs (A), then remove the 2. Detach the clips, and release the hooks (A), then
sunshade hooks (B). remove the door sash outer trim (B).
Fastener Locations
C t> ; Clip, 3 D P> : Clip, 8
(Orange)
3. Install new door sash outer trim in the reverse order of

them with new ones.
3. Detach the clips (C, D), then remove the door sash
inner trim (E).
4. Install the new door sash inner trim in the reverse
order of removal, and note these items:
them with new ones.
Sliding Door Glass Outer Weatherstrip Replacement
NOTE: 3. Starting at the rear, puli up the door glass outer

• Once you remove the door glass outer weatherstrip, weatherstrip (A) at each area where the inner molding
replace it with a new one because it will bend during (B) catches the inside edge of the window slot.
removal.
2. Remove the screw from the rear edge of the door.
Fastener Location
► : Screw, 1
4. First slide the door glass outer weatherstrip (A)

forward slightly, detach the clip (B) by pulling up the
front of the weatherstrip, then slide the weatherstrip
rearward to remove it.
A
Replace.
5. Install a new outer weatherstrip in the reverse order of

removal, and push it into place securely.
Sliding Door Outer Sash Trim Sliding Door Outer Molding
KTC Trim Tool Set SOJATP2014* • Take care not to scratch the door.
• Available through the Honda Tool and Equipment • Put on gloves to protect your hands.
1. Remove the door sash outer trim (see page 20-42).
*08-10 Models 2. Pull away the glass run channel (A) as needed, and
remove the screws (B, C).
NOTE;
• Put on gloves to protect your hands. Fastener Locations
• Take care not to scratch the door. B► : Screw, 2 C ► : Screw, 1 D [> : Clip, 2
avoid damage when removing components. Qxn> 0xan>
1. Remove the sliding door pinch sensor (see page
22-604).
2. Remove the screw, then remove the door sash outer
trim (A), if necessary, release the door center seal (B).
Fastener Location
► : Screw, 1
3. Remove the clips (D) from the outer molding (E), then
remove the outer molding from the sash.
4. Detach the remaining clips from the sash.
3. Install the outer sash trim in the reverse order of

removal, make sure you do not roll up the lip (C) of the
door glass outer weatherstrip. If necessary, set a
plastic plate between the lip and weatherstrip. Install
the top edge of the weatherstrip while sliding the
plastic plate sideways. Be careful not to cut the lip.
Power Sliding Door Motor Unit
Replacement
5. Install the cli ps (A) on the outer molding (B), and NOTE:
reinstall the outer molding. Ifthe clips are damaged or • Have an assistant help you when removing and
stress-whitened, replace them with new ones. installing the power sliding door motor unit.
Fastener Locations
A |> : Clip, 2 C► : Screw, 1 D► : Screw, 2
• Take care not to scratch the center rail or the body.
• Take care not to kink the cable.
• Take care not to drop or damage the door.
A 1. Place the vehicle on a firm, level surface when

removing and installing the sliding door.
• Sliding door (see page 20-53)
• Rear side trim panel (see page 20-110)
• Second row seat belt retractor (see page 24-11)
• Rear HVAC unit (right side only) (see page 21-202)
3. Remove the screws, then remove the speaker (A), and
disconnect the connector (B).
Fastener Locations
► : Screw, 3
6. Install the screws (C, D) and reinstall the glass run

channel (E).
Power Sliding Door Motor Unit Replacement (cont'd)
4. Remove the quarter plastic cover (A). 6. Detach the cable clips (A). Pull up the stoppers (B),
and push the cables (C) toward the motor (D).
A
5. Right side: Release the hooks (A), then remove the

blower unit cover (B).
7. While holding the cables in toward the motor, pull up 10. Release the power sliding door motor unit cable (A)
the stoppers (A), until the cables (B) push in fully, and from the center rail (B).
the stoppers hold the cables in place.
NOTE: You may have to wiggle the stoppers in order
to allow the cable to clear the stopper, before the
stopper will pull up completely.
11. Remove the center roller (A) from the center rail.
A
8. Remove the taillight (see page 22-271).
9. Remove the center rail cover (see step 8 on page
20-50).
12. Disconnect the power sliding door motor unit cables

(B) from the center roller.
Power Sliding Door Motor Unit Replacement (cont'd)
13. Remove the protector (A) as needed, and remove the 15. Right side: Disconnect the power sliding door control
bolts securing the front pulley (B). unit connectors (A), and remove the screws. Release
the hook (B), then remove the power sliding door
Fastener Locati ons control unit (C).
► ; Bolt, 4
Fastener Locations
14. Remove the nuts securing the rear pulley (A).
Fastener Locations 16. Left side: Disconnect the power sliding door motor
• :Nut,3 unit connectors (A), then detach the connector clip
(B). Remove the bolt (C), and loosen the bolts (D), then
6 x 1.0 mm remove the power sliding door motor unit (E).
9.8 N-m
(1.0 kgf-m, 7.2 Ibf-ft) Fastener Locations
C ► : Bolt, 1 D ► : Bolt, 2
6 x 1.0 mm
9.8 N-m
(1.0 kgf-m, 7.2 Ibf-ft)
x 1.0 mm
A B 9.8 N-m
(1.0 kgf-m, 7.2 Ibf-ft)
Sliding Door Center Rail
Replacement
17. Right side: Disconnect the power sliding door control NOTE:
unit connectors (A). Remove the bolt (B), and loosen • Use seat covers to avoid damaging any surfaces.
the bolts (C), then remove the motor unit (D). • Take care not to scratch the body.
Fastener Locations • Put on gloves to protect your hands.
B► : Bolt, 1 € ► : Bolt, 2 1. Remove these items:
• Taillight (see page 22-271)
• Rear blower unit (right side only) (see page 21-202)
2. Manual sliding door: Remove the center roller from
the center rail.
(1.0 kgf-m, A
7.2 Ibf-ft)
18. Install the power sliding door motor unit in the
reverse order of removal, and note these items:
• Power sli ding door cables are routed properly.
3. Power sliding door: Remove the speaker (see step 3

on page 20-45).
4. Power sliding door: Remove the plastic cover (see
step 4 on page 20-46).
5. Power sliding door right side: Remove the blower unit
cover (see step 5 on page 20-46).
6. Power sliding door: Detach the cable clips. Pull up the
stoppers, and push the cables toward the motor, (see
7. Power sliding door: Pull up the stoppers farther up to
hold the cables in place, (see step 7 on page 20-47)
Sliding Door Center Rail Replacement (cont'd)
8. Remove the bolt (A) and the screw (B), then slide the 13. Remove the nuts from inside the vehicle.
center rail cover (C) and remove it.
Fastener Locations
Fastener Locations % : Nut, 5
9. Power sliding door: Release the power sliding door

motor unit cable from the center rail (see step 10 on
page 20-47).
10. Power sliding door: Remove the center roller (see step
11 on page 20-47).
11. Power sliding door: Disconnect the power sliding
door motor unit cable from the center roller (see step
12 on page 20-47).
12. Remove the screws. Detach the clips, then remove the
center rail cover spacer (A).
Fastener Locations
^SiN
Sliding Door Rear Pulley Mount
Replacement
15. Clean the groove area of the center rail (A). With NOTE:
power sliding door, apply multipurpose grease to the • Use seat covers to avoid damaging any surfaces.
corner area of the sliding door, as shown. • Take care not to scratch the center rail or the body.
• Taillight (see page 22-271)
2. Power sliding door: Remove the speaker (see step 3
on page 20-45).
3. Power sliding door: Remove the plastic cover (see
4. Power sliding door right side: Remove the rear blower
unit cover (see step 5 on page 20-46).
5. Power sliding door: Detach the cable clips. Pull up the
stoppers, and push the cables toward the motor (see
6. Power sliding door: Pull the stoppers farther up to
and if the clips are damaged or stress-whitened, hold the cables in place (see step 7 on page 20-47).
replace them with new ones.
7. Power sliding door: Release the power sliding door
motor unit cable from the center rail (see step 10 on
page 20-47).
8. Power sliding door: Remove the center roller (see step
11 on page 20-47).
Sliding Door Rear Pulley Mount Sliding Door Guide Pin
Replacement (cont'd) Replacement
9. Power sliding door: Disconnect the power sliding 1. Remove the guide pin covers (A), then remove the
door motor unit cable from the center roller (see step guide pins (B).
12 on page 20-47).
10. Power sliding door: Remove the nuts securing the
rear pulley (see step 14 on page 20-48).
11. Remove the center rail cover (see step 8 on page
20-50).
12. Remove the nuts, and remove the rear pulley mount
(A).
Fastener Locations
2. Install the guide pins in the reverse order of removal,

and apply medium strength liquid thread lock to the
threads of the guide pins before reinstallation.
Sliding Door Subseal Replacement Sliding Door Removal/Installation
1. Detach the clip, then remove the subseal (A). Take NOTE:
care not to scratch the body. • Be sure to disable the power sliding door by turning
the main switch off.
Fastener Location
• Have an assistant help you when removing and
> : Clip, 1 installing the door.
• Take care not to scratch the center rail or the body.
• Take care not to drop or damage the door.
removing and installing the door.
2. Remove the sliding door sill trim (see page 20-101).
3. Remove the CESS articulated harness (A) from the
floor panel (B).
-1. Disconnect the connectors (C).
2. Install the subseal in the reverse order of removal, -2. Remove the bolt.
and if the clip is damaged or stress-whitened, replace -3. Release the hooks (D).
it with a new one. NOTE: Take care not to damage the articulated
harness.
Fastener Location
Sliding Door Removal/Installation (cont'd)
4. Remove the bolts, then remove the lower roller plate 6. Remove the bolts, then remove the open stop (A).
(A).
Fastener Locations
Fastener Locations ► : Bolt, 2
► : Bolt, 2
7. Detach the clips (A, B), and cut the double-sided

adhesive tape (C) with a utility knife, then remove the
upper rail cover (D).
A d h e s iv e ta p e : Th ickness 0 .8 m m (0.03 in)
Fastener Locations Width 10 mm (0.39 in)
Length 60S mm (23.8 in)
Fastener Locations
A (> ; Clip, 1 B [> *.Clip, 2
D
8. While holding the sliding door, remove the bolts 9. Slide the sliding door (A) slightly until the lower roller
securing the center roller (A). subbase (B) lines up with the notch (C) in the lower rail
(D). While holding the door, remove the lower roller
Fastener Locations subbase from the lower rail through the notch.
Sliding Door Removal/Installation (cont'd)
10. Hold the bottom of the sliding door (A) away from the 12. Install the sliding door in the reverse order of
body, and gently slide it forward until the upper roller removal, and note these items:
(B) lines up with the notch (C) in the upper rail (D). • Make sure the CESS articulated harness connectors
While holding the door, remove the upper roller from are plugged in properly.
the upper rail through the notch. • Clean the groove area of each rail, and apply
multipurpose grease to the moving area of the
lower roller plate (A) and along the entire length of
moving area of the lower rail (B). If equipped with
the power sliding door, apply multipurpose grease
to the corner area of the center rail (C), as shown.
• Make sure the door opens properly and locks
securely.
• Check the sliding door position adjustment (see
page 20-57).
11. Remove the sliding door.

Sliding Door Position Adjustment
NOTE: If equipped, be sure to disable the power sliding V erti

cal adjustment at the front
door by turning the main switch off.
2. Adjust the lower roller (A).
1. Remove the bolts (A), and remove both female guides
-1. Remove the plug (B).
(B) from the body.
-2. Slightly loosen the lower roller bolts (C).
-3. Move the door up or down to equalize the gaps.
-4. Tighten all bolts securely, and reinstall the plug.
(cont'd)
Sliding Door Position Adjustment (cont'd)
Horizontal adjustment at the front V e rtic a l an d h o rizo n ta l a d ju s tm e n t a t th e rear

3. Adjust the upper roller (A) and the lower roller 4. Adjust the center roller (A), the front striker (B) and the
subbase (B). rear striker (C).
-1. Slightly loosen the upper roller bolts (C), and install -1. Loosen the center roller bolts (D).
the shim(s) (D, E) between the upper roller and the -2. Move the door in or out until it's flush with the body,
door until the door is flush with the body. and up or down to equalize the gaps.
- 2 . Slightly loosen the lower roller subbase bolts (F). -3. If necessary, adjust the door cushion (E)to make the
-3. Move the door in or out until it's flush with the body. door fit flush with the body.
-4. Tighten all bolts securely. -4. Tighten all bolts securely.
Shim thickness: D = 1 mm (0.04 in)

E s 2 mm (0.08 in)
Max. 3 mm (0.12 in)
5. Set the female guides (A), and lightly tighten the bolts
(B). Adjust the alignment of the guides by closing the
door, then open the door and tighten the bolts.
B
6 x 1.0 mm
8 N-m
(0.8 kgf-m,
6 Ibf-ft)
6. Make sure the door opens and closes smoothly, and

locks securely.
W ithout driving position memory system (DPMS)
MIRROR HOLDER
With driving position memory system
MIRROR HOLDER
VAN, LX and EX models VAN, DX, LX, and EX models
(f07 model) ('08-10 models)
MOUNT
MOUNT
REARVIEW MIRROR
EXL (with Navigation), Touring models EXL (without Navigation) model

Power Mirror Replacement
Without Driving Position Memory System 5. While holding the power mirror (A), squeez the
retaining tabs on the connector clip (B), then push out
(DPMS)
to remove the power mirror.
NOTE: Take care not to scratch the door.
B
1. Lower the door glass fully.
2. With your hand, carefully detach the clip, lift the
mirror mount cover upward to release the hook (A),
and remove the cover (B) in the sequence shown.
i
Fastener Locat on
[>: Clip, 1
6. Install the power mirror in the reverse order of

3. Disconnect the power mirror connector (A).
Fastener Locations
# ;N u t,3
4. While holding the power mirror, remove the nuts

securing the mirror.
With Driving Position Memory System 6. While holding the power mirror (A), pull out the
harness (B) through the hole in the door.
(DPMS)
NOTE; Take care not to scratch the door,
1. Lower the door glass fully.
2. With your hand, carefully detach the clip, lift the
mirror mount cover upward to release the hook (A),
and remove the cover (B) in the sequence shown.
Fastener Location
7. Install the power mirror in the reverse order of


4. Disconnect the power mirror connector (A).
Fastener Locations
5. While holding the power mirror, remove the nuts

securing the mirror.
Mirror Holder Replacement
NOTE: 3. Apply heat with a heat gun to the gap between the
• Put on gloves to protect your hands. mirror holder (A) and the mirror housing (B). Carefully
• When prying with a flat-tip screwdriver, wrap it with pull out the bottom edge of the mirror holder to
protective tape to prevent damage. separate the adhesive (C), then release the side hook
(D ).
1. Carefully push on the top edge of the mirror holder (A)
by hand. NOTE: Do not heat the plastic parts too much or you
may damage them.
2. Put a shop towel in the opening between the lower

edge of the mirror holder and the mirror housing (B)
to prevent scratches, and detach the bottom clips (C)
with a flat-tip screwdriver.
4. Separate the mirror holder from the actuator (E) by
releasing the hooks (F). If equipped, disconnect the
mirror defogger connectors (G).
5. Before installing a new mirror holder to the actuator 6. If either of the actuator boots (A) is hard to adjust
(A), check the actuator rods (B) and the actuator boots because the top of the boot is down on the actuator
(C): rods (B) and it was turned inside out, disassemble the
mirror actuator assembly to reset the turned boot on
NOTE: Make sure each actuator rod is inserted into
the rod, then reassemble it.
the actuator securely, and each actuator boot is fully
seated on the actuator. -1. Remove the mounting screw (C).
-2. Remove the washer (D), the spring (E), the lock cap
(F) and the inner holder (G) with the boots from the
actuator (H).
-3. If necessary, remove the boots.
-4. Stretch the turned boot, and put it on the rod
entirely. Take care not to tear or damage the boots;
they are not replaceable.
-5. Reinstall the removed parts, then secure them with
the screw.
NO GOOD
7. If equipped, reconnect the mirror defogger connector.

8. Reattach the hooks of the mirror holder to the
actuator, then position the mirror holder on the
actuator. Carefully push on the side hook of the mirror
holder until the mirror holder locks into place.
9. Check the actuator operation.
Rearview Mirror Replacement
Special Tools Required 3. Fit the mirror base (A) over the mount (B), and secure
KTC Trim Tool Set SOJATP2Q14* the rearview mirror by the spring (C) and the hook (D).
* Available through the Honda Tool and Equipment C A
VAN, LX and EX Models ('07 Model)

1. Release the hooks (A), then puli the mirror base cover
(B) down.
2. Pull down the hook (A) to release it from the mount

(B), and the slide the mirror base (C) rearward, then
remove the rearview mirror (D).
VA N , DX, LX, and EX Models ('08-10 Models) EXL (w ith Nawigation), Touring Models
1. Turn the rearview mirror base (A) 90°. 1. Slide the mirror harness upper cover (A) forward,
then remove the mirror harness cover (B).
2. Remove the mirror harness holder (A), then

disconnect the rearview mirror connector (B).
2. Slide the rearview mirror base (A) down toward the

bottom of the windshield to detach it from the spring
(B) in the mount (C).
3. If necessary, remove the spring from the mount

4. Install the rearview mirror in the reverse order of
removal.
(cont'd)
Rearview Mirror Replacement (cont'd)
3. Turn the rearview mirror base (A) 90 °. EXL (without Navigation) model
NOTE: Use the appropriate tool from the KTC trim tool
set to avoid damage when removing components.
1. Remove the roof console (see step 3 on page 20-117).
2. Disconnect the rearview mirror connector (A), and
slide the mirror harness cover (B) forward, then
remove the screw with a TORX T20 bit from the mirror
base (C).
Fastener Location
► ; TORX Screw, 1
4. Slide the rearview mirror base (A) down toward the

bottom of the windshield to detach it from the spring
(B) in the mount (C).
5. If necessary, remove the spring from the mount.

6. Install the rearview mirror in the reverse order of
removal.
3. While holding the rearview mirror (A), the mirror
harness connector (B) out through the headliner (C),
then remove the rearview mirror from the mount (D).
4. Install the mirror in the reverse order of removal, and

note these items:
• Before installing the rearview mirror, remove the
TORX screw, and apply medium strength liquid
thread lock to it.
• Make sure the rearview mirror connector is plugged
in properly.
RIGHT SIDE RUBBER DAM
(Self-adhesive-type,
body side)
Windshield Replacement
NOTE: 6. With a helper on the outside, pull the piano wire (A)
• Put on gloves to protect your hands. back and forth in a sawing motion. Hold the piano
• Wear eye protection while cutting the glass adhesive wire as close to the windshield (B) as possible to
with piano wire. prevent damage to the body and the dashboard.
Carefully cut through the rubber dam and the
adhesive (C) around the entire windshield.
• Glass adhesive can be efficiently cut with a
commercially available auto glass tool. See the tool
manufacturer's instructions for details.
• Rearview mirror (see page 20-66)
• A-pillartrim, both sides (see page 20-103)
• Roof molding (see page 20-266)
• Windshield side trim (see page 20-262)
2. Remove the windshield molding (A) from the upper
edge of the windshield (B). If necessary, cut the
windshield molding with a utility knife.
3. Ifthe old windshield is to be reinstalled, make

alignment marks across the glass and the body with a
grease pencil.
4. Pull down the front area of the headliner (see page
20-116). Take care not to bend the headliner
excessively, or you may crease or break it.
5. Apply protective tape along the edge of the
dashboard and the body. Make a hole through the
rubber dam with an awl or similar tool, and the
adhesive from inside the vehicle at a corner of the
windshield. Push a piece of piano wire through the
hole, and wrap each end around a piece of wood.
8. Scrape smooth the old adhesive with a knife until 11. Apply glass primer to the upper clips mounting areas
there is a thickness of about 2 mm (0.08 in) on the on the windshield (A), and let dry. Remove the
bonding surface around the entire windshield adhesive backing and attach the rubber dam (B) and
opening flange: the upper clips (C) to the inside of the windshield as
• Do not scrape down to the painted surface of the shown:
body; damaged paint will interfere with proper • Make sure the rubber dams and the upper clips line
bonding. up with the alignment marks ( D ) .
• Remove the rubber dam and fasteners from the • Be careful not to touch the windshield where the
body. adhesive will be applied.
• Replace the dashboard seal with a new one.
9. Clean the body bonding surface with a shop towel
dampened in isopropyl alcohol. After cleaning, keep
oil, grease and water from getting on the clean
surface.
10. If you are reinstalling the old windshield with a putty
knife to scrape off all of the old adhesive, the upper
clips and the rubber dams from the windshield. Clean
the bonding surfaces on the inside face and the edge
of the windshield with isopropyl alcohol. Make sure
the bonding surface is kept free of water, oil and
grease.
11 m m
(0.43 in)
Inside
Y // IL.X7 Tz7 nj
%
Windshield Replacement (cont'd)
12, Attach the windshield molding (A) with adhesive tape 14. If you are installing a new windshield, set the
(B) to the upper edge of the windshield (C). Be careful windshield in the opening, and center it. Make
not to touch the windshield where the adhesive is alignment marks (A) across the windshield and the
applied. body with a grease pencil at the four points shown.
Make sure both clips (B) contact with the edge of the
body holes. Be careful not to touch the windshield
where the adhesive will be applied.
13. Attach the windshield molding upper seal (A) with 15. Remove the windshield.
adhesive tape to the inside surface of the windshield
molding (B) as shown.
/' //// /// : Apply primer here.

*imh
16. Apply a light coat of glass primer around the edge of 17. Carefully apply a light coat of body primer to any
the windshield (A) between the rubber dam (B) and exposed paint on the windshield mounting flange. Let
the windshield molding (C) as shown, then lightly the body primer dry for at least 10 minutes:
wipe it off with gauze or cheesecloth: • Do not apply body primer to any remaining old
• Apply glass primer to the molding. adhesive on the flange.
• Do not apply body primer to the windshield, and do • Be careful not to mix up the body primer applicators
not mix up the body and glass primer applicators. and the glass primer applicators.
• Allow the primer to dry for at least 10 minutes. • Never touch the primed surfaces with your hands.
• Never touch the primed surfaces with your hands. If • Mask off the dashboard before priming the flange.
you do, the adhesive may not bond to the
windshield properly, causing a leak after the /' //// /// : Apply body primer to any exposed paint as shown.
windshield is installed. 20 mm
the primed surface.
: Apply glass primer here.

Inside n mm
B (0.43 in)
18. Cut a "V" in the end of the adhesive cartridge nozzle

(A) as shown.
Inside
11 mm
(0.43 in)
(cont'd)
Windshield Replacement (cont'd)
19. Put the adhesive cartridge in a caulking gun, and run a 20. Hold the windshield with suction cups over the
continuous bead of the adhesive (A) around the edge opening, align it with the alignment marks made in
of the windshield (B) along the edge of the rubber step 14, and set it down on the adhesive. Lightly push
dam (C) and the windshield molding (D) as shown. on the windshield until its edges are fully seated on
Apply the adhesive within 30 minutes after applying the adhesive all the way around.
the glass primer. Make a slightly thicker bead at each
corner.
an hour until adhesive is dry.
2 mm (0.08 in) 21. Remove the excess adhesive with a putty knife or a
13 mm A shop towel dampened in isopropyl alcohol.
(0.51 in) *-!“ j
8 mm (0.31 in) 22. Wait at least an hour for the adhesive to dry, then
spray water over the windshield and check for leaks.
Mark the leaking area, let the windshield dry, then
seal with sealant. Let the vehicle stand for at least 4
Overlap hours after windshield installation. If the vehicle has
1 mm to be used within the first 4 hours, it must be driven
(0.04 in)
slowly.
Inside
C 8
2 mm rV '
(0.08 in)
Rear Window Replacement
NOTE: 3. If the old rear window is to be reinstalled, make

• Put on gloves to protect your hands. alignment marks across the glass and body with a
• Wear eye protection while cutting the glass adhesive grease pencil.
with a piano wire. 4. Apply protective tape along the inside and outside
• Use seat covers to avoid damaging any surfaces. edges of the tailgate. Make a hole with an awl or
• Do not damage the rear window defogger grid lines or similar tool through the adhesive, at a corner of the
the terminals. rear window. Push the piano wire through the hole,
• Glass adhesive can be efficiently cut with a and wrap each end around a piece of wood.
commercially available auto glass tool. See the tool 5. With a helper on the outside, pull the piano wire (A)
manufacture's instructions for details. back and forth in a sawing motion. Hold the piano
1. Remove these items: wire as close to the rear window (B) as possible to
prevent damage to the tailgate, and carefully cut
• Tailgate spoiler trim:
through adhesive (C) around the entire rear window.
- '07 model (see page 20-270)
- '08-10 models (see page 20-271)
• Rear window wiper motor (see page 22-335)
2. Disconnect the rear window defogger connectors (A).
(cont'd)
Rear Window Replacement (cont'd)
7. Scrape smooth the old adhesive with a knife until 10. Apply glass primer to the inside of the rear window
there is a thickness of about 2 mm (0.08 in) on the (A) where the dams and the fasteners attach. Let the
bonding surface around the entire rear window primer dry for at least 10 minutes, then attach the
opening flange: upper rubber dam (B), the lower rubber dam (C) and
• Do not scrape down to the painted surface of the the fasteners (D, E) with the adhesi ve tape as shown:
body; damaged paint will interfere with proper • Make sure the fasteners, and upper and lower
bonding. rubber dams line up with alignment marks (F).
• Remove the fasteners from the tailgate. • If necessary, cut the excess side molding along the
lower edge of the rear window.
8. Clean the tailgate bonding surface with a shop towel
dampened in isopropyl alcohol. After cleaning, keep • Be careful not to touch the rear window where the
oil, grease and water from getting on the surface. adhesive will be applied.
9. If you are reinstalling the old windshield with a putty * //////// : Apply glass primer here.
knife to scrape off all of old adhesive, the fasteners
and the rubber dams from the rear window. Clean the
bonding surfaces on the inside face and the edge of
the rear window with isopropyl alcohol. Make sure
the bonding surface is kept free of water, oil and
grease.
11. Attach the fasteners (A, B) with adhesive tape to the 14. Apply a light coat of glass primer to the rear window
tailgate as shown. (A) along the edge of the upper rubber dam (B) and
the lower rubber dam (C) as shown, then lightly wipe
Fastener Locations it off with gauze or cheesecloth:
A t> ' Fastener, 2 B |> : Fastener, 2 • Apply the glass primer to the corner areas of the
rear window with the printed dots (D) on the rear
window as a guide.
• Do not apply body primer to the rear window, and
do not mix up the body primer applicators and the
glass primer applicators.
• Let the primer dry at least 10 minutes,
you do, the adhesive may not bond to the rear
window properly, causing a leak after the rear
window is installed.
the primed surface.
12. If you are installing a new rear window, set the rear
window (A) in the opening, and center it. Make
alignment marks (B) across the rear window and the
body with a grease pencil at the four points shown. Be
careful not to touch the rear window where the
adhesive will be applied.
Rear Window Replacement (cont'd)
15. Carefully apply a light coat of body primer to any 17. Put the cartridge in a caulking gun, and run a
exposed paint on the windshield mounting flange. Let continuous bead of the adhesive (A) on the rear
the body primer dry for at least 10 minutes: window (B) around the edge of the upper rubber dam
• Do not apply body primer to any remaining old (C) and the lower rubber dam (D) as shown:
adhesive on the flange. • Apply the adhesive within 30 minutes after
• Be careful not to mix up the body primer applicators applying the glass primer.
and the glass primer applicators. • Make a slightly thicker bead at each corner.
• Never touch the primed surfaces with your hands.
2 mm (0.08 in)
'////////: Apply body primer to an y exposed paint as shown.
16. Cut a "V" in the end of the adhesive cartridge nozzle

(A) as shown.
Quarter Glass Replacement
18. Hold the rear window with suction cups over the NOTE:
opening, align it with the alignment marks you made • Put on gloves to protect your hands.
in step 12, and set it down on the adhesive. Lightly • Wear eye protection while cutting the glass with piano
push on the rear window until its edges are fully wire.
seated on the adhesive all the way around.
NOTE: Do not open or close any of the doors for about • Do not damage the antenna grid lines or terminals.
an hour until the adhesive is dry. • Glass adhesive can be efficiently cut with a
19. Remove the excess adhesive with a putty knife or a commercially available auto glass tool. See the tool
shop towel dampened in isopropyl alcohol. manufacture's instructions for details.
20. Wait at least an hour for the adhesive to dry, then 1. Remove these items:
spray water over the rear window, and check for • D-pillartrim (see page 20-103)
leaks. Mark the leaking area, let the rear window dry, • Rear side trim panel (see page 20-110)
then seal with sealant. Let the vehicle stand for at least
2. Remove the front seal (A) from the front edge of the
4 hours after rear window installation. If the vehicle
quarter glass (B). If necessary, cut the rubber dam
has to be used within the first 4 hours, it must be
with a utility knife.
driven slowly.
3. Right quarter glass: Disconnect the glass antenna

connectors (A).
Quarter Glass Replacement (cont'd)
4. From inside the vehicle, cut through the quarter glass 6. With a helper on the outside, pull the piano wire (A)
adhesive (A) with a utility knife (B) on the upper, lower back and forth in a sawing motion. Hold the piano
and rear edges. wire as close to the quarter glass (B) as possible to
• Ifthe quarter glass (C) is to be reinstalled, take care prevent damage to the body, and carefully cut
not to damage the windshield molding (D). through the adhesive (C) on the front side of the
• If the molding is damaged, replace the quarter quarter glass.
glass, the molding, and the clips (E) as an assembly. • Take care not to drop the quarter glass.
• If any of the clips are broken, the quarter glass can • If the quarter glass is to be reinstalled, take care not
be reinstalled using butyl tape (refer to step 12). to damage the windshield molding (D).
• Apply protective tape along the edges of the entire • If the molding is damaged, replace the quarter
quarter glass opening flange. glass, the molding, and the clips (E) as an assembly.
• If any of the clips are broken, the quarter glass can
be reinstalled using butyl tape (refer to step 12).
5. Apply protective tape to along the inside and outside

edges of the body. Push a piece of piano wire through
the lower cut area in the adhesive, and wrap each end
around a piece of wood.
8. Scrape smooth the old adhesive with a knife until 12. If you are reinstalling the old quarter glasss (A) (and
there is a thickness of about 2 mm (0.08 in) on the either glass clip is broken off the molding), apply light
bonding surface around the entire quarter glass coat of primer, then apply butyl tape (B) to the
opening flange: windshield molding (C) as shown:
• Do not scrape down to the painted surface of the • Let the primer dry at least 10 minutes.
body; damaged paint will interfere with proper • Be careful not to touch the quarter glass where the
bonding. adhesive will be applied.
• Remove the clip and the fastener from the body. • Do not peel the separator off butyl tape.
oil, grease, and water from getting on the surface.
10. If you are reinstalling the old quarter glass with a
putty knife to scrape off all of the old adhesive, the
fastener and the rubber dam from the quarter glass.
Clean the bonding surfaces on the inside face and the
edge of the quarter glass with isopropyl alcohol. Make
sure the bonding surface is kept free of water, oil, and
grease.
11. Attach the fastener (A) and the clip (B) with adhesive
tape to the inside face of the quarter glass (C):
• Be sure the fastener and the clip line up with the
alignment marks (D).
• Be careful not to touch the quarter glass where the
adhesive will be applied. 250 mm
(9.34 in)
13. Attach the fastener with adhesive tape to the body as
shown. If you are reinstalling the old quarter glass
(and either clip is broken off the molding), seal the
body holes with pieces of urethane tape (A).
Fastener Location
O : Fastener, 1
Quarter Glass Replacement (cont'd)
14. If you are reinstalling the oil quarter glass (A) (and 16. Apply light coat of glass primer to the inside face of
either clip is broken off the molding), install the rear the quarter glass (A) along the windshield molding
fastener (B) and the rear clip (C) in the opening flange, (B), and to the molding as shown, then lightly wipe it
set the quarter glass upright in the opening, and make off with gauze or cheesecloth:
alignment marks (D) across the quarter glass and the • Apply the glass primer to the corner areas of the
body with a grease pencil at the four points shown. Be quarter glass using the printed dots (C) on the
careful not to touch the quarter glass where the quarter glass as a guide.
adhesive will be applied. • Do not apply body primer to the quarter glass, and
do not mix up the body primer applicators and the
glass primer applicators.
• Let the primer dry at least 10 minutes.
you do, the adhesive may not bond to the quarter
glass properly, causing a leak after the quarter glass
is installed.
the primed surface.
/' //// /// : Apply glass primer here.

C
15. Remove the quarter glass. Take care not to break the
rear clip during removal.
17. Carefully a light coat of body primer to any exposed 19. Put the cartridge in a caulking gun, and run a
paint around the flange where the new adhesive will continuous bead of the adhesive (A) on the quarter
be applied. Let the body primer dry for at least 10 glass (B) around the edge of the windshield molding
minutes: (C) as shown:
• Do not apply body primer to any remaining old • After applying adhesive, peel the separator off butyl
adhesive on the flange. tape (if applicable).
• Be careful not to mix up the body primer applicators • Apply the adhesive within 30 minutes after
and the glass primer applicators. applying glass primer. Make slightly thicker bead at
• Never touch the primed surfaces with your hands. each corner.
/' ///////,* Apply body primer to any exposed paint as shown.

2 mm (0.08 in)
13 mm f|T __ a
(0.51 in)
20. Hold the quarter glass with suction cups over the
opening, align it with the clips or the alignment marks
made in step 14, and set it down on the adhesive.
18. Cut a "V" in the end of the adhesive cartridge nozzle Lightly push on the quarter glass until its edges are
(A) as shown. fully seated on the adhesive all the way around.
an hour until the adhesive is dry.
21. Remove the excess adhesive with a putty knife or a
shop towel dampened in isopropyl alcohol.
22. Wait at least an hour for the adhesive to dry, then
spray water over the quarter glass, and check for
leaks. Mark the leaking area, let the quarter glass dry,
then seal with sealant. Let the vehicle stand for at least
4 hours after quarter glass installation. If the vehicle
has to be used within the first 4 hours, it must be
driven slowly.
rGLASS
Position Adjustment, page 20-88
Closing Force and Opening Drag
Check, page 20-99
DRAIN CHANNEL
WIND DEFLECTOR DRAIN CHANNEL SEAL

BRACKET COVER
SUNSHADE
SUNSHADE REAR HOOK
REAR SUNSHADE BASE SLIDER
DEFLECTOR LINK
SUNSHADE SLIDER SPACEER
FRONT SUNSHADE BASE SLIDER
CABLETUBE
REAR BRACKET
DEFLECTOR ARM SPRING
CABLE ASSEMBLY
DEFLECTOR BASE Replacement, page 20-96
LIMIT SWITCH
REAR DRAIN VALVE
CEILING VENT BRACKET

FRONT DRAIN VALVE
REAR ENTERTAINMENT
SYSTEM BRACKET
Symptom D iag n o stic p ro c ed u re

Water leaks from moonroof 1. Check for a clogged or detached drain tube.
2. Check the glass position adjustment.
3. Check for a defective or an improperly installed glass weatherstrip or drain
channel.
4. Check for a gap between the drain channel seal and the roof panel.
Wind noise from moonroof 1. Check for excessive clearance between the glass weatherstrip and the roof
panel.
2. Check the glass position adjustment (see page 20-88).
Motor noise from moonroof 1. Check for a loose motor.
2. Check for a worn gear or bearing.
3. Check for a deformed cable assembly.
Moonroof glass does not 1. Make sure the cable assembly is attached properly.
move, but motor turns 2. Check for a loose inner cable.
3. Check for a defective gear or inner cable.
4. Check for foreign matter stuck between the guide rail and the slider.
Moonroof glass does not 1. Check for a faulty moonroof switch.
move and motor does not 2. Check for a blown fuse.
turn (glass can be moved 3. Check for a run down battery.
with 5 mm hex wrench) 4. Check for a faulty relay.
5. Check for a defective motor control unit.
6. Check the limit switch.
Glass Position Adjustment Glass Replacement
The roof panel (A) should be even with the glass 1. Close the glass fully.
weatherstrip (B), to within 0.3+ 1/—1 mm (0.01 +0.04/
2. Slide the sunshade all the way back.
—0.04 in) all the way around. If not, make the following
adjustment: 3. Pry out the cap (A). Remove the screw (B) and release
the hooks (C), then remove the bracket cover (D) on
0.3+1 mm both sides.
Fastener Locations
i ► : Screw, 2 E ► : TORX Bolt, 6
1. Remove the bracket covers, (see page 20-88)

2. Loosen the bolts with a TORX T25 bit, and adjust the
glass (A).
Fastener Locati ons 5x mm
^ ^ F ro n t
4. Remove the bolts (E) with a TORX T25 bit from the
glass brackets (F) on both sides.
5. Remove the glass (A) by lifting it up. Do not damage
the roof panel.
3. Tighten the bolts to the specified torque, and reinstall

the bracket covers.
4. Check for water leaks. Let the water run freely from a
hose without a nozzle. Do not use a high-pressure
spray.
NOTE: It is normal for some water to seep past the
moonroof into the moonroof frame and exit through
the drains. 6. Install the glass in the reverse order of removal, and
adjust the glass position (see page 20-88).
Wind Deflector Replacement
NOTE: When prying with a flat-tip screwdriver, wrap it 4. Pry up on the deflector bases (A) with a flat-tip
with protective tape to prevent damage. screwdriver, and release the hooks (B), then remove
the bases with springs (C) from both sides.
1. Open the glass fully.
2. Remove the links (A) from both sides.
5. Install the deflector in the reverse order of removal.

3. Remove the wind deflector (A).
A
Drain Channel Replacement
1. Remove the moonroof glass (see page 20-88). 4. Pull up the rear edge of the drain channel (A) while
pushing both clips (B), and release the channel from
2. Slide both glass brackets (A) with the 5 mm hex
both hooks (C) of the drain channel slider by pulling it
wrench to the position where the moonroof normally
rearward, and remove the drain channel.
tilts up, and disconnect the drain channel rods (B) on
both sides.
5. Install the drain channel in the reverse order of

• Check the glass position adjustment (see page
20- 88 ).
Sunshade Replacement
1. Remove the drain channel (see page 20-90). 4. While lifting the front area of the sunshade (A), move
the sunshade forward until you can see both
2. Slide the sunshade (A) until you can see both
sunshade rear hooks (B). Do not damage the
sunshade slider spacers (B).
sunshade or the sunshade rear hooks.
Fastener Locations
Fastener Locations
3. Remove the screws, then remove both sunshade

5. Remove the screws, then remove both sunshade rear
slider spacers.
hooks.
Sunshade Replacement (cont'd) Motor Replacement
6. Remove the sunshade (A). NOTE: Put on gloves to protect your hands.
2. Disconnect the motor connector (A), and remove the
bolts, then remove the motor (B).
Fastener Locations
► ; Bolt, 2
7. Remove both front sunshade base sliders (A) and

both rear sunshade base sliders (B).
9 N-m (0.9 kgf-m, 7 Ibf-ft)
3. Install the motor in the reverse order of removal, and

note these items:
• Make sure the motor connector is plugged in
properly.
• Check the motor operation.
8. Install the sunshade in the reverse order of removal,

and check the glass position adjustment (see page
20 - 88 ).
Frame and Drain Tube Replacement
SRS components are located in this area. Review the 3. Disconnect the motor connector (A).
NOTE;
• Take care not to scratch the interior trim, the body, or
tear the seat covers.
• Headliner (see page 20-116)
• Moonroof glass (see page 20-88)
2. Remove the bolts, then remove the ceiling vent
brackets (A) from both sides.
4. Disconnect the front drain tubes (A) and rear drain
Fastener Locations
tubes (B).
5. Remove the roof wire harness (C) by detaching the

harness clips (D).
Frame and Drain Tube Replacement (cont'd)
6. If necessary, remove the bolts (A), and remove the 8. With the help of an assistant, carefully remove the
rear entertainment system bracket (B). frame through the front door opening.
Fastener Locations 9. Front drain tubes: Remove the driver's kick panel or
A, : Bolt, 13 passenger's kick panel (see page 20-110).
10. Front drain tubes: Release the front drain valve (A)
from the body. Tie a string to the top end of the drain
tube (B), then pull down the front drain tube out of the
A-pillar. The string will later be used to install the
drain tube. The driver's side is shown; the
passenger's side is similar.
7. With an assistant holding the frame (C), remove the

bolts (D), starting at the rear, and release the rear
hooks (E) by moving the frame forward.
11. Rear drain tubes: Remove the left side rear side trim 13. Install the frame and the drain tubes in the reverse
panel or right side rear side trim panel (see page order of removal, and note these items:
20 - 110 ). • Before installing the frame, clear the drain tubes
and the drain valves with compressed air.
12. Rear drain tubes: Release the drain valve (A) from the
body. Detach the clips, then remove the rear drain • To install a new drain tube, tie the string that was
tube (B) from the body. left in the A-pillar to the top end of the new drain
tube, and pull it up into the roof.
Left side • Check the frame seal.
Fastener Locations • Clean the surface of the frame.
t> : Clip, 5 • When installing the frame, first attach the rear
hooks into the body holes.
• Make sure the connectors are plugged in properly.
• When connecting the drain tubes, slide them over
the frame nozzles at least 10 mm (0.39 in).
• Install the tube clips (A) on the drain tubes (B) as
shown.
• When connecting the passenger's side rear drain
tube, make sure the tube clips do not rub against
the rear A/C lines.
Upward
a
Fastener Locations
|> ; Clip, 5
14. Check for water leaks. Let the water run freely from a
hose without a nozzle. Do not use a high-pressure
spray.
Drain Channel Slider and Cable Assembly Replacement
NOTE: Put on gloves to protect your hands. 4. Turn both cable tube side brackets (A) up to release
the hooks (B) from the holes in both sides of the
1. Remove the frame (see page 20-93).
frame.
2. Remove these parts from the frame:
• Sunshade (see page 20-91)
• Moonroof motor (see page 20-92)
3. Remove the screws (A, B) securing the slide stops (C)
and the cable tube rear brackets (D). Remove the
cable tube side bracket mounting bolts (E) and the
cable tube mounting screws (F) from both sides of the
frame (G).
Fastener Locations
: Screw, 2 i ► : Screw, 2 E► : Bolt, 2
5. Pivot the glass brackets (C) down by sliding the link

lifters (D) back, then slide both glass brackets back
with the link lifters.
6. Slide the cable assembly (E) half-way back.
7. Remove the slide stops (A) and the drain channel 9. Install the drain channel slider and the cable assembly
sliders (B) from both sides. in the reverse order of removal, and note these items:
• Damaged parts should be replaced.
• Apply muItipurpose grease to the glass brackets (A)
and guide rail area of the frame (B) indicated by the
arrows both sides.
• Before reinstalling the motor, make sure both link
lifters are parallel, and in the fully closed position.
• Before reinstalling the motor, install the frame and
the glass, then check the opening drag (see page
20-99).
8. Slide the cable assembly (A) and both glass brackets

(B) back, remove the deflector sliders (C) from both
glass brackets, then remove them from the frame (D).
Limit Switch Adjustment

2. Close the glass (A) fully with the 5 mm hex wrench:
• Make sure both link lifters (B) are parallel, and in the position shown.
• Check the glass position adjustment (see page 20-88).
3. Loosen the limit switch mounting bolts (C) with an open-end wrench.
4. Adjust the limit switch (D):
-1. Move the switch plate (E) a little at a time.
-2. Secure the switch plate at the position where you hear a faint click when the switch cam (F) pushes the limit switch
(open/close).
-3. Check that the switch plate contacts the switch bracket (G).
5. Check the operation of the glass (from the tilt-up position to fully closed position, from the fully open position to the
fully closed position) by operating the moonroof switch.
NOTE: Adjust the switch plate until the glass opens and closes correctly.
6. Reinstall all remaining parts in the reverse order of removal.
Closing Force and Opening Drag Check
1. Remove the headliner (see page 20-116). 4. Opening drag check: Protect the leading edge of the
glass with a shop towel (A). Measure the effort
2. Closing force check: required to open the glass with a spring scale (B) as
• Protect the leading edge of the glass (A) with a shop shown.
towel (B), and attach a spring scale (C) as shown.
• Have an assistant hold the switch to close the glass
while you measure the force required to stop it.
• Read the force as soon as the glass stops moving,
then immediately release the switch and spring
scale.
Closi ng force: 2 00 -2 9 0 N (2 0 -3 0 kg f, 4 4 -S 8 ibf)
5. If the load is over 40 N (4 kgf, 9 Ibf), check:

• The side clearance and glass position adjustment
(see page 20-88).
• For broken or damaged sliding parts. If any sliding
parts are damaged, replace them.
3. Ifthe force in not within specification, remove the

moonroof motor (see page 20-92), and check the
following items:
• Check the gear teeth and the inner cable for
breakage or damage. If the gear teeth is broken,
replace the motor. If the inner cable is damaged,
remove the frame (see page 20-93), and replace the
cable (see page 20-96).
• Check the moonroof motor (see page 22-397). If the
motor fails to run or does not turn smoothly,
replace it with a new one.
• Check the opening drag. Go to step 4.
A-PILLAR TRIM
SUN VISOR Removal/Installation, page 20-103
Removal/Installation, page 20-114 FRONT DOOR OPENING TRIM
Removal/Installation, page 20-101
B-PILLAR UPPER TRIM
HEADLINER
GRAB HANDLE Removal/Installation, page 20-116
Removal/ SLIDING DOOR OPENING TRIM
Installation, Removal/Installation, page 20-101
B-PILLAR LOWER TRIM
C-PILLAR TRIM
TAILGATE UPPER TRIM
D-PILLAR TRIM
TAILGATE SIDE TRIM
•TAILGATE LOWER
TRIM PANEL
REAR CARPET
FRONT CARPET
REAR SIDE TRIM PANEL

‘REAR TRIM PANEL

IN-FLOOR STORAGE BIN SLIDING DOOR SILL TRIM
(For some *07 models) Removal/Installation, page 20-101
Disassembly/
Reassembly, page 20-129 FRONTDOOR SILL TRIM
FLOOR WELL COVER
FLOOR WELL COVER CARPET Replacement, page 20-124
Removal/Installation, page 20-124 Disassembly/Reassembly, page 20-126
FLOOR WELL COVERB
(*07 model)
FLOOR WELL COVER LOCK CYLINDER
Trim Removal/Installation - Door Areas
Special Tools Requi red 2. Remove the driver's kick panel (A), or the passenger's
KTC Trim Tool Set SOJATP2014* kick panel (B).
• Available through the Honda Tool and Equipment -1. Pull away the door opening trim (C) from the kick
Program; call 888-424-6857 panel hooks (D) and the door opening flange.
-2. Driver's side: Pull the hood release handle, and hold
NOTE: it.
• Put on gloves to protect your hands. -3. Pull out the kick panel by hand to detach the clips
• Take care not to bend or scratch the trim or the panels. (E, F).
• Use the appropriate tool from the KTC trim tool set to D river's side
Fastener Locations
1. Release the hook (A), the tabs (B) and the pin (C) from E [> ; Clip, 2 F [> ; Clip, 1
the kick panel (D) and the B-pillar lower trim panel (E). (Blue) (Black)
Pull up the front door sill trim (F) by hand to detach the
clips, and release the pin (G) then remove the trim.
Fastener Locations
O : Clip, 3
(W hite)
P assenger's side
Fastener Locations
E > ; Clip, 1 F > : Clip, 1
(W hite) (Black)
(cont'd)
Trim Removal/Installation - Door Areas (cont'd)
3. Pull out the front door opening trim (A) from the trim 5. Pull out the sliding door opening trim (A) from the
hooks (B) around the front door opening flange, then trim hooks (B) around the sliding door opening
remove the trim. flange, then remove the trim.
4. Release the hooks (A) and the tabs (B) from the
B-pillar lower trim (C) and the rear side trim panel (D). 6. Install the trim in the reverse order of removal, and
Pull up the sliding door sill trim (E) by hand to detach note these items:
the clips (F, G), then remove the trim. • Ifthe clips are damaged or stress-whitened, replace
them with new ones.
Fastener Locations
F |> ; Clip, 3 G |> : Clip, 2
• Push the clips, the hooks, and the tabs into place
(Black) (W hite) securely.
Trim Removal/Installation - Pillar Areas
S p ecial Tools Requi red 2. Remove the A-pillar trim (A).

KTC Trim Tool Set SQJATP2014* -1. Pry out attachment clip (B) until it is stopped by the
• Available through the Honda Tool and Equipment hooks (C) in the grommet (D).
Program; call 888-424-6857 -2. Pull back the trim by hand to detach the clip.
-3. Release the hooks on the grommet, then pull out
NOTE: If side airbags and/or side curtain airbags have the attachment clip.
deployed, the affected pillar area trim and attachment
clips must be replaced. Refer to Component Fastener Location
Replacement/Inspection After Deployment (see page
24-211).
A-Piliar Trim
NOTE:
• Take care not to bend or scratch the trim or the panels.
1. Pull out the front door opening trim, as needed (see
Trim Removal/Installation - Pillar Areas (cont'd)
3. Install the A-pillar trim in the reverse order of removal, B-Pillar Upper/Lower Trim
• If the clip is damaged or stress-whitened, replace it SRS components are located in this area. Review the
with a new one. SRS component locations (see page 24-23) and the
• Replace the attachment clip with a new one.
doing repair or service.
• If the side curtain airbag has deployed, replace the
A-pillar trim and its clip with a new one. NOTE:
• To prevent the side curtain airbags from deploying • Put on gloves to protect your hands.
improperly and possibly causing injury, inspect • Take care not to bend or scratch the trim or the panels.
A-pillar trim and replace it with a new one if it have • Use the appropriate tool from the KTC trim tool set to
any of the following damage: avoid damage when removing components.
- Any cracks, deformations, or stress-whitened
areas in the A-pillar trim (A) 1. Remove these items:
- Any cracks, or stress-whitened areas in the • Front door sill trim (see step 1 on page 20-101)
grommet and the clip seating surfaces (B) • Sliding door sill trim (see step 4 on page 20-102)
- Bent or broken grommets (C) • Front door opening trim, as needed (see step 3 on
• Replace any damaged parts with new ones. page 20-102)
• Make sure the top of the trim overlaps with the • Sliding door opening trim, as needed (see step 5 on
headliner correctly (see page 24-214). page 20-102)
• Push the clip into place securely. 2. Pull the front seat belt lower anchor cover (A), then
remove the front seat belt lower anchor bolt (B ).
3. Remove the B-pillar lower trim (A). 5. Remove the B-pillar upper trim (A).
-1. Detach the clips by pulling the bottom of the trim -1. Pry out the attachment clip (B) while releasing the
back by hand. hooks (C) until it is stopped by the grommet (D).
-2. Pull back the trim to release the upper hooks (B). -2. Pull out the attachment clip with the grommet.
-3. Pull back the bottom of the trim by hand to detach
Fastener Locations the lower clip.
-4. Pull down the trim to release the trim from the
headliner (E).
Fastener Location ^
[> : Clip, 1 D Replace.
4. Remove the upper anchor cover (A), then remove the

upper anchor bolt (B).
6. Install the B-pillar trim in the reverse order of removal, C-Pillar Trim
• If the clips are damaged or stress-whitened, replace SRS components are located in this area. Review the
them with new ones. SRS component locations (see page 24-23) and the
B-pillar upper trim and its clip with a new one. NOTE;
• To prevent the side curtain airbags from deploying • Put on gloves to protect your hands.
improperly and possibly causing injury, inspect • Take care not to bend or scratch the trim or the panels.
B-pillar trim and replace it with a new one if it have • Use the appropriate tool from the KTC trim tool set to
any of the following damage: avoid damage when removing components.
- Any cracks or deformations, or stress-whitened
areas in the B-pillar upper trim (A) 1. Remove the upper anchor cover (A), then remove the
- Any cracks, or stress-whitened areas in the
grommet and the clip seating surfaces (B)
- Bent or broken grommets (C)
- Any cracks or deformations in the B-pillar lower
trim (D), or any breakages in the area (E) that
overlaps the B-pillar upper trim
• Make sure the top of the B-pillar upper trim
overlaps with the headliner correctly (see page
24-214).
seat belt anchor bolts before installation.
• Before installing the anchor bolts, make sure there
are no twists or kinks in the seat belt.
2. Remove the C-pillar trim (A). 3. Install the C-pillar trim in the reverse order of removal,
-1. Pry out the attachment clip (B) while releasing the
hooks (C) until it is stopped by the grommet (D).
-2. Pull out the attachment clip with the grommet. • Ifthe side curtain airbag has deployed, replace the
-3. Pull back the lower edge of the trim release the C-pillar trim with a new one.
hooks (E) from the rear side trim panel (F). • To prevent the side curtain airbags from deploying
improperly and possibly causing injury, inspect
B C-pillar trim and replace it with a new one if it have
any of the following damage:
- Any cracks, or stress-whitenings in the C-pillar
trim (A)
- Any cracks, or stress-whitened areas in the
grommet seating surface (B)
- Bent or broken grommets (C)
• Make sure the top of the C-pillar trim overlaps with
the headliner correctly (see page 24-214).
• Push the hooks into place securely.
anchor bolt before installation.
• Before installing the anchor bolt, make sure there
are no twists or kinks in the belt.
(cont'd)
O-Piiiar Trim 2. Remove the D-pillar trim (A).
SRS components are located in this area. Review the -1 . Open the cap (B), then remove the screw (C, D).
SRS component locations (see page 24-23) and the -2. Pull back the bottom of the trim by hand to detach
precautions and procedures (see page 24-26) before the clips (E, F).
doing repairs or service. -3. Pull down the trim to release the upper hooks (G)
from the headliner (I).
NOTE: Left side (with power tailgate)
• Take care not to bend or scratch the trim or the panels. Fastener Locations
• Use the appropriate tool from the KTC trim tool set to C ► : Screw, 1 E t> : Clip, 1

• Spare tire cover and the spare tire (see step 6 on
page 20-111)
• Rear side trim panel, as need (see step 7 on page
20- 111 )
• Tailgate weatherstrip, as necessary (see page
20-255)
Left side (w ith ou t power tailgate) 3. install the D-pillartrim in the reverse order of removal,
Fastener Locations
D ► ■■S c r e w ,! F > :C lip ,1 ' them with new ones.
(Black)
• Ifthe side curtain airbag has deployed, replace the
D-pillar trim and its clips with new parts.
► • To prevent the side curtain a irbags from deploying
improperly and possibly causing injury, inspect
D-pillar trim and replace it with a new one if it have
any of the following damage:
- Any cracks or deformations in the D-pillartrim (A)
or the upper hooks (B), or any stress-whitening in
the upper part of the trim
- Any cracks or stress-whitening in the clip seating
surfaces (C)
• Replace any damaged parts with new ones.
• Make sure the top of the D-piliar trim overlaps with
the headliner correctly (see page 24-214).
Right side
Fastener Locations
D► : Screw, 1 F |> ; Clip, 3
(Black)
Trim Removal/Installation - Rear Side Area
Special Tools Required 3. Detach the clip and release the hooks (A), then
KTC Trim Tool Set SOJATP2014* remove the pivot cover (B).
• Available through the Honda Tool and Equipment Fastener Location
NOTE:
• Take care not to bend or scratch the trim or the panels.

• Sliding door sill trim, as needed (see step 4 on page
20 - 102 )
• C-pillar trim (see page 20-103)
• Sliding door opening trim, as needed (see step 5 on
page 20-102)
• Remove the tailgate weatherstrip, as needed (see
page 20-255)
2. Pull up the second row seat belt lower anchor cover
(A), then remove the second row seat belt lower
anchor bolt (B). 4. Remove the third row seat belt lower anchor bolt (A).
5. Remove the rear trim panel (A). 7. Remove the rear side trim panel (A).
-1. Remove the side bolts (B). -1. Remove the cap (B) by releasing the hooks (C).
-2. Pull out both side edges of the trim panel by hand to -2. Remove the side bolt (D).
release the hooks (C) from the rear side trim panel -3. Pull out the rear upper edge of the trim panel by
(D). hand to release the hooks (E) from the D-pillartrim
-3. Pull back the trim panel to detach the clips (E, F). (F).
-4. Pull back the trim panel by hand to detach the clips
Fastener Locations (G, H).
B ► ; Bolt, 2 E p> : Clip, 4 F> Clip, 6 -5. Disconnect the cargo area accessory power socket
(Black) (White)
connector (I), the rear entertainment system
auxiliary jack connector (J) (with rear entertainment
system); and the power outlet connector (K) (for
some models).
Left side
Fastener Locations _ ... _
D ► : Bolt, 1 G t> : Clip, 7 H t> :C lip ,3
(Orange)
>Jill Jp
Jr
6. Left side: Remove the spare tire (A).
-1. Place a hand in each grab handle (B) on the spare

tire cover (C), and pull back to detach the clips.
Remove the spare tire cover.
-2. Remove the spare tire mounting bolt (D).
Fastener Locations
Trim Removal/Installation - Rear Side Area (cont'd)
Right side 8. Remove the rear side trim panel beverage holder (A).
The left side is shown; the right side is similar.
Fastener Loeations
D ► : Bolt, 1 i
G 0 ; Cl p, 9 -1. Detach the clips and release the hooks (B), then
remove the rear speaker grille (C).
-2, Remove the screws.
-3. Slide the beverage holder forward to release the
rear hooks (D).
Fastener Locations
t> : Clip, Left, 2 ►> : Screw, Left, 6
Right, 3 Right, 8
9. Install the rear side trim panel in the reverse order of

them with new ones.
• Make sure there are no twists or kinks in the seat
belt, and that it is not pinched by the rear side trim
panel.
• Make sure that each connector is plugged in
properly.
Trim Removal/Installation - Tailgate Area
S p e c ial T ools Required 2. Remove the left tailgate side trim (A) and the right
KTC Trim Too! Set SOJATP2014* tailgate side trim (B).
*Available through the Honda Tool and Equipment -1. Pull out the top of the side trim to detach the clips.
Program; call 888-424-6857 -2. Release the hooks (C) and the tabs (D) from the
tailgate lower trim panel (E).
NOTE:
Fastener Locations
[>; Clip, 4
• Take care not to bend or scratch the trim or the panels. (Orange)
1. Remove the ta ilgate upper trim (A). ¥

-1. Release the hooks (B) and the tabs (C) from the left
tailgate side trim (D) and the right tailgate side trim
(E).
-2. Pull back the tailgate upper trim by hand to detach
the clips.
Fastener Locations
P>: Clip, 4
(White)
3. Release the hooks (A), and remove the tailgate grip

cover (B), then remove the self-tapping ET screws .
Fastener Locations
4. With power tailgate: Gently pry on the rear power

tailgate close switch (C) to detach the clips, then
disconnect the switch connector (D).
(cont'd)
Trim Removal/Installation - Sunvisor Removal/Installation
Tailgate Area (cont'd)
5. Pull out the tailgate lower trim panel (A) by hand to Special Tools Required
detach the clips (B, C), then remove it. KTC Trim Tool Set SQJATP2014*
Fastener Locations Âvailable through the Honda Tool and Equipment
i p> : Clip, 4 C [> : Clip* 9
i
(Wh te) (Gray)
NOTE;
A A • Use the appropriate tool from the KTC trim tool set to
A
• Take care not to damage the sunvisor or the headliner.
• When prying with a flat-tip screwdriver, wrap it with
protective tape to prevent damage.
1. Release the tabs (A) from the bracket (B) with the
appropriate trim tool.
6. Install the trim in the reverse order of removal, and

note these items:
properly.
them with new ones.
• Push the clips, the hooks, and the tabs into place
securely.
2. Remove the sunvisor cap (A) from the bracket (B).
3. Remove the sunvisor (A). 5. Install the sunvisor in the reverse order of removal,
-1. Release the sunvisor from the holder (B).
-2. Remove the screws with TORX T25 bit.
sunvisor with a new one.
-3. Disconnect the vanity mirror light connector (C).
• To prevent the side curtain airbags from deploying
Fastener Locations improperly and possibly causing injury, inspect the
► ; TORX Screw, 2 sunvisor and replace it with a new one if it have any
of the following damage:
- Any cracks in the sunvisor stay base (A)
- Any bends or cracks in the sunvisor stay shaft (B)
- Any cracks in the sunvisor base (C)
- Any cracks or breakage in the vanity mirror base
(D)
• If the threads on a visor screws are worn out, refer
to the Parts Catalog if you need to use an oversized
self-tapping ET screw.
3.4 N-m
(0.35 kgf-m, 2.5 Ibf-ft)
4. Push the hook (A) with a flat-tip screwdriver and turn

the holder (B) 90 °, then pull it out.
Grab Handle Removal/Installation Headliner Removal/Installation
Special Tools Required Special Tools Required

KTC Trim Tool Set SOJATP2014* KTC Trim Tool Set SOJATP2014*
Âvailable through the Honda Tool and Equipment Âvailable through the Honda Tool and Equipment
Program; call 888-424-6857 Program; call 888-424-6857
NOTE: Use the appropriate tool from the KTC trim tool SRS components are located in this area. Review the
set to avoid damage when removing components. SRS component locations (see page 24-23) and the
1. Lower the grab handle, then pry out the caps (A) with
the appropriate trim tool. Remove the self-tapping ET
screws, then remove the grab handle (B). NOTE;
Fastener Locations
► : Screw, 2
• Take care not to bend or scratch the headliner.
• Be careful not to damage the dashboard orthe other
5 x 0.8 mm
3.4 N-m interior trim.
i
10.35 kgf-m, 2.5 bf-ft)
page 22-112), then wait at least 3 minutes before
beginning work.

• A-pillar trim, both sides (see page 20-103)
• B-pillar upper/lower trim, both sides (see page
20-103)
• C-pillar trim, both sides (see page 20-103)
• D-pillar trim, both sides (see page 20-103)
2. Install the grab handle in the reverse order of
removal, and note these items: • Sunvisors, both sides (see page 20-114)
• Grab handles, six places (see page 20-116)
grab handles with new ones. • Rear individual map lights (see page 22-286)
• To prevent the side curtain airbags from deploying • Center second row seat belt cover (see page 24-14)
improperly and possibly causing injury, inspect the • Center third row seat belt cover (see page 24-18)
removed grab handle (A), and replace it if it has any • With rear entertainment system: RES display cover
damage or deformations. (see page 23-358)
• Rear A/C control panel (see page 21-201)
3. Remove the roof console (A). 4. Remove the rear ceiling vents (A).
-1. Remove the lenses (B). -1. Remove the lens (B).
-2. Remove the bolts (C, D). -2. Slide the vent to the closed position to expose the
-3. Pull out the roof console and the front individual screw (C).
map light (E). -3. Remove the screw (D) and the nut (E) (rear left side
-4. With navigation system: Disconnect the front only).
individual map light connector (F) and the -4. Pull out the rear ceiling vent to release the clip (F),
navigation microphone connector (G). and disconnect the map light connector (G).
Fastener Locations Fastener Locations

C ► : Bolt, 2 'D ► : Bolt, 2 C ► : Screw, 1 D > : Screw, 1 E § : Nut, 1 F |> ; Clip, 1
(cont'd)
Headliner Removal/Installation (cont'd)
5. Remove the headliner (A). Without moonroof

-1. Remove the bolt (B), Fastener Locations
- 2 . Remove the front door opening trim (C), the sliding B ► : Bolt, 1 F t> : Clip, 2
door opening trim (D), and the tailgate weatherstrip
(E) from each roof area.
-3. With the help of an assistant, detach the rear clips
(F) by pulling the rear area of the headliner down. 1
-4. With moonroof: Release the Velcro fasteners (G)
and detach the front clips (H) by lowering the
headliner.
-5. Lower the headliner, and remove it through the
tailgate opening.
With moonroof
Fastener Locations
!!►.* Bolt, 1 F,H !>: Clip, 5
§0MII3) d
E
6. If necessary, pull down the roof console bracket (A) to

detach the clip.
Fastener Location
t> : Clip, 1
7. '07 models: If necessary, remove the grab handle 8. '08-10 models: If necessary, remove the grab handle
bracket (A). bracket (A).
-1. Remove the grab handle bracket mounting bolts -1. Remove the grab handle bracket mounting bolts
(B). Then remove the side curtain airbag mounting (B,C). Then remove the side curtain airbag
bolt (C). Release the hook (D) from the side curtain mounting screw (D). On the rear grab handle
airbag bracket (E). brackets, release the clip (E). Release the hooks (F)
-2. Release the hooks (F) from the body. from the side curtain airbag bracket (G).
-2. Release the hooks (H) from the body.
Fastener Locations
Front and Center
B,C ► ; Bolt,3
Fastener Locations
B ► : Bolt, 2 D ► : Screw, 1
B
5 x 0.8 mm
6 N-m
(1.0 kgf-m, 7.2 Ibf-ft)

Replace.
Headliner Removal/Installation (cont'd)
Rear 10. Install the headliner in the reverse order of removal,

Fastener Locations
C ► : Bolt, 2 D► : Screw, 1 E > : C l ip , 1 headliner and the designated trim pieces with new
parts (see page 24-211).
• To prevent the side curtain airbags from deploying
improperly and possibly causing injury, inspect the
headliner and all removed trim. Replace any pieces
with the following damage:
- Any creases or tears in the headliner (A)
- Any Velcro fasteners (B) or the clip bases (C)
which have come off the headliner
- Any damage around the grab handle holes (D) or
the sunvisor holes (E) in the headliner
- Any deformations in the grab handles (F)
- Any deformations in the grab handle brackets (G)
- Any cracks in the sunvisor stay bases (H)
- Any bends or cracks in the sunvisor stay shafts (I)
- Any cracks in the sunvisor bases (J)
- Any cracks in the vanity mirror base (K)
• Make sure the headliner overlaps the trim pieces
correctly (see page 24-214).
(1.0 kgf-m, 7.2 Ibf-ft) • When passing the headliner through the tailgate
Replace. opening, be careful not to fold or bend it. Also, be
careful not to scratch the body.
9. *07 models: If necessary, remove the bolts, then • Check that both sides of the headliner are securely
remove the dynamic damper (A). attached to the body.
Fastener Locations • Do the battery terminal reconnection procedure

(see page 22-112).
9.3 N-m
(1.0 kgf-m, 7.2 Ibf-ft)
Carpet Replacement
D SRS components are located in this area. Review the

NOTE:
• Take care not to damage, wrinkle or twist the floor
covering.
• Be careful not to damage the dashboard or other
interior trim pieces.
Front Carpet
beginning work.

• Front seats, both sides (see page 20-153)
• Kick panels, both sides (see page 20-101)
• Dashboard center lower cover (see page 20-138)
(cont'd)
Carpet Replacement (cont'd)
3. Remove the front carpet (A). Rear Carpet

-1. Release the Velcro fasteners (B), then pull out the SRS components are located in this area. Review the
carpet from under the B-pillar lower trim (C). SRS component locations (see page 24-23) and the
-2. Release the hooks (D) on both sides. precautions and procedures (see page 24-26) before
-3. Release the Velcro fastener (E) on the front edge of doing repairs or service.
the carpet, then pull back the carpet from under the
dashboard. NOTE:
-4. Pull the seat harnesses (F) out through the holes in • Put on gloves to protect your hands.
the carpet. • Take care not to damage, wrinkle or twist the carpet.

• Rear side trim panel, both sides (see page 20-110)
• Detachable console or second row center seat
• Second row seats, both sides
• Third row seats, both sides (see page 20-219)
2. Detach the clips (A, B), then remove the third row seat
striker cover (C).
Fastener Locations
A > -.Clip,2- B > :C lip ,3
(Black) (White)
4. Install the front carpet in the reverse order of removal,

• Take care not to damage, wrinkle or twist the
carpet.
• Make sure the seat harnesses are routed correctly.
• Slip the holes in the carpet over the rear heater
ducts.
• Do the battery terminal reconnection procedure
(see page 22-112).
H i.*
3. Remove the screws (A, B) and detach the clip (C), then 4. For some models: Release the Velcro fasteners (A),
remove the second row seat striker covers (D, E, F), and remove the bolts, then remove the floor recess lid
and the second row seat hook covers (G, H). ■(B).

A► : Screw, 6 B ► ; Screw, 7 C p> : Clip, 1
5. Pull up the front carpet (A), and release the Velcro

fasteners (B). Detach the clips (C,D), then remove the
rear carpet (E).
Fastener Locations
B t> : Clip, 2 D |> : Clip, 2
6. Install the rear carpet in the reverse order of removal,

• Take care not to damage, wrinkle or twist the
carpet.
them with new ones.
Floor Well Cover Carpet Floor Well Cover Replacement
Removal/Installation
Special Tools Required ' NOTE:
KTC Trim Tool Set SQJATP2014* • Put on gloves to protect your hands.
*Available through the Honda Tool and Equipment • Take care not to damage, wrinkle or tw ist the carpet.
1. Remove the center console or the second row center
seat.
NOTE;
• Put on gloves to protect your hands. 2. Remove both second row seats.
• Use the appropriate tool from the KTC trim tool set to 3. Pull up the front carpet (A). Remove the bolts, then
avoid damage when removing components. remove the floor well cover (B).
1. Remove the center console or the second row center *07 model
seat.
Fastener Locations
2. Remove both second row seats.
3. Open the floor well cover (A). Detach the clips, and
release the Velcro fasteners (B), then remove the floor
well cover carpet (C).
Fastener Locations
O : Clip, 2
Fastener Locations
4. Install the floor well cover carpet in the reverse order

them with new ones.
• Push the fasteners and the clips into place securely.
4. Install the floor well cover in the reverse order of

removal, and take care not to damage, wrinkle or twist
the carpet.
Floor Well Cover B Replacement
07 Model 3. If necessary, remove the screws, then separate the

lock cover (A) and the lock case (B).
NOTE: Take care not to scratch the floor well cover or the
related parts. Fastener Locations
► : Screw, 4
1. Remove the screws and the floor well cover B .
Fastener Locations
► : Screw, 4
2. Remove the screw, securing the upper collar (A), the

lock (C), and the lower collar (D) to the floor well cover
B.
Fastener Location
4. Install the floor well cover B in the reverse order of

removal.
FLOOR WELL
COVER HINGE
Floor Well Cover Lock Cylinder Replacement
Special Tools Required 3. If necessary, remove the screws and the lock handle
KTC Trim Tool Set SOJATP2014* cover (A).
• Available through the Honda Tool and Equipment Fastener Locations
► : Screw, 3
NOTE;
• Take care not to scratch the floor well cover.
1. Remove the floor well cover (see page 20-124).
2. Remove the screws and the lock handle (A).
Fastener Locations
4. Release the hooks (A), then remove the lock cylinder

cover (B).
Floor Well Cover Lock Cylinder Replacement (cont'd)
5. Pull out one end of the retainer (A) of its slot with a
hook-shaped tool, then remove the floor well cover
lock cylinder (B).
NOTE: Wear eye protection during this step.
O L .
♦
6. Insert the retainer into the lock body, then push the
lock cylinder into the lock cylinder body unit it snaps
into the retainer.
7. Install the floor well cover lock cylinder and the lock
handle in the reverse order of removal.
In-floo r Storage Bin Disassembly/Reassembly
For some '07 Model

Detachable Console Disassembly/Reassembly
Special Tools Required 3. If necessary, remove the screws, then separate the
KTC Trim Tool Set SOJATP2Q14* beverage holder base (A) from the beverage holder
• Available through the Honda Tool and Equipment upper cover (B).
Prog ram; call 888-424-6857 Fastener Locations
► : Screw, 5
For some *07 model
NOTE:
• Take care not to scratch the console or the related
parts.
1. Remove the detachable console.
2. Detach the clips, then remove the beverage holder

(A).
Fastener Locations
> : Clip, 10
4. Disconnect the console latch cables (A) from the

console box (B) and the console latch handle (C).
5. Remove the screws, then pull out the console front 7. Remove the screws from the side cover (A).
cover (A) to detach the clips, then remove the cover.
Fastener Locations
Fastener Locations ► : Screw, 4
► ; Screw, 3 |> : Clip, 4
8. Pull out the side cover (A) to detach the clips, then
remove the cover.
Fastener Locations
[>: Clip, 7
6. Remove the screw (A), then pull out the console rear
cover (B) to detach the clips (C, D), then remove the
cover.
Fastener Locations
A ► : Screw, 1 C |> ; Clip, 4 D [> : Clip, 2
Detachable Console Disassembly/Reassembly (cont'd)
9. Remove the screws, then remove the sliding frame 11. Remove the bolts, then remove the console latches
(A) and the sliding lid (B) from the console box (C), (A).
then remove the sliding lid from the sliding frame.
Fastener Locations
Fastener Locations ► ; Bolt, 2 6 x1.0 mm
9.8 N-m
. ► ; Screw, 6 (1.0 kgf-m, 7.2 Ibf-ft)
12. Remove the screws, then remove the console

10. Disconnect and detach the console latch cables (A) brackets (A).
from the console latches (B) and the console brackets
(C). Fastener Locations
► : Screw, 6
B
13. Remove the screws, then remove the console locks
(A).
Fastener Locations
► ; Screw, 2
(0 ™
14. Reassemble the detachable console in the reverse

order of disassembly, and note these items:
them with new ones.
• Make sure the console latch cables are connected
securely.
Driver's Dashboard Outer Panel Removal/Installation
Special Tools Required 3. Gently pry up on the driver's dashboard outer panel
KTC Trim Tool Set SOJATP2014* (A) to detach the clips, and release the hook (B).
Âvailable through the Honda Tool and Equipment Fastener Locations
> ■: Clip, 3
NOTE:
• Take care not to scratch the dashboard or the related
parts.
1. Remove the dashboard side panel (A).
-1. Open the front door.

-2. Gently pull out along the front edge to release the
hooks (B).
-3. Gently pull out on the side cover to release the
hooks (C), then remove the side panel.
4. Disconnect the moonroof switch connector (C), the

power sliding door main switch connector (D), and
the adjustable pedal switch connector (E), then
remove the driver's dashboard outer panel.
5. Install the outer panel in the reverse order of removal,

2. Push the bottom hook (A) by hand, and pull out the
bottom of the driver's dashboard outer panel (B).
NOTE: Take care not to scratch the dashboard or the Special Tools Required
related parts, KTC Trim Tool Set SOJATP2014 *
1. Remove the dashboard/steering hanger beam (see *Available through the Honda Tool and Equipment
page 20-145). Program; call 888-424-6857
2. Remove the screws and the driver's lower dashboard

NOTE:
switch panel (A).
Fastener Locations parts.
► : Screw, 4 • Use the appropriate tool from the KTC trim tool set to
1. Remove the driver's dashboard lower cover (A).
-1. Remove the screw.

-2. Pull out the bottom of the driver's dashboard lower
cover to release the clips and the hooks (B).
-3. With climate control: Disconnect the in-car
temperature sensor connector (C) and the air hose
(D).
Fastener Locations
2. Install the cover in the reverse order of removal, and

note these items:
• Make sure that the in-car temperature sensor
connector is plugged in properly, and the air hose is
connected properly.
them with new ones.
Dashboard Center Panel Removal/Installation
Special Tools Required 3. Pry up on the outside edge of the dashboard center
KTC Trim Tool Set SOJATP2014* panel (A) very carefully to detach the clips (B, C) with a
• Available through the Honda Tool and Equipment flat-tip screwdriver, then remove the panel.
Fastener Locations
NOTE:
i
B [> : Cl p, 6 C P> : Clip, 3

parts.
• Be very careful not to bend the trim.
1. Open the upper glove box.
2. Gently pry up on the dashboard center panel (A) to

detach the clips with the appropriate trim tool.
Fastener Locations
4. Disconnect the hazard warning switch/passenger's

airbag cutoff indicator connector (D), the climate
control unit connector (E), and the interior lights
switch connector (F).
5. If necessary, remove the screws securing the driver's

center vent (A), then separate it from the dashboard
center panel (B).
Fastener Locations
6. Install the panel in the reverse order of removal, and

note these items:
them with new ones.
instrument Panel Center Pocket Removal/Installation
KTC Trim Tool Set SOJATP2014* KTC Trim Tool Set SOJATP2C514*
• Available through the Honda Tool and Equipment * Available through the Honda Tool and Equipment
Program; call 888-424-6857 Program; call 888-424-6857
NOTE: NOTE:
• Take care not to scratch the dashboard or the related • Put on gloves to protect your hands.
parts. • Use the appropriate tool from the KTC trim tool set to
• Use the appropriate tool from the KTC trim tool set to avoid damage when removing components.
avoid damage when removing components. • Take care not to scratch the dashboard or the related
parts.
1. Adjust the steering column to the full tilte down
position, and to the full telescopic out position. 1. Remove the dashboard center panel (see page
20-136).
2. Remove the instrument panel (A).
2. Remove the audio unit (see page 23-167).
-1. Gently pull out along the bottom to release the clips
(B) and the hooks (C). 3. Remove the bolts (A), and pull out the center pocket
-2. Gently pull out the upper area of the panel to (B) to detach the clips (C, D).
release the clips (D).
Fastener Locations
Fastener Locations A ► : Bolt, 2 C > : Clip, 2 D [>.: Clip, 2
B [> : Clip, 4 D [> : Clip, 2
i x 0.8 mm
5 N-m
(0.5 kgf-m,
4 Ibf-ft)
4. Install the center pocket in the reverse order of

3. Install the panel in the reverse order of removal, and • Ifthe clips are damaged or stress-whitened, replace
note these items: them with new ones.
• If the clips are damaged or stress-whitened, replace • Push the clips and the hooks into place securely.
them with new ones.
Dashboard Center Lower Cover Removal/Installation
Special Tools Required 2. Open the beverage holder (A), and remove the
KTC Trim Tool Set SOJATP2014* screws.
*AvailabIe through the Honda Tool and Equipment Fastener Locations
► ; Screw, 4

NOTE;
parts.
1. From under the dash, remove the driver's heater

lower cover (A) and the passenger's heater lower
cover (B).
-1. Detach the clips (C, D).

-2. Release the hook (E) and the stud (F).
Fastener Locations
A > : Clip, 1 B > : Clip, 1
Beverage Holder
3. Remove the dashboard center lower cover (A). NOTE: Take care not to scratch the dashboard or the
related parts.
-1. Pull out the cover to detach the clips (B, C).
-2. Disconnect the driver's/passenger's accessory 1. Remove the dashboard center lower cover (see page
power socket connectors (D). 20-138).
-3. For some models: Disconnect the seat heater
2. Open the beverage holder (A), and remove the
connectors (E).
screws.
Fastener Locations
Fastener Locations
B [> : Clip, 2 C P> : Clip, 2
3. Pull out the beverage holder (A) to release the bosses

(B), then remove the holder.
note these items:
them with new ones.
properly.
• Push the clips and the hook into place securely.
4. Install the holder in the reverse order of removal.

Upper Glove Box Lid Upper Glove Box Lid Damper
Removal/Installation Removal/Installation
NOTE: Take care not to scratch the glove box lid or the NOTE: Take care not to scratch the glove box lid or the
related parts. related parts.
1. Remove the upper glove box lid (A). 1. Disconnect the damper arm (A) from the upper glove
box lid.
-1. Open the glove box.
-2. Disconnect the damper arm (B). Fastener Locations
-3. Remove the bolts, release the hooks (C), and then ► : Screw, 2
remove the lid.
Fastener Locations
► : Bolt, 2
2. Remove the screws, then remove the upper glove box

lid damper (B).
3. Install the damper in the reverse order of removal.

Upper Glove Box Pocket Passenger's Dashboard Undercover
NOTE: Take care not to scratch the upper glove box or NOTE: Take care not to scratch the dashboard or the
the related parts. related parts.
1. Remove the lower glove box striker (see page 20-143). 1. Remove the passenger's dashboard undercover (A).
2. Remove the screws (A), and the upper glove box lid -1. Gently pull down the rear edge to detach the clips.
striker (B). Remove the screws (C) and the upper glove -2. Pull the cover away to release the pins (B) from the
box pocket (D). holders (C).

A,C ► Screw, 11 |> ; Clip, 3
3. Install the pocket in the reverse order of removal. 2. Install the undercover in the reverse order of removal,
and push the clips and the pins into place securely.
Lower Glove Box Lower Glove Box Lock Cylinder
Removal/Installation Replacement
SRS components are located in this area. Review the Special Tools Required
SRS component locations (see page 24-23) and the KTC Trim Tool Set SOJATP2014*
precautions and procedures (see page 24-26) before • Available through the Honda Tool and Equipment
doing repairs or service. Program; call 888-424-6857
NOTE: Take care not to scratch the dashboard or the
related parts. NOTE:
• Take care not to scratch the glove box or the related
1. While holding the lower glove box (A), release the
parts.
lower glove box damper (B), and remove the glove
box stop (C) on each side. • Use the appropriate tool from the KTC trim tool set to
1. Remove the lower glove box (see page 20-142).
2. Remove the lid (A). Remove the screws, and remove

the lock handle (B).
Fastener Locations
2. Remove the bolts, then remove the lower glove box

(A).
Fastener Locations
► : Bolt, 2
3. Release the hooks (A), then remove the lock cylinder

cover (B).
3. Install the lower glove box in the reverse order of

removal.
Lower Glove Box Striker
4. Pull one end of the retainer (A) out of its slot with a NOTE; Take care not to scratch the dashboard or the
hook-shaped tool, then remove the lower glove box related parts.
lock cylinder (B).
1. Remove the dashboard/steering hanger beam (see
NOTE: Wear eye protection during this step. page 20-145).
2. Remove the screws and the lower glove box striker

(A).
Fastener Locations
► . * Screw, 6
♦ *
5. Insert the retainer into the lock body, then push the
lock cylinder into the lock cylinder body until it snaps
into the retainer.
3. Install the lower glove box striker in the reverse order
6. Install the lock cylinder in the reverse order of
of removal.
removal.
Lower Glove Box Damper Dashboard Side Vent
NOTE: Take care not to scratch the dashboard or the Special Tools Required
related parts. KTC Trim Tool Set SOJATP2014*
1. Remove the lower glove box (see page 20-142). Âvailable through the Honda Tool and Equipment
2. Remove the bolt and the lower glove box damper (A).
Fastener Location NOTE:

► : B olt 1 • Take care not to scratch the dashboard or the related
parts.
5 x 0.8 m m avoid damage when removing components.
4 N-m
(0.4 kgf-m, 3 Ibf-ft) 1. Carefully insert a trim tool next to the hooks (A), and
release the hooks by prying on the side vent (B).
3. Install the damper in the reverse order of removal.
2. Install the side vent in the reverse order of removal,

and push the hooks into place securely.
Dashboard/Steering Hanger Beam Removal/Installation
Special Tools Required Driver's side

KTC Trim Tool Set SQJATP2014 *
4. From under the dash, disconnect the cabin wire
• Available through the Honda Tool and Equipment harness connectors (A), the roof wire harness
Program; call 888-424-6857 connectors (B), the floor wire harness connectors (C),
the parking brake switch connector (D), and the
SRS components are located in this area. Review the dashboard wire harness connectors (E), then release
SRS component locations (see page 24-23) and the the wire harness clip (F) from the driver's under-dash
precautions and procedures (see page 24-26) before fuse/relay box (G).
NOTE: Lift the large wire harness connector locks (H)
NOTE: before trying to remove the connectors from the
• Use the appropriate tool from the KTC trim tool set to fuse/relay box.
installing the dashboard.
• Take care not to scratch the dashboard, the body or
the other related parts.

beginning work.

• Passenger's dashboard undercover (see page
20-141)
• Dashboard center lower cover (see page 20-138)
• Lower glove box (see page 20-142)
® Driver's dashboard outer panel (see page 20-134)
• Kick panels, both sides (see page 20-101)
• A-pillar trim, both sides (see page 20-103)
• A-pillar corner trim (see page 20-261)
• Steering column (see page 17-9)
3. Disconnect the A/T shift cable (see page 14-242).

Dashbo ard/Steering Hanger Beam Removal/Installation (cont'd)
Middle area Passenger's side

5. Remove the heater lower duct (A). Detach the harness 6. From under the dash, disconnect the passenger's
clips (B), and disconnect the SRS unit connectors (C), door wire harness connectors (A), the floor wire
the audio subharness connectors (D), the A/C harness connector (B), the audio amplifier connectors
subharness connector (E), and the floor wire harness (C), the roof wire harness connector (D), and
connectors (F). disconnect the dashboard wire harness connectors
(E) from the passenger's under-dash fuse/relay box
(F). Remove the ground bolt (G) with a TORX T35 bit.
7. Carefully remove the dashboard (A) through the front

door opening.
-1. Open the driver's door, and remove the dashboard

mounting bolts (B,C).
-2. Remove the remaining dashboard mounting bolts
(D, E) and the center frame mounting bolts (F).
-3. Lift up on the dashboard to release it from the guide
pins (G,H).
NOTE: Do not rest the dashboard on its lower center 8. If necessary, remove the center bracket mounting
cover opening, or it may be damaged. Lay it on its bolts, then remove the center bracket (A).
front or back.
Fastener Locations
A ^ : Bolt,2 B ► ; Bolt, 1 C ^ ;B o lt,2 D ^ ;B o it,2
(Black) (Black) (Gold) (Gold)
(j^nn© ^ md
9. Install the dashboard in the reverse order of removal,

• Reinstall the center bracket on the center frame,
and slightly tighten the mounting bolts. Reinstall
the dashboard on the body. After tightening the
dashboard mounting bolts, tighten the center
bracket mounting bolts and the center frame
mounting bolts.
• Make sure the dashboard fits onto the guide pins
correctly.
center frame mounting bolts securing the center
bracket and the dashboard before reinstallation.
• Before tightening the bolts, make sure the wire
harnesses are not pinched.
© Make sure the connectors are plugged in properly,
and the antenna lead and air hose are connected
properly.
(see page 22-112).
Dashboard/Steering Hanger Beam Disassembly/Reassembly
Special Tools Required 3. From the front of the dashboard, detach the harness
KTC Trim Too! Set SOJATP2014* clips (A, B).
*Available through the Honda Tool and Equipment
NOTE:
• Take care not to scratch the dashboard, the body, or
the other related parts.
• Take care not to bend the brackets.
1. Remove the dashboard/steering hanger beam (see

page 20-145).
2. Remove these items from the dashboard:

• Driver's dashboard outer panel (see page 20-134)
• Center panel (see page 20:136)
• Tweeter, both sides (see page 23-173)
4. From glove box opening, detach the harness clip (A),
• Gauge control module (see page 22-371)
and disconnect the glove box light connector (B).
• Sunlight sensor (see page 21-185)
• Radio switch panel, with audio unit (see page
23-167)
• Shift lever (see page 14-228)
• Audio display-clock, with audio unit (see page
23-167)
• Dashboard side vent (see page 20-144)
• Front passenger's airbag (see page 24-216)
• Beverage holder (see page 20-139)
5. On the back of both sides of the dashboard, detach the 7. From the back of the dashboard, detach the harness
tweeter harness clip (A). The driver's side is shown; clip (A).
the passenger's side is similar.
8. Remove the bolts (A) and the screws (B), then

separate the dashboard (C) and the steering hanger
beam (D), and disconnect the connectors (E).
6. From the back of the dashboard, detach the Fastener Locations

connectors (A), and release the sunlight sensor A ► : Bolt, 17 B ► : Screw, 2
harness (B) from the hooks (C).
9. Reassemble the steering hanger beam in the reverse

• Make sure the dashboard wire harness is not
pinched.
properly.
Dashboard Panel Disassembly/Reassembly
NOTE: Take care not to scratch the dashboard panel or 4. Remove the screws, then remove the center A/C duct
the related parts. (A) from the dashboard (B).
1. Remove the dashboard/steering hanger beam (see Fastener Locations

page 20-145). ► : Screw, 3
2. Remove the screws, then remove the driver's A/C
duct (A) from the dashboard (B).
Fastener Locations
► : Screw, 5
5. Remove the screws, then remove the defogger duct

(A) from the dashboard (B).
Fastener Locations
3. Remove the screws, then remove the passenger's A/C

duct (A) from the dashboard (B).
Fastener Locations
6. Reassemble the dashboard in the reverse order of

disassembly.
SECOND ROW CENTER SEAT

Seat-back Cover Replacement, page 20-211
Side Frame Cover Replacement, page 20-213
Lever Removal/Installation, page 20-213
Latch Replacement, page 20-214
Latch Cable Replacement, page 20-216
Lock Cable Replacement, page 20-217
Interlock Cable Replacement, page 20-218
THIRD ROW SEATS

Striker Replacement, page 20-232
Pivot Removal/Installation, page 20-233
Pivot Disassembly/Reassembly, page 20-234
Latch Replacement, page 20-236
Seat Cover Replacement, page 20-237
Latch Cable Replacement, page 20-240
Recline Cable Replacement, page 20-242
SECOND ROW SEATS

Riser Disassembly/Reassembly, page 20-195
Striker Replacement, page 20-196
Armrest Replacement, page 20-196
Seat-back Cover Replacement, page 20-197
Seat Cushion Cover Replacement, page 20-201
Seat Lock Release Cable
Third Row Access Cable
FRONT SEAT FRONT SEAT
(Passenger's) (Driver's)
Active Head Restraint Active Head Restraint Inspection, page 20-152
Inspection, page 20-152 Removal/Installation, page 20-153
Removal/Installation, page 20-153 Disassembly/Reassembly, page 20-157
Disassembly/Reassembly, page 20-157 Linkage Disassembly/Reassembly-Driver's Manual
Linkage Disassembly/Reassembly- Height Adjustable, page 20-166
Passenger’s Manual, page 20-169 Linkage Disassembly/Reassembly-Driver's 8-Way
Linkage Disassembly/Reassembly- Power, page 20-168
Passenger's 4-Way Power, page 20-172 Arm rest Replacement, page 20-173
Arm rest Replacement, page 20-173 Recline M otor Replacement, page 20-175
Recline Motor Replacement, page 20-175 Lumbar Support Replacement, page 20-176
Seat-back Cover Replacement, page 20-177 Seat-back Cover Replacement, page 20-177
Seat Cushion Cover Replacement, page 20-185 Seat Cushion Cover Replacement, page 20-185
Front Seat Active Head Restraint Inspection
NOTE: If the vehicle has been in a collision, always 6. Make marks (A) on both sides at 280 mm (11.02 in)
inspect the active head restraints, even if they appear upward from the posts of the head restraint frame (B)
reusable, by doing the following procedure. along the back of the head restraint (C) surface. Make
the center point (D) between the two marks for the
Resetting Head Restraint Position measurements in step 7.
1. Push the head restraint (A) forward fully from the
locked position to return the inside inertia lock (B).
7. Push the head restraint (A) forward, and measure the

horizontal head restraint movement. The head
restraint should move more than 60 mm (2.36 in)
%
without resistance. If it is less than 60 mm (2.36 in), or
the head restraint does not move smoothly, replace
the seat frame:
• Power seat: Replace the seat-back frame (see page
20-177)
• Manual height adjustable seat:
2. Slowly raise the head restraint into the normal
- '08-10 models (see page 20-167)
position.
• Manual seat:
Inspection - '07 model (see page 20-169)
3. Manual height adjustable seat/manual seat: Fold the - '08-10 models (see page 20-171)
seat-back forward, then recline the seat-back to the
Above 60 mm (2.36 in)
first lock position, and raise the head restraint to the (Level)
highest position.
4. Power seat: Move the seat-back to the fully upright

position. Raise the head restraint to the highest
position. A
5. Apply masking tape on the top of the head restraint.

Front Seat Removal/Installation
Speci al Tools Required 3. Passenger's seat: Remove the rear inner seat track
KTC Trim Tool Set SQJATP2014* cover (A) from the back of the seat track by detaching
Âvailable through the Honda Tool and Equipment the clips.
Program; call 888-424-6857 Fastener Locations

Do the OPDS/ODS unit initialization after front

passenger's seat replacement.
• '07 model: OPDS unit (see page 24-39)
• '08-10 models: ODS unit (see page 24-41)
NOTE:
• Take care not to scratch the body or tear the seat 4. Passenger's seat: Remove the seat belt lower anchor
covers. bolt (A), and release the hook (B), then remove the
• Put on gloves to protect your hands. lower anchor bracket (C) from the outer side of the
front passenger's weight sensor (D).
1. Adjust the steering column to the full tilt up position,
and to the full telescopic in position. Adjust the NOTE: Do not remove the seat belt anchor bolt (E)
seat-back recline to a middle position. from the lower anchor bracket.
2. Passenger's seat: Slide the seat all the way forward.

Remove the rear outer seat track cover (A) from the
back of the seat track by detaching the clips and
releasing the hook (B).
Fastener Locations
>:C lip,2
Front Seat Removal/Installation (cont'd)
5. Detach the dips and release the m iddle hooks (A), 7. Release the hook (A) and detach the clip, then remove
then remove the rear riser cover (B). the front riser cover (B) from both sides.
Driver's seat Fastener Location

Fastener Locations
8. Remove the bolts securing the front seat (A).
Fastener Locations
Fastener Locations

page 22-112), and wait at least 3 minutes before
beginning work.
6. Slide the seat fully to the rear to access the front riser
cover.
10. Lift up the front seat, then detach the harness clips (A) Driver's seat (manual height adjustable seat)
on the manual height adjustable seat ('07 model), and ('08-10 models)
disconnect the connectors:
C D
Driver's seat (manual height adjustable seat): Side
airbag connector (B), the seat belt switch connector
(C), and the seat position sensor subharness
connector (D)
Driver's seat (8-way power seat): Side airbag

connector (B), the power seat harness connectors (E),
the navigation unit connectors (F) (with navigation
system), and the GPS antenna harness connector (G)
(with navigation system)
Passenger's seat: Side airbag connector (B), the seat

subharness connector (H), the front passenger's
weight sensor unit connector (I), and the woofer
connector (J) (for some models)
Driver's seat (manual height adjustable seat)

('07 model)
w
C D
Driver's seat (8-way power seat)
B E
Front Seat Removal/Installation (cont'd)
Passenger's seat 11. Install the seat in the reverse order of removal, and
note these items:
B H 1
front seat mounting bolts before reinstallation.
• Tighten the seat mounting bolts to the specified
torque in the sequence shown. Slide the seat all the
way back and tighten © and © , then slide it forward
and tighten © and ® . The driver's seat (A) is
shown; the passenger's seat is similar.
• Tighten the bolts by hand first, then tighten them to
specified torque with a torque wrench.
• Passenger's seat: Before installing the front seat
belt lower anchor, make sure there are no twists or
kinks in the belts.
(see page 22-112).
Seat mounting bolts t ightening sequence
Fastener Locations
Front Seat Disassembly/Reassembly
Special Tools Required 2. Power seat: Remove the clips, and release the hooks
KTC Trim Tool Set SOJATP2014* (A), then remove the inner cover (B) from both sides.
Âvailable through the Honda Tool and Equipment Driver's seat (8-way power seat)
Fastener Locations
'07 model/Power seat ('08-10 models)
Do the OPDS/ODS unit initialization after front

passenger's seat replacement.
NOTE:
• Take care not to tear or damage the seat covers.
1. Remove the front seat (see page 20-153).

Passenger's seat (4-way power seat)
Fastener Locations
[>: Clip, 4
I -
(cont'd)
Front Seat Disassembly/Reassembly (cont'd)
3. Passenger's seat: Remove the center table (A). 4. Manual seat: Remove the center cover (A).
-1. Detach the clips (B), and release the hooks (C), then -1. Remove the clips (B), and detach the clip (C).
remove the inner riser cover (D). -2. Pull up the cover, then release the hooks (D, E).
-2. Remove the nuts (E), then remove the table. Driver's seat (manual height adjustable seat)
-3. Detach the clips (F), then remove the center table ('07 model)
inner cover (G) from the table.
Fastener Locations
Fastener Locations
Passenger's seat (manual seat) ('07 model)
Fastener Locations
B [> : Clip, 2 C |> :C lip ,1
5. Power seat: Remove the center cover (A). 6. Power seat: Remove the screw, and release the hooks
(A), then remove the front cover (B).
-1. Driver's seat (8-way power seat): Remove the
screw. Driver's seat (8-way power seat)
-2. Pull up the cover, then release the hooks (B, C, D, E).
Fastener Location
Driver's seat (8-way power seat)
Fastener Location
► : Screw, 1
O*
Fastener Location
► : Screw, 1
o »
7. Manual seat: Remove the recline cover (A). Passenger's seat (manual seat) ('07 model)
-1. Driver's seat: Gently pull out along the bottom of Fastener Locations
the cap (B) to release the hooks (C), then remove the
cap.
-2. Driver's seat: Remove the bolts (D), then remove
the height handle (E) and the screw (F).
-3. Remove the recline knob (G) and the clips (H).
-4. Detach the clip (I), and release the hooks (J, K), then
remove the cover.
(*07 model)
8. Power seat: Remove the recline cover (A). 9. Remove the front outer seat track cover (A) and the
front inner seat track cover (B) by gently pulling out
-1. Remove the screw(s).
the cover to release the clip(s), then slide the cover off
-2. Pull up the cover, then release the hooks (B, C).
from the seat rail.
-3. Disconnect the power seat adjustment switch
connector (D). Passenger's seat ('07 model)
-4. Driver's seat: Detach the harness clips (E) from the
cover. Fastener Locations
Driver's seat (8-way power seat) t> : Clip
Outer, 2
Inner, 1
Fastener Locations
► .-Screw, 2
Fastener Location
► : Screw, 1
Inner
0®
B
Passenger's seat (4-way power seat) ('08-10 models) 10. Driver's seat (8-way power seat): Remove the recline
lower cover (A) and the center lower cover (B).
Fastener Locations
> :C lip ,2
O uter
11. Passenger's seat (manual seat) ('07 model): Detach

the rod fastener (A), then remove the recline rod (B).
Fastener Location
> : Clip, 1
Inner
12. If necessary, detach the clips, and release the hooks 13. From under the seat cushion, release the hook
(A), then remove the riser cover (B). The outer riser springs (A) and the seat cushion cover (B) from the
cover is shown; the inner riser cover is similar. seat cushion frame spring (C), then pullback the
cover, and release the wire tie(s) (D). Disconnect the
Fastener Locations
OPDS/ODS unit connector (E) on the passenger's
D>: Clip, 4 seat, the recline motor subharness connector (F) on
the power seat, and if equipped, the seat-back heater
connector (G) on the driver's 8-way power seat.
Detach the harness clip(s) (H).

('07 model)
H
Passenger's seat (manual seat) ('07 model)
H
Driver's seat (8-way power seat) (*07 model) Passenger's seat (4-way power seat)
Driver's seat (8-way power seat) ('08-10 models)

-1. Remove the bolts.
-2. Lift the seat-back, then pull out the seat wire
harnesses (B), through the holes in the seat cushion
cover.
Fastener Locations
► : Bolt, 4
15. Assemble the seat-back and the seat cushion in the

reverse order of disassembly, and note these items:
them with new ones.
• Apply multipurpose grease to the moving parts of
the seat track.
• To prevent wrinkles in the seat cushion cover,
stretch the material evenly over the pad.
Front Seat Linkage Disassembly/Reassembly - Driver's Manual Height
Adjustable
*§7 model
• The operation of the driver's seat position sensor must be checked after any of these actions (see page 24-46):
- Driver's seat position sensor replacement
- Cover plate (front side of driver's seat slide rail) replacement
NOTE:
• Apply oil to the pivot areas of the slide lock.
• Apply multipurpose grease to the sliding parts and pivot areas of the seat tracks.
8x1.25 mm
22 N-m SEAT CUSHION SPRING
(2.2 kgf-m,
16 Ibf-ft)
INNER SEAT
TRACK REAR MEMBER
CONNECTING LINK
REAR LINK CONNECT PIPE
8x1.25 mm
22 N-m
8 x 1.25 mm
22 N-m OUTER SEAT TRACK
(2.2 kgf-m, END CAP
16 Ibf-ft)
10 x 1.25 mm
47 N-m (4.8 kgf-m, 35 Ibf-ft)
Use a TORXT45 b it
E CLIP 7 mm
HEIGHT RATCHET UNIT
6 x 1.0 mm
9.8 N-m
(1.0 kgf-m,
7.2 Ibf-ft)
8 x 1.25 mm
22 N-m
6 x 1.0 mm
9.8 N-m
(1.0 kgf-m, 7.2 Ibf-ft)
6 x 1.0 mm
9.8 N-m
(1.0 kgf-m, 7.2 Ibf-ft)
Use a TORX T30 b it
Replace.
” 08-10 models
NOTE:
• To remove the slide lever, slide the front seat forward fully, then lightly tap the lever out to disconnect both ends of it
from the springs in both seat tracks.
SEAT FRAME
Front Seat Linkage Disassembly/Reassembly - Driver's 8-Way Power
NOTE:
• To remove the slide motor and the slide gearbox, slide the front seat forward fully.
• Before installing the slide motor and the slide gearbox, align area (A) as shown to align both slide gearbox positions.
• Apply multipurpose grease to the sliding and pivot areas.
• Check operation of the recline adjuster and the slide/up-down adjuster.
8 x 1.25 mm
22 N-m SEAT CUSHION FRAME
SEAT CUSHION SPRING
FRONT UP-DOWN MOTOR
8x1.25 mm
14 N-m
10 x 1.25 mm
59 N-m
SUPPORT WIRE B Use a TORX T45 bit.
REAR UP-DOWN MOTOR

8 x 1.25 mm
14 N-m
(1.4 kgf-m,
10 Ibf-ft)
10 x 1.25 mm
59 N-m
(6.0 kgf-m,
43 Ibf-ft)
Use a TORX
T45 bit.
RIGHT SLIDE
GEARBOX
SLIDE JOINT POWER SEAT HARNESS

CABLE
3.7 N-m HARNESS BRACKET

(0.38 kgf-m, 2.7 Ibf-ft)
SEAT RISER
NAVIGATION UNIT BRACKET B NAVIGATION UNIT BRACKET A

Front Seat Linkage Disassembly/Reassembly - Passenger's Manual
*07 model
Do the front passenger's weight sensor initialization after front passenger's seat frame replacement (see page 24-40).
NOTE:
• Apply oil to the pivot areas of the slide locks.
• Apply multipurpose grease to the sliding parts of the seat tracks.
• When tightening the weight sensor mounting TORX bolts, tighten the bolts in the sequence shown. Improper
tightening could cause the front passenger's airbag system to malfunction.
• Make sure the weight sensor unit connectors are plugged in properly.
• Make sure the weight sensor wires are routed properly so they are not pinched and do not interfere with other parts.
Seat tracks/Seat weight sensor/Seat cushion frame
Front Seat Linkage Disassembly/Reassembly - Passenger's Manual (cont'd)
Seat riser
SEAT RISER
LEFT WOOFER
RIGHT WOOFER BRACKET
BRACKET (For some models)
(For some models)
6x 1.0 mm
9.8 N-m (1.0 kgf-m, 7.2 Ibf-ft)
6 x 1 .0 mm
9.8 N-m
( 1.0 kgf-m,
7.2 Ibf-ft)
UNDER STORAGE
TRAY
(For some models)
'08-10 m odels
Do the front passenger's weight sensor initialization after front passenger's seat frame replacement (see page 24-41).
NOTE:
• To remove the slide lever, slide the front seat forward fully, then lightly tap the lever out to disconnect both ends of it
from the springs in both seat tracks.
• When tightening the weight sensor mounting TORX bolts, tighten the bolts in the sequence shown.
Front Seat Linkage Disassembly/Reassembly - Passenger's 4-Way Power
Do the front passenger's weight sensor initialization after front passenger's seat frame replacement.
NOTE:
• To remove the slide motor and the slide gearbox, slide the front seat forward fully.
• Before installing the slide motor and the slide gearbox, align area (A) as shown to align both slide gearbox positions.
• Apply multipurpose grease to the sliding and pivot areas of the linkage.
• When tightening the weight sensor mounting TORX bolts, tighten the bolts in the sequence shown.
• Make sure the weight sensor wires are routed properly so they are not pinched and do not interfere with other parts.
Front Seat Armrest Replacement
Seat riser Special Tools Required

KTC Trim Tool Set SOJATP2014*
Prog ram; call 888-424-6857
NOTE:
Normal
1. Remove the cap (A) with a trim tool.
E
10x1.25 mm
47N-m
(4.8 kgf-m, 35 Ibfft)
2. Remove the armrest center pin (B), then remove the

armrest (C). If necessary, remove the bushings (D)
from the armrest.
3. Remove the armrest pins (E).
4. Install the armrest in the reverse order of removal.
• Make sure the bushings are installed properly.
• Make sure the cap is installed correctly.
Front Seat Armrest Replacement (cont'd)
Adjustable
1. Remove the cap (A) with a trim tool.
2. Remove the armrest center pin (B), then remove the

armrest (C).
3. Install the armrest in the reverse order of removal,
and make sure the cap is installed correctly.
Front Seat Recline Motor Replacement
Driver's 8-Way power seat/Passenger’s 4-Way Power Seat

and procedures (see page 24-26) before doing repairs or service.
NOTE:
• The driver's seat is shown; the passenger's seat is similar.
1. Remove the seat-back cover/pad (see page 20-177).
2. Remove the recline motor (A).
-1. Disconnect the recline motor connector (B).
-2. Release the push nut (C) from the motor side end of the connecting rod (D).
-3. Gently tap on the motor side of the connecting rod to remove it from the motor and both recline adjusters (E).
-4. Remove the rod cover (F).
-5. Remove the bolt, then remove the motor.
3. Install the motor in the reverse order of removal, and note these items:
• Replace the push nut with a new one. Make sure the push nut is installed correctly.
• Apply medium strength liquid thread lock to the motor mounting bolt before reinstallation.
• Calibrate the front passenger's weight sensor unit ('07 model) (see page 24-40) or initialize the ODS unit
('08-09 models) (see page 24-41).
Front Seat Lumbar Support Replacement
Special Tools Required 4. Release the hook of the yoke wire (A) from the top of
KTC Trim Tool Set SOJATP2014* the basket (B) to loosen the lumbar support cable (C),
• Available through the Honda Tool and Equipment then disconnect it.
For Some Models (Driver's seat)

NOTE:
• Take care not to bend or kink the cable.
• Armrest (see page 20-173)
• Lumbar support knob (see step 4 on page 20-178)
5. Release the wire tie (A), then release the lumbar
2. Release the back of the seat-back cover, as needed support cable (B) and the actuator (C) as an assembly.
(see page 20-177).
3. Remove the screws securing the lumbar support
actuator (A).
Fastener Locations
► : Screw, 2
Qmmmmm
Front Seat-back Cover
Replacement
6. Disconnect the lumbar support cable (A) from the Special Tools Required
lumbar support actuator (B). KTC Trim Tool Set SCUATP2014*
*Available through the Honda Tool and Equipment

Do the OPDS sensor initialization after front passenger's
seat-back cover replacement.
NOTE:
7, Remove the lumbar support (A). • Seats with a side airbag have a "SIDE AIRBAG" label
-1. Release both lower springs (B) from inside the on the seat-back. Because the component parts
seat-back. (seat-back cover, cushion, etc.) of seats with and
-2. Release the lumbar support from both upper without airbags are different, make sure you install
springs (C). only the correct replacement parts.
• Do not repair any tears or frayed spots of the seat-back
cover. If necessary, replace the seat-back cover.
• On the passenger's seat, do not touch the OPDS
sensor in the seat-back pad, and keep it away from oil.
Oil can corrode the sensor causing it to fail.
2. Remove the head restraint.
3. Remove the armrest (see page 20-173).
8. Install the lumbar support in the reverse order of

• Make sure the cable is routed correctly and
connected securely.
• To prevent wrinkles when installing a seat-back
cover, make sure the material is stretched evenly
over the pad before securing the hook strips.
Front Seat-back Cover Replacement (cont'd)
4. If equipped, remove the clip (A), then remove the 6. From under the seat cushion, release the hook
lumbar support knob (B). springs (A) and the seat cushion cover (B) from the
seat cushion frame spring (C), then pull back the
cover, and release the wire tie(s) (D). Disconnect the
recline motor subharness connector (E), and if
equipped, the seat-back heater connector (F) on the
driver's 8-way power seat. Disconnect the OPDS/ODS
unit connector (G) on the passenger's seat, and
detach the harness clip(s) (H).
('07 model)
5. Pry off the caps (A). Remove the screws, then remove
the grab handle (B).
Fastener Locations
► : Screw, 2
S x 1,0 mm
9.8 N-m
(1.0 kgf-m, 7.2 Ibf-ft)

('08-10 models)
Driver's seat (8-way power seat) ('07 model) Passenger's seat (manual seat)
H H
Driver's seat (8-way power seat) ('08-10 models) Passenger's seat (4-way power seat)
E E H g
7. '07 model: Release the lower hook (A), and remove 9. '08-09 models: Release the lower hook (A), and the
the hook covers (B) from inside of the seat-back (C). fasteners (B) from side of the seat-back (C).
8. '07 model: Release the hooks (A), then pull back the
seat-back cover (B).
10. Release the hook strips (A), then loosen the seat-back 11. Pull out the recline motor subharness (A) (power
cover (B). seats), the seat-back heater harness (B) (for some
driver's seats), the side airbag harness (C), and the
*07 model OPDS harness (D) (passenger's seat) through the
harness guides (E).
Driver's seat
Passenger's seat ('07 model)

Passenger's seat ('08-10 models) 13. Pinch the tabs on the ends of the head restraint guides
(A), and remove them from the seat-back.
'07 model
12. Release airbag attachment wire A and airbag

attachment wire B from the seat-back frame (C).
'08-10 models
14. From the back of the seat-back, pass both lower 15. Remove the seat-back cover/pad (A) from the seat
retainers (A) through the slots in the seat-back pad. frame (B).
For some '07 models, release all of the upholstery
rings (B).
*07 model
*08-10 models
16. Pull back the edge of the seat-back cover all the way Passenger's seat ('08-10 models)
around, and release the upholstery rings (A), then
remove the seat-back cover.
Driver's seat
Front Seat Cushion Cover
Replacement
17. Install the seat-back cover in the reverse order of Special Tools Required
removal, and note these items: KTC Trim Tool Set SQJATP2014*
• To prevent wrinkles when installing a seat-back *Available through the Honda Tool and Equipment
cover, make sure the material is stretched evenly Program; call 888-424-6857
over the pad before securing the upholstery rings,
the hooks, and the hook strips. SRS components are located in this area. Review the
• Reinstall airbag attachment wire A and airbag SRS component locations (see page 24-23) and the
attachment wire B of the reinforcing cloth (C) precautions and procedures (see page 24-26) before
securely. doing repairs or service.
• Replace ail of the upholstery rings (D) fastening the
seat-back cover (E) and the pad wire (F) with new NOTE:
ones using commercially available upholstery ring • Use the appropriate tool from the KTC trim tool set to
pliers (G). avoid damage when removing components.
• Use only original Honda replacement seat-back • Take care not to tear or damage the seat covers.
covers. • Put on gloves to protect your hands.
• If equipped, make sure the recline motor harness, 1. '07 model/power seat ('08-10 models): Disassemble
the side airbag harness, the seat-back heater the seat-back and the seat cushion (see page 20-157).
harness, and the OPDS sensor harness
(passenger's seat) are routed properly. 2. Passenger's manual seat ('08-10 models): Remove the
center table (A).
-1. Detach the clips (B), and release the hooks (C), then
remove the inner riser cover (D).
-2. Remove the nuts (E), then remove the table.
-3. Detach the clips (F), then remove the center table
inner cover (G) from the table.
Fastener Locations
Front Seat Cushion Cover Replacement (cont'd)
3. Manual seat ('08-10 models): Remove the center 4. Driver's manual height adjustable seat
cover (A). ('08-10 models): Pull back the cap (A) to release the
hooks (B), and remove the screws, then remove the
-1. Passenger's seat: Remove the cap (B), then remove height adjuster handle (C).
the screw (C).
-2. Remove the clips (D), and detach the clip (E). Fastener Locations
-3. Pull up the cover, then release the hooks (F, G). ► : Screw, 2
Fastener Locations
Passenger's seat (manual seat)
Fastener Locations
5. Manual seat ('08-10 models): Remove the recline 6. Passenger's seat (manual seat) ('08-10 models):
cover (A). Remove the front outer seat track cover (A) and the
front inner seat track cover (B) by gently pulling out
-1. Remove the recline knob (B) and the screw (C). the cover to release the clip(s), then slide out the cover
-2. Detach the clips (D) on the passenger's manual from the seat rail.
seat.
-3. Gently pull out the cover, then detach the clip (E), Outer
and release the hook(s) (F).
Fastener Locations
P>: Clip, 2
Fastener Locations
C ► : Screw, 1 E D>: Clip, 1

Fastener Locations
C ► : Screw, 1 Dl>:CIip,1 E t>: Clip, 1
Inner 7. Manual seat ('08-10 models); From under the seat

cushion, release the hook springs (A) and the seat
Fastener Location cushion cover (B) from the seat cushion frame spring
D>: Clip, 1 (C), then pull the cover back, and release the wire ties
(D). Disconnect the OPDS/ODS unit connector (E) on
the passenger's seat, and detach the harness clips (F).
Driver's seat
Passenger's seat
A
*
8. Release the hook strips (A) from both sides of the seat Passenger's seat (4-way power seat)
cushion.
9. Manual height adjustable seat: Release the retainers

(B).
A
10. From under the seat cushion, detach the clips on the 11. Remove the seat cushion cover/pad (A) from the seat
driver's seat. Pull back the seat cushion cover (A), and cushion frame (B).
release the book (B).
Driver's seat
Fastener Locations
12. Release the upholstery rings (A) from under the seat
cushion (B).
Passenger's seat
Second Row Seat
Disassembly/Reassembly
13. Pull back the edge of the seat cushion cover (A) all the Special Tools Required
way around, and release the upholstery rings (B), then KTC Trim Tool Set SOJATP2014*
remove the cover. • Available through the Honda Tool and Equipment
NOTE:
2. '07 model: Remove the beverage holder (A).
Fastener Locations
► : Screw, 3

note these items:
• To prevent wrinkles when installing a seat cushion
over the pad before securing the upholstery rings
and the hook strips.
• Replace all of the upholstery rings (A) fastening the
seat cushion cover (B) and the pad wire (C) with
new ones using commercially available upholstery
ring pliers (D).
Second Row Seat Disassembly/Reassembly (cont'd)
3. Remove the outer recline cover (A). 4. Remove the outer center cover (A).
-1. Remove the clip (B), then remove the recline knob -1. Detach the clips.
(C). -2. Pull up the cover, then release the hooks (B, C).
-2. Release the cap (D) ('08-10 models), and then
remove the bolt(s) (E) and the screw (F). Fastener Locations
-3. '07 model: Remove the screw (G), then remove the [> ; Clip, 3
beverage holder subbracket (H).
*07 model
Fastener Locations
E ► : Bolt, 2 F ► : Screw, 1 G ► ; Screw, 1
5. Remove the lock release knob (A).

-1. Remove the screws, then pull out the lock release
knob and the inner recline cover C.
-2. Disconnect the outer lock release cable (B) and the
Fastener Locations
inner lock release cable (D) from the knob.
E► : Bolt, 1 F ► : Screw, 1
Fastener Locations
► : Screw, 2
6. Remove the seat-back (A). 7. If necessary, remove the inner center cover (A) and
the inner recline cover (B).
-1. Remove the push nut (B), then remove the third row
seat access cable (C). -1. Remove the seat cushion cover (see page 20-201).
-2. Remove the bolts (D) and the pivot bolt (E), then -2. Remove the screws, then remove the inner center
remove the seat-back and the pivot bushing (F). cover and the inner recline cover.
-3. Lift the seat-back, then pull the third row seat access
cable, out through the hole in the seat-back frame Fastener Locations
(G).
Fastener Locations
8. If necessary, remove the seat cushion frame (C) and

the seat tracks/seat riser (D).
-1. Remove the nuts and the wire ties (E), then separate
the seat cushion frame and the seat tracks/seat
riser.
-2. Lift the seat cushion frame, then pull the third row
seat access cable (F), out through the hole (G).
Second Row Seat Disassembly/Reassembly (cont'd)
9. Reassemble the seat-back and seat cushion in the

reverse order of disassembly, and note these items:
• Replace the push nut you removed with new one.
them with new ones.
• Apply multipurpose grease to the moving parts of
the seat-track.
• To prevent wrinkles in the seat cushion cover,
stretch the material evenly over the pad.
Second Row Seat Riser Disassembly/Reassembly
NOTE:
• Take care not to bend or kink any cables.
• Apply medium strength liquid thread lock to the seat tracks and front connecting pipe mounting TORX bolts.
• Apply multipurpose grease to the sliding area of the seat tracks.
• The right riser assembly is shown; the left riser assembly is similar except it has no adapter.
Second Row Seat Striker Second Row Seat Armrest
NOTE: Take care not to bend or scratch the interior trim NOTE: Take care not to tear or damage the seat covers.
or the body.
1. Remove the cap (A).
• Second row seat
• Rear carpet, as needed (see page 20-122)
2. Remove the bolts and the nuts, then remove the
strikers (A).
Fastener Locations
► : Bolt, 7 # ;N u t,3
10 x 1.25 mm
47 N-m
2. Remove the armrest center pin (B), the bushing (C)

and the nylon washer (D), then remove the armrest
(E).
3. Remove the armrest pins (F).
4. Install the armrest in the reverse order of removal,
and make sure the nylon washer and the bushing are
installed properly.
3. Install the strikers in the reverse order of removal.

Second Row Seat-back Cover Replacement
Special Tools Required 7. Remove the third row seat access knob (A) and the
KTC Trim Tool Set SOJATP2014* screw, then remove the third row seat access knob
• Available through the Honda Tool and Equipment trim (B).
Prog ram; call 888-424-6857
Fastener Location
Screw, 1
NOTE;
• Take care not to scratch the body or tear the seat
covers.
1. Fold the seat-back forward.
2. Remove the second row seat.
4. Remove the armrests from both sides (see page
20-196).
5. Remove the seat-back (see page 20-191).
6. Pry off the caps (A) and remove the screws, then
remove the grab handle (B).
Fastener Locations
8. Pull the seat-back cover (A) off the frame hooks (B)
around the third row seat access lever (C).
(1.0 kgf-m, A
7.2 Ibf-ft)
(cont'd)
Second Row Seat-back Cover Replacement (cont'd)
9. Unzip the bottom of the seat-back cover (A). 11. While pulling back the seat-back cover, release the
inside springs (A) from behind the seat-back.
r-
□ □
rr \ rr% rr% rr\
fr\f(\irt\ %
rr\ rr% rr\ rr\ rr\ rr\
JJ \
10. Release the clips fastening the seat-back cover (A) to

the frame.
Fastener Locations
O : Cli p, 2
§-
12. Pinch the tabs on the ends of the head restraint guides 13. Pull back the edge of the seat-back cover (A) all the
(A), and remove them from the seat-back. way around, and release the upholstery rings (B), then
remove the cover.
'07 model
14. Remove the seat-back pad (A) from the seat-back

frame (B).
*08-10 models
Second Row Seat-back Cover Replacement (cont'd)
15. Right second row seat: If necessary, remove the 16. Install the seat-back cover in the reverse order of
seat-back damper (A) from the seat-back frame (B) removal, and note these items:
• To prevent wrinkles when installing the seat-back
Fastener Locations
► : Screw, 2 over the pad before securing the upholstery rings,
the hooks, and the inside springs.
seat-back cover (B) to the pad wires (C) with new
ones using commercially available upholstery ring
pliers (D).
Second Row Seat Cushion Cover Replacement
Special Tools Required 5. Release the hook strips (A) from both sides the seat
KTC Trim Tool Set SOJATP2014* cushion.
Âvailable through the Honda Tool and Equipment
Program; call 888-424-6857 A
NOTE;
• Take care not to scratch the body or tear the seat
covers.
2. Remove the seat cushion (see page 20-191).
3. Remove the seat belt buckle (see page 24-15).
4. Release the hooks (A) from under the seat cushion,
6. Remove the cushion cover/pad from the seat cushion
then loosen the seat cushion cover (B).
frame.
7. Release the upholstery rings (A) from under the seat
cushion (B).
Second Row Seat Cushion Cover Second Row Seat Lock Release
Replacement (cont'd) Cable Replacement
8. Pull back the edge of the seat cushion cover (A) all the NOTE: Take care not to kink the cable.
way around, and release the upholstery rings (B), then 1. Remove the second row seat.
remove the cover.
• Outer recline cover (see step 3 on page 20-192)
• Inner recline cover C (see step 5 on page 20-192)
• Rear outer riser cover (see page 20-195)
• Rear inner riser cover (see page 20-195)
3. Release the hooks from under the seat cushion (see
4. Disconnect the outer lock release cable (A) and the
inner lock release cable (B) from the knob.
Replace.
9. Install the cushion cover in the reverse order of

• To prevent wrinkles when installing the seat
cushion cover, make sure the material is stretched
evenly over the pad before securing the upholstery
rings and the hook strips.
5. If necessary, remove the screw and the knob (A).
seat cushion cover (B) to the pad wires (C) with new
ones using commercially available upholstery ring Fastener Location
pliers (D).
► : Screw, 1
Third Row Seat Access Cable
Replacement
6. Disconnect the lock release cables (A) from both NOTE:
latches (B). Pull the end of each cable in through the • Take care not to tear or damage the seat covers.
holes (C) in the riser. • Take care not to kink the cable.
From Access Lever to Recline Adjuster

2. Remove the seat-back (see page 20-191).
3. Remove the seat-back cover and the pad from the
seat-back frame (see page 20-197).
4. Remove the screw and release the hooks (A), then
remove the third row seat access cover (B).
Fastener Location
► : Screw, 1
7. Release the wire ties (A) fastening each cable on the

seat cushion frame spring (B), then remove the outer
lock release cable (C) and the inner lock release cable
(D).
B
A
8. Install the release cables in the reverse order of

• Make sure each cable is connected securely.
• Replace the wire ties you removed with new ones.
Third Row Seat Access Cable Replacement (cont'd)
5. Remove the screw, then remove the recline inner 6. Disconnect the third row seat access cable (A) from
cover (A). the access lever (B) and the recline adjuster (C), then
remove the cable.
Fastener Location
► : Screw, 1
7. Install the access cable in the reverse order of

removal, and make sure the cable is connected
securely.
From Recline Adjuster to Seat Tracks 5. Release the wire tie (A) fastening the third row seat
access cable (B) to the seat cushion frame spring (C),
1. Remove the second row seat. then remove the cable.
2. Remove the outer recline cover (see step 3 on page
20-192).
3. Remove the push nut (A), then disconnect the third
row seat access cable (B) from the recline adjuster (C).
Pull the cable in through the hole (D) in the recline
adjuster.
6. Install the access cable in the reverse order of

• Replace the push nut and the wire tie you removed
with new ones.
4. From under the seat cushion, disconnect both ends of • Make sure the cable is connected securely.
the third row seat access cable (A) from both seat
tracks (B).
Second Row Center Seat Disassembly/Reassembly
*07 Model 5. Remove the bolts (A, B), then separate the seat-back
(C) and the base (D).
NOTE:
• Take care not to tear or damage the seat covers. Fastener Locations
• Put on gloves to protect your hands. A ► : Bolt, 1 B ► : Bolt, 1
1. Remove the second row center seat.

0™ > 03®
• Seat cushion
• Seat belt buckle (see page 24-15)
• Detachable seat belt buckle (see page 24-15)
3. Release the hooks (A), then remove the recline cover
(B).
6. Remove the screws, and release the hooks (A), then

remove the seat back cover (B).
4. Detach the clip and release the hooks (A), then
remove the center cover (B). Fastener Locations
► ; Screw, 2
Fastener Location
0 : Clip, 1
7. Remove the screw, and release the hooks (A), then
remove the base cover (B).
Fastener Locations
Fastener Location ► : Bolt, 2
► : Screw, 1
10. If necessary, disassemble the seat grip.
Fastener Locations
► : Screw, 4
8. Remove the screws, and detach the clips, then

remove the base undercover (A).
Fastener Locations
► : Screw, 3 |> : Clip, 4
(cont'd)
Second Row Center Seat Disassembly/Reassembly (cont'd)
11. Release the hooks (A), then remove the center riser 13. Remove the screws (A), then remove the dampers (B).
cover (B). Remove the screws (C), and release the hooks (D),
then remove the right riser outer cover (E) and the
right riser inner cover (F).
Fastener Locations
A ► : Screw,2 C ► :Screw ,6
12. Remove the screws (A), then remove the dampers (B).
Remove the screws (C), and release the hook (D), then
remove the left outer riser cover (E).
Fastener Locations
14. Remove the bolts with a TORX T40 bit, then remove
the latch (A).
Fastener Locations
15. Reassemble the second row center seat in the reverse

them with new ones.
'08-10 m odels 5. Remove the bolts (A, B), then separate the seat-back
(C) and the base (D).
NOTE:
• Take care not to tear or damage the seat covers. Fastener Locations
• Put on gloves to protect your hands. A ► : Bolt, 1 B ► ; Bolt 1

• Seat cushion
3. Release the hooks (A), then remove the recline cover
(B).
6. Remove the screws, and release the hooks (A), then

remove the seat back cover (B).
Fastener Locations
4. Release the hooks (A), then remove the center cover

(B).
Second Row Center Seat Disassembly/Reassembly (cont'd)
7. Remove the upper cover (A). 8. Remove the screws and the dampers (A), then
remove the lower cover (B).
-1. Remove the console box mat (B).
-2. Remove the screws, and release the hooks (C), then Fastener Locations
pull out the upper cover.
Fastener Locations
9. Remove the bolts, then remove the seat grip (A).
Fastener Locations
► : Bolt, 2
Second Row Center Seat-back
Cover Replacement
10. If necessary, disassemble the seat grip. NOTE:
Fastener Locations
• Put on gloves to protect you hands.
► : Screw, 4
• Seat cushion
• Recline cover:
- '07 model (see step 3 on page 20-206)
- '08-10 models (see step 3 on page 20-209)
• Center cover:
• Seat-back:
• Seat back cover:
~ '08-10 models (see step 6 on page 20-209)
3. Pinch the tabs on the ends of the head restraint guides
(A), and remove them from the seat-back.
11. Reassemble the second row center seat in the reverse

order of disassembly.
(cont'd)
Second Row Center Seat-back Cover Replacement (cont'd)
4. Release the hook (A) in the bottom of the seat-back 6. Install the seat-back cover in the reverse order of
cover (B), then raise the seat-back and fold back the removal, and note these items:
edge of the cover all the way around. • To prevent wrinkles when installing the seat
cushion cover, make sure the material is stretched
evenly over the pad before securing the upholstery
rings and the hooks.
seat-back cover (B) to the pad wires (C) with new
pliers (D).
5. Release the upholstery rings (A), then remove the

seat-back cover (B).
Replace.
A
Replace.
o o
Second Row Center Seat Side Second Row Center Seat Lever
Frame Cover Replacement Removal/Installation
NOTE: For Some Models
NOTE:
© Put on gloves to protect your hands.
1. Remove the seat-back cover (see page 20-211). • Put on gloves to protect your hands.
2. Remove the screw. 1. Remove these items:
Fastener Location • Seat cushion
• Recline cover (see step 3 on page 20-206)
• Center cover (see step 4 on page 20-206)
• Seat-back (see step 5 on page 20-206)
• Base cover (see step 7 on page 20-207)
• Base undercover (see step 8 on page 20-207)
2. Remove the bolt, then remove the second row center
seat lever (A).
Fastener Location
► ; Bolt, 1
3. Release the hooks (C), then remove side frame cover

A and side frame cover B.
3. Disconnect the cables (A) from the second row center

seat lever (B).
4. Install the side frame covers in the reverse order of

removal, and push the hooks into place securely.
Second Row Center Seat Lever Second Row Center Seat Latch
4. If necessary, remove the lock washer (A), and release NOTE: Take care not to tear or damage the seat covers.
the shaft (B), then separate the base lever (C) and the
base lever bracket (D).
• Seat cushion
• Recline cover:
• Center cover:
• Seat-back:
• Base cover, '07 model (see step 7 on page 20-207)
• Base undercover, '07 model (see step 8 on page
5. Install the center seat lever in the reverse order of 20-207)
removal, and replace the lock washer you removed • Left outer riser cover, '07 model (see step 12 on
with new one. page 20-208)
• Right outer and inner riser cover, '07 model (see
• Upper cover, '08-10 models (see step 7 on page
20- 210)
• Lower cover, '07 model (see step 8 on page 20-210)
^ 3 3111
*****
2. Disconnect the latch cable (A). 3. Remove the bolts with a TORX T40 bit, then remove
the latch (A).
'07 model
*07 model
Fastener Locations
*08-10 models
Fastener Locations
Second Row Center Seat Latch Cable Replacement
For Some Models 3. Remove the latch cables A and B.
NOTE: Take care not to scratch the seat or the related -1. Disconnect the latch cables from the lever (C).
parts. -2. Release the latch cables from the riser (D).
-3. Release the latch cables, the inter lock cable (E), and
1. Remove these items: the lock cable (F) from the hooks (G, H).
• Seat cushion
• Left outer riser cover (see step 12 on page 20-208)
• Right outer and inner riser cover (see step 13 on
page 20-208)
2. Disconnect the latch cable (A) fro m the latch (B).
4. Install the latch cables in the reverse order of removal,

• Make sure the latch cables are connected securely.
• Make sure the second row center seat latches and
unlatches properly.
Second Row Center Seat Lock Cable Replacement
NOTE: Take care not to scratch the seat or related parts. 2. Remove the lock cable A and B.
1. Remove these items: -1. Disconnect the lock cables from the lever (C).
• Seat cushion -2. '07 model: Release the lock cable A, B, and the
• Seat belt buckle (see page 24-15) interlock cable (D),from the hooks (E, F).
-3. '08-10 models: Release the lock cable A and B from
the hooks (G).
• Recline cover:
"07 model
• Center cover:
• Seat-back:
• Base cover, '07 model (see step 7 on page 20-207)
• Base undercover, '07 model (see step 8 on page
20-207)
• Left outer riser cover, '07 model (see step 12 on
page 20-208)
• Right outer and inner riser cover, '07 model (see
• Upper cover, '08-10 models (see step 7 on page
20-210)
• Lower cover, '08-10 models (see step 8 on page
20- 210 )
(cont'd)
Second Row Center Seat Lock Second Row Center Seat Interlock
Cable Replacement (cont'd) Cable Replacement
* 08-10 models For Some Models
A
NOTE: Take care not to scratch the seat or related parts.
• Seat cushion
• Left outer riser cover (see step 12 on page 20-208)
• Right outer and inner riser cover (see step 13 on
page 20-208)
2. Remove the interlock cable (A).
-1. Disconnect the interlock cable from the hooks (B).
-2. Release the latch cable A (C), B (D), the interlock
cable, and the lock cable A (E) from the hooks (F).
3. Install the lock cables in the reverse order of removal,

and make sure cables are connected securely.
3. Install the interlock cable in the reverse order of

removal, and make sure it is connected securely.
Third Row Seat Removal/Installation
Special Tools Required 4. Detach the clips, then remove the center lower pivot
• Stopper Plate 82217-SHJ-A01 cover (A).
• KTC Trim Tool Set SOJATP2014*
Fastener Locations
Program; call 888-424-6857 j> : Clip, 2
NOTE:
• Take care not to scratch the interior trim or the body,
or tear the seat covers.
1. Store both third row seats in the floor recess.
2. Detach the clips, and release the center upper pivot
cover (A) from the tabs (B) on the center lower pivot
cover (C), then remove it.
Fastener Locations
[> : Clip, 2
A
3. Raise both third row seats up, and secure them.

Third Row Seat Removal/Installation (cont'd)
5. Release the seat cushion cover clips {A, B) around the 6. Remove the screws, then remove the left center cover
left center cover (C) or the right center cover (D). (A) or the right center cover (B).
Left third row seat Left third row seat

A P> ; Clip, 5 i
B O : Cl p, 1 ► : Screw, 2
I A O n ©
Right third row seat Right third row seat

A > : Clip, 5 i
B [> : Cl p, 1 ► : Screw, 2
§■ T
7. Store the third row seat that you are removing in the
floor recess.
8. Remove the pivot bolt (A) from the center pivot 11. Release the hook (A), then pull back the edge of the
bracket (B). Right third row seat removal is shown; the seat-back mat (B) as needed. Remove the bolts (C, D)
left third row seat is similar. securing the left third row seat or the right third row
seat.
Left third row seat
Fastener Locations
C ^;B o It,2 D ► : Bolt, 2
12 x 1.25 mm
54 N-m
(2.2 kgf-m,
16 Ibfft)
9. Remove the pivot cover (see step 3 on page 20-110).

10. Insert the stopper plate (A) into the slot in the outer
pivot shaft (B). Right third row seat
A CAUTION Fastener Locations

Third Row Seat Removal/Installation (cont'd)
12. Remove the left third row seat (A) or the right third 13. Install the third row seat in the reverse order of
row seat (B). removal, and note these items:
Left third row seat • Ifthe clips are damaged or stress-whitened, replace
them with new ones.
• Push the clips and the hook into place securely.
• Do not remove the stopper plate (A) from the outer
pivot bracket (B) before securing the seat
• After mounting the seat, remove the stopper plate.
Right third row seat

Special Tools Required 4. Pry up the cap (A), and remove the screw, then
KTC Trim Tool Set SQJATP2014* remove the cushion hook (B). Release the hook (C),
• Available through the Honda Tool and Equipment then remove the cushion hook trim (D).
Fastener Location
NOTE;
• Take care not to kink the cables.
1. Remove the third row seat (see page 20-219).
3. Remove the seat-back knob (A).
-1. Pry up the lower clips with a trim tool.
-2. Pull up the lower part of the knob, and release the
upper hook (B) from the frame.
-3. Disconnect the seat-back cable (C).
5. Release the seat cushion cover clips (A, B) around the
Fastener Locations
outer recline cover (C).
Fastener Locations
A > :C Iip ,3 B > :C lip ,1
II A
(cont'd)
Third Row Seat Disassembly/Reassembly (cont'd)
6. Remove the screws, then remove the outer recline 7. Release the bottom hook (A), and unzip the seat-back
cover (A). The left outer recline cover is shown; the cover (B).
right outer recline cover is similar. Left third row seat
Fastener Locations

8. Release the seat cushion cover clips. The left 9. Pull up the seat back-cover (A), and release the hook
seat-back is shown; the right seat-back is similar. strips (B).
Fastener Locations Left third row seat

P>: Clip, 5
B
10. Pinch the tabs on the ends of the head restraint guides 11. Left third row seat: Remove the bolts (A, B) and the
(A), and remove the guides from the seat-back. pivot bushing (C), then separate the seat-back (D) and
the seat cushion (E).
'07 model
Fastener Locations
*08-10 models
A
12. Pass the straps (A) in the seat-back cover through 13. Remove the screws, then remove the grip trim (A)
each slot (B), then remove the seat-back cover/pad (C) from the cushion frame.
from the seat-back frame (D).
Fastener Locations
Left third row seat
14. Pry up the cushion utility hook cap (A), and remove
the screws, then remove the cushion utility hook trim
(B) from the cushion utility hooks (C).
Fastener Locations
15. Detach the clips, then remove the left foot cover (A) or 16. Release the lock washer (A), then remove the seat
the right foot cover (B). cushion rod (B) from the seat foot.
Left third row seat
Fastener Locations
Replace.
Fastener Locations
[> : Clip, 9
17. Detach the clips (A, B, C), and remove the seat 18. Release the hook strips (A) from the cushion frame
cushion bottom cover (D). (B), then loosen the seat cushi on cover (C).
Left seat cushion Left seat cushion
Right seat cushion Right seat cushion
Fastener Locations A A
A > : Clip, 3 B |> : Clip, 7
I r fr
19. Remove the seat cushion cover/pad (A) from the 20. Remove the screw, then remove the plate (A), the
cushion frame (B). spri ng (B), and the collar (C) from the end of the seat
cushion rod (D).
Left seat cushion
Fastener Location
► : Screw, 1
Right seat cushion

21. Remove the li nk unit (A). 22. Release the wire tie (A) fastening the left seat-back
recline cable (B) or the right seat-back recline cable (C)
-1. Remove the bolts securing the link unit.
on the seat cushion frame (D).
-2. Disconnect the cable (B).
-3. Remove the unit while passing each rod (C) through Left third row seat
between the frame pipe (D) and the frame (E).
Fastener Locations 6 x 1.0 mm
D
Third Row Seat Third Row Seat Striker
Disassembly/Reassembly (cont'd) Replacement
23. Right third row seat Remove the bolts, then separate NOTE: Take care not to scratch the interior trim.
the right seat-back frame (A) and the right seat 1. Remove the third row seat striker cover (see step 2 on
cushion frame (B). page 20-122).
Fastener Locations 2. Remover the bolts, then remove the center striker (A)
and both side strikers (B).
Fastener Locations
10 x 1.25 mm
3. Install the strikers in the reverse order of removal, and

move the striker (A) left or right until it is centered in
the seat latch (B).
24. Reassemble the third row seats i n the reverse order of
disassembly, and note these items:
• Make sure the latch cables and the recline cables
are connected securely.
• Replace the lock washer you removed with a new
one.
• Make sure the third row seat latches and unlatches
properly.
• Check the seat-back recline operation.
• To prevent wrinkles when installing the seat-back
cover or the seat cushion cover, make sure the
material is stretched evenly over the pad before
securing the hook and the clips.
• Left third row seat: Replace the pivot bushing
shown in step 11 with a new one.
them with new ones.
*
Third Row Seat Pivot Removal/Installation
Special Tools Required Outer

- Stopper Plate 82217-SHJ-A01
- KTC Trim Tool Set SOJATP2014* 1. Remove the third row seat (see page 20-219).
Program; call 888-424-6857 A C A U TIO N
Be sure a stopper plate (P/N 82217-SHJ-A01) is
NOTE; fully inserted onto the outer pivot shaft before
removing the seat; otherwise, the seat may spring
• Take care not to scratch the interior trim, the body, or
open forcefully.
tear the seat covers.
• Use the appropriate tool from the KTC trim tool set to 2. Remove the rear side trim panel (see page 20-110).
3. Remove the bolts, then remove the seat outer
Center pivot (A).
1. Remove the pivot bolt of the third row seats (see page NOTE: Do not remove the stopper plate (B) from the
20-219). outer pivot (C) until the seat is reinstalled.
2. Remove the bolts, then remove the center pivot (A). Fastener Locations
Fastener Locations
► : Bolt, 5
Third Row Seat Pivot Third Row Seat Pivot
Removal/Installation (cont'd) Disassembly/Reassembly
4. Install the pivot in the reverse order of removal, and Special Tools Required
note these items: KTC Trim Tool Set SOJATP2014*
• Do not remove the stopper plate from the outer • Available through the Honda Tool and Equipment
pivot until the seat is reinstalled. Program; call 888-424-6857
• Ifthe stopper plate has been removed during
disassembly, bolt the pivot base (A) to the body, NOTE:
and make sure the return springs (B) are hooked on • Use the appropriate tool from the KTC trim tool set to
the pivot base plate (C). Rotate the pivot bracket (D), avoid damage when removing components.
and then reinstall the stopper plate (E) on the pivot • Take care not to scratch the cover.
shaft.
Center
1. Remove the seat center pivot (see page 20-233).
2. Remove the screws, then remove the center pivot
cover brackets (A, B).
Fastener Locations
► : Screw, 4
3. Remove the bolt, and separate both pivot bases (A, B), Outer
then remove the spring pin (C). Remove the pivot bolt
(D), the pivot bracket (E), and the bushings (F, G) from NOTE: The right side is shown; the left side is similar.
the pivot base. 1. Remove the seat outer pivot (see page 20-233).
Fastener Location 2. Remove the cap (A) and the screws, then remove the
upper bracket cover (B) and the lower bracket cover
(C).
Fastener Locations
4. Reassemble the pivot in the reverse order of

disassembly, and replace the spring pin and the
bushings with new ones.
Third Row Seat Pivot Third Row Seat Latch Replacement
Disassembly/Reassembly (cont'd)
3. Remover the nut (A), then remover the pivot bracket Special Tools Required
(B), the bushings (C, D, E), the washer (F), and the KTC Trim Tool Set SOJATP2014*
spiral springs (G) from the pivot base (H). Âvailable through the Honda Tool and Equipment
NOTE: There are two spiral springs on the left side,
and there are four spiral springs on the right side.
NOTE:
1. Stand the third row seat upright, and hold it.
2. Remove the left foot cover or the right foot cover (see
3. While holding the seat upright, remover the bolts
securing the latch (A), and disconnect the cable (B) by
releasing the push nut (C), then remove the latch.
Replace. NOTE: Replace the push nut you removed with a new
A one.
12x1.25 mm
37 N-m
(3.8 kgf-m,
27 Ibf-ft)
4. Reassemble the pivot in the reverse order of

disassembly, and replace the bushings with new
ones.
Third Row Seat Cover Replacement
4. Install the latch (A) in the reverse order of removal and Special Tools Requi red
move it left or right until it is centered on the striker KTC Trim Tool Set SOJATP2014*
(B). Âvailable through the Honda Tool and Equipment
8 x 1.25 mm
22 N-m
(2.2 kgf-m. NOTE;
Seat-back Cover
2. Remove the seat-back cover/pad from the seat frame
(see page 20-223).
3. Pull the edge of the seat-back cover (A) back all the
way around, and release the upholstery rings (B) and
Velcro fasteners (C), then remove the cover.
Left third row seat
(cont'd)
Third Row Seat Cover Replacement (cont'd)
4. Install the seat-back cover in the reverse order of Seat Cushion Cover
• To prevent wrinkles when installing the seat-back 1. Remove the third row seat (see page 20-219).
cover, make sure the material is stretched evenly 2. Remove the seat cushion cover/pad from the seat
over the pad before securing the hook and frame (see page 20-223).
upholstery rings.
• Replace all of the upholstery rings (A) fastening the 3. Release the upholstery rings (A) from under the seat
seat-back cover (B) to the pad wires (C) with new cushion (B).
ones using commercially available upholstery ring Left seat cushion
pliers (D).
Right seat cushion
Replace.
4. Pull back the edge of the seat cushion cover (A) all the 5. Install the seat cushion cover in the reverse order of
way around, and release the upholstery rings (B), then removal, and note these items:
remove the cover. • To prevent wrinkles when installing the seat
Left seat cushion cushion cover, make sure the material is stretched
evenly over the pad before securing all the clips.
seat cushion cover (B) to the pad wires (C) with new
pliers (D).
Right seat cushion

Third Row Seat Latch Cable Replacement
Special Tools Required 4. From the back of the seat foot (A), detach the clips,
KTC Trim Tool Set SOJATP2014* then remove the rear cover (B).
Left third row seat
Fastener Locations
NOTE; t > : Clip, 2
• Take care not to kink the cables.
2. Remove these items from the seat frame:
• Seat-back cover/pad (see page 20-223)
• Seat cushion cover/pad (see page 20-223)
3. Reassemble the left seat-back frame or the left seat
cushion frame (see page 20-223).
Fastener Locations
> :C llp ,4
T |
B
5. Disconnect the latch cable from the latch (see step 3

on page 20-236).
6. Release the wire tie (A) fastening the latch cable (B) on 7. Release the wire ties (A) fastening the latch cable (B)
the foot frame (C). on the seat cushion frame (C), then remove the cable.
Left third row seat Left third row seat
8. Install the latch cable in the reverse order of removal,

• Make sure the latch cables are connected securely.
• Make sure the third row seat latches and unlatches
properly.
Third Row Seat-back Recline'Cable Replacement
Special Tools Requi red Right third row seat

KTC Trim Tool Set SOJATP2014* .
Fastener Locations
NOTE:
• Take care not to bend or kink the cables.
• Take care not to scratch the interior trim.
2. Reassemble the left seat-back frame or the left seat
cushion frame (see page 20-223).
3. Remove the screws, then remove the protector (A).
Left third row seat
Fastener Locations
► : Screw, 3
4. Remove the screws, then remove the recline outer
upper cover (A) and the recline inner cover (B) from
both seats.
Fastener Locations
5. Right third row seat: Remove the screw, then remove 6. Left third row seat: Disconnect the left seat-back
the recline inner upper cover (A). recline cable A. Release the wire ties (B) fastening
each cable on the seat-back frame (C).
Fastener Location
► : Screw, 1
Third Row Seat-back Recline Cable Replacement (cont'd)
7. Right third row seat: Disconnect the right seat-back 8. Release the wire tie (A) fastening the left seat-back
recline cable A and the right-seat back recline cable B. recline cable (B) or the right seat-back recline cable (C)
Release the wire ties (C) fastening each cable on the on the seat cushion frame (D), then remove the cable.
seat-back frame (D).
Left third row seat
9. Install the recline cables in the reverse order of

• Make sure each seat-back recline cable is
connected securely.
• Check the seat-back recline operations.
Front Bumper Removal/Installation
NOTE: *08-10 models

Fastener Locations
installing the front bumper.
B > : Clip, 6 C.> : Clip, 2 D > : Clip, 2
• Take care not to scratch the front bumper or the body.
4 t" i*
E► : Screw, 2 F► : Screw, 2
1. Remove the front grille cover:
• '07 model (see page 20-257)
• ’08-10 models (see page 20-257)
2. Remove the bolts (A), and detach the clips (B, C, D),
then remove the screws (E, F) securing the front
bumper (G).
*07 model
Fastener Locations
C
Front Bumper Removal/Installation (cont'd)
3. Pull the front bumper (A) at the wheel arch areas to 5. Remove the front bumper (A). If equipped, disconnect
release it from the hooks (B) on the side spacer (C). the front fog light connectors (B) and the front corner
sensor connectors (C) on both sides. If necessary,
release the hooks (D) (four places), then remove the
front bumper air spoiler (E).
*07 model
4. With the help of an assistant, pull the front bumper to

release it from the hooks (A) on the center upper
beam (B).
A *08-10 models
6. Install the bumper in the reverse order of removal,

• Make sure the front bumper securely engages the
hooks on both corner upper beams and both side
spacers.
them with new ones.
NOTE: NOTE;
• Take care not to scratch the bumper or the body. • Take care not to scratch the bumper or the body.
• Use the appropriate tool from the KTC trim tool set to • Use the appropriate tool from the KTC trim tool set to
avoid damage when removing components. avoid damage when removing components.
• Put on gloves to protect your hands. • Put on gloves to protect your hands.
• When prying with a flat-tip screwdriver, wrap it with • When prying with a flat-tip screwdriver, wrap it with
protective tape to prevent damage. protective tape to prevent damage.
• The left side is shown; the right side is similar.
1. Remove the front bumper (see page 20-245).
2. Release the hooks (A) on the top of the front bumper
lower mesh (B), then remove the front bumper lower 2. Release the hooks (A, B), then remove the front
mesh from the front bumper (C). bumper lid (C) from the front bumper (D).
3. Install the lower mesh in the reverse order of removal,

3. Install the front bumper lid in the reverse order of
Rear Bumper Removal/Installation
Special Tools Requi red *08-10 models

KTC Trim Tool Set 80JATP2014*
Fastener Locations
B► : Bolt, 4 € ► : Screw, 2 D► : Screw, 2
NOTE:
• Have an assistant help you when removing and E |> : Clip, 2
installing the rear bumper.
• Use the appropriate tool from the KTC trim to o l set to 4
• Take care not to scratch the rear bumper or the body.
1. Pry out the caps (A), then remove the bolts (B) and the
screws (C, D), and detach the clips (E) from the
bumper (F).
*07 model
Fastener Locations
2. Pull the rear bumper (A) at the wheel arch areas to

release it from the hooks (B) on the side spacers (C).
(1.0 kgf-m,
7.2 Ibf-ft)
3. With the help of an assistant, pull the rear bumper (A) Special Tools Required
to release it from the hooks (B) on the upper brackets KTC Trim Tool Set SOJATP2014*
(C). Disconnect the rear bumper subharness • Available through the Honda Tool and Equipment
connector (D) (for some models). If necessary, Program; call 888-424-6857
remove the absorber (E).
NOTE:
• Take care not to scratch the rear bumper.
1. Remove the rear bumper (see page 20-248).
2. From inside of the rear bumper (A), release the
double-side adhesive tape (B), and detaGh the hooks
(C, D, E), then remove the rear bumper step (F).
Adhesive tape: Thickness 2.29 mm (0.09 in)
Width 5 mm (0.2 in)
Length 15 mm (0.59 in)
Fastener Locations
4. Install the bumper in the reverse order of removal,
C > : Hook, @ D > : Hook, 6 E > : Hook, 4
and note these item:
• Make sure the rear bumper securely engages the
hooks on both side brackets and both side spacers. ^
them with new ones.
3. Scrape off the remaining double-side adhesive tape

from the rear bumper, then clean the rear bumper
surface with a shop towel dampened in isopropyl
alcohol.
4. If needed, apply a new piece of adhesive tape to the
rear bumper step where you removed the old tape.
5. Fit all the hooks into the holes in the bumper, then
push on the step until the hooks snap into place.
6. Reinstall the rear bumper.
Hood
Hood Adjustment
1. Loosen each bolt slightly.

2. Adjust the hood (A) alignment in this sequence:
• Adjust the hood right and left, as well as forward and rearward, by using the elongated holes on the hood hinges
(B).
• Turn the hood edge cushions (C), as necessary, to make the hood fit flush with the body at the front and side edges.
9.8 N-m
(1.0 kgf-m, 7.2 ibf-ft)
3. Adjust the hood latch (D) to obtain the proper position at the forward edge, and move the hood latch right or left until
the striker (E) is centered in the hood latch.
4. Tighten the bolts to the specified torque.
Hood Insulator Replacement
5. Check that the hood opens properly and locks For Soma Models
securely.
1. Detach the clips with a clip remover, then release the
6. For some models, check that the security system hood insulator (A) from the hooks (B). Take care not to
operates properly with the hood opened and closed. bend the insulator or not to scratch the hood.
7. Apply touch-up paint to the hinge mounting bolts and
Fastener Locations
around the hinges, and let the paint dry.
8. Apply multipurpose grease to the hood latch (A) and
the hood hinge (B) as indicated by the arrows.
2. Install the insulator in the reverse order of removal,

them with new ones.
Hood
Hood Seal and Hood Molding Replacement
1. '07 Canada models: Detach the clips (A, B) with a clip 2. Except '07 Canada models: Detach the clips (A) with a
remover, then remove the hood molding (C), the left clip remover, then remove the hood seal (B). Take
hood seal (D), and the right hood seal (E). Take care care not to scratch the hood.
not to scratch the hood.
Fastener Locations
Fastener Locations A p> ; Clip, 21
3. Install the hood seal and the hood molding in the

reverse order of removal, and note these items:
them with new ones.
Tailgate
Tailgate Adjustment
Special Tools Required

• Available through the Honda Tool and Equipment Program; call 888-424-6857
NOTE:
• Use the appropriate tool from the KTC trim tool set to avoid damage when removing components.
1. With power tailgate: Do the battery terminal disconnection procedure (see page 22-112), then wait at least 3 minutes
before beginning work.
NOTE: Open the tailgate by using the emergency lever while adjusting the tailgate (see page 20-293).
• Support strut from each side (see page 20-254)
• With power tailgate: Power tailgate drive unit (see page 22-649)
3. Slightly loosen each bolt.
4. Adjust the tailgate (A) alignment in the following sequence:
• On the vehicle without power tailgate, pull down the rear area of the headliner (see page 20-116). Take care not to
bend the headliner excessively. Adjust the tailgate hinges (B) right and left, as well as forward and rearward, using
the elongated holes.
• Turn the tailgate edge cushions (C), in or out as necessary, to make the tailgate fit flush with the body at the side
edges.
• Remove the rear trim panel lid (D).
• Adjust the fit between the tailgate and tailgate opening by moving the striker (E).
8 x 1.25 mm
18 N-m (1.8 kgf-m, 13 Ibf-ft)
(cont'd)
20253
Tailgate
Tailgate Adjustment (cont'd) Tailgate Support Strut

Replacement
5. Tighten each bolt to the specified torque with a torque NOTE:
wrench. • Wear eye protection when prying the support strut
6. Check that the tailgate opens properly and locks clip.
securely. • Do not remove the clip from the support strut.
7. Reinstall the support struts securely. protective tape to prevent damage.
8. Apply touch-up paint to the hinge mounting bolts and 1. Have an assistant hold the tailgate in position. Pry up
around the hinges, and let the paint dry. the support strut clip (A) with a flat-tip screwdriver (B)
9. Apply multipurpose grease to the pivot area of the from each end of the support strut (C) at the tailgate
tailgate hinges (A) as indicated by the arrows. and the body, then release the support strut from the
pivot bolts (D).

11. With power tailgate: Do the battery terminal
reconnection procedure (see page 22-112).
2. Set the clips (A) to the original position, then push the
ends of the support strut (B) on to the pivot bolts (C)
until they attach securely.
Tailgate Weatherstrip Replacement
1. With power tailgate: Remove the left tailgate side trim 2. Remove the tailgate weatherstrip (A) by pulling out on
(see page 20-113), and remove the bolts, then release it.
the push arm bracket (A) from the tailgate.
Fastener Locations
► : Bolt, 2
0 "
(2.2 kgf-m, 16 Ibf-ft) 3. Locate the painted alignment mark (B) on the tailgate
weatherstrip. Align the painted mark with the
alignment tab in the center of the tailgate opening,
and install the tailgate weatherstrip all the way
around. Make sure there are no wrinkles in the
weatherstrip.
4. With power tailgate: Reinstall the push arm bracket.
5. Check for water leaks (see step 10 on page 20-30).
Fuel Fill Door
Fuel Fill Door Adjustment
1. Loosen the hinge mounting bolts (A) slightly. 5. Apply multipurpose grease to the location indicated
by the arrow.
6. Apply touch-up paint to the hinge mounting bolts and

around the hinges, and let the paint dry.
2. Adjust the fuel fill door (B) in or out until it's flush with
the body, and up or down as necessary to equalize the
gaps.
3. Tighten the hinge mounting bolts.
4. Check that the fuel fill door opens properly and locks
securely.
Front Grille Cover Replacement
'07 Model '08-10 Models

NOTE: NOTE:
• Take care not to scratch the front grille or the body. • Take care not to scratch the front grille or the body.
1. Remove the front grille cover (A). 1. Detach the clips by carefully pulling up the front grille
cover (A), then remove the cover by releasing the
-1. Remove the clips (B, C). front edge of the cover from the grille (B).
-2. Release the hooks (D) of the cover from the
headlight mounting areas (E) on both sides. Fastener Locations
-3. Detach the hooks (F) of the cover from the front 0 : Clip, 8
grille (G).
Fastener Locations
BO: Clip, 2 CO: Clip, 8
tfh

note these items:
• ifthe clips are damaged or stress-whitened, replace
them with new ones.

note these items:
them with new ones.
Front Grille Replacement
Grille Replacement ('07 Model) Molding Replacement ('07 Model)

NOTE: NOTE: Take care not to scratch the front grille.
• Take care not to scratch the front bumper or the body. 1. Remove the front grille.
protective tape to prevent damage. 2. Release the hooks (A), then remove the front grille
molding (B), the front grille upper moldings (C), and
1. Remove the front grille cover (see page 20-257). the front grille lower molding (D) from the front grille
2. Remove the front grille (A). base (E).
-1. Remove the clips.

-2. Release the hooks (B) on the grille from the front
bumper (C).
-3. Puli the grille away to release it from the groove (D)
in the bumper.
Fastener Locations
> :C lip ,3
<===»
3. Install the moldings in the reverse order of removal,

3. Install the grille in the reverse order of removal, and

note these items:
them with new ones.
Grille and Molding Replacement 3. Remove the screws, then remove the front "H"
(08-10 Models) emblem base (A).
NOTE: Fastener Locations

• Take care not to scratch the front grille or the body. ^ : Screw, 2
2. Remove the screws, then remove the front grille
molding (A).
Fastener Locations
► : Screw, 6
4. Detach the clips, and release the hooks (A), then

remove the grille (B) from the front bumper (C).
NOTE: Release the clips by prying up on the center pin
at the notch (D).
Fastener Locations
> :C lip ,2
5. Install the grille and the molding in the reverse order

of removal.
Cowl Cover Replacement
Speci al Tools Required 4. Release the hooks (A) of the cowl cover (B) by pulling
KTC Trim Tool Set SQJATP2014* the cover forward. From both hood hinge areas,
• Available through the Honda Tool and Equipment release the hooks (C, D) of the hood hinge cover (E)
Program; call 888-424-6857 from the front fender (F) and the windshield side trim
(G).
NOTE:
• Take care not to scratch the cowl cover or the body.
1. Remove the windshield wiper arms (see page 22-334).
2. Remove the clips (A) with a trim tool, from the cowl
cover (B), and detach the clips (C, D) by carefully
pulling the windshield side edge of the cover upward.
Fastener Locations
A > :C iip ,5 C |> : Clip, 1 D > : C I ip , 8 E > :C lip ,1 0
5. Release the windshield washer tube (H) from the

cover, then remove the cover.
3. If necessary, detach the clips (E) with a trim tool, then note these items:
remove the hood rear seal (F). • Ifthe clips are damaged or stress-whitened, replace
them with new ones.
• Make sure the cowl cover does not pinch the
windshield washer tube.
A-Pillar Corner Trim Replacement
Special Tools Required 3. Gently slide the A-pillar corner trim (A) up along the
KTC Trim Tool Set SOJATP2014* A-pillar to release it from the clips.
• Available through the Honda Tool and Equipment Fastener Locations
P>: Clip, 2
NOTE:
• Take care not to scratch the trim or the body.
1. Open the front door.
2. Detach the bottom clip of the A-pillar corner trim (A)
with a trim tool.
Fastener Location
| > : Clip, 1
4. Remove the remaining clips (A) from the body with a

trim tool.
A-Pillar Corner Trim Replacement Windshield Side Trim Replacement
(cont'd)
5. Install the clips (A) (three places) on the A-pillar corner Special Tools Required
trim (B). KTC Trim Tool Set SQJATP2014*
NOTE: If the clips are damaged or stress-whitened, • Available through the Honda Tool and Equipment
replace them with new ones. Program; call 888-424-6857
B NOTE:
• Take care not to damage the windshield.
• Do not use metal tools to remove the windshield side
trim, or you may chip or crack the windshield.
• Take care not to bend the windshield side trim.
Trim Replacement
1. Remove the cowl cover (see page 20-260).
2. Carefully insert a trim tool (A) under the windshield
side trim (B) next to the lower clip (C), then release the
6. Hold the A-pillar trim (A) up, and fit the clips (B) into clip from the windshield (D) by pushing the clip.
the holes in the body, then push on the trim until the
Fastener Location
clips snap into place securely.
C t>: Clip, 1
3. Starting at the bottom, remove the windshield side 4. Remove the clips (A, B) by detaching the hooks (C)
trim (A). from the windshield side trim (D).
-1. Carefully insert a trim tool (B) under the trim next to
the clips (C).
-2. While pulling the clip area of the trim up by hand,
push each of the four small hooks (D) in the
numbered sequence shown to release the clip from
the retainer (E). Do not try to pry up the clip if it is
hard to release from the retainer.
-3. Gradually work your way up to release each of the
clips.
Fastener Locations
5. If the clips are damaged or stress-whitened, replace

them with new ones.
6. Install the clips to the windshield side trim.
Windshield Side Trim Replacement (cont'd)
7. Hold the windshield side trim (A) up, and fit all of the Retainer Replacement
clips (B) into the retainers (C) on the body and the clip
(D) to the windshield, then push on the trim until the 1. Gradually scrape off the adhesive tape (A) under the
clips snap into place. retainers (B) while heating it with a heat gun about
2 1 2 -2 4 8 °F (1 0 0 -1 2 0 °C).
NOTE:
NOTE: ’
• If necessary, adjust the clip positions to align with
the retainers. • Do not overheat the painted surface around the
retainers.
• If the retainers were replaced, do not pull up on the
trim for at least 24 hours while the adhesive cures. • Wrap the exterior plastic parts near the A-pillar with
aluminum foil to protect them from heat.

Roof Rail Replacement
3. Install the retainers (A). Special Tools Required

-1. Peel the adhesive backing away from the retainers.
-2. Line up the retainers with the alignment mark (B) on Âvailable through the Honda Tool and Equipment
the body, and attach the retainers with adhesive Program; call 888-424-6857
tape (C).
-3. Apply two-part epoxy adhesive (D) around the edge For Some Models
of the retainers as shown. NOTE:
• Take care not to scratch the covers, the roof rail, or the
body.
• When using a flat-tip screwdriver, wrap it with
1. Remove the front cover (A) and the rear cover (B) by
sliding them in the direction shown while pushing the
spring plate (C) through the hole in each bracket (D)
with a flat-tip screwdriver.
Front
Rear
B
Roof Rail Replacement (cont'd) Roof Molding Replacement
2. Remove the roof rail (A) and the center bracket (B). Special Tools Required
-1. Pry the notch (C) with a trim tool, then remove the
roof rail bar cap (D). * Available through the Honda Tool and Equipment
-2. Remove the nuts (E) with a TORX T30 bit, from the
front bracket (F) and the rear bracket (G).
-3. Remove the bolts (H) with a TORX T30 bit, then NOTE;
remove the roof rail. • Take care not to scratch the body.
-4. Remove the center cover (I). Remove the nuts (J), • The steel core in the roof molding can not be restored
with a TORX T30 bit. to its original shape once it is bent. Replace the roof
molding if the steel core is bent.
Fastener Locations
E, J O : TORX n u t 6 -H ► : TORX bolt, 2
0 ) 0EM3) 1. With roof rail: Remove the roof rail and center bracket
(see page 20-265).
2. Detach the clips by prying up the roof molding(s) (A)
with the appropriate trim tool.
Fastener Locations
> : Clip
Without roof rail, 4
With roof rail, 2
Without roof rail
3. Install the roof rail in the reverse order of removal,

and make sure the front and rear covers are snapped
tightly into place.
3. install the roof molding(s) in the reverse order of
them with new ones. The front clip should be
installed on the body with its hook toward the front,
and the rear clip should be installed with its hook
toward the rear.
• Make sure the roof molding(s) (A) are installed on
the clips (B) securely.
Door Molding Replacement
NOTE:
• Be careful not to bend the molding.
1. Prepare to release the molding clips from inside the vehicle:
• To remove the front door molding (A), remove the front door panel and the plastic cover (see page 20-8).
• To remove the sliding door molding (B), remove the sliding door panel and the plastic cover (see page 20-21).
Adhesive tape: Thickness 1.2 mm (0.047 i n)
Width 5 mm (0.2 in)
Fastener Locations
D>; Clip, 13
iso*
2. From inside the door, detach the clips while gently prying the molding away from the door, then remove the molding.
3. Install the moldings in the reverse order of removal, and note these items:
• If the clips are damaged or stress-whitened, replace them with new ones.
• Scrape off the remaini ng double-sided adhesive tape from the molding and the door, then clean the molding and
the door surfaces with a shop towel dampened in isopropyl alcohol, and apply new double-sided adhesive tape (C)
to the molding.
• Push the clips and the adhesive tape into place securely.
4. Reinstall the plastic cover and the door panel.
Side Sill Panel Replacement
NOTE:
© Take care not to scratch the body.
• When prying with a flat-tip screwdriver, wrap it with protective tape to prevent damage.
1. Open the front door and sliding door.
2. Remove the side sill panel (A).
-1. With splash guard: Remove the screws (B), then remove the splash guard (C).
-2. Without splash guard: Remove the screws (D).
-3. Remove the clips (E, F), then pull the front inner fender (G) forward.
-4. Slide the side sill panel forward and remove it. The side clips (H) will stay in the body.
-5. Remove the side clips by turning them 45 °.
Fastener Locations
3. Ifthe clips are damaged or stress-whitened, replace them with new ones.
4. Install the side clips on the side sill panel.
5. Hold the panel up, and fit all the side clips into the holes in the body, then push on the panel until the side clips snap
into place.
6. Reinstall the front inner fender and front splash guard (if equipped).
Tailgate Spoiler Trim Replacement
07 Model 3. Gently close the tailgate, and lift up on the tailgate

spoiler trim (A) to detach the clips.
NOTE: Take care not to scratch the tailgate or the body.
1. Open the tailgate. Remove the nuts and the bolts
securing the tailgate spoiler trim.
Fastener Locations
# :N « t,2 f> : Bolt,2
4. Remove the high mount brake light connector

grommet (B) from the tailgate, and disconnect the
high mount brake light connector (C), then remove
the tailgate spoiler trim.
2. Disconnect the rear window washer tube (A). Remove
the access cap (B) from the tailgate, and detach the 5. Install the trim in the reverse order of removal, and
clip. note these items:
• Make sure the high mount brake light connector is
Fastener Location
plugged in properly, and the rear window washer
> : Clip, 1 tube is connected properly.
• Make sure the high mount brake light connector
grommet is installed securely.
them with new ones.
*08-10 Models 4. Gently close the tailgate, and lift up on the tailgate
spoiler trim (A) to detach the clips.
NOTE: Take care not to scratch the tailgate or the body.
1. Open the tailgate. Remove the nuts and the bolts
securing the tailgate spoiler trim.
Fastener Locations
5. Remove the high mount brake light connector

2. Remove the tai lgate upper trim (see page 20-113). grommet (B) from the tailgate, and disconnect the
3. Disconnect the rear window washer tube (A). Remove high mount brake light connector (C), then remove
the nut from the tailgate. the tailgate spoiler trim.
Fastener Location
note these items:
0 : Nut, 1
• Make sure the high mount brake light connector is
plugged in properly, and the rear window washer
tube is connected properly.
• Make sure the high mount brake light connector
grommet is installed securely.
them with new ones.
6 x 1.0 mm
9.8 N-m
(1.0 kgf-m,
7.2 Ibf-ft)
Rear License Trim Replacement
'07 Model 3. Remove the rear license trim (A).
NOTE: -1. Open the tailgate.

-2. From inside the tailgate, detach the clips (B, C).
• Take care not to scratch the tailgate.
-3. Gently close the tailgate.
• Put on gloves to protect your hands. -4. Release the harness grommet (D) from the body,
1. Remove the tailgate lower trim panel (see page then pull out the rear license light subharness (E).
20-113).
Fastener Locations
2. From inside the tailgate, disconnect the rear license
light subharness connector (A), and detach it from the
tailgate. With navigation system: Disconnect the rear
camera unit connector (B), and detach it from the
tailgate. Remove the bolts securing the rear license
molding and the rear license trim.
Fastener Locations
► : Bolt, 6
4. With navigation system: Remove the rear license v08-10 Models
molding (A).
NOTE:
-1. Pull out the molding to detach the clips from the
• Take care not to scratch the tailgate.
rear license trim (B).
9 Put on gloves to protect your hands.
-2. Remove the screws, then remove the rear camera
unit (C) from the rear license trim. 1. Remove the tailgate lower trim panel (see page
-3. Disconnect the rear license light connectors (D). 20-113).
Fastener Locations 2. Remove the bolt securing the rear license trim. With
t> : Clip, 4 ► : Screw, 2 navigation system: Disconnect the rear camera unit
connector (A), and detach it from the tailgate.
0 ccoxd>
Fastener Location
► : Bolt, 1

note these items:
them with new ones.
• Make sure the rear license light subharness
connector is plugged in properly.
• Make sure the harness grommet is installed
securely.
Rear License Trim Replacement Emblem Replacement
(cont'd)
3. Remove the rear license trim (A). '07 Model
-1. Open the tailgate. NOTE: When using dental floss to cut the emblem
-2. From i nside the tailgate, detach the clips (B, C). adhesive, take care not to scratch the body.
-3. Gently close the tailgate.
-4. Release the harness grommet (D) from the body, 1. To remove the front "H" emblem, remove the front
then pull out the rear camera unit subharness (E). grille (see page 20-258),
Fastener Locations
2. Clean the bonding surface with a shop towel
B f> : Clip, 4 C [> ; Clip, 1
3. Apply the emblems where shown.
e H 0

note these items:
them with new ones.
• Make sure the rear camera unit subharness
connector is plugged in properly.
• Make sure the harness grommet i s installed
securely.
'08-10 Models
NOTE: When using dental floss to cut the emblem
adhesive, take care not to scratch the body.
1. To remove the front "H" emblem, remove the front "H"
emblem base (see step 3 on page 20-259).
2. Remove the front "H" emblem from the base.
3. Clean the bonding surface with a shop towel
4. Apply the emblems where shown.
____ SCREWS .
FRONT "H" EMBLEM
(cont'd)
Emblem Replacement (cont'd)
'07 Model
Unit: mm (in) REAR TOURING EMBLEM

i
Adhesive tape; Th ckness 0.8 mm (0.03 in) (For some models) ULEV EMBLEM
Onto th e inside face of
GLASS MARK th e sliding door glass
REAR ODYSSEY EMBLEM
Edge of the tailgate rear TOURING EMBLEM

*08 Model
Unit: mm (in) ULEV EMBLEM

Adhesive tape: Thickness 0.8 mm (0.03 in) Onto the inside face of
GLASS MARK the sliding door glass
REAR TOURING EMBLEM

REAR ODYSSEY EMBLEM (For some models)
Edge of the tailgate
(cont'd)
Emblem Replacement (cont'd)
09 -10 Models
Unit: mm (in) ULEV EMBLEM

Adhesive tape: Thickness 0.8 mm (0.03 in) _ Onto the inside face of
GLASS MARK the sliding door glass
REAR TOURING EMBLEM

REAR ODYSSEY EMBLEM (For some models)
Edge of the tailgate

Front Inner Fender Replacement
'07 Model
NOTE:
• Take care not to scratch the body.
• When prying wi th a flat-tip screwdriver, wrap it with protective tape to prevent damage.
1. Remove the front inner fender (A).
-1. With splash guard: On the back of the wheel arch, remove the screws (B), then remove the splash guard (C).
-2. Without splash guard: On the back of the wheel arch, remove the screws (D).
-3. From under the front bumper (E), remove the bolt (F) securing the front bumper and the front inner fender, and
remove the clips (G) securing the front splash shield (H) and the front inner fender, and remove the clip (I) securi ng
the front inner fender on the body.
-4. From the wheel arch, remove the clips (J, K, L) securing the front inner fender and the front fender fairing (M) on the
body, then pull out the stay clip (N).
-5. Pull out the front inner fender.
Fastener Locations
B , : Screw,3 o r2 F ^ :B o It,1 G ,J |> :C lip I,K > : C lip ,2 L [ > ; Clip,2 or 1
Right, 11
Left, 10
2. Install the inner fender in the reverse order of removal, and note these items:
Front Inner Fender Replacement (cont'd)
08-10 Models
NOTE:
• When prying with a flat-tip screwdriver, wrap it with protective tape to prevent damage.
1. Remove the front inner fender (A).
-1. With splash guard: On the back of the wheel arch, remove the screws (B), then remove the splash guard (C).
-2. Without splash guard: On the back of the wheel arch, remove the screws (D, E).
-3. From under the front bumper (F), remove the clips (G) securing the front splash shield (H) and the front inner
fender, and remove the clip (I) securing the front bumper and the front inner fender, and remove the clip (J)
securing the front inner fender on the body.
-4. From the wheel arch, remove the clips (K, L, M) securing the front inner fender and the front fender fairing (N) on
the body.
-5. Pull out the front inner fender.
Fastener Locations
B, : Screw, 3 E ► : Screw, 1 G, L | > ; Cilfi I, J, K |> : Clip, 3 M [>: Clip, 1 or 2
2. Install the inner fender in the reverse order of removal, and note these items:
Front Splash Shield Replacement
07 Model *08-10 Models

NOTE: NOTE:
• Take care not to scratch the body. • Take care not to scratch the body.
1. From under the front bumper (A), remove the clips 1. From under the front bumper (A), remove the clips
(B, C, D) securing the front bumper, the front bumper (B, C) securing the front bumper, the front bumper air
air spoiler (E), the front splash shield (F), and the front spoiler (D), the front splash shield (E), and the front
inner fender (G) on the front subframe and the body. inner fender (F) on the front subframe and the body.

B P> : Clip, 4 C 0 : Clip, 7 D > :C lip ,6 B |> ; Clip, 12 C [> : Clip, 5
' “
2. Remove the front splash shield, and release the hooks 2. Remove the front splash shield, and release the hooks
(H), then remove the air spoiler from the splash (G), then remove the air spoiler from the splash
shield. shield.
3. Install the splash shield in the reverse order of 3. Install the splash shield in the reverse order of
removal, and note these items: removal, and note these items:
• If the clips are damaged or stress-whitened, replace • Ifthe clips are damaged or stress-whitened, replace
them with new ones. them with new ones.
• Push the clips and the hooks into place securely. • Push the clips and the hooks into place securely.
Front Bulkhead Lower Trim Front Fender Fairing Replacement
Replacement
NOTE: NOTE:
• Take care not to scratch the front bumper or the body. • Take care not to scratch the body.
• When prying with a flat-tip screwdriver, wrap it with 1. Remove the front inner fender, as needed:
• *07 model (see page 20-279)
1. Remove the front bumper (see page 20-245). • '08-10 models (see page 20-280)
2. Remove the clips, then remove the front bulkhead 2. Open the front door.
lower trim (A).
3. From inside the door, release the hooks (A) securing
Fastener Locations the front fender fairing (B).
[> : Clip, 4

note these items:
them with new ones.
‘A
Fuel Pipe Protector Replacement
4. Release the hook (A), then remove the front fender NOTE:
fairing (B). • Take care not to scratch the body.
1. Remove the left rear wheel (see step 2 on page 18-34).
2. Remove the bolts and detach the clips, then remove
the fuel pipe protector (A).
Fastener Locations
► :BoIt,3 P> : Clip, 4
5. Install the fender fairing in the reverse order of

6 m 1.0 m m
9.8 N-m
(1.0 kgf-m, 7.2 Ibf-ft)
3. Install the protector in the reverse order of removal,

them with new ones.
Rear Air Outlet Replacement

NOTE;
1. Remove the rear bumper (see page 20-248).
2. Detach the hooks (A), then remove the rear air outlet
(B).
3. Install the air outlet by pushing on the edges until the

hooks snap into place securely.

Hood Opener Cable Replacement
NOTE:
• Take care not to scratch the body or the related parts.
• Front grille cover
- '08-10 models (see page 20-257)
• Front inner fender, driver's side as needed
- '08-10 models (see page 20-280)
• Kick panel, driver's side (see page 20-101)
2. Disconnect the hood opener cable (A) from the hood latch (B) (see page 20-289).
Fastener Locations
[>: Clip, 6
3. Remove the hood release handle (C) (see page 20-290).

4. Detach the clips with a clip remover, and remove the grommet (D) from the body, then remove the hood opener cable
from the vehicle. Take care not to bend or kink the cable.
5. Install the cable in the reverse order of removal, and note these items:
• Ifthe clips are damaged or stress-whitened, replace them with new ones.
• Push the clips and the grommet into place securely.
Fuel Fill Door Opener Cable Replacement
and procedures (see page 24-26) before doing repairs or service.
• Kick panel, driver's side (see page 20-101)
• Front door sill trim, driver's side (see page 20-101)
• Sliding door sill trim, driver's side (see step 4 on page 20-102)
• B-pillar lower trim, driver's side (see page 20-103)
• Rear side trim panel, left side (see page 20-110)
2. Pull the carpet back as needed, front (see page 20-121), rear (see page 20-122).
3. Disconnect the fuel fill door opener cable (A) from the opener (B) (see page 20-290).
Fastener Locations
C [> : Cushion tape, 2 D |> : Clip, 1 E [> : Clip, 2
4. Remove the cushion tape pieces (C), and release the opener cable from the clip (D). Detach the clips (E) from the body
with a clip remover, then remove the fuel fill door latch (F) from the body by turning it 90 °.
5. Remove the fuel fill door opener cable from the vehicle. Take care not to bend or kink the cable.
(cont'd)
Fuel Fill Door Opener Cable Replacement (cont'd)
6. Install the opener cable (A) in the reverse order of removal, and note these items:
• Ifthe clips are damaged or stress-whitened, replace them with new ones.
• Align the marks (B) on the cable with the clips and the cushion tapes.
• Route the cable beside the floor wire harness (C) as shown.
Hood Latch Replacement
1. Remove the front grille cover: 5. Install the latch in the reverse order of removal, and
• '07 model (see page 20-257) note these items:
• '08-10 models (see page 20-257) • Apply multipurpose grease to the hood latch as
indicated by the arrows.
2. Disconnect the hood latch switch connector (A), then
• Make sure the hood opener cable is connected
detach the connector clip (B).
properly and the hood latch switch connector is
• Make sure the cable actuates the latch before you
close the hood.
• Do the hood latch adjustment (see step 3 on page
20-250).
• Make sure the hood opens properly and locks
securely.
3. Remove the bolts, then remove the hood latch (C)

from the body.
4. Disconnect the hood opener cable (D) from the hood
latch. Take care not to bend or kink the cable.
Hood Release Handle Replacement Fuel Fill Door Opener Replacement
1. Remove the kick panel, driver's side (see page 1. Remove the kick panel, driver's side (see page
20 - 101 ). 20 - 101 ).
2. Remove the bolts, then remove the hood release 2. Remove the bolts, then remove the fuel fill door
handle (A). opener (A).

► : Bolt, 2
6x1.0 mm
---------------- 9.8 N-m
(1.0 kgf-m, 7.2 Ibf-ft)
3. Disconnect the hood opener cable (B) from the hood

release handle. Take care not to kink the cable.
4. Install the hood release handle in the reverse order of 3. Disconnect the fuel fi ll door opener cable (B) from the
removal, and note these items: fuel fill door opener. Take care not to kink the cable.
• Make sure the hood opener cable is connected 4. Install the fuel fill door opener in the reverse order of
properly.
• Make sure the hood opens properly.
• Make sure the fuel fill door opener cable is
connected properly.
• Make sure the fuel fill door opens properly.
Tailgate Handle Replacement
Without Power Tailgate With Power Tailgate

NOTE: Put on gloves to protect your hands. NOTE: Put on gloves to protect your hands.
1. Remove the rear license trim: 1. Remove the rear license trim:
• '07 model (see page 20-272) • '07 model (see page 20-272)
• '08-10 models (see page 20-273) • '08-10 models (see page 20-273)
2. Disconnect the tailgate opener cable (A) from the 2. Disconnect the tailgate handle connector (A), and
tailgate handle (B), and remove the nuts. remove the nuts.
Fastener Locations ^ Fastener Locations

6x1.0 mm
# : Nut, 2
3. From outside of the tailgate, pull out the tailgate 3, From outside of the tailgate, pull out the tailgate
handle, then remove it. handle (B), then remove it.
4. Install the handle in the reverse order of removal, and 4. Install the handle in the reverse order of removal, and
note these items: note these items:
• Make sure the tailgate opener cable is connected • Make sure the tailgate handle connector is plugged
securely. in properly.
• Make sure the tailgate opens properly. • Make sure the tailgate opens properly.
Tailgate Latch Replacement
Without Power Tailgate 4. Disconnect the tailgate latch switch connector (A) and
tailgate actuator connector (B).
NOTE: Put on gloves to protect your hands.
Fastener Locations
1. If the tailgate latch can not be unlocked by using the
keyless entry transmitter or by unlocking the driver's
door lock, remove the maintenance lid (A) from the
tailgate lower trim panel, then unlock the tailgate latch
by turning the pivot of the lever clockwise with a
flat-tip screwdriver.
5. Remove the bolts, and pull out the tailgate latch (C),
then remove it.
2. Remove the tailgate lower trim panel (see page

20-113).
3. Disconnect the tailgate opener cable from the tailgate
handle (see page 20-291).
With Power Tailgate 4. Disconnect the tailgate latch connector (A) and
actuator connector (B).
NOTE: Put on gloves to protect your hands.
Fastener Locations
1. If the tailgate latch does not open by pulling the
C ► : Bolt, 2 D ; Bolt, 1
tailgate handle or using the keyless entry transmitter,
remove the maintenance lid (A) from the tailgate
Co
lower trim panel, then turn the emergency lever (B)
counterclockwise as shown.
9.8 N-m 22 N-m

(1.0 kgf m, (2.2 kgf-m,
7.2 Ibf-ft) 16 Ibf-ft)
5. Remove the bolts (C, D), and pull out the tailgate latch
(E), then remove it.
6. Install the latch in the reverse order of removal, and
note these items:
• Make sure the connectors are plugged in properly.
(see page 22-112).
• If necessary, reset the power tailgate control unit
2. Do the battery terminal disconnection procedure (see (see page 22-611).
page 22-112), and wait at least 3 minutes before • Make sure the tailgate opens properly and locks
beginning work. securely.
NOTE: If you remove the tailgate latch while the
negative battery cable is still connected, the vehicle
goes into the failsafe mode.
20-113).
Subframe Replacement
Front Subframe Torque

After removing the subframe mounting bolts, be sure to replace them with new ones.
10 x 1.25 mm
59 N-m
(§.0 kgf-m, 43 Ibf-ft)
STEERING GEARBOX
8 x 1.25 mm STIFFENER
22 N-m
UPPER INSULATOR
UPPER INSULATOR
FRONT SUBFRAME
LOWER INSULATOR
Bottom view
LOWER INSULATOR
FRONT SUBFRAME
FRONT STIFFENER
12 x 1.25 mm
117 N-m
12 x 1.25 mm (11.9 kgf-m, 86.1 Ibf-ft)
14 x 1.5 mm 74 N-m
103 N-m (7.5 kgf-m, 54 Ibf-ft) 14 x 1.5 mm
(10.5 kgf-m, 75.9 Ibf-ft) 103 N-m (10.5 kgf-m, 75.9 Ibf-ft)
Replace. Replace.
F ro n t S u b fra m e A lig n m e n t
NOTE:
• Before removing the subframe, make a mark where the subframe lines up with the body for reinstallation.
• Loosely install the new subframe mounting bolts, the front stiffener mounting bolts, the rear stiffener mounting bolts,
and the front and the rear stiffeners.
• After mounting the subframe and the brackets loosely, align the reference marks with the body, then tighten the bolts.
Subframe Replacement (cont'd)
Rear Subframe Torque

NOTE;
• Loosely install the new subframe mounting bolts, the front stiffener mounting bolts, the rear stiffener mounting bolts,
and the front and the rear stiffeners.
• After removing the subframe mounting bolts, be sure to replace them with new ones.
(2.2 kgf-m, 103 N-m (10.5 kgf-m, 75.9 lbf-ft)

16 ibf-ft) Replace.
Frame Repair Chart
Top View
Unit: mm (in) a1, a2 For bumper beam 011 (0.43)

0 : Inner diameter b1, b2 For front subframe 015 (0.59) forward
c For engine mount 013 (0.51)
d l, d2 Front damper center 08O (3.15)
e1, e2 For front subframe 015 (0.59) rearward
f1,f2 Locating hole 028 (1.1)
CENTERLINE
VERTICAL LINE
g l,g 2 For fuel tank 013 (0.51) forward n1, n2 For rear subframe 017 (0.67) forward
h i, h2 Locating hole 028.2 (1.11) o1,o2 For rear spring 025 (0.98)
i1,i2 For fuel tank 011 (0.43) middle r1,r2 For rear subframe 017 (0.67) rearward
j1,j2 For trailing arm 0 I 6 (0.63) outrigger side s1,s2 Locating hole 029 (1.14)
k1,k2 For trailing arm 020 (0.79) floor frame side
11,12 Locating hole 029 (1.14)
m l, m2 For fuel tank 013 (0.51) rearward
POINT o l
(cont'd)
Frame Repair Chart (cont'd)
Side View
Unit; mm (in) a1, a2 For bumper beam 011 (0.43)

0 ; Inner diam eter b1,b2 For fro n t subfram e 015 (0.59) forw ard
c For engine mount 013 (0.51)
d1, d2 Front damper center 08O (3.15)
■ e1,e2 For front subframe 015 (0.59) rearward
f 1, f2 Locating hole 028 (1.1)
[ SECTION: A A ]
gi,g 2 For fuel tank 013 {0.51} forward n1, n2 For rear subframe 017 (0.67) forward
h i, h2 Locating hole 028.2 (1.11) o1, ©2 For rear spring 025 (0.98)
11,12 For fuel tank 011 (0.43) middle P For rear damper 012 (0.47) forward
J1.J2 For trailing arm 0 I 6 (0.63) outrigger side q For rear damper 012 (0.47) rearward
k1, k2 For trailing arm 020 (0.79) floor frame side r1,r2 For rear subframe 017 (0.67) rearward
11,12 Locating hole 029 (1.14) s1,s 2 Locating hole 029 (1.14)
m l, m2 For fuel tank 013 (0.51) rearward
CENTER LINE
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) (If HVAC maintenance is required)
these circuits.
Heating, Ventilation, and Air Conditioning
HVAC (Heating, Ventilation, and A/C Condenser Replacement .................... 21-85

Air Conditioning) Receiver/Dryer Desiccant
Special Tools............................................ 21-2 Replacement........................................ 21-88
Refrigerant Recovery...............................21-88
Heating/Air Conditioning System Evacuation................. ................. 21-89
Component Location Index....................21-3 System Charging.................................... 21-90
A/C Service Tips and Precautions..........21-6 Refrigerant Leak Check........................... 21-91
A/C System Inspection............. ............. 21-6 A/C System Noise Check....................... 21-96
A/C Refrigerant Oil Replacement......... 21-7 A/C System T est...................................... 21-98
A/C Line Replacement............................. 21-9
General Troubleshooting Information. 21-10 Climate Control
DTC Troubleshooting Index....................21-13 Component Location Index................... 21-105
Symptom Troubleshooting Index........21-14 A/C Refrigerant Oil Replacement..........21-108
System Description................................. 21—17 A/C Line Replacement............................. 21-109
Circuit Diagram .........................................21-24 General Troubleshooting Information. 21-110
DTC Troubleshooting............................. 21-26 DTC Troubleshooting Index................... 21-120
Recirculation Control Motor Circuit Symptom Troubleshooting Index. . . . . 21-122
Troubleshooting........................... ....... 21-51 System Description.................................21-125
A/C Control Power and Ground Circuit Circuit Diagram........................................ 21-136
Troubleshooting...................................21-52 DTC Troubleshooting............................. 21-138
Radiator and A/C Condenser Fan Low Recirculation Control Motor Circuit
Speed Circuit Troubleshooting..........21-54 Troubleshooting ........................................21-173
A/C Condenser Fan High Speed Circuit Navigation Communication Line Circuit
Troubleshooting..................... ............. 21-58 Troubleshooting...................................21-174
Radiator and A/C Condenser Fan High Climate Control Panel Power and
Speed Circuit Troubleshooting..........21-60 Ground Circuit Troubleshooting........21-176
A/C Compressor Clutch Circuit Rear Control Panel Power and Ground
Troubleshooting...................................21-62 Circuit Troubleshooting..................... 21-177
A/C Pressure Switch Circuit Climate Control Communication Line
Troubleshooting...................................21-64 Circuit Troubleshooting..................... 21-178
Evaporator Temperature Sensor T es t.. 21-66 Front Climate Control Unit Power and
Evaporator Temperature Sensor Ground Circuit Troubleshooting........21-179
Replacement........................................ 21-66 Rear Climate Control Unit Power and
Front Power Transistor Test....................21-67 Ground Circuit Troubleshooting........21-180
Front Air Mix Control Motor T es t..........21-68 A/C Pressure Switch Circuit
Front Air Mix Control Motor Troubleshooting...................................21-181
Replacement...................................... 21-69 In-car Temperature Sensor T est............21-183
Front Mode Control Motor T es t........... 21-69 In-car Temperature Sensor
Front Mode Control Motor Replacement........................................ 21-183
Replacement.........................................21-70 Outside Air Temperature Sensor T est.. 21-184
Recirculation Control Motor T e s t..........21-70 Outside Air Temperature Sensor
Recirculation Control Motor Replacement........................................ 21-184
Replacement.........................................21-71 Sunlight Sensor T est...............................21-185
A/C Control Panel Sunlight Sensor Replacement................21-185
Removal/Installation........................... 21-71 Passenger's Air Mix Control Motor
A/C Control Panel Bulb Replacement.. 21-72 Test..........................................................21-186
Blower Unit Removal/Installation..........21-72 Passenger's Air Mix Control Motor
Blower Unit Component Replacement. 21-73 Replacement........................................ 21-187
Front Blower Motor Replacement........ 21-74 Climate Control Panel
Front Evaporator Core Replacement. . . 21-74 Removal/Installation........................... 21-187
Expansion Valve Replacement..............21-76 Front Climate Control Unit
* Heater Unit/Core Replacement..............21-77 Removal/Installation........................... 21—188
Heater Valve Cable Adjustment............21-79 Dust and Pollen Filter Replacement. . . . 21-188
A/C Compressor Replacement..............21-80 Blower Unit Removal/Installation..........21-189
A/C Compressor Clutch Check.............. 21-82 A/C Compressor Replacement..............21-190
A/C Compressor Clutch Overhaul........ 21-83
A/C Compressor Relief Valve
Replacement.........................................21-85
Rear Air Conditioning
System Description.................................21-194
Rear In-car Temperature Sensor Test.. 21-195
Rear In-car Temperature Sensor
Replacement...................................... .. 21-195
Rear Power Transistor Test................... 21-196
Rear Air Mix Control Motor T est----------21-197
Rear Air Mix Control Motor
Replacement........................................ 21-198
Rear Mode Control Motor Test..............21-199
Rear Mode Control Motor
Replacement........................................ 21-200
Rear Control Panel
Removal/Installation...........................21-201
Rear Climate Control Unit
Removal/Installation...........................21-201
Rear Blower Motor Replacement..........21-202
Rear HVAC Unit Removal/Installation.. 21-202
Rear HVAC Unit Component
Replacement........................................ 21-204
Rear A/C Line Replacement................... 21-205
Rear Heater Hose Replacement............ 21-206
Special Tools

(D 07SAZ-Q01000A Backprobe Set 2
l
SERVICE VALVE
(LOW-PRESSURE SIDE)

Clutch Check, page 21-82
Clutch Overhaul, page 21-83
RADIATOR FAN RELAY

Test, page 22-114
A/C DIODE A
Test, step 36 on page 21-57
A/C CONDENSER FAN RELAY

UNDER-HOOD page 22-114
FUSE/RELAY BOX
A/C COMPRESSOR CLUTCH RELAY
Test, page 22-114
FRONT BLOWER MOTOR RELAY

Test, page 22-114
AUXILIARY A/C DIODE B

UNDER-HOOD (Located under-dash,
RELAY BOX taped to harness)
FAN CONTROL
RELAY
Test, page 22-114
RADIATOR FAN
FAN CONTROL RELAY PCM A/C CONDENSERFAN

Test, page 22-114
HI
EXPANSION VALVE
BLOWER UNIT
Component Replacement, page 21-73
RECIRCULATION CONTROL
MOTOR
Test, page 21-70
HEATER VALVE v
CABLE \
Adjustment, page 21-/9
\
FRONT MODE CONTROL MOTOR

Test, page 21-69
FRONT BLOWER MOTOR

FRONT AIR MIX CONTROL MOTOR
Test, page 21-68
FRONT POWER TRANSISTOR

Test, page 21-67
A/C CONTROL PANEL

Bulb Replacement, page 21-72
EVAPORATOR TEMPERATURE SENSOR

Test, page 21-66
A/C Service Tips and Precautions A/C System Inspection
Before troubleshooting any problem with the air

conditioning system, do the following:
• Air conditioning refrigerant or lubricant vapor can
irritate your eyes, nose, or throat. 1. With the ignition switch in LOCK (0), inspect the A/C
• Be careful when connecting service equipment components, the pressure lines, and the hoses for
• Do not breathe refrigerant or vapor. stains that may indicate a refrigerant or a compressor
oil leak.
ik CAUTION
• Air conditioning refrigerant or lubricant vapor can Checkfor stains.
irritate your eyes, nose, or throat.
• Be careful when connecting service equipment.
• Do not breathe refrigerant or vapor.
The air conditioning system uses HFC-134a (R-134a)

refrigerant and polyalkyleneglycol (PAG) refrigerant oil,
which are not compatible with CFC-12 (R-12) refrigerant
or mineral oil. Do not use R-12 refrigerant or mineral oil
in this system, and do not attempt to use R-12 servicing
equipment; damage to the air conditioning system or
your servicing equipment will result.
Use only service equipment that is U.L.-listed and is 2. Check the A/C condenser for material clogging the
certified to meet the requirements of SAE J2210 to fins or for damage to the fins:
remove R-134a from the air conditioning system. • Carefully clean any material from the A/C
If accidental system discharge occurs, ventilate the work condenser (A) fins with water and detergent. If
area before resuming service. deeper cleaning is required, clean the fins with
Honda Brite cleaner (P/N 08732-0020B).
R-134a service equipment or vehicle air conditioning • Be sure to dry the A/C condenser completely.
systems should not be pressure tested or leak tested • Refer to the Refrigerant Leak Check (see page 21-91)
with compressed air. to confirm leaks if there is visible damage to the A/C
Additional health and safety information may be condenser.
obtained from the refrigerant and lubricant
manufacturers.
• Always disconnect the negative cable from the battery
whenever replacing air conditioning parts.
• Keep moisture and dirt out of the system. When
disconnecting any lines, plug or cap the fittings
immediately; don't remove the caps or plugs until just
before you reconnect each line.
• Before connecting any hose or line, apply a few drops
of refrigerant oil to the O-ring.
• When tightening or loosening a fitting, use a second
wrench to support the matching fitting.
• When discharging the system, use an R-134a
refrigerant reeovery/recycling/charging station; don't
release refrigerant into the atmosphere.
A/C Refrigerant Oil Replacement
3. Inspect the drive belt (see page 4-42). Recommended PAG oil: DENSO ND-OIL 8
4. Make sure no material is blocking the air flow to the P/N 38897-PR7-A01AH: 120 mL (4 fl-oz)
A/C condenser.
Add the recommended refrigerant oil in the amount
5. Check the dust and pollen filter (see page 21-188). listed if you replace any of the following parts.
Replace it if it is clogged. • To avoid contamination, do not return the oil to the
container once dispensed, and never mix it with other
6. Check for kinks or sharp bends in the A/C lines and
refrigerant oils.
hoses, which can greatly reduce system performance.
Replace A/C lines and hoses (see page 21-9) if they are • Immediately after using the oil, reinstall the cap on the
kinks or damaged. container, and seal it to avoid moisture absorption.
• Do not spill the refrigerant oil on the vehicle; it may
7. Start the engine, turn the air conditioning system on, damage the paint; if it gets on the paint, wash it off
and allow it to run for a few minutes and reach stable immediately.
operation.
• Check that the A/C operates at each position of the
*07 model
blower fan switch (except OFF). If the A/C does not A/C condenser.......50 mL (1 2/3 fl-oz)
operate, refer to the Symptom Troubleshooting. Evaporator.............. 40 mL (1 1/3 fl-oz)
Rear evaporator..... 40 mL (1 1/3 fl-oz)
• Check that the A/C compressor clutch (A) is
Line or hose...........10 mL (1/3 fl-oz)
engaged. The pressure plate should be rotating at
Leakage repair.......25 mL (5/6 fl-oz)
the same speed as the pulley. Ifthe pressure plate
A/C compressor...... For A/C compressor
does not engage, refer to the Symptom
replacement, subtract the
Troubleshooting. volume of oil drained from
• Check that the radiator fan (B) and A/C condenser the removed A/C
fan (C) operate when the A/C compressor clutch is compressor from 180 mL (6
engaged. If either fan fails to operate when the A/C fl-oz), and drain the
compressor clutch is engaged, refer to the calculated volume of oil
Symptom Troubleshooting. from the new A/C
compressor: 180 mL (6 fl-oz)
• Check that the engine idle speed is correctly — Volume of removed A/C
maintained when the A/C is switched on and off and compressor = Volume to
the A/C compressor clutch is engaged and drain from new A/C
disengaged. compressor.
NOTE: Even if no oil is

drained from the removed
A/C compressor, don't drain
more than 50 mL (1 2/3 fl-oz)
from the new A/C
compressor.
REMOVED NEW
A/C COMPRESSOR A/C COMPRESSOR
:A
A: 180 mL (6 fl*oz)
(cont'd)
A/C Refrigerant Oil Replacement (cont'd)
*08-10 models
A/C condenser....... 50 mL (1 2/3 fl-oz)
Evaporator......... . 40 mL (1 1/3 fl-oz)
Line or hose........... 10 mL (1/3 fl-oz)
Leakage repair...... . 25 mL (5/6fl-oz)
A/C compressor..... For A/C compressor
replacement, subtract the
volume of oil drained from
the removed A/C
compressor from 125 mL
(4 2/9 fl-oz), and drain the
calculated volume of oil
from the new A/C
compressor: 125 mL
(4 2/9 fl-oz) — Volume of
removed A/C
compressor = Volume to
drain from new A/C
compressor.

more than 50 mL (1 2/3 fl-oz)
from the new A/C
compressor.
REMOVED NEW
HA
© Discharge hose to the A/C compressor (6x 1.0 mm): 9.8 N-m (1.0 kgf-m, 7.2 Ibf-ft)
© Discharge hose to the A/C condenser (6 x 1.0 mm): 9.8 N-m (1.0 kgf-m, 7.2 Ibf-ft)
© Receiver line to the A/C condenser (6x 1.0 mm): 9.8 N-m (1.0 kgf-m, 7.2 ibf-ft)
® Receiver line to the evaporator (6x 1.0 mm): 9.8 N-m (1.0 kgf-m, 7.2 Ibf-ft)
© Suction line to the evaporator (6x 1.0 mm): 9.8 N-m (1.0 kgf-m, 7.2 Ibf-ft)
© Suction line to the suction hose (6x 1.0 mm): 9.8 N-m (1.0 kgf-m, 7.2 Ibf-ft)
© Suction hose to the A/C compressor (6 x 1.0 mm): 9.8 N-m (1.0 kgf-m, 7.2 Ibf-ft)
© A/C compressor to the A/C compressor bracket (8 x 1.25 mm): 22 N-m (2.2 kgf-m, 16 Ibf-ft)
© A/C compressor bracket to the engine block (10 x 1.25 mm): 44 N-m (4.5 kgf-m, 33 Ibf-ft)
Checking for DTCs

The A/C control panel has a self-diagnostic function for heating, ventilation, and air conditioning system. To run the
self-diagnostic function, do the following:
2. Set the FAN CONTROL DIAL to OFF, the TEMPERATURE CONTROL DIAL on Max Cool, the MODE CONTROL DIAL to
select Vent, and the REAR FAN CONTROL DIAL to OFF.
4. Press and hold the RECIRCULATION CONTROL button. While holding the button, press the REAR WINDOW
DEFOGGER button five times within 10 seconds. The recirculation indicator blinks two times, then the self-diagnostic
begins.
• If there is any problem in the system after self-diagnostic is finished, the recirculation indicator will blink Diagnostic
Trouble Code (DTC) 1 through 15. If there are any problems in the evaporator temperature sensor circuit, the A/C
indicator will blink DTC 7 or 8.
• If no DTCs are found, the indicator will not blink.
FAN CONTROL DIAL
RECIRCULATION CONTROL BUTTON REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER BUTTON
Example of DTC Indication Pattern (DTC 13)
0.3 sec 0.3 sec 0.3 sec
Recirculation Recirculation or
indicator A/C indicator -
comes on comes on
Recirculation Recirculation or
indicator A/C indicator
goes off goes off
1.5 sec 0.9 sec 1.5 sec
^ ------- ► ^ .... is^
Self-diagnosis finished
Self-diagnosis begin
Canceling the Self-diagnosti c Function

5. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0) to cancel the self-diagnostic function. After completing repair work, run the
self-diagnostic function again to make sure that there are no other malfunctions.
Max Cool Positi on Function
When the mode control dial is in the MAX A/C position, the A/C control panel will automatically select the recirculation
mode and turn the A/C on. The recirculation switch and A/C switch are disabled and cannot be turned off in this mode. If
the A/C control panel fails to function as described, replace it.
DTC (Recirculation Detection Item Page

Indicator Blinks)
1 An open in the front air mix control motor circuit DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 21-28)
2 A short in the front air mix control motor circuit DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 21-29)
3 A problem in the front air mix control linkage, door, or DTC Troubleshooting
motor (see page 21-30)
4 An open or short in the front mode control motor circuit DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 21-31)
5 A problem in the front mode control linkage, doors, or DTC Troubleshooting
6 A problem in the front blower motor circuit DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 21-35)
9 An open in the rear air mix control motor circuit DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 21-38)
10 A short in the rear air mix control motor circuit DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 21-39)
11 A problem in the rear air mix control linkage, door, or DTC Troubleshooting
12 An open in the rear mode control motor circuit DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 21-42)
12 An open in the rear mode control motor circuit DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 21-43)
13 A short in the rear mode control motor circuit DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 21-43)
14 A problem in the rear mode control linkage, doors, or DTC Troubleshooting
15 A problem in the rear blower motor circuit DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 21-46)
DTC (A/C Indicator Blinks) Detection Item Page

7 An open in the evaporator temperature sensor circuit DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 21-26)
8 A short in the evaporator temperature sensor circuit DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 21-27)
In case of multiple problems, the recirculation indicator will indicate only the DTC with the least number of blinks.
How to Check for DTCs w ith the HDS

1. Make sure the ignition switch is in LOCK (0).
2. Connect the HDS to the data link connector (DLC) (A) located under the driver's side of the dashboard.

4. Make sure the HDS communicates with the vehicle and the climate control unit. If it doesn't, troubleshoot the DLC
circuit (see page 11-269).
5. Select HVAC/CLIMATE CONTROL in the BODY ELECTRICAL menu.
6. Select DTCs in the HVAC/CLIMATE CONTROL menu.
7. Check for DTCs. If any DTCs are indicated, write down the DTCs, then go to the indicated DTC troubleshooting. If no
DTCs are indicated, refer to symptom troubleshooting.
NOTE:
• After troubleshooting, clear the DTCs with the HDS.
• For specific operations, refer to the user's manual that came with the HDS.
Checking the DTCs by HDS

DTC Detection Item or Symptom ECU DTC type page
B1200 Communication bus line error A/C control Loss of DTC Troubleshooting
panel communication (see page 22-170)
B1202 A/C control panel internal error A/C control Internal error DTC Troubleshooting
panel (see page 21-49)
B1205 A/C control panel lost communication A/C control Loss of DTC Troubleshooting
with gauge control module (VSP/NE panel communication (see page 21-50)
message)
with gauge control module panel communication (see page 21-50)
(ENGTEMP message)
with gauge control module (ILLUMI panel communication (see page 21-50)
message)
B1221 An open in the rear mode control motor A/C control Signal error DTC Troubleshooting
circuit panel (see page 21-42)
B1223 A problem in the rear blower motor A/C control Signal error DTC Troubleshooting
B1231 An open in the evaporator temperature A/C control Signal error DTC Troubleshooting
sensor circuit panel (see page 21-26)
B1232 A short in the evaporator temperature A/C control Signal error DTC Troubleshooting
sensor circuit panel (see page 21-27)
B1233 An open in the front air mix control A/C control Signal error DTC Troubleshooting
motor circuit panel (see page 21-28)
B1234 A short in the front air mix control motor A/C control Signal error DTC Troubleshooting
B1235 A problem in the front air mix control A/C control Signal error DTC Troubleshooting
linkage, door, or motor panel (see page 21-30)
B1239 An open or short in the front mode A/C control Signal error DTC Troubleshooting
control motor circuit panel (see page 21-31)
B1240 A problem in the front mode control A/C control Signal error DTC Troubleshooting
linkage, doors, or motor panel (see page 21-33)
B1241 A problem in the front blower motor A/C control Signal error DTC Troubleshooting
B1244 An open in the rear air mix control A/C control Signal error DTC Troubleshooting
motor circuit panel (see page 21-38)
B1245 A short in the rear air mix control motor A/C control Signal error DTC Troubleshooting
B1246 A problem in the rear air mix control A/C control Signal error DTC Troubleshooting
linkage, door, or motor panel (see page 21-40)
B1247 An open or short in the rear mode A/C control Signal error DTC Troubleshooting
control motor circuit panel (see page 21-43)
B1248 A problem in the rear mode control A/C control Signal error DTC Troubleshooting
linkage, doors, or motor panel (see page 21-45)
Symptom Diagnostic procedure Also check for

The front blower Do the A/C control power and ground circuit • HVAC DTCs (see page 21-10)
and heater troubleshooting (see page 21-52) • Blown fuse No.30 (10 A) in the driver's
controls and the Probable cause: A/C control panel malfunction under-dash fuse/relay box
A/C system do • Poor ground at G504 (see page 22-49)
not work • Poor or loose connections at the terminals
The A/C Probable cause: A/C pressure switch circuit • HVAC DTCs (see page 21-10)
compressor malfunction » Powertrain DTCs (see page 11-3)
clutch and the Do the A/C signal circuit troubleshooting (see • Poor or loose connections at the terminals
A/C condenser/ page 11-377)
radiator fans are
inoperative, but NOTE: The A/C pressure switch can
the blower and malfunction without setting a DTC
heater controls
work
The A/C Probable cause: No power to the A/C • HVAC DTCs (see page 21-10)
compressor compressor clutch • Blown fuse No.12 (7.5 A) in the under-hood
clutch does not Do the A/C compressor clutch circuit fuse/relay box
engage, but the troubleshooting (see page 21-62) • A/C system pressure is normal (see page
A/C condenser/ 21-98)
radiator fans • Poor or loose connections at the terminals
operate, and the
blower and
heater controls
work
The A/C Probable cause: Condenser/radiator fan low • HVAC DTCs (see page 21-10)
condenser fan speed circuit malfunction • Powertrain DTCs (see page 11-3)
and/or the Do the radiator and A/C condenser fan low • Blown fuse No.9 (30 A) in the under-hood
radiator fan do speed circuit troubleshooting (see page 21-54) fuse/relay box
not run with the • Poor ground at G301 (see page 22-33)
A/C on • Poor or loose connections at the terminals
The condenser/ Probable cause: Malfunction in the fan(s) high • HVAC DTCs (see page 21-10)
radiator fans do speed circuit • Powertrain DTCs (see page 11-3)
not run at high Do the following troubleshooting as needed: e Blown fuse No.11 (30 A) in the under-hood
speed, but do • A/C condenser fan high speed circuit fuse/relay box
run at low speed troubleshooting (see page 21-58) • Poor ground at G201 (see page 22-33)
• Radiator fan high speed circuit • Poor or loose connections at the terminals
troubleshooting (see page 10-20)
The blower fan Probable cause: Engine coolant temperature • HVAC DTCs (see page 21-10)
runs slower than (ECT) circuit malfunction • Powertrain DTCs (see page 11-3)
expected in cold Troubleshoot the ECT sensor circuit: • Blower motor operation
weather (when • ECT sensor 2 circuit low voltage (see page
in AUTO mode) 11-231)
• ECT sensor 2 circuit high voltage (see page
11-233)
The A/C Probable cause: The A/C system is very low on • HVAC DTCs (see page 21-10)
compressor refrigerant, indicating a possible leak • If there is no leak and the refrigerant level is
clutch cycles Do the refrigerant leak check (see page 21-91) normal, do the A/C compressor clutch
rapidly on and and repair any leaks. Replace the receiver/dryer circuit troubleshooting (see page 21-62),
off (see page 21-88), then recharge the system to and look for an intermittent problem.
specifications (see page 21-90)
Warm air comes Probable cause: The A/C system is overcharged • Incorrect tension or abnormal wear on the
out of the vents, (too much refrigerant), or the A/C condenser is drive belt. Replace the belt and/or the belt
and the high malfunctioning tensioner as needed.
pressure liquid Recover A/C refrigerant (see page 21-88), then » Proper operation of the A/C
line is very hot check the A/C condenser for restrictions or poor condenser/radiator fans. Repair as needed.
airflow. Repair as needed. Recharge the system 9 Signs of an overheated engine. Repair as
to specifications (see page 21-90) needed.
DO
Warm air comes Probable cause: The A/C system is low on • HVAC DTCs (see page 21-10)
out of the vents. refrigerant, indicating a possible leak • Add refrigerant oil depending on the part
The suction line Do the refrigerant leak check (see page 21-91) you replaced (see page 21-7)
is cool to warm, and repair any leaks. Recharge the system to
and the specifications (see page 21-90)
discharge line is
warm to hot
Warm air comes Probable cause: Excessive air and/or moisture • HVAC DTCs (see page 21-10)
out of the vents. in the system, indicating a possible leaks. • Check the amount of refrigerant oil in the
The suction line Replace the receiver/ dryer (see page 21-88). system. Adjust the oil level as needed.
is cool to warm, Do the refrigerant leak check (see page 21-91)
the discharge and repair any leaks. Recharge the system to
line is warm to specifications (see page 21-90)
hot, and there is
no frost on the
expansion valve
Warm air comes Probable cause: A restriction in the HVAC DTCs (see page 21-10)
out of the vents. high-pressure side of the system
The liquid line or Recover A/C refrigerant (see page 21-88), then
the condenser check the liquid line, the receiver/dryer, and the
outlet is A/C condenser for restrictions. Repair as
abnormally cool, needed. Recharge the system to specifications
or there is frost (see page 21-90)
or condensation
on the
receiver/dryer
There is heavy Probable cause: A restriction in the HVAC DTCs (see page 21-10)
frost or low-pressure side of the system
condensation on Recover A/C refrigerant (see page 21-88), then
the expansion check the suction line and the expansion valve
valve, and frost for restrictions. Repair as needed. Recharge the
on the suction system to specifications (see page 21-90)
line
Warm air comes Probable cause: The expansion valve is stuck • HVAC DTCs (see page 21-10)
out of the vents, closed • Check the old expansion valve for
and there is frost Replace the expansion valve (see page 21-76) contamination. If contaminants are found,
on the expansion replace the A/C system component that
valve caused the contamination.
The temperature Probable cause: The expansion valve is stuck • HVAC DTCs (see page 21-10)
of the liquid line open • Check the old expansion valve for
is the same on Replace the expansion valve (see page 21-76) contamination. If contaminants are found,
both sides of the replace the A/C system component that
expansion valve, caused the contamination.
and the
evaporator coil
or suction line
has heavy
condensation
Warm air comes Probable cause: A/C compressor failure • HVAC DTCs (see page 21-10)
out of the vents, Do the A/C system test (see page 21-98), and • Add refrigerant oil depending on the part
but A/C correct any problems. If necessary, replace the you replaced (see page 21-7)
command is A/C compressor (see page 21-80)
normal (A/C
switch and
clutch are on) .. ............. ................ .
(cont'd)

Driver's and Probable causes: The recirculation control door • HVAC DTCs (see page 21-10)
passenger's side or the air mix door is malfunctioning • Poor or loose connections at the terminals
vent Do the following troubleshooting:
temperatures • Recirculation control motor circuit
vary by more troubleshooting (see page 21-71)
than 20 °F(11 °C) • Front air mix control motor test (see page
21-68)
HDS does not Troubleshoot the DLC circuit (see page 11 -269)
communicate
with the climate
control unit or
the vehicle
Insufficient 1. Check the coolant level (see page 10-6) • HVAC DTCs (see page 21-10)
heating 2. Check the radiator cap (see page 10-3) • Damaged cylinder head gasket
3. Check the coolant temperature during
normal operation
4. Check the operation of the heater valve (see
page 21-79)
5. Check the heater core inlet hose
temperature:
• If it is COLD, check for restrictions in the
hose, a damaged or leaking thermostat, or
a damaged or leaking water pump
• If it is HOT, check for restrictions in the
heater core. Back flush or replace the
heater core
6. Do the front air mix control motor test (see
page 21-68)
7. Check the blower motor for obstructions
8. Check for air leaks around the ducts and
vents
System Description
The air conditioning (A/C) system removes heat from the passenger compartment by transferring heat from the ambient
air to the evaporator. The A/C refrigerant expands in the evaporator, and the evaporator becomes very cold and absorbs
the heat from the ambient air. The blower fan pushes air across the evaporator where the heat is absorbed, and then it
blows the cool air into the passenger compartment
EXPANSION VALVE
(Meters the required amount of
DESICCANT
(Traps debris, and ' ____ . 3 ! LOW PRESSURE VAPOR
removes moisture)
This vehicle uses HFC-134a (FM34a) refrigerant, which does not contain chlorofluorocarbons. Pay attention to the
following service items:
• Do not mix refrigerants CFC-12 (R-12) and HFC-134a (R-134a). They are not compatible.
• Use only the recommended polyalkyleneglycol (PAG) refrigerant oil (DENSO ND-OIL8) designed for the R-134a A/C
compressor. Intermixing the recommended (PAG) refrigerant oil with any other refrigerant oil will result in A/C
compressor failure.
• All A/C system parts (A/C compressor, discharge line, suction line, evaporator, A/C condenser, receiver/dryer,
expansion valve, O-rings for joints) are designed for refrigerant R-134a. Do not exchange with R-12 parts.
• Use a halogen gas leak detector designed for refrigerant R-134a.
• R-12 and R-134a refrigerant servicing equipment are not interchangeable. Use only a recovery/recycling/charging
station that is U.L.-listed and is certified to meet the requirements of SAE J2210 to service the R-134a air conditioning
systems.
• Always recover refrigerant R-134a with an approved recovery/recycling/charging station before disconnecting any
A/C fitting.
(cont'd)
A /C Pressure S w itch
The A/C pressure switch consists of a high-low pressure switch (A/C pressure switch A) and a middle pressure switch
(A/C pressure switch B).
• High-low pressure switch
Ifthe refrigerant pressure becomes too high (due to blockage or lack of airflow at the condenser), or too low (due to
leakage), the A/C pressure switch stops the A/C request signal to the PCM and the A/C compressor stops operating.
• Middle pressure switch
Ifthe refrigerant pressure goes above 1,520 kPa (15.5 kgf/cm2, 221 psi), the A/C pressure switch closes to signal the
PCM to change the speed of the A/C condenser fan and radiator fan to high. When the refrigerant pressure drops
below 930 kPa (9.5 kgf/cm2, 135 psi), the A/C pressure switch opens to signal the PCM to change the speed of the A/C
condenser fan and radiator fan to low.
A/C Pressure Switch Operation
A/C System Pressure Hi-Low Medium System Operation
Pressure Pressure
Switch Switch
Abnormally low pressure: OPEN OPEN The PCM disengages the A/C compressor
Below 196 kPa (2.0 kgf/cm2, 28 psi) clutch. Radiator and A/C condenser fan
control is based on engine coolant
temperature
Normal operating pressure: CLOSED OPEN The A/C compressor clutch cycles. The
• Above 225 kPa (2.3 kgf/cm2, 33 psi) radiator and A/C condenser fans operate at
• Below 930 kPa (9.5 kgf/cm2, 213 psi) low speed.
High operating pressure: CLOSED CLOSED The A/C compressor clutch cycles. The
• Above 1,520 kPa (15.5 kgf/cm2, 221 psi) radiator and A/C condenser fans operate at
• Below 2,550 kPa (26.0 kgf/cm2, 370 psi) high speed.
Abnormally high pressure: OPEN CLOSED The PCM disengages the A/C compressor
More than 3,140 kPa (32 kgf/cm2, 455 psi) clutch. Radiator and A/C condenser fan
temperature
NOTE: When the A/C system pressure is between the listed ranges, the pressure switches are in a transition state. The
switch behavior depends upon whether the pressure is rising or falling.
i d
Heating/Air Conditioning Door Positions
I HOT COOL
<c=^
DEFROSTER
DOOR
(HEAT/VENT)
CHEAT)
(cont'd)
HOT COOL
* 1 ?
(HEAT/DEF)
IT T
(DEF)
A/C Control Panel Inputs and Outputs
A/C CONTROL PANEL CONNECTOR A (22P)
.5 EL
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
11 12 13 14 15 16 X 17 18 19 20 21 22
Cavity Wire Terminal Description Signal

color name
1 BLK GND Ground for A/C control panel Less than 0.5 V at all times
(G504)
2 RED/BLK ILLUMI + Power source for illumination With combination light switch ON: battery
voltage
3 WHT/GRN S-COM Sensor ground Less than 0.5 V at all times
4 BLU ACS Outputs A/C on/off signal With ignition switch ON (II), A/C pressure
switch ON, and A/C compressor clutch ON:
less than 0.5 V
With ignition switch ON (II), A/C pressure
switch ON, and A/C compressor clutch
OFF: battery voltage
5 GRN/WHT FRS Drives recirculation control With ignition switch ON (II) and
motor FRESH side recirculation control motor change to the
RECIRCU position: connected to
ground at several seconds
6 LT REC Drives recirculation control With ignition switch ON (II) and

GRN/RED motor RECIRCULATE side recirculation control motor change to the
FRESH position: connected to
7 PNK/BLK AMD-P Outputs front air mix control With ignition switch ON (II): about 0.5-4.5 V
motor (depending on front air mix control motor
potentiometer signal position)
8 BLU/RED BLW-V Feedback signal of front power With ignition switch ON (II): about 0 V-
transistor drain voltage battery voltage (depending on front blower
motor speed)
9 BLU/YEL BLW-G Outputs front power transistor With ignition switch ON (II) and fan control
gate voltage dial OFF: less than 0.5 V
With ignition switch ON (II) and fan control
dial ON:about 4.0 V-battery voltage
(depending on front blower motor control)
10 LT BLU B-CAN B-CAN communication signal With ignition switch ON (II): pulses
(cont'd)

Cavity W ire Terminal Description Signal
color name
11 BLK/YEL IG2 Power source for control panel With ignition switch ON (II): battery voltage
(IG2)
12 RED ILLUMt - Illumination control With ignition switch ON (II) and parking
light ON: changed voltage (depending on
dash light brightness controller)
13 GRY S5V Provides motor reference With ignition switch ON (II): about 5.0V
voltage
14 BRN TEVA Detects evaporator With ignition switch ON (II): about 1.0-4.0 V
temperature sensor signal (depending on evaporator temperature)
15 YEL/GRN MODE4 Inputs front mode control With ignition switch ON (II): less than 0.5 V
motor signal or about 5.0 V (depending on front mode
control motor position)
16 WHT/BLU MODE3 Inputs front mode control With ignition switch ON (II): less than 0.5 V
17 RED/BLU MODE2 Inputs front mode control With ignition switch ON (II): less than 0.5 V
18 RED/YEL MODE1 Inputs front mode control With ignition switch ON (II): less than 0.5 V
19 YEL/RED M-VENT Outputs front mode control With ignition switch ON (II) and front mode
motor VENT side control motor change to the DEF position:
less than 0.5 V at several seconds
20 YEL/BLU M-DEF Outputs front mode control With ignition switch ON (II) and front mode
motor DEF side control motor change to the VENT position:
less than 0.5 V at several
seconds
21 GRN/BLK M-COOL Drives front air mix control With ignition switch ON (II) and front air
motor COOL side mix control motor change to the max HOT
position: less than 0.5 V at several seconds
22 PNK/BLU M-HOT Drives front air mix control With ignition switch ON (II) and front air
motor HOT side mix control motor change to the max
COOL position: less than 0.5 V at several
seconds
A/C CONTROL PANEL CONNECTOR B (14P)
1 2 3 L ? 4 / /
/ / / 10 X 11 12 13 14

color name
1 BLU/YEL BLW-G Outputs rear power transistor With ignition switch ON (II) and fan control
gate voltage dial OFF: less than 0.5 V
dial ON:about 4.0 V-battery voltage
(depending on rear blower motor control)
2 BLU/RED BLW-V Feedback signal of rear power With ignition switch ON (II): about 0 V-
transistor drain voltage battery voltage (depending on rear blower
motor speed)
3 PNK/BLK AMD-P Outputs rear air mix control With ignition switch ON (II): about 0.5-4.5 V
motor (depending on rear air mix control motor
4 GRN BUS Communication signal With ignition switch ON (II): pulses

DATA between A/C control panel and
rear A/C control panel
10 RED/YEL M-PT Outputs rear mode control With ignition switch ON (II): about 0.5-4.5 V
motor (depending on rear mode control motor
11 PNK/BLU M-HOT Rear air mix control motor HOT With ignition switch ON (II) and rear air mix
side control motor change to the max COOL
12 GRN/BLK M-COOL Rear air mix control motor With ignition switch ON (II) and rear air mix
COOL side control motor change to the max HOT
13 YEL/BLU M-DEF Outputs rear mode control With ignition switch ON (II) and rear mode
14 YEL/RED M-VENT Outputs rear mode control With ignition switch ON (II) and rear mode
Circuit Diagram
UNDER-HOOD FUSE/RELAY BOX DRIVER'S UNDER-DASH

FUSE/RELAY BOX
RADIATOR
f
FAN
MOTOR
BLK
GRN/YEL -
E H
DTC Troubleshooting
DTC B1231 or DTC indicator 7: An Open in the 8. Check for continuity between A/C control panel
connector A (22P) terminal No. 3 and evaporator
Evaporator Temperature Sensor Circuit
temperature sensor 2P connector terminal No. 2.
1. Clear the DTC by turning the ignition switch to A/C CONTROL PANEL CONNECTOR A (22P)
LOCK (0), and then turn to ON (II). Wire side of female terminals
2. Operate the A/C control system in several modes.
3. Check for DTCs using the HDS (see page 21-12) or
00
CM!
1 3 4 5 x 6 7 9 10
X 17 18 19 20 21
CM
CM
11 12 13 14 15 16
Is DTC B1231 or 7 Indicated?
YES-Go to step 4.
NO-lntermittent failure, check for loose wires or poor WHT/GRN
connections on the evaporator temperature sensor
circuit®
EVAPORATOR TEMPERATURE SENSOR 2P CONNECTOR
4. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). Wire side of female terminals
5. Remove the evaporator temperature sensor (see
page 21-66) and test it (see page 21-66).
YES-Check for loose wire or poor connections at A/C
Does the evaporator temperature sensor test OK?
control panel connector A (22P) and at the evaporator
YES-Go to step 6. temperature sensor 2P connector. If the connections
are good, substitute a known-good A/C control panel,
NO-Replace the evaporator temperature sensor.B and recheck. If the symptom/indication goes away,
6. Disconnect A/C control panel connector A (22P). replace the original A/C control panel (see page
21-7D.B
7. Check for continuity between A/C control panel
connector A (22P) terminal No. 14 and evaporator NO-Repair an open in the wire between the A/C
temperature sensor 2P connector terminal No. 1. control panel and the evaporator temperature
sensor.B -
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
CM
o
CM
CM
11 12 13 14 15 16 X 17 18 19 21

YES-Go to step 8.
NO-Repair an open in the wire between the A/C
control panel and the evaporator temperature
sensor.B
BB
DTC B1232 or DTC indicator 8: A Short in the 8. Check for continuity between A/C control panel
connector A (22P) terminals No. 3 and No. 14.
Evaporator Temperature Sensor Circuit
1. Clear the DTC by turning the ignition switch to A/C CONTROL PANEL CONNECTOR A (22P)
LOCK (0), and then turn to ON (II).
3. Check for DTCs using the HDS (see page 21-12) or WHT/GRN
self-diagnostic function (see page 21-10). 1 2 3 4 5 > < 6 7 8 9 10
11 12 13 14 15 16 X
17 18 19 21 22
CM
o
Is DTC B1232 or 8 indicated?
YES-Go to step 4. BRN
NO-lntermittent failu re.!

5. Remove the evaporator temperature sensor (see Is there continuity?
YES-Repair a short in the wires between the A/C
Does the evaporator temperature sensor test OK? control panel and the evaporator temperature
YES-Go to step 6. sensor.B
NO-Replace the evaporator temperature sensor.B NO-Substitute a known-good A/C control panel, and
recheck. If the symptom/indication goes away,
6. Disconnect A/C control panel connector A (22P). replace the original A/C control panel (see page
21-71).B
connector A (22P) terminal No. 14 and body ground.
SHE
1 2 3 4 5 x 6 7 8 9 10
11 12 13 14 15 16 X 17 18 19 21 22
CM
o
BRN
between the A/C control panel and the evaporator
temperature sensor.B
NO-Go to step 8.
DTC B1233 or DTC indicator 1: An Open in the 8. Check for continuity between the following terminals
of A/C control panel connector A (22P) and the front
Front A ir M ix Control M otor Circuit
air mix control motor 7P connector.
1. Clear the DTC by turning the ignition switch to 22P: 7P;
LOCK (0), and then turn to ON (II). No. 3 No. 5
2. Operate the A/C control system in several modes. No. 7 No. 3
No. 13 No. 7
A /C C O N T R O L P A N E L C O N N E C T O R A (2 2 P )
self-diagnostic function (see page 21-10). Wire side of female terminals
YES-Go to step 4.
1 2 3 4 5 x 6 7 8 9 10
NO-lntermittent failure, check for loose wires or poor
connections on the front air mix control motor
11 12 13 14 15 16
JGRY
X 17 18 19 20 21 22
circuit.!
PNK/BLK
5. Test the front air mix control motor (see page 21-68). C i
1 2 3 / 5 /
Is the front air mix control motor OK?
W HT/GRN GRY
YES-Go to step 6.
NO-Replace the front air mix control motor (see page FRONT AIR MIX CONTROL MOTOR 7P CONNECTOR
21-69).! Wire side of female terminals
6. Disconnect the front air mix control motor 7P Is there continuity?

connector.
7. Disconnect A/C control panel connector A (22P). control panel connector A (22P) and at the front air
mix control motor 7P connector. Ifthe connections
are good, substitute a known-good A/C control panel
and recheck. If the symptom/indication goes away,
replace the original A/C control p an el.!
NO-Repair an open in the wire(s) between the A/C
control panel and the front air mix control m o to r.!
DTC B1234 or DTC indicator 2: A Short in the 9. Checkfor continuity between terminals of A/C control
panel connector A (22P) as follows.
Front Air Mix Control Motor Circuit
1. Clear the DTC by turning the ignition switch to Terminal To terminals
LOCK (0), and then turn to ON (II). A3 A7, A13
A7 A13
2. Operate the A/C control system in several modes. Is there continuity between any of the terminals?
3. Check for DTCs using the HDS (see page 21-12) or YES-Repair the short in the wires.H
s^lf-diagnostic function (see page 21-10).
NO-Go to step 10.
10. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II), and measure the
YES-Go to step 4. same terminals for voltage to body ground.
NO-lntermittent failure.® A/C CONTROL PANEL CONNECTOR A (22P)
WHT/GRN PNK/BLK
5. Test the front air mix control motor (see page 21-68).
Is the front air mix control motor OK?
YES-Go to step 6.
NO-Replace the front air mix control motor (see page
21-69).IB
6. Disconnect the front air mix control motor 7P
connector.
7. Disconnect A/C control panel connector A (22P). Wire side of female terminals
8. Check for continuity between body ground and A/C

control panel connector A (22P) terminals No. 3,7, Is there any voltage?
and 13 individually.
YES-Repair a short to power in the wire(s) between
A /C C O N T R O L P A N E L C O N N E C T O R A (22P ) the A/C control panel and the front air mix control
motor. This short may also damage the A/C control
W H T /G R N P N K /B L K panel. Repair the short to power before replacing the
A/C control p an e l.!
NO-Substitute a known-good A/C control panel, and
replace the original A/C control panel (see page
21-71 ) . ■ -
YES-Repair a short to body ground in the wire(s)
between the A/C control panel and the front air mix
control m o to r.il
NO-Go to step 9.
DTC B1-235 or DTC indicator 3: A Problem in 8. Check for continuity between the following terminals
of A/C control panel connector A (22P) and the front
the Front Air Mix Control Linkage, Door, or
air mix control motor 7P connector.
Motor
22P: 7P;
1. Clear the DTC by turning the ignition switch to No. 21 No. 1
2. Operate the A/C control system in several modes. A /C C O N T R O L P A N E L C O N N E C T O R A (2 2 P )
Is DTC B1235 or 3 indicated? 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
X
CM
o
YES-Go to step 4. 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 21 22
G R N /B L K PNK/
NO-lntermittent failu re.! BLU

G R N /B L K
5. Test the front air mix control motor (see page 21-68).
1
Is the front air mix control motor OK? P N K /B L U
YES-Go to step 6.
NO-Replace the front air mix control motor (see page F R O N T A IR M IX C O N T R O L M O T O R 7 P C O N N E C T O R
21-69), or repair the front air mix control linkage or
d o o r.!
6. Disconnect the front air mix control motor 7P
YES-Go to step 9.
connector.
7. Disconnect A/C control panel connector A (22P).
control panel and the front air mix control m o tor.!
n
9. Check for continuity between body ground and A/C DTC B1239 or DTC indicator 4: An Open or
control panel connector A (22P) terminals No. 21 and
Short in the Front Mode Control Motor Circuit
No. 22 individually.
1. Clear the DTC by turning the ignition switch to
YES-Go to step 4.
connections on the front mode control motor
circuit.!
Wire side of female terminals 4. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
5. Test the front mode control motor (see page 21-69).
Is the front mode control motor OK?
between the A/C control panel and the front air mix YES-Go to step 6.
control m o to r.il
NO-Replace the front mode control motor (see page
NO-Substitute a known-good A/C control panel, and 2 1 - 7 0 ) .■
6. Disconnect the front mode control motor 7P
2 1 -7 D .B
connector.
8. Check for continuity between the following terminals 9. Check for continuity between body ground and A/C
of A/C control panel connector A (22P) and the front control panel connector A (22P) terminals No. 3,15,
mode control motor 7P connector. 16,17, and 18 individually.
22P: 7P: A/C CONTROL PANEL CONNECTOR A (22P)
No. 3 No. 7
No. 15 No. 3
No. 16 No. 4
No. 17 No. 5 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
No. 18 No. 6
11 12 13 14 15 16 X 17 18 19 20 21 22
A/C CONTROL PANEL CONNECTOR A (22P) YEL/GRN I RED/YEL
Wire side of female terminals WHT/BLU
REP/BLU
between the A/C control panel and the front mode
control m o tor.!
NO-Go to step 10.
10. Check for continuity between terminals of A/C control
panel connector A (22P) as follows.
Terminal To terminals
FRONT MODE CONTROL MOTOR 7P CONNECTOR A3 A15, A16, A17, A18
Wire side of female terminals A15 A16, A17, A18
Is there continuity? A16 A17, A18
A17 A18
YES-Go to step 9. Is there continuity between any of the terminals?
NO-Repair an open in the wire(s) between the A/C YES-Repair a short in the w ire s .!
control panel and the front mode control m o to r.!
NO-Go to step 11.
HB
11. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II), and measure the DTC B1240 or DTC indicator 5: A Problem in
same terminals for voltage to body ground.
the Front Mode Control Linkage, Doors, or
A/C CONTROL PANEL CONNECTOR A (22P) Motor
YES-Go to step 4.
NO-lntermittent failure.®
Wire side of female terminals 5. Test the front mode control motor (see page 21-69).
Is there any voltage? Is the front mode control motor OK?
YES-Repair a short to power in the wire(s) between YES-Go to step 6.

the A/C control panel and the front mode control
21-70), or repair the front mode control linkage or
panel. Repair the short to power before replacing the
doors.B
A/C control panel.■
NO-Check for loose wire or poor connections at A/C
connector.
control panel connector A (22P) and at the front mode
control motor 7P connector. If the connections are 7. Disconnect A/C control panel connector A (22P).
good, substitute a known-good A/C control panel, and
21-71).B
8 . Check for continuity between the following terminals 9. Check for continuity between body ground and A/C
of A/C control panel connector A (22P) and the front control panel connector A (22P) terminals No, 19 and
mode control motor 7P connector. No. 20 individually.
22P: 7P;
No. 19 No. 1 A/C CONTROL PANEL CONNECTOR A (22P)
No. 20 No. 2
A/C CONTROL PANEL CONNECTOR A (2 2 P )
between the A/C control panel and the front mode
control m o tor.!
FRONT MODE CONTROL MOTOR 7P CONNECTOR replace the original A/C control panel (see page
2 1-71).! ' . .
YES-Go to step 9.
control panel and the front mode control m o to r.!
BB
DTC B1241 or DTC indicator 6: A Problem in 11. Check for continuity between front power transistor
the Front Blower Motor Circuit
1. Clearthe DTC by turning the ignition switch to FRONT POWER TRANSISTOR 4P CONNECTOR
3. Checkfor DTCs using the HDS (see page 21-12) or
YES-Go to step 4.
connections on the front blower motor circuit.! Wire side of female terminals

5. Check the No. 21 (40 A) fuse in the under-hood
fuse/relay box, and the No. 30 (10 A) fuse in the YES-Go to step 12.
driver's under-dash fuse/relay box. NO-Check for an open in the BLK wire between the
Are the fuses OK? front power transistor and body ground. If the wire is
OK, check for poor ground at G 5 04 .!
YES-Go to step 6.
12. Connect front power transistor 4P connector
NO-Replace the fuse(s), and recheck.! terminals No. 2 and No. 4 with a jumper wire.
6. Connect front blower motor 2P connector terminal
No. 2 to body ground with a jumper wire. FRONT POWER TRANSISTOR 4P CONNECTOR
BLK
FRONT BLOWER MOTOR 2P CONNECTOR
1 2l
JUMPER WIRE
3 4
BLU/BLK
BLU/BLK
JUMPER WIRE
Wire side of female terminals 13. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
Does the front blower motor run at high speed?
YES-Go to step 14.
Does the front blower motor run?
NO-Repair an open in the BLU/BLK wire between the
YES-Go to step 8. front power transistor and the front blower m o tor.!
NO-Go to step 23. 14. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
8. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 15. Disconnect the jumper wire.
9. Disconnect the jumper wire. 16. Disconnect A/C control panel connector A (22P).
10. Disconnect the front power transistor 4P connector.
17. Checkfor continuity between body ground and A/C 19. Start the engine.
20. Measure the voltage between body ground and A/C
No. 9 individually.
A/C CONTROL PANEL CONNECTOR A (22P) No. 9 individually.
BLU/RED
BLU/YEL
BLU/RED
1 2 3 4 5 x 6 7 8 9 10
BLU/YEL
11 12 13 14 15 16 X
CM
o
CM
17 18 19 21
CM
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
X 17 18 19
CM
o
11 12 13 14 15 16 21 22

Is there continuity? Wire side of female terminals
YES-Repair a short to body ground in the wire(s) Is there voltage?
between the A/C control panel and the front power
transistor.! YES-Repair a short to power in the w ire s .!
NO-Go to step 18. NO-Go to step 21.

21. Reconnect A/C control panel connector A (22P).
18. Check for continuity between the following terminals
of A/C control panel connector A (22P) and front 22. Test the front power transistor (see page 21-67).
power transistor 4P connector.
Is the front power transistor OK?
22P: 4P:
No. 8 No. 3 YES-Check for loose wire or poor connections at A/C
No. 9 No. 1 control panel connector A (22P) and at the front power
transistor 4P connector. If the connections are good,
A/C CONTROL PANEL CONNECTOR A (22P) substitute a known-good A/C control panel, and
recheck. Ifthe symptom/indication goes away,
BLU/RED BLU/YEL replace the original A/C control p an el.!
NO-Replace the front power transistor.!
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
11 12 13 14 15 16 X 17 18 19 21 23. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
CM
o
CM
CM
24. Disconnect the jumper wire.

25. Disconnect the front blower motor 2P connector.
BLU/YEL
1 2l
BLU/RED
3 4
FRONT POWER TRANSISTOR 4P CONNECTOR

YES-Go to step 19.
control panel and the front power transistor.!
HB
27. Measure the voltage between front blower motor 2P 32. Measure the voltage between front blower motor
connector terminal No. 1 and body ground. relay 4P socket terminal No. 4 and body ground.
FRONT BLOWER MOTOR 2P CONNECTOR FRONT BLOWER MOTOR RELAY 4P SOCKET
BLK/YEL

Is there battery voltage? Is there battery voltage?
YES-Replace the front blower motor.® YES-Go to step 33.
NO-Go to step 28. NO-Repair an open in the wire between the No. 30 (10
A) fuse in the driver's under-dash fuse/relay box and
the front blower motor relay.®
29. Remove the front blower motor relay from the
under-hood fuse/relay box, and test it (see page
22-114). 34. Check for continuity between front blower motor
relay 4P socket terminal No. 3 and body ground.
Is the relay OK?
YES-Go to step 30. FRONT BLOWER MOTOR RELAY 4P SOCKET
NO-Replace the front blower motor relay.®

30. Measure the voltage between front blower motor
FRONT BLOWER MOTOR RELAY 4P SOCKET BLK
1
2
4 3
YES-Repair an open in the WHT/BLU wire between
the front blower motor relay and the front blower
motor.®
Terminal side of female terminals NO-Check for an open in the wire between the front
Is there battery voltage? blower motor relay and body ground. Ifthe wire is OK,
check for poor ground at G202.®
YES-Go to step 31.
NO-Replace the under-hood fuse/relay box.®
DTC B1244 or DTC indicator 9: An Open in the 8. Check for continuity between following terminals of
A/C control panel connectors A (22P) and B (14P) and
Rear Air Mix Control Motor Circuit
the rear air mix control motor 7P connector.
1. Clear the DTC by turning the ignition switch to 22P: 7P;
14P: 7P:
No. 3 No. 3
A /C C O N T R O L P A N E L C O N N E C T O R A (22P )
YES-Go to step 4.
1 2 3 4 5 > < 6 7 8 9 10
connections on the rear air mix control motor
circuit.® 11 12 13 14 15 16
GRY
X
17 18 19 20 21 22
5. Test the rear air mix control motor (see page 21-197).
C | GRY
Is the rear air mix control motor OK? ^ wni/taKN
1 2 3 / 5 /
YES-Go to step 6. i PNK/BLK
REAR AIR MIX CONTROL
NO-Replace the rear air mix control motor (see page MOTOR 7P CONNECTOR
21-198).B Wire side of female terminals
6. Disconnect the rear air mix control motor 7P PNK/BLK
connector. 1 3 J 4 / /
s
7. Disconnect A/C control panel connectors A (22P) and

B (14P).
/I /I / 10 X 11 12 13 14
control panel connectors A (22P) and B (14P) and at
the rear air mix control motor 7P connector. If the
connections are good, substitute a known-good A/C
control panel, and recheck. If the symptom/indication
goes away, replace the original A/C control panel (see
page 21-71 ).B
control panel and the rear air mix control motor.B
a il
DTC B1245 or DTC indicator 10: A Short in the 8. Check for continuity between body ground and A/C
No. 13 individually, and between body ground and
1. Clear the DTC by turning the ignition switch to A/C control panel connector B (14P) terminal No. 3.
1 2 3 4 5 6 > < C 6 7 8 9 10
X
CM
o
CM
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 21
CM
YES-Go to step 4. GRY
NO-lntermittent failure.B
Is the rear air mix control motor OK?
YES-Go to step 6.
NO-Replace the rear air mix control motor (see page PNK/BLK
21-198).B
1 4 XX
CM
CO
c J
6. Disconnect the rear air mix control motor 7P

connector.
XX / 10 X 11 12 13 1 4
7. Disconnect A/C control panel connectors A (22P) and

B (14P).

between the A/C control panel and the rear air mix
control motor.B
NO-Go to step 9.
connectors A (22P) and B (14P) terminals as follows.
Terminal To terminals
A3 A13, B3
A13 B3
Is there continuity between any of the terminals?
YES-Repair a short in the wires.B
NO-Go to step 10.
10. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II), and measure the DTC B1246 or DTC indicator 11: A Problem in
the Rear Air Mix Control Linkage, Door, or
Motor
WHT/GRN LOCK (0), and then turn to ON (II).
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 2. Operate the A/C control system in several modes.
CM
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 o
CM
CM
21 3. Check for DTCs using the HDS (see page 21-12) or
YES-Go to step 4.
PNK/BLK Is the rear air mix control motor OK?
/ /
CO
CM
1 c
P 4 YES-Go to step 6.
/ / / 10 X 11
CM
CO
14 NO-Replace the rear air mix control motor (see page

21-198), or repair the rear air mix control linkage or
door.®
connector.
7. Disconnect A/C control panel connector B (14P).
Is there any voltage?
the A/C control panel and the rear air mix control
panel. Repair the short to power before replacing the
A/C control panel.®
NO-Check for loose wire or poor connections at A/C
the rear air mix control motor 7P connector. If the
control panel, and recheck. If the symptom/indication
page 21-71).®
8. Check for continuity between the following terminals 9. Check for continuity between body ground and A/C
of A/C control panel connector B (14P) and the rear air control panel connector B (14P) terminals No. 11 and
mix control motor 7P connector. No. 12 individually.
14P: 7P:
No. 11 No. 1 A/C CONTROL PANEL CONNECTOR B (14P)
No. 12 No. 2

1 2 3 C 4 XX
/ /I / 10X 11 12 13 14
GRN/BLK
PNK/BLU Is there continuity?

between the A/C control panel and the rear air mix
control motor.®
REAR AIR MIX CONTROL MOTOR
7P CONNECTOR NO-Substitute a known-good A/C control panel, and
Wire side of female terminals recheck. Ifthe symptom/indication goes away,
Is there continuity? replace the original A/C control panel (see page
21-71).®
YES-Go to step 9.
control panel and the rear air mix control motor.®
DTC:B1221 m DTC indicator 12: An Open in 8. Check for continuity between following terminals of
the Rear Mode Control M otor Circuit
the rear mode control motor 7P connector.
22P: 7P:
No. 3 No. 5
14P: 7P:
No. 10 No. 3
Is DTC B1221 or 12 indicated? A/C CONTROL PANEL CONNECTOR A (22P)
YES-Go to step 4.
connections on the rear mode control motor circuit.!
1 2 3 4 5 X 6 7 8 9 10

11 12 13 14 15 16
GRY
X
17 18 19 20 21 22
5. Test the rear mode control motor (see page 21-199).

WHT/GRN
Is the rear mode control motor OK? GRY
YES-Go to step 6. 1 2 3
RED/YEL
NO-Replace the rear mode control motor (see page
21-199).! REAR MODE CONTROL
MOTOR 7P CONNECTOR
6. Disconnect the rear mode control motor 7P Wire side of female terminals
connector.
7. Disconnect A/C control panel connectors A (22P) and 1 2 3 G J 4 X/
B (14P). / / / 10 X 11 12 13 14
] RED/YEL
the rear mode control motor 7P connector. If the
control panel, and recheck. Ifthe symptom/indication
page 21-71).!
control panel and the rear mode control m o to r.!
HI
DTC B1247 or DTC indicator 12 or 13: An Open 8. Check for continuity between following terminals of
or Short in the Rear Mode Control Motor
the rear mode control motor 7P connector.
Circuit
22P: 7P;
2. Operate the A/C control system in several modes. 14P: 7P:
No. 10 No. 3
self-diagnostic function (see page 21-10). A/C CONTROL PANEL CONNECTOR A (22P)
Is DTC B1247 or 12 or 13 indicated?
YES-Go to step 4.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
11 12 13 14 15 16 X 17 18 19 20 21
CM
CM
connections on the rear mode control motor circuit.!
Is the rear mode control motor OK?
YES-Go to step 6. RED/YEL
REAR MODE CONTROL
NO-Replace the rear mode control motor (see page MOTOR 7P CONNECTOR
21-200).■ Wire side of female terminals
6. Disconnect the rear mode control motor IP

4 / /
CO
connector. 1 L J
7. Disconnect A/C control panel connectors A (22P) and X / X 10RED/YEL

X 11 12 13 14
B (14P).
YES-Go to step 9.
control panel and the rear mode control m o tor.!
9. Check for continuity between body ground and A/C 11. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II), and measure the
control panel connector A (22P) terminals No. 3 and same terminals for voltage to body ground.
No. 13 individually, and between body ground and
A/C control panel connector B (14P) terminal No. 10. A /C C O N T R O L P A N E L C O N N E C T O R A (22P )
1 2 3 4 5 > < 6 7 8 9 10
WHT/GRN
X
J
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
1 2 3 4 5 X 6 7 8 9 10
GRY
11 12 13 14 15 1 6 ^ 1 7 18 19
o
CM
CM
CM
21

A /C C O N T R O L P A N E L C O N N E C T O R B (1 4 P )
A /C C O N T R O L P A N E L C O N N E C T O R B (14P )
1 2 3 C J 4 X
/
1 2 3 i. J 4 / / XX / 10 X 11 12 13 14
/ / / 10 X 11 12 13 14
R E D /Y E L
R E D /Y E L

Is there continuity? YES-Repair a short to power in the wire(s) between
the A/C control panel and the rear mode control
YES-Repair a short to body ground in the wire(s) motor. This short may also damage the A/C control
between the A/C control panel and the rear mode panel. Repair the short to power before replacing the
control m o to r.! A/C control p an el.!
NO-Go to step 10. NO-Check for loose wire or poor connections at A/C
10. Check for continuity between terminals of A/C control
the rear mode control motor 7P connector. If the
panel connectors A (22P) and B (14P) as follows.
Terminal To terminals control panel, and recheck. If the symptom/indication
A3 A13, B10 goes away, replace the original A/C control panel (see
A13 B10 page 21-71).!
YES-Repair a short in the w ire s .!
NO-Go to step 11.
* 1 !
DTC B1248 or DTC indicator 14: A Problem in 8. Check for continuity between the following terminals
of A/C control panel connector B (14P) and the rear
the Rear Mode Control Linkage, Doors, or
mode control motor 7P connector.
Motor
14P: 7P;
2. Operate the A/C control system in several modes. A/C CONTROL PANEL C O N N E C T O R i (14P)
1 2 3 s 4 XX
YES-Go to step 4.
/ / / 10 X 11 12 13 14
YEL/BLU YEL/RED

/BL,U| c
5. Test the rear mode control motor (see page 21-199). 1 2
YEL/RED
3 X 5X 7
Is the rear mode control motor OK?
YES-Go to step 6. REAR MODE CONTROL MOTOR
7P CONNECTOR
NO-Replace the rear mode control motor (see page Wire side of female terminals
21-200), or repair the rear mode control linkage or Is there continuity?
doors.B
YES-Go to step 9.
6. Disconnect the rear mode control motor 7P
connector. NO-Repair an open in the wire(s) between the A/C
control panel and the rear mode control motor.il
9. Checkfor continuity between body ground and A/C DTC B1223 or DTC indicator 15: A Problem in
control panel connector B (14P) terminals No. 13 and
the Rear Blower Motor Circuit
A /C C O N T R O L P A N E L C O N N E C T O R B (1 4 P )
YES-Go to step 4.
connections on the rear blower motor circuit.!
5. Check the No. 22 (70 A) fuse in the under-hood
fuse/relay box, and the No. 1 (30 A) fuse in the
between the A/C control panel and the rear mode
passenger's under-dash fuse/relay box.
control m o to r.!
Are the fuses OK?
recheck. If the symptom/indication goes away, YES-Go to step 6.
21-71 ).■ NO-Replace the fuse(s), and recheck.!
6. Connect rear blower motor 2P connector terminal No.
2 to body ground with a jumper wire.
REAR BLOW ER M O TO R 2P C O NN EC TO R
B L U /B L K
JUMPER WIRE

Does the rear blower motor run?
YES-Go to step 8.
NO-Go to step 24.
10. Disconnect the rear power transistor 4P connector.
11. Check for continuity between rear power transistor 4P 17. Check for continuity between A/C control panel
connector terminal No. 2 and body ground. connector B (14P) terminals No. 1 and No. 2 and body
ground individually.
REAR POWER TRANSISTOR 4P CONNECTOR
BLU/ BLU/RED
YEL
123 L 4 XX J
/ / / 10X 111213 14
(g (g)
Is there continuity? Is there continuity?
YES-Go to step 12. YES-Repair a short to body ground in the wirefs)

between the A/C control panel and the rear power
NO-Check for an open in the BLK wire between the transistor.®
rear power transistor and body ground. If the wire is
OK, check for poor ground at G652.H NO-Go to step 18.
12. Connect rear power transistor 4P connector terminals 18. Checkfor continuity between the following terminals
No. 2 and No. 4 with a jumper wire. of A/C control panel connector B (14P) and rear power
transistor 4P connector.
REAR POWER TRANSISTOR 4P CONNECTOR 14P; 4P;

No. 1 No. 1
BLK "
No. 2 No. 3
------- ,
J1 2 A/C CONTROL PANEL CONNECTOR B (14P)

JUMPER WIRE
3 4 Wire side of female terminals
BLU/BLK
BLU/ BLU/RED
YEL
1 2 3 s j 4 / /
/ / / 10 X 11 12 13 14

BLU/YEL J P .....
Does the rear blower motor run at high speed? 1 2

BLU/RED
CO
4
YES-Go to step 14.
rear power transistor and the rear blower motor.B
YES-Go to step 19.
control panel and the rear power transistor.®
20. Measure the voltage between body ground and A/C 28. Measure the voltage between rear blower motor 2P
control panel connector B (14P) terminals No. 1 and connector terminal No. 1 and body ground.
No. 2 individually.
REAR BLOW ER M OTOR 2P CO NNECTO R
A /C C O N T R O L P A N E L C O N N E C T O R B (14P )
BLU/ B L U /R E D
YEL
GRIM/YEL 0 - 0
1 2 3

Wire side of female terminals Is there battery voltage?
Is there voltage?
YES-Replace the rear blower motor (see page
YES-Repair a short to power in the w ire s .! 2 1 - 202).11

22. Reconnect A/C control panel connector B (14P). 30. Remove the rear blower motor relay from the rear
junction box, and test it (see page 22-114).
23. Test the rear power transistor (see page 21-196).
Is the relay OK?
Is the rear power transistor OK?
YES-Go to step 31.
control panel connector B (14P) and at the rear power NO-Replace the rear blower motor re lay .!
transistor 4P connector. Ifthe connections are good,
31. Measure the voltage between body ground and rear
substitute a known-good A/C control panel, and
blower motor relay 4P socket terminals No. 1 and
No. 4 individually.
2 1-71).!
REAR BLO W ER M O T O R RELAY 4 P SO C K ET
NO-Replace the rear power transistor.!
B L K /W H T
24. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 1
26. Disconnect the rear blower motor 2P connector.
B L K /W H T

YES-Go to step 32.
NO-Repair an open in the BLK/WHT wire between the
passenger's under-dash fuse/relay box and the rear
junction control u n it.!
33. Check for continuity between rear blower motor relay DTC B1202: A/C Control Panel Internal Error
4P socket terminal No. 3 and body ground.
NOTE:
REAR BLOWER MOTOR RELAY 4P SOCKET • Check the battery condition (see page 22-111) and the
charging system (see page 4-37).
• If you are troubleshooting multiple DTCs, be sure to
follow the instructions in B-CAN system diagnosis test
mode A (see page 22-155).
1. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), then turn to
ON (II).
2. Turn the A/C control system on and operate several
functions (A/C ON/OFF, air mix and blend door
operations, temperature settings etc.).
Is there continuity? 3. Checkfor DTCs using the HDS (see page 21-12).
YES-Substitute a known-good rear junction box, and Is DTC B1202 indicated?

recheck. If the symptom/indication goes away, YES-The A/C control panel is faulty, replace the A/C
replace the original rear junction box.B
control panel.B
NO-Check for an open in the wire between the rear NO-lntermittent failure, the A/C control panel is OK at
blower motor relay and body ground. Ifthe wire is OK, this time. Check for loose or poor connections at A/C
check for poor ground at G652.B control panel connector A (22P).B
DTC B120S: A/C Control Panel Lost 7. Check for continuity between A/C control panel
connector A (22P) terminal No. 10 and gauge control
Com m unication w ith Gauge Control Module module connector A (SOP) terminal No. 25.
(VSP/NE message)
DTC B1206: A/C Control Panel Lost Wire side of female terminals
Com m unication w ith Gauge Control M odule
(ENGTEMP message) 6 7 8 9 10
LTBLU
1 2 3 4 5
X
CM
CM
CM
o
DTC B1207: A/C Control Panel Lost 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 21
Com m unication w ith Gauge Control Module
(ILLUMI message)
1. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), then turn to 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 X 8 9 10 11 / 13 14
ON (II).
1
15 16 / 18 19 20 21 24 25 / 27 28 / 30
CM
CO
B R N /Y E L
2. Turn the A/C control system on and operate several
functions (A/C ON/OFF, air mix and blend door G A U G E C O N T R O L M O D U L E C O N N E C T O R A (S O P )
operations, temperature settings etc.). Wire side of female terminals
3. Check for DTCs using the HDS (see page 21-12).
Is DTC indicated? control panel connector A (22P) and at the gauge
YES- control module connector A (30P). If the connections
are good, substitute a known-good A/C control panel
• DTC B1205 indicated: Go to step 4. and/or gauge control module, and recheck. If the
• DTC B1206 or B1207 indicated: Go to step 5. symptom/indication goes away, replace the original
A/C control panel (see page 21-71) and/or gauge
NO-intermittent failure, the gauge control module
control module (see page 22-371 ).B
and A/C control panel are OK at this time.B
4. Check for DTCs using the HDS.
control panel and the gauge control module.B
Is DTC B1060 indicated?
YES-Do the gauge control module self-diagnostic
function (see page 22-345).B
NO-The A/C control panel is faulty, replace the A/C
control panel.B
6. Disconnect gauge control module connector A (SOP)
(see page 22-371).
Recirculation Control Motor Circuit Troubleshooting
1. Check the No. 30 (10 A) fuse in the driver's under-dash 8 . Check for continuity between body ground and A/C
fuse/relay box. control panel connector A (22P) terminals No. 5 and
No. 6 individually.
Is th e fu s e O K ?
YES-Go to step 2. A/C CONTROL PANEL CONNECTOR A (22P)
NO-Replace the fuse, and recheck.B

2. Disconnect the recirculation control motor 7P
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
connector.
11 12 13 14 15 16 X 17 18 19 21
CM
o
CM
CM
4. Measure the voltage between recirculation control
motor 7P connector terminal No. 1 and body ground.
RECIRCULATION CONTROL MOTOR 7P CONNECTOR

Is t h e r e c o n tin u ity ?

between the A/C control panel and the recirculation
control m o tor.!
NO-Go to step 9.
W ire side of female term inals same terminals for voltage to body ground.
Is th e r e b a t t e r y v o lta g e ?
YES-Go to step 5.
NO-Repair an open in the wire between the No. 30 (10
A) fuse in the driver's under-dash fuse/relay box and 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
the recirculation control m o to r.!
11 12 13 14 15 16 X 17 18 19 20 21 22
6 . Test the recirculation control motor (see page 21-70).
Is t h e r e c ir c u la tio n c o n t r o l m o t o r O K ?
YES-Go to step 7.
NO-Replacfc the recirculation control motor (see page
21-71), or repair the recirculation control linkage or is t h e r e a n y v o l t a g e ?
doors.H
7. Disconnect A/C control panel connector A (22 P). the A/C control panel and the recirculation control
panel. Repair a short to power before replacing the
A/C control panel.!
NO-Go to step 10.
Recirculation Control Motor Circuit A/C Control Power and Ground
Troubleshooting (cont'd) Circuit Troubleshooting
11 . Check for continuity between the following terminals 1 . Check the No. 30(10 A) fuse in the driver's under-dash
of A/C control panel connector A (22P) and the fuse/relay box.
recirculation control motor 7P connector.
Is th e f u s e O K ?
22P: 7P:
No. 5 No. 5 YES-Go to step 2.
No. 6 No. 7 NO-Replace the fuse, and recheck.■
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 4. Measure the voltage between A/C control panel
11 12 13 14 15 16 X 17 18 19 20 21 22 connector A (22P) terminal No. 11 and body ground.

c
r!,........ I T^DM/DCn
1 2 3 / 5 ^
GRN/WHT 1 2 3 4 5 x 6 7 8 9 10
11 12 13 14 15 16 X 17 18 19 20 21 22
RECIRCULATION CONTROL MOTOR IP CONNECTOR
W ire side of female term inals BLK/YEL
Is t h e r e c o n t in u it y ?
YES-Check for loose wires or poor connections at A/C

control panel connector A (22P) and at the
recirculation control motor 7P connector. If the W ire side of female term inals
control panel, and recheck. If the symptom/indication Is t h e r e b a t t e r y v o lta g e ?
goes away, replace the original A/C control panel (see YES-Go to step 5.
page 21-71 ) . ■
NO-Repair an open in the wire(s) between the A/C (10 A) fuse in the driver's under-dash fuse/relay box
control panel and the recirculation control motor.® and the A/C control panel.®
n n
6 . Check for continuity between A/C control panel 11. Check for continuity between rear A/C control panel
connector A (22P) terminal No. 1 and body ground. 5P connector terminal No. 1 and body ground.
A/C CONTROL PANEL CONNECTOR A (22P) REAR A/C CONTROL PANEL 5P CONNECTOR
s J
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
1 2 3 4 5
11 12 13 14 15 16 X 17 18 19 20 21
CM
CM
BLK
(g>
W ire side of female term inals W ire side of female term inals
Is t h e r e c o n tin u ity ? Is t h e r e c o n tin u ity ?
YES-Go to step 7. YES-Go to step 12.

NO-Check for an open in the wire between the A/C NO-Check for an open in the BLK wire between the
control panel and body ground. If the wire is OK, rear A/C control panel and body ground. If the wire is
check for poor ground at G504.il OK, checkfor poor ground at G601.H
7. Disconnect the rear A/C control panel 5P connector. 12. Disconnect A/C control panel connector B (14P).
8 . Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 13. Check for continuity between A/C control panel
connector B (14P) terminal No. 4 and rear A/C control
9. Measure the voltage between rear A/C control panel panel 5P connector terminal No. 2 .
REAR A/C CONTROL PANEL 5P CONNECTOR
GRN
1 2 3 C
4 / /
J S
/ / / 10 X 11 12 13 14
1 2 3 4 5
BLK/YEL
GRN € P
1 2 3 4 5

REAR A/C CONTROL PANEL 5P CONNECTOR
Is th e r e b a t t e r y v o lta g e ? W ire side of female term inals
YES-Go to step 10.
YES-Go to step 14.
the rear A/C control panel.B NO-Repair an open in the wire between the A/C
control panel and rear A/C control p an el.!
A/C Control Power and Ground Radiator and A/C Condenser Fan
Circuit Troubleshooting (cont'd) Low Speed Circuit Troubleshooting
14. Check for continuity between rear A/C control panel NOTE:
5P connector terminal No. 2 and body ground. • Do not use this troubleshooting procedure if the A/C
compressor is inoperative. Refer to the symptom
REAR A/C CONTROL PANEL 5P CONNECTOR troubleshooting index.
• Before performing symptom troubleshooting, check
for powertrain DTCs (see page 11-3).
j
H
1 1. Check the No. 9 (30 A) fuse in the under-hood

CM
4 5
GRN driver's under-dash fuse/relay box.
U A r e th e fu s e s O K ?
YES-Go to step 2.
Wire side of female terminals NO-Replace the fuse(s), and recheck.B
Is th e r e c o n tin u ity ? 2. Remove the A/C condenser fan relay from the
22-114).
between the A/C control panel and the rear A/C
control p an el.! Is t h e r e la y O K ?
NO-Check for loose wires or poor connections at A/C YES-Go to step 3.
control panel connectors A (22P), B (14P) and rear A/C
control panel 5P connector. Ifthe connections are NO-Replace the A/C condenser fan relay.B
good, substitute a known-good A/C control panel, and 3. Measure the voltage between A/C condenser fan relay
recheck. Ifthe sym pto m/indication is still present, 4P socket terminal No. 1 and body ground.
substitute a known-good A/C control panel, and
recheck.B A/C CONDENSER FAN RELAY 4P SOCKET
1
2
4 3

Is t h e r e b a t t e r y v o lt a g e ?
YES-Go to step 4.
NO-Replace the under-hood fuse/relay box.B
4. Connect A/C condenser fan relay 4P socket terminals 12. Connect PCM connector A (49P) terminal No. 4 to
No. 1 and No. 2 with a jumper wire. body ground with a jumper wire.
A/C CONDENSER FAN RELAY 4P SOCKET PCM CONNECTOR A (49P)
JUMPER WIRE LTBLU
f . ri ......... ............ .....□....

_| 1 | 2 / [ 4 j 5 J 6 1 7 1 8 9 1101
i
BLU/YEL 11 12 13 I 4 ! / 16 17 18 19 20 /
4 3 i
24 25 > s 26 27 /
■ 22 23 i
29 30 31 3233 34 3 5 / / 38 39
14 0 141 X 1 /1 4 4 145146147 4 8 |4 9 |
JUMPER WIRE
D o th e A /C c o n d e n s e r a n d ra d ia to r fa n s ru n ?
YES-Go to step 5.
NO-Go to step 14.
6 . Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
D o e s th e A /C c o n d e n s e r a n d ra d ia to r fa n s ru n ?
7. Measure the voltage between A/C condenser fan relay
YES-Check for loose wires or poor connections at
PCM connector A (49P). If the connections are good,
A/C CONDENSER FAN RELAY 4P SOCKET check the PCM grounds. If the grounds are good,
substitute a known-good PCM, and recheck. If the
symptom/indication goes away, replace the original
PCM (see page 11-294).!
condenser fan relay and the PCM.B
15. Reinstall the A/C condenser fan relay.
16. Disconnect the A/C condenser fan motor 2P
Terminal side of female terminals connector.
Is t h e r e b a t t e r y v o lta g e ? 17. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II), then set the A/C
YES-Go to step 8 . button and fan control dial ON.
NO-Go to step 34.

8 . Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
9. Reinstall the A/C condenser fan relay.

10. Jump the SCS line with the HDS.
NOTE: This step must be done to protect the
powertrain control module (PCM) from damage.
Radiator and A/C Condenser Fan Low Speed Circuit Troubleshooting
(cont'd)
18. Measure the voltage between A/C condenser fan 23. Set the A/C button and fan control dial OFF, then turn
motor 2P connector terminal No. 2 and body ground. the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
A/C CONDENSER FAN MOTOR 2P CONNECTOR 25. Remove the fan control relay from the auxiliary
under-hood relay box, and test it (see page 22-114).
Is th e r e la y O K ?
BLU/YEL YES-Go to step 26.

NO-Replace the fan control re lay .!
26. Connect fan control relay 5P socket terminal No. 1 to
body ground with a jumper wire.
Is th e r e b a t t e r y v o lta g e ? FAN CONTROL RELAY 5P SOCKET
YES-Go to step 19. WHT/RED

1
condenser fan relay and the A/C condenser fan
m o to r.!
5 4 JUMPER
WIRE
19. Set the A/C button and fan control dial OFF, then turn
the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
20. Reconnect the A/C condenser fan motor 2P connector.
21. Connect A/C condenser fan motor 2P connector
terminal No. 1 to body ground with a jumper wire. 27. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II), then set the A/C
button and fan control dial ON.
D o e s th e A /C c o n d e n s e r fa n ru n ?
A/C CONDENSER FAN MOTOR 2P CONNECTOR
YES-Go to step 28.
condenser fan motor and the fan control re lay .!
WHT/RED 28. Set the A/C button and fan control dial OFF, then turn
JUMPER WIRE the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
29. Remove the radiator fan relay from the under-hood
fuse/relay box.
22. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II), then set the A/C
button and fan control dial ON.
D o e s th e A /C c o n d e n s e r fa n ru n ?
YES-Go to step 23.

NO-Replace the A/C condenser fan m o to r.!
B B
30. Check for continuity between fan control relay 5P 33. Checkfor continuity between radiator fan motor 2P
socket terminalNo. 4 and radiator fan relay 4P socket connector terminal No. 1 and body ground.
terminal No. 1.
FAN CONTROL RELAY 5P SOCKET RADIATOR FAN MOTOR 2P CONNECTOR

Terminal side o f female term inals
1
u E
2
BLK
5 4 3
BLU/BLK
BLU/BLK
YES-Replace the radiator fan m o tor.!

NO-Check for an open in the wire between the
RADIATOR FAN RELAY 4P SOCKET radiator fan motor and body ground. If the wire is OK,
Terminal side o f female term inals check for poor ground at G301. !
Is th e r e c o n tin u ity ?
34. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0 ).
YES-Go to step 31.
35. Remove A/C diode A from under-hood fuse/relay box.
NO-Repair an open in the wire between the fan
control relay and the radiator fan re la y .! 36. Using the diode setting H 4 - ) on a DVOM, check for
current flow in both directions between A/C diode A
31. Disconnect the radiator fan motor 2P connector. terminals No. 1 and No. 2 .
32. Check for continuity between radiator fan relay 4P
socket terminal No. 1 and radiator fan motor 2P A/C DIODEA
connector terminal No. 2.
RADIATOR FAN RELAY 4P SOCKET
1 BLU/BLK
1
2
4 3
1 2h 1 O------- 1^ ----- 0 2
BLU/BLK
RADIATOR FAN MOTOR 2P CONNECTOR Is t h e r e c u r r e n t f lo w in o n ly o n e d ir e c t io n ?

YES-Go to step 37.
NO-Replace A/C diode A . !
YES-Go to step 33.
NO-Repair an open in the wire between the radiator
fan relay and the radiator fan m o tor.!
(cont'd)
Radiator and A/C Condenser Fan Low A/C Condenser Fan High Speed
Speed Circuit Troubleshooting (cont'd) Circuit Troubleshooting
38. Measure the voltage between A/C diode A 2P socket NOTE:
terminal No. 2 and body ground. • Do not use this troubleshooting procedure if the
radiator fan and/or the A/C compressor is inoperative.
Refer to the symptom troubleshooting index.
A/C DIODE A 2P SOCKET
for powertrain DTCs (see page 1 1-3).
. r
2 11 1. Check the No. 30 (10 A) fuse in the driver's under-dash

fuse/relay box.
SLK/YiL
YES-Go to step 2 .
NO-Replace the fuse, and recheck.!
2. Remove the fan control relay from the auxiliary
Is t h e r e b a t t e r y v o lta g e ? under-hood relay box, and test it (see page 22-114).
YES-Open in the wire between the A/C diode A 2P Is th e r e la y O K ?
socket terminal No. 1 and A/C condenser fan re la y .!
YES-Go to step 3.
A) fuse in the driver's under-dash fuse/relay box and NO-Replace the fan control re lay .!
A/C diode A pin 2 . ! 3. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
4. Measure the voltage between fan control relay 5P
socket terminal No. 5 and body ground.
FAN CONTROL RELAY 5P SOCKET
1
2
5 4 3
BLU/YEL
(x )
YES-Go to step 5.
NO-Go to step 12.
6 . Check for continuity between fan control relay 5P 10. Disconnect PCM connector A (49P).
socket terminal No. 2 and body ground.
11. Check for continuity between radiator fan relay 4P
socket terminal No. 4 and PCM connector A (49P)
FAN CONTROL RELAY 5P SOCKET terminal No. 5.
BLK Terminal side of female term inals
GRN
f r n
_| 1 [ 2 / i 4 1 £> | 6. | 7 | 8 9 |10|
i
11 12 13 1 4 | / 16 17 18 19 20 /
i
■ 22 23 24 25 > < 26 27 /
i
29 30 31 32 33 34 3 5 / / 38 39
140141 / | / | 44145146147 48|49|
Is t h e r e c o n tin u it y ?
1
YES-Go to step 7.
2
NO-Check for an open in the wire between the fan ORN
4 3
control relay and body ground. Ifthe wire is OK, check
for poor ground at G201 . ■
7. Remove the radiator fan relay from the under-hood Terminal side of female terminals
fuse/relay box. Is t h e r e c o n tin u ity ?
8 . Check for continuity between fan control relay 5P YES-Check for loose wires or poor connection at PCM
socket terminal No. 3 and radiator fan relay 4P socket connector A (49P). Ifthe connection is good,
terminal No. 4. substitute a known-good PCM, and recheck. If the
FAN CONTROL RELAY 5P SOCKET
PCM (see page 11-294).B
NO-Repair an open in the wire between the radiator
fan relay and the PCM.B
12. Remove A/C diode A from under-hood fuse/relay box.
5 4 3
GRN
1
eI
ORN 4 3

YES-Go to step 9.
NO-Repair an open in the wire between the fan
control relay and the radiator fan re lay .!
A/C Condenser Fan High Speed Radiator and A/C Condenser Fan
Circuit Troubleshooting (cont'd) High Speed Circuit Troubleshooting
13. Using the diode settingH#-*) on a DVOM, check for NOTE:
current flow in both directions between A/C diode A • Do not use this troubleshooting procedure if only one
terminals No. 1 and No. 2 . fan is inoperative, or ifthe A/C compressor is
inoperative. Refer to the symptom troubleshooting
A/C DIODE A
index.
• The normal operating A/C pressure for the radiator
and A/C condenser fans to run at high speed is
1,520 kPa (15.5 kgf/cm2, 221 psi).
• If A/C refrigerant pressure is abnormal, the radiator
and the A/C condenser fans are controlled based on
engine coolant temperature.
1. Check the No.9 (30A) fuse and No.11 (30A) fuse in the
1 O------- --------- 0 2 under-hood fuse/relay box, and the No.30 ( 10A) fuse
in the driver's under-dash fuse/relay box.
Is t h e r e c u r r e n t f lo w in o n ly o n e d ir e c t io n ? A r e th e fu s e s O K ?
■ NO-Replace A/C diode A M NO-Replace the fuse(s), and recheck.!
14. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 2 . Using the HDS, confirm the following values in the
15. Measure the voltage between A/C diode A 2P socket Data List at idle.
terminal No. 2 and body ground. A/C SWITCH ON
A/C CLUTCH ON
Fan Low Speed ON
A/C DIODE A 2P SOCKET Fan High Speed ON
A r e a ll th e v a lu e s O K ?
2 1 YES-Go to step 3.
BLK/YEL N O -T roubleshoot the value that is not within
specifications.!
4. Disconnect the A/C pressure switch 4P connector.
YES-Repair an open in the BLU/YEL wire between A/C

diode A pin 1 and the fan control re lay .!
NO-Repair an open in the wire BLK/YEL between the
No. 30 (10 A) fuse in the driver's under-dash fuse/relay
box and A/C diode A M
5. Checkfor continuity between A/C pressure switch 4P 10. Check for continuity between A/C pressure switch 4P
connector terminal No. 2 and body ground. connector terminal No. 3 and PCM connector A (49P)
terminal No. 47.
A/C PRESSURE SWITCH 4P CONNECTOR
BLK 1 r f ....... ........"

— T = n .....~..... —
r1.....y ,................................. - ........0
— ....... .1
i 3 ....—
4 J 1 I 2 / | 4 1 51 6 17 18 9 |10|
i
11 12 13 ™ \ / 16 17 18 19 20 /
i
■ 22 23 24 25 26 27 /
■
29 30 31 3233 34 3 5 / / 38 39
|40|41 / | / | 44145146147 48|49|
I BRN/WHT
YES-Go to step 6 .
2 3
BRN/WHT
NO-Check for an open in the wire between the A/C
pressure switch and body ground. If the wire is OK,
check for poor ground at G202 .B A/C PRESSURE SWITCH 4P CONNECTOR
6 . Turn the ignition switch to ON (II), then set the A/C
button and fan control dial to ON. Is t h e r e c o n t in u ity ?
7. Connect A/C pressure switch 4P connector terminals YES-Check for loose wires or poor connection at PCM
No. 2 and No. 3 with a jumper wire. connector A (49P). If the connection is good,
A/C PRESSURE SWITCH 4P CONNECTOR PCM (see page 11-294).B
BLK BRN/WHT pressure switch and the PCM.B
JUMPER WIRE
D o th e r a d ia t o r a n d c o n d e n s e r fa n s ru n a t h ig h s p e e d ?
YES-Replace the A/C pressure switch.B

NO-Go to step 8 .
8 . Jump the SCS line with the HDS.

A /C C o m p r e s s o r C lu tc h C ir c u it T r o u b le s h o o tin g
NOTE; 4. Measure the voltage between A/C compressor clutch

• It is normal for the A/C compressor to turn off under relay 4P socket terminal No. 1 and body ground.
certain conditions, such as low idle, high engine
coolant temperature, or hard acceleration. A/C COMPRESSOR CLUTCH RELAY 4P SOCKET
• Do not use this troubleshooting procedure if the fans
are also inoperative with the A/C on. Refer to the 1
symptom troubleshooting index.
2
for powertrain DTCs (see page 11-3). 4 3
1. Check the No. 12 (7.5 A) fuse in the under-hood
fuse/relay box, and the No. 30 (10 A) fuse in the X
driver's under-dash fuse/relay box.
A r e th e fu s e s O K ? Terminal side of female terminals
YES-Go to step 2 . Is th e r e b a t t e r y v o lta g e ?
NO-Replace the fuse(s), and recheck.B YES-Go to step 5.
2. Using the HDS, confirm the following values in the NO-Replace the under-hood fuse/relay box.Hl
PGM-FI Data List at idle.
5. Connect A/C compressor clutch relay 4P socket
ECT Sensor 2 176 -2 12 °F (80 -1 00 °C) terminals No. 1 and No. 2 with a jumper wire.
TP Sensor About 0.5 V
RPM More than 790 A/C COMPRESSOR CLUTCH RELAY 4P SOCKET
A/C Switch ON
A/C Clutch ON
A r e a ll th e v a lu e s w ith in s p e c if b a t io n s ?
1
YES-Go to step 3. JUMPER WIRE
?
BLU/RED
NO-Troubleshoot the value that is not within the 4 3
specifications.!
3. Remove the A/C compressor clutch relay from the Terminal s i de of female terminals
22-114).
D o e s th e A /C c o m p r e s s o r c lu tc h c lic k ?
Is th e r e la y O K ?
YES-Go to step 6 .
YES-Go to step 4.
NO-Go to step 15.
NO-Replace the A/C compressor clutch re lay .!
6 . Disconnect the jumper wire.

8 . Measure the voltage between A/C compressor clutch 13. Connect PCM connector A (49P) terminal No. 13 to
relay 4P socket terminal No. 4 and body ground. body ground with a jumper wire.
A/C COMPRESSOR CLUTCH RELAY 4P SOCKET

GRY
ll----- ll
n n
j 1 I 2 / ' I 4 | £i | 6 | 7 | 8 9 10
■
11 12 13 I 4/ 16 17 18 19 20 /
1
22 23 24 25 26 27 /
> r< , 1
29 30 31 3233 34 35^ / 38 39
|40 |41 / | / | 44145146147 48|49|
XT
JUMPER WIRE
YES-Go to step 9. " Terminal side of female terminals

A) fuse in the driver's under-dash fuse/relay box and D o e s th e A /C c o m p r e s s o r c lic k ?
the A/C compressor clutch re lay .!
YES-Check for loose wires or poor connections at
9. Set the A/C button OFF, then turn the ignition switch PCM connector A (49P). If the connections are good,
to LOCK (0). check the PCM grounds. If the grounds are good,
10. Reinstall the A/C compressor clutch relay. symptom/indication goes away, replace the original
11. Jump the SCS line with the HDS. PCM (see page 11 -294).B
12. Disconnect PCM connector A (49P). NO-Repair an open in the wire between the A/C
compressor clutch relay and the PCM.B
powertrain control module (PCM) from damage. 15. Disconnect the jumper wire.
16. Disconnect the A/C compressor clutch 1P connector.
A/C Compressor Clutch Circuit A/C Pressure Switch Circuit
Troubleshooting (cont'd) Troubleshooting
17. Check for continuity between A/C compressor clutch NOTE:
relay 4P socket terminal No. 2 and A/C compressor • Do not use this troubleshooting procedure if any of the
clutch 1P connector terminal No. 1. following items are operative; A/C condenser fan,
radiator fan, A/C compressor. Refer to the symptom
A/C COMPRESSOR CLUTCH RELAY 4P SOCKET troubleshooting index.
BLU/RED • Ifthe blower motor does not run at all speeds, the A/C
compressor will be inoperative. Before performing
any other troubleshooting, repair the cause of the
inoperative blower motor.
@
1. Check for body DTCs using B-CAN system diagnosis
test mode A troubleshooting (see page 22-155).
BLU/RED*1
8SEE*! HBLU/RE
RED/BLK*2 A r e th e r e a n y D T C s in d ic a t e d ?
A/C COMPRESSOR CLUTCH IP CONNECTOR YES-Do the appropriate troubleshooting for the DTC
Terminal side of male terminals indicated.■
*1: '07 model
*2: '08-10 models NO-Go to step 2 .
Is th e r e c o n tin u ity ? 2. Check that the front blower motor operates at all
YES-Check the A/C compressor clutch clearance, and speeds.
the compressor clutch field coil (see page 21-82). D o e s th e fro n t b lo w e r m o to r o p e r a te a t a ll s p e e d s ?
Repair as needed.!
YES-Go to step 3.
compressor clutch relay and the A/C compressor NO-Repair the problem in the front blower motor
clutch.■ circuit.!
5. Measure the voltage between A/C pressure switch 4P
BLU/RED

Is t h e r e 5 V o r m o r e ?
YES-Go to step 6 .
NO-Repair an open in the wire between the relay
control module and the A/C pressure sw itch.!
B B
7. Check for continuity between A/C pressure switch 13. Measure the evaporator temperature sensor
terminals No. 1 and No. 4. resistance between A/C control panel connector A
(22P) terminals No. 3 and No. 14.
A/C PRESSURE SWITCH

f R lR . 1 2 3 4 5 > < 6 7 8 9 10
^ L 4 11 12 13 14 15 16 X 17 18 19 20 21 22
BRN

Is th e r e s is ta n c e le s s th a n 2 4 k D ?
YES-Go to step 8 .
YES-Go to step 14.
NO-Go to step 16.
NO-Test the evaporator temperature sensor (see
8 . Reconnect the A/C pressure switch 4P connector.
page 21 -66 ) . !
14. Reconnect A/C control panel connector A (22P).
11. Measure the voltage between A/C control panel
16. Check for proper A/C system pressure.
Is t h e p r e s s u r e w ith in s p e c if b a t io n s ?
YES-Replace the A/C pressure sw itch.!
NO-Repair the A/C pressure problem .!
1 2 3 4 5 > < 6 7 8 9 10
11 12 13 14 15 16 X 17 18 19
CM
o
CM
CM
21

Is th e r e 5 V o r m o r e ?
YES-Go to step 12.

control panel and the A/C pressure sw itch.!
Evaporator Temperature Sensor Evaporator Temperature Sensor
Test Replacement
NOTE; Before testing the sensor, checkfor HVAC DTCs 1. Remove the driver's dashboard lower cover (see page
(see page 21-10). 20-135).
1. Remove the evaporator temperature sensor (see 2. Disconnect the 2P connector (A) from the evaporator
page 21-66 ). temperature sensor (B), then remove the connector
clip (C). Remove the self-tapping screw, and carefully
2. Dip the sensor in ice water, and measure the
pull out the evaporator temperature sensor.
resistance between its terminals.
EVAPORATOR TEMPERATURE SENSOR
J
1 ?
y... L
..... .... r f t ______
Term inal side of male term inals
3. Pour warm water on the sensor, and check for a

change in resistance. 3. Install the sensor in the reverse order of removal.
4. Compare the resistance readings with the

specifications shown in the graph; the resistance
should be within the specifications.
RESISTANCE
m
TEMPERATURE
5. If the resistance is not as specified, replace the

evaporator temperature sensor (see page 21-66 ).
Front Power Transistor Test
1. Remove the passenger's dashboard undercover (see 4. Carefully release the lock tab on terminal No. 1
page 20-141). (BLU/YEL) (A) in the 4P connector, then remove the
terminal and insulate it from body ground.
2. Disconnect the 4P connector from the front power
transistor.
3. Measure the resistance between front power
transistor terminals No. 3 and No. 4. It should be
about 1.5 kO.
• If the resistance is within the specifications, go to
step 4.
• If the resistance is not within the specifications,
replace the front power transistor.
NOTE: Also check the front blower motor. Front
power transistor failure can be caused by a
defective front blower motor.

5. Reconnect the 4P connector to the front power
transistor.
6 . Make sure the BLU/YEL wire is completely isolated,
then supply 12 volts to cavity No. 1 with a jumper
wire.
7. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II), and check that the
front blower motor runs.
• If the front blower motor does not run, replace the
front power transistor.
• If the front blower motor runs, the front power
transistor is OK.
Front Air Mix Control Motor Test
Sp ecial T o o ls R eq u ired 3. Ifthe front air mix control motor did not run in step 2 ,
Backprobe Set 07SAZ-001000A (2) remove it, then check the front air mix control linkage
and door for smooth movement.
NOTE: Before testing the motor, check for HVAC DTCs • If the linkage and door move smoothly, replace the
(see page 21 - 10). front air mix control motor (see page 21-69).
1. Disconnect the 7P connector from the front air mix • Ifthe linkage or door sticks or binds, repair them as
control motor. needed.
• Ifthe front air mix control motor runs smoothly, go
INOTICE l to step 4.
Incorrectly applying power and ground to the front air
mix control motor will damage it. Follow the FRONT AIR MIX CONTROL MOTOR
instructions carefully.
2 . Connect battery power to terminal No. 1 of the front

air mix control motor, and ground terminal No. 2; the
front air mix control motor should run, and stop at
Max Cool. If it doesn't, reverse the connections; the
front air mix control motor should run, and stop at
Max Hot. When the front air mix control motor stops
running, disconnect battery power immediately.
4. Measure the resistance between terminals No. 5 and

No. 7. It should be between 4.2 to 7.8 kO.
5. Reconnect the front air mix control motor 7P
connector, then turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
6 . Using the backprobe set, measure the voltage
between terminals No. 3 and No. 7.
M a x Cool: A b o u t 0.5 V
M a x H ot: A b o u t 4.5 V
7. If either the resistance or voltage readings are not as
specified, replace the front air mix control motor (see
page 21-69).
Front Air Mix Control Motor Front Mode Control Motor Test
Replacement
1. Remove the driver's dashboard lower cover (see page NOTE: Before testing the motor, checkfor HVAC DTCs
20-135). (see page 21- 10).
2. Remove the self-tapping screws and the duct (A). 1. Disconnect the 7P connector from the front mode
control motor.
INOTICE I
Incorrectly applying power and ground to the front
mode control motor will damage it. Follow the
2. Connect battery power to terminal No. 1 of the front

mode control motor, and ground terminal No. 2; the
front mode control motor should run smoothly, and
stop at Vent. If it doesn't, reverse the connections; the
front mode control motor should run smoothly, and
stop at Defrost. When the front mode control motor
stops running, disconnect battery power
immediately.
3. Disconnect the 7P connector (A) from the front air mix
control motor (B). Remove the self-tapping screws FRONT MODE CONTROL MOTOR
and the front air mix control motor from the heater
unit
3. Ifthe front mode control motor did not run in step 2,

remove it, then check the front mode control linkage
and doors for smooth movement.
• Ifthe linkage and doors move smoothly, replace the
front mode control motor (see page 21-70).
4. Install the motor in the reverse order of removal. • If the linkage or doors stick or bind, repair them as
Make sure the pin on the motor is properly engaged needed.
with the linkage. After installation, make sure the
• Ifthe front mode control motor runs smoothly, go
motor runs smoothly.
to step 4.
4. Use a digital multimeter with an output of 1 mA or
less at the 20 k Q range. With the front mode control
motor running as in step 2 , check for continuity
between terminals No. 3,4,5 and 6 and terminal No. 7
individually. There should be continuity for a moment
at each terminal as the motor moves past the switch's
terminal.
5. If there is no continuity for a moment at each terminal,
replace the front mode control motor (see page
21-70).
Front Mode Control Motor Recirculation Control Motor Test
Replacement
1. Remove the glove box housing (see page 20-142). 1. Disconnect the 7P connector from the recirculation
control motor.
2 . Disconnect the 7P connector (A) from the front mode
control motor (B). Remove the self-tapping screws INOTICE I
and the front mode control motor from the heater
unit. Incorrectly applying power and ground to the
recirculation control motor will damage it. Follow the
2. Connect battery power to terminal No. 1 of the

recirculation control motor, and ground either
terminal No. 5 or terminal No. 7. The motor should
run smoothly to the Fresh position (terminal No. 5
connected to ground), or the Recirculate position
(terminal No. 7 connected to ground). Disconnect
battery power immediately when the motor stops
running.
NOTE: Do not reverse the power and ground
connections, or leave the recirculation control motor
connected to power and ground after it has stopped
running. These actions will damage the motor.
RECiRCULATION CONTROL MOTOR

3. Install the motor in the reverse order of removal.
Make sure the pin on the motor is properly engaged
3. If the recirculation control motor did not run in step 2,

remove it, then check the recirculation control linkage
and doors for smooth movement.
• Ifthe linkage and doors move smoothly, replace the
recirculation control motor (see page 21-71).
• If the linkage or doors stick or bind, repair them as
needed.
D U
Recirculation Control Motor A/C Control Panel

Replacement Removal/Installation
1. Make sure the ignition switch is in LOCK (0). 1. Remove the center panel (see page 20-136).
2. Remove the glove box housing (see page 20-142). 2. Remove the dials (A), the self-tapping screws, and the
A/C control panel (B).
3. Disconnect the 7P connector (A) from the
recirculation control motor (B). Remove the
self-tapping screws and the recirculation control
motor from the blower unit.

motor runs smoothly. 3. Install the A/C control panel in the reverse order of
removal. After installation, operate the various
functions to make sure they work properly.
4. Run the self-diagnostic function to confirm that there
are no problems in the system (see page 21 - 10).
A/C Control Panel Bulb Blower Unit Removal/Installation
Replacement
1. Discharge the static electricity (which accumulated on 1. Remove the glove box housing (see page 20-142).
you when you removed the A/C control panel) by
2. Remove the self-tapping screws, the bolts, and the
touching the door striker or other body parts.
glove box frame (A).
2 . Remove the self-tapping screws, then carefully
separate the A/C control panel display (A) from the
control panel (B). Do not kink or pull on the wires
between the display and the control panel. Do not
touch the electronic components on the printed circuit
board in the control panel.
f
I
3. Cut the plastic cross brace (A) in the glove box

opening with diagonal cutters in the area shown, and
discard it.
3. Remove the bulb(s) with a flat-tip screwdriver.
4. Install the bulb(s) in the reverse order of removal.

4. Disconnect the connectors (A) from the front blower Note these items when overhauling the blower unit:
motor and the front power transistor, then remove the • The recirculation control motor (A), the blower motor
wire harness clips (B). cover (B), front blower motor (C) and the dust and
pollen filter housing (D) can be replaced without
removing the blower unit.
• Before reassembly, make sure that the recirculation
control linkage and doors move smoothly without
binding.
• After reassembly, make sure the recirculation control
motor runs smoothly (see page 21-71).
5. Disconnect the connector (A) from the recirculation

control motor, then remove the bolts, the mounting
nuts and the blower unit (B).
6 x 1.0 mm
9.3 N-m
{1.0 kgf-m,
7.2 Ibf-ft)
6 x 1.0 mm
9.8 N-m (1.0 kgf-m,
7.2 Ibf-ft)
6 . Install the unit in the reverse order of removal. Make

sure that there is no air leakage.
Front Blower Motor Replacement Front Evaporator Core
Replacement
1. Remove the passenger's side undercover (see page 1. Recover the refrigerant with a
20-141). recovery/recycling/charging station (see page 21-88 ).
2. Disconnect the connectors (A) from the front climate 2 . Remove the engine cover (see step 7 on page 5-2).
control unit (with climate control), the front blower
motor, and the front power transistor, then remove 3. Remove the bolts and nut, then disconnect the
suction line (A) and the receiver line (B) from the front
the wire harness clips (B).
evaporator core.
i A
6 x 1.0 mm 8x1 .2 5 mm
S.8 N-m 12.3 N-m
(1.0 kgf-m, (1.3 kgf-m,
7.2 Ibf-ft) 9.0 Ibf-ft)
4. Remove the blower unit (see page 21-72).

5. Remove the self-tapping screws, the expansion valve
cover (A), and seal (B).

B B
6 . Remove the bolts, inlet and outlet pipes (A), and 7. Carefully pull out the front evaporator core (A) and the
expansion valve (B). plate (B).
8 . Install the core in the reverse order of removal, and

note these items:
• If you're installing a new front evaporator core, add
refrigerant oil (DENSO ND-OIL 8 ) (see page 21-7).
• Replace the O-rings with new ones at each fitting,
and apply a thin coat of refrigerant oil before
installing them. Be sure to use the correct O-rings
for HFC-134a (R-134a) to avoid leakage.
• Immediately after using the oil, reinstall the cap on
the container, and seal it to avoid moisture
absorption.
damage the paint; if the refrigerant oil contacts the
paint, wash it off immediately.
• Make sure that there is no air leakage.
• Charge the system (see page 21-90).
Expansion Valve Replacement
1. Recover the refrigerant with a 6 . Remove the bolts, inlet and outlet pipes (A), and
recovery/recycling/charging station (see page 21-88 ). expansion valve (B).
3. Remove the bolts and nut, then disconnect the
suction line (A) and the receiver line (B) from the front
evaporator core.
B A
7. Install the expansion valve in the reverse order of

6 x 1.0 mm 8 x 1.25 mm • If you're installing a new expansion valve, add
9.8 N-m 12.3 N-m
(1.0 kgf-m, (1.3 kgf-m, refrigerant oil (DENSO ND-OIL 8 ) (see page 21-7).
7.2 Ibf-ft) 9.0 Ibf-ft) • Replace the O-rings with new ones at each fitting,
4. Remove the blower unit (see page 21-72).
5. Remove the self-tapping screws, the expansion valve for HFC-134a (R-134a) to avoid leakage.
cover (A), and seal (B). • Immediately after using the oil, reinstall the cap on
absorption.
Heater Unit/Core Replacement
SRS components are located in this area. Review the 6 . Remove the mounting nut from the heater unit. Take
SRS component locations (see page 24-23) and the care not to damage or bend the fuel lines and the
precautions and procedures (see page 24-26) before brake lines, etc.
8 x 1.25 mm
1. Do the battery terminal disconnection procedure (see 12.3 N-m
(1.3 kgf-m, 9.0 Ibf-ft)
page 22-112).
2. Disconnect the suction and receiver lines from the
front evaporator core (see page 21-74).
3. From under the hood, open the cable clamp (A), then
disconnect the heater valve cable (B) from the heater
valve arm (C). Turn the heater valve arm to the fully
opened position as shown.
7. Remove the dashboard (see page 20-145).

8 . Disconnect the connectors (A) from the front blower
motor and the front power transistor, then remove the
wire harness clips (B).
4. When the engine is cool, drain the engine coolant

from the radiator (see page 10-6 ).
5. Slide the hose clamps (A) back. Remove the nut and
the water valve (B), then disconnect the inlet heater
hose (C) and the outlet heater hose (D) from the heater
unit. Engine coolant will run out when the hoses are
disconnected; drain it into a clean drip pan. Be sure
not to let coolant spill on the electrical parts or the
painted surfaces. If any coolant spills, rinse it off
immediately.
(cont'd)
Heater Unit/Core Replacement (cont'd)
9. Disconnect the connectors (A) from the front mode 11. Remove the drain hose (A), then remove the nuts and
control motor and the recirculation control motor, the blower-heater unit (B).
then remove the wire harness clips (B) and the
connector clip (C). 6x1.0 mm
9.8 N-m (1.0 kgf-m, 7.2 Ibf-ft)
10. Disconnect the connectors (A) from the evaporator

sensor and the front air mix control motor, then
remove the wire harness clips (B) and the wire
harness (C).
Heater Valve Cable Adjustment
12. Remove the self-tapping screws, the joint duct (A), 1. From under the hood, open the cable clamp (A), then
and seal (B). Remove the self-tapping screws, then disconnect the heater valve cable (B) from the heater
remove the passenger's heater outlet (C), and the valve arm (C).
heater core cover (D). Remove the self-tapping
screws, the heater pipe brackets (E), the grommets
(F), and carefully pull out the heater core (G) so you
don't bend the inlet and outlet pipes.
2. From under the dash, disconnect the heater valve

cable housing from the cable clamp (A), and
disconnect the heater valve cable (B) from the air mix
control linkage (C).
13. Install the heater core in the reverse order of removal.

14. Install the heater unit in the reverse order of removal,
• Do not interchange the inlet and outlet heater
hoses, and install the hose clamps securely.
• Refill the cooling system with engine coolant (see
page 10-6 ). 3. With the heater valve cable detached at both ends,
• Adjust the heater valve cable (see page 21-79). make sure the cable moves freely with no binding.
Replace the heater valve cable if it does not move
• Make sure that there is no coolant leakage.
freely.
• Refer to front evaporator core replacement (see 4 . Set the temperature control dial to Max Cool (Lo) with
page 21-74). the ignition switch to ON (II).
15. Do the battery terminal reconnection procedure (see 5. Attach the heater valve cable to the air mix control
page 22 - 112). linkage as shown step 2. Hold the end of the heater
valve cable housing against the stop (D), then snap
the heater valve cable housing into the cable clamp.
NOTE: Make sure the ring-end of the cable is pushed
all the way to the base of the pin on air mix control
linkage.
Heater Valve Cable Adjustment A/C Compressor Replacement
(cont'd)
6 . From under the hood, turn the heater valve arm (A) to NOTE: Do not install the A/C compressor into a system
the fully closed position as shown, and hold it. Attach unless you are completely sure that the system is free of
the heater valve cable (B) to the heater valve arm, and contamination. Installing the A/C compressor into a
gently pull on the heater valve cable housing to take contaminated system can result in premature A/C
up any slack, then install the heater valve cable compressor failure.
housing into the cable clamp (C).
1. If the A/C compressor is marginally operable, run the
engine at idle speed, and let the air conditioning work
for a few minutes, then shut the engine off.
2. Recover the refrigerant with a
recovery/recycling/charging station (see page 21 -88 ).
3. Remove the engine cover (see step 7 on page 5-2),
and the drive belt (see page 4-42).
4. '07 model: Remove the front splash shield (see page
20-281). Remove the clips (A) and bolt from the right
front inner fender (B). Then move the inner fender to
the rear.
m
5. '08-10 models: Remove the front splash shield (see 7. Remove the mounting bolts and the A/C compressor.
page 20-281). Remove the clips (A) and screw from
the right front inner fender (B). Then move the inner
fender to the rear.
8 . Install the compressor in the reverse order of

• Inspect the A/C lines for any signs of contamination.
• If you're installing a new A/C compressor, you must
calculate the amount of refrigerant oil to be
6 . Disconnect the A/C compressor clutch connector (A). removed from it (see page 21-7). A new A/C
Remove the bolt and the nut, then disconnect the compressor comes with a full charge of oil.
suction line (B) and discharge line (C) from the A/C • Replace the O-rings with new ones at each fitting,
compressor. Plug or cap the lines immediately after and apply a thin coat of refrigerant oil before
disconnecting them to avoid moisture and dust installing them. Be sure to use the correct O-rings
contamination. for HFC-134a (R-134a) to avoid leakage.
• Use only refrigerant oil (DENSO ND-OIL 8 ) for
6x 1.0 mm
HFC-134a DENSO A/C compressors only.
• To avoid contamination, do not return the oil to the
container once dispensed, and never mix it with
other refrigerant oils.
absorption.
6x 1.0 mm
9.8 N-m
(1.0 kgf-m,
7.2 Ibf-ft)
A/C Compressor Clutch Check
1. Check the pressure plate for discoloration, peeling, or 3. Measure the clearance between the rotor pulley (A)
other damage. If there is damage, replace the clutch and the pressure plate (B) all the way around. If the
set (see page 21-83). clearance is not within specified limits, remove the
pressure plate (see page 21-83) and add or remove
2. Check the pulley bearing play and drag by rotating the shims as needed to increase or decrease clearance.
pulley by hand. Also check for grease leakage from
the bearing. Replace the clutch set with a new one if it Clearance: 0.35—0.60 mm (0.014—0.024 i n)
is noisy, has excessive play/drag, or has bearing NOTE: The shims are available in three thicknesses:
grease contamination on the clutch faces (see page 0.1 mm, 0.3 mm, and 0.5 mm.
21-83).
NOTE: The pulley and the pressure plate were mated
at the factory by a burnishing operation. Always
replace the pulley and the pressure plate as a set.
Replacing only one part of the clutch set will cause
clutch slippage.
4. Remove the pressure plate (see page 21-83), and

inspect the pressure plate and pulley friction surface
for wear. If there is excessive wear, roughness, or
scoring, replace the clutch set.
5. Inspect the friction surfaces and the A/C compressor
shaft hub for excess oil. If excess oil is present, and it
is not from the engine or power steering system, then
the A/C compressor shaft seal is leaking. In that case,
replace the A/C compressor (see page 21-80).
6 . Check the resistance of the field coil. If resistance is
not within specifications, replace the field coil (see
page 21-83).
Field Coil Resi stance: S .9-4.3 Q at 68 °F (20 °C)
Q .
9 9
A/C Compressor Clutch Overhaul
Speci al Tools Requi red 2. Remove the pressure plate (A) and the shim(s) (B),
• A/C Clutch Holder Robinair 10290 or Kent-Moore taking care not to lose the shim(s). If the clutch needs
J37872, commercially available adjustment, increase or decrease the number and
• A/C Clutch Holder Honda Tool and Equipment thickness of shims as necessary, then reinstall the
ACT499A, commercially available pressure plate, and recheck its clearance (see page
21-82).
1. Remove the center bolt (A) while holding the pressure
plate with a commercially available A/C clutch holder NOTE:
(B). • The shims are available in three thicknesses: 0.1
mm, 0.3 mm, and 0.5 mm.
• Do not pry on the pressure plate with screwdrivers
or similar tools. Prying damages the pressure plate
and the pulley.
• When replacing the clutch set, place a trial stack of
shims, 1 mm total thickness, on the A/C compressor
shaft. Install the pressure plate, and check its
clearance (see step 3 on page 21-82). If the
clearance is not with specification, add or subtract
shims as needed.
A/C Compressor Clutch Overhaul (cont'd)
3. If you are replacing the field coi l, remove the snap ring 4. Remove the screw from the field coil ground terminal
(A) with snap ring pliers, then remove the pulley (B). (A), then remove the wire harness (B) and the bracket
Be careful not to damage the pulley or the A/C (C). Disconnect the field coil connector (D). Remove
compressor. the snap ring (E) with snap ring pliers, then remove
the field coil (F). Be careful not to damage the field coil
NOTE;
. or the A/C compressor.
• Do not use a hammer to remove the snap rings.
Using a hammer damages the A/C compressor.
• Do not hammer or pry on the pulley to remove it. If
the pulley is difficult to remove, use a commercially
available pulley removing tool. Make sure the jaws
of the pulling tool engage the back face of the
pulley, not the pulley grooves.
5. Reassemble the clutch in the reverse order of

disassembly, and note these items:
e When replacing the field coil, check that the new
coil has the correct resistance (see step 6 on page
21-82).
• Install the field coil with the wire side facing down,
and align the boss on the field coil with the hole in
the A/C compressor.
• Clean the pulley and A/C compressor sliding
surfaces with contact cleaner or other
non-petroleum solvent.
• Install new snap rings, note the installation
direction, and make sure they are fully seated in the
grooves.
• Make sure that the pulley turns smoothly after it's
reassembled.
• Route and clamp the wires properly to prevent
damage by the pulley.
6 . Cycle the A/C clutch approximately 20 times by
running the engine at 1,500-2,000 rpm and setting the
HVAC control temperature to Lo with the A/C button
ON. This procedure seats the clutch friction surfaces,
and increases clutch torque capacity.
1 8 1
A/C Compressor Relief Valve A/C Condenser Replacement

Replacement
NOTE: If the A/C compressor relief valve released '07 Model
refrigerant to the atmosphere, determine and correct the
cause of the excessive system pressure, then replace the 1. Recover the refrigerant with a
relief valve. recovery/recycling/charging station (see page 21 -88 ).
1. Recover the refrigerant with a 2. Remove the front grille cover (see page 20-257).
recovery/recycling/charging station (see page 21-88 ).
3. Remove the bolt, then disconnect the receiver line (A)
2 . Remove the relief valve (A) and the O-ring (B). Plug from the A/C condenser.
the opening to keep foreign matter from entering the
system, and the A/C compressor oil from running out.
9.8 N-m
(1.0 kgf-m, 7.2 Ibf-ft)
4. Remove the bolts, then disconnect the discharge line

13.2 N-m
(1.35 kgf-m, 9.76 Ibf-ft) (A) from the A/C condenser.
3. Clean the mating surfaces.

4. Replace the O-ring with a new one, and apply a thin
coat of refrigerant oil before installing it.
5. Remove the plug you installed in step 2 , and install
and tighten the relief valve.
6 . Charge the system (see page 21-90).
9.8 N-m
(1.0 kgf-m, 7.2 Ibf-ft)
A/C Condenser Replacement (cont'd)
5. Remove the bolts and the A/C condenser upper *08-10 Models
mount brackets (A).
A recovery/recycling/charging station (see page 21-88 ).
3. Remove the bolts, then disconnect the discharge hose
(A) from the A/C condenser.
6 . Remove the A/C condenser (A) by lifting it up. Be

careful not to damage the radiator and A/C condenser
fins when removing the A/C condenser.
4. Remove the bolt, then disconnect the receiver line (A)

from the A/C condenser.
7. Install the A/C condenser in the reverse order of

• If you're installing a new A/C condenser, add
• Replace the O-rings with new ones at each fitting, 6 x 1.0 mm
and apply a thin coat of refrigerant oil before 9.8 N-m
installing them. Be sure to use the correct O-rings (1.0 kgf-m, 7.2 ibf-ft)
absorption.
B D
5. Remove the bolts and the A/C condenser upper 6 . Remove the A/C condenser (A) by lifting it up. Be
mount brackets (A). careful not to damage the radiator and A/C condenser
fins when removing the A/C condenser.
A
9.8 N-m
(1.0 kgf-m, 7.2 Ibf-ft)
7. Install the A/C condenser in the reverse order of

• If you're installing a new A/C condenser, add
absorption.
damage the paint; ifthe refrigerant oil contacts the
Receiver/Dryer Desiccant Refrigerant Recovery
Replacement
NOTE: Install the Receiver/Dryer as quickly as possible ik C A U T I O N
to prevent the system from absorbing moisture from the
air.
1 . Remove the A/C condenser (see page 21-85). • Be careful when connecting service equipment.
2. Remove the cap (A) from the bottom of the A/C • Do not breathe refrigerant or vapor.
condenser. Remove the O-ring (B) and the desiccant
NOTE:
(C).
• If accidental system discharge occurs, ventilate the
work area before resuming service.
• Additional health and safety information may be
manufacturers.
1. Connect an R-134a refrigerant
recovery/recycling/charging station (A) to the
high-pressure service port (B) and the low-pressure
service port (C), as shown, following the equipment
manufacturer's instructions.
2.9 N-m
(0.3 kgf-m, 2.1 Ibf-ft)
3. Install the receiver/dryer in the reverse order of

• Replace the O-rings with new ones, and apply a thin
coat of refrigerant oil (DENSO ND-OIL 8 ) before
• Install the cap to the specified torque. It is made of
plastic and can be easily stripped.
2. Measure the amount of refrigerant oil removed from

the A/C system after the recovery process is
completed. Be sure to put the same amount of new
refrigerant oil back into the A/C system before
charging.
System Evacuation
ik C A U T I O N 2. Connect an R-134a refrigerant

KM HH recovery/recycling/charging station (A) to the
high-pressure service port (B) and the low-pressure
service port (C), as shown, following the equipment
• Be careful when connecting service equipment manufacturer's instructions. Recover the refrigerant,
• Do not breathe refrigerant or vapor. if any, from the A/C system.
NOTE:
manufacturers.
• Do not allow moisture to contaminate the A/C system
oil. Moisture in the oil is difficult to remove, and it can
damage the A/C compressor.
1. When an A/C System has been opened to the
atmosphere, such as during installation or repair, it
must be evacuated using an R-134a refrigerant
recovery/recycling/charging station. If the system has
been open for several days, replace the
receiver/dryer, drain the refrigerant oil, and add fresh
oil (see page 21-7). Then evacuate the system for
several hours before charging it.
3. Evacuate the system. The vacuum pump should run

fora minimum of 45 minutes to eliminate all moisture
from the system. When the suction gauge reads —
93.3 kPa (—700 mmHg, —27.6 inHg) for at least 45
minutes, close all valves, and turn off the vacuum
pump.
4. Ifthe suction gauge dose not reach approximately —
93.3 kPa (—700 mmHg, —27.6 inHg) in 15 minutes,
there is probably a leak in the system. Partially charge
the system, and check for leaks.
System Charging
A C A U T IO N 2. Recover the refrigerant in the A/C system.

• Air conditioning refrigerant or lubricant vapor can 3. Evacuate the system. Ifthe system cannot reach a
irritate your eyes, nose, or throat. vacuum of —93.3 kPa (—700 mmHg, —27.6 inHg) in
• Be careful when connecting service equipment. 15 minutes, or cannot hold a vacuum for at least 15
• Do not breathe refrigerant or vapor. minutes, these is probably a leak. Do the refrigerant
leak check, and repair any leaks before charging the
NOTE; system.
• If accidental system discharge occurs, ventilate the 4. Add the same amount of new refrigerant oil to the
work area before resuming service. system that was removed during recovery. Use only
• Additional health and safety information may be DENSO ND-OIL 8 refrigerant oil.
manufacturers. 5. Charge the system with the specified amount of
R-134a refrigerant. Do not overcharge the system; the
1. Connect an R-134a refrigerant A/C compressor will be damaged.
high-pressure service port (B) and the low-pressure Select the appropriate units of measure for your
service port (C), as shown, following the equipment refrigerant charging station.
manufacturer's instructions. R e frig e ra n t Capacity:
7 0 0 to 7 50 g
0.70 to 0.75 kg
1.5 to 1.7 lbs
2 4 .7 to 2 6 .5 oz
6 . Check for refrigerant leaks (see page 21-91).
7. Check the system performance (see page 21-98).

Refrigerant Leak Check
Special Tools Required Leak Detector Usage Tips (Refer to the

. Leak Detector YGK-H-10PM* Operator's Manual for complete operating
• Leak Detector HLD-100*
• Leak Detector TIFZX-1 *
instructions):
• OPTIMAX Jr. A/C Leak Detection Kit TRP124893* • Position the vehicle in a wind-free work area. This will
*Availabl e through the Honda Tool and Equipment aid in detecting small leaks.
Program 888-424-6857 • When using the leak detector for the first time, allow it
to warm up for 2 minutes with the probe in a clean
atmosphere. This lets the temperature sensor in the
l i i C H H H I
detector stabilize.
• The calibration check should be done in the "Search
2 " mode. Once that is done, the other check modes do
• Be careful when connecting service equipment. not need calibrating.
• Do not breathe refrigerant or vapor. • When leak checking through the HVAC module drain
hose, avoid drawing water into the probe. Water can
These tools are available through the Honda Tool and
damage the internal pump and sensor.
Equipment Program; call 888-424-6857.
• Avoid creasing the flexible probe extension. Creases
NOTE; can restrict air flow and give false readings.
• If accidental system discharge occurs, ventilate the • Because the detector recalibrates itself for ambient
work area before resuming service. gases, it may be necessary to move the detector away
• Additional health and safety information may be from the leak to clear the sensor. Once the sensor has
obtained from the refrigerant and lubricant cleared, recheck the suspected leak.
manufacturers. • When removing the clear probe tip, be careful not to
• Check the system for leaks using an R-134a refrigerant lose the flow ball.
leak detector with an accuracy of 14 g (0.5 oz) per year • R-134a is heavier than air, always check below and to
or better the sides of all potential leak sources.
• Halogen leak detectors are sensitive to chemicals:
windshiled washing solutions, solvents/cleaners, and
some vehicle adhesives. Keep these chemicals out of
the area when doing leak detection.
Refrigerant Leak Check (cont'd)
Fluorescent Dye Usage Tips 1. Connect an R-134a refrigerant

• Use only Tracer-Stick® signal dose fluorescent dye high-pressure service port (B) and the low-Connect an
capsules from Tracerline®. Other dyes contain R-134a refrigerant recove ry/recycIing/charg ing
solvents that may contaminate the refrigerant oil, station (A) to the high-pressure service port(B) and
leading to componet failure. the low-pressure service port (C), as shown, following
• Adding excessive amounts of dye can damage the the equipment manufacturer's instructions.
compressor.
• PAG oil is water soluble, so condensation on the
evaporator core or the refrigerant lines may wash the
PAG oil and fluorescent dye away from the actual leak.
Condensation may also carry dye through the
evaporator module drain.
• After checking and repairing leaks, thoroughly clean
any residual dye from the areas where leaks were
found. Use GLO-AWAY dye cleaner, from Tracerline®,
and hot water to remove the dye (follow the
instructions on the bottle). Residual dye stains can
cause misdiagnosis of any future A/C system leaks.
• If any refrigerant dye contacts an exterior paint
surface, remove it by doing this:
- Carefully wash the affected surfaces to remove any
dirt, and to prevent paint scratching.
- Mix water and isopropyl alcohol in a 50/50 mixture.
Soak a soft 100 percent cotton towel with the
water/alcohol mixture, and place the cloth on the
affected areas to remove the dye.
- After removing the dye with the
water/alcohol-soaked cloth, carefully wash the
affected areas, and check that there is no remaining
dye.
m
2. Recover refrigerant from the A/C system, and

evacuate the system. Ifthe system achieves a vacuum
of approximately 93.3 kPa (700 mmHg, 27.6 inHg) in
15 minutes, and holds the vacuum for 15 minutes,
then the system dose not have a leak at this time. If
the system cannot achieve or hold a vacuum,
continue the refrigerant leak check.
3. Open the high pressure valve to charge the system to
the specified capacity.
Select the appropriate units of measure for your
refrigerant charging station.
R e frig e ra n t C apacity:
700 to 750 g
0.70 to 0.75 kg
1.5 to 1.7 lbs
24.7 to 26.5 oz
(cont'd)
Refrigerant Leak Check (cont'd)
4. With the engine OFF, use a halogen leak detector f i rst to detect the leak source. Follow a continuous path in order to
ensure that you will not miss any possible leaks. Test the following areas of system for leaks.
Possible Leak D iag n o stic P ro ced u re w ith th e Leak N o tes

A re a D e te c to r
Service Ports • Check the service ports with the When capping the service ports, ensure that the
detector. seals on the port caps are in place, and that the caps
• If the detector "sniffs" a leak, use are tight. The caps are used as the final seals in the
fluorescent dye to confirm it. system.
A/C Condenser If the detector "sniffs" a leak, use • Check for joints or connections coated with oily
fluorescent dye to confirm it. dust.
• Checkfor damaged and corroded areas.
• Check all fittings, couplings, brazed/welded areas
and areas around attachment points.
• Move the probe slowly (1 inch/second or less),
and keep it within 1/4 inch of the component being
checked. This maximizes the chance of detecting
a leak.
• If you detected a leak, blow compressed air over
the area, then recheck for leaks. For large leaks,
clearing the area with compressed air may help
you pinpoint the leak source.
A/C Lines • Wiggle the rubber hoses when • Check all fittings, couplings, pressure switches,
checking crimped metal ends. brazed/welded areas, and areas around
• Ifthe detector "sniffs" a leak, use attachment points on A/C lines and components.
fluorescent dye to confirm it. • Check for damaged and corroded areas.
• Move the probe slowly (1 inch/second or less),
and keep it within 1/4 inch of the component being
checked. This maximizes the chance of detecting
a leak.
5. Close the quick coupler valves, then disconnect the quick couplers from the vehicle service ports.
6 . Attach the universal connect set, from the Optimax Jr. Leak Detection Kit, to the service valve fitting. Close the control
valve (the black knob on the connect set).
7. Attach the charging station low pressure hose quick coupler to the service valve fitting, and open the quick coupler
valve. Evacuate the connect set using the charging station vacuum pump, then close the quick coupler valve.
8 . Detach the universal connect set, and install a Tracer-Stick® dye capsule between the connect set and the service
valve fitting (see the manufacturer's instructions for more detail).
9. Attach the quick coupler on the universal connect set to the low pressure service port on the vehicle. Open the
charging station low pressure hose quick coupler valve, but do not open the control valve.
10. Start the engine, and set the A/C system to maximum cooling. Open the control valve to let refrigerant and the dye
enter the A/C system through the low pressure service port. Close the control valve when the Tracer-Stick® dye
capsule is empty.
11. Run the engine and A/C system for 15 minutes to thoroughly circulate the dye. Then shut the engine off, and inspect
the following areas of the system for leaks.
NOTE:
• Check for leaks in a dark work area, and use the UV light and the special glasses from the leak check kit. Other UV
lights may not work well with the Tracer-Stick® dye.
• Small leaks may take up to 1 week of vehicle operation (with normal A/C use) to become visible.
P ossible Leak A re a D iag n o stic P roced ure w ith Flu o rescen t D ye

Service Ports If a leak is found, replace the Schrader valve on the service port.
A/C Lines • Use a permanent marker pen to circle the leak area.
• If a leak is found, remove and replace the A/C line.
A/C Condenser • If a leak is found, remove the A/C condenser.
• Determine whether leak is in the A/C condenser or the receiver/dryer.
• Use a permanent marker pen to circle the leak area.
• Replace either the receiver/dryer (see page 21-88), or the A/C condenser (see page
21-86 ), depending upon which is leaking.
A/C Compressor • Check for leaks at all of the A/C compressor joints, the clutch center, the A/C
compressor front housing bolts, and the scroll bolts on the back of the A/C
compressor.
• If the A/C compressor relief valve appears to be leaking, determine whether the leak
is coming from the relief valve, or the joint between the A/C compressor casing and
the valve.
- If the leak is from the relief valve, diagnose and repair the cause of excessive A/C
system pressure, then replace the A/C compressor relief valve (see page 21-85).
- Ifthe leak is from the casing/valve joint, replace the A/C compressor relief valve
(see page 21-85).
• Ifthe leak is coming from the suction hose and/or discharge hose fittings on the A/C
compressor, clean the A/C fittings and replace the suction/discharge fitting O-rings.
• For all other compressor leaks, remove and replace the A/C compressor (see page
21-80).
Evaporator • Start checking for evaporator leaks by illuminating the evaporator drain tube area.
• If a leak is found, remove the evaporator core (see page 21-74).
• Determine whether leak is from the evaporator or the expansion valve.
• Use a permanent marker pen to circle the leak area.
• Replace the expansion valve (see page 21-76), or the evaporator core (see page
21-74), depending upon which is leaking.
A/C System Noise Check
i4 C A U T I O N 3. Operate the blower at each speed with the engine and

A/C off, and checkfor unusual noises and excessive
vibration. If noise and/or vibration are present, do the
following checks:
• Do not breathe refrigerant or vapor. -1. If the noise or vibration occurs only in a specific
mode or setting, then check these items:
The A/C system noise check will help you determine the • Operation of the mode control motor, door, and
source of abnormal A/C system noise. linkage
NOTE; • Operation of the air mix control motor(s), door(s),
and linkage
work area before resuming service. ® Operation of the recirculation motors, doors, and
linkage
obtained from the refrigerant and lubricant -2. If there is a squeaking or chirping noise, but no
manufacturers. unusual vibration, replace the blower motor (see
• Identify the conditions when the noise occurs. The page 21-74).
weather, the vehicle speed, the vehicle being in gear -3. Remove the blower unit (see page 21-72), and check
or in neutral, the engine temperature, or other for foreign material (leaves or twigs, for example)
conditions may be factors in determining the noise on the blower motor and fan. If foreign material is
source. present, remove it, and recheck for noise. If you
• Do an A/C system inspection (see page 21-6), and
don't find any foreign material, remove the blower
correct any problems found prior to diagnosing motor (see page 21-74), and check these items:
abnormal noises. • Check ifthe fan blades are cracked or broken
• Abnormal A/C noises can be misleading. For example, 9 Make sure the fan retainer is tight
a sound similar to a failed bearing may be caused by • Inspect the fan alignment on the blower motor
loose fasteners, loose mounting brackets, or a faulty shaft
A/C compressor clutch assembly.
Replace the blower motor if any problems are
1 . Inspect theair inlet grille in the cowl cover for debris. present.
If debris is present, remove it.
4. Set up the vehicle for the running A/C checks:
2 . Sit inside the vehicle, close the doors and windows, • Select a quiet area for testing
and turn the ignition switch to ON (II), but do not start • Apply the parking brake
the engine. Cycle the HVAC system through all blower
• Shift the vehicle in PARK or in Neutral
speeds and all air distribution modes to determine
® Start the engine
where and when the noise occurs.
• Set the temperature control dial to Max Cool
• Set the mode control switch to Vent
• Set the fan control dial to minimum (but not OFF)
• Turn the A/C switch ON
Switch the A/C compressor on and off several times to
clearly identify the sound during A/C compressor
operation. Listen to the noise while the A/C
compressor clutch is engaged and disengaged. Probe
the A/C system with a stethoscope to pinpoint the
noise.
NOTE: If the noise does not change when the A/C
compressor clutch engages or disengages, the noise
may be caused by an engine-related component.
Probe the engine area with a stethoscope to pinpoint
the noise.
5. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), and check the 8 . Listen with a stethoscope for noises coming from the
drive belt for excessive wear, oil contamination, A/C compressor, and check these items:
improper routing, or a faulty belt tenssioner (see page • The noise changes when the A/C compressor clutch
4-41). Correct any problems found. Start the engine, disengages. If the noise does not change when the
run the A/C system, and check ifthe noise is coming A/C compressor disengages, the noise may be
from the drive belt, the belt tensioner or any of the caused by an engine-related component. Probe the
pulleys. Repair or replace any faulty components. engine area with a stethoscope to pinpoint the
noise.
6 . Listen for noises coming from the A/C lines, the A/C
hoses, the A/C condenser, the evaporator, the • The A/C system operating pressures are normal. If
receiver-drier, or the expansion valve, and check the system pressures are abnormal, troubleshoot
these items: the problem using the pressure test table in the A/C
system test (see page 21-98). Correct the
• Noises caused by A/C components touching other
pressure-related problem(s), and recheck for noise.
components or the body. Reroute or insulate the
A/C component(s) as needed, and recheck for noise. • The A/C compressor hose connections, mounting
brackets, and fasteners are in good condition. If any
• Loose, damaged or excessively worn A/C
of these components are loose, damaged, or
components or mounting hardware. Repair or
excessively worn, repair or replace the faulty
replace the faulty component(s) or hardware, and
component(s), and recheck for noise. If these
recheck for noise.
components are in good condition, and the noise is
• A moaning noise coming from the A/C suction line.
still present, replace the A/C compressor (see page
If there is a moaning noise, check the system
21-80).
refrigerant charge (see page 21-90). Ifthe
• Teat-drive the vehicle to enable the auto idle stop
refrigerant charge is OK, replace the receiver/dryer.
mode. Have an assistant sit in the driver's seat and
7. Check the operation of the A/C compressor clutch: press the brake pedal with the shift lever in D
• Make sure the A/C compressor clutch engages (engages auto idle stop mode). Listen for abnormal
without slipping. If the clutch does not engage, noises coming from the electric motor-driven
troubleshoot the A/C compressor clutch circuit (see section of the A/C compressor. If unusual noises are
page 21-62). Ifthe A/C compressor clutch slips, present, replace the A/C compressor.
replace the complete clutch assembly.
• Make sure the A/C compressor clutch disengages. If
the clutch does not disengage, do the A/C
compressor clutch check. Ifthe A/C compressor
clutch is OK, replace the A/C compressor (see page
21-80).
• Make sure the A/C compressor clutch cycles
normally. Ifthe A/C compressor clutch is cycling
rapidly, the A/C system is probably low on
refrigerant due to a leak. Do the refrigerant leak
check (see page 21-91). If the refrigerant charge is
OK, and there are no leaks, troubleshoot the A/C
compressor clutch circuit (see page 21-62).
A/C System Test
Performance Test 5. Insert a thermometer (A) in the center vent.

• Do not breathe refrigerant or vapor.
The performance test will help determine if the A/C

system is operating within specifications.
NOTE:
manufacturers.
6 . Place a thermometer (B) near the blower unit's
1. Do the A/C system inspection (see page 21 -6 ), and
recirculation inlet duct.
correct any problems found.
7. Test conditions:
2. Connect an R-134a refrigerant
recovery/recycling/charging station to the • Move the vehicle out of direct sunlight and let it cool
high-pressure service port and the low-pressure down to the surrounding (ambient) temperature. If
service port, following the equipment manufacturer's necessary, wash the vehicle to cool it down more
instructions. quickly.
• The ambient temperature must be at least 60 °F (16
3. Determine the relative humidity and air temperature. °C).
4. Remove the glove box housing (see page 20-142). • Open hood.
• Open front doors.
• Set the temperature control dial to Max Cool (front
and rear), the mode control switch to Vent (front
and rear), and the recirculation control switch to
Recirculate.
• Turn the A/C switch ON and the fan switch to Max
(front and rear).
• Hold the engine speed at 1,500 rpm.
• No driver or passengers in the vehicle.
8 . Inspect the A/C components for the following
conditions:
• A/C compressor clutch not engaged.
• Abnormal frost areas.
• Unusual noises.
If you observe any of these conditions, refer to the
Symptom Troubleshooting Index.
9. After running the air conditioning for 10 minutes
under the above test conditions, read the delivery
temperature from the thermometer in the center vent,
the intake temperature near the blower unit, and the
discharge (high) and suction (low) pressures on the
A/C gauges.
B B
10. To complete the vent (delivery)/ambient air (intake) temperature chart:

• Mark the vent (delivery) temperature on the vertical line.
• Mark the ambient air (intake) temperature on the bottom line.
• Draw a vertical line from the ambient air (intake) temperature mark.
• Draw a horizontal line from the vent (delivery) temperature mark until it intersects the vertical line.
NOTE: The vent temperature and the ambient air temperatures should intersect in the shaded area. Any
measurements outside the area may indicate the need for further inspection.
Ambient Ai r (Intake) Temperature vs. Vent (Delivery) Temperature
HUMIDITY
(°C) LEVEL
92 •
(33)
87 ■
(31)
82 •
(28)
77 -
(25)
72
(22)
67
(19)
VENT
(DELIVERY) 62
TEMPERATURE (17)
57
(14)
52 ■
(11)
47 •
(8)
42 •
(6)
37 ■
(3)
32 •
m
80 85 90 95 100 105 110 115 120 °F
(27) (29) (32) (35) (38) (41) (43) (46) (49) (°C)
A/C System Test (cont'd)
11. To complete the high side (discharge pressure)/ambient air (intake) temperature chart;
• Mark the high side (discharge pressure) pressure on the vertical line.
• Mark the ambient air (intake) temperature on the bottom line.
• Draw a horizontal line from the high side (discharge) pressure mark until it intersects the vertical line.
NOTE: The high side pressure and the ambient air temperatures should intersect in the shaded area. Any
Ambient Air (Intake) Temperature vs. High Side (Discharge) Pressure
psi
(kPa) HUMIDITY
450 -i LEVEL
(3103)
425
(2930)
400
(2758)
375
(2586)
350
(2413)
325
(2241)
300
(2068)
HIGH SIDE
(DISCHARGE) 275
PRESSURE (1896)
250
(1724)
225
(1551)
200
(1379)
175
(1207)
150
(1034)
125
(862)
100
(689)
80 85 90 95 100 105 110 115 120 ®F
(27) (29) (32) (35) (38) (41) (43) (46) (49) (eC)
B D
12. To complete the low side (suction pressure)/ambient air (intake) temperature chart:
• Mark the low side (suction) pressure along the vertical line.
• Mark the ambient air (intake) temperature along the bottom line.
• Draw a horizontal line from the low side (suction) pressure mark until it intersects the vertical line.
NOTE: The low side pressure and the ambient air temperature should intersect in the shaded area. Any
Ambient Air (Intake) Temperature vs. Low Side (Suction) Pressure
psi
(kPa)
70 —
(4-83)
HUMIDITY
65 LEVEL
(448)
60
(414)
55
(379)
50
(345)
45
(310)
40
(276)
LOW SIDE
(SUCTION) 35
PRESSURE (241)
30
(207)
25 •
(172)
20 H
(138)
15 -
(103)
10
(69)
5
(34)
80 85 90 95 100 105 110 115 120 ®F

(27) (29) (32) (35) (38) (41) (43) (46) (49) (*C)
Pressure Test
Test results R e lated s y m p to m s P ro b ab le cause R e m ed y
Suction and Warm air from the vents. The A/C system • Recover refrigerant (see page 21-88)
discharge pressures contains too much and evacuate the system (see page
are normal refrigerant oil. 21 -89). Adjust the amount of oil in
The air mix door is the system (see page 21-7), then
not operating recharge the system (see page
properly. 21-90).
• Check air mix door operation (see
page 21-68 ), and repair as needed.
Suction and The Suction and The A/C compressor • Check whether the A/C compressor
discharge pressures discharge pressures clutch or the drive clutch or the drive belt is slipping.
are roughly equal equalize when the engine belt is slipping, or the • Ifthe drive belt is slipping, replace
and steady is rewed A/C compressor shaft the drive belt (see page 4-42). Also
seal is leaking. inspect the drive belt auto-tensioner
(see page 4-43).
• Ifthe A/C compressor clutch is
slipping, replace it (see page 21-83).
• Check the A/C compressor shaft seal.
If it's leaking, replace the A/C
compressor (see page 21-80).
Suction and Suction and discharge The A/C compressor Replace the A/C compressor (see page
discharge pressures pressures fluctuate while discharge valve or 21-80).
are roughly equal but running. Pressures the A/C compressor
fluctuate equalize as soon as the gasket is faulty.
A/C compressor
disengages.
Suction and The suction and The A/C system is Recover refrigerant (see page 21-88),
discharge pressures discharge pressures do undercharged. then do the refrigerant leak check (see
are roughly equal not change during page 21-91). Repair any leaks, then
and abnormally low continued operation. recharge the system (see page 21-90).
Suction and The suction pressure The A/C system is Recover refrigerant (see page 21-88),
discharge pressures decreases when cool overcharged. evacuate the system (see page 21-89),
are abnormally high, water is sprayed on the and recharge the system (see page
but normalize when A/C condenser. 21-90).
the A/C condenser is
cooled
Suction and • The high pressure The A/C system Replace the restricted line or
discharge pressures vapor line to the A/C refrigerant flow is component (see page 21-9).
are abnormally high, condenser is too hot. restricted.
and refrigerant line • The low pressure liquid
temperatures are line from the expansion
abnormal valve is not cold.
• There is an abrupt
temperature drop
along a refrigerant line,
or in the A/C condenser
or evaporator.
Suction and • After stopping the A/C There is excess air in Recover refrigerant (see page 21-88),
discharge pressures compressor, the the A/C system. evacuate the system (see page 21-89),
are abnormally high, discharge pressure and recharge the system (see page
but drop rapidly quickly drops about 196 21-90).
when the A/C kPa (28 psi), then falls
compressor gradually.
disengages • The input and output
temperatures at the
expansion valve are not
similar.
B B
Test results Related symptoms Probable cause Remedy

Suction and • The A/C condenser • Clean debris from the A/C condenser
discharge pressures and/or radiator fins and/or radiator fins.
are abnormally high, are clogged • Comb the A/C condenser fins to
and there is little or • The A/C condenser repair any damage.
no airflow through fins are damaged • Troubleshoot the A/C condenser fan
the A/C condenser • The A/C condenser and/or the radiator fan circuit(s).
and/or radiator
fans are not
working properly
The suction pressure • The liquid line The expansion valve Replace the expansion valve (see page
is high and the temperature is similar is stuck open. 21-76).
discharge pressure is on both sides of
low. Both pressures expansion valve.
are steady • System pressures do
not vary at a steady
engine speed.
The suction pressure • The high pressure The A/C system Replace the restricted line or
is low, the discharge liquid line going into refrigerant flow is component (see page 21-9).
pressure is high, and expansion valve is cold. restricted.
the refrigerant • There is an abrupt
temperature changes temperature drop in the
abnormally line between the A/C
somewhere in the compressor and the
system A/C condenser, or in
the line between the
A/C condenser and the
expansion valve.
The suction pressure The expansion valve The A/C compressor Replace the A/C compressor (see page
is high, the discharge and/or the A/C is malfunctioning. 21-80). If the system is contaminated
pressure is low, and compressor discharge with desiccant, replace the
there are particle hose are contaminated receiver/dryer (see page 21-88 ).
contaminants in the with metal flakes or
refrigerant lines. desiccant particles.
The suction pressure The discharge and The A/C compressor Replace the A/C compressor (see page
is high, the discharge suction pressures seal is faulty. 21-80).
pressure is low, and equalize soon after the
the pressures quickly A/C compressor stops.
change when the A/C
disengages
Suction and There is no frost on the The A/C system has a Do the refrigerant leak check (see page
discharge pressures expansion valve, and the leak (very low 21-91), repair any leaks, and recharge
are both low and low-pressure liquid line is refrigerant charge). the A/C system (see page 21 -90).
none of the not cold.
refrigerant lines are
cold
Suction and • The temperature • The discharge Repair or replace the faulty A/C line
discharge pressures around the expansion hose/line is (see page 21-9).
are both low, and the valve is too low clogged or kinked,
expansion valve or compared to the which is restricting
the suction line is temperature around refrigerant flow.
abnormally cold the receiver/dryer. • The suction
• The low pressure hose/line is
(suction) hose/line is clogged or kinked,
cooler than the which is restricting
evaporator. refrigerant flow.
(cont'd)
Test results R elated s y m p to m s P ro b ab le cause R e m ed y

Initially, the suction During extended The evaporator is Run the fan with A/C compressor off to
and discharge operation, the air flow freezing up. warm the evaporator, then test the
pressure are normal, from the vents decreases. evaporator temperature sensor (see
but both become page 21 -66 ). If necessary, replace the
abnormally low evaporator temperature sensor (see
during operation page 21 -66 ).
Suction and • During extended The expansion valve • Replace the expansion valve (see
discharge pressures operation, warm air is stuck closed. page 21-74) and the receiver/dryer
are both low and comes out of the vents, (see page 21-88 ).
there are abnormal the suction pressure • Check the old expansion valve for
temperature changes decreases, and heavy contamination. If contaminants are
at the expansion frost occurs on the low found, replace the component that
valve pressure liquid line. caused the contamination.
• The low pressure liquid
line is cold at the
expansion valve, but
warm after the valve.
• There is frost on the
expansion valve.
The discharge There is no frost on the There is excessive Recover refrigerant (see page 21-88),
pressure is low, the expansion valve outlet, moisture in the A/C then replace the receiver/dryer (see
suction pressure is and the liquid line system. page 21-88 ). Evacuate the system (see
extremely low, and temperature changes page 21-89) and recharge the system
the expansion valve significantly across the (see page 21-90).
outlet is abnormally expansion valve.
warm
The discharge There is frost on the line The evaporator is Recover refrigerant (see page 21-88),
pressure is low, the from the evaporator to internally then replace the receiver/dryer (see
suction pressure is the A/C compressor. contaminated or page 21-88 ). Evacuate the system (see
extremely low, and plugged. page 21-89) and recharge the system
the suction line is (see page 21-90).
abnormally cold
The discharge • There is no frost on the The expansion valve Replace the expansion valve (see page
pressure is low, the expansion valve, and is faulty. 21-76).
suction pressure is the low pressure liquid
extremely low, and line is not cold.
the refrigerant • The liquid line .
temperature doesn't temperatures are
change going similar on both sides of
through the expansion valve.
expansion valve
The discharge There is frost on the Excessive moisture Recover refrigerant (see page 21-88),
pressure is low, the expansion valve. in the system is then replace the receiver/dryer (see
suction pressure is freezing the page 21-88 ). Evacuate the system (see
extremely low, and expansion valve. page 21-89) and recharge the system
the expansion valve (see page 21-90).
is abnormally cold
The discharge There is frost on the line The receiver/dryer is Recover refrigerant (see page 21-88),
pressure is low, the from the receiver/dryer to clogged. then replace the receiver/dryer (see
suction pressure is the expansion valve. page 21-88 ). Evacuate the system (see
extremely low, and page 21 -89) and recharge the system
the high pressure (see page 21-90).
liquid line is
abnormally cold
SERVICE VALVE
(LOW-PRESSURE SIDE)
Clutch Check, page 21-82

Clutch Overhaul, page 21-83
RADIATOR FAN RELAY

Test, page 22-114
A/C DIODE A
Test, step 36 on page 21-57
A/C CONDENSER FAN RELAY

UNDER-HOOD Test, page 22-114
FUSE/RELAY BOX
A/C COMPRESSOR CLUTCH RELAY
Test, page 22-114
FRONT BLOWER MOTOR RELAY
Test, page 22-114
AUXILIARY A/C PRESSURE SWITCH

UNDER-HOOD
RELAY BOX USA
A/C DIODE B
(Located under-dash,
taped to harness)
FAN CONTROL
RELAY
Test, page 22-114
FAN CONTROL RELAY

Test, page 22-114
OUTSIDE AIR TEMPERATURE

PCM
SENSOR
Test, page 21-184
EXPANSION VALVE
.SUNLIGHT SENSOR
/T e s t page 21-185
FRONT MODE CONTROL MOTOR
Test, page 21-69
BLOWER UNIT
Component Replacement page 21-73
FRONT CLIMATE
CONTROL UNIT
DUST AND POLLEN

FILTER
RECIRCULATION CONTROL
MOTOR
T est page 21-70
FRONT BLOWER MOTOR

DRIVER'S AIR MIX
CONTROL MOTOR
T est page 21-68
Replacement page 21-69 PASSENGER'S AIR MIX
CONTROL MOTOR
T est page 21-186
IN-CAR TEMPERATURE
SENSOR CLIMATE CONTROL PANEL
Test, page 21-183 Removal/Installation, page 21-187
EVAPORATOR TEMPERATURE Test- Pa9e 2167
SENSOR
Test, page 21-66
A/C Refrigerant Oil Replacement
Recommended PAG oil: DENSO ND-OIL 8 *08-10 Models

P/N 38897-PR7-A01AH; 120 mL (4 fl-oz) A/C condenser.......50 mL (1 2/3 fl-oz)
Evaporator.............40 mL (1 1/3 fl-oz)
Add the recommended refrigerant oil in the amount
listed if you replace any of the following parts.
Line or hose..... 10 mL (1/3 fl-oz)
• To avoid contamination, do not return the oil to the Leakage repair..... . 25 mL (5/6 fl-oz)
container once dispensed, and never mix it with other A/C compressor.....For A/C compressor
refrigerant oils. replacement, subtract the
• Immediately after using the oil, reinstall the cap on the volume of oil drained from
container, and seal it to avoid moisture absorption. the removed A/C
• Do not spill the refrigerant oil on the vehicle; it may compressor from 125 mL
(4 2/9 fl-oz), and drain the
damage the paint; if it gets on the paint, wash it off calculated volume of oil
immediately. from the new A/C
compressor: 125 mL
f07 Model (4 2/9 fl-oz) — Volume of
A/C condenser..... . 50 mL (1 2/3 fl-oz) removed A/C
Evaporator............. 40 mL (1 1/3 fl-oz) compressor = Volume to
drain from new A/C
Rear evaporator.....40 mL (1 1/3 fl-oz)
compressor.
Line or hose.......... . 10 mL (1/3 fl-oz)
Leakage repair....... 25 mL (5/6 fl-oz) NOTE: Even if no oil is
A/C compressor.....For A/C compressor drained from the removed
replacement, subtract the A/C compressor, don't drain
volume of oil drained from more than 50 mL (1 2/3 fl-oz)
the removed A/C from the new A/C
compressor from 180 mL (6 compressor.
fl-oz), and drain the
calculated volume of oil REMOVED NEW
from the new A/C
compressor: 180 mL (6 fl-oz)
— Volume of removed A/C
compressor = Volume to
drain from new A/C
compressor.

more than 50 mL (1 2/3 fl-oz) A: 125 mL (4 2/9 fl-oz)
from the new A/C
compressor.
REMOVED NEW
A: 180 mL (6 fl-oz)
© ©
® Discharge hose to the A/C compressor (6 x 1.0 mm): 9.8 N-m (1.0 kgf-m, 7.2 Ibf-ft)
© Discharge hose to the A/C condenser (6 x 1.0 mm): 9.8 N-m (1.0 kgf-m, 7.2 Ibf-ft)
© Receiver line to the A/C condenser (6 x 1.0 mm): 9.8 N-m (1.0 kgf-m, 7.2 Ibf-ft)
© Receiver line to the evaporator (6x 1.0 mm): 9.8 N-m (1.0 kgf-m, 7.2 Ibf-ft)
© Sucti on line to the evaporator (6x 1.0 mm): 9.8 N-m (1.0 kgf-m, 7.2 Ibf-ft)
© Suction line to the suction hose (6x 1.0 mm): 9.8 N-m (1.0 kgf-m, 7.2 Ibf-ft)
© Suction hose to the A/C compressor (6x 1.0 mm): 9.8 N-m (1.0 kgf-m, 7.2 Ibf-ft)
© A/C compressor to the A/C compressor bracket (8 x 1.25 mm): 22 N-m (2.2 kgf-m, 16 Ibf-ft)
© A/C compressor bracket to the engine block (10 x 1.25 mm): 44 N-m (4.5 kgf-m, 33 Ibf-ft)
Retrieving DTCs (w itho u t HDS)

The climate control unit has a self-diagnostic function. To run the self-diagnostic function, do the following:
NOTE: Before troubleshooting the climate control system, refer to B-CAN System Diagnosis Test Mode A
Troubleshooting (see page 22-155), and the communication circuit self-diagnostic function test.
2. Press and hold the OFF button. While holding the OFF button, press the REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER button f i ve times
within 10 seconds. Release the OFF button. All the LEDs and LCD segments should blink three times, then the
self-diagnostic begins. Wait for about one minute for the self-diagnostic to complete.
NOTE: The blower motor can be run at any speed regardless of what the panel is displaying.
DRIVER'S SIDE AUTO INDICATOR
If there is any problem in the system, the temperature indicator will light the AUTO indicator and the segment
(A through N) corresponding to the error. The temperature indicator will then alternate every second between
displaying " 88 " (all segments lit) and the error code segment (A through N) and AUTO indicator. To determine the
meaning of the DTC, refer to the DTC Troubleshooting Index.
If there are no problems detected, the segments will not illuminate, and the system will appear to be turned off.
DRIVER'S SIDE TEMPERATURE INDICATOR AUTO INDICATOR
C E B D
A U T O
C ancelin g th e S e lf-d ia g n o s tic Fu n ctio n

3. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0) to cancel the self-diagnostic function. After completing repair work, run the
D B
Checking DTCs by DTC Indicator

NOTE: Before troubleshooting the climate control system, refer to B-CAN System Diagnosis Test Mode A
Troubleshooting (see page 22-155).
To retrieve the DTC, you must run the self-diagnostic function. In the case of multiple problems, the respective indicator
segments will come on. If indicator segments A, C, D, E, F, G, I, L, N, and AUTO indicator come on at the same time, there
may be an open in the common ground wire.
DRIVER S SIDE TEMPERATURE INDICATOR AUTO INDICATOR
C E BD
A U T O
DTC D e te c tio n Ite m

(T e m p e ra tu re
In d ic ato r
S e g m e n t and
AUTO
in d icato r)
a; An open in the in-car temperature sensor circuit (see page 21-138)
B,* A short in the in-car temperature sensor circuit (see page 21-139)
c; An open in the outside air temperature sensor circuit (see page 21-140)
d; A short in the outside air temperature sensor circuit (see page 21-141)
e; ■ An open in the sunlight sensor circuit (see page 21-142)
F,* A short in the sunlight sensor circuit (see page 21-144)
G,* An open in the evaporator temperature sensor circuit (see page 21-145)
h; A short in the evaporator temperature sensor circuit (see page 21-146)
1/ An open in the driver's air mix control motor circuit (see page 21-147)
J/ A short in the driver's air mix control motor circuit (see page 21-148)
k; A problem in the driver's air mix control linkage, door, or motor (see page 21-149)
l; An open in the passenger's air mix control motor circuit (see page 21-150)
m ; A short in the passenger's air mix control motor circuit (see page 21-151)
h ; A problem in the passenger's air mix control linkage, door, or motor (see page 21-152)
a An open or short in the front mode control motor circuit (see page 21-154)
B A problem in the front mode control linkage, doors, or motor (see page 21-156)
C A problem in the front blower motor circuit (see page 21-157)
D An open in the rear in-car temperature sensor circuit (with rear climate control) (see page 21-160)
E A short in the rear in-car temperature sensor circuit (with rear climate control) (see page 21-161)
F An open in the rear air mix control motor circuit (see page 21-162)
G A short in the rear air mix control motor circuit (see page 21-163)
H A problem in the rear air mix control linkage, door, or motor (see page 21-164)
1 An open in the rear mode control motor circuit (see page 21-166)
J A short in the rear mode control motor circuit (see page 21-167)
K A problem in the rear mode control linkage, doors, or motor (see page 21-168)
L A problem in the rear blower motor circuit (see page 21-168)
*: AUTO indicator illuminated
(cont'd)
How to Check for DTCs w ith the HDS


4. Make sure the HDS communicates with the vehicle and the climate control unit. If it doesn't, troubleshoot the DLC
circuit (see page 11-269).
5. Select HVAC/CLIMATE CONTROL in the BODY ELECTRICAL menu.
6 . Select DTCs in the HVAC/CLIMATE CONTROL menu.
NOTE:
Communication circuit self-diagnostic function (*07 EX and EX-L models)
The climate control unit has a communication circuit self-diagnostic function. Perform the following steps to test the
communication circuit.
1. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), and then turn to ON (II).
2. At the climate control panel, press and hold the OFF button. While holding the OFF button, press the rear window
defogger button five times within 10 seconds. Release the OFF button. All the LEDs and LCD segments should blink
three times.
• If none of the LEDs or LCD segments blink, go to climate control panel power and ground circuit troubleshooting
(see page 21-176).
• If one or more LEDs or LCD segments do not blink, but at least one LED or LCD segment blinks, replace the climate
control panel.
• if all LEDs and LCD segments blink, go to step 3.
4. At the rear control panel, set the REAR FAN CONTROL DIAL to oOFF. The REAR TEMPERATURE CONTROL DIAL to
Max Cool, and the REAR MODE CONTROL DIAL to select Vent.
5. Press the REAR CONTROL button five times within 10 seconds. The rear control indicator will come on and then go
off. The communication circuit self-diagnostic function will then start. The rear control indicator will blink to indicate
any problems.
• If no segment other than segment A lights in the climate control panel and the rear climate control indicator does
not blink, the communication circuit is OK.
• If any segment other than segment A lights, and/or the rear control indicator blinks, record the segments and/or
blinks, and then go to step 6.
CLIMATE CONTROL PANEL REAR CONTROL PANEL
liyr^ ATrklDf CAM a m IXTrmi REAR FAN REAR TEMPERATURE REAR MODE
FAN INDICATOR FAN A BUTTON CONTROL DIAL CONTROL DIAL CONTROL DIAL
REAR FANABUTTON
REAR FANVBUTTON
OFF BUTTON REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER BUTTON
FAN INDICATOR
* m l l
TTTTT
A i C D E
G e n e r a l T r o u b le s h o o t in g I n f o r m a t io n ( c o n t 'd )
Example of indication Pattern (3)
1.5 sec
Rear control Rear control

indicator indicator
comes on comes on
Rear control Rear control

indicator indicator
goes o ff ii goes o ff
1.5 sec
.-mi. . ..ih^
Self-diagnosis fin i shed

Self-diagnosis beg i n
6. Refer to the chart below and perform the appropriate d i agnosis for the error indicated by the front fan segments and
rear control indicator.
Front Fan Rear Possible Cause Perform the following tests

Segment control
indicator
(number
of blinks)
b, c, d , • Open in 1G2 to climate control panel • Climate control panel power and ground
and/or E • Open in ground to climate control panel circuit troubleshooting (see page 21-176)
• Faulty climate control panel • Replace the climate control panel
• Faulty rear control panel • Replace the rear control panel
1 ,2 ,3 , ® Open in IG2 to rear control panel • Rear control panel power and ground
and/or 4 • Open in ground to rear control panel circuit troubleshooting (see page 21-177)
• Faulty rear control panel • Replace the rear control panel
• Faulty front climate control panel • Replace the climate control panel
E 4 • Open in IG2 circuit to front climate • Climate control panel power and ground
control unit circuit troubleshooting (see page 21-176)
• Open in ground circuit to front climate • Climate control communication circuit
control unit troubleshooting (see page 21-178)
• Open in communication circuit between • Replace the front climate control unit
climate control unit and all other units
• Short to ground in communication
circuit
• Faulty front climate control unit
E 1 • Open in communication circuit to # Climate control communication circuit
climate control panel and front climate troubleshooting (see page 21-178)
control unit • Replace the climate control panel
• Faulty climate control panel
C 2 • Open in communication circuit to rear • Climate control communication circuit
climate control unit and front climate troubleshooting (see page 21-178)
control unit • Replace the rear climate control unit
• Faulty rear climate control unit
D 4 • Open in communication circuit to rear • Climate control communication circuit
control panel and front climate control troubleshooting (see page 21-178)
unit e Replace the rear control panel
• Faulty rear control panel
Communication Circuit self-diagnostic Function Test ('0 7 Touring model and '08-10 EX, EX-L, and
Touring models)
The climate control unit has a communication circuit self-diagnostic function. Perform the following steps to test the
communication circuit.
2. At the climate control panel, press and hold the OFF button. While holding the OFF button, press the REAR WINDOW
DEFOGGER button five times within 10 seconds. Release the OFF button. All the LEDs and LCD segments should blink
three times.
• If none of the LEDs or LCD segments blink, go to climate control panel power and ground circuit troubleshooting
(see page 21-176).
• If one or more LEDs or LCD segments do not blink, but at least one LED or LCD segment blinks, replace the climate
control panel.
• If all LEDs and LCD segments blink, go to step 3.
4. At the rear climate control panel press and hold the OFF button. While holding the OFF button, press the REAR FAN ▼
button five times within 10 seconds. Release the OFF button. All the LCD segments should blink three times.
• If none of the LCD segments blink, go to rear climate control panel power and ground circuit troubleshooting (see
page 21-177).
• If one or more LCD segments do not blink, but at least one LCD segment does blink, replace the rear climate control
panel.
• If all LCD segments blink, go to step 5.
6. At the climate control panel, press and hold the FAN A button and then the OFF button. While holding both buttons,
the fan indicator will light the segment A. If there is any problem in the system, the fan indicator will light
corresponding segment (B through E). Record any segments that light and go to step 7.
(cont'd)
G e n e r a l T r o u b le s h o o t in g In f o r m a t io n ( c o n t 'd )
8. At the rear climate control panel, press and hold the REAR FAN A button and then the OFF button. While holding both
buttons, the fan indicator will light the segment A. If there is any problem in the system, the fan indicator will light the
corresponding segment (B through E).
• If no segment other than segment A light in either the climate control panel or the rear climate control panel,
communication circuit is OK.
• If any segment other than segment A light, record the segments and then go to step 9.
CLIMATE CONTROL PANEL REAR CLIMATE CONTROL PANEL
FAN INDICATOR FAN A BUTTON REAR FAN INDICATOR REAR FAN A BUTTON
FAN INDICATOR REAR FAN INDICATOR
T T T T l T T T T T
A B C D E A B C D E
9. Refer to the chart below and perform the appropriate diagnosis for the error indicated by the front and rear fan
segments.
Front Fan Rear Fan Possible Cause Perform the following tests
Segment Segment
b , c, a • Open in IG2 to climate control panel • Climate control panel power and ground
and/or E • Open in ground to climate control panel circuit troubleshooting (see page 21-176)
• Faulty climate control panel • Replace the climate control panel
• Faulty rear climate control panel • Replace the rear climate control panel
B,C, D, • Open in IG2 to rear climate control panel • Rear climate control panel power and
and/or E • Open in ground to rear climate control ground circuit troubleshooting (see page
panel 21-177)
• Faulty rear climate control panel • Replace the rear climate control panel
• Faulty front climate control panel • Replace the climate control panel
E E • Open in IG2 circuit to front climate • Climate control panel power and ground
control unit circuit troubleshooting (see page 21-176)
• Open in ground circuit to front climate • Climate control communication circuit
control unit troubleshooting (see page 21-178)
• Open in communication circuit between • Replace the front climate control unit
front climate control unit and all other
units
• Short to ground in communication
circuit
• Faulty front climate control unit
E B • Open in communication circuit to • Climate control communication circuit
control unit • Replace the climate control panel
• Faulty front climate control panel
C C • Open in communication circuit to rear • Climate control communication circuit
climate control unit and climate control troubleshooting (see page 21-178)
unit • Replace the rear climate control unit
• Faulty rear climate control unit
D E • Open in communication circuit to rear • Climate control communication circuit
control unit • Replace the rear climate control panel
• Faulty rear climate control panel
G e n e r a l T r o u b le s h o o t in g In f o r m a t io n ( c o n t'd )
Displaying Sensor Inputs at the Front Climate Control Unit

The climate control unit has a mode that displays sensor inputs it receives. This mode shows you what the climate
control unit is receiving from each of the sensors, one at a tim e, and it can help you determine if a sensor is faulty.
Check these items before using the sensor input display mode
1.Turn the ignition switch to ON (II), and check the recirculation door function; press the recirculation button to switch
from FRESH to RECIRC. The air volume and sound should change slightly.
2. Set the temperature control knob to the desired test temperature. When selecting the test temperature, note these
items:
• "Lo" temperature setting will default to MAX COOL, VENT, and RECIRC.
• "Hi" temperature setting will default to MAX HOT, FLOOR, and FRESH.
• 61 through 89 °F settings will use the automatic climate control logic.
To run the sensor input display mode, follow these steps

2. Press and hold both the AUTO and recirculation buttons, then start the engine.
3. After the engine starts, release the buttons. The display panel control unit will flash the sensor number and then the
value for that sensor. Record the value displayed.
4. To advance to the next sensor, press the rear window defogger button.
NOTE:
• The sensor values will be displayed in degrees Celsius (°C) or an alphanumeric code. Use the chart to convert the
value to degrees Fahrenheit (°F).
• Ifthe sensor value displays "Er," this indicates there is an open or short in the circuit or sensor. Checkfor DTCs
using the HDS, or refer to checking DTCs by DTC indication to check for DTCs.
• If necessary, compare the sensor input display to an alike, known-good vehicle under the same test conditions.
• If the sensor is out of the normal range, refer to the sensor test or substitute a known-good sensor, and recheck.
Sensor Item Displayed Value

1 In-car Temperature °C
2 Outside Air Temperature °C
3 Solar Radiation Sensor Value: Dark = 00, Flashlight = 04, Cloudy =10, Sunny = 65 10 kcal/m2-h
4 Evaporator Outlet Air Temperature °C
■ 5 Driver's Air Mix Opening (Low value indicates cooler air distribution, higher value % of opening
indicates warmer air distribution)
6 Passenger's Air Mix Opening (Low value indicates cooler air distribution, higher % of opening
value indicates warmer air distribution)
7 Driver's Vent Temperature Air Out (TAO-Dr) °C
8 Rear In-car Temperature °c
9 Rear Air Mix Opening (Low value indicates cooler air distribution, higher value % of opening
indicates warmer air distribution)
10 Rear Vent Temperature Air Out (TAO-Rr) °C
Celsius to Fahrenheit Conversion Table
®c °F *c ®F ®C ®F ®C °F ®C ®F
0 32 10 50 20 68 30 86 40 104
1 34 11 52 21 70 31 88 41 106
2 36 12 54 22 72 32 90 42 108
3 37 13 55 23 73 33 91 43 109
4 39 14 57 24 75 34 93 44 111
5 41 15 59 25 77 35 95 45 113
6 43 16 61 26 79 36 97 46 115
7 45 17 63 27 81 37 99 47 117
8 46 18 64 28 82 38 100 48 118
9 48 19 66 29 84 39 102 49 120
®C °F °C ®F ®C ®F ®C ®F ®C ®F
50 122 60 140 70 158 80 176 90 194
51 124 61 142 71 160 81 178 91 196
52 126 62 144 72 162 82 180 92 198
53 127 63 145 73 163 83 181 93 199
54 128 64 147 74 165 84 183 94 201
55 131 65 149 75 167 85 185 95 203
56 133 66 151 76 169 86 187 96 205
57 135 67 152 77 170 87 188 97 207
58 136 68 154 78 172 88 190 98 208
59 139 69 158 79 174 89 192 99 210
Alphanumeric Conversion Table

Display Reading ®C ®F %
(Alphanumeric)
A1 thru A9 —1 thru - 9 30 thru 16 —1 thru —9
B0 thru B9 —10 thru —19 14 thru - 2 - 1 0 th ru - 1 9
CO thru C9 —20 thru —29 —4 thru - 2 0 - 2 0 th ru - 2 9
DO thru D9 - 3 0 thru - 3 9 - 2 2 thru - 3 8 —30 thru —39
E0 thru E9 - 4 0 th ru - 4 9 —40 thru —58
F0 thru F9 + 100 thru +109
5. To cancel the sensor input display mode, press the AUTO button or turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
D T C T r o u b le s h o o tin g In d e x

DTC Detection Item or Symptom ECU DTC type Page
B1200 Communication bus line error Front climate Loss of DTC Troubleshooting
control unit communication (see page 22-170)
81202 Front climate control unit internal error Front climate Internal error DTC Troubleshooting
control unit (see page 21-171)
B1205 Front climate control unit lost Front climate Loss of DTC Troubleshooting
communication with gauge control control unit communication (see page 21-172)
module (VSP/NE message)
module (ENGTEMP message)
module (ILLUMI message)
B1221 An open in the rear mode control motor Rear climate Signal error DTC Troubleshooting
circuit control unit (see page 21-166)
B1222 A short in the rear mode control motor Rear climate Signal error DTC Troubleshooting
B1223 A problem in the rear blower motor Rear climate Signal error DTC Troubleshooting
B1224 A short in the rear in-car temperature Rear climate Signal error DTC Troubleshooting
sensor circuit (with rear climate control) control unit (see page 21-161)
B1225 An open in the in-car temperature Front climate Signal error DTC Troubleshooting
sensor circuit control unit (see page 21-138)
B1226 A short in the in-car temperature sensor Front climate Signal error DTC Troubleshooting
B1227 An open in the outside air temperature Front climate Signal error DTC Troubleshooting
B1228 A short in the outside air temperature Front climate Signal error DTC Troubleshooting
B1229 An open in the sunlight sensor circuit Front climate Signal error DTC Troubleshooting
B1230 A short in the sunlight sensor circuit Front climate Signal error DTC Troubleshooting
B1231 An open in the evaporator temperature Front climate Signal error DTC Troubleshooting
B1232 A short in the evaporator temperature Front climate Signal error DTC Troubleshooting
B B

DTC Detection Item or Symptom ECU DTC type Page
B1233 An open in the driver's air mix control Front climate Signal error DTC Troubleshooting
motor circuit control unit (see page 21-147)
B1234 A short in the driver's air mix control Front climate Signal error DTC Troubleshooting
B1235 A problem in the driver's air mix control Front climate Signal error DTC Troubleshooting
linkage, door, or motor control unit (see page 21-149)
B1236 An open in the passenger's air mix Front climate Signal error DTC Troubleshooting
control motor circuit control unit (see page 21-150)
B1237 A short in the passenger's air mix Front climate Signal error DTC Troubleshooting
B1238 A problem in the passenger's air mix Front climate Signal error DTC Troubleshooting
control linkage, door, or motor control unit (see page 21-152)
B1239 An open or short in the front mode Front climate Signal error DTC Troubleshooting
B1240 A problem in the front mode control Front climate Signal error DTC Troubleshooting
linkage, doors, or motor control unit (see page 21-156)
B1241 A problem in the front blower motor Front climate Signal error DTC Troubleshooting
B1244 An open in the rear air mix control Rear climate Signal error DTC Troubleshooting
B1245 A short in the rear air mix control motor Rear climate Signal error DTC Troubleshooting
B1246 A problem in the rear air mix control Rear climate Signal error DTC Troubleshooting
linkage, door, or motor control unit (see page 21-164)
B1248 A problem in the rear mode control Rear climate Signal error DTC Troubleshooting
linkage, doors, or motor control unit (see page 21-168)
B1249 An open in the rear in-car temperature Rear climate Signal error DTC Troubleshooting
sensor circuit (with rear climate control) control unit (see page 21-160)
S y m p to m T r o u b le s h o o t in g In d e x
S y m p to m D ia g n o stic pro c ed u re A lso check for

The front blower Probable cause: front climate control unit • HVAC DTCs (see page 21-110)
and heater malfunction • Blown fuse No,30 (10 A) in the driver's
controls and the Do the front climate control unit power and under-dash fuse/relay box
A/C system do ground circuit troubleshooting (see page • Poor ground at G504 (see page 22-49)
not work 21-179) • Poor or loose connections at the terminals
The rear blower Probable cause: Rear climate control unit • HVAC DTCs (see page 21-110)
and heater malfunction • Blown fuse No.30 (10 A) in the driver's
controls and the Do the rear climate control unit power and under-dash fuse/relay box
A/C system do ground circuit troubleshooting (see page u Poor ground at G652 (see page 22-57)
not work 21-180) • Poor or loose connections at the terminals
Climate control Probable cause: Climate control panel • Blown fuse No.30 (10 A) in the driver's
panel does not malfunction under-dash fuse/relay box
work Do the climate control panel power and ground • Poor ground at G504 (see page 22-49)
circuit troubleshooting (see page 21-176) • Poor or loose connections at the terminals
Rear control Probable cause: Rear control panel malfunction • Blown fuse No.30 (10 A) in the driver's
panel does not Do the rear control panel power and ground under-dash fuse/relay box
work circuit troubleshooting (see page 21-177) • Poor ground at G601 (see page 22-51)
• Poor or loose connections at the terminals
The A/C Probable cause: A/C pressure switch circuit • . HVAC DTCs (see page 21-110)
compressor malfunction • Powertrain DTCs (see page 11-3)
clutch and the Do the A/C signal circuit troubleshooting (see • Poor or loose connections at the terminals
A/C condenser/ page 11-377)
radiator fans are
inoperative, but NOTE: The A/C pressure switch can
the blower and malfunction without setting a DTC
heater controls
work
The A/C Probable cause: No power to the A/C • HVAC DTCs (see page 21-110)
compressor compressor clutch • Blown fuse No.12 (7.5 A) in the under-hood
clutch does not Do the A/C compressor clutch circuit fuse/relay box
engage, but the troubleshooting (see page 21-62) • A/C system pressure is normal (see page
A/C condenser/ 21-98)
radiator fans • Poor or loose connections at the terminals
operate, and the
blower and
heater controls
work
The A/C Probable cause: Condenser/radiator fan low • HVAC DTCs (see page 21-110)
condenser fan speed circuit malfunction • Powertrain DTCs (see page 11-3)
and/or the Do the radiator and A/C condenser fan low • Blown fuse No.9 (30 A) in the under-hood
radiator fan do speed circuit troubleshooting (see page 21-54) fuse/relay box
not run with the • Poor ground at G301 (see page 22-33)
A/C on • Poor or loose connections at the terminals
The condenser/ Probable cause: Malfunction in the fan(s) high • HVAC DTCs (see page 21-110)
radiator fans do speed circuit • Powertrain DTCs (see page 11-3)
not run at high Do the following troubleshooting as needed: • Blown fuse No.11 (30 A) in the under-hood
speed, but do • A/C condenser fan high speed circuit fuse/relay box
run at low speed troubleshooting (see page 21-58) • Poor ground at G201 (see page 22-33)
• Radiator fan high speed circuit • Poor or loose connections at the terminals
Voice Probable cause: Communication problem • HVAC DTCs (see page 21-110)
commands do between the climate control unit and the • Navi system link (see page 23-276)
not work navigation system • Poor or loose connections at the terminals
Do the navigation communication line circuit
H IP
Symptom D iag n o stic p rocedu re A lso check fo r

The blower fan Probable cause: Engine coolant temperature HVAC DTCs (see page 21-110)
runs slower than (ECT) circuit malfunction • Powertrain DTCs (see page 11-3)
expected in cold Troubleshoot the ECT sensor circuit: • Blower motor operation
weather (when • ECT sensor 2 circuit low voltage (see page
in AUTO mode) 11-231)
• ECT sensor 2 circuit high voltage (see page
11-233)
TheA/C Probable cause: The A/C system is very low on # HVAC DTCs (see page 21-110)
compressor refrigerant, indicating a possible leak • If there is no leak and the refrigerant level is
clutch cycles Do the refrigerant leak check (see page 21-91) normal, do the A/C compressor clutch
rapidly on and and repair any leaks. Replace the receiver/dryer circuit troubleshooting (see page 21-62),
off (see page 21-88), then recharge the system to and look for an intermittent problem.
specifications (see page 21-90)
Warm air comes Probable cause: The A/C system is overcharged • Incorrect tension or abnormal wear on the
out of the vents, (too much refrigerant), or the A/C condenser is drive belt. Replace the belt and/or the belt
and the high malfunctioning tensioner as needed.
pressure liquid Recover A/C refrigerant (see page 21-88), then • Proper operation of the A/C
line is very hot check the A/C condenser for restrictions or poor condenser/radiator fans. Repair as needed.
airflow. Repair as needed. Recharge the system • Signs of an overheated engine. Repair as
to specifications (see page 21-90) needed.
Warm air comes Probable cause: The A/C system is low on # HVAC DTCs (see page 21-110)
out of the vents. refrigerant, indicating a possible leak • Add refrigerant oil depending on the part
The suction line Do the refrigerant leak check (see page 21-91) you replaced (see page 21-108)
and the specifications (see page 21-90)
discharge line is
warm to hot
Warm air comes Probable cause: Excessive air and/or moisture • HVAC DTCs (see page 21-110)
out of the vents. in the system, indicating a possible leak • Check the amount of refrigerant oil in the
The suction line Do the refrigerant leak check (see page 21-91) system. Adjust the oil level as needed.
the discharge specifications (see page 21-90)
line is warm to
hot, and there is
no frost on the
expansion valve
Warm air comes Probable cause: A restriction in the HVAC DTCs (see page 21-110)
out of the vents. high-pressure side of the system
The liquid line or Recover A/C refrigerant (see page 21-88), then
the condenser check the A/C condenser for restrictions or poor
outlet is airflow. Repair as needed. Recharge the system
abnormally cool, to specifications (see page 21-90)
or there is frost
or condensation
on the
receiver/dryer
There is heavy Probable cause: A restriction in the HVAC DTCs (see page 21-110)
frost or low-pressure side of the system
condensation on Recover A/C refrigerant (see page 21-88), then
the expansion check the suction line and the expansion valve
valve, and frost for restrictions. Repair as needed. Recharge the
on the suction system to specifications (see page 21-90)
line ............. ' .........
(cont'd)
S y m p t o m T r o u b le s h o o t in g In d e x ( c o n t'd )
Symptom D ia g n o stic p ro c e d u re A lso ch eck fo r

W a rm air co m es P ro b ab le cause: T h e exp an sio n v a lv e is stuck • HVAC DTCs (see page 21-110)
o u t o f th e ven ts, closed • Check the old expansion valve for
an d th e re is fro s t R eplace th e ex p an sio n v a lv e (see pa ge 21-7 6) co n tam in atio n . If co n tam in a n ts are fo u n d ,
on th e exp ansion replace th e A /C system co m p o n en t th a t
valv e caused th e c o n tam in atio n .
T h e te m p e ra tu re P ro b ab le cause: T h e exp an s io n v a lv e is stuck • HVAC DTCs (see page 21-110)
o f th e liq uid line o p en • Check th e old exp an sio n v alv e fo r
is th e s am e on R eplace th e exp an sio n v a lv e (se e pa g e 21-76) co n tam in a tio n . If c o n tam in an ts are fo u n d ,
both sides o f th e replace th e A /C system c o m p o n e n t th a t
exp ansion v a lv e , caused th e co n tam in a tio n .
an d th e
ev a p o ra to r coil
o r suction line
has heavy
co nd ensation
W a rm air co m es P ro b ab le cause: A /C c o m p re ss o r failu re @HVAC DTCs (see page 21-110)
o u t o f th e ven ts, D o th e A /C system te s t (see p a g e 2 1 -98), an d • A d d refrig e ra n t oil d e p en d in g on th e p a rt
but A/C co rre c t an y p ro b lem s. If necessary, replace th e you replaced (see page 21-108)
co m m a n d is A /C co m p res so r (see page 2 1 -1 9 0 )
n o rm al (A /C
sw itch an d
clutch are on)
D river's and P ro b ab le causes: T h e recircu latio n co ntrol d o o r ® HVAC DTCs (see page 21-110)
passeng er's side o r th e a ir m ix d o o r is m alfu n c tio n in g • P oor o r loose co nn ectio ns a t th e te rm in a ls
vent D o th e fo llo w in g tro u b le sh o o tin g :
te m p e ra tu re s • F ro n t a ir m ix co ntrol m o to r te s t (see p a g e
v a ry by m o re 21-68)
than 20 °F(11 °C) • R e circulatio n co ntrol m o to r circu it
tro u b le s h o o tin g (see p a g e 2 1 -1 7 3 )
H D S does no t T ro u b le s h o o t th e DLC circu it (se e p a g e 11-269)
c o m m u n ic a te
w ith th e c lim a te
co ntrol u n it or
th e veh ic le
Insu fficient 1. C heck th e co o la n t level (see p a g e 10-6) ® H V A C D TCs (see page 21-110)
h eatin g 2. C heck th e ra d ia to r cap (see p a g e 10-3) • D a m a g e d cy lin d er head gasket
3. C heck th e c o o la n t te m p e ra tu re d u rin g
n o rm a l o p e ra tio n
4. C heck th e o p era tio n o f th e h e a te r v a lv e (see
page 21-79)
5. C heck th e h e ater core in le t ho se
te m p e ra tu re :
• If it is C O LD , check fo r restrictio n s in th e
hose, a d a m a g e d o r leakin g th e rm o s ta t, o r
a d a m a g e d o r leaking w a te r p u m p
• If it is H O T , check fo r restrictio ns in th e
h e ate r core. Back flu sh o r rep lace th e
h e a ter co re
6. D o th e fro n t a ir m ix control m o to r te s t (see
page 21-68)
7. C heck th e b lo w e r m o to r fo r ob stru ctio n s
8. C heck fo r a ir leaks aro u n d th e ducts an d
ve n ts
H D
S y s te m D e s c r ip tio n
The air conditioning (A/C) system removes heat from the passenger compartment by transferring heat from the ambient
air to the evaporator. The A/C refrigerant expands in the evaporator, and the evaporator becomes very cold and absorbs
the heat from the ambient air. The blower fan pushes air across the evaporator where the heat is absorbed, and then it
blows the cool air into the passenger compartment.
EXPANSION VALVE
(Meters the requi red amount of
DESICCANT L
(Traps debris, and I I LOW PRESSURE VAPOR
removes moisture)
This vehicle uses HFC-134a (R-134a) refrigerant, which does not contain chlorofluorocarbons. Pay attention to the
following service items:
• Do not mix refrigerants CFC-12 (R-12) and HFC-134a (R-134a). They are not compatible.
• Use only the recommended polyalkyleneglycol (PAG) refrigerant oil (DENSO ND-OIL 8) designed for the R-134a A/C
compressor. Intermixing the recommended (PAG) refrigerant oil with any other refrigerant oil will result in A/C
compressor failure.
• All A/C system parts (A/C compressor, discharge line, suction line, evaporator, A/C condenser, receiver/dryer,
expansion valve, O-rings for joints) are designed for refrigerant R-134a. Do not exchange with R-12 parts.
• Use a halogen gas leak detector designed for refrigerant R-134a.
• R-12 and R-134a refrigerant servicing equipment are not interchangeable. Use only a recovery/recycling/charging
station that is U.L.-listed and is certified to meet the requirements of SAE J2210 to service the R-134a air conditioning
systems.
• Always recover refrigerant R-134a with an approved recovery/recycling/charging station before disconnecting any
A/C fitting.
(cont'd)
S y s te m D e s c r ip t io n ( c o n t 'd )
A/C Pressure Switch

The A/C pressure switch consists of a high-low pressure switch (A/C pressure switch A) and a middle pressure switch
(A/C pressure switch B).
• High-low pressure switch
If the refrigerant pressure becomes too high (due to blockage or lack of airflow at the condenser), or too low (due to
. leakage), the A/C pressure switch stops the A/C request signal to the PCM and the A/C compressor stops operating.
• Middle pressure switch
If the refrigerant pressure goes above 1,520 kPa (15.5 kgf/cm2, 221 psi), the A/C pressure switch closes to signal the
PCM to change the speed of the A/C condenser fan and radiator fan to high. When the refrigerant pressure drops
below 930 kPa (9.5 kgf/cm2, 135 psi), the A/C pressure switch opens to signal the PCM to change the speed of the A/C
condenser fan and radiator fan to low.
A/C Pressure Switch Operation
A/C System Pressure Hi-Low Medium System Operation
Pressure Pressure
Switch Switch
Abnormally low pressure: OPEN OPEN The PCM disengages the A/C compressor
Below 196 kPa (2.0 kgf/cm2, 28 psi) clutch. Radiator and A/C condenser fan
temperature
Normal operating pressure: CLOSED OPEN The A/C compressor clutch cycles. The
• Above 225 kPa (2.3 kgf/cm2, 33 psi) radiator and A/C condenser fans operate at
• Below 930 kPa (9.5 kgf/cm2, 213 psi) low speed.
High operating pressure: CLOSED CLOSED The A/C compressor clutch cycles. The
• Above 1,520 kPa (15.5 kgf/cm2, 221 psi) radiator and A/C condenser fans operate at
• Below 2,550 kPa (26.0 kgf/cm2, 370 psi) high speed.
Abnormally high pressure: OPEN CLOSED The PCM disengages the A/C compressor
More than 3,140 kPa (32 kgf/cm2, 455 psi) clutch. Radiator and A/C condenser fan
temperature
NOTE: When the A/C system pressure is between the listed ranges, the pressure switches are in a transition state. The
switch behavior depends upon whether the pressure is rising or falling.
C lim a te C o n tro l D o o r P ositions
HOT COOL
DEFROSTER
DOOR
(VENT)
AIR MIX
DOOR
HEAT/VENT
DOOR
(HEAT)
(cont'd)
HOT COOL
if f
(HEAT/DiF)
^557
TTT
(DEF)
i m
Dual A ir M ix Control System
Driver's side: HOT Driver's side: COOL

Passenger's side: COOL Passenger's side: HOT
DRIVER'S
AIR MIX DOOR
AIR MIX DOOR

i-Dual Zone and i-Tri Zone Climate Control system (With navigation system)
The "i-Dual zone" climate control system automatically controls the temperature and the vent mode of the air direction
to the driver's and passenger's side, depending on the angle of the sun, and the direction of the vehicle. It calculates
information such as date, time, longitude, and latitude from the navigation system, as well as the radiant strength of the
sun from the sunlight sensor, to determine the appropriate mode position and temperature to be directed to each side.
The "i-Tri zone" climate control system is an addition of the automatic controls with the temperature and the vent mode
of the air direction to the rear section to the "i-Dual zone" climate control system.
FRONT CLIMATE CONTROL UNIT
With
i-Tri zone
I
REAR CLIMATE
CONTROL UNIT
FRONT DUAL AIR MIX CONTROL

I
REAR AIR MIX CONTROL
DRIVER'S
REAR AIR MIX DOOR
In the event that the navigation system malfunctions, or when driving in areas where the navigation system cannot
determine the vehicle position (non-coverage areas, tunnels, etc.), the climate control system will operate the same as a
vehicle without a navigation system.
m
Climate Control Unit Inputs and Outputs

FRONT CLIMATE CONTROL UNIT 30P CONNECTOR
s h e .
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 > < C 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
15 16 17 18 19 21 22 X 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30

color name
1 BLU ACS Outputs A/C on/off signal With ignition switch ON (II), A/C pressure
switch ON, and A/C compressor clutch ON:
less than 0.5 V
With ignition switch ON (II), A/C pressure
switch ON, and A/C compressor clutch
OFF: battery voltage
2 RED/YEL MODE1 Inputs front mode control With ignition switch ON (II): less than 0.5 V
3 RED/BLU MODE2 Inputs front mode control With ignition switch ON (II): less than 0.5 V
4 WHT/BLU MODE3 Inputs front mode control With ignition switch ON (II): less than 0.5 V
5. YEL/GRN MODE4 Inputs front mode control With ignition switch ON (II): less than 0.5 V
6* GRN/BLK CLK Communication signal from With ignition switch ON (II): pulses
navigation unit
7 LT BLU B-CAN B-CAN communication signal With ignition switch ON (II): pulses
8 YEL/RED M-VENT Outputs front mode control With ignition switch ON (II) and front mode
9 YEL/BLU M-DEF Outputs front mode control With ignition switch ON (II) and front mode
10 GRN/BLK M-COOL Drives driver's air mix control With ignition switch ON (II) and driver's air
(DR) motor COOL side mix control motor change to the max HOT
SHE.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
CM
o
CM
CM
15 16 17 18 19 21 X 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30

color name
11 PNK/BLU M-HOT Drives driver's air mix control With ignition switch ON (II) and driver's air
(DR) motor HOT side mix control motor change to the max
COOL position: less than 0.5 V at several
seconds
12 YEL/BLK M-COOL Drives passenger's air mix With ignition switch ON (II) and
(AS) control motor COOL side passenger's air mix control motor change
to the max HOT position: less than 0.5 V at
several seconds
13 LT GRN M-HOT (AS) Drives passenger's air mix With ignition switch ON (II) and
control motor HOT side passenger's air mix control motor change
to the max COOL position: less than 0.5 V at
several seconds
14 BLK/YEL IG2 Power source for control unit With ignition switch ON (II): battery voltage
(IG2)
15 LT REC Drives recirculation control With ignition switch ON (II) and

GRN/RED motor RECIRCULATE side recirculation control motor change to the
FRESH position: connected to
16 GRN/WHT FRS Drives recirculation control With ignition switch ON (II) and
motor FRESH side recirculation control motor change to the
RECIRCU position: connected to
17* YEL/GRN SO Communication signal from With ignition switch ON (II): pulses
navigation unit
18 PUR TR Detects in-car temperature With ignition switch ON (II): about 1.0-4.0 V
sensor signal (depending on in-car temperature)
19 PNK TAM Detects outside air temperature With ignition switch ON (II): about 1.0-4.0 V
sensor signal (depending on outside air temperature)
20 ORN TSUN Detects sunlight sensor signal With ignition switch ON (II) and sensor out
of direct sunlight: 3.6-3.7 V or more
With ignition switch ON (II) and sensor in
direct sunlight: 3.3-3.5 V or less
color name
21 BRN TEVA Detects evaporator With ignition switch ON (II): about 1.0-4.0 V
temperature sensor signal (depending on evaporator temperature)
22 GRY S5V Provides motor reference With ignition switch ON (II): about 5.0V
voltage

DATA between front climate control
unit, climate control panel, rear
control panel, and rear climate
control unit
24* RED/BLU SI Communication signal to With ignition switch ON (II): pulses

navigation unit
25 YEL AMD-P Outputs passenger's air mix With ignition switch ON (II): about 1.5-4.5 V
(AS) control motor (depending on passenger's air mix control
potentiometer signal motor position)
26 PNK/BLK AMD-P Outputs driver's air mix control With ignition switch ON (II): about 0.5-4.5 V
(DR) motor (depending on driver's air mix control
potentiometer signal motor position)
27 BLU/RED BLW-V Feedback signal of front power With ignition switch ON (II): about 0 V-
transistor drain voltage battery voltage (depending on front blower
motor speed)
28 BLU/YEL BLW-G Outputs front power transistor With ignition switch ON (II) and fan control
gate voltage switch OFF: less than 0.5 V
switch ON:about 4.0 V-battery voltage
(depending on front blower motor control)
29 WHT/GRN S-COM Sensor ground Less than 0.5 V at all times
30 BLK GND Ground for front climate Less than 0.5 V at all times
control unit (G504)
With navigation system
S y s te m D e s c r ip tio n ( c o n t'd )
REAR CLIMATE CONTROL UNIT 22P CONNECTOR
1 / / / ] / > < 6 7 8 9 10
CM
CM
o
CM
11 / / 16 X 17 18 19 21

color name
1 RED/YEL M-PT Outputs rear mode control With ignition switch ON (II): about 0.5-4.5 V
motor (depending on rear mode control motor
6 YEL/RED M-VENT Outputs rear mode control With ignition switch ON (II) and rear mode
7 YEL/BLU M-DEF Outputs rear mode control With ignition switch ON (II) and rear mode
8 PNK/BLU M-HOT Drives rear air mix control With ignition switch ON (II) and rear air mix
motor HOT side control motor change to the max COOL
9 GRN/BLK M-COOL Drives rear air mix control With ignition switch ON (II) and rear air mix
motor COOL side control motor change to the max HOT
10 BLK/YEL IG2 Power source for control unit With ignition switch ON (II): battery voltage
(IG2)
B B

color name
11* LT BLU TR Detects rear in-car temperature With ignition switch ON (II): about 1.0-4.0 V
sensor signal (depending on rear in-car temperature)
16 PUR S5V Provides motor reference With ignition switch ON (II): about 5.0V
voltage

DATA between front climate control
unit, climate control panel, rear
control panel, and rear climate
control unit
18 BLU/YEL BLW-G Outputs rear power transistor With ignition switch ON (II) and fan control
gate voltage switch OFF: less than 0.5 V
switch ON:about 4.0 V-battery voltage
(depending on rear blower motor control)
19 BLU/RED BLW-V Feedback signal of rear power With ignition switch ON (II): about 0 V-
transistor drain voltage battery voltage (depending on rear blower
motor speed)
20 PNK/BLK AMD-P Outputs rear air mix control With ignition switch ON (II): about 0.5-4.5 V
motor (depending on rear air mix control motor
21 YEL/BLK S-COM Sensor ground Less than 0.5 V at all times
22 BLK GND Ground for rear climate control Less than 0.5 V at all times
unit (G652)
With rear climate control
C ir c u it D ia g r a m
UNDER-HOODFUSE/RELAYBOX IGNITIONSWITCH DRIVER'SUNDER-DASHFUSE/RELAYBOX

N20
RADIATOR
f FAN
MOTOR
BLK
GRN/YEL -
;CANline *1: '07 model *3: Withautomaticlighting
*2: '08-10 models *4; Without automaticlighting
FRONTCLIMATECONTROLUNIT
D T C T r o u b le s h o o tin g
DTC B1225 or DTC indicator A and AUTO: 8. Check for continuity between front climate control
unit 30P connector terminal No. 29 and in-car
An Open in the in-car Temperature Sensor
Circuit
1. Clear the DTC by turning the ignition switch to Wire side of female terminals
2. Operate the climate control system in several modes.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
CM
CM
CO
CO
29 30
CM
24 25 26
CM
o
15 16 17 18 19 21 22 X
WHT/GRN
Is DTC B1225 or A and AUTO indicated?
YES-Go to step 4.
WHT/GRN
connections on the in-car temperature sensor
c ir e u it . il
IN-CAR TEMPERATURE SENSOR 2P CONNECTOR
5. Remove the in-car temperature sensor (see page
21-183) and test it (see page 21-183). Is there continuity?
Does the in-car temperature sensor test OK? YES-Check for loose wires or poor connections at the
front climate control unit 30P connector and at the
YES-Go to step 6. in-car temperature sensor 2P connector. If the
connections are good, substitute a known-good front
NO-Replace the in-car temperature sensor.B
climate control unit, and recheck. If the
6. Disconnect the front climate control unit 30P symptom/indication goes away, replace the original
connector. front climate control unit (see page 21-188).H
7. Check for continuity between front climate control NO-Repair an open in the wire between the front
unit 30P connector terminal No. 18 and in-car climate control unit and the in-car temperature
temperature sensor 2P connector terminal No. 2. sensor.B

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
CM
o
CM
CM
15 16 17 18 19
CM
CM
CM
o
CO
CM
00
CO
21 X 23 25 29
PUR
PUR
IN-CAR TEMPERATURE SENSOR 2P CONNECTOR

YES-Go to step 8.
NO-Repair an open in the wire between the front
climate control unit and the in-car temperature
sensor.B
I S !
DTC B122S or DTC Indicator B and AUTO: 8. Check for continuity between front climate control
unit 30P connector terminals No. 18 and No. 29.
A S h o r t in t h e I n - c a r T e m p e r a t u r e S e n s o r
C irc u it
FRONT CLIMATE CONTROL UNIT SOP CONNECTOR
1. Clearthe DTC by turning the ignition switch to
2. Operate the climate control system in several modes. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 X 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 X 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30
PUR WHT/GRN
Is DTC B1226 or B and AUTO indicated?
YES-Go to step 4.
5. Remove the in-car temperature sensor (see page
21-183) and test it (see page 21-183). YES-Repair a short in the wires between the front
climate control unit and the in-car temperature
Does the in-car temperature sensor test OK? sensor.B
YES-Go to step 6. NO-Substitute a known-good front climate control
unit, and recheck. If the symptom/indication goes
NO-Replace the in-car temperature sensor.B
away, replace the original front climate control unit
6. Disconnect the front climate control unit 30P (see page 21-188).B
connector.
7. Check for continuity between front climate control

CD
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 10 11 12 13 14
15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 X 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30
PUR
is there continuity?
D T C T r o u b le s h o o t in g ( c o n t'd )
DTC B1227 or DTC indicator C and AUTO: 8. Check for continuity between front climate control
unit 30P connector terminal No. 29 and outside air
An Open in the Outside Air Temperature
Sensor Circuit
1. Clear the DTC by turning the ignition switch to FRONT CLIMATE CONTROL UNIT 30P CONNECTOR
LOCK (0), and then turn to ON (II). Wire side of female terminals
Is DTC B1227 or C and AUTO indicated?
YES-Go to step 4.
connections on the outside air temperature sensor
circuit.!
4. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). OUTSIDE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR 2P CONNECTOR
5. Remove the outside air temperature sensor (see page
21-184) and test it (see page 21-184). Is there continuity?
Does the outside air temperature sensor test OK? YES-Check for loose wires or poor connections at the
YES-Go to step 6. outside air temperature sensor 2P connector. If the
NO-Replace the outside air temperature sensor.B
climate control unit, and recheck. Ifthe
6. Disconnect the front climate control unit SOP symptom/indication goes away, replace the original
connector. front climate control unit (see page 21-188).B
unit 30P connector terminal No. 19 and outside air climate control unit and the outside air temperature

OUTSIDE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR 2P CONNECTOR

YES-Go to step 8.
climate control unit and the outside air temperature
sensor.B
m
DTC B1228 or DTC indicator D and AUTO: 8. Check for continuity between front climate control
A Short in the Outside Air Temperature
Sensor Circuit
2. Operate the climate control system in several modes. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
CO
o
CM
o
CM
CM
15 16 17 18 19 21 X 23 24 25 26 27 28 29
PNK WHT/GRN
Is DTC B1228 or D and AUTO indicated?
YES-Go to step 4.
5. Remove the outside air temperature sensor (see page
21-184) and test it (see page 21-184). YES-Repair a short in the wires between the front
climate control unit and the outside air temperature
Does the outside air temperature sensor test OK? sensor.B
unit, and recheck. Ifthe symptom/indication goes
NO-Replace the outside air temperature sensor.B
connector.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 X 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 X 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30
PNK
is there continuity?
D T C T r o u b le s h o o t in g ( c o n t 'd )
DTC B1229 or DTC indicator E and AUTO: 8. Checkfor continuity between front climate control
unit 30P connector terminal No. 20 and sunlight
An Open in the Sunlight Sensor Circuit
sensor 5P connector terminal No. 4 (with automatic
1. Clear the DTC by turning the ignition switch to lighting) or sunlight sensor 2P connector terminal No,
LOCK (0), and then turn to ON (II). 1 (without automatic lighting).
2. Operate the climate control system in several modes. With automatic lighting
3. Check for DTCs using the HDS (see page 21-112) or FRONT CLIMATE CONTROL UNIT SOP CONNECTOR
self-diagnostic function (see page 21-110). W i re side of female termi nals
Is DTC B1229 or E and AUTO Indicated?

szz.
CD
00
'Tm
CO
YES-Go to step 4. 10 11 12 14
CM;
1 3 4 5 6 7 3 > < C
m
NO-lntermittent failure, check for loose wires or poor 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 X 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30
connections on the sunlight sensor circuit.! [o R N

T _
5. Test the sunlight sensor (see page 21-185). c, | ORN
1 2 3 4 5
Is the sunlight sensor OK?
YES-Go to step 6. SUNLIGHT SENSOR 5P CONNECTOR
NO-Replace the sunlight sensor (see page 21-185).!
6. Disconnect the sunlight sensor 5P connector (with Without automatic lighting
automatic lighting) or 2P connector (without
automatic lighting). FRONT CLIMATE CONTROL UNIT SOP CONNECTOR
W i re side of female terminals
7. Disconnect the front climate control unit 30P
connector.
s h e .
CD
CM
T“
CO
1 4 5 6 7 8 10 11 14
CM
CM
15 16 17 18 19 20 21 X 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30
I ORN
T _
ORN J- 1
L
1 2 j
J---- —
SUNLIGHT SENSOR 2P CONNECTOR

YES-Go to step 9.
9. Check for continuity between front climate control Is there continuity?
unit 30P connector terminal No. 29 and sunlight
YES-Check for loose wires or poor connections at the
sensor 5P connector terminal No. 2 (with automatic
lighting) or sunlight sensor 2P connector terminal
sunlight sensor 5P connector (with automatic
No. 2 (without automatic lighting).
lighting) or the sunlight sensor 2P connector (without
With automatic lighting automatic lighting). If the connections are good,
substitute a known-good front climate control unit,
FRONT CLIMATE CONTROL UNIT SOP CONNECTOR and recheek. If the symptom/indication goes away,
Wire side of female terminals replace the original front climate control unit (see
page 21-188).B
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 NO-Repair an open in the wire between the front

climate control unit and the sunlight sensor.B
15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 X 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30
WHT/GRN
WHT/GRN
1 2

Without automatic lighting

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
CM
o
CO
o
CM
15 16 17 18 19 21 22 I X 23 25 26 27 28 29
WHT/GRN
T
__T T WHT/GRN
j
1 —2 j
1j—

DTC B1230 or DTC indicator F and AUTO: 9. Check for continuity between front climate control
A Short in the Sunlight Sensor Circuit
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
self-diagnostic function (see page 21-110). 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 X 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30
ORN WHT/GRN
Is DTC B1230 or F and AUTO indicated?
YES-Go to step 4.
5. Test the sunlight sensor (see page 21-185). Is there continuity?
Is the sunlight sensor OK? YES-Repair a short in the wires between the front
YES-Go to step 6. climate control unit and the sunlight sensor.B
NO-Replace the sunlight sensor (see page 21-185).B NO-Substitute a known-good front climate control
6. Disconnect the sunlight sensor 5P connector (with away, replace the original front climate control unit
automatic lighting) or 2P connector (without (see page 21-188).B
automatic lighting).
connector.
SHE
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
CM
CM
CO
o
15 16 17 18 19 20 21 X 23 24 25 26 27 28 29
ORN
H I
DTC B1231 or DTC indicator G and AUTO: 8. Check for continuity between front climate control
unit 30P connector terminal No. 29 and evaporator
A n O p e n in t h e E v a p o r a t o r T e m p e r a t u r e
S e n s o r C irc u it
2. Operate the climate control system in several modes. SH E
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
CM
00
CM
CD
CM
15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 X 23 24 25 29 30
WHT/GRN I
Is DTC B1231 or G and AUTO indicated?
©
YES-Go to step 4.
.J~“ T WHT/GRN
NO-lntermittent failure, check for loose wires or poor r
| 1 —2j
connections on the evaporator temperature sensor j—
circuit.!

page 21-66) and test it (see page 21-66). Is there continuity?
Does the evaporator temperature sensor test OK? YES-Check for loose wire or poor connections at the
YES-Go to step 6. evaporator temperature sensor 2P connector. If the
NO-Replace the evaporator temperature sensor.B
6. Disconnect the front climate control unit 30P symptom/indication goes away, replace the original
connector. front climate control unit (see page 21-188).B
unit 30P connector terminal No. 21 and evaporator climate control unit and the evaporator temperature

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 X 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30
BRN

YES-Go to step 8.
climate control unit and the evaporator temperature
sensor.B
DTC B1232 or DTC indicator H and AUTO: 8. Check for continuity between front climate control
A Short in the Evaporator Temperature
Sensor Circuit
2. Operate the climate control system in several modes. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 X 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
00
o
CD
CM
CM
a
CM
o
CM
CM
15 16 17 18 19 21 X 23 25 27 29
BRN WHT/GRN
is DTC B1232 or H and AUTO indicated?
YES-Go to step 4.
YES-Repair a short in the wires between the front
climate control unit and the evaporator temperature
Does the evaporator temperature sensor test OK? sensor.B
NO-Replace the evaporator temperature sensor.B
connector.
unit SOP connector terminal No. 21 and body ground.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
CM
o
CM
CM
CM
CO
15 16 17 18 19
CM
00
00
21 24 25 26 27
o
X 29
BRN
between the front climate control unit and the
evaporator temperature sensor.B
NO-Go to step 8.
B B
DTC B1233 or DTC indicator I and AUTO: 8. Check for continuity between the following terminals
of the front climate control unit 30P connector and the
An Open in the Driver's Air Mix Control Motor
driver's air mix control motor 7P connector.
Circuit
30P; 7P;
No. 29 No. 5
3. Check for DTCs using the HDS (see page 21-112) or FRONT CLIMATE CONTROL UNIT 30P CONNECTOR
self-diagnostic function (see page 21-110). Wire side of female terminals
Is DTC B1233 or I and AUTO indicated?

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
YES-Go to step 4.
CO
CM
&
CM
00
CO
o
o
CM
csi
css
CM
15 16 17 18 19 21 24 26 29
NO-lntermittent failure, check for loose wires or poor GRY PNK/BLK W HT/
connections on the driver's air mix control motor GRN
circuit.H
4. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). PNK/BLK GRY
5. Test the driver's air mix control motor (see page 1

21-68). WHT/GRN
Is the driver's air mix control motor OK?

DRIVERS AIR M IX CONTROL MOTOR 7P CONNECTOR
YES-Go to step 6. Wire side of female terminals
NO-Replace the driver’s air mix control motor (see
page 21-69).11 YES-Check for loose wire or poor connections at the
6. Disconnect the driver's air mix control motor 7P driver's air mix control motor 7P connector. If the
connector. connections are good, substitute a known-good front
7. Disconnect the front climate control unit 30P climate control unit and recheck. If the
connector. symptom/indication goes away, replace the original
front climate control unit (see page 21-188).H
NO-Repair an open in the wire(s) between the front
climate control unit and the driver's air mix control
m o to r.!
DTC B1234 or DTC indicator J and AUTO: 9. Check for continuity between terminals of the front
climate control unit 30P connector as follows.
A Short in the Driver's Air Mix Control Motor
Circuit Terminal To terminals
22 26,29
1. Clear the DTC by turning the ignition switch to 29
26
self-diagnostic function (see page 21-110). NO-Go to step 10.
Is DTC B1234 or J and AUTO indicated? 10. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II), and measure the
YES-Go to step 4.
NO-lntermittent failu re .! FRONT CLIMATE CONTROL UNIT 30P-CONNECTOR

5. Test the driver's air mix control motor (see page 1 2 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
21-68).
15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 X 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30
Is the driver's air mix control motor OK? GRY PNK/BLK W HT/
GRN
YES-Go to step 6.
NO-Replace the driver's air mix control motor (see
page 2 1-69).!
6. Disconnect the driver's air mix control motor 7P Wire side of female terminals
connector.
connector.
the front climate control unit and the driver's air mix
8. Check for continuity between body ground and front control motor. This short may also damage the front
climate control unit 30P connector terminals No. 22, climate control unit. Repair the short to power before
26, and 29 individually. replacing the front climate control u n it.!
NO-Substitute a known-good front climate control
FRONT CLIMATE CONTROL UNIT SOP CONNECTOR unit, and recheck. If the symptom/indication goes
(see page 21-188).!
between the front climate control unit and the driver's
air mix control m o to r.!
B IB
D T C B 1 2 3 5 m D T C In d ic a to r K a n d A U T O : 8. Checkfor continuity between the following terminals

of the front climate control unit 30P connector and the
A P r o b l e m in t h e D r iv e r 's A ir M ix C o n t r o l
driver's air mix control motor 7P connector.
L in k ag e, D o o r, o r M o to r
30P: 7P:
2. Operate the climate control system in several modes. FRONT CLIMATE CONTROL UNIT SOP CONNECTOR
Is DTC B1235 or K and AUTO indicated?
YES-Go to step 4.
5. Test the driver's air mix control motor (see page
21-68).
DRIVER'S AIR MIX CONTROL MOTOR 7P CONNECTOR
Is the driver's air mix control motor OK? Wire side of female terminals
YES-Go to step 6.
NO-Replace the driver's air mix control motor (see
page 21-69), or repair the driver's air mix control YES-Go to step 9.
linkage or d o o r.! NO-Repair an open in the wire(s) between the front
6. Disconnect the driver's air mix control motor 7P climate control unit and the driver's air mix control
connector. m o tor.!

connector.
(cont'd)
9. Check for continuity between body ground and front DIG B1236 or DTC indicator L and AUTO:
climate control unit 30P connector terminals No. 10
An Open in the Passenger's Air Mix Control
Motor Circuit
GRN/BLK
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
CM
o
CM
CM
^r
CM
15 16 17 18 19 21 X 23 25 26 27 28 29 30
Is DTC B1236 or L and AUTO indicated?
YES-Go to step 4.
connections on the passenger's air mix control motor
circuit.!
Is there continuity? 4. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
YES-Repair a short to body ground in the wire(s) 5. Test the passenger's air mix control motor (see page
between the front climate control unit and the driver's 21-186).
air mix control m o to r.!
Is the passenger's air mix control motor OK?
unit, and recheck. Ifthe symptom/indication goes YES-Go to step 6.
NO-Replace the passenger's air mix control motor
(see page 21-188).■
(see page 21-187).!
6. Disconnect the passenger's air mix control motor
7P connector.
connector.
m
8. Check for continuity between following terminals of D T C B1237 or D T C indicator M and AUTO:
the front climate control unit 30P connector and the
A S h o r t in t h e P a s s e n g e r 's A ir M ix C o n t r o l
passenger's air mix control motor 7P connector.
M o to r C irc u it
30P: 7P:
No. 22 No. 7 1. Clearthe DTC by turning the ignition switch to
No. 25 No. 3 LOCK (0), and then turn to ON (II).
No. 29 No. 5
FRONT CLIMATE CONTROL UNIT 30P CONNECTOR 3. Checkfor DTCs using the HDS (see page 21-112) or
Wire side of female terminals self-diagnostic function (see page 21-110).
Is DTC B1237 or M and AUTO indicated?
7 | Z > < C | 8 I 9 |10|11 Il2 |l3 |l4 YES-Go to step 4.
15ll6|l7ll8ll9l20l2ll22lXl23|24|25l26l27l28l29[30,
GRY YEL WHT/ NO-lntermittent failure.®
GRN
§> , 5. Test the passenger's air mix control motor (see page
YEL — ?_ | GRY
21-186).
1 2 3 / 5 |/| 7
| W H T /G R N Is the passenger's air mix control motor OK?
PA S SE N G E R 'S AIR MIX CONTROL M OTOR 7P CONNECTOR YES-Go to step 6.

Is there continuity? (see page 21-187).®
YES-Check for loose wire or poor connections at the 6. Disconnect the passenger's air mix control motor 7P
front climate control unit 30P connector and at the connector.
passenger's air mix control motor 7P connector. If the 7. Disconnect the front climate control unit SOP
connections are good, substitute a known-good front connector.
symptom/indication goes away, replace the original 8. Check for continuity between body ground and front
front climate control unit (see page 21-188).® climate control unit SOP connector terminals No. 22,
25, and 29 individually.
climate control unit and the passenger's air mix
control motor.® FRONT CLIMATE CONTROL UNIT 30P CONNECTOR
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
21 22 X 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30
CM
0
15 16 17 18 19
GRY YEL W HT/
GRN
passenger's air mix control motor.®
(cont'd)
9. Checkfor continuity between terminals of the front DTC B1238 or DTC indicator N and AUTO:
climate control unit SOP connector as follows. A Problem in the Passenger's Air Mix Control
Terminal To terminals Linkage, Door, or Motor
22 25,29
25 29
NO-Go to step 10. self-diagnostic function (see page 21-110).
10. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II), and measure the Is DTC B1238 or N and AUTO indicated?
YES-Go to step 4.
FRONT CLIMATE CONTROL UNIT 30P CONNECTOR NO-lntermittent failure.B

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 X 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 5. Test the passenger's air mix control motor (see page

15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 X 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 21-186).
GRY YEL W HT/ Is the passenger's air mix control motor OK?
GRN
YES-Go to step 6.
(see page 21-187), or repair the passenger's air mix
Wire side of female terminals control linkage or door.B
6. Disconnect the passenger's air mix control motor 7P
connector.
the front climate control unit and the passenger's air
connector.
mix control motor. This short may also damage the
front climate control unit. Repair the short to power
before replacing the front climate control u nit.ll
NO-Check for loose wire or poor connections at the
passenger's air mix control motor 7P connector. If the
front climate control unit (see page 2 1-188).■
8. Check for continuity between following terminals of 9. Checkfor continuity between body ground and front
the front climate control unit 30P connector and the climate control unit 30P connector terminals No. 12
passenger's air mix control motor 7P connector. and No. 13 individually.
30 P: 7P; FRONT CLIMATE CONTROL UNIT 30P CONNECTOR
No. 12 No. 1
No. 13 No. 2 LT GRN
YEL/BLK
Wire side of female terminals 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 X 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
CM
00
CM
CM
LT GRN 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 X 23 24 25 26 27 29 30
YEL/BLK | [
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
m
I CO
ro
\m
15 16 17 18 19 21 X 23 24 25 26 28 29
c Wire side of female terminals

YEL/BLK P
1 2 3 X 5 / Is there continuity?
PASSENGER'S AIR MIX CONTROL MOTOR 7P CONNECTOR YES-Repair a short to body ground in the wire(s)
Wire side of female terminals between the front climate control unit and the
passenger's air mix control motor.B
YES-Go to step 9. unit, and recheck. If the symptom/indication goes
NO-Repair an open in the wire(s) between the front (see page 21-188).B
climate control unit and the passenger's air mix
control motor.B
DTC B1239 or DTC indicator A; An Open or 8. Check for continuity between the following terminals
of front climate control unit 30P connector and the
Short in the Front Mode Control M otor Circuit
front mode control motor7P connector.
1. Clear the DTC by turning the ignition switch to SOP: 7P:
2. Operate the climate control system in several modes. No. 3 No. 5
No. 4 No. 4
3. Check for DTCs using the HDS (see page 21-112) or No. 5 No. 3
self-diagnostic function (see page 21-110). No. 29 No. 7
Is DTC B1239 or A indicated?

WHT/BLU
connections on the front mode control motor
circuit.! RED/BLU
RED/YEL YEL/GRN
5. Test the front mode control motor (see page 21-69). 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 IX I 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30
Is the front mode control motor OK? WHT/GRN
YES-Go to step 6.
21-70).B S I
r*
WHT/GRN
CO
CD
1 2 4 5 7
YEL/GRN RED/YEL
connector.
WHT/BLU
connector. RED/BLU
FRONT MODE CONTROL MOTOR 7P CONNECTOR

YES-Go to step 9.
climate control unit and the front mode control
m oto r.B
H I
9. Checkfor continuity between body ground and front 11. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II), and measure the
climate control unit SOP connector terminals No. 2,3, same terminals for voltage to body ground.
4,5, and 29 individually.

YES-Repair a short to body ground in the wire(s) the front climate control unit and the mode control
between the front climate control unit and the front motor. This short may also damage the front climate
mode control motor.B control unit. Repair the short to power before
replacing the front climate control unit.B
NO-Go to step 10.
10. Check for continuity between terminals of front
mode control motor 7P connector. If the connections
Terminal To terminals are good, substitute a known-good front climate
2 3,4,5, 29 control unit, and recheck. Ifthe symptom/indication
3 4, 5, 29 goes away, replace the original front climate control
4 5,29 unit (see page 21-188).B
5 29
YES-Repair a short in the wires.B
NO-Go to step 11.
DTC B1240 or DTC indicator B: A Problem in 8. Check for continuity between the following terminals
of front climate control unit SOP connector and the
the Front Mode Control Linkage, Doors, or front mode control motor 7P connector.
Motor
30P: 7P;
2. Operate the climate control system in several modes. FRONT CLIMATE CONTROL UNIT SOP CONNECTOR
self-diagnostic function (see page 21-110). YEL/RED YEL/BLU
S
r > .... - .....................
Is DTC B1240 or B indicated? 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 : x 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22X 23 24 25 26 27
CM
00
YES-Go to step 4. 29 30
NO-lntermittent failure.! f------------- ....... .— \

4. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). YE U B L l1
YEL/RED c p
5. Test the front mode control motor (see page 21-69).
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
Is the front mode control motor OK?
YES-Go to step 6. FRONT MODE CONTROL MOTOR 7P CONNECTOR
21-70), or repair the front mode control linkage or Is there continuity?
d o o rs.!
YES-Go to step 9.
connector. NO-Repair an open in the wire(s) between the front
climate control unit and the front mode control
7. Disconnect the front climate control unit 30P m o to r.!
connector.
* 1 !
9. Check for continuity between body ground and front DTC B1241 or DTC Indicator C: A Problem in
climate control unit 30P connector terminals No. 8
the Front Blower Motor Circuit
YEL/RED YEL/BLU 2. Operate the climate control system in several modes.

................... ... ..........S ..t>
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 x 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
15 16 17 18 19 20 21 2 2 X 231 24 25 26 27 28 29 30
Is DTC B1241 or C indicated?
YES-Go to step 4.
connections on the front blower motor circuit.!
Is there continuity? 5. Check the No. 21 (40 A) fuse in the under-hood
YES-Repair a short to body ground in the wire(s) driver's under-dash fuse/relay box.
between the front climate control unit and the front
mode control m o to r.! Are the fuses OK?
NO-Substitute a known-good front climate control YES-Go to step 6.

unit, and recheck. If the symptom/indication goes NO-Replace the fuse(s), and recheck.!
(see page 21-188).! 6. Connect front blower motor 2P connector terminal
No. 2 to body ground with a jumper wire.
BLU/BLK
JUMPER WIRE

Does the front blower motor run?
YES-Go to step 8.
NO-Go to step 24.
10. Disconnect the front power transistor 4P connector.
(cont'd)
11. Check for continuity between front power transistor 17. Check for continuity between front climate control
4P connector terminal No. 2 and body ground. unit 30P connector terminals No. 27 and No. 28 and
body ground individually.
FRONT POWER TRANSISTOR 4P CONNECTOR
jr .. BLK
1
3 4

YES-Go to step 12.
NO-Check for an open in the BLK wire between the
front power transistor and body ground. If the wire is YES-Repair a short to body ground in the wire(s)
OK, check for poor ground at G 504.il between the front climate control unit and the front
power transistor.®
12. Connect front power transistor 4P connector
terminals No. 2 and No. 4 with a jumper wire. NO-Go to step 18.
FRONT POWER TRANSISTOR 4P CONNECTOR 18. Check for continuity between the following terminals
of the front climate control unit SOP connector and
front power transistor 4P connector.
BLK
_r.. .. i_ SOP;, 4P:
1 2 No. 27 No. 3
JUMPER WIRE
3 4 No. 28 No. 1
BLU/BLK FRONT CLIMATE CONTROL UNIT SOP CONNECTOR
13. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14

CM
00
24 25 26 27 29 30
00
CM
CM
CM
15 16 17 18 19 20 21 X
Does the front blower motor run at high speed? BLU/RED BLU/YEL
YES-Go to step 14.
BLU/YEL
front power transistor and the front blower motor.B J T ..
1 2
14. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 3 4
BLU/RED
POWER TRANSISTOR 4P CONNECTOR
16. Disconnect the front climate control unit 30P Wire side of female terminals
connector.
YES-Go to step 19.
climate control unit and the front power transistor,!!
n
20. Measure the voltage between front climate control 28. Measure the voltage between front blower motor 2P
unit 30P connector terminals No. 27 and No. 28 and connector terminal No. 1 and body ground.

YES-Replace the front blower motor.B
Is there 1 V or more?
NO-Go to step 29.
YES-Repair a short to power in the w ire s .!
NO-Go to step 21.
30. Remove the front blower motor relay from the
21. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0) under-hood fuse/relay box, and test it (see page
22. Reconnect the front climate control unit 30P 22-114).
connector. Is the relay OK?
23. Test the front power transistor (see page 21-67). YES-Go to step 31.
Is the front power transistor OK? NO-Replace the front blower motor re lay .!
YES-Check for loose wire or poor connections at the 31. Measure the voltage between front blower motor
front climate control unit 30P connector and at the relay 4P socket terminal No. 2 and body ground.
power transistor 4P connector. If the connections are
good, substitute a known-good front climate control FRONT BLOWER MOTOR RELAY 4P SOCKET
(see page 21-188).! 1
NO-Replace the front power transistor.! 2

4 3
24. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0)
26. Disconnect the front blower motor 2P connector. I
27. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (II) Terminal side of female terminals
YES-Go to step 32.
NO-Replace the under-hood fuse/relay box (see page
22-105).!
33. Measure the voltage between front blower motor DTC B1249 or DTC indicator D: An Open in the
Rear In-car Temperature Sensor Circuit (with
FRONT BLOWER MOTOR RELAY 4P SOCKET Rear Climate Control)
2. Operate the rear climate control system in several
modes.
BLK/YEL 3. Checkfor DTCs using the HDS (see page 21-112) or

Is DTC B1249 or D indicated?
Terminal side of female terminals YES-Go to step 4.

Is there battery voltage? NO-lntermittent failure, check for loose wires or poor
connections on the rear in-car temperature sensor
YES-Go to step 34.
circuit.B
the front blower motor relay.B 5. Remove the rear in-car temperature sensor (see page
21-195) and test it (see page 21-195).
Does the rear in-car temperature sensor test OK?
35. Check for continuity between front blower motor
relay 4P socket terminal No. 3 and body ground. YES-Go to step 6.
FRONT BLOWER MOTOR RELAY 4P SOCKET

NO-Replace the rear in-car temperature sensor.B
6. Disconnect the rear climate control unit 22P
connector.
7. Checkfor continuity between rear climate control unit
22P connector terminal No. 11 and rear in-car

Terminal side of female terminals 1 6 7 8 9 10

I CM
! CM
Is there continuity? 11 / / / / 16 X 17 18 19 21
LT BLU
YES-Repair an open in the WHT/BLU wire between ______
the front blower motor relay and the front blower
motor.B . 1.T BLU
NO-Check for an open in the wire between the front ■ r f :2
blower motor relay and body ground. Ifthe wire is OK,
REAR IN-CAR TEMPERATURE SENSOR 2P CONNECTOR
check for poor ground at G202.B Wire side of female terminals
YES-Go to step 8.
NO-Repair an open in the wire between the rear
climate control unit and the rear in-car temperature
sensor.B
m
8. Checkfor continuity between rear climate control unit DTC B1224 or DTC indicator £: A Short in the
22P connector terminal No. 21 and rear in-car
Rear In-car Temperature Sensor Circuit (with
Rear Climate Control)
Wire side of female terminals 1. Clear the DTC by turning the ignition switch to
CD
00
1/ 7 10 2. Operate the rear climate control system in several
11 / 16 X 17 18 19 21 22 modes.
8
/ / /
YEL/BLK 3. Check for DTCs using the HDS (see page 21-112) or
YEL/BLK
Is DTC B1224 or E indicated?
YES-Go to step 4.
REAR IN-CAR TEMPERATURE SENSOR 2P CONNECTOR NO-lntermittent failure.®
5. Remove the rear in-car temperature sensor (see page
YES-Check for loose wires or poor connections at the 21-195) and test it (see page 21-195).
rear climate control unit 22P connector and at the rear
in-car temperature sensor 2P connector. Ifthe Does the rear in-car temperature sensor test OK?
connections are good, substitute a known-good rear
YES-Go to step 6.
symptom/indication goes away, replace the original NO-Replace the rear in-car temperature sensor.B
rear climate control unit (see page 21-201 ) . ■
NO-Repair an open in the wire between the rear connector.
sensor.B 7. Check for continuity between rear climate control unit
8. Check for continuity between rear climate control unit DTC B1244 or DTC indicator F: An Open in the
22P connector terminals No. 11 and No. 21.
REAR CLIMATE CONTROL UNIT 22P CONNECTOR 1. Clear the DTC by turning the ignition switch to
11 f / t / l X l / i 1 6 1 X 1 1 7 11 8 119 j2 0 12 1 122 self-diagnostic function (see page 21-110).
LTBLU YEL/BLK
Is DTC B1244 or F indicated?
YES-Go to step 4.
Wire side of female terminals connections on the rear air mix control motor
circuit.!
Is there continuity? 4. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
YES-Repair a short in the wires between the rear 5. Test the rear air mix control motor (see page 21-197).
sensor.B Is the rear air mix control motor OK?
NO-Substitute a known-good rear climate control YES-Go to step 6.

unit, and recheck. If the symptom/indication goes NO-Replace the rear air mix control motor (see page
away, replace the original rear climate control unit 21-198KB
(see page 21-201).B
connector.
connector.
8. Checkfor continuity between follow ing terminals of DTC B1245 or DTC indicator G: A Short in the
the rear climate control unit 22P connector and the
rear air mix control motor 7P connector.
22P: 7P: 1. Clear the DTC by turning the ignition switch to
No. 16 No. 5 LOCK (0), and then turn to ON (II).
No. 20 No. 3 2. Operate the climate control system in several modes.
No. 21 No. 7
REAR CLIMATE CONTROL UNIT 22P CONNECTOR self-diagnostic function (see page 21-110).
Is DTC B1245 or G indicated?
YES-Go to step 4.
YES-Go to step 6.
NO-Replace the rear air mix control motor (see page
REAR AIR MIX CONTROL MOTOR 7P CONNECTOR 21-198).!
Is there continuity? connector.
YES-Check for loose wire or poor connections at rear 7. Disconnect the rear climate control unit 22P
climate control unit 22P connector and at the rear air connector.
mix control motor 7P connector. If the connections
are good, substitute a known-good rear climate 8. Check for continuity between body ground and rear
control unit and recheck. Ifthe symptom/indication climate control unit 22P connector terminals No. 16,
goes away, replace the original rear climate control 20, and 21 individually.
unit (see page 21 -201 ) . ■
NO-Repair an open in the wire(s) between the rear
climate control unit and the rear air mix control
m o tor.!
between the rear climate control unit and the rear air
mix control m o tor.!
(cont'd)
9. Check for continuity between terminals of rear DTC B1246 or DTC indicator H: A Problem in
climate control unit connector as follows. the Rear Air Mix Control Linkage, Door, or
Terminal To terminals Motor
16 20,21
20 21
NO-Go to step 10. self-diagnostic function (see page 21-1 TO).
10. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II), and measure the Is DTC B1246 or H indicated?
YES-Go to step 4.
REAR CLIMATE CONTROL UNIT 22P CONNECTOR NO-I ntermittent failu re.!
YES-Go to step 6.
NO-Replace the rear air mix control motor (see page
21-198), or repair the rear air mix control linkage or
d o o r.!
Wire side of female terminals 6. Disconnect the rear air mix control motor 7P
connector.
connector.
the rear climate control unit and the rear air mix
control motor. This short may also damage the
climate control unit. Repair the short to power before
replacing the rear climate control u n it.!
NO-Substitute a known-good rear climate control
away, replace the original rear climate control unit
(see page 21-201).!
H B
8. Checkfor continuity between following terminals of 9. Check for continuity between body ground and rear
rear climate control unit 22P connector and the rear climate control unit 22P connector terminals No. 8
air mix control motor 7P connector. and No. 9 individually.
22P: 7P: REAR CLIMATE CONTROL UNIT 22P CONNECTOR
No. 8 No. 1
No. 9 No. 2 GRN/BLK
GRN/BLK
GRN IB Ll K
PNK/BLU c P' YES-Repair a short to body ground in the wire(s)
CM
CO
/ between the rear climate control unit and the rear air
5 Z 7
mix control motor.B
REAR AIR MIX CONTROL MOTOR 7P CONNECTOR NO-Substitute a known-good rear climate control
Wire side of female terminals unit, and recheck. If the symptom/indication goes
Is there continuity? away, replace the original rear climate control unit
(see page 21-201 ).B
YES-Go to step 9.
climate control unit and the rear air mix control
motor.B
DTC B1221 or DTC indicator i: An Open in the 8. Check for continuity between the following terminals
of the rear climate control unit 22P connector and the
Rear Mode Control Motor Circuit
rear mode control motor 7P connector.
22P: 7P:
No. 1 No. 3
2. Operate the climate control system in several modes. No. 16 No. 7
No. 21 No. 5
self-diagnostic function (see page 21-110). REAR CLIMATE CONTROL UNIT 22P CONNECTOR
Is DTC B1221 or I indicated?
YES-Go to step 4. 1 / 6 7 8 9 10
/ / /
Csl
o
NO-lntermittent failure, check for loose wires or poor 11 / / / / 16 X 17 18 19 21 22
connections on the rear mode control motor circuit.! PUR YEL/BLK

Is the rear mode control motor OK? RED/YEL c J PUR
1 2 3 / 5 Z 7
YES-Go to step 6.
YEL/BLK
21-200).■ REAR MODE CONTROL MOTOR 7P CONNECTOR
6. Disconnect the rear mode control motor IP Wire side of female terminals
connector. Is there continuity?
7. Disconnect the rear climate control unit 22P YES-Check for loose wire or poor connections at the
connector. rear climate control unit 22P connector and at the rear
mode control motor 7P connector. Ifthe connections
are good, substitute a known-good rear climate
control unit, and recheck. If the symptom/indication
goes away, replace the original rear climate control
unit (see page 21-201 ).H
climate control unit and the rear mode control
motor.B
D T C B 1 2 2 2 o r D T C indicator J: A S h o r t i n t h e 9. Check for continuity between terminals of rear
R e a r M o d e C o n tro l M o to r C irc u it
1. Clearthe DTC by turning the ignition switch to Terminal To terminals
LOCK (0), and then turn to ON (II). 1 16,21
16 21
2. Operate the climate control system in several modes. Is there continuity between any of the terminals?
3. Check for DTCs using the HDS (see page 21-112) or YES-Repair a short in the wires.B
NO-Go to step 10.
Is DTC B1222 or J indicated?
YES-Go to step 4. same terminals for voltage to body ground.
Is the rear mode control motor OK? 1 / / / / x 6 7 8 9 10
11 / / / x 16 X 17 18 19 20 21 22
YES-Go to step 6.
PUR YEL/BLK
21-200).B
6. Disconnect the rear mode control motor 5P
connector.
connector. Is there any voltage?
8. Check for continuity between body ground and rear YES-Repair a short to power in the wire(s) between
climate control unit 22P connector terminals No. 1,16, the rear climate control unit and the rear mode control
and 21 individually. motor. This short may also damage the rear climate
control unit. Repair the short to power before
REAR CLIMATE CONTROL UNIT 22P CONNECTOR replacing the rear climate control unit.B
mode control motor 7P connector. If the connections
are good, substitute a known-good rear climate
control unit, and recheck. If the symptom/indication
goes away, replace the original rear climate control
unit (see page 21-201 ).B
between the rear climate control unit and the rear
mode control motor.B
DTC B1248 or DTC indicator K: A Problem in DTC B1223 or DTC indicator L: A Problem in
the Rear Mode Control Linkage, Doors, or the Rear Blower Motor Circuit
Motor 1. Clear the DTC by turning the ignition switch to
1. Clear the DTC by turning the ignition switch to LOCK (0), and then turn to ON (II).
LOCK (0), and then turn to ON (II). 2. Operate the climate control system in several modes.
2. Operate the climate control system in several modes. 3. Checkfor DTCs using the HDS (see page 21-112) or
3. Checkfor DTCs using the HDS (see page 21-112) or self-diagnostic function (see page 21-110).
self-diagnostic function (see page 21-110). Is DTC B1223 or L indicated?
Is DTC B1248 or K indicated? YES-Go to step 4.
YES-Go to step 4. NO-lntermittent failure, check for loose wires or poor
NO-lntermittent fa ilu re .! connections on the rear blower motor circuit.B
5. Test the rear mode control motor (see page 21-199). 5. Check the No. 22 (70 A) fuse in the under-hood
Is the rear mode control motor OK? passenger's under-dash fuse/relay box.
YES-Substitute a known-good rear climate control Are the fuses OK?
away, replace the original rear climate control unit.B YES-Go to step 6.
NO-Replace the rear mode control motor (see page NO-Replace the fuse(s), and recheck.B
21-200), or repair the rear mode control linkage or 6. Connect rear blower motor 2P connector terminal
d o o rs .B No. 2 to body ground with a jumper wire.
REAR BLOWER MOTOR 2P CONNECTOR
BLU/BLK
JUMPER WIRE

Does the rear blower motor run?
YES-Go to step 8.
NO-Go to step 24.
10. Disconnect the power transistor 4P connector.
11. Check for continuity between rear power transistor 4P 17. Check for continuity between body ground and rear
connector terminal No. 2 and body ground. climate control unit 22P connector terminals No. 18
and No. 19 and individually.
BLK
1
3 4
I

YES-Go to step 12.
NO-Check for an open in the BLK wire between the
rear power transistor and body ground. If the wire is YES-Repair a short to body ground in the wire(s)
OK, check for poor ground at G 6 52 .! between the rear climate control unit and the power
transistor.!
12. Connect rear power transistor 4P connector terminals
No. 2 and No. 4 with a jumper wire. NO-Go to step 18.
REAR POWER TRANSISTOR 4P CONNECTOR 18. Check for continuity between the following terminals
of the rear climate control unit 22P connector and rear
power transistor 4P connector.
BLK
-T—“T . 22P; 4P;
1 2 JUMPER WIRE No. 18 No. 1
3 4 No. 19 No. 3
BLU/BLK

Does the rear blower motor run at high speed?
YES-Go to step 14.
rear power transistor and the rear blower m o tor.!
16. Disconnect the rear climate control unit 22P Wire side of female terminals
connector.
YES-Go to step 19.
climate control unit and the rear power transistor.!
(cont'd)
20. Measure the voltage between body ground and rear 28. Measure the voltage between rear blower motor 2P
climate control unit 22P connector terminals No. 18 connector terminal No. 1 and body ground.
REAR BLOWER MOTOR 2 P CONNECTOR

Is there voltage?
YES-Replace the rear blower motor (see page
YES-Repair a short to power in the w ire s .! 21-202).!
22. Reconnect the rear climate control unit 22P 30. Remove the rear blower motor relay from the rear
connector. junction box, and test it (see page 22-114).
23. Test the rear power transistor (see page 21-196). Is the relay OK?
Is the power transistor OK? YES-Go to step 31.
YES-Check for loose wire or poor connections at the NO-Replace the rear blower motor re lay .!
31. Measure the voltage between body ground and rear
power transistor 4P connector. If the connections are
blower motor relay 4P socket terminals No. 1 and
good, substitute a known-good rear climate control
No. 4 individually.
away, replace the original rear climate control unit
REAR BLOWER MOTOR RELAY 4P SOCKET
(see page 21-201).!
NO-Replace the rear power transistor.!
1
24. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 2
25. Disconnect the jumper wire. 4 3
26. Disconnect the rear blower motor 2P connector.

(x )
27. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (II).

YES-Go to step 32.
NO-Repair an open in the BLK/WHT wire between the
passenger's under-fuse/relay box and the rear
junction box control u n it.!
33. Check for continuity between rear blower motor relay DTC B1202: Front Climate Control Unit
Internal Error
REAR BLOWER MOTOR RELAY 4P SOCKET NOTE:
• Check the battery condition (see page 22-111) and the
1 charging system (see page 4-37).
2
follow the instructions in B-CAN system diagnosis test
4 3 mode A (see page 22-155).
1.Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), then turn to
(g ) ON (II).
2. Turn the climate control system on and operate
several functions (A/C ON/OFF, air mix and blend door
operations, tem peratu re setti ngs etc.).
3. Checkfor DTCs using the HDS (see page 21-112).
YES-Substitute a known-good rear junction box, and
recheck. If the symptom/indication goes away, Is DTC B1202 indicated?
replace the original rear junction box.B
YES-The front climate control unit is faulty, replace
NO-Check for an open in the wire between the rear the front climate control unit (see page 21-188).B
blower motor relay and body ground. Ifthe wire is OK,
NO-lntermittent failure, the front climate control unit
check for poor ground at G652.B
is OK at this time. Check for loose or poor connections
at the front climate control unit 30P connector.B
DTC B1205: Front Climate Control Unit Lost 8. Check for continuity between front climate control
unit 30P connector terminal No. 7 and gauge control
Communication with Gauge Control Module
module connector A (30P) terminal No. 25.
(VSP/NE message)
DTC B1206: Front Climate Control Unit Lost Wire side of female terminals
(ENGTEMP message)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7X 8 9 10 11 121314
DTC B1207: Front Climate Control Unit Lost 15161718192021 22|Xl23 24252627282930
(ILLUMI message)
1. Push the AUTO button.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 > < 8 9 1011 / 1314
Does the climate control turn on? 1516/ 18192021 /IX M 2425/ 2728/ 30
BRN/YEL
YES-Go to step 2.
NO-Go to front climate control unit power and Wire side of female terminals
ground circuits troubleshooting (see page 2 1-17 9).■
2. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), then turn to Is there continuity?
ON (II). YES-Check for loose wire or poor connections at the
3. Turn the climate control system on and operate
gauge control module connector A (30P). If the
several functions (A/C ON/OFF, air mix and blend door
operations, temperature settings etc.).
climate control unit and/or gauge control module, and
4. Check for DTCs using the HDS (see page 21-112). recheck. If the symptom/indication goes away,
replace the original front climate control unit and/or
Is DTC indicated?
gauge control m odule.!
YES-
• DTC B1205 indicated: Go to step 5. climate control unit and the gauge control m odule.!
• DTC B1206 or B1207 indicated: Go to step 6.
NO-lntermittent failure, the gauge control module
and front climate control unit are OK at this tim e .!
5. Check for DTCs using the HDS.
mode (see page 22-345).! ,
NO-The front climate control unit is faulty, replace the
front climate control unit (see page 21-188).!
connector.
7. Disconnect gauge control module connector A (30P)
(see page 22-371).
m
R e c ir c u la tio n C o n tr o l M o t o r C ir c u it T r o u b le s h o o tin g
1. Check the No. 30 (10 A) fuse in the driver's under-dash 8. Check for continuity between body ground and front
fuse/relay box. climate control unit 30P connector terminals No. 15
Is the fuse OK?
YES-Go to step 2. FRONT CLIMATE CONTROL UNIT SOP CONNECTOR
SH E
2. Disconnect the recirculation control motor 7P
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
connector.
CM
00
CO
CM
CD
CO
o
CM
CM
CM
CM
o
CM
15 16 17 18 19 21 X 25 27 29
3. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). GRN/WHT
4. Measure the voltage between recirculation control

LT GRN/
motor 7P connector terminal No. 1 and body ground. RED
RECfRCULATION CONTROL MOTOR 7P CONNECTOR

recirculation control motor.B
NO-Go to step 9.
Is there battery voltage? same wires for voltage to body ground.
YES-Go to step 5.
S H E
the recirculation control motor.B
CM
00
CM
col
1 4 5 6 7 x 9 10 11 13 14
5. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 X 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30
GRN/WHT
6. Test the recirculation control motor (see page 21-70).
Is the recirculation control motor OK? LT GRN/
RED
YES-Go to step 7.
NO-Replace the recirculation control motor (see page
21-71), or repair the recirculation control linkage or
doors.B
7. Disconnect the front climate control unit 30P Is there any voltage?
connector.
the front climate control unit and the recirculation
control motor. This short may also damage the front
climate control unit Repair the short to power before
replacing the front climate control unit (see page
21-188).B
NO-Go to step 10.
(cont'd)
R e c ir c u la tio n C o n tr o l M o t o r C ir c u it N a v ig a t io n C o m m u n ic a t io n L in e
T r o u b le s h o o t in g ( c o n t 'd ) C ir c u it T r o u b le s h o o tin g
11. Check for continuity between the following terminals 1. Disconnect navigation unit connector A (20P)
of the front climate control unit 30P connector and the ('07 model) or connector A (32P) ('08-10 models).
recirculation control motor 7P connector.
2. Disconnect the climate control unit 30P connector.
30P; 7P;
No. 15 No. 7 3. Check for continuity between the following terminals
No. 16 No. 5 of the front climate control unit 30P connector and
navigation unit connector A (20P) ('07 model) or
FRONT CLIMATE CONTROL UNIT 30P CONNECTOR connector A (32P) ('08-10 models).
'07 model
SOP 20P
No. 6 No. 15
No. 17 No. 14
No. 24 No. 4
GRN/BLK | q— ? ______________
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 X 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30
RECIRCULATION CONTROL MOTOR 7P CONNECTOR E L / G R N I RED/BLU
@
RED/BLU | ________
YES-Check for loose wires or poor connections at the 1 2 3 4 5 / 9 10
X X
o
CM
11 12 13 14 15 / X X X
recirculation control motor7P connector. Ifthe
YEL/GRN |
GRN/BLK
symptom/indication goes away, replace the original NAVIGATION UNIT CONNECTOR A (20P)
front climate control unit (see page 21-188).H Wire side of female terminals
climate control unit and the recirculation control
m otor.B
S
m
'08-10 models 4. Checkfor continuity between body ground and front

30P 32P climate control unit 30P connector terminals No. 6,17,
No. 6 No. 21 and 24 individually.
No. 17 No. 20
No. 24 No. 4
1 2 3 4 5 6 7x 8 9 10 11 121314
15161718192021 22IXI23 24252627282930
I YEL/GRN RED/BLU
RED/BLU
117| 1si 1q|2o|2i \ / \ / \ / \ / \ j ^ y \ y \ y \ y \ / \ / Wire side of female terminals

YEL/GRN
GRN/BLK Is th e r e c o n tin u ity ?
NAVIGATION UNIT CONNECTOR A (32P)

Wire side of female terminals between the front climate control unit and the
navigation unit.B
YES-Go to step 4. front climate control unit 30P connector and at the
NO-Repair an open in the wire(s) between the front navigation unit connector A (20P) ('07 model) or
climate control unit and the navigation unit.B connector A (32P) ('08-10 models). Ifthe connections
are good, substitute a known-good front climate
control unit and/or navigation unit, and recheck. If the
front climate control unit and/or the navigation unit.B
Climate Control Panel Power and Ground Circuit Troubleshooting
1. Check the No. 30 (10 A) fuse in the driver's under-dash 7. Substitute a known-good climate control panel.
fuse/relay box.
9. Press and hold the OFF button. While holding the OFF
YES-Go to step 2. button, press the rear window defogger button five
times within 10 seconds. Release the OFF button. All
NO-Replace the fuse, and recheck.B the LEDs and LCD segments should blink three times.
2. Disconnect the climate control panel 5P connector. D o th e L E D s a n d L C D s e g m e n t s b lin k ?
3. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). YES-Check for communication circuit DTCs (with rear
4. Measure the voltage between climate control panel climate control) (see page 21-115), (without rear
5P connector terminal No. 3 and body ground. climate control) (see page 21-113).■
NO-Check for loose wires and poor connections at
CLIMATE CONTROL PANEL 5P CONNECTOR the climate control panel 5P connector. If connections
are good, substitute a known-good climate control
panel and recheck. If the symptom/indication goes
s J away, replace the original climate control panel.■
1 2 3 4 5
BLK/YEL
Is t h e r e b a t t e r y v o lta g e ?
YES-Go to step 5.
and the climate control p an e l.!
6. Check for continuity between climate control panel 5P
CLIMATE CONTROL PANEL 5P CONNECTOR
J s
1 2 3 4 5
BLK
YES-Go to step 7.
NO-Check for an open in the wire between the climate
control panel and body ground. If the wire is OK,
check for poor ground at G 5 0 4 .I
Rear Control Panel Power and Ground Circuit Troubleshooting
1. Check the No. 30 (10 A) fuse in the driver's under-dash 7. Substitute a known-good rear control panel.
fuse/relay box.
Is t h e f u s e O K ?
9. Press and hold the OFF button. While holding the OFF
YES-Go to step 2. button, press the rear window defogger button five
times within 10 seconds. Release the OFF button. All
the LCD segments should blink three times.
2. Disconnect the rear control panel 5P connector.
D o th e L C D s e g m e n t s b lin k ?
3. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). YES-Check for communication circuit DTCs (with rear
4. Measure the voltage between rear control panel 5P climate control) (see page 21-115), (without rear
connector terminal No. 3 and body ground. climate control) (see page 21-113).B
NO-Check for loose wires or poor connections at the
REAR CONTROL PANEL 5P CONNECTOR rear control panel 5P connector. If connections are
good, substitute a known-good rear control panel and
J
replace the original rear control panel.■
1 2 3 4 5
BLK/YEL
YES-Go to step 5.
and the rear control p an e l.!
6. Check for continuity between rear control panel 5P
REAR CONTROL PANEL 5P CONNECTOR
L J
1 2 3 4 5
BLK
Is t h e r e c o n t in u ity ?
YES-Go to step 7.
NO-Check for an open in the wire between the rear
control panel and body ground. If the wire is OK,
check for poor ground at G504.il
Climate Control Communication Line Circuit Troubleshooting
1. Disconnect the front climate control unit SOP 6. Check for continuity between front climate control
connector. unit 30P connector terminal No. 23 and rear control
panel 5P connector terminal No. 2.
2. Disconnect the climate control panel 5P connector.
3. Disconnect the rear climate control unit 22P FRONT CLIMATE CONTROL UNIT 30P CONNECTOR
connector. Wire side of female terminals
4. Disconnect the rear control panel 5P connector. SHE

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
X
CM
CO
o
o
CM
unit 30P connector terminal No. 23 and climate 15 16 17 18 19 21 22 23 24 25 26 28 29
control panel 5P connector terminal No. 2. GRN
FRONT CLIMATE CONTROL UNIT 30P CONNECTOR -v y r

Wire side of female terminals GRN r
1 2 3 4 5
SH E
1 2 3 4 5 7 6 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
REAR CONTROL PANEL 5P CONNECTOR
X
CM
15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
00
o
25 26 27 28 29
GRN
GRN c j YES-Go to step 7.

1 2 3 4 5 NO-Repair an open in the wire between the front
climate control unit 30P connector and the rear
CLIMATE CONTROL PANEL SP CONNECTOR control panel 5P connector.!
unit 30P connector terminal No. 23 and rear climate
control unit 22P connector terminal No. 17.
YES-Go to step 6.
climate control unit 30P connector and the climate
control panel 5P connector.!

YES-Go to step 8.
H I
Front Climate Control Unit Power and

Ground Circuit Troubleshooting
8. Check for continuity between front climate control 1. Check the No. 30 (10 A) fuse in the driver’s under-dash
unit 30P connector terminal No. 23 and body ground. fuse/relay box.
YES-Go to step 2.
SH E. NO-Replace the fuse, and recheck.B

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 X 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 connector.
GRN
a
4. Measure the voltage between front climate control
unit SOP connector terminal No. 14 and body ground.
W ire side of female terminals FRONT CLIMATE CONTROL UNIT 30P CONNECTOR
c— p BLK/YEL
YES-Repair a short to body ground in the wire 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 ^><C 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
between the front climate control unit, climate control
CM
o
CM
CO
CM
CM
CO
o
00
15 16 17 18 19 21 22 X 25 26 27 29
panel, rear climate control unit and the rear control
panel.B
NO-Substitute a known-good rear control panel,
climate control panel, front climate control unit, and
rear climate control unit one at a time, rechecking the
system after each substitution. Replace the unit that
eliminates the symptom/indication.■
YES-Go to step 5.
and the front climate control unit.B
Front Climate Control Unit Power and Rear Climate Control Unit Power and
Ground Circuit Troubleshooting (cont'd) Ground Circuit Troubleshooting
6. Check for continuity between front climate control 1. Check the No. 30 (10 A) fuse in the driver's under-dash
unit 30P connector terminal No. 30 and body ground. fuse/relay box.
YES-Go to step 2.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 X 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 connector.
BLK
4. Measure the voltage between rear climate control
unit 22P connector terminal No. 10 body ground.
W ire side of female term inals REAR CLIMATE CONTROL UNIT 22P CONNECTOR
YES-Check for loose wires or poor connections a t the

front climate control unit 30P connector. If the
front climate control unit (see page 21-188).B
NO-Check for an open in the wires between the front
climate control unit and body ground. If the wire is W ire side of female terminals
OK, check for poor ground at 6 5 0 4 ,■
Is th e r e b a tte r y v o lta g e ?
YES-Go to step 5.
and the rear climate control unit.B
A/C Pressure Switch Circuit
Troubleshooting
6. Check for continuity between rear climate control unit NOTE:
22P connector terminal No. 22 and body ground. • Do not use this troubleshooting procedure if any of the
following items are operative; A/C condenser fan,
REAR CLIMATE CONTROL UNIT 22P CONNECTOR • radiator fan, A/C compressor. Refer to the symptom
troubleshooting index.
1/ / / 6 7 8 9 10 for powertrain DTCs (see page 11-3).
11 / / / 16 X 17 18 19 21 22
CM
o
/ 1. Checkfor body DTCs using B-CAN system diagnosis
BLK test mode A troubleshooting (see page 22-155).
A r e th e r e a n y D T C s in d ic a t e d ?
YES-Do the appropriate troubleshooting for the DTC

indicated.!
NO-Go to step 2.
Is t h e r e c o n tin u ity ? 2. Check that front blower motor operates at all speeds.
YES-Check for loose wires or poor connections at the D o e s th e fro n t b lo w e r m o to r o p e r a te a t a ll s p e e d s ?

rear climate control unit 22P connector. If the YES-Go to step 3.
connections are good, substitute a known-good rear
climate control unit, and recheck. If the NO-Repair the problem in the front blower motor
symptom/indication goes away, replace the original circuit.!
rear climate control unit (see page 21-201).HI
NO-Check for an open in the wires between the rear
climate control unit and body ground. If the wire is
OK, check for poor ground at G 6 5 2 .! 5. Measure the voltage between A/C pressure switch 4P
BLU/RED

Is th e r e 5 V o r m o r e ?
YES-Go to step 6.
NO-Repair an open in the wire between the relay
control module and the A/C pressure sw itch.!
A/C Pressure Switch Circuit Troubleshooting (cont'd)
7. Check for continuity between A/C pressure switch 13. Measure the evaporator temperature sensor
terminals No. 1 and No. 4. resistance between front climate control unit 30P
connector terminals No. 21 and No. 30.
A/C PRESSURE SWITCH

CO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 14
15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 X 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30
BRN BLK
Is t h e r e c o n tin u ity ? W ire side of female term inals
YES-Go to step 8.
I s t h e r e s i s t a n c e l e s s t h a n 2 4 k C l?
NO-Go to step 16.
YES-Go to step 14.
8. Reconnect the A/C pressure switch 4P connector.
NO-Test the evaporator temperature sensor (see
9. Disconnect front climate control unit 30P connector. page 2 1-66 ).■
10. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 14. Reconnect the front climate control unit 30P
connector.
11. Measure the voltage between front climate control
unit 30P connector terminal No. 1 and body ground. 15. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
16. Check for proper A/C system pressure.
Is t h e p r e s s u r e w it h in s p e c if ic a t io n s ?
YES-Replace the A/C pressure sw itch.!

NO-Repair the A/C pressure problem .!
Is t h e r e 5 V o r m o r e ?
YES-Go to step 12.

climate control unit and the A/C pressure sw itch.!
B B
In-car Temperature Sensor Test In-car Temperature Sensor

Replacement
NOTE: Before testing the sensor, check for HVAC DTCs 1. Remove the driver's dashboard lower cover (see page
(see page 21-110). 20-135).
1. Remove the in-car temperature sensor (see page 2. Remove the self-tapping screws and the in-car
21-183). temperature sensor (A) from the driver's dashboard
lower cover (B).
2. Heat and cool the sensor by holding it in front of the
dashboard center vent.
A
• Measure the resistance with the system set to Max
Cool.
Hot.
3. Compare the resistance reading between in-car
temperature sensor terminals No. 1 and No. 2 with the
IN-CAR TEMPERATURE SENSOR
3. Install the sensor in the reverse order of removal. Be

sure to connect the air hose securely.
12
11
10
9
8
7
RESISTANCE 6
CkO) 5
4
3
2
1
14 32 50 68 36 104 °F
-1 0 0 10 20 30 40 °C
TEMPERATURE
4. If the resistance is not as specified, replace the in-car
temperature sensor (see page 21-183).
Outside Air Temperature Sensor Outside Air Temperature Sensor
Test Replacement
NOTE: Before testing the sensor, checkfor HVAC DTCs 1. '08-10 models: Remove the front bumper (see page
(see page 21-110). 20-245).
1. Remove the outside air temperature sensor (see page 2. Lift the tab (A) to release the lock, then remove the
21-184). outside air temperature sensor (B). Disconnect the 2P
connector (C) from the outside air temperature
2. Dip the sensor in ice water, and measure the
sensor.
resistance. Then pour warm water on the sensor, and
check for a change in resistance.
3. Compare the resistance reading between outside air
temperature sensorterminals No. 1 and No. 2 with the
3. Install the sensor in the reverse order of removal.
TEMPERATURE
4. Ifthe resistance is not as specified, replace the out

side air temperature sensor (see page 21-184).
i n
Sunlight Sensor Test Sunlight Sensor Replacement
NOTE: Before testing the sensor, check for HVAC DTCs 1. Remove the sunlight sensor (A) from the dashboard,
(see page 21-110). then disconnect the connector (B). Be careful not to
damage the sensor and the dashboard.
1. Remove the sunlight sensor (A) from the dashboard.
With automatic li ghting sensor
Without automatic lighti ng sensor
2. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). Measure the

voltage between terminals with the (+ ) probe on
terminal No. 4 (with automatic lighting sensor) or
No. 1 (without automatic lighting sensor) and the (—)
probe on terminal No. 2 with the connector
connected.
NOTE: The voltage readings will not change under the
light of a flashlight or a fluorescent lamp. Voltage
should be:
• 3.6—3.7 V or more with the sensor out of direct
sunlight.
• 3.3—3.5 V or less with the sensor in direct sunlight.
3. If the voltage is not as specified, replace the sunlight
sensor (see page 21-185).
Passenger's Air Mix Control M otor Test
N O TE ; B e fo re te s tin g th e m o to r, c h e c k fo r HV A C D T C s 3. If the passenger's air mix control motor did not run in
(s e e p a g e 2 1 -1 1 0 ). step 2, remove it, then check the passenger's air mix
control linkage and door for smooth movement.
1. Disconnect the 7P connector from the passenger's air
• Ifthe linkage and door move smoothly, replace the
mix control motor.
passenger's air mix control motor (see page
INOTICE 21-187).
• If the linkage or door sticks or binds, repair them as
Incorrectly applying power and ground to the
needed.
passenger's air mix control motor will damage it.
Follow the instructions carefully. • If the passenger's air mix control motor runs
smoothly, go to step 4.
2. Connect battery power to terminal No. 1 of the
passenger's air mix control motor, and ground PASSENGER'S AIR MIX CONTROL MOTOR
terminal No. 2; the passenger's air mix control motor
should run, and stop at Max Cool. If it doesn't, reverse
the connections; the passenger's air mix control
motor should run, and stop at Max Hot. When the
passenger's air mix control motor stops running,
disconnect battery power immediately.

No. 7. It should be between 4.2 to 7.8 k D .
5. Reconnect the passenger's air mix control motor 7P
connector, then turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
6. Using the backprobe set, measure the voltage
Max Cool: About 0.5 V
Max Hot: About 3.3 ¥
specified, replace the passenger's air mix control
motor (see page 21-187).
I H
Passenger's Air Mix Control Motor Climate Control Panel

Replacement Removal/Installation
1. Remove the glove box housing (see page 20-142). 1. Remove the center panel (see page 20-136).
2. Disconnect the 7P connector (A) from the passenger's 2. Remove the self-tapping screws and the climate
air mix control motor. Remove the self-tapping control panel (A).
screws and the passenger's air mix control motor (B)
from the heater unit.

3. Install the control panel in the reverse order of

functions to see whether works properly.
are no problems in the system (see page 21-110).
Front Climate Control Unit Dust and Pollen Filter Replacement
1. Remove the glove box housing (see page 20-142). 1. Remove the glove box housing (see page 20-142).
2. Disconnect the connector (A) from the front climate 2. Remove the dust and pollen filter assembly (A) from
control unit (B), then remove the self-tapping screws the blower unit.
and the front climate control unit.
3. Remove the filter (A) from the housing (B), and

replace the filter.
3. Install the unit in the reverse order of removal. After
installation, operate the various functions to see
whether works properly.
4. Install the filter in the reverse order of removal. Make

sure that there is no air leaking out of the evaporator.
Blower Unit Removal/Installation
1. Remove the glove box housing (see page 20-142). 4. Disconnect the connectors (A) from the front climate
control unit, the front blower motor, and the front
2. Remove the self-tapping screws, the bolts and the power transistor, then remove the wire harness clips
glove box frame (A).
(B ).
3. Cut the plastic cross brace (A) in the glove box

opening with diagonal cutters in the area shown, and 5. Disconnect the connector (A) from the recirculation
discard it. control motor, then remove the bolts, the mounting
nuts and the blower unit (B).
9.8 N-m
(1.0 kgf-m, 7.2 ibf-ft)
6. Install the unit in the reverse order of removal. Make
sure that there is no air leakage.
A/C Compressor Replacement
EX model (see page 21-80): 5. Disconnect the A/C compressor clutch connector (A).
Remove the bolt and the nut, then disconnect the
NOTE: Do not install the A/C compressor into a system ' suction line (B) and discharge line (C) from the A/C
unless you are completely sure that the system is free of compressor. Plug or cap the lines immediately after
contamination. Installing the A/C compressor into a disconnecting them to avoid moisture and dust
contaminated system can result in premature A/C
contamination.
compressor failure.
6 x 1.0 mm
'07 Model
1. Ifthe A/C compressor is marginally operable, run the
recovery/recycIing/charging station (see page 21-88).
4. Remove the splash shield (see page 20-281). Remove
the clips (A) and bolt from the right front inner fender
(B). Then move the right front inner fender to the rear.
6. Remove the mounting bolts, then detach the A/C

compressor (A). Remove the mounting bolts, then
slide up the A/C compressor bracket (B).
44 N*m
(4.5 kgf-m,
33 Ibf-ft)
7. Remove the A/C compressor (A). '08-10 Models
1. If the A/C compressor is marginally operable, run the
recovery/recycling/charging station (see page 21-88).
4. Remove the drive belt auto-tensioner (see page 4-46).
5. Remove the splash shield (see page 20-281). Remove
the clips (A) and screw from the right front inner
fender (B). Then move the right front inner fender to
8. Install the A/C compressor in the reverse order of the rear.
removed from it (see page 21-7). A new A/C
compressor comes with a full charge of oil.
• Use only refrigerant oil (DENSO ND-OIL 8) for
absorption.
(cont'd)
A /C Compressor Replacement (cont'd)
6. Disconnect the A/C compressor clutch connector (A). 7. Remove the mounting bolts and the A/C compressor.
Remove the bolt and the nut, then disconnect the
suction line (B) and discharge line (C) from the A/C
compressor. Plug or cap the lines immediately after
disconnecting them to avoid moisture and dust
contamination.
8. Install the A/C compressor in the reverse order of

removed from it (see page 21-7). A new A/C
compressor comes with a full charge of oil.
• Use only refrigerant oil (DENSO ND-OIL 8) for
absorption.

Test, page 21-197
REAR HVAC UNIT

Component Replacement page 21-204
REAR MODE CONTROL MOTOR

Test, page 21-199
REAR BLOWER MOTOR

REAR CONTROL PANEL

REAR IN-CAR TEMPERATURE

SENSOR
(With rear climate control)
Test, page 21-195
REAR CLIMATE CONTROL UNIT
(With climate control)
REAR POWER TRANSISTOR

Test, page 21-196
REAR JUNCTION BOX
REAR BLOWER MOTOR RELAY

Test, page 22-114
System Description
Rear Heater-A/C Door Positions
HOT COOL
H
(VENT)
HEAT/VENT
DOOR
♦ # *
(H EAT/VENT)
(HEAT)
H I
Rear In-car Temperature Sensor Rear In-car Temperature Sensor

Test Replacement
NOTE: Before testing the sensor, checkfor HVAC DTCs 1. Remove the right rear side trim panel (see page
(see page 21-110). 20-110).
1. Remove the rear in-car temperature sensor (see page 2. Disconnect the 2P connector (A) from the rear in-car
21-195). temperature sensor (B), then remove the self-tapping
screw and the rear in-car temperature sensor.
2. Heat and cool the sensor by holding it in front of the
dashboard center vent. A
Cool.
Hot.
3. Compare the resistance reading between terminals
No. 1 and No. 2 of the rear in-car temperature sensor
with the specifications shown in the graph; the
resistance should be within the specifications.
REAR IN-CAR TEMPERATURE SENSOR
12
11
10
9
8
7
RESISTANCE ®
(kO) *
4
3
2
. 1
14 32 50 68 86 104 eF
“ 10 0 10 20 30 40 °C
TEMPERATURE
4. If the resistance is not as specified, replace the rear
in-car temperature sensor (see page 21-195).
Rear Power Transistor Test
1. Remove the right rear side trim panel (see page 4. Carefully release the lock tab on terminal No. 1
20-110). (BLU/YEL) (A) in the 4P connector, then remove the
terminal and insulate it from body ground.
2. Disconnect the 4P connector from the power
transistor.
No. 4 of the rear power transistor. It should be about
1.5 kO.
• Ifthe resistance is within the specifications, go to
step 4.
• Ifthe resistance is not within the specifications,
replace the rear power transistor.
NOTE: Also check the rear blower motor. Rear power
transistor failure can be caused by a defective rear
blower motor.
REAR POWER TRANSISTOR
(To 12 V power
source on vehicle)
5. Reconnect the 4P connector to the rear power
transistor.
6. Make sure the BLU/YEL wire is completely isolated,
then supply 12 volts to cavity No. 1 with a jumper
wire.
rear blower motor runs.
• If the rear blower motor does not run, replace the
power transistor.
# If the rear blower motor runs, the power transistor
is OK.
B B
Rear Air Mix Control Motor Test
Special Tools Required 3. Ifthe rear air mix control motor did not run in step 2,
Backprobe Set 07SAZ-001000A (2) remove it, then check the rear air mix control linkage
NOTE: Before testing the motor, check for HVAC DTCs: • Ifthe linkage and door move smoothly, replace the
• with climate control (see page 21-110) rear air mix control motor (see page 21-198).
• without climate control (see page 21-10) • If the linkage or door sticks or binds, repair them as
needed.
1. Disconnect the 7P connector from the rear air mix
control motor. • Ifthe rear air mix control motor runs smoothly, go
to step 4.
INOTICE
Incorrectly applying power and ground to the rear air
mix control motor will damage it. Follow the
2. Connect battery power to terminal No. 1 of the rear air

mix control motor, and ground terminal No. 2; the
rear air mix control motor should run, and stop at Max
Hot. If it doesn't, reverse the connections; the rear air
mix control motor should run, and stop at Max Cool.
When the rear air mix control motor stops running,

No. 7. It should be between 4.2 to 7.8 kD.
5. Reconnect the rear air mix control motor 7P
connector, then turn the ignition switch to ON (ll).
Max Cool: About 1.0 V
Max Hot: About 4.0 V
specified, replace the rear air mix control motor (see
page 21-198).
Rear Air Mix Control Motor Replacement
1. Remove the right rear side trim panel (see page 4. Disconnect the clamp (A), then remove the bolt and
20-110). clamp (B).
2. Remove the wire harness clip (A), the clip (B), and
then remove the side duct (C).
3. Remove the bolts, then hang the rear junction box (A)
down.
H B
Rear Mode Control Motor Test
6. Disconnect the connector (A) from the rear air mix Special Tools Requi red
control motor (B), then remove the self-tapping Backprobe Set 07SAZ-Q01GG0A (2)
screws and the rear air mix control motor.
NOTE: Before testing the motor, check for HVAC DTCs:
• with climate control (see page 21-110)
• without climate control (see page 21-10)
1. Disconnect the 7P connector from the rear mode
control motor.
INOTICE I
Incorrectly applying power and ground to the rear
mode control motor will damage it. Follow the
2. Connect battery power to terminal No. 1 of the rear

mode control motor, and ground terminal No. 2; the
rear mode control motor should run, and stop at Vent.
If it doesn't, reverse the connections; the rear mode
control motor should run, and stop at Heat. When the
rear mode control motor stops running, disconnect
battery power immediately.
(cont'd)
Rear Mode Control M otor Test Rear Mode Control Motor
3. Ifthe rear mode control motor did not run in step 2, 1. Remove the right rear side trim panel (see page
remove it, then check the rear mode control linkage 20-110).
2. Disconnect the 7P connector (A) from the rear mode
• If the linkage and door move smoothly, replace the control motor (B). Remove the self-tapping screws
rear mode control motor (see page 21-200). and the rear mode control motor from the rear HVAC
• If the linkage or door sticks or binds, repair them as unit.
needed.
• If the rear mode control motor runs smoothly, go to
step 4.
REAR MODE CONTROL MOTOR

4. Measure the resistance between terminals No. 5 and motor runs smoothly.
No. 7. It should be between 4.2 to 7.8 kO.
5. Reconnect the rear mode control motor 7P connector,
then turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
Vent: About 0.5 V
Heat: About 4.5 V
specified, replace the rear mode control motor (see
page 21-200).
Rear Control Panel Rear Climate Control Unit
1. Remove the rear control panel (A) from the roof. 1. Remove the right rear side trim panel (see page
20-110).
With rear climate control
2. Disconnect the connector (A) from the rear climate
control unit (B), then remove the self-tapping screws
and the rear climate control unit
3. Install the rear climate control unit in the reverse

order of removal. After installation, operate the
various functions to see whether works properly.
panel.
3. Install the rear control panel in the reverse order of
functions to see whether works properly.
Rear Blower Motor Replacement Rear HVAC Unit
1. Remove the right rear side trim panel (see page 1. Recover the refrigerant with a
20-110). recovery/recycling/charging station (see page 21-88).
2. Disconnect the connectors (A) from the rear mode 2. Remove the right rear side trim panel (see page
control motor and the rear blower motor (B), then 20-110).
remove the wire harness clip (C), the self-tapping
3. Remove the wire harness clip (A), the clip (B), and
screws and the rear blower motor.
then remove the side duct (C).
4. Remove the bolts, then hang the rear junction box (A)
down.
5. Disconnect the rear evaporator receiver line (A) and 7. Remove the bolts, then pull out the rear HVAC unit
the suction line (B) connections. Slide the hose (A). Disconnect the rear air mix control motor
clamps (C) back, then disconnect the inlet heater hose connector (B), then remove the rear HVAC unit.
(D) and the outlet heater hose (E) from the rear heater
core. Engine coolant will run out when the hoses are 6 x 1.0 mm
9.8 N-m (1.0 kgf-m, 7.2 Ibf-ft)
disconnected; drain it into a clean drip pan. Be sure
not to let coolant spill on the electrical parts, the
carpet, or the painted surfaces. If any coolant spills,
rinse it off immediately.
B A
24 x 1.5 mm 16 x 1.5 mm
6. Disconnect the connectors (A) from the rear mode

control motor, the rear blower motor, rear in-car
temperature sensor and rear climate control unit,
then remove the wire harness clips (B), from the rear
HVAC unit.
Rear HVAC Unit Component Replacement
NOTE: The rear in-car temperature sensor (A), the rear power transistor (B), the rear air mix control motor (C), the rear
mode control motor (D), the rear blower motor (E), and the rear climate control unit (F) can be replaced without
removing the rear HVAC unit.
1. Remove the self-tapping screws, the clamps (G) and the rear heater core (H). Remove the self-tapping screws, the
clamp (I) and the evaporator lines (J) together with the expansion valve (K). If necessary, remove the expansion valve.
Use a second wrench to hold the other fitting on the valve so the evaporator lines won't twist. Leave the first fitting
loosely connected so you can use it to hold the valve while you loosen the second fitting.
2. If necessary, remove the rear power transistor, the rear air mix control motor (see page 21-198), the rear mode control
motor (see page 21-199), and the rear blower motor (see page 21-202).
3. Remove the self-tapping screws, carefully separate the right housing (L) from the left housing (M), then remove the
insulator (N) and the rear evaporator core (0).
4. Reassemble the unit in the reverse order of disassembly, and note these items;
• Replace all O-rings with new ones at each fitting and apply a thin coat of refrigerant oil before installing them. Be
sure to use the correct O-rings for HFC-134a (R-134a) to avoid leakage.
• Immediately after using the oil, reinstall the cap on the container, and seal it to avoid moisture absorption.
• Install the capillary tube (P) directly against the outlet line, and wrap it with electrical tape (Q).
• Make sure no air is leaking from the right housing, the left housing and the lower housing fitting.
• Before reassembly, make sure that the rear air mix control linkage and door move smoothly without binding.
• Before reassembly, make sure that the rear mode control linkage and door move smoothly without binding.
• After reassembly, make sure the rear air mix control motor runs smoothly (see page 21-198).
• After reassembly, make sure the rear mode control motor runs smoothly (see page 21-200).
• Make sure that there is no coolant leakage.
Rear A /C Line Replacement
® Receiver line to th e rear receiver line A; 13 N-m (1.3 kgf-m, 9.4 Ibf-ft)
(D Rear receiver line A to th e rear receiver line B: 13 N-m (1.3 kgf-m, 9.4 Ibf-ft)
(D Rear receiver line B to t h e rear blower/evaporator unit: 13 N-m (1.3 kgf-m, 9.4 Ibf-ft)
@ Rear suction line B to the rear blower/evaporator unit: 31 N-m (3.2 kgf-m, 23 Ibf-ft)
© Rear suction line B to the rear suction line A: 31 N-m (3.2 kgf-m, 23 Ibf-ft)
© Suction line to the rear suction line A: 31 N-m (3.2 kgf-m, 23 Ibf-ft)
Rear Heater Hose Replacement
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) (if electrical maintenance is required)
these circuits.
Body Electrical
Body Electrical Troubleshooting

Special Tools.............................................22-2 B-CAN System Diagnosis Test Mode
General Troubleshooting Inform ation. 22-3 A ......................................................... 22-155
B-CAN System Diagnosis Test Mode
Relay and Control Unit Locations B ......................................................... 22-157
Engine Compartment............................. 22-7 B-CAN System Diagnosis Test Mode
Dashboard................. . . . .........................22-9 C ......................................................... 22-157
Rear Quarter Panel and Sliding D o o r.. 22-12 B-CAN System Diagnosis Test Mode
Rear Quarter Panel, Sliding Door, and D ......................................................... 22-158
Roof........................................................ 22-13 B-CAN System Diagnosis Test Mode
D o o r .......................................................... 22-14 1 and Test Mode 2 (without the
S eat............................................................ 22-15 HDS)...................................................22-160
Gauge Control Module DTC Display. . . 22-163
Connectors and Harnesses Circuit Diagram .........................................22-164
Connector Index................... ................... 22-16
DTC Troubleshooting............................. 22-167
Connector to Harness Index....................22-19
MICU Input T est................................ 22-185
Gauge Control Module Input Test........22-189
Fuse/Relay Boxes
Door Multiplex Control Unit In put Test. 22-190
Connector to Fuse/Relay Box Index-----22-90
Combination Switch Control Unit Input
Power Distribution Tes t............. ..................... .....................22-191
Fuse to Components Index.................... 22-96 Relay Control Module Input Test..........22-192
MICU-Rear Junction Box Input T est. . . 22-193
Ground Distribution
Ground to Components Index----- . . . . . 22-103 Keyless/Power Door
Locks/Security System
Under-hood Fuse/Relay Box Component Location Index................... 22-195
Removal and Installation........................22-105 System Description.................................22-198
DTC Troubleshooting............................. 22-106 Circuit Diagram ........................................ 22-201
Under-dash Fuse/Relay Box Symptom Troubleshooting................... 22-210
* Removal and Installation....................... 22-110 Control Unit Input T est...........................22-211
Door Lock Actuator Test......................... 22-222
Battery Tailgate Lock Actuator Test................... 22-223
Battery T est............................................... 22-111 Front Passenger's Door Lock Switch
Battery Terminal Disconnection and T es t......................................................... 22-223
Reconnection....................... ................ 22-112 Door Lock Knob Switch Test................. 22-224
Battery Removal and Installation..........22-113 Tailgate Lock Knob Switch T est............ 22-226
Door Key Cylinder Switch Test............. 22-226
Relays Security Hood Switch T est..................... 22-227
Power Relay T est..................................... 22-114 Fuel Fill Door Switch
Test/Replacement.................................22-227
Ignition Switch CESS Articulated Harness Test............. 22-228
Component Location Index....................22-116
CESS Articulated Harness
Circuit Diagram ........................................22-118
Replacement........................................ 22-230
* Key Interlock System Circuit Transmitter Test...................................... 22-231
Troubleshooting................................... 22-119
Keyless Transmitter Programming/
*K ey Interlock Solenoid Test....................22-120 Deleting - Manual M ethod................. 22-232
Park Pin Switch Test................................. 22-120
* Ignition Switch Test................................. 22-121 Horns
Multiplex Integrated Control Circuit Diagram ............. ........................ 22-234
System Horn Test/Replacement........................... 22-235
Component Location Index....................22-122 Horn Switch Test.......................................22-235
General Troubleshooting Information. 22-124
DTC Troubleshooting Index....................22-126 Exterior Lights
System Description............................... . 22-138 Component Location Index................... 22-237
Circuit Diagram ........................................ 22-240
Parking/Side Power Windows
Marker/Taillights/License Plate Component Location Index................... 22-299
Lights.................................................. 22-244 System Description................................. 22-300
Fog Lights.............................................. 22-246 Resetting the Power Window Control
Back-up Lights.......................................22-247 U n it................. ....................................... 22-301
Brake Lights.......................................... 22-248 Circuit Diagram ........................................ 22-304
DTC Troubleshooting............................. 22-249 DTC Troubleshooting............................. 22-307
Combination Light Switch Power Window Master Switch Input
Test/Replacement................................. 22-258 Test..........................................................22-309
Automatic Lighting Control Unit Input Driver's Power W indow Motor T est----- 22-313
T est..........................................................22-260 Passenger's Power W indow Motor
Daytime Running Lights Control Unit T est......................................................... 22-314
Input T est.............................................. 22-263 Power Window Master Switch
Headlight Replacement........................... 22-265 Replacement........................................ 22-314
Headlight Adjustment............................. 22-265 Passenger's Power W indow Switch
Bulb Replacement..................... ............. 22-267 Test/Replacement.................................22-315
Fog Light Replacement............. ............. 22-270
Fog Light Adjustm ent................. ........... 22-271 Wipers/Washers
Taillight Replacement............................. 22-271 Component Location Index................... 22-316
Circuit Diagram - W indshield..................22-318
License Plate Light Replacement.......... 22-272
High Mount Brake Light Replacement. 22-273 Rear W in do w ........................................ 22-320
Brake Pedal Position Switch T e s t.......... 22-274 DTC Troubleshooting............................. 22-322
Wiper/Washer Switch (Combination
Turn Signal/Hazard Warning Lights Switch Control Unit) Input Test..........22-330
Component Location Index.................. 22-275 Wiper/Washer Switch Replacement. . . 22-332
Circuit Diagram ...... .................................. 22-276 Wiper Motor Test..................................... 22-332
Turn Signal/Hazard Relay Input Test. . . 22-278 Washer Motor Test................... ............... 22-333
Hazard Warning Switch Washer Fluid Level Switch Test........... 22-334
Test/Replacement.................................22-280 Wiper Motor Replacement..................... 22-334
Rear Window Wiper Motor
interior Lights Replacement........................................ 22-335
Component Location Index................... 22-281 Washer Reservoir Replacement............ 22-336
Circuit Diagram ........................................ 22-282 Wiper Arm/Nozzle Adjustment.............. 22-337
Interior Light Switch Washer Tube Replacement................... 22-339
Tailgate Latch Switch Gauges
Test/Replacement.................................22-284 Component Location Index................... 22-343
Front Individual Map Light Self-diagnostic Function......................... 22-345
Test/Replacement.................................22-285 Circuit Diagram ........................................ 22-350
Rear Individual Map Light DTC Troubleshooting............................. 22-358
Test/Replacement.................................22-286 Rewriting the ODO Data and
Cargo Area Light Test/Replacement. . . 22-286 Transferring the Maintenance
Ambient Light Test/Replacement.......... 22-287 Minder Data to a New Gauge Control
Vanity Mirror Light Test/Replacement. 22-287 M odule.................................................. 22-370
Glove Box Light Test/Replacement — 22-288 Gauge Control Module Replacement.. 22-371
Courtesy Light Replacement................. 22-288 Outside Air Temperature Indicator
Calibration............................................ 22-371
Entry Lights Control System Select/Reset/lnformation Switch
Component Location Index................... 22-289 Test/Replacement................................. 22-373
Circuit Diagram ........................................ 22-290
Control Unit Input T est.......................... 22-291 Dashlights Brightness Controller
Ignition Key Switch Test......................... 22-296 Circuit Diagram........................................ 22-374
Ignition Key Light Test.............................22-296
Electrical Compass
HomeLink Remote Control System Component Location Index................... 22-375
Circuit Diagram ........................................ 22-297 System Description................................. 22-376
Test............................................................ 22-298 Circuit Diagram........................................ 22-377
Electrical Compass Unit Input Test . . . . 22-378
Safety Indicator System Seat Heaters
Circuit Diagram ........................................ 22-380 Component Location Index................... 22-428
Control Unit Input T est........................... 22-381 Circuit Diagram ....................... ................ 22-429
Switch Test/Replacement....................... 22-431
Reminder Systems Seat Heater Test...................................... 22-431
Circuit Diagram............................. ........... 22-385
Control Unit Input T es t........................... 22-387 Power Seats
Rear Window Defogger Circuit Diagram - Driver's Power S e at.. 22-435
Component Location Index................... 22-390 Front Passenger's Power S e at.......... 22-436
Circuit Diagram ........................................ 22-391 Power Seat Adjustment Switch
Function T est............................................ 22-392 Test/Replacement.................................22-437
Defogger Wire Repair............................. 22-393 Driver's Power Seat Motor T est............ 22-439
Front Passenger's Power Seat Motor
Moonroof Test........................... .............................. 22-440
Symptom Troubleshooting Index........ 22-395 Immobilizer System
Circuit Diagram ........................................ 22-396 Component Location Index................... 22-441
Limit Switch Test..................................... 22-397 System Description................................. 22-442
Moonroof Motor T es t............................. 22-397 Circuit Diagram ..................... ................... 22-443
Moonroof Switch Test/Replacement. . . 22-398 Symptom Troubleshooting
Inform ation........................................ .. 22-445
Accessory Power Sockets Symptom Troubleshooting Index........ 22-447
Component Location Index................... 22-399 Symptom Troubleshooting................... 22-448
Circuit D iagram ......................... .............. 22-401 Imoes Unit Input Test/Replacement. . . . 22-451
Driver's and Front Passenger's System Check.......................................... 22-455
Accessory Power Socket Status Log......................... ........................22-457
Test/Replacement.................................22-402 Immobilizer Key Registration............... 22-458
Cargo Area Accessory Power Socket Immobilizer Control Unit-Receiver
Test/Replacement............................. .. 22-404 Replacement........................................ 22-459
AC Power Outlet Driving Position Memory System

Component Location Index................... 22-405 (DPMS)
Circuit Diagram ....................................... 22-406 Component Location Index................... 22-460
AC Inverter Unit Input Test..................... 22-407 System Description................................. 22-462
Power Outlet Replacement..................... 22-408 General Troubleshooting Information. 22-463
Circuit Diagram - Power S eat................ 22-468
Rearview Monitor Mirror Power M irro r..................... .................. 22-471
DTC Troubleshooting....................... . 22-473
Circuit D iagram .........................................22-410
System Input Test and Function T est.. 22-503
System Description.................................22-411
Power Seat Control Unit Input Test — 22-510
Rearview Monitor Mirror Input
Power Mirror Control Unit Input T est.. 22-513
Test/Replacement................................. 22-412
Driving Position Memory Switch
Automatic Dimming Inside Mirror
Power Seat Adjustment Switch
Circuit D iagram .........................................22-415
System Description................................. 22-416
Driver's Power Seat Motor T est............22-517
Test/Replacement.....................................22-416
Power Mirrors Power Sliding Doors

Component Location Index............... 22-518
System Description..................... .......... 22-520
Circuit D iagram -W ithout D P M S . . . . . . 22-418
Resetting the Power Sliding Door
Power Mirror Switch Function Test . . . . 22-419
Control U n it.......................................... 22-531
Power Mirror Switch
Circuit Diagram ........................................ 22-532
Test/Replacement................................. 22-422
Power Mirror Actuator T es t................... 22-423
Symptom Troubleshooting Index........ 22-596
Power Mirror Actuator Replacement. . . 22-425
Control Unit Input T est................... ....... 22-598
Power Sliding Door Switch
Closer Motor T est................................ 22-602
Release Actuator Test........................ 22-603
Slide Motor T est.. * . . ......................... 22-603
Sliding Door Pinch Sensor
Test/Replacement..................... 22-604
Remote Control Switch Test.............. 22-604
Window Position Switch T e s t . . . . . . . 22-605
Latch Position Switch Test................. 22-605
Power Tailgate
Component Location Index. . ........... 22-607
System Description............................. 22-609
Resetting the Power Tailgate Control
U n i t . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ............... 22-611
Circuit Diagram ............................... 22-612
DTC Troubleshooting......... 22-614
Control Unit Input Test....................... 22-644
Power Tailgate Motor Test................. 22-646
Dashboard Power Tailgate Switch
Test/Replacement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-646
Inside Tailgate Switch
Test/Replacement............................. 22-647
Power Tailgate Latch/Ratchet Switch
T e s t.......................... ......................... 22-647
Power Tailgate Closer Motor Test. . . 22-648
Power Tailgate Outer Handle Switch
Test/Replacement....................... 22-648
Power Tailgate Outside Beeper
Test/Replacement............................. 22-649
Drive Unit Replacement..................... 22-649
Pinch Sensor Replacement------------ 22-650
Parking and Back-up Sensor

System
Component Location Index.......... 22-651
System Description............................. 22-653
Circuit Diagram. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-654
Parking and Back-up Sensor Control
Unit Input Test......................... ......... 22-656
Parking and Back-up Sensor Switch
Test/Replacement................... ......... 22-660
Parking and Back-up Sensor
Replacement...................................
Special Tools
Ref.NO. Tool Number Description Qty

© 07AAC-000A1 AO Relay Puller 1
© 07TAZ-001020A Back Probe Adapter 2
© 07WAZ-00101OA MPCS (MCIC) Service Connector 1
I
Tips and Precautions • Some connectors have a clip on their side used to
attach them to a mount bracket on the body or on
Special Tools Required another component This clip has a pull type lock.
Back Probe Adapter 07TAZ-001020A • Some mounted connectors cannot be disconnected
unless you first release the lock and remove the
Before T roubleshooting connector from its mount bracket (A).
1. Check applicable fuses in the appropriate fuse/relay
box.
2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and
clean and tight connections.
NOTICE I
• Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery
ground cable has been disconnected, otherwise
you will damage the alternator diodes.
• Do not attempt to crank the engine with the battery
ground cable loosely connected or you will severely
damage the wiring.
Handling Connectors
• Never try to disconnect connectors by pulling on their
• Make sure the connectors are clean and have no loose wires; pull on the connector halves instead.
wire terminals.
• Always reinstall plastic covers.
• Make sure multiple cavity connectors are packed with
dielectric grease (except watertight connectors).
• All connectors have push-down release type locks (A).
• Before connecting connectors, make sure the

terminals (A) are in place and not bent.
(cont'd)
• Check for loose retainers (A) and rubber seals (B). Handling Wires and Harnesses
• Secure wires and wire harnesses to the frame with
their respective wire ties at the designated locations.
• Remove clips carefully; don't damage their locks (A).
• The backs of some connectors are packed with

dielectric grease. Add grease if necessary. If the
grease is contaminated, replace it.
• After installing harness clips, make sure the harness

doesn't interfere with any moving parts.
• Keep wire harnesses away from exhaust components
and other hot parts, from sharp edges of brackets and
holes, and from exposed screws and bolts.
• Seat grommets in their grooves properly (A). Do not
leave grommets distorted (B).
• Insert the connector all the way and make sure it is

securely locked.
• Position wires so that the open end of the cover faces
down.
Testing and Repairs Fiwe-step Troubleshooting
• Do not use wires or harnesses with broken insulation. 1. Verify The Complaint:
Replace them or repair them by wrapping the break
with electrical tape or shrink tubing. Turn on all the components in the problem circuit to
• Never attempt to modify, splice, or repair SRS wiring. verify the customer complaint. Note the symptoms.
If there is an open or damage in SRS wiring or Do not begin disassembly or testing until you have
terminals, replace the harness. narrowed down the problem area.
• After installing parts, make sure that no wires are 2. Analyze The Schematic:
pinched under them.
Look up the schematic for the problem circuit.
• When using electrical test equipment, follow the
Determine how the circuit is supposed to work by
manufacturer's instructions and those described in
tracing the current paths from the power feed through
this manual.
the circuit components to ground. If several circuits
• If possible, insert the probe of the tester from the wire fail at the same time, the fuse or a ground is a likely
side (except waterproof connector).
cause.
Based on the symptoms and your understanding of
the circuit operation, identify one or more possible
causes of the problem.
3. Isolate The Problem By Testing The Circuit:
Make circuit tests to check the diagnosis you made in
step 2. Keep in mind that a logical, simple procedure
is the key to efficient troubleshooting. Test for the
most likely cause of failure first. Try to make tests at
points that are easily accessible.
4. Fix The Problem:
Once the specific problem is identified, make the
• Use back probe adaptor 07TAZ-001020A. repair. Be sure to use proper tools and safe
procedures.
5. Make Sure The Circuit Works:
Turn on all components in the repaired circuit in all
modes to make sure you've fixed the entire problem.
If the problem was a blown fuse, be sure to test all of
the circuits on the fuse. Make sure no new problems
turn up and the original problem does not recur.
• Refer to the instructions in the Honda Terminal Kit for

identification and replacement of connector terminals.
Genera! Troubleshooting Information (cont'd)
Wire Color Codes How to Check for DTCs with the Honda
Diagnostic System (HDS)
The following abbreviations are used to identify wire
colors in the circuit schematics: NOTE: For specific operations, refer to the user's manual
W H T...................... ...... ......... ... White that came with the Honda Diagnostic System (HDS).
YEL............................. ........... ... Yellow Make sure the HDS is loaded with the latest software.
BLK............................ ............... Black
BLU................................. ......... Blue 1. Connect the Honda Diagnostic System (HDS) to the
GRN .......... .............. ..... ....... ... Green Data Link Connector (DLC) (A) located under the
RED....................... ................ ... Red driver's side of the dashboard.
O R N............................... .......... Orange
PNK....................................... ... Pink
BRN..................... ........... ..... .... Brown
GRY........................................... Gray
PUR.... ................................... ... Purple
TAN........................................... Tan
LT BLU...................................... Light Blue
LT GRN...................... .......... .... Light Green
The wire insulation has one color or one color with
another color stripe. The second color is the stripe.

and the gauge assembly. If it does not, troubleshoot
3. Select the MODE MENU and check for Diagnostic
Trouble Code (DTCs), and note them. Refer to the
Troubleshooting Index and begin the appropriate
Engine Compartment
RADIATOR FAN
RELAY
(cont'd)
Engine Compartment (cont'd)
DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHTS RELAY

r Wire colors: RED/BLK, RED/WHT, 1
[ BLU/WHT, BLK, and RED/WHT J
Dashboard
ADJUSTABLE PEDAL FORWARD RELAY (Touring model)

Wire colors: GRN/RED, ORN, 1
BLU/BLK, BLK, and GRN J
ADJUSTABLE PEDAL REARWARD RELAY (Touring model)
f Wire colors: GRN/YEL, ORN, 1
[ BLU/BLK, BLK, and BLU J
AUTOMATIC LIGHTING CONTROL UNIT
COMBINATION SWITCH CONTROL UNIT
(Built into the wiper/washer switch)
PARKSIMG and
BACK-UP SENSOR
CONTROL UNIT
(Touring model)
HANDSFREELINK CONTROL UNIT

(*08-10 models)
DRIVER'S ACCESSORY POWER SOCKET RELAY
MULTIPLEX INTEGRATED
CONTROL UNIT (MICU)
(Built into the driver's
under-dash fuse/relay box)
PGM-FI MAIN RELAY 2

(FUEL PUMP) DRIVER'S UNDER-DASH
FUSE/RELAY BOX
POWER WINDOW RELAY
PGM-Fi SUBRELAY (LAF)
STARTER CUT RELAY
(cont'd)
Dashboard (cont'd)
MOONROOF CLOSE RELAY
(With premium audio system)

ACTIVE NOISE CANCELLATION (ANC) UNIT AUDIO AMPLIFIER
FUSE/RELAY BOX
Rear Quarter Panel and Sliding Door
POWER TAILGATE CONTROL UNIT
LEFT POWER SLIDING

DOOR CONTROL UNIT
r n
M BODY ■
Rear Quarter Panel, Sliding Door, and Roof

Door
Driver's Door:
Seat
Front Passenger's Seat: Driver's Seat:

Connector Index
Identifi cation numbers have been assigned to in-line connectors, junction connectors, and terminals. The number is preceded by the letter "C"
for connectors, "G " for ground terminals, or "T " for non-ground terminals.
Harness Location
Engi ne Dashboard Others (Floor, Door, Notes
Compartment Trunk, and Roof)
A/C wire harness C505 Connector to Harness
(see page 22-81)
Active noise cancellation (ANC) C438 Connector to Harness
microphone subharness*6 (see page 22-64)
Alternator +B cable ('07 model) T102, T103 Connector to Harness
(see page 22-19)
Audio subharness C681, C682, and C683 C684 Connector to Harness
(see page 22-79)
Battery ground cable G1, and (—) Connector to Harness
(see page 22-19)
CKP sensor A/B subharness C151 • '07 model (see page
22-23)
• '08-10 models: J35A6
engine (see page
22-27)
Dashboard wire harness C505, C506, C681, C682, Connector to Harness
(Center console branch)*1 C683, G502, and G503 (see page 22-43)
(Center console branch)*2 G502, and G503 (see page 22-45)
Dashboard wire harness C505, C506, G502, and Connector to Harness
(Center console branch)*3 G503 (see page 22-47)
Dashboard wire harness C401 through C404, C406, Connector to Harness
(Left branch) C407, C432, C433, C501, (see page 22-39)
C502, C503, C508, C604,
C605, and G501
(Right branch) C732, G504, and G505 (see page 22-49)
Driver's door subharness C631 C632 and C633 Connector to Harness
(see page 22-67)
Driver's door wire harness A €632, C633, and C634 Connector to Harness
(see page 22-67)
Driver's door wire harness B (Except C634 Connector to Harness
VAN, DX, and LX models) (see page 22-67)
Driver's seat subharness*4 C903 Connector to Harness
(see page 22-82)
Driver's seat subharness*5 C903 Connector to Harness
(see page 22-84)
Driver's seat wire harness*4 C901, C902, and C903 Connector to Harness
(see page 22-82)
Driver's seat wire harness*5 C901, C902, and C903 Connector to Harness
(see page 22-84)
Engine compartment wire harness C401 through C408, C431, Connector to Harness
(Dash branch) C601, C602, C603, and (see page 22-37)
G401
Engine compartment wire harness C201, C203, Connector to Harness
(Engine compartment branch) C204, T2, G202, (see page 22-35)
and G302
Engine ground cable A G2 and T4 Connector to Harness
(see page 22-19)
Engine ground cable B T5 and (—) Connector to Harness
(see page 22-19)
Engine wire harness ('07 model) C101,C102,C151, Connector to Harness
C152, C153, C203, (see page 22-21)
G101,and G102
*1: With navigation system
*2: EX, EX-L, and Touring models; without navigation system
*3: VAN, DX, and LX models
*4: '08-10 models with driver's power seat
*5: '07 model with driver's power seat
*6: *08-10 models with ANC (Active Noise Cancellation)
*7: With front passenger's power seat
*8: With moonroof
*9: Without moonroof
*10: Touring and '08-10 EX-L models with navigation system
Harness Location
Engi ne Dashboard Others (Floor, Door, Notes
Engine wire harness C101, C102, C103, Connector to Harness
('08-10 models: J35A6 engine) C104, C151, C152, (see page 22-25)
C153, C203, S1, S2,
T102, T103, G101,
and G102
Engine wire harness C101, C102, C103, Connector to Harness
('08-10 models: J35A7 engine) C104, C152, C153, (see page 22-29)
C203,T102, T103,
and G101
Floor wire harness (Left front branch) C436, C603, C604, C605, C606, C684, C751, Connector to Harness
C631, and G601 C752, C901, C902, and (see page 22-51)
G602
Floor wire harness (Left rear branch) C691, C701, C702, Connector to Harness
C801, C951, C952, and (see page 22-53)
G603
Floor wire harness (Right front branch) C504, C601, and C602 C781, C782, C931, and Connector to Harness
G651 (see page 22-55)
Floor wire harness (Right rear branch) C703, C801, C961, Connector to Harness
G652, and G653 (see page 22-57)
Front engine mount actuator C202 Connector to Harness
subharness (J35A7 engine) (see page 22-33)
Front engine compartment wire C201, C202, G201, Connector to Harness
harness and G301 (see page 22-33)
Front passenger's door wire harness A C731, C732, and C733 Connector to Harness
(see page 22-69)
Front passenger's door wire harness B C733 Connector to Harness
(Except VAN, DX, and LX models) (see page 22-69)
Front passenger's seat subharness*7 C933 Connector to Harness
(see page 22-88)
Front passenger’s seat wire harness C931 and C932 Connector to Harness
('07 model) (see page 22-86)
Front passenger's seat wire harness C931, C932, and C933 Connector to Harness
('08-10 models) (see page 22-88)
Fuel tank unit subharness C691 Connector to Harness
(see page 22-53)
High mount brake light subharness C856 Connector to Harness
(see page 22-77)
Knock sensor subharness C152 • '07 model (see page
22-23)
• '08-10 models: J35A6
engine (see page 22-27)
• '08-10 models: J35A7
Left CESS articulated harness C751 through C754 Connector to Harness
(see page 22-71)
Left side curtain airbag harness C435, C951, and C952 Connector to Harness
(see page 22-63)
Left sliding door wire harness C753 and C754 Connector to Harness
(see page 22-71)
Left tailgate wire harness C704, C705, C851, and Connector to Harness
C852 (see page 22-75)
License plate lights subharness C855 Connector to Harness
('07 model) (see page 22-77)
Middle tailgate wire harness C851 and C852 Connector to Harness
(Left branch) (see page 22-75)
Middle tailgate wire harness C853, C854, and C855 Connector to Harness
(Right branch) (see page 22-77)
OPDS unit harness ('07 model) C932 Connector to Harness
(see page 22-86)
*6: '08-10 models with ANC (Active Noise Cancellation)
*8: With moonroof
(cont'd)
Connector Index (cont'd)
Harness Location
Engine Dashboard Others (Floor, Door, Notes
ODS unit harness ('08-10 models)*7 C932 Connector to Harness
(see page 22-88)
Rear bumper subharness (Touring C708 Connector to Harness
model) (Left branch) (see page 22-59)
Rear bumper subharness (Touring Connector to Harness
model) (Right branch) (see page 22-61)
Rear wire harness (Left branch) C701, C702, C704, Connector to Harness
C705, C708, C709, and (see page 22-59)
G702
Rear wire harness (Right branch) C703, C706, C707, and Connector to Harness
G701 (see page 22-61)
Rearview mirror subharness*10 C437 Connector to Harness
(see page 22-64)
Right CESS articulated harness C781 through C784 Connector to Harness
(see page 22-73)
Right side curtain airbag harness C961 Connector to Harness
(see page 22-57)
Right sliding door wire harness C783, C784, and G751 Connector to Harness
(see page 22-73)
Right tailgate wire harness C706, C707, C853, Connector to Harness
C854, and C856 (see page 22-77)
Roof wire harness*8 C431 through C434and C435, C437, and C438 Connector to Harness
C436 (see page 22-63)
Roof wire harness*9 C431 and C433 Connector to Harness
(see page 22-65)
Seat position sensor subharness*3 C606 Connector to Harness
(see page 22-51)
Shift solenoid wire harness C153 • '07 model (see page
22-23)
• '08-10 models: J35A6
• '08-10 models: J35A7
Starter cable T1,T2, T3, T101, Connector to Harness
and ( + ) (see page 22-19)
*6; '08-10 models with ANC (Active Noise Cancellation)
*8: With moonroof
Connector to Harness Index
Starter Cable
Connector or Terminal Ref Cavities Location Connects to Notes
T101 1 Ri ght si de of engine compartment Under-hood fuse/relay box
T1 9 Middle of engine compartment Starter motor
T2 2 Right side of engine compartment Auxiliary under-hood fuse *
box
T3 3 Battery Battery positive terminal #
(+ ) Battery Battery positive terminal
*: EX, EX-L, and Touring models
Alternator +B Cable (*07 model)
T102 10 Right side of engine compartment Under-hood fuse/relay box
T103 8 Front of engine compartment Alternator B terminal
Battery Ground Cable

G1 4 Left side of engine compartment Body ground, via engine
ground cable
(-) Battery Battery negative terminal
Engine Ground Cable A

T4 7 Middle of engine compartment Cylinder head cover
G2 6 Middle of engine compartment Body ground, via engine
ground cable
Engine Ground Cable B

T5 5 Left side of engine compartment Transmission housing
(-) Battery Battery negative terminal
(cont'd)
Connector to Harness Index (cont'd)
BATTERY GROUND
CABLE
Engine Wire Harness ('07 model)
A/T clutch pressure control solenoid 26 2 Transmission housing
valve A
valve B
valve C
ATF temperature sensor 29 2 Transmission housing
Alternator 46 4 Middle of engine compartment
CMP sensor 50 3 Right side engine compartment
Engine coolant temperature (ECT) sensor 1 38 2 Left side of engine compartment
Engine coolant temperature (ECT) sensor 2 19 2 Left side of engine compartment
Rocker arm oil pressure sensor 13 3 Middle of engine compartment
EVAP canister purge valve 17 2 Middle of engine compartment
Exhaust gas recirculation (EGR) valve 36 6 Left side of engine compartment
and position sensor
Front air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor (Bank 2, 39 6 Exhaust manifold (front bank)
Sensor 1)
Front secondary heated oxygen 37 4 Exhaust manifold (front bank)
sensor (secondary H02S) (Bank 2,
Sensor 2)
Ignition coil No. 1 5 3 Middle of engine compartment
Injector No. 1 4 2 Middle of engine compartment
Input shaft (mainshaft) speed sensor 33 3 Transmission housing
Intake air temperature (IAT) sensor 40 2 Left side of engine compartment
Intake manifold tuning (IMT) actuator 55 5 Right side of engine compartment *1
Manifold absolute pressure (MAP) 41 3 Left side of engine compartment
sensor
Oil pressure switch 58 1 Right side of engine compartment
Output shaft (countershaft) speed sensor 31 3 Transmission housing
PCM connector B 52 49 Right side of engine compartment
PCM connector C 51 49 Right side of engine compartment
Rear air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor (Bank 1, 12 6 Exhaust manifold (rear bank)
Sensor 1)
Rear secondary heated oxygen sensor 14 4 Exhaust manifold (rear bank)
(secondary H02S) (Bank 1f Sensor 2)
Rocker arm oil control solenoid 2 1 Right side of engine compartment *2
Rocker arm oil control solenoid 15 2 Middle of engine compartment
Rocker arm oil pressure switch 57 2 Right side of engine compartment *2
Starter solenoid 35 1 Left side of engine compartment
Throttle actuator and throttle position 18 6 Middle of engine compartment
sensor
Transmission range switch 30 10 Transmission housing
Transmission fluid pressure switch A 16 1 Transmission housing
(2nd clutch)
Transmission fluid pressure switch B 32 1 Transmission housing
(3nd clutch)
4th clutch pressure switch 21 1 Transmission housing
*1: J35A7 engine
*2: J35A6 engine
(cont'd)
SUBHARNESS
C101 (Junction connector) 6 24 M i ddle of engine compartment
C102 (Junction connector) 9 24 Mi ddle of engine compartment
C151 3 6 Right side of engine compartment CKP sensor A/B subharness
C152 54 1 Middle of engine compartment Knock sensor subharness
C153 28 5 Transmission housing Shift solenoid wire harness
C203 53 13 Right side of engine compartment Engine compartment wire
harness
G101 20 Left side of engine compartment Body ground, via engine wire
harness
G102 1 Right side of engine compartment Body ground, via engine wire
harness
Shift Solenoid Wire Harness ('07 model

Shift solenoid valve A 24 1 Transmission housing
Shift solenoid valve B 34 1 Transmission housing
Shift solenoid valve C 23 1 Transmission housing
Shift solenoid valve D 25 1 Transmission housing
C153 28 5 Transmission housing Engine wire harness
CKP Sensor A/B Subharness ('07 model)

CKP sensor A/B 56 6 Right side of engine compartment
C151 3 6 Right side of engine compartment Engine wire harness
Knock Sensor Subharness ('07 model)

Knock sensor 49 1 Middle of engine compartment
KNOCK SENSOR 46 45 44 43 42 41 40 39 38 37 36 35 34
SUBHARNESS
Connector or Terminal Ref I Cavities Location Connects to Notes
A/C compressor clutch 49 1 Front of engine comportment
valve A
valve B
valve C
Engine coolant temperature (ECT) 40 2 Left side of engine compartment
sensor 1
sensor 2
and position sensor
Sensor 1)
sensor (secondary H02S) (Bank 2 ,
Sensor 2)
Intake air temperature (IAT) sensor 42 2 Left side of engine compartment
Manifold absolute pressure (MAP) sensor 43 3 Left side of engine compartment
Oil pressure switch 4 1 Right side of engine compartment
Sensor 1)
(secondary H02S) (Bank 1, Sensor 2)
Rocker arm oil control solenoid 2 1 Right side of engine compartment
Rocker arm oil pressure switch 60 2 Right side of engine compartment
sensor
(2nd clutch)
(3rd clutch)
4th clutch transmission fluid pressure 21 1 Transmission housing
switch
(cont'd)
Engine Wire Harness (*08-10 models; J35A6 engine) (cont'd)
C101 (Junction connector) 7 24 Middle of engine compartment
C103 (Junction connector) 19 24 Left side of engine compartment
C151 3 6 Right side of engine compartment CKP sensor A/B subharness
harness
S1 (Thermal joint) 36 Left side of engine
S2 (Thermal joint) 37 Left side of engine
T102 61 Right side of engine compartment under-hood fuse/relay box
G101 20 Left side of engine compartment Body ground, via engine wire
harness
harness
Shift Solenoid Wire Harness {*08-10 models; J35A6 engine)

C153 28 5 Transmission housing Engine wire harness
CKP Sensor A/B Subharness (*08-10 models; J35A6 engine)

CKP sensor A/B 59 6 Right side of engine compartment
Knock Sensor Subharness ('08-10 models; J35A6 engine)

(cont'd)
CKP SENSOR
A/B
SUBHARNESS
KNOCK SENSOR
SUBHARNESS
46 45 44 43 42 41 40 39 38
Engine Wire Harness ('©8-10 models: J35A7 engine)
A/C compressor clutch 47 1 Front of engine compartment
valve A
valve B
valve C
CKP sensor 16 3 Left side engine compartment
sensor 1
sensor 2
and position sensor
Sensor 1)
Front rocker arm oil pressure switch 54 1 Right side of engine compartment
sensor (secondary H02S) (Bank 2,
Sensor 2)
Ignition coil No. 6 '43 3 Middle of engine compartment
Manifold absolute pressure (MAP) sensor 42 3 Left side of engine compartment
Sensor 1)
Rear rocker arm oil pressure switch 13 1 Left side of engine compartment
(secondary H02S) (Bank 1, Sensor 2)
Rocker arm oil control solenoid B 11 2 Middle of engine compartment
Rocker arm oil control solenoid C 52 2 Right side of engine compartment
Rocker arm oil control solenoid A 15 2 Right side of engine compartment
Rocker arm oil pressure sensor 2 3 Middle of engine compartment
sensor
(2nd clutch)
(3rd clutch)
4th clutch transmission fluid pressure 23 1 Transmission housing
switch
(cont'd)
SHIFT
SOLENOID
WIRE
HARNESS
Engine Wire Harness ('08-10 models: J35A7 engine) (cont'd)
C103 (Junction connector) 21 12 Left of engine compartment
C104 (Junction connector) 22 24 Left of engine compartment
harness
T102 60 Right side of engine compartment under-hood fuse/relay box
harness
Shift Solenoid Wire Harness ('08-10 models: J35A7 engine)

€153 30 5 Transmission housing Engine wire harness
Knock Sensor Subharness ('08-10 models: J35A7 engine)

€152 59 1 Right side of engine compartment Engine wire harness
(cont'd)
Front Engine Compartment Wire Harness
A/C compressor clutch 16 1 Front of engine compartment '07
model
A/C condenser fan motor 14 2 Front of engine compartment
Daytime running lights relay 21 5 Auxiliary under-hood relay box Canada
models
Engine mount control solenoid 11 2 Front of engine compartment *4
Fan control relay 23 5 Auxiliary under-hood relay box
Fog light relay 21 4 Auxiliary under-hood relay box *5
Fog light relay 22 4 Auxiliary under-hood relay box *6
Horn (high) 25 1 Behind right side of front bumper
Horn (low) 26 1 Behind right side of front bumper
Left fog light 7 2 Behind left fog light
Left front parking light 5 2 Behind left headlight
Left front turn signal light 3 2 Behind left headlight
Left headlight (high) 6 2 Behind left headlight
Left headlight (low) 4 2 Behind left headlight
Outside air temperature sensor 10 2 Behind left side of front bumper
Radiator fan motor 8 2 Front of engine compartment
Right fog light 19 2 Behind right fog light
Right front parking light 20 2 Behind right headlight
Right front turn signal light 29 2 Behind right headlight
Right headlight (high) 18 2 Behind right headlight
Right headlight (low) 28 2 Behind right headlight
Security hood switch 13 2 Front of engine compartment
Under-hood fuse/relay box connector 1 20 Right side of engine compartment
F (see page 22-90)
Under-hood fuse/relay box connector 2 18 Right side of engine compartment
H (see page 22-90)
Washer fluid level switch 24 2 Behind right side of front bumper Canada
models
Washer motor 27 2 Behind right side of front bumper
harness
C201 30 2 Right side of engine compartment Engine compartment wire *3
harness
C202 15 2 Behind right side of front bumper Front engine mount actuator *2
subharness
G201 17 Right front fenderwell Body ground, via front engine
compartment wire harness
G301 9 Left front fenderwell Body ground, via front engine
*1: Except '07 model: J35A6 engine
*2: J35A7 engine
*3: '07 model: J35A6 engine
*4: J35A6 engine
*5: USA Touring models
*6: Canada Touring models
Front Engine Mount Actuator Subharness (J35A7 engine)

Front engine mount actuator 12 2 Front of engine compartment
C202 15 2 Behind right side of front bumper Front engine compartment
wire harness
(cont'd)
FRONT ENGINE
MOUNT ACTUATOR
SUBHARNESS
UNDER-HOOD
FUSE/RELAY BOX
AUXILIARY
UNDER-HOOD
RELAY BOX
Engine Compartment Wire Harness (Engine compartment branch)
A/C pressure switch 2 4 Right side of engine compartment
Brake fluid level switch 8 2 Left side of engine compartment
Left front corner parking sensor 13 2 Left front bumper *2
Left front impact sensor 14 2 Left fenderwell
Left front initiator 10 3 Left fenderwell *5
Left front wheel speed sensor 9 2 Left side of engine compartment
MAF sensor 7 5 Left side of engine compartment
Optional connector (for fog light) 27 2 Right side of engine compartment '07
model
PCM connector A 30 49 Right side of engine compartment
Rear engine mount actuator 5 2 Rear of engine compartment *1
Power steering pressure (PSP) switch 4 2 Right side of engine compartment
Right front corner parking sensor 25 2 Right front bumper *2
Right front impact sensor 26 2 Right fenderwell
Right front initiator 29 3 Right fenderwell *5
Right front wheel speed sensor 3 2 Right side of engine compartment
Under-hood fuse/relay box connector A 19 3 In under-hood fuse/relay box
(ELD)
Under-hood fuse/relay box connector B 21 1 Behind under-hood fuse/relay box
(see page 22-90)
Under-hood fuse/relay box connector C 22 2 Behind under-hood fuse/relay box
(see page 22-90)
Under-hood fuse/relay box connector D 17 9 Behind under-hood fuse/relay box
(see page 22-90)
Under-hood fuse/relay box connector E 18 16 Behind under-hood fuse/relay box
(see page 22-90)
Under-hood fuse/relay box connector G 20 2 Behind under-hood fuse/relay box
(see page 22-90)
Under-hood fuse/relay box connector J 23 5 Behind under-hood fuse/relay box
(see page 22-90)
Under-hood fuse/relay box connector K 16 10 Behind under-hood fuse/relay box
(see page 22-90)
VSA modulator-control unit 11 47 Left side of engine compartment
Windshield wiper motor 6 5 Left side of engine compartment
C201 28 6 Right side of engine compartment Front engine compartment *4
wire harness
C201 28 2 Right side of engine compartment Front engine compartment *3
wire harness
• '07 model
• '08-10 models: J35A6
engine
• '08-10 models: J35A7
engine
T2 1 Auxiliary under-hood fuse box
G202 15 Right side of engine compartment Body ground, via engine
G302 12 Left side of engine compartment Body ground, via engine
*2: Touring model
*4: Except '07 model: J35A6 engine
*5: Touring model with TPMS
(cont'd)
Engine Compartment Wire Harness (Dash branch)
Accelerator/brake pedal adjuster 14 2 Under left side of dash *1
motor
Accelerator pedal position sensor 12 6 Under left side of dash
Brake pedal position switch 15 4 Under left side of dash *1
Brake pedal position switch 13 4 Under left side of dash *2
Engine mount control unit 1 20 Under right side of dash *3
Engine mount control unit 1 16 Under right side of dash *5
Driver's under-dash fuse/relay box 20 6 Left kick panel
connector B (see page 22-92)
connector C (see page 22-92)
connector D (see page 22-92)
connector P (MICU) (see page 22-92)
Imoes unit 10 5 Under middle of dash *4
Optional connector (for fog light) 25 2 Under left side of dash '07
model
Passenger's under-dash fuse/relay 2 1 Right kick panel
box connector A (see page 22-94)
box connector B (see page 22-94)
box connector J (see page 22-94)
Radiator fan diode 11 2 Under left side of dash
C401 17 16 Under left side of dash Dashboard wire harness •07
model
C401 17 20 Under left side of dash Dashboard wire harness '08-10
models
C402 27 12 Under left side of dash Dashboard wire harness
C404 18 4 Under left side of dash Dashboard wire harness '07
model
C405 (Junction connector) 8 12 Under right side of dash
C406 26 18 Under left side of dash Dashboard wire harness '07
model
models
C407 (Junction connector) 9 12 Under right side of dash '08-10
models
C431 5 20 Under right side of dash Roof wire harness *1
• With moonroof
• Without moonroof
C601 6 13 Right kick panel Floor wire harness '07
model
C601 6 20 Right kick panel Floor wire harness '08-10
models
C602 7 5 Right kick panel Floor wire harness
C603 19 6 Left kick panel Floor wire harness
G401 24 Left kick panel Body ground, via engine
*1: Touring model
*2: Except Touring model
*4: '08-10 models: Canada models
*5 :'08-10 models: J35A7 engine
(cont'd)
Connectors and Harnesses

Dashboard Wire Harness (Left branch)
Adjustable pedal forward relay 25 5 Under left side of dash *1
Adjustable pedal rearward relay 19 5 Under left side of dash *1
Automatic lighting control unit 45 14 Under left side of dash *1
Automatic lighting sensor/sunlight 3 5 Middle of dash *1
sensor
Auxiliary fuse holder 31 2 Under left side of dash
Cable reel connector A 13 4 In the steering column *5
Cable reel connector B 9 20 In the steering column *6
Daytime running lights control unit 43 14 Under left side of dash *5
connector A (see page 22-92)
connector N (see page 22-92)
connector R (MES connector) (see
page 22-92)
connector S (see page 22-92)
connector X (see page 22-92)
Gauge control module connector A 2 30 Behind gauge
Gauge control module connector B 1 14 Behind gauge
Ignition key switch/key light/shift lock 12 6 In steering column cover
solenoid
Ignition switch 14 7 In steering column cover
Immobilizer control unit-receiver 11 7 In steering column cover
Imoes unit 26 5 Under left side of dash *5
Interior lights switch 8 6 Middle of dash
Left tweeter 47 2 Left side of dash
Moonroof close relay 28 5 Under left side of dash *4
Moonroof open relay 27 5 Under left side of dash *4
Moonroof switch 46 6 Left side of dash *4
*1: Touring model
*3: EX, EX-L, and '07 Touring models
*4: With moonroof
*5: ’08-10 USA models
*6: '08-10 Touring models
(cont'd)
Dashboard Wire Harness (Left branch) icont'd)
Parking and back-up sensor control 44 22 Under left side of dash -*1
unit
Parking and back-up sensor switch 17 5 Left side of dash *1
Parking brake switch 30 1 Under left side of dash
Power adjustable pedal switch 49 7 Left side of dash
#1
Power sliding door switch 48 10 Left side of dash
Power tailgate switch 18 5 Left side of dash *9
Steering angle sensor 15 5 In the steering column
Sunlight sensor 3 2 Middle of dash *2
VSA OFF switch 16 6 Under left side of dash
Wiper/washer switch connector A 10 8 In the steering column
C401 22 16 Under left side of dash Engine compartment wire '07
harness model
C401 22 20 Under left side of dash Engine compartment wire '08-10
harness models
C402 20 12 Under left side of dash Engine compartment wire
harness
C403 21 4 Under left side of dash Engine compartment wire
harness
harness model
harness model
C406 24 20 Under left of dash Engine compartment wire '08-10
harness models
C432 32 20 Under left side of dash Roof wire harness *8
• '08-10 models with
moonroof
• Without moonroof
C501 (Junction connector) 7 28 Under middle of dash #6
C502 (Junction connector) 5 12 Under middle of dash
C604 39 22 Left kick panel Floor wire harness
C605 40 4 Left kick panel Floor wire harness *5
Optional connector (for XM radio) 42 14 Under left side of dash
G501 29 Left kick panel Body ground, via dashboard
wire harness
*1: Touring model
*2: EX and EX-L models
*3: '08-10 models with moonroof and without moonroof
*4: '07 model with moonroof
*6; Except VAN, DX, and LX models
*7: '08-10 models with moonroof
*8: With moonroof
*9: With power tailgate
(cont'd)
Dashboard Wire Harness (With navigation system) (Center console branch)
Active noise cancellation unit 3 16 Under middle of dash
Active noise cancellation unit 3 20 Under middle of dash *2
Audio unit connector A 29 20 Console panel ■07
model
Audio unit connector A 29 17 Console panel '08-10
models
Audio unit connector B 13 30 Console panel
Audio unit connector C 14 14 Console panel
Audio unit connector D 16 14 Console panel
Audio unit connector E 15 5 Console panel
Audio unit connector F 17 20 Console panel ’08-10
models
Auxiliary jack assembly 24 5 Console panel ’08-10
models
Audio disc changer connector A 4 18 Console panel
Audio disc changer connector B 5 14 Console panel
Climate control panel 12 5 Console panel
Data link connector 30 16 Under left side of dash
Driver's accessory power socket 26 2 Console panel
Driver's seat heater switch 27 6 Console panel
DVD player unit connector A 25 22 Console panel
D3 switch/park pin switch/A/T gear 2 6 Under left side of dash
position indicator panel light
Front passenger's accessory power 24 2 Console panel '07
socket model
Front passenger's airbag first and 11 4 Under right side of dash
second inflators
Front passenger's seat heater switch 23 6 Console panel
Hazard warning switch/passenger's 8 6 Console panel
airbag cutoff indicator
HandsFreeLink control unit 22 28 under middle of dash '08-10
models
In-car temperature sensor 31 2 Under left side of dash
Navigation display unit connector A 6 20 Console panel
Navigation display unit connector B 7 10 Console panel
Shift lock solenoid 1 2 Under left side of dash
SRS unit connector A 28 28 Under middle of dash
C505 18 16 Under middle of dash A/C wire harness
C681 19 12 Under middle of dash Audio subharness
C682 21 20 Under middle of dash Audio subharness
C683 20 16 Under middle of dash Audio subharness '07
model
C683 20 24 Under middle of dash Audio subharness '08-10
models
G502 32 Under middle of dash Body ground, via dashboard
wire harness
wire harness
*1: '07 J35A7 engine
(cont'd)
Dashboard Wire Harness (EX, EX-L, and Touring models; without navigation system) (Center console branch)
Active noise cancellation unit 12 16 Under middle of dash *1
Audio unit connector A 5 20 Console panel '07
model
models
Audio unit connector B 2 30 Console panel *2
Audio unit connector C 4 16 Console panel *2
Audio unit connector D 3 14 Console panel *2
Audio unit connector E 1 5 Console panel *1
Audio unit connector F 6 20 Console panel '08-10
models
Auxiliary jack assembly 15 5 Console panel '08-10
models
Climate control panel 11 5 Console panel
Driver's seat heater switch 21 6 Console panel *4
DVD player unit connector A 18 22 Console panel *2
socket model
second inflators
Front passenger's seat heater switch 16 6 Console panel *4
In-car temperature sensor 25 2 Under left side of dash
C681 14 12 Under middle of dash Audio subharness *2
wire harness
wire harness
*2: With rear entertainment system
*3: '08-10 EX-L models without rear entertainment system
*4: EX-L and Touring models
(cont'd)

Dashboard Wire Harness (VAN, DX, and LX models) (Center console branch)
Audio unit connector A 4 20 Console panel '07
model
models
Audio unit connector F 3 20 Console panel '08-10
models
Auxiliary jack assembly 12 5 Console panel '08-10
models
A/C control panel connector A 9 22 Console panel
A/C control panel connector B 10 14 Console panel
socket model
second inflators
wire harness
wire harness
(cont'd)

Dashboard Wire Harness (Right branch
Active noise cancellation unit 5 24 Under right side of dash *5
Front blower motor 16 2 Under right side of dash
Front power transistor 19 4 Under right side of dash
Glove box light 1 2 Under right side of dash
box connector D (see page 22-94)
box connector E (see page 22-94)
box connector F (see page 22-94)
box connector G (see page 22-94)
box connector H (see page 22-94)
Right tweeter 2 2 Right side of dash
Stereo amplifier connector A 6 20 Under right side of dash *2
Stereo amplifier connector B 14 14 Under right side of dash *2
C504 13 22 Right kick panel Floor wire harness
C731 3 6 Under right side of dash Front passenger's door wire
harness A
C732 4 12 Under right side of dash Front passenger's door wire *4
harness A
C732 4 16 Under right side of dash Front passenger's door wire *3
harness A
G504 17 Under right side of dash Body ground, via dashboard
wire harness
G505 12 Under right side of dash Body ground, via dashboard
wire harness
*1: With moonroof
*2: Touring model
*4: Except '08-10 Touring model
*5; *08-10 EX-L models
(cont'd)
Floor Wire Harness (Left front branch)
Driver's door switch 15 1 Left B-pillar
Driver's seat belt buckle switch 8 3 Under driver's seat *1
Driver's seat belt tensioner 16 4 Left B-pillar
Driver's side airbag inflator 19 2 Under driver's seat
connector E (see page 22-92)
connector F (see page 22-92)
connector G (see page 22-92)
connector H (see page 22-92)
connector Q (MICU) (see page 22-92)
EVAP canister vent shut valve 26 2 Under left side of floor
Fuel tank pressure (FTP) sensor 25 3 Under left side of floor
GPS antenna terminal connector 34 2 Under middle of dash *5
Left sliding door switch 11 1 Left C-pillar
Left side impact sensor (FIRST) 17 2 Left B-pillar
Left side impact sensor (SECOND) 14 2 Left side of floor
Navigation unit connector E 22 2 Under driver's seat *5
Navigation unit connector D 23 7 Under driver's seat *5
SRS unit connector B 32 28 Under middle of dash
SRS unit connector C 33 16 Under middle of dash
VSA sensor cluster 24 6 Under driver's seat
C436 6 6 Left kick panel Roof wire harness #6
C603 2 6 Left kick panel Engine compartment wire
harness
C604 3 22 Left kick panel Dashboard wire harness
C605 5 4 Left kick panel Dashboard wire harness •1
C606 9 2 Under driver's seat Seat position sensor *1
subharness
C631 4 6 Left kick panel Driver's door subharness *2
C631 4 16 Left kick panel Driver's door subharness *4
C684 7 24 Under driver's seat Audio subharness *7
C751 12 8 Left side floor Left CESS articulated harness
C752 13 16 Left side floor Left CESS articulated harness *3
C901 20 12 Under driver's seat Driver's seat wire harness *8
C902 21 10 Under driver's seat Driver's seat wire harness #8
C902 21 10 Under driver's seat Driver's seat wire harness #9
G601 27 Left kick panel Body ground, via floor wire
harness
G602 18 Left B-pillar Body ground, via floor wire
harness
*1; VAN, DX, and LX models
*2: '07 Touring model
*3: EX, EX-L, and Touring models
*6: With rearview monitor mirror
Seat Position Sensor Subharness (VAN, DX, and LX models)
Driver's seat position sensor 10 2 Under driver's seat
C606 9 2 Under driver's seat Floor wire harness
(c o n t'd
fl o o r s e a t p o s it io n s e n s o r s u b h a r n e s s
WIRE HARNESS (VAN, DX, and LX models)
Floor Wire Harness (Left rear branch)
AC inverter unit 8 12 Left quarter panel *1
Auxiliary jack assembly 18 14 Left quarter panel *2
Fuel fill door switch 22 2 Left C-pillar
Left power slide motor assembly 17 2 Left quarter panel *3
connector A
Left power slide motor assembly 16 6 Left quarter panel *3
connector B
Left power sliding door control unit 9 22 Left quarter panel *3
connector A
connector B
connector C
Left rear initiator 24 3 Under left side of floor *4
Left rear wheel speed sensor 4 2 Under middle of floor
Left rear speaker 23 2 Left C-pillar
Left side impact sensor (THIRD) 14 2 Left quarter panel
Power outlet 21 3 Left C-pillar
Right rear wheel speed sensor 6 2 Under middle of floor
Rear safing sensor 7 2 Under third row seat
XM receiver connector A 15 14 Left quarter panel USA
models
C691 5 4 Under middle of floor Fuel tank unit subharness USA
models
C701 12 20 Left quarter panel Rear wire harness
C702 13 12 Left quarter panel Rear wire harness
C801 20 16 Left quarter panel Floor wire harness
C951 2 4 Left C-pillar Left side curtain airbag
harness
C952 1 4 Left C-pillar Left side curtain airbag *2
harness
G603 19 Left quarter panel Body ground, via floor wire
harness
*1: Touring and '08-10 EX-L models with rear entertainment system
Fuel Tank Unit Subharness
Fuel tank unit 3 5 Under middle of floor
C691 5 4 Under rear of floor Floor wire harness
(cont'd)
FUEL TANK UNIT SUBHARNESS
Floor Wire Harness (Right front branch
Front passenger's door switch 10 1 Right B-pillar
Front passenger's seat belt tensioner 11 4 Right B-pillar
Front passenger's side airbag inflator 1 2 Under front passenger's seat *4
box connector C (see page 22-94)
Right side impact sensor (FIRST) 9 2 Right B-pillar
Right side impact sensor (SECOND) 12 2 Right C-pillar
Right sliding door switch 15 1 Right C-pillar
Subwoofer 7 2 Under front passenger’s seat *2
C504 6 22 Right kick panel Dashboard wire harness
C601 5 13 Right kick panel Engine compartment wire *4
harness
C601 5 20 Right kick panel Engine compartment wire *3
harness
C602 4 5 Right kick panel Engine compartment wire
harness
C781 14 8 Right side of floor Right CESS articulated
harness
C782 13 16 Right side of floor Right CESS articulated *1
harness
C931 2 13 Under front passenger's seat Front passenger's seat wire *3
harness
C931 2 12 Under front passenger's seat Front passenger's seat wire *4
harness
G651 8 Right B-pillar . Body ground, via floor wire
harness
*2: Touring model
*3: '08-10 models
*4: '07 model
(cont'd)
22-55
FLOOR
WIRE HARNESS
22-56
Fluor Wire Harness (Right rear branch)
MICU-Rear junction box connector A 19 14 Right quarter panel
(see page 22-95)
MICU-Rear junction box connector B 20 9 Right quarter panel
(see page 22-95)
MICU-Rear junction box connector C 21 6 Right quarter panel
(see page 22-95)
MICU-Rear junction box connector D 22 17 Right quarter panel
(see page 22-95)
Rear air mix control motor 15 7 Right quarter panel
Rear blower motor 1 2 Right quarter panel
Rear climate control unit 17 22 Right quarter panel
Rear in-car temperature sensor 3 2 Right quarter panel
Rear mode control motor 2 7 Right quarter panel
Rear blower power transistor 16 4 Right quarter panel
Right power sliding door control unit 13 22 Right quarter panel *1
connector A
connector B
connector C
Right power slide motor assembly 10 2 Right quarter panel *1
connector A
Right power slide motor assembly 4 6 Right quarter panel *1
connector B
Right rear initiator 8 3 Under right side of floor *2
Right rear speaker 9 2 Right quarter panel
Right side impact sensor (THIRD) 14 2 Right quarter panel
C703 23 4 Right quarter panel Rear wire harness
C801 24 16 Left quarter panel Floor wire harness (left rear
branch)
C961 6 4 Right quarter panel Right side curtain airbag wire
harness
G652 7 Under rear junction box Body ground, via floor wire
harness
G653 18 Right quarter panel Body ground, via floor wire
harness
*1; EX, EX-L, and Touring models
Right Side Curtain Airbag Harness
Right side curtain airbag inflator 5 4 Roof
C961 6 4 Right quarter panel Floor wire harness
(cont'd)

Rear Wire Harness (Left branch)
Cargo area accessory power socket 16 2 Left quarter panel
Left rear turn signal light 8 2 Behind left tail light '07
model
Left taillight/brake light 8 3 Behind left taillight '08-10
models
Left taillight/brake light 9 3 Behind left taillight '07
model
Left rear turn signal light 9 2 Behind left taillight '08-10
models
Optional connector 15 2 Left side of cargo area '08-10
models
Power tailgate control unit connector A 5 5 Left D-pillar *1
Power tailgate control unit connector B 6 20 Left D-pillar *1
Power tailgate control unit connector C 7 14 Left D-pillar *1
Power tailgate drive unit connector A 1 2 Left D-pillar *1
Power tailgate drive unit connector B 4 8 Left D-pillar *1
Power tailgate outside beeper 14 2 Behind left side of rear bumper *1
C704 2 20 Left D-pillar Left tailgate wire harness
C705 3 6 Left D-pillar Left tailgate wire harness *2
C708 13 8 Behind left side of rear bumper Rear bumper subharness *1
G702 12 Left side of cargo area Body ground, via rear wire
harness
*2: '07-08 EX-L models
Rear Bumper Subharness (Touring model) (Left branch)

Left rear corner parking sensor 10 2 Behind left side of rear bumper
Left parking and back-up sensor 11 2 Behind left side of rear bumper
C708 13 8 Behind left side of rear bumper Rear wire harness
(cont'd)

Rear Wire Harness (Right branch)
Cargo area light 13 3 Roof
MICU-Rear junction box connector E 5 8 Right quarter panel
(see page 22-95)
MICU-Rear junction box connector F 4 13 Right quarter panel
(see page 22-95)
MICU-Rear junction box connector G 6 8 Right quarter panel
(see page 22-95)
MICU-Rear junction box connector H 3 5 Right quarter panel
(see page 22-95)
Right rear turn signal light 1 2 Behind right taillight *07
model
Right rear turn signal light 2 2 Behind right taillight '08-10
models
Right taillight/brake light 2 3 Behind right taillight '07
model
Right taillight/brake light 1 3 Behind right taillight '08-10
models
C703 7 4 Right rear trim Floor wire harness
C706 11 13 Right D-pillar Right tailgate wire harness
C707 12 2 Right D-pillar Right tailgate wire harness
G701 9 Right side of cargo area Body ground, via rear wire
harness
Rear Bumper Subharness (Touring model) (Right branch)

Right rear corner parking sensor 8 2 Behind right side of rear bumper
Right parking and back-up sensor 10 2 Behind right side of rear bumper
(cont'd)
Roof Wire Harness (With moonroof)
Driver's under-dash fuse/relay box 29 5 Under left side of dash
connector W (see page 22-92)
Driver's vanity mirror light 25 2 Driver's sunvisor mount
Electrical compass unit 14 6 Middle of roof right side *4
Front individual map light 4 3 Front of roof
Left rear individual map light (2nd) 23 3 Rear of roof left side
Left rear individual map light (3rd) 18 3 Rear of roof left side
Moonroof motor/limit switch 16 6 Middle of roof
Passenger's vanity mirror light 5 2 Passenger's sunvisor mount
Rear controller and screen 10 26 Middle of roof *3
Rear control panel (HVAC) 24 5 Middle of roof left side
Rearview monitor mirror 9 12 Front of roof *2
Right rear individual map light (2nd) 11 3 Middle of roof right side
Right rear individual map light (3rd) 15 3 Rear of roof right side
Roof console (Ambient 7 11 Front of roof
light/HomeLink)
TPMS control unit connector A 12 14 Middle of roof
TPMS control unit connector B 13 20 Middle of roof
C431 2 20 Behind glove box Engine compartment wire *6
harness
C431 2 6 Behind glove box Engine compartment wire *5
harness
C433 26 4 Under left side of dash Dashboard wire harness *07
model
models
C434 1 20 Behind glove box Dashboard wire harness
C435 19 4 Middle of roof left side Left side curtain airbag harness
C436 27 6 Under left side of dash Floor wire harness *2
C437 9 3 Front of roof Rearview mirror subharness *1
C438 6 4 Front of roof Active noise cancellation (ANC) *7
microphone subharness
*2: With rearview monitor mirror
*4: '07 Touring model without navigation system
*6: Touring model
*7: '08-10 models with Active noise cancellation (ANC)
Left Side Curtain Airbag Harness

Left side curtain airbag inflator 20 2 Rear of roof left side
C435 19 4 Middle of roof left side Roof wire harness
C951 21 4 Behind left rear side trim panel Floor wire harness
C952 22 4 Behind left rear side trim panel Floor wire harness
*: With rear entertainment system
(cont'd)
22-63
Rearview Mirror Subharness (Touring and *08-10 EX-L models with navigation system)
Automatic dimming inside mirror 3 7 Front of roof
C437 9 3 Front of roof Roof wire harness
Active Noise Cancellation (ANC) Microphone Subharness (*08-10 models with ANC)
Active noise cancellation front microphone 8 2 Front of roof
Active noise cancellation rear microphone 17 2 Rear of roof
C438 6 4 Front of roof Roof wire harness
Roof Wire Harness (Without moonroof)
Driver's under-dash fuse/relay box 14 5 Behind left kick panel
connector W (see page 22-92)
Driver's vanity mirror light 11 2 Driver's sunvisor mount
Front individual map light 2 3 Front of roof
Left rear individual map light (2nd) 9 3 Middle of roof left side
Left rear individual map light (3rd) 7 3 Rear of roof left side
Passenger's vanity mirror light 1 2 Passenger's sunvisor mount
Rear control panel 10 5 Middle of roof left side
Right rear individual map light (2nd) 4 3 Middle of roof right side
Right rear individual map light (3rd) 6 3 Rear of roof right side
Roof console (Ambient 3 10 Front of roof
light/HomeLink)
TPMS control unit connector A 5 14 Middle of roof
TPMS control unit connector B 8 20 Middle of roof
C431 13 6 Behind glove box Engine compartment wire
harness
(cont'd)
5 6
Driver's Door Wire Harness A
Driver's door lock actuator 17 2 Driver's door
Driver's door key cylinder switch 15 3 Driver's door
Driver's door lock knob switch 18 3 Driver's door
Driver's door speaker 13 2 Driver's door
Driver's power window motor 14 6 Driver's door
Driving position memory switch 3 10 Driver's door *1
Left power mirror 6 8 Driver's door *4
Left power mirror 5 13 Driver's door *3
Power mirror switch 4 13 Driver's door
Power mirror control unit 7 24 Driver's door *3
Power window master switch (Door 2 23 Driver's door
multiplex control unit)
C632 9 17 Driver's door Driver's door subharness
C633 8 20 Driver's door Driver's door subharness
C634 1 2 Driver's door Driver's door wire harness B *2
Driver's Door Wire Harness B (Except VAN, DX, and LX models)

Driver's door courtesy light 16 2 Driver's door
C634 1 2 Driver's door Driver's door wire harness A
Driver's Door Subharness

connector J (see page 22-92)
connector K (see page 22-92)
*1: Touring model
*2: Except VAN, DX, and LX models
*3: *08-10 Touring models
*4: Except *08-10 Touring models
*5: *07 Touring model
(cont'd)
22-67
WIRE HARNESS B
Front Passenger's Door Wire Harness A
Front passenger's door lock actuator 6 2 Front passenger's door
Front passenger's door lock knob 5 3 Front passenger's door
switch
Front passenger's power window 8 2 Front passenger's door
motor
Front passenger's power window 3 10 Front passenger's door
switch/door lock switch
Front passenger's speaker 9 2 Front passenger's door
Right power mirror 2 16 Front passenger's door
Right power mirror 1 8 Front passenger's door *2
C731 10 6 Front passenger's door Dashboard wire harness
C732 11 12 Front passenger's door Dashboard wire harness *2
C732 11 16 Front passenger's door Dashboard wire harness *1
C733 4 2 Front passenger's door Front passenger's door wire *3
harnessB
*2: Except'08-10 Touring models
*3: Except VAN, DX, and LX models
Front Passenger's Door Wire Harness B (Except VAN, DX, and LX models)
Front passenger's door courtesy light 7 2 Front passenger's door
C733 4 2 Front passenger's door Front passenger's door wire
harness A
(cont'd)
22-69
Left Sliding Door Wire Harness
Left rear power window motor 7 2 Left sliding door
Left rear power window switch 5 6 Left sliding door
Left power sliding door pinch sensor 6 2 Left sliding door #
Left power sliding door remote control 2 4 Left sliding door
switches 1/2/3
Left power sliding door window 1 2 Left sliding door *
position switch
Left power sliding door rear latch 13 2 Left sliding door #
assembly connector A
Left power sliding door rear latch 14 6 Left sliding door *
assembly connector B
Left power sliding door release 8 2 Left sliding door #
actuator
Left sliding door lock actuator 3 2 Left sliding door
Left sliding door lock knob switch 4 3 Left sliding door
C753 9 8 Left sliding door Left CESS articulated harness
C754 10 16 Left sliding door Left CESS articulated harness ■55-
Left CESS Articulated Harness

C751 12 8 Leftside of floor Floor wire harness
C752 11 16 Left side of floor Floor wire harness *
C753 9 8 Left sliding door Left sliding door wire harness
C754 10 16 Left sliding door Left sliding door wire harness
CESS: Constant Electricity Supply System
(cont'd)
LEFT SLIDING
ARTICULATED
HARNESS
Right Sliding Door Wire Harness
Right rear power window motor 13 2 Right sliding door
Right rear power window switch 15 6 Right sliding door
Right power sliding door pinch sensor 14 2 Right sliding door
Right power sliding door remote 1 4 Right sliding door #
control switches 1/2/3
Right power sliding door window 4 2 Right sliding door
position switch
Right power sliding door rear latch 6 2 Right sliding door #
assembly connector A
Right power sliding door rear latch 5 6 Right sliding door #
assembly connector B
Right power sliding door release 11 2 Right sliding door #
actuator
Right sliding door lock actuator 2 2 Right sliding door
Right sliding door lock knob switch 3 3 Right sliding door
C783 9 8 Right sliding door Right CESS articulated
harness
C784 10 16 Right sliding door Right CESS articulated *
harness
G751 12 Right sliding door Body ground, via right sliding
door wire harness
Right CESS Articulated Harness

C781 7 8 Right side of floor Floor wire harness
C782 8 16 Right side of floor Floor wire harness #
C783 9 8 Right sliding door Right sliding door wire
harness
C784 10 16 Right sliding door Right sliding door wire #
harness
CESS: Constant Electricity Supply System
(cont'd)
RIGHT SLIDING
DOOR WIRE HARNESS
Left Tailgate Wire Harness
Power tailgate left pinch sensor 6 2 Left side of tailgate *1
C704 13 20 Left D-pillar Rear wire harness •1
C705 12 6 Left D-pillar Rear wire harness *2
C851 9 20 Leftside of tailgate Middle tailgate wire harness **!
C852 10 6 Left side of tailgate Middle tailgate wire harness *2
Middle Tailgate Wire Harness (Left branch)

Left back-up light 7 3 Behind left inner taillight
Left inner taillight 8 2 Behind left inner taillight
Left license plate light 2 2 Middle of tailgate '08-10
models
Power tailgate outer handle switch 3 2 Middle of tailgate *1
Rear window defogger connector B 11 1 Left side of rear window
(—)
Rear window wiper motor 1 5 Middle of tailgate
Tailgate closer unit 4 6 Middle of tailgate *1
Tailgate latch switch 5 2 Middle of tailgate *3
C851 9 20 Left side of tailgate Left tailgate wire harness
C852 10 6 Left side of tailgate Left tailgate wire harness *2
*2: '07-08 EX-L models
(cont'd)
WIRE HARNESS
Right Tailgate Wire Harness
Rear window defogger connector A 3 1 Right side of rear window
(+ )
C706 2 13 Right D-pillar Rear wire harness
C707 1 2 Right D-pillar Rear wire harness
C853 4 13 Right side of tailgate Middle tailgate wire harness
C856 18 2 Behind right side of tailgate High mount brake light
subharness
Middle Tailgate Wire Harness (Right branch)

Inside tailgate switch 12 5 Middle of tailgate *1
Power tailgate closer motor 14 2 Middle of tailgate *1
Power tailgate right pinch sensor 9 2 Right side of tailgate *1
Rearview camera 10 6 Right side of tailgate *2
Right back-up light 7 3 Right side of tailgate
Right inner taillight 6 2 Right side of tailgate
Right license plate light 17 2 Middle of tailgate *08-10
models
Tailgate lock knob switch 15 3 Middle of tailgate *3
Tailgate lock actuator 13 2 Middle of tailgate *3
C853 4 13 Right side of tailgate Right tailgate wire harness
C854 5 1 Right side of tailgate Right tailgate wire harness
C855 8 2 Right side of tailgate License plate lights '07
subharness model
*2: Except VAN, DX, LX, and EX models
*3: Without power tailgate
License Plate Lights Subharness ('07 model)

Left license plate light 16 2 Behind left license plate light
Right license plate light 11 2 Behind right license plate light
High Mount Brake Light Subharness

High mount brake light 19 2 Behind high mount brake light
C856 18 2 Behind right side of tailgate Right tailgate wire harness
(cont'd)
RIGHT TAILGATE
WIRE HARNESS
Audio Subharness
Navigation service check connector 6 2 Under driver's seat *2
Navigation unit connector A 4 32 Under driver's seat *3
Navigation unit connector A 4 20 Under middle of dash *4
Navigation unit connector B 5 16 Under driver's seat *3
Navigation unit connector B 5 14 Under middle of dash #4
Navigation unit connector C 3 8 Under driver's seat *2
Navigation unit connector F 2 5 Under driver's seat *3
C681 7 12 Under middle of dash Dashboard wire harness *1
• With navigation system
• With rear entertainment
system: without navigation
system
• With rear entertainment
system: Without navigation
system
C682 9 12 Under middle of dash Dashboard wire harness
'08-10 EX-L models: Without
rear entertainment system
C684 1 24 Under driver's seat Floor wire harness *1
*3: '08-10 models with navigation system
*4: '07 model with navigation system
(cont'd)
22-79

A/C Wire Harness
Climate control unit connector 4 30 Under middle of dash *
Driver's air mix control motor 1 7 Under middle of dash
Evaporator temperature sensor 7 2 Under middle of dash
Front mode control motor 2 7 Under middle of dash
Passenger's air mix control motor 5 7 Under middle of dash *
Recirculation control motor 3 7 Under middle of dash
C505 6 16 Under middle of dash Dashboard wire harness
• EX, EX-L, and Touring
models: without navigation
system
• VAN, DX, and LX models
*: Except VAN, DX, and LX models
(cont'd)
Driver's Seat Wire Harness ('08-10 models with driver's power seat)
Driver's power seat front up-down 15 2 Under driver's seat *1
motor
motor/position sensor
Driver's power seat rear up-down 5 2 Under driver's seat *1
motor
Driver's power seat slide motor 8 2 Under driver's seat *1
Driver's power seat slide position 12 3 Under driver's seat *2
sensor
Driver's power seat adjustment switch 7 12 Left side of driver's seat
Driver's seat belt buckle switch 13 3 Under driver's seat
Driver's seat cushion heater 10 3 Under driver's seat *3
Driver's seat back heater 14 2 Under driver's seat *3
Driver's seat position sensor (for SRS) 1 2 Under driver's seat
Power seat control unit connector A 11 40 Under driver's seat *2
Power seat control unit connector B 9 18 Under driver's seat *2
C903 6 5 Under driver's seat Driver's seat subharness *2
C903 6 2 Under driver's seat Driver's seat subharness *1
Driver's Seat Subharness ('08-10 models with driver's power seat)

Driver's power seat recline motor 3 2 Left side of driver's seat back
Driver's power seat recline 3 5 Left side of driver's seat back *2
*1: Except Touring model with power seat
*2: Touring model
*3: EX-L and Tourning models
(cont'd)
Driver's Seat Wire Harness ('07 model with driver's power seat)
motor
motor
Driver's power seat slide motor 8 2 Under driver's seat *1
Driver's power seat slide position 14 3 Under driver's seat *2
sensor
Driver's power seat adjustment switch 7 12 Left side of driver's seat
Driver's seat belt buckle switch 13 3 Under driver's seat
Driver's seat heater 11 4 Under driver's seat *3
Driver's seat position sensor (for SRS) 1 2 Under driver's seat
Power seat control unit connector A 12 40 Under driver's seat *2
Power seat control unit connector B 9 18 Under driver's seat *2
C903 10 5 Under driver's seat Driver's seat subharness
Driver's Seat Subharness ('07 model with driver's power seat)

Driver's power seat recline motor 4 2 Left side of driver's seat back *1
Driver's power seat recline 4 5 Left side of driver's seat back *2
C903 10 5 Under driver's seat Driver's seat harness
*1: Except Touring model with power seat
*2: Touring model
*3: EX-L and Tourning models
(cont'd)
22-85
Front Passenger's Seat Wire Harness ('07 model)

Front passenger's seat belt buckle 5 3 Under front passenger's seat
switch
Front passenger's seat heater 4 4 Under front passenger's seat *
Front passenger's weight sensor unit 6 6 Under front passenger's seat
connector C
C931 1 12 Under front passenger's seat Floor wire harness
C932 3 4 Under front passenger's seat OPDS unit harness
*: EX-L and Touring models
OPDS Unit Harness ('07 model)
OPDS unit connector 2 8 Left side of front passenger's
seat-back
C932 3 4 Under front passenger's seat Front passenger's seat wire
harness
(cont'd)
22-87
Front Passenger's Seat Wire Harness ('08-10 models)

Front passenger's seat adjustment 9 12 Linder front passenger's seat *1
switch
Front passenger's seat belt buckle 6 3 Under front passenger's seat
switch
Front passenger's seat cushion heater 8 3 Under front passenger's seat *3
Front passenger's power seat slide 5 2 Under front passenger's seat *2
motor
Inner side front passenger's weight 4 2 Under front passenger's seat
sensor
ODS unit connector 2 18 Right side of passenger's seat back *2
Outer side front passenger's weight 10 3 Under front passenger's seat
sensor
C931 7 13 Under front passenger's seat Floor wire harness
C932 3 8 Under front passenger's seat ODS unit harness *1
C933 11 2 Under front passenger's seat Front passenger's seat *1
subharness
*2: Without front passenger's power seat
*3: With seat heater
ODS Unit Harness (*08-10 models with front passenger's power seat)
ODS unit connector 2 18 Right side of front passenger's seat
back
C932 3 8 Under front passenger's seat Front passenger's seat wire
harness
Front Passenger's Seat Subharness ('08-10 models with front passenger's power seat)
Front passenger's power seat recline 1 2 Right side of passenger's seat back Front passenger's seat wire
motor harness
C933 11 2 Under front passenger's seat
Connector to Fuse/Relay Box Index
Under-hood Fuse/Relay Box

Socket Ref Terminal Connects to
A/C compressor clutch relay 6 4
A/C condenser fan relay 2 4
A (ELD) 16 3 Engine compartment wire harness (engine compartment
branch) (see page 22-35)
B 8 1 Engine compartment wire harness (engine compartment
C 9 ' 2 Engine compartment wire harness (engine compartment
D 15 9 Engine compartment wire harness (engine compartment
E 10 16 Engine compartment wire harness (engine compartment
F 11 20 Front engine compartment wire harness (see page 22-33)
Front blower m otor relay 5 4
G 17 2 Engine compartment wire harness (engine compartment
H 12 18 Front engine compartment wire harness (see page 22-33)
J 13 5 Engine compartment wire harness (engine compartment
K 14 10 Engine compartment wire harness (engine compartment
Radiator fan relay 1 4
Rear w indow defogger relay 7 4
T101 3 Starter cable (see page 22-19)
T102 4 Alternator +B cable (see page 22-19)
(Viewed from bottom )

Auxiliary Under-hood Relay Box
Daytime running lights relay 3 5 Front engine compartment wire harness (see page 22-33)
Fan control relay 2 5 Front engine compartment wire harness (see page 22-33)
Fog lights relay 1 4 Front engine compartment wire harness (see page 22-33)
USA models Canada models
J_L J I
Auxiliary Under-hood Fuse Box

T2 1 Starter cable (see page 22-19)
Connector to Fuse/Relay Box Index (cont'd)
Driver's Under-dash Fuse/Relay Box

A 6 6 Dashboard wire harness (left branch) (see page 22-39)
B 12 6 Engine compartment wire harness (dash branch) (see page
22-37)
C 11 12 Engine compartment wire harness (dash branch) (see page
22-37)
D 13 17 Engine compartment wire harness (dash branch) (see page
22-37)
Driver's accessory power socket 19 4
relay
E 16 16 Floor wire harness (left front branch) (see page 22-51)
F 9 14 Floor wire harness (left front branch) (see page 22-51)
G 14 6 Floor wire harness (left front branch) (see page 22-51)
H 15 14 Floor wire harness (left front branch) (see page 22-51)
Ignition coil relay 23 4
J 27 21 Driver's door subharness (see page 22-67)
K 26 12 Driver's door subharness (see page 22-67)
M 25 3 MICU service connector
N 2 45 Dashboard wire harness (left branch) (see page 22-39)
P(MICU) 17 30 Engine compartment wire harness (dash branch) (see page
22-37)
PGM-FI main relay 1 (FI MAIN) 21 4
PGM-FI main relay 2 (FUEL PUMP) 24 4
PGM-FI subrelay (LAF) 20 4
Power window relay 22 4
Q(MICU) 8 14 Floor wire harness (left front branch) (see page 22-51)
R (MES connector) 3 2 Dashboard wire harness (left branch) (see page 22-39)
S 5 2 Dashboard wire harness (left branch) (see page 22-39)
Starter cut relay 18 4
T 7 6 Optional connector
Turn signal/hazard relay 4 6
W 10 5 Roof wire harness
• With m oonroof (see page 22-63)
• W ithout m oonroof (see page 22-65)
X 1 39 Dashboard wire harness (left branch) (see page 22-39)
BODY
22-93
Connector to Fuse/Relay Box Index (cont'd)
Passenger's Under-dash Fuse/Relay Box

A 1 1 Engine compartment wire harness (dash branch) (see page
22-37)
Active control engine mount 12 4
(ACM) control relay
B 2 10 Engine compartment wire harness (dash branch) (see page
22-37)
C 9 5 Floor wire harness (right front branch) (see page 22-55)
D 6 17 Dashboard wire harness (right branch) (see page 22-49)
E 11 14 Dashboard wire harness (right branch) (see page 22-49)
F 7 8 Dashboard wire harness (right branch) (see page 22-49)
G 8 14 Dashboard wire harness (right branch) (see page 22-49)
H 10 3 Dashboard wire harness (right branch) (see page 22-49)
J 3 13 Engine compartment wire harness (dash branch) (see page
22-37)
Passenger's accessory power 5 4
socket relay*
Seat heater relay 4 4
ETCS control relay 13 4
*: '07 model
MICU-Rear Junction Box
A 8 14 Floor wire harness (right rear branch) (see page 22-57)
B 9 7 Floor wire harness (right rear branch) (see page 22-57)
C 7 6 Floor wire harness (right rear branch) (see page 22-57)
D 6 17 Floor wire harness (right rear branch) (see page 22-57)
E 4 8 Rear wire harness (right branch) (see page 22-61)
F 2 13 Rear wire harness (right branch) (see page 22-61)
G 5 8 Rear wire harness (right branch) (see page 22-61)
H 1 5 Rear wire harness (right branch) (see page 22-61)
J 3 8 Not used
Rear blower m otor relay 10 5
Fuse to Components Index
Under-hood Fuse/Relay Box

Fuse Amps Component(s) or Circuit(s) Protected
Number
1 10 A Left headlight (low beam)
2 30 A Control block
3 10 A Left headlight (high beam)
4 ■ 15 A Ambient light, Control block, Driving position memory switch, Left front parking light, Left
license plate light, Left taillight, Left inner taillight, No. 7 fuse (in the passenger's
under-dash fuse/relay box), Optional connector (fuse/relay box socket), Power m irror
switch light, Rear A/C control panel, Relay control module, Right front parking light, Right
license plate light, Right taillight, Right inner taillight
5 10 A Right headlight (high beam)
6 10 A Right headlight (low beam)
7 7.5 A Control block
8 15 A CMP sensor, CKP sensor A/B, Data link connector (DLC), Injectors, No. 23 fuse, PCM,
PGM-FI main relay 1, PGM-FI main relay 2
9 30 A A/C condenser fan motor
10 Not used
11 30 A Fan control relay, Radiator fan m otor
12 7 5A A/C compressor clutch
13 20 A Brake pedal position switch, Control block, High horn, Ignition key switch, Low horn
14 30 A MICU-rear junction box, Rear w indow defogger
15 40 A No. 5, 6 ,7 ,8 , and 9 fuses (in the driver's under-dash fuse/relay box), No. 7 fuse (in the
under-hood fuse/relay box)
16 15 A Hazard warning switch and passenger's airbag cutoff indicator, Trailer lighting connector
(optional), Turn signal/hazard relay
17 30 A VSA modulator-control unit
18 30 A VSA modulator-control unit
19 30 A No. 1,2, 3, and 4 fuses (in the driver's under-dash fuse/relay box)
20 40 A No. 12,13,14,15,16, and 17 fuses (in the driver's under-dash fuse/relay box)
21 40 A Front blower m otor
22 120 A Alternator, No. 1 ,3 ,4 ,5 ,6 ,8 ,9 ,1 1 ,1 2 ,1 4 ,1 5 ,1 9 ,2 0 ,2 1 , and 22 fuses (in the under-hood
(BAT) fuse/relay box)
70 A No. 1 ,2 ,3 ,4 ,5 , 6,8, and 9 fuses (in the passenger's under-dash fuse/relay box)
(AS F/B)
23 50 A Ignition switch
(IG)
50 A"1 No. 27 and 28 fuses (in the driver's under-dash fuse/relay box), Power w indow relay
(P/W)
40 A*2
(P/W)
*1: W ith security system
*2: W ithout security system
(cont'd)
Fuse to Components Index (cont'd)
Auxiliary Under-hood Fuse Box

Number
1 Not used
2 40 A Left power sliding door control unit
3 40 A Right power sliding door control unit
4 40 A Power tailgate control unit
5 20 A Audio am plifier (with premium audio system)
6 20 A AC inverter unit
W -a
7 Fog light relay

o o
>>
8 10 A Engine m ount control unit (via active control engine mount (ACM) control relay) (J35A7
engine)
9 7.5 A*1 TPMS control unit
20 A*2 Front passenger's power seat slide m otor (via front passenger's power seat adjustment
switch)
10 20 A*2 Front passenger's power seat recline m otor (via front passenger's power seat adjustment
switch)
11 7.5 A Rear controller and screen (with rear entertainment system)
*1: '07 model
*2; '08-10 models
AUXILIARY UNDER-HOOD FUSE BOX
Driver's Under-dash Fuse/Relay Bom
Number
1 7.5 A TPMS control unit
2 15 A PCM (main relay)
Ignition coils
3 10 A Daytime running lights relay (Canada models), Daytime running lights control unit ('08-10
USA models), Multiplex integrated control unit (MICU)
4 15 A A/F sensor 1, A/F sensor 2, Secondary H02S 1, Secondary H02S 2
5 10 A Audio unit, XM receiver, Navigation unit (with navigation system), DVD player unit (with
rear entertainment system)
6 7.5 A Am bient light, Cargo area light, Driver's door courtesy light, Driver's vanity m irror light,
Front individual map light, Front passenger's vanity m irror light, Front passenger's door
courtesy light, Left rear individual map light, Power tailgate inner switch light, Right rear
individual map light
7 7.5 A Combination switch control unit, Door m ultiplex control units, Gauge control module,
HandsFreeLink control unit ('08-10 with rear entertainment system), Immobilizer control
unit-receiver, Imoes unit ('08-10 models), Left power sliding door control unit, MICU-rear
junction box, Multiplex integrated control unit (MICU), Navigation display unit (with
navigation system), Navigation unit (with navigation system), Power m irror control unit
('08-10 Touring models), Power seat control unit, Power tailgate control unit, Right power
sliding door control unit
8 Not used
9 15 A Driver's accessory power socket (via driver's accessory power socket relay)
10 7.5 A SRS unit, Passenger's weight sensor unit, OPDS unit ('07 model), ODS unit ('08-10 models)
11 30 A Windshield wiper motor
12 15 A Cargo area accessory power socket relay, Cargo area light
13 20 A Left power sliding door control unit
14 20 A Power seat control unit
15 20 A Adjustable pedal relays
16 20 A Power seat control unit
17 20 A Power tailgate control unit
18 15 A Alternator, Brake pedal position switch, ELD unit, EVAP canister purge valve, VSA
modulator-control unit, PCM (VBSOL), PCM (IG1 ACC)
19 15 A Fuel pump, Immobilizer control unit-receiver, PCM (IG1), Imoes unit ('08-10 models)
20 10 A Washer motor, Rear window wiper motor relay, Rear window wiper motor
21 7.5 A Active control engine mount (ACM) relay, Automatic lighting control unit, A/T shift lock
solenoid, Combination switch control unit, Daytime Running lights control unit ('08-10
USA models), Door multiplex control unit, Electrical compass unit (Touring model w ithout
navigation system) Engine mount control unit, Gauge control module, Left power sliding
door control unit, MICU-rear junction box, Multiplex integrated control unit (MICU), Relay
control module, Right power sliding door control unit, Parking and back-up sensor control
unit, Power m irror control unit ('08-10 Touring models), Power seat control unit, Power
tailgate control unit, TPMS control unit
22 10 A SRS unit
23 7.5 A Radiator fan diode, PCM (LAF R)
24 20 A Left rear w indow switch
25 20 A Right rear w indow switch
26 20 A Front passenger's w indow switch
27 20 A Door multiplex control unit
28 20 A M oonroof open/close relay
29 Not used
(cont'd)
Driver's Under-dash Fuse/Relay Box

Number
30 10 A AC inverter unit, Adjustable pedal m otor, Automatic dimming inside m irror (with
automatic dim ming inside mirror), Automatic lighting control unit, Front blower motor
relay, Front climate control unit (with climate control), Rearview m onitor (with rearview
m onitor mirror), Front A/C control panel, No. 2 fuse (in the under-hood fuse/relay box),
Optional connector, PCM (FAN L), PCM (ACC L), Power m irror actuators, Seat heater relay
(in the passenger's under-dash fuse/relay box), Rear A/C control panel, Rear climate
control unit (with climate control), Recirculation control motor
31 15 A PCM
32 10 A Active noise cancellation unit (with active noise control), Audio unit, Audio amplifier (with
premium audio system), Auxiliary jack assembly (with rear entertainment system),
Driver's accessory power socket relay, DVD player unit (with rear entertainment system),
HandsFreeLink control unit ('08-10 models with rear entertainment system), Ignition key
switch, M ultiplex integrated control unit (MICU), Navigation unit (with navigation system),
Navigation display unit (with navigation system), Optional connector, Passenger's
accessory power socket relay (in the passenger's under-dash fuse/relay box) ('07 model)
33 Not used
Passenger's Under-dash Fuse/Relay Box
Number
1 30 A Rear blower motor relay (in the MICU-rear junction box)
2 Not used
3 15 A PCM (THROTTLE ACTUATOR CONTROL RELAY OUT)
4 20 A Left sliding door lock actuator, M ulti plex integrated control unit (MICU)
5 Not used
6 15 A Driver's seat heater switch, Passenger's seat heater switch
7 7.5 A Navigation display unit (with navigation system), Navigation unit (with navigation system),
Ashtray light, Audio unit, Audio remote switch, Cruise control combination switch, Climate
control panel (with climate control), Power sliding door switch, DVD player unit (with rear
entertainment system), Rear controller and screen (with rear entertainment system), Glove
box light, Driver's interior light switch, Park pin switch, VSA OFF switch. Adjustable pedal
switch, Parking and back-up sensor switch, Power tailgate switch, Moonroof switch,
Driver's seat heater switch, Front passenger's seat heater switch, Hazard warning switch,
HFL voice control switch ('08-10 Touring models)
8 20 A Right power sliding door control unit
9 10 A Passenger's accessory power socket ('07 model)
(cont'd)
Auxiliary Fuse Holder

Fuse Amps Wire Color Component(s) or Circuit(s) Protected
Number
1 7.5 A RED PCM
□
Ground to Components Index
Ground Component or circuit grounded

G1 Battery terminal
G2 Engine mount bracket
G3 Transmission housing
G101 PCM (PG1 and PG2 are BLK, and LG1 and LG2 are BRN/YEL)
and BLK: Rocker arm oil control solenoid, EGR valve, Ignition coils, TCC solenoid valve, Transmission range
G102 switch, A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valves A, B, C
BRN/YEL: CKP sensor A/B, CMP sensor, Rocker arm oil pressure switch
Shielding between PCM and knock sensor, between PCM and A/F sensor (front, rear), between PCM and
secondary H02S (front, rear) have BRN/YEL wire
G201 Daytime running lights relay (Canada models), Fan control relay, Right fog light, Right front parking
light, Right front turn signal light, Right headlights, Washer fluid level switch (Canada models)
G202 Engine mount control unit, Front blower motor relay, ELD, Rear w indow washer relay, TPMS control
unit
G301 Left fog light, Left front parking light, Left front turn signal light, Left headlights, Radiator fan motor,
Hood switch
G302 VSA modulator-control unit (2 wires)
G401 M ultiplex integrated control unit (MICU), Windshield w iper motor, Power steering pressure (PSP)
switch, A/C pressure switch, Brake fluid level switch
G501 Adjust pedal forward relay, Adjust pedal rearward relay, Automatic lighting control unit (2 wires),
Electrical compass unit ('07 model), Parking and back-up sensor switch, Parking and back-up sensor
control unit, Driver's accessory power socket, D3 switch, Park pin switch, Moonroof close relay,
M oonroof open relay, Moonroof switch, VSA OFF switch, Daytime running lights control unit ('08-10
USA models)
G502 Active noise cancellation unit, Cable reel, Data link connector (DLC) (2 wires), Interior light switch,
Gauge control module (2 wires). Ignition key switch
G503 Audio unit, DVD player unit
G504 ACM control unit (2 wires), Climate control panel, Front climate control unit, Driver's seat heater switch,
Front passenger's accessory power socket relay ('07 model), Front passenger's door lock knob switch,
Right power m irror defogger, Front passenger's seat heater switch, Front passenger's w indow switch,
Glove box light, A/C control panel, Power sliding door switch, Front power transistor, Rear controller
and screen, Seat heater relay, Navigation display unit, Navigation unit, Stereo amplifier, HandsFreeLink
control unit ('08-10 models)
G505 SRS unit (2 wires)
G601 Driver's accessory power socket relay, Combination switch, Door m ultiplex control unit (2 wires),
Driver's door key cylinder switch, Driver's door lock knob switch, Left power m irror defogger, Driver's
vanity m irror light, Driver's window motor, MICU service check connector, Multiplex integrated control
unit (MICU), Passenger's vanity m irror light, Power m irror switch (2 wires), Rear control panel, Turn
signal/hazard relay, Automatic dimming inside mirror, Driving position memory switch, Power m irror
control unit ('08-10 models), Rearview monitor m irror ('08-10 models)
G602 BLK: Left rear w indow switch, Left sliding door lock knob switch, Left sliding door release actuator,
Driver's power seat adjustment switch
BRN: Driver's seat belt buckle switch (2 wires), Driver's seat heater, Power seat control unit (2 wires)
G603 AC inverter unit, Fuel gauge sending unit, Fuel fill door switch, Auxiliary jack assembly, Left power
sliding door control unit (3 wires)
Ground to Components Index (cont'd)
Ground Component or circuit grounded

G651 BLK: Front passenger's weight sensor unit, Right rear w indow switch, Right sliding door lock knob
switch, Right sliding door release actuator, Front passenger's power seat adjustment switch ('08-10
models)
BRN: Front passenger's seat belt buckle switch, Front passenger's seat heater
(G651 connects to G751)
G652 Rear climate control unit, MICU-rear junction box (2 wires), Rear power transistor
G653 Right power sliding door control unit (2 wires) have BLK wire
Right power sliding door control unit (1 wire) has BRN wire
G701 Rear w indow w iper motor, Right brake light, Right rear turn signal light, Right taillight, Tailgate lock
knob switch, Tailgate latch switch, High mount brake light, Left back-up light, Right back-up light, Left
license plate light, Right license plate light, Left inner taillight, Right inner taillight, Rear w indow
defogger
G702 Left brake light, Left rear turn signal light, Left taillight. Cargo area accessory power socket, Power
tailgate control unit (3 wires), Power tailgate outside beeper
G751 Not used (taped to w ith the right sliding door wire harness)
Removal and Installation
Special Tools Required Installation

Relay Puller 07AAC-000A1 AO
1. Install the relays and connect the connectors to the
Removal under-hood fuse/relay box, then install the
under-hood fuse/relay box in the reverse order of
removal.
page 22-112).
2. Install the removed parts in the reverse order of
2. Remove the screws (A) for the alternator and battery
removal.
cable terminals from the under-hood fuse/relay box.
page 22-112).
4. Confirm that all systems work properly.
3. Remove the two mounting bolts (B) from the

under-hood fuse/relay box.
4. Remove the bottom cover from the under-hood
fuse/relay box.
5. Disconnect the connectors from the under-hood
fuse/relay box.
6. Carefully remove the relays using the relay puller (see
page 22-114) or by prying under the base of the relay.
NOTE: Do not use pliers; pliers w ill damage the relays,
which could cause the engine to stall or not start.
DTC Troubleshooting
DTC B1055: Relay Control Module Lost DTC B1056: Relay Control Module Lost
Communication With MICU Communication With MICU (Alarm message)
NOTE: If you are troubleshooting multiple DTCs, be sure NOTE: If you are troubleshooting multiple DTCs, be sure
to follow the instructions in B-CAN System Diagnosis to follow the instructions in B-CAN System Diagnosis
Test Mode A (see page 22-155). Test Mode A (see page 22-155).
1. Clear the DTCs w ith the HDS. 1. Clear the DTCs with the HDS.
2. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), and then back to 2. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), and then back to
ON (II). ON (II).
3. Wait for at (east 6 seconds. 3. W ait for at least 6 seconds.
Is D T C B 1 0 5 5 in d ic a te d ? Is D T C B 1 0 5 6 in d ic a te d ?
YES-Go to step 5. YES-Go to relay control module input test (see page
22-192).B
NO -lnterm ittent failure, the communication line is OK
at this tim e .B NO-lnterm ittent failure, the communication line is OK
at this tim e.B
A re D T C s B 1 1 0 6 , B 1 1 5 7 , B 1 2 5 5 , B 1 3 5 5 , B 1 5 5 6 , B 1 8 0 6 ,
B 1 9 5 5 , B 2 0 0 5 , a n d B 2 0 5 5 a ls o in d ic a te d ?
YES-Go to MICU input test (see page 22-185).B
NO-Go to relay control module input test (see page
22-192).11
DTC B1057: R e l a y C o n t r o l M o d u l e L o s t DTC B 1 0 5 8 : R e l a y C o n t r o l M o d u l e L o s t
C o m m u n ic a tio n W ith M IC U (D o o r s w itc h C o m m u n ic a tio n W ith D o o r M u ltip le x C o n tro l
m essage) U n it (D o o r lo c k s w itc h m e s s a g e )
NOTE: If you are troubleshooting m ultiple DTCs, be sure NOTE: If you are troubleshooting multiple DTCs, be sure
1. Clear the DTCs with the HDS. 1. Clear the DTCs with the HDS.
ON (II). ON (II).
3. Wait for at least 6 seconds. 3. Wait for at least 6 seconds.
NO-lnterm ittent failure, the communication line is OK NO-lnterm ittent failure, the communication line is OK
at this tim e.B at this tim e.B
A r e D T C s B 1 1 0 5 , B 1 1 5 9 , a n d B 1 8 0 7 a ls o in d ic a te d ? A r e D T C s B 1 0 0 6 , B 1 1 6 0 , a n d B 1 3 5 6 a ls o in d ic a te d ?
YES-Go to MICU input test (see page 22-185).B YES-Go to door multiplex control unit input test (see
page 22-190).B
22-192).B NO-Go to relay control module input test (see page
22-192).B
DTC B1060: Relay Control Module Lost DTC B1061: Relay Control Module Lost
Communication With Gauge Control Module Communication With Gauge Control Module
(VSP/NE message) (A/T message)
1. Clear the DTCs w ith the HDS. 1. Clear the DTCs with the HDS.
ON (II). ON (II).
3. W ait for at least 6 seconds. 3. W ait for at least 6 seconds.
4. Check for DTCs w ith the HDS. 4. Check for DTCs with the HDS.
at this tim e .! at this tim e.B
5. Check for DTCs w ith the HDS. 5. Check for DTCs with the HDS.
A re D T C s B 1 2 0 5 , B 1 3 5 7 , B 1 8 0 5 , B 2 0 1 0 , a n d B 2 0 6 0 A re D T C s B 1 0 0 8 , B 1 8 0 8 , B 1 9 5 6 , B 2 0 1 1 , a n d B 2 0 6 1
a ls o in d ic a te d ? a ls o in d ic a te d ?
YES-Go to gauge control module input test (see page YES-Go to gauge control module input test (see page
22-189).■ 22-189).B
NO-Go to relay control module input test (see page NO-Go to relay control module input test (see page
22-192).■ 22-192).B
D T C B 1 0 6 2 : R e la y C o n tro l M o d u le L o st D T C B 1 0 6 3 : R e la y C o n tro l M o d u le L o st
C o m m u n ic a tio n W ith C o m b in a tio n S w itc h C o m m u n ic a tio n W ith C o m b in a tio n S w itc h
C o n tro l U n it (H e a d lig h t s w itc h m e s s a g e ) C o n tro l U n it (W ip e r s w itc h m e s s a g e )
ON (II). ON (II).
3. Wait for at least 6 seconds. 3. W ait for at least 6 seconds.
4. Check for DTCs with the HDS. 4. Check for DTCs w ith the HDS.
at this tim e.B at this tim e.B
5. Check for DTCs with the HDS. 5. Checkfor DTCs with the HDS.
A r e D T C s B 1 0 0 7 , B 1 1 5 5 , B 1 5 5 5 , a n d B 1 9 5 7 a ls o A r e D T C s B 1 1 5 6 , a n d B 1 9 5 8 a ls o in d ic a te d ?
in d ic a te d ?
YES-Go to combination switch control unit input test
YES-Go to combination switch control unit input test (see page 22-191).B
(see page 22-191 ).B
NO-Go to relay control module input test (see page 22-192).B
22-192).B
Removal and Installation
Special Tools Required 4. Remove the mounting bolt(s) and pull the fuse/relay
Relay Puller 07AAC-000A1A0 box away from the body.
5. Disconnect the connectors and remove the driver's
NOTE: SRS components are located in this area. Review
the SRS component locations (see page 24-23), (or passenger's) under-dash fuse/relay box.
precautions, and procedures (see page 24-26) before NOTE: Some SRS harness connectors are
doing repair or servicing. spring-loaded lock type (see page 24-30).
Removal 6. Carefully remove the relays using the relay puller (see
page 22-114) or by prying under the base of the relay.
page 22-112). . NOTE: Do not use pliers; pliers w ill damage the relay,
which could cause the engine to stall or not start.
2. Remove the left (or right) front door sill trim (see page
20-17) and left (or right) kick panel (see page 20-101). Installation
3. Disconnect the connectors from the fuse side o f the 1. Install the relays and connect the connectors to the
driver's (or passenger's) under-dash fuse/relay box driver's (or passenger's) under-dash fuse/relay box,
(A). then install the driver's (or passenger's) under-dash
fuse/relay box in the reverse order of removal.
2. Install the removed parts in the reverse order of
removal.
page 22-112).
4. Confirm that all systems work properly.
B a tte ry
Battery Test
3. Here are the five possible battery conditions:

A battery can explode if you do not follow the proper • Good Battery: The battery has at least 60 percent of
procedure, causing serious injury to anyone nearby. its charge and requires no action.
Follow all procedures carefully and keep sparks and • Good-Recharge: The battery condition appears to
open flames away from the battery. be good, but charging is recommended and then
retest. See your battery charger's instructions to
Required Test Equipment fully charge the battery, then recheck. Do not
charge the battery using the vehicle's alternator.
Honda Electrical System Analyzer (ED-18 Battery tester):
• Charge and Retest: The battery condition is not
T/N INBED18LLH
known because its charge is too low. Recharge the
Ordering Information battery, then retest. See your battery's instructions
to fully charge the battery, then recheck. Do not
To order the Electrical System Analyzer, go to the Honda charge the battery using the vehicle's alternator.
Tool and Equipment catalog on the iN, or call
• Replace Battery: The battery condition is poor.
888-424-6857.
Replace it.
Software Version • Bad Cell: There is a problem with the battery.
Replace it.
Make sure you have the latest software in the ED-18. To
check the version on the do this:
• Press the POWER button.
• Select Reports, then press ENTER.
• Select i Version, then press ENTER.
If you do not have the correct version, call the Tools
Hotline at 800-346-6327.
Using the ED-18 Battery Tester
NOTE: For set up, customization, and other available
features, refer to the ED-18 user's manual.
1. Connect the leads to the positive and negative
terminal of the battery.
2. Use the arrow keys to select the battery test, then
press enter, then follow the prompts.
NOTE: Make sure to enter the correct cold cranking
ampere rating of the battery. If the number is not
entered correctly, the result w ill not be accurate.
B a tte ry
Battery Terminal Disconnection and Reconnection
Disconnection Reconnection
NOTE: Some systems store data in the memory that is NOTE: Some systems store data in the memory is that
lost when the battery is disconnected. Do the follow ing lost when the battery is disconnected. Do the following
procedures before disconnecting the battery. procedures to restore the system back to normal
operation.
1. Make sure you have the anti-theft code(s) fo r the
audio and/or the navigation system (if equipped). 1. Clean the battery terminals.
2. If you are replacing the audio unit, w rite down the 2. Test the battery (see page 22-111).
audio presets (AM and FM), and the XM audio presets
3. Reconnect the positive cable (A) to the battery (B) first,
(if equipped) because the audio unit does not retain
then reconnect the negative cable (C) to the battery.
the presets after the battery is disconnected.
NOTE: Always connect the positive cable to the
battery first.
4. Disconnect and isolate the negative cable from the
battery. 2 3 - 5 .9 N-m
NOTE: Always disconnect the negative cable from the

battery first.
5. Disconnect the positive cable from the battery.
4. Apply multipurpose grease to the terminals to

prevent corrosion.
5. Enter the anti-theft code(s) for the audio system
and/or the navigation system (if equipped).
6. Set the clock (for vehicles w ithout navigation system).
Battery Removal and Installation
NOTE: The battery terminal disconnection/reconnection Installation

procedure (see page 22-112) must be done before and
after doing this procedure. Some systems store data in 1. Install the battery (A), then install the battery setting
the memory is lost when the battery is disconnected. plate (B).
Removal
page 22-112).
2. Remove the two nuts (A) securing the battery setting
plate, then remove the battery setting plate (B) and
the battery (C).
2. Tighten the two nuts (C) equally until the battery is

stable.
NOTE: Do not deform the battery setting plate by
tightening the nuts too much.
page 22-112).
NOTE: Make sure the battery is installed correctly, and
the negative terminal are not reversed-connected.
Power Relay Test
Special Tools Required Relay Test

Relay Puller 07AAC-000A1A0 Adjustable pedal forward relay Five-terminal
Adjustable pedal rearward relay type
Use this chart to identify the type of relay, then do the Daytime running lights relay
test listed for it. (Canada models)
Fan control relay
NOTE: Moonroof open relay
• For the turn signal/hazard relay input test (see page M oonroof close relay
22-278). Carefully remove the relay using the relay puller.
• PGM-FI main relay 2 contains a diode between Do not use pliers. Pliers w ill damage the relay.
terminals No. 3 and No. 4. Power (+B ) must be
connected to term inal No. 4, and ground connected to
terminal No. 3. Failure to test relay correctly w ill
damage the relay and the PCM.
Relay Test
A/C compressor clutch relay Normally-open
A/C condenser fan relay four-terminal
Active control engine mount type
(ACM) control
Driver's accessory power
socket relay
ETCS control relay
Engine mount control relay
Fog light relay
Front blower m otor relay
Ignition coil relay
Passenger's accessory power
socket relay ('07 model)
PGM-FI subrelay (LAF)
PGM-FI main relay 1, 2
Power w indow relay
Radiator fan relay
Rear w indow defogger relay
Rear blower m otor relay
Starter cut relay
Seat heater relay
N o rm a lly -o p e n F o u r-te rm in a l T y p e Five-terminal Type
Check fo r continuity between the terminals. Check for continuity between the terminals.
• There should be continuity between terminals No. 1 • There should be continuity between terminals No. 1
and No. 2 when battery positive terminal is connected and No. 2 when battery positive terminal is connected
to terminal No. 4, and battery negative terminal is to terminal No. 5, and battery negative terminal is
connected to term inal No. 3. connected to terminal No. 3.
• There should be no continuity between terminals No. • There should be continuity between terminals No. 1
1 and No. 2 when power is disconnected. and No. 4 when power is disconnected.
Diode Type
Resistor Type Diode Type
©
1 5
n
©
STEERING LOCK ASSEMBLY
Circuit Diagram
IGNITION SWITCH
BATTERY No. 22 (BAT) No. 23 (IG)

(120 A) (BOA) G1
....."'■ef x x i............... crv£>—«—
© -
BLU/WHT BLU/WHT
) No. 1 AUXILIARY
,(7.5 A) FUSE-HOLDER
RED
V
PCM (STS)
DRIVER'S UNDER-DASH
FUSE/RELAY BOX A4 A6 A5
V V V
STARTER IG2 IG1
I No. 32
, (10 A)
CUT RELAY FUSES FUSES
DRIVER'S MICU
ATP-P
P-PIN SW KEY SW KEY SOL
P29 j P13 J P2 | P30 N36
BLU/BLK YEL/BLU RED/WHT WHT/RED YEL/RED
1
F4
IGNITION FRONT
KEY KEY STEERING PASSENGER'S
SWITCH INTERLOCK LOCK UNDER-DASH
(Closed: SOLENOID ASSEMBLY FUSE/RELAY
Key Inserted) BOX
7 TRANSMISSION 6 PARKING PIN D6
RANGE SWITCH SWITCH
(Closed: (Open:
6 In P position) 2 In P position)
BLK BLK YEL/RED
_Q _ -LL
G101 G501 G502
G102
Key Interlock System Circuit Troubleshooting
NOTE: SRS components are located in this area. Review 6. Turn the ignition switch to ACCESSORY (I), and move
the SRS component locations (see page 24-23), the shift lever to P.
precautions, and procedures (see page 24-26) before
doing repair or servicing. 7. Disconnect the D3 switch/park pin switch/A/T gear
position indicator panel light harness connector.
1.Turn the ignition switch to ACCESSORY (l).The shift
lever must be in P. 8. Check for continuity between D3 switch/park pin
switch/A/T gear position indicator panel light harness
2. Disconnect the steering lock assembly connector. connector terminals No. 2 and No. 6 with the shift
3. Check if the ignition switch can be turned to LOCK (0). lever in P, and with the shift lever out of P.
C a n th e ig n itio n s w itc h b e tu r n e d to L O C K (0 )?
D3 SWITCH/PARK PIN SWITCH/
A /T GEAR POSITION INDICATOR
YES-Go to step 4. PANEL LIGHT HARNESS CONNECTOR
NO-Replace the ignition key cylinder/steering lock
assembly (see page 17-13).B GND (BLK)
4. Turn the ignition switch to ACCESSORY (I) or ON (II), r>
1
and move the shift lever to N. 3 4 5 (
5. Measure the voltage between steering lock assembly
P-PIN SW (YEL/BLU)
STEERING LOCK ASSEMBLY CONNECTOR Terminal side of female terminals
Is th e re c o n tin u ity w h e n s h ift le v e r is in a n y p o s itio n o th e r

1 2 3 4 5 6 th a n P , a n d n o c o n tin u ity w h e n th e s h ift le v e r is in P ?
I ACC (YEL/RED)
YES-Check for an open in the wire between the
(v ) multiplex integrated control unit and the D3 switch/
park pin switch/A/T gear position indicator panel light
harness connector. If the wire is OK, substitute a
known-good multiplex integrated control unit and
Wire side of female terminals recheck.B
NO-Replace the park pin switch (see page 14-306).B
Is th e re b a tte r y v o lta g e ?
YES-Go to step 6.
NO-Check for a blown No. 32 (10 A) fuse in the
driver's under-dash fuse/relay box. Ifthe fuse is OK,
repair an open or short in the wire between the
driver's under-dash fuse/relay box and the steering
lock assembly connector.il
Key Interlock Solenoid Test Park Pin Switch Test
NOTE: SRS components are located in this area. Review 1. Remove the driver's side dashboard lower cover.
the SRS component locations (see page 24-23),
precautions, and procedures (see page 24-26) before 2. Disconnect the D3 switch/park pin switch/A/T gear
doing repair or servicing. position indicator panel light harness connector.
1. Remove the driver's dashboard lower cover (see page 3. Check for continuity between D3 switch/park pin
20-136) and lowersteering column cover. switch/A/T gear position indicator panel light harness
connector terminals No. 2 and No. 6 while the shift
2. Disconnect the steering lock assembly connector. lever is in P, and when the shift lever out of P.
3. Turn the ignition switch to ACCESSORY (I).
4. Connect positive battery power to steering lock
assembly connector terminal No. 4, and ground
terminal No. 3. Make sure that the ignition key cannot
be turned to LOCK (0). Disconnect battery power, and
make sure that the key can be turned to LOCK (0)
position and removed from the cylinder.
STEERING LOCK ASSEMBLY CONNECTOR

4. There should be no continuity when the shift lever is
in P, and there should be continuity when the shift
lever is in any position other than P.
5. Ifthe key interlock solenoid does not work correctly,
replace the ignition key cylinder/steering lock 5. Ifthe park pin switch is OK, connect the connector and
assembly. install the driver dashboard lower cover. If the switch
is faulty, replace the park pin switch (see page
6. Install the driver's dashboard lower cover (see page 14-306).
20-136) and the lower steering column cover.
Ignition Switch Test
NOTE: SRS components are located in this area. Review

the SRS component locations (see page 24-23),
precautions, and procedures (see page 24-26) before
doing repair or servicing.
page 22-112).
2. Remove the left front door sill trim (see page 20-101)
and left kick panel (see page 20-101).
3. Disconnect the 6P connector from the driver's
4. Check for continuity between the terminals in each

switch position according to the table.
Terminal W HT/ BLK/ BLK/ BLK/

RED WHT YEL RED WHT
Position (ACC) (BAT) (IG1) (IG2) (ST)
0 (LOCK)
I (ACC) o— —O
II (ON) o — |— o — — o — — O
111(START) o -J — o— —O
5. If the continuity is not as specified, replace the

steering lock/switch (see page 17-13).
page 22-112).
RELAY CONTROL MODULE

(Built into the under-hood fuse/relay box)
Troubleshooting, page 22-155
Input Test, page 22-192
FRONT INDIVIDUAL MAP LIGHT (EX, EX-L, and Touring models)
(Built into the roof console)
Test/Replacement, page 22-285
FRONT INDIVIDUAL MAP LIGHT (VAN, DX, and LX models)
RIGHT POWER SLIDING
DOOR CONTROL UNIT
POWER TAILGATE
CONTROL UNIT
LEFT POWER SLIDING

DOOR CONTROL UNIT
MICU-REAR JUNCTION BOX CONTROL UNIT

(Built into the rear junction box)
DOOR MULTIPLEX CONTROL UNIT

(Built into the power window master switch)
FRONT CLIMATE CONTROL UNIT MULTIPLEX INTEGRATED CONTROL UNIT (MICU)

(Built into the driver's under-dash fuse/relay box)
Driver's Seat
Troubleshooting CAN C ircuit Related Problems

NOTE: Check the PCM for DTCs and troubleshoot PCM or F-CAN loss of communication errors first (see page 11-3).
Using the HDS (Preferred method)

Connect the HDS to the Data Link Connector (DLC).
NOTE: There are two ways to read B-CAN code with the HDS.
First method; Go to B-CAN System Diagnosis Test Mode A to check for DTCs (see page 22-155).
Second method; Ground the SCS circuit w ith the HDS, then read the DTCs displayed in the m ulti-inform ation display
(MID) in the gauge assembly, then go to B-CAN System Diagnosis Test Mode A (see page 22-155).
W ithout HDS {Use only if the HDS is unavailable)

1. Check for communication circuit problems using B-CAN System Diagnosis Test (see page 22-160).
2. Check for DTCs (see page 22-160).
NOTE: If the problem is related to the power seat control unit (with DPMS), check for DTCs first with the driving
position memory system self-diagnostic function (see page 22-463).
3. If there are multiple DTCs stored, sort them, and then troubleshoot the DTCs in this o rd e r.
-1. Battery voltage DTCs
-2. Internal error DTCs
-3. Loss of communication DTCs
(beginning with the lowest number first; for example, if B1006 and B1059 are retrieved, troubleshoot B1006 first)
-4. Signal error DTCs
4. If no DTCs are retrieved, use B-CAN System Diagnosis Test Mode 2 to check all inputs related to failure (see step 11 on
page 22-160).
Loss of Communication DTC cross-reference chart
When an ECU on the CAN circuit is unable to communicate w ith the other ECUs on the B-CAN and F-CAN circuits, the
other control units w ill set loss of communication DTCs. Use this chart to find the control unit that is not communicating
with the other control units on the CAN circuits.
1. Find the Transmitting Control Unit that is in the same row as all of the loss of communication DTCs retrieved.
2. Do the input test for the transm itting control u n it
Transmitting Message Receivi ng Unit/Loss of Communication DTC
Control Unit MICU Relay Door Combination Gauge A/C Control MICU- Power Left Power Right Power Automatic Power
Control Multiplex Switch Control Panel or Rear Tailgate Sliding Door Sliding Door Lighting Seat
Module Control Control Unit Module Front climate Junction Control Control Unit Control Unit Control Unit Control
Unit Control Unit Box Unit Unit
MICU ALARM B1'0.56 RX
MICU B1055 B1106 B1255 B1157 B1955 B1355 B2005 B2055 B1556 B1806
DOOR SWITCH B1057 B1105 B1159 B1807
PASSENGER'S RX B1358 B2008 B2058
DOOR SWITCH
Relay Control RELAY B1005 B1158 B1959
Module CONTROL
MODULE
Door KEYLESS DOOR RX RX RX RX
Multiplex LOCK
Control Unit PANIC RX RX
DRIVER'S DOOR B1006 B1058 B1160 B1356
LOCK SWITCH
FOB ID RX RX RX
Combination HEADLIGHT B1007 B1062 B1155 B1957 B1555
Switch Control SWITCH
Unit WIPER SWITCH B1063 B1156 B1958
Gauge Control VSP/NE RX B1060 B1205 B1357 B2010 B2060 B1805
Module A/T B1008 B1061 B1956 B1359 B2011 B2061 B1808
ENGTEP B1206
ILLUMI B1207
VSP
VSA
STEERING
A/C Control RX RX B1960
Panel or Front
Climate
Control Unit
MICU-Rear RJU B1012 B2007
Junction Box
Power ANSWER BACK RX
Tailgate POWER B1162
Control Unit TAILGATE
Left Power LEFT POWER B1163
Sliding Door SLIDING DOOR
Control Unit PSDBUZZ B2059
Right Power RIGHT POWER B1164
Sliding Door SLIDING DOOR
Control Unit
Automatic AUTOLT RX RX B1165
Lighting
Control Unit
PCM B1168
B1169
TPMS B1173
VSA B1170
SRS B1187
RX: Receiving unit does not set a loss of communication DTC.
NOTE: Check the PCM for DTCs and troubleshoot PCM or F-CAN loss of communication errors first (see page 11-3), then
record all DTCs, and sort them by DTC type using the following DTC troubleshooting indexes, then troubleshoot the DTC
(s) in this order:
• Battery voltage DTCs
• Internal error DTCs
• Loss of communication DTCs (beginning with the lowest number first; for example, if B1006 and B1059 are retrieved,
troubleshoot B1006 first).
• Signal error DTCs
DTC Description ECU DTC type Page

B1000 Communication bus line error (BUS OFF) MICU Loss of DTC Troubleshooting
Communication (see page 22-167)
B1001 MICU CPU error MICU Internal Error DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 22-175)
B1002 MICU EEPROM error MICU Internal Error DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 22-175)
B1005 MICU lost communication with Relay MICU Loss of DTC Troubleshooting
Control Module Communication (see page 22-175)
B1006 MICU lost communication with Door MICU Loss of DTC Troubleshooting
M ultiplex Control Unit (door lock switch Communication (see page 22-176)
message)
B1007 MICU lost communication with MICU Loss of DTC Troubleshooting
Combination Switch Control Unit Communication (see page 22-176)
(headlight switch message)
B1008 MICU lost communication with Gauge MICU Loss of DTC Troubleshooting
Control Module (A/T message) Communication (see page 22-177)
B1012 MICU lost communication with MICU Loss of DTC Troubleshooting
MICU-Rear Junction Box (RJU message) Communication (see page 22-177)
B1026 Passenger's door lock switch signal error MICU Signal Error DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 22-205)
B1028 Rear w indow wiper m otor (As) signal MICU-Rear Signal Error DTC Troubleshooting
error Junction Box (see page 22-322)
B1032 MICU collision detection signal (CDS) input MICU Signal Error DTC Troubleshooting
failure (see page 22-178)
B1050 Communication bus line error (BUS OFF) Relay Control Loss of DTC Troubleshooting
Module Communication (see page 22-169)
B1055 Relay Control Module lost Relay Control Loss of DTC Troubleshooting
communication w ith MICU Module Communication (see page 22-106)
B1056 Relay Control Module lost - Relay Control Loss of DTC Troubleshooting
communication w ith MICU (alarm Module Communication (see page 22-106)
message)
communication w ith MICU (door switch Module Communication (see page 22-107)
message)
communication w ith Door Multiplex Module Communication (see page 22-107)
Control Unit (door lock switch message)
communication w ith Gauge Control Module Communication (see page 22-108)
Module (VSP/NE message)
communication w ith Gauge Control Module Communication (see page 22-108)
Module (A/T message)
communication with Combination Module Communication (see page 22-109)
Switch Control Unit (headlight switch
message)
Switch Control Unit (wiper switch
message)
B1075 Headlight signal error Relay Control Signal Error DTC Troubleshooting
Module (see page 22-249)
B1076 Windshield w iper signal error Relay Control Signal Error DTC Troubleshooting
B1077 Wiper switch (As) signal error Relay Control Signal Error DTC Troubleshooting
B1078 Daytime running lights signal error Relay Control Signal Error DTC Troubleshooting
(Canada) Module (see page 22-251)
B1079 Daytime running lights signal error Relay Control Signal Error DTC Troubleshooting
(USA) Module (see page 22-252)
B1080 Power supply circuit (IG1 line) input error Relay Control Battery voltage DTC Troubleshooting
for Relay Control Module and MICU Module (see page 22-178)
B1100 Communication bus line error (BUS OFF) Door Multiplex Loss of DTC Troubleshooting
Control Unit Communication (see page 22-169)
B1102 Door Multiplex Control Unit internal Door Multiplex Internal Error DTC Troubleshooting
error Control Unit (see page 22-180)
B1105 Door Multiplex Control Unit lost Door Multiplex Signal Error DTC Troubleshooting
communication with MICU (door switch Control Unit (see page 22-180)
message)
B1106 Door Multiplex Control Unit lost Door Multiplex Signal Error DTC Troubleshooting
communication with MICU (MICU Control Unit (see page 22-181)
message)
B1125 Driver's power window motor A pulse Door Multiplex Signal Error DTC Troubleshooting
B1126 Driver's power window motor B pulse Door Multiplex Signal Error DTC Troubleshooting
B1127 Driver's door key cylinder switch signal Door Multiplex Signal Error DTC Troubleshooting
B1128 Driver's door lock switch signal error Door Multiplex Signal Error DTC Troubleshooting
Control Unit (see page 22-208)
B1129 Driver's door lock knob switch signal Door Multiplex Signal Error DTC Troubleshooting
B1140 Driver's power window position detect Door Multiplex Signal Error DTC Troubleshooting
circuit error Control Unit (see page 22-308)
B1150 Communication bus line error (BUS OFF) Gauge Control Loss of DTC Troubleshooting
B1152 Gauge Control Module EEPROM error Gauge Control Internal Error DTC Troubleshooting
B1155 Gauge Control Module lost Gauge Control Loss of DTC Troubleshooting
message)
message)
(cont'd)
DTC Troubleshooting Index (cont'd)

B1157 Gauge Control Module lost Gauge Control Loss of DTC T roubleshooting
communication w ith MICU Module Communication (see page 22-359)
communication w ith Relay Control Module Communication (see page 22-360)
Module
communication w ith MICU (door switch Module ‘ Communication (see page 22-360)
message)
communication w ith Door Multiplex Module Communication (see page 22-361)
communication w ith Power Tailgate Module Communication (see page 22-361)
Control Unit (PTG message)
communication w ith Left Power Sliding Module Communication (see page 22-362)
Door Control Unit (PSDL message)
communication w ith Right Power Sliding Module Communication (see page 22-362)
Door Control Unit (PSDR message)
communication with PCM (Engine Module Communication (see page 22-362)
messages)
communication w ith PCM (A/T Module Communication (see page 22-362)
messages)
communication with VSA/ABS Module Communication (see page 22-363)
modulator-control unit (VSA/ABS
message)
communication w ith TPMS control unit Module Communication (see page 22-364)
(TPMS messages)
B1175 Fuel level sensor (Fuel gauge sending Gauge Control Signal Error DTC Troubleshooting
unit) circuit open Module (see page 22-364)
B1176 Fuel level sensor (Fuel gauge sending Gauge Control Signal Error DTC Troubleshooting
unit) circuit short Module (see page 22-365)
B1177 Abnormal battery voltage (7.5 V) Gauge Control Battery voltage DTC Troubleshooting
B1178 F-CAN communication line error Gauge Control Loss of DTC Troubleshooting
communication with Electrical Compass Module Communication (see page 22-367)
Unit
communication w ith SRS Unit (SRS Module Communication (see page 22-369)
message)
B1200 Communication bus line error (BUS OFF) Front Climate Loss of DTC Troubleshooting
Control Unit communication (see page 22-170)
A/C Control
Panel
B1202 Climate control unit internal error Front Climate Internal error DTC Troubleshooting
A/C Control Internal error DTC Troubleshooting
Panel (see page 21-49)
B1205 Climate control unit lost communication Front Climate Loss of DTC Troubleshooting
with gauge control module (VSP/NE Control Unit communication (see page 21-172)
message) A/C Control Loss of DTC Troubleshooting
Panel communication (see page 21-50)
with gauge control module (ECT Control Unit communication (see page 21-172)
with gauge control module (ILLUMI Control Unit communication (see page 21-172)
B1221 An open in the rear mode control motor Rear Climate Signal error DTC Troubleshooting
circuit Control Unit (see page 21-166)
A/C control Signal Error DTC Troubleshooting
B1222 A short in the rear mode control motor Rear Climate Signal error DTC Troubleshooting
B1223 A problem in the rear blower motor Rear Climate Signal Error DTC Troubleshooting
A/C control Signal Error DTC Troubleshooting
B1224 A short in the rear in-car temperature Rear Climate Signal Error DTC Troubleshooting
sensor circuit Control Unit (see page 21-161)
B1225 An open in the in-car temperature sensor Front Climate Signal Error DTC Troubleshooting
B1226 A short in the in-car temperature sensor Front Climate Signal Error DTC Troubleshooting
B1227 An open in the outside air temperature Front Climate Signal Error DTC Troubleshooting
B1228 A short in the outside air temperature Front Climate Signal Error DTC Troubleshooting
B1229 An open in the sunlight sensor circuit Front Climate Signal Error DTC Troubleshooting
B1230 A short in the sunlight sensor circuit Front Climate Signal Error DTC Troubleshooting
B1231 An open in the evaporator temperature Front Climate Signal Error DTC Troubleshooting
A/C Control Signal Error DTC Troubleshooting
B1232 A short in the evaporator temperature Front Climate Signal Error DTC Troubleshooting
(cont'd)

B1233 An open in the driver's air mix control Front Climate Signal Error DTC Troubleshooting
motor circuit Control Unit (see page 21-147)
B1234 A short in the driver's air m ix control Front Climate Signal Error DTC Troubleshooting
B1235 A problem in the driver's air mix control Front Climate Signal Error DTC Troubleshooting
linkage, doors, or motor Control Unit (see page 21-149)
B1236 An open in the passenger's air mix Front Climate Signal Error DTC Troubleshooting
control motor circuit Control Unit (see page 21-150)
B1237 A short in the passenger's air mix control Front Climate Signal Error DTC Troubleshooting
B1238 A problem in the passenger's air mix Front Climate Signal Error DTC Troubleshooting
control linkage, doors, or motor Control Unit (see page 21-152)
B1239 An open or short in the mode control Front Climate Signal Error DTC Troubleshooting
B1240 A problem in the mode control linkage, Front Climate Signal Error DTC Troubleshooting
doors, or motor Control Unit (see page 21-156)
B1241 A problem in the blower motor circuit Front Climate Signal Error DTC Troubleshooting
B1244 An open in the rear air mix control motor Rear Climate Signal Error DTC Troubleshooting
B1245 A short in the rear air mix control motor Rear Climate Signal Error DTC Troubleshooting
B1246 A problem in the rear air m ix control Rear Climate Signal Error DTC Troubleshooting
B1247 An open or short in the rear mode control A/C Control Signal Error DTC Troubleshooting
m otor circuit Panel (see page 21-43)
B1248 A problem in the rear mode control Rear Climate Signal Error DTC Troubleshooting
B1249 An open in the rear in-car temperature Rear Climate Signal Error DTC Troubleshooting
B1250 Communication bus line error (BUS OFF) Combination Loss of DTC Troubleshooting
Switch Control Communication (see page 22-171)
Unit
B1255 Combination Switch Control Unit lost Combination Loss of DTC Troubleshooting
communication with MICU Switch Control Communication (see page 22-254)
Unit
B1275 Headlight switch OFF position circuit Combination Signal Error DTC Troubleshooting
malfunction Switch Control (see page 22-254)
Unit
B1276 Headlight switch parking (SMALL) Combination Signal Error DTC Troubleshooting
position circuit malfunction Switch Control (see page 22-254)
Unit
B1277 Headlight switch AUTO position circuit Combination Signal Error DTC Troubleshooting
Unit
B1278 Headlight switch ON position circuit Combination Signal Error DTC Troubleshooting
Unit
B1279 Headlight switch dimmer position circuit Combination Signal Error DTC Troubleshooting
Unit
B1280 Turn signal switch circuit malfunction Combination Signal Error DTC Troubleshooting
Switch Control (see page 22-256)
Unit
B1281 Windshield wiper switch MIST position Combination Signal Error DTC Troubleshooting
circuit malfunction Switch Control (see page 22-327)
Unit
B1282 Windshield wiper switch INT position Combination Signal Error DTC Troubleshooting
Unit
B1283 Windshield wiper switch LOW position Combination Signal Error DTC Troubleshooting
Unit
B1284 Windshield wiper switch HIGH position Combination Signal Error DTC Troubleshooting
Unit
B1350 Communication bus line error (BUS OFF) Power Tailgate Loss of DTC Troubleshooting
B1352 Power tailgate control unit EEPROM Power Tailgate Internal error DTC Troubleshooting
B1355 Power tailgate control unit lost Power Tailgate Loss of DTC Troubleshooting
communication with MICU Control Unit Communication (see page 22-614)
communication with Door Multiplex Control Unit Communication (see page 22-615)
communication with Gauge Control Control Unit Communication (see page 22-615)
communication with MICU (passenger's Control Unit Communication (see page 22-616)
door lock switch message)
(cont'd)

B1375 Driver's power tailgate switch circuit Power Tailgate Signal Error DTC Troubleshooting
malfunction Control Unit (see page 22-617)
B1376 Tailgate outer handle switch circuit Power Tailgate Signal Error DTC Troubleshooting
B1377 Power tailgate inside switch circuit Power Tailgate Signal Error DTC Troubleshooting
B1378 Power tailgate right pinch sensor circuit Power Tailgate Signal Error DTC Troubleshooting
B1379 Power tailgate left pinch sensor circuit Power Tailgate Signal Error DTC Troubleshooting
B1380 Tailgate closer unit neutral switch circuit Power Tailgate Signal Error DTC Troubleshooting
B1381 Tailgate closer unit release switch circuit Power Tailgate Signal Error DTC Troubleshooting
B1382 Tailgate closer unit full latch switch Power Tailgate Signal Error DTC Troubleshooting
circuit malfunction Control Unit (see page 22-628)
B1383 Tailgate closer unit ratchet switch circuit Power Tailgate Signal Error DTC Troubleshooting
B1384 Tailgate closer unit half latch switch Power Tailgate Signal Error DTC Troubleshooting
circuit malfunction Control Unit (see page 22-632)
B1386 Power tailgate sensor pulse A circuit Power Tailgate Signal Error DTC Troubleshooting
B1387 Power tailgate sensor pulse B circuit Power Tailgate Signal Error DTC Troubleshooting
B1388 Power tailgate drive motor circuit Power Tailgate Signal Error DTC Troubleshooting
B1389 Power tailgate motor clutch circuit Power Tailgate Signal Error DTC Troubleshooting
B1390 Power tailgate closer motor function Power Tailgate Signal Error DTC Troubleshooting
B1550 Communication bus line error (BUS OFF) Automatic Loss of DTC Troubleshooting
Lighting Control Communication (see page 22-172)
Unit
B1555 Automatic Lighting Control Unit lost Automatic Loss of DTC Troubleshooting
communication w ith Combination Lighting Control Communication (see page 22-256)
Switch Control Unit (AUTOLT message) Unit
B1556 Automatic Lighting Control Unit lost Automatic Loss of DTC Troubleshooting
communication with MICU (MICU Lighting Control Communication (see page 22-257)
message) Unit
B1750 Communication bus line error (BUS OFF) HandsFreeLink Loss of DTC Troubleshooting
B1775 Microphone Input/Output Short to HandsFreeLink Signal Error DTC Troubleshooting
Power/Open Control Unit (see page 23-380)
B1776 Microphone Input/Output Short to HandsFreeLink Signal Error DTC Troubleshooting
Ground/Open Control Unit (see page 23-381)
B1779 HFL Switch (Pick Up/Hang Up Switch) HandsFreeLink Signal Error DTC Troubleshooting
circuit Open/Short Control Unit (see page 23-382)
B1780 HFL Switch (Pick Up/Hang Up Switch) HandsFreeLink Signal Error DTC Troubleshooting
circuit Short Control Unit (see page 23-384)
B1792 HandsFreeLink Control Unit Internal HandsFreeLink Signal Error DTC Troubleshooting
Error Control Unit (see page 23-385)
B1800 Communication bus line error (BUS OFF) Power Seat Loss of DTC Troubleshooting
B1802 Power Seat Control Unit EEPROM error Power Seat Internal Error DTC Troubleshooting
B1805 Power Seat Control Unit lost Power Seat Loss of DTC Troubleshooting
communication with MICU (MICU Control Unit Communication (see page 22-474)
massage)
communication with MICU (door switch Control Unit Communication (see page 22-474)
message)
B1825 Power seat slide motor pulse error Power Seat Signal Error DTC Troubleshooting
B1826 Power seat front up-down m otor pulse Power Seat Signal Error DTC Troubleshooting
B1827 Power seat rear up-down m otor pulse Power Seat Signal Error DTC Troubleshooting
B1828 Power seat recline motor pulse error Power Seat Signal Error DTC Troubleshooting
B1829 A/T P signal and VSS signal mismatch Power Seat Signal Error DTC Troubleshooting
B1830 Left m irror position sensor malfunction Power Seat Signal Error DTC Troubleshooting
B1832 Right m irror position sensor malfunction Power Seat Signal Error DTC Troubleshooting
B1836 Power seat position sensor circuit short Power Seat Signal Error DTC Troubleshooting
B1837 Driving position memory recall tim eout Power Seat Signal Error DTC Troubleshooting
communication with Power M irror Control Unit Communication (see page 22-497)
Control Unit (UART line)
B1844 Power seat slide switch circuit Power Seat Signal Error DTC Troubleshooting
B1845 Power seat recline switch circuit Power Seat Signal Error DTC Troubleshooting
(cont'd)

B1846 Power seat front up-down switch circuit Power Seat Signal Error DTC Troubleshooting
B1847 Power seat rear up-down switch circuit Power Seat Signal Error DTC Troubleshooting
B1950 Communication bus line error (BUS OFF) MICU-Rear Loss of DTC Troubleshooting
Junction Box Communication (see page 22-173)
B1955 MICU-Rear Junction Box lost MICU-Rear Loss of DTC Troubleshooting
communication w ith MICU (MICU Junction Box Communication (see page 22-181)
message)
communication with Gauge Control Junction Box Communication (see page 22-182)
communication with Combination Junction Box Communication (see page 22-182)
message)
communication w ith Combination Junction Box Communication (see page 22-183)
message)
communication with Relay Control Junction Box Communication (see page 22-183)
Module (R/M message)
communication w ith Climate Control Junction Box Communication (see page 22-184)
Unit (A/C message)
B2000 Communication bus line error (BUS OFF) Left Power Loss of DTC Troubleshooting
Sliding Door Communication (see page 22-174)
Control Unit
B2002 Left Power Sliding Door Control Unit Left Power Internal Error DTC Troubleshooting
EEPROM error Sliding Door (see page 22-536)
Control Unit
B2005 Left Power Sliding Door Control Unit lost Left Power Loss of DTC Troubleshooting
communication with MICU Sliding Door Communication (see page 22-536)
Control Unit
communication with Rear Junction Box Sliding Door Communication (see page 22-537)
Control Unit (RJU message) Control Unit
communication with MICU (ASLOCKSW Sliding Door Communication (see page 22-537)
message) Control Unit
communication with Gauge Control Sliding Door Communication (see page 22-538)
Module (VSP/NE message) Control Unit
communication with Gauge Control Sliding Door Communication (see page 22-538)
Module (A/T message) Control Unit
B2025 Left power sliding door main switch Left Power Signal Error DTC Troubleshooting
(open input) signal error Sliding Door (see page 22-539)
Control Unit
B2026 Left power sliding door main switch Left Power Signal Error DTC Troubleshooting
(close input) signal error Sliding Door (see page 22-540)
Control Unit
B2027 Left power sliding door remote control Left Power Signal Error DTC Troubleshooting
switch 1 signal error Sliding Door (see page 22-542)
Control Unit
Control Unit
Control Unit
B2030 Left power sliding door pinch sensor Left Power Signal Error DTC Troubleshooting
signal error Sliding Door (see page 22-546)
Control Unit
B2031 Left power slide motor pulse (SLSE1) Left Power Signal Error DTC Troubleshooting
Control Unit
B2032 Left power slide motor pulse (SLSE2) Left Power Signal Error DTC Troubleshooting
Control Unit
B2033 Left power slide motor circuit Left Power Signal Error DTC Troubleshooting
malfunction Sliding Door (see page 22-553)
Control Unit
B2034 Left power slide motor electromagnetic Left Power Signal Error DTC Troubleshooting
clutch circuit malfunction Sliding Door (see page 22-554)
Control Unit
B2035 Left power sliding door half latch switch Left Power Signal Error DTC Troubleshooting
circuit short Sliding Door (see page 22-556)
Control Unit
(cont'd)

B2036 Left power sliding door full latch switch Left Power Signal Error DTC Troubleshooting
Control Unit
B2037 Left power sliding door ratchet switch Left Power Signal Error DTC Troubleshooting
Control Unit
B2038 Left power sliding door base position Left Power Signal Error DTC Troubleshooting
switch circuit open/short Sliding Door (see page 22-559)
Control Unit
B2039 Left power sliding door switch Left Power Signal Error DTC Troubleshooting
open/close signal input error (inputs at Sliding Door (see page 22-561)
the same time) Control Unit
B2040 Left power slide motor malfunction Left Power Signal Error DTC Troubleshooting
Sliding Door (see page 22-562)
Control Unit
B2041 Left power slide motor pulse Left Power Signal Error DTC Troubleshooting
(SLSE1/SLSE2) error Sliding Door (see page 22-564)
Control Unit
B2050 Communication bus line error (BUS OFF) Right Power Loss of DTC Troubleshooting
Sliding Door Communication (see page 22-174)
Control Unit
B2052 Right Power Sliding Door Control Unit Right Power Internal Error DTC T roubleshooting
EEPROM error Sliding Door (see page 22-565)
Control Unit
B2055 Right Power Sliding Door Control Unit Right Power Loss of DTC Troubleshooting
lost communication with MICU Sliding Door Communication <see page 22-565)
Control Unit
lost communication with MICU Sliding Door Communication (see page 22-566)
(ASLOCKSW message) Control Unit
lost communication with Left Power Sliding Door Communication (see page 22-566)
Sliding Door Control Unit (PSD message) Control Unit
lost communication with Gauge Control Sliding Door Communication (see page 22-567)
Module (VSP/NE message) Control Unit
lost communication with Gauge Control Sliding Door Communication (see page 22-567)
Module (A/T message) Control Unit
B2075 Right power sliding door switch (open Right Power Signal Error DTC Troubleshooting
side) signal error Sliding Door (see page 22-568)
Control Unit
B2076 Right power sliding door switch (close Right Power Signal Error DTC Troubleshooting
side) signal error Sliding Door (see page 22-569)
Control Unit
B2077 Right power sliding door remote control Right Power Signal Error DTC Troubleshooting
Control Unit
B2078 Right power sliding door remote control Right Power Signal Error DTC Troubleshooting
Control Unit
B2079 Right pow ersliding door remote control Right Power Signal Error DTC Troubleshooting
Control Unit
B2080 Right power sliding door pinch sensor Right Power Signal Error DTC Troubleshooting
Control Unit
B2081 Right power slide motor pulse (SLSE1) Right Power Signal Error DTC Troubleshooting
Control Unit
B2082 Right power slide motor pulse (SLSE2) Right Power Signal Error DTC Troubleshooting
Control Unit
B2083 Right power slide motor circuit Right Power Signal Error DTC Troubleshooting
malfunction Sliding Door (see page 22-582)
Control Unit
B2084 Right power slide motor electromagnetic Right Power Signal Error DTC Troubleshooting
clutch circuit malfunction Sliding Door (see page 22-583)
Control Unit
B2085 Right power sliding door half latch Right Power Signal Error DTC Troubleshooting
switch circuit short Sliding Door (see page 22-585)
Control Unit
B2086 Right power sliding door full latch switch Right Power Signal Error DTC Troubleshooting
Control Unit
B2087 Right power sliding door ratchet switch Right Power Signal Error DTC Troubleshooting
Control Unit
B2088 Right power sliding door base position Right Power Signal Error DTC Troubleshooting
switch circuit open/short Sliding Door (see page 22-588)
Control Unit
B2089 Right power sliding door switch Right Power Signal Error DTC Troubleshooting
open/close signal input error (inputs at Sliding Door (see page 22-591)
the same time) Control Unit
B2090 Right power slide motor malfunction Right Power Signal Error DTC Troubleshooting
Sliding Door (see page 22-592)
Control Unit
B2091 Right power slide motor pulses Right Power Signal Error DTC Troubleshooting
(SLSE1/SLSE2) error Sliding Door (see page 22-594)
Control Unit
System Description
Body Controller Area Network (B-CAN) and Fast Controller Area Network (F-CAN)
The body controller area network (B-CAN) and the fast controller area network (F-CAN) share information between
m ultiple electronic control units (ECUs). B-CAN communication moves at a slower speed for convenience related items
and for other functions. F-CAN information moves at a faster speed for real time functions such as fuel and emissions
data. To allow both systems to share information, the gauge control module translates and relays the information from
B-CAN to F-CAN and from F-CAN to B-CAN. This is called the Gateway Function.
The ECUs on the B-CAN and the F-CAN transm it and receive information in the form of structured messages that may be
received by several different ECUs on the network at one time. These messages are transmitted and received across a
communication circuit that consists of a single w ire that is shared by all the ECUs on the circuit. Since messages on the
F-CAN are typically of higher importance, a second wire is used for communication circuit integrity monitoring. A
backup circuit is also added to the headlight and w iper circuits on the B-CAN in the event of a network wire or ECU
failure that would effect the operation of the system.
F-CAN
Messages are transmitted by an ECU (that monitors an input) over the communication circuit. ECUs that use the
message (information related to that input) are the receivers. For example, the combination switch control unit monitors
the wiper switch. When the wiper switch is placed in the low speed position, the combination switch control unit
transmits that message on the communication circuit. The relay control module receives the message and turns on the
wipers by providing a ground for the relay.
Connected ECUs
Several ECUs are connected to each of the two networks. The gauge control module is part of both networks since it is
the gateway between them. Here is a list of ECUs and the network they are connected to.
B-CAN ECUs F-CAN ECUs
• Gauge control module Gauge control module

• Relay control module PCM
• Multiplex integrated control unit (MICU) VSA modulator-control unit
• Door m ultiplex control unit ACM
• Combination switch control unit TPMS control unit
• MICU-rear junction box SRS unit
• Power tailgate control unit
• Power seat control unit
• Left power sliding door control unit
• Right power sliding door control unit
• A/C control panel/Front climate control unit
• Automatic lighting control unit
• HandsFreeLink control unit
Network "Loss of Communication" Error Checking
The B-CAN and the F-CAN send messages to each other to check the integrity of the network communication circuit.
They do this by sending a specific digital message out after an event. For example, after turning the ignition switch to
ON (II). All the ECUs on the communication circuit expect to receive a message from other specific units w ithin a
specified amount of time. Ifthe message is not received, the ECU w ill transm it a DTC reporting that it did not receive the
message.
Examples of a communication circuit test

Normal circuit
1. Ignition switch is turned to ON (II).
2. The door multiplex control unit transmits a door switch message.
3. The m ultiplex integrated control unit (MICU), relay control module, and gauge control module receive the door lock
switch message.
4. The communication circuit test is passed.
Since the door lock switch message was received by all the ECUs expecting to receive a message, the communication
circuit between those units is OK. There are multiple messages sent and received by each ECU during this tim e to
ensure that the communication circuit is intact.
(cont'd)
Failed circuit
5. Ignition switch is turned to ON (II).
6. The door m ultiplex control unit transm its a door switch message.
7. The m ultiplex integrated control unit (MICU), relay control module, and gauge control module expect to receive the
door lock switch message, but since there is a break in the communication circuits, it is not received.
8. Each ECU that expects to receive the door lock switch message from the door multiplex control unit w ill transm it
DTCs for the message that it did not receive.
Power Window
Master Switch B-CAN Gauge
Control
Module
DTCs set for:

■ Door lock switch message not received by Gauge Control Module
■ Door lock switch message not received by MICU
■ Door lock switch message not received by Relay Control Module
B-CAN Relay
Control
Module
Since there is a break in the communication circuit, the door lock switch message could not be received by the gauge
control module, multiplex integrated control unit (MICU), or the relay control module. Each of these units w ill set 'lo ss
of com m unication" error codes for the message(s) they did not receive. There may be multiple communication DTCs if
the unit that has become disconnected from the network would normally transm it multiple messages during the
communication line test. For example, the door m ultiplex control unit sends the keyless panic message and door lock
switch message during the communication circuit test.
Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTC)
There are three types of DTCs used by the CAN networks.
Internal error DTCs The ECUs run internal checks. If one finds that there is an internal ECU problem, it w ill set an
internal error DTC. Confirm that the battery and charging system are OK. If so, this indicates
that the ECU needs to be replaced.
Loss of Loss of communication DTCs (and Bus-off DTCs) are set when there is a problem with the
communication communication between ECUs. This could be in the connections, the w iring, or the ECU (as
DTCs called out in the DTC Troubleshooting index).
Signal error DTCs The ECUs can run diagnostics on some input circuits to determine if those circuits are
functioning properly (no opens or shorts). If a circuit fails the diagnostic test, a DTC w ill set.
(NOTE: Not all input circuits are tested for errors.)
B-CAN System Unit Input/Output Index

Combination Switch Control Unit
Input signal Output signal/Device
Dimmer switch, Lighting switch, Passing switch, Turn None
signal switch, Wiper/washer switch, Intermittent dwell
time controller
Relay Control Module
Daytime running lights control, Security hood switch, Daytime running lights control, Headlight, Parking light,
Horn switch, Windshield wiper m otor, Windshield w iper Horn, Windshield washer motor, Windshield wiper
fail-safe, Rear w indow defogger m otor
Door Multiplex Control Unit
Input signal Output signal
Driver's door key cylinder switch (lock/unlock), Driver's Driver's power window motor, Passenger's power
door lock knob switch (lock/unlock), Driver's door lock w indow switches, Power window relay control,
switch. Driver's power w indow switches (up, down, auto Passenger's power window enable, Security, Memory
up, auto down), Passenger's power w indow switches seat switches and indicators
(up, down), Driver's power w indow m otor pulser, Key-off
tim er, Keyless transm itter signal
Multiplex Integrated Control Unit
Brake pedal position switch, Door switches, Ignition key Door lock actuators, Hazard warning lights, Interior
cylinder switch, Park pin switch, Passenger's door lock lights. Ignition key light, Key interlock solenoid, Turn
knob switches (unlock), Passenger's door lock switch, signal lights, Door courtesy lights, Key-off tim er, Back-up
Seat belt switch (unbuckled), Transmission range switch lights
(P, R), Tailgate latch switch
MICU-Rear Junction Box
Brake lights, Back-up lights, Taillights and license plate Brake lights, High mount brake light, Back-up lights,
lights, Turn signal/hazard lights, Fuel lid switch, Rear Taillight and license plate lights, Rear ceiling light, Rear
w indow defogger switch, Rear w indow wiper m otor (As), turn signal/hazard lights, Fuel lid switch, Left/Right power
Tailgate latch switch, Tailgate lock knob switch, Rear sliding doors, Left/Right sliding door lock actuators, Rear
w indow wiper switch, Power sliding door main switch, blower motor, Cargo area accessory power socket, Rear
Left rear sliding door lock knob switch, Other door lock w indow defogger, Rear window wiper motor, Tailgate
switch signals lock actuator, Power tailgate
Power Tailgate Control Unit
Driver's power tailgate switch, Inner tailgate switch, Power tailgate motor, Closer motor, Power tailgate
Power tailgate outer handle switch, Power tailgate sensor, Power tailgate buzzer, Power tailgate clutch
sensor. Power tailgate pinch sensors, Neutral switch,
Release switch, Latch switch, Half latch switch, Ratchet
switch, Transmission range switch, Power tailgate clutch
HandsFreeLink Control Unit
Remote switches, Microphone input, Bluetooth HandsFreeLink information
communication with cellular phone
B-CAN System Unit Input/Output Index
Gauge Control Module
Dash lights brightness controller, Daytime running lights Dash lights, Fuel gauge, Gauge lights, Indicator, LEDs,
signal, Oil pressure switch, Washer fluid level switch Speedometer, Tachometer, ECT gauge, Warning buzzer,
(Canada models), Parking brake switch, Brake fluid level Odometer/Outside air temperature display, Compass
switch, Fuel gauge sending unit, Select/Reset/ display
Information switch, Cruise control combination switch
(set, cancel, resume, master), VSA OFF switch, A/T park
position, MET INH from PCM, Electrical compass unit
A/C Control Panel/Front Climate Control Uni t
Evaporator temperature sensor, In-car temperature Air mix control motors (Driver's/Passenger's/Rear), Front
sensor, Outside air temperature sensor, Sunlight sensor, power transistor, Mode control motors, Recirculation
Air mix motor position (Driver's, Passenger's, and Rear), motor
Mode motors position, Blower m otor control feedback
Power Seat Control Unit
Back-up light switch, Driving position memory switch, Driver's power seat motors
Memory sensors
Left Power Sliding Door Control Unit
Left power sliding door switch (open/close, main Left power slide motor, Left power sliding door closer
switches), Left power slide motor pulses, Left power motor, Left power sliding door release actuator
sliding door pinch sensor, Left power sliding door
w indow position switch, Latch switch, Half latch switch,
Ratchet switch, Transmission range switch (P), Remote
control switches 1/2/3, Slide motor clutch
Right Power Slidin*1 Door Control Unit
Right power sliding door switch (open/close, main Right power slide motor, Right power sliding door closer
switches), Right power slide motor pulses, Right power motor, Right power sliding door release actuator
sliding door pinch sensor, Right power sliding door
w indow position switch, Latch switch, Half latch switch,
Ratchet switch, Transmission range switch (P), Remote
control switches 1/2/3, Slide motor clutch
Automatic Lighting Control Unit
input signal Output signal/Device
Automatic lighting sensor Headlight relays
Power Mirror Control Unit
M irror switches, M irror position sensors M irror actuator
HDS Inputs and Commands

I nput:
System Menu Data List Data List Indication
Gauge Auto Light Sensor OFF/ON
A/L Sensor Head Light Command OFF/ON
A/L Sensor Warning Light Command 0 V —5 V
Fog Light Switch OFF/ON
Rear Fog Light Switch OFF/ON
Cruise Control Main Switch OFF/ON
Cruise Control Set Switch OFF/ON
Cruise Control Resume Switch OFF/ON
VSA/TCS Off Switch OFF/ON
Gauge Select/Reset Switch OFF/ON
Parking Brake Switch OFF/ON
Brake Fluid Level Switch OFF/ON
Select/Reset Switch OFF/ON
INFO Next Switch OFF/ON
Fuel Sending Unit Input 2
VSA/TCS Active Indicator OFF/ON
VSA/TCS Indicator (Warning) OFF/ON
ABS Indicator OFF/ON
EBD Indicator (Electronic Brake Distribution) OFF/ON
Cruise Control Main Switch Indicator OFF/ON
MIL Indicator OFF/ON
Low Oil Pressure Indicator OFF/ON
Charging System Indicator OFF/ON
Cruise MASTER Switch ON Indicator OFF/ON
Smart Maintenance Required Indicator OFF/ON
High Beam Indicator OFF/ON
Parking Light ON Indicator OFF/ON
Low Fuel Warning Indicator OFF/ON
Security Indicator OFF/ON
Fog Light Indicator OFF/ON
Master Warning Indicator OFF/ON
Automatic-Lighting Indicator OFF/ON
Seat Belt Indicator OFF/ON
Low Tire Pressure Indicator OFF/ON
TPMS Indicator OFF/ON
ECO Indicator OFF/ON
PTG Indicator OFF/ON
Right power sliding door Indicator OFF/ON
Left power sliding door Indicator OFF/ON
Door Open Indicator OFF/ON
Smart Maintenance Change Oil Indicator OFF/ON
Fuel Fill Cap Caution
A/T Indicator OFF/ON
SRS Indicator OFF/ON
Side Airbag Cutoff Indicator OFF/ON
Headlight Command OFF/ON
Headlight High Beam Command OFF/ON
Parking Light Command OFF/ON
HDS Inputs and C o m m a n d s
Input:
Lighting Automatic-Lighting Sensor OFF/ON
Automatic-Lighting Sensor Head Light Command OFF/ON
Automatic-Lighting Sensor Warning Light Command 0 V—5 V
Headlight Switch (OFF) OFF/ON
Headlight Switch (PARKING) OFF/ON
Headlight Switch (HEADLIGHT) OFF/ON
Headlight Switch (AUTO) OFF/ON
Headlight Switch (DIMMER) OFF/ON
Headlight Switch (PASSING) OFF/ON
Turn Signal Switch (LEFT) OFF/ON
Turn Signal Switch (RIGHT) OFF/ON
Fog Light Switch OFF/ON
Rear Fog Light Switch OFF/ON
Driver's Door Switch OFF/ON
Ignition Key Cylinder Light Command OFF/ON
Interior Light Command OFF/ON
Left Turn Signal Command OFF/ON
Right Turn Signal Command OFF/ON
Hazard Signal Command OFF/ON
Headlight Switch (BACK-UP) OFF/ON
Ignition Switch (IG1) OFF/ON
Fog Light Command OFF/ON
Rear Defroster Command OFF/ON
Inner Taillight Command OFF/ON
Door Driver's Door Switch OFF/ON
Front Passenger's Door Switch OFF/ON
Left Side Sliding Door Switch OFF/ON
Right Side Sliding Door Switch OFF/ON
Front Passenger's Door Lock Switch (LOCK) OFF/ON
Front Passenger's Door Lock Switch (UNLOCK) OFF/ON
Front Passenger's Door Lock Knob Switch (UNLOCK) OFF/ON
Left Side Sliding Door Switch (UNLOCK) OFF/ON
Right Side Sliding Door Switch (UNLOCK) OFF/ON
Door LOCK Command OFF/ON
Door UNLOCK Command OFF/ON
Driver's Door UNLOCK Command OFF/ON
Driver's Door Key Cylinder Switch (LOCK) OFF/ON
Driver's Door Key Cylinder Switch (UNLOCK) OFF/ON
Driver's Door Lock Switch (LOCK) OFF/ON
Driver's Door Lock Switch (UNLOCK) OFF/ON
Driver's Door Lock Knob Switch (LOCK) OFF/ON
Driver's Door Lock Knob Switch (UNLOCK) OFF/ON
Left Power Sliding Door Knob Switch (LOCK) OFF/ON
Tailgate Knob Switch (UNLOCK) OFF/ON
Tailgate Switch OFF/ON
Left Power Sliding Door Lock Command OFF/ON
Left Power Sliding Door Unlock Command OFF/ON
(cont'd)

Input;
Keyless Transmitter Driver's Door Switch OFF/ON
Left Power Sliding Door Switch OFF/ON
Right Power Sliding Door Switch OFF/ON
Left Power Sliding Door Switch (UNLOCK) OFF/ON
Right Power Sliding Door Switch (UNLOCK) OFF/ON
Door Lock Command OFF/ON
Door Unlock Command OFF/ON
Driver's Door Unlock Command OFF/ON
Power windows Driver's Door Switch OFF/ON
M oonroof Timer Command OFF/ON
P/W Main Switch OFF/ON
P/W Master Switch (Driver's w indow AUTO) OFF/ON
P/W Master Switch (Driver's w indow UP) OFF/ON
P/W Master Switch (Driver's w indow DOWN) OFF/ON
P/W Master Switch (Front Passenger's W indow UP) OFF/ON
P/W Master Switch (Front Passenger's W indow DOWN) OFF/ON
P/W Master Switch (Left Rear W indow UP) OFF/ON
P/W Master Switch (Left Rear W indow DOWN) OFF/ON
P/W Master Switch (Right Rear W indow UP) OFF/ON
P/W Master Switch (Right Rear W indow DOWN) OFF/ON
Driver's P/W M otor Pulse A NONE, DETECT
Driver's P/W M otor Pulse B NONE, DETECT
Driver's P/W M otor Command OFF, UP, DOWN
Front Passenger's P/W M otor Command OFF, UP, DOWN
Left Rear P/W M otor Command OFF, UP, DOWN
Right Rear P/W M otor Command OFF, UP, DOWN
P/W Relay Command OFF/ON
Input:
Power Seat/Power Power M irror UP Switch OFF/ON
M irror
Power M irror MOVE LEFT Switch OFF/ON
Power M irror DOWN Switch OFF/ON
Power M irror MOVE RIGHT Switch OFF/ON
Power M irror LEFT Switch OFF/ON
Power M irror RIGHT Switch OFF/ON
Slide Switch Forward OFF/ON
Slide Switch Backward OFF/ON
Recline Switch Forward OFF/ON
Recline Switch Backward OFF/ON
Front Up-Down Switch Up OFF/ON
Front Up-Down Switch Down OFF/ON
Rear Up-Down Switch Up OFF/ON
Rear Up-Down Switch Down OFF/ON
Ignition Switch for Power Seat Control OFF/ON
A/T Gear Position Switch (P) OFF/ON
Seat MEMO Switch OFF/ON
Driver 1 Position Switch OFF/ON
Driver 2 Position Switch OFF/ON
Slide Sensor OFF/ON
Front UP-DOWN Sensor OFF/ON
Recline Sensor OFF/ON
Rear UP-DOWN Sensor OFF/ON
Slide Motor Command OFF, FWD, RWD
Recline Motor Command OFF, FWD, RWD
Front Height Motor Command OFF, UP, DOWN
Rear Height Motor Command OFF, UP, DOWN
Power Seat Buzzer Command OFF/ON
Left Power M irror Horizontal Sensor NORMAL/ABNORMAL
Left Power M irror Vertical Sensor NORMAL/ABNORMAL
Right Power M irror Horizontal Sensor NORMAL/ABNORMAL
Right Power M irror Vertical Sensor NORMAL/ABNORMAL
Ignition Switch for Power M irror Control OFF/ON
M irror Left Horizontal M otor Command OFF/UP/DOWN
M irror Left Vertical M otor Command OFF/LEFT/RIGHT
M irror Right Horizontal Motor Command OFF/UP/DOWN
M irror Right Vertical Motor Command OFF/LEFT/RIGHT
Driver 1 Position Indicator OFF/ON
Driver 2 Position Indicator OFF/ON
Seat Memory Position None, Pos1, Pos2
M irror Select Switch LEFT OFF/ON
M irror Select Switch RIGHT OFF/ON
M irror Select Switch CENTER OFF/ON
(cont'd)

Input:
Wipers Windshield Wiper Switch (LOW) OFF/ON
Windshield Wiper Switch (HIGH) OFF/ON
Windshield Wiper Switch (MIST) OFF/ON
Rear Wiper Switch OFF/ON
Windshield Washer Switch OFF/ON
Rear Washer Switch OFF/ON
Intermittent Wiper Dwell Timer OFF/ON
Brake Pedal Position Switch OFF/ON
Windshield Wiper M otor PARK Switch OFF/ON
Windshield Wiper Switch (BACK-UP) OFF/ON
Windshield Wiper M otor HI Command OFF/ON
Windshield Wiper M otor LO Command OFF/ON
Windshield Washer M otor Command OFF/ON
Rear W indow Washer M otor Command OFF/ON
Rear W indow Wiper Command OFF/ON
Security Driver's Door Switch OFF/ON
Left Power Sliding Door Switch OFF/ON
Right Power Sliding Door Switch OFF/ON
Left Power Sliding Door Switch (UNLOCK) OFF/ON
Right Power Sliding Door Switch (UNLOCK) OFF/ON
Radio Switch OFF/ON
Door LOCK Command OFF/ON
Door UNLOCK Command OFF/ON
Driver's Door UNLOCK Command OFF/ON
Hood Switch OFF/ON
Horn Command OFF/ON
Tailgate Switch OFF/ON
Input:
Power Sliding Door Left Power Slide Door Open Switch OFF/ON
Left Power Slide Door Close Switch OFF/ON
Left Remote Control Switch 1 OFF/ON
Left Power Sliding Door Main Switch OFF/ON
Left Power Sliding Door Half Latch Switch OFF/ON
Left Power Sliding Door Full Latch Switch OFF/ON
Left Power Sliding Door Ratchet Switch OFF/ON
Left Power Sliding Door Main Position Switch OFF/ON
Left Power Sliding Door Window Switch OFF/ON
Left Power Sliding Door Pulser Sensor 1 NONE/DETECT
Left Power Sliding Door Pulser Sensor 2 NONE/DETECT
Left Power Sliding Door Touch Sensor OFF/ON
Left Power Slide Motor Command STOP/OPEN/CLOSE
Left Power Slide Motor Magnetic Clutch Command OFF/ON
Left Power Sliding Door Release Actuator Command STOP/RELEASE
Left Power Sliding Door Closer Motor Command STOP/FORWARD/BACKWARD
Right Power Sliding Door Open Switch OFF/ON
Right Power Sliding Door Close Switch OFF/ON
Right Remote Control Switch 1 OFF/ON
Transmission Range Switch P Position OFF/ON
Right Power Sliding Door Main Switch OFF/ON
Right Power Sliding Door Half Latch Switch OFF/ON
Right Power Sliding Door Full Latch Switch OFF/ON
Right Power Sliding Door Ratchet Switch OFF/ON
Right Power Sliding Door Main Position Switch OFF/ON
Ignition 1 Switch OFF/ON
Right Power Sliding Door Window Switch OFF/ON
Right Power Sliding Door Pulser Sensor 1 NONE/DETECT
Right Power Sliding Door Pulser Sensor 2 NONE/DETECT
Right Power Sliding Door Touch Sensor OFF/ON
Right Power Slide Motor Command STOP/OPEN/CLOSE
Right Power Slide Motor Magnetic Clutch Command OFF/ON
Right Power Sliding Door Release Actuator Command STOP/RELEASE
Right Power Sliding Door Closer Motor Command STOP/FORWARD/BACKWARD
Right Power Sliding Door Warning Buzzer Command OFF/ON
Fuel Fill Door Switch OFF/ON
(cont'd)

I nput:
Power Tailgate Power Tailgate Switch OFF/ON
Power Tailgate Outer Handle Switch Open OFF/ON
Power Tailgate Switch Close OFF/ON
AT Gear Position Switch (P) OFF/ON
Power Tailgate Latch Gear Position Switch neutral OFF/ON
Power Tailgate Latch Gear Position Switch release OFF/ON
Power Tailgate Lock Switch Full Latch OFF/ON
Power Tailgate Lock Switch Ratchet OFF/ON
Power Tailgate Lock Switch Half Latch OFF/ON
Power Tailgate Drive Motor Pulse A NONE/DETECT
Power Tailgate Drive Motor Pulse B NONE/DETECT
Right Side Touch Sensor Signal NONE/DETECT
Left Side Touch Sensor Signal NONE/DETECT
Power Tailgate Drive Motor Command OFF, OPEN, CLOSE
Power Tailgate Drive Clutch Command OFF/ON
Power Tailgate Release Latch Motor Command OFF, RELEASE, CLOSE
Warning Chime Command OFF/ON
Output:
System Data List Data List Indication Operation Time
Menu
Gauges Self-Diagnostic Test
Lighting Turns Ignition Key Cylinder Light Ignition Key Cylinder Light Illuminates for 30 sec.
On/Off Command
Turns Interior Light On/Off Interior Light Command Illuminates for 30 sec.
Turns Left Turn Signal Lights On/Off Left Turn Signal Command Blinks for 5 sec.
Turns Right Turn Signal Lights Right Turn Signal Command Blinks for 5 sec.
On/Off
Turns Headlight On/Off Headlight Command Operates for 15 sec.
Turns Headlight High Beam On/Off Headlight High Beam Command Operates for 15 sec.
Turns Parking Lights On/Off Parking Light Command Operates for 15 sec.
Turns Front Fog Lights On/Off Front Fog Light Operates for 15 sec.
Turns Daytime Running Lights Daytime Running Light Signal Operates for 15 sec.
On/Off (Canada models)
Turns Automatic Headlights On/Off Automatic Lighting Headlight Operates for 15 sec.
Turns Cargo Area Lights On/Off Cargo Area Light Illuminates for 30 sec.
Power Runs Driver's Window Up Driver's Window Up Drives for 3 sec.
Windows
Runs Driver's Window Down Driver's Window Down Drives for 3 sec.
Runs Front Passenger's Window Up Front Passenger's Window Up Drives for 3 sec.
Runs Front Passenger's Window Front Passenger's Window Down Drives for 3 sec.
Down
Runs Left Rear Window Up Left Rear Window Up Drives for 3 sec.
Runs Left Rear Window Down Left Rear Window Down Drives for 3 sec.
Runs Right Rear Window Up Right Rear Window Up Drives for 3 sec.
Runs Right Rear Window Down Right Rear Window Down Drives for 3 sec.
Turns Power Window Relay On/Off Power Window Relay Drives for 3 sec.
Wiper Turns Wiper Low Speed On/Off Windshield Wiper Motor Low Operates for 5 sec.
Command
Turns Wiper High Speed On/Off Windshield Wiper Motor High Operates for 5 sec.
Command
Turns Windshield Washer On/Off Windshield Washer Command Operates for 5 sec.
Turns Rear Window Washer On/Off Rear Window Washer Motor Operates for 5 sec.
Command
Turns Rear Window Wiper On/Off Rear Wiper Motor Operates for 5 sec.
Security Turn Horns On/Off Horn Command Operates horn for
1 sec.

Output:
System Data List Data List Indication Operation Time
Menu
Power Seat Turns Power Seat Indicator On/Off Memory Seat Indicator 1 Illuminates for 3 sec.
Memory Seat Indicator 2 Illuminates for 3 sec.
Runs Power Seat Motors Power Seat: Slide Motor-Full
Forward
Power Seat: Slide Motor-Full
Backward
Power Seat: Front UP-DOWN
Motor-Full Up
Motor-Full Down
Power Seat: Rear UP-DOWN
Motor-Full Up
Motor-Full Down
Power Seat: Recline Motor-Full
Forward
Power Seat: Recline Motor-Full
Backward
Power Seat: Memory Buzzer-5 Drives for 5 sec.
seconds
Power Operates Left Power Sliding Door Power Sliding Door Motor: Open Drives for 2 sec.
Sliding Door (2 sec.)
Power Sliding Door Motor: Close Drives for 2 sec.
(2 sec.)
Magnet Clutch (2 sec.) Drives for 2 sec.
Release Actuator (1.3 sec.) Drives for 1.3 sec.
Closer Motor
Buzzer
Operates Right Power Sliding Door Power Slide Door Motor: Open Drives for 2 sec.
(2 sec.)
Power Slide Door Motor: Close Drives for 2 sec.
(2 sec.)
Magnet Clutch (2 sec.) Drives for 2 sec.
Release Actuator (1.3 sec.) Drives for 1.3 sec.
Closer Motor
Buzzer
Door Outputs LOCK Signal 1 Time To All Lock All Doors 0.6 sec.
Doors
Outputs LOCK Signal 1 Time To All Unlock All 0.6 sec.
Doors
Outputs UNLOCK Signal 1 Time To Unlock Driver's Side Door 0.6 sec.
Driver’s Door
Runs Left Sliding Door Lock Left Sliding Door Lock Lock signal 1 time
Actuator Left Sliding Door Unlock Unlock signal 1 time
Power Runs Power Tailgate Motor Full Open Position
Tailgate Full Close Position
Operates Power Tailgate Operates On For 1 sec. Operates for 1 sec.
Electromagnetic Clutch
Runs Power Tailgate Release Open
Actuator Close
A/C Turn Rear Window Defogger Relay Rear Defogger Operates a relay for
On/Off 60 sec.
Troubleshooting - B-CAN System Diagnosis Test Mode A
Check the PCM for DTCs and troubleshoot PCM or 2. Connect the Honda Diagnosis System (HDS), then
F-CAN loss of communication errors first (see page turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
11 -3), then do this diagnosis first if the symptom is
3. From the BODY ELECTRICAL SYSTEM SELECTION
related to the B-CAN system.
MENU, select UNIT INFORMATION, and then select
1. Compare the system with this list of B-CAN related CONNECTED UNIT listed to see ifthe following
systems: control units are communicating with the HDS.
• Gauge control module • MICU
• Exterior lights • Door multiplex control unit (HDS name: Power
• Turn signals window unit)
• Entry light control • Gauge control module
• Interior lights • Combination switch control unit
• Safety indicators • Relay control module (HDS name: Relay unit)
• Rear window defogger • MICU-rear junction box (HDS name: Rear junction
• Horns (security and panic) unit)
• Chimes (key, seat belt, lights-on, and parking brake) • Power seat control unit
• Power windows • Power tailgate control unit
• Power window/moon roof timer • Left power sliding door control unit
• Wiper/washer • Right power sliding door control unit
• Security • A/C control panel/Front climate control unit (HDS
name: Climate control unit/HVAC control unit)
• Keyless entry
• Automatic lighting control unit
• Power door locks
• Climate control
• Key interlock NOTE:
• Dash light brightness • If one or more of the units are communicating with
• Driving position memory the HDS, DETECT will be displayed.
• Power tailgate • Ifthe unit is not communicating or the vehicle is not
• Power sliding doors equipped, "Not Available" is displayed.
• The HDS only checks the connected units status
• Compass
one time when BODY ELECTRICAL is selected. To
recheck the status after repair, reboot the HDS and
Is th e s y m p to m r e la te d to th e B - C A N s y s te m ? repeat step 3.
YES-Go to step 2. A r e a ll c o n tro l u n its c o m m u n ic a tin g w ith th e H D S ?
NO-Go to the system troubleshooting for the system YES-Go to step 4.

with the symptom.■
NO-lf any of the control units are not communicating,
go to B-CAN System Diagnosis Test Mode B (see
page 22-157). If all units are not communicating or
only the MICU is communicating, go to DTC B1000
troubleshooting (see page 22-167).■
Troubleshooting - B-CAN System Diagnosis Test Mode A (cont'd)
4. Select the system that has the problem from the 5. Record all DTCs, and sort them by DTC type.
BODY ELECTRICAL SYSTEM SELECTION MENU,
6. Troubleshoot the DTC(s) in this order:
then select DTCs.
• Battery voltage DTCs.
A r e a n y D T C s in d ic a t e d ? • Internal error DTCs.
YES-Go to step 5. • Loss of communication DTCs. Begin
troubleshooting with the lowest number first
NO-lf the problem is related to one of the following (Example: if DTCs B1006 and B1058 are retrieved,
items, and the system that is malfunctioning does not begin by troubleshooting B1006).
stop or turn off, go to B-CAN System Diagnosis Test
• Signal error DTCs.
Mode C (see page 22-157). If the problem is related to
one of the following items and the system that is
malfunctioning does not work or turn on, go to B-CAN
System Diagnosis Test Mode D (see page 22-158).
• Exterior lights
• Turn signals
• Entry light control
• Interior lights
• Horns (security and panic)
• Power windows
• Wiper/washer
• Power tailgate
• Power sliding door
• Compass
If the problem is related to one of the following items,
go to the troubleshooting for that individual
system .!
• Gauge control module
• Safety indicators
• Chimes (key, seat belt and lights-on)
• Rear window defogger (climate control)
• Security
• Keyless entry
• Climate control
• Key interlock
• Dash light brightness
• Audio system
• Navigation system (if equipped)
• Driving position memory
• Power tailgate
• Power sliding door
• Compass
• HandsFreeLink
Troubleshooting - B-CAN System Troubleshooting - B-CAN System
Diagnosis Test Mode B DiagnosisTest Mode C
Do this diagnosis if any of the control units are not Do this diagnosis if a component that is controlled by the
communicating (Not Available is displayed in the HDS) B-CAN system does not stop or turn off.
as found by the B-CAN System Diagnosis Test Mode A
NOTE:
(see page 22-155).
• If the component does not turn on, go to B-CAN
1. Using the HDS, select the system that has the System Diagnosis Test Mode D (see page 22-158).
symptom from the BODY ELECTRICAL SYSTEM • See the B-CAN system unit input/output index for a list
SELECTION MENU. of input and output devices and the control units that
2. Select DTCs, and then check for loss of monitor the input and control the output devices (see
communication DTCs (use the DTC Troubleshooting page 22-144).
Index to find the DTC type) (see page 22-125). 1. Checkfor DTCs by selecting the MODE MENU from
A r e a n y lo s s o f c o m m u n ic a tio n D T C s in d ic a te d ? the HDS.
YES-Go to step 3. Are any D T C s in d ic a t e d ?
NO-Replace the MICU (see page 22-110).■ YES-Go to B-CAN System Diagnosis Test Mode A
(see page 22-155).■
3. Do the input test for the unit(s) not communicating
with the HDS. NO-Go to step 2.
NOTE: Troubleshoot MICU-rear junction box loss of 2. Turn off the switch that controls the malfunctioning
communication DTCs before troubleshooting the component.
left/right power sliding door control unit, the power 3. Select DATA LIST from the MODE MENU, and check
tailgate control unit, and the power seat control unit the input of the switch that controls the component.
DTCs.
D o e s th e H D S in d ic a te th e s w itc h is O F F ?
__________ Unit not communicating__________
MICU (see page 22-185) ________ YES-Go to step 4.
Poor multiplex control unit (see page 22-190) NO-Go to step 6.
Gauge control module (see page 22-189)_______
Relay control module (see page 22-192)________ 4. In the DATA LIST, check the output signal of the
Combination switch control unit (see page malfunctioning component.
22-191)______________
Is th e o u tp u t s ig n a l O F F ?
Power seat control unit (see page 22-510)______
MICU-rear junction box (see page 22-193)______ YES-Go to step 5.
Power tailgate control unit (see page 22-644)
Left power sliding door control unit (see page NO-Replace the control unit that controls the device
22-598)________________________________ __ that will not turn OFF (see page 22-144) ■
Right power sliding door control unit (see page
22-600) ___________
A/C control panel (see page 21-17)____________
Front climate control unit (see page 21-125)
Automatic lighting control unit (see page 22-260)
HandsFreeLink control unit (see page 23-389)
Troubleshooting - B-CAN System Troubleshooting - B-CAN System
Diagnosis Test Mode C (cont'd) Diagnosis Test Mode D
5. Test the relay that controls the device that does not Do this diagnosis if a component that is controlled by the
stop orturn off, if applicable. Ifthe relay tests OK, then B-CAN system does not work or come on.
check for a short in the wire between the relay and the
NOTE:
component, the relay and control unit, or the
• If the component does not turn off or stop, go to
component and control unit.
B-CAN System Diagnosis Test Mode C (see page
A r e th e r e la y a n d th e w ire h a r n e s s O K ? 22-157).
• See the B-CAN system unit input/output index for a list
YES-Replace the control unit that controls the
of input and output devices and the control units that
component that will not stop or turn OFF.B
monitor the input and control the output devices (see
NO-Replace the relay, or repair/replace the wire page 22-144).
harness.!!
1. Check the fuse of the malfunctioning output device.
6. Test the switch, then check for a short in the wire
between the switch and the control unit that monitors
the switch. YES-Go to step 2.
A r e th e s w itc h a n d w ir e h a r n e s s O K ? NO-Replace the fuse and recheck.B
YES-Replace the control unit that monitors the 2. Checkfor DTCs by selecting the MODE MENU from
switch.■ the HDS.
NO-Replace the switch or repair/replace the wire A r e a n y D T C s in d ic a t e d ?
harness.■
YES-Go to B-CAN System Diagnosis Test Mode A
(see page 22-155).■
NO-Go to step 3.
3. Turn ON the switch that controls the malfunctioning
component.
4. Select DATA LIST from the MODE MENU, and check
output signal for the malfunctioning component.
Is th e r e a n o u tp u t s ig n a l?
YES-Go to step 5.
NO-Go to step 9.
5. Test the relay and ground that controls the device that 9. Select DATA LIST from the MODE MENU, and make
does not work, if applicable. Ifthe relay and ground sure the switch signal input for the malfunctioning
test OK, then check for an open or a short in the circuit system indicates a change when operated.
for the malfunctioning component.
D o e s th e s w itc h in p u t in d ic a te O N w h e n th e s w itc h is
A r e th e r e la y a n d c irc u it O K ? ON?
YES-Go to step 6. YES-Replace the control unit that controls the
malfunctioning component.B
NO-Replace the relay or repair the wire circuit.!
NO-Go to step 10.
6. Do the function test for the malfunctioning
component. 10. Test the switch and its ground (if applicable), then
check for an open or a short in the wire between the
D o e s th e o u tp u t d e v ic e p a s s th e fu n c tio n te s t? switch and the control unit that monitors it.
YES-Go to step 7. Is th e s w itc h a n d th e w ir e h a r n e s s O K ?
NO-Replace the component.® YES-Replace the control unit that monitors the
7. With the malfunctioning output device connected, switch. B
connect a voltmeter between the malfunctioning NO-Replace the switch, or repair/replace the wire
output device input and the body ground on the wire
harness.B
that the control unit uses to control the output device
circuit.
8. Select MISC. TEST from the MODE MENU, and do the
forced operation test of the malfunctioning
component.
Is th e r e a c h a n g e in v o lta g e ( 1 2 V t o O V o r O V t o 1 2 V ) ?
YES-lnspect the ground for the component. If ok,
replace the component.B
NO-Replace the control unit that controls the
malfunctioning component.B
Troubleshooting - B-CAN System Diagnosis Test Mode 1 and Test Mode 2
(without the HDS)
Special Tools Required 6. Checkfor B-CAN DTCs indicated by the gauge control
MPCS (MCIC) Service Connector 07WAZ-001010A module odometer/trip meter display or the
multi-information display while still in Test Mode 1.
Test Mode 1 Push the trip meter select/reset knob to display the
next code. After you get to the last code, the display
Check the PCM for DTCs and troubleshoot PCM or shows END, if no DTCs are stored, the display will
F-CAN loss of communication errors first (see page read No (see page 22-124).
11-3), then do this diagnosis ifthe HDS is not available.
NOTE: If the test times out, remove the MPCS service
1. Check the No. 7 (7.5 A) fuse and No. 21 (7.5 A) fuse in connector, turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), and
the driver's under-dash fuse/relay box. repeat steps 3 and 4.
A r e th e fu s e s O K ? A r e a n y D T C s in d ic a te d ?
NO-Find and repair the cause of the blown fuse.ll NO-Go to step 11.
2. Remove the left kick panel (see page 20-101). 7. Record all DTCs and sort them into these categories:
3. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II), and move the • Battery voltage DTCs
interior lights switch to the middle (door) position.
• Internal error DTCs
4. Connect the MPCS service connector (A) to the MCIC • Loss of communication DTCs (begin with the lowest
socket (B) in the driver's under-dash fuse/relay box. number first; for example, if B1006 and B1059 are
retrieved, troubleshoot B1006 first)
• Signal error DTCs
8. Troubleshoot the DTCs in the order listed above.
9. Clear the DTCs by pressing and holding the
SELECT/RESET knob for about 13 seconds.
10. You will hear a beep to confirm the codes have been
cleared. Operate the devices that failed, and recheck
for codes.
Test Mode 2
11. Remove the MPCS service connector from the
driver's under-dash fuse/relay box socket for
5 —10 seconds, then re-insert it to enter Mode 2. When
the system enters Mode 2, the front and rear map
lights will flash two times quickly.
5. Wait 5 seconds, and watch the map lights. When the
front and rear map lights flash quickly once, and a NOTE: If the MPCS service connector is disconnected
double beep is heard, the system is in Test Mode 1. for too short or too long of a time, or the ignition
switch is turned OFF, the system will return to Test
Mode 1.
12. The following tables list the circuits that can be POWER WINDOW MASTER SWITCH (DOOR
checked in Test Mode 2. Operate the switch that is MULTIPLEX CONTROL UNIT)
most closely related to the problem. Ifthe circuit is
OK, the map lights will blink once. If the circuit is ___________________ Item___________________
faulty, there will be no indication. Power window master switch
(Driver's window UP)_______________________
MICU Power window master switch
(Driver's w i ndow DOWN)____________________
____________________ Item____________________ Power window master switch
Driver's door switch (OPEN)__________________ (Driver's window AUTO UP)__________________
Front passenger's door switch (OPEN)_________ Power window master switch
Left rear door switch (OPEN)__________________ (Driver's window AUTO DOWN)______________
Right rear door switch (OPEN)________________ Power window master switch
Ignition key switch (inserted)_________________ (Front passenger's window UP)_______ ________
Front passenger's door lock knob switch Power window master switch
(UNLOCK)*________________________________ (Front passenger's window DOWN)____________
Left sliding door lock knob switch (UNLOCK)* Power window master switch
Right sliding door lock knob switch (UNLOCK)* (Left rear window UP) __________________
Audio security ground (disconnected)__________ Power window master switch
Driver's seat belt switch (unbuckled)___________ (Left rear window DOWN)____________________
Brake pedal position switch Power window master switch
(ON; brake pedal pressed)____________________ (Right rear window UP)______________________
Power window master switch
* The front passenger's and sliding door lock knob (Right rear window DOWN)__________________
switches must be in the locked position when
Driver's door key cylinder switch* (LOCK)_______
beginning the test.
Driver's door key cylinder switch* (UNLOCK)
RELAY CONTROL MODULE Driver's door lock switch (LOCK)______________
Driver's door lock switch (UNLOCK)___________
____________________ Item____________________
Driver's door lock knob switch (LOCK)__________
Windshield wiper switch (AUTO STOP/PARK)
Driver's door lock knob switch (UNLOCK)_______
Hood switch (open)_________________________
Driver's position memory switches (1,2, memo)
A/C pressure switch/thermal protector (A/C ON)
Passenger's power window switch____________
COMBINATION SWITCH CONTROL UNIT Passenger's power window switch (UP)________
Passenger's power window switch (DOWN)_____
____________________ Item____________________
Turn signal switch (LEFT)____________________ * A second key is necessary to check the key cylinder
Turn signal switch (RIGHT)___________________ inputs.
Combination light switch (ON; each position) Be sure to rotate the key cylinder switch two times
to each position (lock and lock, unlock and unlock)
Dimmer switch (ON)________________________ to ensure the door lock knob switch is in the
Passing switch (ON)_________ appropriate position.
Windshield wiper switch (ON)________________
Intermittent wiper dwell timer________________ GAUGE CONTROL MODULE
Windshield washer switch (ON)_______________ ___________________ Item___________________
Parking brake switch (ON; parking brake applied)
Cruise control main SET/RESUME/CANCEL
switch (ON; switch pressed)__________________
Transmission range switch (P, R, N, D)_________
Washer fluid level switch (fluid removed)
(Canada models)___________________________
Brake fluid level switch (fluid removed)_________
MID switches (Select/Reset, <INFO, INFO>)
T r o u b le s h o o tin g - B -C A N S y s t e m D ia g n o s is T e s t M o d e 1 a n d T e s t M o d e 2
( w i t h o u t t h e H D S ) ( c o n t 'd )
POWER SEAT CONTROL UNIT___________

___________________ Item___________
Power seat slide switch (Forward, Backward)
Power seat front up-down switch (UP, Down)
Power seat rear up-down switch (UP, Down)
Power seat recline switch (Forward, Recline)
POWER MIRROR CONTROL UNIT _____________

___________________ Item ________________
Mirror select switch (LEFT, Center, RIGHT)______
“Mirror switch (LEFT, RIGHT, UP, DOWN)
MICU-REAR JUNCTION BOX_______________ _

_________ Item___________________
Tailgate latch switch (Open)__________________
Tailgate lock knob switch (UNLOCK)___________
Fuel fill door switch (Open)___________________
Left sliding door lock knob switch (UNLOCK)

___________________ Item __________________
Driver's power tailgate switch (Open/Close)_____
Power tailgate inner switch (Close)____________
Power tailgate outer handle switch (Open)
LEFT POWER SLIDING POOR CONTROL UNIT

___________________ Item___________________
Left sliding door switch (Open) _____________
Left sliding door switch (Close)
RIGHT POWER SLIPING POOR CONTROL UNIT

___________________ Item___________________
Right sliding door switch (Open)_______________
Right sliding door switch (Close)
D o th e m a p lig h ts in d ic a te p r o p e r s w itc h o p e r a tio n ?
YES-Go to function and input test for the system
related to the failure.■
NO-Repair the open, short, or replace the faulty
switch.■
Gauge Control Module DTC Display
How to display DTCs on the gauge control module

While in Test Mode 1, the DTCs which have been detected and stored individually by various B-CAN (Body-controller
Area Network) units, will be shown one by one on the multi-information display when the communication between the
Multiplex Integrated Control Unit (MICU) and the gauge control module are normal. To scroll through the DTCs, press
the select/reset knob on the gauge control module.
DTC detected (the lower four digits is

a decimal number representing the DTC.)
■B B & l No DTCs detected
All DTCs have been displayed
The unit that has been stored the code can be identified by the number shown on the multi-information display.
Control Unit Control Unit

I.D. Number
MICU 10
Relay control module 11
MICU-rear junction box 12
Door multiplex control unit 30
Power tailgate control unit 31
Left power sliding door control unit 33
Right power sliding door control unit 34
Gauge control module 50
A/C control panel/Front climate control 51
unit
Combination switch control unit 70
Automatic lighting control unit 72
HandsFreeLink control unit 94
Power seat control unit 95
How to clear the DTC

While in Test Mode 1, press and hold down the SELECT/RESET knob for at least 13 seconds.
Circuit Diagram
UNDER-HOOD DRIVER'S
FUSE/RELAY BOX UNDER-DASH DRIVER'S UNDER-DASH FUSE/RELAY BOX
FUSE/RELAY IG NITION SW ITCH
BATTERY BOX No. 21 (7.5 A)
A2 BLK/YEL ■ -----cr \ j D ----
A5 No. 32 (10 A)
W HT/RED - — < r\j> —
IG1 HOT in ON (II) and START (III)
ACC HOT in ACC (I) and O N (II)
B4 No. 7 (7.5 A)
---- crvx)----
D6
D11
K10 X 18 X27 IN 2 8 X34 X35
No. 3 0 (1 0 A)
FUSE
YEL WHT/RED
(DRIVER'S
UND ER -DASH FRONT
FUSE/RELAY PASSENGER'S
BOX UNDER-DASH
FUSE/RELAY
V BOX
BLK/YEL YEL LT GRN W HT/RED YEL LT GRN
WIPER/WASHER
1 7 14 SWITCH
POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT/

CONTROLLER AREA NETW ORK CONTROLLER
AUTO M ATIC
LIGHTING CO M B IN ATION SW ITCH
CONTROL CONTROL U N IT F-CAN
U N IT * 1 MU LTI-INFO RM ATIO N TRANSCEIVER
DISPLAY
p w H
A20 A21 A24
I A23
I
I
BLK BLK BLK BLK RED WHT
• PCM
■ V SA M O DU LATO R-
CONTROL U N IT
■ ENGINE M O U N T
CONTROL U N IT
-LL XL -9 r _Q_ -O' _LL • TPM S CONTROL U N IT
• SRS U N IT
G202 G501 G501 G601 G502 G502 • DATA LINK CONNECTOR
(DLC)
*1: Touring model
*2: W ith pow er tailgate
- : CAN line
* - : Other com m unication line
DRIVER'S UNDER-DASH FUSE/RELAY BOX
*<§)
G3 F1 G1
W HT/RED YEL GRN RED
A6 A12 A14 MICU-REAR JU NCTIO N BOX
MICU-REAR JUNCTIO N BOX

CONTROL U N IT
SG
D3 D9 G2 G4
W HT/RED YEL GRN/RED
W HT/RED YEL GRN/RED W HT/RED YEL GRN RED
W HT/RED YEL GRN/RED WHT/RED GRN/RED

I I
A37 A35 A40 A11 C14 JC7
1^1
VBU IG1 B-CAN VBU IG1
UART
RIGHT POWER LEFT POWER
POWER SEAT POWER TAILGATE
SLIDING DOOR SLIDING DOOR
CONTROL U N IT * 1 CONTROL U N IT * 2
CONTROL U N IT CONTROL U N IT
SG PG1 SG PG1
A9 A21 C1 C4 A21 C4 B19 A1 A4
V
POWER
MIRROR BRN BRN BRN BLK BRN BLK BLK BRN BLK BLK BRN BLK BLK BLK
CONTROL
UNIT
i_ -LL _LL XL _Q_ _Q_ _£l Xl _Cl Xl XL Xl . Xl Xl

G602 G602 G602 G653 G653 G653 G603 G603 G603 G702 G702 G702 G652 G652
INTERIOR
LIGHTS : Front clim ate control unit
: B-CAN line
: Other comm unication line
YEL
DRIVER'S UNDER-DASH FUSE/RELAY BOX W4
IG NITION
KEY LIGHT
K-LINE
M3
1N22 J9 *J4 P9 H9 E9
I
I i MULTIPLEX
1 i I CONTROL
W HT/RED YEL/RED LT BLU LT BLU W HT/RED YEL GRN/RED BLU BLK BLK INSPECTION
I CONNECTOR
S I (MCIC)
FRONT
I
PASSENGER'S
I
UNDER-DASH I
FUSE/RELAY I
BOX I
D16 I
I
YEL/RED I
1
i 7*
15 16 i 18 1 A10 20 1 16
FRONT CLIMATE
POWER W IN D O W
CONTROL
HANDSFREELINK MASTER SWITCH
U N IT or
CONTROL UNIT (DOOR MULTIPLEX
A/C CONTROL
CONTROL UNIT)
PANEL
A1
30*
V
• DLC
• ACM U N IT
• TPM S CONTROL
UNIT
• V SA M ODULATOR-
CONTROL UNIT
• SRS U N IT
BLK BLK BLK BLK BLK
-CL _CL -£l _Q _
G504 G 504 G601 G601 G401

DTC Troubleshooting
DTC B1000: Communication Bus Line Error 6. Disconnect the appropriate connector one at a time
from its control unit according to the table. Clear the
(BUS OFF)
DTC, then recheck for DTCs with the connector
NOTE: If you are troubleshooting multiple DTCs, be sure disconnected. After checking for DTCs, reconnect the
to follow the instructions in B-CAN System Diagnosis connector and move to the next control unit listed in
Test Mode A (see page 22-155). the table.
1. Clear the DTCs with the HDS. Control Unit Connector

Gauge Control Connector A (SOP)
2. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), and then back to Module
ON (II). Relay Control Module Under-hood fuse/relay
3. Wait for at least 6 seconds. box connector K (10P)
Door Multiplex Power window master
4. Check for DTCs with the HDS. Control Unit switch connector (23P)
Combination Switch Connector (8P)
Is D T C B 1 0 0 0 in d ic a te d ? Control Unit
YES-Go to step 5. Automatic Lighting Connector (14P)
Control Unit
NO-lntermittent failure. The communication bus line MICU-Rear Junction Connector A (14P)
is OK at this time. Check for loose or poor Box
connections, or worn/shorted wires. Ifthe A/C Control Panel Connector (22P)
connections are good, check the battery condition Front Climate Control Connector (30P)
(see page 22-111) and the charging system.® Unit
HandsFreeLink Connector (28P)
5. Check for DTCs with the HDS. Control Unit
A re D T C s B 1 0 0 5 , B 1 0 0 6 , B 1 0 0 7 , B 1 0 0 8 , a n d B 1 0 1 2 Is D T C B 1 0 0 0 in d ic a t e d w ith e a c h in d iv id u a l u n it
in d ic a te d ? d is c o n n e c te d ?

NO-Replace the MICU.B NO-Replace the control unit that was disconnected
when B1000 did not reset. (Ifthe unit is the MICU-rear
junction box control unit, go to step 7.)B
7. Disconnect connector D (17P) and connector G (8P)
from the MICU-rear junction box.
8. Check for continuity between each of the MICU-rear
junction box terminals listed in the table and body
ground.
Connected control un it MICU-rear

junction box
term inal
Power Seat Control Unit D8
Right Power Sliding Door D9
Control Unit
Left Power Sliding Door G4
Control Unit/Power Tailgate
Control Unit
YES-Repair a short to ground in the wire between the
MICU-rear junction box and the affected control
u n it.il
(cont'd)
9. Measure the voltage between each of the MICU-rear 12. Check for continuity between each of the driver's
junction box terminals listed in the table and body under-dash fuse/relay box terminals listed in the table
ground. and body ground.
Connected control unit MICU-Rear Connected Control Unit Driver's under-dash

junction box fuse/relay box
terminal terminal
Power Seat Control Unit D8 Gauge Control Module N28
Right Power Sliding Door D9 Relay Control Module D11
Control Unit Door Multiplex Control J4
Left Power Sliding Door G4 Unit
Control Unit/Power Tailgate Combination Switch X27
Control Unit Control Unit
Is th e r e le s s th a n 0 .2 V ? Automatic Lighting X18
Control Unit
YES-Replace the MICU-rear junction box.® MICU-Rear Junction G1
Box
NO-Repair an open in the wire between the A/C Control Panel/Front N22
MICU-rear junction box and the connected control CHmate Control
units.® Unit/HandsFreeLink
Control Unit
10. Disconnect all of the appropriate connectors for each
of the units in the table. Is th e r e c o n tin u ity ?
Control Unit Connector YES-Repair a short to ground in the wire between the
Gauge Control Connector A (30P) driver's under-dash fuse/relay box and the affected
Module control unit.®
Relay Control Module Under-hood fuse/relay NO-Go to step 13.
box connector K (10P)
Door Multiplex Power window master 13. Measure the voltage between each of the driver's
Control Unit switch connector (23P) under-dash fuse/relay box terminals listed in the table
Combination Switch Connector (8P) and body ground.
Control Unit
Automatic Lighting Connector (14P) Connected Control Unit Driver's under-dash
Control Unit fuse/relay box
MICU-Rear Junction Connector A (14P) terminal
Box Gauge Control Module N28
A/C Control Panel Connector (22P) Relay Control Module D11
Front Climate Control Connector (30P) Door Multiplex Control J4
Unit Unit
HandsFreeLink Connector (28P) Combination Switch X27
control unit Control Unit
11. Disconnect driver's under-dash fuse/relay box Automatic Lighting X18
Control Unit
connectors D(17P), G (6P), J ..(21P), N (45P), X (39P),
and P (30P). MICU-Rear Junction G1
Box
A/C Control Panel/Front N22
Climate Control
Unit/HandsFreeLink
Control Unit
Is th e r e le s s th a n 0 .2 V ?
YES-Replace the driver's under-dash fuse/relay box
(see page 22-110).®
DTC B1050: Communication Bus Line Error DTC B1100: Communication Bus Line Error
(BUS OFF) (BUS OFF)
ON (II). ON (II).

Is D T C B 1 0 5 0 in d ic a te d ? Is D T C B 1 1 0 0 in d ic a t e d ?
NO-lntermittent failure, the system is OK at this time. NO-lntermittent failure, the system is OK at this time.
Check for loose or poor connections at under-hood Check for loose or poor connections at the door
fuse/relay box connector K (10P), and at driver's multiplex control unit connector (23P), and at driver's
under-dash fuse/relay box connector D (17P).B under-dash fuse/relay box connector J (21P).B
Is D T C B 1 0 0 0 a ls o in d ic a te d ? Is D T C B 1 0 0 0 a ls o in d ic a t e d ?
YES-Troubleshoot DTC B1000 (see page 22-167).B YES-Troubleshoot DTC B1000 (see page 22-167).B
NO-lf only B1050 is indicated, replace the relay NO-lf only B1100 is indicated, replace the door
control module (see page 22-105).B multiplex control unit (see page 22-314).B
(BUS OFF) (BUS OFF)
1. Clearthe DTCs with the HDS. 1. Clear the DTCs with the HDS.
ON (II). ON (II).
Is D T C B 1 1 5 0 in d ic a t e d ? Is D T C B 1 2 0 0 in d ic a te d ?
Check for loose or poor connections at gauge control Check for loose or poor connections at the A/C control
module connector A (30P), and at driver's under-dash panel connector (22P) or front climate control unit
fuse/relay box connector N (45P).ll connector (30P), and at driver's under-dash fuse/relay
box connector N (45P).B
Is D T C B 1 0 0 0 a ls o in d ic a t e d ?
Is D T C B 1 0 0 0 a ls o in d ic a te d ?
YES-Troubleshoot DTC B1000 (see page 22-167).B
NO-lf only B1150 is indicated, replace the gauge
control module (see page 22-371 ) . ■ NO-lf only B1200 is indicated, replace the front
climate control unit (see page 21-188) or A/C control
panel (see page 21-71 ) . ■
(BUS OFF) (BUS OFF)
ON (II). ON (II).
Check for loose or poor connections at the Check for loose or poor connections at power tailgate
combination switch control unit connector (8P), and at control unit connector C (14P), at MICU-rear junction
driver's under-dash fuse/relay box connector X box connector A (14P) and G (8P), and at driver's
(39P).H under-dash fuse/relay box connector G (6 P ).I
Is D T C B 1 0 0 0 a ls o in d ic a te d ? Is D T C B 1 0 0 0 a ls o in d ic a te d ?
YES-Troubleshoot DTC B1000 (see page 22-167).■ YES-Troubleshoot DTC B1000 (see page 22-167).IH
NO-lf only B1250 is indicated, replace the NO-lf only B1350 is indicated, replace the power
combination switch control unit (see page 22-332).! tailgate control u n it.l
DTC B15S0: Communication Bus Line Error DTC B1750: Communication Bus Line Error
(BUS OFF) (BUS OFF)
ON (II). ON (II).
Check for loose or poor connections at automatic Check for loose or poor connections at HandsFreeLink
lighting control unit connector (14P), and at driver's control unit connector (28P), and at under-dash
under-dash fuse/relay box connector X (39P).H fuse/relay box connector X (39P).H
Is D T C B 1 0 0 0 a ls o in d ic a t e d ? Is D T C B 1 0 0 0 a ls o in d ic a te d ?
YES-Troubleshoot DTC B1000 (see page 2 2-16 7).■ YES-Troubleshoot DTC B1000 (see page 22-167).■
NO-lf only B1550 is indicated, replace the automatic NO-lf the B1750 is indicated, replace the
lighting control unit.H HandsFreeLink control unit (see page 23-388).B
DTC B1800; Communication Bus Line Error DTC B1950: Communication Bus Line Error
(BUS OFF) (BUS OFF)
ON (II). ON (II).
Check for loose or poor connections at power seat Check for loose or poor connections at MICU-rear
control unit connector A (40P), at MICU-rear junction junction box connector A (14P), and at driver's
box connectors A (14P) and D (17P), and at driver's under-dash fuse/relay box connector G ( 6 P ) M
under-dash fuse/relay box connector G (6P).B
is D T C B 1 0 0 0 a ls o in d ic a te d ?
YES-Troubleshoot DTC B1000 (see page 22-167).H
NO-lf only B1950 is indicated, replace the MICU-rear
NO-lf only B1800 is indicated, replace the power seat junction box.B
control unit.B
DTC B2000: Communication Bus Line Error DTC B205D: Communication Bus Line Error
(BUS OFF) (BUS OFF)
ON (II). ON (II).
/s D T C B 2 0 0 0 in d ic a t e d ? Is D T C B 2 0 5 0 in d ic a te d ?
Check for loose or poor connections at left power Check for loose or poor connections at right power
sliding door control unit connector A (22P), at sliding door control unit connector A (22P), at
MICU-rear junction box connectors A (14P) and G MICU-rear junction box connectors A (14P) and D
(8P), and at driver's under-dash fuse/relay box ( 1 7 P ) , and at driver's under-dash fuse/relay box
connector G (6P).fi connector G (6P).B
Is D T C B 1 0 0 0 a ls o in d ic a t e d ? Is D T C B 1 0 0 0 a ls o in d ic a te d ?
YES-Troubleshoot DTC B1000 (see page 22-167).B YES-Troubleshoot DTC B1000 (see page 22-167).B
NO-lf only B2000 is indicated, replace the left power N O -lf only B2050 is ind i cated, replace the right power
sliding door control unit.B sliding door control unit.B
DTC B1M1: MICU CPU Error DTC B1005: MICU Lost Communication With
DTC B1002: MICU EEPROM Error
NOTE: If you are troubleshooting multiple DTCs, be sure
NOTE: If you are troubleshooting multiple DTCs, be sure to follow the instructions in B-CAN System Diagnosis
to follow the instructions in B-CAN System Diagnosis Test Mode A (see page 22-155).
Test Mode A (see page 22-155).
1. Clear the DTCs with the HDS.
2. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), and then back to
2. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), and then back to ON (II).
ON (II).
3. Wait for at least 6 seconds.
3. Operate the door lock (LOCK/UNLOCK).
Is D T C B 1 0 0 5 in d ic a te d ?
Is D T C B 1 0 0 1 o r B 1 0 0 2 in d ic a te d ?
YES-Go to step 5.
YES-Faulty MICU; replace the driver's under-dash
fuse/relay box (see page 22-110).■ NO-lntermittent failure, the relay control module is
OK at this time. Check for loose or poor connection at
NO-lntermittent failure, the MICU is OK at this time. relay control module connector K (10P), and at
Checkfor loose or poor connections. Ifthe driver's under-dash fuse/relay box connector D (17P).
connections are good, check the battery condition If the connections are good, check the battery
(see page 22-111) and the charging system .! condition (see page 22-111) and the charging
system.■
A r e D T C s B 1 1 5 8 a n d B 1 9 5 9 a ls o in d ic a t e d ?
YES-Go to relay control module input test (see page
22-192).■
NO-Check for an open in the communication circuit
between the MICU and the relay control module. Ifthe
circuit is OK, replace the MICU (see page 22-110). If
the circuit is bad, repair the o p e n .l
DTC B1006: MICU Lost Communication With DTC B1007: MICU Lost Communication With
Door Multiplex Control Unit (Door Lock Combination Switch Control Unit (Headlight
Switch Message) Switch Message)
ON (II). ON (II).
NO-lntermittent failure, the door multiplex control NO-lntermittent failure, the MICU is OK at this time.
unit is OK at this time. Check for loose or poor Check for loose or poor connection at the
connection at the door multiplex control unit combination switch control unit connector (8P), and at
connector (23P), and at driver's under-dash fuse/relay driver's under-dash fuse/relay box connector X (39P).
box connector J (21P). Ifthe connections are good, If the connections are good, check the battery
check the battery condition (see page 22-111) and the condition (see page 22-111) and the charging
charging system.■ system.B
A r e D T C s B 1 0 5 8 , B 1 1 6 0 , a n d B 1 3 5 6 a ls o in d ic a t e d ? A r e D T C s B 1 0 6 2 , B 1 1 5 5 , B 1 5 5 5 , a n d B 1 9 5 7 a ls o
in d ic a t e d ?
YES-Go to door multiplex control unit input test (see
page 22-190).B YES-Go to the combination switch control unit input
test (see page 22-191 ) . ■
between the MICU and the door multiplex control NO-Check for an open in the communication circuit
unit. If the circuit is OK, replace the MICU (see page between the MICU and the combination switch
22-110). If the circuit is bad, repair the open.B control unit. If the circuit is OK, replace the MICU (see
page 22-110). Ifthe circuit is bad, repair the open.B
DTC B1008: MICU Lost Communication With DTC B1012: MICU Lost Communication With
Gauge Control Module (A/T Message) MICU-Rear Junction Box (RJU Message)
ON (II). ON (II).
Is D T C B 1 0 0 8 in d ic a t e d ? Is D T C B 1 0 1 2 in d ic a t e d ?
NO-lntermittent failure, the gauge control module is NO-lntermittent failure, the MICU-rear junction box is
OK at this time. Check for loose or poor connection at OK at this time. Check for loose or poor connection at
gauge control module connector A (30P), and at MICU-rear junction box connector A (14P), and at
driver's under-dash fuse/relay box connector N (45P). driver's under-dash fuse/relay box connector G (6P). If
If the connections are good, check the battery the connections are good, check the battery condition
condition (see page 22-111) and the charging (see page 22-111) and the charging system.B
system.■
A re D T C s B 1 0 6 1 , B 1 8 0 8 , B 1 9 5 6 , B 2 0 1 1 , a n d B 2 0 6 1
YES-Go to the MICU-rear junction box input test (see
a ls o in d ic a te d ?
page 22-193).B
YES-Go to the gauge control module input test (see
page 22-189).■
between the MICU and the MICU-rear junction box. If
NO-Check for an open in the communication circuit the circuit is OK, replace the MICU (see page 22-110).
between the MICU and the gauge control module. If Ifthe circuit is bad, repair the open.B
the circuit is OK, replace the MICU (see page 22-110).
If the circuit is bad, repair the open.B
DTC B1032: MICU Lost Communication With DTC B1080: Power Supply Circuit (IG1 Line)
SRS Unit (CDS Message) Input Error for Relay Control Module and
MICU
to follow the instructions in B-CAN System Diagnosis NOTE: If you are troubleshooting multiple DTCs, be sure
Test Mode A (see page 22-155). to follow the instructions in B-CAN System Diagnosis
1. Clear the DTCs with the HDS. Test Mode A (see page 22-155).
2. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), and then back to 1. Clear the DTCs with the HDS.
ON (II). 2. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), and then back to
3. Wait for at least 6 seconds. ON (II).
NO-lntermittent failure, the gauge control module is NO-lntermittent failure, check for loose or poor
OK at this time. Check for loose or poor connections at connections at under-hood fuse/relay box connector
gauge control module connector A (30P), and at K (10P), and at driver's under-dash fuse/relay box
driver’s under-dash fuse/relay box connector N (45P). connector D (17P). If the connections are OK, check
If the connections are good, check the battery the battery condition (see page 22-111) and the
condition (see page 22-111) and the charging charging system.B
system.■ 4. Check the MICU IG1 power supply No. 21 (7.5 A) fuse
5. Check for DTCs with the HDS. in the driver's under-dash fuse/relay box.
A r e D T C s B 1 0 0 8 a n d B 1 0 1 2 a ls o in d ic a t e d w ith D T C Is th e fu s e O K ?
B 1032? YES-Go to step 5.
YES-Check for an open in the communication circuit NO-Replace the fuse and recheck for DTCs.BI
between the MICU and the gauge control module. If
the circuit is bad, repair the open.B 5. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
NO-Do the gauge control module input test (see page 6. Disconnect under-hood fuse/relay box connector K
22-189).Hi (10P), and inspect for loose or bent pins.
7. Reconnect under-hood fuse/relay box connector K
(10P).
9. Measure the voltage between under-hood fuse/relay 10. Measure the voltage between under-hood fuse/relay
box connector K (10P) terminal No. 2 and body box connector K (10P) terminal No. 10 and body
ground. ground.

CONNECTOR K (10P) UNDER-HOOD FUSE/RELAY BOX
CONNECTOR K (10P)
YEL
1 2 F=l / 4 1 2 | F=q / 4
5 6 | 7 | 8 9 10 5 6 | 7 | 8 9 10
BLK

Is th e r e b a tt e r y v o lta g e ? Is th e r e le s s th a n 0 .2 V ?
YES-Go to step 10. YES-Faulty relay control module; replace the
under-hood fuse/relay box (see page 22-105).B
NO-Repair an open in the wire between the
under-hood fuse/relay box and the driver's NO-Repair an open in the wire between the
under-dash fuse/relay box.B under-hood fuse/relay box and G202. Ifthe wire is OK,
inspect G202.B
DTC B1102: Door Multiplex Control Unit DTC B1105: Door Multiplex Control Unit Lost
Internal Error Communication With MICU (Door Switch
NOTE: If you are troubleshooting multiple DTCs, be sure Message)
3. Operate the power window (UP/DOWN). ON (II).
4. Check for DTCs with the HDS. 3. Wait for at least 6 seconds.
Is D T C B 1 1 0 2 in d ic a t e d ? 4. Check for DTCs with the HDS.
YES-Faulty door multiplex control unit; replace the Is D T C B 1 1 0 5 in d ic a te d ?

power window master switch (see page 22-314).B YES-Go to step 5.
NO-lntermittent failure, the door multiplex control NO-lntermittent failure. The system is OK at this time.
unit is OK at this time. Check for loose or poor Check for loose or poor connections.®
connections. Ifthe connections are good, check the
battery condition (see page 22-111) and the charging 5. Check for DTCs with the HDS.
system.■
A r e D T C s B 1 0 5 7 , B 1 1 5 9 , a n d B 1 8 0 7 a ls o in d ic a t e d ?
NO-Go to door multiplex control unit input test (see
page 22-190).H
DTC B1106: Door Multiplex Control Unit Lost DTC B1955: MICU-Rear Junction Box Lost
Communication With MICU (MICU Message) Communication With MICU (MICU Message)
Test Mode A (see page 22-155). Test Mode A (see page 22-155),
ON (II), ON (II).
NO-lntermittent failure. The system is OK at this time. NO-lntermittent failure, the communication line is OK
Check for loose or poor and connections.! at this time. Check for loose or poor connections.®
A re D T C s B 1 0 5 5 , B 1 1 5 7 , B 1 2 5 5 , B 1 3 5 5 , B 1 5 5 6 , B 1 8 0 6 , A re D T C s B 1 0 5 5 , B 1 1 0 6 , B 1 1 5 7 , B 1 2 5 5 , B 1 3 5 5 , B 1 5 5 6 ,
B 1 9 5 5 , B 2 0 0 5 , a n d B 2 0 5 5 a ls o in d ic a te d ? B 1 8 0 6 , B 2 0 0 5 , a n d B 2 0 5 5 a ls o in d ic a t e d ?
YES-Go to the MICU input test (see page 22-185).H YES-Go to the MICU input test (see page 22-185).■
NO-Go to the door multiplex control unit input test NO-Go to the MICU-rear junction box input test (see
(see page 22-190),B page 22-19 3 ) M
DTC B1956: MICU-Rear Junction Box Lost DTC B1957: MICU-Rear Junction Box Lost
Communication With Gauge Control Module Communication With Combination Switch
(A/T Message) Control Unit (Headlight Switch Message)
ON (II). ON (II).
NO-lntermittent failure, the communication line is OK NO-lntermittent failure, the communication line is OK
at this time. Check for loose or poor connections.I at this time. Check for loose or poor connections.®
A re D T C s B 1 00 8 , B 1 0 6 1 , B 1 8 0 8 , B 2 0 1 1 , a n d B 2 0 6 1 A r e D T C s B 1 0 0 7 , B 1 0 6 2 , B 1 1 5 5 , a n d B 1 5 5 5 a ls o
a ls o in d ic a te d ? in d ic a te d ?
YES-Go to the gauge control module input test (see YES-Go to the combination switch control unit input
page 22-18 9 ) M test (see page 22-191 ) . ■
NO-Go to the MICU-rear junction box input test (see NO-Go to the MICU-rear junction box input test (see
page 22-193).B page 22-193).H
DTC B1958: MICU-Rear Junction Box Unit Lost DTC B1959: MICU-Rear Junction Box Lost
Communication With Combination Switch Communication With Relay Control Module
Control Unit (Wiper Switch Message) (R/M Message)
ON (II). ON (II).
NO-lntermittent failure, the communication line is OK NO-lntermittent failure, the communication line is OK
at this time. Check for loose or poor connections.! at this time. Check for loose or poor connections.®
A r e D T C s B 1 0 6 3 , a n d B 1 1 5 6 a ls o in d ic a t e d ? A r e D T C s B1005 a n d B 1 158 a ls o in d ic a te d ?
YES-Go to the combination switch control unit input YES-Go to the relay control module input test (see
test (see page 22-191).■ page 22-192).®
NO-Go to the MICU-rear junction box input test (see NO-Go to the MICU-rear junction box input test (see
page 22-193).® page 22-193).®
DTC B1960: MICU-Rear Junction Box Lost

Communication With Climate Control Unit
(A/C Message)
to follow the instructions in B-CAN System Diagnosis
ON (II).
Is D T C B 1 9 6 0 in d ic a t e d ?
YES-Go to the MICU-rear junction box input test (see
page 22-193).B
NO-Go to the front climate control unit
troubleshooting (see page 2 1-178).■
MICU Input Test
NOTE: Make sure the ignition switch is turned to LOCK (0) before troubleshooting the driver's under-dash fuse/relay box
connectors.
1. Remove the left side kick panel (see page 20-101).
2. Disconnect driver's under-dash fuse/relay box connectors D, E, F, G, H, J, K, P, W, N, and X.
NOTE: All connector views are shown from wire side of female terminals.
DRIVER'S UNDER-DASH FUSE/RELAY BOX DRIVER'S UNDER-DASH FUSE/RELAY BOX

CONNECTOR D (17P) CONNECTOR J (21P)*
YEL YEL
GRN/RED
n_ n . ^Pk__ k n
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 > 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
8 9 10 11 / 13 14 15 16 17 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 / 18 19 / 21
^. ' i. j— —u
BLU
DRIVER’S UNDER-DASH FUSE/RELAY BOX DRIVER'S UNDER-DASH FUSE/RELAY BOX

CONNECTOR E (16P) CONNECTOR K (12P)*
WHT/RED
n... ...ri __ti__ r
1
CM
3 „ 4 / / 7 1 2 JF=3 3 4 5
8 9 / | 1 1 12 13 14 15 6 u 11112
. 9 10 ---
u 4 j—
BLK
DRIVER S UNDER-DASH FUSE/RELAY BOX DRIVER'S UNDER-DASH FUSE/RELAY BOX
CONNECTOR F (14P) CONNECTOR P (30P)
YEL WHT/BLK BLK
nr
1 / 4 / / / / / / 13 14
0
2 3 6 9 10
IC
Pol
6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 17 / / 20 / / / 25/ / / 29
O|
DRIVER S UNDER-DASH FUSE/RELAY BOX DRIVER'S UNDER-DASH FUSE/RELAY BOX

CONNECTOR G (6P) CONNECTOR W (5P)
GRN/RED
ll
1 .... F=l ... / 1 2 /
---
3 / / 6
7
YEL
WHT/RED

CONNECTOR H (14P)
rt—. n
&
E
1 4 5 6
7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
BLK
“Connector view shown rotated 180° (upside down) from actual position in the driver's under-dash fuse/relay box.
MICU Input Test (cont'd)
DRI VER'S UNDER-DASH FUSE/RELAY BOX

CONNECTOR N (45P)#
DRIVER’S UNDER-DASH FUSE/RELAY BOX

CONNECTOR X(39P)*
“Connector view shown rotated 180 ° (upside down) from actual position in the driver's under-dash fuse/relay box.
3. Inspect the connector and socket terminals to be sure they are all making good contact.
• If the terminals are bent, loose or corroded, repair them as necessary, and recheck the system.
• Ifthe terminals look OK, go to step 4.
4. With the connectors still disconnected from the under-dash fuse/relay box, do these input tests at the following
connector(s).
• If any test indicates a problem, find and correct the cause, then recheck the system.
• If all the input tests prove OK, go to step 5. ,
Cavity Wire Test condition Test: Desired result Possible cause if desi red result is
not obtained
D11 BLU Relay control module connector Check for continuity between An open in the B-CAN wire
K (10P) disconnected terminal D11 and relay control
module connector K (10P) terminal
No. 8;
There should be continuity.
Check for continuity to ground: A short to ground in the B-CAN
There should be no continuity. wire
G1 GRN/RED MICU-rear junction box Check for continuity between An open in the B-CAN wire
connector A (14P) disconnected terminal G1 and MICU-rear junction
box connector A (14P) terminal
No. 14:
J4 GRN/RED Power wi ndow master switch Check for continuity between An open in the B-CAN wire
(Door multiplex control unit) terminal J4 and power window
23P connector disconnected master switch 23P connector
terminal No. 16:
N22 LT BLU A/C control panel connector A Check for continuity between An open in the B-CAN wire
(22P) or front climate control terminal N22 and A/C control panel
unit 30P connector connector A (22P) terminal No. 10 or
disconnected front climate control unit 30P
connector terminal No. 7:
There should be conti nuity.
N22 LT BLU HandsFreeLink control unit 28P Check for continuity between An open in the B-CAN wire
connector disconnected terminal N22 and HandsFreeLink
control unit 28P connector terminal
No. 18:
Check for continuity to ground: A short to ground i n the B-CAN
N28 BRN/YEL Gauge control module Check for continuity between An open in the B-CAN wire
connector A (30P) disconnected terminal N28 and gauge control
module connector A (30P) terminal
No. 25:
X18 LT GRN Automatic lighting control unit Check for continuity between An open in the B-CAN wire
connector 14P disconnected terminal X18 and automatic lighting
control unit connector 14P terminal
No. 4:
X27 LT GRN Wiper/washer switch 8P Check for continuity between An open in the B-CAN wire
connector disconnected terminal X27 and wiper/washer
switch 8P connector terminal No. 4:
(cont'd)
MICU Input Test (cont'd)
5. Reconnect the connectors to the driver's under-dash fuse/relay box, and do these input tests at the following
connectors on the driver's under-dash fuse/relay box.
• If all the input tests prove OK, the MICU must be faulty; replace the driver's under-dash fuse/relay box assembly.
Cavity Wire Test condition Test: Desired result Possible cause if desired
result is not obtained
N36 YEL/RED Ignition switch Measure the voltage to • Blown No. 32 (10 A) fuse in
ACCESSORY (I) ground: the driver's under-dash
There should be battery fuse/relay box
voltage. • An open or high resistance
in the wire
D6 YEL Ignition switch ON (II) Measure the voltage to • Blown No. 21 (7.5 A) fuse
F1 ground: in the driver's under-dash
J9 There should be battery fuse/relay box
X34 voltage. • An open or high resistance
in the wire
K5 WHT/RED Under all conditions Measure the voltage to • Blown No. 7 (7.5 A) fuse in
G3 ground: the driver's under-dash
X35 There should be battery fuse/relay box
voltage. • An open or high resistance
in the wire
E9 BLK In all ignition switch Measure the voltage to • Poor ground (G601) or an
H9 positions ground: open in the ground wire
There should be less than • An open or high resistance
0.2 V. in the wire
P14 BLK In all ignition switch Measure the voltage to • Poor ground (G401) or an
positions ground: open in the ground wire
There should be less than • An open or high resistance
0.2 V. in the wire
P8 WHT/BLK Under all conditions Connect to ground with a • Blown No. 13 (20 A) fuse in
jumper wire: the under-hood fuse/relay
The ignition key light should box
come on. • Faulty LED
• An open or high resistance
in the wire
W4 YEL Interior lights switch in the Connect to ground with a • Blown No. 6 (7.5 A) fuse in
middle position, all doors jumper wire: the driver's under-dash
closed The individual map lights fuse/relay box
should come on. • Faulty map light
in the wire
Gauge Control Module Input Test
1. Remove the gauge control module (see page 22-371).

2. Disconnect connector A (30P) from the gauge control module.
# If the terminals are bent, loose or corroded, repair them as necessary, and recheck the system.
• If the terminals look OK, go to step 4.
BLK BLK BRN/YEL
4. Reconnect connector A to the gauge control module, and do these input tests at the following connector.
• If all the input tests prove OK, replace the gauge control module.
Cavity Wire Test Condition Test: Desired result Possible cause i f desired result is not
obtained
A6 WHT/RED Under all Measure the voltage to • Blown No. 7 (7.5 A) fuse in the driver's
conditions ground: under-dash fuse/relay box
There should be battery • An open or high resistance in the wire
voltage.
A5 YEL Ignition switch Measure the voltage to • Blown No. 21 (7.5 A) fuse in the
ON (II) ground: driver's under-dash fuse/relay box
voltage.
A20 BLK In all ignition Measure the voltage to • Poor ground (G502) or an open in the
A21 switch ground: ground wire
positions There should be less than • An open or high resistance in the wire
0.2 V.
A25 BRN/YEL Disconnect Check for continuity between An open in the B-CAN wire
driver's terminal A25 and driver's
under-dash under-dash fuse/relay box
fuse/relay box connector N (45P) terminal
N (45P) and No. 28:
gauge control There should be continuity.
module A (SOP) Check for continuity between A short to ground in the B-CAN wire
connectors terminal A25 and body ground:
There should be no continuity.
Door Multiplex Control Unit Input Test
NOTE: Make sure the ignition switch is turned to LOCK (0) before disconnecting the driver's door switch panel.
1. Remove the driver's door switch panel (see page 22-314).
2. Disconnect the 23P connector from the power window master switch.
DOOR MULTIPLEX CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR (23P)
BLK
\
1 2 3 4 5 8 10
11 12 13 14 15
/
WHT/RED
\GRN/RED \YEL
4. Reconnect the connector to the door multiplex control unit and do these input tests at the following connector.
• If all the input tests prove OK, the door multiplex control unit must be faulty, replace the power window master
switch.
Cavity Wire Test condition Test: Desired result Possible cause if desired result is not
obtained
15 WHT/RED Under all Measure the voltage to • Blown No. 7 (7.5 A) fuse in the driver's
voltage.
20 YEL Ignition switch Measure the voltage to • Blown No. 21 (7.5 A) fuse in the
voltage.
1 BLK In all ignition Measure the voltage to • Poor ground (G601) or an open in the
switch ground: ground wire
0.2 V.
16 GRN/RED Disconnect Check for continuity between An open in the B-CAN wire
driver's terminal No. 16 and driver's
fuse/relay box connector J (21P) terminal
J (26P) and No. 4:
door multiplex There should be continuity.
control unit Check for continuity between A short to ground in the B-CAN wire
connectors terminal No. 16 and body
ground:
Combination Switch Control Unit Input Test
1. Remove the steering column covers (see page 17-9).

2. Disconnect the 8P connector from the wiper/washer switch.
BLK
■ LT GRN
1 3 4
00
5 / 7 • WHT/RED
YEL
4. Reconnect the connector to the control unit, and do these input tests at the following connector.
• If all the input tests prove OK, the combination switch control unit must be faulty, replace the wiper/washer switch.
obtained
8 WHT/RED Under all Measure the voltage to • Blown No. 7 (7.5 A) fuse in the driver's
voltage.
7 YEL Ignition switch Measure the voltage to • Blown No. 21 (7.5 A) fuse in the
voltage.
3 BLK In all ignition Measure the voltage to • Poor ground (G601) or an open in the
0.2 V.
4 LT GRN Disconnect Check for continuity between An open in the B-CAN wire
driver's terminal No. 4 and driver's
fuse/relay box connector X (39P) terminal
X (39P) and No. 27:
combination There should be continuity.
switch control Check for continuity between A short to ground in the B-CAN wire
unit connectors terminal No. 4 and body
ground:
Relay Control Module Input Test
1. Remove the under-hood fuse/relay box under cover (see page 22-105).
2. Disconnect under-hood fuse/relay box connector K (10P).
UNDER-HOOD FUSE/RELAY BOX CONNECTOR K (10P)
YEL
1 2 I— I / 4
00
5 6 9 10
1^
BLU BLK
4. Reconnect the connector to the under-hood fuse/relay box, and do these input tests at the following connector.
• If all the input tests prove OK, the relay control module must be faulty, replace the under-hood fuse/relay box.
obtained
K2 YEL Ignition switch Measure the voltage to • Blown No. 21 (7.5 A) fuse in the
voltage.
K10 BLK In all ignition Measure the voltage to • Poor ground (G202) or an open in the
0.2 V.
K8 BLU Disconnect Check for continuity between An open in the B-CAN wire
driver's terminal K8 and driver's
fuse/relay box connector D (17P) terminal
D (17P) and No. 11:
under-hood There should be continuity.
fuse/relay box Check for continuity between A short to ground in the B-CAN wire
K (10P) terminal K8 and body ground:
connectors There should be no continuity.
MICU-Rear Junction Box Input Test
1. Remove the right rear side trim (see page 20-110).

2. Disconnect MICU-rear junction box connectors A, C, D, and G.
NOTE: All connectors are wire side of female terminals.
CONNECTOR A (14P) CONNECTOR C (6P)
WHT/RED BLK
_tn
7 2 3 4 5 6 1 J = l_ 2
7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 3 / 5 /
u -ru
YEL BLK GRN/RED
CONNECTOR D f17P) CONNECTOR G (8P)
WHT/RED YEL YEL

WHT/RED GRN/RED
n
1 2 3 4 1 t
i..—.. 1 / / /
00 f
2 3 4 5 7
............................. .. ........II
8 9 / / 12 13 14 / 7
X WHT/RED YEL
GRN/RED GRN/RED
MICU-Rear Junction Box input Test (cont'd)
4. Reconnect the connectors to the MICU-rear junction box and do these input tests at the following connectors on the
MICU-rear junction box.
• If all the input tests prove OK, replace the MICU-rear junction box.
Cavity Wire Test condition Test: Desired result Possible cause if desired result is not obtained
A6 WHT/RED Under all Measure the voltage to ground: • Blown No. 7 (7.5 A) fuse in the driver's
conditions There should be battery voltage. under-dash fuse/relay box
• An open or high resistance in the wire
A12 YEL Ignition switch Measure the voltage to ground: • Blown No. 21 (7.5 A) fuse in the driver's
ON (II) There should be battery voltage. under-dash fuse/relay box
A13 BLK In all ignition Measure the voltage to ground: • Poor ground (G652) or an open in the ground
C1 switch positions There should be less than 0.2 V. wire
D1 WHT/RED Under all Measure the voltage to ground: Faulty MICU-rear junction box
D2 conditions There should be battery voltage.
G2
D3 YEL ignition switch Measure the voltage to ground: Faulty MICU-rear junction box
D4 ON (II) There should be battery voltage.
G3
G4 GRN/RED Disconnect left Check for continuity between An open in the B-CAN wire
power sliding terminal G4 and left power sliding
door control unit door control unit connector A (22P)
connector A (22P), terminal No. 7:
power tailgate There should be continuity.
control unit Check for continuity between An open in the B-CAN wire
connector C (14P), terminal G4 and power tailgate
and MICU-rear control unit connector C (14P)
junction box terminal No. 7:
connector D (17P) There should be continuity.
Check for continuity to ground: A short to ground in the B-CAN wire
A14 GRN/RED Disconnect Check for continuity between An open in the B-CAN wire
driver's terminal A14 and driver's under-dash
under-dash fuse/relay box connector G (6P)
fuse/relay box terminal No. 1:
connector G (6P) There should be continuity.
and MICU-rear Check for continuity to ground: A short to ground in the B-CAN wire
junction box There should be no continuity.
connector A (14P)
D8 GRN/RED Disconnect power Check for continuity between An open in the B-CAN wire
seat control unit terminal D8 and power seat control
connector A (40P) unit connector A (40P) terminal
and MICU-rear No. 40:
junction box There should be continuity.
connector D (17P) Check for continuity to ground: A short to ground in the B-CAN wire
D9 GRN/RED Disconnect right Check for continuity between An open in the B-CAN wire
power sliding terminal D9 and right power sliding
door control unit door control unit connector A (22P)
connector A (22P) terminal No. 7:
and MICU-rear There should be continuity.
junction box Check for continuity to ground: A short to ground in the B-CAN wire
connector D (17P) There should be no continuity.
SECURITY INDICATOR*
RELAY CONTROL MODULE

(Built into the under-hood fuse/relay box)
MICU
(Built into the driver's
under-dash fuse/relay box)
HORNS Input Test, page 22-211
Test/Replacement, page 22-235 SECURITY HOOD SWITCH*1
Test, page 22-227
With Power Sliding Door*1 Without Power Sliding Door
.TRANSMITTER
Test, page 22-231
Programming, page 22-232
TRANSMITTER
Test, page 22-231
UNLOCK BUTTON
LOCK BUTTON
LOCK BUTTON
RIGHT SLIDING
DOOR BUTTON
UNLOCK BUTTON
LEST SLIDING
DOOR BUTTON
TAILGATE BUTTON
(Touring model) V Cpan i c)^ j
PANIC BUTTON
PANIC BUTTON e e b S
*1: EX, EX-L, Touring models
(cont'd)
KNOB SWITCH
Actuator Test, page 22-222
*2: Without Power tailgate Knob Switch Test, page 22-225
PASSENGER'S UNDER-DASH
FUSE/RELAY BOX
FRONT PASSENGER'S
DOOR LOCK SWITCH
Test, page 22-223
FRONT PASSENGER'S
DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR/
KNOB SWITCH
Knob Switch Test, page 22-224
FRONT PASSENGER'S DOOR SWITCH
RIGHT SLIDING DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR/

KNOB SWITCH
MICU-REAR JUNCTION BOX Actuator Test, page 22-222
CONTROL UNIT Replacement, page 20-23
(Built into the rear junction box) Knob Switch Test, page 22-225
RIGHT SLIDING DOOR SWITCH

System Description
Security Alarm System

The security alarm system is integrated with the multiplex integrated control system, and arms automatically after the
doors, hood, and tailgate are closed and locked. For the system to arm, the ignition switch must be off, the key must be
removed from the ignition switch, and the MICU must receive signals that the doors, hood, and tailgate are closed and
locked. The alarm can be disarmed at any time by unlocking the driver's door with the key or pressing the UNLOCK
button on the remote transmitter (a door must be opened to completely disarm the alarm).
When everything is closed and locked, the only inputs that are grounded, and have 0 V, are the driver's door lock knob
switch (LOCK position), and the audio unit. In other words, all of the other switches are open, and have about 0.8 V in
sleep mode and 5 V or more in awake mode, including the key cylinder switches. With the doors, tailgate, and hood
closed and locked, the multiplex integrated control system sends a signal to the gauge control module to flash the
security indicator. The security indicator will begin to flash at a long ON long OFF rate, signaling that the multiplex
integrated control system has verified the inputs are correct. About 15 seconds after the security indicator begins to
flash, the security system will arm and the security indicator will flash at a short ON short OFF rate. If the security
indicator does not flash, the system is not armed.
Ifthe doors and tailgate are locked using the remote transmitter, and the inputs are correct, the multiplex integrated
control system will flash the parking lights and taillights, and the security indicator will begin to flash. Ifthe parking
l i g h t s and taillights do not flash, the system is not armed.
If the remote transmitter lock button is pressed a second time within 5 seconds of the first, and the Keyless lock
acknowledgement is activated. The multiplex integrated control system will sound the horn one time and flash the
parking lights and taillights to confirm the security system is armed. The multiplex integrated control system will sound
the alarm when any of the following occur while the security system is set.
• A door or the tailgate is forced open
• A door is unlocked without using the key or the remote transmitter
• The hood is opened
• The audio unit is disconnected
• The RES DVD player or rear display is disconnected (with RES)
• The navigation unit is disconnected (with navigation system)
• The ignition switch is turned ON (II)
There is no glass breakage sensor or motion detector sensor.
A switch that is misadjusted or a poor connection can cause the alarm to sound for no apparent reason. In this case, a
significant change in temperature, inside or outside the vehicle, the vibration from a passing vehicle, or something
bumping into the vehicle may cause the loose connection or misadjusted switch to shift slightly and the alarm will
sound.
Ifthe multiplex integrated control system detects a drop in voltage on the switches (0 V) or voltage on the driver's door
lock switch (lock wire) or the audio unit security circuit, the horn will sound and the headlights and taillights will flash for
about 2 minutes. The alarm can be stopped at any time by unlocking the driver's door with the key or by pressing any
button on the remote transmitter.
Panic M o d e
The panic mode sounds the alarm in order to attract attention. When the PANIC button on the remote transmitter is
pressed and held for about 2 seconds, the alarm sounds and the exterior lights flash for about 20 seconds.
The panic mode can be cancelled at anytime by pressing any button on the remote transmitter or by turning the ignition
switch to ON (II). The panic mode will not function if the ignition switch is ON (II).
Power Door Lock System

The power door lock system locks and unlocks all four doors with the driver's master door lock switch and the
passenger's door lock switch. The doors and the tailgate (without power) can be locked and unlocked using the key in
the driver's door key cylinder switch. If the key is turned counterclockwise, all the doors and tailgate lock. If the key is
turned clockwise once, the driver's door unlocks, and when the key is released, then turned again, the other doors and
tailgate unlock.
The doors and tailgate can also be locked by pushing down on the lock knob on the driver's door. Pulling up on the lock
knob only unlocks the driver's door. The lock knobs on the other doors only lock and unlock that door.
Ifthe key is in the ignition switch, and a door is open, the doors will not lock using the master door lock switch.
Keyless Entry System
The keyless entry system is integrated with the multiplex integrated control system. The multiplex integrated control
unit (MICU) receives LOCK, UNLOCK and PANIC signals from the keyless receiver unit built into the power window
master switch. The keyless entry system allows you to lock and unlock the vehicle with the remote transmitter. When
you press the LOCK button, all the doors lock (unless any one of the doors is not fully closed or the key is in the ignition
switch). For Touring model, the remote transmitters 1 and 2 (Identified on the back of the remote) are linked to the
DPMS, and the custom memory settings (in the MID). Depending on which remote transmitter unlocks the vehicle, these
settings are chosen. The remote transmitter can also be unlinked to cancel this feature.
Some functions of the security, keyless entry and power door locks can be customized using the MID keyless memory
setting (Touring model only). They include:
• AUTO DOOR LOCK: Door locking can be turned off, or turned on when shifting from Park or at a speed above 10 mph.
• AUTO DOOR UNLOCK: Door unlocking can be turned off, or turned on when shifting to Park or turning the ignition
switch OFF.
• ONE TOUCH UNLOCK (Touring model): Door unlocking can be set to unlock all doors or only the driver's door with
one touch of the button.
• KEYLESS DOOR LOCK ACKNOWLEDGEMENT: The beep, the parking lights and taillights can be turned on or off
when pressing the LOCK button a second time on the remote transmitter.
• SECURITY RELOCK TIMER: Select the time (30,60, or 90 sec.) that the doors relock if you unlock the doors with the
remote transmitter, but do not open any of them.
• HEADLIGHT AUTO OFF TIMER: Select time (0,15,30, or 60 sec.) to turn the headlights off after removing the key from
the ignition and closing the driver's door.
• INTERIOR LIGHT DIMMING TIMER: Select the dimming time (15,30, or 60 sec.) of the interior lights after closing the
door with the key removed from the ignition.
• FRONT WIPERS OPERATION: Select the windshield intermittent wiper dwell time control to manually adjustment
type or automatic type link with the vehicle speed.
• COMPASS CALIBRATION: Calibrate the compass area zone.
• MEMORY SEAT LINK: The remote transmitters can recall the memorized driving position by pressing the LOCK and
UNLOCK buttons at the same time for about 1 second.
When you press the UNLOCK button the first time, only the driver's door unlocks. The other doors unlock when you
press the UNLOCK button a second time. All the doors unlock when you press the UNLOCK button first time if you press
the LOCK button and the PASSENGER SIDE SLIDING DOOR button at same time for about 1 second, the LED in the
remote transmitter will blink twice. To cancel this feature, press the LOCK button and the PASSENGER SIDE SLIDING
DOOR button at the same time, the LED will blink once.
NOTE: The doors will not lock with the remote transmitter if a door is not fully closed, the key off timer is ON, or if the key
is in the ignition switch.
For EX, EX-L, and Touring models:
If the UNLOCK button is pressed, released, then pressed and held, the windows begin to open. The windows stop if the
button is released. See power windows for more information and troubleshooting.
For Touring model:
When the interior lights switch is in the middle (door) position, the individual map lights will come on when the UNLOCK
button is pressed. If a door is not opened, the lights will go off in about 15,30, or 60 seconds (depending on the keyless
memory setting "INTERIOR LIGHT DIMMING TIMER"), and the doors will relock. Ifthe doors are locked with the remote
transmitter within 30 seconds, the light will go off immediately.
If the doors are unlocked using the remote transmitter, and no doors are open, the multiplex integrated control system
will relock the doors in about 30 seconds.
For EX, EX-L, and Touring models, the security system will rearm itself.
Circuit Diagram
(cont'd)
Circuit Diagram
UND ER -HO O D FUSE/RELAY BOX
No.15 (40 A) FUSE No. 4 (15 A) FUSE No. 1 3(20 A) FUSE
V V V RELAY CONTROL
MODULE
(7 5 A) TAILLIGHT < HORN

l/.& A ) RELAY ^ RELAY
CONTROL BLOCK
| H2 JK4 jm |H 9
GRN/BLK BLU GRN/TEL RED/BLK BLU/RED BLU/RED

I1 I1
HORN i \ HORN
(H igh) ' ' (Low)
HORN • FRONT PARKING

SWITCH LIGHTS
I ■ TAILLIGHTS
i
1 D11 DRIVER'S UNDER-DASH FUSE/RELAY BO X
) ■
M IC U
UNLOCK UNLOCK LOCK
E14 H12 No. 21 (7.5 A) FUSE

(DRIVER'S
UNDER-DASH
FUSE/RELAY BOX)
GRN GRN/YEL LT GRN/RED G RN/W H T
3 FRONT
PASSENGER'S
DOOR LOCK
1 SECURITY DRIVER'S LEFT FRONT RIGHT KNOB
HOOD DOOR SLIDING PASSENGER'S SLIDING SWITCH
SW ITCH SWITCH DOOR DOOR DOOR FRONT
(Closed; (Closed: SWITCH SWITCH SW ITCH PASSENGER'S
Hood open) Door open) (Closed: (Closed: (Closed: DOOR LOCK
Door open) Door open) BLK
Door open) SWITCH
D L I\ BLK
1 I
G301 G504
*1: W ith pow er sliding door
*2: '07 model
*3: '0 8 -1 0 models
- : B-CAN line
DRIVER'S DOOR
LOCK ACTUATOR
No. 4 (20 A) FUSE

(PASSENGER'S
UNDER-DASH FUSE/
RELAY BOX)
*: W ith po w er sliding d o or
No. 22 (AS F/B) --------------------- : B-CAN line
(70 A) FUSE
(UNDER-HO O D
FUSE/RELAY BOX)
y
BLK/W HT
(W ithout power tailgate)

DTC Troubleshooting
DTC B1026; Passenger's Door Lock Switch 7. Push the front passenger's door lock switch to the
Signal Error LOCK and UNLOCK positions, and check the ON/OFF
information of the FRONT PASSENGER'S DOOR
NOTE: If you are troubleshooting multiple DTCs, be sure LOCK SWITCH (LOCK) and FRONT PASSENGER'S
to follow the instructions in B-CAN system diagnosis test DOOR LOCK SWITCH (UNLOCK) in the DATA LIST.
D o e s th e F R O N T P A S S E N G E R 'S D O O R L O C K S W IT C H
1. Clear the DTCs with the HDS. (L O C K ) ( F R O N T P A S S E N G E R 'S D O O R L O C K S W IT C H
( U N L O C K ) ) in fo rm a tio n in d ic a te O N w h e n th e d o o r lo c k
s w itc h is p u s h e d in e a c h s w itc h p o s itio n , a n d O F F w h e n
ON (II).
th e d o o r lo c k s w itc h is r e le a s e d ?
3. Operate the front passenger's door lock switch
YES-Faulty MICU, replace the driver's under-dash
several times.
fuse/relay box (see page 22-110).B
NO-Go to step 8.
8. Remove the front passenger's door panel (see page
YES-Go to step 5. 20-8).
NO-lntermittent failure. The front passenger's door 9. Disconnect the 10P connector from the front
lock system is OK at this time. Check for loose or poor passenger's power window/door lock switch.
connections.®
10. Disconnect driver's under-dash fuse/relay box 30P
5. With the front passenger's door lock switch in the connector P.
neutral position, select SECURITY from the HDS and
11. Check for continuity between front passenger's
enter the DATA LIST.
power window/door lock switch 10P connector
6. Check the ON/OFF information of the FRONT terminals No. 1 and No. 2.
PASSENGER'S DOOR LOCK SWITCH (LOCK) and
FRONT PASSENGER'S DOOR LOCK SWITCH
(UNLOCK) in the DATA LIST. FRONT PASSENGER S POWER WINDOW/
DOOR LOCK SWITCH 10P CONNECTOR
A r e b o th in fo rm a tio n in d ic a to r s O F F ?
YES-Go to step 7.
HOH
NO-Go to step 12. UNLOCK (GRn TI [LOCK (PNK/BLK)
1 2 F=l 3 4
5 6 / 8 9 10
YES-Repair a short to ground in the wire.B
NO-Faulty front passenger's door lock switch.■
12. Remove the front passenger's door panel (see page DTC B1127: Driver's Door Key Cylinder Switch
20-8). Signal Error
13. Disconnect the 10P connector from the front NOTE: If you are troubleshooting multiple DTCs, be sure
passenger's power window/door lock switch. to follow the instructions in B-CAN System Diagnosis
14. Check the ON/OFF information of the FRONT Test Mode A (see page 22-155).
PASSENGER'S DOOR LOCK SWITCH (LOCK) and 1. Clear the DTCs with the HDS.
FRONT PASSENGER'S DOOR LOCK SWITCH
(UNLOCK) in the DATA LIST. 2. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), and then back to
ON (II).
3. Operate the driver's door key cylinder several times.
YES-Faulty front passenger's door lock switch;
replace i t ■ 4. Check for DTCs with the HDS.
NO-Go to step 15. Is D T C B 1 1 2 7 in d ic a te d ?
15. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). YES-Go to step 5.

16. Check for continuity between the MICU and front NO-lntermittent failure. The driver's door key cylinder
passenger's door lock switch using the keyless system is OK at this time. Check for loose or poor
entry/power door locks/security system control unit connections.®
input test (see page 22-211).
5. With the driver's door key cylinder in the neutral
Is th e r e c o n tin u ity ? position, select SECURITY with the HDS, and enter
DATA LIST.
YES-Repair a short in the wire and recheck.®
6. Check the ON/OFF information of the DRIVER'S DOOR
NO-Fa ulty MICU; replace the driver's under-dash KEY CYLINDER SWITCH (LOCK) and DRIVER'S DOOR
fuse/relay box (see page 22-110).® KEY CYLINDER SWITCH (UNLOCK) in the DATA LIST.
YES-Go to step 7.
NO-Go to step 8.
7. Turn the driver's door key cylinder to the LOCK and 10. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
UNLOCK positions with the ignition key and check the 11. Disconnect the driver's door multiplex control unit
ON/OFF information of the DRIVER'S DOOR KEY
23P connector.
CYLINDER SWITCH (LOCK) and DRIVER'S DOOR KEY
CYLINDER SWITCH (UNLOCK) in the DATA LIST. 12. Check for continuity between driver’s door key
cylinder switch 3P connector terminals No. 3 (LOCK)
Is th e D R IV E R 'S D O O R K E Y C Y L IN D E R S W IT C H and No. 1 (UNLOCK) and body ground individually.
(L O C K ) ( D R IV E R 'S D O O R K E Y C Y L IN D E R S W IT C H
(U N L O C K ) ) in fo rm a tio n in d ic a to r O N w h e n th e k e y
c y lin d e r is in th e L O C K (U N L O C K ) p o s itio n , a n d O F F DRIVER S DOOR KEY CYLINDER SWITCH
w h e n th e k e y is r e tu r n e d to th e n e u tr a l p o s itio n ? 3P CONNECTOR
YES-Substitute the door multiplex control unit and

-EzL
retest.B
1 2
NO-Faulty driver's door key cylinder switch or short
to ground on the WHT/BLU and/or WHT wire.H UNLOCK n r z f LOCK
(WHT) , (WHT/BLU)
8. Disconnect the driver's door key cylinder switch 3P
connector.
KEY CYLINDER SWITCH (LOCK) and DRIVER'S DOOR
KEY CYLINDER SWITCH (UNLOCK) in the DATA LIST.
A r e b o th in fo rm a tio n in d ic a to r s O F F ? Is th e r e c o n tin u ity ?
YES-Faulty driver's door key cylinder switch.® YES-Repair a short in the WHT/BLU (LOCK) or WHT
NO-Go to step 10. (UNLOCK) wire.B
NO-Faulty door multiplex control unit; replace the
power window master switch (see page 22-314).H
DTC 81128: Driver's Door Lock Switch Signal DTC B1129: Driver's Door Lock Knob Switch
Error Signal Error
to follow the instructions in B-CAN system diagnosis test to follow the instructions in B-CAN system diagnosis test
mode A (see page 22-155). mode A (see page 22-155).
ON (II). ON (II).
3. Operate the driver's door look switch several times. 3. Operate the driver's door lock knob switch several
times.
4. Check for DTCs w ith the HDS.
YES-Faulty driver's door lock switch; replace the
power window master switch (see page 22-314).■ YES-Go to step 5.
NO-lntermittent failure. The driver's door lock switch NO-lntermittent failure. The driver's door lock knob
system is OK at this time. Check for loose or poor switch system is OK at this time. Check for loose or
connections.® poor connections.®
5. Select SECURITY from the BODY ELECTRICAL
SYSTEM SELECT MENU, and enter the DATA LIST.
Check the ON/OFF information of the DRIVER'S DOOR
LOCK KNOB SWITCH (LOCK) and DRIVER'S DOOR
LOCK KNOB SWITCH (UNLOCK) in the DATA LIST.
D o e s th e D R IV E R 'S D O O R L O C K K N O B S W IT C H
(L O C K ) in fo rm a tio n in d ic a to r O N a n d D R IV E R 'S D O O R
L O C K K N O B S W IT C H ( U N L O C K ) in fo rm a tio n in d ic a te
O F F w ith th e d riv e r 's d o o r lo c k k n o b s w itc h in L O C K
p o s itio n , a n d d o e s th e D R IV E R 'S D O O R L O C K K N O B
S W IT C H ( L O C K ) in fo rm a tio n in d ic a te O F F a n d
D R IV E R 'S D O O R L O C K K N O B S W IT C H (U N L O C K )
in fo rm a tio n in d ic a te O N w ith th e d riv e r's d o o r lo c k k n o b
s w itc h in th e U N L O C K p o s itio n ?
YES-Faulty door multiplex control unit; replace the
power window master switch (see page 22-314).®
NO-Go to step 6.
6. Disconnect the driver's door lock knob switch 3P
connector.
LOCK KNOB SWITCH (LOCK) and DRIVER'S DOOR
LOCK KNOB SWITCH (UNLOCK) in the DATA LIST.
YES-Check for an open in the driver's door lock knob
switch (LOCK) wire or the driver's door lock knob
switch (UNLOCK) wire between the door multiplex
control unit and the driver's door lock knob switch. If
OK, replace the driver's door lock actuator.!
NO-Go to step 8.
9. Disconnect the power window master switch 23P
connector.
10. Check for continuity between driver's door lock knob
switch 3P connector terminals No. 2 (UNLOCK) and
No. 3 (LOCK) and body ground individually.
DRIVER’S DOOR KEY CYLINDER SWITCH

3P CONNECTOR
1 2 3
Is th e re c o n tin u ity ?
YES-Repair a short in the YEL/RED (LOCK) or
WHT/BLK (UNLOCK) wire.B
NO-The door multiplex control unit is faulty; replace
the power window master switch (see page 22-314).B
1. Troubleshoot the keyless entry/security alarm system by the symptom index.
Symptom Location Possible cause

The door will not lock or unlock with Door lock system • B-CAN troubleshooting test mode A
the remote transmitters. (see page 22-155)
• Control unit input test
Transmitter • Transmitter test
• Transmitter programming
Wire harness Control unit input test
Ignition switch • Ignition switch test
• Ignition key switch test
NOTE: Ifthe key is in the ignition key
switch or the ignition switch is ON (II),
the door lock system does not
function.
Keyless receiver Transmitter programming
Door multiplex control unit Door multiplex control unit input test
The door will not lock. Door switch Door switch test
Door lock system • Door lock knob switch test
The door will not unlock. Door switch Door switch test
Door lock system ® Door lock knob switch test
Transmitter will not program. Transmitter Transmitter test
Ignition switch Ignition switch test
Wire harness Control unit input test
Keyless receiver • B-CAN troubleshooting test mode A
(see page 22-155)
• Power window master switch input
test
Door lock system Control unit input test
Door will relock even if the door is Door switch Door switch test
opened once after unlocking with
remote.
Door will lock and unlock with the Ignition switch • Ignition switch test
remote even ifthe ignition switch is NOTE: Ifthe ignition switch is ON (II),
ON (II). the door lock system does not
function.
Door will lock or unlock with the Ignition switch • Ignition key switch test
remote even ifthe key is in the NOTE: Ifthe key is in the ignition key
ignition key switch. switch, the door lock system does not
function.
Sometimes door will not lock or Door switch • Door switch test
unlock. Door key cylinder switch • Door key cylinder switch test
Tailgate latch switch • Tailgate latch switch test
Control Unit Input Test
NOTE: Before troubleshooting the keyless entry/security control system, troubleshoot the multiplex integrated control
system first using B-CAN System Diagnosis Test Mode A (see page 22-155).
Make sure the ignition switch to LOCK (0) before troubleshooting the driver's under-dash fuse/relay box.
2. Remove the left kick panel (see page 20-101).
3. Disconnect driver's under-dash fuse/relay box connectors E, G, H, K, N, P, and Q.
NOTE: All connector views are wire side of female terminals.
DRIVER'S UNDER-DASH DRIVER'S UNDER-DASH DRIVER'S UNDER-DASH

FUSE/RELAY BOX FUSE/RELAY BOX FUSE/RELAY BOX
CONNECTOR E (16P) CONNECTOR G(6P) CONNECTOR H (14P)
YEL/BLK YEL/BLK
n_ _r n_ _r
/I/FI
1 2 3 .r— i 4 / / 7 1 JF = I. 1 2 3 4 5 6
u
8 9 / 11(12 13 14 15 3 6 7 8 9 I 10 11 12 13 14
jj 4
/ / r x
YEL BLK GRN/YEL GRN RED/YEL BLK YEL. / GRN/WHT
LT GRN/RED
CONNECTOR N (45P)
o
M |2 |3 } 4 | [5 0
DRIVER'S UNDER-DASH FUSE/RELAY BOX 7 | 8 | 9 | 10 | 11 j 12 J

CONNECTOR K(12P)
1 3 lH K |1 5 |/W 1 1 9 |
YEL/GRN
YEL/BLK
____ iUL. — i
1 2 _F==L_ 3 4 5 /
[231241/1 126 |27 |
6 / | 9 10 11 12 YEL
4 L— i a—r riil
|2 8 M 3 0 ly 1 7 1 f~33~l
YEL/BLK
l~34l 171361 |/|40|41|42|
a
L d Z l Iz 3 Z L iL l

CONNECTOR P (30P) CONNECTOR Q |«P |
RED/WHT GRN YEL ('07 model ) BLK BLK/RED RED/BLU
1 /
/ 2 3 / / 6 / 8 9 10 / / 13 14 / / / 4 5 6
15 / 17 / / 20 / A 4 / / 25 / / / 29 30 / / / / X 11 / / /
/ \ \
BRN/WHT PNK/BLK BLU/BLK
(cont'd)
Control Unit Input Test (cont'd)
• Ifthe terminals are bent, loose or corroded, repair them as necessary, and recheck the system.
5. With the connectors still disconnected, do these input tests at the following connectors.
• Ifthe input tests prove OK, go to step 6.
Cavity Wire Test condition Test: Desired result Possible cause if desired result
is not obtained
K2 YEL/GRN Connect the battery Check actuator operation: • Faulty driver's door lock
K12 YEL/BLK positive terminal to The driver's door lock actuator
terminal K12 (K2), and actuator should lock • An open or high resistance in
terminal K2 (K12) to (unlock). the wire
terminal H9.
N7 YEL/BLK Connect the battery Check actuator operation: • Faulty front passenger's
m YEL positive terminal to The front passenger’s door door lock actuator
terminal N7 (N9), and lock actuator should lock • An open or high resistance in
terminal N9 (N7) to (unlock). the wire
terminal H9.
E2*1 YEL/BLK Connect the battery Check actuator operation: • Faulty tailgate lock actuator
E8*1 YEL positive terminal to The tailgate lock actuator • An open or high resistance in
terminal E2 (E8), and should lock (unlock). the wire
terminal E8 (E2) to
terminal H9.
H3 YEL/BLK Connect the battery Check actuator operation: • Faulty right sliding door lock
H10 YEL positive terminal to The right sliding door lock actuator
terminal H3 (H10), and actuator should lock • An open or high resistance in
terminal H10 (H3) to (unlock). the wire
terminal H9.
P1CT2 YEL With driver's under-dash Check for continuity An open or high resistance in
fuse/relay box connector P between terminal P10 and the wire
(30P) and SRS unit SRS unit connector A (28P)
connector A (28P) terminal No. 21:
disconnected There should be continuity.
*2: '07 model
6. Reconnect all connectors to the driver's under-dash fuse/relay box. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II), and do these
input tests at the following connectors on the driver's under-dash fuse/relay box.
• If all the input tests prove OK, go to step 7.
is not obtained
G6 RED/YEL Under all conditions Measure the voltage to • Blown No. 4 (20 A) fuse in the
ground: passenger's under-dash
voltage. • An open or high resistance in
the wire
E9 BLK In all ignition switch Measure the voltage to • Poor ground (G601) or an
H9 positions ground: open in the ground wire
There should be less than 0.2 • An open or high resistance in
V. the wire
P14 BLK In all ignition switch Measure the voltage to • Poor ground (G401) or an
positions ground: open in the ground wire
V. the wire
P17 BRN/WHT Front passenger's door Measure the voltage to • Poor ground (G504) or an
lock knob switch unlocked ground: open in the ground wire
There should be less than 0.2 • Faulty front passenger's
V. door lock knob switch
• An open or high resistance in
the wire
Front passenger's door Measure the voltage to • Faulty front passenger's
lock knob switch locked ground: door lock knob switch
There should be about 5 V. • A short to ground in the wire
P6 GRN Front passenger's door Measure the voltage to • Poor ground (G504) or an
lock switch unlocked ground: open in the ground wire
V. door lock switch
the wire
lock switch in neutral ground: door lock switch
P20 PNK/BLK Front passenger's door Measure the voltage to • Poor ground (G504) or an
lock switch locked ground: open in the ground wire
V. door lock switch
the wire
lock switch in neutral ground: door lock switch
Q5*1 BLK/WHT Left sliding door lock knob Measure the voltage to • Poor ground (G602) or an
switch unlocked ground: open in the ground wire
There should be less than 0.2 • Faulty left sliding door lock
V. knob switch
the wire
Left sliding door lock knob Measure the voltage to • Faulty left sliding door lock
switch locked ground: knob switch
*1: With power sliding door
*2: Insert the key into the ignition switch and turn the ignition switch to ON (II) before continuing to the next step.
(cont'd)
is not obtained
Q4*1 BLK/RED Right sliding door lock Measure the voltage to • Poor ground (G651) or an
knob switch unlocked ground: open in the ground wire
There should be less than 0.2 • Faulty right sliding door lock
V. knob switch
the wire
Right sliding door lock Measure the voltage to • Faulty right sliding door lock
knob switch locked ground: knob switch
P29 BLU/BLK Transmission range Measure the voltage to • Poor ground (G101, G102) or
switch in P position ground: an open in the ground wire
There should be less than 0.2 • Faulty transmission range
V. switch
the wire
Transmission range Measure the voltage to • Faulty transmission range
switch in other any ground: switch
position than P position There should be about 5 V. • A short to ground in the wire
Q6 RED/BLU Under all conditions Measure the voltage to • Poor ground (G503) or an
ground: open in the ground wire
There should be less than 0.2 • Faulty connections at the
V. audio unit
• Faulty audio unit
the wire
P2 RED/WHT Ignition key inserted into Measure the voltage to • An open or high resistance in
the ignition switch. ground: the wire
There should be less than 0.2 • Faulty ignition key switch
V. • An open or high resistance in
the wire
Ignition switch turned to Measure the voltage to • Faulty ignition key switch
LOCK (0) and ignition key ground: • A short to ground in the wire
removed from the ignition There should be about 5 V.
switch/2
is not obtained
E15 GRN Driver's door open Measure the voltage to • Faulty driver's door switch
ground: • Faulty driver's door switch
There should be less than 0.2 ground
the wire
Driver's door closed Measure the voltage to • Faulty driver's door switch
ground: • A short to ground in the wire
There should be about 5 V.
H12 LT Front passenger's door Measure the voltage to • Faulty front passenger's
GRN/RED open ground: door switch
V. door switch ground
the wire
closed ground: door switch
E14 GRN/YEL Left sliding door open Measure the voltage to • Faulty left sliding door
ground: switch
There should be less than 0.2 • Faulty left sliding door door
V. switch ground
the wire
Left sliding door closed Measure the voltage to • Faulty left sliding door
ground: switch
H13 GRN/WHT Right sliding door open Measure the voltage to • Faulty right sliding door
ground: switch
There should be less than 0.2 • Faulty right sliding door
V. switch ground
the wire
Right sliding door closed Measure the voltage to • Faulty right sliding door
ground: switch
MICU-Rear Junction Box Control Unit

8. Remove the right rear trim (see page 20-110).
9. Disconnect MICU-rear junction box connectors A, B, C, and F.
M IC U -R E A R J U N C T IO N B O X M IC U -R E A R J U N C T IO N B O X
C O N N E C T O R A (1 4 P ) C O N N E C T O R B (9P)
W H T /R E D
-Cl1 n
7 2
7 8 9 10
3 4 5 6
11 12 13 14
1 2 i—i /
5 6 / 8 /
7
LD~^ —u
PUR YEL BLK R E D /Y E L
M IC U -R E A R J U N C T IO N B O X M IC U -R E A R J U N C T IO N B O X
C O N N E C T O R C (6P) C O N N E C T O R F (1 3 P )
BLK RED G R N /B L K *
1 ..J=l. 2 1 / 3 i....... "1 / 5

CD
/ 10 11 /
00
3 / 5 E
X
-- , 7 /
jr r -1
BLU B L U /R E D B L U /R E D *
*: Without power tailgate
• If the terminals are bent, loose or corroded, repair them as necessary and recheck the system.
11. With the connectors still disconnected, do these input tests at the following connectors.
Cavity W ire Test condition Test: Desired result Possible cause if desired result
is not obtained
C3 BLU Connect terminal B8 to Check actuator operation: • Faulty left sliding door lock
‘ C5 BLU/RED terminal C3 (C5), and The left sliding door lock actuator
terminal C5 (C3) to actuator should lock • An open or high resistance in
terminal C1 (unlock). the wire
12. Reconnect all connectors to the MICU-rear junction box. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II), and do these input tests at
the following connectors on the MICU-rear junction box.
is not obtained
A6 WHT/RED Under all conditions Measure the voltage to • Blown No. 15 (40 A) fuse in
ground: the under-hood fuse/relay
There should be battery box
voltage. • Blown No. 7 (7.5 A) fuse in
the driver's under-dash
fuse/relay box
the wire
A12 YEL Ignition switch ON (II) Measure the voltage to • Blown No. 21 (7.5 A) fuse in
ground: the driver's under-dash
the wire
B8 RED/YEL Under all conditions Measure the voltage to • Blown No. 22 (AS F/B) (70 A)
ground: fuse in the under-hood
voltage. • Blown No. 4 (20 A) fuse in the
passenger's under-dash
fuse/relay box
the wire
A13 BLK Under all conditions Measure the voltage to • Poor ground (G652) or an
C1 ground: open in the ground wire
V. the wire
A7 PUR Fuel fill door open Measure the voltage to • Poor ground (G603) or an
There should be less than 0.2 • Faulty fuel fill door switch
the wire
Fuel fill door closed Measure the voltage to • Faulty fuel fill door switch
C2 RED Left sliding door lock knob Measure the voltage to • Poor ground (G602) or an
switch locked ground: open in the ground wire
There should be less than 0.2 • Faulty left sliding door lock
V. knob switch
the wire
Left sliding door lock knob Measure the voltage to • Faulty left sliding door lock
switch unlocked ground: knob switch
F3* GRN/BLK Tailgate latch switch open Measure the voltage to • Poor ground (G701) or an
There should be less than 0.2 • Faulty tailgate latch switch
the wire
Tailgate latch switch Measure the voltage to • Faulty tailgate latch switch
closed ground: • A short to ground in the wire
(cont'd)
is not obtained
F10* BLU/RED Tailgate lock knob switch Measure the voltage to • Poor ground (G701) or an
unlocked ground: open in the ground wire
There should be less than 0.2 • Faulty tailgate lock knob
V. switch
the wire
Tailgate lock knob switch Measure the voltage to • Faulty tailgate lock knob
locked ground: switch
14. Remove the under-hood fuse/relay box (see page 22-105).
15. Remove the under cover from the under-hood fuse/relay box, and disconnect connector H (18P).
UNDER-HOOD FUSE/RELAY BOX CONNECTOR H (18P)
BLU/RED GRN/BLK
1 2 3 4I— I / 6 7 8
9 11 12 13 14 15 17 18
r
BLU/RED
• If the terminals look OK, goto step 17.
17. With the connector still disconnected, do these input tests at the following connectors.
is not obtained
H1 BLU/RED Under all conditions Connect the battery power to • Faulty horn
H9 terminal H1 (H9) • An open or high resistance in
momentarily: the wire
The horn should sound.
18. Reconnect the connector to the under-hood fuse/relay box, turn the ignition switch to ON (II) and do the input test at
the appropriate connector on the under-hood fuse/relay box.
• If a test indicates a problem, find and correct the cause, then recheck the system.
• Ifthe input test proves OK, go to step 19.
is not obtained
H2 GRN/BLK Hood open Measure the voltage to • Poor ground (G301) or an
There should be less than 0.2 • Faulty security hood switch
the wire
Hood closed Measure the voltage to • Faulty security hood switch
Door M ultiplex C ontrol U nit

20. Remove the power window master switch (see page 22-314).
21. Disconnect the 23P connector from the power window master switch (door multiplex control unit).
DOOR MULTIPLEX CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR (23P)
BLK BLK WHT/BLK WHT/BLU
A .
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
WHT/RED
\
GRN/RED
7 .\ \
YEL WHT YEL/RED
• if the terminals look OK, go to step 23.
23. With the connector still disconnected, do these input tests at the following connectors.
• Ifthe test indicates a problem, find and correct the cause, then recheck the system.
• If the input tests prove OK, go to step 24.
is not obtained
16 GRN/RED Under all conditions Check for continuity An open in the B-CAN wire
between terminal No. 16 and
driver's under-dash
fuse/relay box connector J
terminal No. 4:
Check for continuity A short to ground in the B-CAN
between terminal No. 16 and wire
body ground:
There should be no
continuity.
24. Reconnect the 23P connector to the power window master switch (door multiplex control unit). Turn the ignition
switch to ON (II) and do these input tests at the following connectors.
is not obtained
7 WHT/BLK Driver's door lock knob Measure the voltage to • Poor ground (G601) or an
switch unlocked ground: open in the ground wire
There should be less than 0.2 • Faulty driver's door lock
V. knob switch
the wire
Driver's door lock knob Measure the voltage to • Faulty driver's door lock
switch locked ground: knob switch
22 YEL/RED Driver's door lock knob Measure the voltage to • Poor ground (G601) or an
switch locked ground: open in the ground wire
There should be less than 0.2 • Faulty driver's door lock
V. knob switch
the wire
Driver's door lock knob Measure the voltage to • Faulty driver's door lock
switch unlocked ground: knob switch
8 WHT/BLU Driver's door key cylinder Measure the voltage to © Poor ground (G601) or an
switch in LOCK ground: open in the ground wire
There should be less than 0.2 • Faulty driver's door key
V. cylinder switch
the wire
Driver's door key cylinder Measure the voltage to • Faulty driver's door key
switch in neutral ground: cylinder switch
Driver's door key cylinder Measure the voltage to
switch in UNLOCK ground:
21 WHT Driver's door key cylinder Measure the voltage to • Poor ground (G601) or an
switch in UNLOCK ground: open in the ground wire
There should be less than 0.2 • Faulty driver's door key
V. cylinder switch
the wire
Driver's door key cylinder Measure the voltage to • Faulty driver's door key
switch in neutral ground: cylinder switch
Driver's door key cylinder Measure the voltage to
switch in LOCK ground:
25. If all the input tests prove OK, and no DTCs were found during MICS troubleshooting (B-CAN System Diagnostic Test
Mode A) (see page 22-155), go to the B-CAN system input and output index (see page 22-144). If multiple failures are
found on more than one control unit, replace the driver's under-dash fuse/relay box (includes the MICU). If input
failures are related to a particular control unit, replace that control unit.
Door Lock Actuator Test
Driver's/Front passenger's door Sliding door

1. Remove the door panel (see page 20-8). 1. Remove the sliding door panel (see page 20-21).
2. Disconnect the 2P connector from the actuator. 2. Disconnect the 2P connector from the actuator.
3. Check actuator operation by connecting power and

NOTE: The illustration shows the driver's door. ground according to the table. To prevent damage to
the actuator, apply battery voltage only momentarily.
ground according to the table. To prevent damage to
\ Terminal
the actuator, apply battery voltage only momentarily. 1 2
Position \
Terminal
Position
1 2 LOCK © ©
UNLOCK © ©
LOCK
© ©
UNLOCK 4. Ifthe actuator does not operate as specified, replace
© © it.
4. If the actuator does not operate as specified, replace
it.
Tailgate Lock Actuator Test Front Passenger's Door Lock
Switch Test
Without Power Tailgate 1. Remove the front passenger's power window switch
(see page 22-315).
1. Open the tailgate.
2. Disconnect the 10P connector from the switch.
2. Remove the tailgate trim panel (see page 20-113).
3. Disconnect the 2P connector from the actuator.
3. Check for continuity between the terminals.

• There should be continuity between terminals No. 2
and No. 9 when the door lock switch is in the LOCK
position and no continuity when the switch is in the
ground according to the table. To prevent damage to
UNLOCK position.
the actuator, apply battery voltage only momentarily.
• There should be continuity between terminals No. 1
\ Terminal and No. 9 when the door lock switch is in the
1 2 UNLOCK position and no continuity when the
Position \ switch is in the LOCK position.
LOCK 0 4. Ifthe continuity is not as specified, replace the front
0 passenger's power window assembly.
UNLOCK 0 ©
5. Ifthe actuator does not operate as specified, replace
it.
Door Lock Knob Switch Test
Driver's door Front passenger's door

1. Remove the driver's door panel (see page 20-8). 1. Remove the front passenger's door panel (see page
20-8).

• There should be continuity between terminals No. 1 3. Check for continuity between the terminals.
and No. 3 when the door lock knob switch is in the There should be continuity between terminals No. 2
LOCK position and no continuity when the switch is and No. 3 when the door lock knob switch in the
in the UNLOCK position. UNLOCK position and no continuity when the switch
• There should be continuity between terminals No. 1 is in the LOCK position.
and No. 2 when the door lock knob switch is in the
UNLOCK position and no continuity when the 4. If the continuity is not as specified, replace the door
switch is in the LOCK position. lock actuator.
4. Ifthe continuity is not as specified, replace the door

lock actuator.
Left sliding door Right sliding door
1. Remove the left sliding door panel (see page 20-21). 1. Remove the right sliding door panel (see page 20-21).
2. Disconnect the 3P connector from the actuator. 2. Disconnect the 3P connector from the actuator.

• There should be continuity between terminals No. 1 3. Check for continuity between the terminals.
and No. 3 when the door lock knob switch is in the
LOCK position and no continuity when the door lock There should be continuity between terminals No. 2
knob switch is in the UNLOCK position. and No. 3 when the door lock knob switch is in the
UNLOCK position and no continuity when the door
• With power sliding door only:
lock knob switch is in the LOCK position.
There should be continuity between terminals No. 1
and No. 2 when the door lock knob switch is in the 4. If the continuity is not as specified, replace the door
UNLOCK position and no continuity when the door lock actuator.
lock knob switch is in the LOCK position.
4. If the continuity is not as specified, replace the door
lock actuator.
Tailgate Lock Knob Switch Test Door Key Cylinder Switch Test
Without Power Tailgate 1. Remove the driver's door panel (see page 20-8).
1. Open the tailgate. 2. Disconnect the 3P connector from the key cylinder
switch.
2. Remove the tailgate trim panel (see page 20-113).

4. Check for continuity between the terminals. • There should be continuity between terminals No. 2
and No. 3 when the door key cylinder switch is in
LOCK position. (Except VAN and LX models)
and No. 3 when the tailgate lock knob switch in the
UNLOCK position and no continuity when the switch • There should be no continuity between terminals
No. 2 and No. 3 when the door key cylinder switch is
is in the LOCK position.
in the neutral or UNLOCK position. (Except VAN
5. If the continuity is not as specified, replace the tailgate and LX models)
lock actuator. • There should be continuity between terminals No. 1
and No. 2 when the door key cylinder switch is in
UNLOCK position.
• There should be no continuity between terminals
No. 1 and No. 2 when the door key cylinder switch is
in the neutral or LOCK position.
4. If the continuity is not as specified, replace the door
key cylinder assembly (see page 20-10).
Security Hood Switch Test Fuel Fill Door Switch
Test/Replacement
1. Open the hood. 1. Remove the left rear side trim panel (see page
20-110).
2. Disconnect the 2P connector from the security hood
switch. 2. Disconnect the 2P connector (A) from the fuel fill door
switch (B).

and No. 2 when the hood is opened (latch released).
There should be no continuity between terminals No.
1 and No. 2 when the hood is closed (latch pushed
down).
3. Check for continuity between fuel fill door switch 2P
4. If the continuity is not as specified, replace the hood connector terminals No. 1 and No. 2.
switch.
There should be no continuity with the fuel fill door
switch knob (C) pushed.
There should be continuity with the fuel fill door
switch knob (C) released.
4. Ifthe check is not as specified, replace the switch.
CESS Articulated Harness Test

2. Disconnect connector A (16P)* and connector B (8P) from the sliding door wire harness.
CONNECTOR B (8P)
CONNECTOR A (16P)*
Terminal side of 1 f=3 2 3
male terminals 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 i= l 4 5 6 7 Terminal side of
male terminals
/ 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
CONSTANT ELECRIC1TY
SUPPLY SYSTEM (CESS)
HARNESS
CONNECTOR D (8P)
1 F=l. 2 3
4 5 6 7 8
0
El
1 3 4 5 7
8 9 10 11112 14 15 /
CO
*: W ith power sl i ding door

3. Disconnect connector C (16P)* and connector D (8P) from the floor wire harness.
connector A (16P)* connector C {16P)* connector B (8P) connector D (8P)

A1 C4 B1 D1
A2 C3 B2 D2
A3 C7 B3 D3
A4 C11 B4 D4
A5 C13 B5 D5
A6 C2 B6 D6
A7 C9 B7 D7
A8 (Not used) C16 (Not used) B8 D8
A9 C1
A10 C15
A11 C14
A12 C6
A13 C12
A14 C10
A15 C5
A16 C8
*: With power sliding door
4. Check for continuity between CESS articulated harness connector A (16P) and connector C (16P) terminals and
connector B (8P) and connector D (8P) terminals while sliding the door from fully open to fully closed. There should be
continuity through the full range of motion. If there is a lack of continuity at any point of motion, replace the CESS
articulation harness.
CESS Articulated Harness Replacement
1. Remove the sliding door panel (see page 20-21), and rear side trim panel (see page 20-110).
2. Disconnect the 16P* and 8P connectors (A) from the sliding door wire harness.
*: With power sliding door
3. Disconnect the 16P* and 8P connectors (B) from the floor wire harness.
4. Remove the two screws, clip and bolt, then remove the CESS articulated harness (C).
Transmitter Test
NOTE: Without HDS

• Ifthe doors unlock or lock with the transmitter, but the
LED on the transmitter does not come on, the LED is 1. Press the transmitter! lock or unlock button five or six
faulty; replace the transmitter. times to reset the transmitter.
• If any door is open, you cannot lock the doors with the • If the locks work, the transmitter is O K .I
transmitter. • If the locks don't work, go to step 2.
9 If the UNLOCK button is pressed on the transmitter
2. Open the transmitter and check for water damage.
and a door is not opened within 30 seconds (variable
• If you find any water damage, replace the
setting), the doors relock automatically.
transmitter.®
• The doors do not lock or unlock with the transmitter if
• If there is no water damage, go to step 3.
the key is in the ignition switch.
9 Panic function will not operate if the ignition switch is 3. Replace the transmitter battery (A) with a new one,
ON (II). and try to lock and unlock the doors with the
• Ifthe lock and unlock function works normally, but the transmitter by pressing the lock or unlock button five
driving position memory system (DPMS) is not linked, or six times.
confirm the link is turned ON (press lock and unlock at • Ifthe doors lock and unlock, the transmitter is OK.H
the same time until the LED blinks once), then check • If the doors don't lock and unlock, go to step 4.
for problems in the DPMS (see page 22-463) or B-CAN
System Diagnosis Test Mode A (see page 22-155).
Refer to System Description (see page 22-198) for
more information.
9 If the panic function works, the transmitter is
programmed to the system.
With HDS
Do a transmitter test using the HDS by selecting the
KEYLESS INSPECTION MENU.
4. Reprogram the transmitter (see page 22-232), then try

to lock and unlock the doors.
• Ifthe doors lock and unlock, the transmitter is OK.B
• If the doors don't lock and unlock, try and program
to another vehicle.
- Ifthe transmitter programs to another vehicle, go
to B-CAN System Diagnosis Test Mode A (see
page 22-155).■
- If the transmitter will not program to another
vehicle, replace the transmitter.®
Keyless Transmitter Programming/ Deleting - Manual Method
NOTE: The keyless transmitter attaches to the ignition key and is separate from the immobilizer transponder. It is not
necessary to use the HDS when replacing or deleting an existing transmitter.
• Adding a key (transponder) can only be done with the HDS. Ifthe key being added has a new remote transmitter, it can
be programmed with the HDS at the end of the "ADD A KEY" function (see page 22-458).
• If one or all keys (transponders) are lost, the remote transmitters must be deleted manually. This will assure that all of
the old keyless transmitters have been cleared from the keyless receiver unit memory.
• When replacing the power window master switch (has built-in keyless receiver unit), you must have all of the remote
transmitters that need to be programmed to the car.
• The keyless receiver unit can only store 5 keyless transmitters.
• During programming, pushing the same remote button 5 times will delete all other remotes.
Adding a remote transmitter

Turn the ignition switch to ON (II), push the transmitter's lock or unlock button within 4 seconds and turn the ignition
switch to LOCK (0), turn it back to ON (II) within 4 seconds and back to LOCK (0). Repeat this 2 more times and the locks
should cycle when the transmitter button is pushed. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0) and remove the key. Wait 10
seconds and verify that all remotes function properly.
Adding multiple remote transmitters

should cycle when the transmitter button is pushed. Push the lock or unlock button on each remote to be programmed
within 4seconds of each other. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0) and remove the key. Wait 10 seconds and verify that
all remotes being programmed are functioning properly.
Deleting remotes
should cycle when the transmitter button is pushed. Push the same button 5 more times. This will leave only the current
remote programmed in the keyless receiver unit.
HORNS
Circuit Diagram
UNDER-HOOD
FUSE/RELAY BOX
) No. 13
, (20 A)
D9 RELAY
CONTROL
MODULE
RED
CONTROL BLOCK
K4
GRN/YEL BLU/RED BLU/RED
HORN /O X HORN
©
(High) k V (L ow )
GRN/YEL
GRN/YEL GRN/YEL
HORN
)
CRUISE CONTROL SWITCH
MASTER SWITCH,
SET/RESUME/
CANCEL SWITCH
MULTI-INFORMATION
SWITCH
Horn Test/Replacement Horn Switch Test
1. Remove the right front inner fender: 1. Remove the driver's airbag assembly (see page
• '07 model (see page 20-279) 24-215), and disconnect the horn switch 1P positive
• '08-10 models (see page 20-280) terminal from the cable reel (A).
2. Disconnect the 1P connectors (A) from each horn (B).
2. Using a jumper wire, connect the cable reel side 1P

connector (B) to body ground.
• If the horns sound, replace the horn plate.
• If the horns do not sound, go to step 3.
3. Test the horn by momentarily connecting battery
power to the terminal (A) and ground to the bracket 3. Remove the steering column covers (see page 17-9).
(B). The horn should sound.
Horn Switch Test (cont'd)
4. Disconnect the dashboard w ire harness 20P*1

(13P*2or 5P*3) connector (A) from the cable reel.
20P CONNECTOR*1
pA .
1 2 3 4 / / 8 9 10 Wire side of
11 / / l 14 15 / 17 / / female terminals
$ 5P CONNECTOR*3
1 2[ 03 ]4 5 Wire side of
female terminals
$ 13P CONNECTOR*2

*2: '08-10 EX-L and '07 Touring models
5. Using a jumper wire, connect terminal No. 11*1

(No. r 2 *3) of the dashboard wire harness 20P*1 (13P*2
or 5P*3) connector to body ground.
• If the horns sound, replace the cable reel (see page
24-231).
• If the horns don't sound, check these items:
- No. 13 (20 A) fuse in the under-hood
fuse/relay box.
- Relay control module in the under-hood
fuse/relay box.
- Horns (see page 22-235).
- An open in the wire.
Replacement, page 22-270 FRONT PARKING LIGHT

Adjustment, page 22-271 Bulb Replacement, page 22-268
Bulb Replacement page 22-269

REAR TURN SIGNAL LIGHT
Bulb Replacement page 22-269
LiGHTS-ON INDICATOR
(Touring model)
Circuit Diagram
USA models
(Touring model)
Canada models
DRIVER'S
UNDER-HOOD FUSE/RELAY BOX UNDER-DASH
r bo T y i
(Touring model)
Circuit Diagram - Parking/Side Marker/Taillights/License Plate Lights
UNDER-HOOD FUSE/RELAY BOX DRIVER'S
-LL JX XL _LL _Q_ _LL _£L

m
*1: '07 model

*2: '08-10 models
- - : B-CAN line

IGNITION SWITCH
/B A T A No. 21 (7.5 A)
- WHT---- K ) CH------ BLK/YEL • ---- crx_x>— PG1
IG1 HOT in ON (II) and

START (III) No. 7 (7.5 A) MICU
E9
— crxx)— VBU SG2
B-CAN
I
------------------- ,------------
SG1
D11 X35 X34 | X27 P14
I
I
BLU I
i
XL XL _LL XL
G601 G401 G601 G601

Circuit Diagram - Fog Lights
Touring model
*1: '07 model
*2: '08-10 models
- - : B-CAN line
DRIVER'S
UNDER-HOOD FUSE/RELAY BOX UNDER-DASH DRIVER'S UNDER-DASH FUSE/RELAY BOX
FUSE/RELAY IGNITION SWITCH
BATTERY No. 22 (BAT) No. 23 (IG) BOX
(120 A) (50 A) G1 B1 A2 / baT \ A6 No. 21 (7.5 A)
— cr^jo— — ctxjd— WHT 4 - 0 0 4 - BLK/YEL — c t \ j d --------- IG1
w MICU P14
IG1 HOT in ON (II) SG1
No. 15 (40 A) and START (III) B4 No. 7 (7.5 A)
YEL —<TXjO VBU
B-CAN PG1 SG2
RELAY CONTROL
MODULE ---- #
X34 | D11
i
• BLU
CONTROL
BLK BLOCK H13
AUXILIARY
UNDER-HOOD
FUSE BOX
No. 7 (10 A )*1
(20 A)*
—hT V > - I
I
1
BLU/RED BLU/RED BLU/BLK WHT/RED YEL LT GRN
u 4
FOG
LIGHT
RELAY
BLU/YEL*1
BLU*2
BLU/YEL*1 BLU/YEL*1
BLU*2 BLU*2
2 LEFT 2 RIGHT
, , FOG FOG
)
p ) LIGHT LIGHT
(35 W)* (35 W )*1
1 (55 W)* 1 (55 W )*2
BLK BLK BLK BLK BLK
_o. _£L _Q_ _LL _Q_

G601 G601 G601 G401
Circuit Diagram - Back-up Lights
UNDER-HOOD
FUSE/RELAY BOX
BATTERY No. 22 (BAT) No. 23 (IG)
(120 A) (BOA)
---- cr\jo.- .......cr u >
DRIVER'S
UNDER-DASH
FUSE/RELAY
BOX
IG1 HOT in ON (I!) and

START (III)
GRN GRY WHT
A8
MICU-REAR • NAVIGATION UNIT

JUNCTION • AUTOMATIC
BOX DIMMING
INSIDE MIRROR
• PARKING AND
F1 BACK-UP SENSOR
CONTROL UNIT
GRN
GRN GRN
|3 LEFT M3 RIGHT 8 TRANSMISSION

/ T \ BACK-UP / T \ BACK-UP G range
LIGHT q) SWITCH
% te H
wT, ^ 2 (21 W) Tq (Closed: In R position)
BLK BLK BLK
! i
G701 G701 G101
G102
Circuit Diagram - Brake Lights
UNDER-HOOD
FUSE/RELAY BOX
BATTERY
No. 13(20 A) D9
--- CTVjO---
© -
1 BRAKE PEDAL
POSITION
)
SWITCH
(Closed: Pedal pressed)
WHT/BLK
WHT/ BLK WHT/ BLK

DRIVER'S UNDER-DASH
N26 FUSE/RELAY BOX
PCM
'v 7
MICU
F12
WHT/BLK
MICU-REAR JUNCTION BOX A9
BRAKE LIGHT
FAILURE SENSOR
E3 H2 TRAILER
LIGHTING
CONNECTOR
WHT/ BLK WHT/BLK WHT/ BLK
LEFT RIGHT 1 HIGH
©
BRAKE MOUNT
©
LIGHT >LIGHT BRAKE
3 (21 W) (21 W) LIGHT
2 (16 W)
BLK BLK
_Q_ XL _Q_
G702 G701 G701

DTC Troubleshooting
DTC B1075; Headlight Signal Error 9. Checkfor continuity between under-hood fuse/relay
box connector K (10P) terminal No. 7 and
NOTE: If you are troubleshooting multiple DTCs, be sure wiper/washer switch (combination switch control
to follow the instructions in B-CAN System Diagnosis unit) 8P connector terminal No. 1.
2. Turn the headlights switch from the OFF position to
the ON position. 1 2 F=l / 4 Wire side of
5 6 7 8 9 10 female terminals
Is D T C B 1 0 7 5 In d ic a te d ?
YES-Go to step 4.
NO-lntermittent failure, the headlight circuit is OK at HEADLIGHT
this time. Check for loose or poor connections at BACKUP
under-hood fuse/relay box connector K (10P), and at (WHT)
00
the combination switch connector.® 1 / I 4 Wire side of
female terminals
00
5 / 7
4. With the headlight switch OFF, select LIGHTING
SYSTEM from the HDS, and enter the DATA LIST.
WIPER/WASHER SWITCH 8P CONNECTOR
5. Check the ON/OFF information of the HEADLIGHT
SWITCH (BACK-UP) in the DATA LIST. Is t h e r e c o n t in u it y ?
Is th e in fo r m a tio n in d ic a to r O F F ? YES-Faulty combination switch control unit or relay

control module; substitute a known-good
YES-Go to step 6. wiper/washer switch and retest. If the DTC is no
NO-Go to step 10. longer present, replace the original wiper/washer
switch. If the DTC is still present, the relay control
6. Turn the headlight switch ON. module is faulty, replace the under-hood fuse/relay
box.®
7. Check the ON/OFF information of the HEADLIGHT
SWITCH (BACK-UP) in the DATA LIST. NO-Repair an open in the WHT wire.®
Is th e in fo r m a tio n in d ic a to r O N ? 10. Disconnect under-hood fuse/relay box connector K
(10P).
YES-Faulty relay control module; replace the
under-hood fuse/relay box.®
NO-Go to step 8.
8. Disconnect under-hood fuse/relay box connector K
(10P) and the wiper/washer switch 8P connector.
11. Check for continuity between under-hood fuse/relay 16. Checkfor continuity between under-hood fuse/relay
box connector K (10P) terminal No. 7 and body box connector K (10P) terminal No. 7 and body
ground. ground.
UNDER-HOOD FUSE/RELAY BOX CONNECTOR K (10P) UNDER-HOOD FUSE/RELAY BOX CONNECTOR K (10PJ
1 2 F=) / 4 1 2 F=1 4
5 6 7 8 9 10 5 6 7 8 9 10
HEADLIGHT BACKUP HEADLIGHT BACKUP
(WHT) (WHT)
Is t h e r e c o n tin u ity ? Is t h e r e c o n t in u it y ?
YES-Go to step 12. YES-Repair a short in the WHT wire.B
NO-Faulty relay control module; replace the NO-Faulty combination switch control unit; replace
under-hood fuse/relay box.B the wiper/washer switch.■
13. Disconnect the combination light switch 12P
connector from the wiper/washer switch.
14. Check for continuity between under-hood fuse/relay
box connector K (10P) terminal No. 7 and body
ground.
1 2 F=l / 4
5 6 7 8 9 10
HEADLIGHT BACKUP
(WHT)
YES-Go to step 15.
NO-Faulty combination switch control unit; replace
it.a
DTC B1078: Daytime Running Lights Signal 9. Check for continuity between headlight (high beam)
2P connectors terminal No. 2 and under-hood
Error (Canada models)
fuse/relay box connector H (18P) terminals No. 7 (right
NOTE: If you are troubleshooting multiple DTCs, be sure headlight) or No. 8 (left headlight) respectively.
to follow the instructions in B-CAN System Diagnosis UNDER-HOOD FUSE/RELAY B O X CONNECTOR H ( 1 8 P )
Test Mode A (see page 22-155). Wire side of female terminals
Before troubleshooting, check the No. 3 (10 A) and No. 5
(10 A) fuses in the under-hood fuse/relay box, and
headlight bulbs.
ON (II).
3. Operate the parking brake pedal.
H E A D L IG H T (H IG H B E A M ) 2 P C O N N E C T O R S
YES-Go to step 5.
NO-lntermittent failure. The daytime running lights
YES-Go to step 10.
system is OK at this time. Check for loose or poor
connections.® NO-Repair an open in the wire.il
5. Turn the headlight (high beam) ON. 10. Check for continuity between left headlight (high
beam) 2P connector terminal No. 1 and body ground.
D o b o th h e a d lig h ts c o m e o n ?
YES-Go to step 6.
LEFT H E A D L I G H T (HIGH BEAM) 2P CONNECTORS
NO-Go to step 10.
6. Turn the headlight switch ON.
7. Select the TEST MODE menu from the HDS, then
enter the DATA LIST.
8. Check the ON/OFF information of the DAYLIGHT
RELAY in the DATA LIST.
Is th e in f o r m a t io n in d ic a t o r O N ?
YES-Replace the daytime running lights re lay .!
22-192).■
Is th e r e c o n t in u it y ?
YES-Go to step 11.
NO-Repair an open in the wire or poor ground (G301)
or an open in the ground wire.B
11. Check for continuity between right headlight (high DTC B1079: Daytime Running Lights
beam) 2P connector terminal No. 1 and daytime
Malfunction ('08-10 USA models)
running lights relay 5P connector terminal No. 1.
RIGHT HEADLIGHT (HIGH BEAM) 2P CONNECTOR to follow the instructions in B-CAN System Diagnosis
Wire side of female terminals Test Mode A (see page 22-155).
Before troubleshooting, check the No. 3 (10 A) and No. 5
(10 A) fuses in the under-hood fuse/relay box, and
headlight bulbs.
1 3. Make sure the foot parking brake switch is OFF.

2 4. Make sure the headlight switch is OFF.
5 4 3 5. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHTS RELAY 5P CONNECTOR
Terminal side of female terminals Is D T C B 1 0 7 9 in d ic a te d ?
Is t h e r e c o n t in u it y ? YES-Go to step 7.
YES-Test the daytime running lights relay (see page NO-lntermittent failure, the daytime running lights
22-114). If OK, faulty relay control module; replace the system is OK at this time. Check for loose or poor
under-hood fuse/relay box.® connections.®
NO-Repair an open in the wire.H 7. Turn the headlight (high beam) ON.
Do b o t h h e a d l i g h t s c o m e o n ?
YES-Go to step 8.
NO-lf one of the headlights doesn't come on, check
the fuse and bulb, and for a poor ground (G201,
G301), an open in the ground wire, an open or high
resistance in the wire. If both headlights don't come
on, go to step 11.
8. Turn the headlight switch OFF.
9. Select LIGHTING SYSTEM from the HDS, and enter
the DATA LIST.
10. Check the ON/OFF information of the DRL Command
in the DATA LIST.
Is th e in fo r m a tio n in d ic a to r O N ?
YES-Go to relay control module input test (see page
22-192).®
NO-Substitute a known-good daytime running lights
control unit and recheck the system.®
11. Check the headlight bulbs. 15. Checkfor continuity between each headlight high
beam 2P connector terminal No. 1 and body ground.
A r e b o th b u lb s O K ?
YES-Go to step 12. HEADLIGHT {HIGH BEAM) 2P CONNECTORS
NO-Replace the blown bulb, and recheck the
system.® LEFT RIGHT
12. Disconnect the 2P connector from each headlight

high beam.
13. Disconnect under-hood fuse/relay box connector H
(18P).
14. Check for continuity between left headlight high beam
2P connector terminal No. 2 and under-hood
fuse/relay box connector H (18P) terminal No. 8, and
between right headlight high beam 2P connector Wire side of female terminals
terminal No. 2 and under-hood fuse/relay box
connector H (18P) terminal No. 7. Is t h e r e c o n t in u it y ?
UNDER-HOOD FUSE/RELAY BOX CONNECTOR H (18P) YES-Faulty relay control module; replace the
under-hood fuse/relay box.®
NO-Repair an open in the wire or a poor ground
(G201, G301) or an open in the ground wire.®
HEADLIGHT (HIGH BEAM) 2P CONNECTORS

YES-Go to step 15.
NO-Repair an open in the wire.®
DTC B1255: Combination Switch Control Unit DTC B1275: Headlight Switch OFF Position
Lost Comm unication W ith MICU Circuit M alfunction
NOTE: If you are troubleshooting multiple DTCs, be sure DTC B1276: Headlight Switch Parking
(SMALL) Position Circuit M alfunction
1. Clear the DTCs with the HDS. DTC B1278: Headlight Switch ON Position
Circuit Malfunction
ON (II). NOTE: If you are troubleshooting multiple DTCs, be sure
YES-Go to step 4.
NO-lntermittent failure, MICU is OK at this time. ON (II), and wait for 2 seconds.
Checkfor loose or poor connection at combination
3. Turn the parking (SMALL) light switch ON and wait for
switch control unit connector (8P), and at driver's
2 seconds.
under-dash fuse/relay box connector X (39P). If the
connections are good, check the battery condition 4. Turn the headlight light switch (LOW) ON and wait for
(see page 22-111) and the charging system.® 2 seconds.
4. Check for DTCs with the HDS. 5. Change the dimmer switch position from low beam to
high beam and wait for 2 seconds.
A r e D T C s B 1 0 5 5 , B1106, B 1 1 5 7 , B1355, B 1 5 5 6 , B 1 8 0 6 ,
B1955, B2005, a n d B2055 a l s o i n d i c a t e d ? 6. Check for DTCs with the HDS.
YES-Go to MICU input test (see page 2 2 - 1 8 5 ) .■ Are DTCs B 1 2 7 5 , B 1 2 7 6 , o r B 1 2 7 8 indicated?
NO-Replace the combination switch control unit.B YES-Go to step 7.
NO-lntermittent failure, the combination light switch
and the combination switch control unit are OK at this
time. Check for loose or poor connections at the
combination light switch connector, and at the
combination switch control unit connector.®
9. Do the combination light switch test (see page
22-258).
Is th e c o m b in a tio n lig h t s w itc h O K ?

YES-Faulty combination switch control unit, replace
the wiper/washer switch.®
NO-Replace the combination light switch.®
DTC B1277: Headlight Switch AUTO Position DTC B1279: Headlight Switch DIMMER
Circuit Malfunction Position Circuit Malfunction
Touring mode! NOTE: If you are troubleshooting multiple DTCs, be sure
NOTE: If you are troubleshooting multiple DTCs, be sure Test Mode A (see page 22-155).
Test Mode A (see page 22-155). 1. Clear the DTCs with the HDS.
1. Clear the DTCs with the HDS. 2. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0) and then back to
ON (II), then turn the headlight switch ON.
ON (II), and wait for at least 2 seconds. 3. Change the combination light switch from low beam
to high beam and wait for at least 2 seconds.
3. Turn the light switch (AUTO position) ON and wait for
at least 2 seconds. 4. Pull and hold the combination light switch lever and
keep the passing switch position for at least 2
4. Check for DTCs with the HDS. seconds.
Is D T C B 1 2 7 7 in d ic a t e d ? 5. Check for DTCs with the HDS.
YES-Go to step 5. Is D T C B 1 2 7 9 in d ic a t e d ?
NO-lntermittent failure, the combination light switch YES-Go to step 6.
time. Check for loose or poor connections at the NO-lntermittent failure, the combination light switch
combination light switch connector, and at the and the combination switch control unit are OK at this
combination switch control unit connector.® time. Check for loose or poor connections at the
combination switch connector, and at the
5. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). combination switch control unit connector.®
6. Disconnect the combination light switch 12P 6. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
7. Do the combination light switch test (see page connector from the wiper/washer switch.
22-258).
8. Do the combination light switch test (see page
Is th e c o m b in a tio n lig h t s w itc h O K ? 22-258).
YES-Faulty combination switch control unit, replace Is th e c o m b in a tio n lig h t s w itc h O K ?
YES-Faulty combination switch control unit, replace
NO-Replace the combination light switch.® the wiper/washer switch.®
NO-Replace the combination light switch.®
DTC B1280: Turn Signal Switch Circuit DTC B15S5: Autom atic Lighting Control Unit
M alfunction Lost Communication W ith Combination
Switch Control Unit (AUTOLT Message)
Touring model
2. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), and then back to Test Mode A (see page 22-155).
ON (II).
3. Turn the turn signal switch to the left turn position and
wait for at least 2 seconds.
ON (II).
4. Turn the turn signal switch to the right turn position
and wait for at least 2 seconds.
(see page 22-191).®
YES-Go to step 6.
NO-Go to step 4.
NO-lntermittent failure, the combination light switch
4. Measure the voltage between automatic lighting
control unit 14P connector terminals No. 1 and No. 8,
time. Check for loose or poor connections at the
and terminals No. 7 and No. 9 respectively.
combination switch connector, and at the
combination switch control unit connector.®
AUTOMATIC LIGHTING CONTROL UNIT 14P CONNECTOR
7. Disconnect the combination light switch 12P BLK/YEL
connector from the wiper/washer switch. 1 2 / C p 4 5 6
8. Check for short in the turn signal switch terminals in
each switch position (see page 22-258).
7 8 9 / X/ / / 14
/s t h e r e a s h o r t ?
YES-Faulty combination light switch, replace it.®
NO-Faulty combination switch control unit, replace
YES-Faulty automatic lighting control unit.®
NO-Repair an open in the wire, a blown No. 30 fuse or
No. 21 (7.5 A) fuse in the driver's under-dash
fuse/relay box, or poor ground (G501) or an open in
the ground wire.®
DTC B1556: Automatic Lighting Control Unit
Lost Communication With MICU (MICU
Message)
Touring model
ON (II).
A re D T C s B 1 0 5 5 , B 1 1 0 6 , B 1 1 5 7 , B 1 2 5 5 , B 1 3 5 5 , B 1 5 5 6 ,
B 1 8 0 6 , B 1 9 5 5 , B 2 0 0 5 , a n d B 2 0 5 5 in d ic a te d ?
NO-Go to step 4.
4. Measure the voltage between automatic lighting
control unit 14P connector terminals No. 1 and No. 8,
and terminals No. 7 and No. 9 respectively.
AUTOMATIC LIGHTING CONTROL UNIT 14P CONNECTOR
YES-Faulty automatic lighting control unit.B
NO-Repair an open in the wire, a blown No. 30 (10 A)
fuse or No. 21 (7.5 A) fuse in the driver's under-dash
fuse/relay box, or poor ground (G501) or an open in
the ground wire.B
Combination Light Switch Test/Replacement

2. Disconnect the combination light switch 12P connector (A) from the wiper/washer switch (B).
3. Turn the steering wheel to access the combination switch mounting screws.
4. Remove the two screws, then slide out the combination light switch (A).
5. Inspect the connector terminals to be sure they are all making good contact.
• If the terminals look OK, checkfor continuity between the terminals in each switch position according to the tables.
1 2 3 4 5 /
7 8 / 10 11 12
Light switch:
\ Terminal 1 2 3 8 7 12
Position \
OFF U n
KJ
-:o<£ o —- o
Headlight switch LOW U KJ rs
w
ID f'N
w {J KJ
HIGH Hi
OFF
Passing switch rkJ\
ON Kj
Turn signal switch:

\ Terminal
4 10 12
Position \
LEFT o -------- — o
Neutral
RIGHT o— - — o
Fog light switch:

*\ Terminal
5 12
Position \
OFF
ON a — - — o
6. If the continuity is not as specified, replace the switch.
/
Automatic Lighting Control Unit Input Test
1. Before testing the automatic lighting control functions, troubleshoot the multiplex integrated control system using
B-CAN System Diagnosis Test Mode A (see page 22-155).
2. Remove the driver's dashboard lower cover (see page 20-135).
3. Disconnect the 14P connector (A) from the automatic lighting control unit (B).
-RED
1 2 / c J 4 5 6
7 8 9/I X / / / 14
RED/BLU
YEL \
\
BLK BLK
5. Reconnect the automatic lighting control unit connector, then do these input tests at the following connectors.
• If all the inputs test prove OK, go to step 6.
1 BLK/YEL Ignition switch ON (II) Measure the voltage to ground: • Blown No. 30 (10 A) fuse in
There should be battery voltage. the driver's under-dash
fuse/relay box
• Faulty driver's under-dash
fuse/relay box
• Faulty passenger's
under-dash fuse/relay box
in the wire
7 YEL Ignition switch ON (ll) Measure the voltage to ground: • Blown No. 21 (7.5 A) fuse
There should be battery voltage. in the driver's under-dash
fuse/relay box
fuse/relay box
in the wire
8 BLK In all ignition switch Measure the voltage to ground: • Poor ground (G501) or an
9 positions There should be less than 0.2 V. open in the ground wire
in the wire
2 WHT Ignition switch ON (II) Measure the voltage to ground: An open or high resistance in
and headlight switch ON There should be less than 0.2 V. the wire
4 LT GRN Under all conditions Measure the continuity between An open in the B-CAN wire
terminal No. 4 and driver's
connector X (39P) terminal
No. 18:
Automatic Lighting Control Unit Input Test (cont'd)
6. Connect a voltmeter and jumper wires as shown, then turn the ignition switch to ON (II) and do this input test at the
following connector.
• If test indicates a problem, find and correct the cause, then recheck the system.
• If the input test proves OK, replace the automatic lighting control unit.
JUMPER WIRE SIO (RED)
6 RED Cover the automatic Measure the voltage between • Faulty automatic lighting
lighting sensor. (Cut the terminal No. 6 and body ground: sensor
light off completely with There should be less than 0.2 V. • An open or high resistance
a dark cloth.) in the wire
Shine light on the Measure the voltage between
automatic lighting terminal No. 6 and body ground:
sensor. There should be about 5 V.
Daytime Running Lights Control Unit Input Test
'08-10 USA models

NOTE:
• Before testing, troubleshoot the multiplex integrated control system first using B-CAN System Diagnosis Test Mode A
(see page 22-155).
• Make sure the headlights high beam come on normally with the combination light switch ON.
2. Disconnect the 14P connector (A) from the daytime running lights control unit (B).
YEL BLK
Daytime Running Lights Control Unit Input Test (cont'd)
4. Reconnect the connector to the daytime running lights control unit, and do these input tests at the connector.
• If the input test proves OK, replace the daytime running lights control unit.
8 YEL Ignition switch ON (II) Measure the voltage to ground: • Blown No. 21 (7.5 A) fuse
There should be battery voltage. in the driver's under-dash
fuse/relay box
in the wire
1 RED/WHT Under all conditions Measure the voltage to ground: • Blown No. 19(30 A) fuse in
There should be battery voltage. the under-hood fuse/relay
box
• Blown No. 3 (10 A) fuse in
fuse/relay box
in the wire
13 BLK In all ignition switch Measure the voltage to ground: • Poor ground (G401) or an
14 positions There should be less than 0.2 V. open in the ground wire
in the wire
2 BLU/WHT Ignition switch ON (II) Measure the voltage to ground: • Faulty relay control
There should be less than 1.5 V. module in the under-hood
fuse/relay box
in the wire
7 WHT/RED Ignition switch ON (II) Measure the voltage to ground: • Blown No. 3 (10 A) fuse in
with the parking brake There should be about 2.3 V. the under-hood fuse/relay
released box
in the wire
• A short to ground in the
wire
• Faulty parking brake
switch or circuit
Headlight Replacement Headlight Adjustment

2. Disconnect the connectors (A) from the headlight Headlights become very hot during use; do not touch
assembly (B). them or any attaching hardware immediately after
they have been turned off.
*07 model
Before adjusting the headlights:
• Park the vehicle on a level surface.
• Make sure the tire pressures are correct.
• The driver or someone who weighs the same should
sit in the driver's seat (or an equivalent amount of
weight).
1. Clean the outer lens so that you can see the center (A)
of the headlights.
*08-10 models
2. Park the vehicle 25 ft (7.5 m) away from a wall or a

screen (A).
A
3. Remove the bolts and clip (C) from the headlight.

4. Remove the bolt (D) and the corner upper beam (E)
from the headlight.
5. Install the headlight in the reverse order of removal.
6. After replacement, adjust the headlights to local
requirement.
Headlight Adjustment (cont'd)
4. Determine if the headlights are aimed properly. 5. If necessary, open the hood and adjust the headlights
to local requirements by turning the vertical adjuster.
Vertical adjustm ent:
Measure the height of the headlights (A). The lights
should reflect 2.1 in (52 mm) below headlight height
(B).
The illustration is shown from back side of

left headlight.
Bulb Replacement
Headlight (Low Beam) Headlight (High Beam)

1. Disconnect the 2P connector (A) from the headlight. 1. Disconnect the 2P connector (A) from the headlight.
Headlight (low beam): 51 W (HB4) Headlight (high beam): 60W(HB3)
2. Turn the bulb socket (B) 45 ° counterclockwise to

remove it from the headlight housing.
2. Turn the bulb socket (B) 45 ° counterclockwise to
3. Install a new bulb in the reverse order of removal.
remove it from the headlight housing.
(cont'd)
Bulb Replacement (cont'd)
Front Turn Signal Light Front Parking Light

1. Turn the bulb socket (A) 45 ° counterclockwise to 1. Turn the bulb socket (A) 45 ° counterclockwise to
remove it from the headlight housing. remove it from the headlight housing.
Front Turn Signal Light: 21 W Front Parking Light: 1.5 CP ('07 model)
3 CP ('08-10 models)

Brake Light/Turn Signal/Outer Taillight Back-up Light/Inner Taillight
1. Remove the taillight assembly (see page 22-271). 1. Open the tailgate and remove the tailgate lid panel.
2. Turn the bulb sockets (A) 45 ° counterclockwise to 2. Turn the bulb sockets (A) 45 ° counterclockwise to
remove it from the housing. remove it from the housing.
Rear Turn Signal Light (B): 21 W Back-up Light (B); 21 W
Brake Light/Taillight (C); 21/5 W Taillight (C); 3 CP ('07 model)
2 CP ('08-10 models)
*07 model
*07 model
A €
'08-10 models
'08-10 models
Fog Light Replacement
louring model 3. Disconnect the 2P connector, and Turn the bulb

socket (A) 45 ° counterclockwise to remove it from the
1. Remove the bolt from the fog light (A). housing.
*07 model Fog Light: 35 W (Hi) ('07 model)
55 W (H11) ('08-10 models)
B
'07 model
5. After replacement, adjust the fog lights to local

requirements.
Fog Light Adjustment Taillight Replacement
1. Adjust the fog lights to local requirements by turning Taillight

the adjuster (A).
1. Remove the covers (A) and two bolts from the taillight
'07 model (B).
*08-10 models 2. Carefully pull out the taillight, and disconnect the
connectors (C) from the taillight
3. Install the taillight in the reverse order of removal.
Taillight Replacement (cont'd) License Plate Light Replacement
Inner Taillight '07 model

NOTE: For bulb replacement, refer to Bulb Replacement 1. Remove the license plate light (A), and disconnect the
(see page 22-269). 2P connector (B) from the light.
1. Remove the tailgate trim panel (see page 20-113). License Plate Light: 5 W x2
2. Remove the license trim (see page 20-272).

3. Disconnect the connectors (A) from the inner taillight
(B).
*07 model
2. Remove the lens (C) from the light, then replace the
bulb (D).
3. Install the light in the reverse order of removal.
*08-10 models
4. Remove the four nuts and inner taillight.

5. install the inner taillight in the reverse order of
removal.
High Mount Brake Light
Replacement
'08-10 models 1. Remove the covers (A) and screws from the high
mount brake light (B).
1. Push the license plate light (A) to the slide to release
the retaining spring, and pull out the license plate High Mount Brake Light: 16 W
light.
License Plate Light; 5 W x2
2. Turn the bulb socket (C) 45 ° counterclockwise to

remove it from the housing.
light
3. Separate the license plate light and the housing (C),
then remove the bulb (D).
Brake Pedal Position Switch Test
1. Disconnect the 4P connector (A) from the brake pedal

position switch (B).
2. Check for continuity between terminals No. 1 and

No. 2.
• There should be continuity when the brake pedal is
pressed.
• There should be no continuity when the brake pedal
is released.
3. Check for continuity between terminals No. 3 and
No. 4.
• There should be no continuity when the brake pedal
is pressed.
• There should be continuity when the brake pedal is
released.
4. Ifthe test results are not as specified, adjust the switch
or adjust the pedal height (see page 19-6).
If the test results are still not as specified, adjust the
switch
Circuit Diagram
DRIVER'S
(120 A) (50 A) A2 A6 No. 21 (7.5 A)
€T\0>— — <JXO — —- WHT —- W H T -- K) CH---- BLK/YEL ■ — crvx)----

No. 15 (40 A) START (III) No. 7 (7.5 A)
D6 B4
--- CTVjO---
No. 16 (15 A) E3 D17
— crvx)— - WHT/BLK -
X34
I
I N45 X13
I No. 7 (7.5 A) FUSE
I (PASSENGER'S
I UNDER-DASH FUSE/
i RELAY BOX)
I
I
I
I
I
WHT/RED YEL LT GRN RED/BLK WHT/BLK
WIPER/WASHER
SWITCH
COMBINATION SWITCH
CONTROL UNIT
------q---------Q--- Q ----
v
DASH LIGHTS
O O BRIGHTNESS
CONTROLLER
LEFT \|/ RIGHT TURN (In the gauge
SIGNAL control module)
SWITCH
COMBINATION LIGHT SWITCH
BLK
*1: '07 model
*2: '08-10 models
- - : B-CAN line
BLK BLK BLK BLK
_LL -L L -Q . -L L _£L
Turn Signal/Hazard Relay Input Test
1. R em ov e the turn signal/hazard relay (A) from the driver's under-dash fuse/relay box (B).
2. Inspect the relay and fuse/relay b ox socket term inals to be sure th ey are all making g o o d contact.
• If th e terminals are bent, lo o se, or corroded, repair them as n ecessary, and recheck the system .
• If the terminals look OK, g o to step 3.
3. Do th e s e input tests at the fuse/relay box.
• If an y test indicates a problem, find and correct the cau se, then recheck the sy stem .
• If all the input tests prove OK, the turn signal/hazard relay m u st be faulty; replace it.
Cavity T est condition Test: Desired result P o ssib le ca u se if desired result is not obtained
6 Under all Measure the voltage to ground: • Blown No. 16 (15 A) fu se in the under-hood
conditions There should be battery voltage. fuse/relay box
• Faulty driver's under-dash fuse/relay box
• An op en or high resistance in the wire
1 Under all Check for continuity to ground: • Poor ground (G601) or an open in the ground
conditions There should be continuity. wire
• An o p en or high resistance in the wire
2 Connect terminal Check the turn signal lights • Blown bulb
No. 6 to terminal operation: • Poor ground (G301, G702) or an op en in the
No. 2 with a The left turn signal lights and ground wire
jum per wire. indicator should c o m e on. • An op e n or high resistance in the wire
3 Connect terminal Check the turn signal lights • Blown bulb
No. 6 to terminal operation: • Poor ground (G201, G701) or an open in the
No. 3 with a The right turn signal lights and ground wire
jumper wire. indicator should c o m e on. • An o p en or high resistance in the wire
4 Ignition switch Measure the voltage to ground: • Poor ground (G601) or an op en in the ground
ON (II) and turn There should be about 10 V. wire
signal switch in • Faulty turn signal switch
Left position. • Faulty driver's under-dash fuse/relay box
5 Ignition switch Measure the v oltage to ground: • An op en or high resistance in the wire
ON (II) and turn There should be about 10 V. • Faulty combination switch control unit*
signal switch in • Faulty MICU*
Right position.
4 Hazard warning M easure the v oltage to ground: • Poor ground (G601)
5 switch ON There should be about 10 V. • Blown No. 16 (15 A) fu se in the under-hood
fuse/relay box
• Faulty hazard warning switch
• An op en or high resistance in the wire
• Faulty MICU*
*: Go to the B-CAN S ystem D iagnosis Test M ode A (see p a ge 22-155).
Hazard Warning Switch Test/Replacement
1. R em ove the dashboard center panel (see p ag e

20-136).
2. D isconnect the 6P con nector (A) from the hazard

warning sw itch /p assen ger's airbag cutoff
indicator (B).
3. Check for continuity b etw een th e term inals in each

sw itch position according to th e table.
Terminal
5 6 3 4
Position \
OFF o - -o
ON o -o o -o
4. If th e continuity is not as specified , replace the bulbs

(C) or th e switch.
5. Install the switch in the reverse order of removal.

FRONT INDIVIDUAL MAP LIGHTS

f (Built into the roof console)
(EX, EX-L, and Touring models)
(VAN, DX, and LX models)
AMBIENT LIGHT/HOMELINK UNIT
Ambient Light Test/Replacement, page 22-287
HomeLink Unit Test, page 22-298
DRIVER'S VANITY PASSENGER'S

MIRROR LIGHT VANITY MIRROR LIGHT
Test/Replacement, page 22-287 Test/Replacement, page 22-287
FRONT PASSENGER’S DOOR COURTESY LIGHT

RIGHT REAR INDIVIDUAL

MAP LIGHTS (2ND, 3RD)
CARGO AREA LIGHT

INTERIOR LIGHTS SWITCH

DRIVER'S DOOR COURTESY LIGHT

LEFT REAR INDIVIDUAL MAP LIGHTS

(2ND, 3RD) TAILGATE LATCH SWITCH
Test/Replacement, page 22-286 (Without power tailgate)
GLOVE BOX LIGHT CLOSER UNIT
(With power tailgate)
Latch/Ratchet Switch Test, page 22-647
Circuit Diagram
UNDER-HOOD FUSE/RELAY BOX DRIVER'S

UNDER-DASH
BATTERY No. 22 (BAT) FUSE/RELAY BOX
(120 A) No. 15 (40 A) B4
— <t \ j d ------------ c r x x > -
S No. 6
(7.5 A) No. 4 (15 A) FUSE
(UNDER-HOOD
FUSE/RELAY
BOX)
W1
WHT/BLU -
WHT/BLU
DASH LIGHTS
BRIGHTNESS
CONTROLLER
(In the gauge
control module)
BLK/RED ■ (EX, EX-L and
Touring models)
No. 7 (7.5 A) FUSE No. 7 (7.5 A) FUSE
(PASSENGER'S (PASSENGER'S
UNDER-DASH FUSE/ UNDER-DASH FUSE/
RELAY BOX) RELAY BOX)
WHT/BLU
Y
RED/BLK RED/BLK
INTERIOR
LIGHTS
SWITCH
*1: '07-08 models
*2: '09-10 models
-WHT/BLU WHT/BLU -
WHT/BLU WHT/BLU
2 2
INTERIOR
LIGHTS
SWITCH
V
1 DRIVER'S 1 FRONT
DOOR PASSENGER'S
COURTESY DOOR
LIGHT COURTESY
YEL (2 CP) LIGHT
(2 CP)
YEL/BLU YEL/GRN
DRIVER'S UNDER-DASH
W4 J2 FUSE/RELAY BOX
P15
MICU
E15 H12 H13
GRN/BLK
GRN LT GRN/RED GRN/YEL GRN/WHT
TAILGATE
LATCH
FULL SWITCH
(Closed:
]> LATCH
II / SWITCH Tailgate
/ (Closed: open)
c!i Tailgate Jp j
unlatched) FRONT LEFT RIGHT
DRIVER'S
CLOSER 1 BLK DOOR PASSENGER'S SLIDING SLIDING
UNIT SWITCH DOOR DOOR DOOR
BLK/YEL (Closed: SWITCH SWITCH SWITCH
Door open) (Closed: (Closed: (Closed:
Door open) Door open) Door open)
POWER
TAILGATE _Cl
CONTROL
UNIT
L G701
(With power tailgate) (Without power tailgate)
Interior Light Switch Tailgate Latch Switch
T est/Replacement Test/Replacement
1. R em ove the center panel (s e e pag e 20-136). 1. Open the tailgate.
2. D isconnect the 6P con n ector (A) from the interior light 2. R em ove the tailgate trim panel (see page 20-113).
switch (B).
3. D isconnect the 2P (or 6P) connector (A ) from the
tailgate latch.
3. R em ov e the sc rew s and th e switch. With power ,

tailgate 1 2 3 4 5 6
4. Check for continuity b etw een the term inals in each
4. Check for continuity betw een terminals No. 1 and

Terminal
1 2 3 4 5 6 No. 2.
Position • With the tailgate o p en, there should be continuity.
OFF a -o • With the tailgate clo sed , there should be no
continuity.
MIDDLE (DOOR) o - -o a -o o - -o
ON 5. Ifthe continuity is not as specified, replace the tailgate
o -0 - -o o - o o
latch.
5. If the continuity is not a s specified, replace the
bulb (C) or the interior lights switch.
Front Individual Map Light Test/Replacement
EX#EX-L#and Touring models VAN, DX#and LX models

1. Carefully pry the lens (A) off with a small screwdriver. 1. Carefully pry the lens (A) off with a small screwdriver.
Front Individual Map Light: 5 W ('07-08 models) Front Individual Map Light: S W ('07-08 models)
8 W ('09-10 models) 8 W ('09-10 models)
2. R em ove the screw s, then rem ove the map light (B)
from the roof co n so le (C).
2. R em ove the screw s, then rem ove the map light (B) 3. D isconnect the 3P connector (D) from the m ap light.
and am bient light/HomeLink unit (C) from the roof
4. Check for continuity betw een the terminals in each
c o n so le (D).
3. D isconnect the 3P connector from the m ap light and
the 10P connector from the am bient light/HomeLink \ Terminal Body
unit. 1 3 ground
Position ^
4. Check for continuity betw een the terminals in each ON o — —® — —o
RIGHT
switch position according to the table. OFF o — —© — I— o
|Lcr
cirrI ON o — —© — r °
\ Terminal Body OFF o — —® — r-O
1 3 ground
Position \
5. Ifthe continuity is not as specified, check the bulb(s). If
ON o — —® — —o the bulb(s) are OK, replace the light.
RIGHT
OFF o — —® — — o
ON O H —© — —o
LEFT
OFF o — —® — — o
5. Ifthe continuity is not as specified, check the bulb(s). If

the bulb(s) are OK, replace the light.
Rear Individual Map Light Cargo Area Light Test/Replacement
T est/Replacement
1. Carefully pry off the lens (A) with a small screwdriver. 1. Turn the light switch OFF.
Rear Individual Map Light 5W 2. Carefully pry off the lens (A) with a small screwdriver.
Cargo Area Light: 8W
A 3. R em ove the tw o mounting screw s.
2. R em ov e the m ounting screw (B). 4. Disconnect the 3P connector (B) from the housing (C).
3. D isconnect the 3P conn ector (C) from the housing (D). 5. Check for continuity betw een the terminals.
• There should be continuity betw een terminals No. 1
4. Check for continuity b etw een the terminals.
and No. 2 with the switch in the MIDDLE position.
• There should be continuity betw een term inals No. 2
• There should be continuity betw een terminals No. 2
and No. 3 with the sw itch ON.
and No. 3 (Body ground) with the switch in the ON
• There should be continuity b etw een term inals No. 1
position.
and No. 2 with the sw itch OFF.
5. Ifthe continuity is not as sp ecifi ed, check the bulb. If
the bulb are OK, replace the light.
Ambient Light Test/Replacement Vanity Mirror Light
Test/Replacement
EX, EX-L, and Touring models 1. Carefully pry off the lens (A) with a small screwdriver.
Vanity Mirror Light; 2W
1. R em ove the front individual m ap light (see page
22-285).
2. D isconnect the 10P connector (A) from the am bient

light/HomeLink unit (B), then rem ove the am bient
light/HomeLink unit from the map light housing (C).
(-)
2. R em ove th e tw o screw s, then rem ove the vanity

mirror light (B).
3. D isconnect the tw o term inals (C) from the vanity

mirror light.
4. Check for continuity b etw een the terminals.

• There should continuity b etw een the terminals with
th e vanity mirror cover o p ened .
3. Connect battery p ow er to terminal No. 4 and ground • There should be no continuity b etw een the
to terminal No. 1. The ambient light should co m e on. term inals, with the vanity mirror cover closed.
If the light d o e s not c o m e on, replace the ambient 5. Ifthe continuity is not as specified, check the bulb or
light/HomeLink unit. the light. Ifthe bulb or light is OK, replace the
sunvisor.
6. Install in the reverse order o f removal.

Glove Box Light Test/Replacement Courtesy Light Replacement
1. Remove the glove box (see page 20-142). EX, EX-L, and Touring m odels
2. D isconnect the 2P con n ector (A) from the glove box 1. Carefully pry off the lens (A) with a small screwdriver.
light (B).
Courtesy Light: 2 CP
Glove Box Light; 3.4 W
2. R em ove the bulb (B) from the socket.
3. Check for continuity betw een term inals No. 1 and

No. 2.
• With the button (C) released, there should be
continuity.
• With the button (C) pressed , there should be no
continuity.
4. If th e continuity is not as specified, check the bulb (D).

If th e bulb is OK, replace the light.
f MULTIPLEX INTEGRATED CONTROL UNIT (MICU)

(Built into under-dash fuse/relay box)
, FRONT INDIVIDUAL MAP LIGHTS (EX, EX-L, and Touring models)

FRONT INDIVIDUAL MAP LIGHTS (VAN, DX, and LX models)
INTERIOR LIGHTS SWITCH
IGNITION KEY SWITCH

Test, page 22-296
IGNITION KEY LIGHT
Test, page 22-296
DRIVER'S DOOR KEY CYLINDER SWITCH

Test, page 22-226
RIGHT REAR INDIVIDUAL

MAP LIGHTS (2ND, 3RD)
PASSENGER'S
DOOR SWITCH
DOOR MULTIPLEX CONTROL

UNIT (Has-built in
keyless receiver antenna)
Input Test, page 22-294 RIGHT SLIDING
DOOR SWITCH
DRIVER S DOOR SWITCH
LEFT SLIDING DOOR SWITCH
LEFT REAR INDIVIDUAL MAP LIGHTS (2ND, 3RD)

T est/Replacement, page 22-286
Circuit Diagram
•: B-CAN line
UNDER-HOOD FUSE/ DRIVER'S DRIVER'S UNDER-DASH
RELAY BOX UNDER-DASH FUSE/RELAY BOX
IGNITION SWITCH
BATTERY
G502 G601
NOTE: Make sure the igniti on switch is turned to LOCK (0) before disconnecting the driver's under-dash fuse/relay box
connectors.
1. Before testing the entry light control functions, troubleshoot the m u Iti pi ex integ rated control sy ste m using B-CAN
S ystem D iagnosis Test M ode A (see page 22-155).
2. R em ove the left kick panel (see p age 20-101).
3. D isconnect driver's under-dash fuse/relay box connectors, E, H, P, and W.
NOTE: All connector v ie w s are sh o w n from wire sid e of fem ale terminals.

CONNECTOR E (16P) CONNECTOR H (14P)
1 n P r
CM
1 3 4 / / 7 1 2 3 4 5 6
CM
00
°ol
9 11 14 15 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
/
BLK GRN/YEL GRN LT GRN/RED GRN/WHT
DRIVER’S UNDER-DASH FUSE/RELAY BOX DRIVER'S UNDER-DASH FUSE/RELAY BOX

CONNECTOR W(5P) CONNECTOR P (30P)
RED/WHT WHT/BLK BLK
U IT
CD
CM
00
00
/ / / 6 / X 10 / / 13 14
1 2 / 4 5
—y
o
00
CM
o
cn
Li 17 / 25 / 29
/ / / / / /
\
YEL
4. Inspect the connector terminals to be sure th ey are all making g o o d contact.

• If the terminals are bent, lo o s e or corroded, repair them as n ecessary, and recheck the sy stem .
• Ifthe terminals look OK, g o to step 5.
(cont'd)
5. With the driver’s under-dash fuse/relay b ox con n ectors still discon nected , do th e s e input tests at the connector.
• If any test indicates a problem, find and correct the cau se, the recheck the system .
• If all the input tests prove OK, g o to step 6.
Cavity Wire Test condition Test: Desired result Possible cause if desired result is
not obtained
P8 WHT/BLK Under all con d itions Connect to ground with a • Blown No. 13 (20 A) fu se in the
jumper wire: under-hood fuse/relay box
Ignition key light should • Faulty ignition key light (LED)
c o m e on. • An op en or high resistance in
the wire
W4 YEL Interior light switch Connect to ground with a • Blown No. 6 (7.5 A) fu se in the
in middle (DOOR) jumper wire: driver's under-dash fuse/relay
position box
Front and rear m ap • Blown bulb
light(s) should c o m e on. • Faulty m ap light
• An op en or high resistance in
the wire
6. R econnect the con n ectors to the driver's under-dash fuse/relay box. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II), and do th e s e
input tests at th e follow ing con n ectors on th e driver's under-dash fuse/relay box.
• If any test indicates a problem, find and correct the cau se, then recheck the system .
• If all the input te sts prove OK, g o to step 7.
not obtained
P14 BLK In all ignition switch M easure the voltag e to • Poor ground (G401) or an open
p ositions ground: in the ground wire
There should be less • An op en or high resistance in
than 0.2 V. the wire
E9 BLK In all ignition switch M easure the vo ltage to • Poor ground (G601) or an open
positions ground: in the ground wire
There should be less • An op en or high resistance in
than 0.2 V. the wire
E15 GRN Driver's d oor op en M easure the vo ltage to • Faulty driver's door switch
ground: • Faulty driver's door switch
There should be less ground
than 0.2 V. • An open or high resistance in
the wire
Driver's d oo r clo sed M easure the v oltage to • Faulty driver's door switch
There should be about 5
V.
H12 LT GRN/RED Front p a sse n g er 's M easure the v oltage to • Faulty front p a ssen g er 's door
door o pen ground: switch
There should be less • Faulty front p a ssen g er 's door
than 0.2 V. switch ground
the wire
Front p a sse n g e r 's M easure the volta ge to • Faulty front p a ssen g er's door
door clo sed ground: switch
There should be about 5 • A short to ground in the wire
V.
not obtained
E14 GRN/YEL Left sliding door M easure the vo ltage to • Faulty left sliding door switch
op en ground: • Faulty left sliding door switch
There should be le ss ground
than 0.2V. • An op en or high resistance in
the wire
Left sliding door M easure the v oltage to • Faulty left sliding door switch
closed ground: • A short to ground in the wire
V.
H13 GRN/WHT Right sliding door M easure th e voltage to • Faulty right sliding door switch
op en ground: • Faulty right sliding door switch
There shou ld be le ss ground
than 0.2 V. • An op en or high resistance in
the wire
Right sliding door M easure the v oltage to • Faulty right sliding door switch
closed ground: • A short to ground in th e wire
V.
P2 RED/WHT Ignition key inserted M easure the vo ltage to • Poor ground (G502) or an open
into the ignition ground: in th e ground wire
switch There should be le ss • Faulty ignition key switch
than 0.2 V. • An o p en or high resistance in
the wire
Ignition switch M easure the v oltage to • Faulty ignition key switch
LOCK (0) and the ground: • A short to ground in the wire
ignition key There should be about 5
rem oved from the V.
ignition switch
Door Multiplex Control Unit

8. R em ove the driver's door panel (see p a ge 20-8).
9. D isconnect th e 23P connector from the d oor multiplex control u n it
10. Inspect the con n ector and socket term inals to be sure th e y are all making g o o d contact.
• If the term inals are bent, lo o s e or corroded, repair th em a s necessary, and recheck the system .
• If the term inals look OK, g o to step 11.
DOOR MULTIPLEX CONTROL UNIT 23P CONNECTOR

WHT/BLU
L
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
CM
00
11 12 13 1 4 15 1 6 1 7 1 8 1 9 2 0 21 2 2
T
GRN/RED WHT

11. R econnect the connector to the door multiplex control u n it Turn the ignition switch to ON (II), and do th e s e input tests
at the connector.
• If any test indicates a problem, find and correct the c au se, then recheck the system .
• If all the input tests prove OK, the MICU m ust be faulty; replace the driver's under-dash fuse/relay box.
not obtained
8 WHT/BLU Driver's door key M easure the v oltage to • Faulty driver's door key
cylinder switch in ground: cylinder switch
LOCK There should be le ss • Poor ground (G601) or an open
than 0.2 V. in the ground wire
• An o p en or high resistance in
the wire
Driver's door key M easure the voltage to • A short to ground in the wire
cylinder switch in ground: • Faulty driver's door key
the neutral position There should be about 5 cylinder switch
V.
Driver's door key Measure the voltage to
cylinder switch in ground:
UNLOCK There should be about 5
V.
21 WHT Driver's door key Measure the voltage to • Faulty driver's door key
cylinder switch in ground: cylinder switch
UNLOCK There should be le ss • Poor ground (G601) or an open
than 0.2V. in the ground wire
the wire
Driver's door key Measure the vo ltage to • A short to ground in the wire
cylinder switch in ground: • Faulty driver's door key
the neutral position There should be about 5 cylinder switch
V.
Driver's door key Measure the voltage to
cylinder switch in ground:
LOCK There should be about 5
V.
16 GRN/RED D isconnect driver's Check for continuity An op en in the B-CAN wire
under-dash betw een terminal No. 16
fuse/relay box and driver's under-dash
conn ector J (21P) fuse/relay box connector
J (21P) terminal No. 4:
There should be
continuity.
Ignition Key Switch Test Ignition Key Light Test
1. R em ove th e steering colum n upper and lower covers 1. R em o ve the steering colum n upper and lower covers
(see page 17-9). (s e e p age 17-9).
2. D isconnect the 6P conn ector (A). 2. D isconnect the 6P connector (A).
3. Check for continuity b etw een term inals No. 1 and

No. 2. 3. The LED (B) should c o m e on w h e n pow er is
• There sh ou ld b e continuity with th e key in the c on n ected to terminal No. 6 and ground is con n ected
ignition switch. to terminal No. 5.
• There sh ou ld b e no continuity with th e key
4. Ifthe LED d o e s not c o m e on, replace the ignition key
rem oved.
cylinder/steering lock a sse m b ly (see p a ge 17-13).
4. Ifthe continuity is not as specified, replace the ignition
key cylinder/steering lock a sse m b ly (s e e p ag e 17-13).
Circuit Diagram
BATTERY
UNDER-HOOD
FUSE/RELAY
BOX
YEL
B4
DRIVER'S
) No. 6 UNDER-DASH
(7.5 A) FUSE/RELAY
BOX
E4
_Q _
Test
NOTE: 4. Clear any previously learned c o d e s by pressing and

• Explain to the cu stom er that gara ge door rem ote holding th e tw o outside buttons (A) on the HomeLink
transmitters c o m e in tw o types: fixed c o d e and rolling unit (B) until the red indicator (C) on the unit starts
code. Each type has its ow n program m ing method, blinking (about 20 sec o n d s), then release the buttons.
and each m ethod is covered in the ow ner's manual. If
the cu stom er has concerns about th e HomeLink unit, C
have the cu stom er contact the HomeLink a ssistan ce
desk at 800-355-3515.
• If the HomeLink will not op en the cu stom er's garage,
do this:
If th e HomeLink rem ote control sy ste m will not open th e

cu stom er's garage, do this:
1. Press any of th e buttons on the HomeLink unit.

• If the red indicator c o m e s on, g o to step 3.
• If th e red indicator d o e s not c o m e on, g o to step 2.
2. M easure the v oltage b etw een the roof c o n so le 10P

con nector term inals No. 6 ( + ) and No. 5 (—). There 5. Point the test rem ote transmitter (A) straight up
should be battery voltage. exactly 4.0 in (101.6 mm) aw ay from the HomeLink
• If the v oltage is not a s specified, check for th e se unit (B).
problems:
- A blown No. 6 (7.5 A) fu se in th e driver's
- A faulty driver's under-dash fuse/relay box.
- An op en in the WHT/BLU wire b etw een the
driver's under-dash fuse/relay b ox and the roof
co n so le.
- A n op en in the BLK wire b e tw een th e roof co n so le
and G601.
• If the volta ge is as specified, g o to step 3.
3. Make sure the com m ercially available Genie rem ote

transmitter (test remote) has fresh batteries.
NOTE: The Genie transmitter can be either the fixed

6. Press and hold the button on the test rem ote
c o d e typ e or th e rolling c o d e type.
transmitter and o n e of the buttons (C) on the
HomeLink unit at the s a m e time.
7. Wait about 20 se c o n d s w hile watching the red

indicator on the HomeLink unit.
• If the red indicator starts blinking slow ly and then
blinks faster, the unit is OK. R elease the buttons,
then clea rth e learned c o d e (see step 4).
• Ifthe red indicator d o e s not blink, replace the roof
c o n so le (see pa ge 22-285).
System Description
Auto Reverse Power Window Operation

The sy ste m is c o m p o s e d of the p ow er w in d o w m aster switch and the driver's power w in d o w motor.
The driver's and front p a ssen ger 's pow er w in d o w m otors incorporate a Hall 1C unit (pulser) which gen erates p ulses
during th e m otor's operation and se n d s the p u lses to the driver's power w in d o w control units. A s so o n a s the power
w in d o w control units detect no p u lses from the pulser, the driver's pow er w in d o w control units make the p ow er w in d o w
motor sto p and reverse. Ifthe w in d o w is m ore than halfway closed , it will reverse to the half o p en position. Ifthe w in d o w
is le ss than halfway c losed, it will sto p and reverse about 2 inches. This is to prevent pinching your hand or fingers
during auto-up operation. The auto reverse is not active w hen th e switch is held in the up position.
HALL 1C UNIT
POWER WINDOW MOTOR (PULSER)
Position when something

is pinched
Threshold value for

judgment of pinching
Key Cylinder Operation

With th e key inserted in th e driver's d oor key cylinder, turn th e key in either direction and release it, turn it a se c o n d tim e
and hold it within 10 s e c o n d s to operate the w in d o w s (clockwise to open , counterclockwise to close). The w in d o w s stop
m oving w h e n th e key is released. The auto reverse operation is not active w h en closing the w in d o w s with the key
cylinder. The key cylinder switch will not activate until th e key is rem oved from the ignition and the driver's door is
o p en ed . O pening the driver’s door ca n cels the key off timer.
Keyless Operation
By p ressin g the UNLOCK button of th e keyless transmitter a se c o n d tim e and hold within 10 sec o n d s, the w in d o w s
op en. The w in d o w s stop m oving w h en the UNLOCK button is released. The w in d o w s do not clo se with the LOCK button.
The k ey le ss w in d o w operation with the rem o tes will not work until th e key has been rem oved from the ignition, and the
driver's d oor has been op en ed . This ca n cels th e key off timer.
Resetting the Power Window Control Unit
Resetting the driver's pow er w in d o w is required w h en any of th e follow ing have occurred:
• Power w in d o w regulator replacem ent or repair • Driver's door g la ss replacem ent or repair
« Power w in d o w motor replacem ent or repair ® Power is rem oved from a pow er w in d ow master
• W indow run channel replacem ent or repair switch w hile the p ow er w in d o w timer is ON.
• Power is rem oved from the pow er w in d o w m aster
switch w hile the driver's p ow er w in d o w is operating.
Using the HDS

1. Connect the HDS to the vehicle's DLC.
2. Turn th e ignition switch to ON (II), then enter the vehicle's VIN and m ileage at the prompts.
3. S elect BODY ELECTRICAL from the S y ste m Selection m enu.
4. From the BODY ELECTRICAL SYSTEM SELECT m enu, select Power W indow s.
5. From th e MODE m enu, s elec t Adjustm ents.
6. From th e ADJUSTMENT m enu, select WINDOW PRESET for driver's sid e w indow .
7. Follow the prompts on the screen.
8. Confirm that the p ow er w in d o w control unit is reset by using the driver's w in d o w AUTO UP and AUTO DOWN
function.
Resetting the Power Window Control Unit (cont'd)
Without the HDS

2. M ove the driver's w in d o w all th e w ay d ow n by using the driver's w in d o w DOWN switch.
3. Open the driver's door.
NOTE: S te p s 4 —7 m u st be d o n e within 5 s e c o n d s of each other.
OPEN
Driver's
Door
CLOSED
ON (11)
Ignition
Switch
Power window
LOCK (0) memory cleared.
ON
Driver's
Window Down
Switch
OFF
/
T1 T1 T1 T1 T1 T1 T1 T1 T1 T1 T1 T1 T1
T1=Less than 5 seconds
4. Turn the ignition sw itch to LOCK (0).

5. Push and hold the driver's w in d o w DOWN switch.
6. Turn the ignition sw itch to ON (II).
7. R elease the driver's w in d o w DOWN switch.
8. Repeat step 4 —7 three m ore tim es.
9. Wait 1 seco n d .
10. Confirm that AUTO UP and AUTO DOWN do not work. If AUTO UP and DOWN work, g o back to step 1.
11. M ove the driver's w in d o w all the w a y dow n by using the driver's w in d o w DOWN switch.
12. Pull up and hold the driver's w in d o w UP switch until the w in d o w reaches the fully clo sed position, then continue to
hold the sw itch for 1 seco n d .
13. Confirm that the p ow e r w in d o w control unit is reset by using th e driver's w in d o w AUTO UP and AUTO DOWN
function.
Ifthe w in d o w still d o e s not work in AUTO, repeat th e procedure several tim es, paying clo se attention to the 5 seco n d
tim e limit b etw een step s. If it still d o e s not work, g o to B-CAN S y ste m D iagnosis Test M ode A (see p ag e 22-155).
Circuit Diagram
UNDER-HOOD DRIVER'S
FUSE/RELAY BOX UNDER-DASH DRIVER'S UNDER-DASH FUSE/RELAY BOX
(120 A) (50 A) B1 A2 A6 No. 21 (7.5 A)
- WHT - WHT— k ) OH— BLK/YEL —CTVjO-----
© -
IG1 HOT in ON (II)
No. 15 (40 A) D6 and START (HI) No. 7 (7.5 A)
B4
YEL —crvjo— <
No. 23*
B5
-WHT/BLU
>No. 27
(20 A)
K5 K4 J9
WHT/RED GRN/WHT YEL
DOOR
LOCK
KNOB
U KEY
DRIVER'S PULSER
DOOR KEY
x L CYLINDER
LOCK Q UNLOCK SWITCH
DRIVER'S POWER WINDOW MOTOR
BLK BLK
_Q_ j Cl
*No. 23 (P/W) (50 A): With security system
No. 23 (P/W) (40 A): Without security system


DTC Troubleshooting
DTC B1125: Driver's Power Window Motor A 7. Check for continuity b etw een the p ow er w in d o w
master switch 23P connector and driver's pow er
Pulse Error
w in d o w motor 6P connector a s follows.
DTC B1126: Driver's Power Window Motor B POWER WINDOW DRIVER'S POWER
Pulse Error MASTER SWITCH WINDOW MOTOR
No. 4 No. 3
No. 6 No. 6
to follow the instructions in B-CAN S y ste m D iagnosis
No. 17 No. 2
Test M ode A (see page 22-155).
POWER WINDOW MASTER SWITCH 23P CONNECTOR
2. Open and clo se the driver's pow er w in d o w by using BLU

the driver's switch manually.
1 3 4 5
2 6 7 8 9 10
CM
CM
CM
3. S elect the POWER WINDOWS from the BODY 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 21 23
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM SELECT m enu and enter DATA ORN
Wire side of
LIST. female terminals
4. While the power w in d ow is m oving, check the
DETECT/NONE information of the DRIVER'S POWER
WINDOW MOTOR PULSE A or B in the DATA LIST.
D o e s th e In fo r m a tio n in d ic a t o r d is p la y D E T E C T ?
YES-Replace the door multiplex control unit . ■ RED/WHT

NO-G o to step 5.
DRIVER’S POWER WINDOW MOTOR 6P CONNECTOR
5. Do the driver's pow er w in d ow motor pulser test (see
page 22-313). Is th e r e c o n tin u ity ?
Is it O K ? YES-Go to step 8.
YES-Go to step 6. NO-Repair an op en in the w ir e .B
NO-R eplace the driver's power w in d o w m o t o r . !
6. D isconnect the pow er w in d o w master switch 23P

connector and the driver's pow er w in d o w motor 6P
connector.
8. Check for continuity b etw een pow er w in d o w m aster DTC B1140: Driver's Power Window Position
switch 23P con nector term inals No. 4, No. 6, and
Detect Circuit Error
No. 17, and b ody ground individually.
POWER WINDOW MASTER SWITCH 23P CONNECTOR to follow the instructions in B-CAN S y ste m D iagnosis
Test M ode A (see page 22-155).

]B W ' I RED/WHT „
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 2. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), and then back to
ON (II).
CM
CM
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 23
ORN 3. Open and clo se the driver's pow er w in d o w by using
the driver's switch manually.
IS D T C B 1 1 2 5 o r B 1 1 2 6 in d ic a t e d ?
Wire side of female terminals YES-Troubleshoot the DTC B1125 (s e e page 22-307)
or B1126 (see page 22 -307).B
/s t h e r e c o n tin u ity ?
NO -G o to step 5.
YES-Repair a short in th e w ir e .B
5. R eset th e power w in d o w control unit (see p age
N O -Substitute a k n ow n -good door multiplex control 22-301).
unit, and recheck. If DTC is g o n e , the original door
multiplex control unit is faulty; replace it. If the DTC is
still indicated, replace th e driver's pow er w in d o w Is D T C B 1 1 4 0 in d ic a t e d ?
m o to r.B
YES-Faulty door multiplex control unit; replace the
pow er w in d o w master switch (see p a ge 22-314 ).B
NO-The sy stem is OK at this tim e .B

Power Window Master Switch Input Test
NOTE: Make sure the ignition switch is turned to LOCK (0) before disconnecting th e connectors.
1. Before testing the pow er w in d ow s, troubleshoot the multiplex integrated control sy ste m using B-CAN S ystem
D iagnosis Test M ode A (see p a ge 22-155).
2. Turn th e ignition switch to LOCK (0).
3. R em ov e the pow er w in d o w m aster switch (see p a g e 22-314).
4. D isconnect the 23P connector (A) and 13P con nector (B) from the p ow er w in d o w master sw itch (C).

Power Window Master Switch Input Test (cont'd)
5. Inspect the connector and socket term inals to be sure th ey are all making go od contact.
• If the terminals are bent, lo o s e or corroded, repair them as n ecessary, and recheck the system .
• If the terminals look OK, g o to step 6.
6. R econnect the con nector to the pow er w in d o w m aster switch, turn the ignition switch to ON (II) and do th e s e input
te s ts at the connector.
• If any test indicates a problem, find and correct th e ca u se, then recheck the system .
• If all the input tests prove OK, g o to step 7.
is not obtained
3 WHT/GRN Ignition switch ON (II) Measure the vo ltag e to • Blown No. 23 (P/W) (50 A)*1
ground: or (40A)*2 fu se in the
There should be less than 0.2 under-hood fuse/relay box
V. • Faulty pow er w in d o w relay
fuse/relay box
the wire
10 GRN/WHT Under all conditions M easure the voltag e to • Blown No. 27 (20 A) fu se in
voltage. • Faulty driver's under-dash
fuse/relay box
the wire
15 WHT/RED Under all conditions Measure the voltag e to • Blown No. 7 (7.5 A) fu se in
fuse/relay box
the wire
20 YEL Ignition switch ON (II) M easure the voltag e to • Blown No. 21 (7.5 A) fu se in
There should b e battery fuse/relay box
fuse/relay box
the wire
1 BLK In all ignition switch M easure the vo lta ge to • Poor ground (G601) or an
2 positions ground: o p en in the ground wire
There should be le ss than 0.2 • An open or high resistance in
V. th e wire
6 RED/WHT Ignition switch ON (II) M easure the v oltage to • Faulty pow er w in d o w m aster
ground: switch
There should be battery • A short to ground in the wire
voltage.
*1: With security sy stem

*2: Without security sy ste m
is not obtained
8 WHT/BLU Driver's door key cylinder M easure th e volta ge to • Faulty driver's door key
switch in LOCK ground: cylinder switch
There should be le ss than 0.2 • Poor ground (G601) or an
V. op en in the ground wire
the wire
Driver's door key cylinder M easure the voltag e to • A short to ground in the wire
switch in neutral ground: • Faulty driver's door key
There should be about 5 V. cylinder switch
Driver's door key cylinder M easure th e v oltage to
switch in UNLOCK ground:
21 WHT Driver's door key cylinder M easure th e voltag e to • Faulty driver's door key
switch in UNLOCK ground: cylinder switch
There should be less than 0.2 • Poor ground (G601) or an
V. o pen in the ground wire
the wire
Driver's door key cylinder M easure the voltage to • A short to ground in the wire
switch in neutral ground: • Faulty driver's door key
There should be about 5 V. cylinder switch
Driver's door key cylinder Measure th e voltage to
switch in LOCK ground:
4 BLU Ignition switch ON (II), and Measure th e voltage • Blown No. 7 (7.5 A) fu se in
the driver's w in d o w switch b etw een term inals No. 4 and the driver's under-dash
m oving up or down No. 1: fuse/relay box
An analog meter should • Blown No. 27 (20 A) fu se in
alternate b etw een betw een 0 the driver's under-dash
V and about 5 V (a digital fuse/relay box
voltm eter reads about 2.5 V • An op en or high resistance in
while the w in d o w m oves). the wire (RED/WHT, BLU,
17 ORN Ignition switch ON (II), and Measure th e voltage ORN)
the driver's w in d o w switch betw een term inals No. 17 • A short to ground in the wire
m oving up or dow n and No. 1: • Faulty driver's p ow er
An analog meter should w in d o w motor
alternate betw een b etw een 0 • Faulty pow er w in d ow m aster
V and about 5 V (a digital switch
voltm eter reads about 2.5 V
w hile the w in d o w m oves).
*1: With security system
*2: Without security system
Power Window Master Switch Input Test (cont'd)
7. D isconnect the 23P connector from the pow er w in d o w m aster switch, and do th ese input tests at the connectors.
• If any test indicates a problem, find and correct th e c a u se, then recheck the system .
• If all the input te s ts prove OK, the control unit m u st be faulty; replace the pow er w in d ow m aster switch, and g o to
step 8.
is not obtained
11 RED/YEL Connect term inals No. 10 Check for driver's w in d ow • Blown No. 27 (20 A) fu se in
and No. 11 with a jum per operation: the driver's under-dash
wire, and co n n ect terminal The w in d o w should g o fuse/relay box
No. 23 to bod y ground. d ow n . • Faulty driver's pow er
23 RED/BLK Connect term inals No. 10 Check for driver's w in d o w w in d ow motor
and No. 23 with a jum per operation: • An open or high resistance in
wire, and co n n ect terminal The w in d o w should g o up. the wire
No. 11 to bod y ground.
18 BLU/RED Connect term inals No. 10 Check for front p assen ger's • Blown No. 26 (20 A) fu se in
and No. 18 with a jum per w in d o w operation: the driver's under-dash
wire. The w in d o w should g o up. fuse/relay box
9 BLU/WHT Connect term inals No. 10 Check for front p assen g er's • Faulty front p a ssen ger's
and No. 9 with a jum per w in d o w operation: pow er w in d o w motor
wire. The w in d o w should g o • Faulty front p a ssen g er's
d ow n . p ower w in d o w switch
• Poor ground (G504) or an
open in the ground wire
the wire
13 BRN/WHT Connect term inals No. 10 Check for left rear w in d ow • Blown No. 24 (20 A) fu se in
19 BRN Connect term inals No. 10 Check for left rear w in d ow • Faulty left rear power
and No. 19 with a jum per operation: w in d o w motor
wire. The w in d o w should go • Faulty left rear power
dow n . w in d o w switch
the wire
12 BLU/ORN C onnect term inals No. 10 Check for right rear w in d o w • Blown No. 25 (20 A) fu se in
14 BRN/YEL C onnect term inals No. 10 C heckfor right rear w in d o w • Faulty right rear pow er
and No. 14 with a jum per operation: w in d ow motor
wire. The w in d o w should g o • Faulty right rear pow er
d ow n . w in d o w switch
the wire
16 GRN/RED U nder all conditions Check for continuity An op en in the B-CAN wire
b etw ee n terminal No. 16 and
driver's under-dash
fuse/relay box connector J
terminal No. 4:
There shou ld be continuity.
*1: With security sy ste m
*2; W ithout security sy ste m
8. R eset the p ow er w in d o w control unit (s e e p age 22-301).
Driver's Power Window Motor Test
Motor Test Hall 1C unit (pulser) Test

1. R em ove the door panel (see p a ge 20-8). 5. R econnect the 6P connector to the pow er w in d o w
motor.
2. D isconnect the 6P connector (A) from the p ow er
w in d o w motor. 6. M easure the volta ge b etw een the terminals.
• There should be battery v oltage betw een term inals
No. 6 ( + ) and No. 5 ( —) w h en the ignition switch is
turned to ON (II).
• Connect an analog voltm eter b etw een terminals
No. 3 ( + ) and No. 5 (—), and run the pow er w in d o w
motor d ow n or up. The voltm eter n eedle should
m ov e back and forth alternately (a digital voltm eter
should s h o w the average vo ltag e betw een 0 —5 V).
• Connect an analog voltm eter betw een terminals
No. 2 ( + ) and No. 5 (—), and run the pow er w in d o w
motor at d ow n or up. The voltm eter need le should
m o v e back and forth alternately (a digital voltm eter
should s h o w the average voltag e betw een 0 —5 V).
7. Ifthe v oltage is not as specified, do the pow er w in d o w

master switch input test (terminals No. 4, No. 6 and
No. 17) (see step 6 on page 22-310).
8. If the switch test is OK, replace the power w in d o w

motor.
9. R eset the p ow er w in d o w control unit (se e page

3. Test the m otor in each direction by connecting battery 22-301).
pow er and ground according to the table. W hen the
motor sto p s running, discon n ect o n e lead
immediately.
\ Terminal
1 4
Direction \
UP © 0
DOWN © ©
4. Ifthe motor d o e s not run or fails to run sm oothly,

replace it.
Passenger's Power Window Motor Power Window Master Switch
Test Replacement
1. R em ove the d oor panel (see p age 20-8). 1. R em ove the driver's door panel (see p age 20-8).
2. D isconnect the 2P conn ector (A) from the pow er 2. R em ove the screw and d iscon nect the 23P connector
w in d o w motor. (A) and 13P connector (B) from the master switch
panel (C), then rem ove the switch asse m b ly from the
Front passenger's
door panel.
Rear
LEFT RIGHT
3. R em o ve the four mounting screw s, then rem ove the
m aster switch (A) from the switch panel (B).
3. Test the motor by c o nn ectin g battery pow er and

ground according to the table. W hen the m otor sto p s
running, d isco n n ect o n e lead im mediately.
\ Terminal 2#1
2*2 !#2 4. Install in the reverse order of removal.
Direction \
5. R eset th e pow er w in d o w control unit (see page
UP © © 22-301).
DOWN 0 ©
*1: Right rear window motor
*2: Left rear power window motor and front
passenger's power window motor
4. If the m otor d o e s not run or fails to run sm oo th ly ,

replace it.
F
■ BODY
id
Passenger's Power Window Switch Test/Replacement
Front Passenger's Rear

1. R em o ve the front p a ssen g er's door panel (se e page 1. R em ove the sliding door panel (see p age 20-21).
20-8).
2. R em ove the screw and d iscon n ect the 6P connector
2. R em ove the screw and d isconnect th e 10P connector (A) from the pow er w in d o w switch (B), then rem ove
(A) from the p ow er w in d o w switch (B), then rem ove the switch a sse m b ly from the door panel.
the switch a sse m b ly from the door panel.
3. R em ove the tw o mounting screw s, then rem ove the

3. R em ove the four m ounting screw s, then rem ove the pow er w in d o w switch from the switch panel (C).
pow er w in d o w switch from the switch panel (C).
4. S w ap the rear pow er w in d o w switch with another
4. S w ap the w in d o w switch with another known-good know n-good switch and test. Ifthe original p ow er
switch and test. Ifthe original pow er w in d o w switch is w in d o w switch is faulty; replace it.
faulty; replace it.
WASHER FLUID LEVEL SWITCH (Canada models) Test, page 22-333

Test, page 22-334 Replacement, page 22-336
Replacement, page 22-335 intermittent wiper relay circuit)
Circuit Diagram - Windshield
DRIVER'S
UNDER-HOOD FUSE/RELAY BOX UNDER-DASH
BOX
A2
WHT------HO OH------ BLK/YEL ■
V jy
START (III)
----------------- : b-CAN line
i
Circuit Diagram - Rear Window
DRIVER'S
JLL jQ_
G202 G202
22 320
O I.IV O LIV D L I\
1 i i i
DTC Troubleshooting
DTC B1028: Rear Window Wiper Motor (As) 6. Measure the voltage b etw een MICU-rear junction box
con nector F (13P) terminal No. 7 and body ground.
Signal Error
NOTE: If y ou are troubleshooting multiple DTCs, be sure MiCU-REAR JUNCTION BOX CONNECTOR F (13P)
to follow th e instructions in B-CAN S y ste m D iagnosis
T est M ode A (see page.22-155).
1. Turn th e ignition switch to ON (II), and check the rear n__ n

5
CO
w in d o w w iper operation. 1 / . I 1......L /
00
D o e s th e r e a r w i n d o w wiper o p e r a t e n o r m a lly ? U
6 7 / 10 11 / 4
YEL/GRN
YES-G o to step 11.
N O -G o to step 2.
2. Turn th e ignition switch to LOCK (0).

3. Check th e No. 20 (10 A) fu se in the driver's under-dash
fuse/relay box.
YES-Go to step 7.
Y ES-G o to step 4.
NO-Repair an op en in the w ir e .B
N O -R eplace the fu se and recheck. Ifthe fu se is blown
again, check for a short to ground in the wire betw een 7. M easure the vo ltage betw een MICU-rear junction box
the driver's under-dash fuse/relay b ox and MICU-rear conn ector A (14P) terminal No. 2 and body ground.
junction box, and b etw een the driver's under-dash
fuse/relay box and under-hood fuse/relay b o x .®
MICU-REAR JUNCTION BOX CONNECTOR A (14P)
5. M easure th e volta ge betw een rear w in d o w wiper YEL/GRN

m otor 4P con n ector terminal No. 1 and bod y ground.
/ 2 3 4 5 6
7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
REAR WINDOW WIPER MOTOR
4P CONNECTOR
1 2
3 4 Wire side of female terminals
YES-G o to step 8.
Wire side of female terminals NO-Repair an open in the w ire.l
YES-G o to step 9.
N O-G o to step 6.
F I
■ BODY ■
8. M easure the v oltag e b etw een rear w in d o w wiper 13. R econnect the 4P con nector to the rear w in d o w wiper
m otor 4P connector terminal No. 2 and body ground. motor.
14. Connect the voltm eter to rear w in d o w w iper motor 4P

REAR WINDOW WIPER MOTOR connector terminal No. 3.
4P CONNECTOR
16. Check th e rear w in d ow w iper motor As signal output

BLK
1 ? with the rear w in d o w w iper switch ON.
3 4
REAR WINDOW WIPER MOTOR 4P CONNECTOR
Wire side of female terminals 1 2

3 4
Is th e r e le s s th a n 0 .2 V ? LT GRN/BLK
Y ES-Replace the rear w in d o w w iper m o to r.B

or an o p en in the ground w ire .B Wire side of female terminals

Is t h e r e p u ls e v o lta g e b e t w e e n 0 — a b o u t 5 V ?
10. D isconnect the 4P connector from the rear w in d o w
w iper motor. YES-Replace the MICU-rear junction b o x .B
11. D isconnect MICU-rear junction box connector F (13P). N O -R eplace the rear w in d o w wiper m o to r .!
12. Check for continuity betw een MICU-rear junction box

connector F (13P) terminal No. 6 and rear w in d ow
w iper motor 4P connector terminal No. 3.
MICU-REAR JUNCTION BOX CONNECTOR F (13P)
p .__ ___n
1/ 5
00 00
-J ...— 1_ /
6 7 / 10J M
jt H
/ 4
REAR WINDOW MOTOR

4P CONNECTOR
1 2
3 4
LT GRN/BLK

DTC B1076: Windshield Wiper Signal Error 10. Check for continuity b etw een under-hood fuse/relay
b ox connector K (10P) terminal No. 6 and wiper/
NOTE: If you are troubleshooting multiple DTCs, be sure w a sh e r switch (combination switch control unit) 8P
to follow the instructions in B-CAN S y ste m D iagnosis conn ector terminal No. 5.
T est M ode A (se e p age 22-155).
1. Clear th e DTCs with the HDS.
2. Turn th e ignition switch to LOCK (0), and then back to

ON (II). 1 2 F=l / 4 Wire side of
female terminals
5 6 7 8 9 10
3. Turn th e w iper switch to INT, LOW, then HIGH for at
least 2 s e c o n d s each.
4. Check for DTCs with the HDS. FR WIPER BACKUP

(GRN/WHT)
Y ES-G o to step 5.
NO-lntermittent failure. The w indshield w iper sy stem 1/ 3 4 Wire side of

is OK at this time. Check for lo o s e or poor female terminals
00
b/ 7
co n n e c tio n s.!
5. With th e w iper/w asher switch OFF, select WIPER/WASHER SWITCH 8P CONNECTOR

WINDSHIELD WIPERS from the BODY ELECTRICAL
SYSTEM SELECT m enu, and enter th e DATA LIST. Is th e r e c o n tin u ity ?
6. Check the ON/OFF information of th e WINDSHIELD YES-Faulty com bination switch control unit; replace
WIPER SWITCH (BACK-UP) in the DATA LIST. th e w iper/washer sw itch .®
Is th e in fo r m a tio n in d ic a t o r O F F ? NO-Repair an open in the GRN/WHT w ir e .B
Y ES-G o to step 7. 11. D isconnect under-hood fuse/relay box connector K

(10P).
N O -G o to step 11.
12. Check for continuity b etw een under-hood fuse/relay
7. Turn th e w iper switch ON (low or high). b ox connector K (10P) terminal No. 6 and body
8. Check th e ON/OFF information of th e WINDSHIELD ground.
WIPER SWITCH (BACK-UP) in the DATA LIST.
Is th e in fo r m a tio n in d ic a t o r O N ? UNDER-HOOD FUSE/RELAY BOX CONNECTOR K (10P)
YES-Faulty relay control module; replace th e

under-hood fuse/relay b o x .B
1 2 F=l / 4
N O -G o to step 9.
5 6 7 8 9 10
9. D iscon n ect under-hood fuse/relay b ox con n ector K
FR WIPER BACKUP
(10P) and the w iper/w asher switch 8P connector. (GRN/WHT)
YES-G o to step 13.
NO-Faulty relay control module; replace the

13. D isconnect th e w iper/washer switch 8P connector. DTC B1077: Windshield Wiper (As) Signal
14. Check for continuity b etw een under-hood fuse/relay Error
box con nector K (10P) terminal No. 6 and body
ground.
Test M ode A (se e p ag e 22-155).
UNDER-HOOD FUSE/RELAY BOX CONNECTOR K (10P) 1. Clear the DTCs with the HDS.

ON (II).
1 2 F=l / 4
3. Turn the wiper switch to LOW, then HIGH for at least
5 6 7 8 9 10
15 s e c o n d s in each position.
FR WIPER BACKUP
(GRN/WHT) 4. Check for DTCs with the HDS.
Is D T C B 1 0 7 7 in d i c a t e d ?
YES-Go to step 5.
Wire side of female terminals NO-lntermittent failure. The w indshield w iper sy stem
is OK at this time. Check for lo o se or poor
Is th e r e c o n tin u ity ? c o n n e c tio n s.B
YES-Repair a short in the GRN/WHT w ir e .B 5. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
NO-Faulty w iper/washer switch; replace it.B 6. Do the wiper motor test (see page 22-332).
D o e s th e w i p e r m o t o r o p e r a t e c o r r e c tly ?
YES-Go to step 7.
N O -R eplace the w indshield wiper motor and

rech eck.B
8. Turn the wiper switch to LOW, then HIGH and check

wiper operation.
D o th e w ip e r s o p e r a t e n o r m a lly ?
YES-Go to step 9.
N O -G o to step 12.
9. D isconnect under-hood fuse/relay box connector J

(5P) and the w indshield wiper motor 5P connector.
10. Check for continuity b etw een w indshield w iper motor 12. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
5P connector terminal No. 4 and under-hood fu se/
13. Check the No. 11 (30 A) fu se in the driver's under-dash
relay box connector J (5P) terminal No. 2.
fuse/relay box.
UNDER-HOOD FUSE/RELAY BOX Is th e fu s e O K ?

CONNECTOR J (5P>
YES-Go to step 14.
WHT
Wire side of 1 n 2 N O -R eplace the blown fu se and recheck the system . If
female terminals the fu se blown again, check for a short on the GRN
3 4 5
wire b etw een the driver's under-dash fuse/relay box
and the w indshield w iper m o tor.B
i.__
15. Measure the v oltage betw een windshield wiper

m otor 5P connector terminal No. 1 and body ground.
1 2 3 Wire side of
r —TT~z—7 female
\ 4 5 / terminals
WINDSHIELD WIPER MOTOR 5P CONNECTOR
WINDSHIELD
WIPER MOTOR
5P CONNECTOR GFtri
Is t h e r e c o n tin u ity ? _m
1 2 3
Y ES-G o to step 11.
\ 4 5 /
NO-Repair an op en in the WHT w ir e .B
11. Check for continuity b etw een under-hood fuse/relay L

b o x con nector J (5P) terminal No. 2 and body ground.

UNDER-HOOD FUSE/RELAY BOX CONNECTOR J (5P)
WHT YES-Go to step 16.

Y n 2
NO-Repair an open in th e GRN w ir e .B
3 4 5
YES-Repair a short in the WHT w ir e .B
NO-Faulty relay control m odule; replace the

16. C heckfor continuity b etw een w indshield w iper motor DTC B1281: Windshield Wiper Switch MIST
5P connector term inals No. 3 and No. 5 and betw een
Position Circuit Malfunction
under-hood fuse/relay box connector J (5P) terminals
No. 1 and No. 3 respectively. NOTE: If you are troubleshooting multiple DTCs, be sure
to follow the instructions in B-CAN S ystem D iagnosis
UNDER-HOOD FUSE/RELAY BOX CONNECTOR J (5P) Test M ode A (see p a ge 22-155).
BLU 1. Clear the DTCs with the HDS.
Wire side of 2. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), and then back to
female terminals ON (II).
3. Turn the w indshield wiper switch in MIST and w ait for

at least 2 seco n d s.
WINDSHIELD
WIPER MOTOR 4. Check for DTCs with the HDS.
5P CONNECTOR
Is D T C B 1 2 8 1 in d i c a t e d ?
Wire side of YES-Replace th e windshield w iper/w asher s w i t c h . !
female terminals
IMO-lntermittent failure, the w indshield w iper/washer
YEL switch and the com bination switch control unit are OK
at this time. Check for lo o se or poor c o n n e c t i o n s .!
YES-Faulty relay control m odule; replace the

under-hood fuse/relay b o x . !
NO-Repair an open in the BLU or YEL w i r e . !

DTC B1282: Windshield Wiper Switch INT DTC B1283: Windshield Wiper Switch LOW
Position Circuit Malfunction Position Circuit Malfunction
to follow the instructions in B-CAN S y ste m D iagnosis to follow the instructions in B-CAN S y ste m D iagnosis
T est M ode A (see p a g e 22-155). Test M ode A (see p age 22-155).
ON (II). ON (II).
3. Turn the w indshield wiper sw itch in INT and w ait for 3. Turn the w indshield wiper sw itch in LOW and wait for
at least 2 seco n d s. at least 2 seco n d s.
Is D T C B 1 2 8 2 in d ic a t e d ? is D T C B 1 2 8 3 in d ic a t e d ?
YES-Replace th e w indshield w ip er/w ash er s w i t c h . ! YES-Replace the w indshield w iper/w asher s w i t c h . !
NO-lntermittent failure, the w in d sh ield w iper/w asher NO-lntermittent failure, th e w indshield w iper/washer
switch and the com bination sw itch control unit are OK switch and the com bination switch control unit are OK
at this time. Check for lo o s e or poor c o n n e c t i o n s . ! at this time. Check for lo o s e or poor c o n n e c t i o n s . !
DTC B1284: Windshield Wiper Switch HIGH
Position Circuit Malfunction
NOTE: If y ou are troubleshooting multiple DTCs, be sure
Test M ode A (see p age 22-155).
2. Turn th e ignition switch to LOCK (0), and then back to

ON (II).
3. Turn the w indshield wiper switch in HIGH and wait for

at least 2 sec o n d s.
Y ES-Replace the w indshield w iper/w asher sw itch .®
NO-lntermittent failure, the w indshield w iper/washer

switch and the com bination switch control unit are OK
at this time. Check for lo o se or poor co n n ec tio n s.®
Wiper/Washer Switch (Combination Switch Control Unit) Input Test
1. Before troubleshooting the wiper/washer sy ste m , tro u b lesh o ot the B-CAN Sy ste m D iagnosis Test M ode A (see page
22-155).
2. R em ove the steering colum n co vers (see p a g e 17-9).
3. R em ove the self-tapping screw s, then d isconn ect th e 8P con nector (A) from the w iper/washer switch (B).
, WHT
1 3 4
00
5 / 7
WHT/RED
GRN/WHT YEL
4. Inspect the con n ector and socket term inals to be sure th ey are ail making g o o d contact.
• If the term inals are bent, lo o s e or corroded, repair th e m a s necessary, and recheck the sy stem .
• If the term inals look OK, g o to step 5.
5. With the connector still disconn ected , do th e s e input te sts at the follow ing connector.
• If any test indicates a problem, find and correct th e c au se, then recheck the system .
• If all the input te sts prove OK, g o to step 6.
not obtained
4 LT GRN D isconnect driver's Check for continuity An o p en in the B-CAN wire
under-dash fuse/relay b etw een terminal No. 4 and
box con n ector X (39P) driver's under-dash
fuse/relay box conn ector X
(39P) terminal No. 27:
Check for continuity A short to ground in the B-CAN wire
b etw een terminal No. 4 and
bod y ground:
There should be no
continuity.
1 WHT D isconnect Check for continuity An op en or high resistance in the
under-hood fuse/relay betw een terminal No. 1 and wire
box connector K (10P) under-hood fuse/relay box
con nector K (10P) terminal
No. 7:
Check for continuity A short to ground in the wire
b etw een terminal No. 1 and
body ground:
There should be no
continuity.
6. Reconnect the 8P connector to the w iper/washer switch, and do th e s e input tests at the connector.
• If any test indicates a problem, find and correct the ca u se, then recheck the system .
• If all the input tests prove OK, replace the w iper/washer switch (combination switch control unit).
not obtained
8 WHT/RED Under all conditions M easure the volta ge to • Blown No. 15 (40 A) fu se in the
ground: under-hood fuse/relay box
There should be battery • Blown No. 7 (7.5 A) fu se in the
voltage. driver's under-dash fuse/relay
box
• An open or high resistance in the
wire
7 YEL Ignition switch ON (II) Measure the voltag e to • Blown No. 21 (7.5 A) fu se in the
ground: driver's under-dash fuse/relay
voltage. • An open or high resistance in the
wire
3 BLK In all ignition switch M easure the vo lta ge to • Poor ground (G601) or an open in
positions ground: the ground wire
There should be less than • An open or high resistance in the
0.2 V. wire
5 GRN/WHT Wiper switch on low M easure the v oltage to • Faulty com bination switch
and high ground: control unit
There should be less than • Poor ground (G601) or an open in
0.2 V. the ground wire
Wiper switch OFF Measure the voltag e to An op en or high resistance in the
ground: wire
Wiper/Washer Switch Wiper Motor Test
Replacement
1. R em ove the dashboard lower cover (see page Windshield
20-135).
1. R em ove the wiper arms (see page 22-334).
2. R em ove th e steering colum n covers (see p ag e 17-9).
NOTE: Carefully rem ove the wiper arms s o that they
3. D isconnect the com bination light switch 12P do not touch the hood.
connector (A) and dashboard wire harness 8P
connector (B) from th e w iper/w asher switch (C). 2. R em ove the hood rear seal and cowl cover (see p age
20-260).
3. D isconnect the 5P connector (A) from the w indshield
w iper motor (B).
4. R em ove the tw o screw s, then slide out the

w iper/w asher switch.
4. Test the motor by connecting battery pow er and

ground according to the table. If the motor d o e s not
run or fails to run sm ooth ly, replace the motor.
Terminal
2 3 5
Position \
LOW SPEED 0 ©
HIGH SPEED 0 ©
5. Connect the battery positive terminal to terminals

No. 1 and No. 3, and the battery negative terminal to
terminal No. 2 of the 5P connector. Then con n ect an
analog voltm eter b etw een the terminal No. 4 ( + ) and
the terminal No. 2 (—(.W hen the park switch contacts,
the pointer should sw in g. If not, replace the motor.
Washer Motor Test
Rear Window 1. R em ove the right inner fender:

• '07 m odel (s e e page 20-279)
1. Open the tailgate, and rem ove th e tailgate trim panel
• '08-10 m od els (see page 20-280)
(see p a g e 20-113).
2. D isconnect the 2P connector (A) from the w ash er
2. D isconnect the 4P connector (A) from the rear w in d o w
m otor (B).
w iper m otor (B).
3. Test th e motor by connecting battery pow er to

terminal No. 4 and ground to terminal No. 2 of th e 4P
connector. The m otor should run. If the motor d o e s 3. Test the motor by connecting battery power to
not run or fails to run sm oothly, replace the motor. terminal No. 1 (No. 2) and ground terminal No. 2
(No. 1) of the w a sh er motor. The motor should run.
4. Connect battery positive terminal to terminals No. 1
and No. 4, and the battery negative terminal to (): Rear w in d ow w a sh er direction.
terminal No. 2 o f the 5P connector. Then co n nect an • If the motor d o e s not run or fails to run sm oothly,
analog voltm eter betw een terminal No. 3 ( + ) and replace it.
terminal No. 2 (—). When the park switch contacts, the • If the motor runs sm oothly, but little or no w ash er
pointer should sw in g. If not, replace the motor. fluid is p um ped, check for a d iscon nected or
blocked w ash er h ose, or a clo g g e d w ash er m otor
outlet.
Washer Fluid Level Switch Test Wiper Motor Replacement
Canada models 1. Open the hood. R em ove the caps, nuts (A), and the
w indshield wiper arms (B).
1. R em ove the right inner fender:
• '07 m odel (see p a g e 20-279)
• '08-10 m od els (s e e p a g e 20-280)
2. D isconnect the 2P con n ector (A) from the w a sh er fluid

level switch.
2. R em ove the cowl covers (C).
3. D isconnect the 5P connector (A) from the wiper

motor.
3. R em ove th e w ash er fluid level switch from the

w ash er reservoir.
NOTE: Fluid m ay flow out of the op ening.
4. C heckfor continuity b etw een term inals No. 1 and

No. 2 in each float position.
• There should be continuity w h e n the float is d ow n .
• There should be no continuity w h e n the float is up.
5. If the continuity is not a s specified , replace the switch.
4. R em ove the four bolts (B) and wiper linkage asse m b ly

(C).
Rear Window Wiper Motor
Replacement
5. Scribe a line (A) a cross the link and w indshield wiper 1. Open the tailgate, and rem ove the tailgate trim panel
linkage to s h o w the original adjustment. (see p age 20-113).
Separate the w indshield w iper linkage (B) from the 2. R em ove the m ounting nut (A), the rear wiper arm (B)
wiper motor (C). and the special nut (C).
3. D isconnect the 4P connector (A) and rem ove the three

mounting bolts (B), then rem ove the rear w in d ow
wiper m otor (C).
6. Install in the reverse order to removal, and note th e se
items:
• Apply multipurpose grea se to the m oving parts.
• Before reinstalling the w iper arms, turn th e wiper
switch ON, then OFF to return the w iper shafts to
the park position.
• If n ecessary, replace any d am a ged clips.
• Check the wiper motor operation.

Washer Reservoir Replacement
1. R em o ve the right inner fender:

• '07 m odel (s e e p age 20-279)
• '08-10 m o d els (see p age 20-280)
2. D isconnect the 2P connector (A) from th e w a sh e r

m otor (B).
3. D isconnect the w indshield w ash er tube (C) and the

rear w in d o w w a sh e r tube (D).
4. R em o ve the bolts (A), then rem ove the w a sh er

reservoir.
Washer reservoir capacity:
2.5 L (2.8 US qt) (USA models)
4.5 L (4.8 US qt) (Canada models)
5. Install in th e reverse order o f removal.

Wiper Arm /Nozzle Adjustment
FRONT
W i per arms stop positi on
1. When the wiper arms stop at the automatic stop position, confirm that they are at the standard position.
a: Position at about 1.0 in (25 mm) [1.7 in (44 mm)] from the top of cowl cover (A)
b: Position at about 1.3 in (33 mm) [1.4 in (36 mm)] from the top of cowl cover (A)
[] : '08-10 models
Washer nozzle position
2. When you turn on the washers, confirm 50 % or more of the washer fluid lands within the spray area. Ifthe spray area
is not within the standard positions, adjust the nozzles.
NOTE:
• X shows the distance from the centerline (B) of the windshield.
• Y shows the distance from the cowl cover.
c d e f
X 22 in (560 mm) 0.2 in (6 mm) 0.2 in (6 mm) 22 in (560 mm)
Y 13.8 in (350 mm) 28.0 in (712 mm) 28.0 in (712 mm) 14.9 in (378 mm)
(cont'd)
Wiper Arm /Nozzle Adjustment (cont'd)
REAR
W iper arm park position
1. When the wiper arm stops at the park position, confirm that it is at the standard position,
a: Position at about 1.8 in (46 mm) from the bottom end of rear window (A)
Washer nozzle position
2. When you turn on the washers, confirm 50 % or more of the washer fluid lands within the spray area. Ifthe spray area
is not within the standard positions, adjust the nozzles.
b: Position at about 1.3 in (34 mm) [2.5 in (64 mm)] from the black ceramic area (B)
c: Position at about 3.9 in (98 mm) [6.2 in (158 mm)] from the black ceramic area (B)
[] : '08-10 models
*07 model
*08-10 models
Washer Tube Replacement
1. Remove the right inner fender:

• '07 model (see page 20-279)
• '08-10 models (see page 20-280)
2. Remove the windshield washer nozzles and clips, then remove the tubes.
"07 model
Washer Tube Replacement (cont'd)
*08-10 models
Washer Tube Replacement (cont'd)
*08-10 models
3. Install in the reverse order of removal. Take care not to pinch the washer tubes. Check the washer operation.
n
i body ■
SELECT/RESET SWITCH
DASH LIGHTS BRIGHTNESS
CONTROL SWITCH
SELECT/RESET/INFORMATION
SWITCH (EX-L and Touring models)

Self-diagnostic Function, page 22-345
Rewriting, ODO Data on a New
Gauge Control Module, page 22-370
PARKING BRAKE SWITCH Outside Air Temperature
Test, page 19-14 Indicator Calibration, page 22-371
Component Location Index (contfd)
CONNECTOR A (30P) CONNECTOR B (14P)
SPEEDOMETER
TACHOMETER
FUEL GAUGE
MULTI-INFORMATION vCOOLANT
A/T GEAR POSITION DISPLAY (MID) TEMPERATURE
INDICATOR (Touring model) GAUGE
Self-diagnostic Function
Before troubleshooting the gauge system, refer to multiplex integrated control system B-CAN System Diagnosis Test
Mode A (see page 22-155).
The gauge control module has a self-diagnostic function shown, and also has a customize reset function.
• The beeper drive circuit check.
• The indicator drive circuit check.
• The switch input test.
• The LCD/MID segments check.
• The gauges drive circuit check (Speedometer, Tachometer, Fuel gauge, Coolant temperature gauge).
• The communication line check (of the body-controller area network (B-CAN) communication line and the
fast-controller area network (F-CAN) communication line between the gauges).
NOTE:
• Indicators are also controlled via the communication lines.
• The self-diagnostic function is also used to reset the PAX system warning (see page 18-97).
Entering the self-diagnostic function

Before doing the self-diagnostic function, check the No. 7 (7.5 A) fuse and the No. 21 (7.5 A) fuse in the driver's
1. Push and hold the SELECT (Dash lights brightness control) button.
2. Turn the headlights ON.
4. Within 5 sec., turn the headlights OFF (AUTO), then ON and OFF (AUTO) again.
5. Within 5 sec., release the SELECT button, and then push and release the button three times repeatedly.
NOTE:
• While in the self-diagnostic mode, the dash lights brightness controller operates normally.
• While in the self-diagnostic mode, the SELECT switch is used to start the Beeper Drive Circuit Test and the Gauge
Drive Circuit Check.
• If the vehicle speed exceeds 1.2 mph (2 km/h) or the ignition switch is turned to LOCK (0), the self-diagnostic mode
ends.
ON (II)
Ignition
Switch
LOCK-
(0)
ON
Lighting
Switch
OFF -
(AUTO)
Select ON
Switch
(Dash Lights OFF -
Brightness
Control) - Move to self-diagnostic mode.
5 sec. 5 sec.
(): Touring model
Self-diagnostic Function (cont'd)
The Indicator Drive Circuit Check ^-

When entering the self-diagnostic mode, the following indicators blink:
A/T gear position indicator, Brake system indicator, Charging system indicator, Cruise control indicator, Cruise main
indicator, DRL indicator, Eco indicator (Canada and '08-10 USA models), Fog light indicator, High beam indicator,
immobilizer indicator, Lights-on indicator, Low fuel indicator, Low tire pressure indicator, Maintenance required
indicator, Malfunction indicator lamp (MIL), Message indicator (Touring model), Low oil pressure indicator, Power
tailgate indicator ('09-10 EX-L model), Seat belt reminder indicator, Security indicator, Side airbag cutoff indicator, VSA
activation indicator, VSA indicator, and Washer fluid level indicator (Canada models).
Switch Input Check
After the intermittent beeper sounds at the initial stage of self-diagnostic, a beeper sounds continuously while any of the
following switch inputs are switched from OFF to ON:
Parking brake switch, brake fluid level switch, VSA OFF switch, cruise control master, SET, RESUME, CANCEL switches,
SELECT/RESET switch, INFO switch (MID), and parking and back-up sensor switch.
The Beeper Drive Circuit Check

When entering the self-diagnostic mode, the beeper sounds five times, then a communication check result is displayed.
The LCD/MID Segment Check

When entering the self-diagnostic mode, the all segments blink five times. For MID, the words "Checking Now" on the
display blinks five times.
The Gauge Drive Circuit Check

When entering the self-diagnostic mode, the speedometer, the tachometer, the fuel gauge, and the coolant temperature
gauge needles sweep from the minimum position to maximum position, then return to the minimum position.
NOTE: After the beeper stops sounding and the gauge needles return to the minimum position, pushing the
SELECT/RESET knob starts the Beeper Drive Circuit Check (one beep) and the Gauge Drive Circuit Check again.
The check cannot be started again until the gauge needles return to the minimum position.
mode
Select switch
Gauge needles
Beeper
to the minimum position.
If a needle fails to sweep or the beeper does not sound, replace the gauge control module.
The Communication Line Check
With Multi-information Display
While in the self-diagnostic mode, the Communication Line Check starts after the LCD/MID Segments Check.
Ifthe word "F-CAN.....OK", "B-CAN..... OK", "COMPASS..... OK"* are indicated, communication lines are OK. If there is
a communication line error, the word "ERROR" is indicated instead of "OK".
• If the word "F-CAN..... ERROR" is indicated, there is a malfunction in the communication line between the gauge
control module and the F-CAN. Check for DTCs in the PCM and troubleshoot any DTCs found. If no DTCs are found, go
to B-CAN System Diagnosis Test Mode A (see page 22-155).
• If the word "B-CAN——ERROR" is indicated, there is a malfunction in the communication line between the gauge
control module and the B-CAN. Go to B-CAN System Diagnosis Test Mode A (see page 22-155). (B1155 or B1161 set).
• Ifthe word "COMPASS— ERROR" is indicated, there is a malfunction in the communication line between the gauge
control module and the compass unit. Check the compass unit. Ifthe unit is OK, goto B-CAN System Diagnosis Test
*: Touring model without navigation system
Faulty (example Compass Error)
(cont'd)
With Norm al Display

If all segments come on, the communication lines are OK. If there is a communication line error, the word "Error" is
indicated on the information display followed by a number.
While in the self-diagnostic mode, the Communication Line Check starts after the LCD/MID Segments Check.
• If the word "Error 1" is indicated, there is a malfunction in the communication line between the gauge control module
and the fast-controller area network (F-CAN). Checkfor DTCs in the PCM and troubleshoot any DTCs found. If no DTCs
are found, go to B-CAN System Diagnosis Test Mode A (see page 22-155).
• Ifthe word "Error 2" is indicated, there is a malfunction in the communication line between the gauge control module
and the body-controller area network (B-CAN). Go to B-CAN System Diagnosis Test Mode A (see page 22-155). (B1157
or B1159 set).
• If the word "Error 3" is indicated, there is a malfunction in the communication line between the gauge control module
and the body-controller area network (B-CAN) and the fast-controller area network (F-CAN). Check for DTCs in the
PCM and troubleshoot any DTCs found. If no DTCs are found, go to B-CAN System Diagnosis Test Mode A (see page
22-155).
Faulty (example Error 1)
r
LCD DISPLAY
V.
If any communication line errors are found, go to B-CAN System Diagnosis Test Mode A (see page 22-155).
Ending the self-diagnostic function
Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
NOTE: Ifthe vehicle speed exceeds 1.2 mph (2 km/h), the self-diagnostic function ends.
Customize Reset Function

While in the self-diagnostic mode, the customized data can be reset to the default condition.
1.Turn the lighting switch to ON (II).
2. Push and hold the SELECT button for more than 10 seconds (The beeper sounds at the same time).
3. When the beeper stops sounding, it means the customize reset is complete.
Self-diagnostic ON
mode OFF
Lighting ON
switch OFF 10 sec. or more
ON
Select switch
OFF
Beeper ON
OFF
Reset signal UIM

OFF
Circuit Diagram
DRIVER'S UNDER-DASH
UNDER-HOOD FUSE/RELAY BOX FUSE/RELAY BOX
BATTERY No. 22 (BAT)
(120 A) No. 15 (40 A) D6 B4
-CTXjO—-f — <TVjO YEL
IGNITION SWITCH
G1 B1 A2 / BAT A6
-WHT WHT- ‘ BLK/YEL ■
IG1,
DRIVER'S
UNDER-DASH |Q1 hot in0N (||) and lNo.21 ) No. 7
No. 7 (7.5 A) (7.5a) r (7.5 A)
FUSE/RELAY START (III)
X34 X35
RELAYCONTROL
MODULE YEL WHT/RED
K4 CABLE
■ GRN/YEL -
■£> REEL FRONT
PASSENGER'S
UNDER-DASH
FUSE/RELAY
BOX
E14
(Touring model
without navigation)
YEL
__1
YEL WHT/RED
ELECTRICAL >
COMPASS
GAUGE CONTROL MODULE A5 A6 UNIT I
-M-
SECURITY
COOLANT BEEPER INDICATOR
TEMPERATURE (LED)
TACHOMETER SPEEDOMETER FUEL GAUGE GAUGE
MULTI-INFORMATION BLINKING
DISPLAY* CIRCUIT
POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT/CONTROLLERAREA NETWORK CONTROLLER

n
B-CAN TRANSCEIVER F-CAN TRANSCEIVER
, 124 0 ,
f— W\|— t
A25 MICU-REAR A24
JUNCTION BOX
A/C LEFT/RIGHT POWER
CONTROL SLIDING DOOR
BRN/YEL PANEL or CONTROL UNITS COMBINATION WHT RED
I AUTOMATIC FRONT DOOR POWER TAILGATE SWITCH
I LIGHTING CLIMATE MUTIPLEX RELAY CONTROL UNIT CONTROL UNIT
I CONTROL CONTROL CONTROL POWER SEAT (in the WIPER/
I UNIT UNIT UNIT MODULE CONTROL UNIT WASHER SWITCH)
I
I
I V V V
i
V
I
I
I LTGRN LTBLU GRN/RED LTGRN PCM
N28 | X18 j N22 J4 D11 I G1 ! X27 VSA MODULATOR-
CONTROL UNIT
MULTIPLEX TPMS CONTROL UNIT
INTEGRATED ACM UNIT
CONTROL UNIT SRS UNIT
DATA LINKCONNECTOR
DRIVER'S UNDER-DASH FUSE/RELAY BOX (DLC)
: Touring model
: CAN line
(Touring model without navigation)

HIGHBEAM
- “ INDICATOR (LED) FOG LIGHTS ----- W W @ -| 5 V REGULATOR
INDICATOR/ LIGHTS-ON
LIGHTS-ON INDICATOR (LED) FOG LIGHTS
Wv INDICATOR INDICATOR (LED)
BRIGHTNESS ----- WV—
CONTROL and
DIMMING
DRIVE CIRCUIT CIRCUIT DRIVE CIRCUIT DRIVE CIRCUIT
POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT/CONTROLLER AREA NETWORKCONTROLLER ) F-CAN

TRANSCEIVER
BLU/ORN
IMMOBILIZER
CONTROL
UNIT-RECEIVER
*: '09-10 EX-L models
LOW CHARGING SEATBELT

'OIL PRESSURE SYSTEM REMINDER -POWER
INDICATOR __ INDICATOR - - INDICATOR I- .TAILGATE BRAKE SYSTEM
(LED) (LED) (LED) 1 INDICATOR(LED) « INDICATOR (LED)
L-AA/V-Q-j j L-A W -Q -j j M AM g>
| DRIVE CIRCUIT | | DRIVE CIRCUIT | | DRIVE CIRCUIT | ! | DRIVE CIRCUIT | ! | DRIVE CIRCUIT [■
| 1 ....... 1 1___ .................. 1.
I POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT/CONTROLLERAREA NETWORKCONTROLLER f

INTERFACE
L-^Wv- -AAA—1
-m r
A28 A7 A8 IMMOBILIZER
CONTROL
UNIT-RECEIVER
RED/YEL GRN/ORN
H -GRN/ORN
GRN/ORN
v OIL BRAKE
1 PARKING
i) PRESSURE f FLUID . BRAKE
SWITCH LEVEL SWITCH
(Closed: SWITCH (Closed:
Engine stopped) (Closed: Pedal depressed)
(Open: Float down)
Engine running) BLK (Open:
i
I______
('07 model) G401
________*1 (Canada models)

MAINTENANCE h
REQUIRED «.
LOWTIRE r, VSA r WASHER 1^
PRESSURE 'J TPMS ACTIVATION LOWFUEL . FLUID LEVEL DRL
INDICATOR I INDICATOR | INDICATOR I INDICATOR INDICATOR INDICATOR INDICATOR
LAMP (LED) (LED) (LED) I (LED) (LED) (LED) (LED)
DRIVE CIRCUIT
POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT/CONTROLLER AREA NETWORKCONTROLLER
A1
BLU
1
WASHER
FLUID
LEVEL
SWITCH
2 (Closed:
Float down)
BLK
_LL
G201
(Canada models)
*1: Except Touring mode!
*2: Except '08-10 Touring models
*3: Canada models and '08-10 USA models
*4: EX and EX-L models
*5: '08-10 EX and EX-L models

CRUISE
DIMMING CIRCUIT >
CRUISE CRUISE
_ POWER SLIDING 1 MESSAGE 1 ECO < CONTROL MAIN
DOOR INDICATOR I INDICATOR ! INDICATOR I INDICATOR INDICATOR
LAMP (LED) I (LED) | (LED) I (LED) (LED)
| U /v w @ -| j U A A r-@ -|
DRIVE CIRCUIT
POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT/CONTROLLER AREA NETWORK CONTROLLER

-W r
m
A9 A11 A10 A27 TAILLIGHTRELAY
LTGRN GRY/RED LTGRN/BLK

y
RED/WHT RED/BLK
I3 I5
VSA
q
i AVAUGHT
Yy (0.56 W) OFF
SWITCH
V A A
CRUISE
CONTROL CRUISE SET/RESUME/ h ntu
6
MASTER CANCEL SWITCH
SWITCH
'v '
_Q _ DASH LIGHTS
BRIGHTNESS
CONTROLLER
(In the gauge
control module)
('08-10 EX-L and Touring models)

*1: '08-10 EX-L and '07 Touring models
*2; '08-10 Touring models
TURN SIGNAL/HAZARD RELAY

DTC Troubleshooting
DTC B1152: Gauge Control Module EEPROM DTC B1155: Gauge Control Module Lost
Error Communication With Combination Switch
NOTE: If you are troubleshooting multi ple DTCs, be sure
Control Unit (Headlight Switch Message)
2. Start the engine. 1. Clear the DTCs with the HDS.
3. Check for DTCs with the HDS. 2 . Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), and then back to
ON (II).
YES-Faulty gauge control module; replace the gauge
control module (see page 22-371 ) . ■ 4. Check for DTCs with the HDS.
NO-lntermittent failure. The gauge control module is Is D T C B 1 1 5 5 in d ic a te d ?

OK at this time. Check for loose or poor connections. If YES-Go to step 5.
the connections are good, check the battery condition
(see page 22-111), and the charging system.® NO-lntermittent failure. The gauge control system is
OK at this time. Check for loose or poor
connections.®
A r e D T C s B 1 0 0 7 , B 1 0 6 2 , B 1 5 5 5 , a n d B 1 9 5 7 a ls o
in d ic a te d ?
(see page 22-191 ) . ■
NO-Go to gauge control module input test (see page
22-189).■
DTC B1156: Gauge Control Module Lost DTC B1157: Gauge Control Module Lost
Communication With Combination Switch Communication With MICU
Control Unit (Wiper Switch Message) NOTE: If you are troubleshooting multiple DTCs, be sure
1. Clear the DTCs with the HDS. 2. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), and then back to
ON (II). 3. Wait for at least 6 seconds.
3. Wait for at least 6 seconds. 4. Check for DTCs with the HDS.
4. Check for DTCs with the HDS. Is D T C B 1 1 5 7 in d ic a te d ?
Is D T C B 1 1 5 6 in d ic a t e d ? YES-Go to step 5.
YES-Go to step 5. NO-lntermittent failure. The gauge control system is
NO-lntermittent failure. The gauge control system is OK at this time. Check for loose or poor
OK at this time. Check for loose or poor connections.!
connections.! 5. Check for DTCs with the HDS.
5. Check for DTCs with the HDS. A re D T C s B 1 0 5 5 , B 1 1 0 6 , B 1 2 5 5 , B 1 3 5 5 , B 1 5 5 6 , B 1 8 0 6,
A r e D T C s B 1 0 6 3 a n d B 1 9 5 8 a ls o in d ic a te d ? B 1 9 5 5 , B 2 0 Q 5 , a n d B 2 0 5 5 a ls o in d ic a te d ?
YES-Go to combination switch control unit input test YES-Go to MICU input test (see page 22-185).!
(see page 22-191).! NO-Go to gauge control module input test (see page
NO-Go to gauge control module input test (see page 22-189).!
22-189).!
Communication With Relay Control Module Communication With the MICU (Door Switch
Message)
3. Wait for at least 6 seconds. ON (II).
4. Check for DTCs with the HDS. 3. Wait for at least 6 seconds.
Is D T C B 1 1 5 8 in d ic a te d ? 4. Check for DTCs with the HDS.
YES-Go to step 5. Is D T C B 1 1 5 9 in d ic a t e d ?
NO-lntermittent failure. The gauge control system is YES-Go to step 5.

OK at this time. Check for loose or poor and NO-lntermittent failure. The gauge control system is
connections.! OK at this time. Check for loose or poor
5. Check for DTCs with the HDS. connections.!
A r e D T C s B 1 0 0 5 a n d B 1 9 5 9 a ls o in d ic a te d ? 5. Check for DTCs with the HDS.
YES-Go to relay control module input test (see page A r e D T C s B 1 0 5 7 , B 1 1 0 5 , a n d B 1 8 0 7 a ls o in d ic a te d ?

22-192).! YES-Go to MICU input test (see page 22-185).!
NO-Go to gauge control module input test (see page NO-Go to gauge control module input test (see page
22-189).! 22-189).!
Communication With Door Multiplex Control Communication With Power Tailgate Control
Unit (Door Lock Switch Message) Unit (PTG Message)
ON (II). ON (II).
YES-Go to step 5. YES-Go to gauge control module input test (see page
22-189).■
NO-lntermittent failure. The gauge control system is
OK at this time. Check for loose or poor NO-lntermittent failure. The gauge control system is
connections.® OK at this time. Check for loose or poor
connections.!!
A r e D T C s B 1 0 0 6 , B 1 0 5 8 , a n d B 1 3 5 6 a ls o in d ic a te d ?
YES-Go to door multiplex control unit input test (see
page 22-19 0 ) M
NO-Go to gauge control module input test (see page
22-189).■
Communication With Left Power Sliding Door Communication With PCM (Engine Messages)
Control Unit (PSDL Message)
DTC B1169: Gauge Control Module Lost
DTC B1164: Gauge Control Module Lost Communication With PCM (A/T Messages)
Communication With Right Power Sliding NOTE: If you are troubleshooting multiple DTCs, be sure
Door Control Unit (PSDR Message) to follow the instructions in B-CAN System Diagnosis
t o f o l l o w t h e i n s t r u c t i o n s in B - C A N S y s t e m D i a g n o s i s 1. Clear the DTCs with the HDS.
T e s t M o d e A ( s e e p a g e 2 2 -1 5 5 ).
1. Clear the DTCs with the HDS. ON (II).
2. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), and then back to 3. Start and run the engine for at least 5 seconds then
O N (II). turn the engine off.
3. Wait for at least 6 seconds. 4. Check for DTCs with the HDS.
4. Check for DTCs with the HDS. Is D T C B 1 1 6 8 o r B 1 1 6 9 in d ic a te d ?
Is D T C B 1 1 6 3 o r B 1 1 6 4 in d ic a te d ? YES-Go to step 5.
YES-Go to gauge control module input test (see page NO-lntermittent failure, the F-CAN communication
2 2 -1 8 9 ).■ line is OK at this time. Check for DTCs in the PCM with
the HDS. If F-CAN DTCs are present, checkfor loose or
NO-lntermittent failure. The gauge control system is
poor connections at the gauge control module and
OK at this time. Check for loose or poor
the PCM. If the connections are good, check the
connections.!
battery condition (see page 22-111) and the charging
system, then clear all DTCs.B
5. Check for DTCs in the PCM with the HDS.
A r e a n y D T C s in d ic a te d ?
YES-Go to the PCM indicated DTCs
troubleshooting.■
NO-Go to step 6.
6. Do the gauge control module input test (see page
22-189).
A r e a ll in p u ts O K ?
YES-Go to step 7.
NO-Repair the faulty input, then recheck the DTCs.B
7. Substitute a known-good gauge control module. DTC B1170: Gauge Control Module Lost
8. Clear the DTCs with the HDS. Communication With VSA/ABS
Modulator-Control Unit (VSA/ABS Message)
ON (II). NOTE: If you are troubleshooting multiple DTCs, be sure
10. Start and run the engine for at least 5 seconds then to follow the instructions in B-CAN System Diagnosis
turn the engine off. Test Mode A (see page 22-155).
11. Check for DTCs with the HDS. 1. Clear the DTCs with the HDS.
Is D T C B 1 1 6 8 o r B 1 1 6 9 in d ic a te d ? 2. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), and then back to

ON (II).
YES-Replace the PCM.B
NO-The original gauge control module is faulty;
replace it (see page 22-371 ).B Is D T C B 1 1 7 0 in d ic a te d ?
YES-Go to step 4.
NO-lntermittent failure, the F-CAN communication
line is OK at this time. Check for DTCs in the PCM and
the VSA modulator-control unit with the HDS. If
F-CAN DTCs are present, check for a loose VSA
ground or poor connections at the VSA
modulator-control unit or gauge control module. If
the connections are good, check the battery condition
(see page 22-111) and the charging system, then clear
all DTCs.B
4. Check for DTCs in the PCM or VSA with the HDS.
YES-Go to the PCM or VSA indicated DTCs
troubleshooting.B
NO-Go to step 5.
22-189).
YES-Go to step 6.
6. Substitute a known-good gauge control module.
ON (II).
YES-Recheck PCM for DTCs, then recheck the VSA
modulator-control unit for DTCs.B
DTC B1173: Gauge Control Module Lost DTC B1175: Fuel Level Sensor (Fuel Gauge
Communication With TPMS Control Unit Sending Unit) Circuit Open
(TPMS Message) NOTE: If you are troubleshooting multiple DTCs, be sure
1. Clear the DTCs with the HDS. 2. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), and then back to
ON (II). 3. Check for DTCs with the HDS.
YES-Go to step 4. NO-lntermittent failure, the fuel level sensor circuit is
NO-lntermittent failure, the F-CAN communication OK at this time. Check for loose or poor
line is OK at this time. Check for loose or poor connections.B
connections. If the connections are good, check the 4. Do the fuel gauge sending unit test (see page 11-415).
battery condition (see page 22-111), and the charging
system.B Is th e fu e l g a u g e s e n d in g u n it O K ?
4. Check for DTCs in the TPMS with the HDS. YES-Go to step 5.
A re a n y D T C s in d ic a te d ? NO-Replace the fuel tank unit.B
YES-Go to the TPMS indicated DTCs 5. Disconnect the fuel pump 5P connector and gauge
troubleshooting.® control module connector A (30P) and check for loose
or damaged terminals.
NO-Go to step 5.
22-189).
YES-Go to step 6.
ON (II).
YES-Check for loose or poor connections at the TPMS
control unit. If continuities are good, replace the
TPMS control unit.B
7. Reconnect the connectors, and measure the voltage DTC B1176: Fuel Level Sensor (Fuel Gauge
between gauge control module connector A (30P)
Sending Unit) Circuit Short
terminals No. 3 and No. 4 and fuel tank unit 5P
connector terminals No. 1 and No. 2 respectively. NOTE: If you are troubleshooting multiple DTCs, be sure
FUEL TANK UNIT 5P CONNECTOR Test Mode A (see page 22-155).
YEL/BLK
W ire side of ON (II).
BLK/WHT female terminals
\ j i i / 3. Check for DTCs with the HDS.
CONNECTOR A (30P) YES-Go to step 4.
NO-lntermittent failure, the fuel level sensor circuit is
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 > < 8 9 10 11 / 13 14 OK at this time. Check for loose or poor
15 16 / 18 19 20 21 / M 23 24 25 / 27 28 / 30 connections.®
W ire side of female term inals 4. Do the fuel gauge sending unit test (see page 11-415).
Is th e fu e l g a u g e s e n d in g u n it O K ?
Is th e r e le s s th a n 0 .2 V ? YES-Go to step 5.
YES-Replace the gauge control module.ll NO-Replace the fuel gauge sending unit.®
NO-Repair the loose connection or open in the 5. Disconnect the fuel tank unit 5P connector.
BLK/WHT or YEL/BLK wire between the gauge control
6. Disconnect gauge control module connector A (30P).
module and fuel the tank unit.H
7. Check for continuity between gauge control module
connector A (30P) terminals No. 3 and No. 4 and body
ground individually.
BLK/WHT YEL/BLK
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 X 8 9 10 11 / 13 14
24 25 / 27 28 / 30
CO
15 16 / 18 19 20 21
YES-Repair a short in the wire.®
NO-Replace the gauge control module.®
DTC B1177: Abnormal Battery Voltage (7=5 V) 6. With gauge control module connector A (30P) still
connected, measure the voltage between the terminal
NOTE: If you are troubleshooting multiple DTCs, be sure No. 5 and body ground.
GAUGE CONTROL MODULE CONNECTOR A (SOP)
2. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), and then back to YEL
ON (II).
3. Check for DTCs with the HDS. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 > < 1 8 9 10 11 / 13 14
C
CM
15 16 / 18 19 20 21 24 25 / 27 28 / 30
O
YES-Go to step 5.
NO-Go to step 4.
4. Crank the engine. Wire side of female term inals
YES-Go to step 5. Is t h e r e b a t t e r y v o lta g e ?
NO-lntermittent failure. The gauge control module YES-Go to step 7.

and power supply voltage (IG1) that is supplied to the NO-Repair an open or high resistance in the YEL wire
gauge control module are OK at this time. The battery between the gauge control module and the driver's
may have been discharged, and recovered.® under-dash fuse/relay box.®
5. Check the battery (see page 22-111) and the charging 7. Measure the voltage between gauge control module
system. connector A (30P) terminals No. 5 and No. 20.
Is th e b a t t e r y c o n d itio n n o r m a l a n d th e c h a r g in g s y s te m
O K?
YES-Go to step 6.
YEL
NO-Abnormal battery condition that needs a
recharge or replacement, or a charging system
repair.® 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 x 8 9 10 11 / 13 14
15 16 / 18 19 20 21 / M 2 3 24 25 / 27 28 / 30
BLK
YES-Faulty gauge control module; replace the gauge
control module (see page 22-371).®
NO-Repair an open or high resistance in the BLK wire
between the gauge control module and ground
(G502).®
DTC B1178: F-CAN Communication Line Error DTC B1179: Gauge Control Module Lost
Communication With Electrical Compass Unit
1. Clearthe DTCs with the HDS. Test Mode A (see page 22-155).
3. Start and run the engine for at least 5 seconds then ON (II).
turn the engine off. 3. Check for DTCs with the HDS.
YES-Go to step 5. NO-lntermittent failure. The gauge control system is
NO-lntermittent failure, the F-CAN communication OK at this time. Check for loose or poor
line is OK at this time. Check for DTCs in the PCM with connections.B
the HDS. If F-CAN DTCs are present, checkfor loose or 4. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
poor connections at the gauge control module and
the PCM. If the connections are good, check the 5. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
battery condition (see page 22-111) and the charging 6. Measure the voltage between the electrical compass
system, then clear all DTCs.B unit 6P connector terminals No. 1 and No. 2.
5. Check for DTCs in the PCM with the HDS.
A r e a n y D T C s in d ic a te d ? ELECTRICAL COMPASS UNIT 6P CONNECTOR
YES-Go to the indicated PCM DTCs

troubleshooting.B I------
BLK
NO-Go to step 6.
T “P.. . . . . ............
1 2 3 4 5 6
22-189).
YES-Go to step 7.
NO-Repair the faulty input, then recheck the DTCs.B Wire side of female terminals

YES-Go to step 7.
ON (II). NO-Check for the blown No. 21 (7.5 A) fuse in the
driver's under-dash fuse/relay box or a poor ground
10. Start and run the engine for at least 5 seconds then (G501) or an open in the ground wire. If the fuse and
turn the engine off. ground are OK, check for an open in the YEL and BLK
11. Check for DTCs with the HDS. wires.
Is D T C B 1 1 7 8 in d ic a te d ? 7. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
YES-Substitute a known-good PCM.B 8. Disconnect the 6P connector from the electrical

compass unit.
9. Disconnect gauge control module connector B (14P).
(cont'd)
10. Check for continuity between gauge control module 11. Check for continuity between gauge control module
connector B (14P) and the electrical compass unit 6P connector B (14P) terminals No. 7, No. 8, No. 9, and
connector as follows. No. 10 and body ground individually.
GAUGE CONTROL ELECTRICAL

MODULE COMPASS UNIT GAUGE CONTROL MODULE CONNECTOR B (14P)
No. 7 o No. 6
No. 8 o No. 5
No. 9 No. 4 1 2 3 C J 4 5 6
No. 10 o No. 3 7 8 9 10 11 1 2 13 1 4
X
GAUGE CONTROL MODULE CONNECTOR B (14P) ORN
CM 00
00
CD
1 L J 4 5
CM
7 9 10 11 1 3 14
X
ORN Wire side of female terminals
RED/WHT Is t h e r e c o n tin u ity ?

YES-Repair a short in the wire.B
NO-Substitute a known-good electrical compass unit
1 2 3 4 5 6
and recheck the DTCs. If there is no DTC, the original
electrical compass unit is faulty, replace it. If the DTC
ELECTRICAL COMPASS UNIT 6P CONNECTOR B1179 is still indicated, replace the gauge control
module (see page 22-371 ).B
Is th e r e c o n t in u it y ?
YES-Go to step 11.
NO-Repair an open in the wire.B
DTC B1187: Gauge Control Module Lost 7. Substitute a known-good gauge control module.
Communication With SRS Unit (SRS 8. Clear the DTCs with the HDS.
Messages) 9. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), and then back to
NOTE: If you are troubleshooting multiple DTCs, be sure ON (II).
to follow the instructions in B-CAN System Diagnosis 10. Start and run the engine for at least 5 seconds then
Test Mode A (see page 22-155). turn the engine off.
1. Clear the DTCs with the HDS. 11. Check for DTCs with the HDS.
2. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), and then back to Is D T C B 1 1 8 7 in d ic a te d ?
ON (II).
YES-Substitute a known-good SRS unit and retest. If
3. Start and run the engine for at least 5 seconds then the symptom/indication goes away, replace the
turn the engine off. original SRS unit.B
4. Check for DTCs with the HDS. NO-The original gauge control module is faulty;
Is D T C B 1 1 8 7 in d ic a t e d ? replace it (see page 22-371 ).B
YES-Go to step 5.
NO-lntermittent failure, the F-CAN communication
line is OK at this time. Check for the DTCs in the SRS
with the HDS. If F-CAN DTCs are present, check for
loose or poor connections at the gauge control
module and the SRS unit. Ifthe connections are good,
check the battery condition (see page 22-111) and the
charging system, then clear all DTCs.ll
5. Check for DTCs in the SRS with the HDS.
YES-Go to the SRS indicated DTCs
troubleshooting.!
NO-Go to step 6.
22-189).
YES-Go to step 7.
Rewriting the ODO Data and Transferring the Maintenance Minder Data to a
New Gauge Control Module
NOTE: How to Release Locked odometer mileage to
• Obtain a new gauge control module before starting the original gauge control module.
the rewriting process. Only new gauges can be
rewritten. If after you attempt to transfer mileage to a new gauge
• Rewriting is not possible on a gauge control module assembly, the new odometer has dashes (———), is
that will not communicate with the HDS. garbled, or shows an incorrect value, the original gauge
• Make sure that the HDS shows the correct VIN for the control module can be unlocked and restored to its
car you are working on. original state In this way, it can be used again for
additional attempts to transfer the mileage.
• Once you have started this procedure, you must
complete it before removing the HDS from the DLC. 1. Confirm that you have the latest HDS version of
• Connect a jumper battery (do not connect a battery software.
charger) to ensure that correct battery voltage will be
2. Make sure that the HDS shows the correct VIN for the
maintained.
car you are working on.
1. Before replacing the gauge control module, connect
3. With the ignition switch to LOCK (0), reconnect the
the HDS.
original gauge control module.
2. Select GAUGES from the BODY ELECTRICAL system
4. Completely re-boot the HDS.
select menu with the HDS.
5. Clear any stored DTCs.
3. Select '"Gauge Control Module Replacement (ODO
Rewrite)" from the ADJUSTMENT menu, select READ 6. Navigate to BODY ELECTRIC/GAUGES/GAUGES
OUT DATA, and save ODO value and smart CONTROL MODULE REPLACEMENT (ODO REWRITE
maintenance data into the HDS. etc.).
4. Replace the gauge control module. 7. Select"3. RELEASING LOCKED ODO VALUE/'
5. Select WRITE DATA and following the instructions, on 8. Follow the prompts and the Odometer mileage will be
the HDS display and install the ODO value and smart restored.
maintenance data into the replacement gauge control
9. Start over and make sure the screen prompts are
module. If the data transfer fails, refer to the
instructions below to release the locked ODO value. followed.
Gauge Control Module Outside Air Temperature Indicator
Replacement Calibration
NOTE: Before replacing the gauge control module, Description
retrieve the ODO value and the maintenance minder
information from the gauge control module with the The outside temperature sensor is located behind the
HDS (see page 22-370). center of the front bumper. The gauge control module
uses measurements from this sensor provide by the
1. Remove the instrument panel (see page 20-137). climate control unit via the B-CAN communication line
2. Remove the three screws from the gauge control to display the outside air temperature.
module (A), and spread a protective cloth (B) on the Because of the location of the sensor, it may be affected
upper column cover. by heat reflection from the road, engine and radiator
heat or hot exhaust from surrounding traffic.
These conditions can heat soak the outside air
temperature sensor and cause inaccurate readings.
Logic has been written into the gauge control module to
help prevent abnormal of fluctuating outside air
temperature indicator readings.
NOTE: To test the outside air temperature sensor, refer
to the test procedure (see page 21-184).
Outside Air Temperature Indicator Logic

Initial outside air temperature indication after the
ignition switch is turned to ON (II).
• If the engine coolant temperature is 140 °F (60 °C) or
higher when the ignition switch is turned to ON (II), the
outside air temperature indicated the last time the key
was turned off will be displayed regardless of the
3. Disconnect the connectors (C), and remove the gauge current temperature measured by the outside air
control module. temperature sensor.
4. Install the gauge in the reverse order of removal. • If the engine coolant temperature is 139 °F (59 °C) or
lower when the ignition switch is turned to ON (II), the
5. Rewriting the ODO data and transfer the maintenance current temperature measured by the outside air
minder data to a new gauge control module (see page temperature sensor will be indicated.
22-370).
(cont'd)
Outside Air Temperature Indicator Calibration (cont'd)
Update to the outside air temperature Calibration

indicator while driving EX, EX-L, and Touring models
If the temperature measured by the outside air The outside air temperature indicator's displayed
temperature sensor is greater than the temperature on temperature can be recalibrated ± 5 °F (or ± 3 °C) to
the outside air temperature indicator, the outside meet the customer's expectations.
temperature indicator increases by 1 °F (1 °C) per minute
after the vehicle speed is greater than 19 mph (30 km/h) 1.Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
for more than 30 seconds. It will continue to increase
2. Select the outside air temperature display and press
until the current outside air temperature is indicated. So,
and hold the SELECT/RESET knob for 10 seconds.
the first change to the outside air temperature indicator
While you continue to hold the button, the display will
is 1 minute and 30 seconds after the vehicle speed is
scroll through temperature settings from + 5 °F to
greater than 19 mph (30 km/h). If the vehicle speed drops
—5 °F (or + 3 °C to —3 °C) as shown.
below 19 mph (30 km/h), the indicator will not update
again until the vehicle speed is increased to 19 mph
(30 km/h) or more for more than 1 minute and
30 seconds again. t0.1.2.3.4.S.-5.-4.-3.-2.-lJ
Ifthe outside air temperature is less than the 140 °F
3. When the desired correction value appears on the
(60 °C), the temperature decreases 1 °F (1 °C) every
display, release the button, and the recalibrated
2 seconds until the current outside air temperature is
outside air temperature will be displayed.
indicated.
Each time a desired correction value is entered, it
If the outside air temperature is less than the indicated
replaces the previous value.
temperature, the temperature decreases 1 °F (1 °C) every
2 seconds until the current outside air temperature is Example:
indicated regardless of vehicle speed. Incorrect value = 68 °F (20 °C)
Desired correction value = + 2 °F (+ 1 °C)
Troubleshooting Correct walue = 70 °F (21 °C)
If the indicator displays "---------- " for more than Desired correction value = —2 °F (—1 °C)
2 seconds after selecting the outside air temperature Correct value = 66°F(19°C)
display mode, check the climate control system or
multiplex integrated control system for DTCs (see Touring model
B-CAN System Diagnostic Test Mode A) (see page The outside air temperature can be calibrated in the MID
22-155). with the Customized Setting function. To enter the
customizing mode, the vehicle must be stopped, with
the transmission in Park. Press and hold the INFO button
on the steering wheel for about 3 seconds while the
multi-information display is in its normal message
mode. Select CHANGE SETTINGS, then select METER
SETUP, then select ADJUST OUTSIDE TEMP DISPLAY.
Press the INFO button to adjust the temperature to the
desired setting.
Select/Reset/Information Switch
Test/Replacement
NOTE: To recalibrate the display to the true temperature, Touring model
remove the outside air temperature sensor (A), but leave
it connected. Submerge the sensor and a thermometer 1. Remove the driver's airbag assembly (see page
(B) in a container of ice water (C). Select the calibration 24-215).
mode as described above, then recalibrate the display to
2. Remove the cover (A), two screws and the
the true temperature.
select/reset/information switch (B), then disconnect
the 8P connector (C) from the switch.
1 2 3 4
5 6 7 8

^ Terminal
8 2 3 6 5
Position \
SELECT/RESET a o
KJ ■O
INFO a o
4. If the check is not as specified, replace the switch. If

the switch is OK, but the system does not operate,
check for an open or high resistance in the wire
between the switch and the cable reel.
Dashlights Brightness Controller
Circuit Diagram
DRIVER'S UNDER-DASH
BATTERY
B4 No. 7 (7.5 A)
—-CTXjO---
DRIVER'S
UNDER-DASH
No. 23 (IG) BOX
(50 A) G1 B1 A2 No. 21 (7.5 A)
-WHT BLK/YEL •
X34 X35
START (III)
WHT/RED
• SEAT HEATER SWITCH LIGHT ADJUSTABLE PEDAL
(DRIVER'S) SWITCH LIGHT
• SEAT HEATER SWITCH LIGHT CLIMATE CONTROL or
(PASSENGER'S) A/C CONTROL PANEL LIGHT
■ SELECT/RESET/INFORMATION REAR HEATER SWITCH PANEL
SWITCH LIGHT LIGHT
• VSA OFF SWITCH LIGHT NAVIGATION DISPLAY and UNIT
• A/T GEAR POSITION INDICATOR DVD PLAYER UNIT FRONT
LIGHT HAZARDWARNING SWITCH/PASSENGER'S
■ CRUISE CONTROL AIRBAG CUTOFF INDICATOR LIGHTS PASSENGER'S
SET/RESUME/CANCEL INTERIOR LIGHTS SWITCH LIGHT UNDER-DASH
• REAR CONTROLLER and SWITCH LIGHT POWER SLIDING DOOR SWITCH LIGHT FUSE/RELAY
SCREEN LIGHTS ■ AUDIO REMOTE SWITCH LIGHT POWER TAILGATE SWITCH LIGHT BOX
• AMBIENT LIGHTS ■ MOONROOF SWITCH LIGHT PARKING and BACK-UP SENSOR
(ROOF CONSOLE) ■ AUDIO UNIT LIGHT SWITCH LIGHT
YEL WHT/RED
GAUGE CONTROL
MODULE
(LED) (BULB)
POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT/CONTROLLERAREA NETWORKCONTROLLER
DASH LIGHTS
BRIGHTNESS
CONTROLLER
A21
BLK
_Q_ _CL
Touring model (without navigation system)

System Description
The el ectrical compass unit shows the direction of the vehicle on the multi-information display (MID).
Electrical Compass Unit Connector Inputs and Outputs
n ,----- ,
1 2 3 4 5 6
Cavi ty Wire Connects to

1 YEL IG1 (Power source for ignition switch)
2 BLK Ground (G501)
3 WHT Gauge control module (RX + )
4 RED/WHT Gauge control module (RX —)
5 BLU/RED Gauge control module (TX + )
6 ORN Gauge control module (TX —)
Circuit Diagram
DRIVER'S
UNDER-HOOD UNDER-DASH
FUSE/RELAY BOX FUSE/RELAY BOX
(120 A) No. 15 (40 A) D6 B4 No. 7 (7.5 A) X35
-CTXjD- —c r\j>
DRIVER'S
UNDER-DASH
FUSE/RELAY GNITION SWITCH WHT/RED
BOX
G1 B1 A2 /b a t \ / No. 21 (7.5 A) E1
-----WHT—■ WHT - k ) 0 4 - BLK/YEL • -crvx>—
FRONT
PASSENGER'S
IG1 HOT in ON (II) and UNDER-DASH
START (III) FUSE/RELAY
YEL BOX
E14 SELECT/RESET/
INFORMATION SWITCH
YEL WHT/RED BLU GRN
YEL ORN BLU/RED RED/WHT WHT
1 6 5 4 3
ELECTRICALCOMPASS UNIT
2
.LL _Q-
Electrical Compass Unit Input Test

2. Disconnect the 6P connector (A) from the electrical compass unit (B).
• If the terminals are bent, loose, or corroded, repair them as necessary, and recheck the system.
4. Reconnect the connector to the electrical compass unit, turn the ignition switch to ON (II) and, do these input tests at
the connector.
• If all input tests prove OK, the electrical compass unit must be faulty; replace it.
Cavity Wire Test Condition Test: Desired result Possible cause if desired result
is not obtained
1 YEL Ignition switch ON (II) Measure the voltage to • Blown No. 21 (7.5 A) fuse in
the wire
2 BLK In all ignition switch Measure the voltage to ® Poor ground (G501) or an
positions ground: There should be less open in the ground wire
the wire
3 WHT Under all conditions Measure the voltage to • Faulty gauge control module
ground: • An open or high resistance in
There should be about 4 V. the wire
• A short to ground in the wire
4 RED/WHT Under all conditions Measure the voltage to • Faulty gauge control module
5 BLU/RED Under all conditions Measure the voltage to • Faulty gauge control module
Cavity Wire Test Condition Test: Desired result Possible cause if desired result
is not obtained
6 ORN Under all conditions Measure the voltage to • Faulty gauge control module
Circuit Diagram
UNDER-HOOD DRIVER'S DRIVER'S UNDER-DASH ■ : B-CAN line

FUSE/RELAY BOX UNDER-DASH FUSE/RELAYBOX
BATTERY BOX
B1 A2
WHT - WHT 4 0 O r- BLK/YEL ■
V jy
START (HI) B4 No. 7 (7.5 A)
X34
FRONT
PASSENGER'S
UNDER-DASH
FUSE/RELAY
BOX
E14
WHT/RED YEL
DRIVER'S FRONT LEFT RIGHT

\ DOOR kPASSENGER'S /±S SLIDING SLIDING
I INDICATOR DOOR ( V JDOOR (V)DOOR
(LED) INDICATOR vq b' INDICATOR INDICATOR MULTI-INFORMATION
(LED) (LED) (LED) DISPLAY (MID)
FAILURE DISPLAY DRIVE CIRCUIT
B-CAN TRANSCEIVER POWER SUPPLYCIRCUIT/

CONTROLLERAREA NETWORKCONTROLLER
_1_
! A25 A21
MICU-REAR BRN/YEL
JUNCTION BOX i N28 DRIVER'S UNDER-DASH FUSE/RELAY BOX
1
1
A14 G1 i
1f B-CAN B-CAN *f 1f MICU j pr jf
E15 H12 E14 H13

■.. ’ “ ---------- 1
POWER TAILGATE
CONTROL UNIT
11
1
Y ‘ 11
LT GRN/BLK
1
11
GRN/BLK GRN LTGRN/RED GRN/YEL GRN/WHT BLK
LTGRN/BLK
|2
1TAILGATE DRIVER'S FRONT LEFT RIGHT

LATCH DOOR PASSENGER'S SLIDING SLIDING
SWITCH SWITCH DOOR DOOR DOOR
(Closed: (Closed: SWITCH SWITCH SWITCH
Tailgate open) Door open) (Closed: (Closed: (Closed:
Door open) Door open) Door open)
BLK
1 Xl
POWER TAILGATE
CONTROL UNIT_______j _________j
(With power tailgate) (Without power tailgate)
NOTE: Before troubleshooting the safety indicator system, troubleshoot the multiplex integrated control system first
using B-CAN System Diagnosis Test Mode A (see page 22-155).
3. Disconnect driver's under-dash fuse/relay box connectors E and H (see page 22-92).
DRIVER S UNDER-DASH DRIVER S UNDER-DASH

FUSE/RELAY BOX CONNECTOR E (16P) FUSE/RELAY BOX CONNECTOR H (14P)
p n .n
P
1 2 3 F=l 4 / / 7 1 2 3 4 5 6
8 9 / 11 12 13 14 15 / 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
U L
7 T 7 \
GRN/YEL GRN LT GRN/RED GRN/WHT
W ire side of female term inals Wire side o f female term inals
4 . Inspect the connector and socket terminals to be sure they are all making good contact.
5. Reconnect the connectors to the driver's under-dash fuse/relay box. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II) and do these
input tests at the connectors on the driver's under-dash fuse/relay box.
is not obtained
E15 GRN Driver's door open Measure the voltage to • Faulty driver's door switch
, ground: • Faulty driver's door switch
There should be less than 0.2 ground
the wire
Driver's door closed Measure the voltage to • Faulty driver's door switch
H12 LT GRN/ Front passenger's door Measure the voltage to • Faulty front passenger's
RED open ground: door switch
V. door switch ground
the wire
closed ground: door switch
E14 GRN/YEL Left sliding door open Measure the voltage to • Faulty left sliding door
ground: switch
There should be less than 0.2 • Faulty left sliding door
V. switch ground
the wire
Left sliding door closed Measure the voltage to • Faulty left sliding door
ground: switch
H13 GRN/WHT Right sliding door open Measure the voltage to • Faulty right sliding door
ground: switch
There should be less than 0.2 • Faulty right sliding door
V. switch ground
the wire
Right sliding door closed Measure the voltage to • Faulty right sliding door
ground: switch
YEL WHT/RED
10. Reconnect the connector to the gauge control module, turn the ignition switch to ON (II) and, do these input tests at
the connector.
is not obtained
A5 YEL Ignition switch ON (II) Measure the voltage to • Blown No. 21 (7.5 A) fuse in
the wire
A6 WHT/RED Under all conditions Measure the voltage to • Blown No. 7 (7.5 A) fuse in
the wire
A21 BLK In all ignition switch Measure the voltage to • Poor ground (G502) or an
positions ground: There should be less open in the ground wire
the wire
MICU-Rear Juncti on Box

11. Remove the right rear side trim (see page 20-110).
12. Disconnect MICU-rear junction box connector F (13P).
MICU-REAR JUNCTION BOX CONNECTOR F (13P)
/ LT GRN/BLK*1
/ GRN/BLK#2
p ___r
1 3 -------------- 5
/ /
6 7 8 10 11
/ /
y 4
* 1: With power tailgate

W ire side o f female term inals
14. Reconnect the connector to the MICU-rear junction box. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II) and do these input tests at
the connector on the MICU-rear junction box.
is not obtained
F3*1 LT GRN/ Tailgate open Measure the voltage to • Faulty tailgate closer unit
BLK ground: • An open or high resistance in
There should be less than 0.2 the wire
V.
Tailgate closed Measure the voltage to • Faulty tailgate closer unit
F3*2 GRN/BLK Tailgate open Measure the voltage to • Poor ground (G701) or an
There should be less than 0.2 • Faulty tailgate latch switch
the wire
Tailgate closed Measure the voltage to • Faulty tailgate latch switch

15. If all the input tests prove OK, and no DTCs were found during multiplex integrated control system troubleshooting
(B-CAN System Diagnostic Test Mode A), go to the B-CAN system input and output index (see page 22-144). If
multiple failures are found on more than one control unit, replace the driver's under-dash fuse/relay box (includes the
MICU). If input failures are related to particular control unit, replace the control unit.
Circuit Diagram
*07 model
SRS UNIT X27 DRIVER'S UNDER-DASH FUSE/RELAY BOX
i OIL 2 DRIVER'S I -J IGNITION

' \ PRESSURE A SEAT BELT I 1 /fHy\ KEY
) SWITCH ( p ) BUCKLE f ( ) SWITCH
J (Closed; M£y SWITCH (Closed:
Engine stopped) 11 (Closed: Unbuckled) | 12 Key inserted)
BRN ^Pen: Buckled) gLK BLK
_LL A _Q_
G502
'08-10 models
DRIVER'S
UNDER-HOOD FUSE/RELAY BOX UNDER-DASH FUSE/RELAY BOX
(120 A) No. 15 (40 A)
-ctxjo— — cr \ j o — • YEL
©- >No. 13 IGNITION SWITCH
(20 A) No. 23 (IG)
(50A) G1 B1 A2
- WHT - - WHT - 4 - 0 0 4 — BLK/YEL
X34 X35
UNDER-DASH |G1 HOT in ON (II) and YEL WHT/RED
FUSE/RELAY START (III) E1
BOX FRONT
PASSENGER'S
UNDER-DASH
FUSE/RELAY
BOX
E14
WHT/RED
GAUGE CONTROL MODULE A5 A6
DIMMING CIRCUIT
NOTE: Before troubleshooting the reminder systems, troubleshoot the multiplex integrated control system first using
M ulti plex Integrated Control Unit (MICU)
3. Disconnect driver's under-dash fuse/relay box connectors E, F, H, and P (see page 22-92).
NOTE: All connectors are wire side of female terminals.
DRIVER'S UNDER-DASH DRIVER'S UNDER-DASH DRIVER'S UNDER-DASH

FUSE/RELAY BOX CONNECTOR E (16P) FUSE/RELAY BOX CONNECTOR F (14P) FUSE/RELAY BOX CONNECTOR H (14P)
__ n n __ i__ _n
1 2 3 F=\ 4 / / 7 1/ / 4 1 2 3 4 5 6
CO
CD
00
8 9 / 11 12 13 14 15 / 7 10 11 12 13 14 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
LJ LJ
v
BLK BLU/RED BLK
DRIVER'S UNDER-DASH FUSE/RELAY BOX CONNECTOR P (30P)
RED/WHT WHT/BLK BLK
/ 2 3 / / 6 / 8 9 10 / / , 13 14
o
CM
CO
o
15 / 17 / / / / X / / 25 / / / 29
• If the terminal are bent, loose or corroded, repair them as necessary, and recheck the system.
(cont'd)
5. With the connectors still disconnected, do this input test at the following connector on the driver's under-dash
fuse/relay box.
Cavity W i re Test condition Test: Desired result Possible cause if desired result is not
obtained
P8 WHT/BLK Under all Connect to ground with a • Blown No. 13 (20 A) fuse in the
conditions jumper wire: under-hood fuse/relay box
The ignition key light should • Faulty ignition key light
come on. • An open or high resistance in the
wire
6. Reconnect the connectors to the driver's under-dash fuse/relay box. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II) and do these
input tests at the connectors on the driver's under-dash fuse/relay box.
obtained
E9 BLK In all ignition Measure the voltage to • Poor ground (G601) or an open in
H9 switch positions ground: There should be less the ground wire
than 0.2 V. • An open or high resistance in the
wire
P14 BLK In all ignition Measure the voltage to • Poor ground (G401) or an open in
switch positions ground: There should be less the ground wire
than 0.2 V. • An open or high resistance in the
wire
F14 BLU/RED Driver's seat belt Measure the voltage to • Faulty driver's seat belt buckle
unbuckled ground: switch
There should be less than 0.2 • Poor ground (G602) or an open in
V. the ground wire
wire
Driver's seat belt Measure the voltage to • Faulty driver's seat belt buckle
buckled ground: switch
There should be 5 V or more. • A short to ground in the wire
P2 RED/WHT Ignition key in the Measure the voltage to • Faulty ignition key switch
ignition switch ground: • Poor ground (G502) or an open in
There should be less than 0.2 the ground wire
V. • An open or high resistance in the
wire
Ignition key out of Measure the voltage to • Faulty ignition key switch
the ignition ground: • A short to ground in the wire
switch There should be 5 V or more.
11. With the connectors still disconnected, do these input tests at the following connector.
obtained
A28* BLU/YEL Engine OFF Check for continuity to ground: • Faulty oil pressure switch
There should be continuity. • An open or high resistance in the
wire
Engine running Check for continuity to ground: • Mechanical problem in the engine
There should be no continuity. • Faulty oil pressure switch
wire
A20 BLK In all ignition Check for continuity to ground: • Poor ground (G502) or an open in
A21 switch positions There should be continuity. the ground wire
wire
*:'07 model
12. Reconnect the connectors at the driver's under-dash fuse/relay box and the gauge control module.
13. Do the Gauge Self-diagnostic Procedure (see page 22-345).
• If the beeper sounds and the seat belt reminder indicator flashes, go to step 14.
• If the beeper does not sound or the seat belt reminder indicator does not flash, replace the gauge control module.
14. Substitute a known-good gauge control module and recheck the system.
• If the symptom is gone, the gauge control module is faulty; replace it.
• Ifthe symptom is still present, the multiplex integrated control unit (MICU) is faulty; replace the driver's under-dash
fuse/relay box.
Rear Window Defogger

Circuit Diagram
( ) '■ Climate control

*1: With front climate control
*2: With A/C control
- - : B-CAN line
DRIVER'S
LTBLU BLK/YEL
i
I
I
I
I
I
I
| A10 (7) A11 (14)
B-CAN
FRONTCLIMATE CONTROL REAR
MICU-REAR WINDOW
JUNCTION UNIT or A/C DEFOGGER
BOX CONTROL PANEL SWITCH*2
A1 (30)
REAR
£i W CLIMATE
INDOW CONTROL
DEFOGGER PANEL
SWITCH*1
REAR
WINDOW
DEFOGGER
BLK BLK BLK
XL JQ_ i
G652 G701 G504
Rear Window Defogger
Function Test
Before troubleshooting the rear window defogger 2. Measure the voltage between the negative terminal
circuit, perform multiplex integrated control system (B) and body ground. There should be less than 0.2 V.
troubleshooting using B-CAN System Diagnosis Test
If there is greater than 0.2 V, check for an open or high
resistance in the wire or poor ground (G701) or an
NOTE: open in the ground wire. If there is continuity, go to
• Be careful not to scratch or damage the defogger step 3.
wires with the tester probe. 3. Touch voltmeter positive probe to each specified
• Before testing, check the No. 14 (30 A) fuse in the point on each defogger wire, and the negative probe
under-hood fuse/relay box and No. 30 (10 A) fuse in to the negative terminal.
the driver's under-dash fuse/relay box. • Ifthe voltage is as specified, the defogger wire up to
1. Measure the voltage between the positive terminal that point is OK.
(A) and body ground with the ignition switch and • ifthe voltage is not as specified, repair the defogger
defogger switch ON. wire (see page 22-393).
- If it is more than specified at one of the points,
There should be battery voltage.
there is a break in the negative half of the wire.
• If there is no voltage, check for:
- If it is less than specified at one of the points,
- Faulty rear window defogger relay (see page there is a break in the positive half of the wire.
22-114).
- Faulty MICU-rear junction box.
- Faulty climate (or heater) control panel.
- An open in the BLK/YEL wire to the positive
terminal.
• If there is voltage, go to step 2.
Defogger Wire Repair
NOTE: To make an effective repair, the broken section

must be no longer than 1 inch (25 mm).
1. Lightly rub the area around the broken section (A)
with fine steel wool, then clean it with isopropyl
alcohol.
2. Carefully mask above and below the broken portion of

the defogger wire (B) with cellophane tape (C).
3. Mix the silver conductive paint (commercially
available) thoroughly. Using a small brush, apply a
heavy coat of paint (A) extending about 1/8 " on both
sides of the break. Allow 25 minutes to dry.
4. Do the function test (see page 22-392) to confirm that

the wire is repaired.
5. Apply a second coat of paint in the same way. Let it
dry 3 hours before removing the tape.
LIMIT SWITCH
Test, page 22-397

Water leaks from moonroof 1. Check for a clogged or detached drain tube.
2. Check for a gap between the glass weatherstrip and the roof panel.
3. Check for a defective or an improperly installed glass weatherstrip or drain
channel.
4. Check for a gap between the drain seal and the roof panel.
Wind noise from moonroof Check for excessive clearance between the glass weatherstrip and the roof panel.
Motor noise from moonroof 1. Check for a loose motor.
2. Check for a worn gear or bearing.
3. Check for a deformed cable assembly.
Moonroof glass does not 1. Check for a defective gear or inner cable.
move, but motor turns 2. Check for foreign matter stuck between the guide rail and the slider.
3. Check for a loose inner cable.
4. Make sure the cable assembly is attached properly.
Moonroof glass does not 1. Check for a blown fuse.
move and motor does not 2. Check for a faulty moonroof switch.
turn (glass can be moved 3. Check the limit switch.
with 5 mm hex wrench) 4. Check for a run down battery.
5. Check for a defective motor.
6. Check for a faulty relay.
Circuit Diagram
DRIVER'S *1: No. 23 (P/W) (50 A): With security system

UNDER-HOOD FUSE/RELAY BOX UNDER-DASH No. 23 (P/W) (40 A): Without security system
FUSE/RELAY IGNITION SWITCH *3: '07 model
BATTERY BOX *4: '08-10 models
LTGRN/RED
DRIVER'S FRONT
DOOR PASSENGER'S
SWITCH DOOR SWITCH
POSITION SW1 SW2

OPENING OPEN OPEN
OPENED OPEN OPEN
CLOSED OPEN CLOSE
CLOSING OPEN OPEN
TILTING CLOSE CLOSE
TILT(CLOSE) CLOSE CLOSE
DASH LIGHTS
BRIGHTNESS
CONTROLLER
(In the gauge
control module)
Limit Switch Test Moonroof Motor Test
1. Remove the headliner (see page 20-116). 1. Remove the headliner (see page 20-116).
2. Disconnect the 6P connector (A) from the moonroof 2. Disconnect the 6P connector (A) from the moonroof
motor/limit switch (B). motor/limit switch (B).
3. Check for continuity between the terminals in each 3. Check the motor by connecting power and ground
moonroof position according to the table. according to the table.
NOTE: Move the moonroof by connecting power and
V Terminal
ground to the motor (see page 22-397). 1 2
Position A
\ Terminal OPEN
3 4 5 6 © 0
Positi on \
CLOSE © ©
TILT 0 -1 - o o - L o
OPEN - o
4. If the motor does not run, replace it.
o -
CLOSE o - - o NOTE: See closing force check (see page 20-99) for
motor clutch test.
4. Ifthe continuity is not as specified, adjust the limit
switch (see page 20-98) and repeat step 3.
If the continuity is still not as specified after the
adjustment, replace the cable assembly (see page
20-96).
Moonroof Switch Test/Replacement
NOTE: The moonroof can still be operated for about

10 minutes after the ignition switch is turned from the
ON (II) to the ACCESSORY (I) or LOCK (0) positions, as
long as none of the doors are opened. This provides a
convenience to parked occupants while offering a
degree of security against unwanted or accidental
moonroof operation.
1. Remove the driver's dashboard outer panel (see page
20-134).
2. Carefully push out the moonroof switch (A) from
behind the driver's dashboard outer panel, then
disconnect the 6P connector (B) from the switch.

\ Terminal
2 s 3 1 4 6
Position \
CLOSE O -o
TILT o - - 0 - HD o -o
OPEN Kr \j kPij
4. Ifthe continuity is not as specified, replace the

illumination bulb (C) or the switch.
DRIVER S UNDER-DASH FUSE/RELAY BOX PASSENGER S UNDER-DASH FUSE/RELAY BOX

*: '07 model
Test/Replacement page 22-404

Circuit Diagram
Driver's and Front Passenger's Accessory Power Socket Test/Replacement
NOTE: If a both accessory power sockets do not work, Driver's side

check the No. 32 (10 A) fuse in the driver's under-dash
fuse/relay box first. 6. Measure the voltage between driver's under-dash
fuse/relay box connector H (14P) terminal No. 2 and
1. Remove the center lower console (see page 20-138). body ground. There should be less than 0.2 V.
2. Disconnect the 2P connectors (A) from the accessory • If there is less than 0.2 V, go to step 7.
power sockets. • If there is more than 0.2 V, check for:
- An open or high resistance in the wire between
driver's under-dash fuse/relay box connector H
(14P) terminal No. 2 and body ground (G601).
- Poor ground (G601) or an open in the ground
wire.
7. Measure the voltage between driver's accessory
power socket 2P connector terminal No. 1 and body
ground. There should be battery voltage.
• If there is battery voltage, go to step 8.
- A blown No. 9 (15 A) fuse in the driver's
- A faulty driver's accessory power socket relay.
driver's under-dash fuse/relay box connector N
(45P) terminal No. 8 and driver's accessory power
socket 2P connector terminal No. 1.
*1: Driver's side
*2: Passenger's side 8. Check for continuity between driver's accessory
3. Inspect the connector terminals to be sure they are all ground. There should be continuity.
making good contact.
• If there is continuity, replace the accessory power
• If the terminals are bent, loose, or corroded, repair socket; go to step 12.
them as necessary and recheck the system.
• if there is no continuity, check for:
- An open in the wire between driver's under-dash
4. Turn the ignition switch to ACCESSORY (I). fuse/relay box connector N (45P) terminal No. 8
and driver's accessory power socket 2P
5. Choose the appropriate test:
• Driver's side, go to step 6. - Poor ground (G501) or an open in the ground
• Passenger's side, go to step 9. wire.
- An open in the wire between driver's accessory
power socket 2P connector terminal No. 2 and
body ground (G501).
Passenger's si de ('07 model) 12. Remove the socket (A).
9. Measure the voltage between passenger's
under-dash fuse/relay box connector E (14P) terminal
No. 9 and body ground. There should be less than 0.2
V.
• If there is less than 0.2 V, go to step 10.
• If there is more than 0.2 V, check for:
passenger's under-dash fuse/relay box connector
E (T4P) terminal No. 9 and body ground (G504)
wire.
10. Measure the voltage between passenger's accessory
ground. There should be battery voltage.
® If there is battery voltage, go to step 11. 13. Remove the housing (A) from the panel.
- A blown No. 9 (10 A) fuse in the passenger's
- A faulty passenger's accessory power socket
relay.
passenger's under-dash fuse/relay box connector
G (14P) terminal No. 9 and passenger's accessory
power socket 2P connector terminal No. 1.
11. Check for continuity between passenger's accessory
ground. There should be continuity.
@ If there is continuity, replace the accessory power
socket; go to step 12.
14. Install the power socket in the reverse order of
• If there is no continuity, checkfor:
removal.
wire.
- An open in the wire between passenger's
accessory power socket 2P connector terminal
No. 2 and body ground (G504).
Cargo Area Accessory Power Socket Test/Replacement
Rear Socket 6. Measure the voltage between cargo area accessory

NOTE: Before troubleshooting the rear accessory power ground. There should be battery voltage.
socket, perform the multiplex integrated control system • If there is battery voltage, go to step 7.
troubleshooting using B-CAN System Diagnosis Test • If there is no voltage, check for:
- A blown No. 12 (15 A) fuse in the driver's
1. Remove the tool box cover. under-dash fuse/relay box.
- A faulty cargo area accessory power socket relay.
2. Disconnect the 2P connector (A) from the accessory
power socket (B). - An open or high resistance in the wire between
MICU-rear junction box connector E (8P) terminal
No. 4 and cargo area accessory power socket 2P
- An open in the wire between MICU-rear junction
box connector B (7P) terminal No. 2 and driver's
under-dash fuse/relay box connector H (14P)
terminal No. 4.
7. Check for continuity between cargo area accessory
ground. There should be continuity.
• If there is continuity, go to step 8.
• If there is no continuity, check for:
wire.
- An open in the wire between cargo area
accessory power socket 2P connector terminal
8. Remove the housing (A), cover (B) and socket (C).
3. Inspect the connector terminals to be sure they are all
making good contact.
• If the terminals are bent, loose, or corroded, repair
them as necessary and recheck the system.
4. Turn the ignition switch to ACCESSORY (I).
5. Measure the voltage between MICU-rear junction box
connector C (6P) No. 1 and body ground. There
should be less than 0.2 V.
• If there is less than 0.2 V, go to step 6.
MICU-rear junction box connector C (6P) terminal
- Poor ground (G652) or an open in the ground 9. Install the power socket in the reverse order of
wire. removal.
Touring and *08-10 EX-L models (with rear entertainment)
AC INVERTER UNIT
Circuit Diagram
Touring and *08-10 EX-L models (with rear entertainment)
DRIVER'S
UNDER-HOODFUSE/RELAYBOX DRIVER'S UNDER-DASH
FUSE/RELAYBOX
ACINVERTERUNIT
POVmn
SUPPLY
CIRC;uit
CPU
INVERTER
5
BLK WHT YEL
1 3
POWER
C] [] OUTLET
XL
G603
AC Inverter Unit Input Test
Touring and "08-10 EX-L models (with rear entertainment)

1. Do the battery terminal disconnection procedure (see page 22-112).
2. Remove the left rear side trim panel (see page 20-110).
3. Disconnect the 12P connector (A) from the AC inverter unit (B).
GRN BLK/YEL YEL POWER OUTLET 3P CONNECTOR
\ L j ~
/ 3 / F f
f1 51
6 / / / / / 12 WHT YEL

Wire side of
BLK female terminals WHT
5. With the control unit still disconnected, do these input tests at the connector.
• if all the input tests prove OK, the control unit must be faulty; replace the AC inverter unit, then go to step 6.
obtained
1 GRN Under all Measure the voltage to ground: • Blown No. 6 (20 A) fuse in the
conditions There should be battery voltage. auxiliary under-hood fuse box
wire
3 BLK/YEL Ignition switch Measure the voltage to ground: • Blown No. 30 (10 A) fuse in the
ON (II) There should be battery voltage. driver's under -dash fuse/relay box
fuse/relay box
wire
6* BLK In all ignition Measure the voltage to ground: • Poor ground (G603) or an open in
switch There should be less than 0.2 V. the ground wire
positions • An open or high resistance in the
wire
5 YEL Under all Check for continuity between An open or high resistance in the wire
conditions terminal No. 5 and power outlet
3P connector terminal No. 3:
12 WHT Under all Check for continuity between An open or high resistance in the wire
conditions terminal No. 12 and power outlet
3P connector terminal No. 1:
*: Reconnect the connector to the AC inverter unit.
6. Do the battery terminal reconnection procedure (see page 22-112).
Power Outlet Replacement
Touring and *08-10 EX-L models (w ith rear

entertainm ent)
1. Remove the left rear side trim panel (see page
20-110).
2. Disconnect the 3P connector (A) from the power
outlet (B).
3. Remove the power outlet.

4. Install it in the reverse order of removal.
Removal/Installation,
'07 model, page 23-297
'08-10 models, page 23-298
Circuit Diagram
:Shielding
F3
PA
NS
DS
EERNGES
RH
'S
U -DA
FUSE/RELAY
BOX
E3
----- GRN— h
GRN
v
GRY •BACK-UPLIGHTS
•PARKINGand
BACK-UPSENSOR
CONTROLUNIT
VCC GND CAMERACAMERA SH

BLK GND V GND
REARVIEWCAMERA
XL Xl
G601 G101
G102
System Description
The rearview monitor mirror system consists of the

rearview camera and the automatic dimming inside
mirror with a built-in rearview monitor. When the
transmission range switch is in R position, the rearview
monitor is on, and the image of the rearview camera
appears. Brightness of the rearview monitor changes
automatically using the front-facing and rear-facing lux
level sensors (A) for the automatic dimming inside
mirror. There is a case that the brightness gets dimmed
gradually when the rearview monitor turns on for a long
time. The rearview monitor turns off, when the
automatic dimming off switch (B) is pushed, or the
transmission range switch is in other than R position.
Rearview Monitor Mirror Input Test/Replacement
NOTE: The normal operating temperature range of rearview monitor mirror is —22 °F to 176 °F (—30 °C to 80 °C). Allow
the inside temperature of the vehicle to stabilize within the normal operating range before testing.
2. Check the auto dimming inside mirror indicator. If the indicator flashes two times, and then turns on, there is a
malfunction in the mirror. Replace it.
4. Disconnect the 12P connector (A) from the roof wire harness (B).
BLK GRN WHT BLK/YEL GRN
11 nM
CO
1 2 / 5 6
7 8 / / / 12
\
GRY RED BLK
6. Remove the tailgate lower trim panel (see page 20-113) to access the rearview camera 6P connector.
7. With the connector still disconnected, do these input tests at the connector.
NOTE: Make sure the connector is connected while testing terminals 5,6 and 12. Make sure the connector is
disconnected while testing terminals 3 ,8 ,2 ,1 , and 7.
• If all the input tests prove OK. Substitute and connect a known-good rearview camera and check the monitor image
in reverse. If the symptom is gone, the rearview camera is faulty; replace it. If the symptom is still present, the
rearview mirror is faulty; replace it.
Cavity Wire Test condition ~Test: Desired result Possible cause if desired result
is not obtained
5 BLK/YEL Ignition switch ON (II) Measure the voltage • An open or high resistance in
between terminal No. 5 and the wire
body ground: • Blown No. 30 (10 A) fuse in
There should be battery the driver's under-dash
voltage. fuse/relay box
• Faulty passenger's
6 GRN Ignition switch ON (II) and Measure the voltage to • An open or high resistance in
the transmission shift ground: the wire
lever in reverse There should be battery • Faulty driver's under-dash
voltage. fuse/relay box (MICU)
• Blown No. 21 (7.5 A) fuse in
fuse/relay box
• Faulty transmission range
switch
• Poor ground (G101,G102) or
an open in the ground wire
12 BLK In all ignition switch Measure the voltage • An open or high resistance in
positions between terminal No. 12 and the wire
body ground: • Poor ground (G601) or an
There should be less than 0.2 open in the ground wire
V.
3 WHT Disconnect the rearview Check for continuity An open or high resistance in
camera 6P connector between terminal No. 3 and the wire
rearview camera 6P
body ground:
There should be no
continuity.
8 RED Disconnect the rearview Check for continuity An open or high resistance in
rearview camera 6P
body ground:
There should be no
continuity.
(cont'd)
Rearview Monitor Mirror Input Test/Replacement (cont'd)
is not obtained
2 GRN Disconnect the rearview Check for continuity An open or high resistance in
rearview camera 6P
body ground:
There should be no
continuity.
1 BLK Disconnect the rearview Check for continuity An open or high resistance in
rearview camera 6P
body ground:
There should be no
continuity.
7 GRY Disconnect the rearview Check for continuity An open or high resistance in
rearview camera 6P
A utom atic Dim m ing Inside M irror
Circuit Diagram
Touring and '08-10 EX-L models
— XL
G
G1
10
01
2
A u to m atic Dim m ing Inside M irror
System Description Test/Replacement
The automatic dimming inside mirror has a front-facing NOTE: With the rearview monitor mirror, refer to the
lux level sensor (A), a rear-facing lux level sensor (B), input test for the rearview monitor mirror (see page
and a control unit. The control unit receives signals from 22-412).
each sensor. Based on the difference between the two
lux levels (the light outside the vehicle and the light from
the headlights of the other vehicle, etc.), the control unit 2. Disconnect the 3P connector (A) from the automatic
controls the electro-chromic gel to reduce the glare. This dimming inside mirror (B).
dimming function is canceled when the transmission is
in reverse, or when the automatic dimming off switch (C)
is turned OFF.
3. Check for continuity between terminal No. 3 and body

ground.
• If there is continuity, go to step 4.
• If there is no continuity, check for:
wire.
4. Measure the voltage between terminal No. 1 and body
ground with the ignition switch to ON (II).
- Blown No. 30 (10 A) fuse in the driver's
- Faulty passenger's under-dash fuse/relay box.
5. Measure the voltage between terminal No. 2 and body
ground with the ignition switch turned to ON (II) and
the transmission shift lever in reverse.
• If there is battery voltage, the mirror harness is OK,
replace the rearview mirror.
- Blown No. 21 (7.5 A) fuse in the driver's
- Faulty driver's under-dash fuse/relay box (MICU).
- Faulty transmission range switch.
- Poor ground (G101,G102) or an open in the
ground wire.
For the *08-10 Touring models, refer to the Drivi ng Position Memory System (DPMS)
Component Location Index, page 22-460
Mirror Actuator Replacement, page 22-425

Circuit Diagram - Without DPMS
*:EX,EX-L,and'07Touringmodels
DRIVER'S
Power Mirror Switch Function Test
Exeept *08-10 Touring models Both m i rrors
1. Remove the driver's door switch trim (see page 20-8). 4. Reconnect the power mirror switch connector, and
measure the voltage between terminal No. 2 and
body ground with the ignition switch to ON (II) while
operating the power mirror switch.
- An open in the BLK/YEL wire.
5. Measure the voltage between terminal No. 6 and
body ground while operating the power mirror
switch.
There should be less than 0.2 V.
- An open in the BLK wire.
wire.
• If there is less than 0.2 V, check both mirrors
2. Disconnect the 13P connector (A) from the power individually as described in step 6 and 7.
mirror switch (B), and inspect the terminals. If OK, go
Left mirror
to step 3.
3. Choose the appropriate test based on the symptom: 6. Connect terminal No. 2 to terminal No. 10, and
terminal No. 5 (or No. 12) to body ground with jumper
• Both mirrors don’t work, go to step 4.
wires. The left mirror should tilt down (or swing left)
• Left mirror doesn't work, go to step 6. with the ignition switch to ON (II).
• Right mirror doesn't work, go to step 7. • If the mirror does not tilt down (or does not swing
• Defoggersdon'twork, gotostep8. left), check for an open in the GRN/WHT (or
BLU/WHT) wire between the left mirror and the 13P
connector.
• Ifthe mirror neither tilts down nor swings left, check
for an open in the BLU/BLK wire.
• Ifthe wire is OK, check the left mirror actuator.
• Ifthe mirror works properly, check the mirror
switch.
Power Mirror Switch Function Test (cont'd)
Right mirror '08-10 Touring models

7. Connect terminal No. 2 to terminal No. 11, and NOTE:
terminal No. 5 (or No. 13) to body ground with jumper
• For additional troubleshooting information, refer to
wires. The right mirror should tilt down (or swing left)
Driving Position Memory System (DPMS) (see page
with the ignition switch to ON (II).
22-460).
• If the mirror does not tilt down (or does not swing
• For the '08-10 Touring models, refer to the circuit
left), check for an open in the GRN/WHT (or
diagram (see page 22-471).
WHT/RED) wire between the right mirror and the
13P connector. If the wire is OK, check the right 1. Remove the driver's door switch trim (see page 20-8).
mirror actuator.
for an open in the RED/YEL wire.
• Ifthe wire is OK, check the left mirror actuator.
• Ifthe mirror works properly, check the mirror
switch.
Defogger (EX, EX-L, and *07 Touring models)
8. Connect terminals No. 1 and No. 8 with a jumper wire,
and check for voltage between terminal No. 1 and
body ground. There should be battery voltage and
both mirrors should warm up with the ignition switch
to ON (II).
• If there is no voltage or neither warms up, checkfor. Wire side of
female terminals
- An open in the BLK/YEL and ORN wires.
under-dash fuse/relay box. BLK /W H T /R E D \ RED
- Poor ground (G504, G601) or an open in the ORN GRN/WHT BLU/WHT
ground wire.
• If only one fails to warm up, check its defogger.
• If both warm up, check the defogger switch. mirror switch (B), and inspect the terminals. If OK, go
to step 3.
3. Choose the appropriate test based on the symptom:
• Both mirrors don't work, go to step 4.
• Left mirror doesn't work, go to step 6.
• Right mirror doesn't work, go to step 7.
• Defoggers don't work, go to step 8.
Both m i rrors Right mirror
4. Reconnect the power mirror switch connector, and 7. Connect terminal No. 2 to terminal No. 11, and
measure the voltage between terminal No. 2 and terminal No. 5 (or No. 13) to body ground with jumper
body ground with the ignition switch to ON (II) while wires. The right mirror should tilt down (or swing left)
operating the power mirror switch. with the ignition switch to ON (II).
• If the mirror does not tilt down (or does not swing
left), check for an open in the BLU/BLK (or
• If there is no voltage, check for: BLU/WHT) wire between the right mirror and the
- Blown No. 30 (10 A) fuse in the driver's 13P connector. If the wire is OK, check the right
under-dash fuse/relay box. mirror actuator.
- An open in the BLK/YEL wire. • Ifthe mirror neither tilts down nor swings left, check
• If there is battery voltage, go to step 5. for an open in the GRN/WHT wire.
• If the wires are OK, check the left mirror actuator.
5. Measure the voltage between terminal No. 6 and
body ground while operating the power mirror • If the mirror works properly, check the mirror
switch. switch.
There should be less than 0.2 V. Defogger

• If there is more than 0.2 V, check for: 8. Connect terminals No. 1 and No. 8 with a jumper wire,
- An open in the BLK wire. and check for voltage between terminal No. 1 and
- Poor ground (G601) or an open in the ground body ground. There should be battery voltage and
wire. both mirrors should warm up with the ignition switch
• If there is less than 0.2 V, check both mirrors to ON (II).
individually as described in step 6 and 7. • If there is no or neither warms up, check for:
- An open in the BLK/YEL and ORN wires.
Left mirror
6. Connect terminal No. 2 to terminal No. 10, and under-dash fuse/relay box.
terminal No. 5 (or No. 12) to body ground with jumper - Poor ground (G504, G601) or an open in the
wires. The left mirror should tilt down (or swing left) ground wire.
with the ignition switch to ON (II). • If only one fails to warm up, check its defogger.
• If the mirror does not tilt down (or does not swing • If both warm up, check the defogger switch.
left), check for an open in the BLU/BLK (or RED) wire
between the left mirror and the 13P connector.
for an open in the WHT/RED wire.
• If the wires are OK, check the left mirror actuator.
• If the mirror works properly, check the mirror
switch.
Power Mirror Switch Test/Replacement
1. Remove the driver's door switch trim (see page 20-8). 3. Check for continuity between the terminals in each
2. Disconnect the 13P connector from the power mirror
switch. Mirror Switch:
y Terminal
2 5 6 w 11 12 13
1 2/ 4 5 Position \
6 / 8 9 10 11 12 13
UP O - -O o - h—VJ A
DOWN v/.. ..w

o - -o
L
0- — /> iO
LEFT A fS
W.. u
u A
U
RIGHT
UP O—- o u— A
“ V/ a
w
A
V n
DOWN
o - -o
R
A
\J . \J
LEFT
o- u
A
U A
u
RIGHT r\
o - —A KJ
Defogger Switch:
Terminal
1 8 6
Position
ON O - - o - -x — % -@ - -O
OFF o -N — % - © - -O
4. Ifthe continuity is not as specified, remove the screws

and replace the power mirror switch.
Power Mirror Actuator Test
Exeept *08-10 Touring models Defogger Test
NOTE: The power mirror actuator can be tested by using 5. Reconnect the 8P connector to the mirror actuator,
the HDS by following these steps: turn the ignition switch to ON (II) and the mirror
defogger switch is ON.
® Select BODY ELECTRICAL from the SYSTEM SELECT
MENU. 6. Measure the voltage between terminals No. 3 and
• Select FUNCTION TESTS, and then the appropriate No. 4 of the 8P connector. There should be battery
power mirror function test. voltage. If there is no voltage, check for an open or
• If the mirror fails to work properly; high resistance in the wire. If voltage is as specified
and the mirror fails to warm up, replace the mirror
1. Remove the door panel (see page 20-8) and the mirror defoggers.
mount cover (see page 20-62).
mirror actuator (B).
/ / 3 4
00
CD
/ 7

ground according to the table.
\ Terminal
6 7 8
Position \
TILT UP 0 ©
TILT DOWN © 0
SWING LEFT 0 ©
SWING RIGHT © ©
4. Ifthe mirror fails to work properly, replace the mirror
actuator.
Power Mirror Actuator Test (cont'd)
'08-10 Touring models Defogger Test
NOTE: 5. Reconnect the 13P connector to the mirror actuator,

turn the ignition switch to ON (II) and the mirror
• For additional troubleshooting information, refer to
defogger switch is ON.
Driving Position Memory System (DPMS) (see page
22-460). 6. Measure the voltage between terminals No. 8 and No.
• For the '08-10 Touring models, refer to the circuit 9 of the 13P connector. There should be battery
diagram (see page 22-471). voltage. If there is no voltage, check for an open or
• The power mirror actuator can be tested by using the high resistance in the wire. If voltage is as specified
HDS by following these steps: and the mirror fails to warm up, replace the mirror
- Select BODY ELECTRICAL from the SYSTEM holder.
SELECT MENU.
- Select FUNCTION TESTS, and then the appropriate
power mirror function test.
• If the mirror fails to work properly;
2. Disconnect the 13P connector (A) from the door wine
harness (B).
Wire si<
female

\ Terminal
13 11 12
Position \
TILT UP © ©
TILT DOWN © ©
SWING LEFT 0 ©
SWING RIGHT €> ©
4. If the mirror fails to work properly, replace the mirror
actuator.
Power Mirror Actuator Replacement
Except *08-10 Touring models 6. Cut the wire harness with wire cutters.
Removal 7. Remove the three terminals from the connector.
1. Remove the mirror holder (see page 20-64) and power 8. Remove the three screws and separate the housing
mirror (see page 20-62). (A) and bracket (B).
2. Disconnect the 8P connector from the power mirror.

3. Remove the gasket (A), then remove the two screws
from the 8P connector (B).
9. Remove the three screws and the power mirror

actuator (C).
4. Record the terminal location and wire harness colors.

5. With mirror defogger: disconnect terminals No. 3 and
No. 4 (A) of the mirror wire harness from the 8P
connector.
REMOVE.
Power Mirror Actuator Replacement (cont'd)
Installation '08-10 Touring models

10, Route a new actuator harness (A) through the bracket Removal
(B), and install the actuator (C) in the reverse order of
removal. 1. Remove the mirror holder (see page 20-64), the power
mirror (see page 20-62), and disconnect the 13P
connector.
2. Record the wire colors and the terminal locations of
the mirror 13P connector.
/ / 3 4 5
/ / 8 9 10 11 12 13
3. Disassemble the power mirror 13P connector (A), and

remove the terminals from it.
4.4 N-m A
(0.45 kgf-m, 3.25 Ibf-ft)
11. Insert the terminals into the connector in the original

arrangement as shown.
Left Right
4. Remove the gasket (A), then remove the screw and

clip (B).
YEL/RED BLU/GRN
*: With defogger
12. Reassemble in the reverse order of disassembly. Be

careful not to break the mirror holder when
reinstalling it to the actuator (see page 20-64).
13. Reinstall the mirror assembly to the door.
14. Operate the power mirror to ensure smooth
operation.
5. Remove the three screws, and separate the mirror Installati on
housing (A) from the bracket (B).
7. Route a new actuator harness through the bracket,
and install the actuator in the reverse order of
removal.
8. Insert the mirror actuator wires into the original
terminal locations as noted in step 2.
9. Reassemble in the reverse order of disassembly. Be
careful not to break the mirror holder when
reinstalling it to the actuator (see page 20-64).
10. Reinstall the mirror assembly to the door.
11. Operate the power mirror to ensure smooth
operation.
4.4 N-m
(0.45 kgf-m, 3.25 Ibf-ft)
6. Remove the four screws and the actuator (A).

EX-L and Touring models
FUSE/RELAY BOX
I ~ b~ y i
Circuit Diagram
*07 EX-L and Touri ng models

DRIVER'S
UNS
DEE/R
RE
-D
UNDER-HOODFUSE/RELAYBOX FU LA
AS
YH IGNITIONSWITCH
BATTERY
No.7(7.5A)FUSE
(PN
U AD
SE
SR
E-D
NGAE
SR
H'S
FUSE/RELAYBOX)
*08-10 EX-L and Touring models

D
UR
NIV
ER
DE R-D
'SASH
UNDER-HOODFUSE/RELAYBOX FUSE/RELAY IGNITIONSWITCH
BATTERY
No.7(7.5A)FUSE
(PASSENGER'S
UNDER-DASH
FUSE/RELAYBOX)
DRIVER'SSEATHEATER B1 FRONTPASSENGER'S 1
BLK BLK SEATHEATER BRN
i 1 I i
G602 G504 G651 G504
Switch Test/Replacement Seat Heater Test
1. Remove the dashboard center lower cover (see page Driver's Seat ('07 model)
20-138),
1. Remove the driver's seat (see page 20-153).
2. Disconnect the 6P connector from the seat heater
switch (A). 2. Disconnect the 4P connector (A) and 2P connector (B)
from the seat heater.
1 F=l 2
3 4 I5 6
3. Remove the two screws and the switch.

\ Terminal
1 2 3 4 5 a
Position \ 3. Check for continuity between terminals B1 and B2 of
0 - —0
HIGH O - - e - -O o~ —O—- e - - o the seat-back heater 2P connector. There should be
ON o - -e - — O 0 - - e - -0
LOW O- -o continuity.
OFF V/"“*— A
1A5J—“V
4. Check for continuity between terminals A2 and B1, the
5. If the continuity check is not as specified, replace the terminals A3 and A4, and the terminals A3 and B2.
illumination bulbs (B) or the switch. There should be continuity.
5. If the continuity check is not as specified, replace the
appropriate seat heater.
Seat Heater Test (cont'd)
Driver's Seat ('08-10 models) Front Passenger's Seat ('07 model)

1. Remove the driver's seat (see page 20-153). 1. Remove the passenger's seat (see page 20-153).
2. Disconnect the 3P connector (A) and 2P connector (B) 2. Disconnect the 4P connector (A) from the seat heater.
from the seat heater.
A
3. Check for continuity between terminals No. 2 and No.

4, and terminals No. 3 and No. 4 of the 4P connector.
3. Check for continuity between terminals B1 and B2 of 4. If the continuity is not as specified, replace the seat
the seat-back heater 2P connector. There should be heater.
continuity.
4. Check for continuity between terminals A2 and A1,
terminals A3 and A1 of the 3P connector. There
should be continuity.
appropriate seat heater.
Front Passenger's Seat ('08-10 models)
1. Remove the passenger's seat (see page 20-153).
2. Disconnect the 3P connector (A) from the seat heater.
3. Check for continuity between terminals No. 1 and No.

2, and terminals No. 1 and No. 3 of the 3P connector.
4. If the continuity is not as specified, replace the seat
heater.
*08-10 models with front passenger's power seat

Circuit Diagram - Driver's Power Seat
Without DPMS
UNDER-HOODFUSE/RELAYBOX
BATTERY
No.22(BAT)(120A) No.20(40A)
-----ct\ jd----------ctxjd—■
0-
Circuit Diagram - Front Passenger's Power Seat
*08-10 models with front passenger's power seat
BATTERY
© ------------------------------------- 1
BLU
GRN/ORN PNK/BLU
G651 G651
Power Seat Adjustment Switch Test/Replacement
Driver's seat w ith o u t DPMS

NOTE: For DPMS power seat adjustment switch test/replacement (see page 22-516).
1. Remove the power seat adjustment switch knobs (A) and the recline cover from the driver's power seat (see page
20-157), then remove the two screws and the power seat adjustment switch (B).
1 2 3 4 5
6 7 8 9 10 11 12
2. Disconnect the 12P connector from the power seat adjustment switch.
3. Reinstall the adjustment switch knobs to the switch.
4. Check for continuity between the terminals in each switch position according to the table.
Terminal
10 11 12
Position
Forward
*o- o- -o
SLIDE
SWITCH o-
Backward
Forward *o-
RECLINE
SWITCH o
Backward
FRONT UP * o
UP-DOWN
SWITCH DOWN
o
REAR UP O
* o -o
UP-DOWN
SWITCH DOWN
*: There i s continuity without operating a switch.

Power Seat Adjustment Switch Test/Replacement (cont'd)
Front Passenger's Seat ('08-10 models w ith fro n t passenger's power seat)
1. Remove the power seat adjustment switch knobs (A) and the recline cover from the passenger's seat (see page
20-157).
1 2 3 4 5
CD
00
6 7 10 11 12
2. Remove the screws and the power seat adjustment switch (B).
3. Disconnect the 12P connector from the power seat adjustment switch.
4. Reinstall the switch knobs to the switch.
SLIDE, RECLINE
Terminal
2 4 6 7 8 10 11 12
Position n.
FORWARD *o — — o
SLIDE o— - ■— o
SWITCH o— — o
BACKWARD
*o — — o
FORWARD rs #o — — o n
RECLINE kJ
SWITCH o— — o
BACKWARD
* o ----- — O
**. There is continuity without operating a switch.
6. Ifthe continuity is not as specified, replace the switch.

Driver's Power Seat Motor Test
W ithout DPMS 4. Test each motor by applying battery voltage and body
ground to the 12P connector terminals.
NOTE: For DPMS power seat motor test (see page
22-517). Slide motor
1. Remove the driver's seat (see page 20-153). ^ Terminal

7 11
2. Remove the power seat adjustment switch knobs and Position \
recline cover from the seat (see page 20-157).
Forward © ©
3. Disconnect'the 12P connector (A) from the power seat
adjustment switch (B). Backward © ©
Recline motor
Wire side of 1 2 f= t. 3 4 5 Terminal

female terminals 12
00
05
6 7 10 11 12 6
Position \
Forward © ©
Backward © ©
Front up-down motor
\ Terminal
3 9
Position \
UP © ©
DOWN © ©
Rear up-down motor
Terminal
1 5
Position \
UP © ©
DOWN © ©
5. If the motor does not run or fails to run smoothly,

check for an open in the driver's seat wire harness and
recline motor subharness. If the harness is OK,
replace the motor (see page 20-175).
Front Passenger's Power Seat Motor Test
Front Passenger's Seat ('08-10 models w ith 4. Test each motor by applying battery voltage and body
ground to the 12P connector terminals.
fro n t passenger's power seat)
Slide motor
1. Remove the front passenger's seat (see page 20-153).
2. Remove the power seat adjustment switch knobs and Terminal
recline cover from the seat (see page 20-157). 11 7
Position \
3. Disconnect the 12P connector (A) from the power seat
adjustment switch (B). Forward © ©
Backward © ©
Wire side of Recline motor

/ 2 ... 1=3 / 4 / female terminals
6 7 8 I / 10 11 12
Terminal
12 6
Position
Forward © ©
Backward © ©
5. Ifthe motor does not run or fails to run smoothly,

check for an open in the front passenger's seat wire
harness between the 12P connector and each motor
connector. Ifthe harness is OK, replace the motor (see
page 20-175).
Input Test/Replacement, page 22-451 Troubleshooting, page 22-445

TRANSPONDER PCM
(Built into the ignition key) Replacement, page 11-294
Substitute known-good for testing, page 11-7
System Description
The vehicle is equipped with a type IV (GEN 3.5) immobilizer system that will disable the vehicle unless the proper
ignition key is used. This system consists of a transponder located in the ignition key, an immobilizer control
unit-receiver, an indicator, imoes unit ('08-10 models), and the PCM.
When the immobilizer key is inserted into the ignition switch and turned to the ON (II) position, the immobilizer control
unit-receiver sends power to the transponder in the ignition key. The transponder then sends a coded signal back to the
immobilizer control unit-receiver, which sends a coded signal to the imoes unit, which confirms the code and signals the
PCM to supply power to the fuel pump circuit. A communication agreement with the HDS is required at the PCM or the
imoes unit after repair or replacement. When replacing the immobilizer control unit-receiver, all keys are required to be
registered into the new immobilizer control unit-receiver. Any keys that were not registered in the immobilizer control
unit-receiver will not start the vehicle.
IM M O B IL IZ E R C O N T R O L U N IT -R E C E IV E R
• Ifthe proper key has been used, the immobilizer indicator will come on for about 2 seconds, then go off.
• Ifthe wrong key has been used or the code was not received or recognized by the units, the indicator will come on for
about 2 seconds, then it will blink until the ignition switch is turned to LOCK (0).
• When the ignition switch is turned to LOCK (0), the indicator blinks for about 5 seconds to signal that the unit has reset
correctly, then the indicator goes off.
IM M O B IL IZ E R IN D IC A T O R B L IN K IN G P A T T E R N ;
Circuit Diagram
USA models
UNDER-HOOD DU
RS
IV :Othercommunicationline
EERE
'SLA
UY
ND
BE
R
FUSE/RELAYBOX F /R OX-DASH
Canada models
UU
NS
DEE/R
R-H :Othercommunicationline
F ELOAO
YD
BOX DRIVER'SUNDER-DASH
FUSE/RELAYBOX
BATTERY N(120A) )
o. 22(BAT
No.7(7.5A)
B4 —crxo— X35
-<txjd— - YEL
WHT/RED
N
(5o
0.A
2)3(IG) IGNITIONSWITCH
No.19(15A)
boAT BLK/YEL■A6
IG1 WHT/RED
G1 D
UR
NIV
ER
R-D
'SASH
DE
WHT FUSE/RELAY WHT andSTARTO
IG1HOTin N(It)
(III) PGM-FI
E1
MAIN PASSENGER'S
I 81 A2 j RELAY2 UNDER-DASH
FUSE/RELAY
('08-10models) BOX
!---------------- D12 E14
BLK/YEL■38
X WHT/RED GAUGE
CONTROL
A6 MODULE
X4
IMMOBILIZER
INDD
IC
(LE )ATOR
A16
WHT/RED BLK/YEL BLK/YEL BLK/YEL WHT/RED BLU/ORN
u la |7 U
+B IG1 IG1 +B IMOARM
IMOESUNIT IMMOBILIZERCONTROLUNIT-RECEIVER ■< z Q ]
KEYSW IMOCD IMOCD
LG3 (S-NET) (S-NET) LG3 H/BRKSW DIAG-H
I1 ;2 :2 I1
BLK RED/BLU RED/BLU BLK GAUGE
MICU CONTROL
MODULE
RED/WHT RED/WHT BLK RED/BLU GRN/ORN GRN/ORN GRY

IA41 B42 *A46
LG3 IG1 IMOCD
(S-NET)
PCM DATALINK
CONNECTOR
RED/WHT LG2 LG1 GRN/ORN (DLC)
L - J z i: j B41 JC41
11 IGNITION BRN/YEL BRN/YEL 1 PARKING
KWEY ) BLAKE
S ITCH SWITCH
(Closed:
I2 Keyinserted) (Closed:Pedaldepressed)
(Open:Pedalreleased)
BLK BRN/YEL
1
G502 G101
Symptom Troubleshooting Information
General Check before Troubleshooting

Before troubleshooting the immobilizer system, check the following general items and solve any if applicable:
• Ifthe battery is low; charge the battery fully, then troubleshoot the immobilizer system.
• Ifthe ignition key is not a genuine Honda part; use the Honda- approved key blank, register the key, then troubleshoot
the immobilizer system.
• Check the key ring, or keys, or if a key case is used; remove the key from it, and troubleshoot the immobilizer system
with a key only.
• If an aftermarket electrical part is attached; remove it, then troubleshoot the immobilizer system.
Symptom Troubleshooting Using the Im m obilizer Indicator Lighting Pattern

The pattern of the immobilizer indicator light can help troubleshooting the condition of the immobilizer system.
Following are descriptions of the five possible patterns:
Normal operati on (Lighting pattern 1)
When the ignition switch is turned to ON (II) and the immobilizer code is identified, the immobilizer indicator comes on
for 2 seconds, then goes off.
The immobilizer indicator blinks five times when the ignition switch is turned to LOCK (0).
+ B line open (Lighting pattern 2 )
When the ignition switch is turned to ON (II) and the immobilizer code is identified, the immobilizer indicator comes on
for 2 seconds, then goes off.
The immobilizer indicator goes off when the ignition switch is turned to LOCK (0).
Immobili zer code is not identified (Lighting pattern 3)
When the ignition switch is turned to ON (II) but the immobilizer code is not identified, the immobilizer indicator comes
on for 2 seconds, then blinks. The state of the immobilizer key registration and the IMOCD (S-NET) line can be checked
by doing a SYSTEM CHECK (see page 22-455) and a STATUS LOG (see page 22-457) CHECK with the HDS.
The immobilizer indicator goes off when the ignition switch is turned to LOCK (0).
Immobilizer indicator does not come on (Lighting pattern 4)
Ifthe immobilizer indicator does not come on when the ignition switch is turned to ON (II), check the following items:
• Check that there is battery voltage on the +B line.
• Check that the LG3 line is grounded through the PCM.
• Check for continuity between the immobilizer control unit-receiver and the gauge control module (IMOARM line).
• Gauge control module
Immobilizer indicator does not go off (Lighting pattern 5)
Ifthe immobilizer indicator does not go off after the ignition switch is turned to ON (II), checkfor a short to ground in the
immobilizer circuit between the gauge module and the immobilizer control unit-receiver (IMOARM line).
Symptom Troubleshooting Information (cont'd)
Symptom Troubleshooting Using M alfunctioning Circuit Functions

If a malfunction occurs in the immobilizer circuit, use the following table to cross-reference the malfunctioning function
to the line(s) that should be checked:
Line error +B line open IG1 line open GND (LG3) line IMOCD (S-NET) Immobilizer Immobilizer
open line open Indicator line Indicator line
Function open short
Immobilizer No blinking Does not come Does not come Blinking Does not come Does not go off
Indicator when ignition on on on
switch turned to
LOCK (0)
Engine start Possible Impossible Impossible Impossible Possible Possible
Key registration Impossible Impossible Impossible Impossible Possible Possible
Tester Possible Impossible Impossible Possible Possible Possible
communication
System Check and Status Log

Note: The HDS can be used to:
• Check the state of the immobilizer key registration and the IMOCD (S-NET) line by doing a SYSTEM CHECK.
• Check the number of times the immobilizer control unit-receiver doesn't permit the engine to run by checking the
STATUS LOG.
1. Connect the HDS to the data link connector, then turn the ignition switch to ON (II) and follow the prompts to the MAIN
MENU.
NOTE: Ifthe HDS does not communicate with the vehicle, goto the DLC circuit troubleshooting (see page 11-269).
2. At the main menu, enter IMMOBI, then select the IMMOBILIZER SET UP.
3. Do the SYSTEM CHECK (see page 22-455). If there is a system check number, do the troubleshooting for the item
indicated.
4. Check the status log (see page 22-457) using the HDS. Troubleshoot the line with the highest counts first. If all the
lines are zero (0), the problem may not be caused by the immobilizer system, check for ignition or fuel problems.
NOTE: Once repaired, clearthe status log by removing the No. 7 (7.5 A) fuse in the under-dash fuse/relay box or
disconnecting the immobilizer control unit-receiver.
1. Troubleshoot the immobilizer system by the order of the priority shown:
Order of Symptom Possible cause

Priority
1 Immobilizer indicator blinks. Symptom troubleshooting (see page 22-448).
2 Engine does not start with the Symptom troubleshooting (see page 22-449).
immobilizer key.
3 Immobilizer indicator does not come on. Check the MIL indication.
• Ifthe MIL comes on, go to the PGM-FI system MIL circuit
troubleshooting (see page 11-268).
• If the MIL does not come on, go to the gauge control
module self-diagnostic function (see page 22-345).
4 Immobilizer indicator does not go off. Symptom troubleshooting (see page 22-450).
Im m obilizer indicator blinks 8. Measure the voltage between immobilizer control

unit-receiver 7P connector terminal No. 6 and body
NOTE: Before troubleshooting, check the following ground.
general items and solve any if applicable:
• Ifthe battery is low; charge the battery fully, then
troubleshoot the immobilizer system.
• If the ignition key is not a genuine Honda part; use the
IMMOBILIZER C O N T R O L U N IT -R E C E IV E R 7 P C O N N E C T O R
Honda-approved key blank, register the key, then
p==n
• Check if a key ring, keys, or a key case is being used;
remove the key from it, and troubleshoot the
immobilizer system with only a key. IQ1 ( B L K /Y E L )
• If an aftermarket electrical part is attached; remove it,
then troubleshoot the immobilizer system.
2. Connect the HDS, then turn the ignition switch to ON
(II), and follow the prompts to the MAIN MENU.
3. At the main menu, enter the IMMOBI, then select the
IMMOBILIZER SETUP. YES-Go to step 9.
4. Check the SYSTEM CHECK and STATUS LOG NO-Check fuse No. 19 (15 A) in the under-dash
information. fuse/relay box or for an open in the BLK/YEL wire
between the under-dash fuse-relay box and the
Is the SYSTEM CHECK or STATUS LOG information
immobilizer control unit-receiver.B
indicated?
9. Measure the voltage between immobilizer control
YES-Troubleshoot the immobilizer system according unit-receiver 7P connector terminal No. 1 and body
to the result of the SYSTEM CHECK (see page 22-455)
ground.
/STATUS LOG (see page 22-457).H
NO-Go to step 5.
I M M O B I L IZ E R C O N T R O L U N I T - R E C E I V E R 7 P C O N N E C T O R
6. Enter the vehicle, and remove the ignition key from
the ignition switch, then close the all doors. i J_
7. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
L G 3 (B L K )
Is there less than 0.2 V ?

YES-Repair poor connection and poor ground (G101)
or an open in the ground wire, or open or high
resistance between the immobilizer control
unit-receiver 7P connector terminal No. 1 and PCM A
connector (49P) terminal No. 41 . ■
NO-Replace the immobilizer control unit-receiver.il
Engine does not start with the immobilizer 6. Wait for a few minutes with the engine running.
key Does the engine stop?
NOTE: Before troubleshooting, check the following YES-Go to the PGM-FI System Symptom
general items and solve any if applicable: Troubleshooting.B
• If the battery is low; charge the battery fully, then
• Ifthe ignition key is not a genuine Honda part; use the
Honda-approved key blank, register the key, then
• Check the key ring, keys, or a key case is being used;
remove the key from it, and troubleshoot the
immobilizer system with only a key.
• If an aftermarket electrical part is attached; remove it,
then troubleshoot the immobilizer system.
1.Try to start the engine.
Does the engine start?
YES-Intermittent failure, the vehicle is OK at this time.
Check status log , and check the line as indicated in
the table (see page 22-457).B
NO-Go to step 2.
3. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II), and check the
immobilizer indicator light operation.
Does the indicator blink once, then stay off?
YES-Go to the immobilizer indicator blinks
troubleshooting (see page 22-448).B
NO-Go to step 4.
4. Turn the ignition switch to START (III).
Does the starter motor run?
YES-Go to step 5.
NO-Go to Starting System and check the starter
motor.B
5. Try to start the engine with the immobilizer key.
Does the engine start?
YES-Go to step 6.
NO-Go to the PGM-FI System Symptom
Troubleshooting.B
Im m obilizer indicator does not go off

2. Connect the HDS to the data link connector.
3. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II), and follow the
prompts to the MAIN MENU.
4. From the main menu, enter IMMOBI, select
IMMOBILIZER SET UP, then select System Check,
Number of Keys, and Status Log.
5. Do the SYSTEM CHECK with the HDS.
is N-1 OK indicated?
YES-Check the BLU/ORN wire between immobilizer
control unit-receiver (7P) connector terminal No. 5
and gauge control module connector A (30P) terminal
No. 16 for a short to ground. If the check is OK,
substitute a known-good gauge control m odule.!
IMO-Substitute a known-good immobilizer control
unit-receiver, then register it and recheck. If the
symptom goes away, replace the original immobilizer
control unit-receiver.B
Imoes Unit Input Test/Replacement
'08-10 USA models

2. Remove the bolt and the imoes unit (A).
3. Disconnect the 5P connector (B) from the imoes unit.

(cont'd)
Imoes Unit Input Test/Replacement (cont'd)
5. With the connectors still disconnected, do these input tests at the following connector.
• If all the input tests prove OK, replace the imoes unit, then do the imoes unit registration with the HDS, and make
sure the immobilizer indicator blinks correctly.
Cavity Wire Terminal Test condition Test: Desired result Possible cause if desired
name result is not obtained
1 BLK LG3 Jump the SCS line with Check for continuity An open or high
the HDS. between terminal No. 1 resistance in the wire
Disconnect the PCM and PCM connector A
connector A (49P) (49P) terminal No. 41:
There should be
continuity.
5 WHT/RED +B Under all conditions Measure the voltage to • Blown No. 15 (40 A)
voltage. • Blown No. 7 (7.5 A)
fuse in the driver's
under-dash fuse/relay
box
• An open or high
resistance in the wire
3 BLK/YEL IG1 Ignition switch ON (II) Measure the voltage to • Blown No. 19 (15 A)
ground: fuse in the driver's
There should be battery under-dash fuse/relay
voltage. box
• An open in the wire
4 RED/WHT KEY SW Ignition key is in the Check for continuity to • Faulty ignition key
ignition switch ground: switch
There should be • An open or high
continuity. resistance in the wire
• Poor ground (G502) or
an open in the ground
wire
Ignition key removed Check for continuity to • Faulty ignition key
from the ignition switch ground: switch
There should be no • A short to ground in
continuity. the wire
2 RED/BLU IMOCD Jump the SCS line with Check for continuity An open or high
(S-NET) the HDS. between terminal No. 2, resistance in the wire
Disconnect PCM PCM connector A (49P)
connector A (49P) and terminal No. 46, and
the immobilizer control immobilizer control
unit-receiver 7P unit-receiver (7P)
connectors terminal No. 2:
There should be
continuity.
Check for continuity to A short to ground in the
ground: wire
There should be no
continuity.
'08-10 Canada models
2. Remove the imoes unit (A).
3. Disconnect the 5P connector (B) from the imoes unit.

Imoes Unit Input Test/Replacement (cont'd)
5. With the connectors still disconnected, do these input tests at the connector.
• If all the input tests prove OK, replace the imoes unit, then do the imoes unit registration with the HDS, and make
sure the immobilizer indicator blinks correctly.
Cavity Wire Terminal Test condition Test: Desired result Possible cause if desired
name result is not obtained
1 BLK LG3 Jump the SCS line with Check for continuity An open or high
the HDS. between terminal No. 1 resistance in the wire
Disconnect the PCM and PCM connector A
connector A (49P) (49P) terminal No. 41:
There should be
continuity.
5 WHT/RED +B Under all conditions Measure the voltage to • Blown No. 15 (40 A)
voltage. • Blown No. 7 (7.5 A)
fuse in the driver's
under-dash fuse/relay
box
• An open or high
3 BLK/YEL IG1 Ignition switch ON (II) Measure the voltage to • Blown No. 19 (15 A)
ground: fuse in the driver's
There should be battery under-dash fuse/relay
voltage. box
• An open or high
4 RED/WHT KEY SW Ignition key is in the Check for continuity to • Faulty ignition key
ignition switch ground: switch
There should be • An open or high
continuity. resistance in the wire
• Poor ground (G502) or
an open in the ground
wire
Ignition key removed Check for continuity to • Faulty ignition key
from the ignition switch ground: switch
There should be no • A short to ground in
continuity. the wire
2 RED/BLU IMOCD Jump the SCS line with Check for continuity An open or high
(S-NET) the HDS. between terminal No. 2, resistance in the wire
Disconnect PCM PCM connector A (49P)
connector A (49P) and terminal No. 46, and
the immobilizer control immobilizer control
unit-receiver 7P unit-receiver (7P)
connectors terminal No. 2:
There should be
continuity.
Check for continuity to A short to ground in the
ground: wire
There should be no
continuity.
System Check

3. Monitor the System Check in the Immobilizer Info with the HDS.
4. If the HDS displays Normal N-1, the immobilizer system is OK at this time, refer to the STATUS LOG. If the HDS
displays any other messages, check as follows:
System Status Log. System Check Possible Failures

Check Indication
No.
A-1 Possible The key is not • This key is not registered in the immobilizer control
registered unit-receiver. Try to register keys using the HDS.
• Poor communication between the antenna and the
immobilizer key because of interference caused by items
such as key chains.
immobilizer key because of low battery voltage.
A-2 Possible Communication error • intermittent interruption between transponder and
between the key and immobilizer control unit-receiver.
immobilizer control • The immobilizer key type is different. It is not for this vehicle
unit-receiver but for another one or for another company's one.
• Key failure (transponder failure)
• different. It is not for this vehicle but for another one or for
another company's one.
A-3 Possible No communication • The ignition switch was turned ON (II) with a
between the key and non-immobilizer key.
immobilizer control • The immobilizer key type is different. It is not for this vehicle
unit-receiver but for another one or for another company's one.
• Key failure (transponder failure)
immobilizer key because of interference caused by items
such as key chains.
• immobilizer control unit-receiver failure
B-1 Possible The PCM is not • The PCM was not registered. Try to register the PCM using
registered the HDS.
• Poor communication between the ECM/PCM and the
immobilizer control unit-receiver because of low battery
voltage.
• Poor communication between the immobilizer control
unit-receiver and the PCM because of interference.
B-2 Possible Error of communication • The PCM was not registered. Try to register the PCM using
format in PCM the HDS.
• Poor communication between the PCM and the immobilizer
control unit-receiver because of low battery voltage.
• Poor communication between the immobilizer control unit
receiver and the PCM because of interference.
C-1 Possible IMOES unit is not • The IMOES unit was not registered correctly. Try to register
registered the IMOES unit using the HDS
C-2 Possible Error of communication • The IMOES unit was not registered correctly. Try to register
format IMOES unit and the/IMOES unit using the HDS.
immobilizer control • Poor communication between the PCM and the immobilizer
unit-receiver control unit-receiver because of low battery voltage.
unit-receiver and the PCM by influence of some noise.
(cont'd)
System Check (cont'd)
System Status Log. System Check Possible Failures

Check Indication
No.
D-1 Possible S- NET line short • Harness short from the PCM to the immobilizer control
unit-receiver. (IMOCD (S- NET) line short)
• Poor communication between the PCM and the immobilizer
unit-receiver and the PCM because of electrical
interference.
• PCM failure
D-2 Possible No communication • Blown fuse
between IMOES unit • Harness open from the IMOES unit to the immobilizer
and immobilizer control control unit-receiver.
unit-receiver • Poor communication between the IMOES unit and the
immobilizer control unit-receiver because of low battery
voltage.
unit-receiver and the IMOES unit because of electrical
interference.
• IMOES unit failure
D-3 Possible No communication • Blown fuse
between PCM and • Harness open from the PCM to the immobilizer control
immobilizer control unit-receiver.
unit-receiver • Poor communication between the PCM and the immobilizer
unit-receiver and the PCM because of interference.
• PCM failure
E-1 Possible Initial registration of The immobilizer control unit-receiver is not registered. Try to
E-2 immobilizer control register the immobilizer control unit-receiver using the HDS.
E-3 unit-receiver is not
E-4 completed
E-5
F-1 Possible Special Mode Turn the ignition switch to ON (II) and to LOCK (0) with the
F-2 registered key.
F-3
F-4
F-5
Status Log
If you suspect there is a immobilizer system problem, check the status log.
3. On the HDS screen, at MAIN MENU, enter IMMOBI, then select IMMOBILIZER SET-UP, select SYSTEM CHECK, Number of
Keys and Status Log, then select STATUS LOG.
4. Check the STATUS LOG count. Troubleshoot the status with the highest count first. If no counts are listed, the immobilizer
system is OK. Continue with normal symptom troubleshooting.
Status Log Detected Item Probable Cause
No.
A-1 KEY CODE MISMATCH (Code •The key was not registered
format normal, but code data is • Interference from metal such as key chains
mismatch) •Low battery voltage
A-2 KEY CODE MISMATCH (Code •Ignition switch was turned to ON (II) with another type of immobilizer
format failure) key or aftermarket key
• Interference from metal such as key chains
• Low battery voltage
A-3 KEY CODE MISMATCH (No key • Ignition switch was turned to ON (II) with another type of immobilizer
code or non-immobilizer key) key or aftermarket key
• Interference from metal such as key chains
• Low battery voltage
• Key failure
• Immobilizer control unit-receiver failure
B-1 PCM CODE MISMATCH (Code • PCM was not registered correctly
format normal, but code data is • Low battery voltage
mismatch) • Poor or loose terminal connections at the immobilizer control
unit-receiver
• Communication line electrical noise
B-2 PCM MISMATCH (Code format • PCM was not registered correctly
failure) • Low battery voltage
• Poor or loose terminal connections at the immobilizer control
unit-receiver
C-1 IMOES UNIT mismatch (Code • Imoes unit was not registered
format nomal, but data is • The communication was not good between imoes unit and
mismatch) immobilizer control unit-receiver by battery voltage low
• The communication was not good between imoes unit and
immobilizer control unit-receiver by influence of some noise
C-2 IMOES UNIT mismatch (Code • Imoes unit was not registered correctly
format failure) • The communication was not good between imoes unit and
immobilizer control unit-receiver by battery voltage low
D-1 SECURITY-NET LINE PROBLEM 0 Low battery voltage
IMOCD (S-NET) (Short to ground) • Poor or loose terminal connections at the immobilizer control
unit-receiver and the PCM
D-2 SECURITY-NET LINE PROBLEM • Blown fuse
(No communication) • Harness open from imoes unit to immobilizer control unit-receiver
immobilizer control unit-receiver by battery voltage low
• Imoes unit failure
• Immobilizer control unit-receiver failure
D-3 SECURITY-NET LINE PROBLEM • Open or short in the harness from the PCM to the immobilizer control
IMOCD (S-NET) (Open line or unit-receiver
PCM failure) • Low battery voltage
• Poor or loose terminal connections at the immobilizer control
unit-receiver and the PCM
Immobilizer Key Registration
NOTE: A ll keys are lost

• The HDS is required for registration of the immobilizer
keys. 1. Prepare all new keys and have the immobilizer PCM
code from the iN system.
• Check for aftermarket electrical equipment that can
cause problems with transponder operation. 2. Connect the HDS to the data link connector.
• The immobilizer control unit-receiver can store up to
six immobilizer Keys.
4. Select IMMOBI from the IMMOBILIZER SETUP menu.
Add one new k e f
5. Select "Add and Delete Keys", then "ALL KEYS
1. Have a registered key, a new immobilizer key cut to fit LOST".
the ignition switch, and the first password from the iN
system. 6. Do the registration according to the instruction of the
HDS screen.
7. Check ifthe engine can be started by all the registered
3. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). keys.
5. Select "Add and Delete Keys", then "Add 1 key".

6. Do the registration according to the instruction of the
HDS screen.
7. Check if the engine can be started by the newly
registered key.
Delete or add m ultiple keys

NOTE: If any of the registered keys were lost, do the
following procedure to delete the lost registered key.
1. Have all registered keys, all new keys, and the first
password from the iN system.
5. Select "Add and Delete Keys", or "Delete or Add
Multiple Keys".
6. Do the registration according to the instruction of the
HDS screen.
7. Check ifthe engine can be started by all the registered
keys.
Immobilizer Control Unit-Receiver Replacement
1. Remove the driver's dashboard lower cover (see page

20-135).
3. Disconnect the 7P connector (A) from the immobilizer
control unit-receiver (B).
4. Remove the two screws and the immobilizer control

unit-receiver from the ignition key cylinder (C).
5. Install the immobilizer control unit-receiver in the
reverse order of removal.
6. After replacement, check the immobilizer system.
7. Using the HDS, select IMMOBI from the main menu,
then select IMMOBILIZER SETUP from the HONDA
SYSTEM menu, then select "Immobilizer control
unit/receiver replacement".
8. Rewrite the immobilizer control unit-receiver by
following the instructions on the HDS, then check the
immobilizer system.
D r i ving Position M e m o ry System (DPMS)

System Input Test and Function Test, page 22-503
Actuator Replacement, page 22-426
System Description
The driver's seat and the power mirrors ('08-10 Touring models) have a memory feature. All the adjustments can be
memorized by pressing the MEMO button on the driving position memory switch, and then pressing one of two position
buttons within 5 seconds. Pressing the appropriate position button will move the seat and the mirrors ('08-10 Touring
models) to the memorized positions.
This system is integrated with the multiplex integrated control system, and has 9 wake-up and sleep modes. All digital
signals are sent via shared B-CAN and UART communication lines. For more information about communication line and
wake-up/sleep mode, refer to the Multiplex Control System Description (see page 22-138).
Disconnecting the battery will cancel the memorized positions.
Memorizing Seat and Mirrors Positions ("08-10 Touring models)

Move the seat and the mirrors to the desired position. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
Press and hold the MEMO button on the driver's position memory switch. A single beep will be heard and both of the
green LEDS will begin to flash. Press No. 1 or No. 2 to match the remote that is to be used. There will be two more beeps
confirming that the seat and the mirrors ('08-10 Touring models) positions have been memorized. The LED will remain
lit, unless the seat and the mirrors ('08-10 Touring models) are moved from the memorized position.
Memorized Position Recall with the Remotes

Make sure that the remotes are LINKED. Press and hold the LOCK and UNLOCK button at the same time. The red LED on
the remote will flash ONE time when the remote has been LINKED and will flash TWO times when the remote has been
UNLINKED. After the seat and the mirrors ('08-10 Touring models) positions have been memorized, the seat and the
mirrors ('08-10 Touring models) will move to the position when the appropriate remote UNLOCK is pressed and the
driver's door is opened. When the seat and mirrors ('08-10 Touring models) get to the memorized position, the green
LED corresponding with that remote will stay lit until the position is changed or the key is turned to LOCK (0).
UNLOCK LOCK BUTTON
-B
(For driving position memory 1) (For driving position memory 2)
Power Seat Position Sensors

Each motor has a sensor that detects motor rotation and sends a pulse to the power seat control unit when the motor
rotates. The control unit stores the number of pulses in its memory, and the seat position is memorized.
Power Mirror Position Sensors ('08-10 Touring models)

By means of a tilt position sensor and swing position sensor, the power mirror control circuit in the power mirror control
unit detects the voltage changes caused by the movements of the mirrors. These voltage changes are stored in
memory, and the power mirror positions are memorized for each stored driving position.
Reverse Mirror Control {*08-10 Touring models)

When the vehicle is shifted to Reverse (shift lever in R position) with the power mirror selector switch in Left (or Right)
position, the driver's (or passenger's) side mirror tilts down automatically to help the driver's view. The mirror will
return to the previous position when the shift lever is shifted out of R position. The reverse mirror control is cancelled if
the power mirror selector switch is in the center position.
Using the HDS (preferred method)

1. Go to B-CAN System Diagnostic Test Mode A to check for "Connected Units" and DTCs (see page 22-155).
2. If no DTCs are retrieved, go to B-CAN System Diagnosis Test Mode C (see page 22-157) or Test Mode D (see page
22-158).
Without the HDS (use only if HDS is not awailable)

The self-diagnostic function of the driving position memory system detects system problems. If a system problem is
detected, the buzzer built into the power seat control unit sounds for 5 seconds. This information can be retrieved
through the driving position memory switch indicators.
Displaying the Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC)

1.Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), and move the seat to a non-memorized position.
2. Press and hold the MEMO button (A) and both position buttons (B) at the same time.
3. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II), and wait at least 1 second, then release the three buttons.
4. After 1 second, the position button indicators (C) will blink to show the DTC.
General Troublesh ooting Information (cont'd)
DTC Indications
No System Problem
If there is no DTC stored, the indicators blink only once (3 seconds).
MEMO button ON
Pos. button 1
Pos. button 2
OFF 1 sec. or more
ON (II)
Ignition
switch - 0.3 sec.
lo c k m -
3 sec.
ON 1 sec. only one blink

Indicator 1
Indicator 2
OFF
System Problem
If a system problem occurs and a DTC is stored, the indicators will show the DTC. The first digit is indicated by the
number of long (1 second) blinks, and the second digit is indicated by the number of short (0.26 second) blinks. There is
a 3 second break between each DTC when there are multiple DTCs.
MEMO button
Pos. button 1 ON
Pos. button 2 .
OFF- 1 sec. or more
ON (II)
Ignition switch -0.3 sec.

two 0.26 sec. blinks
LOCK (0) - 1 sec.
ON
Indicator 1 i 1 sec. 1 sec. ^ 3 sec. break
<*sa ► DTC repeated
Indicator 2
OFF-------------------
= DTC 12
Canceling the DTC Indication

• Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0) or
• Press the MEMO button, or position button 1, or position button 2, or
• Press one of the seat adjustment switches.
Erasing the DTC from Memory
Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). Raise the front and rear of the driver's seat to the highest position. Disconnect the
gray seat harness connectors C901 (12P) and C902 (10P) from the seat floor harness. Wait one minute and then plug
them back in.
Erasing the Driving Position from Memory

1. Press and hold all three driving position memory switch buttons.
3. Continue to hold all three driving position memory buttons for more than 5 seconds, and release them in less than 10
seconds.
4. The buzzer will sound for 0.5 seconds to confirm that all driving position data is erased.
DTC Index (Without HDS)

DTC Sym ptom Possible Cause Note
1 Slide switch circuit Faulty power seat adjustment • System input test and function test
malfunction switch, or power seat control (see page 22-503)
(FORWARD/BACKWARD) unit • Power seat adjustment switch test
(see page 22-516)
2 Recline switch circuit Faulty power seat adjustment • System input test and function test
(FORWARD/BACKWARD) unit • Power seat adjustment switch test
(see page 22-516)
3 Front up-down switch circuit Faulty power seat adjustment • System input test and function test
malfunction (UP/DOWN) switch, or power seat control (see page 22-503)
unit • Power seat adjustment switch test
(see page 22-516)
4 Rear up-down switch circuit Faulty power seat adjustment • System input test and function test
malfunction (UP/DOWN) switch, or power seat control (see page 22-503)
(see page 22-516)
10 Slide motor pulse malfunction Faulty slide position sensor, System input test and function test
or power seat control unit (see page 22-503)
11 Front up-down motor pulse Faulty front up-down position System input test and function test
malfunction sensor, or power seat control (see page 22-503)
unit
12 Rear up-down motor pulse Faulty rear up-down position System input test and function test
malfunction sensor, or power seat control (see page 22-503)
unit
13 Recline motor pulse Faulty recline position sensor, System input test and function test
malfunction or power seat control unit (see page 22-503)
(FORWARD) unit • Power seat adjustment switch test
(see page 22-516)
(BACKWARD) unit • Power seat adjustment switch test
(see page 22-516)
(FORWARD) unit • Power seat adjustment switch test
(see page 22-516)
(BACKWARD) unit • Power seat adjustment switch test
(see page 22-516)
malfunction (UP) switch, or power seat control (see page 22-503)
(see page 22-516)
malfunction (DOWN) switch, or power seat control (see page 22-503)
(see page 22-516)
30 Rear up-down switch circuit Faulty power seat adjustment • System input test and function test
malfunction (UP) switch, or power seat control (see page 22-503)
(see page 22-516)
DTC Symptom Possible Cause Note
31 Rear up-down switch circuit Faulty position sensor(s), or • System input test and function test
malfunction (DOWN) power seat control unit (see page 22-503)
• Power seat adjustment switch test
(see page 22-516)
36 Sensor output short to ground Faulty power seat adjustment System input test and function test
switch, or power seat control (see page 22-503)
unit
37 Transmission range switch P Faulty transmission range • Transmission range switch test (see
position circuit malfunction switch page 14-252)
• Power seat control unit input test
(see page 22-510)
38 Left mirror position sensor Faulty left mirror position System input test and function test
malfunction sensor, or power mirror (see page 22-503)
control unit
39 Right mirror position sensor Faulty right mirror position System input test and function test
malfunction sensor, or power mirror (see page 22-503)
control unit
40 Communication line error Faulty communication line Troubleshoot using B-CAN system
(BUS Off) diagnosis test mode A (see page
22-155)
41 Power seat control unit lost Faulty communication line Power seat control unit input test (see
communication page 22-510)
45 Power seat control unit Faulty power seat control unit DTC troubleshooting (see page 22-473)
EEPROM error
50 Driving position memory Faulty power seat motor, DTC troubleshooting (see page 22-496)
recall timeout engagement of motor gear, or
power seat control unit
Circuit Diagram - Power Seat
DRIVER'S
BOX
A2 / bat \ A6 No. 21 (7.5 A)
WHT -4 -0 0 4 - BLK/YEL ----- crxjo—
IG1 HOT in ON (II)

and START (III) No. 7 (7.5 A)
B4 K5
—KTXjO--- -WHT/RED-
No. 16(20 A)
--- CTXjO—
No. 14 (20 A)
F13 F11 G3
WHT/BLU WHT/RED
WHT/RED YEL
B8 B1 A37 A35
VMP1 VMP2 VBU IG1
POWER SEAT CONTROL UNIT
SG PG2 PG1 B-CAN ATP-P r UART
B18 I A40
BLU/BLK BLK
V V
■ MICU TRANSMISSION j POWER MIRROR
• GAUGE CONTROL MODULE RANGE SWITCH ' CONTROL UNIT J
• COMBINATION SWITCH CONTROL UNIT (ON: P position)
■ MICU-REAR JUNCTION BOX ('08-10 Touring models)
• LEFT/RIGHT POWER SLIDING DOOR
CONTROL UNITS
BRN ■ AUTOMATIC LIGHTING CONTROL UNIT
■ POWER SEAT CONTROL UNIT
• POWER TAILGATE CONTROL UNIT
• FRONT CLIMATE CONTROL UNIT or
A/C CONTROL PANEL
■ POWER WINDOW MASTER SWITCH
(DOOR MULTIPLEX CONTROL UNIT)
• RELAYCONTROL MODULE
_Q_
G602
; B-CAN line
: Other communication line
WHT/RED---------------------------------------------------------------- ------------------------------------------------------------------------------0
A1 A5 A4 A7 A27 A23 A3 A6 A25

SCOM FHUP FHDN SLFW SLBW RHUP RHDN REFW REBW
POWER SEAT CONTROL UNIT
FHM+ FHM- SLM- SLM+ RHM- RHM+ REM- REM+
B16 B6 B7 B17 B10 B2 B11 B9
ORN BRN/WHT LTGRN YEL BLU GRN GRY RED

Circuit Diagram - Power Seat (cont'd)
No. 4 (15 A) FUSE

(DRIVER'S
UNDER-DASH
FUSE/RELAY BOX)
WHT/RED RED/BLK
A A
G601 G601
A16 A17 A20 A18 A19
J IND1 IND2 MEM POS1 POS2
( POWER SEAT CONTROL UNIT
^ SVCC FHSE SLSE RHSE RESE SEG
A15 A12 A11 A13 A10 A29
WHT/BLK YEL/BLK YEL/GRN GRN/WHT BLU/WHT GRN/BLK

Circuit Diagram - Power Mirror
'08-10 Touring models
— ............. : Other communication line
DRIVER'S UNDER-DASH
UNDER-HOOD DRIVER'S FUSE/RELAY BOX
FUSE/RELAY BOX UNDER-DASH
FUSE/RELAY IGNITION SWITCH A4 No. 30 (10 A) H6
BATTERY No. 22 (BAT) No. 23 (IG) BOX BLK/RED * — cr \ j j —
(120 A) (BOA) G1 B1
—CT\jD— -cr^x>- -WHT -WHT No. 21 (7.5 A)
BLK/YEL - — cr \ j D —
IG1 HOT in ON (II)
and START (HI)
IG2 HOT in ON (II)
TAILLIGHT No. 15 (40 A) No. 7 (7.5 A)
RELAY D6 B4 G3
YEL ----CTVX>—
BLK/YEL •
RED/BLK BLK/YEL WHT/RED YEL
(cont'd)
Circuit Diagram - Power Mirror (cont'd)
BLU/BLK GRN BLU/WHT

DTC Troubleshooting
DTC B1802; Power Seat Control Unit EEPROM DTC B1805: Power Seat Control Unit Lost
Error Communication With Gauge Control Module
(VSP/NE Message)
3. Check for DTCs with the HDS. ON (II).
YES-Replace the power seat control unit.B Is D T C B 1 8 0 5 in d ic a te d ?
NO-lntermittent failure. The driving position memory YES-Go to step 4.

system is OK at this time. Check for loose or poor NO-lntermittent failure. The driving position memory
connections at the power seat control unit system is OK at this time. Check for loose or poor
connector.B connections at the power seat control unit connector,
and at the gauge control module connector.B
A r e D T C s B 1 0 6 0 , B 1 2 0 5 , B 1 3 5 7 , B 2 0 1 0 , a n d /o r B 2 0 6 0
YES-Do the gauge control module input test (see
page 22-189).B
NO-Do the power seat control unit input test (see
page 22-510).B
DTC B180S: Power Seat Control Unit Lost DTC B1.807: Power Seat Control Unit Lost
Communication With MICU (MICU Message) Communication With MICU (DOOR SWITCH
NOTE: If you are troubleshooting m ultiple DTCs, be sure
Message)
3. Check for DTCs with the HDS. ON (II).
YES-Go to step 4. Is D T C B 1807 in d ic a te d ?
NO-lntermittent failure. The driving position memory YES-Go to step 4.

system is OK at this time. Check for loose or poor NO-lntermittent failure. The driving position memory
connections at the power seat control unit connector, system is OK at this time. Check for loose or poor
and at the MICU connector.B connections at the power seat control unit connector,
4. Check for DTCs with the HDS. and at the MICU connector.B
Are DTCs B1055, B1106, B1157, B1255, B1355,B1556, 4. Check for DTCs with the HDS.
B1955, B 2 0 0 5 , a n d / o r B 2 0 5 5 a l s o i n d i c a t e d ? A r e D T C s B 1 0 5 7 , B 1 105, a n d / o r B 1 1 5 9 a l s o i n d i c a t e d ?
YES-Do the MICU input test (see page 22-185).B YES-Do the MICU input test (see page 22-185).B
NO-Do the power seat control unit input test (see NO-Do the power seat control unit input test (see
page 22-510).B page 22-510).B
DTC B1808; Power Seat Control Unit Lost DTC B1825: Power Seat Slide Motor Pulse
Communication With Gauge Control Module Error
(A/T Message) NOTE: If you are troubleshooting multiple DTCs, be sure
Test Mode A (see page 22-155). 1. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), and then back to
1. Clear the DTCs with the HDS. ON (II).
ON (II). 3. Operate the power seat adjustment switch for several
3. Check for DTCs with the HDS. seconds in each direction.
Is D T C B 1 8 0 8 in d ic a te d ? NOTE: DTC B1825 is, stored when the slide switch is

operated for more than 1 second after the seat moves
YES-Go to step 4. to the most forward or rearward position, even when
the system is OK.
NO-lntermittent failure. The driving position memory
system is OK at this time. Check for loose or poor 4. Check for DTCs with the HDS.
connections at the power seat control unit connector,
and at the gauge control module connector.B Is D T C B 1 8 2 5 in d ic a te d ?
4. Check for DTCs with the HDS. YES-Go to step 5.
A re D T C s B 1 0 0 8 , B 1 0 6 1 ,B 1 3 5 9 , B 1 9 5 6 , B 2011, a n d /o r NO-lntermittent failure. The slide position sensor is

B 2 0 6 1 a ls o in d ic a te d ? OK at this time. Check for loose or poor connections at
the power seat control unit connector.B
YES-Do the gauge control module input test (see
page 22-189).B 5. Check for DTCs with the HDS.
NO-Do the power seat control unit input test (see Is D T C B 1 8 3 6 a ls o in d ic a t e d ?

page 22-510).B YES-Go to DTC B1836 troubleshooting (see page
22-495).B
NO-Go to step 6.
A r e D T C s B 1 8 2 6 , B 1 8 2 7 , a n d /o r B 1 8 2 8 a ls o in d ic a te d ?
YES-Go to step 16.
NO-Go to step 7.
7. Operate the slide switch for 2 seconds and check the
slide motor operation.
D o e s th e s lid e m o t o r r u n s m o o t h ly ?
YES-Go to step 8.
NO-Go to step 24.
9. Disconnect power seat control unit connector A (40P).
11. Check for continuity between power seat control unit 15. Measure the voltage between slide position sensor 3P
connector A (40P) terminals No. 11 and No. 29 and connector terminals No. 3 and No. 2.
slide position sensor 3P connector terminals No. 1
and No. 2 respectively.
SLIDE POSITION SENSOR 3P CONNECTOR
SEG (GRN/BLK)
L
1 2 3 f
11 2 3 Wire side of LJ U
u ffimalp fprmlrifllft
-------. SI-SE SEG I—
SLSE (YEL/GRN)
| 1 [71 3 14 I 5 16 17 1/1 9 11ol 11112l131/115| 1e| 17| 18| 19|2Q
Is t h e r e a b o u t 1 0 V ?
SEG (GRN/BLK) Wire side of female terminals
YES-Faulty slide position sensor, replace the slide
POWER SEAT CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR A (40P) motor assembly.B
NO-Check for an open in the WHT/BLK wire. If it is OK,
substitute a known-good power seat control unit. If
YES-Go to step 12. the problem is repaired, replace the power seat
control unit.B
12. Check for continuity between power seat control unit
connector A (40P) terminal No. 11 and body ground. 17. Disconnect power seat control unit connector A (40P).
18. Disconnect the slide position sensor 3P connector.
POWER SEAT CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR A (40P)
SLSE (YEL/GRN)
1 |/1 3 I 4 15 | 6 17 1/1 9 |10|11|12|13|/|15|16|17|18|19|20
L>|^|23|/i25|/|27lX|29l^|3l|/l>U^l35|/|3y|/]39|45|
NO-Go to step 13.
13. Reconnect power seat control unit connector A (40P).
19. Check for continuity between power seat control unit 23. Measure the voltage between power seat control unit
connector A (40P) terminals No. 15 and No. 29 and connector A (40P) terminals No. 15 and No. 29.
SVCC (WHT/BLK)
I 11/
A I 3ol 4I5I6I71/
/I A I /I 9I101112131/ 151617181920
C z’ -7 A A r*l A A 1A *"ll A O I A f l l HA lo A
Wire side of
1 2 3L female terminals
) J .......
svcc
(WHT/BLK)
SEG (GRN/BLK)
*| 1|/i 3I4I 5I6I7[/I 9|10|11|12|13I/115|16|17|18|19|20

23 l^^l25 [>/l 2T| 29 j3j I 39 {4-01
Is t h e r e a b o u t 1 0 V w h e n t h e s lid e s w itc h is o p e r a t e d ?
YES-Faulty slide position sensor, replace the slide
POWER SEAT CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR A (40P) motor assembly.B
NO-Replace the power seat control unit.B
YES-Go to step 20.
25. Disconnect power seat control unit connector B (18P).
26. Disconnect the slide motor 2P connector.
20. Disconnect each 5P connector from the recline
motor/position sensor, rear up-down motor/position 27. Check for continuity between power seat control unit
sensor and the front up-down motor/position sensor. connector B (18P) terminals No. 7 and No. 17 and the
slide motor 2P connector terminals No. 1 and No. 2
21. Check for continuity between slide position sensor 3P
respectively.
SLIDE MOTOR 2P CONNECTOR

Wire side of
female terminals
SLM -
(LT GRN)
2 3
SVCC (WHT/BLK)
1 2 / 4 F=l / 6 7 8 SLM+
(YEL)
9 10 1 1 / / / / 16 17 18
Is t h e r e c o n t in u it y ? POWER SEAT CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR B (18P)
YES-Repair short to ground in the wire.B

NO-Go to step 22.
(cont'd)
28. Check for continuity between slide motor 2P DTC B1826: Power Seat Front Up-down Motor
connector terminals No. 1 and No. 2 and body ground
Pulse Error
individually.
to follow the instructions in B-CAN System Diagnostic
SLIDE MOTOR 2P CONNECTOR Test Mode A (see page 22-155).
ON (II).
sun- SLM+ 3. Operate the power seat adjustment switch for several
(LT GRN) (YEL)
seconds in each direction.
NOTE: DTC B1826 is, stored when the front up-down
switch is operated more than 1 second after the seat
moves to the most up or most down position, even
W ire side o f female term inals when the system is OK.
YES-Repair a short to ground in the wire.l
YES-Go to step 5.
NO-Go to step 29.
NO-lntermittent failure. The front up-down position
29. Do the slide motor test (see page 22-517). sensor is OK at this time. Check for loose or poor
Is t h e m o t o r O K ? connections at the power seat control unit
connector.B
YES-Replace the power seat control unit.l
NO-Replace the slide motor.B
Is D T C B 1 8 3 6 a ls o in d ic a te d ?
YES-Go to DTC B1836 troubleshooting (see page
22-495).B
NO-Go to step 6.
YES-Go to step 16.
NO-Go to step 7.
7. Operate the front up-down switch for 2 seconds and
check the front up-down motor operation.
D o e s t h e f r o n t u p - d o w n m o t o r r u n s m o o t h ly ?
YES-Go to step 8.
NO-Go to step 24.
10. Disconnect the front up-down motor/position sensor
5P connector.
11. Check for continuity between power seat control unit 15. Measure the voltage between front up-down motor/
connector A (40P) terminals No. 12 and No. 29 and position sensor 5P connector terminals No. 3 ( + ) and
front up-down motor/position sensor 5P connector No. 4 (—).
terminals No. 5 and No. 4 respectively.
FRONT UP-DOWN MOTOR/POSITION FRONT UP-DOWN MOTOR/

SENSOR 5P CONNECTOR POSITION SENSOR 5P CONNECTOR
1 2 3 4 5 W ire side of
female term inals
FHSE (YEL/BLK)
FHSE (YEL/BLK)
. . 1L/| 3|4I 5I6I 71/1 9I10IIII12I13I/I 15I16I17I18I19I20 W ire side of female term inals
/j/|23 |x [251/1271x1291x131L m // 35|/l371/1391401
SEG (GRN/BLK) ^ ' re s'c*e fernale term inals
Is th e r e a b o u t 1 0 V ?
POWER SEAT CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR A (40P) YES-Replace the front up-down motor/position
sensor.B
NO-Check for an open in the WHT/BLK wire. If the
YES-Go to step 12. wire is OK, substitute a known-good power seat
control unit. If the problem is repaired, replace the
power seat control unit.B
12. Check for continuity between power seat control unit 16. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
POWER SEAT CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR A (40P) 18. Disconnect the slide position sensor 3P connector.
FHSE (YEL/BLK)
*l 1 1/1 3 14 15 | 6 17 1/1 9 I10I11I12113I / I 15I16I17I18I19I20
/ 1 / 1 23 Ixlgsl/] 27|^[2Qjy131! / ] / } / ] 35I/I 37 \ / \ 391401
NO-Go to step 13.
SVCC (WHT/BLK)
SEG (GRN/BLK)
n---------- n j
W ire side of
| 1|/| 3 | 4 | 5 | 6 | 7 |/| 9 |10|11|12|13|/|15|16|17|18|19|20 (V
female term inals /|/l23|/|25l/|27|/|29|/|3l|/|/|/|35|/|37|/|39l40|
SVCC
fWHT/BLK) SEG (GRN/BLK)

1 1 1/1 3 | 4 | 5 | 6 17 t / l 9 110| 11112l 1 3 M 15| 16] 17j 18j 19|20
/\/l2 3 l/l2 5 \/l2 7 l/\2 9 l/\3 ll/l/l/\3 5 \/\3 7 j/\3 9 j4 0 f
Is t h e r e a b o u t 1 0 V w h e n t h e f r o n t u p - d o w n s w it c h is
SEG (GRN/BLK) W ire side of female term inals
o p e ra te d ?
YES-Replace the front up-down motor/position
sensor.B
YES-Go to step 20.
20. Disconnect each 5P connector from the recline
26. Disconnect the front up-down motor/position sensor
motor/position sensor and the rear up-down
5P connector.
motor/position sensor.
21. Check for continuity between front up-down
motor/position sensor 5P connector terminal No. 3
and body ground.
FRONT UP-DOWN MOTOR/POSITION

SENSOR SP CONNECTOR
NO-Go to step 22.
27. Check for continuity between power seat control unit 28. Check for continuity between front up-down
connector B (18P) terminals No. 6 and No. 16 and front motor/position sensor 5P connector terminals No. 1
up-down motor/position sensor 5P connector and No. 2 and body ground individually.
FRONT UP-DOWN MOTOR/ FRONT UP-DOWN MOTOR/

POSITION SENSOR 5P CONNECTOR POSITION SENSOR 5P CONNECTOR
1 2 3 4 5 Wire side of
female terminals
FHM - FHM+ (ORN) "P 2 3 4 s f1
(BRN/WHT) u u
FHM— FHM+
n (ORN)
F H M - (BRN/WHT)
1 2 / 4 F=l / 6 7 8 Wire side of female terminals

FHM+
9 10 11 / / / 16 17 18 (ORN)
POWER SEAT CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR B (18P)
NO-Go to step 29.
29. Do the front up-down motor test (see page 22-517).
YES-Go to step 28.
Is th e m o t o r O K ?
YES-Replace the power seat control unit.B
NO-Replace the front-up-down motor/position
sensor.B
DTC B1827: Power Seat Rear Up-down Motor 8. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
Pulse Error 9. Disconnect power seat control unit connector A (40P).
NOTE: If you are troubleshooting multiple DTCs, be sure 10. Disconnect the rear up-down motor/position sensor
to follow the instructions in B-CAN System Diagnosis 5P connector.
1.Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), and then back to connector A (40P) terminals No. 13 and No. 29 and
ON (II). rear up-down motor/position sensor 5P connector
2. Clearthe DTCs with the HDS.
RWAR UP-DOWN MOTOR/
3. Operate the power seat adjustment switch for several POSITION SENSOR 5P CONNECTOR
seconds in each direction.
SEG (GRN/BLK)
NOTE: DTC B1827 is, stored when the rear up-down
W ire side of
switch is operated more than 1 second after the seat female term inals
moves to the most up or most down position, even
when the system is OK. RHSE (GRN/WHT)

Is D T C B 1 8 2 7 in d ic a t e d ? RHSE (GRN/WHT)
YES-Go to step 5.
1 1/j 3 14 1516171/1 9 lioh 1112]13|/115|16|17|18]19I2O
NO-lntermittent failure. The rear up-down ^71231/251/1271^291/1311/1/1/1351/1371/1391401
motor/position sensor is OK at this time. Check for SEG (GRN/BLK) W ire side of female term inals
loose or poor connections at the power seat control
unit connector.B POWER SEAT CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR A (40P)
/s D T C B 1 8 3 6 a l s o i n d i c a t e d ?
YES-Go to step 12.
22-495).B NO-Repair an open in the wire.B
NO-Go to step 6. 12. Check for continuity between power seat control unit
A r e D T C s B 1 8 2 5 , B 1 8 2 6 , a n d /o r B 1 8 2 8 a ls o in d ic a te d ? POWER SEAT CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR A (40P)
YES-Go to step 16.
NO-Go to step 7.
RHSE (GRN/WHT)
dL
7. Operate the rear up-down switch for 2 seconds and
check the rear up-down motor operation.
■J ?If l?I?1?V} 9ll0|Vl
//I23|/25|/l27[/|29|/|31 l21!31^11,51!611,7!1,811,91^
[//l/|35l/|37|/39|40|
D o e s t h e r e a r u p - d o w n m o t o r r u n s m o o t h ly ?
YES-Go to step 8.
NO-Go to step 24.
NO-Go to step 13.
13. Reconnect power seat control unit connector A (40P). 16. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
14. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 17. Disconnect power seat control unit connector A (40P).
15. Measure the voltage between rear up-down 18. Disconnect the slide position sensor 3P connector.
motor/position sensor 5P connector terminals No. 5
(+ )an d No. 4 ( —).
connector A (40P) terminals No. 15 and No. 29 and
REAR UP-DOWN MOTOR/ and No. 2 respectively.
POSITION SENSOR 5P CONNECTOR
SEG (GRN/BLK)
1 female term inals
SEG (GRN/BLK) RHSE (GRN/WHT)
SVCC
(WHT/BLK)
"l 1 1^1 3 15 15 I6 I 7 / I 9 110i11112[13j/| 15[16|17|18[19|20

Is t h e r e a b o u t 1 0 V ? A A 2 3 \ A ^ \A 2 7 \ A ^ \ A 3 A A A A ^ \ A s i\ / \ 3 ^ \
YES-Replace the rear up-down motor/position SEG (GRN/BLK) Wire side of female term inals
sensor.B
wire is OK, substitute a known-good power seat Is t h e r e c o n t in u it y ?
control unit. If the problem is repaired, replace the
power seat control unit.B YES-Go to step 20.
20. Disconnect each 5P connector from the recline 24. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
motor/position sensor and the front up-down motor/
position sensor.
26. Disconnect the rear up-down motor/position sensor
21. Check for continuity between rear up-down
5P connector.
motor/position sensor 5P connector terminal No. 3
and body ground. 27. Check for continuity between power seat control unit
connector B (18P) terminals No. 2 and No. 10 and rear
up-down motor/position sensor 5P connector
REAR UP-DOWN MOTOR/POSITION
SENSOR 5P CONNECTOR
REAR UP-DOWN MOTOR/
1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5 W ire side of
female term inals
SVCC (WHT/BLK) RHM-
RHM+ (GRN) (BLU)
<5
RHM+ (GRN)
Is t h e r e c o n t in u it y ? 1 2 / 4 6 7 8
F=\
YES-Repair a short to ground in the wire.B RHM - 9 1 0 11 / / /
16 17 18
*-u-J h r
(BLU)
NO-Go to step 22. Wire side of female term inals
23. Measure the voltage between power seat control unit
connector A (40P) terminals No. 15 and No. 29. YES-Go to step 28.
NO-Repair an open in the wire.l
SVCC (WHT/BLK)
1L/[ 3|4I 5I 6I 7j/ \9 11 11112|13|/11 16|17[18|19I20

o
l s
l
Xl^Nal^laslâVfâQl^lsi !>1>1^35|>^|37l^l39kol
SEG (GRN/BLK)
W ire side of fem ale term inals
Is t h e r e a b o u t 1 0 V w h e n t h e r e a r u p - d o w n s w it c h is
o p e ra te d ?
YES-Replace the rear up-down motor/position
sensor.B
28. Check for continuity between rear up-down DTC B1828: Power Seat Recline Motor Pulse
motor/position sensor 5P connector terminals No. 1
Error
and No. 2 and body ground individually.
REAR UP-DOWN MOTOR/ Test Mode A (see page 22-155).
1.Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), and then back to
ON (II).
H
CO
1 4 5
3. Operate the power seat adjustment switch for several
FHM - FHM + seconds in each direction.
(GRN) (BLU)
NOTE: DTC B1828 is, stored when the recline switch is
operated more than 1 second after the seat back
reclines to the most forward or most backward
Wire side of female terminals position, even when the system is OK.
YES-Go to step 5.
NO-Go to step 29.
NO-lntermittent failure. The recline motor/position
29. Do the rear up-down motor test (see page 22-517). sensor is OK at this time. Check for loose or poor
Is th e m o t o r O K ? connections at the power seat control unit
connector.B
NO-Replace the rear up-down motor/position
sensor.B is D T C B 1 8 3 6 a ls o in d ic a te d ?
22-495).B
NO-Go to step 6.
YES-Go to step 16.
NO-Go to step 7.
7. Operate the recline switch for 2 seconds and check the
recline motor operation.
D o e s t h e r e c lin e m o t o r r u n s m o o t h ly ?
YES-Go to step 8.
NO-Go to step 24.
10. Disconnect the recline motor/position sensor 5P
connector.
(cont'd)
11. Check for continuity between power seat control unit 13. Reconnect power seat control unit A (40P).
connector A (40P) terminals No. 10 and No. 29 and
recline motor/position sensor 5 P connector terminals
No. 5 and No. 4 respectively. 15. Measure the voltage between recline motor/position
sensor 5P connector terminals No. 3 (+ ) and No. 4
RECLINE MOTOR/POSITION SENSOR 5P CONNECTOR
female term inals
RESE (BLU/WHT) RECLINE MOTOR/POSITION SENSOR 5P CONNECTOR
RESE (BLU/WHT)
V | / 1 3 I 4 1 5 1 6 1 7 1 / 1 9 Ijo] 1 1 112| 13 | ^ | 15| 16| 17| 18| l ¥ [ 2 0

/^7|23M25|7|27M29|// |31|7M/35|/137|/'|39|40|
SEG (GRN/BLK) W ire side of female term inals
Is t h e r e a b o u t 1 0 V ?
is t h e r e c o n t in u it y ?
YES-Replace the recline motor/position sensor.B
YES-Go to step 12.
wire is OK, substitute a known-good power seat
12. Check for continuity between power seat control unit control unit. If the problem is repaired, replace the
connector A (40P) terminal No. 10 and body ground. power seat control unit.B
18. Disconnect the slide position sensor 3P connector.
RESE (BLU/WHT)
Jh in
1M 3 | 4 I 5 I 6 I 7 1 / 1 9 |1 0 |1 1 |1 2 |1 3 1 / /115|16117|18|19|20
Xl^23l>l25l^2T|^29|^3l|^|^^35l^3Tl^|39|40|
NO-Go to step 13.
and No. 2 respectively. POWER SEAT CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR A (40P)

SVCC (WHT/BLK)
SEG (GRN/BLK)
n----------- n
I 1 | / | 3 | 4 | 5 I 6 | 7 \ / \ 9 |10|11|12|13L/|15|16|17|18|19|20
Wire side of A Annl
female terminals / l*o\SAr%c\ Art-rl Slnnl AoaI A /I
1/ 1 ^ 1 / K 'l / *1/ ! ° 'l /
/loci / I 07I /loal/inl
1/ 1/ 1 ^1 /
( \
SVCC 1
(WHT/BLK) SEG (GRN/BLK)

*h M 3[4 I 5I6I 7L/l 911ol11112|131/115[16117118119[20
/17|23|7|25|// |27|7|29|7|3117|/1/35|//|37|j/|39|401
Is t h e r e a b o u t 1 0 V w h e n th e r e c lin e s w it c h is o p e r a t e d ?
YES-Replace the recline motor/position sensor.B
Is t h e r e c o n tin u ity ? 24. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
YES-Go to step 20. 25. Disconnect power seat control unit connector B (18P).
NO-Repair an open in the wire.B 26. Disconnect the recline motor/position sensor 5P
connector.
20. Disconnect each 5P connector from the front up-down
motor/position sensor and the rear up-down 27. Check for continuity between power seat control unit
motor/position sensor. connector B (18P) terminals No. 9 and No. 11 and
recline motor/position sensor 5P connector terminals
21. Check for continuity between recline motor/position
No. 2 and No. 1 respectively.
sensor 5P connector terminal No. 3 and body ground.
RECLINE MOTOR/POSITION SENSOR 5P CONNECTOR
RECLINE MOTOR/POSITION SENSOR 5P CONNECTOR r ----- j

2 3 4 5 f
Wire side of
X —u female terminals
REM- REM+ (RED)
(GRY)
1 2 3 4 5
SVCC (WHT/BLK)
1 2 / 4 F=l / 6 7 8

9 1 0 11 / / / / 1 6 1 7 18
Wire side of
REM+ (RED) REM— female terminals
(GRY)
NO-Go to step 22.
YES-Go to step 28.
(cont'd)
28. Check for continuity between recline motor/position DTC B1829: A/T P Signal and VSS Signal
sensor 5P connector terminals No. 1 and No. 2 and
Mismatch
RECLINE MOTOR/POSITION SENSOR SP CONNECTOR
"11 2 3 4 5f 3. Test drive at 6 mph (10 km/h) for at least 10 seconds.

u y
__ REM + 4. Check for DTCs with the HDS.
) (RED)
YES-Go to step 5.
NO-lntermittent failure. The system is OK at this time.
W ire side of female term inals Check for loose or poor connections at the power seat
control unit connector.B
5. Check the shift position indicator P indicator and MIL.
Do t h e P i n d i c a t o r a n d M I L c o m e o n ?
NO-Go to step 29.
YES-Troubleshoot the automatic transmission
29. Do the recline motor test (see page 22-517).
system.B
Is th e m o t o r O K ?
NO-Go to step 6.
YES-Replace the power seat control unit.B 6. Check for gauge control module DTCs with the HDS.
NO-Replace the recline motor/position sensor.l A r e th e re a n y D T C s in d ic a te d ?
YES-Troubleshoot the gauge control moduIe.B
DTC B1830: Left Mirror Position Sensor 10. Connect power mirror control unit connector (24P)
terminal No. 7 to body ground with a jumper wire.
Malfunction
'08-10 Touring models POWER MIRROR CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR (24P)

JUMPER WIRE
Test Mode A (see page 22-155). 1— —|
7-1
1. Clear the DTC with the HDS. 1 2 3 4 5 6 /r 8 9 1C) 11 /
i u I 1£; ie>17, 18 19 ;20,/ ; 22,/ ; 24
ON (II).
3. Operate the left power mirror in each direction with
the power mirror switch.
4. Check for DTCs with the HDS. W ire side of female term inals
11. Check for continuity between left power mirror
YES-Go to step 5. connector (13P) terminal No. 3 and body ground.
time.B LEFT POWER MIRROR CONNECTOR (13P)

6. Remove the driver's door panel (see page 20-8).
7. Disconnect the power mirror control unit 24P
connector.
8. Disconnect the left power mirror 13P connectors.
9. Check for continuity between left power mirror
connector (13P) terminal No. 3 and body ground.
LEFT POWER MIRROR CONNECTOR (13P)
YES-Go to step 12.
NO-Repair an open in the ORN wire.B
12. Check for continuity between left power mirror 14. Check for continuity between left power mirror
connector (13P) terminals No. 5 and No. 10 and body connector (13P) terminals No. 5 and No. 10 and body
ground individually. ground individually.
LEFT POWER MIRROR CONNECTOR (13P) LEFT POWER MIRROR CONNECTOR (13P)
Terminal side of male term inals
Is t h e r e c o n t in u it y ? Is t h e r e c o n t in u it y ?
YES-Repair a short to ground in the WHT and/or GRN YES-Go to step 15.
wire.il NO-Repair an open in the WHT and/or GRN wire.B
NO-Go to step 13.
15. Check for continuity between power mirror control
13. Connect power mirror control unit connector (24P) unit connector (24P) terminal No. 6 and body ground.
terminals No. 4 and No. 5 to body ground with jumper
wires.
POWER MIRROR CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR (24P)

BLU
JUMPER WIRE JUMPER WIRE

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 / j CM
/ 24
CM
13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 /
1 2 3 4 ‘5 6 7 8 9 10 11 /
13 14 15 16 17 18 19
CM
o
22 / 24
<g>

YES-Repair a short to ground in the BLU wire.B
NO-Go to step 16.
16. Connect power mirror control unit connector (24P) 20. Measure the voltage between power mirror control
terminal No. 6 to body ground with a jumper wire. unit connector (24P) terminals No. 6 and No. 7.
POWER MIRROR CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR (24P) POWER MIRROR CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR (24P)
JUMPER WIRE BLU r<Sh ORN
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 / 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 /
13 14 15 16 17 18 1 9 ;20 / 22 / 24 13 14 15 16 17r 18 19 / / 24
csl
o
Csl
CM
17. Check for continuity between left power mirror Is th e r e a b o u t 5 V ?

connector (13P) terminal No. 4 and body ground. YES-Faulty left power mirror position sensor; replace
the power mirror actuator (see page 22-425).B
LEFT POWER MIRROR CONNECTOR (13P)
NO-Substitute a known-good power mirror control
unit, and recheck. If DTC is gone, the original power
mirror control unit is faulty; replace it.B
YES-Go to step 18.
NO-Repair an open in the BLU wire.B
18. Reconnect the power mirror control unit connector
(24P).
DTC B1832: Right Mirror Position Sensor 10. Connect power mirror control unit connector (24P)
terminal No. 7 to body ground with a jumper wire.
Malfunction
'08-10 Touring models POWER MIRROR CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR (24P)
NOTE: If you are troubleshooting multiple DTCs, be sure JUMPER WIRE '
1. Clear the DTC with the HDS. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 /
CM
13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 /
CM
CM
/
ON (II).
3. Operate the right power mirror in each direction with
the power mirror switch.
4. Check for DTCs with the HDS. W ire side of female term inals
11. Check for continuity between right power mirror
YES-Go to step 5. connector (13P) terminal No. 3 and body ground.
time.B RIGHT POWER MIRROR CONNECTOR (13P)
6. Remove the front passenger's door panel (see page
20-8).
7. Disconnect the power mirror control unit 24P
connector.
8. Disconnect the right power mirror 13P connectors.
connector (13P) terminal No. 3 and body ground.
RIGHT POWER MIRROR CONNECTOR (13P)
YES-Go to step 12.
NO-Repair an open in the ORN wire.B
YES-Repair a short to ground in the ORN wire.B
NO-Go to step 10.
12. Check for continuity between right power mirror 14. Check for continuity between right power mirror
connector (13P) terminals No. 5 and No. 10 and body connector (13P) terminals No. 5 and No. 10 and body
ground individually. ground individually.
RIGHT POWER MIRROR CONNECTOR (13P) RIGHT POWER MIRROR CONNECTOR (13P)
PUR
n
7 / 3 I.......T 4 5
8 9 10 11 12 13
z 7 Ll
YEL
YES-Repair a short to ground in the PUR and/or YEL YES-Go to step 15.
wire.B
NO-Repair an open in the PUR and/or YEL wire.B
NO-Go to step 13.
15. Check for continuity between power mirror control
13. Connect power mirror control unit connector (24P) unit connector (24P) terminal No. 6 and body ground.
terminals No. 19 and No. 20 to body ground with
jumper wires.
POWER MIRROR CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR (24P) BLU
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 /
1 13 14 15 16 17 18 19:20 / 22 / 24
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 '10 •11,7 '
Vci U 1 1£>ie>17' 16S1£) 2C> / '25
! / 24
JUMPER WIRE JUMPER WIRE

Wire side of female terminals Is t h e r e c o n t in u it y ?

YES-Repair a short to ground in the BLU wire.l
NO-Go to step 16.
16. Connect power mirror control unit connector (24P) 18. Reconnect the power mirror control unit connector
terminal No. 6 to body ground with a jumper wire. (24P).
20. Measure the voltage between power mirror control
JUMPER WIRE unit connector (24P) terminals No. 6 and No. 7.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 ’10 •H , /
1:l 14i u ; 1ei 17’ 1E11£)2C> / "22!/ '24 r® i
BLU ORN
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 /
/ 24
O
CM
CM
CM
13 14 15 16 17r 18 19 /

connector (13P) terminal No. 4 and body ground. Wire side of female terminals
RIGHT POWER MIRROR CONNECTOR (13P)

Is t h e r e a b o u t 5 V ?
YES-Faulty right power mirror position sensor;
replace the power mirror actuator (see page
22-425).B
NO-Substitute a known-good power mirror control
unit, and recheck. If DTC is gone, the original power
mirror control unit is faulty; replace it.B
YES-Go to step 18.
NO-Repair an open in the BLU wire.B
DTC B1836: Power Seat Position Sensor 9. At the sensor end, check for continuity between
terminal No. 3 of each position sensor and body
Circuit Short
ground (motor body).
SLIDE POSITION SENSOR CONNECTOR (3P)
ON (II).
3. Operate the slide switch in each direction for more
than 2 seconds.
YES-Go to step 5.
FRONT UP-DOWN POSITION SENSOR CONNECTOR (5P)
connections at the power seat control unit REAR UP-DOWN POSITION SENSOR CONNECTOR (5P)
connector.B RECLINE POSITION SENSOR CONNECTOR (5P)
7. Disconnect the slide position sensor 3P connector and
the 5P connectors from the recline motor/position
sensor, front up-down motor/position sensor, and
rear up-down motor/position sensor.
POWER SEAT CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR A (40P) Is t h e r e c o n t in u it y ?

YES-Replace the motor/position sensor that has
continuity.B
S V C C (W H T /B L K )
n----------------n NO-Replace the power seat control u n itB
I 1 I / I ? I f | 5 | 6 | ? I / | 9 | 1 0 | 1 1 | 1 2 | 13 | 7 | 15| 16| 17| 18| 19|20
/ 1 / ^ 2 3 [ /|2 5 |y ^ 2 7 i/2 9 M 3 l|/l/lx |3 5 |/|3 7 |/l3 9 |4 0 |
NO-Go to step 9.
DTC B1837: Driving Position Memory Recall 12. Check for DTCs with the HDS.
Timeout A r e a n y D T C s e x c e p t B 1 8 3 7 in d ic a te d ?
NOTE: If you are troubleshooting multiple DTCs, be sure YES-Go to the indicated DTCs troubleshooting.B
Test Mode A (see page 22-155). NO-Go to step 13.
1. Clear the DTCs with the HDS. 13. Clear the DTCs with the HDS and wait for 6 seconds.
2. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), and then back to 14. Move the power seat (slide forward/backward, recline
ON (II). forward/backward, front up-down, rear up-down)
motors one at a time, and check the operation time.
3. Use the front up-down switch to raise the front of the
seat as high as it will go. D o e s a n y m o t o r f a il to r u n s m o o t h ly ?
4. Use the rear up-down switch to raise the rear of the YES-Go to the power seat motor test (see page
seat as high as it will go. 22-517). Ifthe motor is OK, check the engagement of
the motor gear.B
5. Use the slide switch to move the seat to the rear as far
as it will go. NO-Go to the power seat control unit input test (see
•‘■a page 22-510).B
6. Use the recline switch to move the seat-back forward
as far as it will go.
7. Memorize this seat position with the memory
switches.
8. Use the seat switches to move the seat to its opposite
limits (front and rear all the way down, seat fully
forward, and seat-back fully reclined).
9. Recall the seat position with the driving position
memory switch.
10. Wait for at least 3 minutes.
YES-Go to step 12.
connections at each DPMS connector.B
DTC B1843: Power Seat Control Unit Lost 8. Checkfor continuity between power seat control unit
Communication With Power Mirror Control
Unit (UART line)
*08-10 Touring models
Test Mode A (see page 22-155). *| 1 1X1 3 [4 151 e l7 [ / | 9 110[ 11112!13|X115j 16] 17l 18| 19|20
/ 1 / 1 23l x 12 5 l y j 27[ x l 29 \/\ 3 1 1 /1 / 1/ 135 3 7 [ / 39 (40[
1. Clear the DTC with the HDS. BLK
ON (II).
3. Operate the power seat with the driving position
memory switch. W ire side of female term inals
YES-Go to step 5.
NO-Go to step 9.
time.B 9. Measure the voltage between power mirror control
unit connector (24P) terminal No. 24 and body
ground.
6. Disconnect the power seat control unit connectors
and power mirror control unit connector (24P).
connector A (40P) terminal No. 39 and power mirror
control unit connector (24P) terminal No. 13.
POWER SEAT CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR A (40P) 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 /

13 14 15 16>17 18 19 24
CM
o
CM
CM
W ire side of female term inals / /
WHT/RED
. 1 l / l 3 [ 4 I 5 | 6 I 7 \ / \ 9 110[ 11112] 13[/115|l6[l7|l8| 19)20
/1/|23|/|25|/l27|/l29|/|31 |/|/1/|35|/l37|/l39|4o|
BLK
n—_
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 ’10 •11,7 YES-Go to step 10.
1c\ 14; ie>ie>17r 16i 1£) 2C> / 22V 24 NO-Check No. 7 (7.5 A) fuse in the driver's under-dash
I PUR fuse/relay box. Ifthe fuse is OK, repair an open in the
WHT/RED wire B
YES-Go to step 8.
10, Checkfor continuity between power mirror control DTC B1844: Power Seat Slide Switch Circuit
unit connector (24P) terminal No. 22 and body
ground.
Malfunction
POWER MIRROR CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR (24P) to follow the instructions in B-CAN System Diagnosis
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 '10 ■11,/ ON (II).
1C1141ie>1e517" 1611£)2C> / '225 /
^
CM
.
3. Operate the slide switch in each direction for at least 2

BLK seconds.
W ire side of female term inals YES-Go to step 5.

YES-Repair an open in the wire between the power connections at the power seat control unit
mirror control unit and G601. If the wire is OK, repair connector.B
G601.ll
NO-Replace the power mirror control unit.B
7. Disconnect the power seat adjustment switch 12P
connector.
connector A (40P) terminals No. 1, No. 7, No. 27 and
SLFW (RED/WHT) ________

SCOM
(BLK)
SL,
, 1 [ /I 3 [4 15 | 6 17 ]/1 9 110[ 11112| 131/115| 16| 17| 18[ 19|20
/ ^ / 2 3 l y n 2 5 l / 2 7 l / |2 9 l / M 3 l [ / / / i 3 5 |/ 3 7 l / l 3 9 |4 0 [
SLBW (ORN)
NO-Go to step 9.
9. Check for continuity between the following terminals DTC B1845: Power Seat Recline Switch Circuit
of power seat control unit connector A (40P).
Malfunction
No. 1 <-> No. 7
No. 1 o No. 27
No. 7 o No. 27 to follow the instructions in B-CAN System Diagnosis
POWER SEAT CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR A (40P) 1. Clear the DTCs with the HDS.
SCOM 2. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), and then back to
(BLK) |— © — | SLFW (RED/WHT)
ON (II).
, ^ 13| 4 15 16 1 Jfc
1 9 [10|111 13[^l 1si ie| 17[18119I20
AAmA&lA&iAÂm\AAAmAmAmm 3. Operate the recline switch in each direction for at least
2 seconds.
SCOM (BLK)
(Q \ | i |/ | 3 I4 I5 I6 I7 |7 | 9 |10|11 |12|13l/|1 5 l^ |l7jl8|19|20 Is D T C B 1 8 4 5 in d ic a te d ?
X I/|23|/|25M 27|/|29|/131 |/1 /1/|35|/l37l/|39|40|
YES-Go to step 5.
SLBW(ORN)
SLFW (RED/WHT)
connections at the power seat control unit
(H ) ? i«l f .1*1\ ? lj,9l1l1lj!?lj,3 H 1|5l3,6l1l7K8l1,9l2°
connector.B
SLBW(ORN)
is t h e r e c o n tin u ity ? connector.
YES-Repair a short in the wire(s).B 8. Check for continuity between power seat control unit
NO-Go to step 10. connector A (40P) terminals No. 1, No. 6, No. 25 and
10. Do the power seat adjustment switch test (see page
22-516).
Is t h e s w it c h O K ?
YES-Replace the power seat control unit.B REFW (PNK)
SCOM
(BLK)
NO-Replace the power seat adjustment switch.B
■
Jt 1L
| 5 | 6 I 7 [ / I 9 110| 111i2[ 1 3 |/l 15[ 16[ 17]isl 19[20
A 7 m A m A 2 7 \A 2 % \A ^ \A A A 3 ^ A 3 7 \A m m
REBW (PUR)
YES-Repair a short to ground in the wire.I
NO-Go to step 9.
9. Check for continuity between the following terminals DTC B1846: Power Seat Front Up-Down
Switch Circuit Malfunction
No. 1 <-> No. 6
No. 1 o 'No. 25
No. 6 o No. 25 to follow the instructions in B-CAN System Diagnosis
POWER SEAT CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR A (40P) 1. Clear the DTCs with the HDS.
(BLK) REFW (PNK)
ON (II).
. I 1L/13| 4| 5| 6I 7\7\ 9|lolli|i2h3L/|l5ll6|l7|l8|l9|2Q
^lJ^23tJ^l25|J^l27l^|29|J^l3l[^l^lJ^|35tJ^l37|J^l39|4Ql 3. Operate the front up-down switch in each direction for
at least 2 seconds.
SCOM (BLK)
, . 1 1/1 3141516 I 7 1X1 911011111211slXl 1si 1e] 17118119|20 Is D T C B 1 8 4 6 in d ic a t e d ?
XL^|23|>|25|^|27M29|>l3l|>|>|^|35|>|37L>|39|j5r
YES-Go to step 5.
REBW (PUR)
REFW (PNK) connections at the power seat control unit
n--------- n
! 1I/I 3i 4| 5| 6 | 7|/| 9|10|11|12|13|/|15116|17|18|19120 connector.B
/M23|/|25|/127|/|29|/131I/MX35|/|37|/|39|40|
I REBW (PUR)
Is t h e r e c o n t in u it y ? connector.
22-516). POWER SEAT CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR A (40P)
Is th e s w it c h O K ? FHDN (RED/BLK)
YES-Replace the power seat control unit.B SCOM

(BLK) FHUP (LT GRN)
i ll/I 3I4I516I71/1~911o|1111 15|l6|17]18[19[20
xjX23|X25lX27|Xl29lx l3llXlXX35|/37ly^39|40[
W ire si de of female term inals
NO-Go to step 9.
■r n
body ■
9. Check for continuity between the following terminals DTG B1847; Power Seat Rear Up-Down Switch
Circuit Malfunction
No. 1 o No. 4
No. 1 o No. 5
No. 4 <-» No. 5
(BLK) |~© ~| FHDN (RED/BLK)
HL ON (II).
. . 1I/I 3 I4 | 5 | 6 | 7 I/I 9 |10|11|12|131/|15|16|17|18|19|20
/^/M 23|/^25|/^27|/|29|/|3l|/1/|/H35|/l37|/l39|40) 3. Operate the rear up-down switch in each direction for
at least 2 seconds.
SCOM r - O -iF H U P IL T G R N ) 4. Check for DTCs with the HDS.
(BLK)
, ■J Url 3 14 I f I 6 I ? 1/ 19 |l °IV K2h,3l/,|l5|Mlll8ll9l20
[>1^23[>|25|>|27|^|29lXi3l|>|>|^(3S|>l37L>l39|jy
YES-Go to step 5.
FHDN H S H system is OK at this time. Check for loose or poor
(RED/BLK) L - V V J FHUP(LTGRN)
connections at the power seat control unit
. J 1/1 ? [ 4 [ 5 | 6 | 7 [7 [ 9 jy [l lj^ |l3l/[l5|l6|l7[l8[l9|20 connector.B
7 ^ ? m /m A m /m /m lA A A w /w w w m
Is t h e r e c o n t in u it y ? connector.
22-516). POWER SEAT CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR A (40P)
Is th e s w itc h O K ? SHDN (GRY)

SCOM
YES-Replace the power seat control unit.B (BLK)
j M 3 [4 I 5 I 6 I 7 y \ 9 110| 11112l13 i/1 is] 1ej 1j l 18] 19]~20
RHUP (GRN/ORN)
NO-Go to step 9.
(cont'd)
9. Check for continuity between the following terminals

No. 1 o No. 3
No. 1 o No. 23
No. 3 <-> No. 23
YES-Repair a short in the wire(s).B
NO-Go to step 10.
22-516).
Is th e s w itc h O K ?
NO-Replace the power seat adjustment switch.®
System Input Test and Function Test
1. Connect the HDS to the DLC.

3. From the BODY ELECTRICAL SYSTEM SELECT menu, select POWER SEAT/POWER MIRROR, then DTCs.
• If DTCs are found, troubleshoot the DTCs using B-CAN System Diagnostic Test Mode A (see page 22-155).
• If no DTCs are found, go to step 4.
4. Exit the DTC mode and select DATA LIST from the POWER SEAT/POWER MIRROR TEST MODE menu.
5. Test each input and monitor each output under the condition listed below.
• If the data list indication is correct, continue to the next switch. If all switches are OK, go to step 6.
• Ifthe data list indication is not correct, perform the appropriate test at the control unit and terminal indicated in the
table.
- Voltage drop tests should be performed with the ignition switch to ON (II) and all connectors connected and the
meter negative test lead attached to a good body ground.
- Continuity tests should be performed with the ignition switch turned to LOCK (0) and indicated terminals
disconnected.
Data Li st Input/ Condition: Data List Control Unit/Terminal Possible cause if desired result is
Command indication Number/Test (If applicable) not obtained
Slide Switch Slide switch forward: Power seat control unit/A7, A1 • Faulty switch (see page 22-516)
Forward ON (RED/WHT) • An open or high resistance in
Switch released: OFF Slide switch released: the wire
5 V or more • A short to ground in the wire
Slide switch forward: 0 V • Faulty power seat control unit
Slide Switch Slide switch Power seat control unit/A27, A1 • Faulty switch (see page 22-516)
Backward backward: ON (ORN) • An open or high resistance in
Switch released: OFF Slide switch released: the wire
5 Vor more • A short to ground in the wire
Slide switch backward: 0 V • Faulty power seat control unit
Recline Switch Recline switch Power seat control unit/A6, A1 • Faulty switch (see page 22-516)
Forward forward: ON (PNK) • An open or high resistance in
Switch released: OFF Recline switch released: the wire
Recline switch forward: 0 V • Faulty power seat control unit
Recline Switch Recline switch Power seat control unit/A25, A1 • Faulty switch (see page 22-516)
Backward backward: ON (PUR) • An open or high resistance in
Switch open: OFF Recline switch released: the wire
Recline switch backward: 0 V • Faulty power seat control unit
Front Up-Down Front up-down switch Power seat control unit/A5, A1 • Faulty switch (see page 22-516)
Switch Up up: ON (LT GRN) • An open or high resistance in
Switch released: OFF Front up-down switch the wire
released: 5 V or more • A short to ground in the wire
Front up-down switch up: 0 V • Faulty power seat control unit
Front Up-Down Front up-down switch Power seat control unit/A4, A1 • Faulty switch (see page 22-516)
Switch Down down: ON (RED/BLK) • An open or high resistance in
Switch released: OFF Front up-down switch the wire
released: 5 Vor more • A short to ground in the wire
Front up-down switch down: 0 V • Faulty power seat control unit
Rear Up-down Rear up-down switch Power seat control unit/A23, A1 • Faulty switch (see page 22-516)
switch Up up: ON (GRN/ORN) • An open or high resistance in
Switch released: OFF Rear up-down switch the wire
Rear up-down switch up: 0 V • Faulty power seat control unit
Rear Up-down Rear up-down switch Power seat control unit/A3, A1 • Faulty switch (see page 22-516)
Switch Down down: ON (GRY) • An open or high resistance in
Switch released: OFF Rear up-down switch the wire
Rear up-down switch down: 0 V • Faulty power seat control unit
(cont'd)
System Input Test and Function Test (cont'd)
Data List Input/ Condition: Data List Control Unit/Terminal Possible cause if desired result is
Command Indication Number/Test (If applicable) not obtained
A/T Gear Position Transmission range Power seat control unit/A31 • Faulty switch
Switch (P) switch P position: ON (BLU/BLK) • An open or high resistance in
Any other position Transmission range switch P: 0 V the wire
than P: OFF • Faulty power seat control unit
Ignition switch for Ignition switch ON (II): Power seat control unit/A35 (YEL) • Blown No. 21 (7.5 A) fuse in the
power seat ON Ignition switch ON (II): 12 V driver's under-dash fuse/relay
control Ignition switch off: box
OFF • An open or high resistance in
the wire
• Faulty power seat control unit
Slide Sensor Seat moving forward Power seat control unit/A11 • Faulty sensor
or rearward: ON (YEL/GRN) • An open or high resistance in
Seat not moving: OFF Pulses as seat moves, 2.5 V the wire
average • Faulty power seat control unit
Front Up-Down Seat front moving up/ Power seat control unit/A12 • Faulty sensor
Sensor down: ON (YEL/BLK) • An open or high resistance in
Recline Sensor Seat back moving Power seat control unit/A10 9 Faulty sensor
forward or rearward: (BLU/WHT) • An open or high resistance in
ON Pulses as seat moves, 2.5 V the wire
Seat not moving: OFF average • Faulty power seat control unit
Rear Up-down Seat rear moving Power seat control unit/A13 • Faulty sensor
Sensor up/down: ON (GRN/WHT) • An open or high resistance in
Mirror Select Mirror select switch in Power mirror control unit/2 (RED) • Faulty switch
Switch LEFT LEFT position: ON Mirror Select switch LEFT: 0 V; • An open or high resistance in
('08-10 Touring Select switch in CENTER or RIGHT: 5 V the wire
models) CENTER or RIGHT • A short to ground in the wire
position: OFF • Faulty power mirror control
unit
Mirror Select Mirror select switch in Power mirror control unit/8 • Faulty switch
Switch RIGHT RIGHT position: ON (BLU/WHT) • An open or high resistance in
('08-10 Touring Select switch in Mirror Select switch RIGHT: 0 V; the wire
models) CENTER or LEFT CENTER or LEFT: 5 V • A short to ground in the wire
position: OFF • Faulty power mirror control
unit
Mirror Select Mirror select switch in Power mirror control unit/2 (RED), • Faulty switch
Switch CENTER CENTER position: ON 8 (BLU/WHT) Mirror Select switch • An open or high resistance in
('08-10 Touring Select switch in CENTER: the wire
models) RIGHT or LEFT 5 V each RIGHT or [LEFT] : • A short to ground in the wire
position: OFF 2 (5 V) [2 (0 V)] • Faulty power mirror control
unit
Mirror LEFT Mirror select switch in Power mirror control unit/10 • Faulty switch
Switch LEFT, then RIGHT (BLU/BLK), 1 (WHT/RED), 9 • An open or high resistance in
('08-10 Touring Mirror left switch (GRN/WHT), 2 (RED), 8 the wire
models) pressed: ON (BLU/WHT) Mirror Select switch • A short to ground in the wire
Mirror switch LEFT, left switch pressed: 10 (12 • Faulty power mirror control
released: OFF V),1 (12 V), 9 (5 V), 2 (0 V), 8 (5 V) unit
Mirror Select switch RIGHT, left
switch pressed: 10(12 V), 1 (5 V),
9 (12 V), 2 (5 V), 8 (0 V)
Mirror RIGHT Mirror select switch in Power mirror control unit/10 • Faulty switch
('08-10 Touring Mirror right switch (GRN/WHT), 2 (RED), 8 the wire
models) pressed: ON (BLU/WHT) • A short to ground in the wire
Mirror switch Mirror Select switch LEFT, right • Faulty power mirror control
released: OFF switch pressed: 10 (0 V), 1 (0 V), 9 unit
(5 V), 2 (12 V), 8 (5 V)
Mirror Select switch RIGHT, right
switch pressed: 10 (0 V), 1 (5 V), 9
(0 V), 2 (5 V), 8 (12 V)
Mirror UP Switch Mirror select switch in Power mirror control unit/10 • Faulty switch
('08-10 Touring LEFT, then RIGHT (BLU/BLK), 1 (WHT/RED), 9 • An open or high resistance in
models) Mirror up switch (GRN/WHT), 2 (RED), 8 the wire
pressed: ON (BLU/WHT) • A short to ground in the wire
Mirror switch Mirror Select switch LEFT, up • Faulty power mirror control
released: OFF switch pressed: 10 (12 V), 1 (0 V), unit
9 (5 V), 2 (0 V), 8 (5 V)
Mirror Select switch RIGHT, up
switch pressed: 10 (12 V), 1 (5 V),
9(0 V), 2 (5 V), 8(0 V)
Mirror DOWN Mirror select switch in Power mirror control unit/10 • Faulty switch
('08-10 Touring Mirror down switch (GRN/WHT), 2 (RED), 8 the wire
models) pressed: ON (BLU/WHT) • A short to ground in the wire
Mirror switch Mirror Select switch LEFT, down • Faulty power mirror control
released: OFF switch pressed: 10 (0 V), 1 (12 V), unit
9(5 V), 2 (12 V), 8 (5 V)
Mirror Select switch RIGHT,
down switch pressed: 10 (0 V), 1
(5 V), 9 (12 V), 2(5 V), 8 (12 V)
Ignition Switch Ignition switch on (II): Power mirror control unit/11 • Blown No. 21 (7.5 A) fuse in the
for Power Mirror ON (YEL) under-dash fuse/relay box
Control Ignition switch off: Ignition switch on: Battery • An open or high resistance in
('08-10 Touring OFF Voltage the wire
models) • A short to ground in the wire
• Faulty power mirror control
unit
Seat MEMO Seat MEMO switch Power seat control unit/A20 • Faulty switch
Switch pressed: ON (WHT) • An open or high resistance in
Switch released: OFF Seat MEMO switch pressed: 0 V; the wire
Switch released: 5 V or more • Faulty power seat control unit
Driver 1 position Driver position 1 Power seat control unit/A18 (BLU) • Faulty switch
Switch switch pressed: ON Driver position 1 switch pressed: • An open or high resistance in
Switch released: OFF 0 V; Switch released: 5 V or more the wire
• Faulty power seat control unit
Driver 2 position Driver position 2 Power seat control unit/A19 • Faulty switch
Switch switch pressed: ON (BLU/YEL) • An open or high resistance in
Switch released: OFF Driver position 2 switch pressed: the wire
0 V; Switch released: 5 Vor more • Faulty power seat control unit
Motor Right Right mirror moves Power mirror control unit/7 • Faulty sensor
Horizontal Sensor left/right: NORMAL (ORN), 6 (BLU), 20 (PUR) • An open or high resistance in
('08-10 Touring Right mirror stopped: Right mirror moving from full the wire
models) ABNORMAL right to full left: 7 (5 V), 6(0 V), • Faulty power mirror control
20 (about 0.5 V to about 4.5 V) unit
Mirror Right Right mirror moves Power mirror control unit/7 • Faulty sensor
Vertical Sensor up/down: NORMAL (ORN), 6 (BLU), 19 (YEL) • An open or high resistance in
('08-10 Touring Right mirror stopped: Right mirror moving from full the wire
models) ABNORMAL down to full up: 7 (5 V), 6 (0 V), • Faulty power mirror control
(cont'd)
Mirror Left Left mirror moves Power mirror control unit/7 • Faulty sensor
Horizontal Sensor left/right: NORMAL (ORN), 6 (BLU), 4 (WHT) • An open or high resistance in
('08-10 Touring Right mirror stopped: Left mirror moving from full left the wire
models) ABNORMAL to full right: 7 (5 V), 6 (0 V), • Faulty power mirror control
Mirror Left Left mirror moves Power mirror control unit/7 • Faulty sensor
Vertical Sensor up/down: NORMAL (ORN), 6 (BLU), 5 (GRN) • An open or high resistance in
('08-10 Touring Right mirror stopped: Left mirror moving from full the wire
models) ABNORMAL down to full up: 7 (5 V), 6 (0 V), • Faulty power mirror control
Mirror Right Right mirror Function Test: Go to step 6 N/A
Horizontal Motor commanded to move
command left/right: ON
('08-10 Touring Right mirror stopped:
models) OFF
Mirror Right Right mirror Function Test: Go to step 6 N/A
Vertical Motor commanded to move
command up/down: ON
Right mirror stopped:
OFF
Mirror Left Left mirror Function Test: Go to step 6 N/A
Horizontal Motor commanded to move
command left/right: ON
Left mirror stopped:
OFF
Mirror Left Left mirror Function Test: Go to step 6 N/A
Vertical Motor commanded to move
command up/down: ON
Left mirror stopped:
OFF
Driver 1 Position Driver 1 Position Function Test: Go to step 6 N/A
Indicator Indicator on: ON
Driver 1 Position
Indicator off: OFF
Driver 2 Position Driver 2 Position Function Test: Go to step 6 N/A
Indicator Indicator on: ON
Driver 2 Position
Indicator off: OFF
Slide Motor As seat moves Function Test: Go to step 6 N/A
Motor Command forward or rearward:
ON
Seat not moving: OFF
Recline Motor As seat back moves Function Test: Go to step 6 N/A
Command forward or rearward:
ON
Front Height As front of seat moves Function Test: Go to step 6 N/A
Motor Command up or down: ON
Rear Height As rear of seat moves Function Test: Go to step 6 N/A
Motor Command up or down: ON
Power Seat Power seat buzzer Function Test: Go to step 6 N/A
Buzzer Command commanded on: ON
Power seat buzzer
commanded off: OFF
6. Exit the DATA LIST and select Function Test.
7. Do each of the function tests listed in the table below. The appropriate output should occur.
• Ifthe function operates normally, go to the next function test. If all function tests operate normally, the system is
OK.
• If the function does not operate normally, perform the appropriate test at the control unit and terminal indicated in
the table.
- Voltage drop tests should be performed with the ignition switch to ON (II) and all connectors connected
- Continuity tests should be perform with the ignition switch turned to LOCK (0) and indicated terminals
disconnected
- Jumper tests should be done according to the instructions indicated.
• If the test indicates that the component operates normally, but the function does not operate with the function test
or the normal use of the component, the control unit that operates that function must be faulty; replace it.
• If the test indicates that the component does not operate normally, check for an open or short in the harnesses
between the component and the control unit. If the harness is OK, replace the component.
Power Seat Indicator
Function Test Component and Control Unit/Terminal Number/Test Possible cause if desired
operation (If applicable) result is not obtained
Memory Seat Memory seat Power seat control unit/A16 (GRN) • Faulty switch
Indicator 1 indi cator 1 illuminates Disconnect power seat control unit • An open or high
connector A. Connect terminal A16 to resistance in the wire
terminal A9; memory seat indicator 1 • A short to ground in the
should come on. wire
Memory Seat Memory seat Power seat control unit/A17 (RED) • Faulty switch
Indicator 2 indicator 2 illuminates Disconnect power seat control unit • An open or high
connector A. Connect terminal A17 to resistance in the wire
terminal A9; memory seat indicator 2 • A short to ground in the
should come on. wire
Power Seat
Slide Motor—Full Seat slides forward Power seat control unit/B1 • Faulty motor
Forward (WHT/RED), B4 (BRN), B7 (LT GRN), • An open or high
B17(YEL) resistance in the wire
Disconnect power seat control unit • A short to ground in the
connector B. Connect terminal B1 to wire
terminal B17 and terminal B7 to
terminal B4; driver's seat should slide
forward.
Slide Motor—Full Seat slides rearward Power seat control unit/B1 • Faulty motor
Backward (WHT/RED), B4 (BRN), B7 (LT GRN), • An open or high
B17 (YEL) resistance in the wire
terminal B4; driver's seat should slide
backward.
Front UP-DOWN Front of seat moves Power seat control unit/B1 • Faulty motor
Motor—Full Up up (WHT/RED), B4 (BRN), B6 (BRN/WHT), • An open or high
B16 (ORN) resistance in the wire
terminal B4; front of driver's seat
should move up.
(cont'd)
Power Seat
Functi on Test Component and Control Unit/Term i nal Number/Test Possible cause if desired
operati on (If appli cable) result is not obtained
Front UP-DOWN Front of seat moves Power seat control unit/B1 • Faulty motor
Motor—Full Down down (WHT/RED), B4 (BRN), B6 (BRN/WHT), • An open or high
B16 (ORN) resistance in the wire
terminal B4; front of driver's seat
should move down.
Rear Up-Down Rear of seat moves up Power seat control unit/B1 • Faulty motor
Motor—Full Up (WHT/RED), B2 (GRN), B4 (BRN), B10 • An open or high
(BLU) resistance in the wire
terminal B4; driver's seat should
move up.
Rear Up-Down Rear of seat moves Power seat control unit/B1 • Faulty motor
Motor—Full Down down (WHT/RED), B2 (GRN), B4 (BRN), B10 • An open or high
(BLU) resistance in the wire
terminal B4; driver's seat should
move down.
Recline Motor—Full Seat back moves Power seat control unit/B1 • Faulty motor
Forward forward (WHT/RED), B4 (BRN), B9 (RED), B11 • An open or high
(GRY) resistance in the wire
terminal B4; driver's seat back should
move forward.
Recline Motor—Full Seat back moves Power seat control unit/B1 • Faulty motor
Backward backward (WHT/RED), B4 (BRN), B9 (RED), B11 • An open or high
(GRY) resistance in the wire
terminal B4; driver's seat back should
move backward.
Power Mirror
Left Power Left power mirror Power mirror control unit/11 (YEL), 22 • Faulty actuator
Mirror—Full Up moves up (BLK), 14 (GRN), 15 (BLU/BLK) • An open or high
('08-10 Touring Disconnect the power mirror control resistance in the wire
models) unit connector. Connect terminal • A short to ground in the
No. 11 to terminal No. 14 and terminal wire
No. 22 to terminal No. 15; left mirror
should move up.
Mirror—Full Down moves down (BLK), 14 (GRN), 15 (BLU/BLK) • An open or high
should move down.
Mirror—Full Right moves right (BLK), 16 (BLU/WHT), 15 (BLU/BLK) • An open or high
should move right.
Mirror—Full Left moves left (BLK), 16 (BLU/WHT), 15 (BLU/BLK) • An open or high
should move left.
Right Power Right power mirror Power mirror control unit/11 (YEL), 22 • Faulty actuator
Mirror—Full Up moves up (BLK), 3 (GRN/WHT), 17 (RED/YEL) • An open or high
No. 22 to terminal No. 17; right mirror
should move up.
Mirror—Full Down moves down (BLK), 3 (GRN/WHT), 17 (RED/YEL) • An open or high
should move down.
Mirror—Full Right moves right (BLK), 18 (WHT/RED), 17 (RED/YEL) • An open or high
should move right.
Mirror—Full Left moves left (BLK), 18 (WHT/RED), 17 (RED/YEL) • An open or high
should move left.
Power Seat Control Unit Input Test
NOTE: Before troubleshooting the DPMS, troubleshoot the multiplex integrated control system first using B-CAN
2. Remove the driver's power seat (see page 20-153).
NOTE: Be careful not to scratch the interior trim.
3. Disconnect the connectors from the power seat control unit (A).
NOTE: All connector views are from wire side of female terminals.
A CONNECTOR (40P)
LT GRN RED/
GRY \ WHT BLU/WHT YEL/BLK WHT/BLK RED BLU/YEL
RED/
BLK BLK \ PNK \ BRN \ YEL/GRN / GRN/W HT/ G R N / B L U / WHT
rX \ \ V —? n/ / / / / / *
1/ 3 4 5 6 7 / I 9 10 11 12 1 3 / 1 5 16 17 18 19 20
/ Z 23Z 25Z 27Z 29Z 31Z Z Z 35Z 37Z 39 40
* ___ \ 1 \ _____ \ \ IV
GRN/BLK BLK
ORN BLU/BLK WHT/RED GRN/RED
LT GRN
WHT/BLU
f l 2 / 4 .E=3_ / 6 7 8 |
9 10 11
/ / / / 16 17 18
Z ~ f \ ^
RED BLU GRY ORN YEL BRN
5. Reconnect the connectors to the power seat control unit, and do these input tests at the following connectors.
• If all the input tests prove OK, the control unit must be faulty; replace it.
Cavi ty Wire Test condition Test: Desired result Possible cause if desired result is
not obtained
A35 YEL Ignition switch ON (II) Measure the voltage to • Blown No. 21 (7.5 A) fuse in the
the wire
A37 WHT/RED Under all conditions Measure the voltage to • Blown No. 15 (40 A) fuse in the
There should be battery • Blown No. 7 (7.5 A) fuse in the
box
the wire
B1 WHT/RED Under all conditions Measure the voltage to • Blown No. 20 (40 A) fuse in the
There should be battery • Blown No. 16 (20 A) fuse in the
box
the wire
B8 WHT/BLU Under all conditions Measure the voltage to • Blown No. 20 (40 A) fuse in the
There should be battery • Blown No. 14 (20 A) fuse in the
box
the wire
A9 BRN In all ignition switch Measure the voltage to • Poor ground (G602) or an open
B4 positions ground: in the ground wire
B18 There should be less than • An open or high resistance in
0.2 V. the wire
A16 GRN Under all conditions Connect to ground with a • Blown No. 7 (7.5 A) fuse in the
jumper wire: driver's under-dash fuse/relay
The driving position box
memory switch indicator 1 • Faulty driving position
should come on. memory switch
the wire
A17 RED Under all conditions Connect to ground with a • Blown No. 7 (7.5 A) fuse in the
jumper wire: driver's under-dash fuse/relay
The driving position box
memory switch indicator 2 • Faulty driving position
should come on. memory switch
the wire
A18 BLU Press No. 1 button of the Measure the voltage to • Poor ground (G601) or an open
driving position ground: in the ground wire
memory switch There should be less than • Faulty driving position
0.2 V. memory switch
the wire
(cont'd)
Power Seat Control Unit Input Test (cont'd)
Cavi ty Wire Test condition Test; Desired result Possible cause if desired result is
not obtained
A19 BLU/YEL Press No. 2 button of the Measure the voltage to • Poor ground (G601) or an open
driving position ground: in the ground wire
0.2 V. memory switch
the wire
A20 WHT Press the MEMO button Measure the voltage to ® Poor ground (G601) or an open
of the driving position ground: in the ground wire
0.2 V. memoryswitch
the wire
A31 BLU/BLK Shift lever in P position Measure the voltage to • Faulty transmission range
ground: switch
There should be less than • An open or high resistance in
0.2 V. the wire
A39 BLK Power mirror control Checkfor continuity An open or high resistance in the
unit connector (24P) and between terminal A39 and wire
power seat control unit power mirror control unit
connector A (40P) connector terminal No. 13:
disconnected There should be continuity.
between terminal A39 and
body ground:
There should be no
continuity.
Power Mirror Control Unit Input Test
NOTE: Before troubleshooting the DPMS, troubleshoot the multiplex integrated control system first using B-CAN
3. Disconnect the 24P connector (A) from the power mirror control unit (B).
Power Mirror Control Unit Input Test (cont'd)
5. With the connector still disconnected, do these input tests at the connectors.
• If all the input tests prove OK, the control unit must be faulty; replace it.
not obtained
24 WHT/RED Under all conditions Measure the voltage to • Blown No. 7 (7.5 A) fuse in the
voltage. • A short to ground in the wire
the wire
11 ■ YEL Ignition switch ON (II) Measure the voltage to • Blown No. 21 (7.5 A) fuse in the
voltage. • A short to ground in the wire
the wire
22 BLK In all ignition switch Check for continuity to # Poor ground (G601) or an open
positions ground: in the ground wire
There should be continuity. • An open or high resistance in
the wire
13 PUR Power seat control unit Check for continuity An open or high resistance in the
connector A (40P) between terminal No. 13 and wire
disconnected power seat control unit
connector A (40P) terminal
No. 39:
body ground:
There should be no
continuity.
Driving Position Memory Switch Test/Replacement

2. Disconnect the 10P connector from the memory switch (A).
3. Remove the two screws, then remove the switch from the door panel.
\ Terminal
2 3 4 7 8 9 W 5 6
Position \
OFF
MEMO
button r\ rs
ON KJ KJ
OFF
Position 1
button rK sJ rKJ\ rKJ
s
ON KrsJ
^ 2 /
Position 2 OFF
button
ON rs
kj
rs
KJ
Indicator 1 / k Ts
KJ KJ
3 /
/jsTs
Indicator 2 rK sJ ■ rLs/
5. If the continuity is not as specified, replace the illumination bulb (B) or the switch.
Power Seat Adjustment Switch Test/Replacement
1. Remove the power seat adjustment switch knobs (A) and recline cover from the driver's power seat (see page
20-157), then remove the two screws and the power seat switch.
1 2 3 4 5
6 7 8 9 10 11 12
2. Disconnect the 12P connector from the power seat adjustment switch (B).
3. Reinstall the adjustment switch knobs to the switch.
Terminal
1 2 3 5 6 7 8 9 11 12
Position \
FORWARD KJ KJ
SLIDE
SWITCH rU\ ir s
BACKWARD KJ
FORWARD rK>J Pi
KJ
RECLINE
SWITCH
BACKWARD r%
KJ
O
KJ
FRONT UP rs
kJ
rKJy
UP-DOWN
SWITCH DOWN rKJ\ rs
KJ
REAR UP vJ C\
W
UP-DOWN
SWITCH DOWN rLJ*j

Driver's Power Seat Motor Test
1. Remove the driver's seat (see page 20-153). 3. Test each motor by connecting power and ground
according to the table. When the motor stops running,
2. Disconnect the connector from each power seat
motor.
NOTE: A ll connectors are terminal side of male Terminal
terminals. 1 2
Position \
SL ID E M O T O R F R O N T U P -D O W N M O T O R Forward © ©
SLIDE
MOTOR
Backward © ©
Terminal
1 2
Position \
Forward 0 ©
RECLINE
MOTOR
Backward © 0
\ Terminal
1 2
Position \
FRONT UP © ©
UP-DOWN
MOTOR DOWN © ©
RECLINE MOTOR
(At subharness 5P connector)
\ Terminal
1 2
Position \
REAR UP © ©
UP-DOWN
MOTOR DOWN © ©
4. If the motor does not run or fails to run smoothly,

replace:
• Slide motor (see page 20-168)
• Front up-down motor (see page 20-168)
• Rear up-down motor (see page 20-168)
NOTE: For recline motor, check for an open in the
recline motor subharness. If the harness is OK,
replace the recline motor (see page 20-168).
-TRANSMITTER
Test, page 22-231
- RIGHT SLIDING
DOOR BUTTON
/ POWER SLIDING DOOR SWITCH
(Main switch, left OPEN/CLOSE switch, right OPEN/CLOSE switch)
LEFT POWER SLIDING DOOR

REMOTE CONTROL ASSEMBLY
Test, page 22-604
LEFT SLIDING
DOOR BUTTON LEFT POWER SLIDING DOOR RELEASE ACTUATOR
LEFT POWER SLIDING DOOR WINDOW

POSITION SWITCH
Test, page 22-605

REAR LATCH ASSEMBLY
(Closer motor and full latch/
half latch/ratchet/base position switches)
Closer M otor Test, page 22-602
Latch Position Switch
Test, page 22-605
Closer M otor Assembly

PINCH SENSOR
LEFT CESS ARTICULATED HARNESS

Test, page 22-228
FUEL FILL DOOR SWITCH

Test/Replacement, page 22
LEFT POWER SLIDE MOTOR

(Including sensor and
electromagnetic clutch) LEFT POWER SLIDING DOOR CONTROL UNIT
Test, page 22-603 Input Test, page 22-598
Replacement, page 20-45 Resetting the Power Sliding Door
Control Unit, page 22-531
RIGHT POWER SLIDING DOOR
REAR LATCH ASSEMBLY
(Closer motor and full latch/
half latch/ratchet/base position switches)
Closer M otor Test, page 22-602
Latch Position Switch
Test, page 22-605
Closer M otor Assembly
RIGHT POWER SLIDING DOOR WINDOW
POSITION SWITCH
Test, page 22-605

PINCH SENSOR

REMOTE CONTROL ASSEMBLY
Test, page 22-604

RELEASE ACTUATOR
RIGHT CESS ARTICULATED HARNESS

Test, page 22-228
RIGHT POWER SLIDE MOTOR

(Including sensor and electromagnetic clutch)
Test, page 22-603
RIGHT POWER SLIDING DOOR CONTROL UNIT

Resetting the Power Sliding Door
Control Unit, page 22-531
System Description
BACKGROUND
The power sliding door system has a number of electrical and mechanical components that must work in
synchronization with each other for the doors to open and close properly.
COMPONENTS
Front Failsafe Rear

Remote Control Latch Lever Latch
Power Sliding Door Control Unit (behind rear inner trim panel)
This unit receives inputs from the switches and sensors in the sliding door system and from B-CAN. It outputs to the
slide motor, release actuator, and closer motor to control the movement of the doors. It also controls the sliding door
beeper and indicator.
o
Sli de Motor (behind rear inner trim panel)
This motor moves the door in both directions. It includes a power slide door pulser, an electromagnetic clutch and a
cable tension adjuster.
• Power Slide Door Pulser (A)—The power slide door pulser generates pulses that are sent to the power sliding door
control unit as the sliding door moves. The power sliding door control unit uses these pulses to determine the speed
and position of the door.
• Electromagnetic Clutch (B)—This clutch engages the motor to the sliding door cables.
Remote Control Assembly

This assembly operates cables that release the front and rear slide door latches, pulls the inner handle lower roller latch
release cable, triggers the 3 remote control switches, and activates the failsafe lever cable. The assembly includes the
remote control switches, the door lock actuator, the door lock, the child-proof lock, and the inside door handle linkage.
• Remote Control Switch 1 (A)—This switch signals the power sliding door control unit that the outside door handle is
being pulled or the inside door handle is being pulled toward the open direction while the child safety lock is OFF.
• Remote Control Switch 2 (B)—This switch signals the power sliding door control unit that the inside door handle is
being pulled toward the close position.
• Remote Control Switch 3 (C)—This switch signals the power sliding door control unit that the inside door handle is
being pulled toward the open position while the child safety lock is ON. This switch is used for safety reasons because
remote control switch 1 is not actuated when the child safety lock is ON and the inner handle is pulled toward the open
position.
(cont'd)
Outer Handle Crank Assembly

This assembly operates the lower roller latch cable when the inner handle lower roller latch release cable is pulled by
the remote control assembly, the outer handle cable A is pulled by the outer handle or the release actuator is operated.
This assembly also operates the outer handle cable B when the outer handle cable A is pulled by the outer handle or the
release actuator is operated. This assembly includes the release actuator.
Release Actuator (A)—When the dashboard switch, the remote transmitter, or either the inside or outside door handle is
used to open or close the door, the release actuator rotates the outer handle crank assembly linkage, pulling the lower
roller latch cable and the outer handle cable B.
Rear Latch Assembly

This assembly mechanically latches the rear of the door in the closed position. It contains the closer motor, the
half-latch/full-latch switch, the base position switch, ratchet switch, and the failsafe lever.
• Closer Motor (A)—This motor moves the latch from the half-latched to the fully latched position to complete closing
the door.
• Half-Latch Switch/Full-Latch Switch (B)—These switches signal the power sliding door control unit that the door has
reached the half-latched position and the fully latched position-the door is fully closed.
• Base Position Switch (C)—This switch signals the power sliding door control unit that the closer motor is in its normal,
off position.
• Ratchet Switch (D)—This switch provides a confirmation signal to the control unit that the operation of the half-latch
and full-latch switches is accurate.
• Failsafe Lever (E)-This lever mechanically disconnects the closer motor from the door latch. See Emergency Stop
Operation.
L o w e r Roller Latch an d S to p p e r A s s e m b ly (atta c h e d to lo w e r fro n t o f slid e do o r)
This assembly is attached to the lower roller's bracket. The lower roller latch latches the door in the open position when
it is fully opened. The lower roller stopper stops the door at the "open window" position for safety. It contains the lower
roller latch and the lower roller lever as well as the lower rollers.
S lid in g D o o r P o w e r W in d o w R e g u la to r A s sem b ly
This assembly moves the sliding door window in the window run channels, actuates the sliding door window position
switch, and pulls the lower roller stopper cable. It contains a power window motor, position plate, and sliding door
window position switch.
Sliding Door Window Position Switch—This switch signals the power window control unit that the window is open at
about 4 inches (about 100 mm) or more.
Front Latch Assembly

This assembly mechanically latches the front of the door in the closed position.
R e ar Latch C able
This cable is routed between the remote control assembly and the rear latch assembly. It is pulled by the remote control
assembly and releases the rear latch to open the door.
F ro n t L a tchC able
This cable is routed between the remote control assembly and the front latch assembly. It is pulled by the remote control
assembly and releases the front latch to open the door.
Fai lsafe Lever C a b le
This cable is routed between the remote control assembly and the latch assembly. It is pulled by the remote control
assembly and activates the failsafe lever.
O u te r H a n d le C a b le A
This cable is routed between the outer slide door handle and the outer handle crank assembly. It is pulled by the outside
handle and rotates the linkage of the outer handle crank assembly.
O u te r H a n d le C a b le B
This cable is routed between the outer handle crank assembly and the remote control assembly. It is pulled by the outer
handle crank assembly and rotates the linkage on the remote control assembly.
L o w e r R o ller Latch C able
This cable is routed between the outer handle crank assembly and the lower roller latch assembly. It is pulled by the
outer handle crank assembly and releases the lower roller latch.
In n e r H a n d le L o w e r R o ller Latch R elease C a b le
This cable is routed the remote control assembly and the outer handle crank assembly. It is pulled by the remote control
assembly and rotates the linkage on the outer handle crank assembly.
L o w e r R o ller S to p p e r C ab le
This cable is routed between the power window regulator and the lower roller lever. It is pulled by the power window
regulator when the window is about 4 inches (about 100 mm) from the top and it pulls the lower roller stopper.
SWITCHES AND INDICATORS

M a in S w itc h
This switch, when it is OFF, turns off the power slide function of the door, and disables the sliding door beeper. The
doors can only be opened and closed manually. The closer function will continue to operate once the door is manually
moved to the half-latched position.
Power Sliding Door Switches
There is one rocker switch for each door. Each switch signals its respective power sliding door control unit that the
driver wants to open or close that door.
S lid in g D o o r In d ic a to r (E X an d EX-L)
This indicator normally lights for about 2 seconds when the ignition switch is turned to ON (II). If it comes on at any other
time, it is signaling the driver that there is a problem with the power sliding door system. The door with the problem will
no longer operate electrically, only manually. The technician can use this indicator to read out trouble codes stored in
the power sliding door system.
NOTE: Touring model uses the MID to inform the driver of a fault in the power sliding door system.
S lid in g D o o r B eeper
This beeper alerts the driver and occupants that the sliding door system requires attention for safety reasons.
BASIC OPERATION
O p en in g a D o o r w ith th e P o w e r S lid in g D o o r S w itc h o r th e R e m o te T ra n s m itte r
To open a door electrically:
• The Main switch must be ON.
• Ifthe ignition switch is ON (II), the shift lever must be in Park or in Neutral with the foot brake or parking brake ON.
• If the ignition switch is turned to LOCK (0), the shift lever must be in Park.
• The door must be unlocked, and the fuel fill door must be closed (left door only).
1. Ifthe Power Sliding Door Switch is used, the switch sends a signal to the power sliding door control unit for that door.
If the remote transmitter is used, the door multiplex sends an open message to the power sliding door control unit for
that door.
2. The power sliding door control unit sends a signal to the release actuator to unlatch the door.
3. The release actuator rotates the linkage on the outer handle crank which pulls the outer handle cable B. Outer handle
cable B rotates the linkage on the remote control assembly, which pulls the front and rear latch cables. This releases
the front and rear latches mechanically unlatching the door.
4. The power sliding door control unit then activates the electromagnetic clutch and starts the slide motor. The slide
motor moves the cables that move the door.
5. The power slide door motor pulser senses the movement of the slide motor, and sends pulses to the power sliding
door control unit. The control unit uses these pulses to judge the speed and position of the door.
6. When the power sliding door control unit judges that the door is fully open, it turns off the slide motor and the
electromagnetic clutch.
O p en in g a D o o r w ith th e Inside o r O u ts id e H a n d le
To open a door electrically:
• The Main switch must be ON.
• If the ignition switch is ON (II), the shift lever must be in Park or in Neutral with the foot brake or parking brake ON.
• If the ignition switch is turned to LOCK (0), the shift lever must be in Park.
• The door must be unlocked, and the fuel fill door must be closed (left door only).
7. The inside door handle is mechanically linked to the remote control assembly. The outside door handle is linked via
the outer door handle cable A, outer handle crank, and outer handle cable B.
• Inner handle, child safety lock OFF—The inner handle rotates the linkage on the remote control assembly, which
pulls the front and rear latch cables. This releases the front and rear latches, mechanically unlatching the door.
• Inner handle, child safety lock ON—The inner handle rotates the linkage on the remote control assembly, which
only pulls the fail safe cable; the front and rear latch cables are mechanically disengaged from the linkage.
• Outer handle—The outer handle pulls the outer handle cable A, which rotates the outer handle crank. The outer
handle crank assembly pulls the outer handle cable B. Outer handle cable B rotates the linkage on the remote
control assembly, which pulls the front and rear latch cables. This releases the front and rear latches, mechanically
unlatching the door.
(cont'd)
8. Remote control switch 1 or 3 is closed by the rotated linkage on the remote control assembly.
• Inner handle, child safety lock OFF—The linkage on the remote control assembly closes remote control switch 1,
signaling the power slide door control unit to open the door.
• Inner handle, child safety lock ON—The linkage on the remote control assembly is mechanically disengaged and
cannot close remote control switch 1. The child safety lock linkage is engaged and closes remote control switch 3,
signaling the power slide door control unit to NOT open the door and the operation is ended.
• Outer handle—The linkage on the remote control assembly closes remote control switch 1, signaling the power
slide door control unit to open the door.
10. The release actuator rotates the linkage on the outer handle crank, which pulls the outer handle cable B. Outer handle
cable B rotates the linkage on the remote control assembly, which pulls the front and rear latch cables. (This keeps the
front and rear latches mechanically unlatched in the event that the inner or outer handle is not held long enough for
the electromagnetic clutch and slide motor to open the door.)
12. The power sliding door motor pulser senses the movement of the slide motor, and sends pulses to the power sliding
13. When the power sliding door control unit judges that the door is fully open, it turns off the slide motor and the
electromagnetic clutch.
C losing a D o o r w ith th e P o w e r S lid in g D o o r S w itc h o r th e R e m o te T ra n s m itte r
To close a door electrically:
• The Main Switch must be ON.
• The fuel fill door must be closed (left door only).
14. Ifthe Power Sliding Door Switch is used, the switch sends a signal to the power sliding door control unit for that door.
If the remote transmitter is used, the door multiplex sends an open message to the power sliding door control unit for
that door.
16. The release actuator rotates the linkage on the outer handle crank, which pulls the lower roller latch cable. The lower
roller latch cable releases the lower roller latch, which mechanically unlatches the door.
18. The power sliding door motor pulser senses the movement of the slide motor, and sends pulses to the power sliding
19. When the power sliding door nears closed, the slide motor pulls the door in enough to latch the rear door latch in the
half-latch position. This closes the half-latch switch and the ratchet switch.
20. The half-latch switch sends a signal to the sliding door control unit and the control unit starts the closer motor
operation to pull the door in to the full-latch position.
21. The closer motor rotates the closer motor linkage on the rear latch assembly, which closes the base position switch,
and once the door is fully closed, the full-latch switch.
22. The full-latch switch sends a signal to the sliding door control unit, which then reverses the slide motor's direction of
rotation until the base switch opens again and turns off the slide motor and electromagnetic clutch.
23. When the door is fully latched, the full-latch switch sends a signal through the junction switch to the power sliding
door control unit. The control unit stops the slide motor, stops the closer motor, and returns the closer motor to its
start position.
Closing a Door with the Inside or Outside Handle
To close a door electrically:
• The Main Switch must be ON.
• The fuel fill door must be closed (left door only).
24. The inside door handle i s mechanically linked to the remote control assembly. The outside door handle is linked via
the outer door handle cable A, outer handle crank, and outer handle cable B.
• Inner handle pulled toward closed—The inner handle rotates the linkage on the remote control assembly, which
pulls the inner handle lower roller latch release cable. This rotates the linkage on the outer handle crank, which
pulls the lower roller latch cable. The lower roller latch cable releases the lower roller latch, which mechanically
unlatches the door.
• Inner handle pulled toward open, child safety lock OFF—The inner handle rotates the linkage on the remote control
assembly.
• Inner handle pulled toward open, child safety lock ON—The inner handle rotates the linkage on the remote control
assembly.
• Outer handle—The outer handle pulls the outer handle cable A, which rotates the outer handle crank. The outer
handle crank assembly pulls the outer handle cable B. Outer handle cable B rotates the linkage on the remote
control assembly.
25. Remote control switch 1,2, or 3 is closed by the rotated linkage on the remote control assembly.
• Inner handle pulled toward closed—The linkage on the remote control assembly closes remote control switch 2,
signaling the power sliding door control unit to close the door.
• Inner handle pulled toward open, child safety lock OFF—The linkage on the remote control assembly closes remote
control switch 1, signaling the power slide door control unit to close the door.
• Inner handle pulled toward open, child safety lock ON—The linkage on the remote control assembly closes remote
control switch 3, signaling the power sliding door control unit to close the door.
• Outer handle—The linkage on the remote control assembly closes remote control switch 1, signaling the power
sliding door control unit to close the door.
26. From this point, the door closing operation is the same as steps 15 through 23 in the previous description.
(cont'd)
Opening or Closi ng a Door Without Power

The power sliding door operation is disabled if the main switch is OFF, or if there is a problem with the door that has
turned on the sliding door indicator or MID message. In those cases, the door can be opened and closed by moving it
manually, though the door does continue to operate some features:
ik C A U TIO N
The power sliding door automatically closes when halfway latched. Be careful not to pinch your fingers during this
process or serious injury may occur. Make sure to disconnect the battery or remove the fuse before doing any repair
or adjustments.
• Auto Closer - While operating in the manual mode, if the door is closed to the half-latch position, the half-latch switch
and ratchet switch will close, signaling the power sliding door control unit to activate the closer motor in order to
complete the latching sequence.
• Unintentional Slide Prevention (USP), Manual Mode — If the main switch is turned OFF while the door is neither fully
open nor fully closed, the power sliding door control unit will monitor the power sliding door motor pulser for two
seconds after the electromagnetic clutch is turned OFF. If the door begins to move rapidly within that time period, the
power sliding door control unit will reengage the electromagnetic clutch and turn on the power sliding door beeper.
This feature prevents the door from sliding open or closed unintentionally ifthe main switch is turned OFF while
parked on a hill. The USP feature will time out after 30 minutes unless the main switch is turned back on or the inner or
outer handle is operated.
T ra p D e te c tio n O p e ra tio n
Trap Detection is the feature that detects an obstacle in the door's path as it opens or closes. This detection is disabled
when the door is closing and reaches the half-latch position. The trap detection system has three detection modes:
Door speed detection —
• The power sliding door control unit monitors the pulses from the power sliding door motor pulser as the door moves.
• If, from these pulses, the control unit detects that the door has slowed down (a sudden decrease in pulse frequency),
the control unit stops the slide motor.
• The sliding door beeper sounds three times.
• The control unit reverses the slide motor's direction, and moves the door to its previous position (open or closed).
However, while closing, ifthe shift lever is not in park, or is not in neutral with the foot brake or parking brake applied,
the door will stop and will not return to its previous position.
Sliding door motor current detection —
• The power sliding door control unit monitors the current being used by the power sliding door motor as the door
moves.
• If the current increases by more than a certain amount for the situation, which learned as the door begins to move
(such as on a hill), the control unit stops the slide motor.
However, while closing, ifthe shift lever is not in park, or is not in neutral with the foot brake or parking brake applied,
Pinch sensor detection —
• The power sliding doors each have a pinch sensor along the leading edge of the door.
• The power sliding door monitors the pinch sensor only when the door is closing.
• Ifthe pinch sensor closes (resistance drops from the normal 1000 D level to less than 120 Q) the slide door control unit
stops the slide motor.
However, while closing, if the shift lever is not in park, or is not in neutral with the foot brake or parking brake applied,
Emergency Stop Operation
The Emergency Stop feature allows the operator to stop the door for any reason when it is opening or closing. It can be
activated at any time using any of the following:
• The power sliding door switch (OPEN or CLOSE) on the dashboard
• The remote transmitter (button for the door that is to be stopped)
• The inner door handle
• The outer door handle
Turning the Main switch OFF also stops door movement (see Unintentional Slide Prevention (USP) Manual Mode).
It while the door is moving, the power sliding door control unit receives an open or close signal from any of the switches
above, it immediately stops the slide motor. The sliding door beeper sounds three times (ifthe Main switch was not
used to stop door movement). Depending on which operation is used to resume door operation, the door will operate
differently.
• If the remote transmitter is used to move the door after it has stopped, the door will move in the opposite direction.
• If the Power Sliding Door Switch or the inner handle is used, the door will move in the direction selected.
• If the outer handle is used, the door will move toward the open position.
Unintentional Slide Prevention (USP), Power Mode—If the emergency stop operation is activated while the door is
neither fully open nor fully closed, the power sliding door control unit will keep the electromagnetic clutch activated for
up to 30 minutes (depending on whether or not the engine is running in order to preserve the battery). Once the
electromagnetic clutch is turned off, the control unit monitors the power sliding door motor pulser for two seconds for
rapid movement of the door. If rapid movement is detected, the power sliding door control unit reengages the
electromagnetic clutch and then the slide motor to move the door back to its original position and the power sliding
door beeper sounds a continuous tone. The power sliding door control unit then releases the electromagnetic clutch
and monitors the power sliding door motor pulser again. If the door begins to move, it repeats this operation one more
time. If, after disengaging the electromagnetic clutch a third time, the sliding door still moves, the power sliding door
control unit will reengage the electromagnetic clutch and the sliding motor and move the door to the fully open or
closed position, depending on which direction the door was moving when the clutch was disengaged, then the power
sliding door beeper is turned OFF.
Fuel Fill D o o r O p era tio n
The left door locks automatically when the fuel fill door is opened.
27. When the fuel fill door is opened, the fuel fill door switch closes and sends a signal to the MICU-rear junction box.
28. The MICU-rear junction box stores the current position of the left slide door lock knob and then locks the left rear
sliding door.
29. The MICU-rear junction box sends a fuel fill door status message to the left slide door control unit.
30. Once the fuel fill door is closed the fuel fill switch opens. The MICU-rear junction box returns the left rear door lock to
its previous position (if previously unlocked, the door will be unlocked; if previously locked, it will remain locked).
If a passenger attempts to manually unlock the left rear sliding door while the fuel fill door is open, it will lock again. This
automatic lock function can be overridden by pushing the lock knob to the unlock position and holding it there for
several seconds. The power sliding door control unit will not open the door while the fuel fill door is open. If the door is
manually opened past the lower roller stopper position, and a power close operation is requested, the power sliding
door control unit will move the door closed to the stopper position, then beep three times and turn off the
electromagnetic clutch. Unintentional slide prevention is then active (see unintentional sliding prevention (USP), Power
Mode). Serious damage to the power sliding door or the fuel fill door may be caused by opening the sliding door while
the fuel fill door is open.
SLIDING DOOR BEEPER LOGIC

This beeper alerts the driver and occupants that the sliding door system requires attention for safety reasons. There is
one beeper that is shared between both power sliding door control units and is part of the right power sliding door
control unit. The left power sliding door control unit sends a message to the right power sliding door control unit to
request beeper operation. The beeper operates in three modes:
Three Beep—The beeper sounds for 0.5 seconds in quick succession three times. This tone applies during the following
conditions:
• Trap detection operation
• Emergency stop operation
• Power sliding door open operation is requested from the remote transmitter or power sliding door switches on the
dashboard while the door is locked.
• Power sliding door close operation is requested while the pinch sensor is ON.
• Power sliding door open operation is requested while the fuel fill door is open.
Continuous Tone—The beeper sounds a solid, continuous tone until the condition causing the warning is eliminated.
This tone applies during the following conditions:
• The door is neither fully open nor fully closed, the vehicle is stopped, and the shift lever is out of Park or the shift lever
is in Neutral and the foot brake or parking brake is OFF.
• The door is not fully closed and the vehicle speed (VSP) or wheel speed (VSPWHEEL) is not zero.
• Unintentional Slide Prevention is active (electromagnetic clutch is on).
• Unintentional Slide Prevention has been canceled by the inner or outer handle, but the door is still not in the fully open
or fully closed position.
Continuous Beep—The beeper sounds for 0.5 seconds in quick succession continuously until the problem causing the
warning is resolved. This tone applies during the following conditions:
• The door is closing while the vehicle speed (VSP) or wheel speed (VSPWHEEL) is not zero.
• The door is closing while the shift lever is out of park.
RETRIEVING DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES

Power sliding door DTCs can be retrieved using the HDS. Refer to B-CAN System Diagnosis Test Mode A (see page
22-155).
CLEARING DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES

Power sliding door DTCs can be cleared by removing the No. 7 fuse from the under-dash fuse/relay box. Once the DTCs
have been cleared, re-home the power sliding door.
REHOMING THE DOORS

If the power sliding door control unit has lost power for any reason (battery disconnected, etc.), the doors must be
re-homed before they will work properly. The power sliding door control unit must relearn the door's home position so
it can use the revolution sensor to keep track of the door's position when it is moving, refer to the Resetting the Power
Sliding Door Control Unit (see page 22-531).
Resetting the Power Sliding Door Control Unit
NOTE: Ifthe battery terminal is disconnected or No. 7

(7.5 A) fuse in the driver's under-dash fuse/relay box is
removed while the power sliding door is operating, the
power sliding door can not be opened or closed
automatically until it is reset.
1. Erase the power sliding door DTCs by removing the
No. 7 fuse from the under-dash fuse/relay box.
2. Turn off the Main switch for the doors. Make sure the
ignition switch is in LOCK (0).
3. Fully close the power sliding door manually (the
control unit must see the full latch switch and the
ratchet switch closed at the same time).
4. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). Turn on the Main
switch.
5. Test the door operation with the power sliding door
switch, the remote transmitter, and the door handles.
Circuit Diagram
Left power sliding door
C5 C3 A13 A16 A8 A20 A10 A22 C2 B3 A11 A14

SLMOP SLMCL VREF SLSE1 SLSE2 SEGND E/C+ E/C- VMP1 VMP2 VBU IG1 ^
LEFT POWER SLIDING DOOR CONTROL UNIT /
B-CAN ATP-P SG PG1 PG2 \

i A7 A9 A21 C1 C4
i • POWER TAILGATE CONTROL UNIT
I • POWER SEAT CONTROL UNIT
1 POWER TAILGATE • RIGHT POWER SLIDING DOOR
1 CONTROL UNIT CONTROL UNIT
i1 V 1 Y
GRN/RED GRN/RED BLU/BLK BLU/BLK BLK BRN BLK
GRN/RED BLU/BLK
MICU-REAR TRANSMISSION
JUNCTION RANGE SWITCH
BOX (P position)
Xl _Q_ _ll
G603 G603 G603
Closedwithinner/outerhandlepulledtoopenside
Closedwithinnerhandlepulledtocloseside
Closedwithinnerhandlepulledtoopenside
withchildsafetylockon
B-CANline
RIGHTPOWER
SLIDINGDOOR
CONTROLUNIT
Y
YEL/BLU
Right power sliding door
C5 A13 A16 A17 A20 A10 A22 A14

SLMOP VREF SLSE1 SLSE2 SEGND E/C+ E/C- VMP1 VMP2 VBU IG1
RIGHTPOWERSLIDINGDOORCONTROLUNIT BEEPER
B-CAN ATP-P MAIN SG PG1 PG2
I A7 A9 B6 A21 C1 C4
i
1
I
I
I
I
I
I
GRN/RED BLK BRN BLK
I
I
i
❖ V V
■ MICU-REAR
JUNCTIONBOX T RANSMISSION
RANGESWITCH
POWERSLIDING
DOORMAIN
■ POWERTAILGATE (Pposition) SWITCH
CONTROLUNIT
(Withpowertailgate)
^ -LL -LL
G653 G653 G653
*1: Closedwithinner/outerhandlepulledtoopenside
*2: Closedwithinnerhandlepulledtocloseside
*3: Closedwithinnerhandlepulledtoopenside
withchildsafetylockon
*4: '07model
*5; '08-10models
- :B-CANline
No.7(7.5A)FUSE
(PASSENGER'S
UNDER-DASH
FUSE/RELAYBOX)
DTC Troubleshooting
DTC B2002: Left Power Sliding Door Control DTC B2005: Left Power Sliding Door Control
Unit EEPROM Error Unit Lost Communication With MICU
1. Disconnect the negative battery cable and wait for 10 NOTE: If you are troubleshooting multiple DTCs, be sure
seconds, then reconnect it. to follow the instructions in B-CAN System Diagnosis
ON (II). 1. Clear the DTCs with the HDS.
3. Check for DTCs with the HDS. 2. Turn the ignition sw itc h to LOCK (0), and then back to
ON (II).
YES-Replace the left power sliding door control
unit.B Is D T C B 2 0 0 5 in d ic a t e d ?
NO-lntermittent failure. The system is OK at this time. YES-Go to step 4.

Check for loose or poor connections at the left sliding
NO-lntermittent failure. The left power sliding door
door control unit.B
connections at the left power sliding door control unit
connector, and at the MICU connector.B
A r e D T C s B1055, B1106, B1157, B1255,B1355,B1556,
B 1 8 0 6 , B 1 9 5 5 , a n d /o r B 2 0 5 5 a ls o in d ic a te d ?
YES-Go to step 7.
NO-Go to step 5.
6. Do the left power sliding door control unit input test
(see page 22-598).
Is t h e in p u t t e s t O K ?
unit.B
NO-Refer to the left power sliding door control unit
input test and correct the cause.B
8. Do the MICU input test (see page 22-185).
Is th e in p u t te s t O K ?

fuse/relay box.B
NO-Refer to the MICU input test and correct the
cause.B
DTC B2007: Left Power Sliding Door Control DTC B2008; L e f t P o w e r S l i d i n g D o o r C o n t r o l
Unit Lost Communication With Rear Junction U n it L o st C o m m u n ic a tio n W ith M IC U (F ro n t
Box Control Unit (RJU Message) P a s s e n g e r 's D o o r L o c k S w itc h M e s s a g e )
ON (II). ON (II).
Are DTCs B1012 a n d B 2007 in d icate d ? Are DTCs B1358, B2008, an d B2058 indicated?
YES-Go to MICU-rear junction box control unit input YES-Go to MICU input test (see page 22-185),■
test (see page 22-193).■
NO-Go to left power sliding door control unit input
NO-Go to left power sliding door control unit input test (see page 22-598).■
DTC.B2010: L e f t P o w e r S l i d i n g D o o r C o n t r o l D T C B 2 0 1 1 : L eft P o w e r S lid in g D o o r C o n tro l

U n it L o st C o m m u n ic a tio n W ith G a u g e C o n tro l U n it L o st C o m m u n ic a tio n W ith G a u g e C o n tro l
M o d u l e (VSP/NE M e s s a g e ) M o d u l e (A /T M e s s a g e )
2. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0); and then back to 2. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), and then back to
ON (II). ON (II).
3. Wait for at least 6 seconds, 3. Wait for at least 6 seconds.
Are DTCs B 1060, B 1205, B1357, B1805, B2010, a n d A re DTCs B1008, B1061, B1808, B1956, B2011, and
B 2 0 6 0 in d ic a te d ? B2061 indicated?
22-189).■ 22-189).B
NO-Go to left power sliding door control unit input NO-Go to left power sliding door control unit input
test (see page 22-598).B test (see page 22-598).B
DTC B2025: Left Power Sliding Door Switch 9. Push and hold the open side of the left power sliding
door switch for more than 3 seconds.
(Open Side) Signal Error
to follow the instructions in B-CAN System Diagnosis is D T C B 2 0 2 5 in d ic a t e d ?
YES-Go to step 11.
NO-lntermittent failure. The power sliding door
2. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), and then back to system is OK at this time. Check for loose or poor
ON (II). connections at the left power sliding door control unit
connector, and at the power sliding door switch
3. Turn the power sliding door main switch ON.
connector.B
11. Check for continuity between power sliding door
Is D T C B 2 0 2 5 in d ic a t e d ? switch 10P connector terminal No. 9 and body
ground.
YES-Go to step 5.
NO-Go to step 9. POWER SLIDING DOOR SWITCH 10P CONNECTOR
6. Disconnect left power sliding door control unit
connector A (22P).
7. Remove the power sliding door switch (see page JS=Z
22-602), and disconnect the 10P connector from the 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
switch. SCOM
(GRN/WHT)
switch 10P connector terminal No. 2 and body
ground.
POWER SLIDING DOOR SWITCH 10P CONNECTOR

NO-Go to step 12.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
DROP (WHT/BLU)
is th e r e c o n tin u ity ?

NO-Go to step 11.
12. Checkfor continuity between following terminals of DTC B202S: Left Power Sliding Door Switch
the power sliding door switch 10P connector.
(Close Side) Signal Error
o
z
2 7
o o
o
z z
2 o 8 NOTE: If you are troubleshooting multiple DTCs, be sure

o
z
o No. 10 to follow the instructions in B-CAN System Diagnosis

z z z z
2
6 o o 6
o Test Mode A (see page 22-155).

z z z
9 7
o o o
9 *-» 8 1. Clear the DTCs with the HDS.

9 <r> 10
POWER SLIDING DOOR SWITCH'10P CONNECTOR ON (II).
-------- ^ ------- 3. Turn the power sliding door main switch ON.
1 2l 3 4 5 6 7 II 9 10
is D T C B 2 0 2 6 in d ic a te d ?
YES-Go to step 5.
M l3>-
NO-Go to step 9.
----------® —
1 iI 3 4 5 6 7 {i 9 10 6. Disconnect the 22P connector from the left power
sliding door control unit.
7. Remove the power sliding door switch (see page
22-602), and disconnect the 10P connector from the
switch.
1 ;> 3 4 5 6 7 f3 9 10 switch 10P connector terminal No. 1 and body
ground.
Terminal side of male terminals POWER SLIDING DOOR SWITCH 10P CONNECTOR
YES-Replace the power sliding door switch.■

NO-Replace the left power sliding door control unit.B
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
DRCL (WHT/BLK)

NO-Go to step 11.
9. Push and hold the close side of the left power sliding 12. Check for continuity between following terminals of
door switch for more than 3 seconds. the power sliding door switch 10P connector.
10. Check for DTCs with the HDS. No. 1 No. 7
No. 1 No. 8
Is D T C B 2 0 2 6 in d ic a t e d ? No. 1 No. 10
YES-Go to step 11. No. 9 No. 7
No. 9 No. 8
NO-lntermittent failure. The power sliding door No. 9 No. 10
connections at the left power sliding door control unit POWER SLIDING DOOR SWITCH 10P CONNECTOR
connectors, and at the power sliding door switch
connector.B
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
ground.
h-
<3
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
i £ r
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
SCOM
(GRN/WHT)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

YES-Replace the power sliding door switch.B
NO-Go to step 12.
DTC B2027: Left Power Sliding Door Remote 9. Unlock the child proof switch, then operate the left
power sliding door outside handle or inside handle to
Control Switch 1 Signal Error OPEN side for more than 3 seconds.
Test Mode A (see page 22-155). Is D T C B 2 0 2 7 in d ic a t e d ?
1. Clear the DTCs with the HDS. YES-Go to step 11.

2. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), and then back to NO-lntermittent failure. The power sliding door
ON (II). system is OK at this time. Check for loose or poor
connectors, and at the left power sliding door remote
4. Check for DTCs with the HDS. control switch connector.B
Is D T C B 2 0 2 7 in d ic a t e d ? 11. Check for continuity between left power sliding door

remote control switch 4P connector terminal No. 2
YES-Go to step 5. and body ground.
NO-Go to step 9.
5. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). LEFT REMOTE CONTROL SWITCH 4P CONNECTOR
6. Disconnect the 22P and 12P connectors from the left

power sliding door control unit.
7. Disconnect the 4P connector from the left power SCOM (GRN/WHT)
sliding door remote control switch (see page 22-604). 1 2
8. Check for continuity between left power sliding door 3 4
and body ground.
LEFT REMOTE CONTROL SWITCH 4P CONNECTOR

Wire si de of female terminals

NO-Go to step 12.
R/C1 (RED/WHT)

NO-Go to step 11.
12. Checkfor continuity between left power sliding door DTC B2028: Left Power Sliding Door Remote
remote control switch 4P connector terminals No. 2
Control Switch 2 Signal Error
LEFT REMOTE CONTROL SWITCH 4 P CONNECTOR
ON (II).
YES-Go to step 5.
Terminal side of male terminals NO-Go to step 9.

Is t h e r e c o n tin u it y ? 5. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
YES-Replace the left power sliding door remote 6. Disconnect the 22P and 12P connectors from the left
control switch.■ power sliding door control unit.
NO-Replace the left power sliding door control u n it.l 7. Disconnect the 4P connector from the left power
sliding door remote control switch (see page 22-604).
8. Check for continuity between left power sliding door
and body ground.
1 2
3 4
R/C2 (GRN/YEL

NO-Go to step 11.
9. Operate the left power sliding door inside handle to 12. Check for continuity between left power sliding door
CLOSE for more than 3 seconds. remote control switch 4P connector terminals No. 2
Is D T C B 2 0 2 8 in d ic a t e d ? LEFT R E M O T E C O N T R O L S W IT C H 4 P C O N N E C T O R
YES-Go to step 11.

SC O M
system is OK at this time. Check for loose or poor J (G R N /W H T )
connectors, and at the left power sliding door remote
control switch connector.B
R /C 2
(G R N /Y E L )
and body ground.
LEFT R E M O T E C O N T R O L SW IT C H 4 P C O N N E C T O R Terminal side of male terminals

YES-Replace the left power sliding door remote

control switch.■
S C O M (G R N /W H T )
1 2 NO-Replace the left power sliding door control unit.l
3 4

NO-Go to step 12.
DTC B2029: Left Power Sliding Door Remote 9. Lock the child proof switch, then operate the left
power sliding door inside handle to OPEN side for
more than 3 seconds.

connector, and at the left power sliding door remote
4. Check for DTCs with the HDS. control switch connector.B
Is D T C B 2 0 2 9 in d ic a t e d ? 11. Check for continuity between left power sliding door

NO-Go to step 9.
5. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). LEFT REMOTE CONTROL SWITCH 4P CONNECTOR
6. Disconnect the 22P and 12P connectors from the left

7. Disconnect the 4P connector from the left power SCOM (GRN/WHT)
8. Check for continuity between left power sliding door 3 4
and body ground.


R/C3 (ORN)
1 2 NO-Go to step 12.
3 4

NO-Go to step 11.
12. Check for continuity between left power sliding door DTC B203§: Left Power Sliding Door Pinch
Sensor Signal Error
LEFT R E M O T E C O N T R O L S W IT C H 4 P C O N N E C T O R
ON (II).
YES-Go to step 4.
Terminal side of male terminals connections at the left power sliding door control unit
Is th e r e c o n tin u ity ? connector, and at the left power sliding door pinch
sensor connector.B
YES-Replace the left power sliding door remote
control switch.■ 4. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
NO-Replace the left power sliding door control u n it.! 5. Disconnect the 2P connector from the left power
sliding door pinch sensor.
6. Measure the resistance between left power sliding
door pinch sensor 2P connector terminals No. 1 and
No. 2.
L E F T P IN C H S E N S O R 2 P C O N N E C T O R
T S E (B L U ) F G N D ( Y E L /B L U )
i— c g p — ]
r iH h
Is t h e r e 1 .1 k Q o r m o r e ?
YES-Replace the left power sliding door pinch

sensor.B
NO-Go to step 7.
7. Disconnect left power sliding door control unit 9. Check for continuity between left power sliding door
connector A (22P). control unit connector A (22P) terminal No. 19 and left
power sliding door pinch sensor 2P connector
terminal No. 2.
control unit connector A (22P) terminal No. 15 and left
power sliding door pinch sensor 2P connector LEFT POWER SLIDING DOOR CONTROL UNIT
terminal No. 1. CONNECTOR A (22P)
LEFT POWER SLIDING DOOR CONTROL UNIT

CONNECTOR A (22P) 1 2 / / 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
CM
o
12 13 14 15 16 / / 19 21 22
1 2 / / 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 Wire side of female terminals FGND (YEL/BLU)
12 13 14 15 16 / / 19 20 21 22
TSE (BLU) Wire side of female terminals
m i FGND (YEL/BLU)
LEFT PINCH SENSOR 2P CONNECTOR

TSE (BLU)
LEFT PINCH SENSOR 2P CONNECTOR Is th e r e c o n tin u ity ?
Is t h e r e c o n tin u ity ? unit.B
YES-Go to step 9. NO-Repair an open in the wire.B
DTC B2031: Left Power Slide Motor Pulse 11. Check for continuity between left power sliding door
(SLSE1) Signal Error power slide motor connector B (6P) terminal No. 4.
to follow the instructions in B-CAN System Diagnosis CONNECTOR A (22P)
1 2 7 8 9 10 11
ON (II).
12 13 14 15 16 19 20 21 22
2. Turn the power sliding door main switch OFF and
SLSE1 (RED/BLK)
close the left power sliding door from the Wire side of female terminals
fully-opened position.
4. Open the left power sliding door with the left power
Wire side of
sliding door switch. female terminals
SLSE1 (RED/BLK)
LEFT POWER SLIDE MOTOR CONNECTOR B (6P)
A r e D T C s B 2 0 3 1 a n d /o r B 2 0 3 2 in d ic a te d ?
YES-Go to step 7.
YES-Go to step 12.
NO-lntermittent failure, the power sliding door
system is OK at this time. Check for loose or poor NO-Repair an open in the wire.B
connectors, and at the left power slide motor 12. Check for continuity between left power sliding door
connectors.!! control unit connector A (22P) terminal No. 16 and
body ground.
Is o n ly D T C B 2 0 3 1 in d ic a t e d ? LEFT POWER SLIDING DOOR CONTROL UNIT
CONNECTOR A (22P)
YES-Go to step 8.
NO-Go to step 18.
1 2 / / 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
12 13 14 15 16 / / 19 20 21 22
SLSE1 (RED/BLK)
connector A (22P).
10. Disconnect left power slide motor connector B (6P).

NO-Go to step 13.
13. Reconnect left power sliding door control unit
connector A (22P).
15. Measure the voltage between left power sliding door 20. Disconnect left power slide motor connector B (6P).
control unit connector A (22P) terminals No. 1 6 (+ )
and No. 20 (—).
power slide motor connector B (6P) terminal No. 3.
CONNECTOR A (22P) LEFT POWER SLIDING DOOR CONTROL UNIT
CONNECTOR A (22P)
1 2 7 8 9 10 11
00
CM
1 / / 5 6 7 9 10 11
12 13 14 15 16 19 20 21 22 12 13 14 15 16 / / 19 20 21 22
SLSE1(+ ) SEGND(—) VREF (RED) Wire side of female terminals
(RED/BLK) (PNK/BLK)
_ _r
Wire side of female terminals 1 1=1 2
Wire side of
3 4 5 6 female terminals
Is t h e r e a b o u t 5 V ? inmi Li" U
YES-Go to step 16.

NO-Replace the left power sliding door control unit.l
16. Reconnect left power slide motor connector B (6P).
YES-Go to step 22.
17. While sliding the door slowly, measure the voltage
between left power sliding door control unit NO-Repair an open in the wire.B
connector A (22P) terminals No. 16 (+ ) and No. 20
CONNECTOR A (22P) LEFT POWER SLIDING DOOR CONTROL UNIT
CONNECTOR A (22P)
1 2 7 8 9 10 11 1 2 / / 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
12 13 14 15 16 19 20 21 22
CM
CM
12 13 14 15 16 / / 19 20 21
SLSE1 (+ ) SEGND( - ) Wire side of female terminals SEGND
(RED/BLK) (PNK/BLK) (PNK/BLK)
Wire side of female terminals 1 _J=L 2 Wire side of

female terminals
3 4 5 6
D o e s it a lte r n a te b e t w e e n a b o u t 0 V a n d 5 V ? N O T E :
i ---L SEGND
SEi (PNK/BLK)
D ig it a l v o ltm e te r w ill r e a d a b o u t 2 . 5 V .
unit.B
NO-Replace the left power slide motor assembly.l
YES-Go to step 23.
connector A (22P).
(cont'd)
23. Reconnect left power sliding door control unit DTC B2032: Left Power Slide Motor Pulse
connector A (22P).
(SLSE2) Signal Error
25. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). to follow the instructions in B-CAN System Diagnosis
26. Measure the voltage between left power slide motor
connector B (6P) terminals No. 3 (+ ) and No. 6 (—). 1. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), and then back to
ON (II).
L E F T P O W E R S L ID E M O T O R C O N N E C T O R B (6P) 2. Turn the power sliding door main switch OFF and
close the left power sliding door.
JE3. 4. Open the left power sliding door with the left power
4 5 6 sliding door switch.
VREF(+ ) SEGND( - ) 5. Clear the DTCs with the HDS.
(R E D ) (PNK/BLK)
— © —
A r e D T C s B 2 0 3 1 a n d /o r B 2 0 3 2 in d ic a t e d ?
Wire side of female terminals YES-Go to step 7.

Is th e r e a b o u t b a t t e r y v o lta g e ? system is OK at this time. Check for loose or poor
YES-Replace the left power slide motor assembly.! connectors, and at the left power slide motor
NO-Replace the left power sliding door control unit.l connectors.!
is o n ly D T C B 2 0 3 2 in d ic a t e d ?
YES-Go to step 8.
NO-Go to step 18.
connector A (22P).
11. Check for continuity between left power sliding door 15. Measure the voltage between left power sliding door
control unit connector A (22P) terminal No. 8 and left control unit connector A (22P) terminals No. 8 (+ ) and
power slide motor connector B (6P) terminal No. 5. No. 20 (■—).
LEFT POWER SLIDING DOOR CONTROL UNIT LEFT POWER SLIDING DOOR CONTROL UNIT
CONNECTOR A (22P) CONNECTOR A (22P)
SLSE2 (LT GlRN/BLK)
SLSE2 (+) (LT GRN/EILK)
1 2 / / 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
12 13 14 15 16 / / 19 20 21 22 1 2 / / 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
Wire side of female terminals 12 13 14 15 16 / / 19 20 21 22
i
SEGND ( - ) (PNK/BLK)
JE=L
SLSE2 (LT GRN/BLK)

LEFT POWER SLIDE MOTOR CONNECTOR B (6P) is th e r e a b o u t 5 V ?
YES-Go to step 16.
YES-Go to step 12.
12. Check for continuity between left power sliding door between left power sliding door control unit
control unit connector A (22P) terminal No. 8 and connector A (22P) terminals No. 8 ( + ) and No. 20 (—).
body ground.
CONNECTOR A (22P)
CONNECTOR A (22P) SLSE2 (+) (LT GRN/BLK)
SLSE2 (LT GRN/BILK)
1 2 / / 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
1 2 / / 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 CM
12 13 14 15 16 / I / 19 20 21 CM
1
CM
o
CM
CM
12 13 14 15 16 / / 19 21 SEGND ( - ) (PNK/BLK)

D o e s it a lte r n a t e b e t w e e n a b o u t 0 V a n d 5 V ?
Is t h e r e c o n t in u it y ? N O T E : D ig it a l v o ltm e te r w ill r e a d a b o u t 2 . 5 V .
YES-Repair a short to ground in the wire.B YES-Replace the left power sliding door control
unit.B
NO-Go to step 13.
NO-Replace the left power slide motor assembly.B
13. Reconnect left power sliding door control unit
connector A (22P). 18. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
connector A (22P).
(cont'd)
20. Disconnect left power slide motor connector B (6P). 23. Reconnect left power sliding door control unit
connector A (22P).
control unit connector A (22P) terminal No. 13 and left 24. Reconnect left power slide motor connector B (6P).
LEFT POWER SLIDING DOOR CONTROL UNIT 26. Measure the voltage between left power slide motor
CONNECTOR A (22P)
connector B (6P) terminals No. 3 (+ ) and No. 6 (—).
1 2 / / 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
12 13 14 15 16 / / > 19 20 21 22
VREF (RED) Wire side of female terminals
VREF(+ ) SEGND( - )
£E=L Wire side of (RED) (PNK/BLK)
female terminals
VREF (RED)
LEFT POWER SLIDE MOTOR CONNECTOR B (6P) Wire side of female terminals
YES-Go to step 22.
YES-Replace the left power slide motor assembly.!

CONNECTOR A (22P)
1 2 / / 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
12 13 14 15 16 / / 19 20 21 22
Wire side of female terminals SEGND
(PNK/BLK)
__
Wire side of 1 .1 = 1 . 2
female terminals
3 4 5 6
— --- L SEGND
SE (PNK/BLK)
LEFT POWER SLIDE MOTOR CONNECTOR B (iP)

D T C B 2 0 3 3 : L eft P o w e r S lid e M o to r C irc u it 10. Do the left power slide motor test (see page 22-603).
M a lfu n c tio n Is th e m o to r O K ?
NOTE: If you are troubleshooting multiple DTCs, be sure YES-Replace the left power sliding door control
to follow the instructions in B-CAN System Diagnosis unit.B
NO-Replace the left power slide motor assembly.®
ON (II).
3. Operate the open side of the left power sliding door
switch four or more times.
4. Clearthe DTCs with the HDS.
YES-Go to step 6.
connectors, and at the left power slide motor
connectors.!
connector C (5P).
8. Disconnect the 2P connector from the left power slide
motor assembly.
control unit connector C (5P) terminals No. 3 and No. 5
and body ground individually.

CONNECTOR C(5P)

NO-Go to step 10.
DTC B2034: Left Power Slide Motor 9. Check for continuity between left power sliding door
Electromagnetic Clutch Circuit Malfunction
NOTE: If you are troubleshooting multiple DTCs, be sure LEFT POWER SLIDING DOOR CONTROL UNIT
to follow the instructions in B-CAN System Diagnosis CONNECTOR A (22P)
Test Mode A (see page 22-155). E /C + (RED/BLU)
1 2 7 8 9 10 11
ON (II).
12 13 14 15 16 19 20 21 22
E /C + (RED/BLU)
pj_ __ r
5. Check for DTCs with the HDS. 1 _ F = L 2 Wire side of
female terminals
3 4 5 6
Is D T C B 2 0 3 4 i n d ic a t e d ? y --- L
YES-Go to step 6.
NO-lntermittent failure, the power sliding door LEFT POWER SLIDE MOTOR CONNECTOR B (6P)
connectors, and at the left power slide motor YES-Go to step 10.
connectors.il
7. Disconnect left power sliding door control unit control unit connector A (22P) terminal No. 22 and left
connector A (22P). power slide motor connector B (6P) terminal No. 2.
CONNECTOR A (22P)
1 2 / / 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
12 13 14 15 16 / / 19 20 21 22
E /C -(L T BLU)
JEE-L E /C - (LT BLU)

Wire side of
female terminals
YES-Go to step 11.

11. Check for continuity between left power sliding door 13. At the motor side, check for continuity between left
control unit connector A (22P) terminals No. 10 and power slide motor connector B (6P) terminals No. 1
No. 22 and body ground individually. and No. 2.

CONNECTOR A (22P)
E/C + r @ — i E/C -
1 F=l. 2
3 4 5 6
J ----- Ll
nrzr
Is t h e r e c o n tin u it y ? Is th e r e c o n tin u ity ?
YES-Repair a short to ground in the wire.B YES-Replace the left power sliding door control
u n itB
NO-Go to step 12.
NO-Replace the left power slide motor assembly.l
12. At the motor side, check for continuity between left
power slide motor connector B (6P) terminals No. 1

E/C + E/C -
1 F=l 2
3 4 5 6
J ..... L
T5TZT
YES-Replace the left power slide motor assembly.l

NO-Go to step 13.
DTC B203U: Left Power Sliding Door Naif Latch 9. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
Switch Circuit Short 10. Disconnect the 6P connector from the left power
sliding door rear latch assembly.
to follow the instructions in B-CAN System Diagnosis 11. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
12. Check the ON/OFF information of the power sliding
1. Clear the DTCs with the HDS. door L. Half Latch Switch in the DATA LIST.
2. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), and then back to Is t h e in f o r m a t io n in d ic a t o r O F F ?
ON (II).
YES-Replace the left power sliding door rear latch
3. Turn the power sliding door main switch ON. assembly.®
4. Close the left power sliding door. NO-Go to step 13.
5. Open the left power sliding door fully with the left 13. Disconnect left power sliding door control unit
power sliding door switch. connector B (12P).
6. Check for DTCs with the HDS. 14. Checkfor continuity between left power sliding door
control unit connector B (12P) terminal No. 3 and
body ground.
YES-Go to step 7.
NO-lntermittent failure, the power sliding door LEFT POWER SLIDING DOOR CONTROL UNIT
system is OK at this time. Check for loose or poor CONNECTOR B (12P)
connections at the left power sliding door control unit H/L (YEL/GRN)
connector, and at the left power sliding door rear latch
assembly connectors.® 1 2 3 4 5 6
7. With the door open, select POWER SLIDING DOOR 7 8 9 10 11 /
with the HDS, and enter the DATA LIST.
8. Check the ON/OFF information of the power sliding <g>
door L. Half Latch Switch in the DATA LIST.
Is th e in f o r m a t io n in d ic a t o r O F F ?
unit.ll
NO-Go to step 9.
YES-Repair a short to ground in the wire.®
NO-Replace the left power sliding door control unit.®
DTC B2036: Left Power Sliding Door Full Latch 9. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
NOTE: If you are troubleshooting multiple DTCs, be sure sliding door rear latch assembly.
1. Clear the DTCs with the HDS. door L. Full Latch Switch in the DATA LIST.
2. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), and then back to Is t h e in fo r m a tio n in d ic a t o r O F F ?
ON (II).
6. Check for DTCs with the HDS. 14. Check for continuity between left power sliding door
body ground.
YES-Go to step 7.
connections at the left power sliding door control unit F/L (GRN/BLK) f
assembly connectors.® 1 2 3 4 5 6
7. With the door open, select POWER SLIDING DOOR 7 8 9 10 11 /
from the HDS, and enter the DATA LIST.
door L. Full Latch Switch in the DATA LIST.
Is th e in fo r m a t io n in d ic a t o r O F F ?
unit.®
NO-Go to step 9.
YES-Repair a short to ground in the wire.®
DTC B2037: Left Power Sliding Door Ratchet 9. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
NOTE: If you are troubleshooting multiple DTCs, be sure sliding door rear latch assembly.
1. Clear the DTCs with the HDS. door L. Ratchet Switch in the DATA LIST.
2. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), and then back to Is t h e in fo r m a t io n in d ic a t o r O F F ?
ON (II).
6. Check for DTCs with the HDS. 14. Check for continuity between left power sliding door
body ground.
YES-Go to step 7.
1 2 3 4 5 6
assembly connectors.®
7 8 9 10 11 /
7. With the door open, select POWER SLIDING DOOR L/P (BLU/RED)
8. Check the ON/OFF information of the power sliding (g )
door L. Ratchet Switch in the DATA LIST.
Is t h e in f o r m a t io n in d ic a t o r O F F ? Wire side of female terminals

unit.® is th e r e c o n tin u ity ?
NO-Go to step 9. YES-Repair a short to ground in the wire.®

DTC B2038: Left Power Sliding Door Base 10. Disconnect left power sliding door control unit
connector B (12P).
Position Switch Circuit Open/Short
body ground.
1. Clear the DTCs with the HDS. LEFT POWER SLIDING DOOR CONTROL UNIT
CONNECTOR B (12P)
3. Turn the power sliding door main switch ON. CLMP (BLU/YEL)
4. Open and close the left power sliding door three times 1 2 3 4 5 6
with the left power sliding door switch. 7 8 9 10 11 /
YES-Go to step 6.
NO-lntermittent failure, the power sliding door Wire side of female terminals
assembly connectors.! YES-Repair a short to ground in the wire.B
6. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). NO-Go to step 12.
7. Disconnect the 6P connector from the left power 12. Disconnect left power sliding door control unit
sliding door rear latch assembly. connector A (22P).
8. Open the left power sliding door to the half-latched 13. Using a jumper wire, connect left power sliding door
position. rear latch assembly connector (6P) terminals No. 5
and No. 6.
rear latch assembly 6P connector terminals No. 5 and
No. 6.
LEFT POWER SLIDING DOOR REAR LATCH
ASSEMBLY 6P CONNECTOR
LEFT POWER SLIDING DOOR REAR LATCH

A n. n
fii 2 3 jj]
JO. n.x [4 5 6J
rfl 2 3f) F 1-3 q
k 5 6J FGND CLMP
S'"
JUMPER WIRE
FGND CLMP
Y .
Terminal side of ma Ie terminals

assembly.®
14. Check for continuity between left power sliding door 18. Measure the voltage between left power sliding door
control unit connector A (22P) terminal No. 19 and left control unit connector A (22P) terminal No. 19 and left
power sliding door control unit connector B (12P) power sliding door control unit connector B (12P)
terminal No. 5. terminal No. 5.
1 2 / / 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 1 2 / / 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
CM
o
CM
CM
12 13 14 15 16 / / 19 21
CM
o
CM
12 13 14 15 16 / / 19 21 CM
Wire side of female terminals FGND (YEL/BLU) Wire side of female terminals | FGND (YEL/BLU)
CLMP (BLU/YEL) CLMP (BLU/YEL)
1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6
7 8 9 10 11 / 7 8 9 10 11 /
CONNECTOR B (12P) CONNECTOR B(12P)
Is th e r e c o n tin u ity ? Is t h e r e b a t t e r y v o lta g e ?
YES-Go to step 15. YES-Replace the left power sliding door rear latch
assembly.B
NO-Repair an open in the BLU/YEL or YEL/BLU
wire.B NO-Replace the left power sliding door control u n itB
15. Remove the jumper wire.

16. Reconnect all connectors to the left power sliding
door control unit.
DTC B2033: L e f t P o w e r S l i d i n g D o o r S w i t c h 6. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
O p e n /C lo se S ig n al In p u t E rro r (In p u t a t th e 7. Remove the power sliding door switch (see page
s a m e tim e ) 22-602), and disconnect its 10P connector.
NOTE: 8. With the switch OFF, check for continuity between the
• If you are troubleshooting multiple DTCs, be sure to following terminals of the power sliding door switch.
follow the instructions in B-CAN System Diagnosis No. 1 o No. 2
Test Mode A (see page 22-155). No. 1 o No. 9
• If DTC B2025 and/or B2026 is indicated at the same No. 2 o No. 9
time, troubleshoot DTC B2025 and/or B2026 first.
ON (II).
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
YES-Go to step 6.
connector, and at the power sliding door switch
connector.B 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
YES-Replace the power sliding door switch.l

NO-Go to step 9.
9. Disconnect left power sliding door control unit D T C B 2 0 4 0 : L eft P o w e r S lid e M o to r

connector A (22P). M a lfu n c tio n
10. Check for continuity between power sliding door NOTE: If you are troubleshooting multiple DTCs, be sure
switch 10P connector terminals No. 1 and No. 2. to follow the instructions in B-CAN System Diagnosis
P O W E R S L ID IN G D O O R S W IT C H 10P C O N N E C T O R 1. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), and then back to
ON (II).
is D T C B 2 0 4 0 in d ic a t e d ?
YES-Go to step 6.
Is t h e r e c o n t in u it y ? system is OK at this time. Check for loose or poor
YES-Repair a short to ground in the wire.B connections at the left power sliding door control unit
connector, and at the left power slide motor
NO-Replace the left power sliding door control unit.) connector.B
6. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 10. Measure the voltage between left power sliding door
control unit connector C (5P) terminal No. 2 and
7. Check the No. 2 fuse in the auxiliary under-hood fuse
connector A (22P) terminal No. 11 while using the
box.
power sliding door switch to open or close the door.
8. Remove the left power sliding door control unit (see LEFT POWER SLIDING DOOR CONTROL
page 22-598). After removal, connect the connectors UNIT CONNECTOR A (22P)
to the control unit.
9. Measure the voltage between left power sliding door J B U (WHT/RED)
control unit connector C (5P) terminal No. 1 and body
ground while using the power sliding door switch to
1 2 / / 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
CM
o
open or close the door.
12 13 14 15 16 / / 19 21 22

CONNECTOR C(5P)
VMP1 (WHT/BLK)
H P G 1 (BRN)
_r
1 n 2
1 m 2
3 4 5
3 4 5
LEFT POWER SLIDING DOOR CONTROL
UNIT CONNECTOR C (5P)
x Wire side of female terminals
Is t h e r e le s s th a n 0 . 2 V ?

Wire side of female terminals unit.B
NO-Repair an open or high resistance in the wire
Is t h e r e le s s t h a n 0 . 2 V ? between the No. 2 fuse in the auxiliary under-hood
fuse box and the power sliding door control unit. Ifthe
YES-Go to step 10.
wire is OK, check terminal No. 2 of connector C.B
NO-Repair an open or increased resistance in the
wire between power sliding door control unit
connector C (5P) terminal No. 1 and body ground. If
the wire is OK, check G603 and terminal No. 1 of
connector C.B
DTC B2041: Left Power Slide Motor Pulses 10. Check for continuity between left power sliding door
control unit connector A (22P) terminals No. 8 and
(SLSE1/SLSE2) Error
No. 16.
to follow the instructions in B-CAN System Diagnosis LEFT POWER SLIDING DOOR CONTROL UNIT
Test Mode A (see page 22-155). CONNECTOR A (22P)
1. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), and then back to SLSE2 (LT GRN/BLK)
ON (II).
1 2 7 8 9 10 11
2. Turn the power sliding door main switch OFF, then
close the left power sliding door from the 12 13 14 15 16 19 20 21 22
fully-opened position. SLSEl (RED/BLK)

4. Open the left power sliding door with the left power
sliding door switch. Wire side of female terminals
6. Check for DTCs with the HDS. Is t h e r e c o n tin u it y ?
Is D T C B 2 0 4 1 in d ic a t e d ? YES-Repair a short to ground in the wire.B
YES-Go to step 7. NO-Go to step 11.
NO-lntermittent failure, the power sliding door 11. At the motor side, check for continuity between left
system is OK at this time. Check for loose or poor power slide motor connector B (6P) terminals No. 4
connections at the left power sliding door control unit and No. 5.
connectors.!
connector A (22P).
&
9. Disconnect left power slide motor connector B (6P). 4 5
E U
SLSEl SLSE2
(RED/BLK) (LT GRN/BLK)
YES-Replace the left power slide motor assembly.l

DTC B2052: R i g h t P o w e r S l i d i n g D o o r C o n t r o l DTCB2055: R i g h t P o w e r S l i d i n g D o o r C o n t r o l
U n it E E P R O M E rro r U n it L o s t C o m m u n ic a tio n W ith M IC U
1. Disconnect the battery negative cable and wait for 10 1. Clear the DTCs with the HDS.
seconds, then reconnect it.
O N (II).
YES-Go to step 4.
YES-Replace the right power sliding door control
NO-lntermittent failure. The right power sliding door
unit.B
NO-lntermittent failure. The system is OK atthis time. connections at the right power sliding door system
Check for loose or poor connections at the right connector, and at the MICU connector.B
power sliding door control unit.B
A re D T C s B 1 0 5 5 , B 1 1 0 6 ,B 1 1 5 7 , B 1 2 5 5 , B 1 3 5 5 , B 1 5 5 6 ,
B 1 8 0 6 , B 1 9 5 5 , a n d /o r B 2 0 0 5 a ls o in d ic a te d ?
YES-Go to step 7.
NO-Go to step 5.
6. Do the right power sliding door control unit input test
(see page 22-598).
Is t h e in p u t t e s t O K ?

unit.B
NO-Refer to the right power sliding door control unit
input test and correct the cause.B
8. Do the MICU input test (see page 22-185).
Is th e in p u t te s t O K ?

fuse/relay box.B
NO-Refer to the MICU input test and correct the
cause.B
DTC B2058: Right Power Sliding Door Control DTC 82059“ Right Power Sliding Door Control
Unit Lost Communication With MICU Unit Lost Communication With Left Power
(AS LOCKSW Message) Sliding Door Control Unit (PSD Message)
ON (II). ON (II).
A r e D T C s B 1 3 5 8 , B 2 0 0 8 , a n d B 2 0 5 8 in d ic a te d ? Is D T C B 2 0 5 9 in d ic a t e d ?
YES-Go to MICU input test (see page 22-185).H YES-Go to right power sliding door control unit input
NO-Go to right power sliding door control unit input
test (see page 22-598).H NO-Go to left power sliding door control unit input
D T C B 2 0 6 0 : R ig h t P o w e r S lid in g D o o r C o n tro l D T C B2061: R i g h t P o w e r S l i d i n g D o o r C o n t r o l
U n it L o st C o m m u n ic a tio n W ith G a u g e C o n tro l U n it L o st C o m m u n ic a tio n W ith G a u g e C o n tro l
M o d u le (V S P /N E M e s s a g e ) M o d u l e (A /T M e s s a g e )
1. Clear DTCs with the HDS. 1. Clear the DTCs with the HDS.
ON (II). ON (II).
A re D T C s B 1 0 6 0 , B 1 2 0 5 , B 1 3 5 7 , B 1 8 0 5 , B 2 0 1 0 , a n d A re D T C s B 1 0 0 8 , B 1 0 6 1 , B 1 8 0 1 , B 1 9 5 6 , B 2 0 1 1 , a n d
B 2 0 6 0 in d ic a te d ? B 2 0 6 1 in d ic a t e d ?
22-189).! 22-189).!
NO-Go to right power sliding door control unit input NO-Go to right power sliding door control unit input
test (see page 22-598).! test (see page 22-598).!
DTC B207S: Right Power Sliding Door Switch 9. Push and hold the open side of the right power sliding
door switch for more than 3 seconds,
(Open Side) Signal Error
NOTE’ If you are troubleshooting multiple DTCs, be sure
to follow the instructions in B-CAN System Diagnosis Is D T C B 2 0 7 5 in d ic a t e d ?
YES-Go to step 11.
2. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), and then back to system is OK at this time. Check for loose or poor
ON (II). connections at the right power sliding door control
unit connector, and at the power sliding door switch
connector.B
Is D T C B 2 0 7 5 in d ic a t e d ? switch 10P connector terminal No. 8 and body
ground.
YES-Go to step 5.
NO-Go to step 9.
6. Disconnect right power sliding door control unit
connector A (22P).
22-602), and disconnect the 10P connector from the 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
switch. SCOM (LT GRN)

ground.
POWER SLIDING DOOR SWITCH 10P CONNECTOR Is th e r e c o n tin u ity ?

NO-Go to step 12.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
DROP (PNK)
YES-Repair a short to ground in the w ir e .l

NO-Go to step 11.
12. Check for continuity between following terminals of DTC B2076: R i g h t P o w e r S l i d i n g D o o r S w i t c h
the power sliding door switch 10P connector.
(C lo se S id e ) S ig n a l E rro r
No. 4 No. 7
No. 4 No. 9 NOTE: If you are troubleshooting multiple DTCs, be sure
No. 4 O No. 10 to follow the instructions in B-CAN System Diagnosis
No. 8 O No. 7 Test Mode A (see page 22-155).
No. 8 O No. 9 1. Clear the DTCs with the HDS.
No. 8 No. 10
POWER SLIDING DOOR SWITCH 10P CONNECTOR ON (II).

I— © i
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
YES-Go to step 5.
NO-Go to step 9.
------- \ ^ r ~ -
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 6. Disconnect right power sliding door control unit
connector A (22P).
22-602), and disconnect the 10P connector from the
— switch.
1 2 3 L 5 6 7 8 9 10 switch 10P connector terminal No. 3 and body
ground.
q ?
YES-Replace the power sliding door switch.■

NO-Replace the right power sliding door control
unit.H
CD
00
CD
CM
CO
1 4 5 7 10
DRCL (RED/WHT)

NO-Go to step 11.
9. Push and hold the open side of the right power sliding 12. Check for continuity between following terminals of
door switch for more than 3 seconds. the power sliding door switch 10P connector.
10. Checkfor DTCs with the HDS. 3 No. 7
o
z
<->
z
z z z z z
3 9
o
o o o o o
Is D T C B 2 0 2 6 in d ic a t e d ? 3 <-> No. 10
<->
z z z
8 7
o o o
YES-Go to step 11.
8 o 9
NO-lntermittent failure. The power sliding door 8 10
connections at the right power sliding door control P O W E R S L ID IN G D O O R S W IT C H 10P C O N N E C T O R
unit connector, and at the power sliding door switch
connector.B
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
ground.
L©*
P O W E R S L ID IN G D O O R S W IT C H 10P C O N N E C T O R ------- -----------------
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
z s r iY
H
00
CM
1 4 5 6 7 9 10
SCOM (LT G R N ) ...... ^
© 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

YES-Replace the power sliding door switch.B
NO-Go to step 12.
unit.B
D T C B 2 0 7 7 : R ig h t P o w e r S lid in g D o o r R e m o te 9. Unlock the child proof switch, then operate the right
power sliding door outside handle or inside handle to
C o n tro l S w itc h 1 S ig n a l E rro r
OPEN side for more than 3 seconds.

connections at the right power sliding door control
unit connector, and at the right power sliding door
4. Check for DTCs with the HDS. remote control switch connector.B
Is D T C B 2 0 7 7 in d ic a t e d ? 11. Check for continuity between right power sliding door

NO-Go to step 9.
RIGHT REMOTE CONTROL SWITCH 4P CONNECTOR
6. Disconnect the 22P and 12P connectors from the right
7. Disconnect the 4P connector from the right power SCOM (GRN/WHT)
sliding door remote controf switch (see page 22-604). 1 2
8. Check for continuity between right power sliding door 3 4
and body ground.


3 4
R/Cl (RED/WHT) I

NO-Go to step 11.
12. Check for continuity between right power sliding door DTC B2078: Right Power Sliding Door Remote
R/C1 (GRN/WHT)
1 ? ON (II).
(RED/WHT)
3 4 3. Turn the power sliding door main switch ON.
YES-Go to step 5.
NO-Go to step 9.
Is t h e r e c o n t in u ity ? 5. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
YES-Replace the right power sliding door remote 6. Disconnect the 22P and 12P connectors from the right
control switch.■ power sliding door control unit.
NO-Replace the right power sliding door control 7. Disconnect the 4P connector from the right power
unit.H sliding door remote control switch (see page 22-604).
8. Check for continuity between right power sliding door
and body ground.
R/C2 (GRN/YEL)

NO-Go to step 11.
9. Operate the right power sliding door inside handle to 12. Checkfor continuity between right power sliding door
CLOSE side for more than 3 seconds. remote control switch 4P connector terminals No. 2
YES-Go to step 11.
_ SCOM
system is OK at this time. Check for loose or poor j (GRN/WHT)
connections at the right power sliding door control 1 ?
unit connector, and at the right power sliding door 3 4
remote control switch connector.B
R/C2 (GRN/YEL)
remote control switch 4P connector terminal No. 2 («) (H)
and body ground.
RIGHT REMOTE CONTROL SWITCH 4P CONNECTOR Is t h e r e c o n t in u ity ?
YES-Replace the right power sliding door remote

control switch.!
SCOM (GRN/WHT)
1 2 NO-Replace the right power sliding door control
3 4 unit.B
is t h e r e c o n tin u ity ?

NO-Go to step 12.
DTC B2079: Right Power Sliding Door Remote 9. Lock the child proof switch, then operate the right
power sliding door inside handle to OPEN for more
than 3 seconds.

unit connector, and at the right power sliding door
4. Check for DTCs with the HDS. remote control switch connector.B
Is D T C B 2 0 7 9 in d ic a t e d ? 11. Check for continuity between right power sliding door

NO-Go to step 9.
6. Disconnect the 22P and 12P connectors from the right
7. Disconnect the 4P connector from the right power SCOM (GRN/WHT)
8. Check for continuity between right power sliding door 3 4
and body ground.
RIGHT REMOTE CONTROL SWITCH 4P CONNECTOR Wire side of female terminals

R/C3 (GRN)
3 4

NO-Go to step 11.
12. Checkfor continuity between right power sliding door D T C B 2 0 8 0 : R ig h t P o w e r S lid in g D o o r P in c h
S e n s o r S ig n a l E rro r
RIGHT REMOTE CONTROL SWITCH 4P CONNECTOR Test Mode A (see page 22-155).
R/C3 ,----B ---- SCOM 2. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), and then back to
(GRN) Lh.VToTJ (GRN/WHT)
1 ? ON (II).
3 4 3. Check for the DTCs with the HDS.
YES-Go to step 4.
Terminal side of male terminals system is OK at this time. Check for loose or poor
Is th e r e c o n tin u ity ? unit connectors, and at the right power sliding door
pinch sensor connector.B
YES-Replace the right power sliding door remote
control switch.■ 4. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
NO-Replace the right power sliding door control 5. Disconnect the 2P connector from the right power
unit.B sliding door pinch sensor.
6. Measure the resistance between right power sliding
door pinch sensor 2P connector terminals No. 1 and
No. 2.
RIGHT PINCH SENSOR 2P CONNECTOR
Is t h e r e 1 .1 k Q o r m o r e ?
YES-Replace the right power sliding door pinch

sensor.B
NO-Go to step 7.
connector A (22P).
(cont'd)
8. Check for continuity between right power sliding door 9. Check for continuity between right power sliding door
control unit connector A (22P) terminal No. 15 and the control unit connector A (22P) terminal No. 19 and the
right power sliding door pinch sensor 2P connector right power sliding door pinch sensor 2P connector
terminal No. 1. terminal No. 2.
RIGHT POWER SLIDING DOOR CONTROL UNIT RIGHT POWER SLIDING DOOR CONTROL UNIT
CONNECTOR A C22P1 CONNECTORA (22P)
1 2 / / 5 6 7 / 9 10 11 1 2 / / 5 6 7 / 9 10 11
CM
CM
o
CM
CM
CM
CM
o
12 13 14 15 16 17 / 19 21 12 13 14 15 16 17 / 19 21
TSE (BLU) FGND (YEL/BLU)
u r n
TSE (BLU) FGND (YEL/BLU)

Is t h e r e c o n tin u ity ? Is t h e r e c o n t in u ity ?
YES-Go to step 9. YES-Replace the right power sliding door control

unit.B
D T C B 2 0 8 1 : R ig h t P o w e r S lid e M o to r P u ls e 11. Check for continuity between right power sliding door
control unit connector A (22P) terminal No. 16 and
(S L S E 1) S ig n a l E rro r
right power slide motor connector B (6P) terminal
NOTE: If you are troubleshooting multiple DTCs, be sure No. 5.
Test Mode A (see page 22-155). RIGHT POWER SLIDING DOOR CONTROL UNIT
CONNECTOR A (22P)
ON (II).
1 2 / / 5 6 7 / 9 10 11
2. Turn the power sliding door main switch OFF and 12 13 14 15 16 17 / 19 20 21 22
close the right power sliding door from the
SLSE1 (RED/BLK) Wire side of female tem
fully-opened position.
4. Open the right power sliding door with the right
power sliding door switch.
4 5
6. Check for DTCs with the HDS. SLSEl (RED/BLK)
A r e D T C s B 2 0 8 1 a n d /o r B 2 0 8 2 in d ic a t e d ? RIGHT POWER SLIDE MOTOR CONNECTOR B (6P)
YES-Go to step 7.
YES-Go to step 12.
connections at the right power sliding door control NO-Repair an open in the wire.B
unit connectors, and at the right power slide motor
connectors.® 12. Check for continuity between right power sliding door
7. Check for DTCs with the HDS. body ground.
Is o n ly D T C B 2 0 8 1 in d ic a t e d ?
YES-Go to step 8. CONNECTOR A (22P)
NO-Go to step 18.
1 2 / / 5 6 7 / 9 10 11
CM
o
CM
CM
12 13 14 15 16 17 / 19 21
connector A (22P).
SLSEl (RED/BLK)
10. Disconnect right power slide motor connector B (6P).

NO-Go to step 13.
13. Reconnect right power sliding door control unit
connector A (22P).
(cont'd)
15. Measure the voltage between right power sliding 18. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
door control unit connector A (22P) terminals No. 16
(+ ) and No. 20 ( —).
connector A (22P).
R IG H T P O W E R S L ID I N G D O O R C O N T R O L U N IT
C O N N E C T O R A (2 2 P )
10 11 No. 3.
13 14 15 16 17 19 20 21 22
R IG H T P O W E R S L ID IN G D O O R C O N T R O L U N I T
SLSEl SEGND C O N N E C T O R A (2 2 P )
( R E D /B L K ) ( P N K /B L K )
1 2 / / 5 6 7 / 9 10 11
CM
o
12 13 14 15 16 17 / 19 21 22
Wire side of female terminals V R E F (R E D )
Is th e r e a b o u t 5 V ?
__ n
YES-Go to step 16.
Y ...F = L 2
NO-Replace the right power sliding door control 3 4 5 6
unit.B 1ED1 j— —u
16. Reconnect right power slide motor connector B (6P).
R IG H T P O W E R S L ID E M O T O R C O N N E C T O R B (6 P )
17. While sliding the door slowly, measure the voltage Wire side of female terminals
between right power sliding door control unit
connector A (22P) terminals No. 16 (+ ) and No. 20 Is t h e r e c o n tin u it y ?
(-).
YES-Go to step 22.
R IG H T P O W E R S L ID IN G D O O R C O N T R O L U N IT
C O N N E C T O R A (2 2 P )
_1_ 10 11_
12 13 14 15 16 17 19 20 21 22
SLSE1 SEGND
( R E D /B L K ) ( P N K /B L K )
D o e s it a lte r n a t e b e t w e e n a b o u t 0 V o r 5 V ?
NOTE: Digital voltmeter will read about 2.5 V.

unit.B
NO-Replace the right power slide motor assembly.B
F
■
l
BODY ■
22. Check for continuity between right power sliding door 23. Reconnect right power sliding door control unit
control unit connector A (22P) terminal No. 20 and connector A (22P).
No. 6.
CONNECTOR A (22P) 26. Measure the voltage between right power slide motor
connector B (6P) terminals No. 3 (+ ) and No. 6 (—).
1 2 / / 5 6 7 / 9 10 11
CM
CM
12 13 14 15 16 17 / 19 20 21 RIGHT POWER SLIDE MOTOR CONNECTOR B (6P)
Wire side of female terminals SEGND
(PNK/BLK)
J==L
T__ _j-
1 1=1 2
3 4 5 6 VREF SEGND
—1 LJ SEGND
SE (PNK/BLK) (PNK/BLK)
(RED)
RIGHT POWER SLIDE MOTOR CONNECTOR B (6P)
YES-Go to step 23.
YES-Replace the right power slide motor assembly.l
unit.B
DTC B2082: Right Power Slide Motor Pulse 11. Check for continuity between right power sliding door
(SLSE2) Signal Error right power slide motor connector B (6P) terminal
NOTE: If you are troubleshooting multiple DTCs, be sure No. 4.
Test Mode A (see page 22-155). RIGHT POWER SLIDING DOOR CONTROL UNIT
CONNECTOR A (22P)
ON (II). 9 10 11
1 2
2. Turn the power sliding door main switch OFF and 12 13 14 15 16 17 / 19 20 21 22
close the right power sliding door.
Wire side of SLSE2(LT GRN/BLK)
3. Turn the power sliding door main switch ON. female terminals

J==L
4 5
6. Check for DTCs with the HDS. SLSE2 (LT GRN/BLK)
A r e D T C s B 2 0 8 1 a n d /o r B 2 0 8 2 in d ic a te d ?
NO-lntermittent failure, the power sliding door Is t h e r e c o n tin u ity ?

YES-Go to step 12.
unit connectors, and at the right power slide motor NO-Repair an open in the wire.B
eonnectors.il
7. Check for DTCs with the HDS. control unit connector A (22P) terminal No. 17 and
body ground.
Is o n ly D T C B 2 0 8 2 in d ic a t e d ?
YES-Go to step 8.
NO-Go to step 18. CONNECTOR A (22P)

9. Disconnect right power sliding door control unit 1 2 / / 5 6 7 / 9 10 11
connector A (22P).
o
CM
12 13 14 15 16 17 / 19 21 22
10. Disconnect right power slide motor connector B (6P). SLSE2(LT GRN/BLK)

NO-Go to step 13.
13. Reconnect right power sliding door control unit
connector A (22P).
15. Measure the voltage between right power sliding 21. Check for continuity between right power sliding door
door control unit connector A (22P) terminals No. 17 control unit connector A (22P) terminal No. 13 and
(+ ) and No. 20 ( —). right power slide motor connector B (6P) terminal
No. 3.
RIGHT POWER SLIDING DOOR CONTROL UNIT RIGHT POWER SLIDING DOOR CONTROL UNIT
1 2 / / 5 6 7 / 9 10 11 1 2 / / 5 6 7 / 9 10 11
CM
CM
CM
o
CM
CM
12 13 14 15 16 17 / 19 20 21 12 13 14 15 16 17 / 19 21
VREF (RED) Wire side of female terminals
SLSE2 SEGND
(LT GRN/BLK) (PNK/BLK)
_
Wire side of female terminals 1 _ f= L 2
3 4 5 6
mpm y —u
YES-Go to step 16. RIGHT POWER SLIDE MOTOR CONNECTOR B (6P)

unit.B
YES-Go to step 22.
between right power sliding door control unit
connector A (22P) terminals No. 17 (+ ) and No. 20 22. Check for continuity between right power sliding door
No. 6.
CONNECTOR A (22P)
CONNECTOR A (22P)
1 2 / / 5 6 7 / 9 10 11
12 13 14 15 16 17 / 19 20 21 22 1 2 / / 5 6 7 / 9 10 11 CM
CM
12 13 14 15 16 17 / 19 20 21
SLSE2 SEGND
(LT GRN/BLK) (PNK/BLK) SEGND
-/v y - Wire side of female terminals (PNK/BLK)
1 JF = L 2
D o e s it a lte r n a te b e t w e e n a b o u t 0 V o r 5 V ? 3 4 5 ---jJ
6
N O T E : D ig it a l v o ltm e te r w ill r e a d a b o u t 2 . 5 V . i SE
SEGND (PNK/BLK)
YES-Replace the right power sliding door control RIGHT POWER SLIDE MOTOR CONNECTOR B (6P)
unit.B Wire side of female terminals
NO-Replace the right power slide motor assembly H

YES-Go to step 23.
connector A (22P). NO-Repair an open in the wire.l

(cont'd)
23. Reconnect right power sliding door control unit DTC B2083: Right Power Slide Motor Circuit
connector A (22P).
Malfunction
25. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). to follow the instructions in B-CAN System Diagnosis
26. Measure the voltage between right power slide motor
connector B (6P) terminals No. 3 (+ ) and No. 6 (—). 1.Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), and then back to
ON (II).
R IG H T P O W E R S L ID E M O T O R C O N N E C T O R B (6P)
3. Operate the open side of the right power sliding door
cn 4. Clear the DTCs with the HDS.
3 4 5
VREF SEGND Is D T C B 2 0 8 3 in d ic a t e d ?
(RED) (PNK/BLK)
YES-Go to step 6.
Wire side of female terminals system is OK at this time. Check for loose or poor
unit connector, and at the right power slide motor
Is th e r e b a tte r y v o lta g e ? connectors.!
YES-Replace the right power slide motor assembly.l 6. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
NO-Replace the right power sliding door control 7. Disconnect right power sliding door control unit
unit.B connector C (5P).
8. Disconnect the 2P connector from the right power
slide motor assembly.
control unit connector C (5P) terminals No. 3 and No. 5
and body ground individually.

CONNECTOR C(5P)
10. Do the right power slide motor test (see page 22-603). D T C B 2 0 8 4 : R ig h t P o w e r S lid e M o to r
Is th e m o t o r O K ? E le c tr o m a g n e t C lu tc h C irc u it M a lfu n c tio n
YES-Replace the right power sliding door control NOTE: If you are troubleshooting multiple DTCs, be sure
unit.B to follow the instructions in B-CAN System Diagnosis
NO-Replace the right power slide motor assem bly.l
ON (II).
3. Operate the open side of the right power sliding door
YES-Go to step 6.
unit connectors, and at the right power slide motor
c o n n e c to rs.B
connector A (22P).
9. Check for continuity between right power sliding door 11. Check for continuity between right power sliding door
control unit connector A (22P) terminal No. 10 and control unit connector A (22P) terminals No. 10 and
right power slide motor connector B <6P) terminal No. 22 and body ground individually.
No. 1.
C O N N E C T O R A (2 2 P )
CONNECTOR A (22P)
E,f C + (RED/BLU) E/C - i (RED/BLU)
1 2 / / 5 6 7 / 9 10 11
1 2 / / 5 6 7 / 9 10 11
12 13 14 15 16 17 / 19 20 21 22
12 13 14 15 16 17 19 20 21 22
Wire sidej of female terminals E /C - (LT BLU)
E/C+ ___________^ ______
U ) (u
I __ n
1 JF=L 2
3 4 5 —6
j—
RIGHT POWER SLIDE MOTOR CONNECTOR B (6P) Is th e r e c o n tin u ity ?
NO-Go to step 12.
12. At the motor side, check for continuity between right
YES-Go to step 10.
power slide motor connector B (6P) terminals No. 1
NO-Repair an open in the wire.B and No. 2 and body ground individually.
control unit connector A (22P) terminal No. 22 and R IG H T P O W E R S L ID E M O T O R C O N N E C T O R B (6P)
right power slide motor connector B (6P) terminal E /C + E /C -
No. 2.
C O N N E C T O R A (22P)
1 2 / / 5 6 7 / 9 10 11
CM
CM
12 13 14 15 16 17 / 19 20 21
E /C - (LT BLU)
______ .—
E /C -
1 2 Is t h e r e c o n tin u ity ?
3 4 5 6 YES-Replace the right power slide motor assembly.B
—1 —j
NO-Go to step 13.
R IG H T P O W E R S L ID E M O T O R C O N N E C T O R B (6P)
13. At the motor side, check for continuity between right DTC B2085: Right Power Sliding Door Half
power slide m otor connector B (6P) terminals No. 1
Latch Switch Circuit Short
and No. 2.
RIGHT POWER SLIDE MOTOR CONNECTOR B (6P) to follow the instructions in B-CAN System Diagnosis
E/C + [— © — ] E/C -
1 2
F— I
ON (II).
3 4 5 6
j u 3. Turn the power sliding door main switch ON.
TFZT
4. Close the right power sliding door.
5. Open the right power sliding door fully w ith the right
YES-Go to step 7.
u nit.B N O-lnterm ittent failure, the power sliding door
NO-Replace the right power slide m otor assembly.l
unit connectors, and at the right power sliding door
rear latch assembly eonnectors.H
7. With the door open, select POWER SLIDING DOOR
with the HDS, and enter the DATA LIST.
door R. Half Latch Switch in the DATA LIST.
Is th e in fo rm a tio n in d ic a to r O F F ?
u n it.ll
NO-Go to step 9.
door R. Half Latch Switch in the DATA LIST.
YES-Replace the right power sliding door rear latch
assembly.®
(cont'd)
13. Disconnect the right power sliding door control unit DTC B208S: Right Power Sliding Door Full
connector B (12P).
Latch Switch Circuit Short
14. Check fo r continuity between right power sliding door
body ground.
RIGHT POWER SLIDING DOOR CONTROL UNIT 1. Clear the DTCs w ith the HDS.
CONNECTOR B (12P)
H/L (YEL/GRN) ON (II).
1 2 3 4 5 6
7 8 9 1 0 11 / 4. Close the right power sliding door.

5. Open the right power sliding door fully with the right
Y power sliding door switch.
Wire side of female terminals Is D T C B 2 0 8 6 in d ic a te d ?

YES-Go to step 7.
Is th e re c o n tin u ity ? NO-lnterm ittent failure, the power sliding door
YES-Repair a short to ground in the w ir e . l connections at the right power sliding door control
NO-Replace the right power sliding door control unit connector, and at the right power sliding door
u n it.ll rear latch assembly connectors.il
7. W ith the door open, select POWER SLIDING DOOR
door R. Full Latch Switch in the DATA LIST.
u n it.ll
NO-Go to step 9.
door R. Full Latch Switch in the DATA LIST.
a s s e m b ly .l
13. Disconnect right power sliding door control unit DTC B2087: Right Power Sliding Door Ratchet
connector B (12P). Switch Circuit Short
14. Check for continuity between right power sliding door NOTE: If you are troubleshooting m ultiple DTCs, be sure
control unit connector B (12P) term inal No. 4 and to follow the instructions in B-CAN System Diagnosis
body ground. Test Mode A (see page 22-155).
RIGHT POWER SLIDING DOOR CONTROL UNIT 1. Clear the DTCs with the HDS.
CONNECTOR B (12P)
F/L (GRN/BLK) ON (II).
1 2 3 4 5 6
7 8 9 1 0 11 / 4. Close the right power sliding door.
5. Open the right power sliding door fu lly with the right
U power sliding door switch.
Wire side of female terminals Is D T C B 2 0 8 7 in d ic a te d ?

YES-Go to step 7.
Is th e re c o n tin u ity ? NO-lnterm ittent failure, the power sliding door

YES-Repair a short to ground in the w ire .B connections at the right power sliding door control
NO-Replace the right power sliding door control unit connector, and at the right power sliding door
u n it.B rear latch assembly connectors.B
7. With the door open, select POWER SLIDING DOOR
door R. Ratchet Switch in the DATA LIST.
u n it.B
NO-Go to step 9.
door R. Ratchet Switch in the DATA LIST.
assembly.B
(cont'd)
13. Disconnect right power sliding door control unit DTC B2088: Right Power Sliding Door Base
connector B (12P).
Position Switch Circuit Open/Short
body ground.
CONNECTOR B (12P) 2. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), and then back to
ON (II).
1 2 3 4 5 6 3. Turn the power sliding door main switch ON.

7 8 9 1 0 11 / 4. Open and close the right power sliding door three
times w ith the right power sliding door switch.
J L / P (BLU/RED)
tb 5. Check for DTCs w ith the HDS.
YES-Go to step 6.
NO-lnterm ittent failure, the power sliding door
YES-Repair a short to ground in the w ire .B unit connectors, and at the right power sliding door
rear latch assembly connectors.B
u n it.B
6. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 11. Check for continuity between right power sliding door
7. Disconnect the 6P connector from the right power body ground.
8. Open the right power sliding door to the half-latched RIGHT POWER SLIDING DOOR CONTROL UNIT
position. CONNECTOR B (12P)
9. Check for continuity between right power sliding door CLMP (BLU/YEL)
rear latch assembly 6P connector terminals No. 5 and
No. 6. 1 2 3 4 5 6
7 8 9 1 0 11 /
RIGHT POWER SLIDING DOOR REAR LATCH

, ...D. 0, s Wire side of female terminals

2
i4 5 6 j
Treaty Is th e re c o n tin u ity ?
FGND CLMP YES-Repair a short to ground in the w ire.l
NO-Go to step 12.
a sse m b ly.!
NO-Go to step 10.
connector B (12P).
12. Disconnect right power sliding door control unit 15. Reconnect all connectors to the right power sliding
connector A (22P). door control unit.
13. Reconnect the connector to the right closer motor 16. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
assembly.
17. Measure the voltage between right power sliding
14. Check for continuity between right power sliding door door control unit connector A (22P) terminal No. 19
control unit connector A (22P) term inal No. 19 and and right power sliding door control unit connector B
right power sliding door control unit connector B (12P) terminal No. 5.
(12P) terminal No. 5.
RIGHT POWER SLIDING DOOR CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR A (22P)
CONNECTOR A (22P)
CD
1 / / 5 7 / 9 1 0 11
1 2 / 5 6 7 / 9 10 11
CM
CM
o
CM
CD
/ 1 2 13 1 4 1 5 17 / 19 21
12 13 14 15 16 17 / 1 9 2 0 21 2 2 FGND (YEL/BLU)
Wire side of female terminals FGND (YEL/BLU)
CLMP (BLU/YEL)
CLMP (BLU/YEL) 4 5 6
1 2 3
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 /
7 8 9 1 0 11 /
CONNECTOR B (12P)
CONNECTOR B (12P) Wire side of female terminals
Wire side of female terminals Is th e re b a tte ry v o lta g e ?
YES-Go to step 15. a sse m b ly.!
NO-Repair an open in the wire.B NO-Replace the right power sliding door control
unit.B
DTC B2089: Right Power Sliding Door Switch 8. W ith the switch OFF, check for continuity between the
follow ing terminals of the power sliding door switch.
Open/Close Signal Input Error (Input at the
same time) No. 3 <-» No. 4
No. 3 o No. 8
NOTE: No. 4 O No. 8
follow the instructions in B-CAN System Diagnosis POWER SLIDING DOOR SWITCH 10P CONNECTOR
• If DTC B2075 and/or B2076 is indicated at the same
time, troubleshoot DTC B2075 and/or B2076 first.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
1. Clear the DTCs w ith the HDS.
ON (II). ---------- @ -----------

4. Operate the open side of the right power sliding door 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
-
YES-Go to step 6.
NO-lnterm ittent failure, the power sliding door 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
unit connectors, and at the power sliding door switch
connector.B
YES-Replace the power sliding door sw itch.B
22-602), and disconnect its 10P connector. NO-Go to step 9.
9. Disconnect right power sliding door control unit DTC B2090: .Right Power Slide Motor
connector A (22P).
Malfunction
switch 10P connector term inals No. 3 and No. 4.
to fo llow the instructions in B-CAN System Diagnosis
POWER SLIDING DOOR SWITCH 10P CONNECTOR 1.Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), and then back to
ON (II).
1 2 3 i 5 6 7 8 9 10 4. Operate the open side of the right power sliding door
DRCL DROP (PNK) switch four or more times.
(RED/WHT)
<a>

NO-lnterm ittent failure, the power sliding door
YES-Repair a short to ground in the w ire .l connections at the left power sliding door control unit
NO-Replace the right power sliding door control connector.B
u nit.B
6. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 9. Measure the voltage between right power sliding
door control unit connector C (5P) terminal No. 2 and
7. Remove the right power sliding door control unit (see connector A (22P) terminal No. 11 while using the
page 22-598). After removal, connect the connectors power sliding door switch to open or close the door.
to the control unit.
RIGHT POWER SLIDING DOOR CONTROL
8. Measure the voltage between right power sliding UNIT CONNECTOR A (22P)
door control unit connector C (5P) terminal No. 1 and
body ground while using the power sliding door \/BU (WHT/RED)
switch to open or close the door.
1 2 / / 5 6 7 / 9 10 11
o
CM
12 13 14 15 16 17 / 19 21 2 2
CONNECTOR C (5P)
1 PG1 (BRN)
VMP1 (WHT/RED)
1 rn 2 _jn
1 I
3 4 5 ...F==L_
3 4 5
j--- "V
X RIGHT POWER SLIDING DOOR CONTROL
Wire side of female terminals Is th e re 0 .2 V o r le s s ?

Is th e re 0 .2 V o r le s s ? unit.B
YES-Go to step 9. NO-Repair an open or high resistance in the wire

between the No. 3 fuse in the auxiliary under-hood
NO-Repair an open or high resistance in the wire fuse/relay box and the power sliding door control
between the power sliding door control unit unit. If the w ire is OK, check the No. 3 fuse and
connector C (5P) terminal No. 1 and body ground. If terminal No. 2 of connector C .B
the wire is OK, check G653 and terminal No. 1 of the
connector C.B
DTC B2091: Right Power Sliding Door Motor 7. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
Pulses (SLSE1/SLSE2) Error 8. Disconnect right power sliding door control unit
NOTE: If you are troubleshooting m ultiple DTCs, be sure connector A (22P).
to follow the instructions in B-CAN System Diagnosis 9. Disconnect the 6P connector from the right power
Test Mode A (see page 22-155). slide motor assembly.
1. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), and then back to 10. Check for continuity between right power sliding door
ON (II). control unit connector A (22P) terminals No. 16 and
2. Turn the power sliding door main switch OFF, then No. 17.
close the right power sliding door from the
fully-opened position. RIGHT POWER SLIDING DOOR CONTROL UNIT
CONNECTOR A (22P)
power sliding door switch. 1 2 / / 5 6 7 / 9 1 0 11
CM
CM
5. Clear the DTCs with the HDS. 1 2 13 14 15 16 17 / 19 2 0 21
SLSE1 SLSE2
6. Check for DTCs with the HDS. (RED /BLK) (LT GRN/BLK)
YES-Go to step 7.
N O -lnterm ittent failure, the power sliding door Wire side of female terminals
connections at the right power sliding door control Is th e re c o n tin u ity ?
unit connector, and at the right power slide m otor
connectors.® YES-Repair a short to ground in the wire.l
NO-Go to step 11.
11. At the motor side, check for continuity between right
power slide m otor connector B (6P) terminals No. 4
and No. 5.
_Q _
SLSE2 SLSE1
(LT GRN/BLK) (RED/BLK)
YES-Replace the right power slide motor assembly.l
u n it.B
NOTE: Before troubleshooting the power sliding doors, troubleshooting the multiplex integrated system first using
B-CAN System Diagnosis Test Mode A (see page 2 2 - 1 55).
If the power sliding door has one of these systems, perform the diagnostic procedure for it, in the sequence listed.
Symptom D i a g n o s t i c procedure
The sliding door w ill not open or close 1. Resetting the power sliding door control unit (see page 22-531)
automatically w ith all operations (the power 2. Power sliding door main switch (see page 22-602)
sliding door switch, inner handle, outer 3. Sliding door alignment (see page 20-57)
handle switch, keyless transm itter) 4. Slide m otor sensor (see page 22-603)
5. Slide motor (see page 22-603)
6. Slide motor electromagnetic clutch (see page 22-603)
7. Power s l i d i n g door control unit (see page 22-598)
8. Pinch sensor (see page 22-604)
9. Fuel fill door switch (Left sliding door only) (see page 22-227)
10. Rear junction box (see page 22-193)
The sliding door w ill not open or close 1. Power sliding door open/close switch (see page 22-602)
automatically with the power sliding door 2. Power sliding door control unit (see page 22-598)
switch 3. CESS articulated harness (see page 22-228)
The sliding door w ill not open or close 1. Keyless transm itter (see page 22-231)
automatically w ith the keyless transm itter 2. Power sliding door control unit (see page 22-598)
The sliding door w ill not open or close 1. Remote control switch 1 (see page 22-604)
automatically with the outer handle switch 2. Remote control switch 2 (see page 22-604)
or inner handle 3. Remote control switch 3 (see page 22-604)
4. Power sliding door control unit (see page 22-598)
5. CESS articulated harness (see page 22-228)
The sliding door w ill not open automatically 1. Release actuator (see page 22-603)
with all operations (the power sliding door 2. VSA m odulator-control unit (see page 19-103)
switch, inner handle, outer handle switch, 3. Brake pedal position switch (see page 22-274)
keyless transmitter) 4. Parking brake switch
5. Transmission range switch (see page 14-252)
6. Sliding door alignment (see page 20-57)
8. Power door lock system (see page 22-211)
9. PCM (see page 11 -3)
10. Gauge control module (see page 22-189)
11. Output shaft speed sensor/lnput shaft speed sensor (see page
14-105)
12. M ultiplex integrated control unit (see page 22-185)
The sliding door w ill not close automatically 1. Pinch sensor (see page 22-604)
w ith all operations (the power sliding door 2. Sliding door alignment (see page 20-57)
switch, inner handle, outer handle switch, 3. Power sliding door control unit (see page 22-598)
keyless transmitter) 4. CESS articulated harness (see page 22-228)
The sliding door opens automatically 1. Power sliding door open/close switch (see page 22-602)
w ithout operation 2. Keyless transm itter (see page 22-231) and keyless receiver
(built into the power w indow master switch) (see page 22-190)
3. Remote control switch 1 (see page 22-604)
5. Release actuator (see page 22-603)
I 7. CESS articulated harness (see page 22-228)
T h e sliding door stops before opening all the 1. Sliding door alignment (see page 20-57)
way 2. Slide m otor (see page 22-603)
4. Power sliding door open/close switch (see page 22-602)
5. Keyless transm itter (see page 22-231) and keyless receiver
(built into the power w indow master switch) (see
page 22-190)
6. Remote control switches 1,2 and 3 (see page 22-604)
7. Output shaft speed sensor/lnput shaft speed sensor (see
page 14-105)
8. Transmission range switch (see page 14-252)
9. Gauge control module (see page 22-189)
10. M ultiplex integrated control unit (see page 22-185)
11. V S A modulator-control unit (see page 19-103)
With the sliding door w indow closed, the NOTE: The sliding door only opens halfway when the sliding
sliding door stops at the halfway position door window is open more than 76 mm (3.0 in). This is normal.
1. Power sliding door window position switch (see page 22-605)
The sliding door opens in any other gear 1. Brake pedal position switch (see page 22-274)
position than park, or opens in neutral with 2. Parking brake switch (see page 19-14)
the parking brake released 3. Transmission range switch (see page 14-252)
The vehicle w ill run over 1.2 mph (2.0 km/h) 1. VSA modulator-control unit (see page 19-103)
with the sliding door open 2. PCM (see page 11-3)
The sliding door w ill close automatically 1. Power sliding door open/close switch (see page 22-602)
w ithout operation 2. Keyless transm itter (see page 22-231) and keyless receiver
(built into the power window master switch) (see page 22-190)
The sliding door stops before closing all the 1. Ratchet switch (see page 22-605)
way 2. Latch position switch (see page 22-605)
3. Closer m otor (see page 22-602)
4. Sliding door alignment (see page 20-57)
5. Slide m otor sensor (see page 22-604)
6. Slide motor (see page 22-603)
8. Power sliding open/close switch (see page 22-602)
9. Keyless transm itter (see page 22-231) and keyless receiver
(built into the power window master switch) (see page 22-190)
NOTE:
Before doing the input test o f the power sliding door system:
• Troubleshoot the m ultiplex integrated control system using B-CAN System Diagnosis Test Mode A (see page 22-155).
• Check for the DTCs w ith the HDS. If any DTCs are indicated, troubleshoot them first.
Left Power Sliding Door

2. Remove the left rear side trim panel (see page 20-110).
3. Disconnect the 22P, 12P, and 5P connectors (A) from the left power sliding door control unit (B).
NOTE: All connector views are shown from the w ire side of female terminals.
CONNECTOR C (5P) CONNECTOR B (12P) ORN BLU/BLK WHT/RED

H
1 / / 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
fo
C
12 13 14 15 16 / / 19 21 22
MlI
/
YEL BLK
CONNECTOR A (22P)
4. Inspect all the connector and socket term inals to be sure they are all making good contact.
• Ifthe term inals look OK, go to step 5.
5. Reconnect all connectors to the left power sliding door control unit, and do these input tests at the following connectors.
• Ifthe test indicates a problem, find and correct the cause, then recheck the system.
• If the input test proves OK, replace the left power sliding door control unit
obtained
A11 WHT/RED Under all conditions Measure the voltage to ground: • Blown No. 7 (7.5 A) fuse in the driver's
There should be battery voltage. under-dash fuse/relay box
B8 GRN Under all conditions Measure the voltage to ground: • Blown No. 13 (20 A) fuse in the
There should be battery voltage. driver's under-dash fuse/relay box
C2 WHT/BLK Under all conditions Measure the voltage to ground: • Blown No. 2 (40 A) fuse in the auxiliary
There should be battery voltage. under-hood fuse box
A14 YEL Ignition switch ON (II) Measure the voltage to ground: • Blown No. 21 (7.5 A) fuse in the
A21 BLK In all ignition switch Measure the voltage to ground: • Poor ground (G603) or an open in the
C4 positions There should be less than 0.2 V. ground wire
C1 BRN In all ignition switch Measure the voltage to ground: • Poor ground (G603) or an open in the
positions There should be less than 0.2 V. ground wire
B1 BLU/BLK Perform the RELEASE Check the actuator operation: • Faulty left release actuator
ACTION forced operation The release actuator should • Faulty left CESS articulated harness
with the HDS* operate (check by operation • Poor ground (G602) or an open in the
sound). ground wire
B2 BLU/WHT Perform the CLOSER MOTOR Check the closer motor operation: • Faulty left closer motor
B7 GRY forced operation with the The closer motor should operate • Faulty left CESS articulated harness
HDS* (check by operation sound). • An open or high resistance in the wire
A5 ORN Open the left sliding door Check for continuity between • Faulty left sliding door window
window more than 3.9 in terminal A5 and A19: position switch
(100 mm) There should be no continuity. • Faulty left CESS articulated harness
Close the left sliding door Check for continuity between • Faulty left sliding door window
window fully terminal A5 and A19: position switch
There should be continuity. • Faulty left CESS articulated harness
B6 YEL/BLU Power sliding door main Measure the voltage to ground: • Faulty power sliding door switch
switch ON There should be less than 0.2 V. • Poor ground (G504) or an open in the
ground wire
Power sliding door main Measure the voltage to ground: • Faulty power sliding door switch
switch OFF There should be about 5 V. • A short to ground in the wire
A9 BLU/BLK Shift lever in P position Measure the voltage to ground: • Faulty transmission range switch
There should be less than 0.2 V. • Poor ground (G101, G102) or an open
in the ground wire
Shift lever any other position Measure the voltage to ground: • Faulty transmission rage switch
than P There should be about 5 V. • A short to ground in the wire
*: Connect the HDS, select POWER SLIDING DOOR from the BODY ELECTRICAL SYSTEM SELECT menu, then enter the DATA LIST.
Right Power Sliding Door

2. Remove the right rear side trim panel (see page 20-110).
3. Disconnect the 22P, 12P, and 5P connectors (A) from the right power sliding door control unit (B).
NOTE: All connector views are shown from the wire side of female terminals.
CONNECTOR i (12P)
ORN BLU/BLK WHT/RED
1 2 / / 5 6 7 / 9 10 11
12 13 14 15 16 17 / 19 20 21 22
/
YEL BLK
CONNECTOR A (22P)
5. Reconnect all connectors to the right power sliding door control unit, and do these input tests at the following connectors.
• If the test indicates a problem, find and correct the cause, then recheck the system.
• If the input test proves OK, replace the right power sliding door control unit.
obtained
A11 WHT/RED Under all conditions Measure the voltage to ground: • Blown No. 7 (7.5 A) fuse in the driver's
There should be battery voltage. under-dash fuse/relay box
B8 GRN Under all conditions Measure the voltage to ground: • Blown No. 8 (20 A) fuse in the
There should be battery voltage. passenger's under-dash fuse/relay
box
C2 WHT/RED Under all conditions Measure the voltage to ground: • Blown No. 3 (40 A) fuse in the auxiliary
There should be battery voltage. under-hood fuse box
A14 YEL Ignition switch ON (II) Measure the voltage to ground: • Blown No. 21 (7.5 A) fuse in the
A21 BLK In all ignition switch Measure the voltage to ground: • Poor ground (G653) or an open in the
C4 positions There should be less than 0.2 V. ground wire
C1 BRN In all ignition switch Measure the voltage to ground: • Poor ground (G653) or an open in the
positions There should be less than 0.2 V. ground wire
B1 BLU/BLK Perform the RELEASE Check the actuator operation: • Faulty right release actuator
ACTION forced operation The release actuator should • Faulty right CESS articulated harness
with the HDS* operate (check by operation • Poor ground (G651) or an open in the
sound). ground wire
B2 BLU/WHT Perform the CLOSER MOTOR Check the closer motor operation: • Faulty right closer motor
B7 GRY forced operation with the The closer motor should operate • Faulty right CESS articulated harness
HDS* (check by operation sound). • An open or high resistance in the wire
A5 ORN Open the right sliding door Check for continuity between • Faulty right sliding door window
window more than 3.9 in (100 terminal A5 and A19: position switch
mm) There should be no continuity. • Faulty right CESS articulated harness
Close the right sliding door Check for continuity between • Faulty right sliding door window
window fully terminal A5 and A19: position switch
There should be continuity. • Faulty right CESS articulated harness
B6 YEL/BLU Power sliding door main Measure the voltage to ground: • Faulty power sliding door switch
switch ON There should be less than 0.2 V. • Poor ground (G504) or an open in the
ground wire
Power sliding door main Measure the voltage to ground: • Faulty power sliding door switch
switch OFF There should be about 5 V. • A short to ground in the wire
A9 BLU/BLK Shift lever in P position Measure the voltage to ground: • Faulty transmission range switch
There should be less than 0.2 V. • Poor ground (G101, G102) or an open
in the ground wire
Shift lever any other position Measure the voltage to ground: • Faulty transmission range switch
than P There should be about 5 V. • A short to ground in the wire
*: Connect the HDS, select POWER SLIDING DOOR from the BODY ELECTRICAL SYSTEM SELECT menu, then enter the DATA LIST.
Power Sliding Door Switch Closer Motor Test
T est/Replacement
1. Remove the driver's dashboard outer panel (see page 1. Remove the sliding door panel (see page 20-21).
20-134).
2. Disconnect the 2P connector (A) from the rear latch
2. Disconnect the 10P connector (A) from the power assembly (B).
sliding door switch (B).
3. Test the closer m otor (C) by connecting power and

^ Terminal
3. Check for continuity between the terminals in each A1 A2
Direction \
FORWARD © ©
O p en /C lo se S w itch :
REVERSE © ©
4. If the m otor does not operate, replace the latch

assembly.
\ Terminal
6 7
Position \
ON O— — O
OFF
4. If the continuity is not as specified, replace the bulbs

(C) or the switch.
Release Actuator Test Slide Motor Test
1. Remove the sliding door panel (see page 20-21). 1. Remove the rear side trim panel (see page 20-110).
2. Disconnect the 2P connector (A) from the release 2. Disconnect the 2P connector (A) from the slide m otor
actuator (B). (B).
3. Test the release actuator by connecting power to

release actuator 2P connector term inal No. 1 and
ground terminal No. 2. The actuator should operate.
3. Test the slide m otor by connecting power and ground
4. If the actuator does not operate, replace the actuator. according to the table.
\ Terminal
A1 (A2) A2(A1)
Direction \
OPEN 0 ©
CLOSE 0 ©
(): Right motor
4 . If the motor does not operate, replace the motor.

Sliding Door Pinch Sensor Remote Control Switch Test
Test/Replacement
1. Remove the sliding door panel (see page 20-21). 1. Remove the sliding door panel (see page 20-21).
2. Disconnect the 2P connector (A) from the pi nch 2. Disconnect the 4P connector (A) from the sliding door
sensor (B). remote control switch.
Remote control switch 1
Terminal side of
male terminals
3. Measure the resistance between pinch sensor 2P

connector term inals No. 1 and No. 2.
The resistance should vary from about 1 kQ to about
120 D when the sensor is pressed.
4. If the resistance is not as specified, remove the
screws, then replace the pinch sensor. 3. Check fo r continuity between the terminals in each
5. Install in the reverse order of removal. A fter installing,
make sure the sliding door operates properly.
^ Terminal
1 2 3 4
Position \
Pull the inner handle or outer
handle to open side (Remote a o
control switch 1}
Pull the inner handle to close side
(Remote control switch 2) o o
Pull the inner handle to open side

with the child safety lock ON a o
(Remote control switch 3)
4. Ifthe continuity is not as specified, replace the switch.

■F BODY
~ * j lg
Window Position Switch Test Latch Position Switch Test
1. Remove the sliding door panel (see page 20-21). 1. Remove the sliding door panel (see page 20-21).
2. Disconnect the 2P connector (A) from the window 2. Disconnect the rear latch assembly connector B (6P).
position switch (B).

2P connector terminals No. 1 and No. 2.
NOTE: Do not touch the sliding door while the NOTE:
window is moving. • The half latch switch turns ON between half and full
• There should be continuity with the sliding door latch position.
window closed. • The full latch switch turns ON between half and full
• There should be no continuity with the sliding door latch position.
window opened about 3.9 in (100 mm). • The ratchet switch turns ON at half and full latch
4. If the continuity is not as specified, replace the switch. position, and turns OFF when the handle is pulled.
• The base switch turns ON with the closer m otor
operation, then goes OFF when the closer motor
returns to its base position.
Latch Position Switch Test (cont'd)
STRIKER POSITION
HALF FULL OVER
LATCH LATCH STROKE
HALF
latch on I
SWITCH OFF
FULL ON
LATCH ocp 1
SWITCH
RATCHET OIM
SWITCH OFF —1 1________
BASE ON
POSITION OFF — i
SWITCH
**-----Door in m o tio n ------►
HALF LATCH POSITION
FULL LATCH POSITION
4. Ifth e continuity is not as specified, replace the latch

assembly.
(cont'd)
TAILGATE LATCH ASSEMBLY (CLOSER UNIT)

(Including closer motor and latch/ratchet switch)
Latch/Ratchet Switch Test, page 22-647
Closer Motor Test, page 22-648
System Description
The power tailgate can be opened and closed automatically by operating the dashboard switch, outside handle switch
(for open), inside switch (for close) or the keyless transmitter. The power tailgate has tw o safety functions for
safeguarding passengers: obstruction detection, and fall-down detection.
Basic Operation
OPEN: The power tailgate can be opened by operating the driver's switch, outside handle, or the keyless transm itter
under the follow ing conditions:
• Tailgate is fu lly closed (full-latched position is detected.).
• Driver's door or Passenger's door lock knob switch is in UNLOCK.
• Shift lever is in P position.
• Vehicle speed is less than 1.2 mph (2 km/h).
• Closer unit detects the neutral position.
• Battery voltage (VBU) is more than 11V.
• System is not in fail-safe mode.
CLOSE: The power tailgate can be closed by operating the dashboard sw itch, inside switch, or the keyless transm itter
under the follow ing conditions:
• Tailgate is fu lly open.
• Pinch sensor detects no obstruction.
• Closer unit detects the neutral position.
• Battery voltage (VBU) is more than 11V.
• System is not in fail-safe mode.
Obstruction Detection Function

If any obstruction is detected while the tailgate is automatically opening or closing, the tailgate w ill stop and the reverse
operation is activated. An obstruction is detected by the tailgate pinch sensor and the pulser in the drive unit. If the
obstruction is detected when the shift lever is in any other position than P, or the vehicle speed exceeds 1.2 mph
(2 km/h), the tailgate stops moving immediately.
Fall-down Detection Function -

This function prevents the tailgate from suddenly falling down because of an accumulation of snow, or other causes. If
the pulser in the drive unit detects abnormal pulses, the tailgate starts to open. If this operation is activated twice, the
tailgate w ill close automatically. Ifth e obstruction detection function detects any obstruction several times during this
fall-down detection function, the tailgate stops moving.
NOTE: If the tailgate falls repeatedly, replace the tailgate support strut (see page 20-254).
A: Auto open action completed
B: Tailgate falling is detected
C: Clutch reconnect when falling is detected
D: Auto open action (power tailgate m otor reverse action)
E: Close function activated from fu lly open position
Power Tailgate Buzzer Beep Pattern

Condition Beep Pattern
When the tailgate starts to open automatically Beeps 1 time
When the tailgate starts to close automatically Beeps 1 time
When the reverse operation is started after the tailgate has Beeps 3 times
detected any obstruction
When the reverse operation is started by switch operation Beeps 3 times
When the vehicle speed exceeds 1.2 mph (2 km/h) w hile the Beeps interm ittently until the condition is
tailgate is opening automatically corrected
When the operating tim e is over Beeps 3 times
When the vehicle speed exceeds 1.2 mph (2 km/h) while the Beeps interm ittently until the condition is
tailgate is closing automatically corrected
When the tailgate is not fully-latched, and the follow ing condition Beeps interm ittently until the condition is
is met: The shift lever is any position other than P, and Brake corrected
pedal position switch and parking brake switch are OFF, and the
vehicle speed exceeds 1.2 mph (2 km/h).
When the tailgate fall-down detection function is activated Beeps continuously
r ^ i
Resetting the Power Tailgate Control Unit
If the battery terminal is disconnected or No. 7 (7.5 A)

fuse in the driver's under-dash fuse/relay box is
removed while the power tailgate is operating, the
power tailgate w ill not be able to open or close
automatically until it is reset. To reset the system, fully
close the tailgate manually. Once the battery terminals
are reconnected or No. 7 (7.5 A) fuse in the driver's
under-dash fuse/relay box is replaced, the power
tailgate system w ill automatically reset. Make sure the
power tailgate operates properly.
Circuit Diagram
DRIVER'S
DRIVER'S UNDER-DASH
UNDER-HOOD FUSE/RELAY BOX UNDER-DASH FUSE/RELAY BOX
(120 A) (50 A) G1 B1 IA2 A6 No. 21 (7.5 A)
-CTXjO--- — CTXj D - WHT ■WHT BLK/YEL ■ -CTV jO
%
IG1 HOT in ON (II)
and START (III)
No. 15 (40 A) D6 No. 6 (7.5 A)
—< r ^ o ~
No. 7 (7.5 A) G3
No. 20 (40 A) D5 No. 17 (20 A) F4

BLU ■ — < r \jD —
AUXILIARY
BLK UNDER-HOOD POWER
TAILGATE RIGHTPOWER
INSIDE SLIDING DOOR
BEEPER CONTROL UNIT
5-CAN
|A7
GRN/RED
{_A14
I MICU-REAR
JUNCTION
---- BOX
I G4
GRN/RED WHT WHT/RED YEL
A2 B10
VMP1 VBU
CLU+ CLU- PTG+ PTG- SENA SVCC SENB SEG1 BUZ ATP
B9 B20 A5 A3 B14 C13 B15 B18 B8
PUR GRY/BLU
GRY RED GRN PUR/WHT PNK/BLU BRN/WHT BLU/BLK
B1 B3 A2 A1 B6 B8
POWER POWER
TAILGATE TAILGATE POWER TAILGATE SENSOR
CLUTCH f MOTOR
2
POWER
TAILGATE
OUTSIDE
BLK BEEPER
i I
G101
G102
: B-CAN line
DTC Troubleshooting
DTC B1352: Power Tailgate Control Unit DTC B1355: Power Tailgate Control Unit Lost
EEPROM Error Communication With MICU
Test Mode A (see page 22-155), Test Mode A (see page 22-155).
1.Turn the ignition switch to LOCK(0). 1. Clear the DTCs with the HDS.
2. Connect the HDS to the data link connector. 2. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), and then back to
ON (II).
3. Remove the No. 7 (7.5 A) fuse from the driver's
under-dash fuse/relay box, and wait for 1 minute, then 3. Check for DTCs with the HDS.
install it.
4. Open the tailgate with the keyless transmitter.
YES-Go to step 4.
5. Close the tailgate manually (not with the power
tailgate switch). NO-lnterm ittent failure. The power tailgate system is
OK at this time. Check fo r loose or poor connections at
6. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). the power tailgate control unit connector and at the
MICU connector.B
4. Check for the DTCs w ith the HDS.
A re D T C s B 1 0 5 5 , B 1 1 0 6 , B 1 1 5 7 , B 1 2 5 5 , B 1 5 5 6 , B 1 8 0 6 ,
YES-Replace the power tailgate control u n it . l
B 1 9 5 5 , B 2 0 0 5 , a n d B 2 0 5 5 a ls o in d ic a te d ?
N O -lnterm ittent failure. The power tailgate system is
YES-Go to the MICU input test (see page 22-185).■
OK a tthis time. Check for loose or poor connections at
the power tailgate control unit connector and at the NO-Go to the power tailgate control unit input test
MICU connector.B (see page 22-644).■
DTC B1356: Power Tailgate Control Unit Lost DTC B1357: Power Tailgate Control Unit Lost
Communication With Door Multiplex Control Communication With Gauge Control Module
Unit (Door Lock Switch Message) (VSP/NE Message)
ON (II). ON (II).
NO-lnterm ittent failure. The power tailgate system is NO-interm ittent failure. The power tailgate system is
OK at this time. Check for loose or poor connections at OK at this time. Check fo r loose or poor connections at
the power tailgate control unit connector and at the the power tailgate control unit connector and at the
door multiplex control unit connector.B MICU connector.B
4. Check for the DTCs w ith the HDS. 4. Check for the DTCs w ith the HDS.
A re D T C s B 1 0 0 6 , B 1 0 5 8 , a n d B 1 1 6 0 in d ic a te d ? A re D T C s B 1 0 6 0 , B 1 2 0 5 , B 1 8 0 5 , B 2 0 1 0 , a n d B 2 0 6 0
YES-Go to the door multiplex control unit input test
(see page 22-185).■ YES-Go to the gauge control module input test (see
page 22-189).B
NO-Go to the power tailgate control unit input test
(see page 22-644).B NO-Go to the power tailgate control unit input test
(see page 22-644).B
DTC S1358: Power Tailgate Control Unit Lost DTC B1353: Power Tailgate Control Unit Lost
Communication With MICU (ASLOCKSW Communication With Gauge Control Module
Message) (A/T Message)
1. Clear the DTCs with the HDS. 1. Clear the DTCs w ith the HDS.
ON (II). ON (II).
NO -lnterm ittent failure. The power tailgate system is NO-lnterm ittent failure. The power tailgate system is
OK at this time. Check for loose or poor connections at OK at this time. Check for loose or poor connections at
the power tailgate control unit connector and at the the power tailgate control unit connector and at the
MICU connector.B gauge control module connector.B
4. Check for the DTCs w ith the HDS. 4. Check for the DTCs with the HDS.
A r e D T C s B 2 0 0 8 a n d B 2 0 5 8 a ls o in d ic a te d ? Are D T C s B1008, B1061, B1808, B1956, B2011, and
B 2 0 6 1 a ls o in d ic a te d ?
YES-Go to the MICU input test (see page 22-185).B
YES-Go to the gauge control module input test (see
■ page 22-189).B
(see page 22-644).B
(see page 22-644).B
DTCB137S; Dashboard Power Tailgate Switch 9. Disconnect power tailgate control unit connector B
(20P).
Circuit Malfunction
10. Check for continuity between power tailgate control
unit connector B (20P) terminal No. 5 and body
ground.
POWER TAILGATE CONTROL
ON (II). UNIT CONNECTOR B (20P)
SCOM (YEL/BLU)
3. Press and hold the dashboard power tailgate button n n c P n n
for more than 1 second. 1 2 3 / 5 / / 8 9 10
CM
O
4. Check fo r DTCs w ith the HDS. / 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
— i — — i —
YES-Go to step 5.
OK at this time. Check for loose or poor connections at
the power tailgate control unit connectors and at the
dashboard power tailgate switch connector.B Is th e re c o n tin u ity ?
5. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). YES-Repair a short to ground in the w ire .B
6. Disconnect the 5P connector from the dashboard NO-Go to step 11.
power tailgate switch.
11. Do the dashboard powertailgate switch test (see page
7. Disconnect powertailgate control unit connector C 22-646).
(14P).
unit connector C (14P) terminal No. 5 and body YES-Go to step 12.
ground. NO-Replace the dashboard powertailgate switch (see
page 22-646).B
DRSW (WHT/BLK)
10 11 13 14

12. Reconnect the 5P connector to the dashboard power DTC B1376: Tailgate Outer Handle Switch
tailgate switch.
Circuit Malfunction
13. With the dashboard power tailgate button pressed,
check for continuity between power tailgate control
unit connector B (20P) terminal No. 5 and power
tailgate control unit connector C (14P) term inal No. 5.
UNIT CONNECTOR B (20P) ON (II).
s corjfl (YEL/BLU) 2. Clear the DTCs with the HDS, and wait for at least
r» n S pj n n 2 seconds.
1 2 3 / 5 / / 8 9 10 3. Pull the tailgate outer handle for at least 2 seconds.
/ 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
u u 4. Check for DTCs w ith the HDS.
DRSW (WHT/BLK) YES-Go to step 5.

....n........... J n ....
NO-lnterm ittent failure. The powertailgate system is
1 2 3 4
5 / 7 OK at this time. Check for loose or poor connections at
8 9
----jJ1---- 10 11 13 14
/ ----JL---- the power tailgate control unit connectors, and at the
tailgate outer handle switch connector.B
UNIT CONNECTOR C (14P )- 5. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), and open the
Wire side of female terminals power tailgate w ith the keyless transmitter.
6. Disconnect the 2P connector from the tailgate outer
YES-Replace the power tailgate control unit.l handle switch.
NO-Repair an open in the w ir e . l 7. Disconnect power tailgate control unit connector C

(14P).
unit connector C (14P) terminal No. 9 and body
ground.

...n........ n
CO
1 2 4 5 / 7
8
----J 10 11 / 13
—i
0
OHSW (WHT/RED)
YES-Repair a short to ground in the w ire .B
NO-Go to step 9 .
9. Disconnect power tailgate control unit connector B 13. With the tailgate outer handle switch active, check for
(20P). continuity between pow ertailgate control unit
connector B (20P) term inal No. 5 and pow ertailgate
10. Check for continuity between power tailgate control control unit connector C (14P) terminal No. 9.
ground. POWER TAILGATE CONTROL

UNIT CONNECTOR B (20P) 1 2 3 4 5 /
8 9 1 0 11 / 13 14
SiCOIM (YEL/BLU)
n .n............. c. r * ........n n ..... OHSW Wire side of female terminals
1 2 3 / 5 / 8 9 10 (WHT/RED)
/
M § )—
CM
o
/ 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
SCOM (YEL/BLU) UNIT CONNECTOR B (20P)
n c n
1 2 3 / 5 / / 8 9 10
o
CM
/ 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19

YES-Replace the power tailgate control unit.l
NO-Go to step 11.
NO-Repair an open in the w ire .B
11. Test the tailgate outer handle switch (see page
22-648).
is th e s w itc h O K ?
YES-Go to step 12.
NO-Replace the tailgate outer handle switch (see
page 22-648).B
12. Reconnect the 2P connector to the tailgate outer
handle switch.
DTC B1377: Power Tailgate Inside Switch 10. Disconnect power tailgate control unit connector B
(20P).
Circuit Malfunction
ground.
1. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), and then back to POWER TAILGATE CONTROL
ON (II). UNIT CONNECTOR B (20PJ

S<;oi\fl (YEL/BLU)
3. Open the tailgate w ith the keyless transmitter. n n C_ r* n n
4. Push the inside tailgate button for more than 1 2 3 / 5 / / 8 9 10

2 seconds. / 1 2 1 3 1 4 1 5 1 6 1 7 1 8 19 2 0
5. Check fo r DTCs with the HDS.

N O -lnterm ittent failure. The powertailgate system is

the pow ertailgate control unit connectors and at the
inside tailgate switch connector.B YES-Repair a short to ground in the w ire .B
6. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). NO-Go to step 12.
7. Disconnect the 5P connector from the inside tailgate 12. Test the inside tailgate switch (see page 22-647).
switch.
8. Disconnect power tailgate control unit connector C
(14P). YES-Go to step 13.
9. Check fo r continuity between power tailgate control NO-Replace the inside tailgate sw itch.B
ground.

C J
n r1
1 2 3 45 / 7
8 9
---- 1 0 11 / 1 3 1 4
L----
JGTCL (BLU)
U
NO-Go to step 10.
F l H
BODY
13. Reconnect the 5P connector to the inside tailgate DTC B1378: Power Tailgate Right Pinch
switch,
Sensor Circuit Malfunction
14. With the inside tailgate button pressed, check for
continuity between power tailgate control unit
connector B (20P) terminal No. 5 and power tailgate
control unit connector C (14P) terminal No. 8.
1. Open the tailgate manually or with the keyless
POWER TAILGATE CONTROL transmitter.
2. Close the tailgate with the keyless transm itter or with
the dashboard powertailgate switch.
10 11 13 14 3. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), and then back to

ON (II).
GTCL Wire side of female terminals
(BLU) 4. Clear the DTCs with the HDS.

UNIT CONNECTOR B (20P)
SCOIVI (YEL/BLU) Is D T C B 1 3 7 8 in d ic a te d ?
-n_□. n __a
YES-Go to step 6.
1 10
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 NO-lnterm ittent failure. The powertailgate system is
”t r OK at this time. Check for loose or poor connections at
Wire side of female terminals the pow ertailgate control unit connector.B
7. Disconnect the 2P connector from the power tailgate
YES-Replace the powertailgate control unit.l
right pinch sensor.
9. Measure the voltage between the harness side of
pow ertailgate right pinch sensor 2P connector
terminals No. 2 (+ ) and No. 1 (—).
TAILGATE RIGHT PINCH

SENSOR 2P CONNECTOR
-SZ2-
1 2
SEG2 TSER
(BLK/WHT) (BLU/RED)
Is th e re b a tte ry v o lta g e ?
YES-Replace the power tailgate right pinch sensor
(see page 22-650).B
NO-Go to step 10.
(cont'd)
10. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 13. Check for continuity between power tailgate control
11. Disconnect power tailgate control unit connector B
tailgate right pinch sensor 2P connector terminal
(20P).
No. 1.
unit connector B (20P) term inal No. 13 and the power POWER TAILGATE CONTROL
tailgate right pinch sensor 2P connector term inal UNIT CONNECTOR B (20P)
No. 2. ..n _ n ._ _____ c*.... n..n ..
1 2 3 / 5 / / 8 9 10
CM
o
/ 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
n n (-i r* n n Wire side of female terminals SEG2
(BLK/WHT)
CO
CM
00
00
1 / 5 / / 10
CM
o
/ 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 SEG2
(BLK/WHT)
TSER Wire side of female terminals
(BLU/RED) ■SZ2,
SENSOR 2P CONNECTOR
TSER Terminal side of male terminals
(BLU/RED)
SENSOR 2P CONNECTOR Is th e re c o n tin u ity ?
Terminal side of male terminals YES-Replace the powertailgate control unit.B

YES-Go to step 13.
NO-Repair an open in the w ir e . l
DTC B1379: Power Tailgate Left Pinch Sensor 11. Disconnect power tailgate control unit connector B
(20P).
Circuit Malfunction
tailgate left pinch sensor 2P connector term inal No. 2.
1.Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), and then back to POWER TAILGATE CONTROL
ON (II). UNIT CONNECTOR B (20P)
n . n . ........S r> n n
2. Open the tailgate manually or with the keyless
00
transmitter. 1 2 3 / 5 / / 9 10
CM
o
/ 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
3. Close the tailgate with the keyless transm itter or
dashboard power tailgate switch. Wire side of female terminals TSEL
(YEL/GRN)
TSEL
Is D T C B 1 3 7 9 in d ic a te d ? (YEL/GRN)
-S Z 2
YES-Go to step 6. TAILGATE LEFT PINCH
SENSOR 2P CONNECTOR
NO-lnterm ittent failure. The power tailgate system is
OK at this time. Check for loose or poor connections at Terminal side of male terminals
the power tailgate control unit connector.B
YES-Go to step 13.
left pinch sensor. NO-Repair an open in the w ire .B
8. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 13. Check fo r continuity between pow ertailgate control
9. Measure the voltage between the harness side of the
tailgate left pinch sensor 2P connector terminal No. 1.
power tailgate left pinch sensor 2P connector
terminals No. 2 (+ ) and No. 1 ( —).
TAILGATE LEFT PINCH
SENSOR 2P CONNECTOR .... n....n ............. S J ........n...n
1 2 3 / 5 / / 8 9 10
/ 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 2 0
Wire side of female terminals SEG2
(BLK/WHT)
1 2
SEG2 TSEL
(BLK/WHT) (YEL/GRN) SEG2
(BLK/WHT)
TAILGATE LEFT PINCH

SENSOR 2P CONNECTOR 1 2
YES-Replace the power tailgate left pinch sensor (see
page 22-650).B
NO-Go to step 10.
DTC B1380: Tailgate Closer Unit Neutral 6. Open the tailgate with the power tailgate outside
handle.
to follow the instructions in B-CAN System Diagnosis 8. Disconnect the 6P connector from the tailgate closer
Test Mode A (see page 22-155). unit.
1. Open the tailgate w ith the tailgate outside handle. 9. A t the tailgate closer unit side, check for continuity
between tailgate closer unit 6P connector terminals
2. Close the tailgate manually.
No. 1 and No. 5.
ON (II).
TAILGATE CLOSER UNIT 6P CONNECTOR
Is D T C B 1 3 8 0 in d ic a te d ? I I
YES-Go to step 6.
1 2 5 6
u L
N O -lnterm ittent failure. The powertailgate system is SEG3 NTL

(BLK/YEL) (BRN/YEL)
the pow ertailgate control unit connectors, and at the
closer unit connector.B
YES-Faulty neutral switch, replace the tailgate closer
u nit.B
NO-Go to step 10.
10. Reconnect the 6P connector to the tailgate closer unit. 15.Turn the tailgate lock latch to the fully-closed position
using a screwdriver.
(14P). 16. Disconnect powertailgate control unit connector B
(20P).
unit connector C (14P) terminal No. 3 and body 17. Using jum per wires, connect battery power to power
ground. tailgate control unit connector B (20P) terminal No. 2
and ground terminal No. 1 momentarily. (The motor
should run in the release direction.)
l\ITLI[BRN/YEL)
n c r* CLM+ (RED!I
r3 n n
00
CM
1 5 / 4 7 __ n n h
00
9 10 11 / ---
13- 1 2 3 / 5 / / 8 9 10
£
L----
CM
o
U / 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
C L M - (BLK/RED) JUMPER WIRE
Wire side of female terminals © ©
YES-Go to step 13.
NO-Go to step 15. unit connector C (14P) terminals No. 3 and No. 11.
13. Disconnect the 6P connector from the tailgate closer
unit. POWER TAILGATE CONTROL
14. A t the tailgate closer unit side, check for continuity
between tailgate closer unit 6P connector terminal
No. 5 and body ground. rJTL (BRN/YEL)
n c J n
1 2 3 4 5 / 7
TAILGATE CLOSER UNIT 6P-CONNECTOR
8 9 10 11 / 13 14
□ ------
SEG3 (BLK/YEL)
1 1
1 2 3 4 5 6 Wire side of female terminals
j u
....... ...L j-
NTL
(BRN/YEL) Is th e re c o n tin u ity ?
YES-Replace the powertailgate control u nit.B
NO-Go to step 19.
Terminal side of male terminals 19. Disconnect the 6P connector from the tailgate closer
unit.
Is th e re c o n tin u ity ? ^
YES-Replace the tailgate closer unit.B
20. At the tailgate closer unit side, check for continuity DTC B1381: Tailgate Closer Unit Release
between tailgate closer unit 6P connector term inals
No. 1 and No. 5.
TAILGATE CLOSER UNIT 6P CONNECTOR Test Mode A (see page 22-155).
1. Open the tailgate w ith the tailgate outside handle
switch.
I I
1 2 3 4 5 6
Li u 3. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), and then back to
SEG3 NTL ON (II).
(BLK/YEL) (BRN/YEL)
Terminal side of male terminals Is D T C B 1 3 8 1 in d ic a te d ?
YES-Go to step 6.
NO- Intermittent failure. The power tailgate system is
YES-Repair an open in the wire between the closer
unit and the power tailgate control unit.®
the power tailgate control unit connectors, and at the
NO-Replace the tailgate closer u n it.B closer unit connector.B
6. Open the tailgate with the tailgate outer handle.
unit.
9. At the tailgate closer unit side, check for continuity
No. 1 and No. 6.
1 2 3 4 5 6
SEG3 RS
(BLK/YEL) (BRN)
YES-Faulty release switch, replace the tailgate closer
u n it.B
10. Reconnect the 6P connector to the tailgate closer unit. 15. Turn the tailgate lock latch to the fully-closed position
(14P). 16. Disconnect power tailgate control unit connector B
12. Checkfor continuity between pow ertailgate control (20P).
unit connector C (14P) terminal No. 4 and body 17. Using jum per wires, connect battery power to power
ground. tailgate control unit connector B (20P) terminal No. 2
and ground term inal No. 1 momentarily. (The m otor
should run in the reverse direction.)
RS (BRN) JUMPER UNIT CONNECTOR B (20P)
WIRE
CLM+ (RED)
jx r"~ n__cl
10 11 13 14
10
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
CLM- (BLK/RED)

© e
YES-Go to step 13.
NO-Go to step 15. unit connector C (14P) terminals No. 4 and No. 11.
unit.
14. At the tailgate closer unit side, check for continuity UNIT CONNECTOR C (14P)
No. 6 and body ground. RS (BRN)
1 2 3
TAILGATE CLOSER UNIT 6P CONNECTOR 8 9 10 11 / 13 14
SEG3 (BLK/YEL)
I I
1 2 3 4 5 6 Wire side of female terminals
J y
------------------- l I
L _ .
fm m Is th e re c o n tin u ity ?
NO-Go to step 19.
YES-Replace the tailgate closer u nit.B
NO-Repair a short to ground in the wire between the
tailgate closer unit and powertailgate control u nit.B
(cont'd)
19. Disconnect the 6P connector from the tailgate closer DTC B1382: Tailgate Closer Unit Full Latch
unit.
No. 1 and No. 6.
1. Open the tailgate with the tailgate outside handle.
ON (II).
I I
- 2 3 4 5 6 4. Clear the DTCs with the HDS.
u L
SEG3 5. Check for the DTCs with the HDS.
(BLK/YEL) (BRN)
is DTC B 1 3 8 2 in d ic a te d ?
YES-Go to step 6.
Terminal side of male terminals NO-lnterm ittent failure. The power tailgate system is
the power tailgate control unit connector, and at the
YES-Repair an open in the wire between the tailgate
closer unit and the power tailgate control u n it.B
NO-Replace the tailgate closer unit.B
8. Turn the tailgate lock latch to the fully-closed position
unit.
No. 1 and No. 2.
n I
2 3 4 5 6
u U
SEG3
(BLK/YEL) FULL
(LT GRN/BLK)
YES-Faulty full latch switch, replace the tailgate
closer u n it.B
11. Reconnect the 6P connector to the tailgate closer u n it 16. Disconnect the 6P connector from the tailgate closer
unit.
12. Disconnect MICU rear junction box connector F (13P).
between tailgate closer unit 6 P connector terminal
(14P).
No. 2 and body ground.
inside switch.
ground.
i I
1 2 3 4 5 6
POWER TAILGATE CONTROL y L
UNIT CONNECTOR C (14P) “d y.........
FULL
(LT GRN/BLK)
FULL(LT GRN/BLK)
n c J
1 2 3 45 /
8 9 10 11 / ----c
13 14 Terminal side of male terminals
tI---- A
YES-Replace the tailgate closer unit.B
NO-Repair a short to ground in the w ire between the
tailgate closer unit and pow ertailgate control u n it.B
Is th e re c o n tin u ity ? 18. Turn the tailgate emergency lever to release the
tailgate lock latch from the fully-locked position to
YES-Go to step 16.
release position.
NO-Go to step 18. 19. Check for continuity between power tailgate control
unit connector C (14P) terminals No. 2 and No. 11.

FULL (LT GRN/BLK)
1 2 3 4 5 / 7
8 9 10 11 / 13 14
SEG3 (BLK/YEL)
NO-Go to step 20.
(cont'd)
20. Disconnect the 6P connector from the tailgate closer DTC B1383: Tailgate Closer Unit Ratchet
unit.
21. At the tailgate closer unit side, check fo r continuity
No. 1 and No. 2.
1. Open the tailgate w ith the tailgate outside handle.
ON (II).
n I
2 3 4 5 6 4. Clear the DTCs with the HDS.
U LJ
SEG3 5. Check for DTCs with the HDS.
(BLK/YEL) FULL
(LT GRN/BLK) Is D T C B 1 3 8 3 in d ic a te d ?
YES-Go to step 6.
Terminal side of male terminals NO-lnterm ittent failure. The pow ertailgate system is
the powertailgate control unit connectors, and at the
YES-Repair an open in the w ire between the tailgate
closer unit and the power tailgate control u n it.B
NO-Replace the tailgate closer u nit.B
8. Turn the tailgate lock latch to the fully-opened
position using a screwdriver.
unit.
No. 1 and No. 4.
I I
1 2 3 4 5 6
J L
SEG3 RACT
(BLK/YEL) (LT GRN)
— ® —
YES-Faulty ratchet switch, replace the tailgate closer
u n it.B
11. Reconnect the 6P connector to the tailgate closer u n it 16. Turn the tailgate lock latch to the fully-locked position
(14P). 17. Turn the tailgate emergency lever to release the
tailgate lock latch from the fully-locked position to
release position.
ground. 18. Check for continuity between power tailgate control
POWER TAILGATE CONTROL POWER TAILGATE CONTROL

UNIT CONNECTOR C (14P) UNIT CONNECTOR C (14P)
C P
CM
n
00
1 45 / 7 r1 ...
CO
1 2 3 4 5 / 7
00
10 11 / 13 14
8 9 10 11 / 13 14
RACT (LT GRN) u u
RACT SEG3
(LT GRN) (BLK/YEL)
^ y

YES-Go to step 14.
YES-Replace the pow ertailgate control unit.B
NO-Go to step 16.
NO-Go to step 19.
unit.
I I
1 2 3 L\ 5 6
I--- L..1
........ iJ Lj
RACT(LTGRN)
YES-Replace a the tailgate closer u nit.B
19. D isc o n n e c t th e 6 P c o n n e c to r fro m th e ta ilg a te c lo s e r DTC B1384: Tailgate Closer Unit Half Latch
unit.
20. At the tailgate closer unit side, check fo r continuity
between tailgate closer unit 6P connector term inals
No. 1 and No. 4.
ON (II).
I I
1 2 5 6 4. Clear the DTCs with the HDS.
u Ll
SEG3 RACT
{BLK/YEL) (LT GRN) Is D T C B 1 3 8 4 in d ic a te d ?
— (§ )— YES-Go to step 6.
Terminal side of male terminals NO-lnterm ittent failure. The powertailgate system is
closer unit and the powertailgate control u n i t . B
NO-Replace the tailgate closer u n itB
8. Turn the tailgate lock latch to the fully-closed position
unit.
No. 1 and No. 3.
I I
1 2 3 4 5 6
Ll u
SEG3 HALF
(BLK/YEL) (GRN)
YES-Faulty half latch switch, replace the tailgate
closer unit.B
11. Reconnect the 6P connector to the tailgate closer unit. 16. Turn the emergency lever of the tailgate and release
the tailgate lock latch from the fully-locked position.
(14P). 17. Check for continuity between power tailgate control
ground.

UNIT CONNECTOR C (14P) C ?
.n ........... r n
1 2 3 4 5 / 7
C J HALF 8 9 10 11 13 14
r m /
(GRN) y y
HALF 1 2 3 4 5 / 7 SEG3 (BLK/YEL)
(GRN) 8 9
---- |j3---- 10 11 /
13 14
... L1----
Wire side of female terminals Is th e re c o n tin u ity ?

NO-Go to step 18.
YES-Go to step 14.
NO-Go to step 16. unit.
14. Disconnect the 6P connector from the tailgate closer 19. At the tailgate closer unit side, check for continuity
unit. between tailgate closer unit 6P connector terminals
No. 1 and No. 3.

I I
1 2 3 4 5 6
u U
1 2 3 4 5 6 SEG3 HALF
(BLK/YEL) (GRN)
HALF (GRN)
Is th e re c o n tin u ity ? closer unit and the powertailgate control unit.B
YES-Replace the tailgate closer u nit.B
DTCB1386': Power Tailgate Sensor Pulse A 8. Measure the voltage between power tailgate control
unit connector B (20P) terminals No. 14 and No. 18
Circuit Malfunction
while the tailgate is opening and closing with the
NOTE; keyless transmitter or the inside tailgate switch.
• If the power tailgate does not operate, test the m otor
(see page 22-646).
• If you are troubleshooting m ultiple DTCs, be sure to UNIT CONNECTOR B (20P)
follow the instructions in B-CAN System Diagnosis
n _n ,p... o.
1 2 3 8 9 10
2. Close the tailgate automatically with the keyless 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 1 9 2 0
transm itter or inside tailgate switch.
SENA SEG1
3. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), and then back to (PUR) (PNK/BLU)
ON (II).
Is D T C B 1 3 8 6 in d ic a te d ? D o e s it a lte rn a te b e tw e e n a b o u t 0 V a n d 5 V ?
N O T E : D ig ita l v o ltm e te r w ill r e a d a b o u t 2 .5 V.
YES-Go to step 6.
N O-lnterm ittent failure. The pow ertailgate system is
OK at this tim e. Checkfor loose or poor connections at NO-Go to step 9.
the power tailgate control unit connector, and at the 9. Disconnect powertailgate control unit connector B
drive unit connector.B (20P).
6. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 10. Disconnect power tailgate drive unit connector B (8P).
7. Connect the voltm eter to the power tailgate control 11. Check for continuity between power tailgate control
unit connector B (20P) term inals No. 14 and No. 18. unit connector B (20P) terminal No. 14 and body
ground.

n n ..........*“! r*......n ...n ...
1 2 3 / 5 / / 8 9 10
/ 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
LJ --- L —
SENA (PUR)
NO-Go to step 12.
12. Check for continuity between power tailgate control DTC B1387: Power Tailgate Sensor Pulse B
unit connector B (20P) terminals No. 14 and No. 18
Circuit Malfunction
and powertailgate drive unit connector B (8P)
terminals No. 5 and No. 8 respectively. NOTE;
• If the power tailgate does not operate, test the motor
POWER TAILGATE CONTROL (see page 22-646).
_n__n _______ ?a dL. .....CL. JTL. follow the instructions in B-CAN System Diagnosis
1 2 3 / 5 / / 8 9 10 Test Mode A (see page 22-155).
/ y
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 2 0
u 1. Open the tailgate w ith the tailgate outside handle.
Wire side of SEG1
SENA (PUR) female (PNK/BLU) 2. Close the tailgate automatically with the keyless
terminals A ,
transm itter or inside tailgate switch.
SENA (PUR) ON (II).
1 . i = l .. 2 3 SEG1 4. Clear the DTCs with the HDS.
(PNK/BLU)
4 5 6 7 8 5. Check for DTCs w ith the HDS.
POWER TAILGATE DRIVE UNIT Is D T C B 1 3 8 7 in d ic a te d ?
CONNECTOR B (8P)
YES-Faulty power tailgate sensor A, replace the OK at this time. Check for loose or poor connections at
power tailgate drive unit (see page 22-649).B the power tailgate control unit connectors, and at the
power tailgate drive unit connector.B
NO-Repair an open in the w ire.l
7. Connect the voltm eter to power tailgate control unit
connector B (20P) terminals No. 15 and No. 18.
8. Measure the voltage between power tailgate control 12. Check for continuity between power tailgate control
unit connector B (20P) term inals No. 15 and No. 18 unit connector B (20P) terminals No. 15 and No. 18
while the tailgate is opening and closing w ith the and powertailgate drive unit connector B (8P)
keyless transm itter or inside tailgate switch. terminals No. 6 and No. 8 respectively.

POWER TAILGATE CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR B (20P)
UNIT CONNECTOR B (20P) .... n....n_.. c n r
Wire side of 1 2 3 5 8 9 10
female / / /
n _J _n__n__ terminals 1 2 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 2 0
/ u
u
1 2 3 / 5 / /I 8 9 10 SEG1
SENB (GRY/BLU) (PNK/E
/ 12 13 14 1 5 1 6 17 18 19 2 0
LJ u
SENB SEG1 SENB (GRY/BLU)

(GRY/BLU) — ( 9 V - (PNK/BLU)
1 J = L 2 3 SEG1
Wire side of female terminals (PNK/BLU)
4 5 6 7 8
D o e s it a lte rn a te b e tw e e n a b o u t 0 V a n d 5 V ? POWER TAILGATE DRIVE UNIT

CONNECTOR B (3P)
NOTE: Digital voltmeter w ill read about 2.5 V. Wire side of female terminals
YES-Replace the power tailgate control u n it.B
YES-Faulty power tailgate sensor B, replace the
NO-Go to step 9.
power tailgate drive unit (see page 22-649).B
9. Disconnect pow ertailgate control unit connector B
(20P).
10. Disconnect pow ertailgate drive unit connector B (8P).
unit connector B (20P) term inal No. 15 and body
ground.

n D ..n .n..
1 2 3 / 5 / / 8 9 10
CM
o
/ 12 13 14 1 5 16 17 18 19
SENB (GRY/BLU)
NO-Go to step 12.
DTC B1388: Power Tailgate Drive Motor 9. Using jum per wires, connect battery power to power
tailgate control unit connector A (5P) terminal No. 3
Circuit Malfunction
(or No. 5) and ground the terminal No. 5 or (No. 3).
Test Mode A (see page 22-155). POWER TAILGATE CONTROL UNIT
CONNECTOR A (5P)
2. Close the tailgate automatically with the keyless
transm itter or inside tailgate switch. GRN RED
3. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), and then back to JUMPER WIRE
ON (II).
© « ® © « ©
Is D T C B 1 3 8 8 in d ic a te d ? Wire side of female terminals
YES-Go to step 6.
10. Check for motor operation.
D o e s th e m o to r ru n n o rm a lly ?
the power tailgate control unit connectors, and at the YES-Go to step 11.
power tailgate drive unit connector.B
NO-Faulty powertailgate motor, replace the power
6. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). tailgate drive unit (see page 22-649).B
7. Disconnect drive unit connector A (2P). 11. Disconnect power tailgate control unit connector B
(20P).
unit connector A (5P) terminals No. 3 and No. 5 and 12. Checkfor continuity between powertailgate control
body ground individually. unit connector B (20P) terminals No. 9 and No. 20 and

CONNECTOR A (5P)
(CLU+ (BLU)
. n ..n ........... Si r> n n
PTG— (GRN) PTG+ (RED) 1 2 3 / 5 / / 8 9 10
/ 16 17 18 19 2 0
12 13 14 15 --------------
(J (g ) CLU- (GRY)

YES-Repair a short to ground in the w ire.l
NO-Go to step 9.
NO-Go to step 13.
(cont'd)
13. Using jum per wires, connect battery power to power 15. Measure the voltage between power tailgate control
tailgate control unit connector B (20P) term inal No. 9 unit connector B (20P) terminal No. 12 and body
and ground the terminal No. 20. Check for clutch ground.
operation.
POWER TAILGATE CONTROL POWER TAILGATE CONTROL

UNIT CONNECTOR B (20P) UNIT CONNECTOR B (20P)
JUMPER
WIRE
CLU + (BLU) n n S r* n n
n 1 2 3 / 5 / / 8 9 10
1 2 3 8 9 10 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
/
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 1 9 2 0
VMP2 (WHT)
CLU- (GRY)
0 © Wire side of female terminals

C a n y o u h e a r th e c lu tc h o p e r a te ?
YES-Go to step 16.
YES-Go to step 14.
NO-Check the No. 17 (20 A) fuse in the driver's
NO-Faulty power tailgate clutch, replace the power under-dash fuse/relay box. Ifthe fuse is OK, checkfor
tailgate drive unit (see page 22-649).■ an open or high resistance in the wire between the
driver's under-dash fuse/relay box and the power
14. Measure the voltage between powertailgate control
tailgate control u nit.B
unit connector A (5P) term inal No. 2 and body ground.
unit connector A (5P) terminals No. 1 and No. 4 and
CONNECTOR A (5P) body ground individually.

1 n CONNECTOR A (5P)
r VMP1
3 4 5 (WHT/BLU)
PG1 (BRN)
PG2 (BLK)
YES-Go to step 15.
NO-Check the No. 4 (40 A) fuse in the auxiliary Is th e re c o n tin u ity ?
under-hood fuse box. If the fuse is OK, checkfor an YES-Replace the power tailgate control u nit.B
open or high resistance in the wire between the
auxiliary under-hood fuse box and the pow ertailgate NO-Repair an open in the wire or poor ground (G702)
control u n it.B or an open the ground w ire .B
DTC B1389: Power Tailgate Motor Clutch 10. Measure the voltage between power tailgate control
Circuit Malfunction
ground.
Test Mode A (see page 22-155). POWER TAILGATE CONTROL
2. Close the tailgate automatically with the keyless n n S .........CL ..XL.
transm itter or inside tailgate switch. 1 2 3 / 5 / / 8 9 10
CM
O
3. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), and then back to / 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
ON (II). ----L— ----L—
VMP2 (WHT)
Is D T C B 1 3 8 9 in d ic a te d ? Wire side of female terminals
YES-Go to step 6.
the powertailgate control unit connectors, and at the NO-Check the No. 17 (20 A) fuse in the driver's
drive unit connector.B under-dash fuse/relay box. If the fuse is OK, check for
an open or high resistance in the wire between the
7. Open the tailgate. tailgate control u nit.B
8. Disconnect powertailgate control unit connector B
(20P).
unit connector B (20P) terminals No. 9 and No. 20 and

CLU+ (BLU)
k
n _o.
8 10
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
CLU- (GRY)
YES-Repair a short to ground in the wire. If the wire is
OK, replace the powertailgate drive unit (see page
22-649).B
NO-Go to step 10.
DTC B1390: Power Tailgate Closer Function 10. Check for continuity between power tailgate control
unit connector C (14P) terminals No. 1 and No. 11, and
Error
NOTE: If you are troubleshooting multiple DTCs,,be sure
to follow the instructions in B-CAN System Diagnosis POWER TAILGATE CONTROL
Test Mode A (see page 22-155). UNIT CONNECTOR C (14P)
1. With the tailgate closed, pull the tailgate outside FULL (LT GRN/BLK)
handle and w ait fo r 10 seconds.
HALF
2. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), and then back to (GRN)
ON (II).
3. Clear the DTCs w ith the HDS. 10 11 13 14
SEG3 (BLK/YEL)
4. Listen for the sound of the latch releasing.
Is th e re s o u n d ?
YES-Go to step 5.
NO-Go to step 13.
YES-Go to the power tailgate control unit input test
Is D T C B 1 3 9 0 in d ic a te d ? (see page 22-644) .B
YES-Go to step 6. NO-Go to step 11.
N O -lnterm ittent failure. The power tailgate system is 11. Disconnect the 6P connector from the tailgate closer
OK at this time. Check for loose or poor connections at unit.
closer m otor connector.B
6. Check for DTCs w ith the HDS. No. 1 and No. 2, and terminals No. 1 and No. 3
respectively.
A r e D T C B 1 3 8 0 , B 1 3 8 1 , B 1 3 8 2 , B 1 3 8 3 , a n d /o r B 1 3 8 4
YES-Troubleshoot the indicated DTCs.B TAILGATE CLOSER UNIT 6P CONNECTOR
NO-Go to step 7.
7. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). SEG3
(BLK/YEL) I I
8. Open the tailgate. - 1 2 3 4 5 6
J 1

FULL HALF
(14P). (LT GRN/BLK) (GRN)
closer unit and powertailgate control unit connector
C(14P).B
13. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 18. Measure the voltage between power tailgate control
ground.
motor.
16. Disconnect power tailgate control unit connector B UNIT CONNECTOR B (20P)
(20P).
CO
/ /
00
CM CM
CO
tailgate closer m otor 2P connector term inals No. 1
1 / 5 10
and No. 2 individually. / 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
VMP2 (WHT)
TAILGATE CLOSER MOTOR 2P CONNECTOR
J tt-L
CLM ~ (BLK/RED) Wire side of
female terminals
CLM+ (RED)
YES-Go to step 19.
—
CLIVI— iCLM+ (RED) NO-Check the No. 17 (20 A) fuse in the driver's
(BLK/RED) n __ rJ n n under-dash fuse/relay box. If the fuse is OK, check for
1 2 3 / 5 / 8 9 10 an open or high resistance in the w ire between the
/ driver's under-dash fuse/relay box and the power
Csl
o
/ 12: 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 tailgate control u n it f l
POWER TAILGATE CONTROL 19. Check for continuity between power tailgate control
UNIT CONNECTOR B (20P) unit connector A (5P) term inal No. 4 and body ground.
Is th e re c o n tin u ity ? POWER TAILGATE CONTROL UNIT
CONNECTOR A (5P)
YES-Go to step 18.
1 f—1 2
3 4 5
PG2 (BLK)
YES-Go to step 20.
or an open in the ground w ir e . l
20. Turn the tailgate lock latch to the fully-closed position 25. Disconnect the 6P connector from the tailgate closer
. using a screwdriver. unit.
21. Reconnect the tailgate closer m otor 2P connector. 26. Check for continuity between power tailgate control
22. Using jum per wires, connect battery power to power body ground individually.
tailgate control unit connector B (20P) term inal No. 2
(or No. 1) and ground the term inal No. 1 (or No. 2)
momentarily. POWER TAILGATE CONTROL
POWER TAILGATE CONTROL CLM+ (RED)

JUMPER UNIT CONNECTOR B (20P)
WIRE
CLM+ (RED]I 10
- n n ............. S r* n n 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
1 2 3 / 5 / / 8 9 10 CLM— (BLK/RED)
/ 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 2 0
a . u
CLM- (BLK/RED)
— © « ®
—
D o e s th e m o to r ru n s m o o th ly ?
NO-Replace the tailgate closer u n it.B
YES-Replace the power tailgate control u n it.B
NO-Go to step 23.
23. Reconnect the 6P connector to the tailgate closer unit.
unit connector B (20P) term inals No. 1 and No. 2 and

ground.

CLU+ (BLU)
1 2 3 / 5 / / 8 9 10 CM
o
/ 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
NO-Check the No. 17 (20 A) fuse in the driver's
under-dash fuse/relay box. If the fuse is OK, check for
an open or high resistance in the w ire between the
tailgate control unit.B
NOTE: Before troubleshooting the power tailgate system, troubleshoot the m ultiplex integrated control system using
2. Remove the left rear pillar trim (see page 20-103).
3. Disconnect the connectors A (5P), B (20P), and C (14P) from the pow ertailgate control unit (D).
CONNECTOR A (5P) CONNECTOR B (20P) CONNECTOR C (14P)

BRN WHT/BLU BRN/WHT BLU/BLK WHT/RED
? N>S^ "_P- n S ? n
8 10 1 2 3 4 5 /
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 13 14
8 9 10 11 / ---
i.J -h r
X
WHT BLK YEL
• If the term inals are bent, loose or corroded, repair them as necessary, and recheck the system.
• If the term inals look OK, go to step 5.
5. With the connector stii l disconnected, do this input test at the connector.
obtained
B3 BRN/WHT Under all Connect terminal B10 to terminal • Blown No. 7 (7.5 A) fuse in the
conditions B3 w ith a jum per wire: driver's under-dash fuse/relay box
The beeper should sound. • Faulty powertailgate outside
beeper
wire
6. Reconnect all connectors to the power tailgate control unit, and do these input tests at the follow ing connectors.
• If the input test proves OK, replace the power tailgate control unit.
obtained
A2 WHT/BLU Under all Measure the voltage to ground: • Blown No. 4 (40 A) fuse in the
conditions There should be battery voltage. auxiliary under-hood fuse box
wire
B12 WHT Under all Measure the voltage to ground: • Blown No. 17 (20 A) fuse in the
conditions There should be battery voltage. driver's under-dash fuse/relay box
• Blown No. 20 (40 A) fuse in the
under-hood fuse/relay box
wire
B10 WHT/RED Under all Measure the voltage to ground: • Blown No. 7 (7.5 A) fuse in the
conditions There should be battery voltage. driver's under-dash fuse/relay box
• Blown No. 15 (40 A) fuse in the
under-hood fuse/relay box
wire
C14 YEL Ignition switch Measure the voltage to ground: • Blown No. 21 (7.5 A) fuse in the
ON (II) There should be battery voltage. driver's under-dash fuse/relay box
wire
A1 BRN In all ignition Measure the voltage to ground: • Poor ground (G702) or an open the
switch There should be less than 0.2 V. ground wire
wire
A4 BLK In all ignition Measure the voltage to ground: • Poor ground (G702) or an open the
B19 switch There should be less than 0.2 V. ground wire
wire
B8 BLU/BLK Shift lever in P Measure the voltage to ground: • Faulty transmission range switch
position There should be less than 0.2 V. • Poor ground (G101, G102) or an
open the ground wire
wire
Power Tailgate Motor Test Dashboard Power Tailgate Switch
T est/Replacement
1. Open the tailgate and remove the left rear pillar (see 1. Remove the driver's switch panel (see page 20-135).
page 20-103).
2. Push out the powertailgate switch (A) from behind
2. Disconnect the 2P connector (A) from the power the dashboard, and disconnect the 5P connector (B)
tailgate m otor (B). from the switch.
i r r
1 2 3 4 5

3. Close the tailgate manually. switch position according to the table.
4. Check the m otor operation by connecting battery

power to term inal No. 2 and ground to term inal No. 1. 1 2 4 5
The m otor should run (tailgate open).
NOTE: Be careful not to pinch your hands. O --o
5. After opening the tailgate, connect battery power to

term inal No. 1 and ground terminal No. 2. The m otor
should run (tailgate closed). 4. If the continuity check is not as specified, replace the
illumination bulb (A) or the switch.
6. Ifth e m otor does not run or fails to run smoothly,
replace the drive unit assembly (see page 22-649).
Inside Tailgate Switch Power Tailgate Latch/Ratchet
Test/Replacement Switch Test
1. Carefully pry out the inner tailgate switch (A), and 1. Remove the tailgate trim panel (see page 20-113).
disconnect the 5P connector (B) from the switch.
2. Disconnect the 6P connector (A) from the tailgate
closer unit (B).
n I
Terminal side of
1 2 3 4 5 6 ' male terminals
1 2 3 4 5


latch position according to the table.
Terminal
r\
Position
illumination bulb or the switch. Full latched
Between the fully-

latched position to -O
released position
Released

tailgate latch assembly (see page 20-293).
Power Tailgate Closer Motor Test Power Tailgate Outer Handle
Switch Test/Replacement
1. Remove the tailgate trim panel (see page 20-113). 1. Remove the tailgate trim panel (see page 20-113).
2. Disconnect the 2P connector (A) from the closer 2. Disconnect the 2P connector (A) from the power
motor (B). tailgate outer handle switch (B).
3. Check motor operation by connecting battery power

to tailgate closer unit 2P connector terminal No. 2 and
ground to terminal No. 1. To prevent damage to the
3. Check for continuity between tailgate outer handle
motor, apply battery voltage only momentarily. The
switch 2P connector terminals No. 1 and No. 2.
motor should run.
• There should be continuity when the tailgate outer
4. If the motor does not run or fails to run smoothly, handle is pulled.
replace the tailgate latch assembly (see page 20-293). • There should be no continuity when the tailgate
outer handle is released.
4. If the continuity check is not as specified, remove the
two nuts, then remove the tailgate trim (see page
20-113), and the switch.
Power Tailgate Outside Beeper Drive Unit Replacement
T est/Replacement
1. Remove the rear bumper (see page 20-248). 1. Remove the left rear pillar (see page 20-103) and the
headliner (see page 20-116).
tailgate beeper (B), then remove the beeper. 2. Disconnect the 2P and 8P connectors (A) from the
drive unit (B).
3. Test the beeper by connecting battery power to

terminal No. 1 and ground to terminal No. 2. The 3. Close the tailgate, then remove the bolt and support
beeper should click. strut (C).
4. Ifthe beeper does not click, replace it. 4. Remove the mounting bolts and drive unit (A).
8 x 1.25 mm 8 x 1.25 mm
22 N-m (2.2 kgf-m, 16 Ibf-ft) 22 N-m (2.2 kgf-m, 16 Ibf-ft)
Pinch Sensor Replacement

2. Remove the clips, screws and nuts from the pinch
sensor (A).
NOTE: The illustration shows the right side pinch
sensor, the left side is symmetrical.
3. Disconnect the 2P connector (B) from the pinch

sensor.
Touring model
CORNER PARKING SENSOR BEEPER and

BACK-UP SENSOR BEEPER
(In the gauge control module)

FRONT CORNER PARKING SENSORS


System Description
Parking and Back-up Sensor System (Touring model)

The parking and back-up sensor system has a sensor at each corner of the vehicle and two back-up sensors in the rear
bumper. The sensors send out ultra-sonic sound waves, receive waves reflected by an obstacle, determines the
distance, and uses the beeper and LEDs on the Multi-information display (MID) to tell the driver that an obstacle is near.
• The parking sensors work anytime the shifter is out of park, until the vehicle reaches about 10 mph (16 km/h). They do
not come back on until slowing down to about 5 mph (8 km/h) or less.
• The back-up sensors only activate in reverse, until the vehicle reaches 10 mph (16 km/h). They will not activate again
until slowing back down to 5 mph (8 km/h).
• The parking and back-up sensor system is inactive with its main switch OFF.
• The parking sensor beeper (CBZ), back-up sensor beeper (BBZ) and LED's L1 through L5, activate for 1 second when
the ignition switch is turned from LOCK (0) to ON (II) and the parking and back-up sensor main switch is ON.
• The parking sensor beeper (CBZ), back-up sensor beeper (BBZ) and LED's L1 through L5, activate for 1 second when
the ignition switch is ON (II) and the parking and back-up sensor main switch is turned from OFF to ON.
m The parking and back-up sensors must be free of debris, snow, and ice to work correctly.
• A system check is performed each time:
- The ignition switch is turned to ON (II) with the parking and back-up sensor switch ON.
- The parking and back-up sensor switch is turned ON when the ignition switch is already ON.
- When shifted into reverse the first time.
- When shifted into reverse after 60 seconds has elapsed from the last system check.
® If a failure occurs, the MID displays "Check Parking Sensor System" and the CBZ/BBZ beeper(s) and LED activate the
system check. This is signaled by two tones followed by two more tones, then the system returns to the normal state.
The failed sensor will continue to be displayed and the MID will show "Warning Approaching Object", even when
there is no object nearby.
Comer
• The sensor determines between about 1.6 ft (50 cm) to 1.3 ft (40 cm), 1.3 ft (40 cm) to 1 ft (30 cm) and 1 ft (30 cm) or less
from the obstacle to activate the warning indicators accordingly.
• The LED (L1 to L4) and the corner beeper (CBZ) are used to alert the driver, and the ON/OFF time is varied as shown in
the table below according to the sensed distance.
• If an obstacle is sensed by more than one sensor, the beeper sounds in synch with the LED indicator of the sensor that
is closest to the obstacle.
Sensed distance OFF time ON time

About 0 to 1 ft (30 cm) 0 Continuous
About 1 ft (30 cm) to 1.3 ft (40 cm) 75 ms 75 ms
About 1.3 ft (40 cm) to 1.6 ft (50 cm) 225 ms 75 ms
Back-up
• The sensor determines between about 5.6 ft (170 cm) to 3.3 ft (100 cm), 3.3 ft (100 cm) to 2 ft (60 cm) and 2 ft (60 cm) or
less from the obstacle to activate the indicators accordingly.
9 The LED (L5) and the back-up beeper (BBZ) are used to alert the driver, and the ON/OFF time is varied as shown in the
table below according to the sensed distance.
• If beeper sounds in synch with the LED indication.
Sensed distance OFF time ON time

About 0 to 2 ft (60 cm) 0 Continuous
About 2 ft (60 cm) to 3.3 ft (100 cm) 75 ms 75 ms
About 3.3 ft (100 cm) to 5.6 ft (170 cm) 225 ms 75 ms
Circuit Diagram
Touring model
UNDER-HOOD
FUSE/RELAY BOX
BATTERY
YEL ■ W HT/RED -
IG NITION SW ITCH
No 23 (IG)
(50 A)
B1 A2 /b a t \
- WHT - WHT -4-0 0 4 — BLK/YEL YEL ■
DRIVER'S v ^ y
UNDER-DASH IG1 HO T in ON (II)
FUSE/RELAY and START (III)
BOX
GRN GRN
BACK-UP
LIGHTS
PARKING and BACK-UP SENSOR CONTROL U N IT
VSP
j 22 j 13
PCM
y
BLU/W HT BLK/RED
BLU/BLK BLU/BLK WHT
RED/W HT BLK/RED RED/YEL BLK/RED

V
PCM BLU/BLK
7
a | \ TRA NSM ISS IO N TRA NSM ISS IO N
RANGE SWITCH RANGE SWITCH
(ON: In position P) (ON: In position R)
BLK BLK
I !
G101 G101
G102 G102
BRN/WHT BRN/WHT BRN/WHT BRN/WHT
I2 1 I2 1 I2
LEFT FRONT RIGHT FRONT LEFT REAR RIGHT REAR

CORNER PARKING CORNER PARKING CORNER PARKING CORNER PARKING
SENSOR SENSOR SENSOR SENSOR
.XL
Parking and Back-up Sensor Control Unit Input Test
Touring model
2. Disconnect the 22P connector (A) from the parking and back-up sensor control unit (B).
BRN/YEL
GRN/ORN B L U /Y E L / LT BLU GRN
t5 7 7Z ^9
CO
CD
1 4 /
10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 / 19 20 21 22
GRN/RED / RED/WHT \ RED/BLU \ YEL/RED \ BLK \ BLU/WHT

WHT/BLU BLK/RED BLK/ORN GRY BLU/BLK
4. With the connector still disconnected, do these input tests at the connector.
• If all the input tests prove OK, control unit must be faulty; replace it.
obtained
17 YEL/RED Ignition switch Connect to ground with a • Blown No. 21 (7.5 A) fuse in the
15 RED/BLU ON (II) and shift jumper wire: driver's under-dash fuse/relay box
16 BLK/ORN lever in R The corner parking sensor • Faulty gauge control module
14 GRN/ORN indicator should come on. • An open or high resistance in the
5 BLU/YEL Ignition switch Connect to ground with a wire
ON (II) and shift jumper wire:
lever in R The back-up sensor indicator
should come on.
6 BRN/YEL Ignition switch Connect to ground with a • Blown No. 21 (7.5 A) fuse in the
ON (II) and jumper wire: driver's under-dash fuse/relay box
parking and The corner parking sensor • Faulty gauge control module
back-up sensor beeper should sound. • Faulty parking and back-up sensor
switch ON switch
19 GRY Ignition switch Connect to ground with a • An open or high resistance in the
ON (II) and jumper wire: wire
parking and The back-up sensor beeper
back-up sensor should sound.
switch ON
21 BLU/BLK Ignition switch Measure the voltage to • An open or high resistance in the
ON (II) and shift ground: wire
lever in P There should be less than • Faulty transmission range switch
0.2 V. • Poor ground (G101, G102) or an
22 BLU/WHT NOTE: Jump the Check for continuity between An open or high resistance in the wire
SCS line with the terminal No. 22 and PCM
HDS, then connector A (49P) terminal
disconnect PCM No. 30:
connector A (49P) There should be continuity.
Check for continuity between A short to ground in the wire
terminal No. 22 and body
ground:
4 BRN/WHT Disconnect left Check for continuity between An open or high resistance in the wire
front corner terminal No. 4 and each corner
parking sensor parking sensor terminal No. 2:
connectors There should be continuity.
ground:
(cont'd)
Parking and Back-up Sensor Control Unit Input Test (cont'd)
Touring model
not obtained
2 GRY/BLU Disconnect the Check for continuity between An open or high resistance in the
left rear corner terminal No. 2 and left rear corner wire
parking sensor parking sensor terminal No. 1:
connector. There should be continuity.
terminal No. 2 and body ground:
1 BLK/WHT Disconnect the Check for continuity between An open or high resistance in the
right rear corner terminal No. 1 and right rear wire
parking sensor corner parking sensor terminal
connector. No. 1:
10 GRN/RED Disconnect the Check for continuity between An open or high resistance in the
right front corner terminal No. 10 and right front wire
connector. No. 1:
ground:
11 WHT/BLU Disconnect the Check for continuity between An open or high resistance in the
left front corner terminal No. 11 and left front wire
connector. No. 1:
ground:
13 BLK/RED Disconnect the Check for continuity between An open or high resistance in the
back-up sensor terminal No. 13 and each back-up wire
connectors. sensor terminal No. 2:
ground:
12 RED/WHT Disconnect the Check for continuity between An open or high resistance in the
left back-up terminal No. 12 and left back-up wire
sensor sensor terminal No. 1:
ground:
3 RED/YEL Disconnect the Check for continuity between An open or high resistance in the
right back-up terminal No. 3 and right back-up wire
sensor sensor terminal No. 1:
5. Reconnect the 22P connector to the parking/back-up sensor control unit, and do these input tests at the follow ing
connector.
• If any test indicates a problem , find and correct the cause, then recheck the system.
• If all the input tests prove OK, control unit m ust be faulty; replace it.
obtained
9 GRN Ignition switch Measure the voltage to • Blown No. 21 (7.5 A) fuse in the
ON (II), shift lever ground: driver's under-dash fuse/relay box
in R position There should be battery • Faulty MICU
voltage. • An open or high resistance in the
wire
7 LT BLU Ignition switch Measure the voltage to • Blown No. 21 (7.5 A) fuse in the
ON (II) and ground: driver's under-dash fuse/relay box
parking and There should be battery • Faulty parking and back-up sensor
back-up sensor voltage. switch
switch ON • An open or high resistance in the
wire
20 BLK In all ignition Measure the voltage to • Poor ground (G501) or open in the
switch position ground: ground wire
There should less than 0.2 V. • An open or high resistance in the
wire
Parking and Back-up Sensor Switch Parking and Back-up Sensor
T est/Replacement Replacement
Touring model Touring model
1. Remove the driver's switch panel (see page 20-135). 1. Front: Remove the front splash shield (see page
20-281).
2. Disconnect the 5P connector (A) from the parking and
back-up sensor switch (B). Rear: Remove the rear bumper (see page 20-248).
2. Disconnect the 2P connector (A) from the back-up
sensor (B).
3. Push the switch out of the dashboard.

4. Check for continuity between the terminals in each 3. Disconnect the retainer (C) and push out the sensor
switch position according to the table. from behind the bumper.

illumination bulbs (A) or the switch.
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) {if Audio. Navigation, and Telematics
maintenance Is required)
these circuits.
Audio, Entertainment, Navigation, and Telematics
Audio, Entertainment, * V o i c e Control Switch

Navigation, and Telematics Removal/Installation........... 23-295
Special T o o l s ..................... 23-2 Navigation Unit
D T C T roubleshooting I n d e x ...... 23-3 Removal/Installation........... 23-295
G P S Antenna
Audio System
Removal/Installation..... ...... 23-296
C o m p o n e n t Location I n d e x ....... 23-4
Voice Control Switch T e s t ........ 23-297
General Troubleshooting
Rearview C a m e r a
Inform a t i o n .............. .......23-6
Removal/Installation........... 23-297
S y m p t o m Troubleshooting Index. 23-8
Navigation Display
S y s t e m Description — ........... 23-10
Removal/Installation........... 23-299
Circuit D i a g r a m ................... 23-62
Self-diagnostic F u n c t i o n .......... 23-80 Rear Entertainment System
Error C o d e s ....................... 23-85 C o m p o n e n t Location I n d e x ..... .. 23-300
S y m p t o m T r o u b l e s h o o t i n g ....... 23-87 S y m p t o m Troubleshooting Index. 23-302
S o u n d Quality D i a g n o s i s ......... 23-162 S y s t e m Description............... 23-303
* A u d i o Unit Removal/Installation... 23-167 Circuit D i a g r a m ................... 23-312
Stereo Amplifier Self-diagnostic F u n c t i o n .......... 23-334
Removal/Installation........... 23-169 S y m p t o m T r o u b l e s h o o t i n g .... . 23-340
X M Receiver Removal/Installation .23-170 * D V D Player Unit
A u d i o Disc C h a n g e r Removal/Installation........... 23-357
Removal/Installation........... 23-170 R e a r Controller a n d S c r e e n
Active N o i s e Cancellation Unit Removal/Installation........... 23-358
Removal/Installation........... 23-171 Auxiliary J a c k A s s e m b l y
Active N o i s e Cancellation Replacement — ............... 23-360
Microphone Wireless H e a d p h o n e Battery
Removal/Installation........... 23-172 R e p l a c e m e n t ................... 23-360
S p e a k e r T e s t / R e p l a c e m e n t ....... 23-172 Wireless R e m o t e Control Battery
* A u d i o R e m o t e Sw i t c h T e s t ....... 23-175 R e p l a c e m e n t ................... 23-361
Auxiliary J a c k A s s e m b l y
R e p l a c e m e n t ................... 23-176 HandsFreeLink System
A M / F M A n t e n n a Amplifier C o m p o n e n t Location I n d e x ....... 23-362
R e p l a c e m e n t ................... 23-176 G eneral Troubleshooting
X M A n t e n n a R e p l a c e m e n t ........ 23-177 Information — ................. 23-363
A M / F M A n t e n n a R e p a i r ........... 23-177 S y m p t o m Troubleshooting Index. 23-374
S y s t e m Description............... 23-375
Navigation S y s t e m H F L S y s t e m T r o u b l e s h o o t i n g .... 23-376
C o m p o n e n t Location I n d e x ....... 23-178 Circuit D i a g r a m ................... 23-378
General Troubleshooting D T C T r o u b l e s h o o t i n g ............. 23-380
I n f o r mation ..................... 23-180 S y m p t o m T r o u b l e s h o o t i n g ..... .. 23-385
S y m p t o m Troubleshooting Index. 23-187 * H a n d s F r e e L i n k Control Unit
S y s t e m Description............... 23-191 Removal/Installation........... 23-388
Circuit D i a g r a m ................... 23-224 Control Unit Input T e s t ........... 23-389
S y m p t o m T r o u b l e s h o o t i n g ....... 23-228 H F L Sw i t c h T e s t .................. 23-390
S y s t e m Diagnostic M o d e ......... 23-276 * H F L Sw it c h Removal/Installation.. 23-390
F orced Starting of D i s p l a y ........ 23-294
D V D - R O M R e p l a c e m e n t .......... 23-294
A u d io , E n te r ta in m e n t, N a v ig a tio n , a n d T e le m a tic s
Special Tools
Ref.No. Tool Number Descri ption Qty

® 07AAZ-SDBA100 Diagnostic CD 1
(D 07AAZ-SDBA200 Skip Test CD 1
(D 07AAZ-SDBA300 Skip Test CD 1
© 07PAZ-0010100 SCS Service Connector 1
CD (D <D
I
HandsFreeLink Control Unit

DTC Descri ption DTC type Page
B1750 Communication bus line error (Bus-off) Loss of DTC
communication Troubleshooting
(see page 22-172)
B1775 Microphone input/output short to power/open Signal error DTC
Troubleshooting
(see page 23-380)
B1776 Microphone input/output short to ground/open Signal error DTC
Troubleshooting
(see page 23-381)
B1779 HFL switch (HFL TALK/HFL BACK buttons) circuit open/short Signal error DTC
to power Troubleshooting
(see page 23-382)
B1780 HFL switch (HFL TALK/HFL BACK buttons) circuit short Signal error DTC
Troubleshooting
(see page 23-384)
B1792 HandsFreeLink control unit internal error Internal error DTC
Troubleshooting
(see page 23-385)
AUDIO UNIT (Premium audio system

without navigation)
Connector Inputs and Outputs, page 23-34
AUDIO UNIT (Non-premium audio system
without navigation, 6 CD type)
AUDIO UNIT (Non-premium audio system
without navigation, 1 CD type)
AM/FM ANTENNA SUBLEAD
AUDIO DISC CHANGER
(With navigation)
AM /FM ANTENNA LEAD Connector Inputs and Outputs, page 23-51
RIGHT TWEETER
(With climate control)
AUDIO UNIT (Premium audio

system, with navigation)
AUDIO UNIT (Non-Premium

audio system, with navigation)
STEREO AMPLIFIER
FRONT PASSENGER'S
DOOR SPEAKER
SUBWOOFER
('07 model with premium audio system
and '08-10 models with ANC)
AM /FM ANTENNA AMPLIFIER
AM /FM ANTENNA RIGHT REAR SPEAKER
Repair, page 23-177 Replacement, page 23-173
, LEFT TWEETER ACTIVE NOISE CANCELLATION FRONT MICROPHONE
('08-10 models with ANC)
ACTIVE NOISE CANCELLATION UNIT

('07 model with ANC and
*08-10 Premium audio system)

('08-10 m odels without premium audio
system/with ANC)
DRIVER'S DOOR SPEAKER

XM ANTENNA
(Wi th XM)
AUDIO REMOTE SWITCH Replacement, page 23-177
(With cli mate control)
Test, page 23-175
ACTIVE NOISE CANCELLATION
REAR MICROPHONE
('08-10 models with ANC)
AUXILIARY JACK ASSEMBLY Removal/Installation, page 23-172
('08-10 models)
Connector Inputs and Outputs,
page 23-61
XM ANTENNA LEAD (With XM)
XM RECEIVER (With XM)

LEFT REAR SPEAKER

How to Use the HDS (Honda Diagnostic System)

NOTE: Check the vehicle battery conditi on first.
3. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).

4. Make sure the HDS communicates with the PCM and other vehicle systems. If it doesn't, troubleshoot the DLC circuit
(see page 11-269).
5. Check the diagnostic trouble code (DTC) and note it. Also check the freeze data and/or on-board snapshot data, and
download any data found. Then refer to the indicated DTCs troubleshooting, and begin the appropriate
NOTE:
Lever-Locked Connector Connecting
Disconnecting To connect the connector, push the connector into the

connector sleeve (A). As the connector is pressed in, the
To disconnect the connector, pull the lever (A) while lever (B) moves to the locked position.
pushing the lock tab (B) down, then pull the connector
(C).
*07 model
Poor AM or FM radio reception or Symptom Troubleshooting (see page 23-87) AM/FM antenna lead
interference and/or sublead short or
open in the wire
Audio unit power switch will not turn on Symptom Troubleshooting (see page 23-90)
(No information display and no sound)
Audio unit power switch will not turn off Symptom Troubleshooting (see page 23-92)
No sound is heard from the Symptom Troubleshooting (see page 23-93)
speaker(s) (display is normal)
('07 model with premium audio system)
('07 model without premium audio
system)
Audio system sound is weak or Symptom Troubleshooting (see page 23-110)
distorted (display is normal)
Radio preset memory is lost Symptom Troubleshooting (see page 23-112) Internal error
Volume does not change Symptom Troubleshooting (see page 23-113)
Radio tuner does not change stations Symptom Troubleshooting (see page 23-113)
Audio unit button illumination does not Symptom Troubleshooting (see page 23-114)
work
Audio remote switch does not work Symptom Troubleshooting (see page 23-116)
properly
Audio disc does not load Symptom Troubleshooting (see page 23-118)
Audio disc does not eject Symptom Troubleshooting (see page 23-120)
Audio disc changer does not load all six Symptom Troubleshooting (see page 23-120)
discs
Audio disc changer does not move Symptom Troubleshooting (see page 23-121)
between discs
Unable to select audio disc changer Symptom Troubleshooting (see page 23-121)
Audio disc does not play Symptom Troubleshooting (see page 23-123)
Audio disc skips Symptom Troubleshooting (see page 23-123) Tire pressure
(over-inflated), disc
smudged, dirty, or
scratched
Booming sound while driving with Symptom Troubleshooting (see page 23-124)
audio unit on or off
Error code: XM NO SIGNAL or XM Symptom Troubleshooting (see page 23-149)
ANTENNA is displayed
XM radio display is blank and no station Symptom Troubleshooting (see page 23-150)
information is displayed
XM radio preset memory is lost Symptom Troubleshooting (see page 23-159)
Poor or no sound with XM radio (Audio Symptom Troubleshooting (see page 23-160)
unit does display XM channels)
*08-10 models
Poor AM or FM radio reception or Symptom Troubleshooting (see page 23-87) AM/FM antenna lead
interference and/or sublead short or
open in the wire
Audio unit power switch will not turn on Symptom Troubleshooting (see page 23-91)
(No information display and no sound)
Audio unit power switch will not turn off Symptom Troubleshooting (see page 23-92)
('08-10 models with premium audio
system)
('08-10 models without premium audio
system)
Audio system sound is weak or Symptom Troubleshooting (see page 23-110)
distorted (display is normal)
Auxiliary input sound is low or cannot Symptom Troubleshooting (see page 23-110)
be heard ('08-10 models)
Radio preset memory is lost Symptom Troubleshooting (see page 23-112) Internal error
Volume does not change Symptom Troubleshooting (see page 23-113)
Radio tuner does not change stations Symptom Troubleshooting (see page 23-113)
Audio unit button illumination does not Symptom Troubleshooting (see page 23-115)
work
Audio remote switch does not work Symptom Troubleshooting (see page 23-117)
properly
Audio disc does not load Symptom Troubleshooting (see page 23-118)
Audio disc does not eject Symptom Troubleshooting (see page 23-120)
Audio disc changer does not load all six Symptom Troubleshooting (see page 23-120)
discs
Audio disc changer does not move Symptom Troubleshooting (see page 23-121)
between discs
Unable to select audio disc changer Symptom Troubleshooting (see page 23-121)
Audio disc does not play Symptom Troubleshooting (see page 23-123)
Audio disc skips Symptom Troubleshooting (see page 23-123) Tire pressure
(over-inflated), disc
smudged, dirty, or
scratched
audio unit on or off ('08-10 models with
premium audio system)
audio unit on or off ('08-10 models
without premium audio system)
No sound is heard from subwoofer Symptom Troubleshooting (see page 23-148)
Error code: XM NO SIGNAL or XM Symptom Troubleshooting (see page 23-149)
ANTENNA is displayed
XM radio display is blank and no station Symptom Troubleshooting (see page 23-154)
information is displayed
XM radio preset memory is lost Symptom Troubleshooting (see page 23-159)
Poor or no sound with XM radio (Audio Symptom Troubleshooting (see page 23-160)
unit does display XM channels)
System Description
Overview
The audio system features a non-premium and premium option. The premium audio system features a 360-watt
AM/FM/CD audio unit with 7 speakers including a subwoofer. The speakers and subwoofer are powered by the stereo
amplifier. The non-premium audio system features a 120-watt AM/FM/CD audio unit with either 4 or 6 speakers. The
speakers are powered directly by the audio unit. For '08-10 models, the non-premium audio system includes ANC, and
features an audio unit with 7 speakers including a subwoofer. The additional subwoofer is powered directly by the
active noise cancellation unit. In addition, '08-10 all models support the playback function of compressed audio files
recorded on CD-R/RW.
The audio unit acts as the processor for all audio and video signals (RES). You can select the audio functions from the
front panel, the audio remote (on steering wheel), or by using the navigation voice control system. The audio display
provides the current front and rear audio status. For vehicles with the navigation option, additional audio information is
available by touching the audio button (See the owner's manual for more details).
The audio disc (6 CD) changer output can be directed either to the front or to the rear. For vehicles with the navigation
option, pressing the open/close switch on the navigation display panel accesses the audio disc changer.
Each audio component passes its audio or video signal to the audio unit. In addition, they communicate with the audio
unit via the GA-Net bus. Any open connection in this circuit will cause audio and navigation functions to appear
inoperative.
The navigation system provides voice control for the front/rear audio, XM, CD player, and RES functions. The GA-Net
(audio unit) communicates the voice control commands. When the navigation unit is giving voice guidance, only the
front speakers are muted. When using the voice control system, all speakers are muted, but not the RES headphones.
The GA-Net bus communicates the muting commands. For more information, see the navigation section.
A security signal is daisy-chained between the audio, RES, and navigation components for integration into the vehicle's
alarm system.
AM/FM ANTENNA FRONT/REAR SPEAKERS
(With RES)
WIRELESS
HEADPHONES STEREO
AM/FM AMPLIFIER
ANTENNA SUBWOOFER
(premium
Infrared AMPLIFIER audio system)
interface
("08-10 non-premi um
audio system)_______
Audio/Video
REAR ACTIVE
CONTROLLER NOISE
GA-NET CANCELLATION
AND SCREEN
UNIT
Audio/Video
AUDIO UNIT AUDIO
DVD REMOTE
PLAYER UNIT UART 6 CD or 1 CD type
<€VVWVWVVI SWITCH
AUXILIARY Audio/Video AUXILIARY

(Without JACK
JACK navigation)
ASSEMBLY ASSEMBLY
HFL ("08-10 models)
voice
a
HANDSFREELINK
CONTROL UNIT
(With navigation) Wwwwvwvwv6# ('08—10 models)
GA-NET
I L ________ I AFTERMARKET
AUDIO DISC CHANGER i XM ACCESSORIES
RECEIVER (MusicLink, etc.)
1--------
XM ANTENNA
GA-NETs EJECT/Door
OPEN-CLOSE
% NAVI GA-NET
voice
Color
signal
NAVIGATION (RGB) NAVIGATION UNIT
DISPLAY
Outputs: ' UART CLIMATE
■ Audio voice prompts/guidance r j w gw vw * CONTROL
GA-NET • Voice control (audio/radio, RES, and UNIT
CLOCK ■^VsAAAAAAA^8’ climate on GA-NET/UART bus)
(SET BY NAVI) • Color signal for display unit
Active Noise Cancellation (ANC) System

The audio system includes an active noise cancellation system to cancel some of the vehicle noise. It uses a sine wave
sound output to cancel noise developed during cylinder cancel operation. This occurs in the 1,400—2,400 rpm range.
Two microphones detect the low frequency sound, and the system outputs a canceling sound through the audio
speaker.
System Diagram ('08-10 models)
SPEAKERS
V-i i
AUDIO UNIT
audio signal audio signal

adder circuit input
(Without premium audio system)

n
Sine wave sound
PCM
MULTIPLEX
Outputs: INTEGRATED
• Cylinder suspension signal (3 or 4 cylinder) CONTROL
■ Engine revolution signal UNIT (MICU)
CANCELS A LOW-FREQUENCY NOISE

SOUND SOUND
WAVE WAVE
TIME
NOTE: All items may not apply to this vehicle. See the owner's manual for more information.
Audio Glossary
Item Defini tion
Active noise cancellation The active noise cancellation system cancels some of the vehicle noise. This
occurs in the 1,500—2,400 rpm range. Microphones detect the low frequency
sound, and the system outputs a canceling sound from the audio speaker.
AM (Amplitude Modulation) The type of transmission used in the standard radio broadcast band from 530 to
1710 kHz.
Amplifier A device that increases the level of a signal by increasing the current or voltage.
Antenna A device used to send or receive electromagnetic waves through the air.
ATA (PC card) A type of card that has been tested for use in playing WMA and MP3 music files
in the PC card slot. Sizes of up to 1 GB have been tested.
Audio remote switch The switches on the steering wheel that control the audio system.
Auxiliary jack Allows the customer to use a portable audio device to input audio recordings.
Balance A control that changes the relative volume of the left and right channels.
Band A range of frequencies between two definite limits. Bands are assigned by the
Federal Communications Commission for specific uses.
Bass An adjustment for the low frequency sounds of around 160 Hz and below.
Byte A unit of storage for computer files and memory. A CD holds approximately 700
million bytes.
Cassette Audio or video magnetic tape container having two reels. Customers can insert
it for play back
Compact flash A standard for small-size (3 x 4 cm), memory cards used in mobile computers,
PDAs, and digital cameras. Compact flash memory cards are available in size of
32 MB up to 4 GB or more and can be played in the audio PC slot. Sizes above
1 GB have not been tested.
CD (Compact Disc) A 4.5-inch plastic disc containing digital audio recording that is played optically
on a laser equipped player. Never use discs with a paper label. In a hot vehicle,
labels can curl up and jam the unit.
CD (audio disc) changer CD player that can store and play more than one CD. Two types are available.
Some units accept CDs fed into the changer one at a time, and others accept a
magazine (with CDs stacked in a container).
CD player A component designed to play compact disc recordings using a laser optical
pickup. The signal from a CD player usually requires amplification.
Decibels (dB) A method of measuring sound or radio signal strength received by the audio unit
antenna.
Distortion Inexact reproduction of an audio signal caused by playing music at levels the
audio system cannot handle. You will typically hear this as static, pops, or
crackles.
Dolby (noise reduction) A processing system developed by Dolby Laboratories that reduces the
background noise on recording media. The result is a cleaner playback from the
audio system.
DUET A serial data communication line used for sub display.
DVD (Digital Versatile Disc) A 4.5-inch CD-like format used for storing movies with digital audio and video
features. The DVD-A format is a DVD format designed for DVD audio systems.
Some vehicles can play DVD and DVD-A formats.
Equalizer A device that changes the relative volume of individual frequency bands to suit
personal tastes of the listener.
Fader The control that adjusts the relative volume levels of front and rear speakers in a
four-speaker system.
Format To prepare a PC card to receive files this function is done on a PC. Always choose
either FAT or FAT32, as the NTFS format is not accepted by the system. Pick the
default sectors for the format method selected.
FM (Frequency Modulation) The form of modulation used for radio and television sound transmission in
most of the world. Less prone to interference than AM. The FM broadcast band
in North America covers roughly 87.7 to 107.9 MHz.
GA-Net The GA-Net allows the audio unit to communicate with all the audio and
navigation components in a vehicle. If there is an open in the GA-Net or
components the entire audio and navigation system may appear inoperative.
Audio Glossary
item Definition
GB (Gigabyte) A unit of memory or disc storage equal to one billion bytes (1000 million bytes).
HDD Abbreviation for hard disc drive. They are sensitive to heat and it is not
recommended that they be used in the PC card slot for playing audio files.
Hertz (Hz) The unit of frequency equal to one cycle per second (cps). One kilohertz (kHz)
equals 1,000 cps; one megahertz (MHz) equals 1 million cps.
Integrated amplifier A component that combines a pre amp and a power amp into a single unit. A
receiver combines an integrated amp and a tuner into a single unit.
Jewel case The hard plastic case that contains a compact disc or DVD. Always use a jewel
case to prevent scratches on the underside of a CD or DVD.
LCD (Liquid Crystal Display) A type of digital display that changes reflectance or transmittance when an
electrical field i s applied to it.
Memory Circuitry or devices that hold information in electrical or magnetic form, such as
the AM/FM radio presets.
MB (Megabyte) One million bytes. Written as 1 MB. Megabytes are used as a measure of digital
storage space. For example, a CD can hold 650 MB.
Mic An abbreviation for microphone. For vehicles with navigation, the microphone
accepts navigation voice commands to control audio and navigation functions.
MP3 music files MP3 is an audio coding format. MP3 is a popular audio compression format on
the Internet and computers. CDs and PC cards with these files can be played on
some vehicle's audio system.
Mute When the navigation gives guidance, the front speakers are muted (no music).
When you use the voice control system, all of the speakers are muted.
Noise Unwanted random sounds like buzzing, hiss, pops, static, whine, etc.
PC card The slot used for playing MP3 and WMA music files. The PC card is usually a
combination of a small flash card in a PCMCIA adaptor that slides into the slot.
The ATA, SD, and compact flash types of cards have been tested up to 1 GB.
PCMCIA A computer standard for the slot that the PC card slides into. Another term for
the PC card slot.
Processor The part of an audio device that performs tasks/calculations. In the audio unit,
the processor handles muting to allow the navigation system to speak its voice
commands, and the decoding/playback of the sound files, etc.
Radio A head unit that combines a tuner, a preamplifier, and often a power-amplifier.
Route guidance (RG) Spoken voice used for turn-by-turn navigation from the audio speakers.
CSF (Cold Start Fix) screens These screens are displayed ifthe system requires a GPS initialization. The
vehicle should be moved outside into an open area away from buildings/power
lines.
Stereo A recording of at least two channels where you can hear sound or music from
the left or right side.
SD (Secure Digital) card This compact type of memory card allows for fast data transfer and has built-in
security functions. SD cards have a small write-protection switch on the side.
Shield A metallic foil or braided wire layer surrounding conductors which are designed
to prevent electrostatic or electromagnetic interference (noise) from external
sources which you hear as buzzing or popping sounds which you hear on the
speakers.
Speaker (Loudspeaker) A device that converts electrical energy into acoustical energy (sound).
Speed-sensitive volume The SVC increases the audio volume to compensate for increased interior noise
compensation (SVC) when the vehicle drivers at freeway speeds.
Subwoofer A loudspeaker made to reproduce the lowest audio frequencies, from about
25 Hz to 125 Hz.
Track A sound recording on a CD, tape, or PC card.
Treble An adjustment to control the volume of the high frequency sounds.
Tuner A component (or part of a component) that receives radio signals and selects
one broadcast from many.
Tweeter A speaker designed to reproduce the higher frequencies (treble) only.
USB Universal Serial Bus. The USB is used for playing audio files (MP3, WMA, and
AAC) on the external device through the audio unit.
Audio Glossary
Item Definition
USB jack Allows the clients to play data such as input audio recording from portable audio
devices (such as i-Pod) or data from USB flash memory.
Voice coil A coil of wire wrapped around a tube and then attached to the speaker cone or
diaphragm. When an audio signal is applied, the coil becomes an electromagnet
and interacts with the permanent magnet causing the cone or diaphragm to
vibrate. We interpret these vibrations as sound.
Volume control Allows you to control the loudness of the music.
WMA music file Windows Media Audio File. This is an accepted format for music files to be
played on either a CD-R, a CD-RW, or a PC card.
Woofer A speaker that is designed to reproduce low (bass) frequencies only.
XM radio Satellite based radio transmission, which also uses a ground based repeater
network to ensure seamless reception. The channels originate from XM's
broadcast center, in Washington DC, and uplink to two satellites. These satellites
transmit the signal across the entire continental United States.
XM receiver The external component that receives and processes the XM signals from the
XM satellites, and terrestrial (land) stations. The audio unit communicates to the
XM receiver over the GA-Net bus.
(cont'd)
Audio Unit Connector for Inputs and Outputs

When replacing an audio unit connector, match the wires to the cavities listed in the following table.
*07 model with premium audio system/with navigation
AUDIO UNIT CONNECTOR B (30P) AUDIO UNIT CONNECTOR C (16P)
/ 2 3 / / X 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 1 2 3 4 5 6 X
00
ro
/ 17 / X / 21 22 X 23 24 8 9 10 11 X 12 13 14 15 /
CM
ID
26 27 29 /
AUDIO UNIT
CONNECTOR H (2P)
AUDIO UNIT
CONNECTOR G (3P)
c ?
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
11 12 13 / 15 16 17 18 19 20
AUDIO UNIT CONNECTOR

E(5P) AUDIO UNIT CONNECTOR A (20P)
1 2 3 4 5 6
7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
AUDIO U N IT CONNECTOR D (14P)

*08-10 models w ith premium audio system /w ith navigation
/ 2 3/ 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 1 2 3 > < ; 4 5 6 /
/ I /
m
17 / 21
C
CSI
CSI
CM
24 25 27 28 29 / 8 9 10 11IX ] 12 13 14 15 /
O
/ / / /
AUDIO UNIT
CONNECTOR H (2P)
1 I 2 I3 4 l / l / ' 7 |8 |9
|10|11|12KI14115|16|17|
AUDIO UNIT CONNECTOR A (17P)
1 2 3 4 5 6 1 | 2 | 3 | 4 | 5 16| 7| 8| 9| 10|
7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 1llXll3ll4ll5|l6l^y^19l20]
AUDIO UNIT CONNECTOR D (14P)

AUDIO UNIT CONNECTOR F (20P)
AUDIO UNIT CONNECTOR A (20P) ('07 model)
....n... n <_ r> ..n ...n....

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
O
CM
11 12 13 / 15 16 17 18 19
IJ i—
Cavity Wire Connect to

A1 YEL/GRN Stereo amplifier (RADIO SWD +B )
A2 YEL/RED No. 32 (10 A) fuse in the driver's under-dash fuse/relay box (ACC)
A3 WHT Audio remote switch (AUDIO REMOTE)
A4 GRN/ORN Audio disc changer (SCTY6)
A5 BRN Stereo amplifier (RR PRE IN + )
A6 LT BLU Stereo amplifier (RL PRE IN + )
A7 GRN Stereo amplifier (FR PRE IN + )
A8 BLU Stereo amplifier (FL PRE IN + )
A9 RED/BLK No. 7 (7.5 A) fuse in the passenger's under-dash fuse/relay box (ILL+)
A10 WHT/GRN No. 5 (10 A) fuse in the driver's under-dash fuse/relay box (+B)
A11 BRN Remote switch ground (REMOTE GND)
A12 YEL Navigation unit (RG GND)
A13 RED/BLU Navigation unit (RG L +)
A15 YEL Stereo amplifier (RR PRE IN —)
A16 PUR Stereo amplifier (RL PRE IN —)
A17 RED Stereo amplifier (FR PRE IN —)
A18 PNK Stereo amplifier (FL PRE IN —)
A19 RED Dash lights brightness controller (ILL—)
A20 BLK Body ground to G503 (GND)
AUDIO UNIT CONNECTOR A (17P) (’08-10 models)
1 2 3 4/ ' 7 8 9
V
10 11 12 [ Z ’14 15 16 17

A3 PNK Stereo amplifier (FL PRE IN—)
A8 YEL Stereo amplifier (RR PRE IN—)
A11 LT BLU Stereo amplifier (RL PRE IN +)
(cont'd)
AUDIO UNIT CONNECTOR B (30P)
/ 2 3/ / / 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
/ / 17 / / X /
CM
CM
CM
CM
00
21 23 25 26 27 29
Cavi ty Wire Connect to

B2 BLU Rear controller and screen (RR NTSC)
B3 GRY" Shield for terminals No. 2 and No. 7 (RR NTSC SH)
B7 GRY* Shield for terminals No. 21 and No. 22 (VIDE01 SH)
B8 BRN Auxiliary jack assembly (HP L OUT)
B9 GRY* Shield for terminals No. 8, No. 24, and No. 25 (HP R/L OUT SH)
B10 GRY* Shield for terminals No. 11, No. 12, and No. 13 (HP R/L SH)
B11 WHT Rear controller and screen (HP R/L GND)
B12 RED Rear controller and screen (HP L)
B13 BLK Rear controller and screen (HP R)
B14 YEL/RED Rear controller and screen (SYSTEM ACC)
B17 PNK Rear controller and screen (RR NTSC GND)
B21 LT BLU Auxiliary jack assembly (VIDE01 GND)
B22 PUR Auxiliary jack assembly (VIDE01)
B23 WHT/GRN Auxiliary jack assembly (CONN CHK)
B24 ORN Auxiliary jack assembly (HP R OUT)
B25 YEL Auxiliary jack assembly (HP R/L OUT GND)
B26 GRY* Shield for terminals No. 27, No. 28, and No. 29 (VIDE01 R/L SH)
B27 PNK Auxiliary jack assembly (VIDE01 R/L GND)
B28 GRN Auxiliary jack assembly (VIDE01 L)
B29 BLU Auxiliary jack assembly (VIDE01 R)
*: The shielded wires have a heat-shrunk tube insulating the outside of the wire. The color of the insulating
tube, typically black or dark gray, may not match the color of the wire listed on the schematic.
AUDIO UNIT CONNECTOR C (16P)
1 2 3 4 5 6 X
8 9 10 11 X 12 13 14 15 X
Cavity W i re Connect to
C1 WHT DVD player unit (DVD R/L GND)
C2 BLK DVD player unit (DVD L)
C3 RED DVD player unit (DVD R)
€4 GRY* Shield for terminals No. 5 and No. 6 (DVD SH)
C5 PNK DVD player unit (DVD GND)
C6 BLU DVD player unit (DVD)
C8 GRY" Shield for terminals No. 1, No. 2, and No. 3 (DVD R/L SH)
C9 LT BLU Rear controller and screen (GA-NET RR BUS+)
C10 GRY* Shield for terminals No. 9 and No. 11 (GA-NET RR BUS SH)
C11 PUR Rear controller and screen (GA-NET RR BUS—)
C12 ORN DVD player unit (Rx)
€13 BRN DVD player unit (Tx)
C14 YEL DVD player unit (Tx/Rx GND)
€15 GRY* Shield for terminals No. 12, No. 13, and No. 14 (Tx/Rx SH)
(cont'd)
1 2 3 4 5 6
7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14

D1 RED/BLU Audio disc changer ( + B)
D2 BLU/RED Audio disc changer (SYSTEM ACC)
D3 GRY* Shield for terminals No. 9 and No. 10 (GA-NET AUDIO BUS2 SH)
D4 GRY* Shield for terminals No. 5, No. 6, No. 13, and No. 14 (AUDI02 SH)
D5 RED Audio disc changer (AUDI02 R +)
D6 BLK Audio disc changer (AUDI02 L+)
D7 RED/YEL Audio disc changer (+B )
D8 GRN/RED Audio disc changer (ILL)
D9 LT BLU Audio disc changer (GA-NET AUDIO BUS2+)
D10 PUR Audio disc changer (GA-NET AUDIO BUS2—)
D11 WHT/BLK Audio disc changer (GND)
D12 GRN/WHT Audio disc changer (ILL CTRL)
D13 WHT Audio disc changer (AUDI02 R—)
D14 GRN Audio disc changer (AUDI02 L—)
AUDIO UNIT CONNECTOR E (5P)
c J
cn
CM
1 3 4

E1 BLK*1 Active noise cancellation unit (ANC FR+)
BLU*2
E2 GRN Active noise cancellation unit (ANC FR—)
E3 RED Active noise cancellation unit (ANC RR+)
E4 WHT Active noise cancellation unit (ANC RR—)
E5 BRN Active noise cancellation unit (ANC CHK2)
*1: '07 model
*2: ’08-10 model s
AUDIO UNIT CONNECTOR F (20P) ('08-10 models)
i__
L.
.... _
CD
CD
1 2 3 4 5 7 8
CM
O
1 1 ,/ 13 14\ 1f> ie / 1£

F1 YEL Navigation unit (RG GND)
F2 GRY* Shield for terminals No. 1 and No. 11 (RG SH GND)
F3 BLK Auxiliary jack assembly (AUX S GND)
F4 GRY* Shield for terminals No. 3, No. 13, and No. 14 (AUX SH GND)
F5 LT GRN Auxiliary jack assembly (AUX GND)
F6 BRN Remote switches ground (REMOTE GND)
F7 WHT Audio remote switch (AUDIO REMOTE)
F8 PNK HandsFreeLink control unit (HFL ICON)
F9 RED HandsFreeLink control unit (TELM SIG —)
F10 GRY* Shield for terminals No. 9 and No. 19 (TELM SIG SH)
F11 RED/BLU Navigation unit (RG L+)
F13 WHT Auxiliary jack assembly (AUX L)
F14 RED Auxiliary jack assembly (AUX R)
F15 LT BLU Auxiliary jack assembly (AUX DET)
F16 YEL/GRN Stereo amplifier (SWD +B)
F19 GRN HandsFreeLink control unit (TELM SIG+)
F20 LT GRN HandsFreeLink control unit (HFL MUTE)
tube, typically bjack or dark gray, may not match the color of the wire listed on the schematic.
(cont'd)
AUDIO UNIT CONNECTOR G (3P)
3 1

G1 AM/FM antenna amplifier (ANT SIG)
G2 Shield for terminal No. 1 (ANT SH)
G3 AM/FM antenna amplifier (ANT 4-B)
AUDIO UNIT CONNECTOR H (2P)

H1 DVD player unit (DIGITAL SIG)
H2 Shield for terminal No. 1 (DIGITAL SH)
Audi® U nit Connector fo r Inputs and O utputs
When replacing an audio unit connector, match the wires to the cavi ties listed in the following table.
*07 model without premi um audio system/with navigation
_________ AUDIO UNIT CONNECTOR B (3OP)________ AUDIO UNIT CONNECTOR C (16P)
CO
/I 2 3 / /J / 7 8 10 11 12 13 14 1 2 3 4 5 6 /
CO
m
ho
CM
CM
/ / 17 / / / 21 X 23 24 25 26 27 / 8 9 10 11 X 12 13 14 15 /
AUDIO UNIT
CONNECTOR H (2P)
c p
/ 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
13 15 16 17 18 19
CM
o
11 12 X
AUDIO UNIT CONNECTOR
E(5P) AUDIO UNIT CONNECTOR A (20P)
H
CO
CO
1 4 5
CO
7 10 11 13 14
H

*08-10 models without premium audio system/with navigation

AUDIO UNIT CONNECTOR D (14P).

n n S r i .......n_ xl ...
CD
00
00
7
CM
CD CD
/ 4 5 10
11 12 13 / 15
CM
o
17 18 19
W i re si de of female terminals

A5 PNK Right rear speaker+ (RR R SPKR-I-)
A6 BLU/WHT Left rear speaker+ (RR LSPKR+)
A7 GRN/YEL Front passenger’s door speaker+, right tweeter+ (FR R SPKR+)
A8 GRN/BLU Driver's door speaker+, left tweeter+ (FR L SPKR+)
A11 BRN Remote switches ground (REMOTE GND)
A12 YEL Navigation unit (RG GND)
A13 RED/BLU Navigation unit (RG L+)
A15 BLU/YEL Right rear speaker— (RR R SPKR—)
A16 BLU/BLK Left rear speaker— (RR L SPKR—)
A17 GRY/RED Front passenger's door speaker—, right tweeter— (FR R SPKR—)
A18 LT GRN Driver's door speaker—, left tweeter— (FR L SPKR—)
AUDIO UNIT CONNECTOR A (17P) ('08-10 models)
1 2 3 L 7 8 9
/ /
10 11 12 / 14 15 16 17

A2 BLU/RED Left rear speaker— (RR L SPKR—)
A3 LT GRN Driver's door speaker—, left tweeter— (FR L SPKR—)
A11 BLU/WHT Left rear speaker+ (RR L SPKR)
A12 GRN/BLK Driver's door speaker+, left tweeter+ (FR L SPKR+)
A15 GRN/YEL Front passenger's door speaker+, right tweeter + (FR R SPKR+)
A16 PNK Right rear speaker+ (RR R SPKR+)
/ 2 3/ / / 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
/ / 17 / / / 21 22 X 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 /

B3 GRY* Shield for terminals No. 2 and No. 7 (RR NTSC SH)
B10 GRY* Shield for terminals No. 11, No. 12, and No. 13 (HP R/L SH)
(cont'd)
AUDIO UNIT CONNECTOR C (16P)
1 2 3 x 4 5 6 /
8 9 10 11 X 12 13 14 15 /

a WHT DVD player unit (DVD R/L GND)
C4 GRY* Shield for terminals No. 5 and No. 6 (DVD SH)
C8 GRY* Shield for terminals No. 1, No. 2, and No. 3 (DVD R/L SH)
C13 BRN DVD player unit (Tx)
C15 GRY* Shield for terminals No. 12, No. 13, and No. 14 (Tx/Rx SH)
00
1 2 4 5
00
00
7 9 10 11 12 14

D1 RED/BLU Audio disc changer (+B)
D2 BLU/RED Audio disc changer (SYSTEM ACC)
D4 GRY* Shield for terminals No. 5, No. 6, No. 13, and No. 14(AUDI02 SH)
D5 RED Audio disc changer (AUDI02 R-f)
D6 BLK Audio disc changer (AUDI02 L -f)
D7 RED/YEL Audio disc changer (+B)
D8 GRN/RED Audio disc changer (ILL+)
D9 LTBLU Audio disc changer (GA-NET AUDIO B US2+)
D10 FUR Audio disc changer (GA-NET AUDIO B U S 2-)
D11 WHT/BLK Audio disc changer (GND)
D12 GRN/WHT Audio disc changer (ILL CTRL)
D13 WHT Audio disc changer (AUDI02 R—)
D14 GRN Audio disc changer (AUDI02 L—)
c J
CM
1 3 4 5

E1 BLK*1 Active noise cancellation unit (ANC FR+)
BLU*2
*1: '07 model
*2; '08-10 models
n n- ............ ■ n -J1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
CM
o
11 / 13 14 15 16 / / 19

F1 YEL Navigation unit (RG GND)
F2 GRY*1 Shield for terminals No. 1 and No. 11 (RG SH GND)
F4 GRY*1 Shield for terminals No. 3, No. 13, and No. 14 (AUX SH GND)
F8*2 PNK HandsFreeLink control unit (HFL ICON)
F9*2 RED HandsFreeLink control unit (TELM SIG —)
F10*2 GRY*1 Shield for terminals No. 9 and No. 19 (TELM SIG SH)
F11 RED/BLU Navigation unit (RG L+)
F16 YEL/GRN Stereo amplifier (SWD +B)
F19*2 GRN HandsFreeLink control unit (TELM S IG -f)
F20*2 LT GRN HandsFreeLink control unit (HFL MUTE)
*1: The shielded wires have a heat-shrunk tube insulating the outside of the wire. The color of the insulating
*2: '10 model
3 1
2

G3 AM/FM antenna amplifier (ANT +B )
AUDIO UNIT CONNECTOR H (2P)

(cont'd)

*07 model with premium audio system/without navigation
AUDIO UNIT CONNECTOR B OOP) AUDIO UNIT CONNECTOR C_(16P)
/ 2 3 / / / 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 1 2 3 4 5 6/
m
/ / 17 / / / 21 22|X]23 24 25 27 28 29 / 8 9 10 11|X|12 13 14 15 /
©E3 AUDIO UNIT

---------------- — ----------- --------------------
CONNECTOR H (2P)
.... c
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
11 / / 15 16 17 18 19 20
AUDIO UNIT
CONNECTOR AUDIO UNIT CONNECTOR A (17P)
E(5P) / 2 3 4 5 6
/ / 9 10 11 / 13 14

. n .n.............. S r* n n
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
11 / / / 15 16 17 18 19 20

A1 YEL/GRN Stereo amplifier (RADIO SWD +B)
A4 RED/WHT Rear controller and screen (SCTY3)
A6 LT BLU Stereo amplifier (RL PRE IN + )
A9 RED/BLK No. 7 (7.5 A) fuse in the passenger's under-dash fuse/relay box (ILL-f)
A15 YEL Stereo amplifier (RR PRE IN —)
A18 PNK Stereo amplifier (FL PRE IN —)
/ CM
//
00
7 9 10 11 12 13 14
// 17 / / 21 22 X 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 /
Wire side of fem ale terminals
B3 GRY* • Shield for terminals No. 2 and No. 7 (RR NTSC SH)
B10 GRY* Shield for terminals No. 11, No. 12, and No. 13 (HP R/L SI i)
B22 PUR Auxiliary jack assembly (VIDEOI)
AUDIO UNIT CONNECTOR C(ISP)
1 2 3 x 4 5 6 /
89 10 11 X 12 13 14 15 /

a WHT DVD player unit (DVD R/L GND)
C4 GRY* Shield for terminals No. 5 and No. 6 (DVD SH)
C9 LT BLU Rear controller and screen (GA-NET RR BUS + )
C10 GRY* Shield for terminals No. 9 and No. 11 (RR BUS SH)
C11 PUR Rear controller and screen (GA-NET RR BUS —)
(cont'd)
CD
/ 3 4 5
9 10 11 / 13 14
/ /

D2 BLU/RED XM receiver (SYSTEM ACC)
D5 RED XM receiver (AUDI02 R +)
D6 BLK XM receiver (AUDI02 L+)
D9 LT BLU XM receiver (GA-NET AUDIO BUS2+)
D10 PUR XM receiver (GA-NET AUDIO B U S 2-)
D11 WHT/BLK XM receiver (GND)
D13 WHT XM receiver (AUDI02 R - )
D14 GRN XM receiver (AUDI02 L—)
L P
1 2 3 4 5

E1 BLK Active noise cancellation unit (ANC FR+)
AU DIO U NIT CONNECTOR G (3P)
3 1
2

G3 AM/FM antenna amplifier (ANT + B)
AU DIO U NIT CONNECTOR H (2P)
Cavity Wire Connectto

(cont'd)

'07 model without premium audio system/without navigation/6 CD type
(with rear entertainment system) (with rear entertainment system)
/ 2 3 / / / 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 1 2 3 4 5 6 X
CM
00
/ / 17 / / / 21 22 X 23 24 25 26 27 X 8 9 10 11 X 12 13 14 15 X
m
0 yflll
i........i...
AUDIO UNIT
CONNECTOR H (2P)
(with rear entertainment
system)
AUDIO UNIT
CONNECTOR G (3P)
....... c p
/
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
1 2 3 4 5
15 16 17 18 19
CM
o
11 / /

(with ANC) AUDIO UNIT CONNECTOR A (20P)
*08-10 models without premium audio system/without navigation/6 CD type
(with rear entertainment system) (with rear entertainment system)
X2 / / X7
0
00
9 10 11 12 13 14 1 2 3 4 5 6 /
/ / / //
17 21 22 X 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 / 8 9 10 11 X 12 13 14 15 /
AUDIO UNIT
CONNECTOR G(3P)
H
AUDIO UNIT
— .... I
------------------ © ----------- CONNECTOR H (2P)
(with rear entertainment
system)
AUDIO UNIT AUDIO UNIT CONNECTOR A (17P)

CONNECTOR E
(with ANC)
1 2 3 4. 7 8 9
t
1C) 11 12>/1l4|l5> 1f i 17
n------ n
X XX X/ X
CM
CO
4 5 6
CO
CO
4 5 7
XX 9 10 11 / 13 14 XX XX X X
CO
14 15 16

(with XM) AUDIO UNIT CONNECTOR F (20P)
(cont'd)
.. n n S p* n n
/
CM
CO
00
4 5 6 7 9 10
CM
o
11 / / / 15 16 17 18 19

A4 RED/WHT*1 Rear controller and screen (SCTY3)
RED/BLU*2 Multiplex integrated control unit (MICU) (SCTY1)
A5 PNK Right rear speaker+(RR R SPKR+)
A6 BLU/WHT Left rear speaker+ (RR L SPKR-I-)
A7 GRN/YEL Front passenger's door speaker 4-, right tweeter4- (FR R SPKR+)
A8 GRN/BLK Driver's door speaker+ , left tweeter+ (FR L SPKR + )
A15 BLU/YEL Right rear speaker— (RR R SPKR —)
A16 BLU/BLK Left rear speaker—(RR L SPKR—)
A18 LT GRN Driver's door speaker—, left tweeter—(FR L SPKR—)
*1; With rear entertainment system
*2: Without rear entertainment system
AUDIO UNIT CONNECTOR A (17P) (*08-10 models)
1 2 3 4 / /
7 8 9
10 11 12 / 14 15 16 17

A3 LT GRN Driver's door speaker—, left tweeter— (FR L SPKR —)
A4 RED/WHT*1 Rear controller and screen (SCTY3)
RED/BLU*2 Multiplex integrated control unit (MICU) (SCTY1)
A11 BLU/WHT Left rear speaker + (RR L SPKR+)
A12 GRN/BLK Driver's door speaker+ , left tweeter+ (FR LSPKR+)
A15 GRN/YEL Front passenger's door speaker+ , right tweeter+ (FR R SPKR4-)
*2: Without rear entertainment system
AUDIO UNIT CONNECTOR B (30P) (With rear entertai nment system)
CO
7 x
00
/ / / / 8 10 11 12 13 14
CM
cm
CM
00
CM
'nT
CM
00
/ / 17 / / / 21 tx 25 26 27 29 /
Wire side of female termi nals

B3 GRY" Shield for terminals No. 2 and No. 7 (RR NTSC SH)
B10 GRY* • Shield for terminals No. 11, No. 12, and No. 13 (HP R/L SH)
AUDIO UNIT CONNECTOR C (16P) (Wi th rear entertainment system)
xS H E 4 5 6 /
H
CO
1
10 11 X
CD
00
CM
13 14 15 /
Cavity Wi re Connect to
C1 WHT DVD player unit (DVD R/L GND)
C3 "RED DVD player unit (DVD R)
C4 GRY" Shield for terminals No. 5 and No. 6 (DVD SH)
AUDIO UNIT CONNECTOR D (14P) ('08-10 models w i th XM)
CM
/ 3 4 5 6
X X
CD
/ 10 11 13 14

D2 BLU/RED XM receiver (SYSTEM ACC)
D5 RED XM receiver (AUDI02 R+ )
D6 BLK XM receiver (AUDI02 1+)
D9 LT BLU XM receiver (GA-NET AUDIO BUS2+)
D10 PUR XM receiver (GA-NET AUDIO B U S 2-)
D11 WHT/BLK XM receiver (GND)
D13 WHT XM receiver (AUDI02 R - )
D14 GRN XM receiver (A U D I0 2 L -)
(cont'd)
AU DIO UNIT CONNECTOR E (5P) (With ANC)
L J
00
1 2 4 5

E1 BLK Active noise cancellation unit (ANC FR+)
E4 WHT Active noise cancellation unit (ANC RR —)
J t
7/ 3 4 5 6 7 ///
// ////
V"
00
14 15 16

F16 YEL/GRN Active noise cancellation unit (RADIO SWD +B)
3 1
2

G3 AM/FM antenna amplifier (ANT + B)
AUDIO UNIT CONNECTOR H (2P) (With rear entertainment system)

(cont'd)
Audio U nit Connector for Inputs and Outputs

*07 model without premium audio system/without navigation/1 CD type
AUDIO UNIT CONNECTOR A (20P) AUDIO UNIT

CONNECTOR G (3P)
c ?
/ 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
11 / / / 15 16 17 18 19 20
©
© © ©r
©
© t°3l
..- ....
*08-10 models without premium audio system/without navigation/1 CD type

n ..rr. S r* . .n...rr ..
/ 2 / / 5 6 7 8 9 10
/ / / / 15 16 17 18 19 20

A6 BLU/WHT Left rear speakerH- (RR L SPKR + )
A7 GRN/YEL Front passenger's door speakerH- (FR R SPKR+)
A8 GRN/BLK Driver's door speaker+, (FR L SPKR+)
A17 GRY/RED Front passenger's door speaker— (FR R SPKR—)
A18 LT GRN Driver's door speaker— (FR L SPKR—)
AUDIO UNIT CONNECTOR A (17P) ('08-10 models)
1 2 3
/ / z 17 8 9
10 11 12 / 14 15 16 17

A3 LT GRN Driver's door speaker— (FR L SPKR—)
A7 GRY/RED Front passenger's door speaker— (FR R SPKR—)
A8 BLU/YEL Right rear speaker— (RR R SPKR —)
A10 RED/BLK No. 7 (7.5 A) fuse in the passenger's under-dash fuse/relay box (ILL4-)
A11 BLU/WHT Left rear speaker + (RR L SPKR+)
A12 GRN/BLK Driver's door speaker+ (FR L SPKR+)
A15 GRN/YEL Front passenger's door speakerH- (FR R SPKR + )
A16 PNK Right rear speaker+ (RR R SPKRH-)
r
7 / 3 4 5 / / / / /
/ / 13 14 15 / / > / / /

3 1

G3 AM/FM antenna amplifier (ANT +B)
Audio Disc Changer Connector for Inputs and Outputs (With navigation)
When replacing a audio disc changer connector, match the wires to the cavities listed in the following table.
/ 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 :> < : 5 6 7 8
/ / 9 10 11 / 13 14 9 10 11 12 13|X|14 15 16 17 18
AUDIO DISC CHANGER AUDIO DISC CHANGER

CONNECTOR B (14P) CONNECTOR A (18P)
AUDIO DISC CHANGER CONNECTOR A (18P)
1 2 3 4 x 5 6 7 8
9 10 11 12 13 X 14 15 16 17 18

A1 GRN Audio unit (AUDI02 L—)
A2 WHT Audio unit (AUDI02 R—)
A3 GRN/WHT Audio unit (ILL CTRL)
A4 PNK Navigation display (CD EJECT)
A5 LT BLU Audio unit (GA-NET AUDIO BUS2+)
A6 BLU/RED Audio unit (SYSTEM ACC)
A7 RED/BLU Audio unit (+B)
A8 GRN/ORN Audio unit (SCTY6)
A9 BLK Audio unit (AUDI02 L+)
A10 RED Audio unit (AUDI02 R +)
A11 GRY* Shield for terminals No. 1, No. 2, No. 9, and No. 10 (AUDI02 SH)
A12 BLU Navigation display (DISP OPEN)
A13 WHT/BLK Audio unit (GND)
A14 GRY* Shield for terminals No. 5 and No. 15 (GA-NET AUDIO BUS2 SH)
A15 PUR Audio unit (GA-NET AUDIO BUS2—)
A16 GRN/RED Audio unit (ILL)
A17 RED/YEL Audio unit (+B)
A18 GRN/YEL Navigation display (SCTY5)
AUDIO DISC CHANGER CONNECTOR B (14P)
CM
/ 3 4 5 6
11
CD
00
/ 10 / 14

B2 BLU/RED XM receiver (SYSTEM ACC)
B3 GRY* Shield for terminals No. 9 and No. 10 (GA-NET AUDIO BUS1 SH)
B4 GRY* Shield for terminals No. 5, No. 6, No, 13, and No. 14 (AUDIO SH)
B5 RED XM receiver (AUDIO R+ )
B6 BLK XM receiver (AUDIO L+)
B9 BLU Navigation display (GA-NET AUDIO BUS1 + )
B10 PNK Navigation display (GA-NET AUDIO BUS1 —)
B11 WHT/BLK XM receiver (GND)
B13 WHT XM receiver (AUDIO R—)
B14 GRN XM receiver (AUDIO L - )
The shielded wires have a heat-shrunk tube insulating the outside of the wire. The color of the insulating
Stereo Amplifier Connector for Inputs and Outputs (With premium audio system)
When replacing a stereo amplifier connector, match the wires to the cavities listed in the following table.
STEREO AMPLIFIER STEREO AMPLIFIER

q r -j
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 2 3 5 /4 7 8 9 10
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 11 12 13 14 15 / 17 18 20
STEREO AMPLIFIER CONNECTOR A (20P)
n t- r> n
1 2 3
5 / 4 7 8 9 10
11 12 13 14 15 / 17 18 20
'tJ — t
A1 BLK/RED Right tweeter+ (FR R T W +)
A2 RED/BLU Front passenger's door speaker-!- (FR R SPKR+)
A3 WHT Driver's door speaker-h (FR R SPKR+)
A4 BLU/ORN Left tweeterH- (FR LTW +)
A5 GRN Subwoofer+ (WOOFER+ )
A7 BLU/RED Right rear speakerH- (RR R SPKR + )
A8 PNK Left rear speakerH- (RR L SPKRH-)
A9 YEL/RED*1 No. 32 (10 A) fuse in the driver's under-dash fuse/relay box (ACC)
YEL/GRN"2 Audio unit (RADIO SWD +B)
A10 BLU No. 5 (20 A) fuse in the auxiliary under-hood fuse/relay box (H-B)
A11 PNK/BLK Right tweeter— (FR R TW —)
A12 BRN Front passenger's door speaker— (FR R SPKR —)
A13 GRN Driver's door speaker (FR R SPKR—)
A14 GRY/BLU Left tweeter— (FR LTW —)
A15 RED Subwoofer- (WOOFER-)
A17 BLU/ORN Right rear speaker— (RR R SPKR—)
A18 PUR Left rear speaker— (RR L SPKR—)
A20 BLK Body ground to G504 (P GND)
*1: '07 model
*2; '08-10 models
STEREO AMPLIFI ER CONNECTOR B (14P)
____ n ___ h r>_______ r x . . .

1 2 3 4 5 6 7
8 9 10 11 12 13 14
k.1---
------ Jr * ”
J

B1 BLU Audio unit (FL PRE IN +)
B2 GRY* Shield for terminals No. 1 and No. 8 (FL PRE IN SH)
B3 LT BLU Audio unit (RL PRE IN + )
B4 GRN Audio unit (FR PRE IN + )
B5 GRY* Shield for terminals No. 4 and No. 11 (FR PRE IN SH)
B6 BRN Audio unit (RR PRE IN + )
B7 YEL/GRN Audio unit (RADIO SWD +B)
B8 PNK Audio unit (FL PRE IN - )
B9 GRY* Shield for terminals No. 3 and No. 10 (RL PRE IN SH)
B10 PUR Audio unit (RL PRE IN - )
B11 RED Audio unit (FR PRE IN —)
B12 GRY* Shield for terminals No. 6 and No. 13 (RR PRE IN SH)
B13 YEL Audio unit (RR PRE IN - )
B14 BLK Body ground to G504 (S GND)
XM Receiver Connector for Inputs and Outputs (With XM)
When replacing a XM receiver connector, match the wires to the cavities listed in the following table.
XM RECEIVER
CONNECTOR B(2P)
1 2 3 / 5 6
/ / 9 10 11 / 13 14
XM RECEIVER CONNECTOR A (14P)
XM RECEIVER CONNECTOR A (14P) (With navigation)
/
CO
1 5 6
/ / 9 10 11 / 13 14

A1 WHT/GRN No. 5 (10 A) fuse in the driver's under-dash fuse/relay box (+B )
A2 BLU/RED Navigation unit (SYSTEM ACC)
A5 RED Audio disc changer (AUDIO R +)
A6 BLK Audio disc changer (AUDIO L+)
A9 LTBLU Navigation unit (GA-NET AUDIO BUS1 + )
A10 PUR Navigation unit (GA-NET AUDIO BUS1 - )
A11 WHT/BLK Audio disc changer (GND)
A13 WHT Audio disc changer (AUDIO R - )
A14 GRN Audio disc changer (AUDIO L—)
XM RECEIVER CONNECTOR A (14P) (Without navigation)
1 2 3 / 5 6
/ /
9 10 11
/
13 14

A2 BLU/RED Audio unit (SYSTEM ACC)
A5 RED Audio unit (A U D I02R +)
A6 BLK Audio unit (AUDI02 L+)
A9 LTBLU Audio unit (GA-NET AUDIO B US2+)
A10 PUR Audio unit (GA-NET AUDIO B U S 2-)
A11 WHT/BLK Audio unit (GND)
A13 WHT Audio unit (AUDI02 R—)
A14 GRN Audio unit (A U D I0 2 L -)
XM RECEIVER CONNECTOR B (2P)
non
2

B1 XM antenna (SIG)
B2 Shield for terminal No. 1 (SH)
Active Noise Cancellation Microphone Connector for Inputs and Outputs ('08-10 models with
ANC)
When replacing an active noise cancellation microphone connector, match the wires to the cavities listed in the
following tables.
o T o
o
o
ACTIVE NOISE CANCELLATION FRONT MICROPHONE 2P CONNECTOR
S ~ L

1 RED* Shield for terminal No. 2 (F MIC SH)
2 BLU Active noise cancellation unit (F M IC+)
ACTIVE NOISE CANCELLATION REAR MICROPHONE 2P CONNECTOR

1 ORN* Shield for terminal No. 2 (R MIC SH)
2 WHT Active noise cancellation unit (R M IC+)
(cont'd)
Active Noise Cancellation Unit Connector for Inputs and Outputs

When replacing an active noise cancellation unit connector, match the wires to the cavities listed in the following
table.
*07 model with ANC
ACTIVE NOISE CANCELLATION UNIT 16P CONNECTOR
n_ __-J]
1 2/ / / / 7 8
9 1 0 /_ 1 2 / 1 4 15 16

1 RED Audio unit (ANC RR+)
2 BLK Audio unit (ANC FR + )
7 BRN Body ground to G502 (GND)
8 YEL/RED No. 32 (10 A) fuse in the driver's under-dash fuse/relay box (+B)
9 WHT Audio unit (ANC RR—)
10 GRN Audio unit (ANC FR—)
12 BRN Audio unit (ANC CHK2)
14 PNK PCM (CSSAM)
15 WHT/GRN PCM (NEP)
16 YEL Multiplex integrated control unit (MICU) (INTR LT—)
'08-10 models with premium audio system
fl
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
11 12 13 14 15 / / 18 / 20

3 GRY* Shield for terminals No. 1, No. 2, No. 11, and No. 12 (ANC SH)
4 LT BLU* Shield for terminal No. 13 (F MIC SH)
5 PUR* Shield for terminal No. 14 (R MIC SH)
6 PNK PCM (CSSAM1)
7 WHT PCM (CSSAM2)
8 YEL/GRN Audio unit (RADIO SWD + B)
9 WHT/GRN PCM (NEP)
11 BLU Audio unit (ANC FR+)
13 BLU Active noise cancellation front microphone (F M IC +)
14 WHT Active noise cancellation rear microphone (R M IC +)
20 WHT/GRN No. 5 (10 A) fuse in the driver's under-dash fuse/relay box (+B)
*08-1 § models w i thout premium audio system, with ANC
UNIT 24P CONNECTOR

r
h— -r
1 ■2 3 4 5 ‘ 12
/ • 10 '11
13 14I 1£>1(3 17
6 ,
V 'l£ > / I
i 22 23 , 24

1 RED Subwoofer (SUBW—)
2 WHT PCM (CSSAM2)
3 PNK PCM (CSSAMD
4 PUR Shield for terminal No. 16 (ANC R SH GND)
5 LT BLU* Shield for terminal No. 17 (ANC F SH GND)
11 BLU Audio unit (ANC FR+)
13 GRN Subwoofer (SUBW+)
14 YEL/GRN Audio unit (RADIO SW D +B )
15 WHT/GRN PCM(NEP)
16 WHT Active noise cancellation rear microphone (ANC R+ )
17 BLU Active noise cancellation front microphone (ANC F+)
21 GRY* Shield for terminals No. 10, No. 11, No. 22, and No. 23 (ANC SH GND)
24 WHT No. 5 (7.5 A) fuse in the auxiliary under-hood fuse box (+B)
Auxiliary Jack Assembly Connector for Inputs and Outputs ("08-10 models)
When replacing an auxiliary jack assembly connector, match the wires to the cavities listed in the following table.
CONNECTOR
AUXILIARY JACK ASSEMBLY 5P CONNECTOR
C J
1 2 3 4 5

1 LT BLU Audio unit (AUX DET)
2 LT GRN Audio unit (AUX GND)
3 BLK Audio unit (AUX S GND)
4 WHT Audio unit (AUX L)
5 RED Audio unit (AUX R)
Circuit Diagram
'07 model w ith Premium Audio System
A UX ILIARY
UND ER -HO O D FUSE BOX
No. 5 (20 A)
l> ^ STEREO
V ^ AMPLIFIER
*1: The shielded w ires have a heat-shrunk tube insulating
the outside o f the w ire. The color o f the insulating tube,
typically black o r dark gray, m ay not match the color of
(U SA m odels w ithout navigation) the w ire listed on the schematic.
*2: W ith navigation
- - GA-NET
— : Shielding
No. 5 (10 A) FUSE
(In the driver's
under-dash X M AN TEN N A
fuse/relay box)
T
WHT/GRN
“ C |T
X M A N TEN N A LEAD
B1 B2
+B SIG SH
X M RECEIVER
G A-N ET G A-NET G A-NET
AUD102 A U D I0 2 A U D I0 2 A U D I0 2 A U D IO A UD IO AU D IO SYSTEM
L+ L- R + _____ E - .......... . ___ ,________BUS2+ B U S 2 - BUS2 SH G ND ACC
A6 A 14 A5 A13 A9 A 10 | A3 A11 A2
'^1 ' 1 GRY * 1
BLK GRN RED WHT LTB LU PUR WHT/BLK

i i i BLU m E D I
i
i
; i n
GRY * 1 „ -
n GRY * 1 1
i
I " i
D6 D14 D5 D13 ID 4 D9 D10 I D3 D 11 D2 |
A U D I0 2 A U D I0 2 A U D I0 2 A U D I0 2 A U D I0 2 GA-N ET GA-NET G A-NET G ND SYSTEM ' >
L+ L- R+ R- SH A U D IO AUD IO AUDIO ACC
! BUS2+ B U S 2 - BUS2 SH , j
AUD IO U N IT
ANC ANC ANC ANC ANC
FR+ FR RR+ RR- CHK2
E1 E2 E3 E4 E5
No. 32 (10 A) FUSE
(In the driver's
under-dash
fuse/relay box)
BLK GRN RED WHT BRN
I
YEL/RED
2 10 1 9 12 8
ANC ANC A NC ANC ANC ACC

FR+ FR - RR+ RR- CHK2
ACTIVE NOISE CANCELLATION U N IT
(W ith built-in microphone)
INTR
G ND LT- NEP COSAM
7 16 15 1 14
ENGINE M O U N T
CONTROL
JTROLUU NIT
b j
BRN YEL W H T/G R N PNK
PNK
PNK
-
A
(*) IVIULI lrLEA
MULTIPLEX
INTEGRATED
A ZTTTT
PCM
A
r - „ CONTROL
G 502 U N IT (M ICU)
No. 5 (20 A) No. 32 (10 A)

FUSE FUSE FRONT
(In the (In the DRIVER'S PASSENGER'S LEFT REAR RIGHT REAR
auxiliary driver's DOOR SPEAKER LEFT TWEETER DOOR SPEAKER RIG HT TWEETER SPEAKER SPEAKER SUBWOOFER
under-hood under-dash r ---------- :------- 7
fu se box) fu se/relay box) 1----------------- [
I2 S '
Y T
BLU YEL/RED
I2
WHT
GRN
I1
BLU/ORN
GRY/BLU
RED/BLU
| 2
BRN
1 |
BLK/RED
1
PNK/BLK
2 J2
PNK
PUR
1 | 2
BLU/RED
BLU/ORN
1 I2
GRN
I 1
A9 A3 jA 1 3 A4 jA 1 4 A2 | A12 A8 | A18 A7 | A17 A5
>
>
ACC FR L FR L FR L FRL FR R FR R FRR FRR RR L RR L RR R RR R WOOFER+ WOOFER-
SPKR+ SPK R- TW + TW - SPKR+ SPKR- TW + TW - SPKR+ SPKR- SPKR+ SPKR-
STEREO AMPLIFIER
RADIO FL PRE FL PRE FL PRE FR PRE FR PRE FR PRE RL PRE RL PRE RL PRE RR PRE RR PRE RR PRE
SW D+B IN + IN - IN SH IN+ IN - IN SH 1N+ IN - IN SH IN+ IN - IN SH P G ND S G ND
j B2 B4 B11 j B5 B3 B10 j B9 B13 B12 A20 B14
GRY* G RY* GRY* G RY* BLK
BLU PNK RED LT BLU PUR BRN YEL
-U- SL
G504 G 504
A8 A7 A17 A6 A16
RADIO FL PRE FL PRE FR PRE FR PRE RL PRE RL PRE RR PRE RR PRE
SW D+B IN + IN - IN+ IN - IN+ IN IN+ IN -
AU D IO U N IT
' 1 G A-NET GA-NET G A-NET
I ILL SYSTEM A U D I0 2 A U D I0 2 A U D I0 2 A U D I0 2 A U D I0 2 A UD IO AUD IO AUD IO
<1 SCTY 6 +B ILL CTRL +B G ND ACC L+ L- R+ R- SH BUS2+ BUS2- BUS2 SH
1
1 A4 D7 D8 D12 D1 D11 D2 D6 D14 D5 D13 jD 4 D9 D10 J D3
1
1
r"-
i
^ G RY* f - ^ G RY*
1
i
1 i
i J i U
G RN/ORN RED/YEL GRN/RED G R N /W H T RED/BLU WHT/BLK BLU/RED BLK GRN RED W HTi LT BLU PUR i
n G RY*
n G RY*
A8 A17 A3 A7 A6 A10 A2
SCTY6 +B ILL ILL G ND
SYSTEM A U D I0 2 A U D I0 2 A U D I0 2 A U D I0 2 A U D I0 2 G A-NET G A-NET G A-NET
CTRL ACC L+ L- R+ A UD IO AUD IO AUDIO
BUS2+ B U S 2- B U S 2S H
G A-N ET G A-NET GA-NET A U D IO DISC CHANGER
DISP CD AU D IO A UD IO A UD IO
S C T Y 5 OPEN EJECT BUS1+ B U S 1 - BUS1 SH
A18 A4 ■ B9 ; B10 j B3
G RY*
GRN/YEL BLU PNK BLU PNK 1

i - i
i ; ; *—
k * . 1
■ — ___~i G RY*
A16 B9 B10 • A3 • A13 j A4

SCTY 5 DISP CD GA-NET GA-N ET GA-NET
OPEN EJECT AU D IO AUD IO A UD IO
BU S 1 + B U S 1- B U S 1S H
N A V IG A TIO N DISPLAY
*: The shielded w ires have a heat-shrunk tube insulating
the outside o f the w ire. The color of the insulating tube,
typically black or dark gray, m ay not match the color of
the w ire listed on the schematic.
GA-NET
------------ : Shielding
(W ith navigation) (U SA m odels w ith navigation)
*07 model without Premi um Audio System
UNDER-HO O D FUSE/RELAY BOX

No. 22 IG NITIO N SW ITCH
BATTERY No. 23
(BAT) (120 A) (IG) (50 A) G1
W H T/R E D -
0 -
ACC HO T in ACC (I)
No. 15 (40 A) D6 and ON (II)
• CRUISE CONTROL
C O M B IN ATIO N SW ITCH
• M U LTI INFO RM A TION
S W ITCH * 1 470 O 1.2 kO 3.9 kO
V
DASH LIGHTS
■ VOICE CONTROL
SW ITCH * 2 iVOL. 6 |VOL. ^
BRIGHTNESS
CONTROLLER
V , DO W N
ylW |IU)
i UP i pH
||H ||(+) ^
, CH MODE
BRN
(In the gauge _J
control m odule)
-9 r
G503
*1 : W ith multi inform ation switch
*2 : W ith navigation
Shielding
FRONT
DRIVER'S LEFT PASSENGER'S RIGHT LEFT REAR RIGHT REAR
DOOR SPEAKER TWEETER DOOR SPEAKER TWEETER SPEAKER SPEAKER
S 7
GRN/BLK
I2
GRN/BLK
r
GRN/YEL GRN/YEL BLU/W HT
I2
PNK
LT GRN LT GRN GRY/RED GRY/RED BLU/BLK BLU/YEL
(W ith clim ate control) (W ith clim ate control)

GRN/BLK GRN/YEL
LT GRN GRY/RED
A8 A18 A7 A17 A5 A15

FR L FR L FR R FR R RR L RR L RR R RR R
SPKR+ SPKR- SPKR+ SPK R- SPKR+ SPKR- SPKR+ SPKR-
A U D IO UNIT
ANC ANC ANC ANC ANC

No, 32 (10 A) FUSE

(In the driver's
under-dash
fuse/relay box)
BLK GRN RED WHT BRN

V
YEL/RED
2 10 1 9 12 j 8
ANC ANC ANC ANC ANC ACC

ACTIVE NOISE CANCELLATION U N IT
(W ith built-in microphone)
INTR
G ND LT- NEP COSAM
7 16 15 14
ENGINE M O U N T
CONTROL U N IT
BRN YEL W H T/GR N PNK
PNK ■
PNK
-LL
A
MULTIPLEX
INTEGRATED
A
PCM
A
CONTROL
G502 U N IT (M ICU)
(cont'd)
AUD IO U N IT
GA-NET GA-NET G A-NET
ILL SYS TE M A U D I0 2 AUD102 A U D I0 2 AUD102 A U D I0 2 A UD IO AUDIO A UD IO
SCTY 6 ILL CTRL ACC L+ L- R+
I
1 A4 D7 D8 D12 D1 D11 D2 D6 D14 D5 D13 | D4 D9 D10 jD 3
1
1
r"-
""I G RY* ^ G RY*
i i
t
i i
1 i
i Jt i
i • U
G RN/ORN RED/YEL GRN/RED G R N /W H T RED/BLU W HT/BLK BLU/RED BLK GRN RED WHT LT BLU PUR i
i
n G RY*
n G RY*
A8 A16 A3 A13 A6 A9 A1 A10 A2 I A11 A5 A15 IA 1 4

SCTY 6 ILL ILL GNDS YS TE M A U D I0 2 A U D I0 2 A U D I0 2 A U D I0 2 A U D I0 2 G A-NET GA-NET G A-NET
CTRL ACC L+ L- R+ SH AU D IO AUDIO A UD IO
BUS2+ B U S 2- BUS2 SH
GA-NET GA-N ET G A-NET AU D IO DISC CHANGER
DISP CD AUD IO AU D IO AUDIO
SCTY 5 OPEN EJECT BUS1+ B U S T - BUS1 SH
A18 . B9 ; B10 j B3
G RY*
GRN/YEL BLU PNK BLU PNK '

i - i
i I ; t —■
k * *„ i
G RY*
A16 B9 B10 ^ A3 I A13 I A4

SCTY 5 DISP CD GA-N ET G A-NET G A-N ET
OPEN EJECT AUD IO AU D IO AUD IO
B U S 1 + B U S 1- BUS1 SH
NAVIG ATIO N DISPLAY

the outside of the w ire. The color o f the insulating tube,
G A-NET
------------: Shielding
(W ith navigation) (U SA m odels w ith navigation)
*08-10 models w ith Premium Audio System
AU X ILIA R Y
UNDER-HO O D FUSE BOX
No. 5 (20 A)
STEREO
BLU *
|A M P L IF IE R
UNDER-HO O D FUSE/RELAY BOX

IG NITIO N SW ITCH
No. 22 No. 23
(BAT) (120 A) (IG) (50 A) G1
■ W HT- - W HT/RED -
ACC HOT in ACC (I)

N o. 15 (40 A) D 6 and ON (II)
YEL ■
DRIVER'S
A M /F M A N TEN N A
UNDER-DASH
B4 FUSE/RELAY BOX A5
cb cb j No. 32
) No. 5
'( 1 0 A )
± !i± > (10 A)
No. 7 (7.5 A) FUSE

(In the
A M /FM IN11 N36
A N T EN N A
passenger's AMPLIFIER W H T/G R N
under-dash
fuse/relay box)
W H T/G R N W H T/G R N YEL/RED
A M /F M A N T EN N A LEAD *
RED/BLK
A M /FM AN'
4
i N N A SUBLEAD • X M RECEIVER
• ACTIVE NOISE
CANCELLATION
A 10 G3 I G2 G1 U N IT A14
ILL+ ANT ANT ANT +B ACC
+B SH SIG
A U D IO U N IT
A UD IO REMOTE
G ND ILL- REMOTE GND
A9
BLK RED
No. 7 (7.5 A ) FUSE
(In the
passenger's
RED ■ under-dash
fuse/relay box)
CABLE REEL
GRN
AUD IO REMOTE SWITCH

■ CRUISE CONTROL
CO M B IN ATIO N SW ITCH HFL-VOICE
■ M U LTI INFO RM A TION CONTROL
SW ITCH
10 k n < 11
SW ITCH
■ HFL-VOICE CONTROL
V
DASH LIGHTS
SW ITCH
jVOL.
Y
BRIGHTNESS i DOW N I UP I pH i p*J I MODE
BRN
CONTROLLER ylfr) y U)
(In the gauge
control m odule)
jQ. ■ GRN
typically black or dark gray, m ay not match the color o f
the w ire listed on the schematic,
------------: Shielding
HANDSFREELINK CONTROL U N IT
V V V V
GRN RED PNK LT GRN

1 i
1 i
i
H
G RY*
i
i
| F10 F19 F9 F8 F20

TELM TELM TELM HFL HFL
SIG SIG+ S IG - ICON MUTE
A UD IO U N IT SH
AUX
AUX AUX AUX SH AUX AUX
L R S G ND G ND G ND DET
F13 F14 F3 j F4 F5 F15
- - - _ |
~ - GRY*
I
1
1
I
WHT RED BLK i
U LT GRN LT BLU
AUX AUX AUX AUX AUX

L R S G ND G ND DET
AUXILIARY JACK ASSEM BLY
(cont'd)
No. 5 (20 A)
FUSE FRONT
(In the DRIVER'S PASSENGER'S LEFT REAR RIGHT REAR
auxiliary DOOR SPEAKER LEFT TW EETER DOOR SPEAKER RIGHT TWEETER SPEAKER SPEAKER SUBWOOFER
under-hood
fuse box)
1 S 7 YEE7 FEE7 ^ I
T I2
W HT
1 I1
BLU/ORN
2 |
RED/BLU
2
1 l1
BLK/RED
2 12
PNK
1 12
BLU/RED
1 12
GRN
*: The shielded wires have a heat-shrunk tube insulating
------------: GA-NET
-------- Shielding
REAR CONTROLLER and SCREEN NAVIG ATIO N U N IT
G A-NET G A-NET G A-NET RG RG RG

SCTY 2 SCTY 3 RR BUS+ RR B U S - RR BUS SH L+ G ND SH G ND
| 22 | 23 I 3 *, 16 | 15 B14 B13
BLU/YEL RED/WHT G RY*

I "• I
t
GRN
i ;
i •
i *
LT BLU
:
•
•
PUR
i
i
t-
i
i ____
J
i
BRN
U
i
A ^ N I I |r e u S LU
DVD PLAYER NAVIGATION ^ GRY* „ -

n G RY*
U N IT DISPLAY I" ~ - "
! C9 I
C 11 C10 F11 F1 j F2
GA-NET G A-NET G A-NET RG RG RG
RR BUS+ RR B U S - RR BUS SH L+ G ND SH GND
AUD IO U N IT
G A-NET G A-NET GA-NET
ILL SYSTEM A U D I0 2 A U D I0 2 A U D I0 2 A U D I0 2 A U D I0 2 A UD IO AUD IO AUDIO
SCTY 6 +B ILL CTRL +B G ND ACC L+ L- R+ R- SH BUS2+ B U S 2 - BUS2 SH
A4 D7 D8 D12 D1 D11 D2 D6 D14 D5 D13 J D4 I D9 I D10 | D3
I G RY* r GRY*
I
I
GRN/ORN RED/YEL GRN/RED G RN/W H T RED/BLU W HT/BLK BLU/RED

I
BLK GRN RED WHT i
U i!
LT BLU PUR i
U
i i i i
i
i
i n G RY*
!
- ^
n
^ - GRY*
A8 A17 A16 A3 A7 A13 A6 A9 A1 A10 A2 IA 1 1 A5 A15 j A14

SCTY 6 +B ILL ILL +B G ND SYSTEM A U D I0 2 A U D I0 2 A U D I0 2 A U D I0 2 A U D I0 2 G A-NET G A-NET G A-NET x
CTRL ACC L+ L- R+ R— SH A UD IO AUD IO AUDIO
BUS2+ B U S 2- B U S 2S H j
AUD IO DISC CHANGER
(

the outside of the w ire. The color of the insulating tube,
typically black or dark gray, m ay not match the color o f
.............. : GA-NET
------------; Shielding
"08-10 models without Premium Audio System
*1: '0 8 -0 9 m odels with navigation
* 2 : '10 m odel w ith navigation
AUXILIARY *3: W ith X M
UNDER-HO O D FUSE BOX pT|: W ith navigation
No. 5 (7.5 A) [ 2 ] : W ithout navigation
ACTIVE NOISE
BLK
-£ > CANCELLATION U N IT * 3

IG NITION SW ITCH
No. 22 No. 23
(BAT) (120 A) (IG) (50 A) G1
-W H T /R E D -
ACC HOT in ACC (I)

No. 15 (40 A) D6 and ON (II)
YEL •
DRIVER'S
A M /F M A N TEN N A
UNDER-DASH
B4 FUSE/RELAY BOX A5
cb cb jN o .3 2
) No. 5 (6 CD type w ithout
'( 1 0 A )
± ii± , (10 A) rear entertainm ent
system)
No. 7 (7.5 A) FUSE A M /FM (N il N36
(In the A N TEN N A MULTIPLEX
passenger's AMPLIFIER W H T/GR N INTEGRATED
under-dash CONTROL U N IT
fuse/relay box) (M IC U)
W H T/GR N W H T/GR N YEL/RED
r* -
T A M /F M A N T EN N A LEAD
A M /F M Lt N N A SUBLEAD X M RECEIVER *3
RED/BLU
A10 G3
ILL+ ANT ANT ANT ACC SCTY 1
+B SH SIG
A U D IO U N IT
AUDIO REMOTE
GND ILL— REMOTE GND
A9 A1
No. 7 (7.5 A) FUSE

(In the rs.
passenger's —
under-dash ^
fuse/relay box)
RED ■ RED/BLK WHT
Q ]:1 7 Q]:18 □]:£ EM

[21:10 [2 1 :4 CABLE REEL [21:11
Q]:9 HI: 10 S3]: 19 CD: 18

[2]: 10 [2 ]:4 [21:12 [21:11
GRN RED/BLK GRN/RED
RED
■ RED/BLK
r
RED/BLK
VOICE
CONTROL
• CRUISE CONTROL S W ITCH * 1
CO M B IN ATIO N SWITCH HFL-VOICE
• VOICE CONTROL CONTROL
V
DASH LIGHTS
SW ITCH * 1
• HFL-VOICE CONTROL
SW ITCH * 2
BRIGHTNESS
CONTROLLER
SW ITCH * 2
ilVO L. Q lV O L. v,,
DO W N , UP ~ CH MODE
V
(In the gauge <j3!(▼) | 1(A) ||H ||(+) y
control m odule)
• GRN
G503
(cont'd)
*: The shielded wires have a heat-shrunk tube
insulating the outside o f the w ire. The color o f
(cont'd)
(W ith rear entertainm ent system ) (W ith navigation)
REAR CONTROLLER and SCREEN
(With NAVIGATION U N IT
(W ithout G A-N ET GA-NET GA-NET
navigation) navigation) RR RR RR RG RG RG SH
SCTY 2 j SCTY 3~ ^ SCTY 3 * BUS+ BUS- BUS SH L+ G ND GNCL
22 J 23 23 !3 I 16 B17 B14 IB 1 3
RED/WHT
G RY* G RY*
DLL// TCL GRN RED/W HT LT BLU PUR i

i
BRN
YEL
U
i
i
A
DVD
PLAYER
NAVIGATION
DISPLAY
.-
n G RY*
RED/BLU
n
G RY*
U N IT
A4 C9 C11 C10 F1 IF 2
G A-N ET G A-NET G A-NET RG RG RG SH
RR RR RR L+ G ND G ND
BUS+ BUS- BUS SH AUD IO U N IT
----------------------------------------------------------------- 1 G A-NET G A-NET G A-NET
ILL SYSTEM A U D I0 2 A U D I0 2 A U D I0 2 A U D I0 2 A U D I0 2 A UD IO A UD IO AUD IO
SCTY 6 +B ILL CTRL +B GND ACC L+ L -____ R+____ R - SH BUS2+ B U S 2 - BUS2 SH
D7 D12 D1 D11 D2 D6 D14 D5 D13 D4 I D9 I D10
G RY* G RY*
GRN/O RN GRN/RED RED/BLU BLK GRN RED W H Ti LT BLU PUR

i Jii
RED/YEL G RN/W H T WHT/BLK i
GRY*
n G RY*
A8 A17 A16 A13 A6 A9 A1 A10 A2 I A11 A15 IA 1 4

S CTY € +B ILL +B G ND SYSTEM A U D I0 2 A U D I0 2 A U D I0 2 A U D I0 2 A U D I0 2 G A-NET G A-N ET G A-NET
CTRL ACC L+ L- R+ R- SH AUD IO AU D IO AUD IO
BUS2+ B U S 2 - B U S 2S H
AUD IO DISC CHANGER
L
typically black or dark gray, m ay not m atch the color of
. the w ire listed on the schematic.
.............. : G A-NET
-------- Shielding
(W ith navigation)
(cont'd)
How to Obtain the Audio Unit Serial Number

To obtai n the audio unit serial number on a vehicle, do the following:
NOTE: You can only do this procedure after the battery power has been disconnected once and reconnected to the audio
unit and the audio unit di splays CODE.
2. With the audio unit turned off, push and hold the No. 1 and No. 6 buttons. While holding the buttons, push the VOL
push PWR knob (A) to ON.
With navigation Without navigation
A A
3. The display shows an 8 digit serial number.

Enampie: 12345678
4. Use all 8 numbers as the serial number when using the Interactive Network (iN) to retrieve the 5 digit anti-theft code.
5. The self-diagnostic function ends when you turn the audio unit off, or turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
How to check for audio unit condition
2. Enter the anti-theft code.
push PWR knob (A) to on. Release the buttons and the self-diagnostic function begins.
4. DIAG appears on the audio unit to indicate you have entered the self-diagnostic mode.
5. By pressing a preset button while DIAG is displayed, the input triggers the diagnostic mode that is assigned to that
preset switch.
No. 3 button
Entire LCD lighting mode: Turns on the entire LCD to show if there are any LCD segment failures. If any LCD segments
fail to turn on, replace the applicable display unit
No. 4 button
Entire LCD light-out mode: Turns off the entire LCD to show if there are any LCD segments that are stuck on. If any
LCD segments fail to turn off, replace the applicable display unit.
No. 1 button ('07 model with navigation)
Active noise cancellation system function check mode:
How to check the active noise cancellation system
• With the engine stopped and while in DIAG mode, turn the ANC ON to OFF by pressing the No. 1 button. A
low-Frequency hum (50 Hz) should sound for about a minute.
- Ifthe hum does not sound, check for an open in the wire between the active noise cancellation unit and the audio
unit.
- If the hum does not sound for a minute, check for an open in the wire between the active noise cancellation unit
and the microphone.
• Test drive the vehicle at 55 mph (88 km/h) and enter the DIAG mode. Turn the active noise cancellation system OFF
and back to ON (II), the active noise cancellation system should activate.
NOTE: The active noise cancellation system is cancelled when any door is opened.
(cont'd)
How to check the active noise cancellation system ('08-10 models)

NOTE: Before diagnosis, check that all speakers operate. If no sound is heard from the speaker, do the No sounds is
heard from speaker(s) troubleshooting (see page 23-101).
2. Enter the anti-theft code.
push PWR knob (A) to ON.
4. DIAG appears on the audio unit to indicate you have entered the self-diagnostic mode.
5. While in DIAG mode, press the No. 1 button once, and ANC ON appears on the display and the ANC diagnostic mode
begins.
q *v r nki
I II iL US 4
6. There are 10 test modes. When the display changes from ANC ON to ANC OFF, you completed one test, and the next
one begins.
• If no failure is detected, a low-Frequency hum (50 Hz) should sound for a minute.
• If any failure is detected, a low-Frequency hum (50 Hz) should sound for about a second.
• By pressing the No. 1 button and changing the display from ANC OFF into ANC ON, the test you are on ends, and
the next test begins.
A low-frequency A low-frequency A low-frequency

hum sound for hum sound for hum sound for
1 min. or 1 sec. 1 min. or 1 sec. 1 min. or 1 sec.
ANCON
ANC OFF
Test mode 1 Test mode 2 Test mode 3

ANC
diag
start
Test No. Content of diagnosis Test condition
1 • Active noise cancellation front/rear microphone
input test
• Front/Rear speakers output test
2 • Active noise cancellation front/rear microphone • With the engine running
input test • Make sure all doors are closed
• Front/Rear speakers output test
• Engine Evolution signal (NEP) input test
• Door OPEN/CLOSE signal (INTR LT) input test
3 Front speakers output test
4 Rear speakers output test
5 Active noise cancellation front microphone input test
6 Active noise cancellation rear microphone input test
7 Engine Evolution signal (NEP) input test With the engine running
8 Door OPEN/CLOSE signal (INTR LT) input test Make sure all doors are closed
NOTE: When you start the engine during the 2nd or 7th test, the audio unit power supply is cut off and the
self-diagnostic mode ends. Start the engine and start at test No. 1.
Cylinder suspension signal (CSSAM1/CSSAM2) input test

7. Turn the i gnition switch to LOCK (0).
8. Connect the HDS to the data link connector (DLC) (see page 23-6).
push PWR knob to ON.
11. While in DIAG mode, press the No. 1 button once, and ANC ON appears on the display and the ANC diagnostic mode
begins.
Test No. Content of diagnosis Test condition

9 Cylinder suspension signal • On the HDS screen, select Inspection Menu in the PGM-FI
(CSSAM1) input test menu, then select VTEC Test, then select VPS Test and do
the 3 cylinder activation test
• Follow the screen instructions
• Go to ANC test No. 9
• While hold the engine speed, push the No. 1 button to start
the 9th test
10 Cylinder suspension signal • On the HDS screen, select Inspection Menu in the PGM-FI
(CSSAM2) input test menu, then select VTEC Test, then select VPS Test and do
the 4 cylinder activation test
• Follow the screen instructions
• Go to ANC test No. 8
• While holding the engine speed, push the No. 1 button to
start the 10th test
Error Codes
The audio system can display a few error codes when some problems are detected with the audio disc player, the audio
disc, the XM radio, or the anti-theft code. This is not a complete list of audio error codes. Refer to symptom
troubleshooting, or go to any official Honda service website for more service information.
CD Error Codes ('07 model)

Error Code Displayed Possible Cause Solution
CD MECHA ERROR There is a problem with the disc player. Try to eject the disc and try another one.
A common problem is disc labels If there is still a problem, replace the
coming off the disc while in the player. audi o unit
CD HEAT ERROR Disc player is hot This can happen if Park the vehicle in a cooler place for a
the vehicle is parked out in the hot sun while and try the disc player again. If the
all day. error code is still present, try another
disc. If the error code is still present,
replace the audio unit.
CD Error Codes ('08-10 models)

UNSUPPORTED FORMAT Track/File format not supported. Current track is skipped. The next
supported track of file plays
automatically.
• Verify that CD, CD-R, or CD-RW file
names end in CD-A or WMA.
• Verify that the CD, CD-R, or CD-RW
with compressed music formats end
in MP3 or WMA.
• Other file formats like i-Tunes or Ogg
are not recognized.
• WMA files may have (DRM) copy
protection and cannot be read.
BAD DISC/PLEASE • CD label jammed in the mechanism. Press the EJECT button and hold it for 5
CHECK/OWNERS • CD eject mechanism or motor is seconds. If the disc does not eject, try
MANUAL/PUSH EJECT inoperative. again. If the disc still won't eject, replace
• CD spindle motor won't spin up the the unit.
CD.
• The wrong type disc is inserted.
Error Codes (cont'd)
Audio Unit Error Codes

CODE ERROR 1 Anti-theft code mismatch (1st try). Enter the correct anti-theft code
CODE ERROR E Anti-theft code mismatch (10th try). Remove fuse No. 5 (10 A) in the driver's
under-dash fuse/relay box, then reinsert
it. You will have 10 more tries to enter
the correct anti-theft code.
K M Error Codes
LOADING XM radio is acquiring audio or program Wait until the radio receives the
information. information.
OFF AIR XM channel not in service. Try another XM channel.
NO SIGNAL Loss of signal. Both terrestrial and satellite antennas
have lost signal. Park the vehicle outside
with a clear view of the southern
horizon.
UPDATING XM radio is receiving information This message disappears once the
update from the network. update finishes.
CHECK ANTENNA XM antenna error. Repair the open or short in the terrestrial
or satellite antenna. Substitute the XM
antenna and recheck. Ifthe error is gone,
replace the original XM antenna. If the
error is still present, replace the antenna
lead.
ANTENNA ERROR XM antenna error. Repair the open or short in the terrestrial
or satellite antenna. Substitute the XM
antenna and recheck. Ifthe error is gone,
replace the original XM antenna. If the
error is still present, replace the antenna
lead.
No signal from XM. Check a known-good vehicle with XM
radio. If the known-good vehicle has the
same symptoms, contact XM satellite
radio at 800-852-9696.
NOTE: Do these checks with the vehicle parked outside with a clear view of the southern horizon.
Poor AM or FM radio reception or interference 6. Check the connections from the AM/FM antenna
amplifier to the window antenna.
NOTE:
A r e th e r e a n y lo o s e o r d a m a g e d c o n n e c tio n s ?
• Check the vehicle battery condition first (see page
22-111), YES-Repair the connections, or substitute a
• Check for aftermarket accessories plugged into the known-good AM/FM antenna amplifi er (see page
vehicle accessory power sockets. 23-176), and retest. Ifthe symptom/condition goes
• Check the connectors for poor connections or loose away, replace the original AM/FM antenna
terminals. am plifier.!
• Check the radio reception in an open area. Poor NO-Go to step 7.
reception/interference can be caused by the following:
7. With the help of an assistant inside the vehicle, have
- The radio station is far away.
the assistant shine a strong flashlight (A) along each
- Atmospheric conditions are unfavorable. antenna wire (B). Check from the outside of the
- Tall buildings, mountains, or high-voltage power vehicle for any breaks or openings in the antenna
lines are nearby. wires (the light shines through any breaks or cuts).
- Aftermarket metallic window tint.
NOTE: It is easier to see the breaks if you do this test in
1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). a dark or shaded area.
2. Do the seek stop test (see page 23-166).
Is th e t e s t v e h ic le w ith in 1 0 % o f t h e k n o w n - g o o d
v e h ic le ?
YES-Multipath interference or weak station.
Operation is n orm al.!
NO-Go to step 3.
3. Check if the radio reception/interference is the same
in several locations.
Is th e r e c e p tio n /in te r fe r e n c e th e s a m e ?
YES-Go to step 4.
NO-Multipath interference or weak station. Operation
is norm al.!
4. Check the reception/interference while the engine is
running. A r e t h e r e a n y b r e a k s o r c u t s in t h e a n t e n n a ?
Is t h e r e n o is e ( s t a t ic o r w h in e ) o n ly w ith t h e e n g in e YES-Repair the window antenna. Go to AM/FM
r u n n in g ? antenna repair (see page 23-177), or replace the right
YES-Check the AM/FM antenna amplifier and radio quarter glass if the damaged section is too lo n g .!
grounds. If OK, check the charging system and the NO-Go to step 8.
ignition system.®
8. Remove the dashboard center lower (see page
NO-Go to step 5. 20-136). Check that the AM/FM antenna sublead
5. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (O). connector is properly connected.
Is th e A M /F M a n te n n a s u b le a d c o n n e c t e d p r o p e r ly ?
YES-Go to step 9.
NO-Reconnect the antenna sublead connector, and
recheck the function.
(cont'd)
9. Disconnect the AM/FM antenna amplifier 3P 13. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
connector (see page 23-176).
14. Remove the audio unit (see page 23-167), and
10. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). disconnect audio unit connector G (3P).
11. Turn on the audio unit. 15. Check for continuity between audio unit connector G
(3P) terminal No. 3 and AM/FM antenna amplifier 3P
12. Measure the voltage between AM/FM antenna
amplifier 3P connector terminal No. 3 and body
ground.
A M /F ll ANTENNA AMPLIFIER 3P CONNECTOR
ANT +B
AM/FM ANTENNA AMPLIFIER 3P CONNECTOR


Is t h e r e b a t t e r y v o lta g e ? YES-Replace the audio unit (see page 23-167).B
YES-Go to step 16. NO-Repair an open in the wire between the audio unit
and the AM/FM antenna am plifier.!
NO-Go to step 13.
17. Check for continuity between audio unit connector G

ANT SIG
(No.1) (O)
ANT SIG
(No. 1)
AM/FM ANTENNA AMPLIFIER 3P CONNECTOR

YES-Go to step 18.
NO-Replace the antenna lead and/or sublead.l
18. Check for continuity between audio unit connector G 20. Check for continuity between audio unit connector G
(3P) terminal No. 1 and body ground. (3P) terminals No. 1 and No. 2.
AUDIO UNIT CONNECTOR G (3P) AUDIO UNIT CONNECTOR G (3P)
ANT SIG (No.1) ANT SIG (No.1)
ANT SH
(No. 2)
Terminal side of female term inals Terminal side of female term inals
YES-Replace the antenna lead and/or sublead.■ YES-Replace the antenna lead and/or sublead.B
NO-Go to step 19. NO-Replace the AM/FM antenna amplifier (see page
23-176), and recheck. If the reception is still poor,
19. Check for continuity between audio unit connector G replace the audio unit (see page 23-167).B
AUDIO UNIT CONNECTOR Q (3P)

AM /FM ANTENNA AMPLIFIER 3P CONNECTOR

YES-Go to step 20.
NO-Replace the antenna lead and/or sublead.B
Audio unit power switch will not turn on (No 6. Measure the voltage between body ground and audio
unit connector A (20P) terminals No. 2 and No. 10
information display and no sound) ('07 model)
individually.
NOTE:
• Check the vehicle battery condition first (see page AUDIO UNIT CONNECTOR A (20P)
22-111). AM fYHM U +B (WHT/GRN)
• Check the connectors for poor connections or loose _ n_Lr c. -J r r
terminals. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
CM
o
1. With the ignition switch turned to ON (II), push the 11 12 13 / 15 16 17 18 19
audio unit power switch on to see if it turns on.
D o e s th e a u d io u n it d is p la y o p e r a t e p r o p e r ly , a n d d o e s
th e a u d io u n it s o u n d n o r m a l?
YES-lntermittent failure, the system is OK at this
time.B Wire side of female terminals
' NO-Go to step 2. .
YES-Go to step 7.
3. Check the No. 5 (10 A) fuse and No. 32 (10 A) fuse in
the driver's under-dash fuse/relay box. NO-Repair an open in the wire(s) between the No. 5
(10 A) fuse and No. 32 (10 A) in the driver's
A re th e fu s e s O K ? under-dash fuse/relay box and the audio unit.B
YES-Go to step 4. 7. Measure the voltage between audio unit connector A
NO-Replace the fuse, and recheck.B (20P) terminal No. 20 and body ground.
4. Remove the audio unit (see page 23-167). Check that AUDIO UNIT CONNECTOR A (20P)
the audio unit is properly connected.
Is th e a u d io u n it c o n n e c t e d p r o p e r ly ? n n c ir* n n
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
YES-Go to step 5.
11 12 13 15 16 17 18 19 2 0
NO-Reconnect the connector, and recheck the
function.B GND (BLK)
YES-Replace the audio unit (see page 23-167).B
between audio unit connector A (20P) and body
ground (G503) (see page 22-43).B
Audio unit power switch will not turn on (No 5. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
information display and no sound) ('08-10 6. Measure the voltage between body ground and audio
models) unit connector A (17P) terminals No. 14 and No. 17
individually.
NOTE:
22-111).
• Check the connectors for poor connections or loose
terminals. 1 2 3 7 8 9
4 ,/ /
1. With the ignition switch turned to ON (II), push the 10 11 12 / ' 1 4 15 16 17
audio unit power switch on to see if it turns on.
ACC {YEL/RED) +B
D o e s th e a u d io u n it d is p la y o p e r a t e p r o p e r ly , a n d d o e s (WHT/GRN)
th e a u d io u n it s o u n d n o r m a l?
YES-lntermittent failure, the system is OK at this
1
time.B
NO-Go to step 2.
YES-Go to step 7.
3. Check the No. 5 (10 A) fuse and No. 32 (10 A) fuse in
the driver's under-dash fuse/relay box. NO-Repair an open in the wire(s) between the No. 5
A re th e fu s e s O K ?
under-dash fuse/relay box and the audio unit.B
YES-Go to step 4.
7. Measure the voltage between audio unit connector A
NO-Replace the fuse, and recheck.B (17P) terminal No. 9 and body ground.
4. Remove the audio unit (see page 23-167). Check that
the audio unit is properly connected.
GND (BLK)
Is th e a u d io u n it c o n n e c t e d p r o p e r ly ?
YES-Go to step 5. 1 2 4 / V " 7 8 9
3
NO-Reconnect the connector, and recheck the 10 11 1 2 , / • 14 15 16 17

function.®
Wire side o f female term inals
Is t h e r e le s s th a n 0 .2 V ?
YES-Replace the audio unit (see page 23-167).B
Audio unit power sw itch will not turn o ff ('07 Audio unit power sw itch w ill not turn off
model) ('08-10 models)
NOTE; NOTE:
• Check the vehicle battery condition first (see page • Check the vehicle battery condition first (see page
22-111). 22-111).
• Check the connectors for poor connections or loose • Check the connectors for poor connections or loose
terminals. terminals.
• Check for aftermarket accessories pulugged into the • Check for aftermarket accessories pulugged into the
vehicle accessory power sockets. vehicle accessory power sockets.
1. With the ignition switch turned to ON (II), push the 1. With the ignition switch turned to ON (II), push the
power switch off or turn the ignition switch to power switch off or turn the ignition switch to
LOCK (0) to see if the audio unit turns off. LOCK (0) to see if the audio unit turns off.
D o e s th e a u d io u n it tu r n o ff? D o e s th e a u d io u n it tu r n o ff?
YES-Operation is normal.■ YES-Operation is norm al.!
2. Make sure the ignition switch is in LOCK (0). 2. Make sure the ignition switch is in LOCK (0).
3. Remove the audio unit (see page 23-167). 3. Remove the audio unit (see page 23-167).
4. Measure the voltage between audio unit connector A 4. Measure the voltage between audio unit connector A
(20P) terminal No. 2 and body ground. (17P) terminal No. 14 and body ground.
AUDIO UNIT CONNECTOR A (20P) AUDIO UNIT CONNECTOR A (17P)
n In S r*.. n . n ..
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 1 2 3
4 / / 7 8 9
CM
o
11 12 13 / 15 16 17 18 19 10 11 12 / 1 4 15 16 17
ACC (YEL/RED)
Wire side of female term inals W ire side of female term inals
is th e re v o lta g e ? Is t h e r e v o lt a g e ?
YES-Check for short to power on YEL/RED wire.l YES-Check for short to power on YEL/RED wire.B
NO-Replace the audio unit (see page 23-167).H NO-Replace the audio unit (see page 23-167).■
No sound is heard from the speaker(s) 5. Check to see if there is a specific speaker that has no
sound.
(display is normal) ('07 model with premium
audio system) D o a n y o r a ll o f th e s p e a k e r s fa il to s o u n d ?
NOTE: YES-Go to step 6.

• Check the vehicle battery condition first (see page NO-Speakers all work, but sound quality is poor:
22-111). • If sound is poor only with XM radio, or the XM radio
• Set the fader and balance positions to the center. does not function, go to poor or no sound with XM
• Check the connectors for poor connections or loose radio (see page 23-160).!
terminals. • If the sound is poor only with AM or FM, go to poor
1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). AM or FM radio reception or interference (see page
23-87).!
2. Checkfor sound in each mode (AM, FM, XM, and CD). • If the sound is poor only with C D .!
Is t h e s o u n d O K in e a c h m o d e ? - Try several known-good CD in the audio unit.
- Ifthe sound quality is normal, the original CD is
YES-lntermittent failure. The system is OK atthis
faulty.
time. Check for loose connectors at the audio unit and
am plifier.! - If the sound quality is still poor, replace the audio
unit (see page 23-167).
NO-Go to step 3. • If the sound is poor in all modes, go to sound
3. Check that the volume button is not set to the MIN quality diagnosis (see page 23-162).!
level. 6. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
Is it a t th e M I N le v e l? 7. Check the speaker with no sound for any damage.
YES-Raise the volume level, and recheck the Is th e r e a n y d a m a g e ?
function.!
YES-Substitute the speaker (see page 23-172), and
NO- recheck.!
• With navigation: Go to step 4. NO-Go to step 8.
• Without navigation: Go to step 5.
8. Check the speaker connector for a loose or poor
4. On the steering wheel, check the navigation talk connection.
command.
R e c o n n e c t th e s p e a k e r c o n n e c to r, a n d r e c h e c k th e
Is t h e n a v ig a t io n t a lk c o m m a n d fu n c tio n s e t? s y m p t o m ; is t h e c o n d it io n s till p r e s e n t ?
YES-Cancel the navigation talk command by pressing YES-Go to step 9.
the navigation BACK button, then recheck the
function.! NO-lntermittent failure. Operation is norm al.!
9. Test the speaker(s) (see page 23-172).
NO-Go to step 5.
Is th e s p e a k e r ( s ) O K ?
YES-Go to step 10.
NO-Replace the speaker(s) (see page 23-172).!
10. Reconnect the speaker connector(s).
(cont'd)
11. Disconnect stereo amplifier connector A (20P). 13. Measure the resistance between each pair of speaker
terminals at stereo amplifier connector A (20P)
12. Check for continuity between body ground and stereo
according to the table.
amplifier connector A (20P) according to the table.
Speaker Stereo Wire Resistance
Speaker Stereo Wire color
amplifier color
amplifier
connector
connector
Driver's door speaker A3 (+ ) WHT Driver's A3 WHT About 4
A13 (—) GRN door speaker G
Left tweeter A4(+> BLU/ORN A13 GRN
A14 (—) GRY/BLU
Front passenger's A2(+) RED/BLU Left tweeter A3 BLU/ORN About 4
door speaker A12 (—) BRN n
Right tweeter A1 (+ ) BLK/RED A13 GRY/BLU
A11 ( - ) PNK/BLK
Front A2 RED/BLU About 4
Left rear speaker A8(+) PNK
passenger's 0
A18 (—) PUR door A12 BRN
Right rear speaker A 7 (+ ) BLU/RED speaker
A17 (—) BLU/ORN
Subwoofer A 5< + ) GRN Right A2 BLK/RED About 4
A15 (—) RED tweeter n
A12 PNK/BLK
STEREO AMPLIFIER CONNECTOR A (20P) Left rear A8 PNK About 4
speaker a
n n S c!. _ _ n_ n .. A18 PUR
1 2 3 4 5 / 7 8 9 10
Right rear A7 BLU/RED About 4
CM
O
11 12 13 14 15 / 17 18 speaker a
i— — t4 A17 BLU/ORN
Wire side of female terminals Subwoofer A5 GRN About 2

n
A15 RED
/s t h e r e c o n tin u ity ?
YES-Repair a short to body ground in the wires
between the stereo amplifier and the speaker(s).B
NO-Go to step 13.
... _n_ n...... ........ Si r* ...n__
1 2 3 4 5 / 7 8 9 10
11 12 13 14 15 / 17 18 / 20
is th e r e s is ta n c e O K ?
YES-Go to step 14.

NO-Repair an open or a short in the wire between the
stereo amplifier and the speaker(s).B
14. Disconnect stereo amplifier connect B (14P). 17. Check for continuity between stereo amplifier
connector B(14P) terminals according to the table.
15. Disconnect audio unit connector A (20P).
Channel From To
NOTE: Eject all the CDs before removing the audio
terminal terminals
unit and audio disc changer to prevent damaging the
Left front B2 (GRY) B1 (BLU),
CD player's load mechanism. B8 (PNK)
16. Check for continuity between stereo amplifier Right front B5 (GRY) B4 (GRN),
connector B (14P) and body ground according to the B11 (RED)
table. Left rear B9 (GRY)
(LTBLU),
Channel Stereo Wire color B10 (PUR)
amplifier Right rear B12 (GRY) B6 (BRN),
B13 (YEL)
connector
Left front B1 BLU
B8 PNK STEREO AMPLIFIER CONNECTOR B (14P)
Right front B4 GRN
B11 RED __ Ii__ __ T1__
Left rear B3 LT BLU 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
B10 PUR 13jj 14
8 J 9 10 11 12 ---
Right rear B6 BRN --- 3---- 1----
B13 YEL

STEREO AMPLIFIER CONNECTOR B (14P)
__ r1__ ... ____ r1__ Is t h e r e c o n t in u it y b e t w e e n a n y o f t h e t e r m in a ls ?

1 2 3 4 5 6 7
YES-There is a short in the wire(s) between the audio
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 unit and the stereo amplifier. Replace the affected
shielded harness.!
NO-Go to step 18.
YES-There is a short to body ground in the wire(s)
between the stereo amplifier and the audio unit.
Replace the affected shielded harness.!
NO-Go to step 17.
18. Checkfor continuity between stereo amplifier 21. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
connector B (14P) and audio unit connector A (20P)
according to the table. 22. Measure the voltage between body ground and audio
Channel Stereo Audio unit Wire individually.
amplifier connector color
connector AUDIO UNIT CONNECTOR A (20P)
Left front B1 A8 BLU A ^n/Eim eni +B (WHT/GRN)
B8 A18 PNK <—
n lr1 r __n_
Right front B4 A7 GRN
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
B11 A17 RED
o
CM
Left rear B3 A6 LT BLU 11 12 13 / 15 16 17 18 19
B10 A16 PUR
Right rear B6 A5 BRN
B13 A15 YEL

r> n
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Is t h e r e b a t t e r y v o lt a g e ?
8 9 10 11 12 13 14
s.3---- L““I — YES-Go to step 23.
NO-Repair an open in the wire(s) between the No. 5
23. Measure the voltage between audio unit connector A
AUDIO UNIT CONNECTOR A (20P) (20P) terminal No. 20 and body ground.
_n_n_..... ....'n r*.......n . n... AUDIO UNIT CONNECTOR A (20P)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
__r _r — _ r tl. r __
CM
o
11 12 13 / 15 16 17 18 19
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
O
CM
11 12 13 / 15 16 17 18 19
Wire side of female terminals GND (BLK)
YES-Go to step 19.
NO-There is an open in the wire(s) between the stereo
amplifier and the audio unit. Replace the affected
shielded harness.! Is th e r e le s s th a n 0 .2 V ?
19. Reconnect audio unit connector A (20P). YES-Go to step 24.
20. Reconnect stereo amplifier connector A (20P) and B NO-Repair an open or high resistance in the wire
(14P). between audio unit connector A (20P) and body
24. Measure the voltage between stereo amplifier 26. Measure the voltage between stereo amplifier
connector A (20P) terminal No. 10 and body ground. connector B (14P) terminal No. 7 and body ground.
STEREO AMPLIFIER CONNECTOR A (20P) STEREO AMPLIFIER CONNECTOR B (14P)

RADIO SW D+B (YEL/GRN)
C,
__rT_.r ... __ r __rU- n r> n I
1 2 3 4 5 / 7 8 9 10 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
11 12 13 14 15 / 17 18 / 20 8 j L---
--- 9 10 11 12 13 L------14
....... L
W ire side of female term inals Wire side of female term inals
Is th e r e b a t t e r y v o lta g e ? Is t h e r e b a t t e r y v o lt a g e ?
NO-Repair an open in the wire between the No. 5 NO-Repair an open in the wire between the stereo
(20 A) fuse in the auxiliary under-hood fuse box and amplifier connector B (14P) and the audio unit
the stereo amplifier connector A (20P).B connector A (20P).B
25. Measure the voltage between stereo amplifier

ACC (YEL/RED)
—n n _ s n In
1 2 3 4 5 / 7 8 9 10
CM
O
11 12 13 14 15 / 17 18 /
Is th e r e b a t t e r y v o lt a g e ?
YES-Go to step 26.
NO-Repair an open in the wire between No. 32 (10 A)
fuse in the driver's under-dash fuse/relay box and the
stereo amplifier connector A (20P).B
(cont'd)
27. Measure the voltage between stereo amplifier No sound is heard from the speaker(s)
connector A (20P) terminal No. 20 and connector B
(display is normal) (*07 model w ith o u t
(14P) terminal No. 14 and body ground.
STEREO AMPLIFIER CONNECTOR A (20P) NOTE:
-... n n S r* n n 22-111).
1 2 3 4 5 / 7 8 9 10 • Set the fader and balance positions to the center.
11 12 13 14 15 / 17 18 / 2 0 • Always check the connectors for poor connections or
GND {BLK) loose terminals.
2. Check for sound in each mode (AM, FM, XM, and CD).
Is t h e s o u n d O K in e a c h m o d e ?
YES-lntermittent failure. The system is OK at this
STEREO AMPLIFIER CONNECTOR B (14P) amplifier.®
NO-Go to step 3.
........ S
___ j n
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 3. Check that the volume button is not set to the MIN

level.
8 jl 9 10 11 12 ------
--- 13 J 14
3------ J------
Is it a t th e M I N le v e l?
GND (BLK)
YES-Raise the volume level, and recheck the
function.!
NO-
W ire side of female term inals • With navigation: Go to step 4.
4. On the steering wheel, check the navigation talk
YES-Substitute a known-good stereo amplifier (see command.
page 23-169), and recheck. If the symptom/indication
goes away, replace the original stereo amplifier. If the Is th e n a v ig a tio n t a lk c o m m a n d fu n c tio n s e t?
symptom is still present, substitute a known-good YES-Cancel the navigation talk command by pressing
audio unit (see page 23-167), and recheck. Ifthe the navigation BACK button, then recheck the
symptom/indication goes away, replace the original function.!
audio unit.ll
NO-Go to step 5.
between the stereo amplifier connector A (20P) or
connector B (14P) and body ground (G504) (see page
22-49).11
5. Check to see if there is a specific speaker that has no
sound.
D o a n y o r a ll o f th e s p e a k e r s fa il to s o u n d ? unit and the audio disc changer to prevent damaging
the CD player's load mechanism.
YES-Go to step 6.
12. Check for continuity between body ground and audio
NO-Speakers all work, but sound quality is poor in
unit connector A (20P) according to the table.
step 1.
• If the sound is poor only with AM or FM, go to poor Speaker Terminal Wire color
AM or FM radio reception or interference (see page Driver's door speaker, A8 (+ ) GRN/BLK
2 3 -8 7 ),■ Left tweeter A18 (—) LT GRN
• If the sound is poor only with CD M Front passenger's A 7 (+ ) GRN/YEL
door speaker, Right A17 ( —) GRY/RED
- Try several known-good CD in the audio unit.
tweeter
- If the sound quality is normal, the original CD is Left rear speaker A 6 (+ ) BLU/WHT
faulty. A16 (—) BLU/BLK
- Ifthe sound quality is still poor, replace the audio Right rear speaker A5 (+ ) PNK
unit (see page 23-167). A15 (—) BLU/YEL
• If the sound is poor in all modes, go to sound
quality diagnosis (see page 23-162).B AUDIO UNIT CONNECTOR A (20P)
n n S ,-J n n
OO
CD
7. Check the speaker with no sound for any damage.
cn cn
CM
CO
CD CD
1 4 7 10
CM
o
Is th e r e a n y d a m a g e ? 11 12 13 / 17 18 19
recheck.®
NO-Go to step 8.
8. Check the speaker connector for a loose or poor Is t h e r e c o n t in u it y ?
connection.
R e c o n n e c t th e s p e a k e r c o n n e c to r, a n d re c h e c k th e between the audio unit and speaker.®
s y m p to m ; is th e c o n d it io n s till p r e s e n t ?
NO-Go to step 13.
YES-Go to step 9.
13. Disconnect tweeter 2P connectors.
NO-lntermittent failure. Operation is normal.■
YES-Go to step 10.
NO-Replace the speaker(s) (see page 23-172).H
14. Measure the resistance between each pair of speaker 17. Check for continuity between the tweeter 2P
terminals at audio unit connector A (20P) according to connector according to the table.
the table.
Speaker Termi nal Wire color
Speaker Audio unit Wire Resistance
connector color Left tweeter 1 GRN/BLK
Driver's A8 GRN/BLK About 4 0 2 LT GRN

door
speaker A18 LT GRN Right 1 GRN/YEL
tweeter
Front A7 GRN/YEL About 4 0 2 GRY/RED
passenger's
door A17 GRY/RED
speaker TWEETER 2P CONNECTOR
Left rear A6 BLU/WHT About 4 0
speaker
A16 BLU/BLK nT 1n
1 2
Right rear A5 PNK About 4 Q
speaker
A15 BLU/YEL
AUDIO UNIT CONNECTOR A (20P) Is t h e r e c o n t in u it y ?
ri r1 --- JT r ... YES-Go to step 18.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 NO-Repair an open in the wire(s) between the audio
CM
O
11 12 13 / 15 16 17 18 19 unit and the tweeter.®

18. Disconnect jumper wires.
Wire side of female terminals 19. Reconnect audio unit connector A (20P).
Is th e r e s is ta n c e O K ?
YES-Go to step 15.
audio unit and the speaker.®
15. Disconnect the driver's door speaker 2P connector
and the front passenger's door speaker 2P connector.
16. Connect audio unit connector A (20P) terminals with
jumper wires as shown.

FR R SPKR+ (GRN/YEL) FR L SPKR+ (GRN/BLK)
n n. ^ -J n n
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
11 12 13 / 15 16 17 18 19 20
no u
JUMPER FR R SPKR— FR L SPKR— ...jyippn

WIRE (GRY/RED) (LT GRN) ^Jr EPER
21. Measure the voltage between body ground and audio No sound is heard from the speaker(s)
(display is normal) ('08-10 models w ith
individually.
AUDIO UNIT CONNECTOR A (20P) NOTE:
ACC (YEL/RED) + B (WHT/GRN) • Check the vehicle battery condition first (see page
22-111).
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 • Set the fader and balance positions to the center.
11 12 13 / 15 16 17 18 19 20 • Check the connectors for poor connections or loose
terminals.
2. Check for sound in each mode (AM, FM, XM, and CD).
Is th e r e b a t t e r y v o lt a g e ? time. Check for loose connectors at the audio unit and
amplifier.®
YES-Go to step 22.
NO-Go to step 3.
(10 A) fuse and No. 32 (10 A) in the driver's 3. Check that the volume button is not set to the MIN
under-dash fuse/relay box and the audio unit.® level.
22. Measure the voltage between audio unit connector A Is it a t th e M IN le v e l?

(20P) terminal No. 20 and body ground. YES-Raise the volume level, and recheck the
function.■
NO-Go to step 4.
n n.............5a r? n n 4. On the steering wheel, check the navigation talk

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 command.
11 12 13 / 15 16 17 18 19 20 Is t h e n a v ig a t io n t a lk c o m m a n d fu n c tio n s e t?
GND (BLK) YES-Cancel the navigation talk command by pressing
the navigation BACK button, then recheck the
function.®
NO-Go to step 5.
Wire side of female terminals 5. On the steering wheel, check the HFL command.
Is t h e r e le s s t h a n 0 .2 V ? Is t h e H F L t a lk c o m m a n d fu n c tio n s e t?
YES-Replace the audio unit (see page 23-167).® YES-Cancel the HFL talk command by pressing the
HFL BACK button, then recheck the function.®
between audio unit connector A (20P) and body NO-Go to step 6.
ground (G503) (see page 22-43).■
6. Check to see if there is a specific speaker that has no 12. Disconnect stereo amplifier connector A (20P).
sound.
13. Checkfor continuity between body ground and stereo
D o a n y o r a ll o f th e s p e a k e r s fa il to s o u n d ? amplifier connector A (20P) according to the table.
YES-Go to step 7. Speaker Stereo Wire color
NO-Speakers all work, but sound quality is poor in amplifier
step 1. connector
Driver's door speaker A3 ( + ) WHT
• If sound is poor only with XM radio, or the XM radio
A13 (—) GRN
does not function, go to poor or no sound with XM
Left tweeter A4 (+ ) BLU/ORN
radio (see page 23-160).B A14(—) GRY/BLU
• If the sound is poor only with AM or FM, go to poor Front passenger's A2( + ) RED/BLU
AM or FM radio reception or interference (see page door speaker A12 (—) BRN
23-87). I Right tweeter A1 (+ ) BLK/RED
• If the sound is poor only with CD.B A11 ( - ) PNK/BLK
-T ry several known-good CD in the audio unit. Left rear speaker A8 (+ ) PNK
- If the sound quality is normal, the original CD is A18 (—) PUR
faulty. Right rear speaker A7 {+ ) BLU/RED
A17 (—) BLU/ORN
- If the sound quality is still poor, replace the audio
Subwoofer A5 (+ ) GRN
unit.
A15 (—) RED
quality diagnosis (see page 23-162).B
8. Check the speaker with no sound for any damage. __ r _r __ __r _t __
1 2 3 4 5 / 7 8 9 10
Is th e r e a n y d a m a g e ?
11 12 13 14 15 / 17 18 / 20
recheck.B
NO-Go to step 22. Wire side of female terminals
9. Check the speaker connector for a loose or poor

connection.
R e c o n n e c t th e s p e a k e r c o n n e c to r, a n d re c h e c k th e
between the stereo amplifier and the speaker(s).B
s y m p to m ; is t h e c o n d it io n s till p r e s e n t ?
NO-Go to step 14.
YES-Go to step 10.
NO-lntermittent failure. Operation is normal.B
YES-Go to step 11.
NO-Replace the speaker(s) (see page 23-172).B
14. Measure the resistance between each pair of speaker 16. Disconnect audio unit connector A (17P).
terminals at stereo amplifier connector A (20P)
Speaker Stereo Wire Resistance CD player's load mechanism.
amplifier color • 17. Check for continuity between stereo amplifier
connector connector B (14P) and body ground according to the
Driver's table.
A3 WHT About 4
door speaker 0
Channel Stereo Wire color
A13 GRN
amplifier
Left tweeter A3 BLU/ORN About 4 connector
0 Left front B1 BLU
A13 GRY/BLU B8 PNK
Right front B4 GRN
Front A2 RED/BLU About 4 B11 RED
passenger's n Left rear B3 LT BLU
door A12 BRN B10 PUR
speaker Right rear B6 BRN
B13 YEL
Right A2 BLK/RED About 4
tweeter 0
A12 PNK/BLK STEREO AMPLIFIER CONNECTOR B (14P)
Left rear A8 PNK About 4 r>

speaker 0
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
A18 PUR
—8 jL9 10 11 12 —
---- 13j 14
T---
Right rear A7 BLU/RED About 4
speaker 0
A17 BLU/ORN
Subwoofer A5 GRN About 2
0 Is t h e r e c o n t in u it y ?
A15 RED
YES-The re is a short to body ground in the wire(s)
between the stereo amplifier and the audio unit.
STEREO AMPLIFIER CONNECTOR A (20P) Replace the affected shielded harness.!
__ ri r1 __ r __r1 ... NO-Go to step 18.

1 2 3 5 / 4 7 8 9 10
11 12 13 14 15 / 17 18 / 20
Is th e r e s is ta n c e O K ?
YES-Go to step 15.
stereo amplifier and the speaker.!
15. Disconnect stereo amplifier connect B (14P).
18. Check for continuity between stereo amplifier 19. Check for continuity between stereo amplifier
connector B (14P) terminals according to the table. connector B (14P) and audio unit connector A (17P)
Channel From To
terminal terminals Channel Stereo Audio unit Wire
Left front B2 (GRY) B1 (BLU), amplifier connector color
B8 (PNK) connector
Right front B5 (GRY) B4(GRN), Left front B1 A12 BLU
B11 (RED) B8 A13 PNK
Left rear B9 (GRY) B3 Right front B4 A15 GRN
(LT BLU), B11 A7 RED
B10 (PUR) Left rear B3 A11 LT BLU
Right rear B12 (GRY) B6 (BRN), B10 A2 PUR
B13 (YEL)
Right rear B6 A16 BRN
B13 A8 YEL
__ n_ S r> n
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
n .........S r r
8 9 10 11 12 13 L----
14 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
t. L
8 13J14
9 10 11 12 ---
ij J---

Is t h e r e c o n t in u it y b e t w e e n a n y o f t h e t e r m in a ls ?
unit and the stereo amplifier. Replace the affected AUDIO UNIT CONNECTOR A (17P)
shielded harness.!
NO-Go to step 19. 1 2 4 / V ' 7 8 9
3
10 11 12 ,/ • 14 15 16 17
YES-Go to step 20.
NO-There is an open in the wire(s) between the stereo
amplifier and the audio unit. Replace the affected
shielded harness.!
20. Reconnect audio unit connector A (17P). 25. Measure the voltage between stereo amplifier
21. Reconnect stereo amplifier connector A (20P) and B
(14P).
+ B (BLU),
n n t-, n I
23. Measure the voltage between body ground and audio
CD
OO
CM
unit connector A (17P) terminals No. 14 and No. 17 1 3 4 5 / 7 10
CM
O
individually. 11 12 13 14 15 / 17 18 /
1 2 3
4,/
' 7 8 9
10 11 12 / '1 4 15 16 17
ACC (YEL/RED) +B
(WHT/GRN) Is th e r e b a t t e r y v o lt a g e ?
YES-Go to step 26.
1 NO-Repair an open in the wire between No. 5 (20 A)
fuse in the auxiliary under-hood fuse box and the
stereo amplifier connector A (20P).B
Is th e r e b a t t e r y v o lta g e ? 26. Measure the voltage between stereo amplifier
YES-Go to step 24.
NO-Repair an open in the wire(s) between the No. 5 STEREO AMPLIFIER CONNECTOR A (20P)
(10 A) fuse and No. 32 (10 A) in the driver's ACC (YEL/RED)
24. Measure the voltage between audio unit connector A 1 2 3 4 5 / 8 9 10
CM
O
(17P) terminal No. 9 and body ground. 11 12 13 14 15 / 17 18 /

GND (BLK)
1 2 3 4 / ' 7 8 9
V
10 11 1 2 , / • 14 15 16 17
YES-Go to step 27.
NO-Repair an open in the wire between audio unit
connector F (20P) and stereo amplifier connector A
(20P).B
Is t h e r e le s s t h a n 0 .2 V ?
YES-Go to step 25.
ground (G503) (see page 22-43).!
27. Measure the voltage between stereo amplifier 28. Measure the voltage between stereo amplifier
connector B (14P) terminal No. 7 and body ground. connector A (20P) terminal No. 20 and connector B
(14P) terminal No. 14 and body ground.
RADIO SWD+B (YEL/GRN) STEREO AMPLIFIER CONNECTOR A"(20P)
s -J nI
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 ... :...n...n............. Si r* n n
o.
CM
CO
8 9 1 4 5 / 7 8 9
— i—
10 11 12 13 14
L_Ir““J 11 12 13 14 15 / 17 18 / 20
GND (BLK)
T

YES-Go to step 28. STEREO AMPLIFIER CONNECTOR B (14P)
NO-Repair an open in the wire between the stereo
amplifier connector B (14P) and the audio unit
connector F (20PJ.B
Is t h e r e le s s t h a n 0 .2 V ?
YES-Substitute a known-good stereo amplifier (see
goes away, replace the original stereo amplifier. If the
symptom is still present, substitute a known-good
audio unit (see page 23-167), and recheck. If the
audio u n it.l
between the stereo amplifier connector A (20P) or
connector B (14P) and body ground (G504) (see page
22-49).11
No sound is heard from the speaker(s) 5. Check to see if there is a specific speaker that has no
sound.
(display is normal) ('08-10 models without
premium audio system) D o a n y o r a ll o f th e s p e a k e r s fa il to s o u n d ?
NOTE: YES-Go to step 6. Ifthe subwoofer fail to sound, go to

• Check the vehicle battery condition first (see page booming sound while driving troubleshooting.
22-111). NO-Speakers all work, but sound quality is poor in
• Set the fader and balance positions to the center. step 1.
• Always check the connectors for poor connections or • If sound is poor only with XM radio, or the XM radio
loose terminals. does not function, go to poor or no sound with XM
radio (see page 23-160).!
• If the sound is poor only with AM or FM, go to poor
2. Check for sound in each mode (AM, FM, XM, and CD). AM or FM radio reception or interference (see page
23-87 ).!
• If the sound is poor only with C D .!
YES-lntermittent failure. The system is OK at this - Try several known-good CD in the audio unit.
- Ifthe sound quality is normal, the original CD is
am plifier.!
faulty.
NO-Go to step 3. - If the sound quality is still poor, replace the audio
unit (see page 23-167).
3. Check that the volume button is not set to the MIN
level.
quality diagnosis (see page 23-162).!
Is it a t t h e M I N le v e l?
YES-Raise the volume level, and recheck the
function.! 7. Check the speaker with no sound for any damage.
Is t h e r e a n y d a m a g e ?
NO-
• With navigation: Go to step 4. YES-Substitute the speaker and recheck.!
• Without navigation: Go to step 5. NO-Go to step 8.
4. On the steering wheel, check the navigation talk 8. Check the speaker 2P connector for a loose or poor
command. connection.
Is t h e n a v ig a t io n t a lk c o m m a n d f u n c tio n s e t? R e c o n n e c t th e s p e a k e r c o n n e c to r, a n d re c h e c k th e
s y m p to m ; is t h e c o n d it io n s till p r e s e n t ?
YES-Cancel the navigation talk command by pressing
the navigation BACK button, then recheck the YES-Go to step 9.
function.!
NO-lntermittent failure. Operation is n orm al.!
NO-Go to step 5.
Is t h e s p e a k e r ( s ) O K ?
YES-Repair an open or high resistance in the wire(s)
between the audio unit and the speaker(s).!
NO-Replace the speaker(s) (see page 23-172).!
11. Disconnect audio unit connector A (17P). 14. Measure the resistance between each pair of speaker
terminals at audio unit connector A (17P) according to
NOTE: Eject ail the CDs before removing the audio
the table.
CD player's load mechanism. Speaker Audio unit Wire Resistance
12. Checkfor continuity between body ground and audio connector color
unit connector A (17P) according to the table.
Driver's A12 GRN/BLK About 4 0
Speaker Terminal Wire color door
Driver's door speaker, speaker A3 LT GRN
A12 (+ ) GRN/BLK
Left tweeter A3 ( —) LT GRN Front A15 GRN/YEL About 4 0
Front passenger's A15 ( + ) GRN/YEL passenger's
door speaker, Right A7 ( —) GRY/RED door A7 GRY/RED
tweeter speaker
Left rear speaker A11 ( + ) BLU/WHT
A2 {—) BLU/BLK Left rear A11 BLU/WHT About 4 0
Right rear speaker A16 {+ ) PNK speaker
A8 ( —) BLU/YEL A2 BLU/BLK
Right rear A16 PNK About 4 Q

AUDIO UNIT CONNECTOR A (17P) speaker
A8 BLU/YEL
1 2 3 8 9
4 / V ' 7
10 11 1 2 , / ■ 14 15 16 17
YES-Repair a short to body ground in the wires W ire side of female term inals
between the audio unit and speaker.!
NO-Go to step 13. Is th e r e s is ta n c e O K ?
13. Disconnect tweeter 2P connectors. YES-Go to step 15.

audio unit and the speaker.!
15. Disconnect the driver's door speaker 2P connector 20. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
and the front passenger's door speaker 2P connector. 21. Measure the voltage between body ground and audio
16. Connect audio unit connector A (20P) terminals with unit connector A (17P) terminals No. 14 and No. 17
jumper wires as shown. individually.
AUDIO UNIT CONNECTOR A (17P) AUDIO UNIT CONNECTOR A (17P)

FR L SPKR- (LT GRN) FR R SPKR- (GRY/RED)
I
1 2
3 4 ,/ / 7 8 9 1 3 4 / /
2 7 8 9
10 11 12 / 14 15 16 17 10 11 12 / 14 15 16 17
ACC (YEL/RED) +B
JUMPER FRLSPKR+ FRRSPKR+ JUMPER (WHT/GRN)
WIRE (GRN/BLK) (GRN/YEL) WIRE
1
17. Check for continuity between the tweeter 2P W ire side of female term inals
connector according to the table.
Speaker Terminal Is t h e r e b a t t e r y v o lt a g e ?
Wire color
YES-Go to step 22.
Left tweeter 1 GRN/BLK
2 LT GRN (10 A) fuse and No. 32 (10 A) in the driver's
Right 1 GRN/YEL
tweeter 22. Measure the voltage between audio unit connector A
2 GRY/RED (17P) terminal No. 9 and body ground.

TWEETER 2P CONNECTOR GND (BLK)
1 2
3 4 / / 7 8 9
1 2 10 11 12 / 14 15 16 17
Is t h e r e c o n t in u it y ? Wire side o f female term inals

YES-Go to step 18.
NO-Repair an open in the wire(s) between the stereo
amplifier and the tweeter.B YES-Replace the audio unit (see page 23-167).B
18. Disconnect jumper wires. NO-Repair an open or high resistance in the wire
19. Reconnect audio unit connector A (17P).
Audio system sound is weak or distorted Auxiliary input sound is low or cannot be
(display is normal) heard ('08-10 models)
NOTE: NOTE:
22-111). 22-111).
• Check the connectors for poor connections or loose • Use auxiliary stereo cables with 3.5 mm ends only.
terminals. • Auxiliary accessories may be played on the audio unit
1. Check for sound in each mode (AM, FM, XM, and using the auxiliary input.
disc). • Check the connectors for poor connections or loose
terminals.
Is t h e r e s o u n d f r o m t h e s p e a k e r s , a n d is t h e s o u n d
q u a lity n o r m a l in e a c h m o d e ? 1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
YES-lntermittent failure. The system is OK at this 2. Turn on the audio unit and connect an auxiliary
time. Checkfor loose connections at the audio unit, accessory to the auxiliary input jack.
amplifier, and each speaker.!! 3. Check the volume operation.
NO-Speakers all work, sound quality is poor.B Is th e s o u n d n o r m a l?
• If sound is poor only with XM radio, or the XM radio
does not function, go to poor or no sound with XM YES-Operation is normal at this time.B
radio (see page 23-160). NO-Go to step 4.
• If the sound is poor only with AM or FM, go to poor
AM/FM radio reception or interference (see page 4. Make sure the auxiliary accessory volume is set to
23-87). high.
• If sound is poor in all modes, go to sound quality Is t h e v o lu m e s e t to h ig h ?
diagnosis (see page 23-162).
YES-Go to step 5.
NO-Raise the auxiliary accessory volume is set to
high. Make sure the audio unit volume is turned down
before retesting.B
5. Substitute a known-good auxiliary audio accessory
and/or auxiliary stereo cable and recheck.
D o e s th e a u x ilia r y a u d io a c c e s s o r y o p e r a t e p r o p e r ly ?
YES-Original auxiliary audio accessory or auxiliary
stereo cable is faulty.B
NO-Go to step 6.
7. Remove the auxiliary jack assembly (see page
23-176), and check that the auxiliary jack assembly is
properly connected.
Is th e a u x ilia r y ja c k a s s e m b ly c o n n e c t e d p r o p e r ly ?
YES-Go to step 8.
function.B
8. Disconnect auxiliary jack assembly 5P connector. 11. Check for continuity between audio unit connector F
(20P) according to the table.
9. Remove the audio unit (see page 23-167), and
disconnect audio unit connector F (20P). From term i nal To terminals
F3 F3, F13, F14
10. Check for continuity between body ground and audio
F4 F13, F14
unit connector F (20P) according to the table.
F13 F14
Audio unit connector Wire color
F3 BLK AUDIO UNIT CONNECTOR F (20P)
F13 WHT
F14 RED
n __ 1- — 1r
F15 LT BLU
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 ’10
CM
O
/ ' 13 •14 '15 '16, ' M
AUDIO UNIT CONNECTOR F (20P) / /
p t--------------r n
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
1 1 ^ 1 3 14 15 1 6 /7 / 1 9 20 Is t h e r e c o n t in u it y ?
W ire side of female term inals unit and the auxiliary jack assembly. Replace the
affected shielded harness.!
Is t h e r e c o n t in u it y ? NO-Go to step 12.
between the audio unit and the auxiliary jack
assembly. Replace the affected shielded harness.!
NO-Go to step 11.
12. Check for continuity between audio unit connector F Radio preset memory is lost
(20P) and auxiliary jack assembly 5P connector
according to the table. NOTE:
Aud i o unit Auxi liary jack Wire color 22-111).
connector assembly connector
• If only XM stations are lost, go to XM radio preset
F3 3 BLK
memory is lost (see page 23-159).
F5 2 LT GRN
F13 4 WHT 1. Set each of the radio station preset buttons.
F14 5 RED
F15 1 LT BLU D o e a c h o f th e b u tto n s s e t p r o p e r ly ?
YES-Go to step 2.
NO-Replace the audio unit (see page 23-167).B
2. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0) for 1 minute, then
i__ H-z. .....0 n
turn it back to ON (II).
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 ■10
11' / ' i s J U i ie>ie V / 1S) 2 0 3. Test the preset buttons for proper recall operation.
D o th e p r e s e t b u tto n s r e c a ll th e s e t r a d io s ta tio n s ?
W ire s i de of female term inals YES-System is normal at this time. Check

connections at the audio unit.B
L J
1 2 3 4 5
YES-Substitute a known-good auxiliary jack
assembly (see page 23-176), and recheck. Ifthe
auxiliary jack assembly. Ifthe symptom/indication is
still present, replace the audio unit (see page
23-167).B
NO-There is an open in the wire(s) between the audio
unit and the auxiliary jack assembly. Replace the
Volume does not change Radio tuner does not change stations
NOTE; NOTE;
22-111). 22-111).
• Set the fader and balance positions to the center. 1. Check the audio information on the display panel.
1. Listen for sound from the speakers. D o e s th e a u d io in fo r m a tio n d is p la y p r o p e r ly ?
Is th e s o u n d n o r m a l? YES-Go to step 2.
YES-Go to step 2. NO-Go to audio unit power switch will not turn on,
NO-Go to audio system sound is weak or distorted, '07 model (see page 23-90), '08-10 models (see page
(see page 23-110), or no sound is heard from 23-91 ) . ■
speakers; 2. Operate the tuning knob to see if the radio station
• '07 models with premium audio system changes.
(see page 23-93).
D o e s th e r a d io s ta tio n c h a n g e ?
• '07 models without premium audio system
(see page 23-98). YES-lntermittent failure, the turning knob is OK at this
• '08-10 models with premium audio system time.B
(see page 23-101). NO-Replace the audio unit (see page 23-167).B
• '08-10 models without premium audio system
(see page 23-107).
2. Operate the volume knob to see ifthe volume

changes.
D o e s th e v o lu m e c h a n g e ?
YES-Operation is normal.B
NO-Replace the audio unit (see page 23-167).H
Audio unit button illumination does not work 8. Check for continuity between audio unit connector A
(20P) terminal No. 19 and gauge control module
('07 model)
connector A (30P) terminal No. 19.
NOTE:
• Check the vehicle battery condition first (see page Wire side of female terminals
22-111). c_
ri r1 n n ..
• Check the connectors for poor connections or loose 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
terminals.
1 <o
11 12 13 / 15 16 17 —
18 20
Lj j
1.Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). ■ (R E D )
2. Turn the combination lighting switch to the parking

light position.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 > < 8 9 10 11 / 13 14
3. Check the illumination of the audio unit buttons. 15 16 / 18 19 20 21 / I X M 24 25 / 27 28 / 30
_________IL L - (RED)
A r e th e b u tto n s illu m in a te d ?
YES-lntermittent problem: the audio unit is OK at this Wire side of female terminals
time. Check for loose or poor connections at audio Is t h e r e c o n t in u it y ?
unit connector A (20P).B
YES-Go to step 9.
NO-Go to step 4.
4. Check the illumination of several other buttons not control module and the audio unit.B
related to the audio system.
10. With the headlight switch still on, measure the
YES-Go to step 5. voltage between audio unit connector A (20P)
NO-Troubleshoot the interior lights. Start by checking terminal No. 9 and body ground.
the No. 7 (7.5 A) fuse in the passenger's under-dash
fuse/relay box. If the fuse is OK, check for an open in AUDIO UNIT CONNECTOR A (20P)
the wire between the passenger's under-dash
fuse/relay box and the audio unit.B ILL+ (RED/BLK)
n n S ir!__ _n n...
5. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
6. Disconnect audio unit connector A (20P). 11 12 13 / 15 16 17 18 19 20
NOTE: Eject all the discs before removing the audio
unit to prevent damaging the CD player's load
mechanism.
YES-Check the connections at the audio unit
connector A (20P). If all connections are OK, replace
the audio unit (see page 23-167).B
passenger's under-dash fuse/relay box and the audio
unit.B
A u d io u n it b u tto n illu m in a tio n d o e s n o t w o r k 8. Check for continuity between audio unit connector A
(* 0 8 -1 0 m o d e ls )
connector A (30P) terminal No. 19.
NOTE:
• Check the vehicle battery condition first (see page Wire side of female terminals
22-111). ILL- (RED)
terminals. 1 2
3 4 V " 7 8 9
10 11 12,/ ' 14 15 16 17
2. Turn the combination lighting switch to the parking
light position.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 > < 8 9 10 11 / / /
3. Check the illumination of the audio unit buttons. 15 16 /18 19 20 21 / t X f a 24 25 / 27 / / 30
YES-lntermittent problem: the audio unit is OK at this Wire side of female terminals
time. Check for loose or poor connections at audio Is t h e r e c o n t in u it y ?
unit connector A (17P).B
YES-Go to step 9.
NO-Go to step 4.
4. Check the illumination of several other buttons not control module and the audio unit.B
related to the audio system.
10. With the headlight switch still on, measure the
YES-Go to step 5. voltage between audio unit connector A (17P)
NO-Troubleshootthe interior lights. Start by checking terminal No. 10 and body ground.
the No. 7 (7.5 A) fuse in the passenger's under-dash
fuse/relay box. Ifthe fuse is OK, check for an open in AUDIO UNIT CONNECTOR A (17P)
the wire between the passenger's under-dash
fuse/relay box and the audio unit.B
1 2 3 4 / 7 8 9
5. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). /
10 11 12 / 14 15 16 17
ILL+ (RED/BLK)
unit to prevent damaging the CD player's load
mechanism.
YES-Check the connections at the audio unit
connector A (17P). If all connections are OK, replace
the audio unit (see page 23-167).B
passenger's under-dash fuse/relay box and the audio
u nitB
Audio remote switch does not work properly 4. Measure the resistance between audio unit connector
(20P) terminals No. 3 and No. 11 as specified in the
('07 model)
table.
NOTE:
22-111).
terminals. AUDIO 1*EMlOTE(WHT)
4, n q r> n m
1. Check the audio unit operation (volume up, volume
T
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
down, CH ( - ) , CH (+ ), MODE).
11 12 13 A 15 16 17 18 19 20
Is th e a u d io u n it o p e r a tio n O K ? □ ------- u
REMOTE GND (BRN)
- YES-Operation is normal.■
NO-Go to step 2.
2. Test the audio remote switch (see page 23-175).
Is th e a u d io r e m o t e s w itc h O K ? AUDIO REMOTE SWITCH TABLE
Button held VOL VOL UP CH (-) CH {+) MODE No button
YES-Go to step 3. down DOWN pressed
Resistance about about about about about about 10 kO
NO-Replace the audio remote switch (see page 17-7),
100 0 357 Q 7750 1.7 KO 3.7 KO
and recheck.B
Is t h e r e s is ta n c e O K ?
YES-Go to step 5.
unit to prevent damaging the CD player's load NO-Repair an open or high resistance in the circuit
mechanism. between the audio unit and the audio remote switch
If the wires are OK, replace the cable reel (see page
24-231 ).B
5. Check for continuity between body ground and audio A u d io r e m o te s w itc h d o e s n o t w o rk p ro p e rly
(* 0 8 -1 0 m o d e ls )
individually.
NOTE:
AUDIO UNIT CONNECTOR A (20P) • Check the vehicle battery condition first (see page
22-111).
AUDIO FIEMOTE (WHT) • Check the connectors for poor connections or loose
n n c, r* n n terminals.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 1. Check the audio unit operation (volume up, volume
CM
o
11 12 13 / 15 16 17 18 19 down, CH ( - ) , CH ('+), MODE).
REMOTE GND (BRN) Is th e a u d io u n it o p e r a t io n O K ?

YES-Operation is n orm al.!
NO-Go to step 2.
2. Test the audio remote switch (see page 23-175).
Is t h e a u d io r e m o t e s w itc h O K ?
YES-Repair a short to body ground in the circuit
YES-Go to step 3.
between the audio unit and the audio remote switch.
Ifthe wires are OK, replace the cable reel (see page NO-Replace the audio remote switch (see page 17-7),
24-231 ) . ■ and recheck.1
NO-Replace the audio unit (see page 23-167).B 3. Disconnect audio unit connector F (20P).
4. Measure the resistance between audio unit connector
F (20P) terminals No. 6 and No. 7 as specified in the
table.
r® i
REMOTE GND (BRN) AUDIO REMOTE (WHT)
T——
r ..........
9 10
T“
CM
CO
4 5 6 7 8
1 1 / 1 3 14 15 16 , 7 / 1 9 20
AUDIO REMOTE SWITCH TABLE

Button held VOL VOL UP CH (-) CH(+) MODE No button
down DOWN pressed
Resistance about about about about about about 10 kO
100 0 357 Q 775 Q 1.7 KQ 3.7 KO
Is t h e r e s is ta n c e O K ?
YES-Go to step 5.
NO-Repair an open or high resistance in the circuit
between the audio unit and the audio remote switch.
24-231 ) . ■
(cont'd)
5. Check for continuity between body ground and audio Audio disc does not load
unit connector F (20P) terminals No. 6 and No. 7
individually. NOTE:
22-111).
REMOTE GND (BRN) AUDIO REMOTE (WHT) terminals.
• Disc labels should not be used in the audio unit. They
n--------------- -n r
may damage the player mechanism.
1 2 3 4 5 f 7 8 9 10
• Make sure the CD is compatible with the system (refer
o
CM
11 / 13 14 15 16 / / 19 to the owner's manual for more information).

• If the navigation display does not open, go to
navigation system troubleshooting (see page 23-180).
1. Insert a known-good disc to see if the symptom can
Wire side of female terminals be duplicated.
D o e s th e d is c lo a d ?
YES-Operation is normal. Ifthe disc loads normally.
YES-Repair a short to body ground in the circuit But will not play, go to audio disc does not play (see
between the audio unit and the audio remote switch. page 23-123).!
24-231 ) . ! NO-Go to step 2.
NO-Replace the audio unit (see page 23-167).! 2. Insert another disc.
YES-The original disc is fau lty.!
NO-
• With navigation: Go to step 3.
• Without navigation: Replace the audio unit (see
page 23-167).!
4. Remove the audio disc changer (see page 23-170).
5. Measure the voltage between body ground and audio 8. Measure the voltage between audio disc changer
disc changer connector A (18P) terminals No. 7 and connector A (18P) terminal No. 13 and body ground.
CT ~ P
+ B (RED/BLU)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 4 X 3 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 X 14 15 16 17 18
GND (WHT/BLK)
9 10 11 12 13 X 14 15 16 17 18
x

YES-Replace the audio disc changer (see page
YES-Go to step 6. 23-170).!
NO-Repair an open in the wire between the audio unit NO-Repair an open in the wire between the audio unit
and the audio disc changer.! and the audio disc changer.!
7. Measure the voltage between audio disc changer
______ SYSTEM ACC

] (BLU/RED)
1 2 3 4 > < 5 6 7 8
9 10 11 12 13 X 14 15 16 17 18
1
YES-Go to step 8.
NO-Repair an open in the wire between the audio unit
and the audio disc changer.!
Audio disc does not eject Audio disc changer does not load all six discs
NOTE: NOTE:
22-111). 22-111).
• Disc labels should not be used in the audio unit. They • Disc labels should not be used in the audio unit. They
may jam and damage the player mechanism. may jam and damage the player mechanism.
• Ifthe navigation display does not open, go to 1.Try loading six discs into the audio unit.
navigation system troubleshooting (see page 23-180).
D o e s th e a u d io u n it a c c e p t a ll s ix d is c s ?
1. Turn on the audio system.
YES-lntermittent failure, the audio unit is OK at this
D o e s th e s y s te m tu rn o n ?
tim e .!
YES-Go to step 2.
NO-Go to step 2.
NO-Go to audio unit power switch will not turn on, 2. Try loading the disc player with six known-good discs.
23-91 ) . ■ D o e s th e a u d io u n it a c c e p t a ll s ix d is c s ?
2. Check to see if the disc ejects correctly with no YES-At least one of the original discs is fa u lty .!
binding by pushing the EJECT button.
NO-
D o e s th e d is c e je c t n o r m a lly ?
• With navigation: Replace the audio disc
YES-Operation is n orm al.! changer (see page 23-170).!
NO-
page 23-167).!
• With navigation: Replace the audio disc
changer (see page 23-170).!
page 23-167).!
Audio disc changer does not move between Unable to select audio disc changer
discs NOTE:
NOTE: • Check the vehicle battery condition first (see page
• Check the vehicle battery condition first (see page 22-111).
22-111). • Check the connectors for poor connections or loose
• Disc labels should not be used in the audio unit. They terminals.
may jam and damage the player mechanism. 1. Insert a known-good disc into the audio disc changer.
1. Insert six discs into the audio unit and see if the D o e s th e d is c lo a d ?
changer moves between discs.
YES-Go to step 2.
D o e s th e c h a n g e r o p e r a t e n o r m a lly ?
NO-Go to audio disc does not load troubleshooting
YES-lntermittent failure, the disc changer is OK at this (see page 23-118).■
time.B
NO-Go to step 2.
3. Disconnect audio unit connector D (14P).
2. Insert six known-good discs into the audio unit.
4. Disconnect audio disc changer connector A (18P).
D o e s th e c h a n g e r o p e r a t e n o r m a lly ?
5. Check for continuity between the audio unit connector
YES-At least one of the original discs is fau lty.! D (14P) and body ground according to the table.
NO-
Audi o unit connector Wi re color
• With navigation: Replace the audio disc D9 LT BLU
changer (see page 23-170).■ D10 PUR
page 23-167).B AUDIO UNIT CONNECTOR D (14P)
/ 2 3 4 5 6
/ / 9 10 11 / 13 14
between the audio unit and the audio disc changer.
NO-Go to step 6.
6. Check for continuity between the terminals of audio 7. Check for continuity between audio unit connector D
unit connector D (14P) according to the table. (14P) and audio disc changer connector A (18P)
From terminal To terminal
D3 D9, D10 Audio unit Audio disc Wire color
D9 D10 connector changer
connector
AUDIO UNIT CONNECTOR D (14P) D3 A14 GRY
D9 A5 LT BLU
D10 A15 PUR
/ 2 3 4 5 6
9 10 11 13 14 AUDIO UNIT CONNECTOR D (14P)
/ / /
/ 2 3 4 5 6
CO
/ / 9 10 11 / 14
YES-There is a short in the wires between the audio W ire side of female term inals
unit and the audio disc changer. Replace the affected
shielded harness.!
NO-Go to step 7. AUDIO DISC CHANGER CONNECTOR A (ISP)
1 2 3 4 X 5 6 7 8
9 10 11 12 13 X 14 15 16 17 18
YES-Substitute a known-good audio disc changer
(see page 23-170), and recheck. Ifthe
audio disc changer. If symptom is still present,
substitute a known-good audio unit (see page 23-167),
and recheck. If the symptom/indication goes away,
replace the original audio u n it !
NO-There is an open in the wire between the audio
unit and the audio disc changer.!
Diagnostic CD 07AAZ-SDBA100 • Diagnostic CD 07AAZ-SDBA100
- Skip Test CD 07AAZ-SDBA200
Audio disc does not play . Skip Test CD 07AAZ-SDBA300
NOTE: Audio disc skips

22-111). NOTE:
• Check the connectors for poor connections or loose • Check the vehicle battery condition first (see page
terminals. 22-111).
• Disc labels should not be used in the audio unit. They • Check the connectors for poor connections or loose
may jam and damage the player mechanism. terminals.
• Disc labels should not be used in the audio unit. They
1.Try loading a disc. may jam and damage the player mechanism.
D o e s th e d is c lo a d ? 1. Confirm the vehicle tires are properly inflated.
YES-Go to step 2. 2. Check the CD for scratches, fingerprints, and marks.
NO-Go to audio disc does not load (see page NOTE: The following test should be performed with
23-118).! audio unit bass and treble set to customer's listening
2. Insert another audio disc to see if the symptom can be performance. When comparing to a known-good
duplicated. vehicle, comparison should be performed on same
model and trim level.
D o e s th e d is c p la y ?
3. Test drive to identify when the CD skips. The audio
YES-Operation is n orm al.! diagnostic CD (T/N: 07AAZ-SDBA100) can be used if
NO-Go to step 3. the customer's CD is not available. Use tracks 10to 12.
3. Insert the audio diagnostic CD (T/N 07AAZ-SDBA100) D o e s th e C D s k ip ?

in the audio unit. YES-Go to step 4.
D o e s th e d is c p la y ? NO-Operation is no rm al.!
YES-The original disc is faulty or has an unreadable 4. Compare the customer's CD that skips to a
fo rm at.! known-good vehicle under the same conditions.
NO- D o e s t h e C D s k ip in t h e k n o w n - g o o d v e h ic le u n d e r t h e
• With navigation: Replace the audio disc s a m e c o n d itio n s ?
changer (see page 23-170).! YES-Operation is n orm al.!
page 23-167).! NO-Go to step 5.
5. Insert the diagnostic skip test CD (07AAZ-SDBA300)
(ABEX TCD 721). Play tracks 2 to 11 and note the track
number(s) where the CD starts skipping. Do the same
test on a known-good vehicle while parked and
engine running.
D o e s th e C D s k ip o n s a m e t r a c k n u m b e r (s ) a s th e
k n o w n - g o o d v e h ic le ?
YES-Operation is norm al.!
NO-Go to step 6.
6. Insert the diagnostic skip test CD (07AAZ-SDBA200) Booming sound while driving with audio unit
(ABEX TCD 725B) play tracks 7 to 11 and tracks 13 to
on or off (f07 model)
15 and note the track number(s) the CD starts
skipping. Perform the same test on a known-good NOTE:
vehicle. • Check the vehicle battery condition first (see page
D o e s th e C D s k ip o n s a m e t r a c k n u m b e r ( s ) a s th e 22-111).
k n o w n - g o o d v e h ic le ? • Check the connectors for poor connections or loose
terminals.
YES-Operation is normal.B
NO-
2. Operate the audio unit, and check the function of the
• With navigation: Replace the audio disc speakers.
changer (see page 23-170).B
• Without navigation: Replace the audio unit (see Is a b o o m in g s o u n d o r a lo w - f r e q u e n c y h u m h e a r d fr o m
page 23-167).B s p e a k e rs ?
YES-Go to step 3.
NO-Go to no sound is heard from speakers (see page
23-93).B
3. Open the driver's door.
Is t h e b o o m in g s o u n d o r a lo w - f r e q u e n c y h u m s till
p re s e n t?
YES-Do the electrical noise test (see page 23-163).B
NO-Go to step 4.
4. Turn the audio power switch off.
5. Do the self-diagnostic function (see page 23-81).
6. Press the No. 1 button.
C a n y o u h e a r a lo w -fre q u e n c y h u m ?
YES-Go to step 7.
NO-Go to step 8.
7. Check that the low-frequency hum sound continues
sounding for about 1 minute.
D o e s th e lo w - f r e q u e n c y h u m s o u n d c o n t in u e s o u n d in g
fo r a b o u t 1 m in u te ?
YES-Go to step 27.
NO-Substitute a known-good active noise
cancellation unit (see page 23-171), and recheck. Ifthe
active noise cancellation unit. If symptom is still
present, substitute a known-good audio unit (see
page 23-167), and recheck. Ifthe symptom/indication
goes away, replace the original audio unit.B
9. Check the No. 32 (10 A) fuse in the driver's under-dash 12. Measure the voltage between active noise
fuse/relay box. cancellation unit 16P connector terminal No. 7 and
body ground.
Is t h e f u s e O K ?
YES-Go to step 10. ACTIVE NOISE CANCELLATION UNIT 16P CONNECTOR
NO-Replace the fuse, and recheck.! GND (BRN)
10. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 1__ rq
1 2 / / / / 7 8
11. Measure the voltage between active noise
cancellation unit 16P connector terminal No. 8 and 9 10 / 12 / 14 15 16
body ground.
ACC (YEL/RED) W ire side of female term inals
YES-Go to step 13.
between active noise cancellation unit 16P connector
terminal No. 7 and body ground (G502) (see page
22-43).!
13. Do the self-diagnostic function (see page 23-81).
Is t h e r e b a t t e r y v o lt a g e ? 14. Press the No. 1 button.
YES-Go to step 12. 15. Measure the voltage between active noise
NO-Repair an open in the wire between the No. 32 (10 cancellation unit 16P connector terminal No. 12 and
A) fuse in the driver's under-dash fuse/relay box and body ground.
the active noise cancellation unit 16P connector
terminal No. 8 .1 ACTIVE NOISE CANCELLATION UNIT 16P CONNECTOR
1 2 / / / / 8
9 10 / 12 / 14 15 16
ANC CHK2 (BRN)
YES-Go to step 20.
NO-Go to step 16.
17. Disconnect the active noise cancellation unit 16P
connector and audio unit connector E (5P).
(cont'd)
18. Check for continuity between active noise 20. Do the self-diagnostic function (see page 23-81).
cancellation unit 16P connector terminal No. 12 and
audio unit connector E (5P) terminal No. 5. n21 . Press and release the No. 1 button.
22. Measure the voltage between active noise control
ACTIVE NOISE CANCELLATION UNIT 16P CONNECTOR unit 16P connector terminal No. 2 and body ground.
i__
L......
1 2, / 7 ACTIVE NOISE CANCELLATION UNIT 16P CONNECTOR
00
9 1C> / '1?! / ' v ^ 1Ej 16

ANC FR+ (BLK)
ANC CHK2 (BRN)
n—j— n
1 JI z z z z 7 8
c p r ANC CHK2 (BRN)
1 2 3 4 5
9 10Z 12Z 141516
Wire side of female terminals X
Is t h e r e c o n t in u it y ? Wire side of female terminals
YES-Go to step 19.

Is th e r e a b o u t 2 .5 V ?
NO-Repair an open in the wire between active noise
cancellation unit 16P connector terminal No. 12 and YES-Replace the audio unit (see page 23-167).B
audio unit connector E (5P) terminal No. 15.B NO-Go to step 23.
19. Check for continuity between body ground and active 23. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
noise cancellation unit 16P connector terminal No. 12.
YES-Repair a short in the wire between active noise
audio unit connector E (5P) terminal No. 5 . ■
25. Check for continuity between the active noise 26. Check for continuity between audio unit connector E
cancellation unit 16P connector and body ground (5P) and active noise cancellation unit 16P connector
according to the table. according to the table.
Active noise cancellation unit Wire color Audio unit Active noise Wire color
connector connector cancellation
1 RED unit connector
2 BLK E1 2 BLK
9 WHT E2 10 GRN
10 GRN E3 1 RED
E4 9 WHT
r n
p_r
1 2 , / 7 8
9 1( 15V U \ 1£i 16 1 2 3 4 5


between the active noise cancellation unit and the
audio unit Replace the affected shielded harness.!
n._ HI
NO-Go to step 26. 1 2 / / / / 7 8
9 10 / 12 / 14 15 16
YES-Replace the active noise cancellation unit (see

page 23-171 ) . ■
NO-There is an open in the wire(s) between the active
noise cancellation unit and the audio unit. Replace the
27. Start the engine, and let the vehicle idle. 34. Check for continuity between active noise
28. Do the self-diagnostic function (see page 23-81). body ground.
C a n y o u h e a r a lo w -fr e q u e n c y h u m ?
YES-Go to step 30.
n_ _r
NO-The system is O K .B 1 2 7 8
/ / /
30. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 9 10 / 12 / 14 15 16
31. Jump the SCS line with the HDS. NEP (WHT/GRN)
32. Disconnect the active noise cancellation unit 16P u

connector and PCM connector A (49P).
33. Check for continuity between active noise W ire side of female term inals
PCM connector A (49P) terminal No. 33. Is t h e r e c o n t in u it y ?
ACTIVE NOISE CANCELLATION UNIT 16P CONNECTOR YES-Repair a short in the wire between body ground
W ire side of fem ale term inals and active noise cancellation unit 16P connector
1 terminal No. 15 and PCM connector A (49P) terminal
n__ _ I— -r I
1 2 ,/ , / 7 8 No. 33,B
9 1(> / 15! / ' v I 1!5 16 NO-Update the PCM (see page 11-292) if it does not
NEP(WHT/GRN) have the latest software or substitute a known-good
. ....... ......
PCM (see page 11-294).B
. h 12 / 4 | 5 | 6 | 7 8 9 hol
a
11 12 13 1 4 / 16 17 18 19 20 /
a
I
22 23 24 X 25 X 26 27 /
i
29 30 31 38 39
CO
34
CO
CM
CO
CO
ID
/
[40141 / / I 44|45|46|47 48|49|
------------------ NEP(WHTZGRN)
Term inal side o f female term inals
YES-Go to step 34.
NO-Repair an open in the wire between the active
noise cancellation unit 16P connector terminal No. 15
and PCM connector A (49P) terminal No. 33.B
Booming sound while driving with audio unit 8. Do the ANC test No. 3 in the self-diagnostic mode (see
page 23-82).
on or off (*08-1§ models with premium audio
system) C a n y o u h e a r a lo w -fr e q u e n c y h u m fo r 1 s e c o n d o r
m o re ?
NOTE;
• Check the vehicle battery condition first (see page YES-Go to step 9.
22-111). NO-Go to step 27.
9. Do the ANC test No. 4 in the self-diagnostic mode (see
terminals.
page 23-82).
C a n y o u h e a r a lo w -fr e q u e n c y h u m fo r 1 s e c o n d o r
2. Operate the audio unit, and the speakers function m o re ?
normally.
YES-Go to step 10.
Is a b o o m in g s o u n d o r a lo w - f r e q u e n c y h u m h e a r d fr o m
s p e a k e rs ? NO-Go to step 27.
YES-Go to step 3. 10. Do the ANC test No. 5 in the self-diagnostic mode (see
page 23-82).
23-101 ) . ■ C a n y o u h e a r a lo w -fr e q u e n c y h u m fo r 1 s e c o n d o r
m o re ?
3. Open the driver's or passenger's door.
YES-Go to step 11.
p re s e n t? NO-Go to step 32.
YES-Do the electrical noise test (see page 23~162).B 11. Do the ANC test No. 6 in the self-diagnostic mode (see
page 23-82).
NO-Go to step 4.
4. Start the engine. m o re ?
5. Turn the audio power switch off. YES-Go to step 12.
6. Do the ANC test No. 1 in the self-diagnostic mode (see NO-Go to step 39.
page 23-82).
C a n y o u h e a r a lo w -fre q u e n c y h u m m o re th a n 1 s e c o n d ? page 23-82).
YES-Go to step 7. C a n y o u h e a r a lo w -fr e q u e n c y h u m fo r 1 s e c o n d o r
m o re ?
NO-
YES-Go to step 13.
• If a low-frequency hum heard about a second, go to
step 8. NO-Go to step 46.
• If no sound is heard, go to step 14.
7. Do the ANC test No. 2 in the self-diagnostic mode (see page 23-82).
page 23-82).
C a n y o u h e a r a lo w -fre q u e n c y h u m fo r 1 s e c o n d o r
C a n y o u h e a r a lo w -fre q u e n c y h u m fo r 1 s e c o n d o r m o re ?
m o re ?
YES-Go to step 55.
YES-Go to step 55.
NO-Go to step 53.
NO-Go to step 12.
15. Check the No. 5 (10 A) fuse in the auxiliary under-hood 17. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
fuse box.
Is th e fu s e O K ? cancellation unit 20P connector terminal No. 8 and
body ground.
YES-Go to step 16.
NO-Replace the fuse, and recheck.B ACTIVE NOISE CANCELLATION UNIT 20P CONNECTOR
RADIO SWD+ B (YEL/GRN) __________ _
body ground. n__ n .......... o f
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

11 12 13 14 15 / / 18 / 20
n,.. ]h— -r
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 ’10 T
11I 15>1 ■I U I 1E> / / 1£> / W ire side of female term inals
CM
O
+ B (WHT/GRN)
X
YES-Go to step 19.
W ire side of fem ale term inals NO-Repair an open in the wire between the audio unit
and the active noise cancellation u n itB
Is t h e r e b a t t e r y v o lt a g e ? 19. Measure the voltage between active noise
YES-Go to step 17.
body ground.
(10 A) fuse in the auxiliary under-hood fuse box and ACTIVE NOISE CANCELLATION UNIT 20P CONNECTOR
active noise cancellation unit 20P connector No. 20
terminal.fl GND (BRN)
n -T
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
11 12 13 14 15 / / 18 / 20
(X
YES-Go to step 20.

between the active noise cancellation unit and body
20. Do the ANC check mode in the self-diagnostic 25. Check for continuity between active noise
function (see page 23-82). cancellation unit 20P connector terminal No. 18 and
body ground.
22. Measure the voltage between active noise ACTIVE NOISE CANCELLATION UNIT 20P CONNECTOR
body ground.
i__ rH
ACTIVE NOISE CANCELLATION UNIT 20P CONNECTOR 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
11 12 13 14 15 / / 18 / 20
............................................................................. .............. *1
ANC CHK2 (BRN)
n.__
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
11I 15! 1c5 14I 1£5 / V ' n "20
ANCCHK2 (BRN) W ire side of female term inals
W ire side o f female term inals YES-Repair a short to body ground in the wire
audio unit.B
Is t h e r e a b o u t 5 .0 V ?
NO-Go to step 26.
YES-Replace the active noise cancellation unit.B
26. Check for continuity between active noise
NO-Go to step 23. cancellation unit 20P connector terminal No. 18 and
23. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). audio unit connector E (5P) terminal No. 5.
24. Disconnect the active noise cancellation unit 20P ACTIVE NOISE CANCELLATION UNIT 20P CONNECTOR
connector and audio unit connector E (5P). W ire side of female term inals
n__
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 '
o
11I 1 2 >1 ■I U \ 1£ V 'l€ 20
ANC CHK2 (BRN)
ANC CHK2 (BRN) (Q )

c ? I
H
1 4 5
CO

YES-Replace the audio unit.B
noise cancellation unit and audio unit.B
28. Disconnect the active noise cancellation unit 20P 30. Check for continuity between the terminals of active
connector and audio unit connector E (5P). noise cancellation unit 20P connector according to the
table.
29. Check for continuity between the active noise
cancellation unit 20P connector and body ground From terminal To terminals
according to the table. 1 2 ,3 ,1 1 ,1 2
2 3 ,1 1 ,1 2
Active noise cancellation Wire color 3 1 1 ,1 2
unit connector 11 12
1 GRN
2 WHT
A C T IV E N O I S E C A N C E L L A T IO N U N IT 2 0 P C O N N E C T O R
11 BLU
12 RED
n—r ih - -f
A C T IV E N O IS E C A N C E L L A T IO N U N IT 2 0 P C O N N E C T O R
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 •10
11I 15! i: 5 U [ 1£5 / V '1£ » / y 2 0
n,.„.. h - -r
CO
1 2 4 5 67 8 10
/ W ire side of female term inals
CM
o
11I 1 2 ! 1v3 V i re; / 'M » /
W ire side of female term inals YES-There is a short in the wire(s) between the active
Is t h e r e c o n t in u it y ? affected shielded harness.!
YES-There is a short to body ground in the wire(s) NO-Go to step 31.

audio unit. Replace the affected shielded harness.!
NO-Go to step 30.
31. Check for continuity between audio unit connector E 32. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0) then turn to ON
(5P) and the active noise cancellation unit 20P (II).
33. Measure the voltage between body ground and active
Audio unit Active noise Wire color noise cancellation unit 20P connector terminal No. 13.
connector cancellation
unit connector
E1 11 BLU
E2 1 GRN
E3 12 RED
t— _r
E4 2 WHT
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
11 12 13 14 15 / / 18 / 20
AUDIO UNIT CONNECTOR E (5PJ
F MIC + (BLU)
<L J
1 2 3 4 5
YES-Go to step 34.
NO-Replace the active noise cancellation unit (see
ACTIVE NOISE CANCELLATION UNIT 2QP CONNECTOR page 23-171 ) . ■
34. Measure the voltage between body ground and active
T__ _n noise cancellation front microphone 2P connector
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 terminal No. 2.
11 12 13 1 4 I 15 / / 18 / 20
ACTIVE NOISE CANCELLATION FRONT

MICROPHONE 2P CONNECTOR
F M IC+ (BLU)
YES-Substitute a known-good active noise
NO-There is an open in the wire(s) between the audio Is th e r e a b o u t 8 .0 V ?
unit and the active noise control unit. Replace the YES-Go to step 35.
NO-There is an open or a short in the wire between
the active noise cancellation front microphone and
the active noise cancellation unit. Replace the affected
shielded harness.!
connector.
(cont'd)
37. Disconnect the active noise cancellation front 39. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0) then turn to ON
microphone 2P connector. (ID.
38. Check for continuity between active noise 40. Measure the voltage between body ground and active
cancellation unit 20P connector terminals No. 4 and noise cancellation unit 20P connector terminal No. 14.
No. 13.
F MICH-(BLU) n— n
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 / 18 / 20
/
O
CM
11 12 1ci 14 15 / / 18 / R M IC + (WHT)
F MIC SH (LT BLU)

YES-Go to step 41.
YES-There is a short in the wires between the active
NO-Replace the active noise cancellation unit (see
noise cancellation unit and active noise cancellation
page 23-171 ) . ■
front microphone. Replace the affected shielded
harness.® 41. Measure the voltage between body ground and active
noise cancellation rear microphone 2P connector
terminal No. 2.
cancellation front microphone (see page 23-172), and
replace the original active noise cancellation front
ACTIVE NOISE CANCELLATION REAR
microphone. If symptom is still present, substitute a MICROPHONE 2P CONNECTOR
known-good active noise cancellation unit (see page
23-171), and recheck. Ifthe symptom/indication goes
away, replace the original active noise cancellation
u nit.ll RM1C+ (WHT)
YES-Go to step 42.
the active noise cancellation rear microphone and
active noise cancellation unit. Replace the affected
shielded harness.!
connector.
44. Disconnect the active noise cancellation rear 48. Connect the HDS to the data link connector (DLC) (see
microphone 2P connector. page 23-6).
45. Check for continuity between active noise 49. Jump the SCS line with the HDS.
cancellation unit 20P connector terminals No. 5 and
No. 14.
51. Check for continuity between the active noise
ACTIVE NOISE CANCELLATION UNIT 20P CONNECTOR cancellation unit 20P connector terminal No. 9 and
body ground.
-| R M I C SHI (PUR)
nI— ----------- f l ACTIVE NOISE CANCELLATION UNIT 20P CONNECTOR
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 '10
NEP (WHT/GRN)
\ ..............
O
CM
11 12! 1:i U I 1£5 / V "1£ » /
R MIC+ (WHT)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
11 12 13 14 15 / / 18 / 20
noise cancellation unit and the active noise
cancellation rear microphone. Replace the affected
shielded harness.! YES-Repair a short to body ground in the wire
between the active noise cancellation unit and
P C M .!
cancellation rear microphone (see page 23-172), and
recheck. Ifthe symptom/indication goes away, NO-Go to step 52.
replace the original active noise cancellation rear
microphone. If symptom is still present, substitute a
23-171), and recheck. If the symptom/indication goes
u n it.!
connector.
52. Check for continuity between active noise 53. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0) then turn to ON
cancellation unit 20P connector terminal No. 9 and (ll).
PCM connector A (49P) terminal No. 33.
ACTIVE NOISE CANCELLATION UNIT 20P CONNECTOR cancellation unit 20P connector terminal No. 15 and
Wire side of female terminals body ground while the door is opening.
i
p I— -r I —_n
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 ■10 ACTIVE NOISE CANCELLATION UNIT 20P CONNECTOR
/
____________3
11I 12I 1v5 14i- n > / ' K » /' 2 0
n___ I|— -r
1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
CD
8
O
.1 1 12 / I 4 I 5 I 6 I 7 8 9 1101 /
1 11I 15> 113 1 4 I 1£
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 / > /
2 0
22 23 24 25 26 27 1
1 > < > < / 1 INTR L T - (YEL)
29 30 31 32 33 34 3 5 / / 38 39
|40|41 / V I 44 |45|46|47 48|49| V
NEP (WHT/GRN)
Terminal side of female terminals Wire side of female terminals
cancellation unit (see page 23-171), and recheck. Ifthe YES-Replace the active noise cancellation unit (see
symptom/indication goes away, replace the original page 23-171 ).B
active noise cancellation unit. If symptom is still NO-Repair an open in the wire between the active
present, update the PCM (see page 11-292) if it does noise cancellation unit and under-dash fuse/relay box
not have the latest software or substitute a connector W (5P) terminal No. 4.B
known-good PCM (see page 11-294).!
noise cancellation unit and the PCM.B
55. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 61. Jump the SCS line with the HDS.
56. Connect the HDS to the data link connector (DLC) (see 62. Disconnect PCM connector A (49P).
page 23-6).
63. Check for continuity between body ground and active
57. Do the ANC test mode 9 in the self-diagnostic mode noise cancellation unit 20P connector terminal No. 6.
(see page 23-82).
C a n y o u h e a r a lo w -fr e q u e n c y h u m fo r 1 s e c o n d o r ACTIVE NOISE CANCELLATION UNIT 20P CONNECTOR
m o re ? CSSA M I (PNK)
YES-Go to step 58.
NO-Go to step 59.
58. Do the ANC test mode 10 in the self-diagnostic mode
(see page 23-82).
m o re ?
cancellation unit (see page 23-171), and recheck. If the
symptom/indication goes away, replace the original Is t h e r e c o n t in u it y ?
goes away, replace the original audio unit.B PCM.B
NO-Go to step 64.
NO-Go to step 65.
connector and engine mount control unit 16P
connector.
64. Check for continuity between active noise 69. Check for continuity between body ground and active
cancellation unit 20P connector terminal No. 6 and noise cancellation unit 20P connector terminal No. 7.
ACTIVE NOISE CANCELLATION UNIT 20P. CONNECTOR ACTIVE NOISE CANCELLATION UNIT 20P CONNECTOR
CSSAM2 (WHT)
ji
p (— + - “ fl __j
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 ■10 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
/ CM■
o
11I 15! Y < 5 U I- 1£> / / ie* / 1 < k 11 12 13 14 15 / / 18 / 20
CSSAM 1 (PNK)
H I / T i l ' s I f I 7 8 9 10
12T13|j 4|j gl j 6[j 7] 1s) 19 20
22 23 24 25 26 27
29 30 31 32 33 34 35 38 39 W ire side of female term inals
|40|41j / j / 1 44145 j 46^47 48 49
Terminal side of female term inals YES-Repair a short to body ground in the wire
PCM.B
NO-Go to step 70.
cancellation unit (see page 23-171), and recheck. If the
symptom/indication goes away, replace the original 70. Check for continuity between active noise
active noise cancellation unit. If symptom is still cancellation unit 20P connector terminal No. 7 and
present, update the PCM (see page 11-292) if it does PCM connector A (49P) terminal No. 15.
not have the latest software or substitute a
known-good PCM (see page 11-294).B ACTIVE NOISE CANCELLATION UNIT 20P CONNECTOR
NO-Repair an open in the wire between the active CSSAM2 (WHT) r
noise cancellation unit and the PCM.I1
8 10
65. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 11 12 13 14 15 1 8 /2 0
66. Disconnect the active noise cancellation unit 20P CSSAM2 (WHT)
connector and engine mount control unit 16P He
connector. 5 6 7 9 10
12 13 14 15 16 1T118 19 20
67. Jump the SCS line with the HDS. 22 23 24 25 26 27
29 30 31 32|33 34 38 39
68. Disconnect PCM connector A (49P). 40141 L / l / 1 44 j 45146j47 48 49

Term inal side of female term inals
present, update the PCM (see page 11-292) if it does
known-good PCM (see page 11-294).B
noise cancellation unit and the PCM.B
B o o m i n g s o u n d w h it® d r iv in g w i t h a u d i o u n it 8. Do the ANC test No. 3 in the self-diagnostic mode (see
page 23-82).
o n o r o ff (* 0 8 -1 0 m o d e l s w i t h o u t p r e m i u m
a u d io sy ste m ) C a n y o u h e a r a lo w -fr e q u e n c y h u m fo r 1 s e c o n d o r
m o re ?
NOTE;
• Check the vehicle battery condition first (see page YES-Go to step 9.
22-111). NO-Go to step 27.
terminals. 9. Do the ANC test No. 4 in the self-diagnostic mode (see
page 23-82).
2. Operate the audio unit, and check the function of the m o re ?
speakers.
YES-Go to step 10.
Is a b o o m in g s o u n d o r a lo w - f r e q u e n c y h u m h e a r d fr o m
s p e a k e rs ? NO-Go to step 27.
YES-Go to step 3. 10. Do the ANC test No. 5 in the self-diagnostic mode (see
page 23-82).
23-107).B C a n y o u h e a r a lo w -fre q u e n c y h u m fo r 1 s e c o n d o r
m o re ?
3. Open the driver's or passenger's door.
YES-Go to step 11.
p re s e n t? NO-Go to step 32.
YES-Perform the electrical noise test (see page 11. Do the ANC test No. 6 in the self-diagnostic mode (see
23-162).■ page 23-82).
NO-Go to step 4. C a n y o u h e a r a lo w -fr e q u e n c y h u m fo r 1 s e c o n d o r

m o re ?
YES-Go to step 12.
5. Turn the audio power switch off.
NO-Go to step 39.
page 23-82). 12. Do the ANC test No. 7 in the self-diagnostic mode (see
page 23-82).
C a n y o u h e a r a lo w -fr e q u e n c y h u m m o re th a n 1 s e c o n d ?
YES-Go to step 7. m o re ?
NO- YES-Go to step 13.
• If a low-frequency hum heard about a second, go to NO-Go to step 46.
step 8.
• If no sound is heard, go to step 14.
page 23-82).
page 23-82).
m o re ?
YES-Go to step 55.
m o re ?
NO-Go to step 53.
YES-Go to step 55.
NO-Go to step 12.
15. Check for the No. 5 (7.5 A) fuse in the auxiliary 17. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
under-hood fuse box.
Is th e f u s e O K ? cancellation unit 24P connector terminal No. 14 and
body ground.
YES-Go to step 16.
NO-Replace the fuse, and recheck.B A C T IV E N O I S E C A N C E L L A T IO N U N IT 2 4 P C O N N E C T O R

body ground. h- - 12
1 2 3 4 5 9 / ■ 10 -11
6,
t CO
13 14I 1£5 1(3 17V '1£V / 21122 , 24
A C T IV E N O I S E C A N C E L L A T IO N U N IT 2 4 P C O N N E C T O R
R A D I O S W D + B ( Y E L /G R N )
t — --------- r
(X)
1 12
CM
CO
5 6 7 Z 71011
13 14 15 16 1 7 ^ 1 9 ^ 2 1 22 23 24 W ire side of female term inals
+ B (W H T ) I
(X
YES-Go to step 19.
W ire side of female term inals NO-Repair an open in the wire between the audio unit
and the active noise cancellation unit.B
Is t h e r e b a t t e r y v o lt a g e ? 19. Measure the voltage between active noise
YES-Go to step 17.
body ground.
(7.5 A) fuse in the auxiliary under-hood fuse box and A C T IV E N O I S E C A N C E L L A T IO N U N IT 2 4 P C O N N E C T O R
the active noise cancellation unit 20P connector
terminal No. 2 0 .1 G N D (B R N 1 J
i— — r
1 11 I 12
CM
CO
5 6 7 7 7 1 0
13 14 15 16 1 7 7 1 9 Z 21 22 23 24
(X
YES-Go to step 20.
between the active noise cancellation unit and body
20. Do the ANC check mode in the self-diagnostic 25. Check for continuity between active noise
function (see page 23-82). cancellation unit 24P connector terminal No. 19 and
body ground.
22. Measure the voltage between active noise ACTIVE NOISE CANCELLATION UNIT 24P CONNECTOR
body ground.
1
h-
1 ■2 3 4 5 ■ 12
6, / ■ 10 •11
13 U I 1Ei 1(5 17
CM
CO
1£V ^21I 25 2 4
ANCCHK2 (BRN) W ire side o f female term inals
(v)
W ire side of female term inals YES-Repair a short to body ground in the wire
between the active noise cancellation unit and audio
unit.B
Is t h e r e a b o u t 5 . 0 V ?
NO-Go to step 26.
page 23-171).B 26. Check for continuity between active noise
NO-Go to step 23. audio unit connector E (5P) terminal No. 5.
24. Disconnect the active noise cancellation unit 24P W ire side of female term inals
connector and audio unit connector E (5P). II— "i ■ 12
1 ’2 3 4 5
6 , / / • 10 '11
13 U ^1£j 1C5 17
V n ^21 22I 23, 24
ANC CHK2 (BRN)
c ANC CHK2 (BRN)

1 2 3 4 5

YES-Replace the audio unit (see page 23-167).H
noise cancellation unit and the audio u n it.l
29. Check for continuity between the active noise 31. Check for continuity between audio unit connector E
cancellation unit 24P connector and body ground (5P) and active noise cancellation unit 24P connector
according to the table. according to the table.
Active noise cancellation Wire color Audio unit Active noise Wire color
unit connector connector cancellation
10 GRN unit connector
11 BLU E1 11 BLU
22 WHT E2 10 GRN
23 RED E3 23 RED
E4 22 WHT

i------- r
5 67 7 7 io 11 1
2
1
CM
00
L 3
13 14151617/19.721 222324 1 2 3 4 5
YES-There is a short to body ground in the wire(s) ACTIVE NOISE CANCELLATION UNIT 24P CONNECTOR
audio unit. Replace the affected shielded harness.!
NO-Go to step 30. 1 2 3 4 T-----------
5 6
~ ~ l
71011 77 12
CM
30. Check for continuity between the terminals of active 13 14 15 16 1 7 7 1 9 7 2 1 22 2 a
noise cancellation unit 24P connector according to the
table.
From terminal To terminals W ire side of female term inals

10 11,21,22, 23
11 21,22, 23 Is t h e r e c o n t in u it y ?
21 22, 23 YES-Substitute a known-good active noise
22 23 cancellation unit (see page 23-171), and recheck. Ifthe
ACTIVE NOISE CANCELLATION UNIT 24P CONNECTOR active noise cancellation unit. If symptom is still
i page 23-167), and recheck. If the symptom/indication
I— -r
1 2 3 4 5 12 goes away, replace the original audio unit.B
6 / / • 10 ■11
13 U \ 1£i 1(5 17 , 24 NO-There is an open in the wire(s) between the audio
CM
OO
' / 1S> / 721 22 unit and the active noise cancellation unit. Replace the

32. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0) then turn to ON 37. Disconnect the active noise cancellation front
(II). microphone 2P connector.
33. Measure the voltage between body ground and active 38. Check for continuity between active noise
noise cancellation unit 24P connector terminal No. 17. cancellation unit 24P connector terminals No. 5 and
No. 17.
I— -r F MIC SH (LT BLU)

1 ■2 3 4 5 ' 12 n~----------- n
6 , / / • 10 -11 1 2 3 4 5 ' 12
13 U i 1£>N5 17 , 24 6 / ' 10 •11
' / 1£> / / 21125i 23 13 14 ’15 116 17 / 1£> / 721 25! 23 24
F M IC + (BLU)
F MIC+ (BLU)

Is th e re a b o u t 8 .0 V ?
YES-Go to step 34.
NO-Replace the active noise cancellation unit (see noise cancellation unit and the active noise control
page 23-171 ) . ■ front microphone. Replace the affected shielded
34. Measure the voltage between body ground and active harness.!
noise cancellation front microphone 2P connector
terminal No. 2. cancellation front microphone (see page 23-172), and
replace the original active noise cancellation front
ACTIVE NOISE CANCELLATION FRONT
MICROPHONE 2P CONNECTOR microphone. If symptom is still present, substitute a
-SuZ 23-171), and recheck. Ifthe symptom/indication goes
1 2 away, replace the original active noise cancellation
F M IC + (BLU) u n it.!
YES-Go to step 35.
the active noise cancellation front microphone and
the active noise cancellation unit. Replace the affected
shielded harness.!
connector.
39. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0) then turn to ON 44. Disconnect the active noise cancellation rear
(ID. microphone 2P connector.
40. Measure the voltage between body ground and active 45. Check for continuity between the active noise
noise cancellation unit 24P connector terminal No. 16. cancellation unit 24P connector terminals No. 4 and
No. 16.
i-----------------r R MIC SH (PUR)

1 12
CM
00
5 6 7 / 71011
12
13 14 15 16 1 7 / 1 9 / 21 22 23 24 5 6 10 11
13 141151161171 /1 19 I / I 2 1 122T23 24
R M1C+ (WHT)
R M IC + (WHT)

YES-Go to step 41.
NO-Replace the active noise cancellation unit (see noise cancellation unit and the active noise
page 23-171 ) . !
cancellation rear microphone. Replace the affected
41. Measure the voltage between body ground and active shielded harness.!
noise cancellation rear microphone 2P connector
terminal No. 2.
cancellation rear microphone (see page 23-172), and
replace the original active noise cancellation rear
ACTIVE NOISE CANCELLATION REAR
MICROPHONE 2P CONNECTOR microphone. If symptom is still present, substitute a
S P 23-171), and recheck. Ifthe symptom/indication goes
R M1C+ (WHT) u n it.!
YES-Go to step 42.
the active noise cancellation rear microphone and the
active noise cancellation unit. Replace the affected
shielded harness.!
connector.
46. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 52. Check for continuity between active noise
47. Disconnect active noise cancellation unit 24P PCM connector A (49P) terminal No. 33.
connector.
48. Connect the HDS to the data link connector (DLC) (see W ire side of female term inals
page 23-6).
n------------- n
49. Jump the SCS line with the HDS. 1 2 3 4 5[6 [717 / | i o | n ' 12
50. Disconnect PCM connector A (49P). 13 14 '15|16|17|/|19|/|21122|23 24

NEP (WHT/GRN)
51. Check for continuity between active noise
body ground.
J 1 I2 / I 9 |10|
4 | 5 | 6 | 7 f 8
11 12 13 14|15 16 1718 19 20 / j
■
1 22 23 24 25 > < 26 27 /
i
29 30 31 3233 34 3 5 / / 38 39
ACTIVE NOISE CANCELLATION UNIT 24P CONNECTOR |40|41 / 4 |4 5 |46 47 48|49|
NEP (WHT/GRN)
t-----------------r PCM CONNECTOR A (49P)
1 12 Terminal side of female term inals
2 3 4 5 6 7 7 71011
13 14 15 16 1 7 / 1 9 / 21 22 23 24 Is t h e r e c o n t in u it y ?
NEP (WHT/GRN) YES-Substitute a known-good active noise
W ire side of female term inals present, update the PCM (see page 11-292) if it does
Is t h e r e c o n t in u it y ? known-good PCM (see page 11-294).B
YES-Repair a short to body ground in the wire NO-Repair an open in the wire between the active
between the active noise cancellation unit and the noise cancellation unit and the PCM.B
PCM.B
NO-Go to step 52.
53. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0) then turn to ON 58. Do the ANC test mode 10 in the self-diagnostic mode
(H). (see page 23-82).
54. Measure the voltage between active noise C a n y o u h e a r a lo w -fr e q u e n c y h u m fo r 1 s e c o n d o r
cancellation unit 24P connector terminal No. 6 and m o re ?
body ground while the door is opening.
A C T IV E N O IS E C A N C E L L A T IO N U N IT 2 4 P C O N N E C T O R symptom/indication goes away, replace the original
I N T R L T - (Y E L )
10 11 12
13 1415 16 17 / 1 9 / 21 22 23 24 NO-Go to step 65.
W ire side of fem ale term inals connector.
page 23-171 ) . ■ 63. Check for continuity between body ground and active
noise cancellation unit 24P connector terminal No. 3.
noise cancellation unit and under-dash fuse/relay box
A C T IV E N O IS E C A N C E L L A T IO N U N IT 2 4 P C O N N E C T O R
connector W (5P) terminal No. 4.B
55. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). ----------- 1 CS!SAMI (PNK)
-------------------------- 1fl
56. Connect the HDS to the data link connector (DLC) (see 1 ■ 12
2 3 4 5 6 V v 1C) 11
page 23-6).
CM
Tt
13 14 ■15 '16 ’
1 7 ,
/ ■ 1 9 / / : 21 ;12 2 3
57. Do the ANC test mode 9 in the self-diagnostic mode
(see page 23-82).
m o re ?
YES-Go to step 58.
NO-Go to step 59.
PCM.B
NO-Go to step 64.
64. Check for continuity between active noise 65. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
PCM connector A (49P) terminal No. 14. 66. Disconnect the active noise cancellation unit 24P
ACTIVE NOISE CANCELLATION UNIT 24P CONNECTOR connector.
I. 12
1 ■2 3 4 5 | 6 | / | / 68. Disconnect PCM connector A (49P).
/ io |n |
13 U \ 15|16|17|/119[/|21|22|23 24 69. Check for continuity between the body ground and
' CSSAM1 (PNK)
active noise cancellation unit 24P connector terminal
li il No. 2.
j 1 12 / 4 | 5 | 6 | 7 | 8 9 hoi
1
11 12 13 1415 16 1718 1 9 20 /
1 ACTIVE NOISE CANCELLATION UNIT 24P CONNECTOR
■ 22 23 24 X
25 > < 2627 / 1
29 30 31 32I33 34 35! / / 38 39
|40|41 / I / I 4 4 14 5 14 6 14 7 481491 CSSAM2 (WHT)
t
2 3 4 5 I 6 M / 1 / 1 1 0 l 11 12
Terminal side of female term inals 13 14| 15[ 16[ 17 [ / 1 19 [ / 1 2 1 122T23 24
cancellation unit (see page 23-171) and recheck. If the
symptom/indication goes away, replace the original W ire side of female term inals
not have the latest software or substitute a Is t h e r e c o n t in u it y ?
known-good PCM (see page 11-294).B YES-Repair a short to body ground in the wire
NO-Repair an open in the wire between the active between the active noise cancellation unit and the
noise cancellation unit and the PCM.B PCM.B
NO-Go to step 70.
(cont'd)
70, Check for continuity between the active noise No sound is:heard from' subwoofer ('08-10
models without premium audio system)
NOTE:
W ire side of female term inals • Check the vehicle battery condition first (see page
CSSAM2 (WHT) 22-111).
1 2 3 4 • Check the connectors for poor connections or loose
•5 I 6 M / I 10 11 12 terminals.
13 |1 4 |1 5 |1 6 |1 7 |/| 19 |/|2 1 |22l23 24
1. Disconnect active noise cancellation unit 24P
CSSAM2 (WHT) connector.
J 1 12 / 4I 5 | 6 | 7 | 8 9 |10|
11 12 13 14 15 16 1
2. Check for continuity between body ground and active
1715 1920
25 > < 26 27 / 1
noise cancellation unit 24P connector terminals No. 1
1 22 23 24 1 and No. 13 individually.
29 30 31 3233 34 3 5 / / 38 39
140J41 / l / l 44145146147 481491
Terminal side of female term inals _i—1 1r— -f
Is t h e r e c o n t in u it y ? 1 2 3 4 5 6, / • 10 ■11
M2
YES-Substitute a known-good active noise 13 U t 1f5 1(5 17V '1S > / / 21 25i 23 24
cancellation unit (see page 23-171), and recheck. Ifthe SUBW + (GRN)
active noise cancellation unit. If symptom is still s><a
known-good PCM (see page 11-294).■
NO-Repair an open in the wire between the active is t h e r e c o n t in u it y ?
noise cancellation unit and the P C M .I
between the active noise cancellation unit 24P
connector and the subwoofer.®
NO-Go to step 3.
3. Measure the resistance between active noise Error code: XM NO SIGNAL or XM ANTENNA
cancellation unit 24P connectorterminals No. T and
No. 13.
is displayed
NOTE: Check the XM radio reception in an open area.
ACTIVE NOISE CANCELLATION UNIT 24P CONNECTOR Poor reception/interference can be caused by tall
buildings, mountains, or high-voltage power lines.
1. Park the vehicle outside with a clear view of the
southern horizon.
D o e s th e X M r a d io r e c e iv e a s ig n a l?
YES-Reception interference operation is norm al.!
NO-Go to step 2.
2. Check the XM antenna 2P connector and XM receiver
W ire side of female term inals connector B (2P).
A re th e c o n n e c to rs c o n n e c te d ?
Is t h e r e a b o u t 4 Q ?
YES-Go to step 3.
cancellation unit (see page 23-171), and recheck. Ifthe NO-Reconnect the XM antenna 2P connector and XM
symptom/indication goes away, replace the original receiver connector B (2P), and recheck the XM radio
active noise cancellation unit. If symptom is still operation, ifthe signal is restored, operation is
present, replace the subwoofer (see page 23-174).B normal. If signal not restored go to step 3.
NO-Go to step 4. 3. Substitute a known-good XM antenna (see page

23-177).
4. Check the subwoofer 2P connector for a loose or poor
connection. D o e s th e X M r a d io r e c e iv e a s ig n a l?
R e c o n n e c t th e s u b w o o fe r c o n n e c to r, a n d re c h e c k th e YES-Replace the XM antenna (see page 23-177).H

s y m p t o m ; is t h e c o n d it io n s till p r e s e n t ? NO-Substitute a known-good XM antenna
YES-Go to step 5. subharness. If the XM radio receives a signal, replace
the original XM antenna subharness.B
NO-lntermittent failure. Operation is normal.■
5. Test the subwoofer (see page 23-172).
Is t h e s u b w o o f e r O K ?
YES-Repair an open or high resistance in the wire(s)
subwoofer.il
NO-Replace the subwoofer (see page 23-174).H
XM radio display is blank and no station 5. Measure the voltage between XM receiver connector
A (14P) terminal No. 11 and body ground.
information is displayed ('07 model)
NOTE: XM RECEIVER CONNECTOR A (14P)
22-111).
terminals. 1 2 3 / 5 6
/ / 9 10 11 / 13 14
1. With navigation: Check the related system operation
(navigation system, audio disc changer). GND (WHT/BLK)
Is t h e o p e r a t io n n o r m a l?
YES-Go to step 2.
NO-Go to related system troubleshooting.■
2. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). Is t h e r e le s s t h a n 0 .2 V ?
3. Measure the voltage between XM receiver connector YES-
• With navigation: Go to step 6.
NO-
+ B (WHT/GRN)
• With navigation: Repair an open in the wire
1 2 3 / 5 6 between XM receiver connector A (14P) and audio
9 10 11 13 14 disc changer connector B (14P).H
/ / /
• Without navigation: Repair an open in the wire
between XM receiver connector A (14P) and audio
unit connector D (14P).H
Wire side of female terminals 7. Measure the voltage between audio disc changer
connector B (14P) terminal No. 2 and body ground.
YES-Go to step 4. AUDIO DISC CHANGER CONNECTOR B (14P)
NO-Repair an open in the wire between the No. 7 SYSTEM ACC (BLU/RED)
(7.5 A) fuse in the under-dash fuse/relay box and XM
receiver connector A (14P) terminal No. 1. ■ 1 2 3 / 5 6
/ / 9 10 11 / 13 14
Is t h e r e 1 0 V o r m o r e p r e s e n t ?
YES-Go to step 8.
NO-Substitute a known-good audio disc changer (see
page 23-170), and recheck. If there is 10 V or more
present, replace the original audio disc changer.B
8. Measure the voltage between XM receiver connector 13. Check for continuity between XM receiver connector
A (14P) terminal No. 2 and body ground. A (14P) and body ground according to the table.
XM receiver connector Wire color

XM RECEIVER CONNECTOR A (14P) A9 LT BLU
A10 PUR
SYSTEM ACC (BLU/RED )
1 2 3 / 5 6 XM RECEIVER CONNECTOR A (14P)
/ 10 11 / 13 14
/ «
1 2 3 / 5 6
/ / 9 10 11 / 13 14

Is th e r e 1 0 V o r m o r e p r e s e n t ?
YES-Go to step 9.
NO-Repair an open or high resistance in the wire between the XM receiver and the navigation unit.
between audio disc changer connector B (14P) and Replace the affected shielded harness.!
XM receiver connector A (14P).B
NO-Go to step 14.
14. Check for continuity between terminals of XM
10. Measure the voltage between XM receiver connector receiver connector A (14P) according to the table.
From terminal To terminals
A3 A9, A10
A9 A10
SYSTEM ACC (BLU/RED)
1 2 [■SPM . 3 / 5 6
/ / 9 10 11 / 13 14
1 2 rassH 3 / 5 6
/ / 9 10 11 / 13 14
Is th e r e le s s th a n 0 .5 V ? Is t h e r e c o n t in u it y b e t w e e n a n y o f t h e t e r m in a ls ?
YES-Go to step 11. YES-There is a short in the wires between the XM
receiver and the navigation unit. Replace the affected
shielded harness.®
page 23-170), and recheck. If 0.5 V or less are present,
replace the original audio disc changer.B NO-Go to step 15.
12. Disconnect navigation unit connector B (14P) and XM
receiver connector A (14P).
15. Cheek for continuity between XM receiver connector 17. Measure the voltage between audio unit connector D
A (14P) and navigation unit connector B (14P) (14P) terminal No. 2 and body ground.
XM receiver Navigation Wire color AUDIO UNIT CONNECTOR D (14P)

connector unit connector
A9 B2 SYSTEM ACC (BLU/RED)
LT BLU
A10 B8 PUR 1 2 3 4 5 6
7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
1 2 3 / 5 6
I
/ / 9 10 11 / 13 14
Is th e r e 1 0 V o r m o r e p r e s e n t?
YES-Go to step 18.
NO-Substitute a known-good audio unit (see page
NAVIGATION UNIT CONNECTOR B (14P) 23-167), and recheck. If there is 10 V or more present,
replace the original audio u n it.!
KT
CM 00
/ j / S 3 / 5 18. Measure the voltage between XM receiver connector

CD
10 x ! 11 12 13 14 A (14P) terminal No. 2 and body ground.
W ire side of female term inals SYSTEM ACC (BLU/RED)
Is t h e r e c o n t in u it y ? 1 2 3 / 5 6
YES-Substitute a known-good XM receiver (see page 7/ 9 10 11 / 13 14

23-170), then reconnect all of the connectors and
replace the original XM receiver. Ifthe T
symptom/indication is still present, replace the
navigation unit (see page 23-295). If the
navigation unit.®
Is th e re 1 0 V o r m o r e p r e s e n t?
NO-There is an open in the wire(s) between the XM
receiver and the navigation unit. Replace the affected YES-Go to step 19.
shielded harness.! NO-Repair an open or high resistance in the wire
16. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). between audio unit connector D (14P) and XM
receiver connector A (14P). !
20. Measure the voltage between XM receiver connector 24. Check for continuity between terminals of XM
A (14P) terminal No. 2 and body ground. receiver connector A (14P) according to the table.

XM RECEIVER CONNECTOR A (14P) A3 A9, A10
A9 A10
SYSTEM ACC {BLU/RED)
1 2 3 / 5 6 XM RECEIVER CONNECTOR A (14P)
/ / 9 10 11 / 13 14
1 2 3 / 5 6
/ / 9 10 11 / 13 14

YES-Go to step 21.
YES-There is a short in the wires between the XM
NO-Substitute a known-good audio unit (see page receiver and the audio unit. Replace the affected
23-167), and recheck. If there is less than 0.5 V shielded harness.!
present, replace the original audio unit.B
NO-Go to step 25.
22. Disconnect audio unit connector D (14P) and XM
23. Check for continuity between XM receiver connector
A (14P) and body ground according to the table.

A9 LT BLU
A10 PUR
1 2 3 / 5 6
/ / 9 10 11 / 13 14
between the XM receiver and the audio unit. Replace
the affected shielded harness.!
NO-Go to step 24.
25. Check for continuity between XM receiver connector XM radio display is blank and no station
A (14P) and audio unit connector D (14P) according to
the table.
information is displayed (*08-10 models)
NOTE:
XM receiver Audio unit Wire color
connector connector
22-111).
A9 D9 LTBLU
A10 D10 PUR • Check the connectors for poor connections or loose
terminals.
X M R E C E IV E R C O N N E C T O R A ( 1 4 P ) 1. With navigation: Check the related system operation
(navigation system, audio disc changer).
1 2 3 / 5 6 Is t h e o p e r a t io n n o r m a l?
9 10 11 13 14 YES-Go to step 2.
/ / /
NO-Go to related system troubleshooting.!
W ire side o f fem ale term inals
3. Measure the voltage between XM receiver connector
1 2 3 4 5 6 +B (WHT/GRN)
7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
CD
1 2 5
CO
/ 9 10 11 / 14
/

I
YES-Substitute a known-good XM receiver (see page W ire side of female term inals
recheck. If the symptom/indication goes away, Is t h e r e b a t t e r y v o lt a g e ?
replace the original XM receiver. If the
symptom/indication is still present, replace the audio YES-Go to step 4.
unit (see page 23-167).H
NO-There is an open in the wire(s) between the XM (7.5 A) fuse in the under-dash fuse/relay box and XM
receiver and the audio unit. Replace the affected receiver connector A (14P) terminal No. 1.B
shielded harness.®
5. Measure the voltage between XM receiver connector 8. Measure the voltage between XM receiver connector
A (14P) terminal No. 11 and body ground. A (14P) terminal No. 2 and body ground.
XM RECEIVER CONNECTOR A (14P) XM RECEIVER CONNECTOR A (14P)
1 2 3 / 5 6 1 2 3 / 5 6
/ / 9 10 11 / 13 14 / / » 10 11 / 13 14
GND (WHT/SLK)
(v )
Is th e r e le s s th a n 0 .2 V ? Is th e r e 1 0 V o r m o r e p r e s e n t ?
YES- YES-Go to step 9.
• With navigation: Go to step 6. NO-Repair an open or high resistance in the wire
• Without navigation: Go to step 16. between audio disc changer connector B (14P) and
XM receiver connector A (14P).B
M O -
rn With navigation: Repair an open in the wire
between XM receiver connector A (14P) and audio 10. Measure the voltage between XM receiver connector
disc changer connector B (14P).B A (14P) terminal No. 2 and body ground.
between XM receiver connector A (14P) and audio XM RECEIVER CONNECTOR A (14P)
unit connector D (14P).B
1 2 3 / 5 6
connector B (14P) terminal No. 2 and body ground. / / 9 10 11 / 13 14
1 2 3 / 5 6 W ire side of female term inals
/ / 9 10 11 / 13 14
I s t h e r e l e s s t h a n 0.5 V ?
YES-Go to step 11.
1
page 23-170), and recheck. If 0.5 V or less are present,
W ire side of female term inals replace the original audio disc changer.!
Is th e r e 1 0 V o r m o r e p r e s e n t ?
12. Disconnect navigation unit connector B (16P) and XM
YES-Go to step 8. receiver connector A (14P).
page 23-170), and recheck. If there is 10 V or more
present, replace the original audio disc changer.!
13. Check for continuity between XM receiver connector 15. Check for continuity between XM receiver connector
A (14P) and body ground according to the table. A (14P) and navigation unit connector B (16P)
A9 LT BLU XM receiver Navigation Wire color
A10 PUR connector unit connector
A9 B2 LT BLU
A10 B10 PUR
X M R E C E IV E R C O N N E C T O R A ( 1 4 P )
X M R E C E IV E R C O N N E C T O R A ( 1 4 P )
CM
1 3 / 5 6
/ / 9 10 11 / 13 14
1 2 3 / 5 6
/ / 9 10 11 / 13 14
Is t h e r e c o n t in u it y ? W ire side of female term inals

between the XM receiver and the navigation unit.
N A V IG A T IO N U N IT C O N N E C T O R B (1 6 P )
NO-Go to step 14. r
OO
14. Check for continuity between terminals of XM 7 2 / / / / 7
CO
receiver connector A (14P) according to the table. / 10 11 12 14 15 16

A3 A9, A10
A9 A10
X M R E C E IV E R CONNECTOR-A (14P)
YES-Substitute a known-good XM receiver (see page
CO
1 2 / 5 6 recheck. If the symptom/indication goes away,

9 10 11 13 14 replace the original XM receiver. If the
/ / / symptom/indication is still present, replace the
navigation unit (see page 23-295). !
shielded harness.!
shielded harness.!
NO-Go to step 15.
17. Measure the voltage between audio unit connector D 20. Measure the voltage between XM receiver connector
(14P) terminal No. 2 and body ground. A (14P) terminal No. 2 and body ground.
AUDIO UNIT CONNECTOR D (14P) XM RECEIVER CONNECTOR A (14P)
SYSTEM ACC (BLU/RED) SYSTEM ACC (BLU/RED)
1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 / 5 6
7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 / / 9 10 11 / 13 14
Is th e r e 1 0 V o r m o r e p r e s e n t ? Is t h e r e le s s t h a n 0 .5 V ?
NO-Substitute a known-good audio unit (see page NO-Substitute a known-good audio unit (see page
23-167), and recheck. If there is 10 V or more present, 23-167), and recheck. If there is less than 0.5 V
replace the original audio unit.B present, replace the original audio unit.B
18. Measure the voltage between XM receiver connector 21. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
22. Disconnect audio unit connector D (14P) and XM
23. Check for continuity between XM receiver connector
SYSTEM ACC (BLU/RED) A (14P) and body ground according to the table.
1 2 3 / 5 6 XM receiver connector Wire color

A9 LT BLU
/ / 9 10 11 / 13 14
A10 PUR

CD
CO
CM
W ire side of female term inals 1 / 5

CD
CO
/ / 10 11 / 14
Is t h e r e 1 0 V o r m o r e p r e s e n t ?
YES-Go to step 19.
between audio unit connector D (14P) and XM
receiver connector A (14P).B Is t h e r e c o n t in u it y ?
19. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). YES-There is a short to body ground in the wire(s)
between the XM receiver and the audio unit. Replace
the affected shielded harness.B
NO-Go to step 24.
(cont'd)
24. Check for continuity between terminals of XM 25. Check for continuity between XM receiver connector
receiver connector A (14P) according to the table. A (14P) and audio unit connector D (14P) according to
the table.
A3 A9, A10 XM receiver Audio unit Wire color
A9 A10 connector connector
A9 D9 LTBLU
X M R E C E IV E R C O N N E C T O R A (1 4 P )
A10 D10 PUR
KM R E C E IV E R C O N N E C T O R A ( 1 4 P )
1 2 3 / 5 6
/ / 9 To 11 / 13 14
1 2 3 / 5 6
/ / 9 10 11 / 13 14
Is t h e r e c o n t in u it y b e t w e e n a n y o f t h e te r m in a ls ? W ire side of female term inals

receiver and the audio unit. Replace the affected
shielded harness.!
NO-Go to step 25.
1 2 3 4 5 6
7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
symptom/indication is still present, replace the audio
unit (see page 23-167).!
receiver and the audio unit. Replace the affected
shielded harness.!
XM radio preset memory is lost 6. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
NOTE: 7. Measure the voltage between XM receiver connector

22-111).
• Check the connectors for poor connections or loose XM RECEIVER CONNECTOR A (14P)
terminals.
• If you can only tune channel 000,001,174, or 247,
make sure the audio unit is set to the channel mode 1 2 3 / 5 6
(see owner's manual). If it is set to channel mode, call
/ / 9 10 11 / 13 14
XM satellite radio customer support and check the
account activation status. GND (WHT/BLK)
1. Set each of the XM radio channel preset buttons. X)

D o e a c h o f th e X M r a d io c h a n n e l p r e s e t b u tto n s s e t
p r o p e r ly ? W ire side o f female term inals
YES-Go to step 2.
NO-Replace the XM receiver (see page 23-170).B
YES-Replace the XM receiver (see page 23-170).B
2. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0) for 1 minute, then
turn it back to ON (II). NO-
3. Test all of the XM radio channel preset buttons for • With navigation: Repair an open in the wire
proper recall operation. between XM receiver connector A (14P) and audio
disc changer connector B (14P).B
D o t h e p r e s e t b u tto n s r e c a ll th e s e t r a d io s ta tio n s ?
YES-System is normal at this time. Check between XM receiver connector A (14P) and audio
connections at the XM receiver.® unit connector D (14P).B
NO-Go to step 4.
5. Measure the voltage between XM receiver connector
+ B (WHT/GRN)
H
CD
1 2 / 5
CD
/ / 10 11 / 13 14
YES-Go to step 6.
NO-Repair an open in the wire between the driver's
under-dash fuse/relay box and the XM receiver
connector A (14P).B
Poor or no sound with XM radio (Audio unit 6. Check for continuity between audio disc changer
connector B (14P) and body ground according to the
does display XM channels)
table.
NOTE:
Audio disc changer connector Wire color
B5 RED
22-111).
B6 BLK
• Check the connectors for poor connections or loose B13 WHT
terminals. B14 GRN
• Check the radio reception in an open area. Poor
reception/interference can be caused by tall buildings,
mountains, or high-voltage power lines that are
nearby.
• If you can only tune channel 000,001,174, or 247, 3 4 5 6
/ 2 paa
make sure that the audio unit is set to the channel
mode (see owner's manual). If it is set to channel /I / 9 10 11 / 13 14
mode, call XM satellite radio customer support and
check the account activation status.
1. Turn on the audio unit and select XM radio. W ire side of female terminals
2. Check for an error message on the display. Is t h e r e c o n t in u it y ?

A r e th e r e a n y m e s s a g e s d is p la y e d ? YES-There is a short to body ground in the wire(s)
YES-Go to error code list (see page 2 3-85).! between the XM receiver and the audio disc changer.
NO-
NO-Go to step 7.
• With navigation Go to step 3.
• Without navigation: Go to step 9. 7. Check for continuity between terminals of audio disc
changer connector B (14P) according to the table.
4. Disconnect audio disc changer connector B (14P). B4 B5, B6, B13, B14
5. Disconnect XM receiver connector A (14P). B5 B6, B13, B14
B6 1 B13, B14
B13 B14

CO
/ 4 5 6
CD
CO
10 11 14
/ /I /
Is t h e r e c o n t in u it y b e t w e e n a n y o f th e te r m in a ls ?
receiver and the audio disc changer. Replace the
8. Check for continuity between XM receiver connector 12. Check for continuity between audio unit connector D
A (14P) and audio disc connector B (14P) according to (14P) and body ground according to the table.
the table.
Audio unit connector Wire color
XM receiver Audio disc Wire color D5 RED
connector changer D6 BLK
connector D13 WHT
A5 B5 RED D14 GRN
A6 B6 BLK
A13 B13 WHT AUDIO UNIT CONNECTOR D (14P)
A14 B14 GRN
XM RECEIVER CONNECTOR A (14P) 1 2 3 4 5 6

7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
1 2 3 / 5 6
/ / 9 10 11 / 13 14
between the audio unit and the XM receiver. Replace
NO-Go to step 13.
13. Check for continuity between terminals of audio unit
CO
/ rssari 4 5 6
connector D (14P) according to the table.
CD
/ / 10 11 / 13 14
D4 D5, D6, D13, D14
D5 D6, D13, D14
D6 D13, D14
D13 D14
YES-Substitute a known-good audio disc changer AUDIO UNIT CONNECTOR D (14P)
(see page 23-170), then reconnect all of the
connectors and recheck. Ifthe symptom/indication
goes away, replace the original audio disc changer. If 1 2 3 4 5 6
the symptom/indication is still present, replace the 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
XM receiver (see page 23-170). Ifthe
unit.B
disc changer and the XM receiver. Replace the
affected shielded harness.B
9. Make sure the ignition switch is in LOCK (0). YES-There is a short in the wires between the audio
unit and the XM receiver. Replace the affected
10. Disconnect XM receiver connector A (14P). shielded harness.B
11. Disconnect audio unit connector D (14P). NO-Go to step 14.
Symptom Troubleshooting (cont'd) Sound Quality Diagnosis
14. Check for continuity between audio unit connector D Special Tools Requi red
(14P) and XM receiver connector A (14P) according to Diagnostic CD 07AAZ-SDBA100
the table.
Use the following tests to check sound quality.
Audio unit XM receiver Wire color
connector connector NOTE: Before beginning the following tests, write down
D5 A5 RED the customer's bass, treble, fader and balance settings,
D6 A6 BLK then set them to their center positions for the testing.
D13 A13 WHT
D14 A14 - GRN Left/Right Channel ID
Do this test to confirm proper channel routing.
A U D IO U N IT C O N N E C T O R D (1 4 P )
1. Insert the audio diagnostic CD (T/N 07AAZ-SDBA100)
into the CD player.
1 2 3 4 5 6 2. Play the track No. 1 (left, both, right channel ID) at a
7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 normal, or slightly higher than normal, volume level.
3. The voice should be audible only from the channel or
channels when indicated.
W ire side of female term inals • If the channel ID is correct for each side, go to the
phase test.
• If the channel ID is not correct, check for:
KM R E C E IV E R C O N N E C T O R A ( 1 4 P ) - Shorted speaker wire
- Faulty stereo amplifier
- Faulty audio unit
1 2 3 / 5 6
/ / 9 10 11 13 14
unit (see page 23-167).■
unit and the XM receiver. Replace the affected
shielded harness.B
P hase T est Electrical Noise Test
Do this test to check for electrical noise being induced
into the audio system.
into the CD player. NOTE: Electrical noise may be caused by outside
sources that cannot be prevented by the audio system.
2. Play the track No. 2 (phase) at a normal, or slightly Make sure you remove any cell phones and/or turn off
higher than normal, volume level.
any aftermarket device before beginning this test.
3. The voice should sound centered and focused when it
is in-phase.
into the CD player.
4. The voice should sound diffused, and have less bass
2. Play the track No. 4 (digital zero) at a normal, or
when it is out of phase.
slightly higher than normal, volume level.
• If the voice changes from in-phase to out of phase
as indicated by the prompt, the phasing is correct. 3. Operate any electrical device that may create
Go to the electrical noise test. electrical noise in the audio system, including starting
• If the voice always sounds out of phase, phasing is the engine.
not correct. Check for: 4. Play the track No. 5 (near digital zero) at a normal, or
- Crossed speaker wires slightly higher than normal, volume level.
5. Operate any electrical device that may create
- Faulty audio unit electrical noise in the audio system, including starting
the engine.
6. Play the track No. 6 (SNR) at a normal, or slightly
higher than normal, volume level.
7. Operate any electrical device that may create
electrical noise in the audio system, including starting
the engine.
• If no abnormal noise is heard, go to individual
speaker test.
• Ifthe noise is present only during the SNR track,
replace the audio unit.
• If the noise is heard during the digital zero or near
digital zero track, check for:
- Poor ground for the audio unit, amplifier, engine
or battery cable
- Pinched or shorted speaker or amplifier wire
- Faulty audio unit
- Other faulty components causing excessive
electrical noise (ignition coils, alternator, door
lock actuators, etc.). Disconnect any suspect
components, and then replay the tracks that were
originally noisy. If the noise is gone, check the
component's circuit and the component.
Sound Quality Diagnosis (cont'd)
Individual Speaker Test Sound Balance Test

Do this test to identify a faulty speaker. Perform this test to identify a faulty channel or speaker.
1. Insert the audio diagnostic CD (T/N 07AAZ-SDBA100) 1. Insert the audio diagnostic CD (T/N 07AAZ-SDBA100)
into the CD player. into the CD player.
2. Play track No. 30 (steady 300 Hz tone) at a normal, or 2. Confirm the bass and treble are set to the center
slightly higher than normal, volume level. positions.
3. Listen to each speaker for poor sound compared to 3. Play the track No. 3 (pink noise) at a normal, or slightly
the other speakers. Use the audio unit's fader and higher then normal, volume level.
balance settings to help isolate the channel with the
4. A static type sound should be heard through all
problem.
speakers.
• If the sound quality produced by a specific speaker
is poor, substitute it with a known-good speaker. If 5. Insert the audio diagnostic CD (T/N 07AAZ-SDBA100)
the poor sound quality continues, go to the sound into the CD player of a known-good vehicle.
balance test.
6. Set the bass and treble to the center position.
• If the sound quality is OK, go to the sound balance
test. 7. Play the track No. 3 (pink noise) at the same level as
was played in step 3.
8. Compare the sounds made by the two vehicles.
• If the noise made by the two vehicles are very
similar, go to the Frequency Sweep Test.
• If the sound does not have as much bass, check the
subwoofer and circuit.
• if the sound does not have enough hiss, check the
tweeters and their circuits.
Frequency sweep Sound judging
Do this test to find rattles or reverberation that may Do this test to compare overall sound quality, imaging,
cause a perception of poor sound quality. and dynamics between the customer's vehicle and a
known-good vehicle. Only use a vehicle of the same
model and trim level for this test.
into the CD player.
1. In the customer's vehicle, set the bass, treble, fader,
2. Play the track No. 13 (sweep from 500 Hz to 35 Hz) at a
and balance settings to the customer's normal
normal, or slightly higher than normal, volume level.
settings that were written down before beginning
3. Listen to each speaker for poor sound quality or testing.
reverberations caused by specific frequencies. Use 2. Insert the audio diagnostic CD (T/N 07AAZ-SDBA100)
the voice-over to estimate the frequency that causes
into the CD player.
the vibration. Use the audio unit's fader and balance
settings to help isolate the channel with the problem. 3. Play the tracks No. 7 to 12 (sound quality, midland,
• If vibrations or poor sound quality is heard, go to dynamics, and imaging demonstration tracks) at a
step 4. normal, or slightly higher than normal, volume level.
• If no vibrations or poor sound quality is heard, go to Write down the volume setting being used.
sound judging. 4. Listen to areas of the track that stand out as being
4. Choose the appropriate track from No. 14 to 25 (small either very clear or poorer than other areas of the
range frequency sweep) or 26 to 53 (single track.
frequencies) to recreate the frequency that caused the 5. Insert the audio diagnostic CD (T/N 07AAZ-SDBA100)
poor sound quality or vibration located in step 3: this into the CD player of a known-good vehicle.
aids in diagnosis of the cause.
6. Play the tracks at the same volume level and the same
NOTE: When you get to the track that recreates the bass, treble, balance, and fader settings as used in
problem, select the repeat function on the audio unit, step 3 in the customer's vehicle.
this will help you isolate the cause.
7. Listen to the same area of the track that stood out as
5. Replace or insulate the source of the vibration or, if being either very clear or poorer than other areas of
the speaker is the source of the poor sound quality, the track.
replace it.
8. Compare the customer's vehicle's sound quality
results with the known-good vehicle's results.
• If the sound quality in the customer's vehicle is
comparable to the sound quality in the known-good
vehicle, then the customer's vehicle is operating as
designed:
• If the sound quality is not comparable, check these
items in order:
- Loose or improperly installed speakers or other
hardware that may become excited by the
vibrations generated by the speakers
- Poor power or ground to the stereo amplifier
- Damaged speaker(s)
- Faulty amplifier
- Faulty audio unit
Sound Quality Diagnosis (cont'd)
Seek Stop Test 12. Compare the number of stations received in steps 6
and 9 in the customer's vehicle with the number of
Do this test to check the performance of the audio unit's stations received in the known-good vehicle.
AM and FM reception. • If the number of stations received is the same, or
Refer to the following symptom troubleshooting before within 10%, the audio unit's tuner performance is
continuing with this test. OK. The problem may be atmospheric conditions,
• Audio sound is weak or distorted (see page 23-110) multi path interference, or other obstructions to the
• No sound is heard from the speakers (display is radio signal.
normal) • If the customer's vehicle receives fewer stations by
- '07 models with premium audio system (see at least 10 %, go to step 2 of poor AM or FM radio
page 23-93) reception of interference (see page 23-87).
- '07 models without premium audio system (see
page 23-98)
- '08-10 models with premium audio system (see
page 23-101)
- '08-10 models without premium audio system (see
page 23-107)
NOTE:
• Window tint, aftermarket theft-recovery devices and
other aftermarket accessories may reduce radio
reception.
• Changes in cloud cover and other atmospheric
conditions will affect the ability of the audio unit to
receive radio signals.
1. Park the customer's vehicle in an open area away
from buildings or other obstructions.
2. Park a known-good vehicle (same year, model, and
trim level) next to the customer's vehicle, facing the
same direction.
3. Start the engine in the customer's vehicle, and turn on
the radio.
4. Set the FM receiver to 87.7 MHz.
5. Press the Seek + button and record the first station
that the audio unit locks onto.
6. Press the Seek + button repeatedly, and write down
each station that the audio unit locks onto until the
station recorded in step 5 is reached again.
7. Set the AM receiver to 530 kHz.
8. Press the Seek + button, and record the first station
that the audio unit locks on to.
9. Press the Seek + button repeatedly, and write down
each station that the audio unit locks onto until the
station recorded in step 8 is reached again.
11. Start the engine in the known-good vehicle, and then
perform step 4 thru 10 on the known-good vehicle.
SRS component locations (see page 24-23), and the
NOTE:
• Eject all the discs before removing the audio unit to
prevent damaging the CD player's load mechanism.
• If you are replacing the audio unit, write down the
audio presets (if possible), and enter them into the
new audio unit.
• Take care not to scratch the dashboard and related
parts.
• Lay a workshop towel under the parts when working
on them to protect the face panel from scratches or
other damage. (0.45 kgf m, 3.2 ibf-ft)
With navigation 6. Install the audio unit in the reverse order of removal,
1. Make sure you have the anti-theft codes for the audio • Make sure all connectors and AM/FM antenna
and navigation system. sublead are secure.
2. Remove the center panel (see page 20-136). • Enter the anti-theft codes for the audio system, and
set the clock.
3. Remove the bolts (A), then pull out the audio unit (B).
• If necessary, enter the navigation system code.
(0.45 kgf-m, 3.2 ibf-ft)
4. Disconnect the connectors (C), then remove the audio

unit.
Audio Unit Removal/Installation (cont'd)
Without navigation Without premium audio system/6CD type
1. Make sure you have the anti-theft codes for the audio C
system.
2. Remove the center panel (see page 20-136).
3. Remove the bolts (A), then pull out the audio unit (B).
With premium audio system/6CD type
5 x 0.8 mm 4.4 N-m

(0.45 kgf-m, .3.2 Ibf-ft)
Without premium audio system/1 CD type
(0.45 kgf-m, 3.2 Ibf-ft) Â

4. Disconnect the connectors (C), then remove the audio
unit.
Stereo Amplifier
5. Remove the bolts (A), and the bracket (B). 1. Remove the glove box (see page 20-142).
6CD type 2. Remove the connector clip (A), and disconnect the
connectors (B).
3. Loosen the mounting bolt (C), and remove the

mounting nut (D), then remove the stereo amplifi er
(E).
4. Install the stereo amplifier in the reverse order of
removal.
5 x 0.8 mm 4.4 N-m

(0.45 kgf-m, 3.2 Ibf-ft)
6. Install the audio unit in the reverse order of removal,

• Make sure all connectors and AM/FM antenna
sublead are secure.
• Enter the anti-theft code for the audio system, then
enter the audio presets, and set the clock.
X M Receiver Removal/Installation Audio Disc Changer
1. Remove the left rear side trim panel (see page NOTE:
20-110). • Put on gloves to protect your hands.
2. Disconnect the antenna 2P connector (A) and 14P • Take care not to scratch the headliner and display
connector (B) from the XM receiver (C). cover.
1. Remove the navigation display (see page 23-299).
2. Remove the screws, then remove the bracket (A) and
the audio disc changer (B).
NOTE: When removing the audio disc changer, the
bracket (A) must be completely removed to prevent
damaging the audio disc changer.
6 x 1 .0 mm
9.4 N-m <0.95 kgf-m, 6.9 Ibf-ft)
3. Loosen the three bolts (D)r and remove the XM
receiver.
4. Install the XM receiver in the reverse order of
removal.
3. Install the audio disc changer in the reverse order of

removal.
Active Noise Cancellation Unit Removal/Installation
NOTE: *08-10 models w ith o u t premium audio

• Put on gloves to protect your hands. system
• Take care not to scratch the headliner and display
cover. 1. Remove the glove box (see page 20-142).
• Lay a workshop towel under the parts when working 2. While pushing the tab (A), pull the lever (B) up and
on them to protect the face panel from scratches or disconnect connector (C).
other damage.
*07 model and *08-10 models w ith premium

audio system
1. Remove the audio unit (with navigation) (see page
23-167) or center pocket (without navigation) (see
page 20-137).
2. Disconnect the connector (A), then remove the bolt
(B) and the active noise cancellation unit (C).
5 x 0.8 mm
4.4 N-m(0.45 kgf-m, 3.2 i bf-ft)
3. Detach the connector clip (D).
3. Install the unit in the reverse order of removal.
4. Loosen the mounting bolt (E), and remove the
mounting nut (F), then remove the active noise
cancellation unit (G).
5. Install the unit in the reverse order of removal.
Active Noise Cancellation Speaker Test/Replacement
Microphone Removal/installation
F r o n t/R e a r F ro n t D o o r S p e a k e r
1. Remove the headliner (see page 20-116). 1. Remove the door panel (see page 20-8).
2. Disconnect the connector (A), then remove the screws 2. Remove the three mounting screws from the front
and the active noise cancellation microphone (B). door speaker (A).
------------ -- 3. Disconnect the 2P connector (B), and remove the front

door speaker.
3. Remove the cap (C) from the base (D).
4. Install the microphone in the reverse order of
No. 2. There should be about 4 Q.
removal.
5. Ifthe resistance is not as specified, replace the
speaker.
Rear Speaker Tweeter (With climate control)
1. Remove the rear side trim panel (see page 20-110). 1. Carefully pry the tweeter grille (A) out of the
dashboard. Be careful not to damage the tweeter
2. Remove the three mounting screws from the rear grille and the dashboard.
speaker (A).
2. Disconnect the 2P connector (B) from the tweeter.

3. Disconnect the 2P connector (B), and remove the rear
speaker. 3. Remove the tweeter from the speaker grille.
No. 2. There should be about 4 0.
speaker.
Speaker Test/Replacement (cont'd)
4. Measure the resistance between the tweeter (A) Subwoofer ('07 model w ith premium audio
terminals as shown.
system and '08-10 models w ith ANC)
• W ith premium audio system; Measure the
resistance between tweeter 2P connector terminals 1. Slide the front passenger's seat forward.
No. 1 and No. 2. There should be about 4 O.
2. Disconnect the 2P connector (A), and remove the nuts
• W ithout premium audio system; Measure the (B) and the subwoofer (C).
resistance between tweeter 2P connector terminal
No. 2 and the outside terminal of the capacitor (B).
There should be about 4 O.
W ithout premium audio system, check the
capacitor condition. If any problem is found,
replace the tweeter.
With premium audio system
B (0.S5 kgf*m, 6.9 Ibf-ft)

No. 2.
• With premium audio system; there should be about
20.
• W ithout premium audio system; there should be
about 40.
subwoofer.
5. Ifthe resistance is not as specified, replace the

tweeter.
Audio Remote Switch Test
'07 model and "08-10 models without '0 8 -1 0 m o d e ls w it h p re m iu m a u d io s y s te m

premium audio system
SRS components are located in this area. Review the SRS component locations (see page 24-23), and the
SRS component locations (see page 24-23), and the precautions and procedures (see page 24-26) before
precautions and procedures (see page 24-26) before doing repairs or service.
doing repairs or service. 1. Remove the driver's airbag assembly (see page
1. Remove the driver's airbag assembly (see page 24-215).
24-215). 2. Disconnect the 20P connector (A) from the cable reel
2. Disconnect the 13P connector (A) from the cable reel (B).
(B).
i
B
/ 7/ 5 6 7 7 9 10
11 12 13 14 / / 17 18 19 20

No. 19 in each switch position according to the table.
3. Measure the resistance between terminals No. 11 and Position Resistance

No. 12 in each switch position according to the table. No button About 10 kO
pressed
Position Resistance MODE About 3.7 kQ
No button About 10 kQ CH (+ ) About 1.7 kQ
pressed CH {—) About 775O
MODE About 3.7 kQ ▲ About 357 O
CH (+ ) About 1.7 kO (VOL.UP)
CH ( —) About 775 O w About 100 O
▲ About 357 Q (VOLDOWN)
(VOL.UP)
w About 100D 4. Ifthe resistance is not as specified, replace the audio
(VOL.DOWN) remote switch (see page 17-7).
4. If the resistance is not as specified, replace the audio

remote switch (see page 17-7).
Auxiliary Jack Assembly AM/FM Antenna Amplifier
'08-10 models 1. Remove the right rear side trim panel (see page
20-110).
1. Remove the dashboard center lower cover (see page
20-138). 2. Disconnect the 3P connector (A) from the AM/FM
antenna amplifier (B).
2. Disconnect the 5P connector (A) and pull out the
auxiliary jack assembly (B).
3. Install the auxiliary jack assembly in the reverse order

of removal.
3. Disconnect connectors (C), then remove the bolt (D)
and AM/FM antenna amplifier.
4. Install the amplifier in the reverse order of removal.
XM Antenna Replacement AM/FM Antenna Repair
1. Remove the headliner (see page 20-116). NOTE: To make an effective repair, the broken section
must be no longer than one inch.
2. Remove the nut (A) from the XM antenna (B).
1. Lightly rub the area around the broken section (A)
with fine steel wool, then clean it with alcohol.
3. Disconnect the connector (C), and remove the XM 2. Carefully mask above and below the broken portion of
antenna. the window antenna wire (B) w ith cellophane tape (C).
4. Install the antenna in the reverse order of removal. 3. Using a commercially available rear window
defogger repair kit, apply a heavy coat of paint (A)
extending about 1/8" on both sides of the break. Allow
30 minutes to dry.
4. Check for continuity in the repaired wire.

5. Apply a second coat of paint in the same way. Let it
dry 3 hours before removing the tape.
*07 model and *08-09 models without HFL
Removal/Installation,
'07 model, page 23-297
'08-09 models, page 23-298
*08-10 models with HFL

General Operation • Moving the vehicle with the engine stopped and the
vehicle stopped, such as by ferry or tow truck, or if the
Refer to the Navigation System Manual for the vehicle is spun on a turn table.
navigation system operating procedures. • Tire slippage, changes in tire rolling diameters, and
some driving situations may cause discrepancies in
A n t i- t h e f t F e a tu re
travel distances. Examples of this include:
The navigation system and audio unit have a coded theft - Continuous tire slippage on a slippery surface
protection circuit. Make sure you have the anti-theft - Driving with snow chains mounted
security code before: - Abnormal tire pressure
• Disconnecting the battery. - Incorrect tire size
• Disconnecting the navigation unit connector C (8P). - Frequent lane changes across a wide highway
• Removing the No. 7 (7.5 A) fuse from the driver's - Continuous driving on a straight or gently curving
under-dash fuse/relay box. highway
After service, reconnect power to the navigation unit, - Very bumpy roads
and turn the ignition switch to ON (II). Enter the 4-digit • Tolerances in the system and map inaccuracies
anti-theft security code, then select Done. sometimes lim it how precisely the vehicle's position is
indicated. Examples of this include:
If the code cannot be found, use the interactive Network
(iN) to look it up. You can view the serial number in the - Driving on roads not shown on the map (map
Navi ECU diagnostic screen or find it on a label on the matching is not possible)
underside of the navigation unit located under the - Driving on a road that winds in one direction, such
driver's seat. as a loop bridge, an interchange, or a spiral parking
garage
When replacing the navigation unit, be sure to give the - Driving on a road with a series of sharp hair-pin
customer the new anti-theft security code. turns
S y m p to m D ia g n o s is - Driving near a gradual highway exit or transition
- Driving on one of two close parallel roads
Certain circumstances and system lim itations w ill result - Making many 90 degree turns
in occasional vehicle positioning errors. Some customer
may think this indicates a problem w ith the navigation Global Positioning System (GPS) Limitations
system when, in fact, the system is normal. Keep the
follow ing items in mind when interviewing the customer The GPS cannot detect the vehicle's position or
about symptoms o f the navigation system. elevation during the following instances:
• For the first 5 to 10 minutes after reconnecting the
S e lf- In e rtia l N a v ig a tio n L im ita tio n s battery (This process can take as long as 45 minutes).
The lim itations of the self-inertial portion of the • When the satellite signals are blocked by tall
navigation system (the yaw rate sensor and the vehicle buildings, mountains, tunnels, large trees, inside
speed signal) can cause some discrepancies between parking structures or large trucks.
the vehicle's actual position and the indicated vehicle's • When the GPS antenna is blocked by metallic w indow
position (GPS vehicle position). tinting or by an object placed above it in the vehicle.
The GPS antenna requires a clear unobstructed view
The follow ing circumstances may cause vehicle of the sky.
positioning errors:
• When there is no satellite signal output (Signal output
is sometimes stopped for satellite servicing).
• When the satellite signals are blocked by the
operation of some electronic aftermarket accessories
including, but not limited to non-OEM in-dash
entertainment units (radio, CD players/changers,
radar detectors and theft recovery systems) and cell
phones placed near the navigation system.
The accuracy of the GPS is reduced during these
instances:
• Metallic window tinting above the GPS antenna. Symptom Duplication
• When only three or less satellite signals are received
(Four satellite signals are required for accurate • When the symptom can be duplicated, verify that it is
positioning). not a characteristic of the system. Review the
navigation system manual and compare it to a
• When driving near high tension power lines.
known-good vehicle (with the same software and
• When the satellite control centers are experiencing database), under the same conditions. If the symptom
problems. is not the same as the known-good vehicle, follow the
self-diagnostic procedures and the appropriate
Muting Logic
troubleshooting procedures.
Whenever the navigation system is giving guidance, the • When the symptom does not reappear or only
front speakers are muted. When the voice control reappears intermittently, ask the customer about the
system is being used, all of the speakersare muted. Ifthe conditions when the symptom occurred.
HandsFreeLink is in use, the voice control system is - Always ask the customer to demonstrate the
unavailable and a message appears onscreen. problem.
-T ry to establish possible user error or
LCD Unit Limitations
misunderstanding of the system.
NOTE: The screen is not touch sensitive. Use the - T ry to establish if outside interference may have
interface dial and buttons to select items on the screen. been the cause.
• In cold temperatures, the display may stay dark for the - T ry to duplication the symptom under the same
first 2 or 3 minutes until it warms up. conditions the customer experienced.
• When the display is too hot because of direct summer - Vibration, temperature extremes, and moisture
sunlight, it w ill remain dark until the temperature (dew, humidity) are factors that are difficult to
drops (you may see an error message displayed duplicate.
stating this fact). - Inspect the vehicle for after-market electronic
• When the humidity is high and the interior devices (vehicle locators, amps, radar detectors,
temperature is low, the display may appear cloudy. etc.) that may be hidden.
The display w ill clear up after some use.
• Fingerprints on the screen may be noticeable. Clean NOTICE
the screen with a soft, damp cloth. You may use a mild When troubleshooting navigation system problems,
cleaner intended for eye glasses or computer screens. ensure that the known-good vehicle is the same
To avoid scratching the panel, do not rub too hard or software version year and model as the vehicle being
use abrasive cleaners or shop towels. serviced. Mixing incompatible navigation DVDs or other
system components can delay the troubleshooting
process by creating symptoms or issues causing effects
unrelated to the original problem.
Service Precautions The iN may display more than one code for a given serial
number. This is because serial numbers are not unique.
• If you need to replace the navigation unit, you can You may have to try more than one 4-digit code.
back-up the navigation data and transfer it to a new
navigation unit. See Save users memory (see page If no code is shown, or ifth e code(s) given do not work in
23-289). the navigation unit, contact the Automobile Warranty
department. If the code 0000 works, replace the
• When the battery is disconnected, the internal GPS
navigation unit.
clock resets to 0:00. The clock resets to the correct time
after the system finishes GPS initialization. When replacing the navigation unit or audio unit, make
• Before disconnecting the battery, make sure you have sure you give the customer the new anti-theft security
the anti-theft codes for the audio system and the code.
navigation system. Also obtain any PGM-FI or
transmission DTCs and freeze frame date (which are G P S In itia liz a tio n
lost when the PCM loses power). NOTE: You must park the vehicle outside with a clear
• After reconnecting the battery, you have to w ait to get view of the southern sky.
the initial signal from the satellite. It w ill take from 10
to 45 minutes. Depending on the length of time the battery was
• Adjust the setup clock settings (time zone and daylight disconnected, your system may require GPS
savings) in the navigation system. initialization. If it does, the following screen appears:
• Before returning the vehicle to the customer, enter the
anti-theft codes fo r the audio system and the The navigation system lost power and is acquiring its
navigation system. location from the GPS satellites. This usually takes
less than 10 minutes.
S y s te m In itia liz a tio n * Start the engine.
If the navigation system loss power (like the battery was *Park the vehicle in an open area away from trees,
disconnected), the navigation system requires
power lines, and tall buildings.
initialization. Once completed, your system is ready to
* Remove loose articles, cell phones, or electrical
use.
accessories located near the GPS antenna.
* If this screen is displayed repeatedly when starting
This initialization requires the following: the vehicle, see your dealer.
• Entering the 4-digit anti-theft security code to unlock
the system
• GPS initialization (may not be needed depending of
the length of tim e the system was w ithout power)
• Map matching to align the GPS to a location on the
map
E n te rin g th e S e c u r ity C o d e
Any tim e the navigation system loses power, you need

to enter the 4-digit anti-theft code on the navigation
system display. This 4-digit code is located on a small
code card that was given to the customer. Enter the
4-digit code, then select Done.
Ifthe navigation system anti-theft code is missing use
the interactive Network (iN) to look it up. You need the
serial number for the navigation unit to do this.
You can view the serial number by entering the
diagnostic mode. Select Unit Check from the main
menu, then the NAVI ECU diagnostic screen. This allows
you to get the serial number w ithout removing the
navigation unit.
If this procedure is not necessary, the system proceeds Obtaining A Navigation DVD
directly to the Disclaimer screen. During initialization,
the system searches fo r all available GPS satellites, and Ifthe navigation DVD is lost or damaged, or you need a
obtains their orbital information. During this procedure yearly updated DVD, you have two ways to purchase
the vehicle should be out in the open w ith a clear view of one. You can either call 888-549-3798, or order on-line at
the sky. www.honda.com.
Ifthe navigation system finds the satellites properly, this Both methods require a credit card. The DVD for this
box clears, and changes to the Disclaimer screen. If model has a white label, and cannot be ordered through
within 10 minutes the system fails to locate a sufficient the parts system. The following DVDs w ill not work in
number of satellites to locate your position, the this navigation system:
following screen appears. • Earlier model navigation DVDs (black, orange, light
blue label and the older versions with a white label)
i
Something is interfering w th the system's ability to • Map software programs manufactured by other
acquire its location. Check the following: companies
i
* The vehicle must be in an open area w th a clear • DVD movies, or DVDs containing audio recordings
view of the sky. Update DVDs are available for purchase usually in the
* Remove sources of GPS interference like metallic fall of each year. They may contain the following:
window tint above antenna, or electrical items
• Enhanced maps and points of interest (POI) coverage
near antennafsee owner's manual for details).
* Check GPS antenna cable connection. • Fixes for m inor software bugs
* Restart the engine and repeat the GPS acquire • Additional features
procedure. Ifthe problem persists, see your dealer. NOTE:
It this screen appears, turn off the engine, then restart • Map matching must be done any tim e the DVD is
the vehicle and move it to a different location. Ifthe removed or replaced.
disclaimer screen appears, the GPS initialization is 9 Always order navigation DVDs on an as-needed basis.
complete. During a typical model year, each color DVD may

undergo a half a dozen software only version
NOTE: upgrades to fix m inor issues on some or all models
• The average acquiring time is less than 10 minutes, the DVD supports. This is normal. Usually only the
but it can take as long as 45 minutes. letter at the end of the version number changes, while
• Ifthe system is still unable to acquire a signal, follow the database (maps and POIs) remain unchanged.
the instructions on the screen. If this screen appears • Never promise your customer future free updates.
again, go to troubleshooting fo r the GPS icon is white There are no free programs for updating the
or not shown (see page 23-244). navigation DVD. Update DVDs are generally available
• Skip to a CSF screen by pushing the MENU and the for purchase each fall. The online DVD order site
INFO buttons at the same time and you can move to provides information when an update for a particular
an System Links screen. color DVD is available.
• Damaged discs are not covered by warranty unless
Map Matching they have been damaged by the navigation system.
This part of the initialization matches the GPS
coordinates with a road on the map screen. To do this
part of the procedure, make sure that the navigation
system displays a map, and drive the vehicle on a
mapped road shown on the map screen. Do not enter a
destination at this time. When the name of the current
road you are driving on, appears at the bottom of the
screen, the entire procedure is complete. Your system is
now ready to use.
D V D H a n d lin g a n d C le a n in g Earliest DVD Version Application fo r Each

M odel
To avoid damaging or leaving fingerprints on the DVD,
always handle it by the edges and place it in a jewel case Each navigation DVD contains a map/POl (point of
whenever it is outside the navigation u n it Deep interest) database and the navigation system software
scratches or fingerprints on the back of the DVD can for each model that it supports. Inserting an older DVD
cause interm ittent rebooting or other system errors. can cause problems since it lacks the software to
provide the specific features needed for that model.
Unfortunately, the navigation software does not detect
or warn you that the version is outdated, and it may even
appear to operate.
NOTE: Replacing a DVD just because the version
number is higher is not always warranted. A higher
software version does not necessarily mean it contains
newer software for your model. The DVD contains
software for all models that use the same color DVD, and
a revised number may or may not have software fixes or
upgrades for the model in question.
Typical warning symptoms that an outdated DVD is
being used include:
Smudges and fingerprints can be carefully removed • The Honda model navigation screen may display a
using a mild cleaner and tissues designed to clean Acura logo while booting up.
eyeglasses. To clean a DVD, use a clean soft cloth. Very • A newly introduced model feature or current
gently wipe across the DVD from the center to the accessory may not display properly, and Extension
outside edge, never in a circular motion. w ill display instead.
NOTE: Extension may be displayed when using Music
Link, but should never be displayed when XM is
selected.
• The current street (the street being driven on) does not
appear properly at the bottom of the map screen
display when the vehicle is driven on a main road.
NOTE: If necessary, compare the operation to the
navigation system of the same model and year vehicle
that has a current DVD.
Do not place stabilizer rings or labels on the DVD.

How to Identify Navigation DVD Versions, • Incorrectly colored DVDs being put into navigation
vehicles. This causes the system to either display error
and How to Inspect A DVD for Damage
messages, or causes system malfunctions that mimic
To determine the navigation version on a particular a hardware problem. This results in the customer
model, start the engine, then locate the navigation unit. leaving with a malfunctioning navigation system.
Open the DVD door, and push the eject button to eject • The DVD version provided to the customer is out-of
the DVD. Hold the DVD by the edges, and check for these date or incompatible with a particular model. This
items: inconveniences your customer by delaying the repair,
• Check any official Honda service website for more or by causing additional (and unnecessary) returns to
service information about the navigation DVDs. your dealership.
• The DVD label color. • The customer experiences bugs or other issues that
• Read the DVD version on the label, and note it on the have already been resolved in later versions currently
repair order. The version number is near the bottom of available at the fulfillm ent desk.
the label text (for example, ver: 4.23A). You w ill need If the DVD is defective, or has any of the issues
this version number: mentioned above, return the vehicle to your customer
- To verify that the DVD version is appropriate for the and recommend that they order the proper DVD from
vehicle. Check any official Honda service website for the Honda Disc Fulfillment Center.
more service information.
NOTE: Navigation DVDs do not come with replacement
- Any time you call Tech Line regarding a navigation
navigation units. If you are replacing a navigation unit
system issue.
because it is defective (following appropriate service
- To answer customer inquires concerning update or manual troubleshooting), and the DVD does not eject,
coverage issue. order a DVD. See Obtaining a navigation DVD.
NOTE: Customers may obtain DVDs from sources
outside the normal ordering process. If you
determine this is the case, recommend that your
customer purchase the appropriate DVD from the
Honda Disc Fulfillment Center (see ORDERING A
DVD).
- Check the underside of the DVD for signs of
mishandling. Deep scratches, or random scratches,
light swirl marks, or fingerprints can cause random
lock-ups, reboots, erratic voice response, erratic
positioning errors, and DVD read or form at errors.
NOTE: A damaged DVD is not covered under
warranty unless the disc is damaged by the
navigation unit. Damage by the navigation unit
typically appears as circular scratches caused by
something rubbing against the DVD as it spins. The
damage may appear as arcs or complete circles on
the DVD reading surface.
- Verify that the underside of the DVD is silver, and
not a copy with a blue color. Copies w ill not work
properly and can cause other symptoms that mimic
hardware problems.
H o w t o A n s w e r C u s to m e r Q u e s tio n s A b o u t How do I find the local address of a business

N a v ig a tio n C o v e ra g e that is part of a national chain (for example,
Some customers may ask questions regarding a city, Starbucks)?
address, or POI (point o f interest) covered by the There are three ways to find the local address to
navigation system. It is better to verify a coverage businesses:
question on an actual vehicle than to disappoint your • If you know the phone number of the business, select
customer by promising coverage that may be Phone Number and enter the 10 digit phone number
incomplete or missing in their area. The follow ing (area code plus seven digit number).
suggestions can be used to answer coverage inquiries
• Select Category, then Restaurant. Enter the keyword
from your customer.
Star. The resulting list includes all restaurants that
Is my address covered by the navigation system? have the letters Star anywhere in the name.
• Select Name and enter Starbucks. For more common
Using a current production vehicle (of the same model),
business names, like McDonalds, you may have to
try and enter the customer's address (street first) to see
search through a list that includes other businesses
if their area is covered. Always enter the street first,
like McDonalds Welding, McDonalds Automotive, etc.
because sometimes their city may be included in a
neighboring township, or under some larger Precaution on Customer Navigation DVD
metropolitan city name. If the address is shown in a
vehicle, you m ight recommend that your customer #*Sneak Previews"
purchase an update. Your customer m ight request a look (or sneak preview)
Is my city covered by the navigation system? at features in the latest navigation software. You should
never preview a navigation DVD in a customer's vehicle.
For general questions about whether a city is covered, Inserting a newer DVD installs the latest software from
view the map coverage link on the DVD order site. On the DVD into the memory of the customer's navigation
the site, select a year, and select a model, then click on system. When the original DVD is reinstalled, the newer
the Coverage link. You then select a state or province, software remains in memory and is often incompatible
and the cities are listed. This does not guarantee that the w ith the customer's original DVD Map and POI database,
customer's road or address is in the system. Verifying or software.
on an actual production vehicle is always the best
guarantee that your information is accurate. If your customer wishes to see the latest navigation
coverage or software features, demonstrate it on an
The gas station on my corner is now a restaurant. Why in-stock vehicle that already has the latest DVD version.
is it s till incorrect in the navigation system?
If a newer version is loaded either by the dealer or the
For POI-related customer questions, explain that customer, the only remedy is to enter the navigation
businesses are constantly moving, and there can be a diagnostic mode's Version screen and do a forced
considerable lag in updating the m illions of POIs in the download. Check any official Honda service website for
system. The database is updated annually, and the best more information about what patches may need
way to the verify whether the POI is accurate is verify the reinstalling.
inquiry on a current production vehicle.
Why are some features different or missing
Answers to these and other questions regarding
coverage can be found in these locations: compared to my previous Honda vehicle?
• In the Frequently Asked Questions section of the Hardware and software continually go through updates
navigation system manual. and improvements. Features may change or disappear
• A t the online DVD order site, by clicking on the FAQs overtim e based on the navigation system development.
link.

No picture is displayed Symptom Troubleshooting (see • Wrong disc installed in the navigation unit
page 23-228) (should be white or possibly gray for
Canada)
• Navigation unit
• Open/short between the audio unit, audio
disc changer, navigation display,
navigation unit, rear controller and screen,
or the XM receiver on the GA-Net bus
• Navigation display
• Harness/fuses/switches
Picture has lines/rolls/other Symptom Troubleshooting (see • Wrong disc installed in navigation unit
issues or is an odd color ('07 page 23-230) (should be white or possibly gray for
model) Canada)
• Navigation unit
Picture has Iines/rolIs/other Symptom Troubleshooting (see • Wrong disc installed in navigation unit
issues or is an odd color page 23-232) (should be white or possibly gray for
('08-10 models) Canada)
• Navigation unit
• Har ness/fuses/switch es
Navigation unit w ill not eject Symptom Troubleshooting (see • Navigation unit
or accept the navigation DVD page 23-234) • The wrong color DVD or version is installed.
• The DVD is damaged or dirty.
Navigation display buttons do Symptom Troubleshooting (see • Navigation display
not work or respond properly page 23-235) • The wrong color DVD or version is installed.
GPS icon is white or not Symptom Troubleshooting (see • Navigation unit
shown page 23-244) • GPS antenna/cable
• The wrong color DVD or version is installed.
• Aftermarket accessories mounted near or
above the GPS antenna
Voice guidance cannot be Symptom Troubleshooting (see • Navigation unit
heard, is broken up, or there is page 23-244) • Audio unit
static ('07 model) • Harness/fuses/switches
• The DVD is damaged or dirty
Voice guidance cannot be Symptom Troubleshooting (see • Navigation unit
heard, is broken up, or there is page 23-246) • Audio unit
static ('08-10 models) • Harness/fuses/switches
• The DVD is damaged or dirty
Voice control does not Symptom Troubleshooting (see • Navigation unit
work/respond ('07 model) page 23-247) • The wrong color DVD or version is installed.
• Microphone/steering buttons
• Ha r ness/fuses/switch es
(cont'd)

Voice control does not Symptom Troubleshooting (see • Navigation unit
work/respond ('08-10 models) page 23-250) • The wrong color DVD or version is installed.
• Microphone/steering buttons
Vehicle position icon Symptom Troubleshooting (see • Navigation unit
constantly leaves road, moves page 23-271) • GPS antenna/cable
erratically, or is displayed very • PCM (speed and fuel pulse)
far from actual vehicle position • Harness/fuses/switches
• Aftermarket accessories mounted near or
above the GPS antenna
DVD read error messages Symptom Troubleshooting (see • Navigation unit
page 23-254) • The wrong color DVD or version is installed.
Various error messages See error message table (see
(except DVD read error) page 23-293)
System always comes up in Symptom Troubleshooting (see Software remedy, do not replace hardware
in-line diagnostic mode page 23-254)
Navigation cannot control Symptom Troubleshooting (see • Check for B-CAN DTCs
HVAC by voice command ('07 page 23-255) • Navigation display
model) • The wrong color DVD or version is installed.
Navigation cannot control Symptom Troubleshooting (see • Check for B-CAN DTCs
HVAC by voice command page 23-257) • Navigation display
('08-10 models) • The wrong color DVD or version is installed.
Display day/night mode does Symptom Troubleshooting (see • Check for B-CAN DTCs
not work or does not work page 23-260) • Dash brightness knob setting for headlights
properly on and for headlight off (two different
settings)
• The wrong color DVD or version is installed.
• Gauge control module (CAN)
• Climate control unit
System locks up or freezes Symptom Troubleshooting (see • Navigation unit
constantly page 23-261) • The wrong color DVD or version is installed.
Vehicle icon constantly spins Symptom Troubleshooting (see Navigation unit (Yaw rate sensor)
when moving or parked page 23-261)
Vehicle icon moves by itself Symptom Troubleshooting (see Navigation unit
page 23-262)
Navigation display stays on Symptom Troubleshooting (see • Harness/fuses/switches
with ignition switch in LOCK page 23-262) • Aftermarket accessory or cell phone
(0) installed
Navigation cannot control Symptom Troubleshooting (see • Navigation display
audio/disc/rear entertainment page 23-263) • The wrong color DVD or version is installed.
• Audio unit
Navigation cannot control XM Symptom Troubleshooting (see • Navigation display
radio page 23-264) • The wrong color DVD or version is installed.
• Harness
Navigation does not call using Symptom troubleshooting (see The wrong colored DVD or version is installed
the HFL page 23-264)
Navigation frequently asks for Symptom Troubleshooting (see • Navigation unit
anti-theft code and/or needs page 23-266) • Harness/fuses/switches/unit grounds
GPS initialization
CDs cannot be inserted and/or • Symptom Troubleshooting (see • Navigation display (inoperative or w ill not
ejected from the CD changer page 23-267) pivot)
• Audio System Troubleshooting • Audio disc changer
• Harness
• Jammed disc in the audio disc changer
Display can be opened and/or Symptom Troubleshooting (see • Navigation display
closed even when a CD is page 23-268) • Audio disc changer
being inserted or ejected • Harness
OPEN/CLOSE function of the Symptom Troubleshooting (see @Navigation display
display does not work page 23-269) • Audio disc changer
• Harness
Navigation display w ill not Symptom Troubleshooting (see • Navigation display
close page 23-269) • Audio disc changer
• Harness
Navigation display does not Symptom Troubleshooting (see • Navigation display
open or opens part way page 23-270) • Audio disc changer
• Harness
Rearview camera image does Symptom Troubleshooting (see • Software for the latest up-dates
not come on or work properly page 23-272) • Wrong disc installed in navigation unit
(should be white or possibly gray for
Canada)
• Dirty camera lens
The Acura Globe Screen (not System diagnostic mode, version • Wrong navigation unit or disc installed in
the Honda Globe Screen) mode (see page 23-292) the vehicle.
appears every time the vehicle • Check the unit model number in the system
is started diagnostic mode, version mode, (should be
SHJA)
• Check the disc in the navigation unit (should
be white or possibly gray for Canada)
Time is not correct Symptom Troubleshooting (see • The wrong colored DVD or version is
page 23-275) installed.
• Navigation unit
Sym ptom Diagnostic procedure Also check for

Some set-up and information Customer did not select OK from
functions of the navigation Disclaimer screen.
system are grayed-out and do
not w ork
Previous Destinations button Enter a destination, and allow the See owner's manual for details
is dim and not selectable in the system to route to it. After the trip,
Enter destination by screen the Previous Destinations button
(grayed-out) w ill be selectable.
Today's Destinations button is The customer has not entered a See owner's manual for details
dim and not selectable in the group of locations fo r Today's
Enter destination by screen Destinations. This is normal. The
(grayed-out) button is only selectable if the
customer is using this function.
The navigation anti-theft code See anti-theft feature (see page
card is lost or missing 23-180)
The vehicle icon lags behind See self-inertial navigation • Aftermarket accessories connected to the
when the vehicle turns lim itations (see page 23-180) system
• GPS antenna/cable
Navigation screen is darker See LCD unit lim itations
than normal or takes tim e to (see page 23-181)
brighten when it is cold
The navigation clock is off by 1 See service precautions (see page • Perform map matching (see page 23-183)
to 3 hours after replacing the 23-182) • GPS antenna/cable
navigation unit • Check and adjust the clock settings
OK cannot be selected at the Refer to troubleshooting for • The DVD is scratched or dirty
disclaimer screen and the navigation display buttons do not • The wrong colored DVD or version is
screen turns black work or respond properly (see installed
page 23-235)
A new navigation DVD is See obtaining a navigation DVD
needed (see page 23-183)
The DVD is scratched or dirty See DVD Handling and Cleaning Navigation unit damaging discs
(see page 23-184)
The w rong DVD was installed See Precaution on customer • Install the correct version DVD
and now the system does not navigation DVD "Sneak Previews" • Check any official Honda service website
function properly (see page 23-186) for more service information about the
navigation system
A POI cannot be found See How to answer customer The DVD is scratched or dirty
questions about navigation
coverage (see page 23-186)
A specific city cannot be found See How to answer customer The DVD is scratched or dirty
questions about navigation
coverage (see page 23-186)
The map w ill not display the North American coverage is The wrong colored DVD or version is installed
Southern portion of the U.S. or different for U.S./Canada markets.
the Northern parts of Canada See the version diagnostic screen
(see page 23-292) for details on
coverage differences
Error messages are displayed See Error Message table (see
page 23-293)
System Description
Overview
The navigation system is a highly sophisticated, hybrid locating system.
The navigation unit uses global positioning system (GPS) satellite signals, internal yaw and vehicle speed inputs, and a
map database to show where the vehicle is and to help guide you to a desired destination.
The navigation unit's GPS receiver receives signals from the GPS, a network of 24 satellites in orbit around the earth. By
receiving signals from several of these satellites, the navigation system can determine the latitude, longitude, and
elevation of the vehicle.
Signals from the system's yaw rate sensor (inside the navigation unit) detects turns, and the PCM vehicle speed pulse
(VSP) and reverse signal enable the system to keep track of the vehicle's speed and direction of travel. The advantage of
this hybrid system is that the system can track your position if either the GPS signal or the vehicle speed signal is
missing. For instance, when in a tunnel (no GPS), the speed signal is used to update your position on the map.
Alternately, while the vehicle is being transported on a ferry, GPS signals can show the vehicle position on the map as it
crosses the water.
The navigation system uses the location, direction, and speed information to display the appropriate map and calculate
a route to the destination entered. As you drive to a destination, the system provides both visual and audio guidance.
Audio guidance is sent to the audio unit, and an RGB graphics color signal is sent to the navigation display.
This navigation system also has voice recognition that allows voice control of most of the navigation, audio, and climate
control functions. The navigation voice control switches (navigation TALK and navigation BACK buttons on the steering
wheel) activate the voice control system. The microphone on the ceiling receives your voice commands. For more
information on this feature, consult the navigation user's guide.
The illumination signal from the gauge control module is used by the navigation unit to automatically switch the display
mode between the Night and Day display modes. When the taillights or headlights are on and the dash light dimmer
control is set to Full bright, the Night display mode is overridden. This allows a Day mode navigation display with the
headlights ON.
NOTE: The gauge has two different brightness level settings, one for DAY (headlights off) and one for NIGHT (headlights
on). When the night setting is set to MAX, and you adjust the DAY setting, it may appear that the night setting doesn't
work when turning the headlights on and off.
When the navigation system is giving voice guidance commands, the front speakers are muted. When the navigation
voice control system is used (navigation TALK button pressed), all of the speakers are muted except the rear
entertainment system (RES) headphones.
The GA-Net II bus passes information back and forth between the navigation display, the navigation unit, the climate
control unit, and the audio system components. The information passed on this bus are touch button commands, audio
muting signal, audio (radio, XM and RES), and climate control settings when commanded by voice control.
The rearview camera image is shown on the display when in reverse. Camera brightness is adjustable by touching the
ZOOM in, ZOOM out button while viewing the camera image.
The clock on the navigation display is set and maintained by the navigation unit. The time is automatically adjusted for
daylight savings, and time zone changes while driving. The tim e settings can be adjusted in setup.
Additional information is available about the navigation components following the System Diagram. A glossary of
terms that are used throughout this section follows the detailed information.
The navigation system can download the cellular phone book from the HFL system and call any number from the book.
The navigation system senses the status of a phone that is paired to the HFL system.
System Diagram ('07 model and '08-09 models without HFL)
FRONT SPEAKERS
(Navigation voice output)
(Without premium
ILLUMINATION audio system)
(For buttons) DVD PLAYER UNIT
STEREO AMPLIFIER Audio/ UART

(With Premium Video
audio system)
OPEN/EJECT
NAVIGATION DISPLAY
AUDIO DISC
CHANGER AUDIO UNIT
CLOCK (Set by navi) —•
’ -" V
A V a V A V A VA V®*0
fe-
"
— A
v
A
V
A
V
A
V
A ^
GA-NET BUS GA-NET BUS
Audio/ GA-NET
Graphic GA-NET Video fc> BUS
color BUS
signal
XM ANTENNA XM audio WIRELESS REAR

HEADPHONES CONTROLLER and SCREEN
XM RECEIVER
MICROPHONE
Voice NAVI
GA-NET BUS recognition voice
OUT
NAVIGATION UNIT
PC CARD SLOT
(Save user information and
factory use only)
B-CAN GAUGE CONTROL

UART MODULE
(ILLUMI cancel)
VOICE CONTROL PCM CLIMATE

REARVIEW REVERSE SWITCH (TALK& (Vehicle speed GPS ANTENNA
CAMERA SIGNAL CONTROL UNIT
BACK buttons) signal)
FRONT SPEAKERS
(Navigation voice output)
(Without Premium
ILLUMINATION audio system) DVD PLAYER UNIT
(For buttons)
STEREO AMPLIFIER Audio/

Video UART
(With Premium
audio system)
CD
OPEN/EJECT
NAVIGATION DISPLAY
AUDIO DISC
CHANGER AUDIO UNIT
CLOCK (Set by navi) v V V V W ■w V W V V
GA-NET BUS GA-NET BUS
Audio/ < GA-NET

Graphic GA-NET Video > BUS
color BUS
signal
(RGB)
XM ANTENNA XM audio WIRELESS REAR

HEADPHONES CONTROLLER and SCREEN
HFL
voice
OUT
Bluetooth
APPROVED □
BLUETOOTH HANDSFREELINK
ENABLED CONTROL UNIT
CELL PHONE
GA-NET BUS
NAVI/HFL
MICROPHONE
T NAVI
Voice voice
recognition OUT
NAVIGATION UNIT
PC CARD SLOT
(Save user information
and factory use only)
B-CAN GAUGE CONTROL

MODULE
(ILLUMI cancel)
VOICE CONTROL PCM CLIMATE

REARVIEW REVERSE SWITCH (TALK & (Vehicle speed GPS ANTENNA
CAMERA SIGNAL CONTROL UNIT
BACK buttons) signal)
GA-Net Bus Configuration

The GA-Net bus passes audio and navigation commands throughout the navigation and audio components.
These commands include navigation touch screen and hard button signals, audio/XM selections by voice, and XM
station and music title names. Because the entire bus is daisy chained between components (see diagram), any open or
short in the GA-Net bus harness w ill cause any or all of these functions to become inoperative. The addition of any
factory audio accessory must maintain the continuity of the GA-Net bus by installing the Y cable included with the
accessory kit.
Rear Controller
and Screen (RES)
Audio Unit
Audio Disc
Changer
Accessory
(Music link, CD changer, etc.)
Navigation a a >
Display
Navigation
Unit
XM Receiver
Navigation Function
The navigation system is composed of the navigation unit, the PCM (vehicle speed signal), the GPS antenna,
microphone, voice control switch, audio unit, climate control unit, and the navigation display.
Function Diagram
NAVI/HFL
STEERING WHEEL HANDFREELINK
BUTTONS CONTROL UNIT MICROPHONE
NAVIGATION AUDIO DISC

NAVIGATI0NJJN1J DISPLAY CHANGER AUDIO UNIT
GPS ANTENNA GPS RECEIVER

Reception of I Detection
radio wave —!_**. of vehicle — ► GPS tuning
from satellite 1 position
1
Vehicle Speed Pulse

The vehicle speed pulse is sent by the PCM. The PCM receives a signal from the countershaft speed sensor, then it
processes the signal and transmits it to the speedometer and other systems.
N A V I G A T IO N U N I T
PCM ' Sensor power
■v w - DISTANCE
DETECTION
CIRCUIT
Yaw Rate Sensor

The yaw rate sensor (located in the navigation unit) detects the direction change (angular speed) of the vehicle. The
sensor is an oscillation gyro built into the navigation unit.
Sensor Element Structure
The sensor element is shaped like a tuning fork, and it consists of the piezoelectric parts, the metal block, and the
support pin. There are four piezoelectric parts: The one part to drive the oscillators, the one part to m onitor and maintain
the oscillation at a regular frequency, and the tw o parts to detect angular velocity. The two oscillators, which have a
90-degree tw ist in the center, are connected at the bottom by the metal block and supported by the support pin. A
detection piezoelectric part is attached to the top of each oscillator. The driving piezoelectric part is attached to the
bottom of one oscillator, and the m onitoring piezoelectric part is attached to the bottom of the other oscillator.
Oscillation Gyro Principles
The piezoelectric parts have electric/mechanical transfer characteristics. They bend vertically when voltage is applied to
both sides of the parts, and voltage is generated between both sides of the piezoelectric parts when they are bent by an
external force. The oscillation gyro functions by utilizing this characteristic of the piezoelectric parts and Coriolis force.
(Coriolis force deflects moving objects as a result of the earth's rotation.) In the oscillation gyro, this force moves the
sensor element when angular velocity is applied.
Operation
1. The driving piezoelectric part oscillates the oscillator by repeatedly bending and returning when an AC voltage of 6
kHz is applied to the part, the monitoring-side oscillator resonates because it is connected to the driving-side
oscillator by the metal block.
2. The monitoring piezoelectric part bends in proportion to the oscillation and outputs voltage (the monitor signal). The
navigation unit control circuit controls the drive signal to stabilize the monitor signal.
3. When the vehicle is stopped, the detecting piezoelectric parts oscillate right and left w ith the oscillators, but no signal
is output because the parts are not bent (no angular force).
4. When the vehicle turns to the right, the sensor element moves in a circular motion with the right oscillator bending
forward and the left oscillator bending rearward. The amount of forward/rearward bend varies according to the
angular velocity of the vehicle.
5. The detecting piezoelectric parts output voltage (the yaw rate signal) according to the amount of bend. The amount of
vehicle direction change is determined by measuring this voltage.
Enlarged view of sensor element Sensor element top view
DETECTING PIEZOELECTRIC
PARTS
SUPPORT PIN OSCILLATORS Turn to

right
Coriolis force
Oscillation - 3— ► Oscillation
DRIVING
PIEZOELECTRIC
PART
Bend
MONITORING PIEZOELECTRIC
METAL BLOCK PART
Global Posi tioning System (GPS)
The global positioning system (GPS) enables the navigation system to determine the current position of the vehicle by
using the signals transmitted from the satellites in orbit around the earth. The satellites transm it the satellite
identification signal, orbit information, transmission time signal, and other information. When the GPS receiver receives
a signal from four or more satellites simultaneously, it calculates the current position of the vehicle based on the
distance to each satellite and the satellite's position in its respective orbit.
Position detection Image with GPS satellite
Precision of GPS
The precision of the GPS varies according to the number o f satelIites from which signals are received and the view of the
sky. The accuracy is indicated by the color and shape of the GPS icon shown on the display.
GPS ICON NUMBER OF CONDITION DESCRIPTION

COLOR SATELLITES
No GPS icon None Faulty reception The GPS can't be utilized due to a faulty GPS
receiver, open in the wire, or other fault or
interference.
2 or less Impossible to detect vehicle GPS function is normal. The satellite signals
position received by the GPS are too few to detect the
vehicle position.
White GPS icon 3 Vehicle position detectable in The longitude and latitude of the vehicle
2 dimensions position can be detected. (Less precise than
detection in three dimensions)
Green GPS icon 4 or more Vehicle position detectable in The longitude, latitude and the altitude of the
3 dimensions (elevation vehicle position can be detected. (More
displayed) precise than detection in two dimensions)
GPS Antenna
The GPS antenna amplifies and transmits the signals received from the satellites to the GPS receiver.
GPS Receiver and clock
The GPS receiver is built into the navigation unit. It calculates the vehicle position by receiving the signal from the GPS
antenna. The current time, vehicle position, and signal reception condition is transmitted from the GPS receiver to the
navigation unit to adjust vehicle position and the clock in the navigation display.
(cont'd)
Navigation U nit
The navigation unit calculates the vehicle position and guides you to the destination. The unit performs map matching
correction, GPS correction, and distance tuning. It also controls the menu functions, the DVD-ROM drive, and the
back-up camera, and interprets voice commands. With control of all these items, the navigation unit makes the
navigation picture signal, then it transmits the signal to the navigation display and audio driving instructions to the
audio unit.
Calculation of Vehicle Position
The navigation unit calculates the vehicle position (the driving direction and the current position) by receiving the
directional change signals from the yaw rate sensor and the travel distance signals from the PCMs vehicle speed pulse
(VSP) signal.
Map Matching Tuning
The map matching tuning is accomplished by indicating the vehicle position on the roads on the map. The map data
transmitted from the DVD-ROM is checked against the vehicle position data, and the vehicle position is indicated on the
nearest road. Map matching tuning does not occur when the vehicle travels on a road not shown on the map, or when
the vehicle position is far away from a road on the map.
GPS Tuning
The GPS tuning is accomplished by indicating the vehicle position as the GPS's vehicle position. The navigation unit
compares its calculated vehicle position data w ith the GPS vehicle position data. If there is large difference between the
tw o, the indicated vehicle position is adjusted to the GPS vehicle position.
Distance Tuning
The distance tuning reduces the difference between the travel distance signal from the VSP and the distance data on the
map. The navigation unit compares its calculated vehicle position data with the GPS vehicle position data. The
navigation unit then decreases the tuning value when the vehicle position is always ahead of the GPS vehicle position,
and it increases the tuning value when the vehicle position is always behind the GPS vehicle position.
Route Guidance
The navigation unit can calculate different routes to a selected destination. You have five options:
• Direct Route — Calculate a route that is the most direct.
• Easy Route — Calculate a route that minimizes the num ber of turns needed.
• Minimize Freeways — Calculate a route that avoids freeway travel. If that is not possible, keep the amount of freeway
travel to a minimum.
• Minimize Toll Roads — Calculate a route that avoids, or minimizes travel on toll roads.
• Maximize Freeways — Calculate a route that uses freeways as much as possible.
Audio Guidance
The navigation unit transm its audio driving instructions before entering an intersection or passing a junction.
The audio instructions come through the audio unit to the front speakers.
NOTE: The front speakers are muted whenever the navigation system is giving guidance commands, and all of the
speakers are muted when the voice control system is being used.
DVD-ROM
The DVD includes:
• MAP Date
• Point of interest (POI)
• Navigation software
POI Data
Business and category information including phone numbers that can be sent to the HFL system to make phone calls.
Solar Angle
The navigation system uses the sun's angle, along w ith the sunlight sensor to control the driver/passenger A/C air flow.
Off Road Tracking (breadcrumbs!
Off road tracking dots that can be followed on the map retrace your route back to a mapped (digitized) road.
Clock and Time Zone
The clock set up allows you to set daylight savings time, auto tim e zone and tim e adjustment.
Audio Unit
The audio unit receives the audio driving instructions from the navigation unit and transmits the instructions through
the front speakers even when the audio system is in use.
Navigation Display
The navigation display uses a liquid crystal display (LCD). The LCD is a 8-inch-diagonal, thin film transistor (TFT), stripe
type with 336,960 picture elements. The color film and fluorescent light are laid out on the back of the liquid crystal film.
The touch sensor on the front of the LCD consists of a touch sensitive resistive membrane with a large number of
possible touch locations. To maintain compatibility with earlier display units, the sensing locations are confined to a
grid of 20 vertical and 10 horizontal touch locations. This produces 200 total sensing zones. The navigation display
transmits the signal from each operation key and the touch switches to the navigation unit over the GA-Net bus.
Microphone
The microphone (on the ceiling, near the front map light) receives voice commands and transmits them to the
navigation unit or the HFL unit for interpretation.
Navigation TALK Button
Activates the voice control system in the navigation unit to accept voice commands.
Navigation BACK Button

Returns the display to the previous screen (similar function as the CANCEL button).
*07 model and '08-09 models *08-10 models with HFL

without HFL
Glossary
The following is a glossary of terms pertaining to the Voice Recognition Navigation System.
Item Definition
Address Book The HFL system can im port a copy of the phone book from and approved HFL
compatible phone and can display the imported phone book on the navigation
screen as the address book. See the Owner's Manual for more information.
B-CAN Body CAN Bus (see CAN)
Breadcrumbs (White dots) Off road tracking dots that can be followed on the map to retrace your route back to
a mapped (digitized) road. This function can be turned on/off in Setup screen 1.
CAN Controller Area Network. This communication network allows processors in the
vehicle to send/receive information. The fuel pulses used by the MID trip computer
are received from the PCM using the F-CAN (Fast Controller Area Network) bus.
CPU Central Processing Unit. The main device w ithin the navigation unit that
coordinates the rest of the electronic functions.
CSS Output shaft (Countershaft) Speed Signal. This sensor reads the output shaft speed
at the transmission and provides a speed pulse to the PCM.
Database This consists of the Map data, and the POI (Points Of Interest) data stored on the
DVD.
DBW Drive By Wire. Allows electrical control of the throttle w ithout the need of a
mechanical linkage.
DCA Detailed Coverage Area. Main metropolitan areas in the Lower 48 states, and
Canada are mapped to this level. See the Navigation system manual for a list of
these areas.
DTC Diagnostic Trouble Codes. Use the HDS tablet to obtain, and troubleshoot the
cause of these codes.
Dead Reckoning The use of the speed signal, and yaw rate sensor to position the vehicle on the map
even when tall buildings, or driving in a tunnel obscures the GPS signal.
Digitized Road A road that appears on the navigation screen. The road name w ill appear at the
bottom of the navigation screen. Ifthe user drives off-road the navigation system
displays Not on a digitized road, and after 1/2 mile, the breadcrumbs appear.
Disclaimer Screen Screen containing cautionary information. It is meant to be read carefully, and
acknowledged by the customer when using the navigation system.
DVD or Digital Versatile Disk. The navigation program and database resides on this disc.
DVD-ROM See the Navigation System Manual for information on how to order a replacement
or an update navigation DVD.
ECM Engine Control Module. Typically referred to as the ECM.
FAQ Frequency Asked Questions. See the Navigation System Manual for a list of the
customer FAQs, and troubleshooting information.
F-CAN Fast CAN Bus (see CAN)
GA-Net The GA-Net allows the audio unit to communicate with all the audio and navigation
components in a vehicle. If there is an open in the GA-Net, components or the entire
audio and navigation system may appear inoperative.
GPS Global Positioning System. A network of 24 satellites in orbit around the earth. The
navigation system can simultaneously receive signals from up to 12 satellites to
accurately position the vehicle on the map.
Item Definition
HDS Honda Diagnostic System. A hand held tablet PC used for in diagnosing vehicle
problems. This device can be used to obtain DTC codes for diagnosis of the
navigation system and CAN related problems.
HFL HandsFreeLink uses Bluetooth technology as a wireless link between it and an
approved Bluetooth compatible cell phone. See the vehicle Owner's Manual or
Quick Start Guide for more information.
H/U Head Unit. The navigation system display assembly in the dash.
Initialization This refers to the period needed to re-acquire the GPS satellite orbital information
whenever the navigation system power has been disconnected. This can take from
10 to 45 minutes.
LCD Liquid Crystal Display (the navigation screen)
Map Matching The received GPS information allows the navigation system to position the vehicle
on the map. Map matching has occurred if the map screen displays the current
street name in the bottom-shaded area.
Mic Abbreviation for the microphone used for receiving voice commands. It is located
nearthe map light in the ceiling. The active noise cancellation unit may also use it to
check its turning.
MID Multi-Information Display
MW Maneuver Window. While on-route to a destination, this window displays
information about the next maneuver.
Navi Abbreviation for the Navigation System.
Off-Road Tracking See Breadcrumbs
Off Route This occurs when the user leaves mapped roads. Off-road tracking dots
(breadcrumbs) are displayed if the option is enabled in the setup menu. The user
can use them to return to a mapped road. The bottom of the navigation screen
displays Not on a digitized road
Outlying Areas These are rural areas that typically have only their main roads mapped. All other
roads are shown in light brown for reference only, since they have not been
verified.
Paired Linking your cell phone to the HFL
PC Card Slot The PC card (PCMCIA, type II) slot is for factory use only. Make sure that the sliding
door is closed at all items, if opened, an error message is displayed on the screen.
PCM Powertrain Control Module. This unit supplies the navigation system speed signal,
and charge signal via the F-CAN network. Also refered to as ECM.
PCMCIA A computer industry defined term referring to the PC Card slot standard.
Item Definition
PIN Personal Identification Number, a random 4 digit number created by the customer
to protect personal information.
POI Point Of Interest. These are the businesses, schools, etc. found under the Places
option on the main menu.
Polygon Colored areas on the map screen denoting parks, schools, etc. See the Navigation
System Manual, Driving to Your Destination, for a list of the assigned colors.
QWERTY Keyboard layout resembling the typew riter keys. The keyboard layout can be
changed to an alphabetical layout in the Setup mode.
SCS service connector The service check signal 2-pin connector used to put the navigation system into the
diagnostic mode.
Security Code Code needed to activate the navigation system. You can get the security code from
the interactive network (iN) by entering the navigation unit serial number. You can
find the serial number on the diagnostic screens (Unit Check, Navi ECU) or on the
underside of the navigation u n it
Touch Screen Buttons or Touch Navigation display panel has 2 layers of clear film on the screen panel. If you touch
Sensor the screen panel, the film layers engage and the display unit detects the touch
p o in t
Tuning A continual update of internal navigation system scaling factors. See the individual
sensor tuning discussions under either System Description, or System Diagnostic
Mode (see page 23-276).
Unverified Streets These streets have not been verified for turn restrictions, one-way, etc. They appear
light brown on the map. You can enter address destinations in these areas, but
depending on your Unverified Routing choice in setup, voice guidance may end at
the last verified street closest to your destination.
USB Jack Allows the customers to play data such as input audio recording from portable
audio devices (such as i-Pod) or data from USB flash memory.
Verified Streets These streets consist of the detailed metropolitan coverage areas, and all other
inter-town connection roads. These roads are shown in black on the map.
VP Vehicle Position. When in map mode, this circular icon shows the vehicle position
on the map. Touch this icon to show the latitude, longitude, and elevation of your
current position.
VR Voice Recognition. This allows voice control of many of the navigation functions.
The hardware consists of the microphone, voice control switch (navigation
Talk/navigation Back buttons), and the front speakers. See the overview for more
information.
VSP Vehicle Speed Pulse. This pulse signal coming from the PCM (via the CSS) is used
to update the Vehicle position on the map. These pulses do not indicate direction
(forward or backward). When in reverse, the navigation receives a signal and
directs the VP to move backwards on the map.
XM This device receives information from the XM satellites and passes XM audio
information to the audio u n it In addition, traffic information is sent to the
navigation unit (see AcuraLink).
Yaw Sensor This device is located in the navigation unit and senses the side-to-side twisting
force generated when the vehicle turns. See a detailed description of how this
sensor works.
(cont'd)
Diagnostic Function Diagram

This diagram shows the diagnostic slice of the System Function Diagram. It has the diagnostic features of the navigation
system starting atthe center and working outward in layers. The diagnostic starts at Key ON, and then displays the
Diagnostic Main Menu (Select Diagnosis items) after:
The diagram shows the available menu choices starting at the button left and moving clockwise.
You w ill find a detailed explanation of each feature on the given page numbers.
In most cases, do not clear or change settings in any diagnostic screen unless instructed to do so in the explanation or
by the factory. If the factory supplies you with a PCMCIA card to place in the PC slot, then the features specified in the
diagram w ith PC card are available.
• Starting the vehicle w ith the SCS connector plugged in to the navigation service check connector (see page 23-294) to
get to the System Links screen, then selecting Return.
• Simultaneously pressing and holding the MENU, MAP/GUIDE, and CANCEL buttons.
NAVIGATION DISPLAY

NAVIGATION UNIT
NAVIGATION UNIT 2 / t 5 6
CONNECTOR E (2P) /
/
8 9 10
X 11 12 13 14
NAVIGATION UNIT
CONNECTOR B (14P)
1 2 / 4 1 2 3 4 5 / / / 9 10
5 6 7 8 11 1 2 1 3 1 4 1 5 / / / / 20
JTL
NAVIGATION UNIT NAVIGATION UNIT
CONNECTOR C (BP) CONNECTOR A (20P)
NAVIGATION UNIT
CONNECTOR D (7P)
XM RECEIVER 14P CONNECTOR NAVIGATION SERVICE AUDIO UNIT CONNECTOR A (20P)

CHECK CONNECTOR
0
1 2 / 6
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
/ 10 11 13 14
/ » / 11 12 13 15 16 17 18 19 2 0
REARVIEW CAMERA
6P CONNECTOR NAVIGATION VOICE
CONTROL SWITCH
n n . F=l
1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5
u u
— l!b dLi—
Terminal side of male terminals Wire side of female terminals
"08-10 models
NAVIGATION DISPLAY
w
E l
1 3 4 5 / 9 10
CM
o
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
NAVIGATION DISPLAY NAVIGATION DISPLAY

NAVIGATION UNIT NAVIGATION UNIT

CONNECTOR D (7P) CONNECTOR F (5P)
NAVIGATION SERVICE AUDIO UNIT CONNECTOR F f20P)

XM RECEIVER 14P CONNECTOR CHECK CONNECTOR
I . ,__r ■_ !
1 2 3/ 5 6 _E=l
1J 2 I 3 4 | 5 | 6 | 7 8 | 9 |lo|
/ / 9 10 11 / 1314 |11|/|13|14|15|16|/1/|19|20
REARVIEW CAMERA HANDSFREELINK CONTROL UNIT

NAVIGATION VOICE CONTROL
6P CONNECTOR 28P CONNECTOR (W ith HFL)
SWITCH SP CONNECTOR
1 I 2 | 3 | / | / 6 | 7 | 8 | / /|11|12|13|14|
& 2 3 4 5a |15|16|/|18|19|20|21|/|/|/|25|26|27|28
1 2 3 4 5 / / / 9 10
11 12 13 1 4 1 5 / / / / 20
Termi nal Wire Terminal Description Voltage Symptom

Number Color Name (about)
A1 WHT R SIG Red color signal 0.2 V AC If open: Red color missing (see RGB
(Red signal) average in Color diagnostic).
RGB color If short to ground: Red color missing (see
diagnostic RGB Color diagnostic).
mode
A2 RED G SIG Green color 0.2 VAC If open: Green color missing (see RGB
(Green signal average in Color diagnostic).
signal) RGB color If short to ground: Green color missing
diagnostic (see RGB Color diagnostic).
mode
A3 GRY* SIG SH Shield for OV If open: No change to display.
(Shield terminals No. 1,2, If short to ground: No change to display.
signal) 11,12,13
A4 RED/BLU AC-SI A/C input signal 0 —battery If open: Voice control does not work for
(A/C Signal voltage HVAC.
input) pulses If short to ground: Voice control does not
work fo r HVAC.
A5 RED/BLK ILL+ Parking light on Lights on = If open: When brightness = Auto, night
(lllumination signal from dash battery mode for the display is inoperative when
positive) and console voltage, lights on.
lights. Lights off = 0 If short to ground: Blows fuse No. 7 (7.5
V A) in the passenger's under-dash
fuse/relay box.
A9 GRY* GA-NET DISP Shield for OV If open: No change to display.
BUS SH display bus If short to ground: No change to display.
(Shield terminals
display bus) No. 10,20
A10 LT BLU GA-NET DISP Data bus (+ ) 0—5 V pulses If open: Navigation buttons, touch screen
BUS+ GA-Net average 2.5 V and XM radio do not work.
(Display bus depends on If short to ground: Navigation buttons
positive) bus traffic and touch screen do not work.
A11 YEL B SIG Blue color signal 0.2 VAC If open: Blue color missing (see RGB
(Blue signal) average in Color diagnostic).
RGB color If short to ground: Blue color missing
mode
A12 BRN C SIG Composite video 0.2 VAC If open: Picture rolls horizontally, colors
(Composite (vertical/horizon average in still visible.
signal) tal) RGB color If short to ground: Picture rolls
Synchronizing diagnostic horizontally, colors still visible.
signal mode
(cont'd)
System Description (co nt'd)
Terminal Wire Terminal Description Voltage Symptom

A13 BLU GND SIG Ground for color OV If open: No change to display.
(Ground signal If short to ground: No change to display.
signal)
A14 YEL/GRN AC-SO A/C output 0 —battery If open: A/C voice control does not work
(A/C Signal signal voltage for HVAC.
output) pulses If short to ground: A/C voice control does
not work for HVAC.
A15 GRN/BLK AC-CK Time set sync 0 —battery If open: A/C voice control does not work.
(A/C Clock signal voltage If short to ground: A/C voice control does
signal) pulses not work.
A20 PUR GA-NET DISP Data bus (—) 0 —5 V pulses If open: Navigation buttons, touch screen
BUS- GA-Net normally 2.5 and XM radio do not work.
(Display bus V(depends If short to ground: Hard and touch
negative) on BUS buttons work OK.
traffic)
*: The shielded wires have a heat-shrunk tube insulating the outside of the wire. The color of the insulating tube,
typically black or dark gray, may not match the color of the wire listed on the schematic.
n_ pTI
1 2 3 4 5 / / / 9 10 / / / / / /
17 18 19 20 21 / / / / 26 / / / / / /
Terminal Wire Terminal Descri p t i on Voltage Symptom

A1 WHT R SIG Red color signal 0.2 VAC If open: Red color missing (see RGB
mode
A2 RED G SIG Green color 0.2 VAC If open: Green color missing (see RGB
mode
A3 GRY* SIG SH Shield for OV If open: No change to display.
(Shield termi nals If short to ground: No change to display.
signal) No. 1,2,17,18,19
A4 RED/BLU AC-SI A/C input signal 0 —battery If open: Voice control does not work for
(A/C Signal voltage HVAC.
input) pulses If short to ground: Voice control does not
work for HVAC.
A5 RED/BLK ILL+ Parking light on Lights on = If open: When brightness = Auto, night
(lllumination signal from dash battery mode for the display is inoperative when
positive) and console voltage, lights on.
lights. Lights off = 0 If short to ground: Blows fuse No. 7 (7.5
V A) in the passenger's under-dash
fuse/relay box.
(Shield terminals
display bus) No. 10,26
A10 LT BLU GA-NET DISP Data bus ( + ) 0—5 V pulses If open: Navigation buttons, touch screen
BUS+ GA-Net average 2.5 V and XM radio do not work.
(Display bus depends on If short to ground: Navigation buttons
positive) bus traffic and touch screen do not work.
A17 YEL B SIG Blue color signal 0.2 VAC If open: Blue color missing (see RGB
(Blue signal) average in Color diagnostic).
RGB color If short to ground: Blue color missing
mode
(Composite (vertical/horizon average in still visible.
signal) tal) RGB color If short to ground: Picture rolls
Synchronizing diagnostic horizontally, colors still visible.
signal mode
(cont'd)

signal)
A20 YEL/GRN AC-SO A/C output 0 —battery If open: A/C voice control does not work
(A/C Signal signal voltage for HVAC.
output) pulses If short to ground: A/C voice control does
not work for HVAC.
A21 GRN/BLK AC-CK Time set sync 0 —battery If open: A/C voice control does not work
(A/C Clock signal voltage for HVAC.
signal) pulses If short to ground: A/C voice control does
not work for HVAC.
A26 PUR GA-NET DISP Data bus (—) 0 —5 V pulses If open: Navigation buttons, touch screen
BUS— GA-Net normally 2.5 and XM radio do not work.
(Display bus V (depends If short to ground: Hard and touch
negative) on BUS buttons work OK.
traffic)
typically black or dark gray, may not match the color o f the wire listed on the schematic.
c
CM
/ / p / 5 6
CD
00
/ 10 X 11 12 13 14

B2 LTBLU GA-NET Data bus (+ ) 0—5 V pulses If open: XM radio navigation buttons,
ECU2BUS+ GA-Net average 2.5 V and touch screen does not work.
depends on If short to ground: XM radio on the navi
bus traffic screen does not work.
B5 BRN R G L+ Left audio signal Audio signal If open: If voice activated, radio speakers
(Route of voice 0.004-0.04 V buzz; if voice off, no effect.
guidance guidance, and If short to ground: If voice activated,
voice left Voice radio speakers buzz; if voice off, no effect.
positive) Recognition (VR)
prompts
B6 BLU M ICSIG + Microphone 4 -5 V If open: No microphone signal shown in
(Mic signal output signal (with diagnostic screens: Navi System Link
positive) positive navigation and Functional Setup Mic Level.
TALK button If short to ground: No microphone signal
pressed) shown in diagnostic screens: Navi
System Link and Functional Setup Mic
Level.
B8 PUR GA-NET Data bus (—) 0—5 V pulses If open: XM radio navigation buttons,
ECU2BUS— GA-Net average 2.5 V and touch screen does not work.
bus traffic screen does not work.
B9 WHT* GA-NET Shield for OV If open: No effect on XM radio.
ECU2BUS terminals No. 2,8 If short to ground: No effect on XM radio.
SH

B10 GRY STRG SW Steering wheel 4 —5 V If open: Steering wheel navigation TALK,
(Steering switch output (Navigation and navigation BACK switch/buttons do
wheel TALK button not work.
switches) pressed) If short to ground: Steering wheel
2 .5 -3 V navigation TALK, and navigation BACK
(Navigation buttons do not work.
BACK button
pressed)
B11 GRY* RG SH GND Shield for OV If open: No effect on voice output.
(Shield route terminals If short to ground: No effect on voice
guidance) No. 5,12 output.
B12 YEL RGGND Ground fo r voice OV If open: No effect on voice output.
(Ground guidance, and If short to ground: No effect on voice
routs Voice output.
guidance) Recognition (VR)
prompts
B13 GRY* MIC SH Shield for OV If open: No effect on voice recognition.
(Shield mic) terminals No. 6,14 If short to ground: No effect on voice
recognition.
B14 PNK MIC GND Ground for OV If open: No microphone signal shown in
(Ground mic) microphone diagnostics: Navi System Link and
signal Functional Setup Mic Level.
If short to ground: No effect on voice
recognition.
typically black or dark gray, may not match the color of the w ire listed on the schematic.
7 2 / / / / 7 8
/ 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

B2 LT BLU GA-NET Data bus ( + ) 0—5 V pulses If open: XM radio navigation buttons,
ECU2BUS+ GA-Net average 2.5 V and touch screen do not work.
bus traffic screen navigation buttons, and touch
screen do not work.
B7 BRN RG L + Left audio signal Audio signal If open: If voice activated, radio speakers
(Route of voice 0.004-0.04 V buzz; if voice off, no effect.
guidance guidance, and If short to ground: If voice activated,
voice left Voice radio speakers buzz; if voice off, no effect.
positive) Recognition (VR)
prompts
B8 BLU MICSIG + Microphone 4 —5 V If open: No microphone signal shown in
(Mic signal output signal (with diagnostic screens: Navi System Link
positive) positive navigation and Functional Setup Mic Level.
TALK button If short to ground: No microphone signal
pressed) shown in diagnostic screens: Navi
System Link and Functional Setup Mic
Level.
B10 PUR GA-NET Data bus ( —) 0—5 V pulses If open: XM radio navigation buttons,
ECU2BUS - GA-Net average 2.5 V and touch screen do not work.
bus traffic screen navigation buttons, and touch
screen do not work.
B11 WHT* GA-NET Shield for OV If open: No effect on navigation or XM
ECU2 BUS terminals No. 2 ,10 radio.
SH If short to ground: No effect on
navigation or XM radio.
(cont'd)

B12 GRY STRG SW Steering wheel 4 -5 V If open: Steering wheel navigation TALK,
(Steering switch output (Navigation and navigation BACK switch/buttons do
wheel TALK button not work.
switches) pressed) If short to ground: Steering wheel
2 .5 -3 V navigation TALK, and navigation BACK
(Navigation buttons do not work.
BACK button
pressed)
B13 GRY* RG SH GND Shield for OV If open: No effect on voice output.
(Shield route terminals If short to ground: No effect on voice
guidance) No. 7,14 output.
B14 YEL RGGND Ground for voice OV If open: No effect on voice output.
(Ground guidance, and If short to ground: No effect on voice
routs Voice output.
guidance) Recognition (VR)
prompts
B15 GRY* MIC SIG SH Shield for OV If open: No effect on voice recognition.
(Shield mic) terminals No. 8,16 If short to ground: No effect on voice
recognition.
B16 PNK MIC SIG - Ground for OV If open: No microphone signal shown in
(Ground mic) microphone diagnostics: Navi System Link and
signal Functional Setup Mic Level.
If short to ground: No effect on voice
recognition.
typically black or dark gray, may not match the color of the w ire listed on the schematic.
1 2 / 4
5 6 7 8
Navigation unit connector C (8P) ('08-10 models)
r1 n
12 / 4
5 6 7 8


C1 WHT/RED +B Continuous Battery If open: Display picture goes out (display
( + B Power power source voltage back light still on).
source) NOTE: System will reboot to enter code
screen.
If short to ground: Blows fuse No. 7 (7.5
A) in the driver's under-dash fuse/relay
box.
C2 YEL/RED ACC Power source for Battery If open: Display picture goes out (display
(Accessory) accessories voltage at back light still on).
ACCESSORY NOTE: When re-connected the system
(I) w ill reboot to enter code screen.
If short to ground: Blows fuse No. 32 (10
box.
C4 BLK GND Ground for OV If open: No effect on system.
(Ground) navigation unit If short to ground: No effect on system.
C5 GRN BACK LT Reverse signal In reverse, If open: Navigation never sees the
(Back light) of select lever battery reverse signal and rearview camera does
from Multiplex voltage: not come on when in reverse.
Integrated Otherwise 0 Diagnostic screen Car Status, Back = 0.
Control Unit V If short to ground: Blows fuse No. 21 (7.5
box.
C6 BLU/WHT VSP Vehicle speed Pulses 0—5 If open: No vehicle speed signal pulse.
(Vehicle pulse signal V: Diagnostic screen Car Status, VSP Navi =
speed pulse) from PCM Average 2.5 0.
V, If short to ground: No vehicle speed
when pulses.
moving Diagnostic screen Car Status, VSP Navi =
0.
C7 GRY DIAG P Service check 5 -6 V If open: No effect on system.
(Diagnostic signal for If short to ground: System goes into
positive) navigation diagnostic mode.
system
C8 GRN/YEL DIAG N Ground for OV If open: No effect on system.
(Diagnostic service check If short to ground: No effect on system.
negative) signal
C p
1 2 / 4 5 6 7
Navigation unit connector D (7P) (*§8-10 models)
1____ — n
1 2 / 4 5 6 7

D1 WHT CAMERA Power source for 7V If open: No rearview camera image.
VCC rearview camera If short to ground: When put into reverse,
(VCC supply) the navigation screen goes black
(backlight still operative).
D2 RED CAMERA Ground for OV If open: No change to rearview camera
GND rearview camera image.
(Ground) If short to ground: No change to rearview
camera image.
D4 YEL*2 VIDEO GND Ground for OV If open: No change to rearview camera
GRN*3 (Ground camera signal image.
camera) If short to ground: No change to rearview
camera image.
D5 BLK VIDEO Video signal for 0.3 V If open: No rearview camera image.
(Video rearview camera If short to ground: When put into reverse,
camera) the navigation screen goes black
(backlight still operative).
D6 GRY*1 CAMERA SH Shield for OV If open: No change to rearview camera
(Shield terminal No. 1 to image.
camera) No. 7 If short to ground: No change to rearview
camera image.
D7 GRN*2 CAMERA Control signal OV If open: No change to rearview camera
YEL*3 ADPT for rearview image.
(Adaptive camera If short to ground: No change to rearview
camera) camera image.
*1: The shielded wires have a heat-shrunk tube insulating the outside of the wire. The color of the insulating tube,
*2: '07 model
*3: ’08-10 models
(cont'd)
Navigation Unit Inputs and Outputs for Connector E

Navigation u nit connector E (2P)
U LT
S -1
M
2

E1 GPS GPS signal 5V If open: GPS icon on screen is white,
(5 V in, GPS system links screen ANT shows NG.
signal out) If short to ground: Same as open.
E2 GPS SH Shield for OV If open: GPS icon on screen is white,
terminal No. 1 system links screen ANT shows NG.
If short to ground: No effect on system.
Navigation Unit Inputs and Outputs for Connector F
Navigation unit connector F (5P) ('08-10 models with HFL)
n n~ - fin
1 2 3 4 5

F1 GRN HFL/NAV Communication 5 V DC Solid red XM icon and/or HFL icon in
COMM3 signal for Navi System Link
(HFL/NAV navigation unit
communica and HFL
tion 3)
F2 BLK HFL/NAV Communication 4.5 V DC Solid red XM icon and/or HFL icon in
COMM4 signal for Navi System Link
communica and HFL
tion 4)
F3 RED HFL/NAV Communication 5 V DC XM icon and/or HFL icon in Navi System
COMM1 signal for Link changes between red and green
communica and HFL
tion 1)
F4 WHT HFL/NAV Communication 4.5 V DC XM icon and/or HFL icon in Navi System
COMM2 signal for Link changes between red and green
communica and HFL
tion 2)
F5 GRY* HFL/NAV Shield for OV
COMM SH terminals No. 1,
(Shield 2 ,3 ,4
HFL/NAV)
Navigation display Inputs and Outputs for Connector A

Navigation display connector A (20P)
CD CD
CM
CD
00
1 4 5
/ 10
CM
O
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
Terminal W ire Term i nal Description Voltage Symptom

A1 WHT/RED +B Continuous Battery If open: Screen completely off (no
(+ B power power source voltage backlight visible).
source) If short to ground: Blows fuse No. 7 (10 A)
in the driver's under-dash fuse/relay box.
A2 YEL/RED ACC Power source for Battery If open: Display and buttons do not work.
(Accessory) accessory voltage at If short to ground: Blows fuse No. 32 (10
ACCESSORY A) in the driver's under-dash fuse/relay
(I) box.
A3 BLU • GA-NET Data bus ( + ) 0 —5 V pulses If open: Navigation buttons and touch
AUDIO BUS1 GA-Net average 2.5 V screen do not work.
+ depends on If short to ground: Navigation buttons,
bus traffic touch screen and XM radio do not work.
A4 GRY* GA-NET Shield for OV If open: No change to display.
AUDIO BUS1 terminals No. 3, If short to ground: No change to display.
SH 13
A5 LT BLU GA-NET DISP Data bus ( + ) 0 —5 V pulses If open: Navigation buttons and touch
BUS + GA-Net average 2.5 V screen do not work.
depends on If short to ground: Navigation buttons,
bus traffic touch screen and XM radio do not work.
A6 GRN SCTY4 Security signal OV If open: The security system w ill set, and
(security 4) to rear screen w ill not trip when screen is removed.
If short to ground: The security system
w ill set, and w ill not trip when screen is
removed.
A8 WHT R SIG Red color signal 0.2 V AC If open: Red color missing (see RGB
mode
A9 RED G SIG Green color 0.2 V AC If open: Green color missing (see RGB
mode
A10 BLK GND Ground for OV If open: No change to display.
(Ground) display unit If short to ground: No change to display.
A11 RED/BLK ILL+ Parking light on Battery If open: When brightness = Auto, night
(lllumination signal from dash voltage if mode for the display is inoperative when
positive) and console lights on: lights on.
lights otherwise 0 V If short to ground: Blows fuse No. 7 (7.5
A) in the passenger's under-dash
fuse/relay box.
A12 RED ILL— Ground for With full If open: When brightness = Auto, night
illumination light dash lights mode for the display is inoperative when
brightness, 0 lights on.
V If short to ground: No change to display.
A13 PNK GA-NET Data bus ( —) 0 —5 V pulses If open: Navigation buttons and touch
AUDIO BUS1 GA-Net average 2.5 V screen do not work.
depends on If short to ground: Hard and touch
bus traffic buttons work OK.
terminals
No. 5,15
A15 PUR GA-NET DISP Data bus (—) 0 —5 V pulses If open: Navigation buttons and touch
BUS- GA-Net average 2.5 V screen do not work.
depends on If short to ground: Hard and touch
bus traffic buttons work OK.
A16 GRN/YEL SCTY5 Security signal OV If open: The security system w ill set, and
(security 5) from audio disc w ill not trip when screen is removed.
changer If short to ground: The security system
w ill set, and w ill not trip when screen is
removed.
signal)
A18 YEL B SIG Blue color signal 0 - 1 VAC If open: Blue color missing (see RGB
(Blue signal) Color diagnostic).
If short to ground: Blue color missing
(see RGB Color diagnostic).
(Composite (vertical/horizon still visible.
signal) tal) If short to ground: Picture rolls
synchronizing horizontally, colors still visible.
signal
A20 GRY* SIGSH Shield for OV If open: No change to display.
(Shield terminals If short to ground: No change to display.
signal) No. 8,9,17,18,
19
*; The shielded wires have a heat-shrunk tube insulating the outside of the wire. The color of the insulating tube,
(cont'd)
Navigation display Inputs and Outputs for Connector B

Navigation display connector B (10P)
5Z 2
10

B9 BLU DiSPOPEN Display 0—3.3 V If open: CD Eject/Load function does not
open/close work.
signal If short to ground: CD Eject/Load function
works.
B10 PNK CD EJECT CD eject signal 0 -3 .3 V If open: Display can be opened or closed.
If short to ground: Display cannot be
opened or closed.
Rearview Camera Inputs and Outputs
Rearvi ew camera 6P connector (*07 model)
n n
1 2 3 4 5 6
Lj LJ
L
— ijb d
Rearvi ew camera 6P connector ('08-10 models)

1 GRN*2 CAMERA Control signal OV If open: No change to rearview camera
YEL*3 ADPT for rearview image.
(Adaptive camera If short to ground: No change to rearview
camera) camera image.
2 GRY*1 CAMERA SH Shield for OV If open: No change to rearview camera
(Shield terminals No. 1, image.
camera) 3,4, 5,6 If short to ground: No change to rearview
camera image.
3 BLK VIDEO Video signal for 0.3 V If open: No rearview camera image.
(Video rearview camera If short to ground: When put into reverse,
camera) navigation screen goes black (display
backlight still operative).
4 YEL*2 VIDEO GND Ground for OV If open: No change to rearview camera
GRN*3 (Ground camera signal image.
camera) If short to ground: No change to rearview
camera image.
5 RED CAMERA Ground for OV If open: No change to rearview camera
GND rearview camera image.
(Ground) If short to ground: No change to rearview
camera image.
6 WHT CAMERA Power source for 8V If open: No rearview camera image.
VCC rearview camera If short to ground: When put into reverse,
(VCC supply) navigation screen goes black (display
backlight still operative).
*1: The shielded wires have a heat-shrunk tube insulating the outside of the wire. The color of the insulating tube,
*2; '07 model
*3; '08-10 models
Circuit Diagram
"07 model
DRIVER'S
-WHT/RED-
No.7(7.5A)FUSE
(Inthepassenger's RED/BLK■ •RED/BLK-
under-dash
DASHLIGHTS NAVIGATIONDISPLAY fuse/relaybox) o -
BORN
IGTH
RTO
N
C LE
LS
ES
R<J-- RED■ ACC YEL/RED-
(Inthegauge ^
controlmodule) +B WHT/RED-
BLK ILL+ RED/BLK-
r RSIG —WHT—
AUDIODISC G501 GSIGA9 —RED—
CHANGER BSIG —YEL—
GA-NET GA-NET
AUDIOBUSH AUDIOBUSH CSIGA19—Brn —
GA-NET GA-NET NDA17
AUDIOBUS1- B3 ^f pnk -
. . ; . . " 3. A
-f-/ A 4 UDIOBUSH G SIG —BLU—
GA-NET H GA-NET
AUDIOBUS1 —GRY*J LGRY*- AUDIOBUS1 SIGSH —GRY*—
SH SH GA-NET
SCTY5A18 ■ GRN/YEL- SCTY5 DISPBUS+ LTBLU ---
GA-NET A1§..pur ....
DISPOPENA12 —BLU— B9 DISPOPENG DA
IS-N
PE
BTUS- A14
CDEJECT —PNK— B10 CDEJECT S DH
ISPBUS ■ GRY*■
SCTY4 - GRN- -RED/WHT- SCTY3 DVD
REAR PLAYER
UNIT
GA-NET A5
AUDIOBUS2+A15 GA-NET GA-NET . 9 ! . . . GA-NET CONTROLLER
andSCREEN
GA-NET
AUDIOBUS2+ RRBUS+ RRB US
+ V
AUD IOBU S2- PUR J-. P .1
.0. GA-NET GA-NET C11 PUR■ GA-NET
GA-NET 1 D 3 AUDIOBUS2- RRBUS-
GA-NET C 10 ■ GRY*- RRBUS-
GA-NET
AUDIOBUS2 ■GRY*
SH
GRY*- AGUAD-NIOETBUS2
SH
RRBUS SH RRBUSSH SCTY2 BLU/YEL--
A8
SCTY6----- GRN/ORN- A 4 SCTY6
RGL+—— ■ Ri ■BRN■
LEFTFRONT G RN/B
LK - A8 FRL RGGND A12 ■ YEL _u
SPEAKERS < h SPKR+
(Withoutpremium A 18 FRL REMOTE A11 ■ BRN 1VOICECONTROL FRONT
audiosystem) < 3 ~ ■ L
T GRN SPKR- GND —< l SWIT'CH DRIVER'S LEFT PASSENGER'S
B2 DO OR DOOR RIGHT
A 7 FRR - X -
G R Y*- SPEAKE R TW EET
E R SPEAKER TWEETER
RIGHTFRONT < ]- GRN/YEL SPKR+ FLPREIN+ A8 ■ BLU_1------------ B1
SPEAKERS A18 -PNK i 1 1 B8 FLPRE J|22 Fi11 1n1 jI 22 |2 n T i
(Withoutpremium A 17 FRR FL PR
E IN- 12
audiosystem) < F GRY/RED■ SPKR- i_____ / IN WHT BLU/ORN RED/BLU BLK/RED j
A20 GND FRPREIN+ A7 I
t-------- - B4 GRN I GRY/BLU BRN PNK/BLK
FRPREIN- A17 RED i1
_j-------- 1— B11
i A3 |A13IA 4 |A 14 A2 |A12 A1 |All
B5 FRL FRL FRL T FRLFRR FRR FRR FRR
r AUDIOUNIT GRY* INSH + FR PRE SPKR S PKRTW + W - SPKR SP KRTW+ TW-
G503 STEREOAMPLIFIER(Withpremiumaudiosystem)
the outside of the wire. The color of the insulating tube,
typically black or dark gray, may not match the color of the wire
listed on the schematic.
---------: CAN line
: GA-NET
-------- : Shielding
MULTIPLEX
INTEGRATED C5 C6
CONTROL UNIT L ^ " ■ GRN • BACK LT VSP - BLU/WHT- VSP
(MICU)
C4 PCM(VEHICLE SPEED PULSE)
C2 GND BLK
• YEL/RED ■ ACC
“ 1
C1
- WHT/RED-
GPS ANTENNA
A5 GPS GPS
■ RED/BLK • E2
GPS SH GPS SH
CLIMATE CONTROL UNIT
AC-SI B-CAN 17
A4 24
AC-SI - RED/BLU *
17 LTBLU
AC-SO - YEL/GRN ■ AC-SO
A15 6 A
- WHT - RSIG AC-CK - GRN/BLK - AC-CK GAUGE CONTROL
MODULE
- RED - G SIG C7 (ILLUMI cancel)
A11 DIAG P • GRY ■
NAVIGATION SERVICE
- YEL - B SIG C8 CHECKCONNECTOR
A12 DIAG N - GRN/YEL -
- BRN - CSIG
A13 GND 1 MIC
- BLU - SIG MIC \
A3 SIG SH SIG+ ■ BLU ■ I SIG+
■ GRY*- B14 i i 8 MIC MICROPHONE
GND MIC ■ PNK ■ /.
A10 GA-NET
GND _____ i GND
LTBLU -- DISP BUS+ MIC VOICE CONTROL SWITCH
A20 GA-NET SH ■ GRY*
- PUR DISP BUS-
A9 GA-NET
- GRY* DISP BUS
SH
XM RECEIVER B10 13 ( \13
(USA models) STRG SW ---- GRY —ft O •4— GRY
GA-NET A9_ . 7i ----- LTBLU B2 GA-NET
ECU2BUS+ ECU2 BUS+ CABLE REEL
GA-NET A10 GA-NET
ECU2BUS- _ ------ j ECU2BUS-
GA-NET A3 B9 GA-NET
ECU2BUS GRY^ I— WHT* - ECU2 BUS
SH SH
BRN
B5 RGL+
- BRN - BRN
- YEL -
B12 RGGND CABLE REEL
B11 RG SH ^7
■ GRY*■ GND AUDIO UNIT REARVIEWCAMERA
CAMERAVCC D-1 ^ WHT - CAMERAVCC
CAMERA GND D2 1 RED ■ CAMERA GND
VIDEO GND D4 1 YEL - VIDEO GND
VIDEO D5 1 BLK - VIDEO
CAMERAADPT GRN - CAMERAADPT
CAMERASH D6 . . gry* - CAMERASH
23225
*08-10 models
DRIVER'S
UNDER-DASH
IGNITION SWITCH
BATTERY
/BAT \ A5 No. 32 (10 A)
WHT----- hO CH----WHT/RED----- — <rvo— ■ YEL/RED ■ ■ YEL/RED ■
ACC HOT in ACC (I)

and ON (II) B4 No. 7 (7.5 A) X35
YEL ------------------------ - WHT/RED- - WHT/RED-
No. 7 (7.5 A) FUSE

(In the passenger's RED/BLK ■ * RED/BLK •
under-dash
fuse/relay box)
DASH LIGHTS NAVIGATION DISPLAY
BRIGHTNESS A12 A2
CONTROLLER < J ---- I ILL— ACC YEL/RED -
(In the gauge A1
control module) +B WHT/RED-
A10 A11
GND ILL+ RED/BLK -
A8
r L BlK
_L RSIG -WHT —
A9
AUDIO DISC G501 G SIG - RED —
CHANGER A18
B SIG - YEL —
GA-NET B9__ _ _ A3 GA-NET A19 - BR|\j —
AUDIO BUSH *rk• BLU - •' AUDIO BUSH C SIG
GA-NET B10_ . .i i’ . RNK - -/1 A13 GA-NET GND
AUDIO BUS1 B3 — BLU —
GA-NET ^ t - ~f-! A4 AUDIO BUS1- SIG
A20
— GRY*lJ L GRY*1- GA-NET SIG SH -GRY*1—
AUDIO BUS1 AUDIO BUS1
SH SH
GA-NET A5_
SCTY 5 A18 ■ GRN/YEL - SCTY 5 D,SP BUS+ LTBLU
GA-NET A15_ - PU R----- i 1
DISP OPEN A12 — BLU — B9 DISP OPEN ^SP BUS-
/_
GA-NET A14
CD EJECT A4 — PNK —
B10 CD EJECT DISP BUS -GRY*1----------
A6
SCTY 4 - GRN — ♦ — - RED/WHT- SCTY 3
REAR
GA-NET A5_ GA-NET GA-NET GA-NET CONTROLLER
AUDIO BUS2+ AUDIOBUS2+ RRBUS+ RR BUS+ and SCREEN
GA-NET GA-NET GA-NET GA-NET
AUDIO BUS2- A14 ^ t - AUDIOBUS2- RRBUS- .......pur....... RR BUS-
GA-NET D3 GA-NET ET C10 ^ m1
-----
/ & i f 1------- t 1” 22
AUDIO BUS2 I— GRY*1-* *- GRY*1—AUDIOBUS2 RR-N
GA
BUS SH
VI W
-GRY*1- GRY*1■ GA-NET
RR BUS SH
qpTY 9
SH A8 A4
SH RG SH F2 - GRY*1—
SCTY 6 -GRN/ORN - SCTY 6 GND
RG L+ RED/BLU ■
FRL RG GND - YEL —
LEFT FRONT SPKR+
SPEAKERS REMOTE VOICE CONTROL FRONT
(Without premium FRL BRN
audio system) < 3 “ LTGRN —^ SPKR- GND - < ] SWITCH DRIVER'S PASSENGER'S
B2 DOOR LEFT DOOR RIGHT
GRY* SPEAKER TWEETER SPEAKER TWEETER
RIGHT FRONT
A15 FRR
GRN/YEL — SPKR+ A12 -r FLPRE
SPEAKERS FLPRE IN+ BLU T~—
t ........ ..
IN+
I1 B8 FLPRE 12
i1 fi T i 2 |2 fl n 12
PNK 4- t
(Without premium A7 FRR A3
audio system) < ^ [~ GRY/RED FLPRE IN- IN- WHT j BLU/ORN RED/BLU j BLK/RED |
SPKR-
11
1!
A15 B4 FRPRE
f'
FR PRE IN+ ■ GRN 7 GRN I GRY/BLU BRN I PNK/BLK

A9 -- “ IN+
BLK GND A7 I1 ' B11 FRPRE A3 | A13 I A4 | A14 I A2 | A12 1A1 | A11
FR PREIN- ■ RED “H--------L- IN- FRL FRL FRL FR L FR R FRR FRR FRR
r AUDIO UNIT Lg B5 FR PRE
INSH +
SPKR SPKR TW + TW- SPKR SPKR TW + TW-
G503 STEREOAMPLIFIER (With premium audio system)

*1: The shielded wires have a heat-shrunk tube insulating
typically black or dark gray, may not match the color of the wire
listed on the schematic.
*2: '08-09 models with premium audio system and '10 model
*3: '08-09 models without premium audio system
---------: CAN line
.............: GA-NET
-------- : Shielding
MULTIPLEX
INTEGRATED C5 A30
CONTROL UNIT o BACKLT VSP - BLU/WHT- VSP
(MICU)
PCM(VEHICLE SPEED PULSE)
■ YEL/RED ■ ACC GPS ANTENNA
GPS GPS
GPS SH GPS SH
- WHT/RED- CLIMATE CONTROL UNIT
A4 24 17
AC-SI - RED/BLU ■ AC-SI B-CAN
A5 17
■ RED/BLK - ILL+ AC-SO - YEL/GRN ■ AC-SO
C4 6 A
GND AC-CK - GRN/BLK - AC-CK GAUGE CONTROL
— BLK —
MODULE
(ILLUMI cancel)
r DIAG P • GRY ■
NAVIGATION SERVICE
C8 CHECKCONNECTOR
G504 DIAG N ■ GRN/YEL -
- WHT — RSIG MIC MIC HFL-NAVIGATION

SIG+ ■ BLU ' SIG+ MICROPHONE__
- RED - GSIG MIC MIC
SIG- ■ PNK ■ ' SIG- r MIC MIC
- YEL - B SIG i + GND
-GRY* X
A18 MIC B15
- BRN - C SIG SIGSH
- BLU - GND
SIG
A3 SIG SH BLU PNK
- GRY*1- GND MIC MIC
SIG+ - 4 BLU GRN - r SIG+
A10 GA-NET
LTBLU DISP BUS+ MIC MIC GRY*1'
A26 GA-NET SIG- -r4 PNK ■ RED • SIG-
- PUR - DISP BUS-
Jj 2
B15
-GRY*1-
A9 GA-NET MIC
SIGSH -GRY*; x MIC MIC MIC
SH + GND
DISP BUS
SH
XM RECEIVER HFL/NAV F3 HFL/NAV
GA-NET A9 _B2 GA-NET COMM1 - RED ■ COMM1
ECU2 BUS+ ----- LTBLU ECU2BUS+ HFL/NAV HFL/NAV HANDSFREELINK
GA-NET A10 i’ B10 GA-NET COMM2 - WHT - COMM2 CONTROL
ECU2 BUS- - - - ----- ^ ..........PUR------- ECU2BUS- HFL/NAV HFL/NAV UNIT
GA-NET - GRN - COMM3
ECU2BUS
t -WHT*1- 811 GA-NET COMM3
ECU2BUS HFL/NAV HFL/NAV
SH SH COMM4 - BLK - COMM4
F5
HFL/NAV — ^ - -f------f - HFL/NAV
B7 RGL+ COM M GRY*1— 1 1— GRY*1 COMM
- BRN ■
SH SH
- YEL ■ RG GND
-GRY*1' RG SH
REARVIEWCAMERA GND
CAMERAVCC - WHT -
D1 CAMERAVCC
CAMERA GND D2 CAMERA GND
- RED -
VIDEO GND 1 D4 VIDEO GND
- GRN ■
VIDEO D5 VIDEO
- BLK -
CAMERAADPT D7 CAMERAADPT
- YEL -
; r ” t D6 CAMERA SH
CAMERASH -GRY* GRY*1 AUDIO,
UNIT
HFL-VOICE CONTROL SWITCH*
VOICE CONTROL SWITCH*3
No picture is displayed 4. Measure the voltage between body ground and

navigation unit connector C (8P) terminals No. 1 and
NOTE: No. 2 individually.
22-111). NAVIGATION UNIT CONNECTOR C (8P)
• Make sure the DVD read surface is clean and scratch +B
free. (WHT/RED) ACC (YEL/RED)
• Make sure that the correct DVD color and version are
H
installed.
CM CD
1 / 4
• Check any official Honda service website for more
00
5 7
service information about the navigation system.
• For problems with the rearview camera, do the
rearview camera does not come on or work properly
troubleshooting.
• Check the connectors for poor connections or loose Wire side of female terminals
terminals.
• Before troubleshooting, make sure you have the
navigation system anti-theft code.
YES-Go to step 5.
1. Check the No. 7 (7.5 A) fuse and No. 32 (10 A) fuse in
the driver's under-dash fuse/relay box, and reinstall N O -lf the + B or ACC wire does not have voltage,
the fuse if it is OK. repair an open in the wire between the driver's
under-dash fuse/relay box and the navigation unit.l
Is the fuse OK?
5. Measure the voltage between navigation unit
YES-Go to step 2.
connector C (8P) terminal No. 4 and body ground.
NO-Replace the fuse, and recheck.ll
2. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). NAVIGATION UNIT CONNECTOR C (8P)
3. Operate the radio and listen to the audio. GND (BLK)
C a n y o u h e a r th e a u d io ? r I n
1 2 / 4
YES-Go to step 4.
5 6 7 8
NO-Check the ACC circuit.HI
Is th e re le s s th a n 0 .2 V ?
YES-Go to step 6.
between the navigation unit and body ground
(G504) (see page 2 2 -4 9 ).■
6. Do the forced starting of the display (see page 12. Measure the voltage between body ground and
23-294). navigation display connector A (20P) terminal No. 10.
Is th e d ia g n o s is m e n u o f th e p ic tu r e d ia g n o s is
d is p la y e d ? NAVIGATION DISPLAY CONNECTOR A (20P)
YES-Go into the Diagnostic mode and use the Navi GND (BLK)
System Link diagnosis (see page 23-276) to check the
lin k s .!
1 2 3 4 5 6 / 8 9 10
NO-Go to step 7.
CM
o
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
7. Shield the navigation display from the sun with your
hand, and check that the display is back lit (only back
X
light is ON).
C a n y o u s e e th e b a c k lig h t? Wire side of female terminals
YES-Replace the navigation unit (see page 23-295).!
Is th e re le s s th a n 0 .2 V ?
NO-Go to step 8.
YES-Replace the navigation display (see page
23-299).I I
10. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). between the navigation display unit and body ground
(G501) (see page 22-41 ) . ■
11. Measure the voltage between body ground and
navigation display connector A (20P) terminals No. 1
NAVIGATION DISPLAY CONNECTOR A (20P)

+B
(WHT/RED) ACC (YEL/RED) _____
1 2 3 4 5 6 / 8 9 10
CM
o
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
YES-Go to step 12.
N O -lf the + B or ACC wire does not have voltage,
repair an open in the wire between the driver's
under-dash fuse/relay box and the navigation unit.l
Picture has lines/rolls/other issues or is an 8. Check for continuity between navigation unit
connector A (20P) and body ground according to the
odd color ('07 model)
table.
Diagnostic Test: M onitor Check
Navigation unit connector Wire color
NOTE: A1 WHT
• Check the vehicle battery condition first (see page A2 RED
22-111). A11 YEL
• Make sure that the correct DVD color and version are A12 BRN
installed. A13 BLU
• Check any official Honda service website fo r more
service information about the navigation system. NAVIGATION UNIT CONNECTOR A (20P)
• For problems w ith the rearview camera, do the
troubleshooting. 1 2 3 4 5/ / / 9 10
• Check the connectors for poor connections or loose 11 12 13 14 15 / / / 20
terminals.
navigation and audio system anti-theft codes. Wire side of female terminals
1. Check fo r electronic aftermarket accessories (possibly

hidden) mounted near the display unit or the Is th e re c o n tin u ity ?
navigation unit.
A r e th e re a n y e le c tr o n ic a c c e s s o r ie s ? between the navigation unit and the navigation
display. Replace the affected shielded harness.B
YES-Disable the accessories, and recheck.B
NO-Go to step 9.
NO-Go to step 2.
3. Make sure the navigation unit is tuned on.
Is th e picture s c r o llin g h o r iz o n ta lly ( le ft to r ig h t o r r ig h t to
le ft) o r v e r tic a lly ( u p to d o w n o r d o w n to u p ) ?
YES-Go to step 5.
NO-Go to step 4.
4. Go into the Diagnostic mode and use RGB Color
diagnosis under M onitor Check (see page 23-277).
A r e th e re d , g re e n , a n d b lu e c o lo r e d c ir c le s s h o w n ?
YES-lnterm ittent failure. Compare the image to a
known-good vehicle. The system is OK at this tim e .B
NO-Go to step 5.
6. Disconnect navigation unit connector A (20P).
7. Disconnect navigation display connector A (20P).
10. Check for continuity between navigation unit
connector A (20P) and navigation display connector A
From term inal To term inals
(Wire color) Navigation Navigation Wire color
A1 (WHT) A2, A3*, A11, A12, A13 unit display
A2 (RED) A3*, A11, A12, A13 connector connector
A3 (GRY)* A11, A12, A13 A1 A8 WHT
A11 (YEL) A12, A13 A2 A9 RED
A12(BRN) A13 A11 A18 YEL
A13 (BLU) A12 E19 BRN
A13 A17 BLU
*: Shielding

CO
CM
CO
00
1 3 4 / 5 10
1 2 3 4 5 / / / 9 10
CM
o
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
CM
O
11 12 13 14 15 / I / / /

YES-There is a short in the wires between the
navigation unit and the navigation display. Replace
the affected shielded harness.B 1 2 3 4 5 / / / 9 10
NO-Go to step 10. 11 12 13 14 15 / / / / 20
YES-Substitute a known-good navigation display
(see page 23-299), and recheck. if the
navigation display. Ifthe symptom/indication is still
present/replace the navigation unit (see page
23-295). B
NO-There is an open in the wire(s) between the
navigation unit and the navigation display. Replace
Picture has lines/roils/other issues or is an 8. Check for continuity between navigation unit
odd color ('08-10 models) table.
Diagnostic Test: Monitor Check
NOTE: A1 WHT
• Check the vehicle battery condition first (see page A2 RED
22-111). A17 YEL
• Make sure that the correct DVD color and version are A18 BRN
installed. A19 BLU
service information about the navigation system. NAVIGATION UNIT CONNECTOR A (32P)
• For problems w ith the rearview camera, do the
troubleshooting.
terminals.
navigation and audio system anti-theft codes. Wire side of female terminals
1. Check for electronic aftermarket accessories (possibly

hidden) mounted near the display unit or the Is th e re c o n tin u ity ?
navigation unit.
A r e th e re a n y e le c tr o n ic a c c e s s o r ie s ? between the navigation unit and the navigation
display. Replace the affected shielded harness.B
YES-Disable the accessories, and recheck.B
NO-Go to step 9.
NO-Go to step 2.
3. Make sure the navigation unit is tuned on.
Is th e p ic tu r e s c r o llin g h o r iz o n ta lly (le ft to r ig h t o r r ig h t to
le ft) o r v e rtic a lly ( u p to d o w n o r d o w n to u p ) ?
YES-Go to step 5.
NO-Go to step 4.
4. Go into the Diagnostic mode and use RGB Color
diagnosis under M onitor Check (see page 23-277).
A r e th e re d , g re e n , a n d b lu e c o lo r e d c ir c le s s h o w n ?
YES-lnterm ittent failure. Compare the image to a
known-good vehicle. The system is OK at this tim e .B
NO-Go to step 5.
7. Disconnect navigation display connector A (20P).
connector A (32P) and navigation display connector A
(Wire color) Navigation Navigation Wire color
A1 (WHT) A2, A3*, A17, A18, A19 unit display
A2 (RED) A3*, A17, A18, A19 connector connector
A3 (GRY)* A17, A18, A19 A1 A8 WHT
A17 (YEL) A18, A19 A2 A9 RED
A18 (BRN) A19 A17 A18 YEL
A19(BLU) A18 A19 BRN
*: Shielding A19 A17 BLU

1
n_r —
1 2 6 /
3 4 8 9 10
5
1 2 3 4 5 ,/ / 9 ’10 / r
Csl
o
17r 161 1S) 2C) 21' / V V V "2(3/ V V V V V 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19

navigation unit and the navigation display. Replace — —_ri
the affected shielded harness.B 1 2 3 4 5 / / / 9 10
NO-Go to step 10. 17 18 19 20 21 Z Z Z Z 26Z Z Z Z Z Z
YES-Substitute a known-good navigation display
(see page 23-299), and recheck. ifthe
navigation display. Ifthe symptom/indication is still
present, replace the navigation unit (see page
23-295).B
NO-There is an open in the wire(s) between
navigation unit and navigation display. Replace the
Navigation unit will not eject or accept the 6. Measure the voltage between navigation unit
navigation DVD
1. Check the No. 7 (7.5 A) and No. 32 (10 A) fuses in the NAVIGATION UNIT CONNECTOR C (8P)
driver's under-dash fuse/relay box.
+B
(WHT/RED)
A r e th e fu s e s O K ?
n I 1 n
YES-Go to step 2.
1 2 / 4
NO-Replace the fuse(s) and recheck.B 5 6 7 8
2. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). x
3. Eject the DVD from the navigation unit (see page
23-294).
D o e s th e n a v ig a tio n D V D e je c t? W ire side of female terminals
YES-Go to step 4. Is t h e r e b a t t e r y v o lt a g e ?
NO-Go to step 5. YES-Go to step 7.
4. Reinsert the navigation DVD. NO-Repair an open in the wire between navigation
D o e s th e n a v ig a tio n u n it a c c e p t th e D V D ? unit connector C (8P) terminal No. 1 and the No. 7
(7.5 A) fuse in the driver's under-dash fuse/relay
YES-No problems at this time. Inspect for loose or box.B
poor connections at navigation unit connector C
(8P).B 7. Measure the voltage between navigation unit
NO-Replace the navigation unit (see page 23-295).B
5. Measure the voltage between navigation unit NAVIGATION UNIT CONNECTOR C (8P)
ACC (YEL/RED)
....-.... -j
NAVIGATION UNIT CONNECTOR C {8P) n_ln fl n
1 2 / 4
GND (BLK)
5 6 7 8
I] I r
x
1 2 / 4
5 6 7 8
X Wire side of female term inals
Is t h e r e b a t t e r y v o l t a g e ?
YES-Replace the navigation unit (see page 23-295).B
is t h e r e le s s th a n 0 .2 V ? NO-Repair an open in the wire between navigation

unit connector C (8P) terminal No. 2 and the No. 32
YES-Repair an open or high resistance in the wire (10 A) fuse in the driver's under-dash fuse/relay
between navigation unit connector C (8P) terminal box.B
No. 4 and body ground (G504) (see page 22-49).B
NO-Go to step 6.
Navigation display buttons do not work or 4. Turn the audio system ON and test all of its functions.
respond properly D o e s th e a u d io s y s t e m tu r n o n a n d fu n c tio n n o r m a lly ?
NOTE: YES-Go to step 5.
NO-Troubleshoot the audio system.■
22- 111).
• Make sure that the correct DVD color and version are 5. Turn the navigation display ON.
installed.
D o e s th e n a v ig a t io n d is p la y tu r n O N , a n d d is p la y th e
• Check any official Honda service website for more d is c la im e r s c r e e n ?
service information and software updates for the
navigation system. YES-Go to step 6.
• For problems with the rearview camera, do the NO-Do the troubleshooting for no picture is displayed
rearview camera does not come on or work properly (see page 23-228).■
troubleshooting.
• Check the connectors for poor connections or loose 6. Select OK on the disclaimer screen.
terminals. C a n y o u s e le c t O K o n th e d is c la im e r s c r e e n ?
navigation and audio system anti-theft codes. YES-Go to step 7.
• Before troubleshooting, write down all the audio NO-Go to step 8.
presets and re-enter them after repairs are complete.
7. Go into the Diagnostic Menu and use the Touch Panel
• Verify the concern and compare the system operation
Check (see page 23-279) and Hard Key (see page
to a known-good vehicle with the same software
23-282) to test all the possible touch locations on the
loaded whenever possible. Ifthe concern is duplicated
screen and the hard key buttons that surround the
in the known-good vehicle, then it can be considered a
navigation display.
characteristic of the system.
D o e s th e e v e r y b u tto n d is p la y e d o n th e s c r e e n a n d e v e r y
1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). h a r d k e y r e s p o n d p r o p e r ly w h e n to u c h e d ?
2. Eject the navigation DVD (see page 23-294).
YES-No problems at this time. Check any official
D o e s th e D V D e je c t? Honda service website for more service information
about the navigation buttons. Get further details from
YES-Go to step 3. the customer and try to duplicate the problem under
NO-Do the troubleshooting for navigation unit will the same conditions and perform this
not eject or accept the navigation DVD (see page troubleshooting again at that tim e .l
23-234). ■ NO-Substitute a known-good navigation display and
3. Check the DVD label color, version number, and the recheck. If the problem goes away, replace the
reading surface for damage, scratches or dirt. original navigation display. Ifthe problem is still
present, substitute a known-good navigation unit and
NOTE: Check any official Honda service website for recheck. If the problem goes away, replace the
more service information about the navigation navigation unit (see page 23-295).l
system or navigation DVDs.
8. Do the forced starting of display (see page 23-294)
Is th e D V D th e c o r r e c t c o lo r ( w h ite ), c o r r e c t v e r s io n and check the connection links in the In-Line Diag
( m in im u m r e q u ir e m e n t ) , c le a n , a n d f r e e o f s c r a t c h e s ? mode.
YES-Go to step 4. A r e t h e c o n n e c t io n lin k s n o r m a l ( g r e e n ) ?
NO-Replace the navigation system DVD and recheck YES-Substitute a known-good navigation display and
the system .® recheck. Ifthe problem goes away, replace the
original navigation display. Ifthe problem is still
present, substitute a known-good navigation unit and
recheck. If the problem goes away, replace the
navigation unit (see page 23-295).■
(cont'd)
9. Check the connection links on the In-Line Diag mode. 15. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
A r e a ll t h e c o n n e c t io n lin k s r e d ( fa ile d r e s p o n s e ) ? 16. Disconnect the rear controller and screen 26P
connector, then turn the ignition switch to ON (II) and
YES-lf the vehicle is equipped with any OEM audio
recheck the navigation system.
accessories (audio disc changer, Music Link, etc.), go
to step 11. If there are no OEM audio accessories D o e s th e n a v ig a tio n d is p la y n o w r e s p o n d to to u c h ?
connected to the vehicle, go to step 13.
YES-Replace the defective rear controller and
NO-Some of the links are red, go to step 10. screen.■
10. Inspect the connections and pin fits of the following NO-Go to step 17.
units:
• Audio unit
• Audio disc changer (behind the navigation display) 18. Disconnect navigation display connector A (20P) and
• Navigation display audio disc changer connector B (14P).
• Navigation unit 19. Checkfor continuity between body ground and
navigation display connector A (20P) terminals No. 3
A r e a ll th e c o n n e c tio n s p r o p e r ly c o n n e c t e d a n d te r m in a l
fits t ig h t ?
YES-lf the vehicle is equipped with any OEM audio NAVIGATION DISPLAY CONNECTOR A (20P)
accessories (audio disc changer, Music Link, etc.), go
GA-NET AUDIO BUS1 + (BLU)
to step 11. If there are no OEM audio accessories
connected to the vehicle, go to step 13.
OO
4 5 9 10
CM
CO
CD
1 /
NO-Repair the connection(s) and/or tighten the
o
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
CM
terminals and retest.■
GA-NET AUDIO
11. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). BUS1- (PNK)
12. Completely disconnect all cables that connect an

OEM audio accessory to the vehicles GA-NET II
communication bus, then turn the ignition switch to
ON (ll) and recheck the navigation system.
D o e s th e n a v ig a t io n d is p la y n o w r e s p o n d to t o u c h ? Is t h e r e c o n t in u it y ?
YES-Replace the defective OEM audio accessory or YES-There is a short to body ground in the wire(s)
c a b ie .ll between navigation display connector A (20P) and
audio disc changer connector B (14P). Replace the
NO-Go to step 13.
NO-Go to step 20.
14. Disconnect XM receiver connector A (14P), then turn
the ignition switch to ON (II) and recheck the
navigation system.
D o e s th e n a v ig a t io n d is p la y n o w r e s p o n d to to u c h ?
YES-Replace the defective XM receiver.!
NO-
• With rear entertainment system: go to step 15.
• Without rear entertainment system: go to step 17.
(Wire col or) Navigati on Audio disc Wire color
A 3 (BLU) A4*,A13 display changer
A4 (GRY)* A13 connector connector
A13 (PNK) A3 B9 BLU
*: Shielding A4 B3 GRY
A13 B10 PNK

NAVIGATION DISPLAY CONNECTOR A (2QP)
1 2 3 4 5 6 / 8 9 10
1 2 3 4 5 6/ 8 9 10
04
o
11 1 2 1 3 1 4 1 5 1 6 1 7 1 8 1 9
11 12 13 14 15 16 1 7 18 19 2 0

YES-There is a short in the wires between navigation AUDIO DISC CHANGER CONNECTOR B (14P)
display connector A (20P) and audio disc changer
connector B (14P). Replace the affected shielded
harness.B / 2 3 4 5 6
9 1 0 11 13 1 4
NO-Go to step 2!. / / /
YES-Go to step 22.
navigation display connector A (20P) and the audio
disc changer connector B (14P). Replace the affected
shielded harness.B
22. Disconnect audio unit connector D (14P) and audio
disc changer connector A (18P).
(cont'd)
23. Check for continuity between body ground and audio 25. Check for continuity between audio unit connector D
unit connector D (14P) terminals No. 9 and No. 1 0 (14P) and audio disc changer connector A (18P)
individually. according to the table.
AUDIO UNIT CONNECTOR D (14P) Audio unit Audio disc Wire color
connector changer
connector
D3 A 14 GRY
D9 A5 LTBLU
D10 A15 PUR
/ 2 3 4 5 6
W ire side of female term inals 9 10 11 / 13 14
/ A
YES-There is a short to body ground in the wire(s) W ire side of female term inals
between audio unit connector D (14P) and audio disc
changer connector A (18P). Replace the affected
shielded harness.B AUDIO DISC CHANGER CONNECTOR A (18P)
NO-Go to step 24.
SHE
24. Check for continuity between audio unit connector D 1 2 3 4 x 5 6 7 8
( 1 4 P ) according to the table.
9 1 0 11 1 2 1 3 X 14 15 16 17 18
(Wire color)
D 3 (GRY)* D9, D 10 W ire side of female terminals
D 9 (L T B L U ) D 10
D 1 0 (P U R )
*: Shielding
YES-
AUDIO UNIT CONNECTOR D (14P) • With rear entertainment system: go to step 26.
• Without rear entertainment system: go to step 30.
E
NO-There is an open in the wire(s) between audio

CO
/ 4 5
l
unit connector D ( 1 4 P ) and audio disc changer

CD
14
CO
/ /
10 11 / connector A (18P). Replace the affected shielded
harness.B
26. Disconnect audio unit connector C (16P).
YES-There is a short in the wires between audio unit
connector D (14P) and audio disc changer connector
A (18P). Replace the affected shielded harness.B
NO-Go to step 25.
Audio unit Rear controller Wire color
AUDIO UNIT CONNECTOR C (16P) connector and screen
connector
C9 3 LTBLU
1 2 3 x 4 5 6 / C10 15 GRY
8 9 10 11 X 12 13 14 15 / C11 16 PUR
GA-NET GA-NET
RR BUS + / w RR B U S - AUDIO UNIT CONNECTOR C (16P)
(LTBLU) ( M (PUR)
1 2 3 x 4 5 6X
8 9 10 11 X 12 13 14 15 X
YES-There is a short to body ground in the wire(s) Wire side of female term inals
between audio unit connector C (16P) and the rear
controller and screen 26P connector. Replace the
affected shielded harness.B REAR CONTROLLER AND SCREEN
26P CONNECTOR
NO-Go to step 28.
n n X n n
28. Check for continuity between audio unit connector C 1/ / / X
3 /I / 6 7 8 12 13
CM
CM
/ 15 16 / 18 19 2 0 21 23 X 25 2 6
(Wire color)
C9 (LT BLU) C10*, C11 W ire side of female term inals
C10 (GRY)* C11
C11 (PUR)
Shielding
YES-
AUDIO UNIT CONNECTOR C (1@P) • '07 model: go to step 30.

• '08-10 models: go to step 38.
NO-There is an open in the wire(s) between audio
1 2 3 > < ■ 4 5 6 /
unit connector C (16P) and the rear controller and
8 9 10 11 X 12 13 14 15 / screen 26P connector. Replace the affected shielded
harness.B
YES-There is a short in the wires between audio unit
connector C (16P) and the rear controller and screen
26P connector. Replace the affected shielded
harness.B
(cont'd)
31. Check for continuity between body ground and 33. Check for continuity between navigation unit
navigation unit connector A (20P) terminals No. 10 connector A (20P) and navigation display connector A
and No. 20 individually. (20P) according to the table.
Navigation Navigation Wire color

NAVIGATION UNIT CONNECTOR A (20P) unit connector display
GA-NET DISP BUS+ (LT BLU) connector
A9 A14 GRY
1 2 3 4 5
/ / A 9 10 A10 A5 LTBLU
11 12 13 14 15 / /I / / 20 A20 A15 PUR
GA-NET DISP BUS-
(PUR) NAVIGATION UNIT CONNECTOR A (20P)
1 2 3 4 5 / / / 9 10
W ire side of female term inals 11 12 13 14 15 / A / 20
between navigation unit connector A (20P) and
navigation display connector A (20P). Replace the
affected shielded harness.B NAVIGATION DISPLAY CONNECTOR A (20P)
NO-Go to step 32.
32. Check for continuity between navigation unit 1 2 3 4 5 6 8 9 10
/
connector A (20P) according to the table.
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 2 0

(Wire color)
A9 (GRY)* A10, A20 W ire side of female terminals
A10 (LTBLU) A20
A20 (PUR)
Shielding
YES-Go to step 34.
NAVIGATION UNIT CONNECTOR A (20P) NO-There is an open in the wire(s) between

navigation unit connector A (20P) and navigation
display connector A (20P). Replace the affected
1 2 3 4 5 9 10
shielded harness.B
/ /
11 12 13 14 15
/ / / 20 34. Disconnect navigation unit connector B (14P).
YES-There is a short in the wires between navigation
unit connector A (20P) and navigation display
connector A (20P). Replace the affected shielded
harness.B
Navigation XM receiver Wire color
NAVIGATION UNIT CONNECTOR B (14P) unit connector connector
GA-NET ECU BUS2+ (LT BLU) B2 A9 LTBLU
B8 A10 PUR
cn
c p /
CM 00
CD
/l / B9 (WHT) A3 (GRY) WHT or GRY
CD
/ 10 X 11 12 13 14
GA-NET ECU BUS2— NAVIGATION UNIT CONNECTOR B (14P)
(PUR)
s j / 5
Csl 00
CD
/ /
CD
/ 10 X 11 12 13 14

between navigation unit connector B (14P) and XM
receiver connector A (14P). Replace the affected XM RECEIVER CONNECTOR A (14P)
shielded harness.B
NO-Go to step 36.
CM
CO
CD
1 / 5
CD
36. Check for continuity between navigation unit 10 11
CO
X X / 14
connector B (14P) according to the table.

(Wire color) W ire side of female term inals
B2 (LT BLU) B8, B9*
B8 (PUR) B9*
B9 (WHT)* Is t h e r e c o n t in u it y ?
*: Shielding YES-Substitute the following units with known- good

units, one at a time in the following order listed and
recheck the navigation system operation after each
NAVIGATION UNIT CONNECTOR B (14P) unit substitution:
• Audio unit (see page 23-167)
2 / C J / 5 6 • Audio disc changer (see page 23-170)
/
CD
10 X 11 12 13 14 • Navigation display (see page 23-299)

00
/
• Navigation unit (see page 23-295)
If the problem goes away, replace the original
Wire side of female term inals defective unit.B
Is t h e r e c o n t in u it y b e t w e e n a n y o f t h e t e r m in a ls ? navigation unit connector B (14P) and XM receiver
harness.B
unit connector B (14P) and XM receiver connector A
(14P). Replace the affected shielded harness.B 38. Disconnect navigation unit connector A (32P).
NO-Go to step 37.
(cont'd)
39. Check for continuity between body ground and 41. Checkfor continuity between navigation unit
navigation unit connector A (32P) terminals No. 10 connector A (32P) and navigation display connector A
and No. 26 individually. (20P) according to the table.
Navigation Navigation Wire color

NAVIGATION UNIT CONNECTOR A (32P) unit connector display
connector
GA-NET DISP BUS + <LT BLU)
A9 A14 GRY
------------ -fl A10 A5 LT BLU
.Tj-
CM
CO
ID
7 L / 1 9 ho T F P W I^ A26 A15 PUR

\w M M 2 0 \ 2 i \ / \ / \ / \ a M / \ A A / \ A /
GA-NET
^ DISP BUS NAVIGATION UNIT CONNECTOR A (32P)
CH ) (PUR)
n_ JT
1 2 3 4 5 / / / 9 10 / / / / / /
Wire side o f female term inals 17 18 19 20 21 / / / / 26 / / / / / /
between navigation unit connector A (32P) and
navigation display connector A (20P). Replace the
affected shielded harness.B NAVIGATION DISPLAY CONNECTOR A (20P)
NO-Go to step 40.
CD
40. Check for continuity between navigation unit 10
00
1 3 4 5 6/
CN T
CM
o
11 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
C“M
From termi nal To terminals

(Wire color)
A9 (GRY)* A10, A26 W ire side of female term inals
A10 (LTBLU) A26
A26 (PUR)
Shielding
YES-Go to step 42.
NAVIGATION UNIT CONNECTOR A (32P) NO-There is an open in the wire(s) between

navigation unit connector A (32P) and navigation
display connector A (20P). Replace the affected
FT--- r*i
1 2 3 4 5 / / / 9 10 / / / / / / shielded harness.B
17 18 19 20 21 / / / / 26 / / / / / / 42. Disconnect navigation unit connector B (16P).
unit connector A (32P) and navigation display
harness.B
Navigation XM receiver Wire color
NAVIGATION UNIT CONNECTOR B (16P) unit connector connector
GA-NET ECU BUS2+ (LT BLU) B2 A9 LT BLU
B10 A10 PUR
/ / 7 8 B11 (WHT) A3 (GRY) WHT or GRY
1C) 11I 12! i ; I 1 4 I 1£
CD
/
GA-NET ECU BUS2- NAVIGATION UNIT CONNECTOR B (16P)
(PUR)
-fl
7 //// 2
00
7
/
CM
W ire side o f female term inals 10 11 13 14 15 16

between navigation unit connector B (16P) and XM
receiver connector A (14P). Replace the affected XM RECEIVER CONNECTOR A (14P)
shielded harness.B
NO-Go to step 44.
1 2 3 / 5 6
44. Check for continuity between navigation unit 9 10 11
connector B (16P) according to the table. / / / 13 14
From termi nal To terminals

(Wi re color) Wire side of female term inals
B2 (LT BLU) B10,B1T
B10 (PUR) B ir
B11 (WHT)*
*: Shielding YES-Substitute the following units with known- good
units, one at a time in the following order listed and
recheck the navigation system operation after each
NAVIGATION UNIT CONNECTOR B (16P) unit substitution:
• Audio unit (see page 23-167)
• Audio disc changer (see page 23-170)
2 / / /
00
/ / 7
• Navigation display (see page 23-299)
X—
CO
CD
/ 10 11 12 14 15 • Navigation unit (see page 23-295)

Ifthe problem goes away, replace the original
Wire side o f female term inals defective unit.B
Is t h e r e c o n t in u it y b e t w e e n a n y o f t h e t e r m in a ls ? navigation unit connector B (16P) and XM receiver
harness.B
unit connector B (16P) and XM receiver connector A
(14P). Replace the affected shielded harness.B
NO-Go to step 45.
GPS icon is white or not shown Voice guidance cannot be heard* is broken up,
NOTE: or there Is static ('07 model)
• Make sure the vehicle is parked outside and away NOTE;
from buildings. • Check the vehicle battery condition first (see page
• Refer to GPS Information (see page 23-283) for 22- 111).
realtime satellite reception display. • Check any official Honda service website for more
• With good reception, the icon is normally green. service information about the navigation buttons.
1. Check for metallic window tint on the windshield and • Check the volume setting and voice feedback is turned
electronic aftermarket accessories (possibly hidden) ON.
mounted near the GPS antenna located behind the • Check the connectors for poor connections or loose
gauge assembly or the navigation unit. terminals.
• Before troubleshooting, make sure you have the audio
Is t h e r e m e t a llic w in d o w tin t o r e le c t r o n ic a c c e s s o r ie s ?
and navigation system anti-theft codes.
YES-Remove tint or the accessories and recheck.B • After troubleshooting, enter the audio and navigation
system anti-theft codes.
NO-Go to step 2.
1. Press the display unit SET-UP button.
2. Go into the Diagnostic Menu and use the Navi System
Link test (see page 23-276) to check the GPS antenna. 2. Check the volume setting for the navigation system.
Is t h e G P S A n t ic o n r e d ? Is it s e t to O F F ?
YES-Use the Navi ECU test under Unit Check (see YES-Set the volume to an audible level.B
page 23-280) to check for a kinked, crushed, or
disconnected GPS antenna wire. Substitute a NO-Go to step 3.
known-good GPS antenna and recheck. Ifthe problem 3. Check the audio operation.
goes away, replace the original GPS antenna. If icon is
still red, substitute a known-good navigation unit and C a n y o u h e a r th e a u d io fro m a ll s p e a k e r s ?
recheck. If the problem goes away, replace the YES-Go to step 4.
original navigation unit. If the problem is still present,
replace the floor wire harness.B NO-Troubleshoot the audio system.B
NO-Check that nothing is blocking the GPS antenna 4. Go into the Diagnostic Menu and use the Navi System
located behind the gauge control module and Link test (see page 23-276) to check the audio system.
recheck. Substitute a known-good GPS antenna first,
Is th e R a d io ic o n r e d ?
and recheck. Ifthe problem is still present, substitute
a known-good navigation unit, and recheck.B YES-Troubleshoot the audio system.B
NO-Go to step 5.
6. Disconnect navigation unit connector B (14P) and
audio unit connector A (20P).
Navigation unit connector Wire color Navigation Audio unit Wire color
B5 BRN unit connector connector
B12 YEL B5 A13 BRU or
RED/BLU
B12 A12 YEL
NAVIGATION UNIT CONNECTOR B (14P)

c
CO
CM CO
/ X p / 5
CO
/ 10 X 11 12 13 14
CD
X 2 X C J X 5
00
X 9 10 X 11 12 13 14

between the navigation unit and the audio unit. AUDIO UNIT CONNECTOR A (20P)
Replace the affected shielded harness.B
NO-Go to step 8. n n S i-*' n ..
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
11 12 13 / 15 16 17 18 19 2 0

B5 (BRN) B'11*,B12
B11 (GRY)* B12
B12 (YEL) Is t h e r e c o n t in u it y ?
*: Shielding YES-Substitute a known- good audio unit (see page

23-167), and recheck. If the symptom/indication goes
away, replace the original audio unit. If the
NAVIGATION UNIT CONNECTOR B f14P)
navigation unit (see page 23-295).B
E
c
CD
/ / X 5 NO-There is an open in the wire(s) between the

l
14 navigation unit and the audio unit. Replace the

00
CD
X 10 X 11 12 13
navigation unit and the audio unit. Replace the
NO-Go to step 9.
Voice guidance cannot be heard#is broken up, 8. Check for continuity between navigation unit
or there is static ('08-10 models)
table.
NOTE:
• Check the vehicle battery condition first (see page BRN
B7
22- 111). B14 YEL
• Using the HDS, check for and resolve any HFL related
DTCs before troubleshooting.
servise information about the navigation buttons.
1- -----1/f ^
C."..................................................................................
• Check the volume setting and voice feedback is turned
OO m
ON.
> 2 / / / V
CO
• Check the connectors for poor connections or loose / ' 10 11 12 13 '14 1
terminals.
and navigation system anti-theft codes. W ire side of female term inals
• After troubleshooting, enter the audio and navigation

system anti-theft codes. Is t h e r e c o n t in u it y ?
1. Press the display unit SET-UP button. YES-There is a short to body ground in the wire(s)
between the navigation unit and the audio unit.
2. Check the volume setting for the navigation system. Replace the affected shielded harness.B
Is it s e t to OFF? NO-Go to step 9.
YES-Set the volume to an audible level.■ 9. Check for continuity between navigation unit
NO-Go to step 3. connector B (16P) according to the table.
3. Check the HFL system operation making sure that the From terminal To terminals
HFL system mutes and cancels. (Wire color)
B7 (BRN) B13#, B14
D o e s t h e H F L s y s t e m m u t e a n d c a n c e l p ro perly? B14
B13 (GRY)*
YES-Go to step 4. B14 (YEL)
NO-Troubleshoot the HFL system.■ *: Shielding

“
4. Check the audio operation.

C a n y o u h e a r t h e a u d i o f r o m a l l speakers?
YES-Go to step 5.
7 * -7 7 7 7 7 8
NO-Troubleshoot the audio system.■
/ ■ 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
Link test (see page 23-276) to check the audio system.
W ire s i de of female term inals
Is t h e R a d io ic o n r e d ?
YES-Troubleshoot the audio system.■ Is th e r e c o n t in u it y b e t w e e n a n y o f th e te r m in a ls ?
NO-Go to step 6. YES-There is a short in the wires between the
6. Make sure the ignition switch is in LOCK (0). navigation unit and the audio unit. Replace the
7 . Disconnect navigation unit connector B (16P) and
audio unit connector F (20P). NO-Go to step 10.
Voice control does not work/respond ('07
model)
Diagnostic Test: Mic Level
Navigation Audio unit Wire color
unit connector connector NOTE:
B7 F11 BLU or • Check the vehicle battery condition first (see page
RED/BLU 22-111).
B14 F1 YEL • Make sure that the correct DVD color and version are
installed.
NAVIGATION UNIT CONNECTOR B (16P) • Check any official Honda service website for more
service information about the navigation buttons.
• Before assuming that a voice complaint is hardware
7"2 ,
00
/ 7 related, ensure that the voice control system is being

operated correctly.
/ 1C) 11I 12! 1G( V [ 1£j 16
- Make sure you are on the correct screen when trying
to issue a voice command. For instance, the
Wire side of female term inals command "Find the nearest Italian Restaurant" only
works on Map screen. (See the Navigation System
manual for a complete list of allowed voice
commands for the information being displayed).
- Close the windows and sunroof.
- Set the fan speed to low (1 or 2).
I_ n n - Adjust the air flow from the air conditioning vents so
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 that they do not blow against the microphone on the
11 / 13 14 15 16 / / 19 20 ceiling.
- Pause after pressing the navigation navigation
TALK button then give a voice command clearly in a
W ire side of female term inals natural speaking voice.
If the system cannot recognize your command,
Is t h e r e c o n t in u it y ? speak louder.
- If the microphone picks up voices other than yours,
YES-Substitute a known- good audio unit (see page
the system may not interpret your voice commands
23-167), and recheck. Ifthe symptom/indication goes
correctly.
away, replace the original audio unit If the
symptom/indication is still present, replace the - If you speak a command with something in your
navigation unit (see page 23-295).B mouth, or your voice is too husky, the system may
misunderstand your command.
navigation unit and the audio unit Replace the • Check the connectors for poor connections or loose
affected shielded harness.B terminals.
• Checkfor a loose roof console microphone; if it's
loose, tighten it
• Determine ifthe problem only happens to one person,
or everyone who uses the system.
• If the system only has a problem with one person's
voice, this should be considered a system limitation.
1. Go into the Diagnostic Menu and use the Mic Level 7. Check for continuity between navigation unit
test under Functional Setup (see page 23-288) to connector B (14P) terminal No. 10 and voice control
check the operation of the navigation TALK and the switch 5P connector terminal No. 1.
navigation BACK buttons.
A r e th e n a v ig a tio n T A L K a n d n a v ig a tio n B A C K b u tto n s Wire side of female terminals
o p e r a tio n a l?
/ 5 6
cm:
YES-Go to step 8. / / ?
H
/I 9 10 11 12 13 14
NO-Go to step 2.
2 . Check the audio remote switch operation (volume up,
volume down, CH (+ ), CH ( —), MODE). STRG SW (GRY)
Is t h e a u d io r e m o t e s w itc h o p e r a t io n a l?
YES-Go to step 3.
VOICE CONTROL SWITCH 5'P CONNECTOR
NO-Do the audio system Troubleshooting.B W ire side of female term inals
3. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). Is t h e r e c o n t in u it y ?
4. Do the voice control switch test (see page 23-297). YES-Go to step 8.
Is th e s w itc h O K ? NO-Repair an open in the wire between the

navigation unit and the voice control switch. If the
YES-Go to step 5. wire is OK, replace the cable reel.H
NO-Replace the voice control switch and recheck the 8. Use the Mic Level diagnostic under Functional Setup
symptom.■ (see page 23-288) to check the operation of the
5. Disconnect navigation unit connector B (14P) and the microphone.
voice control switch 5P connector. Is th e m ic r o p h o n e o p e r a t io n a l?
6. Check for continuity between navigation unit YES-Check the operation of the voice control system
connector B (14P) terminal No. 10 and body ground. (see the Navigation System Manual) and compare
system operation with a known-good vehicle.®
NO-Go to step 9.
s J / 5 6
CM 00
/ /
10. Disconnect navigation unit connector B (14P).
/I 9 10 X 11 12 13 14
11. Disconnect ambient light/HomeLink unit 10P
STRG SW (GRY)
connector.
between the navigation unit and the voice control
switch.■
Navigation unit connector Wire color Navi gation Ambient light/ Wire color
B6 BLU unit connector HomeLink unit
B14 PNK connector
B6 7 BLU
B14 8 PNK
NAVIGATION UNIT CONNECTOR i f14P)

C J / 5
CM
CO
/ /
00
/ 9 10 X 11 12 13 14
c J / 5
CD
CM 00
/ X
CD
/ 10 X 11 12 13 14

between the navigation unit and the microphone.
Replace the affected shielded harness.! AMBIENT LIGHT/HOMELINK UNIT 10P CONNECTOR
NO-Go to step 13.

SZ2
13. Checkfor continuity between navigation unit 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

(Wire color) W ire side of female terminals
B6(BLU) B13*, B14
B13 (GRY)* B14
B14 (PNK) Is t h e r e c o n t in u it y ?
*: Shielding YES-Substitute a known- good navigation unit (see
goes away, replace the original navigation unit. If the
ambient light/HomeLink unit (see page 2 2 - 2 8 7 ) . B
CD
cn
L J X
CM 00
/ / NO-There is an open in the wire(s) between the

9 10 X 11 13 14
CM
/ navigation unit and the microphone. Replace the

navigation unit and the microphone. Replace the
NO-Go to step 14.
S y m p to m T r o u b le s h o o t in g ( c o n t 'd )
Voice control does not work/respond ('08-10 1. Connect the HDS and check for CAN related DTCs.
models) A r e th e re a n y C A N r e la te d D T C s ?
Diagnostic Test; Mic Level YES-Troubleshoot the CAN related DTC, then
retest.B
NOTE:
• Check the vehicle battery condition first (see page NO-Go to step 2.
22- 111). 2. Check the HFL system operation making sure that the
• Check any official Honda service website for more HFL system responds to voice commands.
service information about the navigation buttons.
• Make sure that the correct DVD color and version are D o e s th e H F L s y s t e m o p e r a t e c o r r e c t ly a n d r e s p o n d to
installed. v o ic e c o m m a n d s p r o p e r ly ?
• Before assuming that a voice complaint is hardware YES-Go to step 3.
related, ensure that the voice control system is being
operated correctly. NO-Troubleshoot the HFL system.®
- Make sure you are on the correct screen when trying 3. Go into the Diagnostic Menu and use the Mic Level
to issue a voice command. For instance, the test under Functional Setup (see page 23-288) to
command "Find the nearest Italian Restaurant" only check the operation of the navigation TALK and the
works on Map screen. (See the Navigation System navigation BACK buttons.
manual for a complete list of allowed voice
commands for the information being displayed). A r e th e N A V IG A T IO N T A L K a n d N A V IG A T IO N B A C K
b u tto n s o p e r a tio n a l?
- Close the windows and sunroof.
- Set the fan speed to low (1 or 2). YES-Go to step 10.
- Adjust the air flow from the air conditioning vents so NO-Go to step 4.
that they do not blow against the microphone on the
ceiling. 4. Check the audio remote switch operation (volume up,
- Pause after pressing the TALK button then give a volume down, CH (+ ), CH ( - ) , MODE).
voice command clearly in a natural speaking voice. Is th e a u d io r e m o t e s w itc h o p e r a tio n a l?
If the system cannot recognize your command,
speak louder. YES-Go to step 5.
- If the microphone picks up voices other than yours, NO-Do the audio system Troubleshooting.B
the system may not interpret your voice commands
correctly. 5. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
- If you speak a command with something in your 6. Do the voice control switch test (see page 23-297).
mouth, or your voice is too husky, the system may
misunderstand your command. is th e s w itc h O K ?
• Check the connectors for poor connections or loose YES-Go to step 7.

terminals. NO-Replace the voice control switch and recheck the
• Check for a loose roof console microphone; if it's symptom.B
loose, tighten it.
7. Disconnect navigation unit connector B (16P) and the
voice control switch 5P connector.
• Determine ifthe problem only happens to one person,
or everyone who uses the system.
• If the system only has a problem with one person's
voice, this should be considered a system limitation.
8. Check for continuity between navigation unit 10. Use the Mic Level diagnostic under Functional Setup
connector B (16P) terminal No. 12 and body ground. (see page 23-288) to check the operation of the
microphone.
NAVIGATION UNIT CONNECTOR B (IBP) Is t h e m ic r o p h o n e o p e r a t io n a l?
1 YES-Check the operation of the voice control system
-r n
(see the Navigation System Manual) and compare
7 -2 ,
/ 7 8
system operation with a known-good vehicle.!
/
' u ) 11i 12! ISi v l 1£j 1 6
NO-
STRG SW (GRY)
• With HandsFreeLink system: go to step 11.
• Without HandsFreeLink system: go to step 18.
11. Check the HandsFreeLink system.
Is th e H a n d s F r e e L in k s y s te m O K ?
YES-Repair a short to body ground in the wire NO-Do the HandsFreeLink system troubleshooting.!
between the navigation unit and the voice control 12. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
switch. ■
NO-Go to step 9.
14. Disconnect the HandsFreeLink control unit 28P
9. Check for continuity between navigation unit connector.
connector B (16P) terminal No. 12 and voice control
switch 5P connector terminal No. 1. 15. Check for continuity between navigation unit
NAVIGATION UNIT CONNECTOR B (16P) table.
B8 BLU
V 25 z z z 7 8 B16 PNK
/ 1 0 11 12 13 14 15 16
STRG SW (GRY)
STRG SW (GRY)i JT
OO
1 2 3 4 5 7 2 / / / / 7
/ 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
VOICE CONTROL SWITCH §P CONNECTOR
YES-Go to step 10. Is t h e r e c o n t in u it y ?
NO-Repair an open in the wire between the YES-There is a short to body ground in the wire(s)
navigation unit and the voice control switch. Ifthe between the navigation unit and the HandsFreeLink
wire is OK, replace the cable re e l.! control unit. Replace the affected shielded harness.!
NO-Go to step 16.
16. Check for continuity between navigation unit 17. Check for continuity between the navigation unit
connector B (16P) according to the table. connector B (16P) and the HandsFreeLink control unit
28P connector according to the table.
(Wire color) Navigation HandsFreeLink Wire color
B8(BLU) B15*, B16 unit control unit
B15 (GRY)* B16 connector connector
B16 (PNK) B8 27 GRN or BLU
*: Shielding B16 28 RED or PNK
NAVIGATION UNIT CONNECTOR i (16P)

_n
_ri
2
/ , / 8 7 210/ 11/ 12/ 13/ 14715816
/ 1 0 11 12! 1 3 ’1 4 ■1 5 •16

HANDSFREELINK CONTROL UNIT 28P CONNECTOR
navigation unit and the HandsFreeLink control unit.
Replace the affected shielded harness.B 1 2 3 / / 6 7 8 / / 11 12 13 14
15 16 / 18 19 20 21 / / / 25 26 27
CM
OO
NO-Go to step 17.
YES-Substitute a known- good navigation unit (see
goes away, replace the original navigation unit. Ifthe
HandsFreeLink control unit (see page 23-388).■
navigation unit and the HandsFreeLink control unit.
20. Disconnect the ambient light/HomeLink unit 10P
connector.
21. Check for continuity between navigation unit 23. Checkfor continuity between navigation unit
connector B (16P) and body ground according to the connector B (16P) and ambient light/HomeLink unit
table. 10P connector according to the table.
Navigation unit connector Wire color Navigation Ambient Wire color
B8 BLU unit connector light/Home
B16 PNK Link unit
connector
NAVIGATION UNIT CONNECTOR B (16P) B8 7 BLU
B16 8 PNK
i n
2/ / / / 7
00
>
Ol
/ 10 11 12 13 14 16
/ 2/ / / / h 8
10 11
00
LO
CD
CM
Wire side of female term inals / 14
between the navigation unit and the microphone. AMBIENT LIGHT/HOMELINK UNIT
Replace the affected shielded harness.B 10P CONNECTOR
NO-Go to step 22.

22. Check for continuity between navigation unit 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
From terminal To terminal

B8(BLU) B15*, B16
B15 (GRY)* B16
B16 (PNK)
*: Shielding YES-Substitute a known- good navigation unit (see
goes away, replace the original navigation unit. If the
NAVIGATION UNIT CONNECTOR B (16P) symptom/indication doesn't go away, substitute a
known-good HandsFreeLink control unit (see page
hi
I i 23-388), and recheck. If the symptom/indication goes

oo
....
2 ,/ , / 7 away, replace the original HandsFreeLink control unit.

Ifthe symptom/indication is still present, replace the
/ ' 1C) 11 12: 13> 14- 15i 16 ambient light/HomeLink unit (see page 22-287).B
W ire side of female term inals navigation unit and the microphone. Replace the
navigation unit and the microphone. Replace the
NO-Go to step 23.
DVD read error messages Sfstem alw afs comes up in in-line diagnostic
Di agnostic Test; Car Status mode
NOTE; 1. When a navigation unit is powered up for the first
time at the factory, the factory diagnosis screen (In
• Refer to the General Troubleshooting for a list of
Line Diag) appears. Normally the factory performs the
common DVD screen error messages and the
steps necessary to verify proper operation and
probable causes (see page 23-293).
terminate the factory diagnosis. Until the proper
• The following Troubleshooting is for the error confirmation sequence is performed, the screen will
messages shown on the error message table (see appear every time the vehicle is started.
page 23-293).
1. Check the DVD-ROM reading surface for scratches In LineDiag StartDiag ExitDiag
and finger prints. Navi ECU XXXXCorrect PIN
GPS Antenna
A r e th e r e a n y s c r a tc h e s o r fin g e r p r in ts o n th e D V D -R O M Display
r e a d in g s u r fa c e ? 6CD Changer
Radio
YES-Clean or replace the DVD-ROM (see page XM
23-294). ■ A/C
Rear Camera
NO-lf the problem occurs occasionally when the
system is cold, this is normal. If the problem occurs
frequently when driving, replace the navigation unit
(see page 23-295).H 2. Follow the steps to prevent the screen from showing
up in the future:
• Hold down the buttons (Menu, Map/Guide, and
Cancel) for about 5 seconds (the Select Diagnosis
Items screen will appear).
• Hold down the Map/Guide button for 5—10 seconds
(A screen with a Complete button appears).
• Touch Complete, and then the Return button (the
system may re-boot).
• Restart the vehicle, and confirm normal operation
by completing the PDI of the navigation system
Service Bulletin.
Navigation Cannot control HVAC by voice 6. Disconnect navigation unit connector A (20P).
command ('07 model) 7. Disconnect front climate control unit 30P connector.
NOTE: 8. Check for continuity between body ground and
• Check and resolve all CAN DTCs before navigation unit connector A (20P) according to the
troubleshooting the navigation system. table.
terminals.
A4 RED/BLU
• Before troubleshooting, make sure you have the A14 YEL/GRN
navigation system anti-theft codes. A15 GRN/BLK
• After troubleshooting, enter the anti-theft codes for
the navigation system.
• Verify that the correct navigation unit is installed for
this model. Go into the Diagnostic mode and use
Version (see page 23-292).
1 2 3 4 5/ / / 9 10
• Make sure that the correct DVD color and version are
installed. 11 12 13 14 15 / / / / 20
2. Check the navigation system function. Is t h e r e c o n t in u it y ?
D o e s t h e n a v ig a t io n s y s t e m f u n c tio n n o r m a lly in a ll o t h e r YES-Repair a short to body ground in the wire(s)
a s p e c ts o f o p e r a tio n ? between the navigation unit and the front climate
control unit.®
YES-Go to step 3.
NO-Go to step 9.
NO-Refer to the navigation symptom
troubleshooting. Resolve any other problems and 9. Check for continuity between navigation unit
then retest the system function.® connector A (20P) according to the table.
3. Check the HVAC system function. From terminal To terminals
D o e s t h e H V A C s y s t e m f u n c tio n n o r m a lly in a ll o th e r (Wire color)
a s p e c ts o f o p e r a tio n ? A4 (RED/BLU) A14, A15
A14 (YEL/GRN) A15
YES-Go to step 4. A15 (GRN/BLK)
NO-Refer to HVAC symptom troubleshooting.
Resolve any other problems and then retest the NAVIGATION UNIT CONNECTORA (20P)
system function.®
4. Go into the navigation diagnostic mode, then select
Navi System Link (see page 23-276). 1 2 3 4 5 / / / 9 10
11 12 13 14 15 / / / / 20
Is t h e A ir - c o n ic o n a n d lin k R E D ?
YES-Go to step 5.
unit (see page 21-187), navigation unit (see page
23-295), and navigation display (see page 23-299) one Is t h e r e c o n t in u it y b e t w e e n a n y o f t h e t e r m in a ls ?
at a time, in this order. Retest the system function YES-Repair a short in the wires between the
after each unit substitution until the problem is navigation unit and the front climate control unit.®
resolved, then replace the malfunctioning unit.®
NO-Go to step 10.
(cont'd)
10. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 13. Check for continuity between navigation unit
connector A (20P) and front climate control unit 30P
11. Measure the voltage between navigation unit
table. Navi gation Front climate Wire color
unit connector control unit
connector
A4 RED/BLU A4 24 RED/BLU
A14 YEL/GRN
A14 17 YEL/GRN
A15 GRN/BLK
A15 6 GRN/BLK

1 2 3 4 5/ / / 9 10 1 2 3 4 5 / / / 9 10
11 12 13 14 15 / / / / 20 11 12 13 14 15 / / 7 20

YES-Go to step 12. FRONT CLIMATE CONTROL UNIT 30P CONNECTOR
NO-Repair a short to power in the wire(s) between the

navigation unit and the front climate control unit.B q— p
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 > x ^ 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
0
0
o
o
CM
CM
CM
CM
CM
00
CM
CD
CSJ
15 16 17 18 19 21 25 27 29
0
0
X
YES-Go to step 14.
NO-Repair an open in the wire(s) between the
navigation unit and the front climate control unit.B
14. Substitute and a known-good front climate control
unit (see page 21-187), reconnect all connectors
disconnected during testing and retest the system
function. NOTE:
• Check and resolve all CAN DTCs before
D o e s th e p r o b le m g o a w a y ?
troubleshooting the navigation system.
YES-Replace the original front climate control unit.B • Check the connectors for poor connections or loose
terminals.
NO-Go to step 15.
15. Substitute a known-good navigation unit (see page navigation system anti-theft codes.
23-295), and retest the system function. • After troubleshooting, enter the anti-theft codes for
D o e s th e p r o b le m g o a w a y ? the navigation system.
YES-Replace the original navigation unit.B this model. Go into the Diagnostic mode and use
NO-Substitute a known-good navigation display (see Version (see page 23-292).
page 23-299) with the same navigation software • Make sure that the correct DVD color and version are
loaded. If the problem goes away, replace the original installed.
navigation display.B • Check any official Honda service website for more
2. Check the navigation system function.
D o e s t h e n a v ig a t io n s y s t e m f u n c tio n n o r m a lly in a ll o t h e r
a s p e c ts o f o p e r a tio n ?
YES-Go to step 3.
NO-Refer to the navigation symptom
troubleshooting. Resolve any other problems and
then retest the system function.B
3. Check the HVAC system function.
D o e s th e H V A C s y s t e m f u n c tio n n o r m a lly in a ll o th e r
a s p e c ts o f o p e r a tio n ?
YES-Go to step 4.
NO-Refer to HVAC symptom troubleshooting.
Resolve any other problems and then retest the
system function.B
4. Go into the navigation diagnostic mode, then select
Navi System Link (see page 23-276).
Is th e A ir - c o n ic o n a n d lin k R E D ?
YES-Go to step 5.
unit (see page 21-188), navigation unit (see page
23-295), and navigation display (see page 23-299) one
at a time, in this order. Retest the system function
after each unit substitution until the problem is
resolved, then replace the malfunctioning unit.B
(cont'd)
6. Disconnect navigation unit connector A (32P). 10. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
7, Disconnect front climate control unit 30P connector. 11. Measure the voltage between navigation unit
8. Check for continuity between body ground and table.
navigation unit connector A (32P) according to the
table. Navigation unit connector Wire color
A4 RED/BLU
Navi gation unit connector Wire color A20 YEL/GRN
A4 RED/BLU A21 GRN/BLK
A20 YEL/GRN
A21 GRN/BLK

n.....— .— n
i_ |Jr
1 2 3 4 5 / / / 9 10
o
CM
17 18 19 21 / / / / 26 / / / /
/

is th e r e le s s th e n 0 .2 V ?
YES-Repair a short to body ground in the wire(s) NO-Repair a short to power in the wire(s) between the
between the navigation unit and the front climate navigation unit and the front climate control unit.B
control unit.B
NO-Go to step 9.

(Wire color)
A4 (RED/BLU) A20, A21
A20 (YEL/GRN) A21
A21 (GRN/BLK)
Is t h e r e c o n t in u it y b e t w e e n a n y o f t h e te r m in a ls ?
YES-Repair a short in the wires between the
13. Check for continuity between navigation unit 14. Substitute and a known-good front climate control
connector A (32P) and front climate control unit 30P unit (see page 21-188), reconnect all connectors
connector according to the table. disconnected during testing and retest the system
function.
Navigation Front climate Wire color
unit connector control unit D o e s th e p r o b le m g o a w a y ?
connector
YES-Replace the original front climate control u n itB
A4 24 RED/BLU
A20 17 YEL/GRN NO-Go to step 15.
A21 6 GRN/BLK
15. Substitute a known-good navigation unit (see page
23-295), and retest the system function.
D o e s th e p r o b le m g o a w a y ?
YES-Replace the original navigation u n itB
NO-Substitute a known-good navigation display (see
page 23-299), with the same navigation software
loaded. Ifthe problem goes away, replace the original
navigation display.B
■q— ?
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
I cm
21
CM
o
CM
CM
CM
15 16 17 18 19 X 23 25 26 27 29 30
YES-Go to step 14.
NO-Repair an open in the wire(s) between the
Display day/night mode does not work or 4. Go into the Diagnostic Menu and use the Car Status
test to check for an ILL+ and illumination cancel
does not work properly
signals (see page 23-282).
NOTE;
Is t h e IL L s ig n a ls O K ?
terminals. YES-Go to step 5.
• Before troubleshooting, make sure you have the NO-Check the ILL+ circuit between the navigation
navigation system anti-theft codes. unit and No. 7 (7.5 A) fuse in the passenger's
• After troubleshooting, enter the anti-theft codes for under-dash fuse/relay box.B
the navigation system.
5. Check the illumi cancel signal.
• Checkfor and resolve all CAN DTCs before
troubleshooting the navigation system. Is t h e illu m i c a n c e l s ig n a l O K ?
this model. Go into the Diagnostic mode and use
Version (see page 23-292). NO-Substitute a known-good navigation unit (see
• Make sure that the correct DVD color and version are page 23-295), front climate control unit (see page
installed. 21-188), and gauge control module (see page 22-371),
• Check any official Honda service website for more one at a time, in this order. Retest the system function
service information about the navigation system. after each unit substitution until the problem is
resolved, then replace the malfunctioning unit.B
• Full brightness on the instrument panel brightness
control when the headlights are turned on causes the
system to stay in the day mode, even when the lights
are on.
1. Adjust the A/C using voice command.
C a n y o u c o n tro l th e A /C b y v o ic e c o m m a n d ?
YES-Go to step 2.
NO-Do the symptom troubleshooting for Navigation
cannot control HVAC by voice command. If the
symptom/indication does not go away, substitute a
known-good navigation unit (see page 23-295). If the
navigation unit. Ifthe symptom/indication does not
go away, substitute a known-good front climate
control unit (see page 21-188). If the
front climate control unit. If the symptom/indication
does not go away, replace the gauge control module
(see page 22-371 ) . ■
2. Make sure the instrument panel brightness control is
not on full brightness. Turn the headlights on, and
adjust the dash brightness to the middle range.
3. Change the day/night mode under Set-up to Auto and
recheck.
D o e s th e d is p la y c h a n g e to d a y a n d n ig h t m o d e s w h e n
tu r n in g th e h e a d lig h ts o n a n d o ff?
time. Check for loose or poor connections.®
System locks up or freezes constantly Vehicle icon constantly spins when moving or
NOTE:
parked
• Make sure that the correct DVD color and version are NOTE:
installed. • This symptom is caused by a defective yaw rate
• Make sure the DVD read surface is clean and scratch sensor. Perform this diagnostic when the vehicle is
free. cold and warm.
• Check any official Honda service website for more • Check any official Honda service website for more
service information about the navigation system. service information about the navigation system.
1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). • Check that the correct DVD color or version is
installed.
2. Remove the DVD and check the DVD reading surface • Make sure the DVD is not damaged or dirty.
for scratches and finger prints.
1. Go into the Diagnostic Menu and use the Yaw Rate
A r e th e r e a n y s c r a tc h e s o r fin g e r p r in ts o n th e D V D -R O M test (see page 23-285).
r e a d in g s u r fa c e ?
A r e th e v a lu e s c o r r e c t?
YES-Clean or replace the DVD-ROM (see page
23-294) and recheck.B YES-The system is OK.B
NO-Go to step 3. NO-Replace the navigation unit (see page 23-295).B

ON (II).
D o e s th e s y s te m re b o o t?
YES-The system is OK at this time. Go into the
Diagnostic mode and use the Unit Check diagnosis
(see page 23-280) to check the navigation unit and
navigation display status. If any status is NG, replace
the affected units.B
Vehicle icon moves by itself Navigation display stays on with ignition

NOTE:
switch in LOCK (0)
• Check the connectors for poor connections or loose NOTE:
terminals. • Check the connectors for poor connections or loose
• Before troubleshooting, make sure you have the terminals.
navigation system anti-theft codes. • Before troubleshooting, get the navigation system
• After troubleshooting, enter the anti-theft code, and anti-theft code.
initialize the navigation system. • After troubleshooting, re-enter the anti-theft code, and
1. Start the engine. re-initialize the navigation system.
• Check for aftermarket accessories that use the same
2. From the main menu, select places, then select any power circuit. A feedback can cause this problem. For
destination, and begin the trip. example, a cell phone, video game console, or an AC.
3. With the vehicle parked, watch the vehicle icon on the inverter plug into the front of rear accessory power
display. sockets.
Does t h e v e h i c l e p o s i t i o n i c o n m o v e b y i t s e l f ? 1. Remove the key from the ignition.

YES-Go to step 4. D o e s th e n a v ig a tio n s c r e e n s ta y o n ?
NO-The system is OK at this time.B YES-Go to step 2.
4. Go into the Diagnostic mode and select Demo Mode, NO-The system is OK at this time.B
under Functional Setup. 2. The vehicle may have been used as a demonstration
Is D e m o M o d e s e t to O N ? vehicle at an event like an auto show. In these events,
power is often jumped to the navigation system so
YES-Set the Demo mode to OFF.B that the ignition key is not needed in the vehicle. At
the end of the show, the jumper wire may not have
been removed. Check the navigation unit C (8P)
connector for a non-factory jumper wire in series with
the factory cable.
Is t h e r e a ju m p e r w ir e ?
YES-Remove the jumper wire, and retest.B
NO-Go to step 3.
3. The navigation display or navigation unit may have Navigation cannot control audio/disc/rear
been jumped to allow the navigation system to run entertainment
without the ignition key.
1. Make sure the anti-theft code for the audio system is
D o e s t h e s y s t e m f u n c tio n w ith t h e ig n it io n s w it c h is in entered.
L O C K (0 )?
YES-Go to step 4. Link test (see page 23-276).
NO-Go to step 5. A r e t h e R a d io a n d th e 6 C D ic o n s r e d ?
4. Remove the navigation display and check to see if the YES-Do the troubleshooting for the voice guidance
display unit connector A (20P) has a non-factory cannot be heard, '07 model (see page 23-244), '08-10
jumper wire in series with the factory connector. models (see page 23-246).B
Is t h e r e a ju m p e r w ir e ? NO-Go to step 3.
YES-Remove the jumper wire, and retest.B 3. Substitute a known-good navigation unit (see page
NO-Go to step 5. 23-295), and recheck.
5. Check the interior lights with the ignition switch is in C a n th e n a v ig a tio n c o n tr o l a u d io /C D ?

LOCK (0). YES-Replace the navigation unit (see page 23-295).B
C a n y o u tu r n o n t h e in t e r io r lig h t s w ith t h e ig n it io n s w itc h NO-Replace the audio unit (see page 23-167).B
o ff?
YES-Troubleshoot the ACC circuit.®
Navigation cannot control XM radio Navigation does not call using the HFL
• Review the audio system diagnostic section. NOTE:
• If you can only tune channel 000,001,174 or 247, make • Always have the customer demonstrate there
sure the audio unit is set to the channel mode (see concern. Compare the operation of this feature in a
owner's manual), if it is set to channel mode, call XM known-good vehicle.
satellite radio customer support and check the • Review the navigation system manual for the proper
account activation status. operation of this feature. If the navigation database
1. Go into the Diagnostic Menu and use the Navi System does not have a phone number listed for the POI you
L i n k test (see page 23-276). are trying to call (for example, a public park), the
navigation system cannot place a call through HFL.
Is o n ly th e X M ic o n r e d ? • You must have the customer's phone, the phone must
YES-Check the connector at the XM receiver and be on the list of the HFL approved phones and
navigation unit connector. Ifthe connection is OK, configured correctly.
substitute a known-good XM receiver (see page • For a current list of HFL approved phones, go to www.
23-170), and recheck. If the symptom goes away, handsfreelink.honda.com or call the HFL support desk
replace the original XM receiver.® at 888-528-7876
NO-Go to step 2. 1. Connect the HDS to the DLC (see page 23-363).
2. Substitute a known-good navigation unit (see page 2. Clearthe DTCs with the HDS.
23-295), and recheck. 3. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), and then back to
C a n th e n a v ig a tio n c o n tr o l th e X M r a d io ? ON (II).
YES-Replace the navigation unit (see page 23-295).® 4. Check for B-CAN DTCs in the data list.
NO-Do the audio system troubleshooting.® A r e t h e r e a n y D T C s in t h e B - C A N s y s t e m s ?

YES-Troubleshoot and repair all CAN related DTCs
and retest.®
NO-Make sure the cell phone is paired to the HFL (see
page 23-366) and working properly, then go to step 5.
6. Disconnect navigation unit connector F (5P) and the
HandsFreeLink control unit 28P connector.
Navigation unit connector Wire color (Wire color)
F1 GRN F1 (GRN) F2, F3, F4, F5*
F2 BLK F2 (BLK) F3, F4, F5‘
F3 RED F3 (RED) F4, F5*
F4 WHT F4 (WHT) F5*
F5 (GRY)”
NAVIGATION UNIT CONNECTOR F (5P) *: Shielding
NAVIGATION UNIT CONNECTOR F (5P)

r n- -fin
1 2 3 4 5
n fh ill,
1 2 3 4 5
Is t h e r e c o n t in u it y ? W ire side o f female term inals

between the HandsFreeLink control unit and the Is t h e r e c o n t in u it y ?
navigation unit. Replace the affected shielded YES-There is a short in the wires between the
harness.! navigation unit and the HandsFreeLink control unit.
NO-Go to step 8. Replace the affected shielded harness.!
NO-Go to step 9.
9. Check for continuity between navigation unit Navigation frequently asks for anti-theft code
connector F (5P) and the HandsFreeLink control unit
and/or needs GPS initialization
28P connector according to the table.
NOTE:
Navigation HandsFreeLink Wire color
unit control unit
connector connector
F1 7 GRN • Check that connectors for poor connections or loose
F2 6 BLK terminals.
F3 20 RED 1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
F4 21 WHT
navigation unit connector C (8P) terminals No. 1 and
NAVIGATION UNIT CONNECTOR F (5P)
No. 2 individually.
pFh "fin NAVIGATION UNIT CONNECTOR C (8P)

1 2 3 4 5
(WHT/RED) ACC (YEL/RED)
CM
1 / 4
00
5 6 7
------------ — Hn
1 2 3 , / / 6 7 8 / V "11I 12 1c514
15 •16 / 18 '19 21
CM
o
/ : 25 27 28
CM
CD
YES-Go to step 3.
W ire side o f female term inals NO-lf the +B or ACC wire does not have voltage,
repair an open in the wire between the driver's
Is t h e r e c o n t in u it y ? under-dash fuse/relay box and the navigation u n itB
YES-Substitute a known-good HandsFreeLink control

unit (see page 23-388), then reconnect all of the
connectors and recheck. If the symptom/indication
goes away, replace the original HandsFreeLink
control unit. Ifthe symptom/indication is still present,
replace the navigation unit (see page 23-295).B
HandsFreeLink control unit and the navigation unit.
CDs cannot be inserted and /or ejected from
the CD changer
NAVIGATION UNIT CONNECTOR C (8P) NOTE: If the navigation screen tilts up and down
normally, refer to the audio system symptom
GND (BLK) troubleshooting for a possible stuck or jammed disc in
- .- ....... the audio disc changer.
n
n_fl
l 1 n
i_jn
1 2 / 4 1. Press the OPEN/CLOSE button to open the navigation
display.
5 6 7 8
y:
2. Remove the navigation display.
s h e
YES-Replace the navigation unit (see page 23-295).! > <
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
NO-Repair an open or high resistance in the wire 9 10 11 1 2 1 3 14 15 16 17 18
X
between navigation unit connector C (8P) terminal
DISP OPEN (BLU)
No. 4 and body ground (G504) (see page 22-49).!
YES-Go to step 4.
NO-Check the connections at the audio disc changer.
If OK, replace the audio disc changer.!
4. Disconnect audio disc changer connector A (18P) and
navigation display connector B (10P).
(cont'd)
5. Checkfor continuity between audio disc changer Display can be opened and/or closed even
connector A (18P) terminal No. 12 and navigation when a CD is being inserted or ejected
display connector B (10P) terminal No. 9.
AUDIO DISC CHANGER CONNECTOR A (18P) Link test (see page 23-276) to check the connection
between the navigation display and the audio disc
changer.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Is t h e 6 C D ic o n r e d ?
9 10 11 12 13 X 14 15 16 17 18
DISP OPEN (BLU) YES-Go to step 2.
------------ NO-Go to step 3.
S— ? DISP OPEN (BLU) 2. Check to see if the navigation display connector B

9 10 (10P) and the audio disc changer connector A (18P)
/ / / / / / / /
are connected securely.
NAVIGATION DISPLAY CONNECTOR B (10P) A r e th e c o n n e c to r s c o n n e c te d s e c u r e ly ?
YES-Check for an open in the wire between
Is t h e r e c o n t in u it y ? navigation display connector B (10P) terminal No. 10
YES-Substitute a known-good navigation display. If and audio disc changer connector A (18P) terminal
the problem is repaired, replace the navigation No. 4. If open, repair the w ire .!
display.! NO-Reconnect the connectors.!
NO-Repair an open in the wire between the audio disc 3. Substitute a known-good navigation display, and
changer and the navigation display.! check to see ifthe display and the audio disc changer
work normally.
Do t h e d i s p l a y a n d t h e a u d i o d i s c c h a n g e r w o r k
n o r m a lly ?
23-299).!
NO-Replace the audio disc changer (see page
23-170).!
OPEN/CLOSE function of the display does not
work 1. Check the CD door. Look for foreign objects, a stuck
1. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). CD, a broken or sticking door.
2. Disconnect navigation display connector B (10P) and Is t h e C D d o o r O K ?

audio disc changer connector A (18P). YES-Go to step 2.
3. Check for continuity between navigation display NO-Repair/replace the audio disc changer.!
2. Remove the audio disc changer (see page 23-170).
NAVIGATION DISPLAY CONNECTOR i (10P) 3. Measure the voltage between navigation display
9 10 NAVIGATION DISPLAY CONNECTOR B (10P)
CD EJECT (PNK)
YES-Repair a short in the wire between the
navigation display and the audio disc changer.!
Is t h e r e a b o u t 3 . 0 V ?
NO-Go to step 4.
YES-Check the connections on navigation display
4. Substitute a known-good navigation display, and connector B (10P). If OK, substitute a known-good
check to see if the display opens and closes normally. navigation display (see page 23-299) and recheck. If
D o e s th e d is p la y w o r k n o r m a lly ? the problem is repaired, replace the navigation
display.!
23-299).! NO-Go to step 4.
NO-Replace the audio disc changer (see page 4. Disconnect navigation display connector B (10P) and
23-170).! audio disc changer connector A (18P).
5. Check for continuity between body ground and audio Navigation display does not open or opens
disc changer connector A (18P) terminal No. 4.
partway
AUDIO DISC CHANGER CONNECTOR A (ISP) 1.Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
CD EJECT (PNK) D o e s th e c lo c k o n th e L C D n a v ig a tio n d is p la y a p p e a r ?

^ J 5 ~ 3 — .....
1 2 3 4 > < YES-Go to step 2.
5 6 7 8
9 10 11 12 13 X 14 15 16 17 18 NO-Go to step 3.
2. Press the Open/Close button.
D o you hear a beep?
YES-Check the navigation display for foreign objects.
If there is none, substitute a known-good navigation
Wire side of female terminals display (see page 23-299), and recheck. Ifthe problem
is repaired, replace the navigation display.!
NO-Remove the navigation display and check for
YES-Repair a short to body ground in the wire loose connections to the display. If the connections
between the navigation display and the audio disc are OK, substitute a known-good navigation display
changer.! (see page 23-299), and recheck. Ifthe problem is
repaired, replace the navigation display.!
NO-Replace the audio disc changer (see page
23-170).! 3. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
navigation display connector A (20P) terminal No. 1
(WnVREp) ACC (YEL/RED)_____________ __
1 2 3 4 5 6/ 8 9 10
o
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
CM
YES-Go to step 7.
NO-lf the + B or ACC wire does not have voltage,
repair an open in the wire between the driver’s
under-dash fuse/relay box and the navigation u n it !
7. Measure the voltage between body ground and Vehicle position icon constantly leaves road,
navigation display connector A (20P) No. 10 terminal
moves erratically* or is displayed very far
and body ground.
from actual vehicle position
NAVIGATION DISPLAY CONNECTOR A (20P) 1. Check the GPS icon on the navigation picture.
GND (BLK) Is t h e G P S ic o n o n th e m a p s c r e e n ?
YES-Do the troubleshooting for GPS icon is white, or
1 2 3 4 5 6 / 8 9 10 not shown (see page 23-244). ■ -
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 NO-Go to step 2.
2. Go into the Diagnostic Menu and use the Yaw Rate
test (see page 23-285) to check the yaw rate sensor.
3. Go into the Diagnostic Menu and use the Car Status
W ire side of female term inals test (see page 23-282) to check the vehicle speed
pulse.
Is th e r e le s s th a n 0 .2 V ? A r e th e y a w r a te s e n s o r a n d v e h ic le s p e e d p u ls e O K ?
YES-Replace the navigation display (see page YES-The problem may be normal. Check to see if the
23-299).■ problem occurs in the same place. If it does, the
NO-Repair an open or high resistance in the wire problem could be in the database. Go to step 4.
between the navigation display and body ground NO-lf the problem is the yaw rate sensor, replace the
(G501) (see page 22-41 ) . ■ navigation unit (see page 23-295). Ifthe problem is the
vehicle speed pulse, troubleshoot the vehicle speed
signal circuit.!
4. Substitute a known-good navigation unit (see page
23-295), and check to see if the problem occurs in the
same place.
D o e s t h e p r o b le m o c c u r in t h e s a m e p la c e ?
YES-The problem is in the database. Report the
problem according to the Navigation System Manual
under Reporting Errors.®
Rearview camera Image does not come on or . Check for continuity between navigation unit
connector D (7P) and body ground according to the
work properly
table.
NOTE:
• Make sure that the correct DVD color (white) and WHT
D1
version are installed. RED
D2
• Check the navigation DVD for scratches or damage. D4 YEL*1
• Do this test with a fully charged battery. GRN*2
• A short in the wiring to the rearview camera can D5 BLK
permanently damage the navigation unit. D6 GRY
D7 GRN*1
1.Turn the ignition switch to ON (II), and start the YEL*2
engine.
*1: '07 model
D o e s th e n a v ig a tio n s c r e e n c o m e o n a n d s h o w a n im a g e
* 2; '08-10 models
w h e n t h e v e h ic le is s t a r t e d ?
YES-Go to step 2. NAVIGATION UNIT CONNECTOR D (7P}
NO-Go to troubleshooting for No picture is displayed
(see page 23-228).!
2. Go into the diagnostic menu and use the Car Status 1 2 / 4 5 6 7
and check the BACK-Reverse indication status (see
page 23-282).
D o e s B A C K g o to [1 ] fro m [0] w h e n th e s h ift le v e r
is p la c e d in t h e R p o s itio n ?
YES-Go to step 3. Is t h e r e c o n t in u it y ?
NO-Repair the back-up signal from the M IC U .! YES-There is a short to body ground in the wire(s)
3. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). between the navigation unit and the rearview camera.
4. Check the connections between navigation unit
connector D (7P) and the rearview camera 6P NO-Go to step 7.
connector.
A r e th e c o n n e c tio n s O K ?
YES-Go to step 5.
NO-Reconnect the connectors.!
5. Disconnect navigation unit connector D (7P) and the
rearview camera 6P connector.
voltage between navigation unit connector D (7P) and
body ground according to the table.
D1 D2, D4, D5, D6, D7 Navigation unit connector Wire color
D2 D4, D5, D6, D7 D1 WHT
D4 D5, D6, D7 D2 RED
D5 D6, D7 D4 YEL*1
D6 D7 GRN*2
D5 BLK
D6 GRY
NAVIGATION UNIT CONNECTOR D (7P)
D7 GRN*1
YEL*2
n -... fl ';..., ..., ....n
D—i__n *1: '07 model
1 2 / 4 5 6 7
* 2: '08-10 models
NAVIGATION UNIT CONNECTOR D (7P)

i__ __r
Is c o n t in u it y b e t w e e n a n y o f t h e t e r m in a l?
1 2 / 4 5 6 7
navigation unit and the rearview camera. Replace the
NO-Go to step 8.
Is t h e r e 0 .1 V o r m o r e ?
YES-There is a short to power in the wire(s) between
the navigation unit and the rearview camera. Replace
NO-Go to step 9.
10. Check for continuity between navigation unit 11. Reconnect the navigation unit connector D (7P) and
connector D (7P) and rearview camera 6P connector rearview camera 6P connector.
12. Substitute and connect a known-good navigation unit
Navigation Rearview Wire color and check the rearview camera image in reverse.
unit connector camera Is t h e r e a r v ie w im a g e O K ?
connector
D1 6 WHT YES-Replace the original navigation unit (see page
D2 5 RED 23-295).B
D4 4 YEL*1
GRN*2 NO-Replace the rearview camera (see page
D5 3 BLK 23-297).11
D7 1 GRN*1
YEL*2
*1: '07 model
*2: '08-10 models
NAVIGATION UNIT CONNECTOR D (7P1
1 6 7
CsJ
/ 4 5
W ire s i de of female term inals
REARVIEW CAMERA 8P CONNECTOR
YES-Go to step 11.
navigation unit and the rearview camera. Replace the
Time is not correct 6. Use the navigation system hard button and touch
screen buttons.
NOTE:
D o e s th e n a v ig a tio n s y s te m r e s p o n d n o r m a lly to in p u ts
fro m th e h a r d b u tto n a n d to u c h s c re e n ?
22- 111).
• Make sure that the correct DVD color and version are YES-Go to step 7.
installed.
NO-Refer to symptom troubleshooting for Navigation
• Check any official Honda service website for more display buttons do not work or respond properly.B
service information and software updates for the
navigation system. 7. Check the clock settings in CLOCK ADJUSTMENT of
• For problems with the rearview camera, do the the navigation set-up screen (See navigation users
rearview camera does not come on or work properly guide for more details).
troubleshooting. A r e th e s e ttin g s c o r r e c t f o r y o u r r e g io n (tim e z o n e ) a n d
• Check the connectors for poor connections or loose tim e o f t h e y e a r ( D S T : D a y lig h t S a v in g s T im e )?
terminals.
YES-Go to step 8.
navigation and audio system anti-theft codes. NO-Correct the settings, and recheck.B
• Before troubleshooting, write down all the audio
presets and re-enter them after repairs are complete.
8. Check the time displayed on the Clock Adjustment
screen.
• Verify the concern and compare the system operation
to a known-good vehicle with the same software Is t h e tim e d is p la y e d o n t h e C lo c k A d ju s t m e n t s c r e e n th e
loaded whenever possible. Ifthe concern is duplicated s a m e a s th e k n o w n -g o o d s o u rc e ?
in the known-good vehicle, then it can be considered a
characteristic of the system.
NO-Go to step 9.
1. Check any official Honda service website for any
service information about the navigation system and 9. Check the time displayed on the Clock Adjustment
the clock. screen to the LCD clock.
A r e th e r e a n y s o f t w a r e p a t c h e s o r s e r v ic e in fo r m a tio n Is th e tim e d is p la y e d o n th e C lo c k A d ju s t m e n t s c r e e n th e
r e la te d to th e c lo c k ? s a m e a s th e tim e d is p la y e d o n th e L C D c lo c k ?
YES-Apply the patch or information as directed and YES-
recheck.B
• '05-07 models: The system is OK at this time.
NO-Go to step 2. • '08-10 models: Go to step 10.
2. Park the vehicle outside with a clear view to the NO-Substitute a known-good navigation unit (see
horizon. page 23-295), and recheck. If the symptom/indication
3. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). goes away, replace the navigation unit. Ifthe
4. Press OK on the navigation disclaimer screen. navigation display (see page 23-299).B
5. Compare the time displayed on the LCD clock against 10. Check the time displayed on the Clock Adjustment
another reliable source like a cell phone or a screen to the LCD clock (Do not select OK on the
known-good vehicle. disclaimer screen. Wait 30 seconds for the screen to
change).
Is t h e t im e d is p la y e d o n t h e L C D c lo c k t h e s a m e a s t h e
k n o w n -g o o d s o u rc e ? Is t h e tim e d is p la y e d o n t h e C lo c k A d ju s t m e n t s c r e e n t h e
s a m e a s th e L C D c lo c k ?
YES-The system is OK at this timeB
System Diagnostic Mode
Start-up procedure and Diagnostic Menu Navi System Link

1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). • This diagnostic tests the cables connecting the
navigation components. Ensure that the ignition
A. Ifthe battery has not been disconnected, then
switch is in the ON (II) position. When the diagnosis
press and hold the Menu, Map/Guide, and
Cancel buttons. Keep them pressed for about begins, you hear a bong sound. The system is in a
5 seconds. The display screen then goes Detecting mode, and is waiting for all items in white to
directly to the Diagnostic Menu. be tested. This includes the voice control switch
(navigation TALK/BACK buttons), and microphone.
B. If the battery was disconnected and
reconnected prior to this test and you do not Press the navigation TALK button on the steering
have the anti-theft security code or the wheel, and in a normal voice, say "testing". The Talk
Acquiring GPS Reception screen is indicator on the screen should turn green, and the
displayed, hold down the Menu and Zoom voice level indicator should move to at least the 6th
Out button. You will see the Navi System Link bar to pass. Next, press the navigation BACK button.
screen. Push the joystick to go directly to the The Cancel indicator should turn green.
Diagnostic Menu.
• If all of the communication lines connecting the
NOTE: This only allows access to the diagnostic system components, and the navigation TALK/BACK
screens. All other Navigation functions are disabled. buttons/microphone check out OK (all block diagram
items green), then the OK indicator turns green.
DIAGNOSTIC MENU SCREEN • If there is a problem with the system, the faulty system
component Item turns red, and the screen shows NG
( Select Diagnosis Items ) I Return j in red. Use the troubleshooting index, and other
diagnostic screens to help locate the problem.
Navi System | GPS Information
Monitor Check • The indication on the screen will not change until you
1 Yaw Rate
Unit Check | Tire Calibrate cycle the ignition switch. After repairing the affected
Car Status 1 Functional Set up cable or system, repeat this diagnosis.
f Version NOTE: Green boxes and green OK indicate that the
communications lines (cables) are intact. This
diagnosis does not necessarily imply that the
individual components are functioning properly. For
instance, the GPS antenna wire may be crushed, but
still show as green. A road test, or other diagnosis
2. After the display changes to the Diagnostic Menu, may be necessary to find the problem.
select the item you want to check, and the test starts, • Select Return to return to the Diagnostic Menu or the
To return to the previous screen, select Return. Exit Diag button to exit.
• Navi System (Link)
• Monitor Check NOTE: The Mic Level indicator must reach the 6th bar or
greater to pass the test.
• Unit Check
• Car Status
• GPS Information ( Navi System Link ] 1 Returf1
• Yaw Rate
OK
• Tire Calibrate X
• Functional Setup n « n -
NavLECU
• Version foisplayJ— H HFL J G S ®
('08-09modelswithHFL)
6CD j—| Radio j—^ XM J [ Exit Diag~
Monitor Check RGB Color
Overview of the navigation display This screen verifies that the navigation display is
receiving the video (R, G, B and Composite sync) signals
• The navigation display communicates with the
properly. The three primary colors should all appear
navigation unit over its own GA-Net bus. Information
without distortion. The combination of all three should
is sent to the navigation unit whenever the user
produce a central white section. Ifthe picture has lines in
activates the touch screen, or buttons. Information
it, or scrolls horizontally or vertically, and any the colors
sent by the navigation unit to the navigation display
are missing, troubleshoot for a Composite sync and
includes commands to control the LCD back light.
color signal problem (see page 23-230).
• The security system protects the navigation display by
daisy-chaining the security signal through it, and then
passing the signal to the audio unit.
• The illumination input from the gauge brightness
control provides back lighting for the buttons
surrounding the screen.
These screens allow you to troubleshoot the navigation
display. Select the item you want to troubleshoot, and
follow the diagnostic instructions.
( Monitor Cheek ] 1 Return |

RGB Color Color Pattern Gray Tone
Gray Tone Monitor Adjustment
White Raster Touch Panel Check This screen looks for problems with contrast. You
Black Raster Touch Panel Calibration should be able to see the changes from bar to bar across
the scale. It is normal for the 2 bars on either side to
appear the same. If you can't see the shade changes
from bar to bar, replace the navigation display.
[ Gray Tone i Returin |

System Diagnostic Mode (cont'd)
White Raster Color Pattern

This diagnostic screen checks for pixels that may be The chart below shows the colors being used for the
dead (off). The entire display must be white. If there are Map and Menu screens. This is for factory use only. To
dead pixels, replace the navigation display. check the color signal use the RGB test.
( W hite Raster ) 1 Return |
Black Raster Monitor Adjustment

This diagnostic screen checks for pixels that may be This allows you to center the navigation display. Use the
stuck on. The entire display must be black. If pixels are joystick to move the picture up/down or left/right. It is
stuck on, replace the navigation display. unlikely that you will ever need to adjust the monitor
position. The Default button will reset the display
position to factory specifications.
( Monitor Adjustment } 1 Return |
Setting (0,0)
Default (0,0)
Default Tuning
Touch Panel Check Touch Panel Calibration
The panel touch sensing system consists of a touch The display screen uses a touch sensitive membrane
sensitive resistive membrane covering the display, instead of fixed infrared beams. This means that every
contrary to other systems using infrared beams, the location of the entire surface of the display is touch
screen has to be physically touched to make it work. The sensitive.
display has capability of an almost infinite number of
For the display to be compatible with earlier navi
touch locations. However, to be compatible with earlier
systems, the system software creates touch zones
systems, the software only senses the locations shown
on the diagnostic screen below. Every possible touch emulating the touch switches created by the
button position is shown on this diagnostic screen. intersections of 20 vertical and 10 horizontal infrared
beams. This diagnosis allows alignment of these
Touching one of these areas should cause its color to artificially created zones with the location of the button's
reverse, and you should hear a beep . If the touch images on the screen.
locations are off slightly (by less than one touch
Normally this should never need adjustment, and it is
location), use the Touch Panel Calibration diagnosis to
used only to adjust the touch locations for parallax (the
re-align the touch zones with the screen image. If any
touch locations appear different when viewed at an
areas of the screen either don't respond, or respond at
angle). However, if an adjustment is necessary, follow
some other location when touched, then replace the
navigation display. this procedure:
• The screen consists of four test areas consisting of a +
NOTE: Unlike earlier screens that used infrared sensors, button and an adjacent box with a black border. Touch
direct sunlight does not affect this test. the four + buttons to verify alignment. If, when you
touch a + button, the adjacent box becomes yellow,
then do the following. Continue to hold the + button,
and simultaneously move the joystick to shift the
Return 1 screen slightly from side to side, or up and down. The
adjustment is complete when you can touch all four +
boxes and none of the adjacent boxes becomes
yellow.
• To store any changes you make, push in the joystick.
• To reset the touch zones to the factory default, touch
the Map/Guide button.
• Press Return to exit the diagnosis.
+ | Return |
Push Map/Guide to reset the parameter.

i+ i I Push Joy stick to set it. 1 l+ l
±
Unit Check Radio
To start the test, select the item you want to check. Ifthe NG is indicated, checkfor loose audio unit
connectors and recheck. If NG is still indicated, do the
troubleshooting for the audio system.
( Select Check Units ) 1 Return

Display PC Card Info. ( Radio ) 1 Return
Radio Hard Key %
Navi ECU Connection OK OK
6CD Connection OK
Display
This diagnosis does additional checks on the
communication bus between the navigation unit and the
navigation display. In addition, the internal electronics
and touch screen functionality are confirmed.
• When the connection is NG, first check for loose
terminals at the navigation unit and the navigation
display connections. Next check for an open or short
in the communication line between the navigation unit
and the navigation display. If you find the line to have
an open or short, replace the affected shielded
harness.
• If the ROM or RAM is NG, replace the navigation
display.
• The version represents the software version in the
display.
• 6 CD connection checks the status of the connection
between the audio disc changer and the audio unit. An
NG represents an open in that circuit.
• Display Lid indicates if the front display panel is Open
or Closed. This should always say Closed.
( Display ) 1 Return |
Connection OK
ROM OK
RAM OK
Version -
6CD Connection OK
Display Lid Close
This screen looks for problems with the navigation unit. There is no PC card in the PC card slot, and the screen
When you initiate this diagnosis, the navigation unit should say, PC card is not inserted. Do not insert any
may treeze or delay up to a minute while the diagnosis card or object into the slot.
runs.
• If V-RAM or D-RAM is NG, then replace the navigation
unit.
• If GPS indicates NG (ANT), check the entire GPS ( PC Card Informat i on ) 1 Return |
antenna wire from the navigation unit to the antenna.
If the wire is crushed or damaged, try a known-good
antenna. If this diagnosis reads OK, then replace the
GPS antenna. Ifthe diagnosis still reads NG (ANT), PC Card is not inserted.
then replace the navigation unit.
• DVD ROM represents the database version on the
DVD. You can also find this information in Setup
Screen 4 by selecting System Information.
• Serial No. should be the same as the serial number
found on the underside of the navigation unit. You
need this number to obtain the security code from the If the factory provides a PC card and instructs you to
Interactive Network (iN) system. insert a card, then the screen displays the Manufacturer,
• Mem Clear is for factory use, and should never be and Product Name as shown in the following screen.
used unless instructed by the factory. Accidental
selection will erase the customer's personal data,
PINS, and settings. If selected, a pop-up box appears
asking if you want to clear the memory. If so, select PC Card Information ] | Return |
Yes. (
Manufacturer
XK5QQCX
Product Name
XXXKXXX
j
Hard Key Car Status

This diagnosis checks the status of each of the hard Use this screen to confirm that navigation unit is
buttons surrounding the navigation display. When you properly receiving input signals. Signals equal to (0) are
press each hard button, the corresponding item on the OFF, and signals equal to (1) are ON. If the value on the
screen should flash blue. Touch the return key to exit. display does not match the actual vehicle status, then
check the wire carrying the signal.
• VSP-Vehicle Speed Pulse from PCM
(Pin 6 of navigation unit C-connector)
( Hard Key ~ ] I Return 1 a) OFF (0) when vehicle is not moving
m Keep Pushing t o Return. b) ON ( 1) when vehicle is moving
MAP GUIDE □ □ MENU The VSP comes from the PCM as a dedicated signal.
CANCEL INFO
ffSl
ISO \A JJ Mi Internally, the navigation unit compares the actual VP on
ZOOM OUT AUDIO
ZOOM IN
the map against street data to adjust the pulse to speed
SETUP
□ □ scaling factor. As this scaling factor becomes more
0 accurate, the Level gradually increases from 0 to 10.
• BACK-Reverse indication from multiplex integrated
control unit (Pin 5 of navigation unit C-connector)
a) OFF (0) when shift lever is in any position other than
reverse
b) ON (1) when shift lever is in reverse
The Back signal is used by the navigation unit to allow
the map screen to show the VP moving backwards when
in reverse and to trigger the back-up camera. This signal
is needed because the Speed Pulse does not provide any
directional information to the system.
• ILL-lllumination Indication
(Pin 5 of navigation unit A-connector)
a) OFF (0) when parking lights, or headlights are off
b) ON ( 1) when parking lights, or headlights are on
This signal is used by the navigation unit to determine
whether to put the navigation screen into the Day or
Night brightness mode. (Setup screen 1)
• DVD Lid-senses if DVD door is open
a) (Close) when door is closed
b) (Open) when door is open
The navigation unit uses a microswitch to detect this.
If open is indicated when the door is closed, replace the
navigation unit.
# ILL CANCEL GPS Information
a) OFF (0) when dash brightness is not set to
maximum brightness This screen shows the current status of GPS reception.
The circular diagram shows the current location of the
b) ON (1) when headlights are on, but dash brightness
GPS satellites (yellow numbers) as they would appear in
is set to max brightness
the sky. The outer circle represents the horizon (0
This item detects whether the illumination cancel degrees elevation). The middle and inner circles
function is in use. The illumination cancel function is represents 30 and 60 degrees respectively. The very
activated by rotating the dash brightness knob fully center of the diagram (90 degrees elevation) is directly
clockwise (full bright) when the headlights off (day overhead.
mode) and on (night mode). The signal is passed from
Nearby obstructions, like tall buildings, will block
the gauge control module by B-CAN to the climate
satellites in that direction. That is why it is necessary to
control ECU. From there the signal travels to the
troubleshoot GPS reception issues in an open area. The
navigation unit on the climate UART bus.
satellites shown on the diagram correspond to the PRN
number in the GPS Details screen. There are always 24
active GPS satellites in orbit. Because satellites fail, and
have to be removed from service, spares are always
( Car Status ] I Return parked in orbit, ready to be activated. This is why the
PRN (satellite ID number) can be greater than 24.
VSP m ILL [0]
NOTE:
BACK [0] DVD Lid Close • When you use this screen for troubleshooting, park
the vehicle outside, away from buildings, tall trees,
ILL CANCEL [0] and high-tension wires for at least 10 minutes with the
j engine running.
• Metallic window tinting on the front window or
after-market electronic accessories mounted near the
navigation unit, GPS antenna, or navigation display
can interfere with GPS acquisition.
• The Number of Satellites box shows the number of
acquired satellites (maximum of 12). It should contain
4 or more icons. If not, troubleshoot for GPS icon is
white, or not shown (see page 23-244).
• The Current Position shows latitude, longitude, and
elevation (in meters). If there are less than 4 satellites,
the elevation can be grossly inaccurate.
• The Date/Time field shows the current date, and also a
time that includes daylight savings and other offsets
entered by the customer in Setup screen 2 Adjust
Time Zone/Clock.
[ GPS Information J | Return |
Number of Satellites
1/
Current Position 1
Latitude: Nxx°xx'xx" T
Longitude: Exxx°xx'xx" '
Elevation: 0 feet q In Use
xxxx.xx.xx xx:xx:xx O Search v
GPS Detail • The box TS/AS and HDopA/Dop is for factory use.
• The Speed and Direction information is updated in
By pressing and holding the MENU button for real time when driving, and can be used to detect
10 seconds, a GPS Detail screen appears. This screen intermittent speed sensor problems.
displays real time incoming satellite positional data.
• The Date/Time Information is the same as in Setup
Most of the information shown on this screen is for
screen 2 Adjust Time Zone/Clock.
factory use, however some of the data can indicate
partial GPS signal interference. • If the 3D icon is shown above the yellow dots, this
implies that at least 4 satellites are available for map
NOTE: The data shown is an example only. positioning, and the GPS indicator on the map screen
will be green. See the Global Positioning System
detailed explanation in the System Description (see
page 23-197).
( GPS Detail ) I Return • If the row of data in the table below begins with a
'TS:xx " HDo p:xx.x Speed: x.xMi/h
yellow dot, the AZI and EL fields can be used to locate
Date :xxxx.xx.xx
AS:xx VDo p:xx.x Direction: x ° Time:xx:xx:xx each satellite on the circular GPS diagram (see prior
PRN ST AZi EL C/N ACC screen).
o XX XX XXX XX XXX XX s
o XX XX XXX XX XXX XX The table of values as shown define the terms at the top
o XX XX XXX XX XXX XX 1/2
o XX XX XXX XX XXX XX of the columns in the GPS Detail screen.
o XX XX XXX XX XXX XX
XX XX XXX XX XXX XX E Column Description Problem
indication
Active Active satellites If 3D is missing
(Yellow Dot) follow no GPS
icon is white, or
not shown (see
page 23-244).
PRN The satellite ID
number
ST The status: If all 0, then follow
0 = cannot view or no GPS icon is
searching, white, or not
2 = acquiring shown
troubleshooting
(see page 23-244).
AZI Azimuth, the angle
(0—360) clockwise
from north
EL Elevation from the
horizon
(90 deg is overhead)
C/N Receiver sensitivity Healthy signal is
4 9 -5 2 ,
no signal: 27—33
ACC Satellite accuracy
A Shows view of all
1/2 satellites in two
or screen views 1/2 or
2/2 2/2
V
Yaw Rate Example: Vehicle turning
Normal Abnormal
This diagnosis checks the yaw rate sensor in the
Sensor 2.678 V Sensor 2.623 V
navigation unit. This device detects when the vehicle (left turn) (no
turns, and repositions the vehicle position icon on the 2.478 V change on
map screen. For more detailed information, see the yaw (right turn) turns)
rate sensor theory of operation under System • Auto tuning should always be on. If it is off, turn it on.
Description (see page 23-196).
• Sensitivity study represents the status of the internal
• Sensor indicates the voltage output from the yaw rate tuning function. At initialization, this value starts at 6
sensor. It should indicate about 2.500 V when the and increases to # 10 as the internal correction values
vehicle is stopped. become more accurate.
• Offset is the reference voltage or standard within the • The settings CCW Cal Factor, CW Cal Factor, and Set
yaw rate sensor. It also should indicate about 2.500 V are for factory use only. THIS SHOULD NEVER BE
when the vehicle is stopped. USED.
• A sensor output voltage LOWER than the Offset NOTE: Do not try to tune the yaw rate sensor without
voltage indicates that the vehicle is turning to the instructions from American Honda.
right
A sensor output voltage HIGHER than the Offset
voltage indicates that the vehicle is turning to the left.
• The yaw rate offset and sensor should both indicate
( Yaw Rate ) I Return
about 2.500 V when the vehicle is stopped. If either
reads zero or 5.000 V, replace the navigation unit. Sensor x.xxxV
• The yaw rate offset and sensor should be within + / — Offset x.xxxV
0.01 V of each other when the vehicle is stopped. The CCW Factor 0.0% ED
sensor value should change relative to t offset as the m
Tuning
vehicle turns while driving. If not, replace the CW Factor 0.0% ED
m Set
navigation unit.
Example: Vehicle stopped
Normal Abnormal
Offset 2.526 V Offset 2.526 V
Sensor 2.516— Sensor 2.623 V
2.536 V
Example: Vehicle turning
Normal Abnormal
Offset 2.526 V Offset 2.526 V
Yaw Rate Tuning Tire Calibrate

This diagnosis allows you to graphically display As the vehicle moves, the navigation system receives
problems with the yaw rate sensor. speed pulses from the PCM. These pulses are converted
• The ANG-Disp value accumulates any differences using a conversion factor to a mph speed that moves the
between the offset, and sensor voltages (see Yaw Rate vehicle position (VP) on the map. The navigation system
diagnosis). When the sensor functions properly, the has an internal tuning function that generates and
random changes in these two voltage generally refines this factor based on actual driving. The Level
cancels out, so the value is 0. However if one voltage is indicates the status of the tuning. At navigation
consistently higher than the other, then the ANG-Disp initialization, it begins at 0, and increases to 10 as the
value accumulates the constant change. navigation system is used.
• The Reset button temporarily clears the angular • The Auto Tuning is factory set to ON, and should
accumulation (ANG-Disp), and clears the display dots. remain on.
• Do not touch the CCW or CW, or Set buttons. These • The Study indicates the tuning status. If it is less than
are used for factory setup only. 10, the unit is still calibrating.
• The Tire-Cal. Tuning and Set should not be used. It is
For gross problems with the sensor, the stationary test
for factory use only.
usually confirms whether the sensor is defective. For
yaw rate issues related to driving, do the road test
described below.
1. Stationary test: If the VP icon spins in place and the
( T ire-C alib rate ) |_Rgtum
ANG-Disp value slowly increases or decreases in
value, the yaw rate sensor is defective. Replace the I ON I
Auto Tun i ng OFF
navigation unit. [ OFF I
Study LevelO
2. Road test: Drive the vehicle on a very straight road. T ire—Cal. Tuning xx.xx%
Enter the diagnostic mode, select Yaw rate, and touch m
the Tuning button. While driving down a straight | Set |
road, the white dots should trace a straight line across
the screen. However, if you are driving on a straight
road, and you notice the dots constantly dropping
down or heading up as you drive, the navigation
unit's yaw rate sensor is defective. You can touch
Reset to clear ANG-Disp, and the dotted line.
3. If either test fails, please enter Yaw rate sensor
defective for the problem description, on the
Navigation core return form.
Functional Setup • However, if the factory provides a PC card, insert it
into the card slot (label side up), and then slide the PC
Select the item you want to check. card slot door shut. Follow the factory procedure for
gathering test data and properly ending the test.
Functional Setup ___ [Return j
Log Data \\ Mic Level 1 J | Return |

[ Log Data
GPS Send Time ll Save Users Memory]
Demo Mode
Logging VP Data OFF [ on j | OFF|
Log Data
GPS Send Time
This screen allows the factory to collect log data to
troubleshoot navigation system issues. This screen is for factory use only. It allows adjustment
• Normally there is no card i n the PC card Slot, and the of the GPS time. This display updates in real time.
PC card slot door should always be closed. The screen • GPS Time is the time as received from the GPS
should look like below. satellites. It is in Greenwich Mean Time (GMT).
• System Time is the internal time used by the
navigation unit to calculate your position on the map.
It is also in Greenwich Mean Time (GMT).
( Log Data ] 1 Return • Display Time is the time shown on Setup screen 2
Adjust Time Zone/Clock, and reflects any changes due
to daylight savings time or time adjustments entered
by the customer.
PC Card is not inserted. • Date, Hour, Minute, and Set should not be used.
Demo Mode Mic Level

This screen is for factory use only and should always be This diagnosis allows you to independently test the
set to OFF. Occasionally this setting is turned ON when microphone and the navigation TALK and navigation
vehicles are being used at Auto Shows or similar events. BACK buttons. They are used to activate the voice
Turning this feature on, allows a route to a destination control system. The microphone is located near the map
when the vehicle is stationary. light in the ceiling. It is directional, and works best if the
voice is coming from the drivers seat.
• Press the navigation TALK button on the steering
wheel, wait unit you hear a beep and in a normal voice
Demo Mode Return say "testing" The Talk indicator on the screen should
momentarily turn green, and the text Now
Demo ON on off Recording... should appear in yellow. Ifthe Mic Level
indicator on the screen does not briefly turn green,
Speed Rate 1200 ms check the wiring from the navigation TALK button to
the navigation unit.
• If there is no Mic Level movement when you speak,
then you should check the wire running from the
microphone to the navigation unit.
• If the Mic Level bar is full or almost full without you
speaking or other back ground noise, replace the
microphone and recheck.
• Press the navigation BACK button on the steering
wheel. This should cause the Cancel indicator on the
screen to momentarily turn green. If it does not briefly
turn green, check the wiring from the steering wheel
navigation BACK button to the navigation unit.
NOTE:
• The Mic Level indicator must reach the 6th bar or
greater to pass the test.
• If the radio is off, and there is movement in the
indicator-even without speaking, then ensure that the
vents are not blowing on the microphone.
• This should resolve voice control complaints such as:
- sometimes the system does not understand my
commands.
- 1have to shout at the navi for a command to be
recognized.
- The system just says "pardon".
( Mic Level ) I Return

Mic Level Now Recording!!
M i l l I I I I U
Steering Switch
[ 1( back )
Save Users Memory 1. Select EXPORT button to move the customer's data
from the original navigation unit to the PC card. Select
When replacing the navigation unit, this function allows YES on the Export User Data Confirmation screen.
the dealer to transfer the customer's personal data to the The process takes only a couple of seconds. The
new navigation unit. The transferred information system stores two files on the card.
includes their Setup settings, and personal addresses.
The dealer inserts a PC card to the navigation unit, and NOTE: Ifthe EXPORT button is grayed out, check the
then selects the Save Users Memory function. The two PC card's edge connector, and the pins inside the
functions in this diagnostic screen are EXPORT and navigation unit (with a flashlight) for damage.
IMPORT. EXPORT saves the customer's data to the PC
card, and IMPORT moves the PC card files to the new
navigation unit. Save Users Memory Return
L D
Export User Data?
Save Users M emory | | Return |
EXPORT ~11 IMPORT j Yes No
2. After installing the customer's original DVD in the

new navigation unit, allow the system to boot up.
Insert the PC card in the new navigation unit and enter
the Save Users Memory in the navigation system
Before starting this function, see the PC Card FAQs for
diagnostic mode.
information regarding PC cards, and how to use this
function. 3. Select IMPORT button to move the two files stored by
the Export process from the PC card to the new
navigation unit. Select YES on the Import User Data
Confirmation screen. When the transfer is finished (a
few seconds) the system will automatically reboot.
After the system reboots, remove the PC card from
the PC slot.
NOTE: Ifthe IMPORT button is grayed out, check ifthe
Model and the Program Flash shown on the Version
screen are the same.
| Save Users Memory | | Return |
c D
Import User Data?
| Yes | | No |
PC Card FAQs
Question Answer
Where do we buy the flash memory or You need a PCMCIA type II adaptor and a flash memory chip. You can
adaptors, and what do we ask for? purchase them at a computer, or office supply store. The card is have
the same size and shape as the PC card in the HDS. Adaptors that
accept multiple flash types are not recommended.
What memory flash chips will work with The flash memory devices that have been tested include Compact
what adaptors? Flash (CF), and ATA style (like the card in the HDS). Other card types
and flash memory chips may work, but have not been tested.
What capacity card do 1need for this A memory chip with capacity of 64 MB to 2 GB will work. The two files
function? moved to the PC card during export are less than a Megabyte in size.
Should the dealer have a dedicated PC card Yes, treat the PC card as a dedicated "'special tool" that you can use
for the Export and Import navigation any time you need to transfer the navigation personal files to a new
function? navigation unit on '08 or later vehicles.
What device can 1use to maintain the PC Any computer store sells USB style card readers that accept the PC
card, and delete files? card, and allow you to perform file maintenance on your PC card.
Most laptops also accept the PC card.
Can we move the customer's data to No, the files are model specific and will only load into a navigation unit
different models? with the same part number.
Can we move the customer's data to the The customer's files can only be transferred to a new navigation unit if
same vehicle with a different software the Model and the Program Flash shown on the Version screen are the
version? same. Files cannot be transferred to the different model and different
versions.
Will other files on the PC card like images or No, the system simply adds two small files that are recognized by the
music files prevent the Export/Import new navigation unit when performing the import function. However, it
function from working? the PC card is full, the Export function won't work correctly.
Do 1have to delete the files on the PC card After the transfer of customer data to the new navigation unit, the files
after each transfer of the customer's data? remain on the PC card. Since this is confidential information, Honda
recommends deleting these files after the transfer. Please note that
each time you export navigation files of the same model and version,
the files are overwritten. Over time the PC card will accumulate two
files for each version of the 8 or so Honda navigation models.
Ifthe memory card needs formatting, what It is unlikely that the PC card will ever need formatting, if it does, use
format should 1use? the FAT (file allocation table) file system.
1can't enter the navigation diagnostic mode Some internal navigation unit ECU failures may make it impossible to
to do the Export/Import function. How can 1 use the Export/Import function. |
transfer the customer's data?
Question Answer
Why wont the Export or Import functions • The card may not be fully inserted into the slot. Eject the PC card,
work? What do 1check as part of and inspect for warping or damage to the edge connector. Never
troubleshooting? use excessive force to insert a PC card. This can damage the pins in
the rear of the slot.
• The PC card may not contain files that are recognized by the new
navigation unit. Navigation data can only be transferred between
navigation units with the same Model code, and with the same navi
Program flash version.
• The flash memory chip type may not be accepted by the system.
Only Compact Flash and ATA cards have been tested.
• The card's PCMCIA adaptor may prevent a known-good card from
being recognized. Avoid multi-slot type PCMCIA adaptors that
accept several different flash memory types.
• The card may be full and as a result the files are stored, but without
any data. Export and import appear to function, but move nothing.
Delete unused files from the PC card.
• There may not be any files on the PC card. If the PC card has a write
protection switch, make sure it is turned off before using the Export
function.
• Although flash memory chips are reliable, occasionally they
develop bad sectors or other formatting errors that prevents them
from accepting files. The PC card should be reformatted using the
FAT format.
• The PC card may have been formatted using the format NTFS. Only
the FAT format is accepted by the system.
• Hard Disc Drive (HDD) cards may not work properly in the system
and can overheat or quit functioning, particularly in a hot vehicle.
They are not recommended.
• Before performing the Import function, ensure that the customer's
original navigation DVD is loaded into the new navigation unit and
working properly.
Version • The DVD labeled United States is for the US market

and contains maps for the contiguous 48 US states,
This screen displays the current version of the program, Hawaii, and some southern portions of Canada.
and allows the loading of a new version of the program Customers wanting additional northern coverage in
either from a CD/DVD or from a PC card. Canada, can purchase a Canada DVD by contacting
The D-RAM Program version should always be greater the DVD fulfillment desk.
than or equal to the Disc Program version. The mapped • The DVD labeled Canada, is for the Canada market,
database version is the date of the database on the DVD. and contains maps for all of Canada, plus some of the
northern US states. If customers with this DVD require
The Model code is SHJA {'07 model) or SHJX ('08-10 full US coverage (including states like Florida and
models), and is for factory use only. This code is stored Texas), they may purchase a United States DVD by
on a chip in the navigation unit. Therefore, every model contacting the DVD fulfillment desk.
has a unique part number for the navigation unit.
NOTE: If any model number other than SHJA or SHJX is
displayed, replace the navigation unit with the correct
part. The model code tells the navigation unit what
software to load off the DVD.
Do not use Download, unless instructed to do so by the
factory.
*07 model
( Version ) I Return |
Program Flash x.xx.xxBN 1
Program Disc -
Program Card -
IPL X.XXX.XXX
APL .
DBOOT X.X.XXX
System uCom if a im ....
Model SHJA DownLoad
*08-10 models (With premium audio system)
Version Return
Program Flash x.xx.xxKA
Program Disc
Program Card
IPL
APL
DBOOT X.X.XXX
System uCom X.XXX.
Model SHJX DownLoad
'08-09 models (Without premium audio system)
( Version ) I Return
Program Flash x.xx.xxKA
Program Disc
Program Card
IPL X.XXX.XXX
APL
DBOOT X.X.XXX
System uCom X.XXX.
Model SHJX-A0 DownLoad
Error Message Table
Screen Error Message Solution
Navigation system is unable to acquire a proper Make sure there is nothing on the dashboard blocking the GPS
GPS signal. antenna. If not, move the vehicle to an open space away from tall
buildings, trees, etc. Aftermarket metallic window tinting and
other aftermarket devices can affect the GPS reception.
Navigation unit door is open or No DVD disc Make sure the correct white-labeled (possibly gray for Canada)
installed. Please check system. navigation DVD is installed with the label side up and the
navigation unit door is snapped fully closed (see page 23-294).
PC card slot door is open. Please check system. Make sure that the sliding door for the PC card is fully closed (see
page 23-294).
No DVD disc, please check system. Check that the navigation DVD is installed with the label side up
(see page 23-294).
Display temp is too high. System will shut down This message appears briefly when the display temperature is
until display cools down. too high, and the display turns off until the temperature cools
down. The system turns back on when the display cools down.
Outside temperature is low, system will take The temperature is below —22 °F (—30 °C) and the navigation
awhile to start up. ECU has difficulties reading the DVD. The system will start up
when the temperature warms up.
DVD disc reading error (unformatted), please Check the DVD source for deep scratches or other damage. Make
consult your dealer. sure you are using an official Honda navigation DVD (white
(possibly gray for Canada) in color). The system cannot read
other mapping databases or video DVDs. Check any official
Honda service website for more service information about
updating the navigation system.
Route has not been completed. Please try again Routing to or from a place (new area) that is not in the database.
from a different location. Try planning a different route to or from a different location.
No alternate route found. Original route will be No alternate route method was found. The original route will be
guided. used.
This destination cannot be found in database. The destination was not found in the database. Try another
destination nearby, or select the destination with the joystick.
Please operate climate control after starting The engine needs to be running to operate the climate control
engine. system (no signal from the front climate control unit to the
navigation unit).
Forced Starting of Display DVD-ROM Replacement

SCS Service Connector 07PAZ-0010100 • Check any official Honda service website for more
1. Connect the SCS service connector (A) to the • Do not replace the DVD-ROM to give a customer a
navigation service check connector (B) located behind
preview of an updated DVD.
the navigation unit.
2. Push the open button (A) of the navigation unit
located under the driver's seat.
B A ____
3. Press the EJECT button (B).

2. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 4. Remove the DVD-ROM.
3. Check that the system starts up and then changes to 5. Insert the new DVD-ROM with the white label facing
the Navi System Link screen. up.
NOTE: If the system fails to display the Navi System 6. Close the front cover. Do not turn the ignition switch
Link screen, refer to no picture is displayed (see page to LOCK (0); watch the navigation screen until the data
23-228). is downloaded to the navigation unit.
7. Do the Map Matching (see page 23-183).
NOTE: After servicing, the front cover and PC card slot
door must be closed. If you start up the navigation
system with the front cover or PC card slot door open,
the display will indicate an error message.
SRS components are located in this area. Review the NOTE:
SRS component locations (see page 24-23), and the • Before replacing the navigation unit, back-up the
precautions and procedures (see page 24-26) before customer data using system diagnostic mode save
doing repairs or service. users memory under the functional set up (see page
23-289).
1. Remove the switch cover (A) from left side of the
steering wheel. • Ifthe navigation unit is replaced or disconnected, a
Map Matching must be done (see page 23-183).
2. Eject the DVD from the original navigation unit (see
page 23-294). To avoid scratching or damaging the
DVD, temporarily place the DVD in a jewel case.
NOTE: If the DVD does not eject, refer to symptom
troubleshooting Navigation unit does not eject or
accept the navigation DVD (see page 23-234).
4. Raise the driver's seat all the way up, then move it all
the way forward.
5. Remove the driver's seat rear riser cover (see step 5
on page 20-154).
6. Lift up the rear of the seat connectors mounting clip
2. Remove the two screws (B) from the voice control (A), and disconnect the navigation unit connectors
switch or HFL-voice control switch (C). (B).
3. Disconnect the 5P connector (D) and remove the voice

control switch or HFL-voice control switch.
Navigation Unit GPS Antenna Removal/Installation
Removal/Installation (cont'd)
7. Move the driver's seat all the way back, and remove 1. Remove the gauge control module (see page 22-371).
the four mounting nuts (A), then remove the
2. disconnect the connector (A) and detach the clip.
navigation unit (B) with brackets (C) from the driver's
seat.
3. Remove the screws and the GPS antenna (B).
A
C
6 x 1.0 mm
9.4 N-m (0.95 kgf-m, 6.9 ibf-ft)
8. Remove the bracket from the navigation unit.

10. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II), then reinstall the
customer's original DVD, verifying that the DVD is free
of scratches or smudges.
11. Check any official Honda service website for more
service information about the navigation system and
any patches that need to be applied to the new unit.
NOTE: Simply transferring the DVD from the original
navigation unit to the new navigation unit does not
assure the correct software for the vehicle will be
loaded into the new navigation unit. Doing the DVD
transfer without doing software patches may cause
the new navigation unit to appear to be
malfunctioning.
12. Enter the new navigation anti-theft code.
13. Park the vehicle outside, and do the GPS initialization
(see page 23-182).
14. Give the new navigation anti-theft code to the
customer.
Voice Control Switch Test Rearview Camera
1. Remove the voice control switch (see page 23-295). *07 model
2. Measure the resistance between terminals No. 1 and 1. Remove the tailgate lower trim (see page 20-113).
2. Disconnect the rearview camera 6P connector (A) and
Position Resistance license plate light 2P connector (B).
No button pressed About 10 kQ
Navigation TALK About 2.2 kO
button pressed
Navigation BACK About 630 D
button pressed
1 2 3 4 5
3. Ifthe resistance is not as specified, replace the switch.
4. Disconnect the license plate light connectors (B).

5. Remove the rearview camera assembly (C).
Rearview Camera Removal/Installation (cont'd)
'§8-1 § models 4. From the rear license trim, remove the screws and
rearview camera (A).
20-113).
2. Disconnect the rearview camera 6P connector (A).
5. Install the rearview camera in the reverse order of

removal.
3. Remove the rear license trim (A) (see page 20-272),

then remove the grommet (B) from the tailgate and
push the connector through the hole in the tailgate.
1. Remove the climate control panel (see page 21-187).
2. Remove the three bolts (A) and disconnect the four connectors (B), and then remove the navigation display (C) with
the audio disc changer (D).
3. Separate the navigation display and the audio disc changer from the bracket.

AUDIO UNIT ('07 Premium audio

system without navigation)
AUDIO UNIT (Non-premium audio
system without navigation 6CD type)
AUDIO DISC CHANGER

(With navigation)
AUDIO UNIT (Premium

audio system with navigation)
AUDIO UNIT (Non-Premium

audio system with navigation)
Removal/Installati on, page 23-167
RIGHT TWEETER
STEREO AMPLIFIER
FRONT PASSENGERS
DOOR SPEAKER
DVD PLAYER UNIT

SUBWOOFER
('07 model with premium audio system and '08-10 models)
AM/FM ANTENNA LEAD
AM/FM ANTENNA RIGHT REAR SPEAKER

Repai r, page 23-177 Replacement, page 23-173
AM/FM ANTENNA AMPLIFIER
ACTIVE NOISE CANCELLATION FRONT MICROPHONE ('08-10 models)


'08-10 models w ithout premium audio system)
ACTIVE NOISE CANCELLATION

REAR MICROPHONE ('08-10 models)
XM ANTENNA
LEFT TWEETER
Replacement,
page 23-173
DRIVER S DOOR SPEAKER

AUDIO REMOTE SWITCH

Test, page 23-175
ANTENNA LEAD
LEFT REAR SPEAKER XM RECEIVER

Replacement, page 23-173 Connector Inputs and Outputs, page 23-55
AUXILIARY JACK ASSEMBLY


RES disc does not load Symptom Troubleshooting (see page • Peeled label stuck in player
23-340) • Wrong type disc
RES disc does not eject Symptom Troubleshooting (see page • Peeled label stuck in player
RES disc does not play Symptom Troubleshooting (see page • Peeled label stuck in player
RES disc skips Symptom Troubleshooting (see page • Peeled label stuck in player
Black picture is shown on the display Symptom Troubleshooting (see page
23-342)
White picture is shown on the Symptom Troubleshooting (see page
display/display lock 23-343)
Display area picture has lines or has Symptom Troubleshooting (see page
shifted 23-344)
Display does not go off when screen Symptom Troubleshooting (see page
is closed 23-344)
No display appears on the rear Symptom Troubleshooting (see page
controller indicator 23-345)
No sound/no display with auxiliary Symptom Troubleshooting (see page • Poor connections or
video unit inputs 23-345) disconnect device
• Low batteries in accessory
device, or disconnected
from power source
Wired headphone sound is weak, Symptom Troubleshooting (see page Audio unit
distorted, volume does not change, 23-348)
or there is no sound
Wireless headphones do not work or Symptom Troubleshooting (see page Digital audio cable connecting
there is static in DVD mode 23-349) the DVD unit to the audio unit
Wireless headphone sound is weak, Symptom Troubleshooting (see page • Wireless remote control
sound is distorted, there is static, 23-351) batteries (see page 23-361)
volume does not change, or there is • Audio unit
no sound in all modes
Wireless remote control does not Symptom Troubleshooting (see page Wireless remote control
work (all buttons) 23-352) batteries (see page 23-361)
work (source select buttons) 23-353) batteries (see page 23-361)
work (rear power button) 23-353) batteries (see page 23-361)
Screen backlight does not Symptom Troubleshooting (see page
dim/remains dim 23-354)
An error code is displayed Enter the self-diagnostic function with the
wireless remote control (see page 23-335),
then scroll to function 3.
DVD player unit illumination does not Symptom Troubleshooting (see page
come on/does not dim 23-355)
DVD player unit DISC IN indicator or Symptom Troubleshooting (see page
DISC DISTINCTION indicator does 23-356)
not come on/does not go off
Wireless remote control illumination Symptom Troubleshooting (see page Wireless remote control
does not come on 23-356) batteries (see page 23-361)
System Description
The rear entertainment system is composed of a special audio unit, a DVD player unit, a rear controller and screen, a
wireless headphones, a wireless remote control, and an auxiliary jack assembly.
System Components
Audio Unit
• Provides rear system power
• Provides control for the rear functions
• Allows the rear display to show information about the rear system status
• Provides a method to stop the rear passenger's from having control of the rear system
DVD Player Unit
• Offers simple operation (control in the audio unit)
• Automatically turns off when battery voltage drops below 12 volts
Rear Screen
• Has a flip down 9" display
• Displays information on the LCD
• Display does not work when pushed beyond the detent
• Provides output for infrared (IR) headphones
Wi reless Headphone
• Has automatic ON/OFF control
• Has volume control
• Works only in the second and third row seats, not outside the vehicle or in the front seats
Wireless Remote Control
Allows remote operation of the audio and DVD player units.
Auxiliary Jack Assembly
• Allows input from standard video game and video equipment using RCA connectors
• Provides two headphone connectors and separate volume controls
Audio Remote Switch
Allows operation of the audio and DVD player units at the steering wheel.
Voice Control Switch
Allows operation of the audio and DVD player units through the navigation system.
Navigati on Display
Allows operation of the audio and DVD player units through the navigation system.
Operating Method
NOTE: Refer to the Owner's Manual for full operation details.
(cont'd)
Audi o Unit
I.Turn the rear entertainment system ON.
• After the main power switch VOL PUSH PWR (A) is turned ON, push REAR PWR switch (B) to turn the rear system
ON. To turn the rear system OFF, push REAR PWR again, and to turn the whole system OFF, push VOL PUSH PWR.
2. Using the selector knob.

• Turn left to select the front controls (Audio).
• Turn right to select the rear controls (After rear operation is finished, selector automatically returns to the front
control in 10 seconds).
3. Rear Control Enable/Disable.
• By pushing the selector knob, the driver can prevent the rear passengers from operating the system. Each push of
the selector knob cycles the switch between ON-OFF (Rear Control Enabled/Rear Control Disabled). When rear
operation is disabled, the LCD on the audio unit displays RR CONT OFF.
4. Viewing the display.

• The display (A) indicates the status of the front and rear systems.
With navigation
Without navigation
5. Rear speaker automatic OFF Function.

• By turning the rear speaker OFF you can reduce the interference between the front source and the rear source
(Headphone). The speaker turns ON/OFF automatically when the front and rear have different sources selected.
When the rear speaker is in the OFF mode, the LCD display on the audio unit displays RR SP OFF.
RR SP OFF:
Wireless Remote Control

Remote control switch use and function.
• W i th Rear Power ON and rear control enabled, the rear passengers can control the functions, except volume, with the
remote.
• Rear passengers can control the functions, unless the rear control has been turned off by the front user.
Source selection
Selection (menu) Rear power play, pause, etc.

DVD Player Unit Connector for inputs and Outputs
When replacing a DVD player unit connector, match the wires to the cavities listed in the following table.
DVD PLAYER UNIT

CONNECTOR B (2P)
(DIGITAL AUDIO)
0 m\
0
/ 2 4 5 7 9 /
/ 12 13 14 15 16(X |17 18 19 21
DVD PLAYER UNIT CONNECTOR A (22P)

DVD PLAYER UNIT CONNECTOR A (22P)
/ 2 3 4 5 > < 6 7 8 9/
12 13 14 15 16 X 17 18 19 21 /
CM
o

A3 RED/BLK Lights-on signal (ILL+)
A5 BLU Audio unit (DVD)
A6 BRN Audio unit (Tx)
A7 YEL Audio unit (Tx/Rx GND)
A8 BLK Audio unit (DVD L)
A9 RED Audio unit (DVD R)
A14 PNK Audio unit (DVD GND)
A15 GRY* Shield for terminals No. 5 and No. 14 (DVD SH)
A10 BLU/YEL Rear controller and screen (SCTY2)
A17 RED/BLU Multiplex integrated control unit (MICU) (SCTY1)
A18 ORN Audio unit (Rx)
A19 GRY* Shield for terminals No. 6, No. 7, and No. 18 (Tx/Rx SH)
A20 WHT Audio unit (DVD R/L GND)
A21 GRY* Shield for terminals No. 8, No. 9, and No. 20 (DVD R/L SH)
(cont'd)
DVD PLAYER UNIT CONNECTOR B (2P) (DIGI TAL AUDIO)
riJTLrj
Jp~1
C a v ity W ire C o n n ect to

B1 Audio unit (DIGITAL SIG)
B2 Shield for terminal No. 1 (DIGITAL SH)
Rear Controller and Screen Connector for Inputs and Outputs
When replacing a rear controller and screen connector, match the wires to the cavities listed in the following table.
REAR CONTROLLER AND SCREEN 26P CONNECTOR
n n X .................._n_____n_
1 / 3 / / 6 7 8 / / / 12 13
CM
CM
CO
CM
CO
CM
/ 15 16 / 18 19 20 21 25
nun

1 WHT/GRN No. 11 (7.5 A) fuse in the auxiliary under-hood fuse box (+B)
3 LTBLU Audio unit (GA-NET RR BUS+)
6 PNK Audio unit (RR NTSC GND)
7 RED Audio unit (HP L)
8 BLK Audio unit (HP R)
12 RED/BLK Lights-on signal (ILL+)
13 YEL/RED Audio unit (SYSTEM ACC)
15 GRY*1 Shield for terminals No. 3 and No. 16 (GA-NET RR BUS SH)
16 PUR Audio unit (GA-NET RR B U S -)
18 BLU Audio unit (RR NTSC)
19 GRY*1 Shield for terminals No. 3 and No. 16 (RR NTSC SH)
20 WHT Audio unit (HP R/L GND)
21 GRY*1 Shield for terminals No. 7, No. 8, and No. 20 (HP R/L SH)
22 BLU/YEL DVD player unit (SCTY2)
23 RED/WHT Audio unit (SCTY3)*2
Navigation display (SCTY3)3
25 GRN/RED Dash lights brightness controller (ILL—LED)
26 BLK Body ground to G504 (GND)
*1: The shielded wires have a heat-shrunk tube insulating the outside of the wire. The color of the insulating
*2: Without navigation
*3: With navigation
Auxiliary Jack Assembly Connector for Inputs and Outputs
When replacing an auxiliary jack assembly connector, match the wires to the cavities listed in the following table.
1 2 3 L— ' 4 5 6
7 8 9 io |X T n 12 13 14
AUXILARY JACK ASSEMBLY 14P CONNECTOR
AUX I LARY JACK ASSEMBLY 14P CONNECTOR
1 2 3 L J 4 5 6
7 8 9 10 X 11 12 13 14

2 YEL/RED No. 32 (10 A) fuse in the driver's under-dash fuse/relay box (ACC)
3 GRY* Shield for terminals No. 7, No. 13, and No. 14 (HP R/L OUT SH)
4 GRY* Shield for terminals No. 8 and No. 9 (VIDE01 SH)
5 GRY* Shield for terminals No. 10, No. 11, and No. 12 (VIDE01 R/L SH)
6 WHT/GRN Audio unit (CONN CHK)
7 YEL Audio unit (HP R/L OUT GND)
8 LTBLU Audio unit (VIDE01 GND)
9 PUR Audio unit (VIDE01)
10 GRN Audio unit (VIDE01 L)
11 PNK Audio unit (VIDE01 R/L GND)
12 BLU Audio unit (VIDE01 R)
13 BRN Audio unit (HP L OUT)
14 ORN Audio unit (HP R OUT)
Circuit Diagram
*07 model w ith premium audio system
AUXILIARY
UNDER-HOOD FUSE BOX

No. 22 No. 23
(BAT) (120 A) (IG) (50 A)
No. 15 (40 A)
No. 7 (7.5 A) FUSE

(In the
passenger's
under-dash
fuse/relay box)
typically black or dark gray, may not match the color of
the wire listed on the schematic.
*2: With navigation
*3: With XM
— : Shielding
MULTPLEX
No. 7 (7.5 A) FUSE INTEGRATED
(In the passenger's CONTROL
under-dash fuse/relay box) UNIT (MICU)
YEL/RED RED/BLK
Y Y
RED/BLU
WHT/GRN
A4 IA2 A3 A17
ACC +B ILL+ SCTY 1
DVD PLAYER UNIT

DVD DVD
R/L R/L DVD DVD TX/RX TX/RX DIGITAL DIGITAL
GND ILL— DVDL DVD R GND SH DVD GND SH TX RX GND SH SIG SH SCTY 2
j A12 j A13 A8 A9 A20 j A21 A5 A14 jA15 A6 A18 A7 jA19 JA16
B2
BLK RED >i GRY*1 < > g ry* 1 k -"i GRY*1 BLU/YEL
I
BLK RED ■i
W HT1
U
i BLU i
PNK1
U
i BRN ORN
i
YEL 1
DIGITAL
AUDIO LEAD
V V
REAR
_LL DASH LIGHTS
BRIGHTNESS -'
n GRY*1 n
„ ' GRY*1
H GRY*1 CONTROLLER
and SCREEN
- CONTROLLER
G503 (|n the gauge H1 H2
control module) C2 C3 ei es C6 C5 IC4 C13 C12 C14 IC15
DVD L DVD R DVD DVD DVD DVD DVD TX TX/RX TX/RX DIGITAL DIGITAL
R/L R/L GND SH GND SH SIG SH
GND SH AUDIO UNIT
HP R/L HP R/L V1DE01 VIDE01
ANC ANC ANC ANC ANC HP L HP R OUT OUT VIDE01 VIDE01 R/L R/L VIDE01 VIDE01 CONN I
FR+ FR- RR+ RR- CHK2 OUT OUT GND SH L R GND SH VIDE01 GND ^SH CHK
E1 E2 E3 E4 E5 B24 B25 B9 B29 B27 B26 B22 B23
No. 32 (10 A) No. 32 (10 A)
FUSE FUSE 'l GRY*1 r-
(In the
U U
(In the
driver's
BLK GRN RED WHT BRN under-dash
fuse/relay box)
driver's
under-dash
fuse/relay box)
BRN ORN YEL
UI
I GRN BLU i
PNK1
i PUR LTBLUV
I
WHT/GRN
YEL/RED YEL/RED
n GRY*1 n nGRY*1
10 12 14
ANC ANC ANC ANC ANC ACC ACC HP L HP R HP R/L HP R/L VIDE01 VIDE01 VIDE01 VIDE01 VIDE01 VIDE01 VIDE01 CONN
FR+ FR- RR+ RR- CHK2 OUT OUT OUT OUT L R R/L R/L GND SH CHK
ACTIVE NOISE CANCELLATION UNIT GND SH GND SH
(With built-in microphone)
INTR
ACC LT- NEP COSAM GND
16 15 14
ENGINE MOUNT
CONTROL UNIT
BRN YEL WHT/GRN PNK
I-1
PNK
BLK
,
-0-
A
MULTIPLEX"
INTEGRATED
A
PCM
A _Q _
" CONTROL
G502 UNIT (MICU) G603
No. 5 (20 A) No. 32 (10 A)

FUSE FUSE FRONT
(In the (In the DRIVER'S PASSENGER'S LEFT REAR RIGHT REAR
auxiliary driver's DOOR SPEAKER LEFT TWEETER DOOR SPEAKER RIGHT TWEETER SPEAKER SPEAKER SUBWOOFER
under-hood under-dash r-
fuse box) fuse/relay box) V
S ' S ' S ' S ’ 'i i7
Y Y
2 1 j1 2 j2 1 |1 2 2 1 12 1
BLU/ORN RED/BLU BLK/RED BLU/RED I

BLU YEL/RED WHT GRN GRY/BLU BRN PNK/BLK PNK PUR BLU/ORN GRN RED
1
A10 A4 | A14 A2 IA12 A1 | A11 | A8 | A18 I A5 I A15
ACC FR L FR L FRL FRL FRR FRR FRR FRR RRL RR L RRR RR R WOOFER+ WOOFER-
SPKR+ SPKR- TW+ TW- SPKR+ SPKR- TW+ TW- SPKR+ SPKR- SPKR+ SPKR-
STEREO AMPLIFIER
RADIO FL PRE FL PRE FL PRE FR PRE FR PRE FR PRE RL PRE RL PRE RL PRE RR PRE RR PRE RR PRE
SWD+B IN+ IN- IN SH IN+ IN- IN SH 1N+ IN- IN SH IN+ IN- IN SH P GND S GND
J B2 B3 B10 j B9 B6 B13 A20 B14
I 85
GRY* GRY* GRY* GRY* BLK BLK
YEL/GRN BLU PNK GRN LT BLU PUR

i i i i i i
i i i i i i
i i i i
i i i i i ) _LL XL
G504 G504
A7 A17 A6 A16 A5 A15
RADIO FL PRE FL PRE FR PRE FR PRE
RL PRE RL PRE RR PRE RR PRE
SWD+B IN+ IN- IN+ IN- IN+ IN- IN+ IN-
AUDIO UNIT
GA-NET GA-NET GA-NET RR RR HP HP
SYSTEM RR RR RR NTSC RR NTSC R/L R/L
ACC BUS+ BUS- BUS SH GND NTSC SH HP L HP R GND SH SCTY3
C10 B17 B3 B12
No. 11 (7.5 A) No. 7 (7.5 A)
FUSE FUSE
(In the auxiliary (In the passenger's
under-hood under-dash GRY* i GRY*
fuse box) fuse/relay box)
U
i
u
LT BLU PUR BLK WHT1 RED/WHT.
i
n
WHT/GRN RED/BLK YEL/RED GRY* GRY*
16 20
+B ILL+ SYSTEM GA-NET GA-NET GA-NET RR RR RR HP L HP R HP HP • SCTY 3 i SCTY 2
ACC RR RR RR NTSC NTSC NTSC R/L R/L i____. ___ i
BUS+ BUS- BUS SH GND SH GND SH (Without
navigation)
ILL- 1
LED GND [ SCTY3
j 26 j 23
I 25
GRN/RED BLK RED/WHT
L_ GRN-------[ e > NAVIGATION

DISPLAY
(With navigation)
V
DASH LIGHTS
BRIGHTNESS
CONTROLLER
(In the gauge
control module) _Q _
G504
(USA models without navigation) the wire listed on the schematic.
“I GA-NET
No. 5 (10 A) Shielding
FUSE
(In the driver's
under-dash XM ANTENNA
fuse/relay box)
T
WHT/GRN
XM ANTENNA LEAD
+B SIG SH
XM RECEIVER
GA-NET GA-NET GA-NET
AUDI02 AUDI02 AUDI02 AUDI02 AUDIO AUDIO AUDIO SYSTEM
L+ L- R+ R- BUS2+ BUS2- BUS2 SH GND ACC
A6 A14 A5 A13 ;A9 : A10 A3 A11 A2
BLK GRN RED WHT LT BLU

IP
PUR WHT/BLK
BLU/RED
GRY*
i n GRY*
D14 D5 D13 D4 . D9 * D10 I D3 D11 D2
AUDI02 AUDI02 AUDI02 AUDI02 AUDI02 GA-NET GA-NET GA-NET GND SYSTEM
L+ L- R+ R- SH AUDIO AUDIO AUDIO ACC
BUS2+ BUS2- BUS2SH AUDIO UNIT
ILL SYSTEM AUDI02 AUDI02 AUDI02 AUDI02 AUDI02 AUDIO AUDIO AUDIO
SCTY 6 +B ILL CTRL +B GND ACC L+ L- R+ R- SH BUS2+ BUS2- BUS2SH
D7 D8 D12 D2 D6 D14 D5 D9 D10 D3
GRY* GRY*
GRN/ORN RED/YEL GRN/RED GRN/WHT RED/BLU WHT/BLK BLU/RED GRN RED

jJ
WHT i LTBLU PUR ii
Ji
h GRY*
n GRY*
A8 A17 A16 A3 A7 A13 A6 A9 A1 A10 A2 I A11 A5 A15 I A14
SCTY 6 +B ILL ILL GND SYSTEM AUDI02 AUDI02 AUDI02 AUDI02 AUDI02 GA-NET GA-NET GA-NET
CTRL ACC L+ L- R+ R- SH AUDIO AUDIO AUDIO
BUS2+ BUS2- BUS2SH
GA-NET GA-NET GA-NET AUDIO DISC CHANGER
DISP CD AUDIO AUDIO AUDIO
SCTY 5 OPEN EJECT BUS1+ BUS1- BUS1 SH
A18 A12 A4 . B9
REAR CONTROLLER
and SCREEN
GRN/YEL BLU PNK
i
BLU PNK
i w
i \ \ f— Y
^ - 1 GRY* GRN
A16 B9 B10 ! A3 JA13 | A4 | A6
SCTY 5 DISP CD GA-NET GA-NET GA-NET SCTY 4
OPEN EJECT AUDIO AUDIO AUDIO
BUS1+ BUS1- BUS1 SH
NAVIGATION DISPLAY
: The shielded wires have a heat-shrunk tube insulating

: GA-NET
: Shielding
(With navigation) (USA models with navigation)
NAVIGATION DISPLAY
DISP DISP DISP
BUS+ BUS- BUS SH
_ jA15 |A14
gry*
LT BLU PUR j
! j 4
" i ------- ‘ GRY* XM ANTENNA
• A10 . A20 I A9
DISP DISP DISP
BUS+ BUS- BUS SH
NAVIGATION UNIT GA-NET GA-NET GA-NET
ECU2 ECU2 ECU2
BUS+ BUS- BUS SH
; B2 ; B8 B9
No. 5 (10 A) XM ANTENNA LEAD
FUSE ! !
(In the driver's r-"_r___ GRY*
under-dash
fuse/relay box) 1 ; : 4-
|lt b l u p u r ,
i : : 4-
f 1 *
^ _____
• I
WHT/GRN i » GRY*
>D
O A3 B2
C
>
.....I A 1......
+B GA-NET GA-NET GA-NET SH SIG
ECU2 ECU2 ECU2
BUS+ BUS- BUS SH
XM RECEIVER
AUDIO AUDIO AUDIO AUDIO SYSTEM
L+____ L~ R+ R- _____ GND ACC
A6 A14 A5 A13 A11 A2
WHT/BLK
GRN RED WHT* BLU/RED
B6 B14 B5 B13 B4 B11

AUDIO AUDIO AUDIO AUDIO AUDIO GND SYSTEM
L+ L- R+ R- SH ACC
AUDIO DISC CHANGER

*: With navigation
AUXILIARY
UNDER-HOOD FUSE BOX
No. 11 (7.5 A) REAR CONTROLLER
BLK . -WHT/GRN
}
and SCREEN
IGNITION SWITCH
No. 22 No. 23
(BAT) (120 A) (IG) (50 A) G1
No. 15 (40 A) D6
No. 7 (7.5 A) FUSE

(In the
passenger's
under- '
fuse/relay box)
Circuit Diagram
No. 32 (10 A) FUSE No. 5 (10 A) FUSE No. 7 (7.5 A) FUSE MULTIPLEX
(In the driver's (In the driver's (In the passenger's INTEGRATED
under-dash under-dash under-dash CONTROL
fuse/relay box) fuse/relay box) fuse/relay box) UNIT (MICU)
T
YEL/RED
T WHT/GRN
Y RED/BLK
T
RED/BLU
~ CONTROL
G502 UNIT (MICU) G603
............: GA-NET
---------- : Shielding
FRONT
DOOR SPEAKER TWEETER DOOR SPEAKER TWEETER SPEAKER SPEAKER
S ' 'i 1 1
I2 1 I1 I2 I2
GRN/BLK GRN/BLK GRN/YEL GRN/YEL BLU/WHT PNK
LT GRN LT GRN GRY/RED GRY/RED BLU/BLK BLU/YEL
GRN/BLK GRN/YEL
LT GRN GRY/RED
A18 A7 A17 A5
FR L FR L FR R FR R RR L RR L RRR RR R
SPKR+ SPKR- SPKR+ SPKR- SPKR+ SPKR- SPKR+ SPKR-
AUDIO UNIT
SYSTEM RR RR RR NTSC RR NTSC R/L r/ l r ----------
ACC BUS+ BUS- BUS SH GND NTSC SH HP L HP R GND SH SCTY3
B14 C9 j C11 C10 B17 B3 B11 B10
No. 11 (7.5 A) No. 7 (7.5 A)
FUSE FUSE
(In the auxiliary (In the passenger's
under-hood under-dash GRY* GRY*
fuse/relay box)
i-J
LT BLU PUR 1 PNK BLUJ 1 RED BLK WHT1 RED/WHT
i
n
WHT/GRN RED/BLK YEL/RED GRY* J GRY* BLU/YEL
I 16 20 23
+B ILL+ SYSTEM GA-NET GA-NET GA-NET RR RR RR HP L HP R HP HP • SCTY3 i SCTY 2
ACC RR RR RR NTSC NTSC NTSC R/L R/L
navigation)
ILL- ~1
LED GND \ SCTY 3
j 26 j 23
T 25
GRN/RED BLK RED/WHT
I • GRN-------[B > NAVIGATION

DISPLAY j
(With navigation)
V
DASH LIGHTS
BRIGHTNESS
CONTROLLER
(In the gauge
control module) Jl.
G504
Circuit Diagram (co nt'd)
AUDIO UNIT
SCTY 6 +B ILL CTRL GND ACC L+ L- R+ R- SH BUS2+ BUS2- BUS2SH
A4 D7 D8 D12 D1 D6 D13 D4 D9 D10 D3
GRY* GRY*
GRN/ORN RED/YEL GRN/RED GRN/WHT RED/BLU WHT/BLK BLU/RED BLK GRN RED WHT i LT BLU PUR i
i i i i
i
i
i n GRY* i- ^ _-
n GRY*
A8 A17 A16 A3 A7 A13 A6 A9 A1 A10 A2 jA11 A5 A15 | A14
SCTY 6 +B ILL ILL +B GND SYSTEM AUDI02 AUDI02 AUDI02 AUDI02 AUDI02 GA-NET GA-NET GA-NET
CTRL ACC L+ L- R+ R— SH AUDIO AUDIO AUDIO
BUS2+ BUS2- BUS2SH
GA-NET GA-NET GA-NET AUDIO DISC CHANGER
DISP CD AUDIO AUDIO AUDIO
SCTY 5 OPEN EJECT BUS1+ BUS1- BUS1 SH
A18 A12 A4 . B9 j B10 I B3
r-"-4 'i gry*
REAR CONTROLLER
i I I t— J and SCREEN
GRN/YEL BLU PNK PNK '
i - i
Y
k ------- ^ - 1 GRY* GRN
A16 B9 B10 • A3 ; A13 I A4 | A6
SCTY 5 DISP CD GA-NET GA-NET GA-NET SCTY 4
OPEN EJECT AUDIO AUDIO AUDIO
BUS1+ BUS1- BUS1 SH
NAVIGATION DISPLAY
(With navigation)
............: GA-NET
---------- : Shielding
(With navigation) (USA models with navigation)

'08-10 models with premium audio system
AUXILIARY
UNDER-HOOD FUSE BOX
No. 5 (20 A)
BLK —-<r\jo---- BLU ■ STEREO
AMPLIFIER
No. 11 (7.5 A) REAR CONTROLLER
UNDER-HOOD FUSE/RELAY BOX -WHT/GRN and SCREEN
No. 22 IGNITION SWITCH
No. 23
(BAT) (120 A) (IG) (50 A) G1
■ W HT- - WHT/RED-
ACC HOT in ACC (I)

No. 15(40 A) D6 and ON (II)
AM/FM ANTENNA
B4 A5
cb cb ) No. 5 IN o. 32 DRIVER'S
UNDER-DASH
► (10 A) .(10 A) FUSE/RELAY BOX
± ii±
No. 7 (7.5 A) FUSE
(In the
AM/FM |N11 |N36
ANTENNA
passenger's AMPLIFIER WHT/GRN YEL/RED
under-dash
fuse/relay box) -WHT/GRN -
- YEL/RED -
WHT/GRN WHT/GRN YEL/RED YEL/RED
AM/FM ANTENNA LEAD
RED/BLK
AM/FM ANTENNA SUBLEAD • XM RECEIVER AUXILIARY
• ACTIVE NOISE JACK ASSEMBLY
r CANCELLATION
I G2 G1 UNIT A14
ILL+ ANT ANT ANT +B
+B SH SIG
AUDIO UNIT
AUDIO REMOTE
GND REMOTE GND
A9 A1 F7
RED
No. 7 (7.5 A) FUSE
(In the rv.
passenger's ^>-
RED * under-dash ^
fuse/relay box)
RED/BLK
18 CABLE REEL
10 19
RED/BLK GRN/RED
RED GRN j - RED/BLK - j
RED/BLK
AUDIO REMOTE SWITCH
• CRUISE CONTROL HFL-VOICE
COMBINATION SWITCH CONTROL
• MULTI INFORMATION SWITCH
SWITCH 470 0 1.2 kQ 3.9 kO
• HFL-VOICE CONTROL
V
DASH LIGHTS
BRIGHTNESS
SWITCH VOL. AjVOL.
..DOWN i UP i p"
^..pu
i p*J ,, MODE
V
<ja!(▼) |lU) ||W | j BRN
CONTROLLER
(In the gauge
control module)
-D _ ■ GRN
G503
Shielding
No. 7 (7.5 A) FUSE MULTIPLEX

(In the passenger's INTEGRATED
under-dash CONTROL
fuse/relay box) UNIT (MICU)
YEL/RED I RED/BLK
Y Y
RED/BLU
WHT/GRN I
A4 | A2 I A3
ACC +B ILL+ SCTY 1
DVD PLAYER UNIT

DVD DVD
GND ILL— DVD L DVD R GND SH DVD GND SH TX RX GND SH SIG SH SCTY 2
I A12 A8 A9 A20 A21 A6 A18 I A16
B2
RED GRY* BLU/YEL
BLK RED ■i
W HT'
U
i BLU i
PNK1
U
i
BRN ORN YEL 1
U DIGITAL
AUDIO LEAD
V
V REAR
DASH LIGHTS
_Q_ BRIGHTNESS n
- - GRY*
n
, - GRY* GRY*
CONTROLLER
and SCREEN
- CONTROLLER
G503 (in the gauge H1 H2
control module) C2 C3 C1 C8 C6 C5 C4 C13 C14 C15
DVD L DVD R DVD DVD DVD DVD DVD TX RX TX/RX TX/RX DIGITAL DIGITAL
GND SH AUDIO UNIT
HP R/L HP R/L VIDE01 VIDE01
HP L HP R OUT OUT VIDE01 VIDE01 R/L R/L VIDE01 VIDE01 CONN |
OUT OUT GND SH L R GND SH VIDE01 GND SH CHK
B8 B24 B25 | B9 B28 B29 B27 B26 B22 B21 IB7 B23
No. 32 (10 A) I I
FUSE
(In the driver's J " GRY* r-'"- '■'""’i GRY* GRY*
under-dash
fuse/relay box) 1
! 1 i ! 1 ! ! I
W ! f— 1 f— 1 t— I
BRN ORN YEL ! GRN BLU PNK1 PUR LTBLU1 WHT/GRN
i i
YEL/RED
n GRY* n nGRY*
ACC HP L HP R HP R/L HP R/L VIDE01 VIDE01 VIDE01 VIDE01 VIDE01 VIDE01 VIDE01 CONN
OUT OUT OUT OUT L R R/L R/L GND SH CHK
GND SH GND SH
GND
BLK
_Q _
G603
(cont'd)
No. 5 (20 A)
FUSE FRONT
(In the DRIVER'S PASSENGER'S Pll, 11TTU,rrT rr, LEFT REAR RIGHT REAR
auxiliary DOOR SPEAKER LEFT TWEETER DOOR SPEAKER RIGHT TWEETER SPEAKER SPEAKER SUBWOOFER
under-hood
fuse box)
SI 2 ' S ' 'S ' S ’ S ' 1 I
Y
BLU
WHT
GRN
1 11
BLU/ORN
GRY/BLU
2
RED/BLU
|2
BRN
1 |1
BLK/RED
PNK/BLK
2
PNK
12
PUR
1 |2
BLU/RED
1
BLU/ORN
12
GRN
1
RED
A10 A3 | A13 A4 | A14 A2 | A12 A1 | A11
<
<
00
A7 | A17 A5 IA15
+B FRL FRL FRL FRL FRR FRR FR R FR R RR L RR L RR R RR R WOOFER+ WOOFER-
SPKR+ SPKR- TW+ TW- SPKR+ SPKR- TW+ TW- SPKR+ SPKR- SPKR+ SPKR-
STEREO AMPLIFIER
RADIO RADIO FL PRE FL PRE FL PRE FR PRE FR PRE FR PRE RL PRE RL PRE RL PRE RR PRE RR PRE RR PRE
SWD+B SWD+B IN+ IN- IN SH IN+ IN- IN SH IN+ IN- IN SH IN+ IN- IN SH P GND S GND
A9 B7 j B2 B4 B11 j B5 B10 j 89 B6 B13 j B12 j A20 JB14
GRY* GRY* GRY* > GRY* BLK BLK

YEL/GRN
YEL/GRN BLU PNK GRN RED LTBLU PUR YEL
-LL _LL
G504 G504
A12 A15 A7 A11 A16 A8
i FL PRE FL PRE FR PRE FR PRE RL PRE RL PRE RR PRE RR PRE
IN+ IN IN+ IN- IN+ IN IN+ IN-
AUDIO UNIT
RADIO ANC ANC ANC ANC ANC
SWD+B FR+ FR RR+ RR- CHK2
F16 E3
No. 5 (10 A) FUSE

YEL/GRN (In the driver's
under-dash fuse/
relay box)
\3/ i BLU GRN RED WHT BRN
YEL/GRN WHT/GRN
n
GRY*
20 3 18
RADIO +B ANC ANC ANC ANC ANC ANC
SWD+B SH FR+ FR- RR+ RR- CHK2
INTR F MIC R MIC
GND LT- NEP CSSAM1 CSSAM2 F MIC+ SH RMIC+ SH
j 10 j 15 J7 15
PUR*
BRN YEL WHT/GRN PNK WHT BLU ,
PNK ■ *
RED WHT i
«h. WHT -j
♦ .
PNK WHT BLU
RED* ORN*
% 11 I1
z i
A A V V
_£L MULTIPLEX
ENGINE MOUNT
ACTIVE NOISE ACTIVE NOISE
INTEGRATED CANCELLATION FRONT CANCELLATION REAR
CONTROL UNIT
G502 CONTROL
UNIT (MICU)
MICROPHONE MICROPHONE
........... : GA-NET
----------; Shielding
AUDIO UNIT
ACC BUS+ BUS- BUS SH GND NTSC SH HP L HPR GND SH
C11 B13
No. 11 {7.5 A) No. 7 |7.5 A)
FUSE FUSE
(In the auxiliary (In the passenger's DVD
under-hood under-dash GRY* GRY* PLAYER
fuse box) fuse/relay box) UNIT
V
i-J i-i V
LT BLU PUR PNK BLU 1 RED BLK WHT1
n n
WHT/GRN RED/BLK YEL/RED GRY* J GRY* GRY* BLU/YEL
15
+B ILL+ SYSTEM GA-NET GA-NET GA-NET RR RR RR HP L HPR HP HP SCTY 2
ACC RR RR RR NTSC NTSC NTSC R/L R/L
BUS+ BUS- BUS SH GND SH GND SH
ILL-
LED GND SCTY 3
| 26 j 23
T 25
GRN/RED BLK RED/WHT
GRN NAVIGATION
DISPLAY
V
DASH LIGHTS
BRIGHTNESS
CONTROLLER
(In the gauge
control module)
-5“
G504
NAVIGATION UNIT
RG RG RG
L+ GND SH GND
B17 B14 B13
GRY*
BRN
iJ
i
i
RED/BLU
„
nGRY*
F11 F1 F2
RG RG RG
L+ GND SH GND
AUDIO UNIT
SCTY 6 +B CTRL +B GND ACC L+ L- R+ R- SH BUS2+ BUS2- BUS2SH
A4 D7 D8 D11 D2 D6 D14 D5 D13 D4 I D9 I D10 I D3
GRY* GRY*
GRN/ORN RED/YEL GRN/RED GRN/WHT RED/BLU WHT/BLK BLU/RED BLK GRN RED WHTi LT BLU PUR
i i i i
i
i
i
-
n GRY* ; r
nGRY*
A1?
A8 A16 A3 A7 A13 A6 A9 A1 A10 A2 A11 A5 A15 | A14
SCTY 6 +B ILL ILL +B GND SYSTEM AUDI02 AUDI02 AUDI02 AUDI02 AUDI02 GA-NET GA-NET GA-NET
BUS2+ BUS2- BUS2 SH
AUDIO DISC CHANGER
----- GA-NET
----------: Shielding
*08-10 models w i thout premium aud i o system
AUXILIARY
UNDER-HOOD FUSE BOX
BATTERY
ACTIVE NOISE
CANCELLATION UNIT
No. 22 No. 23
(BAT) (120 A) (IG) (50 A) G1
No. 15(40 A) D6
No. 7 (7.5 A) FUSE

(In the
passenger's
under-dash
fuse/relay box)
RED/BLK
A10 G3
ANT
+B
AUDIO UNIT
AUDIO REMOTE
GND REMOTE GND
A9
No. 7 (7.5 A) FUSE

BLK (In the
passenger's
under-dash
fuse/relay box)
RED ■ RED/BLK WHT BRN
0:17 0 :1 8 0 :9 0 :8
[2l:10 [2 ]:4 [2]: 12 CABLE REEL [2]: 11
0 :9 0:10 0 :1 9 0:18
[2]:10 (2]: 4 0:12 f2l:11
RED RED/BLK GRN/RED BRN
■ RED/BLK
VOICE
AUDIO REMOTE SWITCH CONTROL
V
• CRUISE CONTROL SWITCH*2
COMBINATION SWITCH HFL-VOICE
• VOICE CONTROL 100Q 10kQ^ ±1 CONTROL
V SWITCH*2 270 0 470 0 1.2 kO 3.9 kO SWITCH*3
DASH LIGHTS • HFL-VOICE CONTROL Wj--- r - W r + W i Y A Aq
SWITCH*3
BRIGHTNESS
CONTROLLER
VOL.
DOWN i UP
Q |VOL. Q I Q I
! pH i pH i MODE
Q I
V
(In the gauge V BRN
control module) (▼) yiu) yi fl yi
jQl '
G503 • GRN
*2: '08-09 models with navigation
*3: '10 model with navigation
[T |: With navigation
No. 7 (7.5 A) FUSE MULTIPLEX
(In the passenger's INTEGRATED |~2]: Without navigation
under-dash CONTROL ------: Shielding
fuse/relay box) UNIT (MICU)
YEL/RED RED/BLK
Y Y
RED/BLU
WHT/GRN
A4 IA2 A3 I A17
ACC +B ILL+ SCTY 1
DVD PLAYER UNIT

DVD DVD
GND ILL— DVD L DVD R GND SH DVD GND SH TX RX GND SH SIG SH SCTY 2
A20 A7 IA19 L j A16
B2
BLK RED •'"’i GRY*1 BLU/YEL
BLK RED ■i
W HT1
Ui
BLU PNK
U
i
i BRN ORN YEL 1
DIGITAL
AUDIO LEAD
V V
REAR
_Q_
DASH LIGHTS
BRIGHTNESS n GRY*1 n
„ - GRY*1 - ' GRY*1 [
CONTROLLER
and SCREEN
- CONTROLLER
G503 (in the gauge H1
control module) C8 C6 C5 C4 C13 C14 | C15 [•
DVD L DVD R DVD DVD DVD DVD DVD TX RX TX/RX TX/RX DIGITAL DIGITAL
GND SH AUDIO UNIT
HP R/L HP R/L VIDE01 VIDE01
HP L HPR OUT OUT VIDE01 VIDE01 R/L R/L VIDE01 VIDE01 CONN !
OUT OUT GND SH L R GND SH VIDE01 GND SH CHK
B8 B24 B25 B9 B28 B29 B27 jB26 B22 B21 JB7 B23
No. 32 (10 A)
FUSE
(In the driver's '-"i GRY*1 ^ - > GRY*1
i
U
under-dash
fuse/relay box)
BRN ORN YEL 1 GRN BLU PNK

jJ PUR J1
LTBLU1
U
h GRY*1
h GRY*1
h GRY*
ACC HP L HPR HP R/L HP R/L VIDE01 VIDE01 VIDE01 VIDE01 VIDE01 VIDE01 VIDE01 CONN
OUT OUT OUT OUT L R R/L R/L GND SH CHK
GND SH GND SH
GND
1
jX
G603
(cont'd)
(Without navigation)
"1
No. 5 (10 A)
(In the driver's
under-dash XM ANTENNA
fuse/relay box)
T
WHT/GRN
.
XM ANTENNA LEAD
I
I A1 B1 B2
+B SIG SH
XM RECEIVER
AUDI02 AUDI02 AUDI02 AUDI02 AUDIO AUDIO AUDIO SYSTEM
L+ L- R+ R- BUS+ BUS- BUS SH GND ACC
A6 A14 A5 A13 A9 : a io I A3 A11 A2
----------
.- - - ” Ih j
r"- : '=i f' ^ - — -
---------- _ - —
i i i * I GRY*
i i i ! i
i
BLK GRN RED WHT
i i J
LT BLU PUR WHT/BLK
BLU/RED
GRY*
i n GRY*
D6 D14 D5 D13 D9 ! D10 I D3 D2
AUDI02 AUDI02 AUDI02 AUDI02 AUDI02 GA-NET GA-NET GA-NET GND SYSTEM
L+ L- R+ R- SH AUDIO AUDIO AUDIO ACC
BUS+ BUS- BUS SH
AUDIO UNIT
ACC BUS+ BUS- BUS SH GND NTSC SH HP L HPR GND SH I SCTY 3 I
B14 ; C9 C11 C10 B17 B2 B3 B12 B13 B11 B101 A4 ,
No. 11 (7.5 A) No. 7 (7.5 A)
FUSE FUSE - - - - - _
(In the auxiliary (In the passenger's - Is
-" - - r-C - -'1
under-hood under-dash i GRY* i i GRY* i GRY* J
fuse/relay box) ;
u : i-i U i
LT BLU PUR 1 1 PNK BLU 1 RED BLK WHT1 HRED/WHT
:
H 1 1 n I n i i
WHT/GRN RED/BLK YEL/RED ^J GRY* L J GRY* ^G RY* ; BLU/YEL
- _
:3 16 jI 15 6 18 iI 19 7 8 20 1
21 J 23
+B ILL+ SYSTEM GA-NET GA-NET GA-NET RR RR RR HP L HPR HP HP « SCTY 3 i SCTY 2
ACC RR RR RR NTSC NTSC NTSC R/L R/L 1________ |
navigation)
ILL-
LED GND f SCTY3 1
| 25 j 26 j 23
GRN/RED BLK RED/WHT
L ® — GRN-------[ e > NAVIGATION

DISPLAY
(With navigation)
V
DASH LIGHTS
BRIGHTNESS
CONTROLLER
(In the gauge
control module)
G504
........... : GA-NET
----------: Shielding
FRONT
DOOR SPEAKER TWEETER DOOR SPEAKER TWEETER SPEAKER SPEAKER SUBWOOFER
(With navigation)
NAVIGATION UNIT
RG RG RG
L-t- GND SH GND
B7 B14 B13
GRY*
BRN
YEL i
i
RED/BLU
n
F2
RG RG RG
L+ GND SHGND
AUDIO UNIT
SCTY 6 ILL CTRL GND ACC L+ L- R+ R- SH BUS2+ BUS2- BUS2 SH
A4 D12 D2 D6 D14 D5 D13 D4 I D9 : D10 D3
GRN/ORN RED/YEL GRN/RED GRN/WHT RED/BLU WHT/BLK BLU/RED BLK GRN RED WHTi LT BLU
:J
PUR iI
I
GRY* ' .J
nGRY*
A16 A7 A13 A6 A9 A1 A10 A2 IA11 A5 A15 IA14
SCTY 6 +B ILL ILL SYSTEM AUDI02 AUDI02 AUDI02 AUDI02 AUDI02 GA-NET GA-NET GA-NET
BUS2+ BUS2- BUS2SH
AUDIO DISC CHANGER
*; The shielded wires have a heat-shrunk tube insulating
............ : GA-NET
--------- : Shielding
(With navigation)
J
The rear entertai nment system has a self-diagnostic functi on that shows on the display. To run the self-diagnostic
function, do the foll owing:
How to Enter the Self-diagnostic Function with the Audio Unit

1. Turn the ignition switch to the ACCESSORY (I).
2. To run the self-diagnosis, press the REAR PWR button four times within 5 seconds.
REAR PWR BUTTON REAR PWR BUTTON
Continue to hold button Continue to hold button

down for 1 second down for 1 second
Audio unit
REAR PWR button
How to Enter for Self-diagnostic Function with the Wireless Remote Control
2. To run the self-diagnosis, press the DVD/AUX button (USA models) or DVD button (Canada models), the AM/FM
button, the 6 button, and then the AM/FM button again. The buttons must be pressed in that order, and within 2
seconds of each other (see table), and the self-diagnosis begins.

6BUTTON 6 BUTTON
DVD/ AM/ 6 AM/ AM/ 6 AM/

AUX FM FM DVD FM FM
►► ►►
ON ON -
OFF- OFF-
Within 2 seconds Within 2 seconds
Canceling the Self-diagnostic Function

Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0) to cancel the self-diagnostic function. After completing repair work, run the
Self-diagnostic Function Mode Select

Use the wireless remote control to navigate within the self-diagnostic function.
LEFT/RIGHT button: Change the function mode
UP/DOWN button: Change the detection
ENTER button: Select the detection point
UP BUTTON
Function Category Check item or informati on Judge di splay

Mo„
1 CONNECT DVD DVD player unit connection check OK or NG
with GRN or
RED
H/U Audio unit connection check OK or NG
with GRN or
RED
JACK Auxiliary jack assembly connection check OK or NG
with GRN or
RED
UNIT Device connection information Device code
2 STATUS + BVOLT +B voltage * * V or Err
TEMP. Screen temperature * * h or Err
DISP PANEL Screen open or close condition OPEN or NG
3 UN I T CHECK RAM CHECK Rear controller and screen RAM check OKorNG
ERR. STATUS DVD player unit error status Error code
DIGITAL OUT Digital out connection check OKorNG
4 VERSION RR DISPLAY Rear controller and screen version information
DVD PLAYER DVD player unit version information
H/U Audio unit version information
Self-diagnostic Function Mode Display
1. CONNECT
The screen displays connection check status for each device while in this self-diagnostic mode.
• RR DISPLAY (rear controller and screen) always indicates OK (green color).
• The screen indicates connecting device codes.
• If the connection for the H/U (audio unit) is DVD (DVD player unit), or JACK (auxiliary jack assembly) is faulty, the
screen displays NG (red color).
Connection check Connecting device codes

Connection OK: Green color
Connection NG: Red color
Connecting Connecting device

device code
0 Built-in control block
1 Audio unit button and LCD
2 Built-in audio block
6 Audio disc changer (With navigation) or Built-in audio disc changer (Without
navigation)
7 Built-in AM/FM tuner unit
13 Cassette player
16 Audio disc changer
19 XM receiver
1B DVD player unit
(cont'd)
2. STATUS
The screen will display screen status while in this self-diagnostic mode.
• If there is a change (analog to digital) of signal error for the categories +B VOLT or TEMP, the screen will display
Err.
• The screen indicates open or closed condition of the screen.
Screen open/close conditi on Normal; Green color

OPEN: Green color Error; Red color
CLOSE; Red color
3. UNIT CHECK
The screen will display self-diagnostic status while in this self-diagnostic mode.
D i a g n o s i s Menu
iECK
ERR, STATUS
DIGITAL OUT
Di gital out connection check RAW CHECKING; White color

OK; Green color RAM OK; Green color
NG; Red color RAM NG; Red color
DVD player unit error information
OK: Green color
ERROR; Red color
Error code displayed Possible cause

MECHA Disc read or eject error
FOCUS Cannot read disc
REGION Region code mismatch
ROM Built-in FLASH memory data broken
PARENTAL Parental error
DISC Disc format that is not recognized
4. VERSION
The screen will display device version information while in this self-diagnostic mode.
If a connection to a device is no-good, the screen will display —.
Device version
RES disc does not load RES disc does not eject
NOTE; NOTE;
22-111). 22-111).
• Check the connector for poor connections or loose • Check the connector for poor connections or loose
• Discs with labels should not be used in the DVD player • Discs with labels should not be used in the DVD player
unit. They may damage the player mechanism. unit. They may damage the player mechanism.
• Make sure the CD or DVD is compatible with the 1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
system (refer to the Owner's Manual for more
information). 2. Try ejecting a disc.
1.Try loading a disc. D o e s th e d is c e je c t?
D o e s th e d is c lo a d ? YES-lntermittent failure, the DVD player unit is OK at

this time.B
YES-lntermittent fail ure, the DVD player unit is OK at
thistime.lH NO-Go to step 3.
NO-Go to step 2. 3. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
2. Insert a known-good disc. 4. Disconnect the DVD player unit connector A (22P) and
wait 2 minutes, then reconnect the connector.
NOTE: Eject all the CD/DVDs before removing the
YES-The original disc is fau lty.! DVD player to prevent damaging the DVD player's
NO-Go to step 3. load mechanism.
3. Do the self-diagnostic function (see page 23-334), 5. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
then select function number 1 for Connect of the rear
6. Try ejecting a disc.
entertainment system.
D o e s th e d is c e je c t?
Is th e D V D p la y e r u n it c o n n e c t c o n d it io n O K ( g r e e n
c o lo r )? YES-lntermittent failure, the DVD player unit is OK at
this time.B
YES-Replace the DVD player unit (see page 23-357).B
NO-Replace the DVD player unit (see page 23-357).B
NO-Repair the loose connection in the DVD player
unit connections.!
RES disc does not play 4. Do the self-diagnostic function (see page 23-334),
NOTE: entertainment system.
Is t h e D V D p l a y e r u n it e r r o r s t a t u s in d ic a t o r O K ( g r e e n
22-111).
c o lo r )?
• Check the connector for poor connections or loose
terminals. YES-Go to step 5.
• CD-R/RWs and DVD-R/RWs will not work in the DVD NO-
player unit
• Damaged or contaminated discs may not play • If MECHA or FOCUS or ROM is indicated: Replace
properly. the DVD player unit.B
• Discs with labels should not be used in the DVD player • If REGION or DISC is indicated: Change the
unit. They may damage the player mechanism. unrecognized format disc.B
• If INVALID REGION is indicated: Change the
1.Try loading a DVD. unrecognized disc to region cord 1 or ALL discs
D o e s th e D V D p la y ( d is p la y a n d s o u n d )? (refer to the Owner's Manual for more
information).B
YES-lntermittent failure, the DVD player unit is OK at • If PARENTAL is indicated: Check the parental level
this time.B or password (refer to the Owner's Manual for more
NO-Go to step 2. information).B
2. Insert a known-good DVD. 5. Substitute a known-good DVD player unit (see page
23-357), then test the DVD player unit.
D o e s th e D V D p la y (d is p la y a n d s o u n d )?
Is t h e s o u n d n o r m a l?
YES-The original DVD is faulty or is an unreadable
form atB YES-Replace the original DVD player unit.B
NO-Go to step 3. NO-Check for loose wires or poor connections at DVD

player unit connectors, and recheck.B
3. Do the self-diagnostic function (see page 23-334),
Is t h e D V D p la y e r u n it c o n n e c t c o n d it io n O K ( g r e e n
c o lo r )?
YES-Go to step 4.
NO-Repair the poor connection in the DVD player unit
connectors.B
RES disc skips Black picture is shown on the display

NOTE; NOTE:
22-111). 22-111).
• Copy protected material on a CD-R/RW or DVD-R/RW • Ifthe navigation system, audio disc changer, orXM
disc will skip or not play. radio do not function properly, troubleshoot and
• Check for scratches, smudges, and fingerprints on the resolve those problems first.
disc.
1. With the ignition switch in ON (II), push the rear power
1-Try playing a disc. switch ON to see if the screen turns ON.
D o e s th e d is c s k ip ? D o e s th e s c re e n c o m e O N ?
YES-Go to step 2. YES-Operation is normal at this time.B
NO-lntermittent failure, the DVD player unit is OK at NO-Go to step 2.

this time.B
2. Check for brightness settings in the display set up
2 . Clean the disc, and recheck. (refer to the Owner's Manual for more information).
D o e s th e d is c p la y p r o p e r ly ? A r e th e d is p la y s e ttin g s e t p r o p e r ly ?
YES-The original disc was dirty.B YES-Go to step 3.
NO-Go to step 3. NO-Adjust the display setting and recheck the

function.B
3. Insert a known-good disc.
3. Check the No. 11 (7.5 A) fuse in the auxiliary
D o e s th e d is c p la y p r o p e r ly ? under-hood fuse box.
YES-The original disc is dirty or the wrong type.B Is t h e f u s e O K ?
NO-Go to step 4. YES-Go to step 4.
4. Do the self-diagnostic function (see page 23-334), NO-Replace the fuse, and recheck.B
entertainment system. 4. Remove the display cover (see page 23-358). Then
check that the rear controller and the screen is
Is t h e D V D p la y e r u n it e r r o r s t a t u s in d ic a t o r O K ( g r e e n properly connected.
c o lo r )?
Is th e r e a r c o n t r o lle r a n d th e s c r e e n c o n n e c t e d p r o p e r ly ?
YES-Go to step 5.
YES-Go to step 5.
NO-Replace the DVD player unit (see page 23-357).B
5. Compare the disc skipping to a known-good vehicle function.B
under the same conditions.
D o e s t h e k n o w n - g o o d v e h ic le 's d is c s k ip u n d e r t h e
s a m e c o n d itio n s ( o v e r th e s a m e b u m p s a n d o n t h e s a m e
ro u g h ro a d s )?
YES-Operation is normal.■
NO-Substitute a known-good DVD player unit (see
goes away, replace the original DVD player unit.B
White picture is shown on the display/display
lock
NOTE:
REAR CONTROLLER AND SCREEN • Check the vehicle battery condition first (see page
26P CONNECTOR 22-111).
+ B (WHT/GRN) • Check the connector for poor connections or loose
terminals.
switch ON to see if the screen turns ON.
D o e s th e s c r e e n tu rn o n n o r m a lly ?
YES-Operation is n orm al.!

NO-Go to step 2.
2. Run the rear entertainment system self-diagnostic
Is t h e r e b a t t e r y v o lt a g e ? function (see page 23-334).
YES-Go to step 6. Is th e s e lf -d ia g n o s t ic t e s t O K ?
NO-Repair an open in the wire(s) between the No. 11 YES-Check the self-diagnostic information.■
(7.5 A) fuse in the auxiliary under-hood fuse box and NO-Substitute a known-good rear controller and
the rear controller and screen.! screen (see page 23-358), and recheck. If the
6. Measure the voltage between rear controller and symptom/indication goes away, replace the original
screen 26P connector terminal No. 26 and body rear controller and screen.!
ground.
REAR CONTROLLER AND SCREEN

26P CONNECTOR
n n p ^l n n
1 / 3 / / 6 7 8 / / / 12 13
CM
CM
CM
CM
CO
o
15 16 / 18 19 21 / 25 26
/
TJ- "LT
GND (BLK)

I
Is t h e r e le s s th a n 0 . 2 V ?
YES-Replace the rear controller and screen (see page

23-358).B
between rear controller and screen 26P connector
terminal No. 26 and body ground (G504) (see page
22-49). ■
Display area picture has lines or has shifted Display does not go off when screen is closed
NOTE: NOTE:
22-111). 22-111).
1. With the ignition switch in ON (II), push the rear power 1. With the ignition switch in ON (II) and screen open,
switch ON to see ifthe screen turns ON. push the rear power switch ON. Then close the screen
by pivoting it up.
D o e s th e s c r e e n c o m e h a v e lin e s o r h a s t h e im a g e
s h ifte d ? D o e s th e s c r e e n g o o ff?
YES-Go to step 2. YES-Operation is normal at this tim e .!

NO-Operation is normal at this tim e .! NO-Go to step 2.
2. Check the screen mode set up (refer to the Owner's 2. Check the lock switch.
Manual for more information).
D o e s th e s c r e e n c lo s e s e c u r e ly ?
A r e th e s e ttin g s s e t p r o p e r ly ?
YES-lf the screen securely closes and the screen does
YES-Substitute a known-good rear controller and not go off, replace i t . !
screen (see page 23-358), and recheck. Ifthe
NO-Relock the screen, and recheck. If the screen will
rear controller and screen.! not securely lock into position, replace i t . !
NO-Adjust the display settings and recheck the

function.!
No display appears on the rear controller No sound/no display with auxiliary video unit
indicator inputs
NOTE; NOTE:
22-111). 22-111).
• Check that the auxiliary device is properly connected,
and has fresh batteries or power source connected.
switch ON to see ifthe screen turns ON.
m Do not connect an RCA type shorting plug with the
D o e s th e s c re e n c o m e o n ? auxiliary jack assembly 14P connector, or system
damage may occur.
YES-Operation is normal at this time.B
1. Connect an auxiliary video source, and check the
NO-Go to step 2.
volume/display operation.
2. Check the operation and display of the screen, the
A r e th e s o u n d /d is p la y n o rm a l?
wireless remote control and the wireless headphone.
YES-Operation is normal at this tim e .!
A r e th e o p e r a tio n a n d d is p la y n o r m a l?
YES-Faulty rear indicator.! NO-Go to step 2.

2. Substitute a known-good auxiliary video unit, and
NO-
recheck.
• Screen faulty: Go to the Black picture is shown on
D o e s th e a u x ilia r y v id e o u n it o p e r a t e p r o p e r ly ?
the display troubleshooting (see page 23-342).!
• Wireless remote control faulty: Go to the Wireless YES-Original auxiliary video unit fau lty.!
remote control does not work (all buttons)
NO-Go to step 3.
• Wireless headphone faulty: Go to the Wireless 3. Do the self-diagnostic function (see page 23-334),
headphone sound is weak, distorted, volume does then select function number 1 for Connect of the rear
not change, or there is no sound in all modes entertainment system.
Is th e a u x ilia r y j a c k a s s e m b ly c o n n e c t c o n d itio n O K
( g r e e n c o lo r )?
YES-Go to step 11.

NO-Go to step 4.
5. Remove the auxiliary jack assembly (see page
23-360). Check that the auxiliary jack assembly is
properly connected.
Is th e a u x ilia r y j a c k a s s e m b ly c o n n e c t e d p r o p e r ly ?
YES-Go to step 6.
function.!
6. Disconnect audio unit connector B (30P), and the
auxiliary jack assembly 14P connector.
7. Check for continuity between audio unit connector B 9. Check for continuity between audio unit connector B
(30P) and body ground according to the table. (SOP) according to the table.
Audio unit connector Wire color From terminal To terminals

B21 LTBLU B26 B27, B28, B29
B22 PUR B27 B28, B29
B27 PNK B28 B28
B28 GRN
B29 BLU AUDIO UNIT CONNECTOR B (30P)
AUDIO UNIT CONNECTOR i (30P)
00
9 10 11 12 13 14
CM
/ 3 / X / 7
CM
CD
CM
00
CM
CM
CM
/ / 17 / / / 21 X23 25 27 29 X
CM
00
X, 3 X X X 7 X 9 10 11 12 13 14
CM
CM
CO
CM
CM
CD
00
CM
/ / 17 / / / 21 X 24 25 27 29 /
Wire side of fema l e terminals
W ire side of female terminals Is t h e r e c o n t in u ity ?
YES-There is a short in the wires between the audio

YES-There is a short to body ground in the wire(s) affected shielded harness.B
assembly. Replace the affected shielded harness.! NO-Go to step 10.
NO-Go to step 8.
8. Checkfor continuity between audio unit connector B
(SOP) according to the table.

B7 B21, B22
B21 B22
AUDIO UNIT CONNECTOR B (SOP)
/ 2 3 / / / 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
/ / 17 / / / 21 22 X 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 /

Audio unit Auxiliary jack Wi re color 1 10,12
connector assembly
connector AUXILIARY JACK ASSEMBLY
B21 8 LT BLU
B22 9 PUR
B27 11 PNK 1 2 3 '— ' 4 5 6
B28 10 GRN
B29 12 BLU
7 8 9 10 X 11 12 13 14
AUDIO UNIT CONNECTOR B (SOP)

00
CO
CO
/ 2 / X / 7 9 10 11 12 14 Is t h e r e c o n tin u ity ?
CD
CM
00
CM
CO
CM
CM
CM
CM
/ / 17 / / / 21 X 25 27 29 / YES-Go to step 15.

NO-Faulty auxiliary jack assembly.B
Wire side of fema l e terminals 15. Remove the RCA type shorting plug(s), and check the
same terminals again for continuity.
YES-Faulty auxiliary jack assembly.B
NO-Faulty audio unit.B
1 Cj p 4 5 6
CM 00
3
CD
7 10 X 11 12 13 14
Wire side of female term ina l s
YES-Go to step 13.

12. Disconnect the auxiliary jack assembly 14P
connector.
13. Connect an RCA type shorting plug to each audio
input (R and L).
NOTE: Do not connect the RCA type shorting plug
with the auxiliary jack assembly 14P connector
connected, or system damage may occur.
Wired headphone sound is weak, distorted, 5. Check for continuity between audio unit connector B
' (SOP) and body ground according to the table.
volume does not change, or there is no sound
NOTE: Audio unit connector Wire color
B8 BRN
B24 ORN
22-111).
B25 YEL
terminals.
1. Substitute a known-good wired headphone set, and
recheck.
D o e s th e s y m p to m g o a w a y ? / 2 3 / / / 7 X 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
/ / 17 / / / 21 22 X 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 /
YES-Original wired headphone set is faulty.B
NO-Go to step 2.
2. Plug the wired headphones into the other ports of the W ire side of female terminals
auxiliary jack assembly to check their condition.
D o a ll th e p o rts h a v e th e s a m e s y m p to m ?
YES-Go to step 3.
NO-Faulty auxiliary jack assem bly.l assembly. Replace the affected shielded harness.!
3. Check that the wired headphone jack is properly NO-Go to step 6.

connected.
6. Check for continuity between audio unit connector B
Is th e h e a d p h o n e ja c k c o n n e c t e d p r o p e r ly ? (30P) according to the table.
YES-Go to step 4. From terminal To terminals

B8 B9, B24, B25
NO-Reconnect the wired headphone connector, and
B9 B24, B25
recheck the function.■
B24 B25
4. Disconnect the auxiliary jack assembly 14P connector
and audio unit connector B (30P). AUDIO UNIT CONNECTOR B (SOP)
/ 2 3 / / / 7 x 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
OO
CM
^r
CM
CM
CM
CD
/ / 17 / / / 21 X 23 25 27 29 /
Wire side of fem a l e term i nals

Wireless headphones do not work or there is
static in DVD mode
NOTE:
Audio unit Auxiliary jack Wire color
connector assembly
22-111).
connector
B8 13 BRN • Check the connector for poor connections or loose
B24 14 ORN terminals.
B25 7 YEL 1. Check the CONNECT and UNIT CHECK of the rear
entertainment system self-diagnostic function (see
AUDIO UNIT CONNECTOR B (30P) page 23-336).
Is th e s e lf -d ia g n o s t ic s ta tu s in d ic a t o r O K ( G r e e n c o lo r )?
YES-Go to the Wireless headphone sound is weak,

/ 2 3 / / / 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
distorted, volume does not change, or there is no
/ / 17 / / / 21 2 2 ^ 2 3 24 25 26 27 28 29 /
sound in all modes (see page 23-351 ) . ■
NO-Go to step 2.
Wire side of female terminals 2. Remove the audio unit (see page 23-167).
3. Check that the audio unit connector H (2P) (digital
audio) is properly connected to the audio unit
Is th e a u d io u n it c o n n e c t o r H ( 2 P ) ( d ig it a l a u d io )
c o n n e c te d p r o p e r ly ?
CD
CO
1 2 ? 4 5
YES-Go to step 4.
7
00
9 10 X 11 12 13 14
NO-Reeonnect the connector, and recheck the
wireless headphone function.B
Wire side of female terminals 4. Remove the DVD player unit (see page 23-357).
5. Check that the DVD player unit connector B (2P)
Is t h e r e c o n t in u it y ? (digital audio) is properly connected to the DVD player
YES-Faulty auxiliary jack assembly.l unit
NO-There is an open in the wire(s) between the audio Is th e D V D p la y e r u n it c o n n e c t o r B ( 2 P ) ( d ig it a l a u d io )

unit and the auxiliary jack assembly. Replace the c o n n e c te d p ro p e r ly ?
affected shielded harness.B YES-Go to step 6.
NO-Reconnect the connector and recheck the
wireless headphone function.B
6. Disconnect audio unit connector H (2P) (digital audio)
and DVD player unit connector B (2P) (digital audio).
(cont'd)
7. Check for continuity between audio unit connector H 9. Check for continuity between audio unit connector H
(2P) (digital audio) terminal No. 1 and DVD player unit (2P) (digital audio) terminals No. 1 and No. 2.
connector B (2P) (digital audio) terminal No. 1.
AUDIO UNIT CONNECTOR H (2P) (DIGITAL AUDIO) AUDIO UNIT CONNECTOR H (2P) (DIGITAL AUDIO)
r m ji
DIGITAL SIG
DIGITAL SH

DVD PLAYER UNIT CONNECTOR B (2P) (DIGITAL AUDIO)
YES-Replace the digital audio lead.B
YES-Go to step 8.
NO-Go to step 10.
NO-Replace the digital audio lead.■
10. Substitute a known-good DVD player unit, and
8. Check for continuity between audio unit connector H recheck the wireless headphone function.
(2P) (digital audio) terminal No. 1 and body ground.
D o th e w ir e le s s h e a d p h o n e s w o r k in D V D m o d e ?
AUDIO UNIT CONNECTOR H (2P) (DIGITAL AUDIO) YES-Replace the original DVD player unit (see page
23-357).■
“LTLT
r j DIGITAL SIG
I.
Term ina l side of female term inals
YES-Go to step 9.
NO-Replace the digital audio lead.B
Wireless headphone sound is weak, sound is
distorted, there is static, volume does not
change, or there is no sound in all modes Audio unit connector Wire color
B11 WHT
NOTE: B12 RED
• Check the vehicle battery condition first (see page B13 BLK
22-111).
terminals.
1. Substitute a known-good wireless headphone and
recheck. / 2 3 / / / 7 X 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
D o e s th e s y m p to m g o a w a y ? / / 17 / / / 21 22 X 2 3 24 25 26 27 28 29 /
YES-Replace the original wireless headphones.®

NO-Go to step 2. Wire side of female terminals
2. Check the lens on the rear edge of the rear screen for
dirt or damage. is t h e r e c o n tin u it y ?
D o e s t h e r e a r s c r e e n a p p e a r to b e in g o o d c o n d it io n ? YES-There is a short to body ground in the wire(s)

between the audio unit and the rear controller and
YES-Go to step 3. screen. Replace the affected shielded harness.B
NO-Substitute a known-good rear controller and NO-Go to step 6.
screen (see page 23-358), and recheck.B
6. Check for continuity between audio unit connector B
3. Substitute a known-good audio unit (see page (SOP) according to the table.
23-167), and recheck.
D o e s th e s y m p to m g o a w a y ? B10 B11, B12, B13
YES-Replace the original audio unit.B B11 B12, B13
B12 B13
NO-Go to step 4.
4. Disconnect audio unit connector B (30P), and the rear AUDIO UNIT CONNECTOR B (30P)
controller and screen 26P connector.
/ 2 3 / / / 7 > < 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
/ 17 / / / 21 22 X 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 /

unit and the rear controller and screen. Replace the
NO-Go to step 7.
7. Check for continuity between audio unit connector B Wireless remote control does not work (all
(30P) and rear controller and screen 26P connector
buttons)
NOTE:
Audio unit Rear controller Wire color
connector and screen
22-111).
connector
B11 20 WHT • Check the connector for poor connections or loose
B12 7 RED terminals.
B13 8 BLK • Make sure that the rear power and rear control are on
(refer to the Owner’s Manual for more information).
AUDIO UNIT CONNECTOR B (30P) 1. Check the wireless remote control operation.
D o e s th e w ir e le s s r e m o te c o n tr o l o p e r a te n o r m a lly ?
/ 2 3 / / / 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 YES-Operation is normal at this tim eJI

/ / 17 / / / 21 22 X 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 / NO-Go to step 2.
2. Substitute a known-good wireless remote control,
and recheck.
D o e s th e w ir e le s s r e m o te c o n tr o l o p e r a te n o r m a lly ?
YES-Replace the original wireless remote control .®

REAR CONTROLLER AND SCREEN
26P CONNECTOR NO-Go to step 3.
.n....n........... X ............... n... n 3. Check the audio unit operation.
1 / 3 / / 6 7 8 / / / 12 13
D o e s th e a u d io u n it o p e r a t e n o r m a lly ?
/ 15 n16r 18 19 20 21 22 23 25 26
YES-Go to step 4.
NO-Go to the audio unit power switch will not turn on
W ire side of female terminals (No information display and no sound)
troubleshooting, '07 model (see page 23-90), '08-10
Is t h e r e c o n t in u it y ? models (see page 23-91).!
YES-Faulty rear controller and screen.■ 4. Check the rear controller display.
NO-There is an open in the wire(s) between the audio Does t h e d i s p l a y o p e r a t e n o r m a l l y ?
unit and the rear controller and screen. Replace the
YES-Replace the rear indicator printed circuit board
(see page 23-358).■
NO-Go to the no display appears on the rear indicator
troubleshooting (see page 23-345).B
Wireless remote control does not work Wireless remote control does not work (rear
(source select buttons) power button)
NOTE: NOTE: Check the vehicle battery condition first (see page
22-111). 1. Check the wireless remote control operation.
terminals. D o e s th e a u d io u n it in d ic a t e R E A R P W R ?
1. Check the wireless remote control operation. YES-Replace the wireless remote control.®
D o e s th e s o u r c e s e le c t b u tto n o p e r a te ? NO-Go to step 2.
YES-Operation is normal at this time.B 2. Press the REAR PWR button of the audio unit.
NO-Go to step 2. Is it n o r m a l?
2. Do the self-diagnostic function (see page 23-334), YES-Operation is normal at this time.B
then select function number 2 for Connect of the rear NO-Replace the wireless remote control.!
Is th e d e v ic e c o n n e c t c o n d it io n O K ( g r e e n c o lo r )?
YES-Replace the wireless remote control.■

NO-Repair the connection for the device that has a
connection error indicated.■
Screen backlight does not dim/remains dim 7. Measure the voltage between rear controller and
screen 26P connector terminal No. 12 and body
NOTE; ground. Operate the combination light switch on and
• Check the vehicle battery condition first (see page off to see ifthe voltage changes.
22-111).
• Check the connector for poor connections or loose REAR CONTROLLER AND SCREEN
terminals. 26P CONNECTOR
1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). ILL+ (RED/BLK)

n n X .... _n__ 1 .n _
2. Turn the combination light switch ON and OFF. 1 / 3 / / 6 7 8 / / / 12 13
CM
CM
m
CM
D o e s th e s c r e e n b a c k lig h t d im w it h t h e c o m b in a t io n lig h t / 15 16
L f”
/ 1 8 1 9 2 0 21 23 26
s w it c h in t h e O N p o s it io n ?
YES-Operation is normal at this tim e .B 1 Qj9
NO-Go to step 3.
3. Check the backlight settings in the display set up
(refer to the Owner's Manual for more information).
Is t h e r e b a t t e r y v o lta g e w ith th e c o m b in a t io n lig h t s w it c h
A r e th e d is p la y s e ttin g s s e t p r o p e r ly ? O N ?
NO-Adjust the display settings and recheck the NO-Go to step 8.
function.B
8. Check the No. 7 (7.5 A) fuse in the passenger's
4. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). under-dash fuse/relay box.
5. Check that the rear controll er and screen and audio Is th e f u s e O K ?
unit are properly connected.
YES-Repair an open in the wire(s) between the No. 7
A r e th e c o n n e c tio n s O K ? (7.5 A) fuse in the passenger's under-dash fuse/relay
YES-Go to step 6. box and the rear controller and screen.B
NO-Reconnect the connector, and recheck the NO-Replace the fuse, and recheck.B
function.B
DVD player unit illumination does not come
on/does not dim
NOTE;
REAR CONTROLLER AND SCREEN • Check the vehicle battery condition first (see page
26P CONNECTOR 22-111).
n n X .............. _n.... . n_ terminals.
1 / 3 / / 6 87 / / / 12 13
/ 15 16 / 18 19 20 21 22 23 / 25 26
2. Turn the combination light switch on and off.
GND (BLK)
D o e s t h e D V D p la y e r u n it illu m in a t io n d im w ith th e
c o m b in a t io n lig h t s w it c h in t h e o n p o s it io n ?
YES-Operation is normal at this time.B

NO-Go to step 3.
Is th e r e le s s th a n 0 .2 V ? 3. Measure the voltage between DVD player unit 22P
YES-Repair an open or high resistance in the wire connector terminal No. 3 and body ground. Operate
between rear controller and screen 26P connector the combination light switch on and off to see if the
terminal No. 26 and body ground (G504) (see page voltage changes.
22-49).f l
DVD PLAYER UNIT 22P CONNECTOR
NO-Replace the rear controller and screen (see page
23-358).I
1LL+ (RED/BLK)
00
/ /
CM
3 4 5 7 9
/
o
CM
/ 12 13 14 15 16 X 17 18 19 21
Is t h e r e b a t t e r y v o lta g e w ith t h e c o m b in a t io n lig h t s w it c h

in t h e o n p o s it io n ?
YES-Replace the DVD player unit (see page 23-357).B

NO-Go to step 4.
4. Check the No. 7 (7.5 A) fuse in the passenger's
YES-Repair an open in the wire between the No. 7 (7.5

A) fuse in the passenger's under-dash fuse/relay box
and the DVD player unit.B
DVD player unit DISC IN indicator or DISC Wireless remote control illumination does
DISTINCTION indicator does not come not come on
on/does not go off NOTE;
NOTE: • Check the vehicle battery condition first (see page
22-111), • Check the connector for poor connections or loose
• Check the connector for poor connections or loose terminals.
terminals. 1. Check the wireless remote control operation.
1. Check the DVD player unit operation. D o e s t h e illu m in a tio n f o r a ll th e b u tt o n s c o m e o n ( 1 0
D o e s th e D V D p la y e r u n it o p e r a t e n o r m a lly ? s e c o n d s )?
YES-Operation is normal at this time.B YES-Operation is normal at this time.B
2. Substitute a known-good disc, and recheck. 2. Replace the batteries in the wireless remote control,
and recheck (see page 23-361).
Is it n o r m a l?
D o e s th e w ir e le s s c o n t r o l illu m in a t io n c o m e o n ?
YES-Original disc is faulty ■
YES-The original batteries were faulty.B
NO-Substitute a known-good DVD player unit (see
page 23-357), and recheck.B NO-Replace the wireless remote control.B
SRS component locations (see page 24-23), and the
NOTE:
• Eject all the CD/DVDs before removing the DVD player
to prevent damaging the DVD player's load.
parts.
• If a disc is loaded remove it before continuing.
1. Remove the center lower cover (see page 20-138).
2. With premium audio system: Remove the
HandsFreeLink control unit (see page 23-388).
6. Install the DVD player unit in the reverse order of
3. Remove the bolts (A), and pull out the DVD player unit
removal, and make sure the DVD player unit
(B).
connectors are plugged in properly. Then test the
DVD player unit operation.
A
6 x 1.0 mm
9.4 N-m (0.95 kgf-m, 6.9 Ibf-ft)
4. Remove the harness clip (C), then disconnect the
connectors (D) from the DVD player unit
Rear Controller and Screen Removal/Installation
NOTE: 3. Remove the wireless remote control (A).

• Take care not to scratch the headliner and display
cover.
1. Remove the display cover.
4. Remove the screws from the rear indicator (B).

5. Disconnect the cable (C) from the rear indicator.
6. Remove the screws, then remove the rear indicator
printed circuit board (A).
2. Remove the mounting bolts (A) and disconnect the

connector (B) from the rear controller and screen.
9. Disconnect the cable (A), then remove the screws and
the rear control printed circuit board (B).
10. Install the parts in the reverse order of removal, and

make sure the rear controller and screen connector is
8. Remove the screws and lock switches (A).

Auxiliary Jack Assembly Wireless Headphone Battery
1. Carefully pry out the auxiliary jack assembly (A). 1. Remove the battery cover (A) from the wireless
headphone, and lift the cover.
2. Remove the battery (B) from the wireless headphone.
2. Disconnect the 14P connector (B), and remove the Replacement Battery Size: AAA
auxiliary jack assembly. 3. Turn the left speaker (A), and confirm that the
indicator (B) comes on after the battery is replaced.
3. Install the auxiliary jack assembly in the reverse order
of removal.
Wireless Remote Control Battery Replacement
1. Remove the cover (A) from the remote control.
2. Remove the batteries (B).

Replacement Battery: BR3032
3. Confirm that each operation works normally after the
batteries are replaced.
HFL-NAVIGATI ON MICROPHONE
(B uilt into the am bient light/HomeLink unit)
LEFT TWEETER
(HFL message output) RIGHT TWEETER
(HFL message output)
DRIVER'S DOOR FRONT PASSENGER'S

SPEAKER DOOR SPEAKER
(HFL message output) (HFL message output)
AUDIO UNIT
HANDSFREELINK CONTROL UNIT

Self-diagnostic Function, page 23-371
HFL SWITCH Removal/Installation, page 23-388
Test, page 23-390 HFL VOLUME
Removal/Installation, page 23-390 (Using audio unit volume knob)
NAVIGATION UNIT (Under the driver's seat)

H o w to Check fo r DTCs w ith th e HDS
NOTE: Check the vehicle battery condition first (see page 22-111).

4. Make sure the HDS communicates with the vehicle and the HandsFreeLink control unit. If it doesn't, troubleshoot the
DLC circuit (see page 11-269).
5. Select HF LINK/TEL in the BODY ELECTRICAL menu.
6. Select DTCs in the HF LINK/TEL menu.
NOTE:
Introduction Voice Control Tips and Im proving V oice

The HFL system works only with Honda approved
Recognition
Bluetooth®-enabled cell phones with a hands-free To give a voice command to the HFL system, press and
profile. If you are not sure if a particular cell phone is release the HFL TALK button. Always wait for the beep,
compatible with the HFL system, Honda has a dedicated then give your command in a clear, natural voice. The
call center at 888-528-7876 and website handsfreelink. HFL microphone is on the ceiling by the map lights.
honda.com to answer your questions.
'08-09 models: Ifthe HFL system doesn't recognize your
The HFL system allows you to make and receive voice command, you'll hear "Pardon." If your command
hands-free calls. It cannot control the phone's isn't recognized a second time, you'll hear "Please
performance (call quality and signal strength). For more repeat." If your command isn't recognized a third time,
information about performance and performance the HFL system sends you to its Help menu.
problems, refer to Dropped Calls.
'10 model: If the HFL system doesn't recognize your
Most HFL complaints are due to pairing, configuration, voice command, you'll hear "Pardon? Press the TALK
or compatibility issues. Contact the Honda call center button and say a command. For a list of commands, say
before replacing the HandsFreeLink control unit. handsfreehelp."' If your command isn't recognized a
second time, you'll hear "Bluetooth handsfreelink main
Checking Cell Phone C o m p atib ility menu. Available calling options are call, dial, redial, and
The most important step in troubleshooting HFL issues transfer. Available setup options are phone setup,
is to identify the customer's phone model, software phone book, and system setup. For more detailed help,
version, and the cellular carrier that experiences the HFL say handsfreehelp." If your command isn't recognized a
problem. Not all phones with the Bluetooth feature and a third time, the HFL system sends you to its Help menu.
hands-free profile are compatible with the Honda HFL To hear a list of available options at any time, press the
system. HFL TALK button and say "Hands-free help."
Go to handsfreelink.honda.com, and check if the The HFL system may have problems recognizing some
customer's phone is approved to work with the Honda voices. To improve voice recognition:
HFL system.
• Close the windows and the moonroof.
NOTE: • Set the fan speed to low (1 or 2) or off.
• The lists of approved, archived, and currently testing • Adjust the airflow from the center vents down, so that
phone model lists change, so make sure you view it's not blowing against the microphone on the ceiling.
them frequently. • Speak in a clear and natural voice. Ifthe system cannot
• Phones are added as they are approved. recognize your command, try speaking louder, in a
• Phones can be removed from the approved list if a deeper tone.
software bug is discovered that makes the phone • Ifthe background noise is too loud, you may need to
incompatible. These phones can be added back to the speak louder.
approved list ifthe phone manufacturer corrects the • If you speak with something in your mouth, or your
bug. voice is too high, the system may not interpret your
• If the software bug is corrected, a new software command correctly.
version is created and may be listed in the Supported • Find out ifthe problem is with one person or with
Features section of the phone. everyone who uses the system. Ifthe system has a
• The Honda web site now includes the software problem with only one person's voice, this is a system
versions that are tested and approved. When software limitation.
versions are listed, you need to know which version is
loaded on the phone to help you troubleshoot the
customer's complaint. If you cannot access the Honda
website, call the HFL call center at 888-528-7876 for
further assistance. The call center is open Monday
thru Friday from 6:00 a.m. to 6:00 p.m. CT; Saturday
from 7:00 a.m. to 6:00 p.m. CT; and Sunday from 8:00
a.m. to 6:00 p.m. CT.
Many issues result from the customer not using the N avig ation Through M enus
system properly. Make sure the customer is using the
HFL buttons and not the navigation TALK/navigation To skip a voice prompt, press and release the HFL TALK
BACK buttons. When the HFL TALK button is pressed, button while the HFL system is speaking. The system
the customer hears one audible tone. When the HFL beings listening for your next voice command.
BACK button is pressed, the customer hears two audible
To go back a step in a voice command sequence, press
tones. Make sure to press the HFL BACK button to exit
and release the HFL BACK button, or press the HFL TALK
the HFL main menu after completing a call and before
button and say "Go back." If you don't say anything
giving any navigation commands.
while the HFL system is listening for your voice
The HFL system may experience a number recognition command, it times out and stops voice recognition. The
issue, such as when a customer says a set of numbers in next time you press and release the HFL TALK button,
a group unrecognized by the system. The HFL system the HFL system begins listening from the point it timed
understands phone numbers in specific blocks of 1,3,4, out.
7, and 10 numbers. For example, the system
If you've finished or want to stop a voice command
understands;
sequence at any time, press and release the HFL BACK
button, or press and release the HFL TALK button, wait
1234567890
for the beep, and say "Cancel." The next time you press
123-456-7890
and release the HFL TALK button, the HFL system begins
1-2-3-4-5-6-7-8-9-0
from its main menu. To avoid keeping the audio system
The system may become confused if numbers are stated muted, press and release the HFL BACK button when
in other blocks, as the following: you are finished.
1234-567-890 NOTE: You can say multiple commands in one

12-34-56-78-90 sequence, like "Phone setup-pair" after pressing the HFL
12345-67890 TALK button.
123-4567-890
Pairing a Cell Phone ('08-09 m odels) 2. Press and release the HFL TALK button. After the
beep, say "Pair." The HFL responds, "The pairing
You must pair an approved Bluetooth-compatible phone process requires operation of your mobile phone. For
to the HFL system before you can make and receive safety, only perform this function while the vehicle is
calls. For a current list of approved phones and specific stopped. State a four-digit code for pairing. Note this
phone pairing instructions for each phone, see Checking code. It will be requested by the phone."
Cell Phone Compatibility, go to handsfreelink.honda.
com, or call 888-528-7876. 3. Press and release the HFL TALK button. After the
beep, say the four-digit code you want to use. This can
The following procedure works for most phones. If you be any four-digit number you want. For example, say
cannot pair a phone to the HFL system with this "1 ,2 ,3 ,4 ." The HFL responds, "1 ,2 ,3 ,4 . Is this
procedure, refer to the phone's operating manual, visit correct?"
handsfreelink.honda.com, or call 888-528-7876.
4. Press and release the HFL TALK button. After the
NOTE; beep, say "Yes." The HFL responds, "HFL is now
• You cannot pair a phone while the vehicle is moving. searching for a Bluetooth phone. Make sure the
• Your phone must be in Discovery Mode. phone you are trying to pair is in Discovery mode." If
• A maximum of six Bluetooth-compatible phones can these steps do not work on the phone you are pairing,
be paired to the system. refer to the phone's operating manual.
1. With the phone on and the ignition switch in 5. Follow the prompts on your phone to get it into its
ACCESSORY (I) or ON (II), press and release the HFL Discovery mode. The phone will search for the HFL.
TALK button. After the beep, say "Phone setup." The When it comes up, select HandsFreeLink from the list
HFL responds, "Phone setup options are status, pair, of options displayed on your phone.
edit, delete, and list." 6. When asked by the phone, enter the four-digit code
from step 3 into your phone. The HFL responds, "A
new phone has been found. What would you like to
name this phone?"
beep, say the name you want to use. For example, say
"Tom's phone." The HFL responds, "Tom's phone
has been successfully paired. Returning to the main
menu."
Pairing a Cell Phone ('10 m odel) Pairing Troubleshooting
You must pair an approved BI uetooth-compatible phone Many pairing issues are resolved by altering the
to the HFL system before you can make and receive customer's phone settings.
calls. For a current list of approved phones and specific
phone pairing instructions for each phone, see Checking Bluetooth feature settings must be turned on. Phone
manufacturers set the default to disable Bluetooth
Cell Phone Compatibility, go to handsfreelink.honda.
features to conserve battery life. Cell phones may
com, or call 888-528-7876.
provide procedures to Temporary Power On Bluetooth,
The following procedure works for most phones. If you or Power On Bluetooth. Turn the Bluetooth feature on,
cannot pair a phone to the HFL system with this pair the phone to the vehicle, and confirm the phone is
procedure, refer to the phone's operating manual, visit linked. Do this by turning the phone off and back on.
handsfreelink.honda.com, or call 888-528-7876. Make or receive a call to confirm that the cell phone is
successfully paired.
NOTE:
• You cannot pair a phone while the vehicle is moving. When the phone's Bluetooth feature is on, other
• Your phone must be in Discovery Mode. handsfree accessories such as earpieces or headsets
may automatically reconnect to the phone when you
• A maximum of six Bluetooth-compatible phones can
turn on the accessory or move it within range of the cell
be paired to the system.
phone. This results in the phone not connecting to the
1. With the phone on and the ignition switch in HFL system when the customer enters the vehicle. You
ACCESSORY (I) o r ON (II), press and release th e HFL must unlink the hands-free accessory from the phone
TALK button. After the beep, say "Phone setup." The before the HFL system can reconnect.
HFL responds, "Phone setup options are pair, edit,
Some phones have an Auto Answer setting that
delete, list, status, next phone, set pairing code."
functions with a headset. This setting must be turned off
2. Press and release the HFL TALK button. After the or the HFL system cannot accept any incoming calls.
beep, say "Pair." The HFL responds, "The pairing When this setting is on, it blocks the HFL system from
process requires operation of your mobile phone. For answering the call, and the call goes to voice mail. This
safety, only perform this function while the vehicle is can cause the customer to thinkthatthe cell phone is not
stopped. For proper system function a compatible paired properly.
bluetooth phone is required. Please visit
Ifthe HFL system has six phones paired, it will not tell
handsfreelink.honda.com for a list of approved
you that it has reached its maximum, and will not allow
phones and other system information. Handsfreelink
you to pair a new phone. To check how many phones are
is waiting to pair with a bluetooth phone. From your
paired, press and release the HFL TALK button. After the
phone, search for bluetooth devices, and select
beep, say "Phone setup list." The HFL system lists every
handsfreelink. When prompted by your mobile phone
assigned phone name paired with it, then finishes by
enter the pairing code 0000."
saying "The entire list has been read. Returning to the
3. When prompted by your mobile phone, enter the main menu." Count the number of phones listed. If there
pairing code 0000. Refer to your cell phone user guide are six, you must delete one phone before adding a new
for more information about searching for a Bluetooth one.
device.
4. Once the phone is recognized by the HFL system, it
responds, "Handsfreelink has connected to a new
phone. A name is needed to identify this phone. Press
the talk button and say a name. For example, John's
phone."
beep, say the name you want to use. For example, say
"Tom's phone." The HFL responds, "Tom's phone
has been successfully paired. Returning to the main
menu."
(cont'd)
Pairing Checks Dropped Calls

For more information about pairing, refer to the cell Customers may perceive dropped calls as being an HFL
phone owner's manual, or go to handsfreelink.honda. system fault, but most dropped calls are from cell phone
com. and cell phone carrier issues. The HFL system does not
directly handle the cell phone signal. It allows the cell
1. Is the cell phone compatible with the HFL?
phone to transmit the cell phone audio over the vehicle's
2. Is the Bluetooth feature turned on? audio system.
3. Is the customer using the HFL buttons, not the Before troubleshooting for dropped calls, confirm the
navigation TALK/navigation BACK buttons, when cell phone settings:
pairing? • Disable Audio Answer. If Auto Answer is enabled,
incoming calls are routed to voice mail.
4. Is the cell phone battery fully charged, and is there
good signal strength when pairing? • Disable Always Ask/Trust, Authorize Device, or similar
setting, If these settings are enabled, each time the
5. Do a soft reset on the cell phone. HFL system attempts to link to the phone, the phone
will ask if you want to connect. If you do not allow the
6. Ifthe customer is trying to pair a Blackberry® or Palm
connection, the HFL will not operate. The phone must
Treo™ device, make sure the customer uses the shift
be set to Never Ask, Authorize Device, etc. (based on
key when entering the pass code. Ifthe shift key is not
the phone manufacturer and carrier) for permission.
pressed, the customer may be entering letters. The
Refer to the cell phone owner's manual for more
HFL does not recognize letters.
information.
• Disable Flip Open to Answer. If this setting is enabled,
the phone must remain open in the vehicle. If it is
closed, the incoming calls are routed to voice mail.
Always confirm with the customer ifthe number of
dropped calls is higher while using the HFL system as
opposed to using the cell phone only. Customers often
confuse problems with their phone or carrier as a
problem with the HFL system. The HFL system cannot
control or determine:
• Cellular connection quality.
• Signal strength.
• Cellular coverage.
• Ambient weather conditions that affect cellular
signals.
When a customer complains about dropped calls, ask
questions about when or where the calls are dropped,
such as:
• Do you drive the same route on a regular basis?
• Does the call drop in the same location?
• Where do you keep your cell phone?
• Have you compared the number of dropped calls
using the HFL versus making calls from the handset?
• Does your phone have an antenna that needs to be
extended?
Many reasons for a dropped call are not related to the
HFL system. Here are some causes for dropped calls:
• Ifthe quantity of dropped calls is about the same when Phone Will Not Automatically Connect the
the customer uses the HFL system versus the handset,
HFL
the issue is likely due to the cellular phone or carrier.
• Ifthe phone is equipped with a retractable antenna, it If a customer complains that their cell phone is not
needs to be extended to maximize signal strength. automatically connecting to the HFL system when they
® If a customer also notices that the calls tend to drop in enter the vehicle, do this:
the same areas, the HFL system may be operating 1. Make sure the Bluetooth feature is turned on in the
normally, but something about the area diminishes cell phone.
cellular coverage to a point where the call drops.
• Hills or mountains can block or interfere with cellular 2. Make sure the cell phone is properly painted to the
signals. HFL system.
• High-rise buildings, bridges, or other large structures 3. Do a soft reset to the cell phone.
may block or interfere with cellular signals.
4. Check if the phone has an Authorized Connection or
• Placing the cell phone in a purse, in a metal briefcase,
under the seat, in the glove box, or in the trunk can all Trusted option.
affect signal reception. 5. Check the battery and signal strength on the cell
• There are coverage gaps in the cellular service. When phone. Pairing a phone requires optimal signal
driving, a call is typically passed from one tower to strength and a nearly full battery.
another. Ifthe customer drives through an area where
there is a coverage gap between towers, the call Incoming Calls
drops.
If a customer complains that they cannot receive
• Electrical storms, heavy rain, or overcast conditions incoming calls through the HFL system, see if the call is
interfere with signal strength. routing to the cell phone instead of the HFL system. An
• The cell phone battery's state of change can affect easy way to know if the call is routed to the cell phone is
signal reception. A low battery may reduce the when the customer says, "I can't hear the caller, but they
phone's ability to boost the antenna's power and can hear me."
function properly, especially in low signal strength
areas. Some phone manufacturers trade off signal 1. Make sure the Bluetooth feature is turned on in the
transmission and reception strength for battery life. cell phone.
As the battery weakens, the signal strength may also 2. Make sure the cell phone is paired to the HFL system
weaken. Some cell phones may operate more and linked.
effectively than others in low signal strength areas,
especially with a partially charged battery, and 3. Make sure the answer settings in the cell phone are
depending on whether or not the retractable antenna set to multi-key or any-key answer. Ifthe phone is set
is fully extended (if applicable). On these models, to flip open to answer, recommend changing the
make sure the antenna is always extended to setting to Any Key or leaving the phone flipped open
maximize signal strength and extend battery life. when using the HFL system.
4. Make sure the Auto Answer feature is turned off in the
cell phone.
5. Do a soft reset to the phone.
6. Make sure the battery is fully charged and there is
adequate signal strength.
7. Ask the customer if they have set specific ring tones
or ringer IDs to specific contacts. If they have,
recommend using one standard ring tone for all calls.
8. Make sure the customer is pressing the HFL TALK
button and not the HFL BACK button or the navigation
TALK/navigation BACK buttons.
(cont'd)
Outgoing Cads Clearing the HFL System ('08-09 models)

If a customer says that they cannot place a call using the NOTE;
HFL system, ask if the call was initiated through the HFL • This operation clears the HFL system of all
system or the cell phone itself. passcode(s), any paired phones, and all names in the
If the call is placed by the HFL system: HFL phonebook.
• Clearing the HFL system is recommend before selling
1. Make sure the Bluetooth feature is turned on in the the vehicle.
cell phone. • If the system is locked and the pass code is lost or
2. Make sure the cell phone is paired to the HFL system forgotten, see the symptom troubleshooting.
and linked. 1. Press and release the HFL TALK button. After the
3. Make sure the customer is pressing the HFL TALK beep, say "System clear" and the HFL system
button before each command and going through the responds, "This process will clear all paired phones,
calling process correctly. clear all entries in the phonebook, clearthe security
passcode and restore all defaults in the system setup.
4. Make sure the customer is pressing the HFLTALK Is this what you would like to do?"
button and not the HFL BACK button or the navigation
TALK/navigation BACK buttons. 2. Press and release the HFL TALK button. After the
beep, say "Yes" and the HFL system responds,
5. Check if the cell phone has an Authorized "Preparing to clear all paired phone, all phonebook
Connections or Trusted option. entries, the passcode. This may take up to 2 minutes
6. Do a soft reset to the cell phone. to complete."
Ifthe call is placed by the cell phone: 3. Press and release the HFL TALK button. After the
beep, say "OK" to proceed, or say "Go back" or
The call will remain on the handset until you transfer it "Cancel."
over to the HFL system. To continue the call on the HFL
system, you must use the Transfer command by 4. If you said "OK", after a short period of time, the HFL
pressing and releasing the HFL TALK button during an system responds, "System has been cleared.
active call and saying "Transfer." The customer can now Returning to the main menu, the Clearing HFL system
continue the call using the HFL system. procedure is now complete".
Clearing th e HFL S ystem {'10 m odel) Self-diagnostic Function
NOTE: NOTE: This procedure should be used only if HDS is
• This operation clears the HFL system of all unavailable.
passcode(s), any paired phones, and all names in the To run the self-diagnostic function, do the following:
HFL phonebook.
• Clearing the HFL system is recommend before selling 1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
the vehicle. 2. Press and hold the HFL BACK button for more than 5
• If the system is locked and the pass code is lost or seconds.
forgotten, see the symptom troubleshooting.
3. When the HandsFreeLink system enters the
1. Press and release the HFL TALK button. After the self-diagnostic function, the following will occur.
beep, say "System clear" and the HFL system • Ifthe system has not completed testing for DTCs,
responds, "This process will clear all paired phones, the HandsFreeLink system says "The hands free
clear all entries in the phonebook, clearthe security system test is in progress".
passcode and restore all defaults in the system setup.
• If there is no DTC, the HandsFreeLink system says
Is this what you would like to do?"
"The hands free system is OK".
2. Press and release the HFL TALK button. After the • If there is any DTC, the HandsFreeLink system says
beep, say "Yes" and the HFL system responds, "The hands free system needs to be serviced".
"Preparing to clear the system, which may take up to
2 minutes to complete." NOTE:
• The self-diagnostic function can only be initiated while
3. Press and release the HFL TALK button. After the the HFL is in its idle state.
beep, say "Continue" to proceed, or say "Go back" or
• The self-diagnostic function starts after you press and
"Cancel."
hold the HFL BACK button for 5 seconds, and ends if
4. If you said "continue," the HFL responds, Please wait the HandsFreeLink control unit returns to its idle state.
until the system is cleared." After a short period of
time (up to two minutes) the HFL responds, "The
system has been cleared."
(cont'd)
Glossary o f T erm s HFL Buttons
Auto Answer • HFL TALK button (A): Use this button on the steering
wheel to give commands. Press the button before a
This cell phone setting forces incoming calls to voice command is given.
automatically be answered by the handset Disable this • HFL BACK button (B): Use this button on the steering
feature on the phone when using the HFL system, as it wheel to end a call or return to a previous prompt in
may interfere with the HFL system answering incoming the HFL menu. Pressing the button twice or holding it
calls. Set the phone setting to: down returns you to the HFL main menu.
• Send Only
• Any Key
• Multi-Key answer
Answer Opt i ons
These cell phone settings allow you to select how you
would like to answer an incoming call on the handset.
The answer option in the phone can affect inbound calls
on the HFL system.
Authorized Connection
This cell phone setting allows the phone to connect
automatically with the HFL system without prompting
the customer for permission to connect. In some
instances, it can affect the ability of the phone to Hard Reset
properly route sound to the HFL system.
Hard resets clearthe saved settings in the cell phone and
Bluetooth Power restores it to the factory defaults. A hard reset should be
This cell phone function enables or disables the done only as a last resort (see the cell phone owner's
manual for more information).
Bluetooth application. When using a hands-free device
such as HFL, the Bluetooth application needs to be Linking
enabled.
This is when your paired phone is actively ready to use
Discovery Mode the HFL system. You can pair up to six phones to the HFL
system, but only one phone can be linked at a time. If
You need to have the cell phone in Discovery Mode to
two paired phones are in the vehicle, only the phone that
allow other devices with Bluetooth capabilities (such as
the HFL system) to find the phone during the pairing is linked can use the HFL system and functions. The
process. second phone must be used as a normal handset.
Downloaded Ringtones Pairing

A description for linking two Bluetooth devices together.
A customer gets these ringtones from an outside source,
such as the internet or a mobile phone store. In this case, you are linking a cell phone with the HFL
system. After the pairing process is complete, the
devices are able to recognize each other and
communicate wirelessly via Bluetooth.
Soft Reset (Cellular phone)
This helps to restore the basic functions of the phone. To
do a soft reset, turn the phone power off, remove and
reinsert the cell phone battery, then turn the phone back
on.
This refers to the software version loaded in the cell
phone. The software version that was tested and
determined to be compatible with the HFL system may
be listed on the HFL website. Not all software versions
are compatible with the HFL system.
Standard Ringtone
These ringtones come factory-installed on the cell
phone.

HFL does not respond Control Unit Input Test (see page Check and repair all CAN related DTCs.
23-389)
The phone icon in the navigation • There is no HFL-compatible The phone must be on the Honda list of
route to screen is grayed-out phone paired to the vehicle. Pair approved Bluetooth phones and
an approved HFL-compatible configured correctly. For a current list of
phone to the vehicle. approved phones, go to handsfreelink.
• If the problem dose not go honda.com or call the HFL support desk at
away, see Navigation does not 888-528-7876 for further assistance.
call using the HFL
troubleshooting (see page
23-264).
The Honda approved Bluetooth HFL System Troubleshooting (see The phone must be on the Honda list of
phone is having problems pairing page 23-376) approved Bluetooth phones and
to the vehicle configured correctly. For a current list of
approved phones, go to handsfreelink.
honda.com or call the HFL support desk at
888-528-7876 for further assistance.
phone cannot use all its functions page 23-376) approved Bluetooth phones and
configured correctly. For a current list of
phone does not place or receive page 23-376) approved Bluetooth phones and
calls using the HFL system configured correctly. For a current list of
The customer wants the HFL Clearing the HFL system (see See the Owner's Manual for Additional
system reset (all phones and page 23-370) information.
address information cleared from
the HFL system)
The HFL system is locked and the Symptom Troubleshooting (see
pass code has been lost or page 23-387)
forgotten
The HFL system does not HFL System Troubleshooting (see Also see Voice control tips (see page
recognize all voice prompts page 23-376) 23-364).
The HFL system speaks in French See the HFL section in the
Owner's Manual for Changing
Language.
The address book does not There is no HFL-compatible The phone must be on the Honda list of
transfer from a Bluetooth phone phone that supports this feature approved Bluetooth phones that supports
to the navigation system paired to the vehicle. Pair an this feature and configured correctly. For a
approved HFL-compatible phone current list of approved phones, go to
that supports this feature to the handsfreelink.honda.com or call the HFL
vehicle. support desk at 888-528-7876 for further
assistance.
The HFL messages cannot be Symptom troubleshooting (see Excessive interior noise (open windows,
heard or are weak page 23-385) vents blowing on microphone, etc.). |
System Description
HandsFreeLink C ontrol U n it inputs and O u tp u ts

When replacing a HandsFreeLink control unit connector, match the wires to the cavities listed in the following table.
Ji= i n
/ / / 11 12 13 14
CM
1 3 6 7 8 /
i
CM
CM
o
CO
15 16 / 18 19 21 / / / 25 27 28
Cavity W ire Connects to

2 BLU HFL-voice control switch (HFL STRG SW)
3 LT GRN Audio unit (HFL MUTE)
6 BLK Navigation unit (HFL/NAV COMM4)
7 GRN Navigation unit (HFL/NAV COMM3)
8 GRY* Shield for terminals No. 6, No. 7, No. 20, and No. 21 (HFL/NAV COMM SH)
11 GRN Audio unit (TELM SIG + )
12 GRY* Shield for terminals No. 13 and No. 14 (MIC SH)
13 BLU Ambient light/HomeLink unit (HFL-navigation microphone) (MIC+)
14 PNK Ambient light/HomeLink unit (HFL-navigation microphone) (MIC GND)
15 WHT/RED No. 7 (7.5 A) fuse in the driver's under-dash fuse/relay box (+B)
16 YEL/RED No. 32 (10 A) fuse in the driver's under-dash fuse/relay box (ACC)
18 LTBLU B-CAN communication line (B-CAN)
19 PNK Audio unit (HFL ICON)
20 RED Navigation unit (HFL/NAV COMM1)
21 WHT Navigation unit (HFL/NAV COMM2)
25 RED Audio unit (TELM SIG —)
26 GRY# Shield for terminals No. 11 and No. 25 (TELM SIG SH)
27 GRN Audio unit (MIC SIG + )
28 RED Audio unit (MIC SIG—)
HFL System Troubleshooting
NOTE:
• You must be able to duplicate the customer's concern to successfully diagnose and the problem.
• Always use the customer's phone.
• Make sure the phone is approved and configured correctly. Online, go to handsfreelink.honda.com or call the HFL
support desk at 888-528-7876 for further assistance.
1. Connect the HDS to the DLC.
3. Checkfor DTCs.
A r e a n y D T C s in d ic a t e d ?
YES-Repair the indicated DTCs and recheck.B
NO-Go to step 4.
4. Try to duplicate the problem.
C a n y o u d u p lic a t e th e p r o b le m ?
YES-Go to step 5.
NO-The system is OK at this tim e.B
5. Pair the phone to a known-good vehicle (same model, year, and trim), and try to duplicate the problem.
D o e s th e p h o n e h a v e th e s a m e p r o b le m o n th e k n o w n - g o o d v e h ic le ?
YES-Call the HFL support desk at 888-528-7876 to make sure the phone is configured correctly and has the correct
software. If the phone is configured correctly, it is either a characteristic of the HFL system, or a characteristic of the
particular approved phone being used. Explain to your customer that this is a system characteristic. Another phone
from the approved phone list may give more favorable results.B
NO-Substitute a known-good HandsFreeLink control unit (see page 23-388), and recheck. If the problem goes away,
replace the original HandsFreeLink control unit.B
23-377
Circuit Diagram
H F l-V O IC E C O N T R O L S W IT C H
G504
: T h e sh ie ld e d w ire s h a v e a h e a t-s h ru n k tu b e in su latin g
t h e o u ts id e o f th e w ire. T h e c o lo r o f th e in su la tin g tu b e ,
ty p ic a lly b la ck o r d a rk g r a y , m a y n o t m a tc h t h e c o lo r o f
th e w ire listed o n th e s c h e m a tic .
: C A N lin e
; S h ie ld in g
N A V IG A T IO N U N IT
A M B IE N T L IG H T /H O M E L IN K U N IT
H F L /N A V
H F L /N A V H F L /N A V H F L /N A V H F L /N A V C O M M M IC M IC M IC H FL-N A V IG A T IO N
COMM1 C O M M 2 C O M M 3 C O M M 4 SH SIG + SIG - SIG SH M IC R O P H O N E
F2 F5 B8 B16 B15
GRY* GRY*
RED W HT GRN BLK

U
i
PNK
i i
i
i n Gf
m RE :d [— > _u p r 4K 1
1
i
_ - 1 GRY* L ^ ^ J GRY* [
1
^ J
20 21 7 6 J 8 27 28 | 12 13 14
H F L /N A V H F L /N A V H F L /N A V H F L /N A V H F L /N A V M IC M IC M IC M IC M IC
COMM1 COM M 2 COMM3 COM M 4 COMM SIG + SIG - SH + GND
SH H A N D S F R E E L IN K C O N T R O L U N IT
TELM TELM TELM HFL HFL

SIG + S IG - SIG S H ICO N MUTE
11 25 j 26 19 3
" I GRY*
i
i
i
U
GRN RED ' PN K LT G R N
BRN L.
F6
REMOTE TELM TELM TELM HFL HFL

GND SIG + SIG - S IG S H ICO N MUTE
A U D IO U N IT
1
I FL PR E FL PR E FR PR E FR PRE ! FRL FRL FRR FRR
I IN+ IN - IN+ IN , I SPK R+ SPKR- SPK R+ SPKR- ! GND
A8 A3
i BLU PNK iG R N RED

i
BLK
n
GRY* i,^ ^ J
i H GRY* k ^
i
i
i G R N /B L K G R N /Y E L
LT G R N G R Y /R E D
- _ -
1 B2 B1 B8 j B5 B4 B11
FL PR E FL P R E FL P R E FR P R E FR P R E FR PR E
IN S H IN + IN - IN S H IN+ IN -
S T E R E O A M PLIFIER
FR L FR L FRL FR L FR R FRR FR R FR R
SPKR+ SPKR- TW+ TW - SPK R+ SPKR- TW+ TW -
j A3 A13 | A4 A 14 | A2 A12 j A1 A11
W HT B L U /O R N R E D /B L U B L K /R ED G R N /B L K G R N /B L K G R N /Y E L G R N /Y E L
LT G RN LT G RN G R Y /R E D
GRN G R Y /B L U BRN P N K /B L U I !
I
2 | 1
J ........ J .2
2
.......i 1 ..1 .............i . 2 ! 2 j 1 U 1 U
£ E = L
D R I V E R 'S LEFT FRO NT RIG H T D R I V E R 'S LEFT FRONT R IG H T
DOOR TW EETER P A S S E N G E R 'S TW EETER DOOR TW EETER P A S S E N G E R 'S TWEETER
SPEAKER DOOR SPEAKER SPEAKER DOOR SPEAKER -£L
J
(W ith p r e m i u m a u d io s y s te m ) ('1 0 m o d e l W i t h o u t p r e m i u m a u d i o s y s t e m ) G503
DTC Troubleshooting
DTC B1775: Microphone Input/Output Short to 11. Check for continuity between HandsFreeLink control
Power/Open unit 28P connector terminal No. 13 and ambient
light/HomeLink unit 10P connector terminal No. 7.
to follow the instructions in B-CAN system diagnosis test HANDSFREELINK CONTROL UNIT 2SP CONNECTOR
mode A (see page 22-155). Wire side of female terminals
1. Connect the HDS to the DLC (see page 23-363). __
\
1 |2
CO
6 | 7 | 8 1 / /|11 |12|1 3|1 4|
2. Clearthe DTCs with the HDS. 115| 1e [ / \ 18| 19|20|21 |/|/V l2 5 |2 6 l2 7 |2 8
3. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), and then turn to

ON (II). MIC+ (BLU) 1 —
4. Check for DTCs with the HDS. i i i<r_pi
| 1 | 2 | 3 |4 | 5 | 6 | /?| 8 | 9 11o|
AMBIENT LIGHT/HOMELINK UNIT 10P CONNECTOR
NO-lntermittent failure, the system is OK at this Is th e r e c o n tin u ity ?

time.B
unit (see page 23-388), then recheck. If the symptom
6. Disconnect the ambient light/HomeLink unit 10P goes away, replace the original HandsFreeLink
connector. control unit. If the symptom/indication is still present,
replace the ambient light/HomeLink unit (see page
7. Disconnect the HandsFreeLink control unit 28P 22-287).B
connector.
NO-There is an open in the wire between the
8. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). HandsFreeLink control unit and the HFL-navigation
9. Measure the voltage between HandsFreeLink control microphone. Replace the affected shielded harness.B
M1C+
(BLU)
00
CO
1 2 /I / 6 7 / / 11 12 13 14
15 16 / 18 19 20 21 / / 25 26 27 28
YES-There is a short to power in the wire between the

HandsFreeLink control unit and the HFL-navigation
microphone. Replace the affected shielded harness.B
NO-Go to step 10.
DTC B1776: Microphone Input/Output Short to
Ground/Open
NOTE: If you are troubleshooting multiple DTCs, be sure From terminal To terminals
to follow the instructions in B-CAN system diagnosis test 12 13,14
mode A (see page 22-155). 13 14
1. Connect the HDS to the DLC (see page 23-363).

ON (II). l I . 2 1 3I Z / 6 | 7 | 8 ! / / 1 11 1121131141
)15116 / 1 8 |l9 |2 0 |2 l|/|/L /i2 5 |2 6 |2 7 |2 8
YES-Go to step 5.
NO-lntermittent failure, the system is OK at this is th e r e c o n tin u ity b e t w e e n a n y o f t h e te r m in a ls ?
time.B
YES-There is a short in the wire(s) between the
5. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). HandsFreeLink control unit and the HFL-navigation
6. Disconnect the ambient light/HomeLink unit 10P microphone. Replace the affected shielded harness.B
connector. NO-Go to step 10.
connector.
8. Check for continuity between body ground and
HandsFreeLink control unit 28P connector terminals
No. 13 and No. 14 individually.

MIC+ MIC GND
(BLU) (PNK)
1 2 3, / 6 7 8 , 11'12 •13 '14

\ )
CM
00
1£j 16> / '16 1S 2C) 21' / V V '2E >26>27
is th e r e c o n tin u ity ?

between the HandsFreeLink control unit and the
HFL-navigation microphone. Replace the affected
shielded harness.B
NO-Go to step 9.
10. Check for continuity between the HandsFreeLink DTC B1779: HFL Switch (HFL TALK/HFL BACK
control unit 28P connector and the ambient
Buttons) Circuit Open/Short to Power
light/HomeLink unit 10P connector according to the
table. NOTE: If you are troubleshooting multiple DTCs, be sure
to follow the instructions in B-CAN system diagnosis test
HandsFreeLink Ambient mode A (see page 22-155).
control unit connector light/HomeLink unit
connector 1. Connect the HDS to the DLC (see page 23-363).
13 7
14 8
3. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), then start the
HANDSFREELINK CONTROL UNIT 28P CONNECTOR vehicle and turn the steering wheel back and forth
several times.
CO
CSJ
00
CsJ
6 h .| 8 1 /
|15|16|/|18|19|20|21 I / V I / 25126127 j 28
YES-Go to step 5.
Wire side of female terminals time.B
A M B IE N T L IG H T /H O M E L IN K U N IT 1 0P C O N N E C T O R 6. Do the HFL switch test (see page 23-390).

s=z YES-Go to step 7.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
NO-Replace the HFL-voice control switch (see page
23-390). ■
Wire side of female terminals connector.
Is th e r e c o n tin u ity ? 8. Disconnect the HFL-voice control switch 5P

connector.
YES-Substitute a know-good HandsFreeLink control
unit (see page 23-388), then reconnect all of the 9. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
connectors and recheck. If the symptom/indication
goes away, replace the original HandsFreeLink
control unit. If the symptom/indication is still present,
replace the ambient light/HomeLink unit (see page
22-287).■
HandsFreeLink control unit and the HFL-navigation
microphone. Replace the affected shielded harness.!
HFL-VOICE CONTROL SWITCH 5P CONNECTOR AUDIO UNIT CONNECTOR F(20P)
c J T_ r\
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
1 2 3 4 5
11 / 13 14 15 16 / / 19
CM
ol
HFL STRG
SW (GRN/ORN)
REMOTE GND (BRN)

1 2 4 5
HFL-VOICE CONTROL SWITCH 5P CONNECTOR
Is th e r e v o lta g e ?
HandsFreeLink control unit and the HFL-voice control YES-Check for loose or poor connections at the audio
switch.® unit, HandsFreeLink control unit and HFL-voice
control switch. If the connections are OK, substitute a
NO-Go to step 11. known-good HandsFreeLink control unit (see page
11. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 23-388). If the problem is gone, replace the original
HandsFreeLink control unit.B
12. Check for continuity between HandsFreeLink control
unit 28P connector terminal No. 2 and HFL-voice NO-Repair an open in the wire between the switch,
control switch 5P connector terminal No. 3. the cable reel, and the audio u n itB

TN
I CO
00
N-
1 I2 I 3 / / //]'I1|12|13|14|
|l5 |l6 |/|1 8 |l9 |2 0 |2 1 l / l / l / l 25126127128
HFL STRG
SW (GRN/ORN)
1 2 3 4 5
HFL-VOICE CONTROL SWITCH 5P CONNECTOR

YES-Go to step 13.

NO-Repair an open in the wire between the switch,
the cable reel, and the HandsFreeLink control u n it.!
DTC B1780: HFL Switch (HFL TALK/HFL BACK 9. Check for continuity between HandsFreeLink control
Buttons) Circuit Short
NOTE: If you are troubleshooting multiple DTCs, be sure HANDSFREELINK CONTROL UNIT 28P CONNECTOR
to follow the instructions in B-CAN system diagnosis test
HFL STRG SW (BLU)
1. Connect the HDS to the DLC (see page 23-363). n-------!— hfl
1 2 3 / V 6 7 8 / V "11I 12I 1cI 14i
/ : 25:26:u : 28
00
15 'I 6 ,/ ■ 19:20 :21,
3. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), then start the
vehicle and turn the steering wheel back and forth U
several times.
YES-Go to step 5. Is there continuity?
NO-lntermittent failure, the system is OK at this YES-Repair a short to body ground in the wire
time.B between the HandsFreeLink control unit and the
HFL-voice control switch.B
NO-Check for loose or poor connections at the audio
6. Do the HFL switch test (see page 23-390). unit, HandsFreeLink control unit, and HFL-voice
Is the switch OK? control switch. Ifthe connections are OK, substitute a
known-good HandsFreeLink control unit (see page
YES-Go to step 7. 23-388). Ifthe problem is gone, replace the original
NO-Replace the HFL-voice control switch (see page HandsFreeLink control unit.B
23-390).B
connector.
8. Disconnect the HFL-voice control switch 5P
connector.
DTC B1792: HandsFreeLink Control Unit The HFL message cannot be heard or are
internal Error weak
NOTE: Check the vehicle battery condition first (see page 1.Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
22-111).
2. Check that the audio system is operating normally
1. Connect the HDS to the DLC (see page 23-363). and the speaker sound levels from different audio
sources (AM/FM, XM, CD, Navigation, etc.).
D o e s th e a u d io s y s te m w o r k n o r m a lly a n d is th e a u d io
o u t p u t fro m th e s p e a k e r n o r m a l w h e n p la y in g v a r io u s
ON (II).
a u d io s o u r c e s ?
YES-Go to step 3.
NO-Refer to the audio system symptom
YES-Replace the HandsFreeLink control unit (see troubleshooting.B
page 23-388).B
3. Check the audio system when HFL messages are
NO-lntermittent failure, the system is OK at this played.
time.B
D o e s th e a u d io s y s te m m u t e w h e n H F L m e s s a g e s a r e
b e i n g p la y e d ?
YES-Go to step 4.
NO-Go to step 10.
5. Disconnect audio unit connector F (20P).
connector.
7. Check for continuity between body ground and
HandsFreeLink control unit 28P connector terminal
No. 11 and No. 25 individually.

TELM SIG +
___________________________ (GRN)
ni----------------n I
1 2 3, / 6 7 8 ,/ / ■ 11 ‘12 '13 ‘14
1£>16 )
'161 1* 2C)21 V V '2S>26>27r 28
TELM SIG— (RED) I
© ©
4 i

audio unit. Replace the affected shielded harness.B
(cont'd)
8. Checkfor c o n tin u ity be tw e e n th e HandsFreeLink 9. Check for continuity between the HandsFreeLink
control unit 28P connector terminals according to the control unit 28P connector and audio unit connector F
table. (20P) according to the table.
From terminal To terminals HandsFreeLink Audio unit connector

11 25,26 control unit
25 26 connector
11 F19
HANDSFREELINK CONTROL UNIT 28P CONNECTOR 25 F9

1 2 3 / / 6 7 8 / 11 12 13 14 TELM S IG - (RED)
15 16 / 18 19 20 21 / / / 25 26 27 28 TT! ' n w 6 | 7 | 8 | / /|11|12|13|14|
|l5 | l 6 | / | 18119120121 l / l / l / l 25126127128
TELM SIG + (RED) |
TELM SIG + (RED)

Is th e r e c o n tin u ity b e t w e e n a n y o f t h e te r m in a ls ?
n. ,, n i„i—, X
YES-There is a short in the wires between the 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
HandsFreeLink control unit and the audio unit. 11 / 13 14 15 16 // 19 20
Replace the affected shielded harness.! TELM S IG - (RED)L
NO-Go to step 9. AUDIO UNIT CONNECTOR F (20P)


unit (see page 23-388), and recheck. If the
HandsFreeLink control unit. Ifthe symptom/indication
is still present, replace the audio unit (see page
23-167).I I
HandsFreeLink control unit and the audio unit.
11. Disconnect audio unit connector F (20P).
connector.
The HFL system is locked and the pass code
has been lost or forgotten
1. Connect the HDS to the DLC (see page 23-363).
HANDSFREELINK CONTROL UNIT 28P CONNECTOR 2. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
HFL MUTE (LT ORN) 3. From the Body Electrical menu, then select
I h —n HandsFreeLink.
11I 12> 13 14
00
1 2 3 / / 6 7 / / 4. Select Miscellaneous Tests, then select Pass code

15 16 / 18 19:20 21 / / 25:26 27 28 reset.
U 5. Follow the HDS system prompts to reset the pass

code.

audio unit.B
NO-Go to step 14.
14. Check for continuity between HandsFreeLink control
unit 28P connector terminal No. 3 and audio unit
connector F (20P) terminal No. 20.

HFL MUTE (LT GRN)
1 I 2 | 3] 7 / 6 I 7 I 8 / I ' l l 1 12113 j 141

|15|16|/|18|19|20| 21 \ / \ / \ / \ 25|26|27|28
T_ .11 n
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
11 / 13 14 15 16 / / 19 20
HFL MUTE (LT GRN) L

unit (see page 23-388) and recheck. If the
HandsFreeLink control unit Ifthe symptom/indication
is still present, replace the audio unit (see page
23-167).B
HandsFreeLink control unit and the audio unit.B
HandsFreeLink Control Unit Removal/Installation
SRS components are located in this area. Review the 3. Detach the harness clip (A) and disconnect the
SRS component locations (see page 24-23), and the connector (B).
doing repairs or service
NOTE;
parts.
• Tell the customer they need to write down all phone
numbers as there is no way to transfer the information
in the original HandsFreeLink control unit to a new
HandsFreeLink control unit.
1. Remove the center lower cover (see page 20-138).
2. Remove the bolts (A), and pull the DVD player unit (B)
down.
4. Remove the bolts (C), and HandsFreeLink control unit

(D ).
5. Install the HandsFreeLink control unit in the reverse

order of removal. After replacing the HandsFreeLink
control unit, tell the customer:
• They need to pair the phones to the system.
• They need to set up their system preferences.
9.4 N-m (0.95 kgf-m,

6.9 Ibf-ft)
NOTE: Before testing, troubleshoot the multiplex integrated control system using B-CAN System Diagnosis Test Mode
A (see page 22-155).
1. Disconnect the 28P connector (A) from the HandsFreeLink control unit (B) (see page 23-388).
2. Inspect the connector and socket terminals for a good pinfit to be sure they are all making good contact.
3. Reconnect the connector, and make these input tests at the connector.
Cavity Wire Test condition Test: Desired result Possi ble cause If result is not
obtained
1 BLK Under all Check for continuity to ground: • Poor ground (G504)
conditions There should be continuity. • An open in the wire
15 WHT/RED Under all Measure the voltage to ground: • Blown No. 7 (7.5 A) fuse in the
conditions There should be battery voltage. driver's under-dash fuse/relay
box
16 YEL/RED Ignition switch ON Measure the voltage to ground: • Blown No. 32 (10 A) fuse in the
(ID There should be battery voltage. driver's under-dash fuse/relay
box
4. Disconnect the 28P connector again, and make this input test at the connector.
• If the input test proves OK, the HandsFreeLink control unit is faulty, replace it.
Cavity Wi re Test condition Test: Desired result Possible cause if result is not
obtained
18 LT BLU Under all Check for continuity between An open in the wire
conditions HandsFreeLink control unit 28P
connector terminal No. 18 and the
driver's under-dash fuse/relay
box connector N (45P) terminal
No. 22:
Driver's under-dash Check for continuity between A short to ground in the wire
fuse/relay box body ground and HandsFreeLink
connector N (45P) control unit 28P connector
and climate control terminal No.18:
unit SOP connector There should be no continuity.
disconnected
HFL Switch Test HFL Switch Removal/Installation
1. Remove the HFL-voice control switch (see page SRS components are located in this area. Review the
23-390). SRS component locations (see page 24-23), and the
1. Remove the switch cover (A) from the left side of the
HFL Switch steering wheel.
Position Resistance
No button pressed About 1 kQ
HFL TALK button pressed About 185 Q
HFL BACK button pressed About 45 Q
HFL TALK button ( M b 3 4 |5 | )
2. Remove the two screws (B) from the HFL-voice

3. Ifthe resistance is not as specified, replace the switch. control switch (C).
3. Disconnect the 5P connector (D) and remove the
HFL-voice control switch.
R estraints
Restraints S y m p t o m T r o u b le s h o o t in g . . . . 2 4 - 2 0 8
S p e c ia l T o o l s ................... .................2 4 -2
Com ponent
Seat Beits R e p la c e m e n t /In s p e c t io n
C o m p o n e n t L o c a tio n I n d e x . . . . 2 4 -3 A f t e r D e p l o y m e n t ............. 2 4 -2 1 1
* F ro n t S e a t B e lt R e p la c e m e n t .. 2 4 - 4 D r iv e r 's A ir b a g R e p la c e m e n t .. 2 4 -2 1 5
S e c o n d R o w S e a t B e lt F ro n t P a s s e n g e r 's A ir b a g
R e p la c e m e n t .................................2 4 -1 1 R e p la c e m e n t .................................2 4 -2 1 6
T h ir d R o w S e a t B e lt S id e A ir b a g R e p la c e m e n t ..........2 4 -2 1 9
R e p la c e m e n t ............................... 2 4 -1 7 S id e C u r ta in A ir b a g
R e p la c e m e n t ................................2 4 -2 2 1
I n s p e c t io n ......................................... 2 4 -2 1
A ir b a g a n d T e n s io n e r
SRS (Supplemental D i s p o s a l......................... ................2 4 -2 2 7
Restraint System) C a b le R e e l R e p la c e m e n t ............2 4 -2 3 1
C o m p o n e n t L o c a tio n I n d e x . . . . 2 4 -2 3 S R S U n it R e p la c e m e n t ............... 2 4 -2 3 4
P r e c a u tio n s a n d P r o c e d u r e s . . . 2 4 -2 6 S id e Im p a c t S e n s o r (F irs t)
G e n e r a l T r o u b le s h o o tin g R e p la c e m e n t .................................2 4 -2 3 5
I n f o r m a t i o n . . . .............................2 4 -3 6 S id e Im p a c t S e n s o r (S e c o n d )
O P D S U n it In it ia liz a t io n ..............2 4 -3 9 R e p la c e m e n t .................................2 4 -2 3 6
F ro n t P a s s e n g e r 's W e ig h t S id e Im p a c t S e n s o r ( T h ir d )
S e n s o r U n it In it ia liz a t i o n . . . . 2 4 -4 0 R e p la c e m e n t .................................2 4 -2 3 7
O D S U n it In it ia liz a t i o n ................. 2 4 -4 1 R e a r S a f in g S e n s o r
F ro n t P a s s e n g e r 's W e ig h t R e p la c e m e n t .................................2 4 -2 3 8
S e n s o r U n it O p e r a t io n O P D S U n it R e p la c e m e n t ............2 4 -2 3 9
C h e c k .......................................... . 2 4 -4 3 O D S U n it R e p l a c e m e n t ............. 2 4 -2 4 0
O D S U n it O p e r a t io n C h e c k . . . . 2 4 -4 4 F ro n t Im p a c t S e n s o r
F ro n t P a s s e n g e r 's W e ig h t R e p la c e m e n t ........................... . .2 4 -2 4 1
S e n s o r O u tp u t C h eck A fte r a F ro n t P a s s e n g e r 's W e ig h t
V e h ic le C o llis io n ....................... 2 4 -4 5 S e n s o r R e p la c e m e n t ............... 2 4 -2 4 2
D r iv e r 's S e a t P o s itio n S e n s o r F ro n t P a s s e n g e r 's W e ig h t
O p e r a t io n C h e c k ............... . 2 4 -4 6 S e n s o r U n it R e p la c e m e n t . . . 2 4 -2 4 4
D T C T r o u b le s h o o tin g I n d e x . . . 2 4 -4 7 D r iv e r 's S e a t P o s itio n S e n s o r
S y m p t o m T r o u b le s h o o tin g R e p la c e m e n t .................................2 4 -2 4 5
I n d e x ..................................................2 4 -5 7 P a s s e n g e r 's A ir b a g C u to f f
S y s t e m D e s c r i p t io n ....................... 2 4 -5 8 In d ic a to r Illu m in a t io n B u lb
C ir c u it D i a g r a m ...............................2 4 -6 6 T e s t /R e p la c e m e n t ..................... 2 4 -2 4 6
D T C T r o u b le s h o o t in g ................. 2 4 -7 4
&
Restraints
Special Tools
R0f.NO. Tool Number Description Qty

© 070AZ-SAA0100 SRS Short Canceller 1
© 070AZ-SNAA100 SRS Simulator Lead J 1
© 070AZ-SNAA200 SRS Simulator Lead K 1
© 070AZ-SNAA300 SRS Simulator Lead L 1
© 07HAZ-SG00500 Deployment Tool 1
© 07PAZ-001010A SCS Service Connector 1
© 07SAZ-TB4011A SRS Inflator Simulator 1
© 07TAZ-001020A Back Probe Adapter, 17 mm 1
© 07XAZ-S1A0200 SRS Simulator Lead E 1
© 07XAZ-SZ30100 SRS Simulator Lead F 1
© 07YAZ-S3AA100 SRS Simulator Lead H 1
Seat Belts &
C o m p o n e n t L o c a tio n In d e x
SECOND ROW SEAT BELT

CENTER THIRD ROW SEAT BELT

SECOND ROW SEAT BELT CENTER SECOND ROW
SHOULDER ANCHOR ADJUSTER SEATBELT
FRONT SEAT BELT SHOULDER

ANCHOR ADJUSTER THIRD ROW SEAT BELT
RIGHT THIRD ROW

SEAT BELT BUCKLE
CENTER THIRD ROW

SEAT BELT ANCHOR
LEFT THIRD ROW SEAT BELT BUCKLE

CENTER THIRD ROW SEAT BELT BUCKLE

LEFT SECOND ROW SEAT BELT BUCKLE

CENTER SECOND ROW SEAT BELT DETACHABLE ANCHOR

CENTER SECOND ROW SEAT BELT BUCKLE

RIGHT SECOND ROW SEAT BELT BUCKLE

FRONT SEAT BELT BUCKLES
FRONT SEAT BELT

Front Seat Belt Replacement
Front Seat Belt 5. Remove the upper anchor cover (A), then remove the
NOTE:
• If replacing the front seat belts after deployment, refer
to Component Replacement/Inspection After
Deployment (see page 24-211) for a complete list of
other parts that must also be replaced.
• Check the front seat belts for damage (see page 24-21),
and replace them if necessary.
page 22-112), then wait at least 3 minutes before 6. Passenger's seat belt: Remove the rear outer seat
beginning work. track cover (see step 2 on page 20-153). Remove the
bolt (A), and release the hook (B), then remove the
2. Slide the front seat fully forward. lower anchor bracket (C) from the outer side of the
3. Pull up the lower anchor cover (A), then remove the front passenger's weight sensor (D).
lower anchor bolt (B). NOTE: Do not remove the seat belt anchor bolt (E)
from the lower anchor bracket.
4. Remove the B-pillar lower trim (see page 20-103).
C (4.8 kgf-m , 35 Ibf-ft)

7. Disconnect the seat belt tensioner connector (A). 9. Remove the B-pillar upper trim (see page 20-103).
Remove the upper retractor mounting bolt (B) and the
lower retractor bolt (C), then remove the front seat 10. Remove the shoulder anchor adjuster (A).
belt (D) and the retractor (E).
Driver's seat belt
9.8 N-m 32 N-m

(1.0 kgf-m, 7.2 Ibf-ft) (3.3 kgf-m, 24 Ibf-ft)
Passenger's seat belt
8. If necessary, remove the front seat belt protector (F).

Front Seat Belt Replacement (cont'd)
11. Install the seat belt in the reverse order of removal, Upper anchor bolt installation.
• If the seat belt tensioner has been deployed, replace COLLAR UPPER ANCHOR UPPER ANCHOR BOLT
the seat belt protector.
• Check that the retractor locking mechanism
functions (see page 24-21).
• Assemble the washers, the collars, and the
bushings on the upper and lower anchor bolts as
shown.
upper anchor bolt before reinstallation.
• Before installing the anchor bolts, make sure there
are no twists or kinks in the seat belt. LOCK WASHER
• Make sure the seat belt tensioner connector is
plugged in properly. Lower anchor bolt installation (Driver's seat belt)
(see page 22-112).
COLLAR COLLAR WASHER LOWER ANCHOR

BOLT
TOOTHED WASHER \ BUSHING

LOCK WASHER LOWER ANCHOR
Lower anchor bolt installation (passenger's seat belt)
SPRING PLASTIC BUSHING

WASHER WASHER
LOWER ANCHOR COLLAR I I , / WASHER
BOLT
LOWER
BOLT ANCHOR TOOTHED LOWER
BRACKET LOCK WASHER ANCHOR NUT
Front S ea t B elt Buckle 4. Disconnect the seat belt buckle switch connector (A),
and detach the harness clips (B).
SRS component locations (see page 24-23) and the Driver's seat (manual height adjustable seat)
precautions and procedures (see page 24-26) before *07 model
NOTE;
beginning work.
3. Manual seat: Remove the center cover (see step 4 on
page 20-158).
'08-10 models
(cont'd)
Driver's seat (8-way power seat) Passenger's seat (manual seat)

*07 model
'08-10 models
&
5. Remove the anchor bolt (A), and detach the harness Driver's seat (8-way power seat)
clips (B), then remove the seat belt buckle (C).
'07 model
'08-10 models
'08-10 models
Passenger's seat (manual seat) 7. Install the buckle in the reverse order of removal, and
note these items:
• Assemble the washers, the collar, and the bushing
on the anchor bolt as shown.
anchor bolt before reinstallation.
• Operate the seat adjustments and make sure the
buckle harness dose not get pinched.
(see page 22-112).
Anchor bolt i nstallati on

Driver's seat (8-way power seat) and
COLLAR
6. Pull out the seat belt buckle switch harness (D)

through the space between the seat cushion and the
seat adjuster or through the hole in the seat track.
WASHER
(EXCEPT '07 MODEL MANUAL SEAT)
Second Row Seat Belt
NOTE:
TOOTHED BUSHING WAVE • Put on gloves to protect your hands.
• Check the second row seat belts for damage (see page
24-21), and replace them if necessary.
1. Slide the second row seat forward fully.
2. Pull up the lower anchor cover (A), then remove the
lower anchor bolt (B).
3. Remove the rear side trim panel (see page 20-110).

Second Row Seat Belt Replacement (cont'd)
4. Remove the upper anchor cover (A), then remove the 7. Remove the C-pillar upper trim (see page 20-103).
8. Remove the shoulder anchor adjuster (A).
5. Remove 1
lower retractor bolt (B), then remove the second row
seat belt (C) and the retractor (D).
A
6 x 1 .0 mm
9.8 N-m
(1.0 |T‘n,l >M *7O r*
32 N-m
(3.3 kgf-m , 24 Ibf-ft)
6. If necessary, remove the second row seat belt

protector (E).
&
9. Install the seat belt in the reverse order of removal,

Second Row Seat Belt Buckle
• Check that the retractor locking mechanism NOTE:
functions (see page 24-21). • Put on gloves to protect your hands.
• Assemble the washers, the collar, and the bushing • Take care not to tear or damage the seat covers.
on the upper and lower anchor bolts as shown.
1. Pull back the seat cushion cover as necessary (see
upper anchor bolt before reinstallation.
• Before installing the anchor bolts, make sure there 2. Remove the anchor bolt (A).
are no twists or kinks in the second row seat belt.
Upper anchor bolt installation
COLLAR UPPER ANCHOR UPPER ANCHOR BOLT
LOCK WASHER
Lower anchor bolt installation 3. Remove the seat belt buckle (A).
Second Row Seat Belt Replacement (cont'd)
4. Install the buckle in the reverse order of removal, and C enter Second R ow S e at Belt
note these items:
• Assemble the washer on the anchor bolt as shown. NOTE:
• Apply medium strength liquid thread lock to the • Put on gloves to protect your hands.
anchor bolt before reinstallation. • Take care not to tear the headliner.
Anchor bolt installation 1. Detach the clips and remove the seat belt cover (A).
Fastener Locations
[>: Cli p, 4
WASHER LOCK WASHER

3. Remove the upper anchor bolts (A), then remove the
upper anchor (B).
A
7/16-20 UNF
32 N-m (3.3 kgf-m , 24 Ibf-ft)
&
4. Remove the retractor bolts (A), then remove the Center Second Row Seat Belt Buckle
center second row seat belt (B) and the retractor (C).
NOTE:
1. Pry off the cap (A) and remove the center anchor bolt
(B), then remove the seat belt buckle .(C),
32 N-m

• Before installing the upper anchor bolt, make sure
there are no twists or kinks in the seat belt.
upper anchor bolts before reinstallation.
them with new ones.
Second lo w Seat Belt Replacement (cont'd)
2. Install the buckle in the reverse order of removal, and C enter Second R o w S e at B elt D etachable
note these items:
A nchor
• Assemble the washer and the bushing on the center
anchor bolt as shown. NOTE:
• Apply medium strength liquid thread lock to the • Put on gloves to protect your hands.
center anchor bolt before reinstallation. • Take care not to tear or damage the seat covers.
Center anchor bolt installation 1. Pry off the cap (A) and remove the center anchor bolt
*07 models (B), then remove the detachable anchor (C).
'08-10 models
2. Install the detachable anchor in the reverse order of

• Assemble the washers and the bushing on the
center anchor bolt as shown.
center anchor bolt before reinstallation.
Center anchor bolt installation
CENTER WASHERS TOOTHED

&
Third Row Seat Belt Replacement
Third Row Seat Belt 4. Remove the upper retractor mounting bolt (A) and the
lower retractor bolt (B), then remove the third row
NOTE: seat belt (C) and the retractor (D).
A
• Check the third row seat belts for damage (see page
24-21), and replace them if necessary.
• Rear side trim panel (see page 20-110)
• D-Pillar trim (see page 20-103)
2. Remove the lower anchor bolt (A).
32 N-m (3.3 kgf-m, 24 ibf-ft)

• Before installing the anchor bolt, make sure there
are no twists or kinks in the seat belt.
anchor bolt before reinstallation.
(cont'd)
Third Row Seat Belt Replacement (cont'd)
C en ter Third R o w S eat B elt 3. Remove the retractor bolts (A), then remove the
center third row seat belt (B) and the retractor (C).
NOTE:
• Take care not to tear or damage the headliner.
• Check the center third row seat belts for damage (see
page 24-21), and replace them if necessary.
1. Detach the clips and remove the seat belt cover (A).
Fastener Locations

retractor bolts before reinstallation.
them with new ones.
&
Left Third Row Seat Belt Buckle 4. Install the buckle in the reverse order of removal, and
note these items:
1. Remove the left third row seat center cover (see step 6 • Assemble the washers on the center anchor bolt as
on page 20-220). shown.
2. Remove the center anchor bolt (A). • Apply medium strength liquid thread lock to the left
side anchor bolt before reinstallation.
A
7/16-20 UNF
32 N-m
(3.3 kgf-m,
24 Ibf-ft)
WASHER ANCHOR LOCK WASHER
3. Remove the seat belt buckle (A).

Third Row Seat Belt Replacement (cont'd)
C en ter and R ight T hird R o w S e at B elt Buckle 5. Remove the right third row seat belt buckle (A) and
the center third row seat belt buckle (B).
1. Pull up the back of the third row seat cushion mat as
necessary (see step 11 on page 20-221).
2. Remove the center anchor nut (A).
6. Install the buckles in the reverse order of removal, and

note these items:
• Assemble the washers on the center anchor bolt as
3. Remove the right third row seat center cover (see step shown.
6 on page 20-220). • Apply medium strength liquid thread lock to the
4. Remove the center anchor bolt (A). center anchor bolt and the center anchor nut before
reinstallation.
SPRING CENTER TOOTHED

WASHER ANCHOR LOCK WASHER
&
Inspection
For front seat belt retractor with seat belt tensioner, Third row
review the SRS component locations (see page 24-23)
and the precautions and procedures (see page 24-26)
before doing repairs or service.
Retractor
1. Before installing the retractor, check that the seat belt
can be pulled out freely.
2. Make sure that the seat belt does not lock when the
retractor (A) is leaned slowly up to 15° from the
mounted position. The seat belt should lock when the
retractor is leaned over 40 °. Do not attempt to
disassemble the retractor.
Front row
Center Second/Center Third row
Inside
Second row
3. Replace the seat belt with a new assembly if there is
any abnormality. Do not disassemble any part of the
seat belt for any reason.
Inspection (cont'd)
in-vehicle
1. Check that the seat belt is not twisted or caught on
anything.
2. After installing the anchors, check for free movement
on the anchor bolts. If necessary, remove the anchor
bolts and check that the washers and other parts are
not damaged or improperly installed.
3. Check the seat belts for damage or discoloration.
Clean with a shop towel if necessary. Use only soap
and water to clean the seat belts.
NOTE: Dirt buildup in the metal loops of the upper
anchors can cause the seat belts to retract slowly.
Wipe the inside of the loops with a shop towel
dampened in isopropyl alcohol.
4. Check that the seat belt does not lock when pulled out
slowly. The seat belt is designed to lock only during a
sudden stop or impact.
5. Check the cancel function of the center seat belt
retractor. You should be able to pull the length of the
belt out of the retractor without it locking. Then, each
time you pull the belt as it retracts, the belt should
lock.
NOTE: Make sure the left seat-back doesn't catch the
center belt when you quickly fold the seat-back
forward.
6. Make sure that the seat belt will retract automatically
when released.
7. For each passenger's seat belt, check the seat belt
retractor locking automatic locking retractor (ALR)
mechanism. This function is for securing child seats.
-1. Pull the seat belt all the way out to engage the ALR.
The seat belt should retract with a ratcheting sound,
but not extend. This is normal.
-2. To disengage the ALR, release the seat belt and
allow it to fully retract, then pull the seat belt out
part-way. The seat belt should retract and extend
normally.
8. Replace the seat belt with a new assembly if there is
any abnormality. Do not disassemble any part of the
seat belt for any reason.
*07 model
CABLE REEL
DRIVER'S AIRBAG
Disposal, page 24-227
SIDE AIRBAG CUTOFF INDICATOR
FRONT PASSENGER'S AIRBAG
SRS INDICATOR
Troubleshooting, page 24-208’ PASSENGER'S AIRBAG CUTOFF
INDICATOR
Bulb Test/Replacement, page 24-246
OPDS SENSOR/
SEAT-BACK
COVER/PAD
FRONT PASSENGER'S
SIDE AIRBAG
MEMORY ERASE Disposal, page 24-227
SIGNAL (MES)
2P CONNECTOR
(YELLOW)
RIGHT SIDE IMPACT
SENSOR (FIRST)
FRONT
PASSENGER'S
SEAT BELT
TENSIONER
‘OPDS UNIT
Initialization, page 24-39
FRONT PASSENGER'S
WEIGHT SENSORS
DATA LINK FRONT PASSENGER'S

CONNECTOR WEIGHT SENSOR UNIT
(DLC) Initialization, page 24-40
Troubleshooting, page 11 -269 Operation Check, page 24-43
DRIVER'S SEAT POSITION SENSOR

Operation Check, page 24-46
LEFTSIDE Replacement, page 24-245
IMPACT
SENSOR
(FIRST) DRIVER’S SEAT BELT TENSIONER
DRIVER'S SIDE Replacement, page 24-235
AIRBAG Replacement, page 24-4
Replacement, page 24-219 Disposal, page 24-227
SRS UNIT Disposal, page 24-227
(cont'd)
'08-10 models
CABLE REEL
DRIVER'S AIRBAG
SIDE AIRBAG CUTOFF INDICATOR Replacement, page 24-215
Troubleshooting, page 24-209 Disposal, page 24-227
FRONT PASSENGER'S AIRBAG

SRS INDICATOR
PASSENGER'S AIRBAG CUTOFF
INDICATOR
Bulb Test/Replacement, page 24-246
ODS UNIT
Initialization, page 24-41
OPDS SENSOR/
MEMORY ERASE SEAT-BACK
SIGNAL (MES) COVER/PAD
2P CONNECTOR Replacement, page 20-177
(YELLOW)
FRONT
PASSENGERS
SIDE AIRBAG
FRONT
PASSENGER'S
SEATBELT
TENSIONER
RIGHT SIDE IMPACT

SENSOR (FIRST)
DATA LINK FRONT PASSENGER'S

CONNECTOR WEIGHT SENSORS
(DLC) Replacement, page 24-243
DRIVER'S SEAT POSITION SENSOR
DRIVER'S SIDE AIRBAG

DRIVER'S SEAT BELT TENSIONER

SRS UNIT Disposal, page 24-227
LEFT SIDE IMPACT SENSOR
(FIRST)
*
SENSOR
(THIRD)
Precautions and Procedures
G eneral Precautions S teering -related Precautions

NOTE: Some systems store data in memory that is lost Cable Reel Alignment
when the battery is disconnected. Before disconnecting
• Misalignment of the cable reel could cause an open in
the battery, refer to Battery Terminal Disconnection and
the wiring, making the SRS system, remote steering
Reconnection (see page 22-112).
wheel controls, or the horn inoperative. Center the
Please read the following precautions carefully before cable reel whenever the following is performed (see
performing the airbag system service. Observe the step 6 on page 24-233).
instructions described in this manual, or the airbags - Installation of the steering wheel
could accidentally deploy and cause damage or injuries. - Installation of the cable reel
• Except when performing electrical inspections that - Installation of the steering column
requires battery power, always turn the ignition switch
- Other steering-related adjustment or installation
to LOCK (0), then disconnect the negative cable from
the battery, then wait at last 3 minutes before starting • Do not disassemble the cable reel.
work. • Do not apply grease to the cable reel.
NOTE: The SRS memory is not cleared even if the • If the cable reel shows any signs of damage, replace it
ignition switch is turned to LOCK (0) or the battery with a new one. For example, ifthe cable reel does not
cables are disconnected from the battery. rotate smoothly, replace it.
• Use replacement parts which are manufactured to the
same standards and quality as the original parts. Do
not install used SRS parts. Use only new parts when
making SRS repairs.
• Carefully inspect any SRS part before you install it.
Do not install any part that shows signs of being
dropped or improperly handled, such as dents, cracks
or deformation.
• Before removing the SRS unit connectors, always

disconnect the appropriate SRS parts connectors.
• Use only a digital multimeter to check the system. If it
is not a Honda multimeter, make sure its output is
10 mA (0.01 A) or less when switched to the lowest
value in the ohmmeter range. A tester with a higher
output could cause accidental deployment and
possible injury.
• Do not put objects on the front passenger's airbag.
&
Airbag Handling and Storage • Never perform electrical inspections to the airbags,
such as measuring resistance.
Do not disassemble an airbag. It has no serviceable
parts. Once an airbag has been deployed, it cannot be • Do not position yourself in front of the airbag during
repaired or reused. removal, inspection, or replacement.
For temporary storage of an airbag during service,

observe the following precautions.
• Store the removed airbag with the pad surface up.
Never put anything on the airbag.
• For proper disposal of a damaged airbag, refer to

airbag disposal (see page 24-227).
• The side curtain airbag module assembly is a long,
• To prevent damage to the airbag, keep it away from jointed part containing an inflator (A), a flexible bag
any oil, grease, detergent, or water. (B), and an adapter pipe (C). When removing or
installing the side curtain airbag assembly, never:
- Handle the flexible bag.
- Drop the airbag assembly.
- Cut, tear, or unwrap the tape strips.
• Store the removed airbag on a secure, flat surface

away from any high heat source (exceeding 200 °F/
93 °C).
Precautions and Procedures (cont'd)
Front and Side Impact Sensors,

SRS. U n it, • After a collision where the front airbags, the side
airbags, the side curtain airbags, or the seat belt
Driver% Seat Position Sensor, Front tensioners deploys, go to Component
Passenger's Weight Sensors and Unit, and Replacement/Inspection After Deployment (see page
Rear Safing Sensor 24-211). After a collision where an airbag do not
deploy, inspect for any damage or any deformation on
NOTE: Some systems store data in memory that is lost
the SRS unit, the front impact sensors, the side impact
when the battery is disconnected. Before disconnecting
sensors, and rear safing sensor. Also, do the front seat
the battery, refer to Battery Terminal Disconnection and
active head restraint inspection (see page 20-152).
Replace all damaged parts.
• Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), disconnect the
negative cable from the battery, and wait at least 3
minutes before starting installation or replacement of
the SRS unit, or disconnecting the connectors from
the SRS unit.
• Be careful not to bump or impact the SRS unit, the
front impact sensors, the side impact sensors, or the
rear safing sensor whenever the ignition switch is in
ON (II), or for at least 3 minutes after the ignition
switch is turned to LOCK (0).
• During installation or replacement, be careful not to
bump (by impact wrench, hammer, etc.) the area
around the SRS unit, the front impact sensors, the side
impact sensors, or the rear safing sensor. The airbags
could accidentally deploy and cause damage or injury. • Do not disassemble the SRS unit, the front impact
sensors, the side impact sensors, the driver's seat
position sensor, the front passenger's weight sensor
unit ('07 model), the front passenger's weight sensors,
or the rear safing sensor.
• Always install the SRS unit, the driver's seat position
sensor, all impact sensors, and the rear safing sensor
securely with new TORX bolts torqued to 9.8 N-m
(1.0 kgfm, 7.2 Ibf-ft).
• Do not spill water or oil on the SRS unit or any of the
sensors, and keep them away from dust.
A
Wiring Precautions Precautions for Electrical Inspections

Some of the SRS wiring can be identified by a special Special Tools Required
yellow outer covering and the SRS connectors can be Back Probe Adapter, 17 mm 07TAZ-001020A
identified by their yellow color. Observe the following
instructions: • Make sure the battery is fully charged when doing
• Never attempt to modify, splice, or repair SRS wiring. electrical test. Ifthe battery is not fully charged, the
If there is an open or damage to the SRS wiring or results of the tests may not be accurate.
terminals, replace the harness. • When using electrical test equipment, insert the probe
of the tester into the wire side of the connector. Do not
insert the probe of the tester into the terminal side of
the connector, and do not tamper with the connector.
• Be sure to install the harness wires so they do not get

pinched or interfere with other parts.
• Use a back probe adapter (07TAZ-001020A). Do not

insert the probe forcibly.
. b---------- < $ jj
• Make sure all SRS ground locations are clean and

securely fastened for optimum metal-to-metal
contact. Poor grounds can cause intermittent
problems that are difficult to diagnose. • Use specified service connectors in troubleshooting.
• Do not use any silicone based cleaners or lubricants Using improper tools could cause a diagnostic error
on any SRS connectors or terminals. due to poor metal-to-metal contact.
Spring-loaded Lock Connector Disconnecting
Some SRS connectors have a spring-loaded lock. To release the lock, pull the spring-loaded sleeve (A)
toward the stop (B) while holding the opposite half of the
Front Airbag Connectors connector, then pull the connector halves apart. Be sure
to pull on the sleeve and not on the connector.
Disconnecting
To release the lock, pull the spring-loaded sleeve (A)
connector, then pull the connector halves apart. Be sure
to pull on the sleeve and not on the connector.
Connecting
To reconnect, hold the pawl-side connector, and press
on the back of the sleeve-side connector in the direction
Connecting shown. As the two connector halves are pressed
together, the sleeve (A) is pushed back by the pawl (B).
1. To reconnect, hold the pawl-side connector, and Do not touch the sleeve.
press on the back of the sleeve-side connector in the
direction shown. As the two connector halves are
pressed together, the sleeve (A) is pushed back by the
pawl (B). Do not touch the sleeve.
2. When the connector halves are completely

connected, the pawl is released, and the
spring-loaded sleeve locks the connector.
a
Side Airbag Connector Disconnecting

Disconnecting To release the lock, pull the spring-loaded sleeve (A)
To release the lock, pull the spring-loaded sleeve (A) and connector. Then pull the connector halves apart. Be sure
the slider (B) while holding the opposite half of the to pull on the sleeve and not on the connector half.
connector, then pull the connector halves apart. Be sure
to pull on the sleeve and not on the connector half.
Connecting
Connecting Hold both connector halves, and press them firmly

together until the projection (A) of the sleeve-side
Hold both connector halves, and press them firmly connector clicks.
together until the projection (A) of the sleeve-side
connector clicks.
(cont'd)
Opening the SRS Unit Shorting Connectors Terminal numbers are shown from the wire side of the
female terminals. Insert a SRS short canceller(s) into the
For Diagnosis
cavities on the terminal side of the connector.
Speci al Tools Required
SRS Short Canceller 070AZ-SAA0100 SRS UNIT CONNECTOR A (28P)
NOTE:
O
• To prevent damage to of the connector cavity, insert a 1 2 3 4 5 SDA 6 7 8 9 10
SRS short canceller (070AZ-SAA0100) straight into the
11 __ ±s_-
13 0 H A 16
cavity from the terminal side. / 1>
• Before installing a SRS short canceller, wash it with 17 18 / i X l Y h 23 7 / A / 27 28
electrical contact cleaner, then dry it with compressed
air.
• Do not use a SRS short canceller if it is damaged. Insert short canceller(s) here.
• Make sure to remove a SRS short canceller before Wire side of female terminals
reconnecting the SRS unit connector.
• Some systems store data in memory that is lost when
the battery is disconnected. Before disconnecting the
SRS UNIT CONNECTOR B (28P)
battery, refer to Battery Terminal Disconnection and
O
When SRS unit connectors A (28P), B (28P), and C (16P) 1 2 3 4 5 SNA 6
/ 1 // /
are disconnected, a short circuit is automatically created tu n 15 16
11 12
in the connector by its own function to prevent an airbag / /
deployment. The circuit may need to be open 17 k v19 ^ 0 / / / / 25 26 27 28
sometimes when testing the system. Insert a SRS short
canceller in the specified cavities when is necessary to
keep the circuit open for diagnosis. Insert short canceller(s) here.
SRS UNIT CONNECTOR C (16P)
SRS Short Canceller

(070AZ-SAA0100)
Backprobing Spring-loaded Lock Connectors Seats with Side Airbags
When checking voltage or resistance on this type of Seats with side airbags have a "SIDE AIRBAG" label on
connector the first time, you must remove the retainer to the seat-back.
insert the tester probe from the wire side.
NOTE: It is not necessary to reinstall the removed
retainer; the terminals will stay locked in the connector
housing.
To remove the retainer (A), insert a flat-tip screwdriver
(B) between the connector body and the retainer, then
carefully pry out the retainer. Take care not to break the
connector.
• Clean the seats with a clamp cloth. Do not soak the

seats with liquid, and do not spray steam on the seats.
• Do not repair a torn or frayed seat-back cover. Replace
the seat-back cover if it is damaged.
• After a collision where the side airbag was deployed,
replace the side airbag with new parts. Ifthe seat-back
cushion is split, it must be replaced. Ifthe seat-back
frame is deformed, it must be replaced, refer to
Component Replacement/Inspection After
Deployment, (see page 24-211)
• Never put aftermarket accessories on the seats
(covers, pads, seat heaters, lights, etc.).
Disconnecting System Connectors Side Airbag
1. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). Do the battery 4. Disconnect the floor wire harness 2P connectors (A)
terminal disconnection procedure, then wait at least 3 from the driver's and the front passenger's side
minutes before starting work, (see page 22-112) airbag 2P connectors.
Driver's Airbag Driver's Seat
2. Remove the access panel (A) from the steering wheel,

then disconnect the driver's airbag 4P connector (B)
from the cable reel 4P connector.
Front Passenger's Seat
Front Passenger's Airbag

3. Remove the lower glove box (see page 20-142).
Disconnect the dashboard wire harness 4P connector
(A) from the front passenger's airbag 4P connector.
A
Side Curtain Airbag Seat Belt Tensioner

5. Remove the headliner (see page 20-116). 7. Remove the B-pillar lower trim (see page 20-103).
Disconnect both floor wire harness 4P connectors (A)
6. Disconnect both side curtain airbag harness 2P
from the seat belt tensioner 4P connectors.
connector (A) from the side curtain airbag 2P
connectors.
'07 model
Precautions and Procedures General Troubleshooting
(cont'd) Information
SRS Unit DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Codes)
8. Remove the driver's dashboard lower cover (see page The self-diagnostic function of the SRS unit allows it to
20-135). locate the causes of system problems and store this
9. Remove the dashboard center lower cover (see page information in memory. For easier troubleshooting, this
20-138). data can be retrieved with the HDS via the data link
circuit.
10. Remove the heater lower duct (see step 5 on page • When you turn the ignition switch to ON (II), the SRS
20-146). indicator should come on. If it goes off after 6 seconds,
11. Disconnect SRS unit connector A (28P), B (28P), and C the system is normal, and is not currently detecting
(16P) from the SRS unit. any problems.
• If there is a problem, the system locates and defines
NOTE: Before disconnecting SRS unit connector B the problem, stores this information in memory, and
from the SRS unit, disconnect both seat belt tensioner turns on the SRS indicator. The data will remain in
4P connectors. memory even if the ignition switch is turned to LOCK
(0) or the battery is disconnected.
A i C
• The data is stored in memory as a diagnostic trouble
code (DTC).
• The "x" at the end of each DTC denotes a numeric
character (0 thru 9) or an alpha character (A thru F) that
is display on the HDS.
• DTCs are either latching or resetting depending on the
malfunction. With resetting DTCs, the SRS indicator
will go off the next time the ignition switch is turned to
ON (II) and the system is normal, but the DTC is still
stored. With latching DTCs, the SRS indicator will not
turn OFF until the malfunction is repaired and the DTC
is cleared.
• When you connect the HDS to the data link connector
(DLC), you can retrieve a more detailed DTC in the
HDS "SRS" menu.
• After reading and recording the DTC, go to the
troubleshooting procedure for that code.
A
Precautions Reading the DTC

• Make sure the battery is fully charged. If the battery is NOTE: Make sure the battery is fully charged before you
dead or low, measuring values may not be correct. begin.
• Use only a digital multimeter to check the system.
Make sure its output is 10 mA (0.01 A) or less when 1. Make sure the ignition switch is in LOCK (0).
switched to the smallest value in the ohmmeter range. 2. Connect the HDS to the data link connector (DLC) (A).
A tester with a higher output could damage the airbag
circuit or cause accidental airbag deployment and
possible injury.
• Whenever the ignition switch is in ON (II), or has been
turned to LOCK (0) for less than 3 minutes, be careful
not to bump the SRS unit; the airbags could
accidentally deploy and cause damage or injuries.
• Before removing the dashboard wire harness, floor
wire harness, or the side curtain airbag harness,
disconnect the driver's airbag connector, the front
passenger's airbag connector, both side airbag
connectors, both side curtain airbag connectors and
both seat belt tensioner connectors.
• Do not touch a tester probe to the terminals in the SRS
unit or harness connectors, and do not connect the
SRS unit terminals or the sensor terminal with a
jumper wire. Use only the backprobe set and the
multimeter. Backprobe spring-loaded lock type 3. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
connectors correctly.
and the SRS unit. If it does not communicate,
5. Use the HDS to check for SRS DTCs.
6. Read and record the DTC.
7. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), and wait for 10
seconds.
9. Do the troubleshooting procedure for the DTC.
Clear the DTC Memory with the HDS Clearthe DTC Memory with the Manual Mode
NOTE: Make sure the battery is fully charged before you Special Tools Required
begin. SCS Service Connector 07PAZ-001010A
1. Make sure the ignition switch is in LOCK (0). To clear the DTCs from the SRS unit, use the HDS or the
2. Connect the HDS to the data link connector (DLC) (A). following procedure.
2. Connect the SCS service connector (A) to the yellow
MES 2P connector (B). Do not use a jumper wire.

troubleshoot DLC circuit (see page 11-269). 3. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
5. In the SRS MENU of the HDS, select SRS, then DTC to 4. The SRS indicator will come on for about 6 seconds,
clears DTCs. and then go off. Remove the SCS service connector
from the yellow MES 2P connector within 4 seconds
6. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), and wait for after the indicator goes off.
10 seconds.
5. The SRS indicator will come on again. Reconnect the
7. Disconnect the HDS from the DLC. SCS service connector to the yellow MES 2P
connector within 4 seconds after the indicator comes
on.
6. When the SRS indicator goes off, remove the SCS
service connector from the yellow MES 2P connector
within 4 seconds.
7. The SRS indicator blinks two times, indicating that the
memory has been cleared.
8. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), and wait for
10seconds.
9. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II) again. If the SRS
indicator comes on for 6 seconds, and then goes off,
the system is OK.
OPDS Unit Initialization
Troubleshooting intermittent Failures '07 model

If there was a malfunction that sets a DTC, but it does not When a seat-back cover, seat-back cushion, and/or
recur, a DTC will be stored in the memory, and the SRS OPDS unit is replaced, initialize the OPDS unit by
indicator may come on depending on this malfunction following the procedure.
detected.
OPDS Sensor Initialization
NOTE;
NOTE
• Check the condition of the battery (see page 22-111)
• A new (uninitialized) OPDS unit installed with a faulty
and the charging system (see page 4-37). Low battery
OPDS sensor can cause DTC 85-71 and DTC 85-78.
voltage may cause some intermittent failures.
• Before initializing the OPDS unit, make sure the
• A faulty or damaged cable reel can cause intermittent
battery is fully charged.
problems related to the driver's airbag inflator DTCs.
1. Clear the DTC memory (see page 24-38).
After checking the DTC, troubleshoot as follows:
2. Make sure the front passenger's seat is dry. Set the
1. Read the DTC (see Reading the DTC).
seat-back in a normal position, and make sure there is
2. Clear the DTC memory (see Clear the DTC Memory). nothing on the seat.
3. Set the parking brake, then start the engine, and let it 3. Make sure the ignition switch is in LOCK (0).
idle.
4. Connect the HDS to the data link connector (DLC) (A).
4. The SRS indicator comes on for about 6 seconds and
then goes off.
5. Shake the related wire harnesses and the connectors,
and look for loose connections, poor pinfits, and poor
grounds.
6. Take a test-drive (quick acceleration, quick braking,
and cornering), turn the steering wheel fully left and
right, and hold it there for 5 to 10 seconds. If the
problem recurs, the SRS indicator will come on.
7. If you cannot duplicate the concern, ask the customer
about the conditions when it occurred, or ask the
customer to demonstrate the concern.
8. If you cannot duplicate the intermittent failure, the
system is OK at this time.
OPDS Unit Initialization (cont'd) Front Passenger's Weight Sensor
Unit Initialization
5. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). *07 model
6. Make sure the HDS communicates with the vehicle Front Passenger's Weight Sensor Initialization
troubleshoot the DLC circuit (see page 11 -269). When you replace the SRS unit, the front passenger's
weight sensors, or the front passenger's weight sensor
7. From the HDS Main Menu, select SRS, then unit, initialize the front passenger's weight sensor unit.
INITIALIZATION. In the INITIALIZATION Menu, select
OPDS Initialization. Follow the prompts until the While doing the front passenger's weight sensor unit,
OPDS sensor initialization has been completed. observe these precautions:
• Make sure all components of the front passenger's
seat are correctly installed.
9. Disconnect the HDS from the DLC. • Make sure nothing is on the front passenger's seat.
NOTE; • Make sure there is nothing in the front passenger's
seat-back pocket.
• If the OPDS unit fails to initialize after several
attempts, replace the seat-back cover/pad with • Keep the windows and the moonroof closed.
equipped OPDS sensor (see page 20-177) and retry. • Do all calibration procedures, except test-driving, in
• Ifthe OPDS unit continues to fail to initialize, replace the service bay.
the OPDS unit (see page 24-239). • Make sure the vehicle is on level ground.
• Keep the A/C and the heater off.
• Do not touch the front passenger's seat during
calibration, until you are prompted to or when you
have completed the calibration.
• Do not expose the front passenger's seat to sudden
temperature changes.
• Before initializing the front passenger's weight sensor
unit, make sure the battery is fully charged.
A
ODS Unit Initialization
1. Position the front passenger's seat to the rear most *08-10 models
position, and adjust the recliner to the forward most
position. Do not move the seat from this position. NOTE;
• After SRS unit or ODS unit is replaced, do this
procedure to initialize the ODS unit.
3. Connect the HDS to the data link connector (DLC) (A). • ODS unit initialization will initialize both OPDS sensor
and seat weight sensor.
OPDS Sensor Initialization

After a seat-back cover, seat-back cushion, and/or ODS
unit is replaced, do this procedure to initialize the OPDS
sensor with the HDS unit.
• A new (uninitialized) ODS unit installed with a faulty
OPDS sensor can cause DTC 85-71 and DTC 85-78.
• Before initializing the ODS unit, make sure the battery
is fully charged.
4. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 2. Make sure the front passenger's seat is dry. Set the
seat-back in a normal position, and make sure there is
5. Make sure the HDS communicates with the vehicle nothing on the seat.
troubleshoot the DLC circuit (see page 11 -269). 3. Make sure the ignition switch is in LOCK (0).
6. Drive the vehicle, and accelerate to 20 mph (36 km/h), 4. Connect the HDS to the data link connector (DLC) (A).
then stop on level ground.
7. From the Main Menu, select SRS, then
INITIALIZATION. In the INITIALIZATION Menu, then
select SWS Initialization. Follow the prompts until the
front passenger's weight sensor unit initialization has
been completed.
ODS Unit Initialization (cont'd)
5. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). Front Passenger's Weight Sensor

6. Make sure the HDS communicates with the vehicle initialization
When you replace the SRS unit, the front passenger's
troubleshoot the DLC circuit (see page 11 -269).
weight sensors, or the front passenger's weight sensor
7. From the HDS Main Menu, select SRS, then unit, initialize the front passenger's weight sensor unit.
INITIALIZATION. In the INITIALIZATION Menu, select
While doing the ODS unit, observe these precautions:
' ODS Initialization. Follow the prompts until the OPDS
sensor initialization has been completed. • Make sure all components of the front passenger's
8. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). • Make sure nothing is on the front passenger's seat.
9. Disconnect the HDS from the DLC. • Make sure there is nothing in the front passenger's
seat-back pocket.
NOTE;
• Keep the windows and the moonroof closed.
• If the ODS unit fails to initialize after several
• Do all calibration procedures, except test-driving, in
attempts, replace the seat-back cover/pad with
the service bay.
equipped OPDS sensor (see page 20-177) and retry.
• Make sure the vehicle is on level ground.
• Ifthe ODS continues to fail to initialize, replace the
ODS unit (see page 24-240). • Keep the A/C and the heater off.
• Do not touch the front passenger's seat during
calibration, until you are prompted to or when you
have completed the calibration.
• Do not expose the front passenger's seat to sudden
temperature changes.
• Before initializing the front passenger's weight sensor
unit, make sure the battery is fully charged.
a
Front Passenger's Weight Sensor
Unit Operation Check
1. Position the front passenger's all the way rearward, '07 model
and adjust the seat-back to the forward most position.
Do not move the seat from this position. Check the front passenger's weight sensor unit
operation after any of these actions:
• Replacement of front passenger's seat component(s)
3. Connect the HDS to the data link connector (DLC) (A). (except front passenger's weight sensor unit and/or
front passenger's weight sensors)
• After a vehicle collision
• SRS unit replacement
Pre-operation Check Set-up

• Before doing the front passenger's weight sensor unit
operation check, make sure the battery is fully
charged.
• Position the front passenger's seat all the way
rearward. Adjust the seat-back all the way forward. Do
not move the seat from this position.
• Make sure nothing is on the front passenger's seat.
• Make sure there is nothing in the front passenger's
seat-back pocket.
5. Make sure the HDS communicates with the vehicle • Keep the windows and the moonroof closed.
and the SRS unit. If it does not communicate, • Do all calibration procedures, except test-driving, in
troubleshoot the DLC circuit (see page 11-269). the service bay.
6. Drive the vehicle, and accelerate to 20 mph (36 km/h), • Make sure the vehicle is on level ground.
then stop on level ground. • Turn the heater and the A/C off.
• Do not touch the passenger's seat during the
7. From the Main Menu, select SRS, then
operation check.
INITIALIZATION. In the INITIALIZATION Menu, then
select SWS Initialization. Follow the prompts until the • Do not expose the front passenger's seat to sudden
front passenger's weight sensor initialization has temperature changes.
been completed. • Make sure all aftermarket devices such as amplifiers,
fluorescent light, air purifiers, CB or HAM radios, etc.
8. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). are turned off.
Front Passenger's Weight Sensor ODS Unit Operation Check
Unit Operation Check (cont'd)
After Replacing Front Passenger's Seat '08-10 models
Component(s) Check the ODS operation after any of these actions:
1. Make sure the ignition switch is in LOCK (0). • Replacement of front passenger's seat component(s)
(except ODS unit and/or front passenger's weight
2. Connect the HDS to the data link connector (DLC) (A). sensors)
• After a vehicle collision
• SRS unit replacement
Pre-operation Check Set-up

• Before doing the front passenger's weight sensor unit
operation check, make sure the battery is fully
charged.
• Position the front passenger's seat to the rear most
position. Adjust the seat-back to the forward most
position. Do not move the seat from this position.
• Make sure nothing is on the front passenger's seat.
• Make sure there is nothing in the front passenger's
3. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). seat-back pocket.
• Keep the windows and the moonroof closed.
and the SRS unit. If it does not communicate, • Do all calibration procedures, except test-driving, in
troubleshoot the DLC circuit (see page 11 -269). the service bay.
• Make sure the vehicle is on level ground.
5. Drive the vehicle, accelerate to 20 mph (36 km/h), then
• Turn the heater and the A/C off.
stop on level ground.
• Do not touch the passenger's seat during the
6. From the HDS Main Menu, select SRS, then operation check.
inspection. In the Inspection Menu, select SEAT • Do not expose the front passenger's seat to sudden
OUTPUT CHK. Follow the prompts until the front temperature changes.
passenger's weight sensor unit operation check has • Make sure all aftermarket devices such as amplifiers,
been completed. fluorescent light, air purifiers, CB or HAM radios, etc.
7. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). are turned off.

a
Front Passenger's Weight Sensor
Output Check After a Vehicle Collision
After Replacing Front Passenger's Seat 1. Position the front passenger's seat to the rear most
position, adjust the seat-back to the forward most
Component(s) position. Do not move the seat from this position.
2. Connect the HDS to the data link connector (DLC) (A). stop on level ground.

stop on level ground.
6. From the HDS Main Menu, select SRS, then
7. From the HDS menu, select SRS, then Inspection,
Inspection. In the Inspection Menu, select SEAT
select SEAT OUTPUT CHK. Follow the prompts until
OUTPUT CHK. Follow the prompts until the ODS unit
the front passenger's weight sensor output check has
operation check has been completed.
been completed.
Driver's Seat Position Sensor Operation Check
Check the driver's seat position after any of these 7. Using a piece of tape (A), mark the location on the
actions. seat's outer cover (B) where the front riser cover
• Driver's seat position sensor replacement meets the seat riser (C). The driver's seat position
• Cover plate (front side of driver's seat slide rail) sensor should read NEAR.
replacement
1. Make sure the driver's seat is all the way forward.
8. Move the seat back in small increments (about 5mm,

0.2 in) until the driver's seat position sensor reads
4. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). NOT NEAR. The seat should be about 25 mm (1 in)
5. Make sure the HDS communicates with the vehicle from the front.
and the SRS unit. If it does not communicate, NOTE;
• It takes a few seconds for the HDS to display
6. From the HDS Main Menu, select SRS, then changes, so wait about 5 seconds between each
PARMETER INFORMATION. In the PARMETER movement.
INFORMATION Menu, select Buckle Switch, Seat • If the driver's seat position sensor data does not
Position Sensor. work as described above, check the driver's seat
position sensor or the cover plate for damage, and
replace parts as needed.
A
*07 model
DTC Detection Item Notes
11-1X Open in the driver's airbag first inflator DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 24-74)
11 -3x Short to another wire or decreased resistance in the driver's airbag first DTC Troubleshooting
inflator (see page 24-76)
11-4x Open in the driver's airbag second inflator DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 24-74)
11-6x Short to another wire or decreased resistance in the driver's airbag second DTC Troubleshooting
11-8x Short to power in the driver's airbag first inflator DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 24-78)
11-9x Short to ground in the driver's airbag first inflator DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 24-80)
11-Ax Short to power in the driver's airbag second inflator DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 24-78)
11-Bx Short to ground in the driver's airbag second inflator DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 24-80)
12-1x Open in the front passenger's airbag first inflator DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 24-82)
12-3x Short to another wire or decreased resistance in the front passenger's airbag DTC Troubleshooting
first inflator (see page 24-83)
12-4x Open in the front passenger's airbag second inflator DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 24-82)
second inflator (see page 24-83)
12-8x Short to power in the front passenger's airbag first inflator DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 24-85)
12-9x Short to ground in the front passenger's airbag first inflator DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 24-86)
12-Ax Short to power in the front passenger's airbag second inflator DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 24-85)
12-Bx Short to ground in the front passenger's airbag second inflator DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 24-86)
(cont'd)

21-1x Open in the driver's seat belt tensioner DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 24-88)
21 -3x Short to another wire or decreased resistance in the driver's seat belt DTC Troubleshooting
tensioner (see page 24-89)
21-8x Short to power in the driver's seat belt tensioner DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 24-91)
21-9x Short to ground in the driver's seat belt tensioner DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 24-92)
22-1 x Open in the front passenger's seat belt tensioner DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 24-94)
22-3x Short to another wire or decreased resistance in the front passenger's seat belt DTC Troubleshooting
22-8x Short to power in the front passenger's seat belt tensioner DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 24-97)
22-9x Short to ground in the front passenger's seat belt tensioner DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 24-98)
31-1x Open in the driver's side airbag inflator DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 24-100)
31-3x Short to another wire or decreased resistance in the driver's side airbag DTC Troubleshooting
31-8x Short to power in the driver's side airbag inflator DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 24-103)
31-9x Short to ground in the driver's side airbag inflator DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 24-104)
32-1 x Open in the front passenger's side airbag inflator DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 24-106)
32-3x Short to another wire or decreased resistance in the front passenger's side DTC Troubleshooting
airbag inflator (see page 24-107)
32-8x Short to power in the front passenger's side airbag inflator DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 24-109)
32-9x Short to ground in the front passenger's side airbag inflator DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 24-110)
33-1 x Open in the left side curtain airbag inflator DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 24-112)
33-3x Short to another wire or decreased resistance in the left side curtain airbag DTC Troubleshooting
33-8x Short to power in the left side curtain airbag inflator DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 24-115)
33-9x Short to ground in the left side curtain airbag inflator DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 24-116)
34-1 x Open in the right side curtain airbag inflator DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 24-118)
34-3x Short to another wire or decreased resistance in the right side curtain airbag DTC Troubleshooting
34-8x Short to power in the right side curtain airbag inflator DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 24-121)
34-9x Short to ground in the right side curtain airbag inflator DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 24-122)
NOTE: The "x" at the end of each DTC denotes a numeric character (0 thru 9) or an alpha character (A
thru F) that you will see on the HDS display. The character is unrelated to your
troubleshooting; it designates the SRS unit manufacturer and other detail used for product
analysis.
m
'07 model
DTC Detection Item ________ Motes______
41-1x No signal from the left front impact sensor DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 24-124)
41-2x Internal failure of the left front impact sensor DTC Troubleshooting
41-3x (see page 24-130)
41-Bx
42-1 x No signal from the right front impact sensor DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 24-127)
42-2x Internal failure of the right front impact sensor DTC Troubleshooting
42-3x (see page 24-130)
42-Bx
43-1 x No signal from the left side impact sensor (first) DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 24-131)
43-2x Internal failure of the left side impact sensor (first) DTC Troubleshooting
43-3x (see page 24-137)
43-Bx
44-1 x No signal from the right side impact sensor (first) DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 24-134)
44-2x Internal failure of the right side impact sensor (first) DTC Troubleshooting
44-3x (see page 24-137)
44-Bx
45-1 x No signal from the left side impact sensor (second) DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 24-138)
45-2x Internal failure of the left side impact sensor (second) DTC Troubleshooting
45-3x (see page 24-144)
45-Bx
46-1 x No signal from the right side impact sensor (second) DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 24-141)
46-2x Internal failure of the right side impact sensor (second) DTC Troubleshooting
46-3x (see page 24-144)
46-Bx
47-1 x No signal from the left side impact sensor (third) DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 24-145)
47-2x Internal failure of the left side impact sensor (third) DTC Troubleshooting
47-3x (see page 24-151)
47-Bx
48-1 x No signal from the right side impact sensor (third) DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 24-148)
48-2x Internal failure of the right side impact sensor (third) DTC Troubleshooting
48-3x (see page 24-151)
48-Bx
51-xx Internal failure of the SRS unit DTC Troubleshooting
52-xx (see page 24-152)
53-xx
54-xx
55-xx
(cont'd)

56-21 Lost communication with the PCM (PGM-FI system) DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 24-152)
56-22 Undefined data received from the PCM (PGM-FI system) DTC Troubleshooting
56-23 (see page 24-153)
56-25 Lost communication with the gauge control module DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 24-154)
56-26 Undefined data received from the gauge control module DTC Troubleshooting
56-27 (see page 24-155)
(see page 24-152)
61-1x Open in the driver's seat belt buckle switch DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 24-155)
61-2x Short in the driver's seat belt buckle switch DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 24-158)
62-1 x Open in the front passenger's seat belt buckle switch DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 24-161)
62-2x Short in the front passenger's seat belt buckle switch DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 24-164)
71-1x Open in the driver's seat position sensor DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 24-167)
71-2x Short in the driver's seat position sensor DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 24-169)
81-4x Internal failure of the front passenger's weight sensor unit DTC Troubleshooting
81-5x (see page 24-180)
81-61 No signal from the front passenger's weight sensor unit DTC Troubleshooting
81-62 Incorrect data from the front passenger's weight sensor unit (see page 24-171)
81-63 Internal failure of the front passenger's weight sensor unit DTC Troubleshooting
81-64 (see page 24-180)
81-71 Front passenger's weight sensor unit not calibrated DTC Troubleshooting
81-78 (see page 24-180)
81-79 Front passenger's weight sensors initial check failure DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 24-183)
82-1 x No signal from the inner side front passenger's weight sensor DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 24-181)
83-2x No signal from the outer side front passenger's weight sensor DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 24-182)
85-31 Internal failure of the OPDS unit DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 24-183)
85-32 Side airbag cutoff indicator stays on DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 24-184) |
NOTE: The "x" atthe end of each DTC denotes a numeric character (Othru 9) or an alpha character (A
analysis.
A
*07 model
85-4x Internal failure of the OPDS unit DTC Troubleshooting
85-5x (see page 24-185)
85-61 No signal from the OPDS unit DTC Troubleshooting
85-62 Incorrect data from the OPDS unit (see page 24-186)
85-64 (see page 24-185)
85-71 OPDS unit not initialized DTC Troubleshooting
85-78 (see page 24-196)
85-79 OPDS sensor initial check failure DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 24-186)
86-1 x Faulty OPDS seat-back sensor DTC Troubleshooting
86-2x Faulty OPDS seat support sensor (see page 24-196)
92-1 x Open in the passenger's cutoff indicator DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 24-198)
92-2x Open or short to ground in the passenger's airbag cutoff indicator DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 24-200)
A1-1x Faulty power supply (VA line) DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 24-201)
A2-1x Faulty power supply (VB line) DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 24-203)
B2-1x No signal from the rear safing sensor DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 24-204)
B2-2x Internal failure of the rear safing sensor DTC Troubleshooting
B2-8x (see page 24-206)
B2-Bx
Ex-11 Control operation recorded DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 24-207)
Fx-11 Airbags and/or tensioners deployment recorded DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 24-152)
(cont'd)
*08-1§ models
11-1x Open in the driver's airbag first inflator DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 24-74)
11-3x Short to another wire or decreased resistance in the driver's airbag first DTC Troubleshooting
11-4x Open in the driver's airbag second inflator DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 24-74)
11-ex Short to another wire or decreased resistance in the driver's airbag second DTC Troubleshooting
11 -8x Short to power in the driver's airbag first inflator DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 24-78)
11-9x Short to ground in the driver's airbag first inflator DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 24-80)
11-Ax Short to power in the driver's airbag second inflator DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 24-78)
11-Bx Short to ground in the driver's airbag second inflator DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 24-80)
12-1x Open in the front passenger's airbag first inflator DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 24-82)
first inflator (see page 24-83)
12-4x Open in the front passenger's airbag second inflator DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 24-82)
second inflator (see page 24-83)
12-Sx Short to power in the front passenger's airbag first inflator DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 24-85)
12-9x Short to ground in the front passenger's airbag first inflator DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 24-86)
12-Ax Short to power in the front passenger's airbag second inflator DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 24-85)
12-Bx Short to ground in the front passenger's airbag second inflator DTC Troubleshooting
I (see page 24-86)
analysis.
*08-10 models
21-1x Open in the driver's seat belt tensioner DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 24-88)
21-3x Short to another wire or decreased resistance in the driver's seat belt DTC Troubleshooting
21-8x Short to power in the driver's seat belt tensioner DTC Troubleshooting
(seepage 24-91)
21-9x Short to ground in the driver's seat belt tensioner DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 24-92)
22-1 x Open in the front passenger's seat belt tensioner DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 24-95)
22-3x Short to another wire or decreased resistance in the front passenger's seat belt DTC Troubleshooting
22-8x Short to power in the front passenger's seat belt tensioner DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 24-97)
22-9x Short to ground in the front passenger's seat belt tensioner DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 24-98)
31-1x Open in the driver's side airbag inflator DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 24-100)
31-3x Short to another wire or decreased resistance in the driver's side airbag DTC Troubleshooting
31 -8x Short to power in the driver's side airbag inflator DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 24-103)
31-9x Short to ground in the driver's side airbag inflator DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 24-104)
32-1 x Open in the front passenger's side airbag inflator DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 24-106)
32-3x Short to another wire or decreased resistance in the front passenger's side DTC Troubleshooting
airbag inflator (see page 24-107)
32-8x Short to power in the front passenger's side airbag inflator DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 24-109)
32-9x Short to ground in the front passenger's side airbag inflator DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 24-110)
33-1 x Open in the left side curtain airbag inflator DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 24-112)
33-3x Short to another wire or decreased resistance in the left side curtain airbag DTC Troubleshooting
33-8x Short to power in the left side curtain airbag inflator DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 24-115)
33-9x Short to ground in the left side curtain airbag inflator DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 24-116)
34-1 x Open in the right side curtain airbag inflator DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 24-118)
34-3x Short to another wire or decreased resistance in the right side curtain airbag DTC Troubleshooting
34-8x Short to power in the right side curtain airbag inflator DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 24-121)
34-9x Short to ground in the right side curtain airbag inflator DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 24-122)
(cont'd)
DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 24-124)
41-2x Internal failure of the left front impact sensor DTC Troubleshooting
41-3x (see page 24-130)
41-Bx
42-1 x No signal from the right front impact sensor DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 24-127)
42-2x Internal failure of the right front impact sensor DTC Troubleshooting
42-3x (see page 24-130)
42-Bx
43-1 x No signal from the left side impact sensor (first) DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 24-131)
43-2x Internal failure of the left side impact sensor (first) DTC Troubleshooting
43-3x (see page 24-137)
43-Bx
44-1 x No signal from the right side impact sensor (first) DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 24-134)
44-2x Internal failure of the right side impact sensor (first) DTC Troubleshooting
44-3x (see page 24-137)
44-Bx
45-1 x No signal from the left side impact sensor (second) DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 24-138)
45-2x Internal failure of the left side impact sensor (second) DTC Troubleshooting
45-3x (see page 24-144)
45-Bx
46-1 x No signal from the right side impact sensor (second) DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 24-141)
46-2x Internal failure of the right side impact sensor (second) DTC Troubleshooting
46-3x (see page 24-144)
46-Bx
47-1 x No signal from the left side impact sensor (third) DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 24-145)
47-2x Internal failure of the left side impact sensor (third) DTC Troubleshooting
47-3x (see page 24-151)
47-Bx
48-1 x No signal from the right side impact sensor (third) DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 24-148)
48-2x Internal failure of the right side impact sensor (third) DTC Troubleshooting
48-3x (see page 24-151)
48-Bx
52-xx (see page 24-152)
53-xx
54-xx
55-xx
analysis.
A
*08-10 models
56-21 Lost communication with the PCM (PGM-FI system) DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 24-152)
56-22 Undefined data received from the PCM (PGM-FI system) DTC Troubleshooting
56-23 (see page 24-153)
56-25 Lost communication with the gauge control module DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 24-154)
56-26 Undefined data received from the gauge control module DTC Troubleshooting
56-27 (see page 24-155)
(see page 24-152)
61-1x Open in the driver's seat belt buckle switch DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 24-155)
61-2x Short in the driver's seat belt buckle switch DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 24-158)
62-1 x Open in the front passenger's seat belt buckle switch DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 24-161)
62-2x Short in the front passenger's seat belt buckle switch DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 24-164)
71-1x Open in the driver's seat position sensor DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 24-167)
71-2x Short in the driver's seat position sensor DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 24-169)
81-4x Internal failure of the ODS unit DTC Troubleshooting
81-5x (see page 24-182)
81-61 No signal from the ODS unit DTC Troubleshooting
81-62 Incorrect data from the ODS unit (see page 24-175)
81-63 Internal failure of the ODS unit DTC Troubleshooting
81-64 (see page 24-182)
81-71 ODS unit not calibrated DTC Troubleshooting
81-78 (see page 24-181)
81-79 Front passenger's weight sensors initial check failure DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 24-183)
82-1 x No signal from the inner side front passenger's weight sensor DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 24-181)
83-2x No signal from the outer side front passenger's weight sensor DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 24-182)
(cont'd)

85-4x Internal failure of the OPDS unit DTC Troubleshooting
85-5x (see page 24-185)
85-61 No signal from the OPDS unit DTC Troubleshooting
85-62 Incorrect data from the OPDS unit (see page 24-190)
85-64 (see page 24-185)
85-71 OPDS unit not initialized DTC Troubleshooting
85-78 (see page 24-196)
85-79 OPDS sensor initial check failure DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 24-186)
86-1 x Faulty OPDS seat-back sensor DTC Troubleshooting
86-2x Faulty OPDS seat support sensor (see page 24-197)
92-1 x Open in the passenger's cutoff indicator DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 24-198)
92-2x Open or short to ground in the passenger's airbag cutoff indicator DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 24-200)
A1-1x Faulty power supply (VA line) DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 24-201)
A2-1x Faulty power supply (VB line) DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 24-203)
B2-1x No signal from the rear safing sensor DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 24-204)
B2-2x Internal failure of the rear safing sensor DTC Troubleshooting
B2-8x (see page 24-206)
B2-Bx
Ex-11 Control operation recorded DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 24-207)
Fx-11 Airbags and/or tensioners deployment recorded DTC Troubleshooting
(see page 24-207)
NOTE: The "x" atthe end of each DTC denotes a numeric character (0 thru 9) or an alpha character (A
analysis.
A

SRS indicator does not come on Symptom Troubleshooting (see page 24-208) Communication with the
HDS
SRS indicator stays on, but no DTCs Symptom Troubleshooting (see page 24-208) Charging system for under
are stored, or cannot be read charging
Side airbag cutoff indicator flashes Check for DTCs. If any DTC is indicated, go to • OPDS/ODS unit
the DTC troubleshooting initialization
• Communication with the
HDS
Side airbag cutoff indicator stays on Symptom Troubleshooting (see page 24-209) Communication with the
HDS
Side airbag cutoff indicator does not Symptom Troubleshooting (see page 24-210) • Communication with the
come on HDS
• OPDS/ODS unit
initialization
Passenger's airbag cutoff indicator Check for DTCs. If any DTC is indicated, go to Communication with the
flashes the DTC troubleshooting HDS
Passenger's airbag cutoff indicator Symptom Troubleshooting (see page 24-210) Communication with the
stays on or comes on suddenly HDS
Passenger's airbag cutoff indicator Check for DTCs. If any DTC is indicated, go to Communication with the
does not come on the DTC troubleshooting HDS
HDS does not communicate with the Troubleshoot the DLC circuit (see page Communication with the
SRS unit or the vehicle 11-269) HDS
System Description
SRS Components
Airbags
The SRS is a safety device which, when used with the seat belt, is designed to help protect the driver and front
passenger in a frontal impact exceeding a certain set limit. The system consists of the SRS unit, including safing sensor,
roll rate sensor and impact sensor (A), the cable reel (B), the driver's airbag (C), the front passenger's airbag (D), side
airbags (E), side curtain airbags (F), seat belt tensioners (G), front impact sensors (H), side impact sensors (first) (I), side
impact sensors (second) (J), side impact sensors (third) (K) and rear safing sensor (L).
Since the driver's and front passenger's airbags use the same sensors, both normally inflate at the same time. However,
it is possible for only one airbag to inflate. This can occur when collision severity is near the threshold for airbag
deployment. If such case, the SRS system will only deploy airbags when the protection provided by the seat belt is
insufficient.
*07 model
£ 3
'08-10 models
Front Passenger's Wei ght Sensors

The front passenger's weight sensor unit ('07 model) (M) is under the front passenger's seat along with the front
passenger's weight sensors (N), OPDS unit ('07 model) (O), or the ODS unit ('08-10 models) (P) is in the front passenger's
seat-back. The front passenger's weight sensors detect the weight on the seat, and send the information to the front
passenger's weight sensor unit or ODS unit. If the total weight is about 65 lbs (30 kg) or less, the front passenger's
weight sensor unit or ODS unit sends a signal to the SRS unit to prevent the passenger's airbag from deploying. When
the passenger's airbag is disabled, the passenger airbag cutoff indicator (Q) on the center panel comes on to alert the
driver that the front passenger's airbag will not deploy in a front-end collision.
NOTE: The sensors only detect the weight on the seat. The sensors do not detect the weight of the passenger's legs or
arms that may be resting on the floor or armrests.
Driver's Seat Position Sensor
The driver's seat position sensor (R) is under the driver's seat on the left side. When the driver's seat is moved to its
forward most position, the deployment of the driver's airbag is moderated to decrease its force of impact during a
front-end collision.
Rear Safi ng Sensor
The rear safing sensor is located under the third row seat. The rear safing sensor performs the same basic function as
the safing sensor in the SRS unit. It measures sideways G force, such as the force the vehicle would receive in a side
collision in the rear, and sends that information to the SRS unit. The SRS unit uses that information, and the information
from the second and/or third side impact sensors to determine the side that is impacted and the force. Ifthe threshold is
met, the SRS unit deploys the side airbag, the side curtain airbag, and the seat belt tensioner on that side.
Side Airbag Cutoff Indicator/OPDS Operation

The indicator comes on when ifthe front passenger's seat is occupied by a small adult or child who is leaning into the
deployment path, or when an object (grocery bag, briefcase, purse, etc.) is in the seat. This indicates the passenger's
side airbag is off and will not deploy; there is no problem with the side airbag. If the passenger sits upright or moves to
another seat, or you remove the object from the seat, the indicator should go off. There will be some delay between the
occupant's repositioning and when the indicator will turn on or off.
Passenger Airbag Cutoff Indicator/Front Passenger's Weight Sensor Operation

The indicator comes on if the weight on the front passenger's seat is about 30kg (65 lbs) or less. This indicates the
passenger's front airbag is off and will not deploy. The front airbag is shut off to reduce the chance of airbag-caused
injuries.
SRS Operation
The main circuit in the SRS unit senses and analyzes the force of impact and, if necessary, ignites the inflator charges. If
battery voltage is too low or power is disconnected due to the impact, the voltage regulator and the back-up power
circuit will keep voltage at a constant level.
For the SRS to operate
Seat Belt Tensioners
(1) A front impact sensor must activate and send electric signals to the microprocessor.
(2) The microprocessor must compute the signals and trigger the tensioners.
(3) The charges must ignite and deploy the tensioners.
Driver's and Front Passenger's Airbag(s)
(1) A front impact sensor must activate and send electric signals to the microprocessor.
(2) The microprocessor must compute the signals and trigger the airbag inflator(s).
(3) The triggered inflators must ignite and deploy the airbags.
Side Airbag(s)
(1) A side impact sensor must activate and send electric signals to the microprocessor.
(2) The microprocessor must compute the signals and trigger the side airbag inflator(s). However, the microprocessor
does not trigger the front passenger's side airbag if the SRS unit determines that the front passenger's head is in the
deployment path of the side airbag.
(3) The inflator that receives the signal must ignite and deploy the side airbags.
A
Side Curtain Airbag(s)

(1) A side impact sensor or the must activate and send electrical signals to the microprocessor.
(2) The microprocessor must compute the signals and trigger the side curtain airbag and side airbag inflator(s).
(3) The triggered inflators must ignite and deploy the side curtain airbag and side airbag at the same time.
*1: '07 model

*2: '08 -1 0 m odels
FRONT
RIGHT RIGHT RIGHT DRIVER'S DRIVER'S PASSENGER'S DRIVER'S FRONT
SIDE SIDE SIDE AIRBAG AIRBAG AIRBAG SIDE PASSENGER'S
IMPACT IMPACT IMPACT FIRST SECOND SECOND AIRBAG SIDE AIRBAG
SENSOR SENSOR SENSOR INFLATOR INFLATOR INFLATOR INFLATOR INFLATOR
(FIRST) (SECOND) (THIRD)
LEFT LEFT RIGHT
-(W)-
SIDE SIDE SIDE FRONT
IMPACT IMPACT IMPACT PASSENGER'S
DRIVER'S UNDER SENSOR SENSOR SENSOR AIRBAG
DASH FUSI RELAY (FIRST) (SECOND) (THIRD) FIRST
BOX INFLATOR
REAR
SAFING
SENSOR CABLE
REEL
MICROPROCESSOR and DIAGNOSTIC CIRCUIT TRIGGER CIRCUIT
. Y“ n
DLC MES SCS
SRS FRONT
INDICATOR PASSENGER'S FRONT
AIRBAG PASSENGER'S
CUTOFF WEIGHT DRIVER'S FRONT LEFTSIDE RIGHT SIDE
SIDE SENSOR
AIRBAG INDICATOR SEATBELT PASSENGER'S CURTAIN CURTAIN
UNIT TENSIONER SEAT BELT AIRBAG AIRBAG
INDICATOR TENSIONER INFLATOR INFLATOR
DRIVER'S FRONT
SEAT PASSENGER'S
FRONT OPDS/ODS POSITION WEIGHT
PASSENGER'S UNIT SENSORS
WEIGHT SENSOR
SENSOR OPDS FRONT
SENSOR DRIVER'S SEAT PASSENGER'S
FRONT FRONT SEAT
PASSENGER'S PASSENGER'S
SEAT SEAT
Self-diagnostic System
A self-diagnostic circuit is built into the SRS unit; when the ignition switch is turned ON (II), the SRS indicator comes on
and goes off after about 6 seconds if the system is operating normally.
If the indicator does not come on, or does not go off after 6 seconds, or comes on while driving, it indicates an
abnormality in the system. The system must be inspected and repaired as soon as possible.
For better serviceability, the SRS unit memory stores DTCs related to the cause of the malfunction. The SRS unit is
connected to the data link connector (DLC). This information can be read with the HDS when it is connected to the DLC
(see page 24-36).
NOTE: Before you disconnect the negative cable from the battery for troubleshooting, refer to Battery Terminal
Disconnection and Reconnection (see page 22-112).
SRS Unit inputs and Outputs at Connector A (28P)
o
1 2 3 4 5 SDA 6 7 8 9 10
11 12 13 EH] 14 15 16
17 18 / / / 22 23 24 / / 27 28
Terminal Wire Color Terminal Name Description

Number
1 GRN/YEL* LA2+ Power source for the driver's airbag second inflator
2 GRN/WHT* LA 2- Ground for the driver's airbag second inflator
3 BLU/BLK* RA2+ Power source for the front passenger's airbag second inflator
4 BLU/RED* RA2— Ground for the front passenger's airbag second inflator
5 LT GRN/BLK* MES Memory clear signal input
6 BRN* SCS Service check signal input
7 GRN/BLK* LA1 + Power source for the driver's airbag first inflator
8 GRN/RED* LA1 - Ground for the driver's airbag first inflator
9 YEL* RA1 + Power source for the front passenger's airbag first inflator
10 BLU/YEL* RA1 — Ground for the front passenger's airbag first inflator
11 WHT* F-CAN H Sends and receives communication signal
12 RED* F-CAN L Sends and receives communication signal
13 RED/BLU* PTT Passenger's airbag cutoff indicator output line
14 GRN/ORN* OPDS/ODS Sends and receives communication signal
15 BLU* LFS— Ground for the left front impact sensor
16 BRN* RFS- Ground for the right front impact sensor
17 WHT* VA SRS system sub power (common with OPDS/ODS)
18 WHT/RED* VB SRS dedicated power (dedicated booster circuit)
22 BLK* SRS GND1 Ground circuit for the SRS unit (G505)
23 BLK* SRSGND2 Ground circuit for the SRS unit (G505)
24 BLU* K-LINE Sends and receives scan tool signal
27 RED* LFS+ Power source for the left front impact sensor
28 GRN* RFS+ Power source for the right front impact sensor
*: Wire colors may be substituted in this table.
A
SRS Unit Inputs and Outputs at Connector B (28P)
o
1 2 3 4 5 SNA 6 / / / /
11 12 R 3 15 16
/ /
17 18 19 20 / / / 25 26 27 28
/

Number
1 RED/BLU* LRP+ Power source for the driver's seat belt tensioner
2 RED/WHT* LRP— Ground for the driver's seat belt tensioner
3 RED/BLK* RRP+ Power source for the front passenger's seat belt tensioner
4 RED/YEL* RRP— Ground for the front passenger's seat belt tensioner
5 GRN/WHT* ss— Ground for the driver's seat position sensor
6 BLU/RED* SS + Power source for the driver's seat position sensor
11 BLU/RED* LBSC Driver's seat belt buckle switch un-buckled signal
12 LT GRN* LBSO Driver's seat belt buckle switch buckled signal
15 BLU* RBSC Front passenger's seat belt buckle switch un-buckled signal
16 ORN* RBSO Front passenger's seat belt buckle switch buckled signal
17 WHT/GRN* LSA+ Power source for the driver's side airbag inflator
18 WHT/RED* LSA— Ground for the driver's side airbag inflator
19 WHT/BLK* RSA+ Power source for the front passenger's side airbag inflator
20 WHT/BLU* RSA- Ground for the front passenger's side airbag inflator
25 PNK/BLU* LBS1 + Power source for the left side impact sensor (first)
26 GRY/RED* LB S1- Ground for the left side impact sensor (first)
27 BRN/YEL* RBS1 + Power source for the right side impact sensor (first)
28 LT GRN/RED* R BS1- Ground for the right side impact sensor (first)
SRS Unit Inputs and Outputs at Connector C (16P)
O
1 2 3 SDA 4 5 6
/ 8
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

Number
1 GRY* GND Ground for shielding
2 BLU/WHT SSS+ Power source for the rear safing sensor
3 BLU/YEL* SSS- Ground for the rear safing sensor
4 YEL* RCSI— Ground for the right side impact sensor (second)
5 YEL/BLK* RCSI + Power source for the right side impact sensor (second)
6 GRN/BLK* LCSI + Power source for the left side impact sensor (second)
8 ORN* LCSI — Ground for the left side impact sensor (second)
9 LT GRN/RED* RDSI + Power source for the right side impact sensor (third)
10 BRN/YEL* R D S I- Ground for the right side impact sensor (third)
11 BLU/BLK* LCA1 + Power source for the left side curtain airbag inflator
12 BLU* LC A1- Ground for the left side curtain airbag inflator
13 RED/YEL* RCA1 + Power source for the right side curtain airbag inflator
14 RED* RCA1 - Ground for the right side curtain airbag inflator
15 RED/BLK* LDSI + Power source for the left side impact sensor (third)
16 WHT/BLK* L D S I- Ground for the left side impact sensor (third)
A
Circuit Diagram
*07 model
BATTERY
FRONT
PASSENGER'S WHT
WEIGHT
SENSOR
UNIT
FLOOR
WIRE
HARNESS _
10
C931 r
FRONT
PASSENGER'S m „
SEAT WIRE BLK
HARNESS 2
C932
OPDS
BRN UNIT
HARNESS
8P
1 1 PASSENGER'S
OPDS UNIT i 1 UNDER-DASH
1 1 FUSE/RELAY
i........i 1 1 BOX
zl
1 1 ENGINE
WHT RED COMPARTMENT
i i WIRE HARNESS
, 48* 49j
_Q_
PCM
G651
A
*1: With driver's 8-way power seat

*2; With driver's manual height adjustable seat
BLU, GRN, GRY, or BRN
wire color can be used for the SRS circuits
that have a * mark
C506
*2
' sea t
POSITION
SENSOR
SUBHARNESS BLK
WHT
GRN/ORN J_
C606L
FRONT FRONT
PASSENGER'S PASSENGER'S No. 10 (7.5 A) FUSE
AIRBAG AIRBAG DRIVER'S
FIRST SECOND UNDER-DASH
INFLATOR INFLATOR FUSE/RELAY BOX
GRN/ORN WHT
8 2I
C9311 ....... ....... r.
FRONT FRONT
PASSENGER'S I I DRIVER'S PASSENGER'S
SEAT WIRE GRN/ORN WHT BLK SEAT BELT SEAT BELT
HARNESS I I TENSIONER TENSIONER
FRONT PASSENGER'S
WEIGHT SENSOR UNIT
JJL
4P L
G651 4P 2 4P 2
BLU/YEL* BLU/RED* FRONT FRONT BLU/RED* RED/WHT* RED/YEL*

PASSENGER'S PASSENGER'S RED/BLK*
DASHBOARD YEL* BLU/BLK* WEIGHT WEIGHT GRN/WHT* RED/BLU*
WIRE SENSOR SENSOR FLOOR
HARNESS (INNER SIDE) (OUTER SIDE) WIRE
14 6 5 HARNESS 2 1 4 3
RA1- RA1+ RA2- RA2+ OPDS SS+ SS- LRP- LRP+ RRP- RRP+
SRS UNIT
SRS SRS
MES SCS K-LINE GND2 GND1 LFS- LFS+ RFS- RFS+
A 5]
61 24l 23 | 22] T s T 1 7 ]- 16 | 28 |
DASHBOARD
LT GRN/BLK* C503 BRN* BLU* BLK* BLK* BLU* RED* BRN* GRN* WIRE
HARNESS
Lu MEMORY _J__ L
ERASE JUNCTION 4l 3I 2j 1I ENGINE
SIGNAL (MES) CONNECTOR
2P CONNECTOR BLU* RED* BRN* GRN* COMPARTMENT
WIRE HARNESS
2P r
BRN*BLU*
LEFT RIGHT
FRONT FRONT
I... .. 1 IMPACT IMPACT
DATA LINK SENSOR SENSOR
BRN CONNECTOR
(DLC)
(cont’d)
FRONT
DRIVER'S PASSENGER'S
SIDE AIRBAG SIDE AIRBAG
INFLATOR INFLATOR
ib| Ts^jj
FLOOR
FRONT
PASSENGER'S
WIRE
HARNESS
DRIVER'S FRONT
ON; ON: SEAT ON: i ON: PASSENGER'S
BUCKLED r UN- BELT UN i BUCKLED SEAT BELT
)BUCKLED BUCKLE BUCKLED BUCKLE
SWITCH J SWITCH
jCl -LL
G602 G651
*2; With driver's manual height adjustable seat
that have a * mark
- -: Shielding
REAR
SAFING
SENSOR
FLOOR i BLU/YEL*
WIRE GRY* i BLU/WHT*i
HARNESS k^
1 3 2
1C
GND SSS- SSS+
SRS UNIT
LCA1- LCA1+ LCSI- LCSI+ LDSI- LDSI+ LCA1- LCA1+ RCSI- RCSI+ RDSI- RDSI+
12 j 11 8J 6 161 15 14 | 13 41 5 10 J 9
FLOOR
WIRE BLU* ORN* WHT/BLK* RED* YEL* BRN/YEL*
HARNESS BLU/BLK* GRN/BLK* RED/BLK* RED/YEL* YEL/BLK* LT GRN/RED*
3 10
C801 u C801 r n
FLOOR
WIRE BLU* ORN* WHT/BLK* RED* YEL* BRN/YEL*
LEFTSIDE RIGHT SIDE

CURTAIN CURTAIN
AIRBAG AIRBAG
INFLATOR INFLATOR
*08-10 models
FRONT FRONT ENGINE

PASSENGER'S PASSENGER'S WHT RED COMPARTMENT
WEIGHT WEIGHT • » WIRE HARNESS
SENSOR SENSOR
(INNER SIDE) (OUTER SIDE)
PCM
&

*2: With driver's manual height adjustable seat
*3; With passenger's 4-way power seat
*4: With passenger's manual seat
that have a * mark
DRIVER'S
SEAT
POSITION
SENSOR
2P
1
*1 __ *2__
dr F
v I r 's SEAT
SEAT POSITION
WIRE SENSOR
HARNESS GRN/WHT SUBHARNESS
BLU lO
C901 L
1_
FRONT FRONT
DRIVER'S DRIVER'S PASSENGER'S PASSENGER'S
AIRBAG AIRBAG AIRBAG AIRBAG
FIRST SECOND FIRST SECOND
INFLATOR INFLATOR INFLATOR INFLATOR
4P L
FRONT
CABLE SEATBELT SEAT BELT
REEL TENSIONER TENSIONER
WHT GRN BLK YEL
4P L 4PL I 4PL
DASHBOARD DASHBOARD
WIRE WIRE
HARNESS HARNESS BLU/RED*
GRN/RED* GRN/WHT* BLU/YEL* GRN/WHT* RED/WHT* RED/YEL*
GRN/BLK* GRN/YEL* FLOOR RED/BLU* RED/BLK*
WIRE
HARNESS
8
LA1- LA14 LA2- LA2+ RA1- RA1+ RA2- RA2+ ODS SS+ SS- LRP- LRP+ RRP- RRP+
SRS UNIT
srs SRS
MES SCS K-LINE GND2 GND1 LFS- LFS+ RFS- RFS+
A 51— 6M 23] 22|
15l 27l - « r 28 j DASHBOARD
LT GRN/BLK* C503 BRN*BLU* BLK* BLK* BLU* RED* BRN* GRN WIRE
HARNESS
LUMEMORY C403 L
I I _L
ERASE JUNCTION
SIGNAL (MES) CONNECTOR 4I 3I 21 11 ENGINE
2P CONNECTOR BLU* RED* BRN* GRN* COMPARTMENT
WIRE
2| il , 2| i l HARNESS
BRN*BLU* I i
LEFT RIGHT
FRONT FRONT
r H IMPACT IMPACT
BRN DATA LINK SENSOR SENSOR
CONNECTOR
(DLC)
i -Q_
(cont'd)
FRONT
SIDE AIRBAG SIDE AIRBAG
INFLATOR INFLATOR
LSA- LSA+ RSA+ LBS1- LBS1+ RBS1- RBS1+

SRS UNIT
LBSO LBSC RBSC RBSO
12] 11| 16 I
FLOOR
WIRE LT GRN* BLU/RED* DRIVER'S BLU* ORN*
*2
FRONT
PASSENGER'S
SEAT
WIRE
HARNESS
jn i DLL
DRIVER'S FRONT
ON:
ON:
UN
SEAT
BELT
ON:
UN
i r - i' ON: PASSENGER'S
BUCKLED. BUCKLED BUCKLE BUCKLED .BUCKLED SEAT BELT
BUCKLE
SWITCH SWITCH
“f-
G602 G651
£

*2: With driver's manual height adjustable seat
that have a * mark
- Shielding
REAR
SAFING
SENSOR
FLOOR i BLU/YEL*
WIRE GRY* i BLU/WHT* i
HARNESS k^
1 3 2
GND SSS- SSS+
SRS UNIT
LCA1- LCA1+ LCSI- LCSI+ LDSI- LDSI+ LCA1- LCA1+ RCSI- RCSI+ RDSI- RDSI+
121 11 8| 6 161 15 14 | 13 4 | 5 10 j 9
FLOOR BLU* ORN* RED* YEL* BRN/YEL*

WIRE WHT/BLK*
3 10
C801 n
13 14
FLOOR ORN* WHT/BLK* RED* YEL* BRN/YEL*

WIRE
1 1 1 1
C951 r 1 2P 2Pr C961 r 2Pr
LEFTSIDE LEFTSIDE RIGHT SIDE RIGHT SIDE
IMPACT IMPACT IMPACT IMPACT
LEFTSIDE SENSOR SENSOR RIGHT SIDE SENSOR SENSOR
CURTAIN BLU* (SECOND) (THIRD) CURTAIN BLU* (SECOND) (THIRD)
AIRBAG BLU/BLK* AIRBAG BLU/BLK*
HARNESS HARNESS
2 1 2
2P r, 2P n
(w v)
LEFTSIDE RIGHT SIDE
CURTAIN CURTAIN
AIRBAG AIRBAG
INFLATOR INFLATOR
DTC Troubleshooting
DTC 11-1x ("x" can be 0 thru 9 or A thru F): 4. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
O p e n in the Driver's A i r b a g First Inflator 5. Disconnect the negative cable from the battery, then
wait at least 3 minutes.
DTC 1 1-4x ("x" can be 0 thru 9 or A thru F):
6. Disconnect the driver's airbag 4P connector (A) from
O p e n in the Driver's A i r b a g S e c o n d Inflator
the cable reel 4P connector.
• SRS Inflator Simulator 07SAZ-TB4011A
. SRS Simulator Lead F 07XAZ-SZ30100
«SRS Simulator Lead J 070AZ-SNAA100
NOTE: Before doing this troubleshooting procedure,

review SRS Precautions and Procedures (see page
24-26), General Troubleshooting Information (see page
24-36), and Battery Terminal Disconnection and
1. Clearthe DTC memory (see page 24-38).
SRS indicator comes on for about 6 seconds and then
goes off.
3. Read the DTC. (see page 24-37)
Does the SRS indicator stay on, and is DTC 11-1x or
11-4x indicated? 7. Connect the SRS inflator simulator (2 Q connectors)
and simulator lead F or J to the cable reel.
YES-Go to step 4.
8. Reconnect the negative cable to the battery.
NO-lntermittent failure, system is OK at this time. Go
to Troubleshooting Intermittent Failures (see page 9. Clearthe DTC memory (see page 24-38).
24-39). If another DTC is indicated, troubleshoot the
DTC.B 10. Read the DTC (see page 24-37).
Is DTC 11-1x or 11-4x indicated?
YES-Go to step 11.
NO-Open in the driver's airbag first or second inflator;
replace the driver's airbag (see page 24-215), then
clearthe DTC.B
A
12. Disconnect the negative cable from the battery, then 19. Disconnect the battery negative cable, then wait at
wait at least 3 minutes. least 3 minutes.
13. Disconnect the dashboard wire harness 4P connector 20. Disconnect SRS unit connector A (28P) from the SRS
(A) from the cable reel 4P connector. unit (see step 11 on page 24-36).
21. Disconnect the SRS inflator simulator from the SRS
simulator lead. Do not disconnect the simulator lead
from the dashboard wire harness 4P connector.
22. Measure the resistance between the terminals of both
SRS simulator leads. There should be less than 1.0 O.
DASHBOARD
WIRE HARNESS
4P CONNECTOR
14. Connect the SRS inflator simulator (2 0 connectors)

and the simulator lead F or J to the dashboard wire
harness.
16. Clearthe DTC memory (see page 24-38). Is the resistance as specified?
17. Read the DTC (see page 24-37) YES-Faulty SRS unit or poor connection at SRS unit
connector A (28P) and the SRS unit. Check the
Is DTC 11-1x or 11-4x indicated? connection between the connector and the SRS unit
Ifthe connection is OK, replace the SRS unit (see page
YES-Go to step 18.
24-234). B
NO-Open in the cable reel; replace the cable reel (see
NO-Open in the dashboard wire harness; replace the
page 24-231), then clear the DTC.B
dashboard wire harness, then clearthe DTC.B
Short to Another Wire or Decreased 5. Disconnect the negative cable from the battery, then
Resistance in the Driver's Airbag First Inflator wait at least 3 minutes.
DTC 11-fix can be § thru 9 or A thru F):
Short to Another Wire or Decreased
Resistance in the Driver's Airbag Second
Inflator
• SRS Simulator Lead F 07XAZ-SZ30100
• SRS Simulator Lead J 070AZ-SNAA100
• SRS Short Canceller 070AZ-SAA0100

SRS indicator comes on for about 6 seconds and then 7. Connect the SRS inflator simulator (2 O connectors)
goes off. and simulator lead F or J to the cable reel.
3. Read the DTC (see page 24-37). 8. Reconnect the negative cable to the battery.
Does the SRS indicator stay on, and is DTC 11-3x or 9. Clear the DTC memory (see page 24-38).
11-6xindicated?
10. Read the DTC (see page 24-37).
YES-Go to step 4.
to Troubleshooting Intermittent Failures (see page YES-Go to step 11.
NO-Short to another wire in the driver's airbag first or
DTC.B
second inflator; replace the driver's airbag (see page
24-215), then clear the DTC.B
a
11. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (O). 18. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
12. Disconnect the battery negative cable, then wait at 19. Disconnect the negative cable from the battery, then
least 3 minutes. wait at least 3 minutes.
22. Connect the SRS short cancellers (070AZ-SAA0100)
to SRS unit connector A (28P) terminals No. 7 and
No. 8 and terminals No. 1 and No. 2 (see page 24-32).
SRS simulator leads. There should be an open circuit
or at least 1 MO.
DASHBOARD
WIRE HARNESS
4P CONNECTOR

and the simulator lead For J to the dashboard wire
harness.
Is DTC 11-3x or 1 1-6x indicated?
Is the resistance as specifbd?
YES-Go to step 18.
YES-Faulty SRS unit or poor connection at SRS unit
NO-Short to another wire in the cable reel; replace the
cable reel (see page 24-231), then clear the DTC.B
connection between the connector and the SRS unit.
24-234).B
NO-Short to another wire in the dashboard wire
harness; replace the dashboard wire harness, then
clearthe DTC.B
Short to Power in the Driver's Airbag First 5. Disconnect the negative cable from the battery, then
Inflator wait at least 3 minutes.
DTC 11-Ax ("x" can be 0 thru 9 or A thru F): the cable reel 4P connector.
Short to Power in the Driver's Airbag Second
Inflator
. SRS Simulator Lead J 070AZ-SNAA100

goes off.
3. Read the DTC (see page 24-37). 7. Connect the SRS inflator simulator (2 O connectors)
11-Ax indicated? 8. Reconnect the negative cable to the battery.
YES-Go to step 4. 9. Clearthe DTC memory (see page 24-38).
NO-lntermittent failure, system is OK at this time. Go 10. Read the DTC (see page 24-37).
to Troubleshooting Intermittent Failures (see page
24-39). If another DTC is indicated, troubleshoot the is DTC 11-8x or 11-Ax indicated?
DTC.B YES-Go to step 11.
NO-Short to power in the driver's airbag first or
24-215),then clearthe DTC.B
&
12. Disconnect the negative cable from the battery, then 19. Disconnect the negative cable from the battery, then
wait at least 3 minutes. wait at least 3 minutes.
24. Measure the voltage between each terminal of both
SRS simulator leads and body ground. There should
be less than 0.2 V.
DASHBOARD
WIRE HARNESS
4P CONNECTOR
07SAZ-TB4O11A ('08-10 models)
14. Connect the SRS inflator simulator (2 O connectors)

harness.
Is DTC 11-8x or 11-Ax indicated?
Is the voltage as specified?
YES-Go to step 18.
NO-Short to power in the cable reel; replace the cable connector A (28P) and the SRS unit. Check the
reel (see page 24-231), then clear the DTC.B connection between the connector and the SRS unit.
24-234). B
NO-Short to power in the dashboard wire harness;
replace the dashboard wire harness, then clear the
DTC.B
DTC 11 -Sx ("x"■can be 0 thru 9 or A thru F): 4. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
Short to Ground in the Driver's Airbag First 5. Disconnect the negative cable from the battery, then
DTC 11-Bx t can be 0 thru 9 or A thru F):
Short to Ground in the Driver's Airbag Second
Inflator

goes off.
3. Read the DTC (see page 24-37). 7. Connect the SRS inflator simulator (2 O connectors)
11-Bx indicated? 8. Reconnect the negative cable to the battery.
YES-Go to step 4. 9. Clearthe DTC memory (see page 24-38).
NO-lntermittent failure, system is OK at this time. Go 10. Read the DTC (see page 24-37).
24-39). If another DTC is indicated, troubleshoot the Is DTC 11-9x or 11-Bx indicated?
DTC.B YES-Go to step 11.
NO-Short to ground in the driver's airbag first or
22. Measure the resistance between each terminal of
both SRS simulator leads and body ground. There
should be an open circuit or at least 1 MO.
DASHBOARD
WIRE HARNESS
4P CONNECTOR
07SAZ-TB4011A {'08-10 models)

14. Connect the SRS inflator simulator (2 Q connectors)
harness.
Is the resistance as specified?
Is DTC 11-9x or 11-Bx indicated? connector A (28P) and the SRS unit. Check the
YES-Go to step 18.
NO-Short to ground in the cable reel; replace the 24-234). B
cable reel (see page 24-231), then clearthe DTC.B
NO-Short to ground in the dashboard wire harness;
DTC.B
DTC 12-1 x ("x" can be 0 thru 3 or A thru F): 4. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
Open in the Front Passenger's Airbag First 5. Disconnect the negative cable from the battery, then
6. Remove the lower glove box (see page 20-142), then
DTC 12-4x ("x" can be 0 thru 9 or A thru F):
disconnect the dashboard wire harness 4P connector
Open in the Front Passenger's Airbag Second (A) from the front passenger's airbag 4P connector.
Inflator
. SRS Simulator Lead J 070AZ-SNAA100

goes off.
and simulator lead F or J to the dashboard wire
12-4x indicated?
harness.
YES-Go to step 4.
24-39). If another DTC is indicated, troubleshoot the 10. Read the DTC (see page 24-37).
DTC.B
YES-Go to step 11.
NO-Open in the front passenger's airbag first or
second inflator; replace the front passenger's airbag
(see page 24-216),then clearthe DTC.B
11. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). DTC 12-3x ("x" can be 0 thru 9 or A thru F):
12. Disconnect the negative cable from the battery, then Short to Another Wire or Decreased
wait at least 3 minutes. Resistance in the Front Passenger's Airbag
13. Disconnect SRS unit connector A (28P) from the SRS First Inflator
unit (see step 11 on page 24-36).
DTC 12-6x ("k" can be § thru 9 or A thru F):
14. Disconnect the SRS inflator simulator from the SRS Short to Another Wire or Decreased
Resistance in the Front Passenger's Airbag
Second Inflator
SRS simulator leads. There should be less than 1.0 fi. Special Tools Required
DASHBOARD . SRS Simulator Lead F 07XAZ-SZ30100
WIRE HARNESS . SRS Simulator Lead J 070AZ-SNAA1Q0
4P CONNECTOR • SRS Short Canceller 070AZ-SAA0100

goes off.
Is the resistance as specified? 12-6x indicated?
YES-Faulty SRS unit or poor connection at SRS unit YES-Go to step 4.

connector A (28P). Check the connection; ifthe NO-lntermittent failure, system is OK at this time. Go
connection is OK, replace the SRS unit (see page to Troubleshooting Intermittent Failures (see page
24-234).* 24-39). If another DTC is indicated, troubleshoot the
NO-Open in the dashboard wire harness; replace the DTC.il
dashboard wire harness, then clear the DTC.H
6. Remove the lower glove box (see page 20-142), then 13. Disconnect SRS unit connector A (28P) from the SRS
disconnect the dashboard wire harness 4P connector unit (see step 11 on page 24-36).
(A) from the front passenger's airbag 4P connector.
15. Connect the SRS short cancellers (070AZ-SAA0100)
to SRS unit connector A (28P) terminals No. 9 and
No. 10 and terminals No. 3 and No. 4 (see page 24-32).
SRS simulator leads. There should be an open circuit
or at least 1 MO.
DASHBOARD
WIRE HARNESS
4P CONNECTOR

harness.
YES-Go to step 11. Is the resistance as specified?
NO-Short to another wire in the front passenger's YES-Faulty SRS unit or poor connection at SRS unit
airbag first or second inflator; replace the front connector A (28P) and the SRS unit Check the
passenger's airbag (see page 24-216), then clearthe connection between the connector and the SRS unit.
DTC.B Ifthe connection is OK, replace the SRS unit (see page
24-234).B
NO-Short to another wire in the dashboard wire
harness; replace the dashboard wire harness, then
clearthe DTC.B
A
Short to Power in the Front Passenger's 5. Disconnect the negative cable from the battery, then
Airbag First Inflator wait at least 3 minutes.
6. Remove the lower glove box (see page 20-142), then
DTC 12-Ax ("x" can be 0 thru 9 or A thru F): disconnect the dashboard wire harness 4P connector
Short to Power in the Front Passenger's (A) from the front passenger's airbag 4P connector.
Airbag Second Inflator

goes off.
7. Connect the SRS inflator simulator (2 D connectors)
Does the SRS indicator stay on, and is DTC 12-Qx or
12-Ax indicated?
harness.
YES-Go to step 4.
DTC.B
is DTC 12-8x or 12-Ax indicated?
YES-Go to step 11.
NO-Short to power in the front passenger's airbag
first or second inflator; replace the front passenger's
airbag (see page 24-216), then clearthe DTC.B
11. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). DTC 12-9x ("x" can be § thru 9 or A thru F):
12. Disconnect the negative cable from the battery, then Short to Ground In the Front Passenger's
wait at least 3 minutes. Airbag First Inflator
13. Disconnect SRS unit connector A (28P) from the SRS
DTC 12-Bx ("x" can be § thru 9 or A thru F):
Short to Ground in the Front Passenger's
14. Disconnect the SRS inflator simulator from the SRS Airbag Second Inflator
from the dashboard wire harness 4P connector. Special Tools Required
16. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). . SRS Simulator Lead J 070AZ-SNAA100
17. Measure the voltage between each terminal of both NOTE: Before doing this troubleshooting procedure,
SRS simulator leads and body ground. There should review SRS Precautions and Procedures (see page
be less than 0.2 V. 24-26), General Troubleshooting Information (see page
DASHBOARD Reconnection (see page 22-112).
WIRE HARNESS
4P CONNECTOR
goes off.
12-Bx indicated?
YES-Go to step 4.
DTC.B
Is the voltage as specified?

24-234). B
NO-Short to power in the dashboard wire harness;
DTC.B
£
6. Remove the lower glove box (see page 20-142), then 13. Disconnect SRS unit connector A (28P) from the SRS
disconnect the dashboard wire harness (A) from the unit (see step 11 on page 24-36).
front passenger's airbag 4P connector.
15. Measure the resistance between each terminal of
both SRS simulator leads and body ground. There
DASHBOARD
W IRE HARNESS
4P CONNECTOR

harness.
Is DTC 12-9x or 12-Bx indicated? connector A (28P) and the SRS unit. Check the
YES-Go to step 11. connection between the connector and the SRS unit.
NO-Short to ground in the front passenger's airbag 24-234). B
first or second inflator; replace the front passenger's
airbag (see page 24-216),then clearthe DTC.B NO-Short to ground in the dashboard wire harness;
DTC.B
DTC 21-1x ("x" can be § thru 9 or A thru F): 6. Remove the left side B-pillar lower trim (see page
20-103), then disconnect the floor wire harness 4P
Open in the Driver's Seat Belt Tensioner
connector (A) from the driver's seat belt tensioner 4P
Special Tools Required connector.
• SRS Simulator Lead K 070AZ-SNAA200

goes off.
Does the SRS indicator stay on, and is DTC 21-1x
indicated?
YES-Go to step 4. and simulator lead K to the floor wire harness.
NO-lntermittent failure, system is OK at this time. Go 8. Reconnect the negative cable to the battery.
24-39). If another DTC is indicated, troubleshoot the 9. Clearthe DTC memory (see page 24-38).
4. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). is DTC 21-1x indicated?
5. Disconnect the negative cable from the battery, then YES-Go to step 11.
NO-Open in the driver's seat belt tensioner; replace
the driver's seat belt (see page 24-4), then clear the
DTC.B
A
11. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). DTC 21 “3x \"x " can be 0 thru 9 or A thru F):
wait at least 3 minutes. Resistance in the Driver's Seat Belt Tensioner
13. Disconnect the front passenger's seat belt tensioner Special Tools Required
4P connector (see step 7 on page 24-35). • SRS Inflator Simulator 07SAZ-TB4011A
14. Disconnect SRS unit connector B (28P) from the SRS - SRS Simulator Lead K 070AZ-SNAA200
15. Measure the resistance between SRS unit connector review SRS Precautions and Procedures (see page
B (28P) terminals No. 1 and No. 2. There should be 24-26), General Troubleshooting Information (see page
2.0—3.0 O. 24-36), and Battery Terminal Disconnection and
SRS UNIT CONNECTOR i (28P) 1. Clearthe DTC memory (see page 24-38).
O goes off.
1 2 3 4 5 SNA 6 / / / / 3. Read the DTC (see page 24-37).
11 12 / / 15 16
Does the SRS indicator stay on, and is DTC 21-3x
17 18 19 22M Z /Z 23 26 27 28 indicated?
YES-Go to step 4.
Wire side of female terminals NO-lntermittent failure, system is OK at this time. Go

Is the resistance as specified? DTC.B
YES-Faulty SRS unit or poor connection at SRS unit 4. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
connector B (28P) and the SRS unit Check the 5. Disconnect the negative cable from the battery, then
connection; if the connection is OK, replace the SRS wait at least 3 minutes.
NO-Open in the floor wire harness; replace the floor
wire harness, then clear the DTC.B
6. Remove the left side B-pillar lower trim (see page 11. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
12. Disconnect the negative cable from the battery, then
connector. wait at least 3 minutes.
13. Disconnect the front passenger's seat belt tensioner
4P connector (see step 7 on page 24-35).
14. Disconnect SRS unit connector B (28P) from the SRS
15. Disconnect the simulator lead from the floor wire
harness.
16. Measure the resistance between SRS unit connector
B (28P) terminals No. 1 and No. 2. There should be an
open circuit or at least 1 MO.

and simulator lead K to the floor wire harness.
Is DTC 21-3x indicated?
YES-Go to step 11.
NO-Short to another wire in the driver's seat belt
tensioner; replace the driver's seat belt (see page YES-Faulty SRS unit or poor connection at SRS unit
24-4),then clearthe DTC.B connector B (28P) and the SRS unit. Check the
connection; if the connection is OK, replace the SRS
unit (see page 24-234).B
NO-Short to another wire in the floor wire harness;
replace the floor wire harness, then clear the DTC.B
&
DTC 21-8x ("x" can be 0 thru 9 or A thru F): 6. Remove the left side B-pillar lower trim (see page
Short to Power in the Driver's Seat Belt
Tensioner connector.
. SRS Simulator Lead K 070AZ-SNAA200

Reconnection (see page 22- 112).
2. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II), and cheek that the
goes off.
D o e s t h e S R S in d ic a t o r s t a y o n , a n d is D T C 2 1 - 8 x
7. Connect the SRS inflator simulator (2 C l connectors)
in d ic a te d ?
YES-Go to step 4.
DTC.B
Is D T C 2 1 - 8 x in d ic a t e d ?
YES-Go to step 11.
wait at least 3 minutes. NO-Short to power in the driver's seat belt tensioner;
replace the driver's seat belt (see page 24-4), then
clearthe DTC.B
(cont'd)
11. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). DTC 21- 9x ("x" can be 0 thru 9 or A thru F):
12. Disconnect the negative cable from the battery, then Short to Ground in the Driver's Seat Belt
wait at least 3 minutes. Tensioner
13. Disconnect the front passenger's seat belt tensioner Special Tools Required
4P connector (see step 7 on page 24-35). • SRS Inflator Simulator 07SAZ-TB4011A
14. Disconnect SRS unit connector B (28P) from the SRS . SRS Simulator Lead K 070AZ-SNAA200
15. Disconnect the simulator lead from the floor wire review SRS Precautions and Procedures (see page
harness. 24-26), General Troubleshooting Information (see page
16. Reconnect the negative cable to the battery. Reconnection (see page 22-112).
17. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 1. Clear the DTC memory (see page 24-38).
18. Measure the voltage between body ground and SRS 2. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II), and check that the
unit connector B (28P) terminals No. 1 and No. 2, SRS indicator comes on for about 6 seconds and then
individually. There should be less than 0.2 V. goes off.

D o e s t h e S R S in d ic a to r s t a y o n , a n d is D T C 2 1 - 9 x
in d ic a te d ?
YES-Go to step 4.
1 2 3 4 5 SNA 6/ / / / NO-lntermittent failure, system is OK at this time. Go
11 12 / SHI / 15 16 to Troubleshooting Intermittent Failures (see page
17 18 19 20 / / / / 25 26 27 28
DTC.B
<^><j 4. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
Wire side of female terminals wait at least 3 minutes.
Is th e v o lt a g e a s s p e c if ie d ?
connector B (28P) and the SRS unit. Check the
NO-Short to power in the floor wire harness; replace
the floor wire harness, then clear the DTC.B
6. Remove the left side B-pillar lower trim (see page 11. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
connector.
13. Disconnect the front passenger's seat belt tensioner
4P connector (see step 7 on page 24-35).
harness.
16. Measure the resistance between body ground and
SRS unit connector B (28P) terminals No. 1 and No. 2,
individually. There should be an open circuit or at
least 1 MO.

YES-Go to step 11.
NO-Short to ground in the driver's seat belt tensioner; Is th e r e s is ta n c e a s s p e c if ie d ?
replace the driver's seat belt (see page 24-4), then
clearthe DTC.B YES-Faulty SRS unit or poor connection at SRS unit
NO-Short to ground in the floor wire harness; replace
the fl oor wire harness, then clear the DTC.B
DTC 22-1x ("x" can be 0 thru 9 or A thru F): 6. Remove the right side B-pillar lower trim (see page
Open in the Front Passenger's Seat Belt
connector (A) from the front passenger's seat belt
Tensioner tensioner 4P connector.
Spec i al Tools Required
. SRS Sim ulator Lead K 070AZ-SNAA200

goes off.
Does the SRS indicator stay on, and is DTC 22-1 x
indicated? 07SAZ-TB4011A
YES-Go to step 4. 7. Connect the SRS inflator simulator (2 0 connectors)
to Troubleshooting Intermittent Failures (see page 8. Reconnect the negative cable to the battery.
DTC.B
Is DTC 22-1 x indicated?
wait at least 3 minutes. YES-Go to step 11.
NO-Open in the front passenger's seat belt tensioner;
replace the front passenger's seat belt (see page
&
11. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). DTC 22-3x ("x " can be 0 thru 9 or A thru F):
12. Disconnect the negative cable from the battery, then Short to Another W ire or Decreased
wait at least 3 minutes. Resistance in the Front Passenger's Seat Belt
13. Disconnect the driver's seat belt tensioner 4P Tensioner
connector (see step 7 on page 24-35). Special Tools Required
14. Disconnect SRS unit connector B (28P) from the SRS • SRS Inflator Simulator 07SAZ-TB4011A
unit (see step 11 on page 24-36). • SRS Simulator Lead K 070AZ-SNAA200
15. Measure the resistance between SRS unit connector NOTE: Before doing this troubleshooting procedure,
B (28P) terminals No. 3 and No. 4. There should be review SRS Precautions and Procedures (see page
2.0—3.0 D. 24-26), General Troubleshooting Information (see page
SRS UNIT CONNECTOR B (28P) Reconnection (see page 22- 112).
O SRS indicator comes on for about 6 seconds and then
1 2 3 4 5 SNA 6 / / / / goes off.
11 12 / / 15 16 3. Read the DTC (see page 24-37).
17 18 19 2 0 Z Z Z Z 2526 27 28
D o e s th e S R S in d ic a to r s ta y o n , a n d is D T C 2 2 - 3 x
in d ic a te d ?
YES-Go to step 4.
Is t h e r e s is ta n c e a s s p e c if ie d ? 24-39). If another DTC is indicated, troubleshoot the
DTC.B
connector B (28P) and the SRS unit. Check the 4. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
6. Remove the right side B-pillar lower trim (see page 11. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
tensioner 4P connector.
13. Disconnect the driver's seat belt tensioner 4P
harness.
o
1 2 3 4 5 SNA 6 / / / /
O7SAZ-TB4011A
11 1 2 / / 15 16
and simulator lead K to the floor wire harness. 17 18 19 2 0 / / / / 25 26 27 28

9. Clearthe DTC memory (see page 24-38). Wire side of female terminals
Is D T C 2 2 - 3 x in d ic a te d ? Is th e r e s is ta n c e a s s p e c if ie d ?
YES-Go to step 11. YES-Faulty SRS unit or poor connection at SRS unit
NO-Short to another wire in the front passenger's connector B (28P) and the SRS unit. Check the
seat belt tensioner; replace the front passenger's seat connection; ifthe connection is OK, replace the SRS
belt (see page 24-4), then clear the DTC.B unit (see page 24-234).B
&
DTC 22-8x ("x" can be 0 thru 9 or A thru F): 6. Remove the right side B-pillar lower trim (see page
Short to Power in the Front Passenger's Seat
Belt Tensioner tensioner 4P connector.
. SRS Simulator Lead K 070AZ-SNAA200

goes off.
in d ic a te d ? ©7SAZ-TS4011A
YES-Go to step 4. 7. Connect the SRS inflator simulator (2 D connectors)
to Troubleshooting Intermittent Failures (see page 8. Reconnect the negative cable to the battery.
DTC.B
is D T C 2 2 - 8 x in d ic a te d ?
wait at least 3 minutes. YES-Go to step 11.
NO-Short to power in the front passenger's seat belt
tensioner; replace the front passenger's seat belt (see
12. Disconnect the negative cable from the battery, then Short to Ground in the Front Passenger's Seat
wait at least 3 minutes. Belt Tensioner
13. Disconnect the driver's seat belt tensioner 4P Special Tools Required
connector (see step 7 on page 24-35). * SRS Inflator Simulator 07SAZ-TB4011A
14. Disconnect SRS unit connector B (28P) from the SRS . SRS Simul ator Lead K 070AZ-SNAA200
15. Disconnect the simulator lead from the floor wire review SRS Precautions and Procedures (see page
harness. 24-26), General Troubleshooting Information (see page
16. Reconnect the negative cable to the battery. Reconnection (see page 22-112).
17. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 1. Clearthe DTC memory (see page 24-38).
18. Measure the voltage between body ground and SRS 2. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II), and check that the
unit connector B (28P) terminals No. 3 and No. 4, SRS indicator comes on for about 6 seconds and then
individually. There should be less than 0.2 V. goes off.
SRS UNIT CONNECTOR B ( 2 8 P )

D o e s th e S R S in d ic a t o r s t a y o n , a n d is D T C 2 2 - 9 x
in d ic a te d ?
YES-Go to step 4.
DTC.B
Is t h e v o lt a g e a s s p e c if ie d ?
unit (see page 2 4-234).■
A
6. Remove the right side B-pillar lower trim (see page 11 .Turn the ignition switch to LOCK(0).
tensioner 4P connector.
13. Disconnect the driver's seat belt tensioner 4P
harness.
16. Measure the resistance between body ground and
least 1 MO.
SRS UNIT CONNECTOR i (28P)
07SAZ-TB4011A
Is D T C 2 2 - 9 x in d ic a te d ?
YES-Go to step 11. Is th e r e s is ta n c e a s s p e c if ie d ?
NO-Short to ground in the front passenger's seat belt YES-Faulty SRS unit or poor connection at SRS unit
tensioner; replace the front passenger's seat belt (see connector B (28P) and the SRS unit. Check the
page 24-4), then clearthe DTC.B connection; if the connection is OK, replace the SRS
DTC 31-1x ("x" can be 0 thru 9 or A thru F): 6. Disconnect the floor wire harness 2P connector (A)
from the driver's side airbag 2P connector (B).
Open in the Driver's Side Airbag Inflator
• SRS Inflator Sim ulator 07SAZ-TB4011A
. SRS Simulator Lead E 07XAZ-S1A0200

goes off.
in d ic a te d ?
7. Connect the SRS inflator simulator (2 0 connector)
YES-Go to step 4. and simulator lead E to the floor wire harness.
24-39). If another DTC is indicated, troubleshoot the 9. Clearthe DTC memory (see page 24-38).
4 . Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). Is D T C 3 1 -1 x in d ic a te d ?
NO-Open in the driver's side airbag inflator; replace
the driver's side airbag (see page 24-219), then clear
the DTC.B
A
wait at least 3 minutes. Resistance in the Driver's Side Airbag Inflator
13. Disconnect both seat belt tensioner 4P connectors Special Tools Required
(see step 7 on page 24-35). • SRS Inflator Simulator 07SAZ-TB4011A
14. Disconnect SRS unit connector B (28P) from the SRS *SRS Simulator Lead E 07XAZ-S1A0200
unit (see step 11 on page 24-36). • SRS Short Canceller 070AZ-SAA0100
15. Disconnect the SRS inflator simulator from the SRS NOTE: Before doing this troubleshooting procedure,
simulator lead. Do not disconnect the simulator lead review SRS Precautions and Procedures (see page
from the floor wire harness 2P connector. 24-26), General Troubleshooting Information (see page
16. Measure the resistance between the terminals of SRS Reconnection (see page 22-112).
simulator lead. There should be less than 1.0 D.
FLOOR 2. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II), and check that the
WIRE HARNESS SRS indicator comes on for about 6 seconds and then
goes off.
in d ic a te d ?
YES-Go to step 4.
DTC.B
Is t h e r e s is t a n c e a s s p e c i f ie d ?
connection; ifthe connection is OK, replace the SRS
unit (see page 24~234).B
wire harness,then clearthe D TC .il
6. Disconnect the floor wire harness 2P connector (A) 11. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
13. Disconnect both seat belt tensioner 4P connectors
(see page 24-35).
from the floor wire harness 2P connector.
16. Connect a SRS short cancellers (070AZ-SAA0100) to
SRS unit connector B (28P) terminals No. 17 and
No. 18 (see page 24-32).
17. Measure the resistance between the terminals of the
SRS simulator lead. There should be an open circuit
or at least 1 MO.
FLOOR
7. Connect the SRS inflator simulator (2 Q connector) WIRE HARNESS
2P CONNECTOR
and simulator lead E to the floor wire harness.
Is D T C 3 1 -3 x in d ic a te d ?
YES-Go to step 11.
NO-Short to another wire in the driver's side airbag
inflator; replace the driver's side airbag (see page
Is t h e r e s is t a n c e a s s p e c if ie d ?
Short to Power in the Driver's Side Airbag
Inflator
Speci al Tools Requi red
- SRS Simul ator Lead E 07XAZ-S1A0200

goes off.
7. Connect the SRS inflator simulator (2 O connector)
in d ic a te d ?
YES-Go to step 4.
DTC.B
YES-Go to step 11.
wait at least 3 minutes. NO-Short to power in the driver's side airbag inflator;
replace the driver's side airbag (see page 24-219),
then clear the DTC.B
12. Disconnect the negative cable from the battery, then Short to Ground in the Driver's Side Airbag
wait at least 3 minutes. Inflator
(see page 24-35). • SRS Inflator Simulator 07SAZ-TB4011A
14. Disconnect SRS unit connector B (28P) from the SRS . SRS Simul ator Lead E 07XAZ-S1A0200
15. Disconnect the SRS inflator simulator from the SRS review SRS Precautions and Procedures (see page
simulator lead. Do not disconnect the simulator lead 24-26), General Troubleshooting Information (see page
from the floor wire harness 2P connector. 24-36), and Battery Terminal Disconnection and
18. Measure the voltage between each terminal of the SRS indicator comes on for about 6 seconds and then
SRS simulator lead and body ground. There should goes off.
be less than 0.2 V.
FLOOR
WIRE HARNESS D o e s th e S R S in d ic a t o r s t a y o n , a n d is D T C 3 1 - 9 x
in d ic a te d ?
YES-Go to step 4.
DTC.B
Is th e v o lta g e a s s p e c if ie d ?
unit (see page 2 4-23 4).■
A
(see page 24-35).
16. Measure the resistance between each terminal of the
SRS simulator lead and body ground. There should
be an open circuit or at least 1 MO.
FLOOR
WIRE HARNESS
7. Connect the SRS inflator simulator <2 Q connector)

YES-Go to step 11.
NO-Short to ground in the driver's side airbag
inflator; replace the driver's side airbag (see page
Is t h e r e s is ta n c e a s s p e c if ie d ?
from the front passenger's side airbag 2P connector
Open in the Front Passenger's Side Airbag
(B).
Inflator

goes off.
D o e s t h e S R S in d ic a t o r s t a y o n , a n d is D T C 3 2 -1 x
in d ic a te d ?
4. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). Is D T C 3 2 - 1 x in d ic a t e d ?
NO-Open in the front passenger's side airbag inflator;
replace the front passenger's side airbag (see page
&
11. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). DTC 32-3x f 3K,r can be 0 th ru 9 or A th ru F):
wait at least 3 minutes. Resistance in the Front Passenger's Side
13. Disconnect both seat belt tensioner 4P connectors Airbag Inflator
(see step 7 on page 24-35). Special Tools R equ i red
14. Disconnect SRS unit connector B (28P) from the SRS • SRS Inflator Simulator 07SAZ-TB4011A
unit (see step 11 on page 24-36). • SRS Simulator Lead E 07XAZ-S1A0200
simulator lead. Do not disconnect the simulator lead NOTE: Before doing this troubleshooting procedure,
from the floor wire harness 2P connector. review SRS Precautions and Procedures (see page
SRS simulator lead. There should be less than 1.0 C l.
FLOOR
WIRE HARNESS 1. Clear the DTC memory (see page 24-38).
2P CONNECTOR
goes off.
D o e s t h e S R S in d ic a to r s ta y o n , a n d is D T C 3 2 - 3 x
in d ic a te d ?
YES-Go to step 4.
DTC.B

Is th e r e s is ta n c e a s s p e c if ie d ?
NO-Open in the fl oor wire harness; replace the floor
(B). 12. Disconnect the negative cable from the battery, then
(see step 7 on page 24-35).
No. 20 (see page 24-32).
SRS simulator lead. There should be an open circuit
or at least 1 M C I .
FLOOR
W IRE HARNESS
2P CONNECTOR
7. Connect the SRS inflator simulator (2 C l connector)
YES-Go to step 11.
NO-Short to another wire in the front passenger's
side airbag inflator; replace the front passenger's side
airbag (see page 24-219), then clearthe DTC.B
Is th e r e s is ta n c e a s s p e c ifie d ?
&
DTC 32-8x \ 'W can be 0 thru 9 or A thru F): 6. Disconnect the floor wire harness 2P connector (A)
Short to Power in the Front Passenger's Side
(B).
Airbag Inflator
* SRS Simulator Lead E 07XAZ-S1A0200

goes off.
in d ic a te d ?
7. Connect the SRS inflator simulator (2 0 connector)
4. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). Is D T C 3 2 ~ 8 x in d ic a te d ?
NO-Short to power in the front passenger's side
airbag inflator; replace the front passenger's side
airbag (see page 24-219),then clearthe DTC.B
11 .Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). DTC 32-Sx ("x" can be 0 th ru 9 or A thru F):
12. Disconnect the negative cable from the battery, then Short to Ground in the Front Passenger's Side
wait at least 3 minutes. Airbag Inflator
(see step 7 on page 24-35). • SRS Inflator Simulator 07SAZ-TB4011A
14. Disconnect SRS unit connector B (28P) from the SRS . SRS Simul ator Lead E 07XAZ-S1A0200
15. Disconnect the SRS inflator simulator from the SRS review SRS Precautions and Procedures (see page
simulator lead. Do not disconnect the simulator lead 24-26), General Troubleshooting Information (see page
from the floor wire harness 2P connector. 24-36), and Battery Terminal Disconnection and
18. Measure the voltage between each terminal of the SRS indicator comes on for about 6 seconds and then
SRS simulator lead and body ground. There should goes off.
be less than 0.2 V.
FLOOR
WIRE HARNESS D o e s t h e S R S in d ic a t o r s t a y o n , a n d is D T C 3 2 - 9 x
in d ic a te d ?
YES-Go to step 4.
DTC.B
unit (see page 2 4-234).■
the floor wire harness, then clear the D TC.ll
(B).
16. Measure the resistance between each terminal of the
SRS simulator lead and body ground. There should
be an open circuit or at least 1 MO.
FLOOR
WIRE HARNESS

YES-Go to step 11.
NO-Short to ground in the front passenger's side
airbag inflator; replace the front passenger's side
airbag (see page 24-219),then clearthe DTC.B
is t h e r e s is ta n c e a s s p e c if b d ?
DTC 33-1x ("x" can be 0 thru 9 or A thru F): 6. Remove the headliner (see page 20-116), then
disconnect the left side curtain airbag harness 2P
Open in the Left Side Curtain Airbag Inflator
connector (A) from the right side curtain airbag 2P
Special Tools Required connector (B).
• SRS Inflator Simulator 07SAZ-TB4011A *07 model
. SRS Sim ulator Lead E 07XAZ-S1A0200
. SRS Sim ulator Lead L 070AZ-SNAA300

goes off.
D o e s t h e S R S in d ic a t o r s ta y o n , a n d is D T C 3 3 - 1 x *08-10 models
in d ic a te d ?
YES-Go to step 4.
DTC.B
5. Disconnect the negative cable from the battery, and
7. Connect the SRS inflator simulator (2 Q connector)

and simulator lead E ('07 model) or L ('08-10 models)
to the left side curtain airbag harness.
YES-Go to step 11.
NO-Open in the left side curtain airbag; replace the
left side curtain airbag (see page 24-221), then clear
the DTC.B
&
11. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). DTC 33-Sx ("x" can be 0 th ru 9 or A th ru F):
wait at least 3 minutes. Resistance in the Left Side Curtain Airbag
13. Disconnect SRS unit connector C (16P) from the SRS Inflator
14. Disconnect the SRS inflator simulator from the SRS • SRS Inflator Simulator 07SAZ-TB4011A
simulator lead. Do not disconnect the simulator lead . SRS Simulator Lead E 07XAZ-S1A0200
from the left side curtain airbag harness 2P connector. . SRS Simulator Lead L 070AZ-SNAA300
15. Measure the resistance between the terminal of the
red SRS simulator lead E (A) or the terminal of the NOTE: Before doing this troubleshooting procedure,
black SRS simulator lead L (B). There should be less review SRS Precautions and Procedures (see page
than 1.0 O. 24-26), General Troubleshooting Information (see page
goes off.
in d ic a te d ?
YES-Go to step 4.
DTC.B
Is th e r e s is ta n c e a s s p e c if ie d ? 5. Disconnect the negative cable from the battery, then
YES-Faulty SRS unit or poor connection at SRS unit wait at least 3 minutes.
connector C (16P) and the SRS unit. Check the
NO-Open in the left side curtain airbag harness;
replace the left side curtain airbag harness, then clear
the DTC.B
6. Remove the headliner (see page 20-116), then 11. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
connector (B). wait at least 3 minutes.
13. Disconnect SRS unit connector C (16P) from the SRS
*07 model
from the left side curtain airbag harness 2P connector.
SRS unit connector C (16P) terminals No. 11 and
No. 12 (see page 24-32).
red SRS simulator lead E (A) or the terminal of the
black SRS simulator lead L (B). There should be an
open circuit or at least 1 MQ.
*08-10 models
7. Connect the SRS infl ator simulator (2 Q connector)

to the left side curtain airbag harness. Is t h e r e s is ta n c e a s s p e c if ie d ?
8. Reconnect the negative cable to the battery. YES-Faulty SRS unit or poor connection at SRS unit
9. Clearthe DTC memory (see page 24-38). connection; ifthe connection is OK, replace the SRS
10. Read the DTC (see page 24-37). unit (see page 24-234).B
Is D T C 3 3 - 3 x in d ic a te d ? NO-Short to another wire in the left side curtain

airbag harness; replace the left side curtain airbag
YES-Go to step 11. harness, then clear the DTC.B
NO-Short to another wire in the left side curtain
airbag inflator; replace the left side curtain airbag (see
£
Short to Power in the Left Side Curtain Airbag
Inflator connector (B).
Speci al Tools Required '07 model
• SRS Simulator Lead E 07XAZ-S1A0200
- SRS Simulator Lead L 070AZ-SNAA300

goes off.
3. Read the DTC (see page 24-37). *08-10 models
in d ic a te d ?
YES-Go to step 4.
DTC.B

to the left side curtain airbag harness.
YES-Go to step 11.
NO-Short to power in the left side curtain airbag
inflator; replace the left side curtain airbag (see page
(cont'd)
11 .Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). DTC 33-9x ("x" can be 0 thru 9 or A thru F):
12. Disconnect the negative cable from the battery, then Short to Ground in the Left Side Curtain
13. Disconnect the SRS unit connector C (16P) from the Speci al Tools Required
SRS unit (see step 11 on page 24-36). • SRS Inflator Simulator 07SAZ-TB4011A
14. Disconnect the SRS inflator simulator from the SRS . SRS Simulator Lead E 07XAZ-S1A0200
simulator lead. Do not disconnect the simulator lead . SRS Simulator Lead L 070AZ-SNAA300
15. Reconnect the negative cable to the battery. review SRS Precautions and Procedures (see page
17. Measure the voltage between the terminal of the red Reconnection (see page 22-112).
SRS simulator lead E (A) and body ground, or the 1. Clear the DTC memory (see page 24-38).
terminal of the black SRS simulator lead L (B) and
body ground. There should be less than 0.2 V. 2. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II), and check that the
goes off.
in d ic a te d ?
YES-Go to step 4.
DTC.B
Is t h e v o lt a g e a s s p e c if b d ?
NO-Short to power in the left side curtain airbag
harness; replace the left side curtain airbag harness,
then clearthe DTC.B
&
connector (B).
*07 model
red SRS simulator lead E (A) and body ground, or the
body ground. There should be an open circuit or at
least 1 MO.
*08-10 models
Is th e re s is ta n c e a s s p e c if b d ?
and simulator lead E ('07 model) or L ('08-10 models) YES-Faulty SRS unit or poor connection at SRS unit
to the left side curtain airbag harness. connector C (16P) and the SRS unit. Check the
8. Reconnect the negative cable to the battery. unit (see page 24-234).B
9. Clear the DTC memory (see page 24-38). NO-Short to ground in the left side curtain airbag
10. Read the DTC (see page 24-37). harness; replace the left side curtain airbag harness,
then clearthe DTC.B
YES-Go to step 11.
NO-Short to ground in the left side curtain airbag
inflator; replace the left side curtain airbag (see page
disconnect the right side curtain airbag harness 2 P
Open in the Right Side Curtain Airbag Inflator
connector (A) from the right side curtain airbag 2 P
Special Tools Required connector (B).
• SRS Inf l ator Simulator 07SAZ-TB4011A
*07 model
• SRS Sim u l ator Lead E 07XAZ-S1A0200
• SRS Sim ulator Lead L 070AZ-SNAA300

goes off.
D o e s th e S R S in d ic a to r s ta y o n , a n d is D T C 3 4 -1 x *08-10 models
in d ic a te d ?
YES-Go to step 4.
24-39). If another DTC i s indicated, troubleshoot the
DTC.B

to the right side curtain airbag harness.
YES-Go to step 11.
NO-Open in the right side curtain airbag inflator,
replace the right side curtain airbag (see page 24-221),
then clearthe DTC.B
A
wait at least 3 minutes. Resistance in the Right Side Curtain Airbag
13. Disconnect SRS unit connector C (16P) from the SRS Inflator
unit (see step 11 on page 24-36). Special Tools Required
14. Disconnect the SRS inflator simulator from the SRS • SRS Inflator Simulator 07SAZ-TB4011A
simulator lead. Do not disconnect the simulator lead • SRS Simulator Lead E 07XAZ-S1A0200
from the right side curtain airbag harness 2P . SRS Simulator Lead L 070AZ-SNAA300
connector. • SRS Short Canceller 070AZ-SAA0100
15. Measure the resistance between the terminal of the NOTE: Before doing this troubleshooting procedure,
red SRS simulator lead E (A) or the terminal of the review SRS Precautions and Procedures (see page
black SRS simulator lead L (B). There should be less 24-26), General Troubleshooting Information (see page
than 1.0 0 . 24-36), and Battery Terminal Disconnection and
goes off.
in d ic a te d ?
YES-Go to step 4.
D T C .B
Is th e r e s is ta n c e a s s p e c if ie d ? wait at least 3 minutes.
connection; if the connection is OK; replace the SRS
NO-Open in the right side curtain airbag harness;
replace the right side curtain airbag harness, then
clearthe DTC.B
(cont'd)
disconnect the right side curtain airbag harness 2P
connector (B). wait at least 3 minutes.
*07 model 13. Disconnect SRS unit connector C (16P) from the SRS
from the right side curtain airbag harness 2P
connector.
No. 14 (see page 24-32).
red SRS simulator lead E (A) or the terminal of the
black SRS simulator lead L (B). There should be an
open circuit or at least 1 M C I .
*08-10 models
7. Connect the SRS inflator simulator (2 C l connector)

9. Clearthe DTC memory (see page 24-38). connector C (16P) and the SRS unit. Check the
10. Read the DTC (see page 24-37). connection; if the connection is OK, replace the SRS
NO-Short to another wire in the right side curtain
YES-Go to step 11. airbag harness; replace the right side curtain airbag
NO-Short to another wire in the right side curtain harness, then clear the DTC.B
airbag inflator; replace the right side curtain airbag
(see page 24-221), then clearthe DTC.B
&
Short to Power in the Right Side Curtain
Airbag Inflator connector (B).
Special Tool s Required *07 model
• SRS Inflator Simulator 07SAZ-TB4Q11A
• SRS Simulator Lead L 070AZ-SNAA300

goes off.
3. Read the DTC (see page 24-37). '08-10 models
in d ic a te d ?
YES-Go to step 4.
DTC.B
7. Connect the SRS infl ator simulator (2 O connector)

YES-Go to step 11.
NO-Short to power in the right side curtain airbag
inflator; replace the right side curtain airbag (see page
12. Disconnect the negative cable from the battery, then Short to Ground in the Right Side Curtain
13. Disconnect SRS unit connector C (16P) from the SRS Special Tools Required
unit (see step 11 on page 24-36). • SRS Inflator Simulator 07SAZ-TB4011A
14. Disconnect the SRS inflator simulator from the SRS . SRS Simulator Lead E 07XAZ-S1A0200
simulator lead. Do not disconnect the simulator lead . SRS Simulator Lead L 070AZ-SNAA300
connector.
15. Reconnect the negative cable to the battery. 24-26), General Troubleshooting Information (see page
17. Measure the voltage between the terminal of the red 1. Clear the DTC memory (see page 24-38).
SRS simulator lead E (A) and body ground, or the
terminal of the black SRS simulator lead L (B) and 2. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II), and check that the
body ground. There should be less than 0.2 V. SRS indicator comes on for about 6 seconds and then
goes off.
in d ic a te d ?
YES-Go to step 4.
DTC.B
Is th e v o lta g e a s s p e c if b d ?
connector C (16P) and the SRS unit Check the
NO-Short to power in the right side curtain airbag
harness; replace the right side curtain airbag harness,
then clearthe DTC.B
wait at least 3 mi nutes.
connector (B).
"07 model
connector.
red SRS simulator lead E (A) and body ground, or the
least 1 MO.
'08-10 models
7. Connect the SRS infl ator simulator (2 O connector) Is t h e r e s is t a n c e a s s p e c if ie d ?

to the right side curtain airbag harness. YES-Faulty SRS unit or poor connection at SRS unit
8. Reconnect the negative cable to the battery. connection; if the connection is OK, replace the SRS
9. Clear the DTC memory (see page 24-38). unit (see page 24-234).!
10. Read the DTC (see page 24-37). NO-Short to ground in the right side curtain airbag
harness; replace the right side curtain airbag harness,
Is D T C 3 4 - 9 x in d ic a t e d ? then clearthe DTC.B
YES-Go to step 11.
NO-Short to ground in the right side curtain airbag
inflator; replace the right side curtain airbag (see page
24-221), then clear the DTC.H
DTC 41 -1x ("x " can be 0 thru 9 or A thru F): No 7. Remove the front bumper (see page 20-245), then
disconnect the engine compartment wire harness 2P
Signal From the Left Front Impact Sensor
connector (A) from the left front impact sensor.
. SRS Simulator Lead L 070AZ-SNAA300

goes off.
3. Read the DTC (see page 24-37). 8. Disconnect SRS unit connector A (28P) from the SRS
in d ic a te d ? 9. Measure the resistance between SRS unit connector
A (28P) terminals No. 15 and No. 27. There should be
YES-Go to step 4. an open circuit or at least 1 MO.
to Troubleshooting Intermittent Failures (see page SRS UNIT CONNECTOR A (28P)
DTC.B
4. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). *L_r
1 2 3 4 5 SDA 6 7 8 9 10
wait at least 3 minutes. 11 12 13 14 15 16
6. Check the connections between SRS unit connector A 17 18 / 7 7 222324Z / 27 28

(28P) and the SRS unit, between the engine
compartment wire harness 2P connector and the left
front impact sensor (see page 24-241), and at
connector C403 (see page 22-37).
is th e r e s is ta n c e a s s p e c if ie d ?
YES-Go to step 7.
YES-Go to step 10.
NO-Repair the poor connections, then clear the DTC.
If DTC 41-1x is still present, Go to step 7. NO-Short to another wire in the engine compartment
wire harness or dashboard wire harness; replace the
faulty harness, then clear the DTC.B
a
10. Measure the resistance between body ground and 11. Reconnect the negative cable to the battery.
SRS unit connector A (28P) terminals No. 15 and
No. 27, individually. There should be an open circuit
or at least 1 MQ. 13. Measure the voltage between body ground and SRS
unit connector A (28P) terminals No. 15 and No. 27,
individually. There should be less than 0.2 V.
SRS UNIT CONNECTOR A (28P)
1 2 3 4 5 SDA 6 7 8 9 10
11 12 13 0E 14 15 16
1 2 3 4 5 SDA 6 7 8 9 10
17 18 / Z Z 222324Z Z 2728 11 12 13 BE 14 15 16
17 18 / Z Z 222324z z 27 28
Wire side of female terminals Y i

Is t h e r e s is t a n c e a s s p e c if ie d ? Wire side of female terminals
YES-Go to step 11.
NO-Short to ground in the dashboard wire harness or
YES-Go to step 14.
the engine compartment wire harness; replace the
faulty harness,then clearthe DTC.B NO-Short to power in the engine compartment wire
harness or the dashboard wire harness; replace the
faulty harness, then clearthe DTC.B
14. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 16. Measure the resistance between SRS unit connector
15. Connect the SRS inflator simulator (jumper
less than 1.0 Q.
connector) and the black lead (A) of simulator lead L
to the engine compartment wire harness 2P
connector (B). SRS UNIT CONNECTOR A (28P)
O
1 2 3 4 5 SD A 6 7 8 9 10
11 1 2 1 3 B E 14 n i 16 I
17 18 / 2 4 Z Z 27 r 2 8
CM
CM
CM
CO
/ /
YES-Faulty left front impact sensor or SRS unit;
replace the left front impact sensor (see page 24-241),
then clearthe DTC. If the DTC is still present, replace
the SRS unit (see page 2 4 - 2 3 4 ) . ■
NO-Poor connection at C403, open in engine
compartment wire harness, or open in dashboard
wire harness. Inspect C403 (see page 22-37). If it is OK,
replace the faulty harness, then clear the D T C . B
A
DTC 42-1x ("x" can be 0 thru 9 or A thru F): No 7. Remove the front bumper (see page 20-245), then
disconnect the engine compartment wire harness 2P
Signal From the Right Front Impact Sensor
connector (A) from the right front impact sensor.
Special Tool s Requi red

goes off.
D o e s th e S R S in d ic a to r s ta y o n , a n d is D T C 4 2 -1 x unit (see step 11 on page 24-36).
in d ic a te d ?
YES-Go to step 4. A (28P) terminals No. 16 and No. 28. There should be
NO-lntermittent failure, system is OK at this time. Go an open circuit or at least 1 MO.
24-39). If another DTC is indicated, troubleshoot the SRS UNIT CONNECTOR A (28P)
DTC.B
5. Disconnect the negative cable from the battery, then * l_ t
1 2 3 4 5 SDA 6 7 8 9 '0
11 12 13 E E 14 15 16
6. Check the connections between SRS unit connector A
(28P) and the SRS unit, between the engine 17 18 / / / 22I23 2 4 y / 27 28
compartment wire harness 2P connector and the right
front impact sensor (see page 24-241), and at
connector C403 (see page 22-37).
Wire side of female termi nal s
YES-Go to step 7.
NO-Repair the poor connections, then clear the DTC:
If DTC 42-1 x is still present, go to step 7. YES-Go to step 10.
NO-Short to another wire in the engine compartment
wire harness or the dashboard wire harness; replace
the faulty harness, then clear the DTC.B
SRS unit connector A (28P) terminals No. 16 and
or at least 1 MQ. 13. Measure the voltage between body ground and SRS
unit connector A (28P) terminals No. 16 and No. 28,
SRS UN I T CONNECTOR A (28P)
YES-Go to step 11.
NO-Short to ground in the dashboard wire harness or
YES-Go to step 14.
the engine compartment wire harness; replace the
faulty harness, then clearthe DTC.il NO-Short to power in the engine compartment wire
harness or the dashboard wire harness; replace the
f f l
less than 1.0 O.
to the engine compartment wire harness 2P
connector (B). SRS UNrr CONNECTOR A (28P)
i_r
1 2 3 4 5 SDA 6 7 8 9 '0
11 12 13 14 15 16
17 18 / 7 7 2 2 23 2 4 7 / 27 28
YES-Faulty right front impact sensor or SRS unit;
replace the right front impact sensor (see page
24-241), then clear the DTC. Ifthe DTC is still present,
replace the SRS unit (see page 24-234).B
NO-Poor connection at C403, open in engine
compartment wire harness, or open in dashboard
wire harness. Inspect C403 (see page 22-37). If it is OK,
replace the faulty harness, then clear the DTC.B
DTC 41-2x, 41-3x, 41-Bx ("x" can be 0 thru 9 or DTC 42-2x,'42-3x, 42-Bx f W can be § th ru 9 or
A thru F): Internal Failure of the Left Front A th ru F): Internal Failure of the Right Front
Impact Sensor Impact Sensor
NOTE: Before doing this troubleshooting procedure, NOTE: Before doing this troubleshooting procedure,
review SRS Precautions and Procedures (see page review SRS Precautions and Procedures (see page
24-26) and General Troubleshooting Information (see 24-26) and General Troubleshooting Information (see
page 24-36). page 24-36).
1. Clear the DTC memory (see page 24-38). 1. Clearthe DTC memory (see page 24-38).
2. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II), and check that the 2. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II), and check that the
SRS indicator comes on for about 6 seconds and then SRS indicator comes on for about 6 seconds and then
goes off. goes off.
3. Read the DTC (see page 24-37). 3. Read the DTC (see page 24-37).
D o e s t h e S R S in d ic a t o r s ta y o n , a n d is D T C 4 1 - 2 x , 4 1 ~ 3 x , D o e s t h e S R S in d ic a t o r s t a y o n , a n d is D T C 4 2 - 2 x , 4 2 - 3 x ,
o r 4 1 -B x in d ic a te d ? o r 4 2 -B x in d ic a te d ?
YES-Replace the left front impact sensor (see page YES-Replace the right front impact sensor (see page
24-241), then clearthe DTC. Ifthe DTC is still present, 24-241), then clear the DTC. If the DTC is still present,
replace the SRS unit (see page 24-234).! replace the SRS unit (see page 24-234).B
NO-lntermittent failure, system is OK at this time. Go NO-lntermittent failure, system is OK at this time. Go
to Troubleshooting Intermittent Failures (see page to Troubleshooting Intermittent Failures (see page
24-39). If another DTC is indicated, troubleshoot the 24-39). If another DTC is indicated, troubleshoot the
DTC.B DTC.B
£
DTC 43-1x ("x " can be 0 thru 9 or A thru F): No 7. Disconnect the floor wire harness 2P connector (A)
from the left side impact sensor (first) (see page
Signal From the Left Side Impact Sensor (first)
24-235).
• SRS Infl ator Simulator 07SAZ-TB4011A

goes off.
D o e s th e S R S in d ic a to r s ta y o n , a n d is D T C 4 3 -1 x 8. Disconnect both seat belt tensioner 4P connectors
in d ic a te d ? (see step 7 on page 24-35).
YES-Go to step 4. 9. Disconnect SRS unit connector B (28P) from the SRS
NO-lntermittent failure, system is OK at this time. Go unit (see step 11 on page 24-36).
to Troubleshooting Intermittent Failures (see page 10. Measure the resistance between SRS unit connector
24-39). If another DTC is indicated, troubleshoot the B (28P) terminals No. 25 and No. 26. There should be
DTC.B an open circuit or at least 1 MO.
5. Disconnect the negative cable from the battery, then SRS UNIT CONNECTOR B (28P)
6. Check the connection between the floor wire harness
2P connector and the left side impact sensor (first) O
1 2 3 4 5 SNA 6 / / / /
(see page 24-235).
Is t h e c o n n e c t io n O K ?
11 12 / / 15 16
17 18 19 20 [ / / l / l / 25 26 27 28
YES-Go to step 7.
NO-Repair the poor connection, then clear the DTC. If
DTC 43-1 x is still present, go to step 7.
W
Wire side of femal e terminals
YES-Go to step 11.
or at least 1 MO. 14. Measure the voltage between body ground and SRS
unit connector B (28P) terminals No. 25 and No. 26,
SRS UNIT CONNECTOR B (28P) individually. There should be less than 0.2 V.
SRS UNIT CONNECTOR B (2SP)
O
1 2 3 4 5 SNA 6 / / / /
11 1 2 / H E / 15 16 O
1 2 3 4 5 SNA 6 / / / /
17 18 19 2 0 L // V 7 25 26 27 28
11 1 2 / mm / 15 16
17 18 19 2 0 / / / / 25 26 27 28

Is th e r e s is ta n c e a s s p e c ifie d ?
YES-Go to step 12.
the floor wire harness, then clear the D T C . B YES-Go to step 15.
a
B (28P) terminals No. 25 and No. 26. There should be
less than 1.0 O.
to the floor wire harness 2P connector (B).
O
1 2 3 4 5 SNA 6 / / / /
11 12 / E E / 15 16
\R
CM
IO
CM
CO
CM
17 18 19 28
/r h
YES-Faulty left side impact sensor (first) or SRS unit;
replace the left side impact sensor (first) (see page
24-235), then clearthe DTC. If the DTC is still present,
replace the SRS unit (see page 24-234).■
wire harness, then clearthe DTC.B
DTC 44-1x ("x" can be 0 thru 9 or A thru F): No 7. Disconnect the floor wire harness 2P connector (A)
from the right side impact sensor (first) (see page
Signal From the Right Side Impact Sensor
24-235).
(first)
- SRS Simulator Lead L 070AZ-SNAA300

goes off.
D o e s t h e S R S in d ic a to r s t a y o n , a n d is D T C 4 4 - 1 x (see step 7 on page 24-35).
in d ic a te d ?
YES-Go to step 4. unit (see step 11 on page 24-36).
NO-lntermittent failure, system is OK at this time. Go 10. Measure the resistance between SRS unit connector
to Troubleshooting Intermittent Failures (see page B (28P) terminals No. 27 and No. 28. There should be
24-39). If another DTC is indicated, troubleshoot the an open circuit or at least 1 MO.
DTC.B
4. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). SRS UNIT CONNECTOR i (28P)

-L _ r
2P connector and the right side impact sensor (first)
1 2 3 4 5 SNA 6 / / / /
(see page 24-235). 11 12 / 0 E / 15 16
Is t h e c o n n e c t io n O K ? 17 18 19 20 / / / / 25 26 2/ 28
YES-Go to step 7.
the DTC 44-1 x is still present, go to step 7. Wire side of female terminals
YES-Go to step 11.
&
unit connector B (28P) terminals No. 27 and No. 28,
SRS UNIT CONNECTOR B (28P) individually. There should be less than 0.2 V.
O
1 2 3 4 5 SNA 6 / / / /
11 12 / SH / 15 16
17 18 19 20 / / / / 25 26 27)28

YES-Go to step 12.
Is t h e v o lt a g e a s s p e c if ie d ?
the floor wire harness, then clear the DTC.B YES-Go to step 15.
less than 1.0 Q.
1 2 3 4 5 SNA 6 / / / /
11 12 / 0 0 / 15 16
17 18 19 20 / / / / 25 26 2 / 28
YES-Faulty right side impact sensor (first) or SRS
unit; replace the right side impact sensor (first) (see
page 24-235), then clearthe DTC. If the DTC is still
present, replace the SRS unit (see page 24-234).H
£
DTC 43-2x,43-3x,43-B x ( " x " can b e 0 thru 9 or DTC 44-2x, 44-3x, 44-Bx ("x " can be 0 thru 9 or
A thru F): Internal Failure of the Left Side A thru F): Internal Failure of the Right Side
Impact Sensor (first) Impact Sensor (first)
page 24-36). page 24-36).
1. Clearthe DTC memory (see page 24-38). 1. Clear the DTC memory (see page 24-38).
goes off. goes off.
D o e s th e S R S in d ic a to r s ta y o n , a n d is D T C 4 3 - 2 x , 4 3 -3 x , D o e s t h e S R S in d ic a t o r s t a y o n , a n d is D T C 4 4 - 2 x , 4 4 - 3 x ,
YES-Replace the left side impact sensor (first) (see YES-Replace the right side impact sensor (first) (see
page 24-235), then clear the DTC. If the DTC is still page 24-235), then clearthe DTC. If the DTC is still
present, replace the SRS unit (see page 24-234).■ present, replace the SRS unit (see page 24-234).B
DTC.B DTC.B
DTC 45-1x ( " X " can be 0 thru 9 or A thru F): No 7. Disconnect the floor wire harness 2P connector (A)
from the left side impact sensor (second) (see page
Signal From the Left Side Impact Sensor
24-236).
(second)
»SRS Simulator Lead H 07YAZ-S3AA100

goes off.
D o e s t h e S R S in d ic a t o r s t a y o n , a n d is D T C 4 5 - 1 x 8. Disconnect SRS unit connector C (16P) from the SRS
in d ic a te d ? unit (see step 11 on page 24-36).
YES-Go to step 4. 9. Measure the resistance between SRS unit connector

C (16P) terminals No. 6 and No. 8. There should be an
NO-lntermittent failure, system is OK at this time. Go open circuit or at least 1 MQ.
D T C .B
5. Disconnect the negative cable from the battery, then “i_r
wait at least 3 minutes. 1 2 3 SDA 4 5 6
6. Check the connection between the floor wire harness / 8
2P connector and the left side impact sensor (second)
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
(see page 24-236).
Is t h e c o n n e c t io n O K ?
the DTC 45-1 x is still present, go to step 7.
YES-Go to step 10.
replace the floor wire harness, then clearthe DTC.B
£
SRS unit connector C (16P) terminals No. 6 and No. 8,
least 1 MO. 13. Measure the voltage between body ground and SRS
unit connector C (16P) terminals No. 6 and No. 8,
SRS UNI T CONNECTOR C (16P)
T_r
1 2 3 SDA 4 5 6
/ 8
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
Is t h e r e s is t a n c e a s s p e c if ie d ? Wire side of female terminals

YES-Go to step 11.
YES-Go to step 14.
C (16P) terminals No. 6 and No. 8. There should be
less than 1.0 C l.
connector) and simulator lead H to the floor wire
harness 2P connector (A).
YES-Faulty left side impact sensor (second) or SRS
unit; replace the left side impact sensor (second) (see
page 24-236), then clear the DTC. If the DTC is still
present, replace the SRS unit (see page 24-234).B
wire harness, then clearthe DTC.ll
£
from the right side impact sensor (second) (see page
24-236).
(second)
. SRS Simulator Lead H 07YAZ-S3AA100

goes off. 8. Disconnect SRS unit connector C (16P) from the SRS
in d ic a te d ?
YES-Go to step 4.
NO-lntermittent failure, system is OK at this time. Go S R S U N IT C O N N E C T O R C (1 6 P )
24-39). If another DTC is indicated, troubleshoot the W
DTC.B
4. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 1 2 3 SDA 4 5 6
5. Disconnect the negative cable from the battery, then 8
/
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
2P connector and the right side impact sensor
(second) (see page 24-236). Wire side of female terminals
Is th e c o n n e c t io n O K ?
NO-Repair the poor connection, then clear the DTC. If YES-Go to step 10.
(cont'd)
SRS unit connector C (16P) terminals No. 4 and No. 5,
least 1 MO. 13. Measure the voltage between body ground and SRS
W ire side of femal e terminals
Is t h e r e s is ta n c e a s s p e c if ie d ? Wire side of female terminals

YES-Go to step 11.
YES-Go to step 14.
&
less than 1.0 D.
connector) and simulator lead H to the floor wire
harness 2P connector (A).
SRS UNIT CONNECTOR C -(16P)
O
1 2 3 SDA 4 5 6
/ 8
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
YES-Faulty right side impact sensor (second) or SRS
unit; replace the right side impact sensor (second)
(see page 24-236), then clearthe DTC. Ifthe DTC is still
present, replace the SRS unit (see page 24-234).■
DTC 45-2x, 45-3x, 45-Bx ("x " can be 0 thru 9 or DTC 46-2x#4§-3x#46-Bx f #x" can be § thru 9 or
A thru F): Internal Failure o f the LeftSide A thru F): Internal Failure of the Right Side
Impact Sensor (second) Impact Sensor (second)
page 24-36). page 24-36).
1. Clear the DTC memory (see page 24-38). 1. Clearthe DTC memory (see page 24-38).
goes off. goes off.
Does the SRS indicator stay on, and is DTC 45-2x, 45-3x, Does the SRS indicator stay on, and is DTC 46-2x, 46~3x,
or 45-Bx indicated? or 46-Bx indicated?
YES-Replace the left side impact sensor (second) (see YES-Replace the right side impact sensor (second)
page 24-236), then clearthe DTC. Ifthe DTC is still (see page 24-236),then clearthe DTC. Ifthe DTC is still
present, replace the SRS unit (see page 2 4-234).■ present, replace the SRS unit (see page 24-234).H
DTC.H DTC.B
a
DTC 47-1x ("x" can be 0 thru i or A th ru F): No 7. Disconnect the floor wire harness 2P connector (A)
from the left side impact sensor (third) (see page
Signal From the Left Side Impact Sensor
24-237).
(third)

D o e s th e S R S in d ic a to r s ta y o n , a n d is D T C 4 7 -1 x
in d ic a te d ?
an open circuit or at least 1 MO.
YES-Go to step 4.
NO-lntermittent failure, system is OK at this time. Go SRS UNIT CONNECTOR C (16P)
DTC.B
O
5. Disconnect the negative cable from the battery, then / 8
wait at least 3 minutes. 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
2P connector and the left side impact sensor (third) /C h
(see page 24-237).
Is th e c o n n e c tio n O K ? Wire side of female terminals
YES-Go to step 7. Is t h e r e s is ta n c e a s s p e c if ie d ?
NO-Repair the poor connection, then clearthe DTC. If YES-Go to step 10.
the DTC 47-1x is still present, go to step 7.
SRS UN I T CONNECTOR C (16P)
SRS UNIT CONNECTOR C (1SP)

O
1 2 3 SDA 4 5 6
/ 8 O
1 2 3 SDA 4 5 6
9 1 0 11 1 2 1 3 1 4 1 5 1 6
/ 8
•----- • •----- ®
9 1 0 11 1 2 1 3 1 4 1 5 1 6
Is t h e r e s is ta n c e a s s p e c if ie d ? Wire side of female terminals

YES-Go to step 11.
YES-Go to step 14.
&
less than 1.0 C l.
to the fl oor wire harness 2P connector (B).
SRS UNI T CONNECTOR C (16P)
O
1 2 3 SDA 4 5 6
/ 8
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
YES-Faulty left side impact sensor (third) or SRS unit;
replace the left side impact sensor (third) (see page
24-237), then clearthe DTC. If the DTC is still present,
replace the SRS unit (see page 24-234).B
NO-Open in the floor wire harness; replace the fl oor
07SAZ-TB4011A wire harness, then clearthe DTC.B
from the right side impact sensor (third) (see page
24-237).
(third)
Specia l Tools Required
* SRS Inflator Simulator 07SAZ-TB4011A
• SRS Simulator Lead L 070AZ-SNAA300

D o e s th e S R S in d ic a to r s t a y o n , a n d is D T C 4 8 - 1 x
in d ic a te d ?
YES-Go to step 4.
NO-lntermittent failure, system is OK at this time. Go SRS UNIT CONNECTOR C (16P)
DTC.B
o
5. Disconnect the negative cable from the battery, then / 8
wait at least 3 minutes. 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
2P connector and the right side impact sensor (third)
/8 V
(see page 24-237).
Is th e c o n n e c t io n O K ? Wire side of female terminals
NO-Repair the poor connection, then clear the DTC. If YES-Go to step 10.
A
YES-Go to step 11.
YES-Go to step 14.
the floor wire harness, then clearthe DTC.B
(cont'd)
less than 1.0 Q.
connector) and the black l ead (A) of simulator lead L
O
1 2 3 SDA 4 5 6
..... 9 ®—_ 0
/ 8
•----- • •----- •
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
YES-Faulty right side impact sensor (third) or SRS
unit; replace the right side impact sensor (third) (see
page 24-237), then clear the DTC. If the DTC is still
present, replace the SRS unit (see page 24-234).!
DTC 47-2x, 47-3x, 47-Bx ("x" can be 0 thru 9 or DTC 48-2x, 48-3x, 48-Bx ("x" can be 0 thru 9 or
A thru F): Internal Failure of the Left Side A thru F): Internal Failure of the Right Side
Impact Sensor (third) Impact Sensor (third)
page 24-36). page 24-36).
1. Clearthe DTC memory (see page 24-38). 1. Clear the DTC memory (see page 24-38).
goes off. goes off.
D o e s t h e S R S in d ic a t o r s t a y o n , a n d is D T C 4 7 - 2 x , 4 7 - 3 x , D o e s th e S R S in d ic a t o r s t a y o n , a n d is D T C 4 8 - 2 x , 4 8 - 3 x ,
YES-Replace the left side impact sensor (third) (see YES-Replace the right side impact sensor (third) (see
page 24-237), then clearthe DTC. Ifthe DTC is still page 24-237), then clearthe DTC. If the DTC is still
present, replace the SRS unit (see page 24-234).B present, replace the SRS unit (see page 24-234).B
DTC.B DTC.B
DTC 51-xx, 52-xx, 53-xx,54-xx,55-xx,57-xx ("x " DTC 56-21: Lost Communication with the PCM
can be 0 thru 9 or A thru F): Internal Failure of (PGM-FI system)
the SRS Unit NOTE: Before doing this troubleshooting procedure,
NOTE: review SRS Precautions and Procedures (see page
• Before troubleshooting any of these DTCs, check the 24-26), General Troubleshooting Information (see page
battery/system voltage and battery cable connections. 24-36), and Battery Terminal Disconnection and
If the voltage is low, repair the charging system, test Reconnection (see page 22- 112).
and charge the battery, or replace the battery (see 1.Turn the ignition switch to ON (II), and see if the other
page 22- 111) before troubleshooting the SRS. Change indicators come on (brake system, etc.).
or replace the battery as needed. If the battery/system
voltage is now OK, ask the customer ifthe battery ever D o th e o th e r in d ic a to r s c o m e o n ?
went dead or ifthe engine was started and run with YES-Go to step 2.
the battery in a low state of charge. A dead battery
may trigger one of these DTCs. NO-Go to the gauge control module Self-diagnostic
• Before doing this troubleshooting procedure, review Function (see page 22-345).B
SRS Precautions and Procedures (see page 24-26) and 2. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
General Troubleshooting Information (see page
24-36). 3. Turn the ignition switch ON (II), and see ifthe MIL
come on.
D o e s th e M IL c o m e o n ?
SRS indicator comes on for about 6 seconds and then YES-Go to step 4.
goes off.
NO-Go to the PGM-FI System troubleshooting (see
3. Read the DTC (see page 24-37). page 11-268).B
D o e s th e S R S in d ic a t o r s t a y o n , a n d is D T C 5 1 -x x , 5 2 - x x , 4. Clear the DTC memory (see page 24-38).
5 3 -x x ,5 4 -x x ,5 5 -x x , o r 5 7 -x x in d ic a te d ?
5. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0) and wait for 10
YES-Replace the SRS unit (see page 24-234).! seconds.
NO-lntermittent failure, system is OK at this time. Go 6. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II) and wait for 10
to Troubleshooting Intermittent Failures (see page seconds.
DTC.B
D o e s t h e S R S in d ic a t o r s t a y o n , a n d is D T C 5 6 - 2 1
in d ic a te d ?
YES-Go to step 8.
DTC.B
£
8. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). DTC 56-22,56-23: Undefined Data Received
9. Disconnect the negative cable from the battery, then From the PCM (PGM-FI system)
10. Disconnect SRS unit connector A (28P) from the SRS review SRS Precautions and Procedures (see page
unit (see step 11 on page 24-36). 24-26) and General Troubleshooting Information (see
page 24-36).
11. Jump the SCS line with the HDS (see page 11 -3).
12. Disconnect PCM connector A (49P) from the PCM.
2. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II), and see if the MIL
13. Check for continuity between SRS unit connector A come on.
(39P) terminal No. 11 and PCM connector A (49P)
terminal No. 48, and between SRS unit connector A D o e s th e M I L c o m e o n ?
(39P) terminal No. 12 and PCM connector A (49P)
YES-Go to step 3.
terminal No. 49.
Wire side of female terminals page 11-268).B
1 | 2 3 4 5 SDA 6 7 8 9 10
1l|l? 13| E E |14|15|16 seconds.
17 18 / //1 2 2 I2 3 2 4 / / 27 28 5. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II) and wait for 10
seconds.
D o e s th e S R S in d ic a t o r s t a y o n , a n d is D T C 5 6 - 2 2 o r
Ll 1 I 2 s Z \ - 4 | 5 | 6 | 7 (8 9|10|
IJ 5 6 - 2 3 in d ic a t e d ?
11 12 13 16 17 18 19 20 /
25 > < 26 27 / 1
1 22 23 24 1 YES-Replace the PCM (see page 11-294), then clear
29 30 31 32 33 34 3 5 l/ / 38 39 the DTC.B
|40|41 / I / I 4 4 14514614 7 481491
—I T. NO-lntermittent failure, system is OK at this time. Go
F-CAN H (WHT) F-CAN L (RED) to Troubleshooting Intermittent Failures (see page
PCM CONNECTOR A (49P) 24-39). If another DTC is indicated, troubleshoot the
Terminal side of female terminals DTC.B

NO-Open in the dashboard wire harness or engine
compartment wire harness, connector E (14P), and
connector (13P) at the passenger's under-dash
fuse/relay box (see page 22-94). Ifthe connections are
OK, replace the faulty harness or component, then
clearthe DTC.B
DTC 56-25: Lost Communication with the 8. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
Gauge Control Module 9. Disconnect the negative cable from the battery, then
review SRS Precautions and Procedures (see page 10. Disconnect SRS unit connector A (28P) from the SRS
24-26), General Troubleshooting Information (see page unit (see step 11 on page 24-36).
Reconnection (see page 22-112). 11. Disconnect gauge control module connector A (30P)
from the gauge control module (see page 22-371).
1.Turn the ignition switch to ON (II), and see if the other
12. Check for continuity between SRS unit connector A
indicators come on (brake system, etc.).
D o th e o t h e r in d ic a t o r s c o m e o n ? connector A (SOP) terminal No. 24, and between SRS
unit connector A (39P) terminal No. 12 and gauge
YES-Go to step 2.
control module connector A (30P) terminal No. 23.
NO-Go to the gauge control module Self-diagnostic
Function (see page 22-345).B Wire side of female terminals
2. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). o
2 3 SDA 10
3. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II), and see if the MIL
come on. 11 12 13 BE 14 15 16
D o e s th e M I L c o m e o n ? 17 18 22|23|24|/1 27 28
YES-Go to step 4.
page 11-268).B
4. Clear the DTC memory (see page 24-38). 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 > < 8 9 10 11 / 13 14
15 16 / 18 19 20 21 / t X l 2 3 24 25 / 27 28 / 30
seconds. F-CAN L (RED)
6. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II) and wait for 10 F-CAN H (WHT)
seconds.
7. Read the DTC (see page 24-37). GAUGE CONTROL MODULE CONNECTOR A (30P)
D o e s th e S R S in d i c a t o r s t a y o n , a n d is D T C 5 6 - 2 5
in d i c a t e d ? Is t h e r e c o n tin u ity ?
YES-Go to step 8. YES-Faulty SRS unit or poor connection at SRS unit

NO-lntermittent failure, system is OK at this time. Go connection; if the connection is OK, replace the SRS
to Troubleshooting Intermittent Failures (see page unit (see page 24-234).B
DTC.B NO-Open in the dashboard wire harness; replace the
a
DTC 5 6 -2 6,5 6-27 : Undefined Data Received DTC 61-1x ("x " can be 0 th ru 9 or A th ru F):
From the Gauge Control Module Open in the Driver's Seat Belt Buckle Switch
24-26) and General Troubleshooting Information (see 24-26), General Troubleshooting Information (see page
page 24-36). 24-36), and Battery Terminal Disconnection and
2. Connect the HDS to the data link connector (DLC).
2. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II), then buckle and
un-buckle the driver's seat belt several times.
seconds.
Is D T C 6 1 - 1 x in d i c a t e d ?
5. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II) and wait for 10
seconds. YES-Go to step 4.
6. Read the DTC (see page 24-37). NO-lntermittent failure, system is OK at this time. Go
D o e s th e S R S in d ic a t o r s t a y o n , a n d is D T C 5 6 - 2 6 o r
5 6 - 2 7 in d ic a t e d ?
DTC.B
function test (see page 22-345). If the gauge control
module fails the self-diagnostic function test, replace 5. Disconnect the driver's seat wire harness (with
the gauge control module, then clearthe DTC. If the driver's 8-way power seat) or floor wire harness (with
DTC is still present, replace the SRS unit (see page driver's manual height adjustable seat) 3P connector
24-234).11 from the driver's seat belt buckle switch 3P connector
(A).
DTC.B
6. Buckle the driver's seat belt 7. Un-buckle the driver's seat belt.
• Measure the resistance between driver's seat belt • Measure the resistance between driver's seat belt
buckle switch 3P connector terminals No. 1 and buckle switch 3P connector terminals No. 1 and
No. 3. There should be less than 1.0 Q. No. 2. There should be less than 1.0 0.
No. 2. There should be an open circuit or at least No. 3. There should be an open circuit or at least
1 MO. 1 MO.
DRIVER'S SEAT BELT BUCKLE SWITCH DRIVER’S SEAT BELT BUCKLE SWITCH
3P CONNECTOR 3P CONNECTOR
r € h
BLK BLU
_Q _
1 2 3
n rz r
Terminal side of male terminals Terminal side of male terminals
GRY
BLK BLK BLU
F =l _ Q _
.......3 L.
1 2 3 1
“C U T w
A r e t h e r e s is t a n c e s a s s p e c if ie d ? A r e th e r e s is t a n c e s a s s p e c if ie d ?

NO-Replace the driver's seat belt buckle assembly NO-Replace the driver's seat belt buckle assembly
(see page 24-7),then clearthe D T C .B (see page 24-7),then clearthe DTC.B
8. Measure the resistance between driver's seat wire 12. Measure the resistance between SRS unit connector
harness (with driver's 8-way power seat) or floor wire B (28P) terminal No. 12 and driver's seat wire harness
harness (with driver's manual height adjustable seat) (with driver's 8-way power seat) or floor wire harness
3P connector terminal No. 1 and body ground. There (with driver's manual height adjustable seat) 3P
should be less than 1.0 O. connector terminal No. 3. There should be less than
1.0 n.
DRIVER'S SEAT WIRE HARNESS or
FLOOR WIRE HARNESS 3P CONNECTOR DRIVER'S SEAT SRS UNIT CONNECTOR B (28P)
WIRE HARNESS or
FLOOR WIRE
HARNESS 3P
CONNECTOR
CM
*l1 3f 5
o
1|2 |3|4 SNA 6 A A A /
1 l|l2 |/l IM U I L /|l5 |l6
LT GRN u| 18I19I20I / I / I / / I 25I26I27I28
i—
—
Is th e r e s is t a n c e a s s p e c if ie d ?
YES-Go to step 9.
YES-Go to step 13.
NO-Open in the driver's seat wire harness (with
driver's 8-way power seat) or floor wire harness/or NO-Open in the driver's seat wire harness (with
poor ground connection at G602 (see page 22-19). If driver's 8-way power seat) or floor wire harness;
G602 is OK, replace the faulty harness, than clear the replace the faulty harness, than clear the DTC.B
DTC.B
9. Disconnect the negative cable from the battery.
13. Measure the resistance between SRS unit connector D T C 6 1 -2 x (" x " can b e 0 th ru 9 o r A th ru F):
B (28P) terminal No. 11 and driver's seat wire harness
Short in the Driver's Seat Belt Buckle Switch
(with driver's 8-way power seat) or floor wire harness
(with driver's manual height adjustable seat) 3P NOTE: Before doing this troubleshooting procedure,
connector terminal No. 2. There should be less than review SRS Precautions and Procedures (see page
1.0 0. 24-26), General Troubleshooting Information (see page
DRIVER'S SEAT SRS UN IT CONNECTOR i (28P)
W IRE HARNESS or
FLOOR W IRE 1. Clear the DTC memory (see page 24-38).
HARNESS3P
CONNECTOR 2. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II), then buckle and
0 un-buckle the driver's seat belt several times.
1| 2 | 3 4 A A /V
5 SNA 6
2 3f tutu
r- 1 1 | 1 2 | / | IZI15I1® Is D T C 6 1 - 2 x in d ic a te d ?
BLU/RED 17|l8|l9|20M /l/|/| 25|26|27|28
YES-Go to step 4.
— (§ )— NO-lntermittent failure, system is OK at this time. Go

Wire side of female terminals 24-39). If another DTC is indicated, troubleshoot the
DTC.B
YES-Faulty SRS unit; replace the SRS unit (see page
5. Disconnect the driver's seat wire harness (with
24-234). ■
driver's 8-way power seat) or floor wire harness (with
NO-Open in the driver's seat wire harness (with driver's manual height adjustable seat) 3P connector
driver's 8-way power seat) or floor wire harness, or from the driver's seat belt buckle switch 3P connector
poor connection at the floor wire harness. Check the (A).
connections at the f loor wire harness, connector F
(14P), and connector H (14P) at the driver's
under-dash fuse/relay box (see page 22-94). If the
connections are OK, replace the faulty harness or
part, then clear the DTC.B
6. Buckle the driver's seat belt. 7. Un-buckle the driver's seat belt.
buckle switch 3P connector terminals No. 1 and buckle switch 3P connector terminals No. la n d
No. 3. There should be less than 1.0 O. No. 2. There should be less than 1.0 0.
No. 3. There should be an open circuit or least 1 MO. No. 3. There should be an open circuit or at least
1 MO.
DRIVER S SEAT BELT BUCKLE SWITCH

3P CONNECTOR DRIVER'S SEAT BELT BUCKLE SWITCH
3P CONNECTOR
r@ n
BLK BLU
_Q _
1 2 3
H 5~ET
J L
" Lb"dJ
Terminal side of male t erminals
BLK BLU
_ Q _
1 2 3
J L
TETHJ
A r e th e r e s is t a n c e s a s s p e c if ie d ?
A r e th e r e s is t a n c e s a s s p e c if ie d ?
YES-Go to step 7.
YES-Go to step 8.
NO-Replace the driver's seat belt buckle assembly
(see page 24-7),then clearthe DTC.B NO-Replace the driver's seat belt buckle assembly
8. Measure the resistance between body ground and 12. Measure the resistance between driver's seat wire
driver's seat belt buckle switch 3P connector harness (with driver's 8-way power seat) or floor wire
terminals No. 2 and No. 3, individually. There should harness (with driver's manual height adjustable seat)
an open circuit or at least 1 MO. 3P connector terminals No. 2 and body ground. There
DRIVER'S SEAT BELT BUCKLE SW ITCH
3P CONNECTOR DRIVER’S SEAT WIRE HARNESS or
FLOOR WIRE HARNESS 3P CONNECTOR
1 2 ---
1J— 3 (
I BLU/RED
U

YES-Go to step 9.
YES-Check the connections at the floor wire harness,
NO-Replace the driver's seat belt buckle assembly
connector F (14P), and connector H (14P) at the
driver's under-dash fuse/relay box (see page 22-94). If
9. Disconnect the negative cable from the battery, then the connections are OK, go to step 13.
NO-Short to ground in the driver's seat wire harness
10. Disconnect both seat belt tensioner 4P connectors (with driver's 8-way power seat) or floor wire harness,
(see step 7 on page 24-35). or the MICU/under-dash fuse/relay box. Replace the
faulty harness or part, then clear the DTC.B
£
13. Measure the resistance between driver's seat wire DTC 62-1x ("x" can be 0 thru 9 or A thru F):
harness (with driver's 8-way power seat) or floor wire
Open in the Front Passenger's Seat Belt
harness (with driver's manual height adjustable seat)
3P connector terminals No. 3 and body ground. There Buckle Switch
should be an open circuit or at least 1 MO. NOTE: Before doing this troubleshooting procedure,
DRIVER S SEAT WIRE HARNESS or 24-26), General Troubleshooting Information (see page
FLOOR WIRE HARNESS 3P CONNECTOR 24-36), and Battery Terminal Disconnection and
CM
) 1 3 f" 2. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II), then buckle and

un-buckle the front passenger's seat belt several
times.
YES-Go to step 4.
Is th e r e s is t a n c e a s s p e c if ie d ? to Troubleshooting Intermittent Failures (see page
DTC.B
24-234). B #
NO-Short to ground in the driver's seat wire harness
(with driver's 8-way power seat) or floor wire harness; 5. Disconnect the front passenger's seat wire harness
replace the faulty harness, then clear the DTC.B from front passenger's seat belt buckle switch 3P
connector (A).
6. Buckle the front passenger's seat belt. 7. Un-buckle the front passenger's seat belt.
• Measure the resistance between front passenger's • Measure the resistance between front passenger's
seat belt buckle switch 3P connector terminals No. 1 seat belt buckle switch 3P connector terminals No. 1
and No. 3. There should be less than 1.0 O. and No. 2. There should be less than 1.0 O.
and No. 2. There should be an open circuit or at and No. 3. There should be an open circuit or at
least 1 MO. least 1 MO.
FRONT PASSENGER'S SEAT BELT FRONT PASSENGER'S SEAT BELT

BUCKLE SWITCH 3P CONNECTOR BUCKLE SWITCH 3P CONNECTOR
r ® ~ i
BLK BLU BLK

_Q _
1 2 3
T5”2T
TTZT
— (Oh
BLK BLK BLU
1 2 3
y u
T5”Hr Lb dl
A r e th e r e s is t a n c e s a s s p e c if ie d ? A r e th e r e s is t a n c e s a s s p e c if ie d ?
NO-Replace the front passenger's seat belt buckle NO-Replace the front passenger's seat belt buckle
assembly (see page 24-7), then clear the DTC.IH assembly (see page 24-7), then clear the DTC.B
A
8. Measure the resistance between front passenger's 12. Measure the resistance between SRS unit connector
seat wire harness 3P connector terminal No. 1 and B (28P) terminal No. 16 and front passenger's seat
body ground. There should be less than 1.0 O. wire harness terminal No. 3. There should be less
than 1.0 0.
FRONT PASSENGER S SEAT

WIRE HARNESS 3P CONNECTOR FRONT PASSENGER S SRS UNIT CONNECTOR B (28P)
SEAT WIRE HARNESS
3P CONNECTOR
1 2
)LrH 3 L( 0
1 | 2 | 3 | 4 5 SNA 6 / K / I /
BLK
0
11 3( 11|1 2 |/| m s l / l 15| 16-
ORN 17|i8 19 j2 0 l/] /M Z |2 5 26 27|28

YES-Go to step 9.
YES-Go to step 13.
NO-Open in the front passenger's seat wire harness
or floor wire harness, or poor ground connection at NO-Open in the front passenger's seat wire harness
G651 (see page 22-55). If G651 is OK, replace the or the floor wire harness; replace the faulty harness,
faulty harness, then clear the DTC.B then clearthe DTC.B
13. Measure the resistance between SRS unit connector DTC 62-2x ("x" can be 0 thru 9 or A thru F):
B (28P) terminal No. 15 and front passenger's seat
Short in the Front Passenger's Seat Belt
wire harness terminal No. 2. There should be less
than 1.0 Q. Buckle Switch
FRONT PASSENGER'S SRS UNIT CONNECTOR B (28P) review SRS Precautions and Procedures (see page
SEAT WIRE HARNESS 24-26), General Troubleshooting Information (see page
3P CONNECTOR 24-36), and Battery Terminal Disconnection and
o 1. Clear the DTC memory (see page 24-38).
1121314 5 SNA 6 / I / , 1 /
1 1 2 _3J 11 I i 2 i / i HOEI I / 4 15| 16

2. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II), then buckle and
un-buckle the front passenger's seat belt several
BLU M \n \n \2 0 \A T \/\A 2 B \2 B \2 7 \2 B
times.
....................... ■................................... 3. Read the DTC (see page 24-37).

I s DTC 62‘ 2 x indicated?
YES-Go to step 4.
Is th e r e s is t a n c e a s s p e c if ie d ? NO-lntermittent failure, system is OK at this time. Go
24-234). B
DTC.B
NO-Open in the front passenger's seat wire harness
or the front passenger's seat wire harness; replace the
faulty harness, then clearthe DTC.B 5. Disconnect the front passenger's seat wire harness
from the front passenger's seat belt buckle switch 3P
connector (A).
A
6. Buckle the front passenger's seat belt. 7. Un-buckle the front passenger's seat belt.
and No. 3. There should be less than 1.0 Q. and No. 2. There should be less than 1.0 0.
and No. 2. There should be an open circuit or at and No. 3. There should be an open circuit or at
least 1 MO. least 1 MO.
FRONT PASSENGER'S SEAT BELT FRONT PASSENGER'S SEAT BELT

BUCKLE SWITCH 3P CONNECTOR BUCKLE SWITCH 3P CONNECTOR
r @ ~ ]
BLK BLU BLK

.m .
1 2
T s rzr
Lb d J
<s> -< 8 h
GRY
BLK BLK BLU
F =1 L j
.....—3
1 2
in j" "TETEr
A r e th e r e s is t a n c e s a s s p e c if ie d ? A r e th e r e s is t a n c e s a s s p e c if ie d ?
NO-Replace the front passenger's seat belt buckle NO-Replace the front passenger's seat belt buckle
assembly (see page 24-7), then clearthe DTC.B assembly (see page 24-7), then clearthe DTC.B
8. Measure the resistance between body ground and 12. Measure the resistance between front passenger's
front passenger's seat belt buckle switch 3P seat wire harness 3P connector terminal No. 2 and
connector terminals No. 2 and No. 3, individually. body ground. There should be an open circuit or at
There should be an open circuit or at least 1 M O. least 1 MO.
FRONT PASSENGER'S SEAT BELT FRONT PASSENGER'S SEAT

BUCKLE SWITCH 3P CONNECTOR WIRE HARNESS 3P CONNECTOR
V1J— 2 -3 jf
I BLU
tt>
Is th e r e s is t a n c e a s s p e c if ie d ? is th e r e s is t a n c e a s s p e c if ie d ?
NO-Replace the front passenger's seat belt buckle NO-Short to ground in the front passenger's seat wire
assembly (see page 24-7), then clear the DTC. ■ harness or the floor wire harness; replace the faulty
harness, then clear the DTC.B
&
13. Measure the resistance between front passenger's DTC 71-1x ("x" can be 0 thru or A thru F):
seat wire harness 3P connector terminal No. 3 and
Open in the Driver's Seat Position Sensor
least 1 MO. NOTE: Before doing this troubleshooting procedure,
FRONT PASSENGER'S SEAT 24-26), General Troubleshooting Information (see page
WIRE HARNESS 3P CONNECTOR 24-36), and Battery Terminal Disconnection and
CM
) 1 3 (
Lj— —i"LI SRS indicator comes on for about 6 seconds and then
I ORN goes off.
U 3. Read the DTC (see page 24-37).
D o e s t h e S R S i n d i c a t o r s t a y o n , a n d is D T C 7 1 - 1 x
in d ic a te d ?
Is th e r e s is t a n c e a s s p e c if ie d ? NO-lntermittent failure, system is OK at this time. Go

YES-Faulty SRS unit; replace the SRS unit (see page 24-39). If another DTC is indicated, troubleshoot the
24-234). B DTC.B
NO-Short to ground in the front passenger's seat wire 4. Check the connection between the driver's seat wire
harness or the floor wire harness; replace the faulty harness (with driver's 8-way power seat) or seat
harness,then clearthe DTC.B position sensor subharness (with driver's manual
height adjustable seat) 2P connector and the driver's
seat position sensor (see page 24-245).
YES-Go to step 7.
DTC.B
(cont'd)
7. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 10. Disconnect the negative cable from the battery, then
8. Disconnect the driver's seat wire harness (with
driver's 8-way power seat) or seat position sensor 11. Disconnect both seat belt tensioner 4P connectors
subharness (with driver's manual height adjustable (see step 7 on page 24-35).
seat) 2P connector from the driver's seat position
sensor (A) (see page 24-245). 12. Disconnect SRS unit connector B (28P) from the SRS
less than 1.0 O.
— @ ----
CO
1 SNA
11 12
•-----m/®--
IE 15 16
CD
25 26 27 28
5
17
9. Install a jumper wire between driver's seat wire Wire side of female terminals
harness (with driver's 8-way power seat) or seat
position sensor subharness (with driver's manual Is th e r e s is t a n c e a s s p e c if ie d ?
height adjustable seat) 2P connector terminal No. 1
and No. 2. YES-Faulty driver's seat position sensor or SRS unit;
replace the driver's seat position sensor (see page
24-245), then clearthe DTC. Ifthe DTC is still present,
DRIVER'S SEAT WIRE HARNESS or
SEAT POSITION SENSOR SUBHARNESS replace the SRS unit (see page 24-234).!
2P CONNECTOR
NO-Open in the floor wire harness, driver's seat wire
harness (with driver's 8-way power seat) or the seat
position sensor subharness (with driver's manual
‘© S ’ height adjustable seat); replace the faulty harness,
then clearthe D T C .I
JUMPER WIRE

&
DTC 71-2x ("*" can be 0 thru 9 or A thru F): 5. Disconnect the driver's seat wire harness (with
driver's 8-way power seat) or seat position sensor
Short in the Driver's Seat Position Sensor subharness (with driver's manual height adjustable
NOTE: Before doing this troubleshooting procedure, seat) 2P connector from the driver's seat position
review SRS Precautions and Procedures (see page sensor (A), (see page 24-245)
goes off.
D o e s th e S R S in d ic a to r s t a y o n , a n d is D T C 7 1 -2 x
in d ic a te d ?
YES-Go to step 4.
DTC.B 6. Clearthe DTC memory (see page 24-38).
4. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 7. Read the DTC (see page 24-37).
YES-Go to step 8.
NO-Faulty driver's seat position sensor; replace the
driver's seat position sensor (see page 24-245), then
clearthe DTC.B
8. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 13. Measure the resistance between body ground and
least 1 MO.
(see step 7 on page 24-35). SRS UNIT CONNECTOR B (28P)
1 2 3 4 5 SNA 6 / / / /
open circuit or at least 1 MO. 11 12 / M L / 15 16
17 18 19 26 27 28
SRS UN IT CONNECTOR B (28P)
h s h
“i_r Wire side of female terminals
1 2 3 4 5 SNA 6
11 12 / M l / 15 16 is th e r e s is t a n c e a s s p e c if ie d ?
17 18 19 20 / / / / 25 26 27 28 YES-Faulty driver's seat position sensor or the SRS
unit; replace the driver's seat position sensor (see
page 24-245),then clearthe DTC. Ifthe DTC is still
present, replace the SRS unit (see page 24-234).B
Wire side of female terminals NO-Short to ground in the floor wire harness, driver's
seat wire harness (with driver's 8-way power seat), or
Is th e r e s is t a n c e a s s p e c if ie d ? the seat position sensor subharness (with driver's
manual height adjustable seat); replace the faulty
YES-Go to step 13. harness,then clearthe DTC.B
NO-Short to another wire in the floor wire harness,
driver's seat wire harness (with driver's 8-way power
seat), or the seat position sensor subharness (with
driver's manual height adjustable seat); replace the
&
DTC 81-61: N o Signal F r o m the front 6. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
Pa s s eng er' s W e i g h t S e n s o r Unit ('07 m o d e l ) 7. Check the No. 10 (7.5 A) fuse in the driver's
DTC 81-62: Incorrect Data F r o m the Front
Pas sen ger 's W e i g h t S e n s o r Unit ('07 m o d e l ) Is th e fu s e O K ?
NOTE: Before doing this troubleshooting procedure, YES-Go to step 8.

review SRS Precautions and Procedures (see page NO-Replace the fuse, then turn the ignition switch to
24-26), General Troubleshooting Information (see page ON (II). If the fuse blows again, check for a short in the
24-36), and Battery Terminal Disconnection and No. 10 (7.5 A) fuse circuit (dashboard wire harness,
Reconnection (see page 22-112). floor wire harness, or front passenger's seat wire
1. Make sure nothing is on the front passenger's seat. harness). Replace the faulty harness or component,
then clearthe DTC.B
8. Disconnect front passenger's weight sensor unit
3. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II), then wait for 10 connector C (6P) from the front passenger's weight
seconds. sensor unit.
Is D T C 8 1 - 6 1 o r 8 1 - 6 2 in d ic a te d ?
YES-Go to step 5.
DTC.B
5. Check the connection between the front passenger's
weight sensor unit connector C (6P) and the front
passenger's weight sensor unit (see page 24-244).
Is th e c o n n e c t io n O K ?
YES-Go to step 6.
DTC 81-61 or 81-62 is still present, go to step 6.
(cont'd)
10. Measure the voltage between front passenger's 14. Measure the voltage between dashboard wire
weight sensor unit connector C (6P) terminal No. 3 harness connector C504 (22P) terminal No. 15 and
and body ground. There should be battery voltage. body ground. There should be battery voltage.
DASHBOARD WIRE HARNESS CONNECTOR C504 (22P)

FRONT PASSENGER'S WEIGHT SENSOR UNIT
CONNECTOR C (§P)
WHT
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 9 10 11
, n n
y / 3 ji
12 13 14 15 16 / / 19 20 21 22
V 5 6 u u Li
1m l
x (2 )

Is th e r e b a t te r y v o lta g e ? YES-Open in the WHT or WHT/RED wire of the floor
YES-Go to step 15. wire harness, front passenger's seat wire harness, or
OPDS unit harness; replace the faulty harness, then
NO-Go to step 11. clear the DTC.B
11. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). NO-Open in the WHT wire of the dashboard wire
12. Disconnect dashboard wire harness connector C504 harness; replace the dashboard wire harness, then
(22P) (A) from floor wire harness connector C504 clearthe DTC.B
(22P) (B).
&
15. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 19. Disconnect the OPDS unit harness 8P connector (A)
from the OPDS unit (B).
16. Measure the resistance between front passenger's
weight sensor unit connector C (6P) terminal No. 6
and body ground. There should be less than 1.0 C l.
FRONT PASSENGER'S WEIGHT SENSOR UNIT

CONNECTOR C(6P)
y /
/
5 6j
BLK

Is th e r e s is t a n c e a s s p e c if ie d ? A (28P) terminal No. 14 and body ground. There
YES-Go to step 17. should be an open circuit or at least 1 MO.
NO-Open in the BLK wire of the floor wire harness,

OPDS unit harness, or front passenger's seat wire SRS UNIT CONNECTOR A (28P)
harness; check for poor ground connection at G651
(see page 22-55). Ifthe connection is OK, replace the
faulty harness, then clear the DTC.B O
1 2 3 4 5 SDA 6 7 8 9 10
wait at least 3 minutes. 11 12 13 EGEI 14 15 16
17 18 / / / 24A y 2 7
CM
CM
CM
CO
CM
00
YES-Go to step 21.
NO-Go to step 24.
21. M ea sure th e re sista n ce b e tw e e n SRS u n it c o n n e c to r 23. Measure the resistance between SRS unit connector
A (28P) terminal No. 14 and front passenger's weight A (28P) terminal No. 14 and dashboard wire harness
sensor unit connector C (6P) terminal No. 5. There connector C504 (22P) terminal No. 16. There should
should be less than 1.0 Q. be less than 1.0 0.
SRS UNIT CONNECTOR A (28P) FRONT
PASSENGER'S
WEIGHT SENSOR UNIT O
CONNECTOR C (6P) 12 3 4 SDA 7 8 9 10
O 11112I13I HQl] 114] 15| 16
1 i 2 13 14 5 SDA 6 7 | 8 | 9 |i0
17ll8l// |/1/|22l23l24l/1/ -'l27l28
I I ! □d ]
11 12 13 I14|l5|l6
m
hr-
17I18I/ 1/ I / 122I23 I24 M /

CM
00
CM
r*.

GRN/ORN
— n DASHBOARD WIRE HARNESS CONNECTOR CS04 (22P)
..r ............. . „.r r
(4
CO
1 I 2 3 I4 |5 9 |10|11
12 | 13 14115116 / I/ 1 .1 9 20|2l|22
Is th e r e s is t a n c e a s s p e c if ie d ? Lj... ....... y □ Li
YES-Faulty front passenger's weight sensor unit or

SRS unit; replace the front passenger's weight sensor
unit (see page 24-244), then clearthe DTC. If the DTC Is th e r e s is t a n c e a s s p e c if ie d ?
is still present, replace the SRS unit (see page
24-234). SB YES-Open in the floor wire harness, the front
passenger's seat wire harness, or the OPDS unit
NO-Go to step 22. harness; replace the faulty harness, then clear the
DTC.B
22. Disconnect dashboard wire harness connector C504
(22P) (A) from floor wire harness connector C504 NO-Open in the dashboard wire harness; replace the
(22P) (B). dashboard wire harness, then clear the DTC.B
(22P) (A) from floor wire harness connector C504
(22P) (B).
&
25. Measure the resistance between SRS unit connector DTC 81-61: No Signal From the ODS Unit
A (28P) terminal No. 14 and body ground. There
('08-10 models)
DTC 81-62: Incorrect Data From of the ODS
SRS UNIT CONNECTOR A (28P) Unit ('08-10 models)
O 24-26), General Troubleshooting Information (see page
1 2 3 4 5 SDA 6 7 8 9 10
11 12 13 B E 14 15 16 Reconnection (see page 22-112).
\
\
17 18 / 1. Make sure nothing is on the front passenger's seat.

CM
CM
CM
CO
CSJ
/ 2 7 28
3. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II), then wait for 10
seconds.
Is D T C 8 1 - 6 1 o r 8 1 - 6 2 in d ic a te d ?
YES-Short to ground in the floor wire harness, the
YES-Go to step 5.
front passenger's seat wire harness, or the OPDS unit
harness; replace the faulty harness, then clear the NO-lntermittent failure, system is OK at this time. Go
DTC.B to Troubleshooting Intermittent Failures (see page
NO-Short to ground in the dashboard wire harness;
DTC.B
DTC.B 5. Check the connection between the ODS unit harness
(with passenger's 4-way power seat), or the front
passenger's seat wire harness 18P connector and the
ODS unit.
Is th e c o n n e c tio n O K ?
YES-Go to step 6.
7. Check the No. 10 (7.5 A) fuse in the driver's 10. Measure the voltage between ODS unit harness (with
under-dash fuse/relay box. passenger's 4-way power seat) or front passenger's
seat wire harness 18P connector terminal No. 1 and
Is th e fu s e O K ? body ground. There should be battery voltage.
YES-Go to step 8. ODS UNIT HARNESS or FRONT PASSENGERS
SEAT WIRE HARNESS 18P CONNECTOR
NO-Replace the fuse, then turn the ignition switch to
ON (II). If the fuse blows again, check for a short in the WHT
No. 10 (7.5 A) fuse circuit (dashboard wire harness,
floor wire harness, front passenger's seat wire 1 / Vy /
/ / /
7
harness, or ODS unit harness (with passenger's 4-way /
power seat)). Replace the faulty harness or 1 2 /7 / / v 7
component,then clearthe DTC.B
8. Disconnect the ODS unit harness (with passenger's
4-way power seat), or the front passenger's seat wire ±
harness 18P connector (A) from the ODS unit (B).
Is th e r e b a t te r y v o lta g e ?
YES-Go to step 15.
NO-Go to step 11.
(22P) (B).
a
14. Measure the voltage between dashboard wire 16. Measure the resistance between ODS unit harness
harness connector C504 (22P) terminal No. 15 and (with passenger's 4-way power seat) or front
body ground. There should be battery voltage. passenger's seat wire harness 18P connector terminal
No. 12 and body ground. There should be less than
1.0 D.
DASHBOARD W IRE HARNESS CONNECTOR CS04 (22P)
ODS UNIT HARNESS or FRONT PASSENGER'S
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 / 9 10 11
/ I 19 20 21
CM
CM
12 13 14 15 16 /
WHT iL
(2

YES-Open in the WHT wire of the floor wire harness,
Is th e r e s is t a n c e a s s p e c if b d ?
the front passenger's seat wire harness, or the ODS
unit harness (with passenger's 4-way power seat); YES-Go to step 17.
replace the faulty harness, then clear the DTC.B
NO-Open in the BLK wire of the floor wire harness,
NO-Open in the WHT wire of the dashboard wire the ODS unit harness (with passenger's 4-way power
harness; replace the dashboard wire harness, then seat), or the passenger's seat wire harness; check for
clearthe DTC.B poor ground connection at G651 (see page 22-19). If
the connection is OK, replace the faulty harness, then
clearthe DTC.B
20. Disconnect the ODS unit harness (with passenger's 22. Measure the resistance between SRS unit connector
4-way power seat) or the front passenger's seat wire A (28P) terminal No. 14 and ODS unit harness (with
harness 18P connector (A) from the ODS unit (B). passenger's 4-way power seat) or front passenger's
seat wire harness 18P connector terminal No. 7. There
should be less than 1.0 Q.
ODS UN IT HARNESS or FRONT PASSENGERS
i GRN/ORN
1 / / / /
7
/ / / I /
A 12

O
SDA 10
11 12 13 BB 14 15 16
17 18 22l23l24l/1, 27 28
21. Measure the resistance between SRS unit connector Wire side of female terminals
should be an open circuit or at least 1 MO. Is th e r e s is t a n c e a s s p e c if ie d ?
YES-Faulty ODS unit or SRS unit; replace the ODS
SRS UNIT CONNECTOR A (28P) unit (see page 24-240), then clearthe DTC. If the DTC
is still present, replace the SRS unit (see page
24-234). ■
O NO-Go to step 23.

1 2 3 4 5 SDA 6 7 8 9 10
11 12 13 H E 14 15 16 (22P) (A) from floor wire harness connector C504
17 18 / 22 23 24 / I / y 2 7 (22P) (B).
/ / 28
YES-Go to step 22.
NO-Go to step 25.
&
24. Measure the resistance between SRS unit connector 26. Measure the resistance between SRS unit connector
A (28P) terminal No. 14 and dashboard wire harness A (28P) terminal No. 14 and body ground. There
connector C504 (22P) terminal No. 16. There should should be an open circuit or at least 1 MO.
be less than 1.0 D.
SRS UNIT CONNECTOR A (28P) SRS UNIT CONNECTOR A (28P)
O
1 2 3 4 SDA 7 8 9 10
O
11 12 13 H E 14 15 16 1 2 3 4 5 SDA 6 7 8 9 10
1 7 l l 8 | / | / | / l 2 2 l 2 3 l 2 4 [ / l "127|28, 11 12 13 E E U \ 15 16
17 18 / /1 /l2 2 |2 3 2 4 | / V 127 28

1 .. ri
1 I 2 3|4|5 6 i7 / 9 |10|11 (4
12 | 13 1 4 |l5 |l6 / t / 1 9 20|21|22
Li J U Ll— ...
Terminal side of female terminals YES-Short to ground in the floor wire harness, the
front passenger's seat wire harness, or the ODS unit
Is th e r e s is t a n c e a s s p e c if ie d ? harness (with passenger's 4-way power seat); replace
YES-Open in the floor wire harness, the front the faulty wire harness, then clear the DTC.B
passenger's seat wire harness, or the ODS unit NO-Short to ground in the dashboard wire harness;
harness (with passenger's 4-way power seat); replace replace the dashboard wire harness, then clear the
the faulty harness, then clear the DTC.B DTC.B
NO-Open in the dashboard wire harness; replace the
(22P) (B).
DTC 8 1 -4x, 81-5x (" x " can be 0 thru 9 o r A th ru DTC 81-71,81-78: Passenger's Weight Sensor
F): Internal Failure of the Front Passenger's Unit Not Calibrated ('07 model)
Weight Sensor Unit ('07 model) NOTE: Before doing this troubleshooting procedure,
DTC 81-63,81-64 : Internal Failure of the Front
24-26) and General Troubleshooting Information (see
Passenger's Weight Sensor Unit ('07 model) page 24-36).
NOTE: Before doing this troubleshooting procedure, 1. Clearthe DTC memory (see page 24-38).
24-26) and General Troubleshooting Information (see 2. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II), and check that the
page 24-36). SRS indicator comes on for about 6 seconds and then
goes off.
SRS indicator comes on for about 6 seconds and then Does the SRS indicator stay on, and is DTC 81-71 or
goes off. 8 1 - 7 8 in d ic a te d ?
3. Read the DTC (see page 24-37). YES-Go to step 4.
D o e s t h e S R S i n d i c a t o r s t a y o n , a n d is D T C 8 1 - 4 x , 8 1 - 5 x , NO-lntermittent failure, system is OK at this time. Go

81-63, or 81-64 indicated? to Troubleshooting Intermittent Failures (see page
YES-Go to step 4. DTC.B
NO-lntermittent failure, system is OK at this time. Go 4. Clearthe DTC memory (see page 24-38).
24-39). If another DTC is indicated, troubleshoot the 5. Do the front passenger's weight sensor initialization,
D T C .B (see page 24-40)
4. Clearthe DTC memory (see page 24-38). 6. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II), and check that the
SRS indicator comes on for about 6 seconds, and then
5. Do the front passenger's weight sensor unit goes off.
initialization (see page 24-40).
D o e s th e S R S in d ic a to r g o o ff?
SRS indicator comes on for about 6 seconds and then YES-The system is OK.B
goes off. NO-Go to step 7.
D o e s th e S R S in d ic a to r g o o ff? 7. Replace the front passenger's weight sensor unit (see
YES-The system is OK at this time.B page 24-244), then clear the DTC.
NO-Go to step 7. 8. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II), and check that the
7. Replace the front passenger's weight sensor unit (see goes off.
page 24-244), then clearthe DTC.
Does the SRS indicator go off?
SRS indicator comes on for about 6 seconds and then YES-The system is OK.B
goes off. NO-Replace the SRS unit (see page 24-234).B
YES-The system is OK.B
£
DTC 81- 71,81-78: ODS Unit Not Calibrated DTC 82-1 x ("x " can be § thru 9 or A thru F): No
('08-10 models) Signal From the Inner Side Front Passenger's
Weight Sensor
review SRS Precautions and Procedures (see page NOTE: Before doing this troubleshooting procedure,
24-26) and General Troubleshooting Information (see review SRS Precautions and Procedures (see page
page 24-36). 24-26) and General Troubleshooting Information (see
1. Clear the DTC memory (see page 24-38). page 24-36).
2. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II), and check that the 1. Check the front passenger's weight sensor
SRS indicator comes on for about 6 seconds and then connectors for loose or poor connections.
goes off. 2. Clear the DTC memory (see page 24-38).
3. Read the DTC (see page 24-37). 3. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II), and check that the
D o e s th e S R S in d ic a to r s t a y o n , a n d is D T C 8 1 - 7 1 o r SRS indicator comes on for about 6 seconds and then
8 1 - 7 8 in d ic a te d ? goes off.
YES-Go to step 4. 4. Read the DTC (see page 24-37).
NO-lntermittent failure, system is OK at this time. Go D o e s th e S R S in d ic a to r s t a y o n , a n d is D T C 8 2 - 1 x

to Troubleshooting Intermittent Failures (see page in d ic a te d ?
24-39). If another DTC is indicated, troubleshoot the YES-Replace the front Passenger's weight sensor
DTC.B assembly, then clearthe DTC.B
4. Clearthe DTC memory (see page 24-38). • '07 model (see page 24-242)
• '08-10 models (see page 24-243)
5. Do the front passenger's weight sensor initialization,
(see page 24-42) NO-lntermittent failure, system is OK at this time. Go
6. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II), and check that the 24-39). If another DTC is indicated, troubleshoot the
DTC.B
goes off.
NO-Go to step 7.
7. Replace the ODS unit (see page 24-240), then clearthe
DTC.
goes off.
DTC 83-2x ("x" can be 0 thru 9 or A thru F): No DTC 81 -4x, 81 -5x ("x" can be 0 thru 9 or A thru
Signal From the Outer Side Front Passenger's FL 8 1 -6 3 , 8 1-64: In tern al Failure o f th e O D S
Weight Sensor U n it ('0 8-10 m o d els)
page 24-36). page 24-36).
1. Check the front passenger's weight sensor 1. Clear the DTC memory (see page 24-38).
connectors for loose or poor connections.
2. Clearthe DTC memory (see page 24-38). SRS indicator comes on for about 6 seconds and then
goes off.
SRS indicator comes on for about 6 seconds and then 3. Read the DTC (see page 24-37).
goes off.
D o e s t h e S R S i n d i c a t o r s t a y o n , a n d is D T C 8 1 - 4 x , 8 1 - 5 x ,
4. Read the DTC (see page 24-37). 81-63, or 81-64 indicated?
Does the SRS indicator stay on, and is DTC 83-2x YES-Go to step 4.
indicated?
YES-Replace the front Passenger's weight sensor to Troubleshooting Intermittent Failures (see page
assembly, then clearthe DTC.B 24-39). If another DTC is indicated, troubleshoot the
• '07 model (see page 24-242) DTC.B
• '08-10 models (see page 24-243) 4. Clearthe DTC memory (see page 24-38).
NO-lntermittent failure, system is OK at this time. Go 5. Do the ODS unit initialization (see page 24-41)
24-39). If another DTC is indicated, troubleshoot the 6. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II), and check that the
DTC.B SRS indicator comes on for about 6 seconds and then
goes off.
NO-Go to step 7.
7. R eplace th e ODS u n it (see page 24-240), th e n c le a r th e
DTC.
goes off.
NO-Replace the SRS unit (see page 24-234).B
A
DTC 81-79: Front Passenger's Weight Sensors DTC 85-31: Internal Failure of the OPDS Unit
Initial Check Failure ('07 model)
page 24-36). page 24-36).
1. Clear the DTC memory (see page 24-38). 1. Clear the DTC memory (see page 24-38).
goes off. goes off.
D o e s th e S R S in d ic a t o r s t a y o n , a n d is D T C 8 1 - 7 9 D o e s th e S R S in d ic a t o r s t a y o n , a n d is D T C 8 5 - 3 1
in d ic a te d ? in d ic a te d ?
DTC.B DTC.B
4. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 4. Replace the OPDS unit (see page 24-239), then clear
the DTC.
5. Make sure nothing is on the front passenger's seat.
goes off.
goes off.
NO-Replace the SRS unit (see page 24-234).B
NO-
• '07 model: Loosen the front passenger's seat
mounting bolts (see step 4 on page 20-153), and
shake the seat in all directions. Tighten the seat
mounting bolts to the specified torque, and Do the
front passenger's weight sensor unit initialization
(see page 24-40). If DTC 81-79 is still present,
replace the front passenger's weight sensor
assembly (see page 24-242). Ifthe DTC is still
present, replace the front passenger's weight
sensor unit (see page 24-244), then clearthe DTC.B
• '08-10 models: Loosen the front passenger's seat
mounting bolts (see step 4 on page 20-153), and
shake the seat in all directions. Tighten the seat
mounting bolts to the specified torque, and Do the
front passenger's weight sensor initialization (see
page 24-42). If DTC 81-79 is still present, replace the
front passenger's weight sensor assembly (see
page 24-243). If the DTC is still present, replace the
ODS unit (see page 24-240), then clear the DTC.B
DTC 85-32: Side Airbag Cutoff Indicator Stays 6. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
On ('07 model) 7. Measure the voltage between OPDS unit harness 8P
connector terminal No. 3 and body ground. There
should be battery voltage.
page 24-36). OPDS UNIT HARNESS 8P CONNECTOR
1. Clearthe DTC memory (see page 24-38). GRN

i”
goes off. / / 4
00
/ / 7
D o e s th e S R S in d ic a to r s t a y o n ?
YES-Go to step 3.
to Troubleshooting Intermittent Failures (see page Wire side of female terminals
DTC.B Is t h e r e b a t t e r y v o lt a g e ?
3. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). YES-Faulty OPDS unit; replace the OPDS unit (see
NO-Go to step 8.
5. Disconnect the OPDS unit harness 8P connector (A)
from the OPDS unit (B). 8. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
Disconnect gauge control module connector A (30P)
from the gauge control module.
a
10. Measure the resistance between OPDS unit harness DTC 85-4x, 85-5x ("x" can be 0 thru 9 or A thru
8P connector terminal No. 3 and body ground. There
F) 85- 63,85-64: Internal Failure of the
should be an open circuit or at least 1 MQ.
OPDS/ODS Unit
OPDS UNIT HARNESS BP CONNECTOR NOTE:
• Before doing this troubleshooting procedure, review
ORN SRS Precautions and Procedures (see page 24-26),
General Troubleshooting Information (see page
/ 3 4 Reconnection (see page 22-112).
/ !/ 7 8 • An incorrect OPDS/ODS unit can cause DTC 85-63.
goes off.
Is th e r e s is t a n c e a s s p e c if ie d ? 3. Read the DTC (see page 24-37).

YES-Replace the gauge control module (see page D o e s th e S R S in d ic a t o r s t a y o n , a n d is D T C 8 5 - 4 x , 8 5 - 5 x ,
22-371), then clear the DTC.B 8 5 - 6 3 , o r 8 5 - 6 4 in d ic a te d ?
NO-Short to ground in the OPDS unit harness, the YES-Go to step 4.

floor wire harness, the front passenger's seat wire
harness, or the dashboard wire harness; replace the
DTC.B
5. Do the OPDS/ODS unit initialization.
goes off.
NO-Go to step 7.
7. Replace the OPDS/ODS unit, then clearthe DTC.
goes off.
DTC 85-79: OPDS Sensor initial Check Failure DTC 85-61: No Signal From the OPDS Unit
('07 model)
DTC 85-62: Incorrect Data From the OPDS Unit
page 24-36). ('07 model)
1. Make sure nothing is on the front passenger's seat. NOTE: Before doing this troubleshooting procedure,
2. Clear the DTC memory (see page 24-38). 24-26), General Troubleshooting Information (see page
3. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II), and check that the 24-36), and Battery Terminal Disconnection and
SRS indicator comes on for about 6 seconds and then Reconnection (see page 22-112).
goes off. 1. Make sure nothing is on the front passenger's seat.
D o e s t h e S R S in d ic a to r g o o ff? 2. Clear the DTC memory (see page 24-38).
YES-lntermittent failure, system is OK at this time. Go 3. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II), then wait for 10
to Troubleshooting Intermittent Failures (see page seconds.
24-39). If another DTC is indicated, troubleshooting
the DTC.B 4. Read the DTC (see page 24-37).
NO-Go to step 4. is D T C 8 5 -6 1 o r 8 5 - 6 2 in d ic a te d ?
4. Clearthe DTC memory (see page 24-38). YES-Go to step 5.
5. Do the OPDS/ODS unit initialization. NO-lntermittent failure, system is OK at this time. Go

• '07 model: OPDS unit (see page 24-39) to Troubleshooting Intermittent Failures (see page
DTC.B
5. Check the connection between the OPDS unit harness
8P connector and the OPDS unit, (see step 3 on page
goes off.
24-239)
YES-Go to step 6.
NO-Replace the OPDS unit ('07 model) (see page
24-239) or ODS unit ('08-10 models) (see page 24-240),
then clearthe DTC. If the DTC is still present, replace
the seat-back cover/pad with equipped OPDS sensor 6. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
(see page 20-177).B
7. Check the No. 10 (7.5 A) fuse in the driver's
YES-Go to step 8.
NO-Replace the fuse, then turn the ignition switch to
ON (II). If the fuse blows again, check for a short in the
floor wire harness, front passenger's seat wire
harness, or OPDS unit harness). Replace the faulty
harness or component, then clear the DTC.B
*
8. Disconnect the OPDS unit harness 8P connector (A) 11. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
from the OPDS unit (B).
(22P) (B).

10. Measure the voltage between OPDS unit harness 8P
connector terminal No. 4 and body ground. There
should be battery voltage.
OPDS UNIT HARNESS 8P CONNECTOR
WHT/RED
CO
/ / 4
00
/ / 7
YES-Go to step 18.
NO-Go to step 11.
15. Reconnect the negative cable to the battery. 18. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
16. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 19. Measure the resistance between OPDS unit harness
8P connector terminal No. 8 and body ground. There
17. Measure the voltage between dashboard wire
should be less than 1.0 C l.
harness connector C504 (22P) terminal No. 15 and
body ground. There should be battery voltage.
OPDS UNIT HARNESS 8P CONNECTOR
---- n _n _n
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 7 9 10 11 / / 3 4
/ / 7 8
12 13 14 15 16 /
CM
CM
/ 1 9 20 21 BLK
u---- Li— j j
WHT JL
(2

Is t h e r e b a t t e r y v o lt a g e ? Is th e r e s is t a n c e a s s p e c if te d ?
YES-Open in the WHT or the WHT/RED wire of the YES-Go to step 20.
floor wire harness, the front passenger's seat wire NO-Open in the OPDS unit harness, the front
harness, or the OPDS unit harness; replace the faulty passenger's seat wire harness, or the floor wire
harness, then clear the DTC.B harness; check the connection at G651 (see page
NO-Open in the WHT wire of the dashboard wire 22-19). Ifthe connection is OK, replace the faulty
harness; replace the dashboard wire harness, then harness, then clear the DTC.B
clear the DTC.B 20. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
25. Disconnect floor wire harness connector C931 (12P)
(A) from front passenger's seat wire harness
connector C931 (12P) (B).
O
1 2 3 4 5 SDA 6 7 8 9 10
11 12 13 V I 15 16
17 18 / / / | 2 2 | 2 3 | 2 4 | / V 127 28
YES-Go to step 24. 26. Measure the resistance between SRS unit connector
NO-Go to step 27. A (28P) terminal No. 14 and front passenger's seat
wire harness connector C931 (12P) terminal No. 7.
24. Measure the resistance between SRS unit connector There should be less than 1.0 Q.
A (28P) terminal No. 14 and OPDS unit harness 8P
connector terminal No. 7. There should be less than
SRS UNIT CONNECTOR A (28P) FRONT PASSENGERS
1.0 O. SEAT WIRE
HARNESS
CONNECTOR
SRS UN IT CONNECTOR A (28P) OPDS UNIT C931 (12P)
HARNESS 8P o
CONNECTOR 12 3 4 SDA 7 8 9 10 _jt_ _jn_
17 3 4 6
11 12|l3| PHIID ~114|15|16 7 7 9 10 7 7
1 | 2 | 3 | 4 5 snA 6 7 | 8 | 9 |l0 xjt1_ 17|18|/1/|/|22|23|24|/L 2728 GRN/ORN
7 ? -3 4
11|12|13| EGO |t 4|15|16
/. 7 Q8
/ U —
1 7 |1 8 |/L /|7 |2 2 |2 3 |2 4 |/|/ 127|28
BLU
............ I L- .......
Is t h e r e s i s t a n c e a s s p e c i f i e d ?
YES-Open in the front passenger's seat wire harness
Is th e r e s is t a n c e a s s p e c if ie d ? or the OPDS unit harness; replace the faulty harness,
then clear the DTC.B
YES-Faulty OPDS unit or SRS unit; replace the OPDS
unit (see page 24-239), then clearthe DTC. Ifthe DTC NO-Open in the dashboard wire harness or the floor
is still present, replace the SRS unit (see page wire harness; replace the faulty harness, then clear
24-234). B the DTC.B
27. Disconnect front passenger's seat wire harness DTC 85-61: No Signal From the ODS Unit
connector C932 (4P) (A) from OPDS unit harness
connector C932 (4P) (B).
('08-10 models)
DTC 85-62: Incorrect Data From the ODS Unit
('08-10 models)
3. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II), then wait for 10
seconds.
Is D T C 8 5 - 6 1 o r 8 5 - 6 2 in d ic a t e d ?
28. Measure the resistance between SRS unit connector YES-Go to step 5.
should be an open circuit or at least 1 Mfi. NO-lntermittent failure, system is OK at this time. Go
SRS UNIT CONNECTOR A (28P) DTC.B
5. Check the connection between ODS unit harness
(with passenger's 4-way power seat) or front
-£> passenger's seat wire harness (with passenger's
1 2 3 4 5 SDA 6 7 8 9 10
manual seat) 18P connector and the ODS unit (see
11 12 13 E U 14 15 16 step 3 on page 24-240).
oo
CM
CM
a
17 18 / 7 24 / / 27
YES-Go to step 6.
YES-Shortto ground in the OPDS unit harness;
replace the OPDS unit harness, then clearthe DTC.B
NO-Short to ground in the dashboard wire harness,
the front passenger's seat wire harness, or the floor
wire harness; replace the faulty harness, then clear
the DTC.B
7. Check the No. 10 (7.5 A) fuse in the driver's 10. Measure the voltage between ODS unit harness (with
under-dash fuse/relay box. passenger's 4-way power seat) or front passenger's
seat wire harness (with passenger's manual seat) 18P
Is th e fu s e O K ? connector terminal No. 1 and body ground. There
YES-Go to step 8. should be battery voltage.
NO-Replace the fuse, then turn the ignition switch to ODS UNIT HARNESS or FRONT PASSENGER'S
SEAT W IRE HARNESS 18P CONNECTOR
ON (II). If the fuse blows again, check for a short in the
floor wire harness, front passenger's seat wire
harness, or ODS unit harness).®
8. Disconnect the ODS unit harness (with passenger's
4-way power seat) or the front passenger's seat wire
harness (with passenger's manual seat) 18P
connector (A) from the ODS unit (B).
YES-Go to step 18.
NO-Go to step 11.
13. Disconnect the SRS unit connector A (28P) from the
SRS unit (see step 11 on page 24-36).
(22P) (B).
15. Reconnect the negative cable to the battery. 18. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
16. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 19. Measure the resistance between ODS unit harness
(with passenger's 4-way power seat) or front
17. Measure the voltage between dashboard wire passenger's seat wire harness (with passenger's
harness connector C504 (22P) terminal No. 15 and manual seat) 18P connector terminal No. 12 and body
body ground. There should be battery voltage. ground. There should be less than 1.0 O.
ODS UN IT HARNESS or FRONT PASSENGERS

DASHBOARD W IRE HARNESS CONNECTOR C504 (22P) SEAT WIRE HARNESS 18P CONNECTOR
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 / 9 10 11
12 13 14 15 16 / 19 20 21 22
Lj------ u— n r — u— /—I — Lr
WHTJL
(2

YES-Open in the floor wire harness, the front
YES-Go to step 20.
passenger's seat wire harness, or the ODS unit
harness (with passenger's 4-way power seat); replace NO-Open in the ODS unit harness (with passenger's
the faulty harness, then clear the DTC.B 4-way power seat), the front passenger's seat wire
harness, or the floor wire harness; check the
NO-Open in the dashboard wire harness; replace the connection at G651 (see page 22-19). Ifthe connection
is OK, replace the faulty harness, then clear the
DTC.B
A (28P) terminal No. 14 and ODS unit harness (with
21. Disconnect the battery negative cable, then wait at
passenger's 4-way power seat) or front passenger's
least 3 minutes. seat wire harness (with passenger's manual seat) 18P
22. Disconnect SRS unit connector A (28P) from the SRS connector terminal No. 7. There should be less than
unit (see step 11 on page 24-36). 1.0D.
23. Measure the resistance between SRS unit connector ODS UNIT HARNESS or FRONT PASSENGER’S
GRN/ORN
1 / 7 V / V 7
SRS UN IT CONNECTOR A (28P) / / / /
127 V / ' / V

O
1 2 3 4 5 SDA 6 7 8 9 10 SRS UNIT CONNECTOR A (28P)
11 12 13 E E 14I 15 16 O
SDA 10
\
\
\
CM
CM
CM
CO
CM
17 18 / 27 28
N
11 12 13 EGEI

Honda Odyssey. 2007-10 Factory Service Manual. Volume 2

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Honda Odyssey. 2007-10 Factory Service Manual. Volume 2

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Honda Odyssey. 2007-10 Factory Service Manual. Volume 2

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

INTRODUCTION

—How to Use This Manual —------------------ :— >

As sections with * include SRS components;

Ref.No. Tool Number Description Qty

Rack Guide Adjustment, page 17-14

BOOT TIE-ROD END BALL JOINT

6. Remove the steering wheel puller, then remove the

4. Connect the cable reel subharness connector (B).

9. Release the lock lever, and adjust the steering column

2. Center the steering rack within its stroke in the

5. Pull on the steering joint to make sure that the

9. Install the steering column (see page 17-9).

3. Remove the shear bolts from the steering lock, then

4. Tighten the rack guide screw to 25 N-m (2.5 kgf-m,

7. Install the tie-rod end to the rack end.

5. Position a 34 mm socket on the flange part of the

, POWER STEERING FLUID RESERVOIR

. POWER STEERING PUMP

POWER STEERING GEARBOX

Symptom Procedure(s) Also check for

Symptom Procedure(s) Also check for

Symptom Procedure(s) Also check for

Hard Steering 5. Using a spring scale, measure the power assist in

i s t h e p r e s s u r e 1 , 4 7 0 k P a ( 1 5 k g f / c m 2, 2 1 3 p s i ) o r l e s s ? NO-Fa ulty steering gearbox. Overhaul the steering

NO-Go to step 10. Check the fluid pressure as follows to determine

4. Connect the hose joint adapter to the P/S pressure

Check the fluid pressure as follows to determine

If the reading is high, check for:

6. Open the shut-off valve (A) fully.

7. Start the engine, and let it idle.

If the reading is high, check for;

11. Immediately open the shut-off valve fully.

System capacity: 1.13 L (1.19 US qt)

2. Connect a hose (B) of suitable diameter to the

Note these items during installation:

ADJUSTABLE HOSE CLAMP (A) HOSE CLAMP (B)

PUMP OUTLET HOSE CYLINDER LINES

4. Remove the drive belt (B) from the pump pulley:

*OUTER SIDE PLATE

* FLOW CONTROL VALVE CAP

Special Tools Required Inspection

5. Loosen the flow control valve cap with a hex wrench,

15. Inspect the ball bearing by rotating the outer race

16. Inspect each part shown with an asterisk in the

Special T ools Required 5. Remove the steering joint cover (A).

SRS components are located in this area. Review the

9. Release the lock lever, and adjust the steering column

26. Make reference marks (A) on the body across the

35. Loosen the adjustable hose clamp (A) and disconnect

31. Remove the two 14 mm special bolts (B) and front

37. Remove the two 10 mm flange bolts from the

41. With active control engine mount (ACM) system:

42. With active control engine mount (ACM) system:

50. After removing the steering gearbox, make sure that

47. Remove the steering gearbox (A) through the

48. Remove the pinion shaft grommet B on the valve

NOTE: Refer to the Exploded View as needed during the

6. Remove the lock washer (D) and stop washer (E)

4. Unbend the lock washer (A).